Recruit and Retain More Women in IT

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}575|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $14,532 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Attract & Select
  • Parent Category Link: /attract-and-select
  • While the number of jobs in IT has increased dramatically, the percentage of women in IT has progressed disproportionately, with only 25% of IT jobs being held by women (CIO from IDG, 2021).
  • The challenge is not a lack of talented women with the competencies to excel within IT, but rather organizations lack an effective strategy to recruit and retain women in IT.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Retaining and attracting top women is good business, not personal. As per McKinsey Global Institute, “$4.3 trillion of additional annual GDP in 2025 could be added to the U.S. by fully bridging the gender gap.”
  • In the war on talent, having a strategy around how you will recruit & retain of women in IT is Marketing 101. What influences whether women apply for roles and stay at organizations is different than men; traditional models won’t cut it.

Impact and Result

To stay competitive, IT leaders need to radically change the way they recruit and retain talent, and women in IT represent one of the largest untapped markets for IT talent. CIOs need a targeted strategy to attract and retain the best, and this requires a shift in how leaders currently manage the talent lifecycle. Info-Tech offers a targeted solution that will help IT leaders:

  1. Build a Recruitment Playbook: Leverage Info-Tech tools to effectively sell to, search for, and secure top talent.
  2. Build a Retention Strategy: Follow Info-Tech’s step-by-step process to identify initiatives and opportunities to retain your top talent.

Recruit and Retain More Women in IT Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Recruit and Retain More Women in IT Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to build a recruitment and retention plan for women in IT.

Create a targeted recruitment and retention strategy for women. Increase the number of viable candidates by leveraging best practices to sell to, search for, and secure top women in IT. Take a data-driven approach to improving retention of women by using best practices to measure and improve employee engagement.

  • Recruit and Retain More Women in IT – Phases 1-2

2. Employee Value Proposition Tools – Build and road-test your employee value proposition to ensure that it is aligned, clear, compelling, and differentiated.

These tools tap into best practices to help you collect the information you need to build, assess, test, and adopt an employee value proposition.

  • Employee Value Proposition (EVP) Interview Guide
  • Employee Value Proposition (EVP) Scorecard
  • Employee Value Proposition (EVP) Internal Scorecard Handout

3. IT Behavioral Interview Question Library – A complete list of sample questions aligned with core, leadership, and IT competencies.

Don’t hire by intuition, consider leveraging behavioral interview questions to reduce bias and uncover candidates that will be able to execute on the job.

  • IT Behavioral Interview Question Library

4. Stay Interview Guide – Use this tool to guide one-on-one conversations with your team members to monitor employee engagement between surveys.

Stay interviews are an effective method for monitoring employee engagement. Have these informal conversations to gain insight into what your employees really think about their jobs, what causes them to stay, and what may lead them to leave.

  • Stay Interview Guide

Infographic

Workshop: Recruit and Retain More Women in IT

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Make the Case for Strategically Recruiting and Retaining Women in IT

The Purpose

Identify the need for a targeted strategy to recruit and retain women in IT and pinpoint your largest opportunities to drive diversity in your IT team.

Key Benefits Achieved

Establish goals and targets for the changes to be made to your IT recruitment and retention strategies.

Activities

1.1 Understand trends in IT staffing.

1.2 Assess your talent lifecycle challenges and opportunities.

1.3 Make the case for changes to recruitment and retention strategies.

Outputs

Recruitment & Retention Metrics Report

Business Case for Recruitment and Retention Changes

2 Develop Strategies to Sell Your Organization to Wider Candidate Pool

The Purpose

The way you position the organization impacts who is likely to apply to posted positions. Ensure you are putting a competitive foot forward by developing a unique, meaningful, and aspirational employee value proposition and clear job descriptions.

Key Benefits Achieved

Implement effective strategies to drive more applications to your job postings.

Activities

2.1 Develop an IT employee value proposition.

2.2 Adopt your employee value proposition.

2.3 Write meaningful job postings.

Outputs

Employee Value Proposition

EVP Marketing Plan

Revised Job Ads

3 Expand Your Talent Sourcing Strategy

The Purpose

Sourcing shouldn’t start with an open position, it should start with identifying an anticipated need and then building and nurturing a talent pipeline.

IT participation in this is critical to effectively promote the employee experience and foster relationships before candidates even apply.

Key Benefits Achieved

Develop a modern job requisition form though role analysis.

Increase your candidate pool by expanding sourcing programs.

Activities

3.1 Build realistic job requisition forms.

3.2 Identify new alternative sourcing approaches for talent.

3.3 Build a sourcing strategy.

Outputs

Job requisition form for key roles

Sourcing strategy for key roles

4 Secure Top Talent

The Purpose

Work with your HR department to influence the recruitment process by taking a data-driven approach to understanding the root cause of applicant drop-off and success and take corrective actions.

Key Benefits Achieved

Optimize your selection process.

Implement non-bias interview techniques in your selection process.

Activities

4.1 Assess key selection challenges.

4.2 Implement behavioral interview techniques.

Outputs

Root-Cause Analysis of Section Challenges

Behavioral Interview Guide

5 Retain Top Women in IT

The Purpose

Employee engagement is one of the greatest predictors of intention to stay.

To retain employees you need to understand not only engagement, but also your employee experience and the moments that matter, and actively work to create positive experience.

Key Benefits Achieved

Identify opportunities to drive engagement across your IT organization.

Implement tactical programs to reduce turnover in IT.

Activities

5.1 Measure employee engagement and review results.

5.2 Identify new alternative sourcing approaches for talent.

5.3 Train managers to conduct stay interviews and drive employee engagement.

Outputs

Identified Employee Engagement Action Plan

Action Plan to Execute Stay Interviews

Further reading

Recruit and Retain More Women in IT

Gender diversity is directly correlated to IT performance.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Technology has never been more important to organizations, and as a result, recruiting and retaining quality IT employees is increasingly difficult.

  • IT unemployment rates continue to hover below 2% in the US.
  • The IT talent market has evolved into one where the employer is the seller and the employee is the buyer.

Common Obstacles

  • While the number of jobs in IT has increased dramatically, the percentage of women in IT has progressed disproportionately, with only 25% of IT jobs being held by women.*
  • The challenge is not a lack of talented women with the competencies to excel within IT, but rather organizations lack an effective strategy to recruit and retain women in IT.

Info-Tech’s Approach

To stay competitive, IT leaders need to radically change the way they recruit and retain talent, and women in IT represent one of the largest untapped markets. CIOs need a targeted strategy to attract and retain the best, and this requires a shift in how leaders currently manage the talent lifecycle. Info-Tech offers a targeted solution to help:

  • Build a Recruitment Playbook: Leverage Info-Tech tools to effectively sell to, search for, and secure top talent.
  • Build a Retention Strategy: Follow Info-Tech’s step-by-step process to identify initiatives and opportunities to retain your top talent.

Info-Tech Insight

Retaining and attracting top women is good business, not personal. Companies with greater gender diversity on executive teams were 25% more likely to have above-average profitability.1 In the war on talent, having a strategy around how you will recruit and retain women in IT is Marketing 101. What influences whether women apply for roles and stay at organizations is different than men; traditional models won’t cut it.

*– McKinsey & Company, 2020; 2 – CIO From IDG, 2021
The image contains a screenshot of a thought model titled: Recruit and Retain More Women in IT. Its subheading is: Gender Diversity is Directly Correlated to IT Performance. The thought model lists critical methods to recruit and retain, and also a traditional method to compare.

Diversity & inclusion – it’s good business, not personal

Why should organizations care about diversity?

  1. The war for talent is real. Every CIO needs a plan of attack. Unemployment rates are dropping and 54% of CIOs report that the skills shortage is holding them up from meeting their strategic objectives.
  2. Source: Harvey Nash and KPMG, 2020
  3. Diversity has clear ROI – both in terms of recruitment and retention. Eighty percent of technology managers experienced increased turnover in 2021. Not only are employee tenures decreasing, the competition for talent is fierce and the average cost of turnover is 150% of an IT worker’s salary.
  4. Source: Robert Half, 2021
  5. Inability to recruit and retain talent will reduce business satisfaction. Organizations who are continuously losing talent will be unable to meet corporate objectives due to lost productivity, keeping them in firefighting mode. An engaged workforce is a requirement for driving innovation and project success.

ISACA’s 2020 study shows a disconnect between what men and women think is being done to recruit and retain female employees

Key findings from ISACA’s 2020 Tech Workforce survey

65% of men think their employers have a program to encourage hiring women. But only 51% of women agree.

71% of men believe their employers have a program to encourage the promotion or advancement of women. But only 59% of women agree.

49% of women compared to 44% of men in the survey feel they must work harder than their peers.

22% of women compared to 14% of men feel they are underpaid.

66% of women compared to 72% of men feel they are receiving sufficient resources to sustain their career.

30% of women compared to 23% of men feel they have unequal growth opportunities.

74% of women compared to 64% of men feel they lack confidence to negotiate their salaries.

To see ISACA’s full report click here.
The image contains a screenshot of a multi bar graph to demonstrate the percentage of female employees in the workforce of major tech companies. The major tech companies include: Amazon, Facebook, Apple, Google, and Microsoft.
Image: Statista, 2021, CC BY-ND 4.0

The chart to the left, compiled by Statista, (based on self-reported company figures) shows that women held between 23% to 25% of the tech jobs at major tech companies.

Women are also underrepresented in leadership positions: 34% at Facebook, 31% at Apple, 29% at Amazon, 28% at Google, and 26% at Microsoft.

(Statista, 2021)

To help support women in tech, 78% of women say companies should promote more women into leadership positions. Other solutions include:

  • Providing mentorship opportunities (72%)
  • Offering flexible scheduling (64%)
  • Conducting unconscious bias training (57%)
  • Offering equal maternity and paternity leave (55%)
  • (HRD America, 2021)

Traditional retention initiatives target the majority – the drivers that impact the retention of women in IT are different

Ranked correlation of impact of engagement drivers on retention

The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates the differences in retaining men and women in IT.

* Recent data stays consistent, but, the importance of compensation and recognition in retaining women in IT is increasing.

Info-Tech Research Group Employee Engagement Diagnostic; N=1,856 IT employees

The majority of organizations take a one-size-fits-all approach to retaining and engaging employees.

However, studies show that women are leaving IT in significantly higher proportions than men and that the drivers impacting men’s and women’s retention are different. Knowing how men and women react differently to engagement drivers will help you create a targeted retention strategy.

In particular, to increase the retention and engagement of women, organizations should develop targeted initiatives that focus on:

  • Organizational culture
  • Employee empowerment
  • Manager relationships

Why organizations need to focus on the recruitment and retention of women in IT

  1. Women expand the talent pool. Women represent a vast, untapped talent pool that can bolster the technical workforce. Unfortunately, traditional IT recruitment processes are targeted toward a limited IT profile – the key to closing the IT skills gap is to look for agile learners and expand your search criteria to cast a larger net.
  2. Diversity increases innovation opportunities. Groups with greater diversity solve complex problems better and faster than homogenous groups, and the presence of women is more likely to increase the problem-solving and creative abilities of the group.
  3. Women increase your ROI. Research shows that companies with the highest representation of women in their management teams have a 34% higher return on investment than those with few or no women. Further, organizations who are unable to retain top women in their organization are at risk for not being able to deliver to SLAs or project expectations and lose the institutional knowledge needed for continuous improvement.
  4. Source: Bureau of Labour Statistics; Info-Tech Research Group/McLean & Company Analysis

Improving the representation of women in your organization requires rethinking recruitment and retention strategies

SIGNS YOU MAY NEED A TARGETED RECRUITMENT STRATEGY…

SIGNS YOU MAY NEED A TARGETED RETENTION STRATEGY…

  • “It takes longer than 8 weeks to fill a posted IT position.”
  • “Less than 35% of applicants to posted positions are women.”
  • “In the last year the number of applicants to posted positions has decreased.”
  • “The number of female employees who have referred employees in the last year is significantly lower than men in the department.”
  • “Less than 35% of your IT workforce is made up of women.”
  • “Proportionally women decline IT roles in higher rates than men in IT.”
  • “Voluntary turnover of high performers and high potentials is above 5%.”
  • “Turnover of women in IT is disproportionate to the percentage of IT staff.”
  • “Employee rankings of the IT department on social networking sites (e.g. Glassdoor) are low.”
  • “Employees are frequently absent from their jobs.”
  • “Less than 25% of management roles in IT are filled by women.”
  • “Employee engagement scores are lower among women than men.”

Info-Tech’s approach to improving gender diversity at your organization

Info-Tech takes a practical, tactical approach to improving gender diversity at organizations, which starts with straightforward tactics that will help you improve the recruitment and retention of women in your organization.

How we can help

  1. Leverage Info-Tech’s tools to define your current challenges and opportunities for gender diversity to improve your recruitment and retention issues.
  2. Employ straightforward and tested tactics to increase talent acquisition of women in IT by optimizing how you sell to, search for, and secure top female talent.
  3. Take a data-driven approach to measure and increase the retention and engagement of women within your IT organization, and know how and when to involve your staff for optimal results.

Leverage Info-Tech’s customizable deliverables to improve the recruitment and retention of women in your organization

RECRUIT Top Women in IT

If you don’t have a targeted recruitment strategy for women, you are missing out on 50% of the candidate pool. Increase the number of viable candidates by leveraging best practices to sell to, search for, and secure top women in IT.

Key metrics to track:

  • Average number of female candidates per posting
  • Average time to fill position
  • Percentage of new hires still at the organization one year later

RETAIN Top Women in IT

The drivers that impact the retention of men and women are different. Take a data-driven approach to improving retention of women in your organization by using best practices to measure and improve employee engagement.

Key metrics to track:

  • Voluntary turnover rates of men and women
  • Average tenure of men and women
  • Percentage of internal promotions going to men and women
  • Employee engagement scores

Info-Tech’s methodology for Recruit and Retain More Women in IT

1. Enhance Your Recruitment Strategies

2. Enhance Your Retention Strategies

Phase Steps

  1. Sell:
  • Develop an attractive employee value proposition.
  • Understand the impact of language on applicants.
  • Search:
    • Define meaningful job requirements
    • Evaluate various sourcing pools.
  • Secure:
    • Improve the interview experience.
    • Leverage behavioral interview questions to limit bias.
    1. Drive engagement in key areas correlated with driving higher retention of women in IT.
    2. Train managers to understand key moments that matter in the employee experience.
    3. Understand what motivates key performers to stay at your organization.

    Phase Outcomes

    Recruitment Optimization Plan

    Retention Optimization Plan

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our teams knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is 6 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    1. Tactics to Recruit More Women in IT

    Call #1: Develop a strategy to better sell your organization to diverse candidates.

    Call #2: Evaluate your candidate search practices to reach a wider audience.

    Call #3: Introduce best practices in your interviews to improve the candidate experience and limit bias.

    2. Tactics to Retain More Women in IT

    Call #4: Launch focus groups to improve performance of key retention drivers.

    Call #5: Measure the employee experience and identify key moments that matter to staff.

    Call #6: Conduct stay interviews and establish actions to improve retention.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Make the Case

    Develop Strategies to Sell to a Wider Candidate Pool

    Expand Your Talent Sourcing Strategy

    Secure & Retain Top Talent

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Understand trends in IT staffing.

    1.2 Assess your talent lifecycle.

    1.3 Make the case for changes to recruitment and retention strategies.

    2.1 Develop an IT employee value proposition (EVP).

    2.2 Adopt your employee value proposition.

    2.3 Write meaningful job postings.

    3.1 Build realistic job requisition forms.

    3.2 Identify new alternative sourcing approaches for talent.

    3.3 Build a sourcing strategy.

    4.1 Assess key selection challenges.

    4.2 Implement behavioral interview techniques.

    4.3 Measure employee engagement and review results.

    4.4 Develop programs to improve employee engagement.

    4.5 Train managers to conduct stay interviews and drive employee engagement.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Recruitment & retention metrics report
    2. Business case for recruitment and retention changes
    1. Employee Value Proposition
    2. EVP marketing plan
    3. Revised job ads
    1. Job requisition form for key roles
    2. Sourcing strategy for key roles
    1. Root-cause analysis of section challenges
    2. Behavioral interview guide
    3. Identified employee engagement action plan
    4. Action plan to execute stay interviews
    1. Completed recruitment optimization plan
    2. Completed retention optimization plan

    Phase 1

    Enhance Your Recruitment Strategies

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Sell
    • 1.2 Search
    • 1.3 Secure

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Engagement
    • 2.2 Employee Experience
    • 2.3 Stay Interviews

    Consider key factors within the recruitment process

    Key Talent Pipeline Opportunities:

    • In today’s talent landscape IT leaders need to be highly strategic about how they recruit new talent to the organization.
    • IT professionals have a huge number of options to choose from when considering their next career.
    • IT leaders need to actively market and expand their search to attract top talent. The “where” and “how” to recruit men and women in IT are different and your strategy should reflect this.
    • Partnering with your HR department to help you improve the number of applicants, expand your search criteria, and optimize the interview experience will all directly impact your talent pipeline.
    1. Sell
    2. How do you position the value of working for your organization and roles in a meaningful way?

    3. Search
    4. How can you expand your key search criteria and sourcing strategies to reach more candidates?

    5. Secure
    6. How can you reduce bias in your interview process and create positive candidate experiences?

    Info-Tech’s Sell-Search-Secure recruitment model

    Follow these steps to increase your pool of female candidates.

    1. Sell Tactics:
    2. 1. Develop an employee value proposition that will attract female candidates.

      2. Understand how your job postings may be deterring female candidates.

    3. Search Tactics:
    4. 3. Identify opportunities to expand your role analysis for job requisitions.

      4. Increase your candidate pool by expanding sourcing programs.

    5. Secure Tactics:
    6. 5. Identify tactics to improve women’s interview experience.

      6. Leverage behavioral interview questions to limit bias in interviews.

    Please note, this section is not a replacement or a full talent strategy. Rather, this blueprint will highlight key tactics within talent acquisition practices that the IT leadership team can help to influence to drive greater diversity in recruitment.

    Understand where leaks exist in your talent pipeline

    Start your recruitment enhancement here.

    Work with your HR department to track critical metrics around where you need to make improvements and where you can partner with your recruitment team to improve your recruitment process and build a more diverse pipeline. Identify where you have significant drops or variation in diversity or overall need and select where you’d like to focus your recruitment improvement efforts.

    Selection Process Step

    Sample Metrics to Track

    Sell

    Average time to fill a vacant position

    Average number of applicants for posted positions

    Total # of Candidates; # of Male Candidates (% of total);

    # of Female Candidates (% of total); % Difference Male & Female

    Number of page visits vs. applications for posted positions

    Total # of Candidates

    # of Male Candidates

    % of total

    # of Female Candidates

    % of total

    % Difference Male & Female

    Search

    Number of applicants coming from your different sourcing channels (one line per sourcing channel: LinkedIn Group A, website, job boards, specific events, etc.)

    Number of applicants coming from referrals

    Secure

    Number of applicants meeting qualifications

    Number of applicants selected for second interview

    Number of applicants rejecting an offer

    Number of applicants accepting an offer

    Number of employees retained for one year

    Enhance your recruitment strategies

    The way you position the organization impacts who is likely to apply to posted positions. Ensure you are putting a competitive foot forward by developing a unique, meaningful, and aspirational employee value proposition and clear job descriptions.

    Sell the organization

    What is an employee value proposition?

    An employee value proposition (EVP) is a unique and clearly defined set of attributes and benefits that capture an employee’s overall work experience within an organization. An EVP is your opportunity to showcase the unique benefits and opportunities of working at your organization, allowing you to attract a wider pool of candidates.

    How is an employee value proposition used?

    Your EVP should be used internally and externally to promote the unique benefits of working within the department. As a recruiting tool, you can use it to attract candidates, highlighting the benefits of working for your organization. The EVP is often highlighted where you are most likely to reach your target audience, whether that is through social media, in-person events, or in other advertising activities.

    Why tailor this to multiple audiences?

    While your employee value proposition should remain constant in terms of the unique benefits of working for your organization, you want to ensure that the EVP appeals to multiple audiences and that it is backed up by relevant stories that support how your organization lives your EVP every day. Candidates need to be able to relate to the EVP and see it as desirable, so ensuring that it is relatable to a diverse audience is key.

    Develop a strong employee value proposition

    Three key steps

    The image contains a cycle to demonstrate the three key steps. The steps are: Build and Assess the EVP, Test the EVP, and Adopt the EVP.

    1. Build and Assess the EVP

    Assess your existing employee value proposition and/or build a forward-looking, meaningful, authentic, aspirational EVP.

    2. Test the EVP

    Gather feedback from staff to ensure the EVP is meaningful internally and externally.

    3. Adopt the EVP

    Identify how and where you will leverage the EVP internally and externally, and integrate the EVP into your candidate experience, job ads, and employee engagement initiatives.

    As you build your EVP, keep in mind that while it’s important to brand your IT organization as an inclusive workplace to help you attract diverse candidates, be honest about your current level of diversity and your intentions to improve. Otherwise, new recruits will be disappointed and leave.

    What is an employee value proposition?

    And what are the key components?

    The employee value proposition is your opportunity to showcase the unique benefits and opportunities of working at your organization, allowing you to attract a wider pool of candidates.

    AN EMPLOYEE VALUE PROPOSITION IS:

    AN EMPLOYEE VALUE PROPOSITION IS NOT:

    • An authentic representation of the employee experience
    • Aligned with organizational culture
    • Fundamental to all stages of the employee lifecycle
    • A guide to help investment in programs and policies
    • Short and succinct
    • What the employee can do for you
    • A list of programs and policies
    • An annual project

    THE FOUR KEY COMPONENTS OF AN EMPLOYEE VALUE PROPOSITION

    Rewards

    Organizational Elements

    Working Conditions

    Day-to-Day Job Elements

    • Compensation
    • Health Benefits
    • Retirement Benefits
    • Vacation
    • Culture
    • Customer Focus
    • Organization Potential
    • Department Relationships
    • Senior Management Relationships
    • Work/Life Balance
    • Working Environment
    • Employee Empowerment
    • Development
    • Rewards & Recognition
    • Co-Worker Relationships
    • Manager Relationships

    Creating a compelling EVP that presents a picture of your employee experience, with a focus on diversity, will attract females to your team. This can lead to many internal and external benefits for your organization.

    Collect relevant information

    Existing Employee Value Proposition: If your organization or IT department has an existing employee value proposition, rather than starting from scratch, we recommend leveraging that and moving to the testing phase to see if the EVP still resonates with staff and external parties.

    Employee Engagement Results: If your organization does an employee engagement survey, review the results to identify the areas in which the IT organization is performing well. Identify and document any key comment themes in the report around why employees enjoy working for the organization or what makes your IT department a great place to work.

    Social Media Sites. Prepare for the good, the bad, and the ugly. Social media websites like Glassdoor and Indeed make it easier for employees to share their experiences at an organization honestly and candidly. While postings on these sites won’t relate exclusively to the IT department, they do invite participants to identify their department in the organization. You can search these to identify any positive things people are saying about working for the organization and potentially opportunities for improvement (which you can use as a starting point in the retention section of this report).

    Step 1.1

    Sell – Assess the current state and develop your employee value proposition

    Activities

    1.1.1 Gather feedback on unique benefits

    1.1.2 Build key messages

    1.1.3 Test your EVP

    1.1.4 Adopt your EVP

    1.1.5 Review job postings for gender bias

    1.1.1 Gather feedback

    1. Hold a series of focus groups with employees to understand what about the organization attracted them to join and to stay at the organization.
    2. Start by identifying if you will interview all employees or a subset. If you are going to use a subset, ensure you have at least one male and one female participating from each team and representation of all levels within the department.
    3. Print the EVP Interview Guide to focus your conversation, and ask each individual to take 15 minutes and respond to questions 1-3 in the Guide:
    4. Draw a quadrant on the board and mark each quadrant with four categories: Day-to-Day Elements, Organizational Elements, Compensation & Benefits, and Working Conditions. Provide each participant with sticky notes and ask them to brainstorm the top five things they value most about working at the organization. Ask them to place each sticky in the appropriate category and identify any key themes.
    5. Ask participants to hand in their EVP Interview Guides and document all of the key findings.

    Input

    Output

    • Employee opinions
    • Employee responses to four EVP components
    • Content for EVP

    Materials

    Participants

    • EVP Interview Guide handout
    • Pen and paper for documenting responses
    • Male and female employees
    • Different departments
    • Different role levels

    Download the EVP Interview Guide

    1.1.2 Build key messages

    1. Collect all of the information from the various focus groups and begin to build out the employee value proposition statements.
    2. Identify the key elements that staff felt were unique and highly valued by employees and group these into common themes.
    3. Identify categories that related to one of the five key drivers* of women’s retention in IT and highlight any key elements related to these:
    • Culture: The degree to which an employee identifies with the beliefs, values, and attitudes of the organization.
    • Company Potential: An employee’s understanding, commitment, and excitement about the organization’s mission and future.
    • Employee Empowerment: The degree to which employees have accountability and control over their work within a supported environment.
    • Learning and Development: A cooperative and continuous effort to enhance an employee’s skill set and expertise and meet an employee’s career objectives.
    • Manager Relationships: The professional and personal relationship an employee has with their manager, including trust, support, and development.
  • Identify up to four key statements to focus on for the EVP, ensuring that your EVP speaks to at least one of the five categories above.
  • Integrate these into one overall statement.
  • *See Engagement Driver Handout slides for more details on these five drivers.

    Input

    Output

    • Feedback from focus groups
    • EVP and supporting statements

    Materials

    Participants

    • EVP Interview Guide handout
    • Pen and paper for documenting responses
    • IT leadership team

    Quality test your revised EVP

    Use Info-Tech’s EVP Scorecard.

    Internally and Externally

    Use the EVP Scorecard and EVP Scorecard Handout throughout this step to assess your EVP against:

    Internal Criteria:

    • Accuracy
    • Alignment
    • Aspirational
    • Differentiation

    External Criteria:

    • Clear
    • Compelling
    • Concise
    • Differentiation
    The image contains screenshots of Info-Tech's EVP Scorecard.

    Ensure your EVP resonates with employees and prospects

    Test your EVP with internal and external audiences.

    INTERNAL TEST REVOLVES AROUND THE 3A’s

    EXTERNAL TEST REVOLVES AROUND THE 3C’s

    ALIGNED: The EVP is in line with the organization’s purpose, vision, values, and processes. Ensure policies and programs are aligned with the organization’s EVP.

    CLEAR: The EVP is straightforward, simple, and easy to understand. Without a clear message in the market, even the best intentioned EVPs can be lost in confusion.

    ACCURATE: The EVP is clear and compelling, supported by proof points. It captures the true employee experience, which matches the organization’s communication and message in the market.

    COMPELLING: The EVP emphasizes the value created for employees and is a strong motivator to join this organization. A strong EVP will be effective in drawing in external candidates. The message will resonate with them and attract them to your organization.

    ASPIRATIONAL: The EVP inspires both individuals and the IT organization as a whole. Identify and invest in the areas that are sure to generate the highest returns for employees.

    COMPREHENSIVE: The EVP provides enough information for the potential employee to understand the true employee experience and to self-assess whether they are a good fit for your organization. If the EVP lacks depth, the potential employee may have a hard time understanding the benefits and rewards of working for your organization.

    1.1.3 Test your EVP

    1. Identify the internal and external individuals who you want to gather feedback from about the EVP.
    2. For internal candidates, send a copy of the EVP and ask them to complete the Internal Assessment (ensure that you have at least 50% representation of women).
    3. For external candidates, identify first how you will reach out to them; popular options are to have team members in key roles reach out to members of their LinkedIn network who are in similar roles to themselves. Request that they look for a diverse group to gather feedback from.
    4. Have the external candidates complete the External Assessment.
    5. Collect the feedback around the EVP and enter the findings into the EVP Scorecard Tool.
    6. If you are dissatisfied with the scorecard results, go back to the employees you interviewed to ask for additional feedback, focusing on the areas that scored low.
    7. Incorporate the feedback and present the revised EVP to see if the changes resonate with stakeholders.
    8. If you are satisfied with the results, present to the leadership and HR teams for agreement and proceed to adopting the EVP in your organization.

    Input

    Output

    • Internal assessment
    • External assessment
    • Finalized EVP

    Materials

    Participants

    • EVP Internal Assessmentt
    • EVP External Assessment
    • Internal staff members
    • External IT professionals

    1.1.4 Adopt your EVP

    Identify your target audience and marketing channels.

    1. Identify the internal and external individuals who you want to gather feedback from about the EVP.
    • The target audience for your employee value proposition
    • Internal and/or external
    • Local, national, international
    • Experience
    • Applicant pool (e.g. new graduates, professionals, internship)
  • For each target audience, identify where you want to reach them with your employee value proposition.
    • Internal: Town hall meetings, fireside chats
    • External: Social media, advertising, job postings
    • Global: Professional affiliations, head hunters
  • For each target audience, build the communication strategy and identify messaging, mediums, timeline, and task ownership.
  • Input

    Output

    • Employee value proposition
    • EVP plan

    Materials

    Participants

    • Pen and paper
    • EVP participants

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Restaurant

    SOURCE: McDonald’s Careers, Canadian Business via McLean & Company

    McDonald’s saw a divide between employee experience and its vision. McDonald’s set out to reinvent its employer image and create the reputation it wanted.

    Challenge

    • Historically, McDonald’s has had a challenging employer brand. Founded on the goal of cost effectiveness, a “McJob” was often associated with lower pay and a poor reputation.
    • McDonald’s reached out to employees using a global survey and asked, “What is it you love most about working at McDonald’s?”

    Solution

    • McDonald’s revaluated its employer brand by creating an EVP focused on the three F’s.
    1. Future – career growth and development opportunities
    2. Flexibility – flexible working hours and job variety
    3. Family & Friends – a people-centric work culture

    Results

    • As a result of developing and promoting its EVP internally, McDonald’s has experienced higher engagement and a steady decrease in turnover.
    • Externally, McDonald’s has been recognized numerous times by the Great Place to Work Institute and has been classified by Maclean’s magazine as one of Canada’s top 50 employers for 13 years running.

    Make your job descriptions more attractive to female applicants

    10 WAYS TO REMOVE GENDER BIAS FROM JOB DESCRIPTIONS – GLASSDOOR – AN EXCERPT

    1. USE GENDER-NEUTRAL TITLES: Male-oriented titles can inadvertently prevent women from clicking on your job in a list of search results. Avoid including words in your titles like “hacker,” “rockstar,” “superhero,” “guru,” and “ninja,” and use neutral, descriptive titles like “engineer,” “project manager,” or “developer.
    2. CHECK PRONOUNS: When describing the tasks of the ideal candidate, use “they” or “you.” Example: “As Product Manager for XYZ, you will be responsible for setting the product vision and strategy.
    3. AVOID (OR BALANCE) YOUR USE OF GENDER-CHARGED WORDS: Analysis from language tool Textio found that the gender language bias in your job posting predicts the gender of the person you’re going to hire. Use a tool like Textio tool or the free Gender Decoder to identify problem spots in your word choices. Examples: “Analyze” and “determine” are typically associated with male traits, while “collaborate” and “support” are considered female. Avoid aggressive language like “crush it.
    4. AVOID SUPERLATIVES: Excessive use of superlatives such as “expert,” “superior,” and “world class” can turn off female candidates who are more collaborative than competitive in nature. Research also shows that women are less likely than men to brag about their accomplishments. In addition, superlatives related to a candidate’s background can limit the pool of female applicants because there may be very few females currently in leading positions at “world-class” firms
    5. LIMIT THE NUMBER OF REQUIREMENTS: Identify which requirements are “nice to have” versus “must have,” and eliminate the “nice to haves.” Research shows that women are unlikely to apply for a position unless they meet 100 percent of the requirements, while men will apply if they meet 60 percent of the requirements.

    For the full article please click here.

    1.1.5 Review job postings

    To understand potential gender bias

    1. Select a job posting that you are looking to fill, review the descriptions, and identify if any of the following apply:
    • Are the titles gender neutral? This doesn’t mean you can’t be creative in your naming, but consider if the name really represents the role you are looking to fill.
    • Do you use pronouns? If there are instances where the posting says “he” OR “she” change this to “they” or “you.”
    • Are you overusing superlatives? Review the posting and ensure that when words like “expert” or “world class” are used that you genuinely need someone who is at that level.
    • Are all of the tasks/responsibilities listed the ones that are absolutely essential to the job? Women are less likely to apply if they don’t have direct experience with 100% of the criteria – if it’s a non-essential, consider whether it’s needed in the posting.
    • Is there any organization-specific jargon used? Where possible, avoid using organization-specific jargon in order to create an inclusive posting. Avoid using terms/acronyms that are only known to your organization.
  • Select four to six members of your staff, both male and female, and have them highlight within the job posting what elements appeal to them and what elements do not appeal to them or would concern them about the job.
  • Review the feedback from staff, and identify potential opportunities to reduce bias within the posting.
  • Input

    Output

    • Job posting
    • Updated job posting

    Materials

    Participants

    • Pen and paper
    • IT staff members

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Social Media

    SOURCE: Buffer Open blog

    When the social media platform Buffer replaced one word in a job posting, it noticed an increase in female candidates.

    Challenge

    For the social media platform Buffer, all employees were called “hackers.” It had front-end hackers, back-end hackers, Android hackers, iOS hackers, and traction hackers.

    As the company began to grow and ramp up hiring, the Chief Technology Officer, Sunil Sadasivan, noticed that Buffer was seeing a very low percentage of female candidates for these “hacker” jobs.

    In researching the challenge in lack of female candidates, the Buffer team discovered that the word “hacker” may be just the reason why.

    Solution

    Understanding that wording has a strong impact on the type of candidates applying to work for Buffer started a great and important conversation on the Buffer team.

    Buffer wanted to be as inviting as possible in job listings, especially because it hires for culture fit over technical skill.

    Buffer went through a number of wording choices that could replace “hacker,” and ended on the term “developer.” All external roles were updated to reflect this wording change.

    Results

    By making this slight change to the wording used in their jobs, Buffer went from seeing a less than 2% female representation of applicants for developer jobs to around 12% female representation for the same job.

    Step 1.2

    Search – Reach more candidates by expanding key search criteria and sourcing strategies

    Activities

    1.2.1 Complete role analysis

    1.2.2 Expand your sourcing pools

    Enhance your recruitment strategies

    Sourcing shouldn’t start with an open position; it should start with identifying an anticipated need and building and nurturing a talent pipeline. IT participation in this is critical to effectively promote the employee experience and foster relationships before candidates even apply.

    Expand your search

    What is a candidate sourcing program?

    A candidate sourcing program is one element of the overall HR sourcing approach, which consists of the overall process (steps to source talent), the people responsible for sourcing, and the programs (internal talent mobility, social media, employee referral, alumni network, campus recruitment, etc.).

    What is a sourcing role analysis?

    Part of the sourcing plan will outline how to identify talent for a role, which includes both the role analysis and the market assessment. The market assessment is normally completed by the HR department and consists of analyzing the market conditions as they relate to specific talent needs. The role analysis looks at what is necessary to be successful in a role, including competencies, education, background experience, etc.

    How will this enable you to attract female candidates?

    Expanding your sourcing programs and supporting deeper role analysis will allow your HR department to reach a larger candidate pool and better understand the type of talent that will be successful in roles within your organization. By expanding from traditional pools and criteria you will open the organization up to a wider variety of talent options.

    Minimize bias in sourcing to hire the right talent and protect against risk

    Failure to take an inclusive approach to sourcing will limit your talent pool by sidelining entire groups or discouraging applicants from diverse backgrounds. Address bias in sourcing so that diverse candidates are not excluded from the start. Solutions such as removing biographical data from CVs prior to interviews may reduce bias, but they may come too late to impact diversity.

    Potential areas of bias in sourcing:

    Modifications to reduce bias:

    Intake Session

    • Describing a specific employee when identifying what it takes to be successful in the role. This may include attributes that do not actually promote success (e.g. school or program) but will decrease diversity of thought.
    • Hiring managers display a “like me” bias where they describe a successful candidate as similar to themselves.
    • Focus on competencies for the role rather than attributes of current employees or skills. Technology is changing rapidly – look for people who have demonstrated a capability over a specific skill.

    Sourcing Pools

    • Blindly hunting or sourcing individuals from a few sources, assuming that these sources are always better than others (e.g. Ivy League schools always produce the best candidates).
    • Expand sources. Don’t exclude diverse sources because they’re not popular.
    • Objectively measure source effectiveness to address underlying assumptions.

    1.2.1 Role analysis

    Customize a sourcing plan for key roles to guide talent pipeline creation.

    1. Complete a role analysis to understand key role requirements. If you are hiring for an existing role, start by taking an inventory of who your top and low performers are within the role today.
    2. Consider your top performers and identify what a successful employee can do better than a less successful one. Start by considering their alignment with job requirements, and identify the education, designations/certifications, and experiences that are necessary for this job. Do not limit yourself; carefully consider if the requirements you are including are actually necessary or just nice to have.
    3. Required Entry Criteria

      Preferred Entry Criteria

      Education

      • University Degree – Bachelors
      • University Degree – Masters

      Experience

      • 5+) years design, or related, experience
      • Experience leading a team
      • External consulting experience
      • Healthcare industry experience

      Designations/Certifications

      • ITIL Foundations
    4. Review Info-Tech’s Job Competency Library in the Workforce Planning Workbook, identify the key competencies that are ideal for this anticipated role, and write a description of how this would manifest in your organization.
    5. Competency

      Level of Proficiency

      Behavioral Descriptions

      Business Analysis

      Level 2: Capable

      • Demonstrates a basic understanding of business roles, processes, planning, and requirements in the organization.
      • Demonstrates a basic understanding of how technologies assist in business processes.
      • Develop basic business cases using internal environment analysis for the business unit level.
    6. Hold a meeting with your HR team or recruiter to highlight the types of experience and competencies you are looking for in a hire to expand the search criteria.

    Target diverse talent pools through different sources

    When looking to diversify your workforce, it’s critical that you look to attract and recruit talent from a variety of different talent pools.

    SOURCING APPROACH

    INTERNAL MOBILITY PROGRAM

    Positioning the right talent in the right place, at the right time, for the right reasons, and supporting them appropriately. Often tied to succession or workforce planning, mentorship, and learning and development.

    SOCIAL MEDIA PROGRAM

    The widely accessible electronic tools that enable anyone to publish and access information, collaborate on common efforts, and build relationships. Think beyond the traditional and consider niche social media platforms.

    EMPLOYEE REFERRAL PROGRAM

    Employees recommend qualified candidates. If the referral is hired, the referring employee typically receives some sort of reward.

    ALUMNI PROGRAM

    An alumni referral program is a formalized way to maintain ongoing relationships with former employees of the organization.

    CAMPUS RECRUITING PROGRAM

    A formalized means of attracting and hiring individuals who are about to graduate from schools, colleges, or universities.

    EVENTS & ASSOCIATION PROGRAM

    A targeted approach for participation in non-profit associations and industry events to build brand awareness of your organization and create a forward-looking talent pipeline.

    1.2.2 Expand your sourcing pools

    Increase the number of female applicants.

    1. Identify where your employees are currently being sourced from and identify how many female candidates you have gotten from each channel as a percentage of applicants.
    2. # of Candidates From Approach

      % of Female Candidates From Approach

      Target # of Female Candidates

      Internal Talent Mobility

      Social Media Program

      Employee Referral Program

      Alumni Program

      Campus Recruiting Program

      Events & Non-Profit Affiliations

      Other (job databases, corporate website, etc.)

    3. Work with your HR partner or organization’s recruiter to identify three recruitment channels from the list that you will work on expanding.
    4. Review the following two slides and identify key success factors for the implementation. Identify what role IT will play and what role HR will play in implementing the approach.
    5. Following implementation, monitor the impact of the tactics on the number of women candidates and determine whether to add additional tactics.

    Different talent sources

    Benefits and success factors of using different talent sources

    Benefits

    Keys to Success

    Internal Mobility Program

    • Drives retention by providing opportunities to develop professionally
    • Provides a ready pipeline for rapid changes
    • Reduces time and cost of recruitment
    • Identify career pathing opportunities
    • Identify potential successors for succession planning
    • Build learning and development and mentorship

    Social Media Program

    • Access to candidates
    • Taps extended networks
    • Facilitates consistent communication with candidates and talent in pipelines
    • Personalizes the candidate experience
    • Identify platforms – common and niche
    • Talk to your top performers and IT network and identify which sites they use
    • Identify how people use that platform – nature of posts and engagement
    • Define what content to share and who from IT should be engaging
    • Be timely with participation and responses

    Employee Referral Program

    • Higher applicant-to-hire rate
    • Decreased time to fill positions
    • Decreased turner
    • Increased quality of hire
    • Expands your network – women in IT often know other qualified women in IT and in project delivery
    • Educate employees (particularly female employees) to participate
    • Send reminders, incorporate into onboarding, and ask leaders to share job openings
    • Make it easy to share jobs by providing templates and shortened URLs
    • Where possible, simplify the process by avoiding paper forms, reaching out quickly
    • Select metrics that will identify areas of strength and gaps in the referral program

    Alumni Program

    • A formalized way to maintain ongoing relationship with former employees
    • Positive branding as alumni are regarded as a credible source of information
    • Source of talent – boomerang employees are doubly as valuable as they understand the organization
    • Increased referral potential provides access to a larger network and alumni know what is required to be successful in the organization
    • Identify the purpose of the network and set clear goals
    • Identify what the network will do: Will the network be virtual or in person? Who will chair? Who should participate? etc.
    • Create a simple process for alumni to share information about vacancies and refer people
    • Measure progress

    Campus Recruiting Program

    • Increases employer brand awareness among talent entering the workforce
    • Provides the opportunity to interact with large groups of potential candidates at one time
    • Offers access to a highly diverse audience
    • Identify key competencies and select programs based on relevant curriculum for building those competencies
    • Select targeted schools keeping in mind programs and existing relationships
    • Work with HR to get involved

    Events & Non-Profit Affiliations

    • Create a strong talent pipeline for future positions
    • Build relationships based on shared values in a comfortable environment for participants
    • Ability to expand diversity by targeting different types of events or by leveraging women-focused, specifically women in technology, groups
    • Look for events that attract similar participants to the skills or roles you are looking to attract, e.g. Women Who Code if you’re looking for developers
    • Actively engage and participate in the event
    • Couple this with learning and development activities, and invite female top performers to participate

    Enhance your recruitment strategies

    Work with your HR department to influence the recruitment process by taking a data-driven approach to understand the root cause of applicant drop-off and success and take corrective actions.

    Secure top candidates

    Why does the candidate experience matter?

    Until recently it was an employer’s market, so recruiters and hiring managers were able to get good talent without courting top candidates. Today, that’s not the case. You need to treat your IT candidates like customers and be mindful that this is often one of the first experiences future staff will have with the organization. It will give them their first real sense of the culture of the organization and whether they want to work for the organization.

    What can IT leaders do if they have limited influence over the interview process?

    Work with your HR department to evaluate the existing recruitment process, share challenges you’ve experienced, and offer additional support in the process. Identify where you can influence the process and if there are opportunities to build service-level agreements around the candidate experience.

    Take a data-driven approach

    Understand opportunities to enhance the talent selection process.

    While your HR department likely owns the candidate experience and processes, if you have identified challenges in diversity we recommend partnering with your HR department or recruitment team to identify opportunities for improvement within the process. If you are attracting a good amount of candidates through your sell and search tactics but aren’t finding that this is translating into more women selected, it’s time to take a look at your selection processes.

    SIMPLIFIED CANDIDATE SELECTION PROCESS STEPS

    1. Application Received
    2. Candidate Selected for Interview
    3. Offer Extended
    4. Offer Accepted
    5. Onboarding of Staff

    To understand the challenges within your selection process, start by baselining your drop-off rates throughout selection and comparing the differences in male and female candidates. Use this to pin point the issues within the process and complete a root-cause analysis to identify where to improve.

    Step 1.3

    Secure – reduce bias in your interview process and create positive candidate experiences

    Activities

    1.3.1 Identify selection challenges

    1.3.1 Identify your selection challenges

    Review your candidate data.

    1. Hold a meeting with your HR partner to identify trends in your selection data. If you have an applicant tracking system, pull all relevant information for analysis.
    2. Start by identifying the total number of candidates that move forward in each stage of the process. Record the overall number of applicants for positions (should have this number from your sourcing analysis), overall number of candidates selected for interviews, overall number of offers extended, overall number of offers rejected, and overall number of employees still employed after one year.
    3. Identify the number of female and male candidates in each of those categories and as a percentage of the total number of applicants.
    4. Selection Process Step

      Total # of Candidates

      Male Candidates

      Female Candidates

      % Difference Male & Female

      #

      #

      % of total

      #

      % of total

      Applicants for Posted Position

      150

      115

      76.7%

      35

      23.3%

      70% fewer females

      Selected for Interview

      (Selected for Second Interview)

      (Selected for Final Interview)

      Offer Extended

      Offer Rejected

      Employees Retained for One Year

    5. Identify where there are differences in the percentages of male and female candidates and where there are significant drop-off rates between steps in the process.

    Note: For larger organizations, we highly recommend analyzing differences in specific teams/roles and/or at different seniority levels. If you have that data available, repeat the analysis, controlling for those factors.

    Root-cause analysis can be conducted in a variety of ways

    Align your root-cause analysis technique with the problem that needs to be solved and leverage the skills of the root-cause analysis team.

    Brainstorming/Process of Elimination

    After brainstorming, identify which possible causes are not the issue’s root cause by removing unlikely causes.

    The Five Whys

    Use reverse engineering to delve deeper into a recruitment issue to identify the root cause.

    Ishikawa/Fishbone Diagram

    Use an Ishikawa/fishbone diagram to identify and narrow down possible causes by categories.

    Process of elimination

    Leveraging root-cause analysis techniques.

    Using the process of elimination can be a powerful tool to determine root causes.

    • To use the process of elimination to determine root cause, gather the participants from within your hiring team together once you have identified where your issues are within the recruitment process and brainstorm a list of potential causes.
    • Like all brainstorming exercises, remember that the purpose is to gather the widest possible variety of perspectives, so be sure not to eliminate any suggested causes out of hand.
    • Once you have an exhaustive list of potential causes, you can begin the process of eliminating unlikely causes to arrive at a list of likely potential causes.

    Example

    Problem: Women candidates are rejecting job offers more consistently

    Potential Causes

    • The process took too long to complete
    • Lack of information about the team and culture
    • Candidates aren’t finding benefits/salary compelling
    • Lack of clarity on role expectations
    • Lack of fit between candidate and interviewers
    • Candidates offered other positions
    • Interview tactics were negatively perceived

    As you brainstorm, ensure that you are identifying differentiators between male and female candidate experiences and rationale. If you ask candidates their rationale for turning down roles, ensure that these are included in the discussion.

    The five whys

    Leveraging root-cause analysis techniques

    Repeatedly asking “why” might seem overly simplistic, but it has the potential to be useful.

    • It can be useful, when confronting a problem, to start with the end result and work backwards.
    • According to Olivier Serrat, a knowledge management specialist at the Asian Development Bank, there are three key components that define successful use of the five whys: “(i) accurate and complete statements of problems, (ii) complete honesty in answering the questions, and (iii) the determination to get to the bottom of problems and resolve them.”
    • As a group, develop a consensus around the problem statement. Go around the room and have each person suggest a potential reason for its occurrence. Repeat the process for each potential reason (ask “why?”) until there are no more potential causes to explore.
    • Note: The total number of “whys” may be more or less than five.

    Example

    The image contains an example of the five whys activity as described in the text above.

    Ishikawa/fishbone diagram

    Leveraging root-cause analysis techniques.

    Use this technique to sort potential causes by category and match them to the problem.

    • The first step in creating a fishbone diagram is agreeing on a problem statement and populating a box on the right side of a whiteboard or a piece of chart paper.
    • Draw a horizontal line left from the box and draw several ribs on either side that will represent the categories of causes you will explore.
    • Label each rib with relevant categories. In the recruitment context, consider cause categories like technology, interview, process, etc. Go around the room and ask, “What causes this problem to happen?” Every result produced should fit into one of the identified categories. Place it there, and continue to brainstorm sub-causes.

    The image contains a screenshot example of the Ishikawa/fishbone diagram.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Avoid naming individuals in the fishbone diagram. The goal of the root-cause exercise is not to lay blame or zero in on a guilty party but rather to identify how you can rectify any challenges.

    Leverage behavioral interviews

    Use Info-Tech’s Behavioral Interview Questions Library.

    Reduce bias in your interviews.

    In the past, companies were pushing the boundaries of the conventional interview, using unconventional questions to find top talent, e.g. “what color is your personality?” The logic was that the best people are the ones who don’t necessarily show perfectly on a resume, and they were intent on finding the best.

    However, many companies have stopped using these questions after extensive statistical analysis revealed there was no correlation between candidates’ ability to answer them and their future performance on the job. Hiring by intuition – or “gut” – is usually dependent on an interpersonal connection being developed over a very short period of time. This means that people who were naturally likeable would be given preferential treatment in hiring decisions whether they were capable of doing the job.

    Asking behavioral interview questions based on the competency needs of the role is the best way to uncover if the candidates will be able to execute on the job.

    For more information see Info-Tech’s Behavioral Interview Question Library.

    The image contains screenshots of Info-Tech's Behavioral Interview Questions Library.

    Improve the level of diversity in your organization by considering inclusive candidate selection practices

    Key action items to create inclusivity in your candidate selection practices:

    1. Managers must be aware of how bias can influence hiring. Encourage your HR department to provide diversity training for recruiters and hiring managers. Ensure those responsible for recruitment are using best practices, are aware of the impact of unconscious bias, and are making decisions in alignment with your DEI strategy.
    2. Use a variety of interviewers to leverage multiple/diverse perspectives. Hiring decisions made by a group can offer a more balanced perspective. Include interviewers from multiple levels in the organization and both men and women.
    3. Hire for distinguished excellence. Be careful not to simply choose the same kind of people over and over, in the name of cultural fit (Source: Recruiter.com, 2015).
    4. Broaden the notion of fit:

    • Hire for skill fit: you might still hire certain types for a specific job (e.g. analytical types for analysis positions), but these candidates can still be diverse.
    • Hire for fit with your organization’s DEI values, regardless of whether the candidate is from a diverse background or not.
    • It can be tempting for hiring managers to hire individuals who are similar to themselves. However, doing so limits the amount of diversity entering your organization, and as a result, limits your organization’s ability to innovate.
  • Deliberately hire for cognitive diversity. Diverse thought processes, perspectives, and problem-solving abilities are positively correlated with firm performance (Source: Journal of Diversity Management, 2014).
  • Leverage a third-party tool

    Ensure recruiting and onboarding programs are effective by surveying your new hires.

    For a deeper analysis of your new hire processes Info-Tech’s sister company, McLean & Company, is an HR research and advisory firm that offers powerful diagnostics to measure HR processes effectiveness. If you are finding diversity issues to be systemic within the organization, leveraging a diagnostic can greatly improve your processes.

    Use this diagnostic to get vital feedback on:

    • Recruiting efforts. Find out if your job marketing efforts are successful, which paths your candidates took to find you, and whether your company is maintaining an attractive profile.
    • Interviewing process. Ensure candidates experience an organized, professional, and ethical process that accurately sets their expectations for the job.
    • Onboarding process. Make sure your new hires are being trained and integrated into their team effectively.
    • Organizational culture. Is your culture welcoming and inclusive? You need to know if top talent enjoy the environment you have to offer.
    The image contains a screenshot of the New Hire Survey.

    For more information on the New Hire Survey click here. If you are interested in referring your HR partner please contact your account manager.

    Phase 2

    Enhance Your Retention Strategies

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Sell
    • 1.2 Search
    • 1.3 Secure

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Engagement
    • 2.2 Employee Experience
    • 2.3 Stay Interviews

    Actively engage female staff to retain them

    Employee engagement: the measurement of effective management practices that create a positive emotional connection between the employee and the organization.

    Engaged employees do what’s best for the organization: they come up with product/service improvements, provide exceptional service to customers, consistently exceed performance expectations, and make efficient use of their time and resources. The result is happy customers, better products/services, and saved costs.

    Today, what we find is that 54% of women in IT are not engaged,* but…

    …engaged employees are: 39% more likely to stay at an organization than employees who are not engaged.*

    Additionally, engaging your female staff also has the additional benefit of increasing willingness to innovate by 30% and performance by 28%. The good news is that increasing employee engagement is not difficult, it just requires dedication and an effective toolkit to monitor, analyze, and implement tactics.*

    * Info-Tech and McLean & Company Diagnostics; N=1,308 IT employees

    Don’t seek to satisfy; drive IT success through engagement

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that highlights the differences between satisfied and engaged employees.

    Engagement drivers that impact retention for men and women are different – tailor your strategy to your audience

    Ranked correlation of impact of engagement drivers on retention

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates the differences in retaining men and women in IT.

    * Recent data stays consistent, but the importance of compensation and recognition in retaining women in IT is increasing.

    Info-Tech Research Group Employee Engagement Diagnostic; N=1,856 IT employees.

    An analysis of the differences between men and women in IT’s drivers indicates that women in IT are significantly less likely than men in IT to agree with the following statements:

    Culture:

    • They identify well with the organization’s values.
    • The organization has a very friendly atmosphere.

    Employee Empowerment:

    • They are given the chance to fully leverage their talents through their job.

    Manager Relationships:

    • They can trust their manager.
    • Their manager cares about them as a person

    Working Environment:

    • They have not seen incidents of discrimination at their organization based on age, gender, sexual orientation, religion, or ethnicity.

    Enhance your retention strategies

    Employee engagement is one of the greatest predictors of intention to stay. To retain you need to understand not only engagement but also your employee experience – the moments that matter – and actively work to create a positive experience.

    Improve employee engagement

    What differentiates an engaged employee?

    Engaged employees do what’s best for the organization: they come up with product/service improvements, provide exceptional service to customers, consistently exceed performance expectations, and make efficient use of their time and resources. The result is happy customers, better products/services, and saved costs.

    Why measure engagement when looking at retention?

    Engaged employees report 39%1 higher intention to stay at the organization than disengaged employees. The cost of losing an employee is estimated to be 150% to 200% of their annual salary.2 Can you afford to not engage your staff?

    Why should IT leadership be responsible for their staff engagement?

    Engagement happens every day, through every interaction, and needs to be tailored to individual team members to be successful. When engagement is owned by IT leadership, engagement initiatives are incorporated into daily experiences and personalized to their employees based on what is happening in real time. It is this active, dynamic leadership that inspires ongoing employee engagement and differentiates those who talk about engagement from those who succeed in engaging their teams.

    Sources: 1 - McLean & Company Employee Engagement Survey, 2 - Gallup, 2019

    Step 2.1

    Improve employee engagement

    Activities

    2.1.1 Review employee engagement results and trends

    2.1.2 Focus on areas that impact retention of women

    Take a data-driven approach

    Info-Tech’s employee engagement diagnostics are low-effort, high-impact programs that will give you detailed report cards on the organization’s engagement levels. Use these insights to understand your employees’ engagement levels by a variety of core demographics.

    FULL ENGAGEMENT DIAGNOSTIC

    EMPLOYEE EXPERIENCE MONITOR

    The full engagement diagnostic provides a comprehensive view of your organization’s engagement levels, informing you of what motivates employees and providing a detailed view of what engagement drivers to focus on for optimal results.

    Info-Tech & McLean & Company’s Full Engagement Diagnostic Survey has 81 questions in total.

    The survey should be completed annually and typically takes 15-20 minutes to complete.

    The EXM Dashboard is designed to give organizations a real-time view of employee engagement while being minimally intrusive.

    This monthly one-question survey allows organizations to track the impact of events and initiatives on employee engagement as they happen, creating a culture of engagement.

    The survey takes less than 30 seconds to complete and is fully automated.

    For the purpose of improving retention of women in IT, we encourage you to leverage the EXM tool, which will allow you to track how this demographic group’s engagement changes as you implement new initiatives.

    Engagement survey

    For a detailed breakdown of staff overall engagement priorities.

    Overall Engagement Results

    • A clear breakdown of employee engagement results by demographic, gender, and team.
    • Detailed engagement breakdown and benchmarking.
    The image contains a screenshot of the overall engagement results.

    Priority Matrix and Driver Scores

    • A priority matrix specific to your organization.
    • A breakdown of question scores by priority matrix quadrant.
    • Know what not to focus your effort on – not all engagement drivers will have a high impact on engagement.
    The image contains a screenshot of the priority matrix and driver scores.

    EXM dashboard

    Reporting to track engagement in real time.

    EXM Dashboard

    • Leverage Info-Tech’s real-time Employee Experience Monitor dashboard to track your team’s engagement levels over time.
    • Track changes in the number of supporters and detractors and slice the data by roles, teams, and gender.
    The image contains a screenshot of the EXM dashboard.

    Time Series Trends

    • As you implement new initiatives to improve the engagement and retention of staff, track their impact and continuously course correct.
    • Empower your leaders to actively manage their team culture to drive innovation, retention, and productivity.
    The image contains a screenshot of the time series trends.

    Start your diagnostic now

    Leverage your Info-Tech membership to seamlessly launch your employee engagement survey.

    Info-Tech’s dedicated team of program managers will facilitate this diagnostic program remotely, providing you with a convenient, low-effort, high-impact experience.

    We will guide you through the process with your goals in mind to deliver deep insight into your successes and areas to improve.

    What You Need to Do:

    Info-Tech’s Program Manager Will:

    1. Contact Info-Tech to launch the program.
    2. Review the two survey options to select the right survey for your organization.
    3. Work with an Info-Tech analyst to set up your personal diagnostic.
    4. Identify who you would like to take the survey.
    5. Customize Info-Tech’s email templates.
    6. Participate in a one-hour results call with an Info-Tech executive advisor.
    1. Work with you to define your engagement strategy and goals.
    2. Launch, maintain, and support the diagnostic in the field.
    3. Provide you with response rates throughout the process.
    4. Explore your results in a one-hour call with an executive advisor to fully understand key insights from the data.
    5. Provide quarterly updates and training materials for your leadership team.

    Start Now

    2.1.1 Review employee engagement results

    Identify trends

    1. In a call with one of Info-Tech’s executive advisors, review the results of your employee engagement survey.
    2. Identify which departments are most and least engaged and brainstorm some high-level reasons.
    3. Review the demographic information and highlight any inconsistencies or areas with high levels of variance. Document which demographics have the most and least engaged, disengaged, and indifferent employees.
    4. With help from the Info-Tech executive advisor, identify and document any dramatic differences in the demographic data, particularly around gender.
    5. Identify if the majority of issues effecting engagement are at an organization or department level and which stakeholders you need to engage to support the process moving forward.
    6. Identify next steps.
    Input
    • Employee engagement results
    Participants
    • CIO
    • Info-Tech Advisor

    2.1.2 Focus on areas that impact retention of women

    Hold focus groups with IT staff and focus on the five areas with the greatest impact on women’s retention.

    1. Review the handout slides on the following pages to get a better understanding of the definition of each of the top five drivers impacting women’s retention. Depending on your team’s size, pick one to three drivers to focus on for your first focus group.
    2. Divide the participants into teams and on flip chart paper or using sticky notes have the teams brainstorm what you can stop/start/continue doing to help you improve on your assigned driver.
    • Continue: actions that work for the team related to this driver and should proceed.
    • Start: actions/initiatives that the team would like to begin.
    • Stop: actions/initiatives that the team would like to stop.
  • Prioritize the initiatives by considering: Is this initiative something you feel will make an impact on the engagement driver? Eliminate any initiatives that would not make an impact.
  • Have the groups present back and vote on two to three initiatives to implement to drive improvements within that area.
  • Culture

    Engagement driver handout

    Culture: The degree to which an employee identifies with the beliefs, values, and attitudes of the organization.

    Questions:

    • I identify well with the organization’s values.
    • This organization has a collaborative work environment.
    • This organization has a very friendly atmosphere.
    • I am a fit for the organizational culture.

    Ranked Correlation of Impact of Engagement Driver on Retention:

    • Women in IT: #1
    • Men in IT: #2

    Company Potential

    Engagement driver handout

    Company Potential: An employee’s understanding of and commitment to the organization’s mission, and the employee’s excitement about the organization’s mission and future.

    Questions:

    • This organization has a bright future.
    • I am impressed with the quality of people at this organization.
    • People in this organization are committed to doing high-quality work.
    • I believe in the organization’s overall business strategy.
    • This organization encourages innovation.

    Ranked Correlation of Impact of Engagement Driver on Retention:

    • Women in IT: #2
    • Men in IT: #1

    Employee Empowerment

    Engagement driver handout

    Employee Empowerment: The degree to which employees have accountability and control over their work within a supported environment.

    Questions:

    • I am not afraid of trying out new ideas in my job.
    • If I make a suggestion to improve something in my department I believe it will be taken seriously.
    • I am empowered to make decisions about how I do my work.
    • I clearly understand what is expected of me on the job.
    • I have all the tools I need to do a great job.
    • I am given the chance to fully leverage my talents through my job.

    Ranked Correlation of Impact of Engagement Driver on Retention:

    • Women in IT: #3
    • Men in IT: #6

    Learning and Development

    Engagement driver handout

    Learning and Development: A cooperative and continuous effort between an employee and the organization to enhance an employee’s skill set and expertise and meet an employee’s career objectives and the organization’s needs.

    Questions:

    • I can advance my career in this organization.
    • I am encouraged to pursue career development activities.
    • In the last year, I have received an adequate amount of training.
    • In the last year, the training I have received has helped me do my job better.

    Ranked Correlation of Impact of Engagement Driver on Retention:

    • Women in IT: #4
    • Men in IT: #5

    Manager Relationships

    Engagement driver handout

    Manager Relationships: The professional and personal relationship an employee has with their manager. Manager relationships depend on the trust that exists between these two individuals and the extent that a manager supports and develops the employee.

    Questions:

    • My manager inspires me to improve.
    • My manager provides me with high-quality feedback.
    • My manager helps me achieve better results.
    • I trust my manager.
    • My manager cares about me as a person.
    • My manager keeps me well informed about decisions that affect me.

    Ranked Correlation of Impact of Engagement Driver on Retention:

    • Women in IT: #5
    • Men in IT: #11

    Step 2.2

    Examine employee experience

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify moments that matter

    Understand why and when employees plan to depart

    Leverage “psychology of quitting” expertise.

    Train your managers to provide them with the skills and expertise to recognize the warning signs of an employee’s departure and know how to re-engage and retain them.

    • The majority of resignations are not spur of the moment. They are the result of a compilation of events over a period of time. Normally, these instances are magnified by a stimulant. The final straw or the breaking point drives the employee to make a change. In fact, it has been estimated that a shock jumpstarts 65% of departures.*
      • These shocks could be a lack of promotion, loss of privilege or development opportunity, or a quarrel with a manager.
    • Employees rarely leave right away. Most wait until they have confirmed a new job opportunity before leaving. This creates a window in which you can reengage and retain them.
    • The majority of employees show signs that they are beginning to think of leaving. Whether that is leaving immediately, putting in the bare minimum of effort, or job searching online at work. Train your managers to know the signs and to keep an eye out for potentially dissatisfied and searching employees.*
    • It is easier and less costly to reengage an employee than to start the hiring process from the beginning.
    *Source: The Career Café, 2017

    Examine employee experience (EX)

    Look beyond engagement drivers to drive retention.

    Employee experience (EX) is the employee’s perception of their cumulative lived experiences with the organization. It is gauged by how well the employee’s expectations are met within the parameters of the workplace, especially by the “moments that matter” to them. Individual employee engagement is the outcome of a strong overall EX.

    The image contains a diagram as an example of examining employee experience.

    Drive a positive employee experience

    Identify moments that matter.

    Moments that matter are defining pieces or periods in an employee’s experience that create a critical turning point or memory that is of significant importance to them.

    These are moments that dramatically change the path of the emotional journey, influence the quality of the final outcome, or end the journey prematurely.

    To identify the moment that matters look for significant drops in the emotional journey that your organization needs to improve or significant bumps that your organization can capitalize on. Look for these drops or bumps in the journey and take stock of everything you have recorded at that point in the process. To improve the experience, analyze the hidden needs and how they are or aren’t being met.

    The image contains a screenshot of an example graph to demonstrate opportunities and issues to help drive a positive employee experience.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The moment that matters is key and it could be completely separate from organizational life, like the death of a family member. Leaders can more proactively address these moments that matter by identifying them and determining how to make the touchpoint at that moment more impactful.

    2.2.1 Identify moments that matter

    1. Review your Employee Experience Monitor weekly trends by logging into your dashboard and clicking on “Time Series Trends.”
    2. With your management team, identify any weekly trends where your Employee Experience Score has seen changes in the number of detractor, passive, or promoter responses.
    3. For each significant change identify:
    • Increase in promoters or decrease in detractors:
      • What can we do to duplicate positive moments that occurred this week?
      • What did I do as a leader to create positive employee experiences?
      • What happened in the organization that created a positive employee experience?
    • Increase in detractors or decrease in promoters:
      • What difficult change was delivered this week?
      • What about this change was negatively perceived?
      • During the difficult situation how did we as a leadership team support our staff?
      • Who did we engage and recognize during the difficult situation?
      • Was this situation a one-off issue or is this likely to occur again?
  • Consider your interactions with employees and identify how you made moments matter during those times related to four key engagement drivers impacting women in IT:
    • How did you promote a positive culture and friendly atmosphere?
    • How did you empower female staff to leverage their talents?
    • How did you interact with staff?
    • How did you promote a positive work environment? Where did you see bias in decisions?
  • Independently as manager, document three to five lessons learned from the changes in your detractors and promoters, and determine what action you will take.
  • Measured benefits of positive employee experience

    Positive employee experiences lead to engaged employees, and engaged employees are eight times more likely to recommend the organization (McLean & Company Employee Engagement Database, 2017; N=74,671).

    Retention

    Employees who indicate they are having a positive experience at work have a 52% higher level of intent to stay (Great Place To Work Institute, 2021)

    The bottom line

    Organizations that make employee experience a focus have: 23% higher profitability 10% higher customer loyalty (Achievers, 2021)

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Post-Secondary Education

    SOURCE: Adam Grant, “Impact and the Art of Motivation Maintenance: The Effects of Contact with Beneficiaries on Persistence Behavior”

    The future is here! Is your data architecture practice ready?

    Challenge

    A university call center, tasked with raising scholarship money from potential donors, had high employee turnover and low morale.

    Solution

    A study led by Grant arranged for a test group of employees to meet and interact with a scholarship recipient. In the five-minute meeting, employees learned what the student was studying.

    Results

    Demonstrating the purpose behind their work had significant returns. Employees who had met with the student demonstrated:

    More than two times longer “talk time” with potential donors.

    A productivity increase of 400%: the weekly average in donations went from $185.94 to $503.22 for test-group employees.

    Enhance your retention strategies

    Do not wait until employees leave to find out what they were unhappy with or why they liked the organization. Instead, perform stay interviews with top and core talent to create a holistic understanding of what they are perceiving and feeling.

    Conduct stay interviews

    What is a stay interview?

    A stay interview is a conversation with current employees. It should be performed on a yearly basis and is an informal discussion to generate deeper insight into the employee’s opinions, perspectives, concerns, and complaints. Stay interviews can have a multitude of uses. In this project they will be used to understand why top and core talent chose to stay with the organization to ensure that organizations understand and build upon their current strengths.

    When should you do stay interviews?

    We recommend completing stay interviews at least on an annual, if not quarterly, basis to truly understand how staff are feeling about the organization and their job, why they stay at the organization, and what would cause them to leave. Couple the outcomes of these interviews with employee engagement action planning to ensure that you are able to address talent needs.

    Step 2.3

    Conduct stay interviews and learn why employees stay

    Activities

    2.3.1 Conduct stay interviews

    Conduct regular “stay” or “retention” interviews

    Build stay interviews into the regular routine. By incorporating stay interviews into your schedule, they are more likely to stick. This regularity provides several advantages:

    1. Ensures that retention issues do not take you by surprise. With a finger on the pulse of the organization you will be aware of potential issues.
    2. Acts as a supplement to the engagement survey by providing additional information and context for the current level of emotion within the organization.
    3. Begins to build a wealth of information that can be analyzed to identify themes and trends. This can be used to track whether the reasons why individuals stay are consistent or if are they changing. This will ensure that the retention strategy remains up to date.

    Stay interview best practices:

    • Ideally is performed by managers, but can be performed by HR.
      • Ideally completed by managers as they are more familiar with their employees, have a greater reach, can hold meetings in a more informal setting, and will receive information first hand.
      • If conducted by managers, it’s a best practice to ensure that there is a central repository of themes so that you can identify if there are any trends in the responses, that consistent questions are asked, and that all of the information is in one place
    • Should be an informal conversation.
    • Should be conducted in a non-critical time in the business year.
    • Ask three types of questions:
      • What do you enjoy about working here?
      • What would you change about your working environment?
      • What would encourage or force you to leave the organization?
    • Interview a diverse employee base:
      • Demographics
      • Role
      • Performance level
      • Location
    Source: Talent Management & HT, 2013

    Leverage stay interviews

    Use Info-Tech’s Stay Interview Guide.

    Proactively identify opportunities to drive retention.

    The Stay Interview Guide helps managers conduct interviews with current employees, enabling the manager to understand:

    • The employee's current engagement level.
    • The employee's satisfaction with current role and responsibilities.
    • Suggestions for potential improvements.
    • An employee's intent to stay with the organization.

    Use this template to help you understand how you can best engage your employees and identify any challenges, in terms of moments that mattered, that negatively impacted their intention to stay at the organization.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Stay Interview Guide.

    2.3.1 Conduct stay interviews

    1. If you are using the Employee Experience Monitor, prepare for your stay interviews by reviewing your results and identifying if there have been any changes in the results over the previous six weeks. Identify which demographics have the highest and lowest engagement levels – and identify any changes in experience between different demographics.
    2. Identify a meeting schedule and cadence that seems appropriate for your stay interviews. For example, you likely will not do all staff at the same time and it may be beneficial to space out your meetings throughout the year. Select a candidate for your first stay interview and invite them for a one-on-one meeting. If it’s unusual for you to meet with this employee, we recommend providing some light context around the rationale, such as that you are looking for opportunities to strengthen the organizational culture and better understand how you can improve retention and engagement at the organization.
    3. Download the Stay Interview Template, review all of the questions beforehand, and identify the key questions that you want to ask in the meeting.
    • TIP: Even though this is called a “stay interview,” really it should be more of a conversation, and certainly not an interrogation. Know the questions you want to ask, and ask your staff member if it’s ok if you jot down some notes. It may even be beneficial to have the meeting outside of the office, over lunch, or out for coffee.
  • Hold your meeting with the employee and thank them for their time.
  • Following the meeting, send them a thank-you email to thank them for providing feedback, summarize your top three to five key takeaways from the meeting, verify with them that this aligns with their perspective, and see if they have anything else to add to the conversation. Identify any initiatives or changes that you will make as a result of the information – set a date for execution and follow-up.
  • If you are in the process of recruiting new employees to the organization, don’t forget to remind them of your referral program and ask if they might know of any candidates that would be a good fit for the organization.
  • Download the Stay Interview Guide

    Ten tips for best managing stay interviews

    Although stay interviews are meant to be informal, you should schedule them as you would any other meeting. Simply invite the employee for a chat.

    1. Step out of the office if possible. Opt for your local coffee shop, a casual lunch destination, or another public but informal location.
    2. Keep the conversation short, no more than 15 to 20 minutes. If there are any areas of concern that you think warrant action, ask the employee if they would like to discuss them another time. Suggest another meeting to delve deeper into specific issues.
    3. Be clear about the purpose of the conversation. Stay interviews are not performance reviews.
    4. Focus on what you can do for them. Ask about the employee’s preferences when it comes to feedback and communication (frequency, method, etc.) as well as development (preferences around methods, e.g. coaching or rotations, and personal goals).
    5. Be positive. Ask your employee what they like about their job and use positively framed questions.
    6. Ask about what they like doing. People enjoy talking about what they like to do. Ask employees about the talents and skills they would like to incorporate into their work duties.
    7. Show that you’re listening – paraphrase, ask for clarification, and use appropriate gestures.
    8. Refrain from taking notes during the meeting to preserve a conversational atmosphere.
    9. Pay attention to the employee’s body language and tone. If it appears that they are uncomfortable talking to you, stop the interview or pause to let them collect themselves.
    10. Be open to suggestions, but remember that you can’t control everything. If the employee brings up issues that are beyond your control, tell them that you will do all you can to improve the situation but can’t guarantee anything.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT

    • To stay competitive, IT leaders need to be more involved and commit to a plan to recruit and retain people of color in their departments and organizations. A diverse team is an answer to innovation that can differentiate your company.
    • Treat recruiting and retaining a diverse team as a business challenge that requires full engagement. Info-Tech offers a targeted solution that will help IT leaders build a plan to attract, recruit, engage, and retain people of color.

    Recruit Top IT Talent

    • Changing workforce dynamics and increased transparency have shifted the power from employers to job seekers, stiffening the competition for talent.
    • Candidate expectations match high consumer expectations and affect the employer brand, the consumer brand, and overall organizational reputation. Delivering a positive candidate experience (CX2) is no longer optional.

    Acquire the Right Hires with Effective Interviewing

    • Talk is cheap. Hiring isn’t.
    • Gain insight into and understand the need for a strong interview process.
    • Strategize and plan your interview process.
    • Understand various hiring scenarios and how an interview process may be modified to reflect your organization’s scenario.

    Bibliography

    “4 Hiring Trends Technology Managers Need to Know.” Robert Half Talent Solutions, 4 Oct. 2021. Accessed 4 Feb. 2022.

    “89% of CIOs are concerned about Talent Retention: SOTD CIO.” 2016 Harvey Nash/KPMG CIO Survey, CIO From IDG, 12 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Angier, Michelle, and Beth Axelrod. “Realizing the power of talented women.” McKinsey Insights, Sept. 2014. Web.

    Beansontoast23. “Not being trained on my first dev job.” Reddit, 29 July 2016. Web.

    Birt, Martin. “How to develop a successful mentorship program: 8 steps.” Financial Post, 5 Dec. 2014. Web.

    Bort, Julie. “The 25 Best Tech Employers For Women [Ranked].” Business Insider, 18 Nov. 2014. Web.

    Bradford, Laurence. “15 of the Most Powerful Women in Tech.” The Balance Careers, Updated 4 Feb. 2018. Web.

    “Building A Stronger, Better, More Diverse eBay.” eBay Inc., 31 July 2014. Web.

    “Canada’s Best Employers 2015: The Top 50 Large Companies.” Canadian Business, 2014. Article.

    Cao, Jing, and Wei Xue. “What are the Best practices to Promote High-Ranking Female Employees Within Organizations?” Cornell University ILR School, Spring 2013. Web.

    Cheng, Roger. “Women in Tech: The Numbers Don't Add Up.” CNET, 6 May 2015. Web.

    “CIO Survey 2020: Everything Changed. Or Did It?” Harvey Nash and KPMG, 2020. Accessed 24 Feb. 2022.

    Daley, Sam. “Women in Tech Statistics Show the Industry Has a Long Way to Go.” Built In, 5 May 2021. Accessed 1 March 2022.

    Dixon-Fyle, Sundiatu, et al. “Diversity wins: How inclusion matters.” McKinsey & Company, 19 May 2020. Accessed 24 Feb. 2022.

    Donovan, Julia. “How to Quantify the Benefits of Enhancing Your Employee Experience.” Achievers Solution Inc., 21 Sept. 2021. Web.

    “Engage Me! Employee Engagement Explored.” SoftSolutions, 12 Jan. 2016. Web.

    Erb, Marcus. Global Employee Engagement Benchmark Study. Great Place to Work Institute, 29 Nov. 2021. Accessed 15 Feb. 2022.

    Garner, Mandy. “How to attract and recruit a more gender diverse team.” Working Mums, 4 March 2016. Web.

    Gaur, Shubhra. “Women in IT: Their path to the top is like a maze.” Firstpost, 28 Aug. 2015. Web.

    “Girls Gone Wired Subreddit.” Reddit, n.d. Web.

    Glassdoor Team. “10 Ways to Remove Gender Bias from Job Descriptions.” Glassdoor for Employers Blog, 9 May 2017. Web.

    Grant, Adam. “Impact and the Art of Motivation Maintenance: The Effects of Contact with Beneficiaries on Persistence Behavior.” Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes, vol. 103, no. 1, 2007, pp. 53-67. Accessed on ScienceDirect.

    IBM Smarter Workforce Institute. The Employee Experience Index. IBM Corporation, 2016. Web.

    ISACA. “Tech Workforce 2020: The Age and Gender Perception Gap.” An ISACA Global Survey Report, 2019. Accessed 17 Feb. 2022.

    Johnson, Stephanie K., David R. Hekman, and Elsa T. Chan. “If There’s Only One Woman in Your Candidate Pool, There’s Statistically No Chance She’ll Be Hired.” Harvard Business Review, 26 April 2016. Web.

    Kessler, Sarah. “Tech's Big Gender Diversity Push One Year In.” Fast Company, 19 Nov. 2015. Web.

    Kosinski, M. “Why You Might Want to Focus a Little Less on Hiring for Cultural Fit.” Recruiter.com, 11 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Krome, M. A. “Knowledge Transformation: A Case for Workforce Diversity.” Journal of Diversity Management (JDM), vol. 9, no. 2, Nov. 2014, pp. 103-110.

    Ladimeij, Kazim. “Why Staff Resign; the Psychology of Quitting.” The Career Café, 31 March 2017. Updated 9 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Loehr, Anne. “Why You Need a New Strategy For Retaining Female Talent.” ReWork, 10 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Lucas, Suzanne. “How Much Employee Turnover Really Costs You.” Inc., 30 Aug. 2013. Web.

    Marttila, Paula. “5 Step Action Plan To Attract Women Join Tech Startups.” LinkedIn, 10 March 2016. Web.

    Mayor, Tracy. “Women in IT: How deep is the bench?” Computerworld, 19 Nov. 2012. Web.

    McCracken, Douglas M. “Winning the Talent War for Women: Sometimes It Takes a Revolution.” Harvard Business Review, Nov.-Dec. 2000. Web.

    McDonald’s Careers. McDonald’s, n.d. Web.

    McFeely, Shane, and Ben Wigert. “This Fixable Problem Costs U.S. Businesses $1 Trillion.” Gallup, Inc., 31 March 2019. Accessed 4 March 2022.

    Morgan, Jacob. The Employee Experience Advantage: How to Win the War for Talent by Giving Employees the Workspaces they Want, the Tools they Need, and a Culture They Can Celebrate. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2017. Print.

    Napolitano, Amy. “How to Build a Successful Mentoring Program.” Training Industry, 20 April 2015. Web.

    Peck, Emily. “The Stats On Women In Tech Are Actually Getting Worse.” Huffington Post. 27 March 2015. Updated 6 Dec. 2017. Web. 20

    Porter, Jane. “Why Are Women Leaving Science, Engineering, And Tech Jobs?” Fast Company, 15 Oct. 2014. Web.

    Pratt, Siofra. “Emma Watson: Your New Recruitment Guru - How to: Attract, Source and Recruit Women.” SocialTalent, 25 Sept. 2014. Web.

    “RBC Diversity Blueprint 2012-2015.” 2012-2015 Report Card, RBC, 2015. Web.

    Richter, Felix. “Infographic: Women’s Representation in Big Tech.” Statista Infographics, 1 July 2021. Web.

    Rogers, Rikki. “5 Ways Companies Can Attract More Women (Aside From Offering to Freeze Their Eggs).” The Muse, n.d. Web.

    Sazzoid. “HOWTO recruit and retain women in tech workplaces.” Geek Feminism Wiki, 10 Jan. 2012. Updated 18 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Seiter, Courtney. “Why We Removed the Word ‘Hacker’ From Buffer Job Descriptions.” Buffer Open blog, 13 March 2015. Updated 31 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Serebrin, Jacob. “With tech giants like Google going after female talent, how can startups compete?” The Globe and Mail, 18 Jan. 2016. Updated 16 May 2018. Web.

    Snyder, Kieran. “Why women leave tech: It's the culture, not because 'math is hard'.” Fortune, 2 Oct. 2014. Web.

    Stackpole, Beth. “5 ways to attract and retain female technologists.” Computerworld, 7 March 2016. Web.

    Sullivan, John. “4 Stay Interview Formats You Really Should Consider.” Talent Management & HT, 5 Dec. 2013. Web.

    Syed, Nurhuda. “IWD 2021: Why Are Women Underrepresented in the C-Suite?” HRD America, 5 March 2021. Web.

    Sylvester, Cheryl. “How to empower women in IT (and beyond) on #InternationalWomenDay.” ITBUSINESS.CA, 31 March 2016. Web.

    “The Power of Parity: Advancing Women’s Equality in the United States.” McKinsey Global Institute, April 2016. Web.

    White, Cindy. “How to Promote Gender Equality in the Workplace.” Chron, 8 Aug. 2018. Web.

    White, Sarah. “Women in Tech Statistics: The Hard Truths of an Uphill Battle.” CIO From IDG Communication, Inc., 8 March 2021. Accessed 24 Feb. 2022.

    Build and Deliver an Optimized IT Update Presentation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}269|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Manage Business Relationships
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-business-relationships
    • IT update presentation success comes with understanding the business and the needs of your stakeholders. It often takes time and effort to get it right.
    • Many IT updates are too technically focused and do not engage nor demonstrate value in the eyes of the business.
    • This is not the time to boast about technical metrics that lack relevance.
    • Too often IT updates are prepared without the necessary pre-discussions required to validate content and hone priorities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • CIOs need to take charge of the IT value proposition, increasing the impact and strategic role of IT.
    • Use your IT update to focus decisions, improve relationships, find new sources of value, and drive credibility.
    • Evolve the strategic partnership with your business using key metrics to help guide the conversation.

    Impact and Result

    • Build and deliver an IT update that focuses on what is most important.
    • Achieve the buy-in you require while driving business value.
    • Gain clarity on your scope, goals, and outcomes.
    • Validate IT’s role as a strategic business partner.

    Build and Deliver an Optimized IT Update Presentation Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our Executive Brief to find out how an optimized IT update presentation is your opportunity to drive business value.Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand how we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Scope and goals

    Confirm the “why” of the IT update presentation by determining its scope and goals.

    • Build and Deliver an Optimized IT Update Presentation – Phase 1: Scope and Goals

    2. Assess and build

    Confirm the “what” of the presentation by focusing on business requirements, metrics, presentation creation, and stakeholder validation.

    • Build and Deliver an Optimized IT Update Presentation – Phase 2: Assess and Build
    • IT Update Stakeholder Interview Guide
    • IT Metrics Prioritization Tool

    3. Deliver and inspire

    Confirm the “how” of the presentation by focusing on engaging your audience, getting what you need, and creating a feedback cycle.

    • Build and Deliver an Optimized IT Update Presentation – Phase 3: Deliver and Inspire
    • IT Update Open Issues Tracking Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build and Deliver an Optimized IT Update Presentation

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Scope, Goals, and Requirements

    The Purpose

    Determine the IT update’s scope and goals and identify stakeholder requirements

    Key Benefits Achieved

    IT update scope and goals

    Business stakeholder goals and requirements

    Activities

    1.1 Determine/validate the IT update scope

    1.2 Determine/validate the IT update goals

    1.3 Business context analysis

    1.4 Determine stakeholder needs and expectations

    1.5 Confirm business goals and requirements

    Outputs

    Documented IT update scope

    Documented IT update goals

    Validated business context

    Stakeholder requirements analysis

    Confirmed business goals and requirements

    2 Validate Metrics With Business Needs

    The Purpose

    Analyze metrics and content and validate against business needs

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Selection of key metrics

    Metrics and content validated to business needs

    Activities

    2.1 Analyze current IT metrics

    2.2 Review industry best-practice metrics

    2.3 Align metrics and content to business stakeholder needs

    Outputs

    Identification of key metrics

    Finalization of key metrics

    Metrics and content validated to business stakeholder needs

    3 Create an optimized IT update

    The Purpose

    Create an IT update presentation that is optimized to business needs

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Optimized IT update presentation

    Activities

    3.1 Understand the audience and how to best engage them

    3.2 Determine how to present the pertinent data

    3.3 IT update review with key business stakeholders

    3.4 Final edits and review of IT update presentation

    3.5 Pre-presentation checklist

    Outputs

    Clarity on update audience

    Draft IT update presentation

    Business stakeholder feedback

    Finalized IT update presentation

    Confirmation on IT update presentation readiness

    Security Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}42|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}42|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,431
    • member rating average days saved: 29
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk

    The challenge

    You may be experiencing one or more of the following:

    • You may not have sufficient security resources to handle all the challenges.
    • Security threats are prevalent. Yet many businesses struggle to embed systemic security thinking into their culture.
    • The need to move towards strategic planning of your security landscape is evident. How to get there is another matter.

    Our advice

    Insight

    To have a successful information security strategy, take these three factors into account:

    • Holistic: your view must include people, processes, and technology.
    • Risk awareness: Base your strategy on the actual risk profile of your company. And then add the appropriate best practices.
    • Business-aligned: When your strategic security plan demonstrates alignment with the business goals and supports it, embedding will go much more straightforward.

    Impact and results 

    • We have developed a highly effective approach to creating your security strategy. We tested and refined this for more than seven years with hundreds of different organizations.
    • We ensure alignment with business objectives.
    • We assess organizational risk and stakeholder expectations.
    • We enable a comprehensive current state assessment.
    • And we prioritize initiatives and build out a right-sized security roadmap.

     

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get up to speed

    Read up on why you should build your customized information security strategy. Review our methodology and understand the four ways we can support you.

    Assess the security requirements

    It all starts with risk appetite, yes, but security is something you want to get right. Determine your organizations' security pressures and business goals, and then determine your security program's goals.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Requirements
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool (xls)
    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool (xls)

    Build your gap initiative

    Our best-of-breed security framework makes you perform a gap analysis between where you are and where you want to be (your target state). Once you know that, you can define your goals and duties.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 2: Assess Gaps
    • Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool (xls)

    Plan the implementation of your security strategy 

    With your design at this level, it is time to plan your roadmap.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 3: Build the Roadmap

    Let it run and continuously improve. 

    Learn to use our methodology to manage security initiatives as you go. Identify the resources you need to execute the evolving strategy successfully.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 4: Execute and Maintain
    • Information Security Strategy Communication Deck (ppt)
    • Information Security Charter (doc)

     

    Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}520|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Determining IT requirements (legal and business needs) is overwhelming.
    • Prioritizing people in the process is often overlooked.
    • Mandating changes instead of motivating change isn’t sustainable.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Compliance is the minimum; the people and behavior changes are the harder part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility makes the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.
    • Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative, however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging, the tendency is to start with tech or compliance, however, starting with the people is key. It must be culture.
    • Think about accessibility like you think about IT security. Use IT security concepts that you and your team are already familiar with to initiate the accessibility program.

    Impact and Result

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear ‘accessibility’ and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.
    • Build your accessibility plan while prioritizing the necessary culture change
    • Use change management and communication practices to elicit the behavior shift needed to sustain accessibility.

    Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT – Use this blueprint to narrow down the requirements for your organization and team while also clearly communicating why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.

    A step-by-step approach to walk you through understanding the IT accessibility compliance requirements, building your roadmap, and communicating with your department. This storyboard will help you figure out what’s needed from IT to support the business and launch accessibility with your team.

    • Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT – Phases 1-2

    2. IT Manager Meeting Template – A clear, concise, and compelling communication to introduce accessibility for your organization to IT managers and to facilitate their participation in building the roadmap.

    Accessibility compliance can be overwhelming at first. Use this template to simplify the requirements for the IT managers and build out a roadmap.

    • IT Manager Meeting Template

    3. Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool – This tool helps to decrease the overwhelm of accessibility compliance. Narrow down the list of controls needed to the ones that apply to your organization and to IT.

    Using the EN 301 549 V3.2.1 (2021-03) as a basis for digital accessibility conformance. Use this tool to build a priorities list of requirements that are applicable to your organization.

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    4. Departmental Meeting Template – Cascade your communication down to the IT department with this facilitation guide for introducing accessibility and the roadmap to the entire IT team.

    Use this pre-built slide deck to customize your accessibility communication to the IT department. It will help you build a shared vision for accessibility, a current state picture, and plans to build to the target future state.

    • Departmental Meeting Template
    • Accessibility Quick Cards

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Initiate Digital Accessibility For IT

    Make accessibility accessible.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project.

    Accessibility is an organizational directive; however, IT plays a fundamental role in its success. As business partners require support and expertise to assist with their accessibility requirements IT needs to be ready to respond. Even if your organization hasn't fully committed to an accessibility standard, you can proactively get ready by planting the seeds to change the culture. By building understanding and awareness of the significant impact technology has on accessibility, you can start to change behaviors.

    Implementing an accessibility program requires many considerations: legal requirements; international guidelines, such as Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG); training for staff; ongoing improvement; and collaborating with accessibility experts and people with disabilities. It can be overwhelming to know where to start. The tendency is to start with compliance, which is a fantastic first step. For a sustained program use, change management practices are needed to change behaviors and build inclusion for people with disabilities.

    15% of the world's population identify as having some form of a disability (not including others that are impacted, e.g. caretakers, family). Why would anyone want to alienate over 1.1 billion people?

    This is a picture of Heather Leier-Murray

    Heather Leier-Murray
    Senior Research Analyst, People & Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Disability is part of being human

    Merriam-Webster defines disability as a "physical, mental, cognitive, or developmental condition that impairs, interferes with, or limits a person's ability to engage in certain tasks or actions or participate in typical daily activities and interactions."(1)

    The World Health Organization points out that a crucial part of the definition of disability is that it's not just a health problem, but the environment impacts the experience and extent of disability. Inaccessibility creates barriers for full participation in society.(2)

    The likelihood of you experiencing a disability at some point in your life is very high, whether a physical or mental disability, seen or unseen, temporary or permanent, severe or mild.(2)

    Many people acquire disabilities as they age yet may not identify as "a person with a disability."3 Where life expectancies are over 70 years of age, 11.5% of life is spent living with a disability. (4)

    "Extreme personalization is becoming the primary difference in business success, and everyone wants to be a stakeholder in a company that provides processes, products, and services to employees and customers with equitable, person-centered experiences and allows for full participation where no one is left out."
    – Paudie Healy, CEO, Universal Access

    (1.) Merriam-Webster
    (2.) World Health Organization, 2022
    (3.) Digital Leaders, as cited in WAI, 2018
    (4.) Disabled World, as cited in WAI, 2018

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    You know the push for accessibility is coming in your organization. You might even have a program started or approval to build one. But you're not sure if you and your team are ready to support and enable the organization on its accessibility journey.

    Common Obstacles

    Understanding where to start, where accessibility lives, and if or when you're done can be overwhelmingly difficult. Accessibility is an organizational initiative that IT enables; being able to support the organization requires a level of understanding of common obstacles.

    • Determining IT requirements (legal and business needs) is overwhelming.
    • Prioritizing people in the process is often overlooked.
    • Mandating changes instead of motivating change isn't sustainable.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Prepare your people for accessibility and inclusion, even if your organization doesn't have a formal standard yet. Take your accessibility from mandate to movement, i.e. from Phase 1 - focused on compliance to Phase 2 - driven by experience for sustained change.

    • Use this blueprint to build your accessibility plan while prioritizing the necessary culture change.
    • Use change management and communication practices to elicit the behavior shift needed to sustain accessibility.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative; however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging because the tendency is to start with tech or compliance; however, starting with the people is key. It must be a change in organizational culture.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help IT leaders who are looking to:

    • Determine accessibility requirements of IT based on the business' needs and priorities, and the existing standards and regulations.
    • Prepare the IT leaders to implement and sustain accessibility and prepare for the behavior shift that is necessary.
    • Build the plan for IT as it pertains to accessibility, including a list of business needs and priorities, and prioritization of accessibility initiatives that IT is responsible for.
    • Ensure that accessibility is sustained in the IT department by following phase 2 of this blueprint on using change management and communication to impact behavior and change the culture.

    90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2020

    Over 30% of those that claim to prioritize diversity are focused on compliance.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2022

    Accessibility is an organizational initiative

    Is IT ready and capable to enable it?

    • With increasing rates of lawsuits related to digital accessibility, more organizations are prioritizing initiatives to support increased accessibility. About 68% of Applause's survey respondents indicated that digital accessibility is a higher priority for their organization than it was last year.
    • This increase in priority will trickle into IT's tasks – get ahead and start working toward accessibility proactively so you're ready when business requests start coming in.

    A survey of nearly 1,800 respondents conducted by Applause found that:

    • 79% of respondents rated digital accessibility either a top priority or important for their organizations.
    • 42% of respondents indicated they have limited or no in-house expertise or resources to test accessibility.
      Source: Business Wire, May 2022

    How organizations prioritize digital accessibility

    • 43% rated accessibility as a top priority.
    • 36% rated accessibility as important.
    • Fewer than 5% rated accessibility as either low priority or not even on the radar.
    • More than 65% agreed or strongly agreed that accessibility is a higher priority than last year.

    Source: Angel Business Communications, 2022

    Why organizations address accessibility

    Top three reasons:

    1. 61% To comply with laws
    2. 62% To provide the best user experience
    3. 78% To include people with disabilities
      Source: Level Access, 2022

    Still, most businesses aren't meeting compliance standards. Even though legislation has been in place for over 30 years, a 2022 study by WebAIM of 1,000,000 homepages returned a 96.8% WCAG 2.0 failure rate.

    Source: Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice, 2022

    Info-Tech's approach to Initiate Digital Accessibility

    An image of the Business Case for Accessibility

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Phase 1 of this blueprint gets you started and helps you build a plan to get you to the initial compliance driven maturity level. It's focused more on standards and regulations than on the user and employee experience.
    2. Phase 2 takes you further in maturity and helps you become experience driven in your efforts. It focuses on building your accessibility maturity into the developing, defined, and managed levels, as well as balancing mandate and movement of the accessibility maturity continuum.

    Determining conformance seems overwhelming

    Unfortunately, it's the easier part.

    • Focus on local regulations and what corporate leaders are setting as accessibility standards for the organization. This will narrow down the scope of what compliance looks like for your team.
    • Look to best practices like WCAG guidelines to ensure digital assets are accessible and usable for all users. WCAG's international guideline outlines principles that can also aid in scoping.
    • In phase 1 of this blueprint, use the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Toolto prioritize criteria and legislation for which IT is responsible.
    • Engage with business partners and other areas of the organization to figure out what is needed from IT. Accessibility is an organizational initiative; it shouldn't be on IT to figure it all out. Determine what your team is specifically responsible for before tackling it all.

    Motivating behavior change

    This is the hard part.

    Changing behaviors and mindsets is necessary to be experience driven and sustain accessibility.

    • Compliance is the minimum when it comes to accessibility, much like employment or labor regulations.
    • Making accessibility an organizational imperative is an iterative process. Managing the change is hard. People, culture, and behavior change matures accessibility from compliance driven to experience driven, increasing the benefits of accessibility.
    • Focus accessibility initiatives on improving the experience of everyone and improving engagement (customer and employee).
    • Being people focused and experience driven enables the organization to provide the best user experience and realize the benefits of accessibility.

    A picture of Jordyn Zimmerman

    "Compliance is the minimum. And when we look at web tech, people are still arguing about their positioning on the standards that need to be enforced in order to comply, forgetting that it isn't enough to comply."
    -- Jordyn Zimmerman, M.Ed., Director of Professional Development, The Nora Project, and Appointee, President's Committee for People with Intellectual Disabilities.

    This is an image of the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework Table.

    To see more on the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework:

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    Think of accessibility like you think of IT security

    Use IT security concepts to build your accessibility program.

    • Risk management: identify and prioritize accessibility risks and implement controls to mitigate those risks.
    • Compliance: use an IT security-style compliance approach to ensure that the accessibility program is compliant with the many accessibility regulations and standards.
    • Defense in depth: implement multiple layers of accessibility controls to address different types of accessibility risks and issues.
    • Response and recovery: quickly and effectively respond to accessibility issues, minimizing the potential impact on the organization and its users.
    • End-user education: educate end users about accessibility best practices, such as how to use assistive technologies and how to report accessibility issues.
    • Monitor and audit: use monitoring and auditing tools to ensure that accessibility remains over time and to identify and address issues that arise.
    • Collaboration: ensure the accessibility program is effective and addresses the needs of all users by collaborating with accessibility experts and people with disabilities.

    "As an organization matures, the impact of accessibility shifts. A good company will think of security at the very beginning. The same needs to be applied to accessibility thinking. At the peak of accessibility maturity an organization will have people with disabilities involved at the outset."
    -- Cam Beaudoin, Owner, Accelerated Accessibility

    This is a picture of Cam Beaudoin

    Info-Tech's methodology for Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT

    1. Planning IT's accessibility requirements

    2. Change enablement of accessibility

    Phase Steps

    1. Determine accessibility requirements of IT
    2. Build the IT accessibility plan
    1. Build awareness
    2. Support new behaviors
    3. Continuous reinforcement

    Phase Outcomes

    List of business needs and priorities related to accessibility

    IT accessibility requirements for conformance

    Assessment of state of accessibility conformance

    Prioritization of accessibility initiatives for IT

    Remediation plan for IT related to accessibility conformance

    Accessibility commitment statement

    Team understanding of what, why, and how

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Sustainment plan

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative; however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging. The tendency is to start with tech or compliance; however, starting with the people is key. It must be a change in organizational culture.

    Insight 1

    Compliance is the minimum; people and behavior changes are the hardest part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility makes the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.

    Insight 2

    Think about accessibility like you think about IT security. Use IT security concepts that you and your team are already familiar with to initiate the accessibility program.

    Insight 3

    People are learning a new way to behave and think; this can be an unsettling period. Patience, education, communication, support, and time are keys for success of the implementation of accessibility. There is a transition period needed; people will gradually change their practices and attitudes. Celebrate small successes as they arise.

    Insight 4

    Accessibility isn't a project as there is no end. Effective planning and continuous reinforcement of "the new way of doing things" is necessary to enable accessibility as the new status quo.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    IT Manager Meeting Template

    IT Manager Meeting Template
    Use this meeting slide deck to work with IT managers to build out the accessibility remediation plan and commitment statement.

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Departmental Meeting Template
    Use this meeting slide deck to introduce the concept of accessibility and communicate IT goals and objectives.

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Accessibility Quick Cards
    Using the Info-Tech IT Management and Governance Framework to identify key activities to help improve and maintain the accessibility of your organization and your core IT processes.

    Key deliverable:

    Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool
    This tool will assist you in identifying remediation priorities applicable to your organization.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Know and understand your role and responsibility in accessibility implementation within the organization.
    • Provide effective support and excellent business service experience to internal stakeholders related to accessibility.
    • You will be set up to effectively support your team through the necessary behavior, process, and thinking changes.
    • Proactively prepare for accessibility requests that will be coming in.
    • Move beyond compliance to support your organization's sustainment of accessibility.
    • Don't lose out on a trillion-dollar market.
    • Don't miss opportunities to work with organizations because you're not accessible.
    • Enable and empower current employees with disabilities.
    • Minimize potential for negative brand reputation due to a lack of consideration for people with disabilities.
    • Decrease the risk of legal action being brought upon the organization.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Improve IT effectiveness and employee buy-in to change.

    Measuring the effectiveness of your program helps contribute to a culture of continuous improvement. Having consistent measures in place helps to inform decisions and enables your plan to be iterative to take advantage of emerging opportunities.

    Monitor employee engagement, overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT, and the overall end-customer satisfaction.

    Remember, accessibility is not a project – just because measures are positive does not mean your work is done.

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you establish metrics for your organization.
    In phase 2, we will help you develop a sustainment for achieving those metrics.

    A screenshot of the slide titled Establish Baseline Metrics.

    Suggested Metrics
    • Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • Requests for accommodation or assistive technology fulfilled
    • Employee engagement
    • Overall compliance status

    Info-Tech's IT Metrics Library

    Executive brief case study

    INDUSTRY: Technology


    SOURCE: Microsoft.com
    https://blogs.microsoft.com/accessibility/accessib...

    Microsoft

    Microsoft's accessibility journey starts with the goal of building a culture of accessibility and disability inclusion. They recognize that the starting point for the magnitude of organizational change is People.

    "Accessibility in Action Badge"

    Every employee at Microsoft is trained on accessibility to build understanding of why and how to be inclusive using accessibility. The program entails 90 minutes of virtual content.

    Microsoft treats accessibility and inclusion like a business, managing and measuring it to ensure sustained growth and success. They have worked over the years to bust systemic bias company-wide and to build a program with accessibility criteria that works for their business.

    Results

    The program Microsoft has built allows them to shift the accessibility lens earlier in their processes and listen to its users' needs. This allows them to continuously mature their accessibility program, which means continuously improving its users' experience.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided implementation

    What does a typical guided implementation (GI) on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Discuss motivation for the initiative and foundational knowledge requirements.
    Call #2: Discuss stakeholder analysis and business needs of IT.

    Call #3: Identify current maturity and IT accountabilities.
    Call #4: Discuss introduction to senior IT leaders and drivers.
    Call #5: Discuss manager meeting outline and slides.

    Call #6: Review key messages and next steps to prepare for departmental meeting.
    Call #7: Discuss post-meetings next steps and timelines.

    Call #8: Review sustainment plan and plan next steps.

    A GI is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is eight to ten calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Understand Your Legislative Environment

    Understand Your Current State

    Define the
    IT Target State

    Build the IT Accessibility Plan

    Prepare for Change Enablement

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up

    Activities

    0.1 Make a list of the legislation you need to comply with
    0.2 Seek legal counsel or and/or professional services' input on compliance
    0.3 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    0.4 Conduct stakeholder analysis

    1.1 Define the risks of inaction
    1.2 Review maturity assessment
    1.3 Conduct stakeholder focus group

    2.1 Define IT compliance accountabilities
    2.2 Define IT accessibility goals/objectives/ metrics
    2.3 Indicate the target-state maturity

    3.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation
    3.2 Decide on priorities
    3.3 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    4.1 Prepare the roadmap
    4.2 Prepare the communication plan

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Legislative requirements for your organization
    2. List of stakeholders
    3. Completed maturity assessment.
    1. Defined risks of inaction
    2. Stakeholder analysis completed with business needs identified
    1. IT accessibility goals/objectives
    2. Target maturity
    1. Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool completed
    2. Accessibility commitment statement
    3. Current compliance and mitigation assessed
    1. IT accessibility roadmap
    2. Communication plan
    1. IT accessibility roadmap
    2. Communication plan

    Phase 1

    Planning IT's Accessibility Requirements.

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Determine accessibility requirements of IT

    1.2 Build IT accessibility plan

    2.1 Build awareness

    2.2 Support new behaviors

    2.3 Continuous reinforcement

    Initiate Digital Accessibility For IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyzing stakeholders to determine accessibility needs of business for IT.
    • Determining accessibility compliance requirements of IT.
    • Build a manager communication deck.
    • Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation.
    • Prioritize and assign timelines.
    • Build a sunrise diagram to visualize your accessibility roadmap.
    • Write an IT accessibility commitment statement.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT leadership team
    • Business partners in other areas of the organization (e.g., HR, finance, communications)

    Step 1.1

    Determine the accessibility requirements of IT.

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine what the business needs from IT
    1.1.2 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)
    1.1.3 Determine IT compliance requirements
    1.1.4 Define target state
    1.1.5 Create a list of goals and objectives
    1.1.6 Finalize key metrics
    1.1.7 Prepare a meeting for IT managers

    Prepare to support the organization with accessibility

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers
    • Business partners in other areas of the organization (e.g., HR, finance, communications)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder analysis with business needs listed
    • Defined target future state
    • List of goals and objectives
    • Key metrics
    • Communication deck for IT management rollout meeting

    While defining future state, consider your drivers

    The Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework identifies three key strategic drivers: compliance, experience, and incorporation.

    • Over 30% of organizations are focused on compliance, according to a 2022 survey by Harvard Business Review and Slack's Future Forum. The survey asked more than 10,000 workers in six countries about their organizations' approach to diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI).(2)
    • Even though 90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity, over 30% are focused on compliance.(1)

    1. Harvard Business Review, 2020
    2. Harvard Business Review, 2022

    31.6% of companies remain in the compliant stage where they are focused on DEI compliance and not on integrating DEI throughout the organization or on creating continual improvement, from Harvard Business Review 2022.

    Info-Tech accessibility maturity framework

    This is an image of Info-Tech's accessibility maturity framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT typically works through maturity frameworks from the bottom to the top, progressing at each level until they reach the end. When it comes to IT accessibility initiatives, being especially thorough, thoughtful, and collaborative is critical to success. This will mean spending more time in the Developing, Defined, and Managed levels of maturity rather than trying to reach Optimized as quickly as you can. This may feel contrary to what IT historically considers as a successful implementation.

    After initially ensuring your organization is compliant with regulations and standards, you will progress to building disciplined process and consistent standardized processes. Eventually you will build the ability for predictable process, and lastly, you'll optimize by continuously improving.

    Depending on the level of maturity you are trying to achieve, it could take months or even years to implement. The important thing to understand, however, is that accessibility work is never done.

    At all levels of the maturity framework, you must consider the interconnected aspects of people, process, and technology. However, as the organization progresses, the impact will shift from largely being focused on process and technology improvement to being focused on people.

    Align the benefits of program drivers to organizational goals or outcomes

    Although there will be various motivating factors, aligning the drivers of your accessibility program provides direction to the program. Connecting the advantages of program drivers to organizational goals builds the confidence of senior leaders and decision makers, increasing the continued commitment to invest in accessibility programming.

    This is an image of a table describing the maturity level; Description; Advantages, and Disadvantages for the three drivers: Compliance; Experience; and Incorporation.

    Accessibility maturity levels

    Driver Description Benefits
    Initial Compliance
    • Accessibility processes are mostly undocumented.
    • Accessibility happens mostly on a reactive or ad hoc basis.
    • No one is aware of who is responsible for accessibility or what role they play.
    • Heavily focused on complying with regulations and standards to decrease legal risk.
    • The organization is aware of the need for accessibility.
    • Legal risk is decreased.
    Developing Experience
    • The organization is starting to take steps to increase accessibility beyond compliance.
    • Lots of opportunity for improvement.
    • Defining and refining processes.
    • Working toward building a library of assistive tools.
    • Awareness of the need for accessibility is growing.
    • Process review for accessibility increases process efficiency through avoiding rework.
    Defined Experience
    • Accessibility processes are repeatable.
    • There is a tendency to resort to old habits under stress.
    • Tools are in place to facilitate accommodation.
    • Employees know accommodations are available to them.
    • Accessibility is becoming part of daily work.
    Managed Experience
    • Defined by effective accessibility controls, processes, and metrics.
    • Mostly anticipating preferences.
    • Roles and responsibilities are defined.
    • Disability is included as part of DEI.
    • Employees understand their role in accessibility.
    • Engagement is positively impacted.
    • Attraction and retention are positively impacted.
    Optimized Incorporation
    • Not the goal for every organization.
    • Characterized by a dramatic shift in organizational culture and a feeling of belonging.
    • Ongoing continuous improvement.
    • Seamless interactions with the organization for everyone.
    • Using feedback to inform future initiatives.
    • More likely to be innovative and inclusive, reach more people positively, and meet emerging global legal requirements.
    • Better equipped for success.

    Cheat sheet: Identify stakeholders

    Ask stakeholders, "Who else should I be talking to?" to discover additional stakeholders and ensure you don't miss anyone.

    Identify stakeholders through the following questions:

    Take a 360-degree view of potential internal and external stakeholders who might be impacted by the initiative.

    • Who in areas of influence will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts of what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?
    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who is negatively impacted by the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who are the owners, governors, customers, and suppliers of impacted capabilities or functions?
    • Executives
    • Peers
    • Direct reports
    • Partners
    • Customers
    • Subcontractors
    • Suppliers
    • Contractors
    • Lobby groups
    • Regulatory agencies

    Categorize your stakeholders with a stakeholder prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map help teams categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    This is an image of a quadrant analysis for mediators; players; spectators; and noisemakers.
    • Players – Players have a high interest in the initiative and high influence to affect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
    • Mediators – Mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers – Noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators – Generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Strategize to engage stakeholders by type

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks.

    By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, you can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy spectators and noisemakers while ensuring the needs of the mediators and players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence, high interest Actively Engage
    Keep them engaged through continuous involvement. Maintain their interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest Keep Satisfied
    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust, and include them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest Keep InformedTry to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest MonitorThey are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    1.1.1 Determine what the business needs from IT (stakeholder analysis)

    1.5 hours

    1. Consider all the potential individuals or groups of individuals who will be impacted or influence the accessibility needs of IT.
    2. List each of the stakeholders you identify. If in person, use sticky notes to define the target audiences. The individuals or group of individuals that potentially have needs from IT related to accessibility before, during, or after the initiative.
    3. As you list each stakeholder, consider how they perceive IT. This perception could impact how you choose to interact with them.
    4. For each stakeholder identified as potentially having a business need requirement for IT related to accessibility, conduct an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.
    5. Based on the stakeholder, the influence or impact of the business need can inform the interaction and prioritization of IT requirements.
    6. Update slide 9 of the IT Manager Meeting Template.

    Input

    • The change
    • Why the change is needed
    • Key stakeholder map from activity 2.1.1 of The Accessibility Business Case for IT (optional)

    Output

    • The degree of influence or impact each stakeholder has on accessibility needs from IT

    Materials

    • Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool (optional)

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • Business partners

    Proactively consider how accessibility could be received

    Think about the positive and negative reactions you could face about implementing accessibility.

    It's likely individuals will have an emotional reaction to change and may have different emotions at different times during the change process.
    Plan for how to leverage support and deal with resistance to change by assessing people's emotional responses:

    • What are possible questions, objections, suggestions, and concerns that might arise.
    • How will you respond to the possible questions and concerns.
    • Include proactive messaging in your communications that address possible objections.
    • Express an understanding for others point of views by re-positioning objections and suggestions as questions.

    This is an image of the 10 change chakras

    Determine your level of maturity

    Use Info-Tech's Accessibility Maturity Assessment.

    On the accessibility questionnaire, tab 2, choose the amount you agree or disagree with each statement. Answer the questions based on your knowledge of your current state organizationally.

    Once you've answered all the questions, see the results on the tab 3, Accessibility Results. You can see your overall maturity level and the maturity level for each of six dimensions that are necessary to increase the success of an accessibility program.

    Click through to tab 4, Recommendations, to see specific recommendations based on your results and proven research to progress through the maturity levels. Keep in mind that not all organizations will or should aspire to the "Optimize" maturity level.

    A series of three screenshots from the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    1.1.2 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)

    1. Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment and save it with the date so that as you work on your accessibility program, you can reassess later and track your progress.
    2. Once you have saved the assessment, select the appropriate answer for each statement on tab 2, Accessibility Questions, based on your knowledge of the organization's approach.
    3. After reviewing all the accessibility statements, see your maturity level results on tab 3, Accessibility Results. Then see tab 4, Recommendations, for suggestions based on your answers.
    4. Document your accessibility maturity results on slides 12 and 13 of the IT Manager Meeting Template and slide 17 of the Departmental Meeting Template.
    5. Use the maturity assessment results in activity 1.1.3.

    Input

    • Assess your current state of accessibility by choosing all the statements that apply to your organization

    Output

    • Identified accessibility maturity level

    Materials

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    Participants

    • Project leader/sponsor
    • IT leadership team

    1.1.3 Determine IT compliance responsibilities

    1-3 hours

    Before you start this activity, you may need to discuss with your organization's legal counsel to determine the legislation that applies to your organization.

    1. Determine which controls apply to your organization based on your knowledge of the organization goals, stakeholders, and accessibility maturity target. If you haven't determined your current and future state maturity model, use the Info-Tech resource from the Accessibility Business Case for IT(see previous two slides).
    2. Using the drop down in column J – Applies to My Org., select "Yes" or "No" for each control on each of the data entry tabs of the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool.
    3. For each control you have selected "Yes" for in column J, identify the control owner in column I.
    4. Update slide 10 in the IT Manager Meeting Template and slide 13 in the IT Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Local, regional, and/or global legislation and guidelines applicable to your organization
    • Organizational accessibility standard
    • Business needs list
    • Completed Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)

    Output

    • List of legislation and standards requirements that are narrowed based on organization need

    Materials

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ CAO/ initiative leader
    • Legal counsel

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    1.1.4 Conduct future-state analysis*

    Identify your target state of maturity.

      1. Provide the group with the accessibility maturity levels to review as well as the slides on the framework and drivers (slides 27-29).
      2. Ask the group to brainstorm pain points created by inaccessibility (e.g. challenges related to stakeholders, process issues).
      3. Next, discuss opportunities to be gained from improving these practices.
      4. Then, have everyone look at the accessibility maturity levels and, based on the descriptions, determine as a group the current maturity level of accessibility in your organization .
      5. Next, review the benefits listed on the accessibility maturity levels slide to those that you named in step 3 and determine which maturity level best describes your target state. Discuss as a group and agree on one desired maturity level to reach.
      6. Document your current and target states on slide 14 of the IT Manager Meeting Template.

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activities 2.1.2 and 2.1.3.

    Input

    • Accessibility maturity levels chart, framework, and drivers slides
    • Maturity level assessment results (optional)

    Output

    • Target maturity level documented

    Materials

    • Paper and pens
    • Handouts of maturity levels

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders

    What does a good goal look like?

    SMART is a common framework for setting effective goals. Make sure your goals satisfy these criteria to ensure you can achieve real results.

    Use the SMART framework to build effective goals.

    S

    Specific: Is the goal clear, concrete, and well defined?

    M

    Measurable: How will you know when the goal is met?

    A

    Achievable: Is the goal possible to achieve in a reasonable time?

    R

    Relevant: Does this goal align with your responsibilities and with departmental and organizational goals?

    T

    Time-based: Have you specified a time frame in which you aim to achieve the goal?

    1.1.5 Create a list of goals and objectives*

    Use the outcomes from activity 1.2.1.

    1. Using the information from activity 1.2.1, develop goals.
    2. Remember to use the SMART goal framework to build out each goal (see the previous slide for more information on SMART goals).
    3. Ensure each goal supports departmental and organizational goals to ensure it is meaningful.
    4. Document your goals and objectives on slides 6 and 9 in your IT Manager Meeting Template.

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activity 2.2.1.

    Input

    • Outcomes of activity 1.2.1
    • Organizational and departmental goals

    Output

    • Accessibility goals and objectives identified

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders

    Establish baseline metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Progressing through the accessibility maturity model.
    2. Addressing accessibility earlier in processes with input from people with disabilities.
    3. Motivating behavior changes and culture that supports accessibility and disability inclusion.
    4. Ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.
    5. Focusing on experience and building a disability inclusive culture.
    Metric Definition Calculation
    Overall end-customer satisfaction The percentage of end customers who are satisfied with the IT department. Number of end customers who are satisfied / Total number of end customers
    Requests for accommodation or assistive technology fulfilled The percentage of accommodation/assistive technology requests fulfilled by the IT department. Number of requests fulfilled / Total number of requests
    Employee engagement The percentage of employees who are engaged within an organization. Number of employees who are engaged / Total number of employees
    Overall compliance status The percentage of accessibility controls in place in the IT department. The number of compliance controls in place / Total number of applicable accessibility controls

    1.1.6 Finalize key metrics*

    Finalize key metrics the organization will use to measure accessibility success.

    1. Brainstorm how you will measure the success of each goal you identified in the previous activity, based on the benefits, challenges, and risks you previously identified.
    2. Write each of the metric ideas down and finalize three to five key metrics which you will track. The metrics you choose should relate to the key challenges or risks you have identified and match your desired maturity level and driver.
    3. Document your key metrics on slide 15 of your IT Manager Meeting Templateand slide 23 of the Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Accessibility challenges and benefits
    • Goals from activity 1.2.2

    Output

    • Three to five key metrics to track

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • IT leadership team
    • Project lead/sponsor

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activity 2.2.2.

    Use Info-Tech's template to communicate with IT managers

    Cascade messages down to IT managers next. This ensures they will have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others.

    Communicate with and build the accessibility plan with IT managers by customizing Info-Tech's IT Manager Meeting Template, which is designed to effectively convey your key messages. Tailor the template to suit your needs.

    It includes:

    • Project scope and objectives
    • Current state analysis
    • Compliance planning
    • Commitment statement drafting

    IT Manager Meeting Template

    Download the IT Manager Meeting Template

    Info-Tech Insight

    Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier.

    1.1.7 Prepare a meeting for IT managers

    Now that you understand your current and desired accessibility maturity, the next step is to communicate with IT managers and begin planning your initiatives.

    Know your audience:

    1. Consider who will be included in your presentation audience.
    2. You want your presentation to be succinct and hard-hitting. Managers are under huge demands and time is tight, they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery.
    3. Contain the presentation and planning activities to no more than an afternoon. You want to ensure adequate time for questions and answers, as well as the planning activities necessary to inform the roll out to the larger IT department later.
    4. Schedule a meeting with the IT managers.

    Download the IT Manager Meeting Template

    Input

    • Activity results

    Output

    • A completed presentation to communicate your accessibility initiatives to IT managers

    Materials

    • IT Manager Meeting Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Step 1.2

    Build the IT accessibility action plan.

    Activities

    1.2.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation

    1.2.2 Decide on your priorities

    1.2.3 Add priorities to the roadmap

    1.2.4 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    Planning IT's accessibility requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Priority controls and mitigation list with identified control owners.
    • IT accessibility commitment statement.
    • Draft visualization of roadmap/sunrise diagram.

    Involve managers in assessing current compliance

    To know what work needs to happen you need to know what's already happening.

    Use the spreadsheet from activity 1.1.3 where you identified which controls apply to your organization.

    Have managers work in groups to identify which controls (of the applicable ones) are currently being met and which ones have an existing mitigation plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Based on EN 301 549 V3.2.1 (2021-03) as a basis for digital accessibility conformance. This tool is designed to assist you in building a priorities list of requirements that are applicable to your organization. EN 301 549 is currently the most robust accessibility regulation and encompasses other regulations within it. Although EN 301 549 is the European Standard, other countries are leaning on it as the standard they aspire to as well.

    This is an image of the Compliance Tracing Tool, with a green box drawn around the columns for Current Compliance, and Mitigation.

    1.2.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation

    1-3 hours

    1. Share the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool with the IT leaders and managers during the meeting with IT management that you scheduled in activity 1.1.7.
    2. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      1. Divide up the controls between the small groups to work on assessing current compliance and mitigation plans.
      2. For each control that is identified as applying to your organization, identify if there currently is compliance by selecting "yes" from the drop-down. For controls where the organization is not compliant, select "no" and identify if there is a mitigation plan in place by selecting "yes" or "no" in column L.
      3. Use the comments column to add any pertinent information regarding the control.

    Input

    • List of IT compliance requirements applicable to the org. from activities 1.1.2 and 1.1.3

    Output

    • List of IT compliance requirements that have current compliance or mitigation plans

    Materials

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Involve managers in building accountability into the accessibility plan

    Building accountability into your compliance tracking will help ensure accessibility is prioritized.

    Use the spreadsheet from activity 1.3.1.

    Have managers work in the same groups to prioritize controls by assigning a quarterly timeline for compliance.

    An image of the Compliance Tracking tool, with the timeline column highlighted in green.

    1.2.2 Decide on your priorities

    1-3 hours

    1. In the same groups used in activity 1.2.1, prioritize the list of controls that have no compliance and no mitigation plan.
    2. As you work through the spreadsheet again, assign a timeline using the drop-down menu in column M for each control that applies to the organization and has no current compliance. Consider the following in your prioritization:
      1. Does the control impact customers or is it public-facing?
      2. What are the business needs related to accessibility?
      3. Does the team currently have the skills and knowledge needed to address the control?
      4. What future state accessibility maturity are you targeting?
    3. Be prepared to review with the larger group.

    Input

    • List from activity 1.2.1
    • Business needs from activity 1.1.1

    Output

    • List of IT compliance requirements with accountability timelines

    Materials

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Review your timeline

    Don't overload your team. Make sure the timelines assigned in the breakout groups make sense and are realistic.

    A screenshot of the Accessibility Compliance Dashboard.

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Empty roadmap template

    An image of an empty Roadmap Template.

    1.2.3 Add priorities to the roadmap

    1 hour

    1. Using the information entered in the compliance tracking spreadsheet during activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.2, build a visual representation to capture your strategic initiatives over time, using themes and timelines. Consider group initiatives in four categories, technology, people, process, and other.
    2. Copy and paste the controls onto the roadmap from the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Toolto the desired time quadrant on the roadmap.
    3. Set your desired timelines by changing the Q1-Q4 blocks (set the timelines that make sense for your situation).

    Input

    • Output of activity 1.2.2
    • Roadmap template
    • Other departmental project plans and timelines

    Output

    • Visual roadmap of accessibility compliance controls

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Communicate commitment

    Support people leaders in leading by example with an accessibility commitment statement.

    A commitment statement communicates why accessibility and disability inclusion are important and guides behaviors toward the ideal state. The statement will guide and align work, build accountability, and acknowledge the dedication of the leadership team to accessibility and disability inclusion. The statement will:

    • Publicly commit the team to fostering disability inclusivity.
    • Highlight related values and goals of the team or organization.
    • Set expectations.
    • Help build trust and increase feelings of belonging.
    • Connect the necessary changes (people, process, and technology related) to organization strategy.

    Take action! Writing the statement is only the first step. It takes more than words to build accessibility and make your work environment more disability inclusive.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier.

    Sample accessibility commitment statements

    theScore

    "theScore strives to provide products and services in a way that respects the dignity and independence of persons with disabilities. We are committed to giving persons with disabilities the same opportunity to access our products and services and allowing them to benefit from the same services, in the same place and in a similar way as other clients. We are also committed to meeting the needs of persons with disabilities in a timely manner, and we will meet applicable legislative requirements for preventing and removing barriers."(1)

    Apple Canada

    "Apple Canada is committed to ensuring equal access and participation for people with disabilities. Apple Canada is committed to treating people with disabilities in a way that allows them to maintain their dignity and independence. Apple Canada believes in integration and is committed to meeting the needs of people with disabilities in a timely manner. Apple Canada will do so by removing and preventing barriers to accessibility and meeting accessibility requirements under the AODA and provincial and federal laws across Canada." (2)

    Google Canada

    "We are committed to meeting the accessibility needs of people with disabilities in a timely manner, and will do so by identifying, preventing and removing barriers to accessibility, and by meeting the accessibility requirements under the AODA." (3)

    Source 1: theScore
    Source 2: Apple Canada
    Source 3: Google Canada.

    1.2.4 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    45 minutes

    1. As a group, brainstorm the key reasons and necessity for disability inclusion and accessibility for your organization, and the drivers and behaviors required. Record the ideas brainstormed by the group.
    2. Break into smaller groups or pairs (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      • Each group uses the brainstormed ideas to draft an accessibility commitment statement.
    3. Each smaller group shares their statement with the larger group and receives feedback. Smaller groups redraft their statements based on the feedback.
    4. Post each redrafted statement and provide each person two dot stickers to place on the two statements that resonate the most with them.
    5. Using the two statements with the highest number of dot votes, write the final accessibility commitment statement.
    6. Add the commitment statement to slide 18 of the Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Business objectives
    • Risks related to accessibility
    • Target future accessibility maturity

    Output

    • IT accessibility commitment statement

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Dot stickers or other voting mechanism

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Phase 2

    Change Enablement for Accessibility.

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Determine accessibility requirements of IT

    1.2 Build IT accessibility plan

    2.1 Build awareness

    2.2 Support new behaviors

    2.3 Continuous reinforcement

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Clarifying key messages
    • IT department accessibility presentation
    • Establishing a frequency and timeframe for communications
    • Obtaining feedback
    • Sustainment plan

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers
    • Other key business stakeholders
    • Marketing and communications team

    Be experience driven

    Building awareness and focusing on experience helps move along the accessibility maturity framework. Shifting from mandate to movement.

    In this phase, start to move beyond compliance. Build the IT team's understanding of accessibility, disability inclusion, and their role.
    Communicate the following messages to your team:

    • The motivation behind the change.
    • The reasons for the change.
    • And encourage feedback.

    Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    an image of the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    Compliance is the minimum; the people and behavior changes are the harder part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.

    What is an organizational change?

    Before communicating, understand the degree of change.

    Incremental Change:

    • Changes made to improve current processes or systems (e.g. optimizing current technology).

    Transitional Change:

    • Changes that involve dismantling old systems and/or processes in favor of new ones (e.g. new product or services added).

    Transformational Change:

    • Significant change in organizational strategy or culture resulting in substantial shift in direction.

    Examples:

    • New or changed policy
    • Switching from on-premises to cloud-first infrastructure
    • Implementing ransomware risk controls
    • Implementing a Learning and Development Plan

    Examples:

    • Moving to an insourced or outsourced service desk
    • Developing a BI and analytics function
    • Integrating risk into organization risk
    • Developing a strategy (technology, architecture, security, data, service, infrastructure, application)

    Examples:

    • Organizational redesign
    • Acquisition or merger of another organization
    • Implementing a digital strategy
    • A new CEO or board taking over the organization's direction

    Consider the various impacts of the change

    Invest time at the start to develop a detailed understanding of the impact of the change. This will help to create a plan that will simplify the change and save time. Evaluate the impact from a people, process, and technology perspective.

    Leverage a design thinking principle: Empathize with the stakeholder – what will change?

    People

    Process Technology
    • Team structure
    • Reporting structure
    • Career paths
    • Job skills
    • Responsibilities
    • Company vision/mission
    • Number of FTE
    • Culture
    • Training required
    • Budget
    • Work location
    • Daily workflow
    • Working conditions
    • Work hours
    • Reward structure
    • Required number of completed tasks
    • Training required
    • Required tools
    • Required policies
    • Required systems
    • Training required

    Change depends on how well people understand it

    Help people internalize what they can do to make the organization more inclusive.

    Anticipate responses to change:

    1. Emotional reaction – different people require different styles of management to guide them through the change. Individual's may have different emotions at different times during the change process. The more easily you can identify persona characteristics, the better you can manage them.
    2. Level of impact – the higher level of change on an individual's day-to-day, the more difficult it will be to adjust to the change. The more impactful the change, the more time focused on people management.

    an image showing staff personas at different stages through the change process.

    Quickly assess the size of change by answering these questions:

    1. Will the change affect your staff's daily work?
    2. Is the change high urgency?
    3. Is there a change in reporting relationships?
    4. Is there a change in skills required for staff to be successful?
    5. Will the change modify entrenched cultural practices?
    6. Is there a change in the mission or vision of the role?

    If you answered "Yes" to two or more questions, the change is bigger than you think. Your staff will feel the impact.

    Ensure effective communication by focusing on four key elements

    1. Audience
    • Stakeholders (either groups or individuals) who will receive the communication.
  • Message
    • Information communicated to impacted stakeholders. Must be rooted in a purpose or intent.
  • Messenger
    • Person who delivers the communication to the audience. The communicator and owner are two different things.
  • Channel
    • Method or channel used to communicate to the audience.
  • Step 2.1

    Build awareness and define key messages for IT.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT leadership team
    • Marketing/communications (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Key accessibility messages

    Determine the desired outcome of communicating within IT

    This phase is focused on communicating within IT. All communication has an overall goal. This outcome or purpose of communicating is often dependent on the type of influence the stakeholder wields within the organization as well as the type of impact the change will have on them. Consider each of the communication outcomes listed below.

    Communicating within IT

    • Obtain buy-in
    • Inform about the IT change
    • Create a training plan
    • Inform about department changes
    • Inform about organization changes
    • Inform about a crisis
    • Obtain adoption related to the change
    • Distribute key messages to change agents

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Establish and define key messages based on organizational objectives

    What are key messages?

    1. Key messages guide all internal communications to ensure they are consistent, unified, and straightforward.
    2. Distill key messages down from organizational objectives and use them to reinforce the organization's strategic direction. Key messages should inspire employees to act in a way that will help the organization reach its objectives.

    How to establish key messages

    Ground key messages in organizational strategy and culture. These should be the first places you look to determine the organization's key messages:

    • Refer to organizational strategy documents. What needs to be reinforced in internal communications to ensure the organization can achieve its strategy? This is a key message.
    • Look at the organization's values. How do values guide how work should be done? Do employees need to behave in a certain way or keep a certain value top of mind? This is a key message.

    The intent of key messages is to convey important information in a way that is relatable and memorable, to promote reinforcement, and ultimately, to drive action.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Empathizing with the audience is key to anticipating and addressing objections as well as identifying benefits. Customize messaging based on audience attributes such as work model (e.g. hybrid), anticipated objections, what's in it for me?, and specific expectations.

    2.1.1 Clarify the key messages

    30 minutes

    1. Brainstorm the key stakeholders and target audiences you will likely need to communicate with to sustain the accessibility initiative (depending on the size of your group, you might break into pairs or smaller groups and each work on one target audience).
    2. Based on the outcome expected from engaging the target audience in communications, define one to five key messages that should be expressed about accessibility.
    3. The key messages should highlight benefits anticipated, concerns anticipated, details about the change, plan of action, or next steps. The goal here is to ensure the target audience is included in the communication process.
    4. The key messages should be focused on how the target audience receives a consistent message, especially if different communication messengers are involved.
    5. Document the key messages on Tab 3 of the Communications Planner Tool.

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Input

    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcomes

    Output

    • Key messages to support a consistent approach

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT leadership team
    • Marketing/communications partner (optional)

    Step 2.2

    Support new behaviors.

    Activities

    2.2.1 Prepare for IT department meeting

    2.2.2 Practice delivery of your presentation

    2.2.3 Hold department meeting

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Entire IT department

    Outcomes of this step

    • IT departmental meeting slides
    • Accessibility quick cards
    • Task list of how each IT team will support the accessibility roadmap

    Key questions to answer with change communication

    To effectively communicate change, answer questions before they're asked, whenever possible. To do this, outline at each stage of the change process what's happening next for the audience, as well as answer other anticipated questions. Pair key questions with core messages.

    Examples of key questions by change stage include:

    The outline for each stage of the change process, showing what happens next.

    2.2.1 Prepare for the IT departmental meeting

    2 hours

    1. Download the IT Department Presentation Template and follow the instructions on each slide to update for your organization.
    2. Insert information on the current accessibility maturity level. If you haven't determined your current and future state maturity level, use the Info-Tech resource from The Accessibility Business Case for IT.
    3. Review the presentation with the information added.
    4. Consider what could be done to make the presentation better:
      1. Concise: Identify opportunities to remove unnecessary information.
      2. Clear: It uses only terms or language the target audience would understand.
      3. Relevant: It matters to the target audience and the problems they face.
      4. Consistent: The message could be repeated across audiences.
    5. Schedule a departmental meeting or add the presentation to an existing departmental meeting.

    Download the Departmental Presentation Template

    Input

    • Organizational accessibility risks
    • Accessibility maturity current state
    • Outputs from manager presentation
    • Key messages

    Output

    • Prepared presentation to introduce accessibility to the entire IT department

    Materials

    • Departmental Presentation Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ CAO/ initiative leader

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, frame – all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your presentation confidently. While this should be obvious, it is essential. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading from your slides. If there is text on a slide, paraphrase it while maintaining eye contact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren't engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    2.2.2 Practice delivery of your presentation and schedule department meeting

    45 minutes

    1. Take ten minutes to think about how to deliver your presentation. Where will you emphasize words, speak louder, softer, lean in, stand tall, make eye contact, etc.?
    2. Set a timer on your phone or watch. Record yourself if possible.
    3. Take a few seconds to center yourself and prepare to deliver your pitch.
    4. Practice delivery of your presentation out loud. Don't forget to use your body language and your voice to deliver.
    5. Listen to the recording. Are the ideas communicated correctly? Are you convinced?
    6. Review and repeat.

    Input

    • Presentation deck from activity 2.2.1
    • Best practices for delivering

    Output

    • An ability to deliver the presentation in a clear and concise manner that creates understanding

    Materials

    • Recorder
    • Timer

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative leader

    2.2.3 Lead the IT department meeting

    1–2 hours

    1. Gather the IT department in a manner appropriate for your organization and facilitate the meeting prepared in activity 2.2.1.
    2. Within the meeting, capture all key action items and outcomes from the Quick Cards Development and Roadmap Planning.
    3. Following the meeting, review the quick cards that everyone built and share these with all IT participants.
    4. Update your sunrise diagram to include any initiatives that came up in the team meetings to support moving to experiential.

    Input

    • Presentation deck from activity 2.2.1

    Output

    • A shared understanding of accessibility at your organization and everyone's role
    • Area task list (including behavior change needs)
    • Accessibility quick cards

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative leader

    Download the Accessibility Quick Cards template

    Step 2.3

    Continuous reinforcement – keep the conversation going – sustain the change.

    Activities

    2.3.1 Establish a frequency and timeframe for communications

    2.3.2 Obtain feedback and improve

    2.3.3 Sustainment plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT leadership team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assigned roles for ongoing program monitoring
    • Communication plan
    • Accessibility maturity monitoring plan
    • Program evaluation

    Communication is ongoing before, during, and after implementing a change initiative

    Just because you've rolled out the plan doesn't mean you can stop talking about it.

    An image of the five steps, with steps four and five highlighted in a green box. The five headings are: Identify and Prioritize; Prepare for initiative; Create a communication plan; Implement change; Sustain the desired outcome

    Don't forget: Cascade messages down through the organization to ensure those who need to deliver messages have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others. Include a mix of personal and organizational messages, but where possible, separate personal and organizational content into different communications.

    2.3.1 Establish a frequency and timeframe

    30 minutes

    1. For each row in Tab 3, determine how frequently that communication needs to take place and when that communication needs to be completed by.
      • Frequency: How often the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. one-time, monthly, as needed).
      • Timeframe: When the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. a planned period or a specific date).
    2. When selecting the timeframe, consider what dependencies need to take place prior to that communication. For example, IT employees should not be communicated with on anything that has not yet been approved by the CEO. Also consider when other communications might be taking place so that the message is not lost in the noise.
    3. For frequency, the only time that a communication needs to take place once is when presenting up to senior leaders of the organizations. And even then, it will sometimes require more than one conversation. Be mindful of this.

    Input

    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcome
    • Communication channel

    Output

    • Frequency and timeframe of the communication

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Changes based on those who would be relevant to your initiative

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Ensure feedback mechanisms are in place

    Soliciting and acting on feedback involves employees in the decision-making process and demonstrates to them that their contributions matter.

    Make sure you have established feedback mechanisms to collect feedback on both the messages delivered and how they were delivered. Some ways to collect feedback include:

    • Evaluating intranet comments and interactions (e.g. likes, etc.) if this function is enabled.
    • Measuring comprehension and satisfaction through surveys and polls.
    • Looking for themes in the feedback and questions employees bring forward to managers during in-person briefings.

    Feedback Mechanisms:

    • CIO business vision survey
    • Engagement surveys
    • Focus groups
    • Suggestion boxes
    • Team meetings
    • Random sampling
    • Informal feedback
    • Direct feedback
    • Audience body language
    • Repeating the message back

    Gather feedback on plan and iterate

    Who

    The project team gathers feedback from:

    • As many members of impacted groups as possible, as it helps build broad buy-in for the plan.
    • All levels (e.g. frontline employees, managers, directors).

    What

    Gather feedback on:

    • How to implement tactics successfully.
    • The timing of implementation (helps inform the next slide).
    • The resources required (helps inform the next slide).
    • Potential unforeseen impacts, questions, and concerns.

    How

    • Use focus groups to gather feedback.
    • Adjust sustainment plan based on feedback.

    Use Info-Tech's Standard Focus Group Guide

    2.3.2 Obtain feedback and improve

    20 minutes

    1. Evenly distribute the number of rows in the communication plan to all those involved. Consider a metric that would help inform whether the communication outcome was achieved.
    2. For each row, identify a feedback mechanism (slide 75) that could be used to enable the collection and confirm a successful outcome.
    3. Come back as a group and validate the feedback mechanisms selected.
    4. The important aspect here is not just to measure if the desired outcome was achieved. If the desired outcome is not achieved, consider what you might do to change or enable better communication to that target audience.
    5. Every communication can be better. Feedback, whether it be tactical or strategic, will help inform methods to improve future communication activities.

    Input

    • Communication outcome
    • Target audience
    • Communication channel

    Output

    • A mechanism to measure communication feedback and adjust future communications when necessary

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Changes based on those who would be relevant to your initiative

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Identify owners and assign other roles

    • Eventually there needs to be a hand off to leaders to sustain accessibility. Senior leaders continue to play the role of guide and facilitator, helping the team identify owners and transfer ownership.
    • Guide the team to work with owners to assign roles to other stakeholders. Spread responsibility across multiple people to avoid overload.

    R

    Responsible
    Carries out the work to implement the component (e.g. payroll manager).

    A

    Accountable
    Owner of the component and held accountable for its implementation (e.g. VP of finance).

    C

    Consulted
    Asked for feedback and input to modify sustainment tactics (e.g. sustainment planning team).

    I

    Informed
    Told about progress of implementation (senior leadership team, impacted staff).

    Identify required resources and secure budget

    Sustainment is critical to success of accessibility

    • This step (i.e. sustainment) often gets overlooked because leaders are focused on the implementation. It takes resources and budget to sustain a plan and change as well.
    • Resorting to the old way is more likely to occur when you don't plan to support sustainment with ongoing resources and budget that's required.

    Resources

    Identify resources required for sustainment components using metrics and input from implementation owners, subject matter experts, and frontline managers.

    For example:

    • Inventory
    • Collateral for communications
    • Technology
    • Physical space
    • People resources (FTE)

    Budget

    Estimate the budget required for resources based on past projects that used similar resources, and then estimate the time it will take until the change evolves into "business as usual" (e.g. 6 months, 12 months).

    Monitor accessibility maturity

    If you haven't already performed the Accessibility Maturity Assessment, complete it in the wake of the accessibility initiative to assess improvements and progress toward target future accessibility maturity.
    As your accessibility program starts to scale out over a range of projects, revisit the assessment on a quarterly or bi-annual basis to help focus your improvement efforts across the six accessibility categories.

    • Vendor relations
    • Products and services
    • Policy and process
    • Support and accommodation
    • Communication
    • People and culture

    Info-Tech Insight

    To drive continual improvement of your organizational accessibility and disability inclusion, continue to share progress, wins, challenges, feedback, and other accessibility related concerns with stakeholders. At the end of the day, IT's efforts to become a change leader and support organizational accessibility will come down to stakeholder perceptions based upon employee morale and benefits realized.

    Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    An image of the maturity level bar graph.

    Evaluate and iterate the program on an ongoing basis

    1. Continually monitor the results of project metrics.
      • Track progress toward goals and metrics set at the beginning of the initiative to gauge the success of the program.
      • Analyze metrics at the work-unit level to highlight successes and challenges in accessibility and disability inclusion and the parameters around it for each impacted unit.
    2. Regularly gather feedback on program effectiveness using questions such as:
      • Has the desired culture been effectively communicated and leveraged, or has the culture changed?
      • Collect feedback through regular channels (e.g. manager check-ins) and set up a cadence to survey employees on the program (e.g. three months after rollout and then annually).
    3. Determine if changes to the program structure are needed.
      • Revisit the accessibility maturity framework and the compliance requirements of IT. Understand what is being experienced; it may be necessary to select a different target or adjust the parameters to mitigate the common challenges.
      • Evaluate the effectiveness of current internal processes to determine if the program would benefit from a dedicated resource.

    2.3.3 Sustain the change

    1. Identify who will own what pieces of the program going forward and assign roles to transition the initiative from implementation to the new normal.
    2. Continue to communicate with stakeholders about accessibility and disability inclusion initiatives, controls, and requirements.
    3. Identify required resources and secure any budget that will be needed to support the accessibility program. Think about employee training, consulting needs, assistive technology requirements, human resources (FTE), etc.
    4. Continue to monitor your accessibility maturity. Use the Accessibility Maturity Assessment tool to periodically evaluate progress on goals and targets. Also, use this tool to communicate progress with senior leaders and executives.
    5. Strive for continuous improvement by evaluating and iterating the program on an ongoing basis.

    Input

    • Activity outputs from this blueprint

    Output

    • Ongoing continuous improvement and progress related to accessibility
    • Demonstrable results

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative Lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Related Info-Tech Research

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear "accessibility" and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization's key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.

    Lead Staff through Change

    • Anticipate and respond to staff questions about the change in order to keep messages consistent, organized, and clear.
    • Manage staff based on their specific concerns and change personas to get the best out of your team during the transition through change.
    • Maintain a feedback loop between staff, executives, and other departments in order to maintain the change momentum and reduce angst throughout the process.

    IT Diversity and Inclusion Tactics

    • Although inclusion is key to the success of a diversity and inclusion (D&I) strategy, the complexity of the concept makes it a daunting pursuit.
    • This is further complicated by the fact that creating inclusion is not a one-and-done exercise. Rather, it requires the ongoing commitment of employees and managers to reassess their own behaviors and to drive a cultural shift.

    Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice

    • Create a practice that is focused on human outcomes; it starts and ends with the people you are designing for. This includes:
      • Establishing a practice with a common vision.
      • Enhancing the practice through four design factors.
      • Communicating a roadmap to improve your business through design.

    Works cited

    "2021 State of Digital Accessibility." Level Access, n.d. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022
    "Apple Canada Accessibility Policy & Plan." Apple Canada, 11 March 2019. .
    Casey, Caroline. "Do Your D&I Efforts Include People With Disabilities?" Harvard Business Review, 19 March 2020. Accessed 28 July 2022.
    Digitalisation World. "Organisations failing to meet digital accessibility standards." Angel Business Communications, 19 May 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.
    "disability." Merriam-Webster.com Dictionary, Merriam-Webster, . Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.
    "Disability." World Health Organization, 2022. Accessed 10 Aug 2022.
    "Google Canada Corporation Accessibility Policy and Multi Year Plan." Google Canada, June 2020. .
    Hypercontext. "The State of High Performing Teams in Tech 2022." Hypercontext. 2022..
    Lay-Flurrie, Jenny. "Accessibility Evolution Model: Creating Clarity in your Accessibility Journey." Microsoft, 2023. <https://blogs.microsoft.com/accessibility/accessibility-evolution-model/>.
    Maguire, Jennifer. "Applause 2022 Global Accessibility Survey Reveals Organizations Prioritize Digital Accessibility but Fall Short of Conformance with WCAG 2.1 Standards." Business Wire, 19 May 2022. . Accessed 2 January 2023.
    "The Business Case for Digital Accessibility." W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 9 Nov. 2018. Accessed 4 Aug. 2022.
    "THESCORE's Commitment to Accessibility." theScore, May 2021. .
    "The WebAIM Million." Web AIM, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.
    Washington, Ella F. "The Five Stages of DEI Maturity." Harvard Business Review, November - December 2022. Accessed 7 Nov. 2022.
    Web AIM. "The WebAIM Million." Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.

    Master the MSA for Your Managed Services Providers

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}235|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $9,869 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Master Services Agreements and Service Level Agreements are tedious, and reviewers may lack the skills and experience to effectively complete the process.
    • Managed services providers have a repository of contract terms and conditions that are road-tested and prepackaged, and which are often biased in their favor.
    • With many different pricing options, it is difficult to choose the services you need.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Manage your managed services providers. Added value is realized when managed service providers are in tune with your IT strategies, goals, and mission.
    • Negotiate an agreement that is beneficial to both parties. The most successful partnerships are a win-win agreement.
    • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. They tend to look at general terms and conditions and may overlook IT-specific components.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding managed services providers, including their roles and pricing models, will give you valuable insight into negotiating the best deal for your organization.
    • Info-Tech’s contract review methodology will help you navigate the complex process of managed services provider contract evaluation and review all the key details to maximize the benefits to your organization.
    • This blueprint provides guidance on catching vendor-biased terms and conditions, and suggests tips for getting managed services providers to take on their fair share of responsibilities.

    Master the MSA for Your Managed Services Providers Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should master the MSA for your MSPs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review terms and conditions for your MSP contract

    Use Info-Tech’s MSA Contract Review Tool to locate and track improvement areas in your MSAs.

    • Master the MSA for Your Managed Services Providers – Phase 1: Review Terms and Conditions of Your MSP Contract
    • MSA Contract Review Tool
    [infographic]

    Quality Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}45|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}45|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Planning and Architecture
    • Parent Category Link: /service-planning-and-architecture
    Drive efficiency and agility with right-sized quality management

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}156|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $86,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 53 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Products are the lifeblood of an organization. They provide the capabilities the business needs to deliver value to both internal and external customers and stakeholders.
    • Product organizations are expected to continually deliver evolving value to the overall organization as they grow.
    • You need to clearly convey the direction and strategy of a broad product portfolio to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that improve end-user value and enterprise alignment.
    • Your organizational goals and strategy are achieved through capabilities that deliver value. Your product hierarchy is the mechanism to translate enterprise goals, priorities, and constraints down to the product level where changes can be made.
    • Recognize that each product owner represents one of three primary perspectives: business, technical, and operational. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.
    • The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.
    • Your product family roadmap and product roadmap tell different stories. The product family roadmap represents the overall connection of products to the enterprise strategy, while the product roadmap focuses on the fulfillment of the product’s vision.
    • Although products can be delivered with any software development lifecycle, methodology, delivery team structure, or organizational design, high-performing product teams optimize their structure to fit the needs of product and product family delivery.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the importance of product families for scaling product delivery.
    • Define products in your context and organize products into operational families.
    • Use product family roadmaps to align product roadmaps to enterprise goals and priorities.
    • Evaluate the different approaches to improve your product family delivery pipelines and milestones.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should define enterprise product families to scale your product delivery capability, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Become a product-centric organization

    Define products in your organization’s context and explore product families as a way to organize products at scale.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 1: Become a Product-Centric Organization
    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook
    • Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook

    2. Organize products into product families

    Identify an approach to group the inventory of products into one or more product families.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 2: Organize Products Into Product Families

    3. Ensure alignment between products and families

    Confirm alignment between your products and product families via the product family roadmap and a shared definition of delivered value.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 3: Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    4. Bridge the gap between product families and delivery

    Agree on a delivery approach that best aligns with your product families.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 4: Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery
    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment

    5. Build your transformation roadmap and communication plan

    Define your communication plan and transformation roadmap for transitioning to delivering products at the scale of your organization.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 5: Transformation Roadmap and Communication

    Infographic

    Workshop: Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Become a Product-Centric Organization

    The Purpose

    Define products in your organization’s context and explore product families as a way to organize products at scale.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the case for product practices

    A concise definition of products and product families

    Activities

    1.1 Understand your organizational factors driving product-centric delivery.

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory.

    1.3 Determine your approach to scale product families.

    Outputs

    Organizational drivers and goals for a product-centric delivery

    Definition of product

    Product scaling principles

    Scaling approach and direction

    Pilot list of products to scale

    2 Organize Products Into Product Families

    The Purpose

    Identify a suitable approach to group the inventory of products into one or more product families.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A scaling approach for products that fits your organization

    Activities

    2.1 Define your product families.

    Outputs

    Product family mapping

    Enabling applications

    Dependent applications

    Product family canvas

    3 Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    The Purpose

    Confirm alignment between your products and product families via the product family roadmap and a shared definition of delivered value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Recognition of the product family roadmap and a shared definition of value as key concepts to maintain alignment between your products and product families

    Activities

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps.

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication.

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps.

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment.

    Outputs

    Current approach for communication of product family strategy

    List of product family stakeholders and a prioritization plan for communication

    Defined key pieces of a product family roadmap

    An approach to confirming alignment between products and product families through a shared definition of business value

    4 Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    The Purpose

    Agree on the delivery approach that best aligns with your product families.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the team configuration and operating model required to deliver value through your product families

    Activities

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness.

    4.2 Understand your delivery options.

    4.3 Determine your operating model.

    4.4 Identify how to fund product delivery.

    4.5 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy.

    4.6 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy.

    4.7 Determine your next steps.

    Outputs

    Assessment results on your organization’s delivery maturity

    A preferred approach to structuring product delivery

    Your preferred operating model for delivering product families

    Understanding of your preferred approach for product family funding

    Product family transformation roadmap

    Your plan for communicating your roadmap

    List of actionable next steps to start on your journey

    5 Advisory: Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    The Purpose

    Implement your communication plan and transformation roadmap for transitioning to delivering products at the scale of your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    New product family organization and supporting product delivery approach

    Activities

    5.1 Execute communication plan and product family changes.

    5.2 Review the pilot family implementation and update the transformation roadmap.

    5.3 Begin advisory calls for related blueprints.

    Outputs

    Organizational communication of product families and product family roadmaps

    Product family implementation and updated transformation roadmap

    Support for product owners, backlog and roadmap management, and other topics

    Further reading

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Analyst Perspective

    Product families align enterprise goals to product changes and value realization.

    A picture of Info-Tech analyst Banu Raghuraman. A picture of Info-Tech analyst Ari Glaizel. A picture of Info-Tech analyst Hans Eckman

    Our world is changing faster than ever, and the need for business agility continues to grow. Organizations are shifting from long-term project delivery to smaller, iterative product delivery models to be able to embrace change and respond to challenges and opportunities faster.

    Unfortunately, many organizations focus on product delivery at the tactical level. Product teams may be individually successful, but how well are their changes aligned to division and enterprise goals and priorities?

    Grouping products into operationally aligned families is key to delivering the right value to the right stakeholders at the right time.

    Product families translate enterprise goals, constraints, and priorities down to the individual product level so product owners can make better decisions and more effectively manage their roadmaps and backlogs. By scaling products into families and using product family roadmaps to align product roadmaps, product owners can deliver the capabilities that allow organizations to reach their goals.

    In this blueprint, we’ll provide the tools and guidance to help you define what “product” means to your organization, use scaling patterns to build product families, align product and product family roadmaps, and identify impacts to your delivery and organizational design models.

    Banu Raghuraman, Ari Glaizel, and Hans Eckman

    Applications Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Products are the lifeblood of an organization. They deliver the capabilities needed to deliver value to customers, internal users, and stakeholders.
    • The shift to becoming a product organization is intended to continually increase the value you provide to the broader organization as you grow and evolve.
    • You need to clearly convey the direction and strategy of your product portfolio to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.

    Common Obstacles

    • IT organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This conflicts with product delivery, which continuously delivers value over the lifetime of a product.
    • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
    • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach will guide you through:

    • Understanding the importance of product families in scaling product delivery.
    • Defining products in your context and organizing products into operational families.
    • Using product family roadmaps to align product roadmaps to enterprise goals and priorities.
    • Evaluating the different approaches to improve your product family delivery pipelines and milestones.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Changes can only be made at the individual product or service level. To achieve enterprise goals and priorities, organizations needed to organize and scale products into operational families. This structure allows product managers to translate goals and constraints to the product level and allows product owners to deliver changes that support enabling capabilities. In this blueprint, we’ll help you define your products, scale them using the best patterns, and align your roadmaps and delivery models to improve throughput and value delivery.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Operationally align product delivery to enterprise goals

    A flowchart is shown on how to operationally align product delivery to enterprise goals.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Start by piloting product families to determine which approaches work best for your organization.
    2. Create a common definition of what a product is and identify products in your inventory.
    3. Use scaling patterns to build operationally aligned product families.
    4. Develop a roadmap strategy to align families and products to enterprise goals and priorities.
    5. Use products and families to evaluate delivery and organizational design improvements.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale via Enterprise Product Families

    An infographic on the Enterprise Product Families is shown.

    Product does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of products.

    Every organization and industry has a different definition of what a product is. Organizations structure their people, processes, and technologies according to their definition of the products they manage. Conflicting product definitions between teams increase confusion and misalignment of product roadmaps.

    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.”

    - Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance

    “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.”

    - TechTarget

    “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.”

    - Mark Curphey

    Organizations need a common understanding of what a product is and how it pertains to the business. This understanding needs to be accepted across the organization.

    “There is not a lot of guidance in the industry on how to define [products]. This is dangerous because what will happen is that product backlogs will be formed in too many areas. All that does is create dependencies and coordination across teams … and backlogs.”

    – Chad Beier, "How Do You Define a Product?” Scrum.org

    What is a product?

    “A tangible solution, tool, or service (physical or digital) that enables the long-term and evolving delivery of value to customers and stakeholders based on business and user requirements.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    A proper definition of product recognizes three key facts:

    1. Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    2. Products are not just “apps” but can be software or services that drive the delivery of value.
    3. There is more than one stakeholder group that derives value from the product or service.

    Products and services share the same foundation and best practices

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. Product is used for consistency but would apply to services as well.

    Product = Service

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:

    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Recognize the different product owner perspectives

    Business:

    • Customer facing, revenue generating

    Technical:

    • IT systems and tools

    Operations:

    • Keep the lights on processes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Recognize that product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.”

    – Robbin Schuurman, “Tips for Starting Product Owners”

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Project

    Product

    Fund projects

    Funding

    Fund products or teams

    Line of business sponsor

    Prioritization

    Product owner

    Makes specific changes to a product

    Product management

    Improve product maturity and support

    Assign people to work

    Work allocation

    Assign work to product teams

    Project manager manages

    Capacity management

    Team manages capacity

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for delivering product changes and improvements

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the difference between project lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle and product lifecycle.

    Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply. The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release. Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    An image is shown to demonstrate the relationship between the product backlog and the product roadmap.

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we demonstrate how the product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path, and as a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    An example of a product roadmap is shown to demonstrate how it is the core to value realization.

    Adapted from: Pichler, "What Is Product Management?""

    Info-Tech Insight

    The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    Use Agile DevOps principles to expedite product-centric delivery and management

    Delivering products does not necessarily require an Agile DevOps mindset. However, Agile methods facilitate the journey because product thinking is baked into them.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the product deliery maturity and the Agile DevOps used.
    Based on: Ambysoft, 2018

    Organizations start with Waterfall to improve the predictable delivery of product features.

    Iterative development shifts the focus from delivery of features to delivery of user value.

    Agile further shifts delivery to consider ROI. Often, the highest-value backlog items aren’t the ones with the highest ROI.

    Lean and DevOps improve your delivery pipeline by providing full integration between product owners, development teams, and operations.

    CI/CD reduces time in process by allowing release on demand and simplifying release and support activities.

    Although teams will adopt parts of all these stages during their journey, it isn’t until you’ve adopted a fully integrated delivery chain that you’ve become product centric.

    Scale products into related families to improve value delivery and alignment

    Defining product families builds a network of related products into coordinated value delivery streams.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the relations between product family and the delivery streams.

    “As with basic product management, scaling an organization is all about articulating the vision and communicating it effectively. Using a well-defined framework helps you align the growth of your organization with that of the company. In fact, how the product organization is structured is very helpful in driving the vision of what you as a product company are going to do.”

    – Rich Mironov, Mironov Consulting

    Product families translate enterprise goals into value-enabling capabilities

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the relationship between enterprise strategy and enabling capabilities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organizational goals and strategy are achieved through capabilities that deliver value. Your product hierarchy is the mechanism to translate enterprise goals, priorities, and constraints down to the product level where changes can be made.

    Arrange product families by operational groups, not solely by your org chart

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate how to arrange product families by operational groups.

    1. To align product changes with enterprise goals and priorities, you need to organize your products into operational groups based on the capabilities or business functions the product and family support.

    2. Product managers translate these goals, priorities, and constraints into their product families, so they are actionable at the next level, whether that level is another product family or products implementing enhancements to meet these goals.

    3. The product family manager ensures that the product changes enhance the capabilities that allow you to realize your product family, division, and enterprise goals.

    4. Enabling capabilities realize value and help reach your goals, which then drives your next set of enterprise goals and strategy.

    Approach alignment from both directions, validating by the opposite way

    Defining your product families is not a one-way street. Often, we start from either the top or the bottom depending on our scaling principles. We use multiple patterns to find the best arrangement and grouping of our products and families.

    It may be helpful to work partway, then approach your scaling from the opposite direction, meeting in the middle. This way you are taking advantage of the strengths in both approaches.

    Once you have your proposed structure, validate the grouping by applying the principles from the opposite direction to ensure each product and family is in the best starting group.

    As the needs of your organization change, you may need to realign your product families into your new business architecture and operational structure.

    A top-down alignment example is shown.

    When to use: You have a business architecture defined or clear market/functional grouping of value streams.

    A bottom-up alignment example is shown.

    When to use: You are starting from an Application Portfolio Management application inventory to build or validate application families.

    Leverage patterns for scaling products

    Organizing your products and families is easier when leveraging these grouping patterns. Each is explained in greater detail on the following slides

    Value Stream Alignment

    Enterprise Applications

    Shared Services

    Technical

    Organizational Alignment

    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products
    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > ModulesSupporting: Job board, healthcare administrator
    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools
    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network
    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure no longer needed because the management team owns product management role

    Leverage the product family roadmap for alignment

    It’s more than a set of colorful boxes. It’s the map to align everyone to where you are going.

    Your product family roadmap

      ✓ Lays out a strategy for your product family.

      ✓ Is a statement of intent for your family of products.

      ✓ Communicates direction for the entire product family and product teams.

      ✓ Directly connects to the organization’s goals.

    However, it is not:

      x Representative of a hard commitment.

      x A simple combination of your current product roadmaps.

    Before connecting your family roadmap to products, think about what each roadmap typically presents

    An example of a product family roadmap is shown and how it can be connected to the products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your product family roadmap and product roadmap tell different stories. The product family roadmap represents the overall connection of products to the enterprise strategy, while the product roadmap focuses on the fulfillment of the product’s vision.

    Product family roadmaps are more strategic by nature

    While individual product roadmaps can be different levels of tactical or strategic depending on a variety of market factors, your options are more limited when defining roadmaps for product families.

    Product

    TACTICAL

    A roadmap that is technical, committed, and detailed.

    Product Family

    STRATEGIC

    A roadmap that is strategic, goal based, high level, and flexible.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Roadmaps for your product family are, by design, less detailed. This does not mean they aren’t actionable! Your product family roadmap should be able to communicate clear intentions around the future delivery of value in both the near and long term.

    Consider volatility when structuring product family roadmaps

    A roadmap is shown without any changes.

    There is no such thing as a roadmap that never changes.

    Your product family roadmap represents a broad statement of intent and high-level tactics to get closer to the organization’s goals.

    A roadmap is shown with changes.

    All good product family roadmaps embrace change!

    Your strategic intentions are subject to volatility, especially those planned further in the future. The more costs you incur in planning, the more you leave yourself exposed to inefficiency and waste if those plans change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A good product family roadmap is intended to manage and communicate the inevitable changes as a result of market volatility and changes in strategy.

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    PRODUCT STRATEGY

    What are the artifacts?

    What are you saying?

    Defined at the family level?

    Defined at the product level?

    Vision

    I want to...

    Strategic focus

    Delivery focus

    Goals

    To get there we need to...

    Roadmap

    To achieve our goals, we’ll deliver...

    Backlog

    The work will be done in this order...

    Release Plan

    We will deliver in the following ways...

    Typical elements of a product family roadmap

    While there are others, these represent what will commonly appear across most family-based roadmaps.

    An example is shown to highlight the typical elements of a product family roadmap.

    GROUP/CATEGORY: Groups are collections of artifacts. In a product family context, these are usually product family goals, value streams, or products.

    ARTIFACT: An artifact is one of many kinds of tangible by-products produced during the delivery of products. For a product family, the artifacts represented are capabilities or value streams.

    MILESTONE: Points in the timeline when established sets of artifacts are complete. This is a critical tool in the alignment of products in a given family.

    TIME HORIZON: Separated periods within the projected timeline covered by the roadmap.

    Connecting your product family roadmaps to product roadmaps

    Your product and product family roadmaps should be connected at an artifact level that is common between both. Typically, this is done with capabilities, but it can be done at a more granular level if an understanding of capabilities isn’t available.

    An example is shown on how the product family roadmpas can be connected to the product roadmaps.

    Multiple roadmap views can communicate differently, yet tell the same truth

    Audience

    Business/ IT Leaders

    Users/Customers

    Delivery Teams

    Roadmap View

    Portfolio

    Product Family

    Technology

    Objectives

    To provide a snapshot of the portfolio and priority products

    To visualize and validate product strategy

    To coordinate broad technology and architecture decisions

    Artifacts

    Line items or sections of the roadmap are made up of individual products, and an artifact represents a disposition at its highest level.

    Artifacts are generally grouped by product teams and consist of strategic goals and the features that realize those goals.

    Artifacts are grouped by the teams who deliver that work and consist of technical capabilities that support the broader delivery of value for the product family.

    Your communication objectives are linked to your audience; ensure you know your audience and speak their language

    I want to...

    I need to talk to...

    Because they are focused on...

    ALIGN PRODUCT TEAMS

    Get my delivery teams on the same page.

    Architects

    Products Owners

    PRODUCTS

    A product that delivers value against a common set of goals and objectives.

    SHOWCASE CHANGES

    Inform users and customers of product strategy.

    Bus. Process Owners

    End Users

    FUNCTIONALITY

    A group of functionality that business customers see as a single unit.

    ARTICULATE RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS

    Inform the business of product development requirements.

    IT Management

    Business Stakeholders

    FUNDING

    An initiative that those with the money see as a single budget.

    Assess the impacts of product-centric delivery on your teams and org design

    Product delivery can exist within any org structure or delivery model. However, when making the shift toward product management, consider optimizing your org design and product team structure to match your capacity and throughput needs.

    A flowchart is shown to see how the impacts of product-centric delivery can impact team and org designs.

    Determine which delivery team structure best fits your product pipeline

    Four delivery team structures are shown. The four are: functional roles, shared service and resource pools, product or system, and skills and competencies.

    Weigh the pros and cons of IT operating models to find the best fit

    There are many different operating models. LoB/Product Aligned and Hybrid Functional align themselves most closely with how products and product families are typically delivered.

    1. LoB/Product Aligned – Decentralized Model: Line of Business, Geographically, Product, or Functionally Aligned
    2. A decentralized IT operating model that embeds specific functions within LoBs/product teams and provides cross-organizational support for their initiatives.

    3. Hybrid Functional: Functional/Product Aligned
    4. A best-of-both-worlds model that balances the benefits of centralized and decentralized approaches to achieve both customer responsiveness and economies of scale.

    5. Hybrid Service Model: Product-Aligned Operating Model
    6. A model that supports what is commonly referred to as a matrix organization, organizing by highly related service categories and introducing the role of the service owner.

    7. Centralized: Plan-Build-Run
    8. A highly typical IT operating model that focuses on centralized strategic control and oversight in delivering cost-optimized and effective solutions.

    9. Centralized: Demand-Develop-Service
    10. A centralized IT operating model that lends well to more mature operating environments. Aimed at leveraging economies of scale in an end-to-end services delivery model.

    Consider how investment spending will differ in a product environment

    Reward for delivering outcomes, not features

    Autonomy

    Flexibility

    Accountability

    Fund what delivers value

    Allocate iteratively

    Measure and adjust

    Fund long-lived delivery of value through products (not projects).

    Give autonomy to the team to decide exactly what to build.

    Allocate to a pool based on higher-level business case.

    Provide funds in smaller amounts to different product teams and initiatives based on need.

    Product teams define metrics that contribute to given outcomes.

    Track progress and allocate more (or less) funds as appropriate.

    Adapted from Bain, 2019

    Info-Tech Insight

    Changes to funding require changes to product and Agile practices to ensure product ownership and accountability.

    Why is having a common value measure important?

    CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic

    A stacked bar graph is shown to demonstrate CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic. A bar titled: Business Value Metrics is highlighted. 51% had some improvement necessary and 32% had significant improvement necessary.

    Over 700 Info-Tech members have implemented the Balanced Value Measurement Framework.

    “The cynic knows the price of everything and the value of nothing.”

    – Oscar Wilde

    “Price is what you pay. Value is what you get.”

    – Warren Buffett

    Understanding where you derive value is critical to building solid roadmaps.

    Measure delivery and success

    Metrics and measurements are powerful tools to drive behavior change and decision making in your organization. However, metrics are highly prone to creating unexpected outcomes, so use them with great care. Use metrics judiciously to uncover insights but avoid gaming or ambivalent behavior, productivity loss, and unintended consequences.

    Build good practices in your selection and use of metrics:

    • Choose the metrics that are as close to measuring the desired outcome as possible.
    • Select the fewest metrics possible and ensure they are of the highest value to your team, the safest from gaming behaviors and unintended consequences, and the easiest to gather and report.
    • Never use metrics for reward or punishment; use them to develop your team.
    • Automate as much metrics gathering and reporting as possible.
    • Focus on trends rather than precise metrics values.
    • Review and change your metrics periodically.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Public Sector & Financial Services

    SOURCE: Info-Tech Interviews

    A tale of two product transformations

    Two of the organizations we interviewed shared the challenges they experienced defining product families and the impact these challenges had on their digital transformations.

    A major financial services organization (2,000+ people in IT) had employed a top-down line of business–focused approach and found itself caught in a vicious circle of moving applications between families to resolve cross-LoB dependencies.

    A similarly sized public sector organization suffered from a similar challenge as grouping from the bottom up based on technology areas led to teams fragmented across multiple business units employing different applications built on similar technology foundations.

    Results

    Both organizations struggled for over a year to structure their product families. This materially delayed key aspects of their product-centric transformation, resulting in additional effort and expenditure delivering solutions piecemeal as opposed to as a part of a holistic product family. It took embracing a hybrid top-down and bottom-up approach and beginning with pilot product families to make progress on their transformation.

    A picture of Cole Cioran is shown.

    Cole Cioran

    Practice Lead,

    Applications Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    There is no such thing as a perfect product-family structure. There will always be trade-offs when you need to manage shifting demand from stakeholder groups spanning customers, business units, process owners, and technology owners.

    Focusing on a single approach to structure your product families inevitably leads to decisions that are readily challenged or are brittle in the face of changing demand.

    The key to accelerating a product-centric transformation is to build a hybrid model that embraces top-down and bottom-up perspectives to structure and evolve product families over time. Add a robust pilot to evaluate the structure and you have the key to unlocking the potential of product delivery in your organization.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    1. Become a Product-Centric Organization

    2. Organize Products Into Product Families

    3. Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    4. Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    5. Build Your Transformation Roadmap and Communication Plan

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm goal and value alignment of products and their product families

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    Phase Outcomes
    • Organizational drivers and goals for a product-centric delivery
    • Definition of product
    • Pilot list of products to scale
    • Product scaling principles
    • Scaling approach and direction
    • Product family mapping
    • Enabling applications
    • Dependent applications
    • Product family canvas
    • Approach for communication of product family strategy
    • Stakeholder management plan
    • Defined key pieces of a product family roadmap
    • An approach to confirming alignment between products and product families
    • Assessment of delivery maturity
    • Approach to structuring product delivery
    • Operating model for product delivery
    • Approach for product family funding
    • Product family transformation roadmap
    • Your plan for communicating your roadmap
    • List of actionable next steps to start on your journey

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook

    Use this supporting workbook to document interim results from a number of exercises that will contribute to your overall strategy.

    A screenshot of the Scale Workbook is shown.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment

    Your strategy needs to encompass your approaches to delivery. Understand where you need to focus using this simple assessment.

    A screenshot of the Scale Readiness Assessment is shown.

    Key deliverable:

    Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook

    Record the results from the exercises to help you define, detail, and deliver digital products at scale.

    A screenshot of the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook is shown.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Improved product delivery ROI.
    • Improved IT satisfaction and business support.
    • Greater alignment between product delivery and product family goals.
    • Improved alignment between product delivery and organizational models.
    • Better support for Agile/DevOps adoption.

    Business Benefits

    • Increased value realization across product families.
    • Faster delivery of enterprise capabilities.
    • Improved IT satisfaction and business support.
    • Greater alignment between product delivery and product family goals.
    • Uniform understanding of product and product family roadmaps and key milestones.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Align product family metrics to product delivery and value realization.

    Member Outcome Suggested Metric Estimated Impact

    Increase business application satisfaction

    Satisfaction with business applications (CIO Business Vision diagnostic)

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Increase effectiveness of application portfolio management

    Effectiveness of application portfolio management (Management & Governance diagnostic)

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Increase importance and effectiveness of application portfolio

    Importance and effectiveness to business ( Application Portfolio Assessment diagnostic)

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Increase satisfaction of support of business operations

    Support to business (CIO Business Vision diagnostic.

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Successfully deliver committed work (productivity)

    Number of successful deliveries; burndown

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keeps us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1: Become a Product-Centric Organization

    Phase 2: Organize Products Into Product Families

    Phase 3: Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    Phase 4: Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Define products and product families in your context.

    Call #3: Understand the list of products in your context.

    Call #4: Define your scaling principles and goals.

    Call #5: Select a pilot and define your product families.

    Call #6: Understand the product family roadmap as a method to align products to families.

    Call #7: Define components of your product family roadmap and confirm alignment.

    Call #8: Assess your delivery readiness.

    Call #9: Discuss delivery, operating, and funding models relevant to delivering product families.

    Call #10: Wrap up.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Become a Product-Centric Organization

    Day 2

    Organize Products Into Product Families

    Day 3

    Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    Day 4

    Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    Advisory

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Understand your organizational factors driving product-centric delivery.

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory.

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families.

    2.2 Define your product families.

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps.

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication.

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps.

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment.

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness.

    4.2 Understand your delivery options.

    4.3 Determine your operating model.

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery.

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy.

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy.

    5.3 Determine your next steps.

    1. Execute communication plan and product family changes.
    2. Review the pilot family implementation and update the transformation roadmap.
    3. Begin advisory calls for related blueprints.

    Key Deliverables

    1. Organizational drivers and goals for a product-centric delivery
    2. Definition of product
    3. Product scaling principles
    4. Scaling approach and direction
    5. Pilot list of products to scale
    1. Product family mapping
    2. Enabling applications
    3. Dependent applications
    4. Product family canvas
    1. Current approach for communication of product family strategy
    2. List of product family stakeholders and a prioritization plan for communication
    3. Defined key pieces of a product family roadmap
    4. An approach to confirming alignment between products and product families through a shared definition of business value
    1. Assessment results on your organization’s delivery maturity
    2. A preferred approach to structuring product delivery
    3. Your preferred operating model for delivering product families
    4. Understanding your preferred approach for product family funding
    5. Product family transformation roadmap
    6. Your plan for communicating your roadmap
    7. List of actionable next steps to start on your journey
    1. Organizational communication of product families and product family roadmaps
    2. Product family implementation and updated transformation roadmap
    3. Support for product owners, backlog and roadmap management, and other topics

    Phase 1

    Become a Product-Centric Organization

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    1.1.2 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    1.1.3 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    1.2.1 Define “product” in your context

    1.2.2 Identify and establish a pilot list of products

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Step 1.1

    Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    Activities

    1.1.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    1.1.2 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    1.1.3 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Organizational drivers to move to product-centric delivery
    • List of differences between project and product delivery
    • Goals for product-centric delivery

    1.1.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    30-60 minutes

    1. Identify your pain points in the current delivery model.
    2. What is the root cause of these pain points?
    3. How will a product-centric delivery model fix the root cause?
    4. Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
    Pain Points Root Causes Drivers
    • Lack of ownership
    • Siloed departments
    • Accountability

    Output

    • Organizational drivers to move to product-centric delivery.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    1.1.2 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    30-60 minutes

    1. Consider project delivery and product delivery.
    2. Discuss what some differences are between the two.
    3. Note: This exercise is not about identifying the advantages and disadvantages of each style of delivery. This is to identify the variation between the two.

    4. Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
    Project Delivery Product Delivery
    Point in time What is changed
    Method of funding changes Needs an owner

    Output

    • List of differences between project and product delivery

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Project Product
    Fund projects Funding Fund products or teams
    Line of business sponsor Prioritization Product owner
    Makes specific changes to a product Product management Improves product maturity and support
    Assignment of people to work Work allocation Assignment of work to product teams
    Project manager manages Capacity management Team manages capacity

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the difference between project lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle, and product lifecycle.

    Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release.

    Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Use Agile DevOps principles to expedite product-centric delivery and management

    Delivering products does not necessarily require an Agile DevOps mindset. However, Agile methods facilitate the journey because product thinking is baked into them.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the product delivery maturity and the Agile DevOps used.

    Based on: Ambysoft, 2018

    Organizations start with Waterfall to improve the predictable delivery of product features.

    Iterative development shifts the focus from delivery of features to delivery of user value.

    Agile further shifts delivery to consider ROI. Often, the highest-value backlog items aren’t the ones with the highest ROI.

    Lean and DevOps improve your delivery pipeline by providing full integration between product owners, development teams, and operations.

    CI/CD reduces time in process by allowing release on demand and simplifying release and support activities.

    Although teams will adopt parts of all these stages during their journey, it isn’t until you’ve adopted a fully integrated delivery chain that you’ve become product centric.

    1.1.3 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    30 minutes

    1. Review your list of drivers from exercise 1.1.1 and the differences between project and product delivery from exercise 1.1.2.
    2. Define your goals for achieving a product-centric organization.
    3. Note: Your drivers may have already covered the goals. If so, review if you would like to change the drivers based on your renewed understanding of the differences between project and product delivery.

    Pain PointsRoot CausesDriversGoals
    • Lack of ownership
    • Siloed departments
    • Accountability
    • End-to-end ownership

    Output

    • Goals for product-centric delivery

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Step 1.2

    Establish your organization’s product inventory

    Activities

    1.2.1 Define “product” in your context

    1.2.2 Identify and establish a pilot list of products

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Your organizational definition of products and services
    • A pilot list of active products

    Product does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of products.

    Every organization and industry has a different definition of what a product is. Organizations structure their people, processes, and technologies according to their definition of the products they manage. Conflicting product definitions between teams increase confusion and misalignment of product roadmaps.

    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.”

    - Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance

    “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.”

    - TechTarget

    “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.”

    - Mark Curphey

    Organizations need a common understanding of what a product is and how it pertains to the business. This understanding needs to be accepted across the organization.

    “There is not a lot of guidance in the industry on how to define [products]. This is dangerous because what will happen is that product backlogs will be formed in too many areas. All that does is create dependencies and coordination across teams … and backlogs.”

    – Chad Beier, "How Do You Define a Product?” Scrum.org

    Products and services share the same foundation and best practices

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. Product is used for consistency but would apply to services as well.

    Product = Service

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:

    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Recognize the different product owner perspectives

    Business:

    • Customer facing, revenue generating

    Technical:

    • IT systems and tools

    Operations

    • Keep the lights on processes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Recognize that product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.”

    – Robbin Schuurman, “Tips for Starting Product Owners”

    Your product definition should include everything required to support it, not just what users see.

    A picture of an iceburg is shown, showing the ice both above and below the water to demonstrate that the product definition should include everything, not just what users see. On top of the picture are various words to go with the product definition. They inlude: funding, external relationships, adoption, product strategy, stakeholder managment. The product defitions that may not be seen include: Product governance, business functionality, user support, managing and governing data, maintenance and enhancement, R-and-D, requirements analysis and design, code, and knowledge management.

    Establish where product management would be beneficial in the organization

    What does not need product ownership?

    • Individual features
    • Transactions
    • Unstructured data
    • One-time solutions
    • Non-repeatable processes
    • Solutions that have no users or consumers
    • People or teams

    Characteristics of a discrete product

    • Has end users or consumers
    • Delivers quantifiable value
    • Evolves or changes over time
    • Has predictable delivery
    • Has definable boundaries
    • Has a cost to produce and operate

    Product capabilities deliver value!

    These are the various facets of a product. As a product owner, you are responsible for managing these facets through your capabilities and activities.

    A flowchart is shown that demonstrates the various facets of a product.

    It is easy to lose sight of what matters when we look at a product from a single point of view. Despite what The Agile Manifesto says, working software is not valuable without the knowledge and support that people need in order to adopt, use, and maintain it. If you build it, they will not come. Product leaders must consider the needs of all stakeholders when designing and building products.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    An image is shown to demonstrate the relationship between the product backlog and the product roadmap.

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we demonstrate how the product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path, and as a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    An example of a product roadmap is shown to demonstrate how it is the core to value realization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    What is a product?

    Not all organizations will define products in the same way. Take this as a general example:

    “A tangible solution, tool, or service (physical or digital) that enables the long-term and evolving delivery of value to customers and stakeholders based on business and user requirements.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    A proper definition of product recognizes three key facts:

    1. Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    2. Products are not just “apps” but can be software or services that drive the delivery of value.
    3. There is more than one stakeholder group that derives value from the product or service.

    1.2.1 Define “product” in your context

    30-60 minutes

    1. Discuss what “product” means in your organization.
    2. Create a common, enterprise-wide definition for “product.”
    3. Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    For example:

    • An application, platform, or application family.
    • Discrete items that deliver value to a user/customer.

    Output

    • Your enterprise/organizational definition of products and services

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    1.2.2 Identify and establish a pilot list of products

    1-2 hours

    1. Review any current documented application inventory. If you have these details in an existing document, share it with the team. Select the group of applications for your family scaling pilot.
    2. List your initial application inventory on the Product List tab of the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
  • For each of the products listed, add the vision and goals of the product. Refer to Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision to learn more about identifying vision and goals or to complete the product vision canvas.
  • You’ll add business capabilities and vision in Phase 2, but you can add these now if they are available in your existing inventory.
  • Output

    • A pilot list of active products

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Phase 2

    Organize Products Into Product Families

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    2.1.1 Define your scaling principles and goals

    2.1.2 Define your pilot product family areas and direction

    2.2.1 Arrange your applications and services into product families

    2.2.2 Define enabling and supporting applications

    2.2.3 Build your product family canvas

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Step 2.1

    Determine your approach to scale product families

    Activities

    2.1.1 Define your scaling principles and goals

    2.1.2 Define your pilot product family areas and direction

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of product scaling principles
    • Scope of product scaling pilot and target areas
    • Scaling approach and direction

    Use consistent terminology for product and service families

    In this blueprint, we refer to any grouping of products or services as a “family.” Your organization may prefer other terms, such as product/service line, portfolio, group, etc. The underlying principles for grouping and managing product families are the same, so define the terminology that fits best with your culture. The same is true for “products” and “services,” which may also be referred to in different terms.

    An example flowchart is displayed to demonstrate the terminology for product and service families.

    A product family is a logical and operational grouping of related products or services. The grouping provides a scaled hierarchy to translate goals, priorities, strategy, and constraints down the grouping while aligning value realization upwards.

    Group product families by related purpose to improve business value

    Families should be scaled by how the products operationally relate to each other, with clear boundaries and common purpose.

    A product family contains...

    • Vision
    • Goals
    • Cumulative roadmap of the products within the family

    A product family can be grouped by...

    • Function
    • Value stream and capability
    • Customer segments or end-user group
    • Strategic purpose
    • Underlying architecture
    • Common technology or support structures
    • And many more
    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the product family and product relations.

    Scale products into related families to improve value delivery and alignment

    Defining product families builds a network of related products into coordinated value delivery streams.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the relations between product family and the delivery streams.

    “As with basic product management, scaling an organization is all about articulating the vision and communicating it effectively. Using a well-defined framework helps you align the growth of your organization with that of the company. In fact, how the product organization is structured is very helpful in driving the vision of what you as a product company are going to do.”

    – Rich Mironov, Mironov Consulting

    Product families translate enterprise goals into value-enabling capabilities

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the relationship between enterprise strategy and enabling capabilities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organizational goals and strategy are achieved through capabilities that deliver value. Your product hierarchy is the mechanism to translate enterprise goals, priorities, and constraints down to the product level where changes can be made.

    Arrange product families by operational groups, not solely by your org chart

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate how to arrange product families by operational groups.

    1. To align product changes with enterprise goals and priorities, you need to organize your products into operational groups based on the capabilities or business functions the product and family support.

    2. Product managers translate these goals, priorities, and constraints into their product families, so they are actionable at the next level, whether that level is another product family or products implementing enhancements to meet these goals.

    3. The product family manager ensures that the product changes enhance the capabilities that allow you to realize your product family, division, and enterprise goals.

    4. Enabling capabilities realize value and help reach your goals, which then drives your next set of enterprise goals and strategy.

    Product families need owners with a more strategic focus

    Product Owner

    (More tactical product delivery focus)

    • Backlog management and prioritization
    • Product vision and product roadmap
    • Epic/story definition, refinement in conjunction with business stakeholders
    • Sprint planning with Scrum Master and delivery team
    • Working with Scrum Master to minimize disruption to team velocity
    • Ensuring alignment between business and Scrum teams during sprints
    • Profit and loss (P&L) product analysis and monitoring

    Product Manager

    (More strategic product family focus)

    • Product strategy, positioning, and messaging
    • Product family vision and product roadmap
    • Competitive analysis and positioning
    • New product innovation/definition
    • Release timing and focus (release themes)
    • Ongoing optimization of product-related marketing and sales activities
    • P&L product analysis and monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Product owner” and “product manager” are terms that should be adapted to fit your culture and product hierarchy. These are not management relationships but rather a way to structure related products and services that touch the same end users. Use the terms that work best in your culture.

    Download Build a Better Product Owner for role support.

    2.1.1 Define your scaling principles and goals

    30-60 minutes

    1. Discuss the guiding principles for your product scaling model. Your guiding principles should consider key business priorities, organizational culture, and division/team objectives, such as improving:
    • Business agility and ability to respond to changes and needs.
    • Alignment of product roadmaps to enterprise goals and priorities.
    • Collaboration between stakeholders and product delivery teams.
    • Resource utilization and productivity.
    • The quality and value of products.
    • Coordination between related products and services.

    Output

    • List of product scaling principles

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Start scaling with a pilot

    You will likely use a combination of patterns that work best for each product area. Pilot your product scaling with a domain, team, or functional area before organizing your entire portfolio.

    Learn more about each pattern.

    Discuss the pros and cons of each.

    Select a pilot product area.

    Select a pattern.

    Approach alignment from both directions, validating by the opposite way

    Defining your product families is not a one-way street. Often, we start from either the top or the bottom depending on our scaling principles. We use multiple patterns to find the best arrangement and grouping of our products and families.

    It may be helpful to work partway, then approach your scaling from the opposite direction, meeting in the middle. This way you are taking advantage of the strengths in both approaches.

    Once you have your proposed structure, validate the grouping by applying the principles from the opposite direction to ensure each product and family is in the best starting group.

    As the needs of your organization change, you may need to realign your product families into your new business architecture and operational structure.

    A top-down alignment example is shown.

    When to use: You have a business architecture defined or clear market/functional grouping of value streams.

    A bottom-up alignment example is shown.

    When to use: You are starting from an Application Portfolio Management application inventory to build or validate application families.

    Top-down examples: Start with your enterprise structure or market grouping

    A top-down example flowchart is shown.

    Examples:

    Market Alignment
    • Consumer Banking
      • DDA: Checking, Savings, Money Market
      • Revolving Credit: Credit Cards, Line of Credit
      • Term Credit: Mortgage, Auto, Boat, Installment
    Enterprise Applications
    • Human Resources
      • Benefits: Health, Dental, Life, Retirement
      • Human Capital: Hiring, Performance, Training
      • Hiring: Posting, Interviews, Onboarding
    Shared Service
    • End-User Support
      • Desktop: New Systems, Software, Errors
      • Security: Access Requests, Password Reset, Attestations
    Business Architecture
    • Value Stream
      • Capability
        • Applications
        • Services

    Bottom-up examples: Start with your inventory

    Based on your current inventory, start organizing products and services into related groups using one of the five scaling models discussed in the next step.

    A bottom-up example flowchart is shown.

    Examples:

    Technical Grouping
    • Custom Apps: Java, .NET, Python
    • Cloud: Azure, AWS, Virtual Environments
    • Low Code: ServiceNow, Appian
    Functional/Capability Grouping
    • CRM: Salesforce, Microsoft CRM
    • Security Platforms: IAM, SSO, Scanning
    • Workflow: Remedy, ServiceNow
    Shared Services Grouping
    • Workflow: Appian, Pega, ServiceNow
    • Collaboration: SharePoint, Teams
    • Data: Dictionary, Lake, BI/Reporting

    2.1.2 Define your pilot product family areas and direction

    30-60 minutes

    1. Using your inventory of products for your pilot, consider the top-down and bottom-up approaches.
    2. Identify areas where you will begin arranging your product into families.
    3. Prioritize these pilot areas into waves:
      1. First pilot areas
      2. Second pilot areas
      3. Third pilot areas
    4. Discuss and decide whether a top-down or bottom-up approach is the best place to start for each pilot group.
    5. Prioritize your pilot families in the order in which you want to organize them. This is a guide to help you get started, and you may change the order during the scaling pattern exercise.

    Output

    • Scope of product scaling pilot and target areas

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Step 2.2

    Define your product families

    Activities

    2.2.1 Arrange your applications and services into product families

    2.2.2 Define enabling and supporting applications

    2.2.3 Build your product family canvas

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product family mapping
    • Product families
    • Enabling applications
    • Dependent applications
    • Product family canvas

    Use three perspectives to guide scaling pattern selection

    • One size does not fit all. There is no single or static product model that fits all product teams.
    • Structure relationships based on your organizational needs and capabilities.
    • Be flexible. Product ownership is designed to enable value delivery.
    • Avoid structures that promote proxy product ownership.
    • Make decisions based on products and services, not people. Then assign people to the roles.
    Alignment perspectives:

    Value Stream

    Align products based on the defined sources of value for a collection of products or services.

    For example: Wholesale channel for products that may also be sold directly to consumers, such as wireless network service.

    Users/Consumers

    Align products based on a common group of users or product consumers.

    For example: Consumer vs. small business vs. enterprise customers in banking, insurance, and healthcare.

    Common Domain

    Align products based on a common domain knowledge or skill set needed to deliver and support the products.

    For example: Applications in a shared service framework supporting other products.

    Leverage patterns for scaling products

    Organizing your products and families is easier when leveraging these grouping patterns. Each is explained in greater detail on the following slides

    Value Stream AlignmentEnterprise ApplicationsShared ServicesTechnicalOrganizational Alignment
    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products
    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > ModulesSupporting: Job board, healthcare administrator
    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools
    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network
    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure no longer needed because the management team owns product management role

    Select the best family pattern to improve alignment

    A flowchart is shown on how to select the best family pattern to improve alignment.

    Use scenarios to help select patterns

    Top-Down

    Bottom-Up

    We have a business architecture defined.

    (See Document Your Business Architecture and industry reference architectures for help.)

    Start with your business architecture

    Start with market segments

    We want to be more customer first or customer centric.

    Start with market segments

    Our organization has rigid lines of business and organizational boundaries.

    Start with LoB structure

    Most products are specific to a business unit or division. Start with LoB structure

    Products are aligned to people, not how we are operationally organized.

    Start with market or LoB structure

    We are focusing on enterprise or enabling applications.

    1. Start with enterprise app and service team

    2. Align supporting apps

    We already have applications and services grouped into teams but want to evaluate if they are grouped in the best families.

    Validate using multiple patterns

    Validate using multiple patterns

    Our applications and services are shared across the enterprise or support multiple products, value streams, or shared capabilities.

    Our applications or services are domain, knowledge, or technology specific.

    Start by grouping inventory

    We are starting from an application inventory. (See the APM Research Center for help.)

    Start by grouping inventory

    Pattern: Value Stream – Capability

    Grouping products into capabilities defined in your business architecture is recommended because it aligns people/processes (services) and products (tools) into their value stream and delivery grouping. This requires an accurate capability map to implement.

    Example:

    • Healthcare is delivered through a series of distinct value streams (top chevrons) and shared services supporting all streams.
    • Diagnosing Health Needs is executed through the Admissions, Testing, Imaging, and Triage capabilities.
    • Products and services are needed to deliver each capability.
    • Shared capabilities can also be grouped into families to better align capability delivery and maturity to ensure that the enterprise goals and needs are being met in each value stream the capabilities support.
    An example is shown to demonstrate how to group products into capabilities.

    Sample business architecture/ capability map for healthcare

    A sample business architecture/capability map for healthcare is shown.

    Your business architecture maps your value streams (value delivered to your customer or user personas) to the capabilities that deliver that value. A capability is the people, processes, and/or tools needed to deliver each value function.

    Defining capabilities are specific to a value stream. Shared capabilities support multiple value streams. Enabling capabilities are core “keep the lights on” capabilities and enterprise functions needed to run your organization.

    See Info-Tech’s industry coverage and reference architectures.

    Download Document Your Business Architecture

    Pattern: Value Stream – Market

    Market/Customer Segment Alignment focuses products into the channels, verticals, or market segments in the same way customers and users view the organization.

    An example is shown to demonstrate how products can be placed into channels, verticals, or market segments.

    Example:

    • Customers want one stop to solve all their issues, needs, and transactions.
    • Banking includes consumer, small business, and enterprise.
    • Consumer banking can be grouped by type of financial service: deposit accounts (checking, savings, money market), revolving credit (credit cards, lines of credit), term lending (mortgage, auto, installment).
    • Each group of services has a unique set of applications and services that support the consumer product, with some core systems supporting the entire relationship.

    Pattern: Value Stream – Line of Business (LoB)

    Line of Business Alignment uses the operational structure as the basis for organizing products and services into families that support each area.

    An example of the operational structure as the basis is shown.

    Example:

    • LoB alignment favors continuity of services, tools, and skills based on internal operations over unified customer services.
    • A hospital requires care and services from many different operational teams.
    • Emergency services may be internally organized by the type of care and emergency to allow specialized equipment and resources to diagnose and treat the patients, relying on support teams for imaging and diagnostics to support care.
    • This model may be efficient and logical from an internal viewpoint but can cause gaps in customer services without careful coordination between product teams.

    Pattern: Enterprise Applications

    A division or group delivers enabling capabilities, and the team’s operational alignment maps directly to the modules/components of an enterprise application and other applications that support the specific business function.

    An example flowchart is shown with enterprise applications.

    Example:

    • Human resources is one corporate function. Within HR, however, there are subfunctions that operate independently.
    • Each operational team is supported by one or more applications or modules within a primary HR system.
    • Even though the teams work independently, the information they manage is shared with or ties into processes used by other teams. Coordination of efforts helps provide a higher level of service and consistency.

    For additional information about HRMS, please download Get the Most Out of Your HRMS.

    Pattern: Shared Services

    Grouping by service type, knowledge area, or technology allows for specialization while families align service delivery to shared business capabilities.

    An example is shown with the shared services.

    Example:

    • Recommended for governance, risk, and compliance; infrastructure; security; end-user support; and shared platforms (workflow, collaboration, imaging/record retention). Direct hierarchies do not necessarily exist within the shared service family.
    • Service groupings are common for service owners (also known as support managers, operations managers, etc.).
    • End-user ticketing comes through a common request system, is routed to the team responsible for triage, and then is routed to a team for resolution.
    • Collaboration tools and workflow tools are enablers of other applications, and product families might support multiple apps or platforms delivering that shared capability.

    Pattern: Technical

    Technical grouping is used in Shared Services or as a family grouping method within a Value Stream Alignment (Capability, Market, LoB) product family.

    An example of technical grouping is shown.

    Example:

    • Within Shared Services, Technical product grouping focuses on domains requiring specific experience and knowledge not common to typical product teams. This can also support insourcing so other product teams do not have to build their own capacity.
    • Within a Market or LoB team, these same technical groups support specific tools and services within that product family only while also specializing in the business domain.
    • Alignment into tool, platform, or skill areas improves delivery capabilities and resource scalability.

    Pattern: Organizational Alignment

    Eventually in your product hierarchy, the management structure functions as the product management team.

    • When planning your product families, be careful determining when to merge product families into the management team structure.
    • Since the goal of scaling products into families is to align product delivery roadmaps to enterprise goals and enable value realization, the primary focus of scaling must be operational.
    • Alignment to the organizational chart should only occur when the product families report into an HR manager who has ownership for the delivery and value realization for all product and services within that family.
    Am example of organizational alignment is shown.

    Download Build a Better Product Owner for role support.

    2.2.1 Arrange your applications and services into product families

    1-4 hours

    1. (Optional but recommended) Define your value streams and capabilities on the App Capability List tab in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
    2. On the Product Families tab, build your product family hierarchy using the following structure:
    • Value Stream > Capability > Family 3 > Family 2 > Family 1 > Product/Service.
    • If you are not using a Value Stream > Capability grouping, you can leave these blank for now.
    A screenshot of the App Capability List in the Deliver Disital Products at Scale Workbook is shown.
  • If you previously completed an application inventory using one of our application portfolio management (APM) resources, you can paste values here. Do not paste cells, as Excel may create a cell reference or replace the current conditional formatting.
  • Output

    • Product family mapping

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    2.2.2 Define enabling and supporting applications

    1-4 hours

    1. Review your grouping from the reverse direction or with different patterns to validate the grouping. Consider each grouping.
    • Does it operationally align the products and families to best cascade enterprise goals and priorities while validating enabling capabilities?
    • In the next phase, when defining your roadmap strategy, you may wish to revisit this phase and adjust as needed.
  • Select and enter enabling or dependent applications to the right of each product.
  • A screenshot from the Deliver Digitial Products at Scale Workbook is shown.

    Output

    • Product families
    • Enabling applications
    • Dependent applications

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Use a product canvas to define key elements of your product family

    A product canvas is an excellent tool for quickly providing important information about a product family.

    Product owners/managers

    Provide target state to align child product and product family roadmaps.

    Stakeholders

    Communicate high-level concepts and key metrics with leadership teams and stakeholders.

    Strategy teams

    Use the canvas as a tool for brainstorming, scoping, and ideation.

    Operations teams

    Share background overview to align operational team with end-user value.

    Impacted users

    Refine communication strategy and support based on user impacts and value realization.

    Download Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.

    Product Family Canvas: Define your core information

    A screenshot of the product family canvas is shown.

    Problem Statement: The problem or need the product family is addressing

    Business Goals: List of business objectives or goals for the product

    Personas/Customers/Users: List of groups who consume the product/service

    Vision: Vision, unique value proposition, elevator pitch, or positioning statement

    Child Product Families or Products: List of product families or products within this family

    Stakeholders: List of key resources, stakeholders, and teams needed to support the product or service

    Download Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.

    2.2.3 Build your product family canvas

    30-60 minutes

    1. Complete the following fields to build your product family canvas in your Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook:
      1. Product family name
      2. Product family owner
      3. Parent product family name
      4. Problem that the family is intending to solve (For additional help articulating your problem statement, refer to Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.)
      5. Product family vision/goals (For additional help writing your vision, refer to Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision..)
      6. Child product or product family name(s)
      7. Primary customers/users (For additional help with your product personas, download and complete Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision..)
      8. Stakeholders (If you aren’t sure who your stakeholders are, fill this in after completing the stakeholder management exercises in phase 3.)

    Output

    • Product family canvas

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    A screenshot of the Product Family Canvas is shown.

    Phase 3

    Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 3.1.1 Evaluate your current approach to product family communication
    • 3.2.1 Visualize interrelationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers
    • 3.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories
    • 3.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders
    • 3.3.1 Define the communication objectives and audience of your product family roadmaps
    • 3.3.2 Identify the level of detail that you want your product family roadmap artifacts to represent
    • 3.4.1 Validate business value alignment between products and their product families

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 3.1

    Leverage product family roadmaps

    Activities

    3.1.1 Evaluate your current approach to product family communication

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of what a product family roadmap is
    • Comparison of Info-Tech’s position on product families to how you currently communicate about product families

    Aligning products’ goals with families

    Without alignment between product family goals and their underlying products, you aren’t seeing the full picture.

    An example of a product roadmap is shown to demonstrate how it is the core to value realization.

    Adapted from: Pichler," What Is Product Management?"

    • Aligning product strategy to enterprise goals needs to happen through the product family.
    • A product roadmap has traditionally been used to express the overall intent and visualization of the product strategy.
    • Connecting the strategy of your products with your enterprise goals can be done through the product family roadmap.

    Leveraging product family roadmaps

    It’s more than a set of colorful boxes.

      ✓ Lays out a strategy for your product family.

      ✓ Is a statement of intent for your family of products.

      ✓ Communicates direction for the entire product family and product teams.

      ✓ Directly connects to the organization’s goals.

    However, it is not:

      x Representative of a hard commitment.

      x A simple combination of your current product roadmaps.

      x A technical implementation plan.

    Product family roadmaps

    A roadmap is shown without any changes.

    There is no such thing as a roadmap that never changes.

    Your product family roadmap represents a broad statement of intent and high-level tactics to get closer to the organization’s goals.

    A roadmap is shown with changes.

    All good product family roadmaps embrace change!

    Your strategic intentions are subject to volatility, especially those planned further in the future. The more costs you incur in planning, the more you leave yourself exposed to inefficiency and waste if those plans change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A good product family roadmap is intended to manage and communicate the inevitable changes as a result of market volatility and changes in strategy.

    Product family roadmaps are more strategic by nature

    While individual product roadmaps can be different levels of tactical or strategic depending on a variety of market factors, your options are more limited when defining roadmaps for product families.

    An image is displayed to show the relationships between product and product family, and how the roadmaps could be tactical or strategic.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Roadmaps for your product family are, by design, less detailed. This does not mean they aren’t actionable! Your product family roadmap should be able to communicate clear intentions around the future delivery of value in both the near and long term.

    Reminder: Your enterprise vision provides alignment for your product family roadmaps

    Not knowing the difference between enterprise vision and goals will prevent you from both dreaming big and achieving your dream.

    Your enterprise vision represents your “north star” – where you want to go. It represents what you want to do.

    • Your enterprise goals represent what you need to achieve in order to reach your enterprise vision.
    • A key element of operationalizing your vision.
    • Your strategy, initiatives, and features will align with one or more goals.

    Download Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision for support.

    Multiple roadmap views can communicate differently, yet tell the same truth

    Audience

    Business/ IT Leaders

    Users/Customers

    Delivery Teams

    Roadmap View

    Portfolio

    Product Family

    Technology

    Objectives

    To provide a snapshot of the portfolio and priority products

    To visualize and validate product strategy

    To coordinate broad technology and architecture decisions

    Artifacts

    Line items or sections of the roadmap are made up of individual products, and an artifact represents a disposition at its highest level.

    Artifacts are generally grouped by product teams and consist of strategic goals and the features that realize those goals.

    Artifacts are grouped by the teams who deliver that work and consist of technical capabilities that support the broader delivery of value for the product family.

    Typical elements of a product family roadmap

    While there are others, these represent what will commonly appear across most family-based roadmaps.

    An example is shown to highlight the typical elements of a product family roadmap.

    GROUP/CATEGORY: Groups are collections of artifacts. In a product family context, these are usually product family goals, value streams, or products.

    ARTIFACT: An artifact is one of many kinds of tangible by-products produced during the delivery of products. For a product family, the artifacts represented are capabilities or value streams.

    MILESTONE: Points in the timeline when established sets of artifacts are complete. This is a critical tool in the alignment of products in a given family.

    TIME HORIZON: Separated periods within the projected timeline covered by the roadmap.

    3.1.1 Evaluate your current approach to product family communication

    1-2 hours

    1. Write down how you currently communicate your intentions for your products and family of products.
    2. Compare and contrast this to how this blueprint defines product families and product family roadmaps.
    3. Consider the similarities and the key gaps between your current approach and Info-Tech’s definition of product family roadmaps.

    Output

    • Your documented approach to product family communication

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Step 3.2

    Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    Activities

    3.2.1 Visualize interrelationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers

    3.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    3.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    Info-Tech Note

    If you have done the stakeholder exercises in Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision or Build a Better Product Owner u don’t need to repeat the exercises from scratch.

    You can bring the results forward and update them based on your prior work.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers
    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers
    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Reminder: Not everyone is a user!

    USERS

    Individuals who directly obtain value from usage of the product.

    STAKEHOLDERS

    Represent individuals who provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what you will be able to accomplish.

    FUNDERS

    Individuals both external and internal that fund the product initiative. Sometimes they are lumped in as stakeholders. However, motivations can be different.

    For more information, see Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.

    A stakeholder strategy is a key part of product family attainment

    A roadmap is only “good” when it effectively communicates to stakeholders. Understanding your stakeholders is the first step in delivering great product family roadmaps.

    A picture is shown that has 4 characters with puzzle pieces, each repersenting a key to product family attainment. The four keys are: Stakeholder management, product lifecycle, project delivery, and operational support.

    Create a stakeholder network map for product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    An example stakeholder network map is displayed.

    Legend

    Black arrows: indicate the direction of professional influence

    Dashed green arrows: indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product family operates in. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantial relationships with your stakeholders.

    3.2.1 Visualize interrelationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers

    60 minutes

    1. List direct stakeholders for your product.
    2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
    • Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
    • Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.

    Output

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps product leaders categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership in the product and/or teams.

    An example stakeholder prioritization map is shown.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.

    Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.

    Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.

    Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    3.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    30-60 minutes

    1. Identify your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on your product as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model below to determine each stakeholder’s category.
    Level of Influence
    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    The example stakeholder prioritization map is shown with the stakeholders grouped into the categories.

    Output

    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Level of Support

    Stakeholder Category

    Supporter

    Evangelist

    Neutral Blocker

    Player

    Critical

    High

    High

    Critical

    Mediator

    Medium

    Low

    Low

    Medium

    Noisemaker

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    High

    Spectator

    Low

    Irrelevant

    Irrelevant

    Low

    Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by answering the following question: How likely is it that this stakeholder would recommend your product?

    These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive your focused attention.

    3.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: How likely is it that this stakeholder would endorse your product?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.

    Stakeholder

    Category

    Level of Support

    Prioritization

    CMO

    Spectator

    Neutral

    Irrelevant

    CIO

    Player

    Supporter

    Critical

    Output

    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    An example is shown to demonstrate how to define strategies to engage staeholders by type.

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players

    High influence, high interest – actively engage

    Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.

    Mediators

    High influence, low interest – keep satisfied

    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.

    Noisemakers

    Low influence, high interest – keep informed

    Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.

    Spectators

    Low influence, low interest – monitor

    They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, the product owner can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers, while ensuring the needs of Mediators and Players are met.

    Step 3.3

    Configure your product family roadmaps

    Activities

    3.3.1 Define the communication objectives and audience of your product family roadmaps

    3.3.2 Identify the level of detail that you want your product family roadmap artifacts to represent

    Info-Tech Note

    If you are unfamiliar with product roadmaps, Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision contains more detailed exercises we recommend you review before focusing on product family roadmaps.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the key communication objectives and target stakeholder audience for your product family roadmaps
    • A position on the level of detail you want your product family roadmap to operate at

    Your communication objectives are linked to your audience; ensure you know your audience and speak their language

    I want to... I need to talk to... Because they are focused on...
    ALIGN PRODUCT TEAMS Get my delivery teams on the same page. Architects Products Owners PRODUCTS A product that delivers value against a common set of goals and objectives.
    SHOWCASE CHANGES Inform users and customers of product strategy. Bus. Process Owners End Users FUNCTIONALITY A group of functionality that business customers see as a single unit.
    ARTICULATE RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS Inform the business of product development requirements. IT Management Business Stakeholders FUNDING An initiative that those with the money see as a single budget.

    3.3.1 Define the communication objectives and audience of your product family roadmaps

    30-60 minutes

    1. Explicitly state the communication objectives and audience of your roadmap.
    • Think of finishing this sentence: This roadmap is designed for … in order to …
  • You may want to consider including more than a single audience or objective.
  • Example:
  • Roadmap

    Audience

    Statement

    Internal Strategic Roadmap

    Internal Stakeholders

    This roadmap is designed to detail the strategy for delivery. It tends to use language that represents internal initiatives and names.

    Customer Strategic Roadmap

    External Customers

    This roadmap is designed to showcase and validate future strategic plans and internal teams to coordinate the development of features and enablers.

    Output

    • Roadmap list with communication objectives and audience

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    The length of time horizons on your roadmap depend on the needs of the underlying products or families

    Info-Tech InsightAn example timeline is shown.

    Given the relationship between product and product family roadmaps, the product family roadmap needs to serve the time horizons of its respective products.

    This translates into product family roadmaps with timelines that, at a minimum, cover the full scope of the respective product roadmaps.

    Based on your communication objectives, consider different ways to visualize your product family roadmap

    Swimline/Stream-Based roadmap example.

    Swimlane/Stream-Based – Understanding when groups of items intend to be delivered.

    An example is shown that has an overall plan with rough intentions around delivery.

    Now, Next, Later – Communicate an overall plan with rough intentions around delivery without specific date ranges.

    An example of a sunrise roadmap is shown.

    Sunrise Roadmap – Articulate the journey toward a given target state across multiple streams.

    Before connecting your family roadmap to products, think about what each roadmap typically presents

    An example of a product family roadmap is shown and how it can be connected to the products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your product family roadmap and product roadmap tell different stories. The product family roadmap represents the overall connection of products to the enterprise strategy, while the product roadmap focuses on the fulfillment of the product’s vision.

    Example: Connecting your product family roadmaps to product roadmaps

    Your roadmaps should be connected at an artifact level that is common between both. Typically, this is done with capabilities, but you can do it at a more granular level if an understanding of capabilities isn’t available.

    Example is shown connecting product family roadmaps to product roadmaps.

    3.3.2 Identify the level of detail that you want your product family roadmap artifacts to represent

    30-60 minutes

    1. Consider the different available artifacts for a product family (goals, value stream, capabilities).
    2. List the roadmaps that you wish to represent.
    3. Based on how you currently articulate details on your product families, consider:
    • What do you want to use as the level of granularity for the artifact? Consider selecting something that has a direct connection to the product roadmap itself (for example, capabilities).
    • For some roadmaps you will want to categorize your artifacts – what would work best in those cases?

    Examples

    Level of Hierarchy

    Artifact Type

    Roadmap 1

    Goals

    Capability

    Roadmap 2

    Roadmap 3

    Output

    • Details on your roadmap granularity

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Step 3.4

    Confirm goal and value alignment of products and their product families

    Activities

    3.4.1 Validate business value alignment between products and their product families

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Validation of the alignment between your product families and products

    Confirming product to family value alignment

    It isn’t always obvious whether you have the right value delivery alignment between products and product families.

    An example is shown to demonstrate product-to-family-alignment.

    Product-to-family alignment can be validated in two different ways:

    1. Initial value alignment
    2. Confirm the perceived business value at a family level is aligned with what is being delivered at a product level.

    3. Value measurement during the lifetime of the product
    4. Validate family roadmap attainment through progression toward the specified product goals.

    For more detail on calculating business value, see Build a Value Measurement Framework.

    To evaluate a product family’s contribution, you need a common definition of value

    Why is having a common value measure important?

    CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic

    A stacked bar graph is shown to demonstrate CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic. A bar titled Business Value Metrics is highlighted. 51% had some improvement necessary and 32% had significant improvement necessary.

    Over 700 Info-Tech members have implemented the Balanced Value Measurement Framework.

    “The cynic knows the price of everything and the value of nothing.”

    – Oscar Wilde

    “Price is what you pay. Value is what you get.”

    – Warren Buffett

    Understanding where you derive value is critical to building solid roadmaps.

    All value in your product family is not created equal

    Business value is the value of the business outcome the application produces and how effective the product is at producing that outcome. Dissecting value by the benefit type and the value source allows you to see the many ways in which a product or service brings value to your organization. Capture the value of your products in short, concise statements, like an elevator pitch.

    A business value matrix is shown.

    Increase Revenue

    Product or service functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue.

    Reduce Costs

    Reduction of overhead. The ways in which your product limits the operational costs of business functions.

    Enhance Services

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Reach Customers

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    Financial Benefits vs. Improved Capabilities

    • Financial Benefit refers to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and is often quite tangible.
    • Human Benefit refers to how a product or service can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    • Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.
    • Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    3.4.1 Validate business value alignment between products and their product families

    30-60 minutes

    1. Draw the 2x2 Business Value Matrix on a flip chart or open the Business Value Matrix tab in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook to use in this exercise.
    2. Brainstorm and record the different types of business value that your product and product family produce on the sticky notes (one item per sticky note).
    3. As a team, evaluate how the product value delivered contributes to the product family value delivered. Note any gaps or differences between the two.

    Download and complete Build a Value Measurement Framework for full support in focusing product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    A business value matrix is shown.

    Output

    • Confirmation of value alignment between product families and their respective products

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Example: Validate business value alignment between products and their product families

    An example of a business value matrix is shown.

    Measure product value with metrics tied to your business value sources and objectives

    Assign metrics to your business value sources

    Business Value Category

    Source Examples

    Metric Examples

    Profit Generation

    Revenue

    Customer Lifetime Value (LTV)

    Data Monetization

    Average Revenue per User (ARPU)

    Cost Reduction

    Reduce Labor Costs

    Contract Labor Cost

    Reduce Overhead

    Effective Cost per Install (eCPI)

    Service Enablement

    Limit Failure Risk

    Mean Time to Mitigate Fixes

    Collaboration

    Completion Time Relative to Deadline

    Customer and Market Reach

    Customer Satisfaction

    Net Promoter Score

    Customer Trends

    Number of Customer Profiles

    The importance of measuring business value through metrics

    The better an organization is at using business value metrics to evaluate IT’s performance, the more satisfied the organization is with IT’s performance as a business partner. In fact, those that say they’re effective at business value metrics have satisfaction scores that are 30% higher than those that believe significant improvements are necessary (Info-Tech’s IT diagnostics).

    Assigning metrics to your prioritized values source will allow you to more accurately measure a product’s value to the organization and identify optimization opportunities. See Info-Tech’s Related Research: Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation blueprint for more information.

    Your product delivery pipeline connects your roadmap with business value realization

    The effectiveness of your product roadmap needs to be evaluated based on delivery capacity and throughput.

    A product roadmap is shown with additional details to demonstrate delivery capacity and throughput.

    When thinking about product delivery metrics, be careful what you ask for…

    As the saying goes “Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.”

    Metrics are powerful because they drive behavior.

    • Metrics are also dangerous because they often lead to unintended negative outcomes.
    • Choose your metrics carefully to avoid getting what you asked for instead of what you intended.

    It’s a cautionary tale that also offers a low-risk path through the complexities of metrics use.

    For more information on the use (and abuse) of metrics, see Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively.

    Measure delivery and success

    Metrics and measurements are powerful tools to drive behavior change and decision making in your organization. However, metrics are highly prone to creating unexpected outcomes, so use them with great care. Use metrics judiciously to uncover insights but avoid gaming or ambivalent behavior, productivity loss, and unintended consequences.

    Build good practices in your selection and use of metrics:

    • Choose the metrics that are as close to measuring the desired outcome as possible.
    • Select the fewest metrics possible and ensure they are of the highest value to your team, the safest from gaming behaviors and unintended consequences, and the easiest to gather and report.
    • Never use metrics for reward or punishment; use them to develop your team.
    • Automate as much metrics gathering and reporting as possible.
    • Focus on trends rather than precise metrics values.
    • Review and change your metrics periodically.

    Phase 4

    Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    4.1.1 Assess your organization’s readiness to deliver digital product families

    4.2.1 Consider pros and cons for each delivery model relative to how you wish to deliver

    4.3.1 Understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders

    4.4.1 Discuss traditional vs. product-centric funding methods

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Assess the impacts of product-centric delivery on your teams and org design

    Product delivery can exist within any org structure or delivery model. However, when making the shift toward product management, consider optimizing your org design and product team structure to match your capacity and throughput needs.

    A flowchart is shown to see how the impacts of product-centric delivery can impact team and org designs.

    Info-Tech Note

    Realigning your delivery pipeline and org design takes significant effort and time. Although we won’t solve these questions here, it’s important to identify factors in your current or future models that improve value delivery.

    Step 4.1

    Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    Activities

    4.1.1 Assess your organization’s readiness to deliver digital product families

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the group’s maturity level when it comes to product delivery

    Maturing product practices enables delivery of product families, not just products or projects

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the differences between project lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle, and product lifecycle.

    Just like product owners, product family owners are needed to develop long-term product value, strategy, and delivery. Projects can still be used as the source of funding and change management; however, the product family owner must manage product releases and operational support. The focus of this section will be on aligning product families to one or more releases.

    4.1.1 Assess your organization’s readiness to deliver digital product families

    30-60 minutes

    1. For each question in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment, ask yourself which of the five associated maturity statements most closely describes your organization.
    2. As a group, agree on your organization’s current readiness score for each of the six categories.

    A screenshot of the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment is shown.

    Output

    • Product delivery readiness score

    Participants

    • Product managers
    • Product owners

    Download the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment.

    Value realization is constrained by your product delivery pipeline

    Value is realized through changes made at the product level. Your pipeline dictates the rate, quality, and prioritization of your backlog delivery. This pipeline connects your roadmap goals to the value the goals are intended to provide.

    An example of a product roadmap is shown with the additional details of the product delivery pipeline being highlighted.

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    PRODUCT STRATEGY

    What are the artifacts?

    What are you saying?

    Defined at the family level?

    Defined at the product level?

    Vision

    I want to...

    Strategic focus

    Delivery focus

    Goals

    To get there we need to...

    Roadmap

    To achieve our goals, we’ll deliver...

    Backlog

    The work will be done in this order...

    Release Plan

    We will deliver in the following ways...

    Step 4.2

    Understand your delivery options

    Activities

    4.2.1 Consider pros and cons for each delivery model relative to how you wish to deliver

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the different team configuration options when it comes to delivery and their relevance to how you currently work

    Define the scope of your product delivery strategy

    The goal of your product delivery strategy is to establish streamlined, enforceable, and standardized product management and delivery capabilities that follow industry best practices. You will need to be strategic in how and where you implement your changes because this will set the stage for future adoption. Strategically select the most appropriate products, roles, and areas of your organization to implement your new or enhanced capabilities and establish a foundation for scaling.

    Successful product delivery requires people who are knowledgeable about the products they manage and have a broad perspective of the entire delivery process, from intake to delivery, and of the product portfolio. The right people also have influence with other teams and stakeholders who are directly or indirectly impacted by product decisions. Involve team members who have expertise in the development, maintenance, and management of your selected products and stakeholders who can facilitate and promote change.

    Learn about different patterns to structure and resource your product delivery teams

    The primary goal of any product delivery team is to improve the delivery of value for customers and the business based on your product definition and each product’s demand. Each organization will have different priorities and constraints, so your team structure may take on a combination of patterns or may take on one pattern and then transform into another.

    Delivery Team Structure Patterns

    How Are Resources and Work Allocated?

    Functional Roles

    Teams are divided by functional responsibilities (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk) and arranged according to their placement in the software development lifecycle (SDLC).

    Completed work is handed off from team to team sequentially as outlined in the organization’s SDLC.

    Shared Service and Resource Pools

    Teams are created by pulling the necessary resources from pools (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk).

    Resources are pulled whenever the work requires specific skills or pushed to areas where product demand is high.

    Product or System

    Teams are dedicated to the development, support, and management of specific products or systems.

    Work is directly sent to the teams who are directly managing the product or directly supporting the requester.

    Skills and Competencies

    Teams are grouped based on skills and competencies related to technology (e.g. Java, mobile, web) or familiarity with business capabilities (e.g. HR, finance).

    Work is directly sent to the teams who have the IT and business skills and competencies to complete the work.

    See the flow of work through each delivery team structure pattern

    Four delivery team structures are shown. The four are: functional roles, shared service and resource pools, product or system, and skills and competencies.

    Staffing models for product teams

    Functional Roles Shared Service and Resource Pools Product or System Skills and Competencies
    A screenshot of the functional roles from the flow of work example is shown. A screenshot of the shared service and resource pools from the flow of work example is shown. A screenshot of the product or system from the flow of work example is shown. A screenshot of skills and competencies from the flow of work example is shown.
    Pros
      ✓ Specialized resources are easier to staff

      ✓ Product knowledge is maintained

      ✓ Flexible demand/capacity management

      ✓ Supports full utilization of resources

      ✓ Teams are invested in the full life of the product

      ✓ Standing teams enable continuous improvement

      ✓ Teams are invested in the technology

      ✓ Standing teams enable continuous improvement

    Cons
      x Demand on specialists can create bottlenecks

      x Creates barriers to collaboration

      x Unavailability of resources can lead to delays

      x Product knowledge can be lost as resources move

      x Changes in demand can lead to downtime

      x Cross-functional skills make staffing a challenge

      x Technology bias can lead to the wrong solution

      x Resource contention when team supports multiple solutions

    Considerations
      ! Product owners must break requests down into very small components to support Agile delivery as mini-Waterfalls
      ! Product owners must identify specialist requirements in the roadmap to ensure resources are available
      ! Product owners must ensure that there is a sufficient backlog of valuable work ready to keep the team utilized
      ! Product owners must remain independent of technology to ensure the right solution is built
    Use Case
    • When you lack people with cross-functional skills
    • When you have specialists such as those skilled in security and operations who will not have full-time work on the product
    • When you have people with cross-functional skills who can self-organize around the request
    • When you have a significant investment in a specific technology stack

    4.2.1 Consider pros and cons for each delivery model relative to how you wish to deliver

    1. Document your current staffing model for your product delivery teams.
    2. Evaluate the pros and cons of each model, as specified on the previous slide, relative to how you currently work.
    3. What would be the ideal target state for your team? If one model does not completely fit, is there a hybrid option worth considering? For example: Product-Based combined with Shared Service/Resource Pools for specific roles.

    Functional Roles

    Teams are divided by functional responsibilities (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk) and arranged according to their placement in the software development lifecycle (SDLC).

    Shared Service and Resource Pools

    Teams are created by pulling the necessary resources from pools (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk).

    Product or System

    Teams are dedicated to the development, support, and management of specific products or systems.

    Skills and Competencies

    Teams are grouped based on skills and competencies related to technology (e.g. Java, mobile, web) or familiarity with business capabilities (e.g. HR, finance).

    Output

    • An understanding of pros and cons for each delivery model and the ideal target state for your team

    Participants

    • Product managers
    • Product owners

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Step 4.3

    Determine your operating model

    Activities

    4.3.1 Understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the potential operating models and what will work best for your organization

    Reminder: Patterns for scaling products

    The alignment of your product families should be considered in your operating model.

    Value Stream Alignment

    Enterprise Applications

    Shared Services

    Technical

    Organizational Alignment

    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products
    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > ModulesSupporting: Job board, healthcare administrator
    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools
    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network
    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure no longer needed because the management team owns product management role

    Ensure consistency in the application of your design principles with a coherent operating model

    What is an operating model?

    An operating model is an abstract visualization, used like an architect’s blueprint, that depicts how structures and resources are aligned and integrated to deliver on the organization’s strategy. It ensures consistency of all elements in the organizational structure through a clear and coherent blueprint before embarking on detailed organizational design

    The visual should highlight which capabilities are critical to attaining strategic goals and clearly show the flow of work so that key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization.

    An example of an operating model is shown.

    For more information, see Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure.

    Weigh the pros and cons of IT operating models to find the best fit

    1. LoB/Product Aligned – Decentralized Model: Line of Business, Geographically, Product, or Functionally Aligned
    2. A decentralized IT operating model that embeds specific functions within LoBs/product teams and provides cross-organizational support for their initiatives.

    3. Hybrid Functional: Functional/Product Aligned
    4. A best-of-both-worlds model that balances the benefits of centralized and decentralized approaches to achieve both customer responsiveness and economies of scale.

    5. Hybrid Service Model: Product-Aligned Operating Model
    6. A model that supports what is commonly referred to as a matrix organization, organizing by highly related service categories and introducing the role of the service owner.

    7. Centralized: Plan-Build-Run
    8. A highly typical IT operating model that focuses on centralized strategic control and oversight in delivering cost-optimized and effective solutions.

    9. Centralized: Demand-Develop-Service
    10. A centralized IT operating model that lends well to more mature operating environments. Aimed at leveraging economies of scale in an end-to-end services delivery model.

    There are many different operating models. LoB/Product Aligned and Hybrid Functional align themselves most closely with how products and product families are typically delivered.

    Decentralized Model: Line of Business, Geographically, Product, or Functionally Aligned

    An example of a decentralized model is shown.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Organization around functions (FXN) allows for diversity in approach in how areas are run to best serve specific business units needs.
    • Each functional line exists largely independently, with full capacity and control to deliver service at the committed service level agreements.
    • Highly responsive to shifting needs and demands with direct connection to customers and all stages of the solution development lifecycle.
    • Accelerates decision making by delegating authority lower into the FXN.
    • Promotes a flatter organization with less hierarchy and more direct communication with the CIO.
    • Less synergy and integration across what different lines of business are doing can result in redundancies and unnecessary complexity.
    • Higher overall cost to the IT group due to role and technology duplication across different FXN.
    • Inexperience becomes an issue; requires more competent people to be distributed across the FXN.
    • Loss of sight of the big picture – difficult to enforce standards around people/process/technology with solution ownership within the FXN.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Hybrid Model: Functional/Product Aligned

    An example of a hybrid model: functional/product aligned is shown.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Best of both worlds of centralization and decentralization; attempts to channel benefits from both centralized and decentralized models.
    • Embeds key IT functions that require business knowledge within functional areas, allowing for critical feedback.
    • Balances a holistic IT strategy and architecture with responsiveness to needs of the organization.
    • Achieves economies of scale where necessary through the delivery of shared services that can be requested by the function.
    • May result in excessive cost through role and system redundancies across different functions
    • Business units can have variable levels of IT competence; may result in different levels of effectiveness.
    • No guaranteed synergy and integration across functions; requires strong communication, collaboration, and steering.
    • Cannot meet every business unit’s needs – can cause tension from varying effectiveness of the IT functions placed within the functional areas.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Hybrid Model: Product-Aligned Operating Model

    An example of a hybrid model: product-aligned operating model.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Focus is on the full lifecycle of a product – takes a strategic view of how technology enables the organization.
    • Promotes centralized backlog around a specific value creator, rather than traditional project focus, which is more transactional.
    • Dedicated teams around the product family ensure that you have all of the resources required to deliver on your product roadmap.
    • Reduces barriers between IT and business stakeholders, focuses on technology as a key strategic enabler.
    • Delivery is largely done through a DevOps methodology.
    • Significant business involvement is required for success within this model, with business stakeholders taking an active role in product governance and potentially product management as well.
    • Strong architecture standards and practices are required to make this successful because you need to ensure that product families are building in a consistent manner and limiting application sprawl.
    • Introduced the need for practice standards to drive consistency in quality of delivered services.
    • May result in increased cost through role redundancies across different squads.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Centralized: Plan-Build-Run

    An example of a centralized: Plan-Build-Run is shown.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Effective at implementing long-term plans efficiently, separates maintenance and projects to allow each to have the appropriate focus.
    • More oversight over financials; better suited for fixed budgets.
    • Works across centralized technology domains to better align with the business's strategic objectives – allows for a top-down approach to decision making.
    • Allows for economies of scale and expertise pooling to improve IT’s efficiency.
    • Well suited for a project-driven environment that employs Waterfall or a hybrid project management methodology that is less iterative.
    • Not optimized for unpredictable/shifting project demands, as decision making is centralized in the plan function.
    • Less agility to deliver new features or solutions to the customer in comparison to decentralized models.
    • Build (developers) and run (operations staff) are far removed from the business, resulting in lower understanding of business needs (as well as “passing the buck” – from development to operations).
    • Requires strong hand-off processes to be defined and strong knowledge transfer from build to run functions in order to be successful.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Centralized: Demand-Develop-Service

    An example of a centralized: Demand-Develop-Service model is shown.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Aligns well with an end-to-end services model; constant attention to customer demand and service supply.
    • Centralizes service operations under one functional area to serve shared needs across lines of business.
    • Allows for economies of scale and expertise pooling to improve IT’s efficiency.
    • Elevates sourcing and vendor management as its own strategic function; lends well to managed service and digital initiatives.
    • Development and operations housed together; lends well to DevOps-related initiatives.
    • Can be less responsive to business needs than decentralized models due to the need for portfolio steering to prioritize initiatives and solutions.
    • Requires a higher level of operational maturity to succeed; stable supply functions (service mgmt., operations mgmt., service desk, security, data) are critical to maintaining business satisfaction.
    • Requires highly effective governance around project portfolio, services, and integration capabilities.
    • Effective feedback loop highly dependent on accurate performance measures.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Assess how your product scaling pattern impacts your resource delivery model

    Value Stream Alignment

    Enterprise Applications

    Shared Services

    Technical

    Plan-Build-Run:
    Centralized

    Pro: Supports established and stable families.

    Con: Command-and-control nature inhibits Agile DevOps and business agility.

    Pro: Supports established and stable families.

    Con: Command-and-control nature inhibits Agile DevOps and business agility.

    Pro: Can be used to align high-level families.

    Con: Lacks flexibility at the product level to address shifting priorities in product demand.

    Pro: Supports a factory model.

    Con: Lacks flexibility at the product level to address shifting priorities in product demand.

    Centralized Model 2:
    Demand-Develop-
    Service

    Pro: Supports established and stable families.

    Con: Command-and-control nature inhibits Agile DevOps and business agility.

    Pro: Supports established and stable families.

    Con: Command-and-control nature inhibits Agile DevOps and business agility.

    Pro: Recommended for aligning high-level service families based on user needs.

    Con: Reduces product empowerment, prioritizing demand. Slow.

    Pro: Supports factory models.

    Con: Reduces product empowerment, prioritizing demand. Slow.

    Decentralized Model:
    Line of Business, Product, Geographically, or

    Functionally Aligned

    Pro: Aligns product families to value streams, capabilities, and organizational structure.

    Con: Reduces shared solutions and may create duplicate apps and services.

    Pro: Enterprise apps treated as distinct LoB groups.

    Con: Reduces shared solutions and may create duplicate apps and services.

    Pro: Complements value stream alignment by consolidating shared apps and services.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Fits within other groupings where technical expertise is needed.

    Con: Creates redundancy between localized and shared technical teams.

    Hybrid Model:
    Functional/Product

    Aligned

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Creates redundancy between localized and shared technical teams.

    Hybrid Model:

    Product-Aligned Operating Model

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Creates redundancy between localized and shared technical teams.

    4.3.1 Understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders

    30-60 minutes

    1. Discuss the intake sources of product work.
    2. Trace the flow of requests down to the functional roles of your delivery team (e.g., developer, QA, operations).
    3. Indicate where key deliverables are produced, particularly those that are built in collaboration.
    4. Discuss the five operating models relative to your current operating model choice. How aligned are you?
    5. Review Info-Tech’s recommendation on the best-aligned operating models for product family delivery. Do you agree or disagree?
    6. Evaluate recommendations against how you operate/work.

    Output

    • Understanding of the relationships between key groups
    • A preferred operating model

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Delivery managers

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    4.3.1 Understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders

    An example of activity 4.3.1 to understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders is shown.

    Output

    • Understanding of the relationships between key groups
    • A preferred operating model

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Delivery managers

    Step 4.4

    Identify how to fund product family delivery

    Activities

    4.4.1 Discuss traditional vs. product-centric funding methods

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the differences between product-based and traditional funding methods

    Why is funding so problematic?

    We often still think about funding products like construction projects.

    Three models are shown on the various options to fund projects.

    These models require increasing accuracy throughout the project lifecycle to manage actuals vs. estimates.

    "Most IT funding depends on one-time expenditures or capital-funding mechanisms that are based on building-construction funding models predicated on a life expectancy of 20 years or more. Such models don’t provide the stability or flexibility needed for modern IT investments." – EDUCAUSE

    Reminder: Projects don’t go away. The center of the conversation changes.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the difference between project lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle, and product lifecycle.

    Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release.

    Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Planning and budgeting for products and families

    Reward for delivering outcomes, not features

    AutonomyFlexibilityAccountability
    Fund what delivers valueAllocate iterativelyMeasure and adjust

    Fund long-lived delivery of value through products (not projects).

    Give autonomy to the team to decide exactly what to build.

    Allocate to a pool based on higher-level business case.

    Provide funds in smaller amounts to different product teams and initiatives based on need.

    Product teams define metrics that contribute to given outcomes.

    Track progress and allocate more (or less) funds as appropriate.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Changes to funding require changes to product and Agile practices to ensure product ownership and accountability.

    The Lean Enterprise Funding Model is an example of a different approach

    An example of the lean enterprise funding model is shown.
    From: Implement Agile Practices That Work

    A flexible funding pool akin to venture capital models is maintained to support innovative ideas and fund proofs of concept for product and process improvements.

    Proofs of concept (POCs) are run by standing innovation teams or a reserve of resources not committed to existing products, projects, or services.

    Every product line has funding for all changes and ongoing operations and support.

    Teams are funded continuously so that they can learn and improve their practices as much as possible.

    Budgeting approaches must evolve as you mature your product operating environment

    TRADITIONAL PROJECTS WITH WATERFALL DELIVERY

    TRADITIONAL PROJECTS WITH AGILE DELIVERY

    PRODUCTS WITH AGILE PROJECT DELIVERY

    PRODUCTS WITH AGILE DELIVERY

    WHEN IS THE BUDGET TRACKED?

    Budget tracked by major phases

    Budget tracked by sprint and project

    Budget tracked by sprint and project

    Budget tracked by sprint and release

    HOW ARE CHANGES HANDLED?

    All change is by exception

    Scope change is routine, budget change is by exception

    Scope change is routine, budget change is by exception

    Budget change is expected on roadmap cadence

    WHEN ARE BENEFITS REALIZED?

    Benefits realization after project completion

    Benefits realization is ongoing throughout the life of the project

    Benefits realization is ongoing throughout the life of the product

    Benefits realization is ongoing throughout life of the product

    WHO “DRIVES”?

    Project Manager

    • Project team delivery role
    • Refines project scope, advocates for changes in the budget
    • Advocates for additional funding in the forecast

    Product Owner

    • Project team delivery role
    • Refines project scope, advocates for changes in the budget
    • Advocates for additional funding in the forecast

    Product Manager

    • Product portfolio team role
    • Forecasting new initiatives during delivery to continue to drive value throughout the life of the product

    Product Manager

  • Product family team role
  • Forecasting new initiatives during delivery to continue to drive value throughout the life of the product
  • Info-Tech Insight

    As you evolve your approach to product delivery, you will be decoupling the expected benefits, forecast, and budget. Managing them independently will improve your ability to adapt to change and drive the right outcomes!

    Your strategy must include the cost to build and operate

    Most investment happens after go-live, not in the initial build!

    An example strategy is displayed that incorporates the concepts of cost to build and operate.

    Adapted from: LookFar

    Info-Tech Insight

    While the exact balance point between development or implementation costs varies from application to application, over 80% of the cost is accrued after go-live.

    Traditional accounting leaves software development CapEx on the table

    Software development costs have traditionally been capitalized, while research and operations are operational expenditures.

    The challenge has always been the myth that operations are only bug fixes, upgrades, and other operational expenditures. Research shows that most post-release work on developed solutions is the development of new features and changes to support material changes in the business. While projects could bundle some of these changes into capital expenditure, much of the business-as-usual work that goes on leaves capital expenses on the table because the work is lumped together as maintenance-related OpEx.

    From “How to Stop Leaving Software CapEx on the Table With Agile and DevOps”

    4.4.1 Discuss traditional vs. product-centric funding methods

    30-60 minutes

    1. Discuss how products and product families are currently funded.
    2. Review how the Agile/product funding models differ from how you currently operate.
    3. What changes do you need to consider in order to support a product delivery model?
    4. For each change, identify the key stakeholders and list at least one action to take.
    5. Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Output

    • Understanding of funding principles and challenges

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Delivery managers

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Phase 5

    Build Your Transformation Roadmap and Communication Plan

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    5.1.1 Introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2.1 Define your communication cadence for your strategy updates

    5.2.2 Define your messaging for each stakeholder

    5.3.1 How do we get started?

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Step 5.1

    Introduce your digital product family strategy

    Activities

    5.1.1 Introduce your digital product family strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A completed executive summary presenting your digital product strategy

    Product decisions are traditionally made in silos with little to no cross-functional communication and strategic oversight

    Software delivery teams and stakeholders traditionally make plans, strategies, and releases within their silos and tailor their decisions based on their own priorities. Interactions are typically limited to hand-offs (such as feature requests) and routing of issues and defects back up the delivery pipeline. These silos likely came about through well-intentioned training, mandates, and processes, but they do not sufficiently support today’s need to rapidly release and change platforms.

    Siloed departments often have poor visibility into the activities of other silos, and they may not be aware of the ramifications their decisions have on teams and stakeholders outside of their silo.

    • Silos may make choices that are optimal largely for themselves without thinking of the holistic impact on a platform’s structure, strategy, use cases, and delivery.
    • The business may approve platform improvements without the consideration of the delivery team’s current capacity or the system’s complexity, resulting in unrealistic commitments.
    • Quality standards may be misinterpreted and inconsistently enforced across the entire delivery pipeline.

    In some cases, the only way to achieve greater visibility and communication for all roles across a platform’s lifecycle is implementing an overarching role or team.

    “The majority of our candid conversations with practitioners and project management offices indicate that the platform ownership role is poorly defined and poorly executed.”

    – Barry Cousins

    Practice Lead, Applications – Project & Portfolio Management

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Use stakeholder management and roadmap views to improve communication

    Proactive, clear communication with stakeholders, SMEs, and your product delivery team can significantly improve alignment and agreement with your roadmap, strategy, and vision.

    When building your communication strategy, revisit the work you completed in phase 3 developing your:

    • Roadmap types
    • Stakeholder strategy

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players

    High influence, high interest – actively engage

    Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.

    Mediators

    High influence, low interest – keep satisfied

    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.

    Noisemakers

    Low influence, high interest – keep informed

    Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.

    Spectators

    Low influence, low interest – monitor

    They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    5.1.1 Introduce your digital product family strategy

    30-60 minutes

    This exercise is intended to help you lay out the framing of your strategy and the justification for the effort. A lot of these items can be pulled directly from the product canvas you created in phase 2. This is intended to be a single slide to frame your upcoming discussions.

    1. Update your vision, goals, and values on your product canvas. Determine which stakeholders may be impacted and what their concerns are. If you have many stakeholders, limit to Players and Influencers.
    2. Identify what you need from the stakeholders as a result of this communication.
    3. Keeping in mind the information gathered in steps 1 and 2, describe your product family strategy by answering three questions:
    1. Why do we need product families?
    2. What is in our way?
    3. Our first step will be... ?

    Output

    • An executive summary that introduces your product strategy

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Example: Scaling delivery through product families

    Why do we need product families?

    • The growth of our product offerings and our company’s movement into new areas of growth mean we need to do a better job scaling our offerings to meet the needs of the organization.

    What is in our way?

    • Our existing applications and services are so dramatically different we are unsure how to bring them together.

    Our first step will be...

    • Taking a full inventory of our applications and services.

    Step 5.2

    Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    Activities

    5.2.1 Define your communication cadence for your strategy updates

    5.2.2 Define your messaging for each stakeholder

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A communication plan for when strategy updates need to be given

    5.2.1 Define your communication cadence for your strategy updates

    30 minutes

    Remember the role of different artifacts when it comes to your strategy. The canvas contributes to the What, and the roadmap addresses the How. Any updates to the strategy are articulated and communicated through your roadmap.

    1. Review your currently defined roadmaps, their communication objectives, update frequency, and updates.
    2. Consider the impacted stakeholders and the strategies required to communicate with them.
    3. Fill in your communication cadence and communication method.

    EXAMPLE:

    Roadmap Name

    Audience/Stakeholders

    Communication Cadence

    External Customer Roadmap

    Customers and External Users

    Quarterly (Website)

    Product Delivery Roadmap

    Development Teams, Infrastructure, Architects

    Monthly (By Email)

    Technology Roadmap

    Development Teams, Infrastructure, Architects

    Biweekly (Website)

    Output

    • Clear communication cadence for your roadmaps

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    The “what” behind the communication

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message, i.e. a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state and makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The change message should:

    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize what will stay the same.
    • Highlight what will be left behind.
    • Emphasize what is being changed.
    • Explain how change will be implemented.
    • Address how change will affect various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss the staff’s role in making the change successful.

    Five elements of communicating change

    1. What is the change?
    2. Why are we doing it?
    3. How are we going to go about it?
    4. How long will it take us to do it?
    5. What is the role for each department and individual?

    Source: Cornelius & Associates

    How we engage with the message is just as important as the message itself

    Why are we here?

    Speak to what matters to them

    Sell the improvement

    Show real value

    Discuss potential fears

    Ask for their support

    Be gracious

    5.2.2 (Optional) Define your messaging for each stakeholder

    30 minutes

    It’s one thing to communicate the strategy, it’s another thing to send the right message to your stakeholders. Some of this will depend on the kind of news given, but the majority of this is dependent on the stakeholder and the cadence of communication.

    1. From exercise 5.2.1, take the information on the specific roadmaps, target audience, and communication cadence.
    2. Based on your understanding of the audience’s needs, what would the specific update try to get across?
    3. Pick a specific typical example of a change in strategy that you have gone through. (e.g. Product will be delayed by a quarter; key feature is being substituted for another.)

    EXAMPLE:

    Roadmap Name

    Audience/ Stakeholder

    Communication Cadence

    Messaging

    External Customer Roadmap

    Customers and External Users

    Quarterly (Website)

    Output

    • Messaging plan for each roadmap type

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Step 5.3

    Determine your next steps

    Activities

    5.3.1 How do we get started?

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding the steps to get started in your transformation

    Make a plan in order to make a plan!

    Consider some of the techniques you can use to validate your strategy.

    Learning Milestones

    Sprint Zero (AKA Project-before-the-project)

    The completion of a set of artifacts dedicated to validating business opportunities and hypotheses.

    Possible areas of focus:

    Align teams on product strategy prior to build

    Market research and analysis

    Dedicated feedback sessions

    Provide information on feature requirements

    The completion of a set of key planning activities, typically the first sprint.

    Possible areas of focus:

    Focus on technical verification to enable product development alignment

    Sign off on architectural questions or concerns

    An image showing the flowchart of continuous delivery of value is shown.

    Go to your backlog and prioritize the elements that need to be answered sooner rather than later.

    Possible areas of focus:

    Regulatory requirements or questions to answer around accessibility, security, privacy.

    Stress testing any new processes against situations that may occur.

    The “Now, Next, Later” roadmap

    Use this when deadlines and delivery dates are not strict. This is best suited for brainstorming a product plan when dependency mapping is not required.

    Now: What are you going to do now?

    Next: What are you going to do very soon?

    Later: What are you going to do in the future?

    An example of a now, next, later roadmap is shown.

    Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017

    5.3.1 How do we get started?

    30-60 minutes

    1. Identify what the critical steps are for the organization to embrace product-centric delivery.
    2. Group each critical step by how soon you need to address it:
    • Now: Let’s do this ASAP.
    • Next: Sometime very soon, let’s do these things.
    • Later: Much further off in the distance, let’s consider these things.
  • Record the group results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
  • Record changes for your product and product family in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.
  • An example of a now, next, later roadmap is shown.

    Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017

    Output

    • Product family transformation critical steps and basic roadmap

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    The journey to become a product-centric organization is not short or easy. Like with any improvement or innovation, teams need to continue to evolve and mature with changes in their operations, teams, tools, and user needs.You’ve taken a big step completing your product family alignment. This provides a backbone for aligning all aspects of your organization to your enterprise goals and strategy while empowering product teams to find solutions closer to the problem. Continue to refine your model and operations to improve value realization and your product delivery pipelines to embrace business agility. Organizations that are most responsive to change will continue to outperform command-and-control leadership.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Emily Archer.

    Emily Archer

    Lead Business Analyst,

    Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency

    Emily Archer is a consultant currently working with Fortune 500 clients to ensure the delivery of successful projects, products, and processes. She helps increase the business value returned for organizations’ investments in designing and implementing enterprise content hubs and content operations, custom web applications, digital marketing, and e-commerce platforms.

    Photo of David Berg

    Founder & CTO

    Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg is a product commercialization expert that has spent the last 20 years of his career delivering product management and business development services across a broad range of industries. Early in his career, David worked with product management and engineering teams to build core network infrastructure products that secure and power the internet we benefit from today. David’s experience also includes working with clean technologies in the area of clean power generation, agritech, and Internet of Things infrastructure. Over the last five years, David has been focused on his latest venture, Strainprint Technologies, a data and analytics company focused on the medical cannabis industry. Strainprint has built the largest longitudinal medical cannabis dataset in the world with the goal to develop an understanding of treatment behavior, interactions, and chemical drivers to guide future product development.

    Kathy Borneman

    Digital Product Owner, SunTrust Bank

    Kathy Borneman is a senior product owner who helps people enjoy their jobs again by engaging others in end-to-end decision making to deliver software and operational solutions that enhance the client experience and allow people to think and act strategically.

    Photro of Charlie Campbell

    Charlie Campbell

    Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions

    Charlie Campbell is an experienced problem solver with the ability to quickly dissect situations and recommend immediate actions to achieve resolution, liaise between technical and functional personnel to bridge the technology and communication gap, and work with diverse teams and resources to reach a common goal.

    Photo of Yarrow Diamond

    Yarrow Diamond

    Sr. Director, Business Architecture

    Financial Services

    Yarrow Diamond is an experienced professional with expertise in enterprise strategy development, project portfolio management, and business process reengineering across financial services, healthcare and insurance, hospitality, and real estate environments. She has a master’s in Enterprise Architecture from Penn State University, LSSMBB, PMP, CSM, ITILv3.

    Photo of Cari J. Faanes-Blakey

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA

    Enterprise Business Systems Analyst,

    Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey has a history in software development and implementation as a Business Analyst and Project Manager for financial and taxation software vendors. Active in the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA), Cari participated on the writing team for the BA Body of Knowledge 3.0 and the certification exam.

    Photo of Kieran Gobey

    Kieran Gobey

    Senior Consultant Professional Services

    Blueprint Software Systems

    Kieran Gobey is an IT professional with 24 years of experience, focused on business, technology, and systems analysis. He has split his career between external and internal customer-facing roles, and this has resulted in a true understanding of what is required to be a Professional Services Consultant. His problem-solving skills and ability to mentor others have resulted in successful software implementations. Kieran’s specialties include deep system troubleshooting and analysis skills, facilitating communications to bring together participants effectively, mentoring, leadership, and organizational skills.

    Photo of Rupert Kainzbauer

    Rupert Kainzbauer

    VP Product, Digital Wallets

    Paysafe Group

    Rupert Kainzbauer is an experienced senior leader with a passion for defining and delivering products that deliver real customer and commercial benefit. Together with a team of highly experienced and motivated product managers, he has successfully led highly complex, multi-stakeholder payments initiatives, from proposition development and solution design through to market delivery. Their domain experience is in building online payment products in high-risk and emerging markets, remittance, prepaid cards, and mobile applications.

    Photo of Saeed Khan

    Saeed Khan

    Founder,

    Transformation Labs

    Saeed Khan has been working in high tech for 30 years in both Canada and the US and has held a number of leadership roles in Product Management over that time. He speaks regularly at conferences and has been writing publicly about technology product management since 2005. Through Transformation Labs, Saeed helps companies accelerate product success by working with product teams to improve their skills, practices, and processes. He is a cofounder of ProductCamp Toronto and currently runs a Meetup group and global Slack community called Product Leaders; the only global community of senior level product executives.

    Photo of Hoi Kun Lo

    Hoi Kun Lo

    Product Owner

    Nielsen

    Hoi Kun Lo is an experienced change agent who can be found actively participating within the IIBA and WITI groups in Tampa, FL and a champion for Agile, architecture, diversity, and inclusion programs at Nielsen. She is currently a Product Owner in the Digital Strategy team within Nielsen Global Watch Technology.

    Photo of Abhishek Mathur

    Abhishek Mathur

    Sr Director, Product Management

    Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur is a product management leader, an artificial intelligence practitioner, and an educator. He has led product management and engineering teams at Clarifai, IBM, and Kasisto to build a variety of artificial intelligence applications within the space of computer vision, natural language processing, and recommendation systems. Abhishek enjoys having deep conversations about the future of technology and helping aspiring product managers enter and accelerate their careers.

    Photo of Jeff Meister

    Jeff Meister

    Technology Advisor and Product Leader

    Jeff Meister is a technology advisor and product leader. He has more than 20 years of experience building and operating software products and the teams that build them. He has built products across a wide range of industries and has built and led large engineering, design, and product organizations. Jeff most recently served as Senior Director of Product Management at Avanade, where he built and led the product management practice. This involved hiring and leading product managers, defining product management processes, solution shaping and engagement execution, and evangelizing the discipline through pitches, presentations, and speaking engagements. Jeff holds a Bachelor’s of Applied Science (Electrical Engineering) and a Bachelor’s of Arts from the University of Waterloo, an MBA from INSEAD (Strategy), and certifications in product management, project management, and design thinking.

    Photo of Vincent Mirabelli

    Vincent Mirabelli

    Principal,

    Global Project Synergy Group

    With over 10 years of experience in both the private and public sectors, Vincent Mirabelli possesses an impressive track record of improving, informing, and transforming business strategy and operations through process improvement, design and re-engineering, and the application of quality to business analysis, project management, and process improvement standards.

    Photo of Oz Nazili

    Oz Nazili

    VP, Product & Growth

    TWG

    Oz Nazili is a product leader with a decade of experience in both building products and product teams. Having spent time at funded startups and large enterprises, he thinks often about the most effective way to deliver value to users. His core areas of interest include Lean MVP development and data-driven product growth.

    Photo of Mark Pearson

    Mark Pearson

    Principal IT Architect, First Data Corporation

    Mark Pearson is an executive business leader grounded in the process, data, technology, and operations of software-driven business. He knows the enterprise software landscape and is skilled in product, technology, and operations design and delivery within information technology organizations, outsourcing firms, and software product companies.

    Photo of Brenda Peshak

    Brenda Peshak

    Product Owner,

    Widget Industries, LLC

    Brenda Peshak is skilled in business process, analytical skills, Microsoft Office Suite, communication, and customer relationship management (CRM). She is a strong product management professional with a Master’s focused in Business Leadership (MBL) from William Penn University.

    Photo of Mike Starkey

    Mike Starkey

    Director of Engineering

    W.W. Grainger

    Mike Starkey is a Director of Engineering at W.W. Grainger, currently focusing on operating model development, digital architecture, and building enterprise software. Prior to joining W.W. Grainger, Mike held a variety of technology consulting roles throughout the system delivery lifecycle spanning multiple industries such as healthcare, retail, manufacturing, and utilities with Fortune 500 companies.

    Photo of Anant Tailor

    Anant Tailor

    Cofounder & Head of Product

    Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor is a cofounder at Dream Payments where he currently serves as the COO and Head of Product, having responsibility for Product Strategy & Development, Client Delivery, Compliance, and Operations. He has 20+ years of experience building and operating organizations that deliver software products and solutions for consumers and businesses of varying sizes. Prior to founding Dream Payments, Anant was the COO and Director of Client Services at DonRiver Inc, a technology strategy and software consultancy that he helped to build and scale into a global company with 100+ employees operating in seven countries. Anant is a Professional Engineer with a Bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering from McMaster University and a certificate in Product Strategy & Management from the Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.

    Photo of Angela Weller

    Angela Weller

    Scrum Master, Businessolver

    Angela Weller is an experienced Agile business analyst who collaborates with key stakeholders to attain their goals and contributes to the achievement of the company’s strategic objectives to ensure a competitive advantage. She excels when mediating or facilitating teams.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product Delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Build a Better Product Owner

    • Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    • Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    • Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    • Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    • Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    • Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    • Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    • Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods in the organization.

    Application Portfolio Management

    APM Research Center

    • See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management for Small Enterprises

    • There is no one-size-fits-all rationalization. Tailor your framework to meet your goals.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    • Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    • Manage your application portfolio to minimize risk and maximize value.

    Modernize Your Applications

    • Justify modernizing your application portfolio from both business and technical perspectives.

    Review Your Application Strategy

    • Ensure your applications enable your business strategy.

    Discover Your Applications

    • Most application strategies fail. Arm yourself with the necessary information and team structure for a successful application portfolio strategy.

    Streamline Application Management

    • Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    • Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    • Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    • Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    • Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    • Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    • Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    • Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    • Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Org Design and Performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic Workforce Plan

    • Have the right people, in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New Organizational Structure

    • Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance

    • Don’t just measure engagement, act on it.

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    • Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • PMOs, if you don't know who is responsible for org change, it's you.

    Bibliography (Product Management)

    “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    A, Karen. “20 Mental Models for Product Managers.” Product Management Insider, Medium, 2 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Adams, Paul. “Product Teams: How to Build & Structure Product Teams for Growth.” Inside Intercom, 30 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Agile Alliance. “Product Owner.” Agile Alliance. n.d. Web.

    Ambysoft. “2018 IT Project Success Rates Survey Results.” Ambysoft. 2018. Web.

    Banfield, Richard, et al. “On-Demand Webinar: Strategies for Scaling Your (Growing) Enterprise Product Team.” Pluralsight, 31 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Berez, Steve, et al. “How to Plan and budget for Agile at Scale.” Bain & Company, 08 Oct 2019. Web

    Blueprint. “10 Ways Requirements Can Sabotage Your Projects Right From the Start.” Blueprint. 2012. Web.

    Breddels, Dajo, and Paul Kuijten. “Product Owner Value Game.” Agile2015 Conference, Agile Alliance 2015. Web.

    Cagan, Martin. “Behind Every Great Product.” Silicon Valley Product Group. 2005. Web.

    Cohn, Mike. “What Is a Product?” Mountain Goat Software. 6 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Connellan, Thomas K. Inside the Magic Kingdom, Bard Press, 1997.

    Curphey, Mark. “Product Definition.” SlideShare, 25 Feb. 2007. Web.

    “Delegation Poker Product Image.” Management 3.0, n.d. Web.

    Distel, Dominic, et al. “Finding the sweet spot in product-portfolio management.’ McKinsey, 4 Dec. 2020. Web

    Eringa, Ron. “Evolution of the Product Owner.” RonEringa.com, 12 June 2016. Web.

    Fernandes, Thaisa. “Spotify Squad Framework - Part I.” PM101, Medium, 6 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Galen, Robert. “Measuring Product Ownership – What Does ‘Good’ Look Like?” RGalen Consulting, 5 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Halisky, Merland, and Luke Lackrone. “The Product Owner’s Universe.” Agile2016 Conference, Agile Alliance, 2016. Web.

    Kamer, Jurriaan. “How to Build Your Own ‘Spotify Model’.” The Ready, Medium, 9 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Kendis Team. “Exploring Key Elements of Spotify’s Agile Scaling Model.” Scaled Agile Framework, Medium, 23 Jul. 2018. Web.

    Lindstrom, Lowell. “7 Skills You Need to Be a Great Product Owner.” Scrum Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Lukassen, Chris. “The Five Belts Of The Product Owner.” Xebia.com, 20 Sept. 2016. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “Scaling Product Management: Secrets to Defeating Common Challenges.” ProductPlan, 12 July 2019. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “When and How to Scale Your Product Team.” UserVoice, 21 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Mironov, Rich. “Scaling Up Product Manager/Owner Teams.” Rich Mironov's Product Bytes, Mironov Consulting, 12 Apr. 2014 . Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “A Product Owner Self-Assessment.” Barry Overeem, 6 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “Retrospective: Using the Team Radar.” Barry Overeem, 27 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “How to Scale the Scrum Product Owner.” Roman Pichler, 28 June 2016 . Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Product Management Framework.” Pichler Consulting Limited, 2014. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Sprint Planning Tips for Product Owners.” LinkedIn, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “What Is Product Management?” Pichler Consulting Limited, 26 Nov. 2014. Web.

    Radigan, Dan. “Putting the ‘Flow' Back in Workflow With WIP Limits.” Atlassian, n.d. Web.

    Rouse, Margaret. “Definition: product.” TechTarget, Sept. 2005. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on (Business) Value.” Scrum.org, 30 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Agile Product Management.” Scrum.org, 28 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Scrum.org, 5 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on the Product Vision.” Scrum.org, 29 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Starting Product Owners.” Scrum.org, 27 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Sharma, Rohit. “Scaling Product Teams the Structured Way.” Monetary Musings, 28 Nov. 2016. Web.

    Shirazi, Reza. “Betsy Stockdale of Seilevel: Product Managers Are Not Afraid To Be Wrong.” Austin Voice of Product, 2 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Steiner, Anne. “Start to Scale Your Product Management: Multiple Teams Working on Single Product.” Cprime, 6 Aug. 2019. Web.

    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 2016. Web.

    “The Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” The Standish Group. 2015. Web.

    Theus, Andre. “When Should You Scale the Product Management Team?” ProductPlan, 7 May 2019. Web.

    Tolonen, Arto. “Scaling Product Management in a Single Product Company.” Smartly.io, 26 Apr. 2018. Web.

    Ulrich, Catherine. “The 6 Types of Product Managers. Which One Do You Need?” Medium, 19 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Verwijs, Christiaan. “Retrospective: Do The Team Radar.” The Liberators, Medium, 10 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Vlaanderen, Kevin. “Towards Agile Product and Portfolio Management”. Academia.edu. 2010. Web.

    Bibliography (Roadmap)

    Bastow, Janna. “Creating Agile Product roadmaps Everyone Understands.” ProdPad, 22 Mar. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bastow, Janna. “The Product Tree Game: Our Favorite Way To Prioritize Features.” ProdPad, 21 Feb. 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Chernak, Yuri. “Requirements Reuse: The State of the Practice.” 2012 IEEE International Conference, 12 June 2012, Herzliya, Israel. Web.

    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Harrin, Elizabeth. “Learn What a Project Milestone Is.” The Balance Careers, 10 May 2018. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    “How to create a product roadmap.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “How to Master the 3 Horizons of Product Strategy.” Aha!, 24 Sept. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “The Product Roadmap vs. the Technology Roadmap.” Aha!, 23 June 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Juncal, Shaun. “How Should You Set Your Product Roadmap Timeframes?” ProductPlan, Web. Sept. 2018.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile, 2017. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “What is a Minimum Viable Product (MVP).” Leanstack, 12 June 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. “10 Tips for Creating an Agile Product Roadmap.” Roman Pichler, 20 July 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. Strategize: Product Strategy and Product Roadmap Practices for the Digital Age. Pichler Consulting, 2016.

    “Product Roadmap Contents: What Should You Include?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Saez, Andrea. “Why Your Roadmap Is Not a Release Plan.” ProdPad, 23 October 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples.” Scrum.org, 7 Dec. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bibliography (Vision and Canvas)

    Adams, Paul. “The Future Product Canvas.” Inside Intercom, 10 Jan. 2014. Web.

    “Aligning IT Funding Models to the Pace of Technology Change.” EDUCAUSE, 14 Dec. 2015. Web.

    Altman, Igor. “Metrics: Gone Bad.” OpenView, 10 Nov. 2009. Web.

    Barry, Richard. “The Product Vision Canvas – a Strategic Tool in Developing a Successful Business.” Polymorph, 2019. Web.

    “Business Canvas – Business Models & Value Propositions.” Strategyzer, 2019. Web.

    “Business Model Canvas.” Wikipedia: The Free Encyclopedia, 4 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Charak, Dinker. “Idea to Product: The Working Model.” ThoughtWorks, 13 July 2017. Web.

    Charak, Dinker. “Product Management Canvas - Product in a Snapshot.” Dinker Charak, 29 May 2017. Web.

    Chudley, James. “Practical Steps in Determining Your Product Vision (Product Tank Bristol, Oct. 2018).” LinkedIn SlideShare. Uploaded by cxpartners, 2 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Cowan, Alex. “The 20 Minute Business Plan: Business Model Canvas Made Easy.” COWAN+, 2019. Web.

    Craig, Desiree. “So You've Decided To Become A Product Manager.” Start it up, Medium, 2 June 2019. Web.

    Create an Aha! Business Model Canvas Strategic Model.” Aha! Support, 2019. Web.

    Eick, Stephen. “Does Code Decay? Assessing the Evidence from Change Management Data.” IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering, vol. 27, no. 1, Jan. 2001, pp. 1-12. Web.

    Eriksson, Martin. “The next Product Canvas.” Mind the Product, 22 Nov. 2013. Web.

    “Experience Canvas: a Lean Approach: Atlassian Team Playbook.” Atlassian, 2019. Web.

    Freeman, James. “How to Make a Product Canvas – Visualize Your Product Plan.” Edraw, 23 Dec. 2019. Web.

    Fuchs, Danny. “Measure What Matters: 5 Best Practices from Performance Management Leaders.” OpenGov, 8 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Gorisse, Willem. “A Practical Guide to the Product Canvas.” Mendix, 28 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Gothelf, Jeff. “The Lean UX Canvas.” Jeff Gothelf, 15 Dec. 2016. Web.

    Gottesdiener, Ellen. “Using the Product Canvas to Define Your Product: Getting Started.” EBG Consulting, 15 Jan. 2019. Web.

    Gottesdiener, Ellen. “Using the Product Canvas to Define Your Product's Core Requirements.” EBG Consulting, 4 Feb. 2019. Web.

    Gray, Mark Krishan. “Should I Use the Business Model Canvas or the Lean Canvas?” Emergn, 2019. Web.

    Hanby, Jeff. "Software Maintenance: Understanding and Estimating Costs." LookFar, 21 Oct. 2016. Web.

    “How do you define a product?” Scrum.org, 4 Apr 2017, Web

    Juncal, Shaun. “How to Build a Product Roadmap Based on a Business Model Canvas.” ProductPlan, 19 June 2019. Web.

    “Lean Canvas Intro - Uber Example.” YouTube, uploaded by Railsware Product Academy, 12 Oct. 2018. Web.

    “Lesson 6: Product Canvas.” ProdPad Help Center, 2019. Web.

    Lucero, Mario. “The Product Canvas.” Agilelucero.com, 22 June 2015. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Create a New Lean Canvas.” Canvanizer, 2019. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Don't Write a Business Plan. Create a Lean Canvas Instead.” LEANSTACK, 2019. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Why Lean Canvas vs Business Model Canvas?” Medium, 27 Feb. 2012. Web.

    Mirabelli, Vincent. “The Project Value Canvas.” Vincent Mirabelli, 2019. Web.

    Mishra, LN. “Business Analysis Canvas – The Ultimate Enterprise Architecture.” BA Times, 19 June 2019. Web.

    Muller. Jerry Z. “Why performance metrics isn’t always the best way to judge performance.” Fast Company, 3 April 2019. Web.

    Perri, Melissa. “What Is Good Product Strategy?” Melissa Perri, 14 July 2016. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “A Product Canvas for Agile Product Management, Lean UX, Lean Startup.” Roman Pichler, 16 July 2012. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Introducing the Product Canvas.” JAXenter, 15 Jan. 2013. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Roman's Product Canvas: Introduction.” YouTube, uploaded by Roman Pichler, 3 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Agile Vision Board: Vision and Product Strategy.” Roman Pichler, 10 May 2011. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Canvas – Template.” Roman Pichler, 11 Oct. 2016. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Canvas Tutorial V1.0.” LinkedIn SlideShare. Uploaded by Roman Pichler, 14 Feb. 2013. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Vision Board: Introduction.” YouTube uploaded by Roman Pichler, 3 Mar. 2017. Web.

    “Product Canvas PowerPoint Template.” SlideModel, 2019. Web.

    Product Canvas.” SketchBubble, 2019, Web.

    “Product Canvas.” YouTube, uploaded by Wojciech Szramowski, 18 May 2016. Web.

    “Product Roadmap Software to Help You Plan, Visualize, and Share Your Product Roadmap.” Productboard, 2019. Web.

    Roggero, Giulio. “Product Canvas Step-by-Step.” LinkedIn SlideShare, uploaded by Giulio Roggero, 18 May 2013. Web.

    Royce, Dr. Winston W. “Managing the Development of Large Software Systems.” Scf.usc.edu, 1970. Web.

    Ryan, Dustin. “The Product Canvas.” Qdivision, Medium, 20 June 2017. Web.

    Snow, Darryl. “Product Vision Board.” Medium, 6 May 2017. Web.

    Stanislav, Shymansky. “Lean Canvas – a Tool Your Startup Needs Instead of a Business Plan.” Railsware, 12 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Stanislav, Shymansky. “Lean Canvas Examples of Multi-Billion Startups.” Railsware, 20 Feb. 2019. Web.

    “The Product Vision Canvas.” YouTube, Uploaded by Tom Miskin, 20 May 2019. Web.

    Tranter, Leon. “Agile Metrics: the Ultimate Guide.” Extreme Uncertainty, n.d. Web.

    “Using Business Model Canvas to Launch a Technology Startup or Improve Established Operating Model.” AltexSoft, 27 July 2018. Web.

    Veyrat, Pierre. “Lean Business Model Canvas: Examples + 3 Pillars + MVP + Agile.” HEFLO BPM, 10 Mar. 2017. Web.

    “What Are Software Metrics and How Can You Track Them?” Stackify, 16 Sept. 2017. Web

    “What Is a Product Vision?” Aha!, 2019. Web.

    Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}322|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Businesses prioritize speed to market over secure coding and testing practices in the development lifecycle. As a result, vulnerabilities exist naturally in software.
    • To improve overall system security, organizations are leveraging external security researchers to identify and remedy vulnerabilities, so as to mitigate the overall security risk.
    • A primary challenge to developing a coordinated vulnerability disclosure (CVD) program is designing repeatable procedures and scoping the program to the organization’s technical capacity.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program is likely to be tomorrow’s law. With pressures from federal government agencies and recommendations from best-practice frameworks, it is likely that a CVD will be mandated in the future to encourage organizations to be equipped and prepared to respond to externally disclosed vulnerabilities.
    • CVD programs such as bug bounty and vulnerability disclosure programs (VDPs) may reward differently, but they have the same underlying goals. As a result, you don't need dramatically different process documentation.

    Impact and Result

    • Design a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program that reflects business, customer, and regulatory obligations.
    • Develop a program that aligns your resources with the scale of the coordinated vulnerability disclosure program.
    • Follow Info-Tech’s vulnerability disclosure methodology by leveraging our policy, procedure, and workflow templates to get you started.

    Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should design a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess goals

    Define the business, customer, and compliance alignment for the coordinated vulnerability disclosure program.

    • Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program – Phase 1: Assess Goals
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    2. Formalize the program

    Equip your organization for coordinated vulnerability disclosure with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program – Phase 2: Formalize the Program
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Policy
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Plan
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Workflow (Visio)
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Workflow (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Create a Service Management Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}394|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.9/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $71,003 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • Inconsistent adoption of holistic practices has led to a chaotic service delivery model that results in poor customer satisfaction.
    • There is little structure, formalization, or standardization in the way IT services are designed and managed, leading to diminishing service quality and low business satisfaction.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having effective service management practices in place will allow you to pursue activities, such as innovation, and drive the business forward.
    • Addressing foundational elements like business alignment and management practices will enable you to build effective core practices that deliver business value.
    • Providing consistent leadership support and engagement is essential to allow practitioners to focus on delivering expected outcomes.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the foundational and core elements that allow you to build a successful service management practice focused on outcomes.
    • Use Info-Tech’s advice and tools to perform an assessment of your organization’s current state, identify the gaps, and create a roadmap for success.
    • Increase business and customer satisfaction by delivering services focused on creating business value.

    Create a Service Management Roadmap Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why many service management maturity projects fail to address foundational and core elements, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the project

    Kick-off the project and complete the project charter.

    • Create a Service Management Roadmap – Phase 1: Launch Project
    • Service Management Roadmap Project Charter

    2. Assess the current state

    Determine the current state for service management practices.

    • Create a Service Management Roadmap – Phase 2: Assess the Current State
    • Service Management Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Organizational Change Management Capability Assessment Tool
    • Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    3. Build the roadmap

    Build your roadmap with identified initiatives.

    • Create a Service Management Roadmap – Phase 3: Identify the Target State

    4. Build the communication slide

    Create the communication slide that demonstrates how things will change, both short and long term.

    • Create a Service Management Roadmap – Phase 4: Build the Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create a Service Management Roadmap

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Service Management

    The Purpose

    Understand service management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a common understanding of service management, the forces that impact your roadmap, and the Info-Tech Service Management Maturity Model.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand service management.

    1.2 Build a compelling vision and mission.

    Outputs

    Constraints and enablers chart

    Service management vision, mission, and values

    2 Assess the Current State of Service Management

    The Purpose

    Assess the organization’s current service management capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand attitudes, behaviors, and culture.

    Understand governance and process ownership needs.

    Understand strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.

    Defined desired state.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess cultural ABCs.

    2.2 Assess governance needs.

    2.3 Perform SWOT analysis.

    2.4 Define desired state.

    Outputs

    Cultural improvements action items

    Governance action items

    SWOT analysis action items

    Defined desired state

    3 Continue Current-State Assessment

    The Purpose

    Assess the organization’s current service management capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the current maturity of service management processes.

    Understand organizational change management capabilities.

    Activities

    3.1 Perform service management process maturity assessment.

    3.2 Complete OCM capability assessment.

    3.3 Identify roadmap themes.

    Outputs

    Service management process maturity activities

    OCM action items

    Roadmap themes

    4 Build Roadmap and Communication Tool

    The Purpose

    Use outputs from previous steps to build your roadmap and communication one-pagers.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Easy-to-understand roadmap one-pager

    Communication one-pager

    Activities

    4.1 Build roadmap one-pager.

    4.2 Build communication one-pager.

    Outputs

    Service management roadmap

    Service management roadmap – Brought to Life communication slide

    Further reading

    Create a Service Management Roadmap

    Implement service management in an order that makes sense.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "More than 80% of the larger enterprises we’ve worked with start out wanting to develop advanced service management practices without having the cultural and organizational basics or foundational practices fully in place. Although you wouldn’t think this would be the case in large enterprises, again and again IT leaders are underestimating the importance of cultural and foundational aspects such as governance, management practices, and understanding business value. You must have these fundamentals right before moving on."

    Tony Denford,

    Research Director – CIO

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Management

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Create or maintain service management (SM) practices to ensure user-facing services are delivered seamlessly to business users with minimum interruption.
    • Increase the level of reliability and availability of the services provided to the business and improve the relationship and communication between IT and the business.

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Service Management Process Owners

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Formalize, standardize, and improve the maturity of service management practices.
    • Identify new service management initiatives to move IT to the next level of service management maturity.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Inconsistent adoption of holistic practices has led to a chaotic service delivery model that results in poor customer satisfaction.
    • There is little structure, formalization, or standardization in the way IT services are designed and managed, leading to diminishing service quality and low business satisfaction.

    Complication

    • IT organizations want to be seen as strategic partners, but they fail to address the cultural and organizational constraints.
    • Without alignment with the business goals, services often fail to provide the expected value.
    • Traditional service management approaches are not adaptable for new ways of working.

    Resolution

    • Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to create a service management roadmap that will help guide the optimization of your IT services and improve IT’s value to the business.
    • The blueprint will help you right-size your roadmap to best suit your specific needs and goals and will provide structure, ownership, and direction for service management.
    • This blueprint allows you to accurately identify the current state of service management at your organization. Customize the roadmap and create a plan to achieve your target service management state.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Having effective service management practices in place will allow you to pursue activities such as innovation and drive the business forward. Addressing foundational elements like business alignment and management practices will enable you to build effective core practices that deliver business value. Consistent leadership support and engagement is essential to allow practitioners to focus on delivering expected outcomes.

    Poor service management manifests in many different pains across the organization

    Immaturity in service management will not result in one pain – rather, it will create a chaotic environment for the entire organization, crippling IT’s ability to deliver and perform.

    Low Service Management Maturity

    These are some of the pains that can be attributed to poor service management practices.

    • Frequent service-impacting incidents
    • Low satisfaction with the service desk
    • High % of failed deployments
    • Frequent change-related incidents
    • Frequent recurring incidents
    • Inability to find root cause
    • No communication with the business
    • Frequent capacity-related incidents

    And there are many more…

    Mature service management practices are a necessity, not a nice-to-have

    Immature service management practices are one of the biggest hurdles preventing IT from reaching its true potential.

    In 2004, PwC published a report titled “IT Moves from Cost Center to Business Contributor.” However, the 2014-2015 CSC Global CIO Survey showed that a high percentage of IT is still considered a cost center.

    And low maturity of service management practices is inhibiting activities such as agility, DevOps, digitalization, and innovation.

    A pie chart is shown that is titled: Where does IT sit? The chart has 3 sections. One section represents IT and the business have a collaborative partnership 28%. The next section represents at 33% where IT has a formal client/service provider relationship with the business. The last section has 39% where IT is considered as a cost center.
    Source: CSC Global CIO Survey: 2014-2015 “CIOs Emerge as Disruptive Innovators”

    39%: Resources are primarily focused on managing existing IT workloads and keeping the lights on.

    31%: Too much time and too many resources are used to handle urgent incidents and problems.

    There are many misconceptions about what service management is

    Misconception #1: “Service management is a process”

    Effective service management is a journey that encompasses a series of initiatives that improves the value of services delivered.

    Misconception #2: “Service Management = Service Desk”

    Service desk is the foundation, since it is the main end-user touch point, but service management is a set of people and processes required to deliver business-facing services.

    Misconception #3: “Service management is about the ITSM tool”

    The tool is part of the overall service management program, but the people and processes must be in place before implementing.

    Misconception #4: “Service management development is one big initiative”

    Service management development is a series of initiatives that takes into account an organization’s current state, maturity, capacities, and objectives.

    Misconception #5: “Service management processes can be deployed in any order, assuming good planning and design”

    A successful service management program takes into account the dependencies of processes.

    Misconception #6: “Service management is resolving incidents and deploying changes”

    Service management is about delivering high-value and high-quality services.

    Misconception #7: “Service management is not the key determinant of success”

    As an organization progresses on the service management journey, its ability to deliver high-value and high-quality services increases.

    Misconception #8: “Resolving Incidents = Success”

    Preventing incidents is the name of the game.

    Misconception #9: “Service Management = Good Firefighter”

    Service management is about understanding what’s going on with user-facing services and proactively improving service quality.

    Misconception #10: “Service management is about IT and technical services (e.g. servers, network, database)”

    Service management is about business/user-facing services and the value the services provide to the business.

    Service management projects often don’t succeed because they are focused on process rather than outcomes

    Service management projects tend to focus on implementing process without ensuring foundational elements of culture and management practices are strong enough to support the change.

    1. Aligning your service management goals with your organizational objectives leads to better understanding of the expected outcomes.
    2. Understand your customers and what they value, and design your practices to deliver this value.

    3. IT does not know what order is best when implementing new practices or process improvements.
    4. Don't run before you can walk. Fundamental practices must reach the maturity threshold before developing advanced practices. Implement continuous improvement on your existing processes so they continue to support new practices.

    5. IT does not follow best practices when implementing a practice.
    6. Our best-practice research is based on extensive experience working with clients through advisory calls and workshops.

    Info-Tech can help you create a customized, low-effort, and high-value service management roadmap that will shore up any gaps, prove IT’s value, and achieve business satisfaction.

    Info-Tech’s methodology will help you customize your roadmap so the journey is right for you

    With Info-Tech, you will find out where you are, where you want to go, and how you will get there.

    With our methodology, you can expect the following:

    • Eliminate or reduce rework due to poor execution.
    • Identify dependencies/prerequisites and ensure practices are deployed in the correct order, at the correct time, and by the right people.
    • Engage all necessary resources to design and implement required processes.
    • Assess current maturity and capabilities and design the roadmap with these factors in mind.

    Doing it right the first time around

    You will see these benefits at the end

      ✓ Increase the quality of services IT provides to the business.

      ✓ Increase business satisfaction through higher alignment of IT services.

      ✓ Lower cost to design, implement, and manage services.

      ✓ Better resource utilization, including staff, tools, and budget.

    Focus on a strong foundation to build higher value service management practices

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus on behaviors and expected outcomes before processes.

    Foundational elements

    • Operating model facilitates service management goals
    • Culture of service delivery
    • Governance discipline to evaluate, direct, and monitor
    • Management discipline to deliver

    Stabilize

    • Deliver stable, reliable IT services to the business
    • Respond to user requests quickly and efficiently
    • Resolve user issues in a timely manner
    • Deploy changes smoothly and successfully

    Proactive

    • Avoid/prevent service disruptions
    • Improve quality of service (performance, availability, reliability)

    Service Provider

    • Understand business needs
    • Ensure services are available
    • Measure service performance, based on business-oriented metrics

    Strategic Partner

    • Fully aligned with business
    • Drive innovation
    • Drive measurable value

    Info-Tech Insight

    Continued leadership support of the foundational elements will allow delivery teams to provide value to the business. Set the expectation of the desired maturity level and allow teams to innovate.

    Follow our model and get to your target state

    A model is depicted that shows the various target states. There are 6 levels showing in the example, and the example is made to look like a tree with a character watering it. In the roots, the level is labelled foundational. The trunk is labelled the core. The lowest hanging branches of the tree is the stabilize section. Above it is the proactive section. Nearing the top of the tree is the service provider. The canopy of the tree are labelled strategic partner.

    Before moving to advanced service management practices, you must ensure that the foundational and core elements are robust enough to support them. Leadership must nurture these practices to ensure they are sustainable and can support higher value, more mature practices.

    Each step along the way, Info-Tech has the tools to help you

    Phase 1: Launch the Project

    Assemble a team with the right talent and vision to increase the chances of project success.

    Phase 2: Assess Current State

    Understand where you are currently on the service management journey using the maturity assessment tool.

    Phase 3: Build Roadmap

    Based on the assessments, build a roadmap to address areas for improvement.

    Phase 4: Build Communication slide

    Based on the roadmap, define the current state, short- and long-term visions for each major improvement area.

    Info-Tech Deliverables:

    • Project Charter
    • Assessment Tools
    • Roadmap Template
    • Communication Template

    CIO call to action

    Improving the maturity of the organization’s service management practice is a big commitment, and the project can only succeed with active support from senior leadership.

    Ideally, the CIO should be the project sponsor, even the project leader. At a minimum, the CIO needs to perform the following activities:

    1. Walk the talk – demonstrate personal commitment to the project and communicate the benefits of the service management journey to IT and the steering committee.
    2. Improving or adopting any new practice is difficult, especially for a project of this size. Thus, the CIO needs to show visible support for this project through internal communication and dedicated resources to help complete this project.

    3. Select a senior, capable, and results-driven project leader.
    4. Most likely, the implementation of this project will be lengthy and technical in some nature. Therefore, the project leader must have a good understanding of the current IT structure, senior standing within the organization, and the relationship and power in place to propel people into action.

    5. Help to define the target future state of IT’s service management.
    6. Determine a realistic target state for the organization based on current capability and resource/budget restraints.

    7. Conduct periodic follow-up meetings to keep track of progress.
    8. Reinforce or re-emphasize the importance of this project to the organization through various communication channels if needed.

    Stabilizing your environment is a must before establishing any more-mature processes

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Manufacturing

    Source: Engagement

    Challenge

    • The business landscape was rapidly changing for this manufacturer and they wanted to leverage potential cost savings from cloud-first initiatives and consolidate multiple, self-run service delivery teams that were geographically dispersed.

    Solution

    Original Plan

    • Consolidate multiple service delivery teams worldwide and implement service portfolio management.

    Revised Plan with Service Management Roadmap:

    • Markets around the world had very different needs and there was little understanding of what customers value.
    • There was also no understanding of what services were currently being offered within each geography.

    Results

    • Plan was adjusted to understand customer value and services offered.
    • Services were then stabilized and standardized before consolidation.
    • Team also focused on problem maturity and drove a continuous improvement culture and increasing transparency.

    MORAL OF THE STORY:

    Understanding the value of each service allowed the organization to focus effort on high-return activities rather than continuous fire fighting.

    Understand the processes involved in the proactive phase

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Manufacturing

    Source: Engagement

    Challenge

    • Services were fairly stable, but there were significant recurring issues for certain services.
    • The business was not satisfied with the service quality for certain services, due to periodic availability and reliability issues.
    • Customer feedback for the service desk was generally good.

    Solution

    Original Plan

    • Review all service desk and incident management processes to ensure that service issues were handled in an effective manner.

    Revised Plan with Service Management Roadmap:

    • Design and deploy a rigorous problem management process to determine the root cause of recurring issues.
    • Monitor key services for events that may lead to a service outage.

    Results

    • Root cause of recurring issues was determined and fixes were deployed to resolve the underlying cause of the issues.
    • Service quality improved dramatically, resulting in high customer satisfaction.

    MORAL OF THE STORY:

    Make sure that you understand which processes need to be reviewed in order to determine the cause for service instability. Focusing on the proactive processes was the right answer for this company.

    Have the right culture and structure in place before you become a service provider

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source:Journal of American Medical Informatics Association

    Challenge

    • The IT organization wanted to build a service catalog to demonstrate the value of IT to the business.
    • IT was organized in technology silos and focused on applications, not business services.
    • IT services were not aligned with business activities.
    • Relationships with the business were not well established.

    Solution

    Original Plan

    • Create and publish a service catalog.

    Revised Plan: with Service Management Roadmap:

    • Establish relationships with key stakeholders in the business units.
    • Understand how business activities interface with IT services.
    • Lay the groundwork for the service catalog by defining services from the business perspective.

    Results

    • Strong relationships with the business units.
    • Deep understanding of how business activities map to IT services.
    • Service definitions that reflect how the business uses IT services.

    MORAL OF THE STORY:

    Before you build and publish a service catalog, make sure that you understand how the business is using the IT services that you provide.

    Calculate the benefits of using Info-Tech’s methodology

    To measure the value of developing your roadmap using the Info-Tech tools and methodology, you must calculate the effort saved by not having to develop the methods.

    A. How much time will it take to develop an industry-best roadmap using Info-Tech methodology and tools?

    Using Info-Tech’s tools and methodology you can accurately estimate the effort to develop a roadmap using industry-leading research into best practice.

    B. What would be the effort to develop the insight, assess your team, and develop the roadmap?

    This metric represents the time your team would take to be able to effectively assess themselves and develop a roadmap that will lead to service management excellence.

    C. Cost & time saving through Info-Tech’s methodology

    Measured Value

    Step 1: Assess current state

    Cost to assess current state:

    • 5 Directors + 10 Managers x 10 hours at $X an hour = $A

    Step 2: Build the roadmap

    Cost to create service management roadmap:

    • 5 Directors + 10 Managers x 8 hours at $X an hour = $B

    Step 3: Develop the communication slide

    Cost to create roadmaps for phases:

    • 5 Directors + 10 Managers x 6 hours at $X an hour = $C

    Potential financial savings from using Info-Tech resources:

    Estimated cost to do “B” – (Step 1 ($A) + Step 2 ($B) + Step 3 ($C)) = $Total Saving

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keeps us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Create a Service Management Roadmap – project overview


    Launch the project

    Assess the current state

    Build the roadmap

    Build communication slide

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Create a powerful, succinct mission statement

    1.2 Assemble a project team with representatives from all major IT teams

    1.3 Determine project stakeholders and create a communication plan

    1.4 Establish metrics to track the success of the project

    2.1 Assess impacting forces

    2.2 Build service management vision, mission, and values

    2.3 Assess attitudes, behaviors, and culture

    2.4 Assess governance

    2.5 Perform SWOT analysis

    2.6 Identify desired state

    2.7 Assess SM maturity

    2.8 Assess OCM capabilities

    3.1 Document overall themes

    3.2 List individual initiatives

    4.1 Document current state

    4.2 List future vision

    Guided Implementations

    • Kick-off the project
    • Build the project team
    • Complete the charter
    • Understand current state
    • Determine target state
    • Build the roadmap based on current and target state
    • Build short- and long-term visions and initiative list

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1: Launch the project

    Module 2: Assess current service management maturity

    Module 3: Complete the roadmap

    Module 4: Complete the communication slide

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information

    Workshop Day 1

    Workshop Day 2

    Workshop Day 3

    Workshop Day 4

    Activities

    Understand Service Management

    1.1 Understand the concepts and benefits of service management.

    1.2 Understand the changing impacting forces that affect your ability to deliver services.

    1.3 Build a compelling vision and mission for your service management program.

    Assess the Current State of Your Service Management Practice

    2.1 Understand attitudes, behaviors, and culture.

    2.2 Assess governance and process ownership needs.

    2.3 Perform SWOT analysis.

    2.4 Define the desired state.

    Complete Current-State Assessment

    3.1 Conduct service management process maturity assessment.

    3.2 Identify organizational change management capabilities.

    3.3 Identify themes for roadmap.

    Build Roadmap and Communication Tool

    4.1 Build roadmap one-pager.

    4.2 Build roadmap communication one-pager.

    Deliverables

    1. Constraints and enablers chart
    2. Service management vision, mission, and values
    1. Action items for cultural improvements
    2. Action items for governance
    3. Identified improvements from SWOT
    4. Defined desired state
    1. Service Management Process Maturity Assessment
    2. Organizational Change Management Assessment
    1. Service management roadmap
    2. Roadmap Communication Tool in the Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    PHASE 1

    Launch the Project

    Launch the project

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create a powerful, succinct mission statement based on your organization’s goals and objectives.
    • Assemble a project team with representatives from all major IT teams.
    • Determine project stakeholders and create a plan to convey the benefits of this project.
    • Establish metrics to track the success of the project.

    Step Insights

    • The project leader should have a strong relationship with IT and business leaders to maximize the benefit of each initiative in the service management journey.
    • The service management roadmap initiative will touch almost every part of the organization; therefore, it is important to have representation from all impacted stakeholders.
    • The communication slide needs to include the organizational change impact of the roadmap initiatives.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Launch the Project

    Step 1.1 – Kick-off the Project

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Identify current organization pain points relating to poor service management practices
    • Determine high-level objectives
    • Create a mission statement

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify potential team members who could actively contribute to the project
    • Identify stakeholders who have a vested interest in the completion of this project

    With these tools & templates:

    • Service Management Roadmap Project Charter

    Step 1.2 – Complete the Charter

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Create the project team; ensure all major IT teams are represented
    • Review stakeholder list and identify communication messages

    Then complete these activities…

    • Establish metrics to complete project planning
    • Complete the project charter

    With these tools & templates:

    • Service Management Roadmap Project Charter

    Use Info-Tech’s project charter to begin your initiative

    1.1 Service Management Roadmap Project Charter

    The Service Management Roadmap Project Charter is used to govern the initiative throughout the project. It provides the foundation for project communication and monitoring.

    The template has been pre-populated with sample information appropriate for this project. Please review this sample text and change, add, or delete information as required.

    The charter includes the following sections:

    • Mission Statement
    • Goals & Objectives
    • Project Team
    • Project Stakeholders
    • Current State (from phases 2 & 3)
    • Target State (from phases 2 & 3)
    • Target State
    • Metrics
    • Sponsorship Signature
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Service Management Roadmap Project Charter is shown.

    Use Info-Tech’s ready-to-use deliverable to customize your mission statement

    Adapt and personalize Info-Tech’s Service Management Roadmap Mission Statement and Goals & Objectives below to suit your organization’s needs.

    Goals & Objectives

    • Create a plan for implementing service management initiatives that align with the overall goals/objectives for service management.
    • Identify service management initiatives that must be implemented/improved in the short term before deploying more advanced initiatives.
    • Determine the target state for each initiative based on current maturity and level of investment available.
    • Identify service management initiatives and understand dependencies, prerequisites, and level of effort required to implement.
    • Determine the sequence in which initiatives should be deployed.
    • Create a detailed rollout plan that specifies initiatives, time frames, and owners.
    • Engage the right teams and obtain their commitment throughout both the planning and assessment of roadmap initiatives.
    • both the planning and assessment of roadmap initiatives. Obtain support for the completed roadmap from executive stakeholders.

    Example Mission Statement

    To help [Organization Name] develop a set of service management practices that will better address the overarching goals of the IT department.

    To create a roadmap that sequences initiatives in a way that incorporates best practices and takes into consideration dependencies and prerequisites between service management practices.

    To garner support from the right people and obtain executive buy-in for the roadmap.

    Create a well-balanced project team

    The project leader should be a member of your IT department’s senior executive team with goals and objectives that will be impacted by service management implementation. The project leader should possess the following characteristics:

    Leader

    • Influence and impact
    • Comprehensive knowledge of IT and the organization
    • Relationship with senior IT management
    • Ability to get things done

    Team Members

    Identify

    The project team members are the IT managers and directors whose day-to-day lives will be impacted by the service management roadmap and its implementation. The service management initiative will touch almost every IT staff member in the organization; therefore, it is important to have representatives from every single group, including those that are not mentioned. Some examples of individuals you should consider for your team:

    • Service Delivery Managers
    • Director/Manager of Applications
    • Director/Manager of Infrastructure
    • Director/Manager of Service Desk
    • Business Relationship Managers
    • Project Management Office

    Engage & Communicate

    You want to engage your project participants in the planning process as much as possible. They should be involved in the current-state assessment, the establishment of goals and objectives, and the development of your target state.

    To sell this project, identify and articulate how this project and/or process will improve the quality of their job. For example, a formal incident management process will benefit people working at the service desk or on the applications or infrastructure teams. Helping them understand the gains will help to secure their support throughout the long implementation process by giving them a sense of ownership.

    The project stakeholders should also be project team members

    When managing stakeholders, it is important to help them understand their stake in the project as well as their own personal gain that will come out of this project.

    For many of the stakeholders, they also play a critical role in the development of this project.

    Role & Benefits

    • CIO
    • The CIO should be actively involved in the planning stage to help determine current and target stage.

      The CIO also needs to promote and sell the project to the IT team so they can understand that higher maturity of service management practices will allow IT to be seen as a partner to the business, giving IT a seat at the table during decision making.

    • Service Delivery Managers/Process Owners
    • Service Delivery Managers are directly responsible for the quality and value of services provided to the business owners. Thus, the Service Delivery Managers have a very high stake in the project and should be considered for the role of project leader.

      Service Delivery Managers need to work closely with the process owners of each service management process to ensure clear objectives are established and there is a common understanding of what needs to be achieved.

    • IT Steering Committee
    • The Committee should be informed and periodically updated about the progress of the project.

    • Manager/Director – Service Desk
    • The Manager of the Service Desk should participate closely in the development of fundamental service management processes, such as service desk, incident management, and problem management.

      Having a more established process in place will create structure, governance, and reduce service desk staff headaches so they can handle requests or incidents more efficiently.

    • Manager/Director –Applications & Infrastructure
    • The Manager of Applications and Infrastructure should be heavily relied on for their knowledge of how technology ties into the organization. They should be consulted regularly for each of the processes.

      This project will also benefit them directly, such as improving the process to deploy a fix into the environment or manage the capacity of the infrastructure.

    • Business Relationship Manager
    • As the IT organization moves up the maturity ladder, the Business Relationship Manager will play a fundamental role in the more advanced processes, such as business relationship management, demand management, and portfolio management.

      This project will be an great opportunity for the Business Relationship Manager to demonstrate their value and their knowledge of how to align IT objectives with business vision.

    Ensure you get the entire IT organization on board for the project with a well-practiced change message

    Getting the IT team on board will greatly maximize the project’s chance of success.

    One of the top challenges for organizations embarking on a service management journey is to manage the magnitude of the project. To ensure the message is not lost, communicate this roadmap in two steps.

    1. Communicate the roadmap initiative

    The most important message to send to the IT organization is that this project will benefit them directly. Articulate the pains that IT is currently experiencing and explain that through more mature service management, these pains can be greatly reduced and IT can start to earn a place at the table with the business.

    2. Communicate the implementation of each process separately

    The communication of process implementation should be done separately and at the beginning of each implementation. This is to ensure that IT staff do not feel overwhelmed or overloaded. It also helps to keep the project more manageable for the project team.

    Continuously monitor feedback and address concerns throughout the entire process

    • Host lunch and learns to provide updates on the service management initiative to the entire IT team.
    • Understand if there are any major roadblocks and facilitate discussions on how to overcome them.

    Articulate the service management initiative to the IT organization

    Spread the word and bring attention to your change message through effective mediums and organizational changes.

    Key aspects of a communication plan

    The methods of communication (e.g. newsletters, email broadcast, news of the day, automated messages) notify users of implementation.

    In addition, it is important to know who will deliver the message (delivery strategy). You need IT executives to deliver the message – work hard on obtaining their support as they are the ones communicating to their staff and should be your project champions.

    Anticipate organizational changes

    The implementation of the service management roadmap will most likely lead to organizational changes in terms of structure, roles, and responsibilities. Therefore, the team should be prepared to communicate the value that these changes will bring.

    Communicating Change

    • What is the change?
    • Why are we doing it?
    • How are we going to go about it?
    • What are we trying to achieve?
    • How often will we be updated?

    The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change

    Create a project communication plan for your stakeholders

    This project cannot be successfully completed without the support of senior IT management.

    1. After the CIO has introduced this project through management meetings or informal conversation, find out how each IT leader feels about this project. You need to make sure the directors and managers of each IT team, especially the directors of application and infrastructure, are on board.
    2. After the meeting, the project leader should seek out the major stakeholders (particularly the heads of applications and infrastructure) and validate their level of support through formal or informal meetings. Create a list documenting the major stakeholders, their level of support, and how the project team will work to gain their approval.
    3. For each identified stakeholder, create a custom communication plan based on their role. For example, if the director of infrastructure is not a supporter, demonstrate how this project will enable them to better understand how to improve service quality. Provide periodic reporting or meetings to update the director on project progress.

    INPUT

    • A collaborative discussion between team members

    OUTPUT

    • Thorough briefing for project launch
    • A committed team

    Materials

    • Communication message and plan
    • Metric tracking

    Participants

    • Project leader
    • Core project team

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1

    A screenshot of activity 1.1 is shown.

    Create a powerful, succinct mission statement

    Using Info-Tech’s sample mission statement as a guide, build your mission statement based on the objectives of this project and the benefits that this project will achieve. Keep the mission statement short and clear.

    1.2

    A screenshot of activity 1.2 is shown.

    Assemble the project team

    Create a project team with representatives from all major IT teams. Engage and communicate to the project team early and proactively.

    1.3

    A screenshot of activity 1.3 is shown.

    Identify project stakeholders and create a communication plan

    Info-Tech will help you identify key stakeholders who have a vested interest in the success of the project. Determine the communication message that will best gain their support.

    1.4

    A screenshot of activity 1.4 is shown.

    Use metrics to track the success of the project

    The onsite analyst will help the project team determine the appropriate metrics to measure the success of this project.

    PHASE 2

    Assess Your Current Service Management State

    Assess your current state

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Use Info-Tech’s Service Management Maturity Assessment Tool to determine your overall practice maturity level.
    • Understand your level of completeness for each individual practice.
    • Understand the three major phases involved in the service management journey; know the symptoms of each phase and how they affect your target state selection.

    Step Insights

    • To determine the real maturity of your service management practices, you should focus on the results and output of the practice, rather than the activities performed for each process.
    • Focus on phase-level maturity as opposed to the level of completeness for each individual process.

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Determine Your Service Management Current State

    Step 2.1 – Assess Impacting Forces

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss the impacting forces that can affect the success of your service management program
    • Identify internal and external constraints and enablers
    • Review and interpret how to leverage or mitigate these elements

    Then complete these activities…

    • Present the findings of the organizational context
    • Facilitate a discussion and create consensus amongst the project team members on where the organization should start

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Step 2.2 – Build Vision, Mission, and Values

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your service management vision and mission statement and discuss the values

    Then complete these activities…

    • Socialize the vision, mission, and values to ensure they are aligned with overall organizational vision. Then, set the expectations for behavior aligned with the vision, mission, and values

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Step 2.3 – Assess Attitudes, Behaviors, and Culture

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss tactics for addressing negative attitudes, behaviors, or culture identified

    Then complete these activities…

    • Add items to be addressed to roadmap

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Step 2.4 – Assess Governance Needs

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Understand the typical types of governance structure and the differences between management and governance
    • Choose the management structure required for your organization

    Then complete these activities…

    • Determine actions required to establish an effective governance structure and add items to be addressed to roadmap

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Step 2.5 – Perform SWOT Analysis

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss SWOT analysis results and tactics for addressing within the roadmap

    Then complete these activities…

    • Add items to be addressed to roadmap

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Step 2.6 – Identify Desired State

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss desired state and commitment needed to achieve aspects of the desired state

    Then complete these activities…

    • Use the desired state to critically assess the current state of your service management practices and whether they are achieving the desired outcomes
    • Prep for the SM maturity assessment

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Step 2.7 – Perform SM Maturity Assessment

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review and interpret the output from your service management maturity assessment

    Then complete these activities…

    • Add items to be addressed to roadmap

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Service Management Maturity Assessment

    Step 2.8 – Review OCM Capabilities

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review and interpret the output from your organizational change management maturity assessment

    Then complete these activities…

    • Add items to be addressed to roadmap

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Organizational Change Management Assessment

    Understand and assess impacting forces – constraints and enablers

    Constraints and enablers are organizational and behavioral triggers that directly impact your ability and approach to establishing Service Management practices.

    A model is shown to demonstrate the possibe constraints and enablers on your service management program. It incorporates available resources, the environment, management practices, and available technologies.

    Effective service management requires a mix of different approaches and practices that best fit your organization. There’s not a one-size-fits-all solution. Consider the resources, environment, emerging technologies, and management practices facing your organization. What items can you leverage or use to mitigate to move your service management program forward?

    Use Info-Tech’s “Organizational Context” template to list the constraints and enablers affecting your service management

    The Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template will help you understand the business environment you need to consider as you build out your roadmap.

    Discuss and document constraints and enablers related to the business environment, available resources, management practices, and emerging technologies. Any constraints will need to be addressed within your roadmap and enablers should be leveraged to maximize your results.


    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template is shown.

    Document constraints and enablers

    1. Discuss and document the constrains and enablers for each aspect of the management mesh: environment, resources, management practices, or technology.
    2. Use this as a thought provoker in later exercises.

    INPUT

    • A collaborative discussion

    OUTPUT

    • Organizational context constraints and enablers

    Materials

    • Whiteboards or flip charts

    Participants

    • All stakeholders

    Build compelling vision and mission statements to set the direction of your service management program

    While you are articulating the vision and mission, think about the values you want the team to display. Being explicit can be a powerful tool to create alignment.

    A vision statement describes the intended state of your service management organization, expressed in the present tense.

    A mission statement describes why your service management organization exists.

    Your organizational values state how you will deliver services.

    Use Info-Tech’s “Vision, Mission, and Values” template to set the aspiration & purpose of your service management practice

    The Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template will help you document your vision for service management, the purpose of the program, and the values you want to see demonstrated.

    If the team cannot gain agreement on their reason for being, it will be difficult to make traction on the roadmap items. A concise and compelling statement can set the direction for desired behavior and help team members align with the vision when trying to make ground-level decisions. It can also be used to hold each other accountable when undesirable behavior emerges. It should be revised from time to time, when the environment changes, but a well-written statement should stand the test of time.

    A screenshot of the Service Management Roadmap Presentation Temaplate is shown. Specifically it is showing the section on the vision, mission, and values results.

    Document your organization’s vision, mission , and values

    1. Vision: Identify your desired target state, consider the details of that target state, and create a vision statement.
    2. Mission: Consider the fundamental purpose of your SM program and craft a statement of purpose.
    3. Values: As you work through the vision and mission, identify values that your organization prides itself in or has the aspiration for.
    4. Discuss common themes and then develop a concise vision statement and mission statement that incorporates the group’s ideas.

    INPUT

    • A collaborative discussion

    OUTPUT

    • Vision statement
    • Mission statement
    • Organizational values

    Materials

    • Whiteboards or flip charts
    • Sample vision and mission statements

    Participants

    • All stakeholders
    • Senior leadership

    Understanding attitude, behavior, and culture

    Attitude

    • What people think and feel. It can be seen in their demeanor and how they react to change initiatives, colleagues, and users.

    Any form of organizational change involves adjusting people’s attitudes, creating buy-in and commitment. You need to identify and address attitudes that can lead to negative behaviors and actions or that are counter-productive. It must be made visible and related to your desired behavior.

    Behaviour

    • What people do. This is influenced by attitude and the culture of the organization.

    To implement change within IT, especially at a tactical level, both IT and organizational behavior needs to change. This is relevant because people don’t like to change and will resist in an active or passive way unless you can sell the need, value, and benefit of changing their behavior.

    Culture

    • The accepted and understood ways of working in an organization. The values and standards that people find normal and what would be tacitly identified to new resources.

    The organizational or corporate “attitude,” the impact on employee behavior and attitude is often not fully understood. Culture is an invisible element, which makes it difficult to identify, but it has a strong impact and must be addressed to successfully embed any organizational change or strategy.

    Culture is a critical and under-addressed success factor

    43% of CIOs cited resistance to change as the top impediment to a successful digital strategy.

    CIO.com

    75% of organizations cannot identify or articulate their culture or its impact.

    Info-Tech

    “Shortcomings in organizational culture are one of the main barriers to company success in the digital age.”

    McKinsey – “Culture for a digital age”

    Examples of how they apply

    Attitude

    • “I’ll believe that when I see it”
    • Positive outlook on new ideas and changes

    Behaviour

    • Saying you’ll follow a new process but not doing so
    • Choosing not to document a resolution approach or updating a knowledge article, despite being asked

    Culture

    • Hero culture (knowledge is power)
    • Blame culture (finger pointing)
    • Collaborative culture (people rally and work together)

    Why have we failed to address attitude, behavior, and culture?

      ✓ While there is attention and better understanding of these areas, very little effort is made to actually solve these challenges.

      ✓ The impact is not well understood.

      ✓ The lack of tangible and visible factors makes it difficult to identify.

      ✓ There is a lack of proper guidance, leadership skills, and governance to address these in the right places.

      ✓ Addressing these issues has to be done proactively, with intent, rigor, and discipline, in order to be successful.

      ✓ We ignore it (head in the sand and hoping it will fix itself).

    Avoidance has been a common strategy for addressing behavior and culture in organizations.

    Use Info-Tech’s “Culture and Environment” template to identify cultural constraints that should be addressed in roadmap

    The Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template will help you document attitude, behavior, and culture constraints.

    Discuss as a team attitudes, behaviors, and cultural aspects that can either hinder or be leveraged to support your vision for the service management program. Capture all items that need to be addressed in the roadmap.

    A screenshot of the Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template is shown. Specifically showing the culture and environment slide.

    Document your organization’s attitudes, behaviors, and culture

    1. Discuss and document positive and negative aspects of attitude, behavior, or culture within your organization.
    2. Identify the items that need to be addressed as part of your roadmap.

    INPUT

    • A collaborative discussion

    OUTPUT

    • Culture and environment worksheet

    Materials

    • Whiteboards or flip charts

    Participants

    • All stakeholders

    The relationship to governance

    Attitude, behavior, and culture are still underestimated as core success factors in governance and management.

    Behavior is a key enabler of good governance. Leading by example and modeling behavior has a cascading impact on shifting culture, reinforcing the importance of change through adherence.

    Executive leadership and governing bodies must lead and support cultural change.

    Key Points

    • Less than 25% of organizations have formal IT governance in place (ITSM Tools).
    • Governance tends to focus on risk and compliance (controls), but forgets the impact of value and performance.

    Lack of oversight often limits the value of service management implementations

    Organizations often fail to move beyond risk mitigation, losing focus of the goals of their service management practices and the capabilities required to produce value.

    Risk Mitigation

    • Stabilize IT
    • Service Desk
    • Incident Management
    • Change Management

    Gap

    • Organizational alignment through governance
    • Disciplined focus on goals of SM

    Value Production

    • Value that meets business and consumer needs

    This creates a situation where service management activities and roadmaps focus on adjusting and tweaking process areas that no longer support how the organization needs to work.

    How does establishing governance for service management provide value?

    Governance of service management is a gap in most organizations, which leads to much of the failure and lack of value from service management processes and activities.

    Once in place, effective governance enables success for organizations by:

    1. Ensuring service management processes improve business value
    2. Measuring and confirming the value of the service management investment
    3. Driving a focus on outcome and impact instead of simply process adherence
    4. Looking at the integrated impact of service management in order to ensure focused prioritization of work
    5. Driving customer-experience focus within organizations
    6. Ensuring quality is achieved and addressing quality impacts and dependencies between processes

    Four common service management process ownership models

    Your ownership structure largely defines how processes will need to be implemented, maintained, and improved. It has a strong impact on their ability to integrate and how other teams perceive their involvement.

    An organizational structure is shown. In the image is an arrow, with the tip facing in the right direction. The left side of the arrow is labelled: Traditional, and the right side is labelled: Complex. The four models are noted along the arrow. Starting on the left side and going to the right are: Distributed Process Ownership, Centralized Process Ownership, Federated Process Ownership, and Service Management Office.

    Most organizations are somewhere within this spectrum of four core ownership models, usually having some combination of shared traits between the two models that are closest to them on the scale.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The organizational structure that is best for you depends on your needs, and one is not necessarily better than another. The next four slides describe when each ownership level is most appropriate.

    Distributed process ownership

    Distributed process ownership is usually evident when organizations initially establish their service management practices. The processes are assigned to a specific group, who assumes some level of ownership over its execution.

    The distributed process ownership model is shown. CIO is listed at the top with four branches leading out from below it. The four branches are labelled: Service Desk, Operations, Applications, and Security.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This model is often a suitable approach for initial implementations or where it may be difficult to move out of siloes within the organization’s structure or culture.

    Centralized process ownership

    Centralized process ownership usually becomes necessary for organizations as they move into a more functional structure. It starts to drive management of processes horizontally across the organization while still retaining functional management control.

    A centralized process ownership model is shown. The CIO is at the top and the following are branches below it: Service Manager, Support, Middleware, Development, and Infrastructure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This model is often suitable for maturing organizations that are starting to look at process integration and shared service outcomes and accountability.

    Federated process ownership

    Federated process ownership allows for global control and regional variation, and it supports product orientation and Agile/DevOps principles

    A federated process ownership model is shown. The Sponsor/CIO is at the top, with the ITSM Executive below it. Below that level is the: Process Owner, Process Manager, and Process Manager.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Federated process ownership is usually evident in organizations that have an international or multi-regional presence.

    Service management office (SMO)

    SMO structures tend to occur in highly mature organizations, where service management responsibility is seen as an enterprise accountability.

    A service management office model is shown. The CIO is at the top with the following branches below it: SMO, End-User Services, Infra., Apps., and Architecture.

    Info-Tech Insight

    SMOs are suitable for organizations with a defined IT and organizational strategy. A SMO supports integration with other enterprise practices like enterprise architecture and the PMO.

    Determine which process ownership and governance model works best for your organization

    The Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template will help you document process ownership and governance model

    Example:

    Key Goals:

      ☐ Own accountability for changes to core processes

      ☐ Understand systemic nature and dependencies related to processes and services

      ☐ Approve and prioritize improvement and CSI initiatives related to processes and services

      ☐ Evaluate success of initiative outcomes based on defined benefits and expectations

      ☐ Own Service Management and Governance processes and policies

      ☐ Report into ITSM executive or equivalent body

    Membership:

      ☐ Process Owners, SM Owner, Tool Owner/Liaison, Audit

    Discuss as a team which process ownership model works for your organization. Determine who will govern the service management practice. Determine items that should be identified in your roadmap to address governance and process ownership gaps.

    Use Info-Tech’s “SWOT” template to identify strengths, weaknesses, opportunities & threats that should be addressed

    The Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template will help you document items from your SWOT analysis.

    A screenshot of the Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template is shown. Specifically the SWOT section is shown.

    Brainstorm the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats related to resources, environment, technology, and management practices. Add items that need to be addressed to your roadmap.

    Perform a SWOT analysis

    1. Brainstorm each aspect of the SWOT with an emphasis on:
    • Resources
    • Environment
    • Technologies
    • Management Practices
  • Record your ideas on a flip chart or whiteboard.
  • Add items to be addressed to the roadmap.
  • INPUT

    • A collaborative discussion

    OUTPUT

    • SWOT analysis
    • Priority items identified

    Materials

    • Whiteboards or flip charts

    Participants

    • All stakeholders

    Indicate desired maturity level for your service management program to be successful

    Discuss the various maturity levels and choose a desired level that would meet business needs.

    The desired maturity model is depicted.

    INPUT

    • A collaborative discussion

    OUTPUT

    • Desired state of service management maturity

    Materials

    • None

    Participants

    • All stakeholders

    Use Info-Tech’s Service Management Process Maturity Assessment Tool to understand your current state

    The Service Management Process Maturity Assessment Tool will help you understand the true state of your service management.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Service Management Process Assessment Tool is shown.

    Part 1, Part 2, and Part 3 tabs

    These three worksheets contain questions that will determine the overall maturity of your service management processes. There are multiple sections of questions focused on different processes. It is very important that you start from Part 1 and continue the questions sequentially.

    Results tab

    The Results tab will display the current state of your service management processes as well as the percentage of completion for each individual process.

    Complete the service management process maturity assessment

    The current-state assessment will be the foundation of building your roadmap, so pay close attention to the questions and answer them truthfully.

    1. Start with tab 1 in the Service Management Process Maturity Assessment Tool. Remember to read the questions carefully and always use the feedback obtained through the end-user survey to help you determine the answer.
    2. In the “Degree of Process Completeness” column, use the drop-down menu to input the results solicited from the goals and objectives meeting you held with your project participants.
    3. A screenshot of Info-Tech's Service Management Process Assessment Tool is shown. Tab 1 is shown.
    4. Host a meeting with all participants following completion of the survey and have them bring their results. Discuss in a round-table setting, keeping a master sheet of agreed upon results.

    INPUT

    • Service Management Process Maturity Assessment Tool questions

    OUTPUT

    • Determination of current state

    Materials

    • Service Management Process Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants

    • Project team members

    Review the results of your current-state assessment

    At the end of the assessment, the Results tab will have action items you could perform to close the gaps identified by the process assessment tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Service Management Process Maturity Assessment Results is shown.

    INPUT

    • Maturity assessment results

    OUTPUT

    • Determination of overall and individual practice maturity

    Materials

    • Service Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants

    • Project team members

    Use Info-Tech’s OCM Capability Assessment tool to understand your current state

    The Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment tool will help you understand the true state of your organizational change management capabilities.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment

    Complete the Capabilities tab to capture the current state for organizational change management. Review the Results tab for interpretation of the capabilities. Review the Recommendations tab for actions to address low areas of maturity.

    Complete the OCM capability assessment

    1. Open Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment tool.
    2. Come to consensus on the most appropriate answer for each question. Use the 80/20 rule.
    3. Review result charts and discuss findings.
    4. Identify roadmap items based on maturity assessment.

    INPUT

    • A collaborative discussion

    OUTPUT

    • OCM Assessment tool
    • OCM assessment results

    Materials

    • OCM Capabilities Assessment tool

    Participants

    • All stakeholders

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    A screenshot of activity 2.1 is shown.

    Create a powerful, succinct mission statement

    Using Info-Tech’s sample mission statement as a guide, build your mission statement based on the objectives of this project and the benefits that this project will achieve. Keep the mission statement short and clear.

    2.2

    A screenshot of activity 2.2 is shown.

    Complete the assessment

    With the project team in the room, go through all three parts of the assessment with consideration of the feedback received from the business.

    2.3

    A screenshot of activity 2.3 is shown.

    Interpret the results of the assessment

    The Info-Tech onsite analyst will facilitate a discussion on the overall maturity of your service management practices and individual process maturity. Are there any surprises? Are the results reflective of current service delivery maturity?

    PHASE 3

    Build Your Service Management Roadmap

    Build Roadmap

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Document your vision and mission on the roadmap one-pager.
    • Using the inputs from the current-state assessments, identify the key themes required by your organization.
    • Identify individual initiatives needed to address key themes.

    Step Insights

    • Using the Info-Tech thought model, address foundational gaps early in your roadmap and establish the management methods to continuously make them more robust.
    • If any of the core practices are not meeting the vision for your service management program, be sure to address these items before moving on to more advanced service management practices or processes.
    • Make sure the story you are telling with your roadmap is aligned to the overall organizational goals.

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Determine Your Service Management Target State

    Step 3.1 – Document the Overall Themes

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the outputs from your current-state assessments to identify themes for areas that need to be included in your roadmap

    Then complete these activities…

    • Ensure foundational elements are solid by adding any gaps to the roadmap
    • Identify any changes needed to management practices to ensure continuous improvement

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Step 3.2 – Determine Individual Initiatives

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Determine the individual initiatives needed to close the gaps between the current state and the vision

    Then complete these activities…

    • Finalize and document roadmap for executive socialization

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Focus on a strong foundation to build higher value service management practices

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus on behaviors and expected outcomes before processes.

    Foundational elements

    • Operating model facilitates service management goals
    • Culture of service delivery
    • Governance discipline to evaluate, direct, and monitor
    • Management discipline to deliver

    Stabilize

    • Deliver stable, reliable IT services to the business
    • Respond to user requests quickly and efficiently
    • Resolve user issues in a timely manner
    • Deploy changes smoothly and successfully

    Proactive

    • Avoid/prevent service disruptions
    • Improve quality of service (performance, availability, reliability)

    Service Provider

    • Understand business needs
    • Ensure services are available
    • Measure service performance, based on business-oriented metrics

    Strategic Partner

    • Fully aligned with business
    • Drive innovation
    • Drive measurable value

    Info-Tech Insight

    Continued leadership support of the foundational elements will allow delivery teams to provide value to the business. Set the expectation of the desired maturity level and allow teams to innovate.

    Identify themes that can help you build a strong foundation before moving to higher level practices

    A model is depicted that shows the various target states. There are 6 levels showing in the example, and the example is made to look like a tree with a character watering it. In the roots, the level is labelled foundational. The trunk is labelled the core. The lowest hanging branches of the tree is the stabilize section. Above it is the proactive section. Nearing the top of the tree is the service provider. The top most branches of the tree is labelled strategic partner.

    Before moving to advanced service management practices, you must ensure that the foundational and core elements are robust enough to support them. Leadership must nurture these practices to ensure they are sustainable and can support higher value, more mature practices.

    Use Info-Tech’s “Service Management Roadmap” template to document your vision, themes and initiatives

    The Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template contains a roadmap template to help communicate your vision, themes to be addressed, and initiatives

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Service Management Roadmap template is shown.

    Working from the lower maturity items to the higher value practices, identify logical groupings of initiatives into themes. This will aid in communicating the reasons for the needed changes. List the individual initiatives below the themes. Adding the service management vision and mission statements can help readers understand the roadmap.

    Document your service management roadmap

    1. Document the service management vision and mission on the roadmap template.
    2. Identify, from the assessments, areas that need to be improved or implemented.
    3. Group the individual initiatives into logical themes that can ease communication of what needs to happen.
    4. Document the individual initiatives.
    5. Document in terms that business partners and executive sponsors can understand.

    INPUT

    • Current-state assessment outputs
    • Maturity model

    OUTPUT

    • Service management roadmap

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Roadmap template

    Participants

    • All stakeholders

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    A screenshot of activity 3.1 is shown.

    Identify themes to address items from the foundational level up to higher value service management practices

    Identify easily understood themes that will help others understand the expected outcomes within your organization.

    A screenshot of activity 3.2 is shown.

    Document individual initiatives that contribute to the themes

    Identify specific activities that will close gaps identified in the assessments.

    PHASE 2

    Build Communication Slide

    Complete your service management roadmap

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Use the current-state assessment exercises to document the state of your service management practices. Document examples of the behaviors that are currently seen.
    • Document the expected short-term gains. Describe how you want the behaviors to change.
    • Document the long-term vision for each item and describe the benefits you expect to see from addressing each theme.

    Step Insights

    • Use the communication template to acknowledge the areas that need to be improved and paint the short- and long-term vision for the improvements to be made through executing the roadmap.
    • Write it in business terms so that it can be used widely to gain acceptance of the upcoming changes that need to occur.
    • Include specific areas that need to be fixed to make it more tangible.
    • Adding the values from the vision, mission, and values exercise can also help you set expectations about how the team will behave as they move towards the longer-term vision.

    Phase 4 Outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 4: Build the Service Management Roadmap

    Step 4.1: Document the Current State

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the pain points identified from the current state analysis
    • Discuss tactics to address specific pain points

    Then complete these activities…

    • Socialize the pain points within the service delivery teams to ensure nothing is being misrepresented
    • Gather ideas for the future state

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Step 4.2: List the Future Vision

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review short- and long-term vision for improvements for the pain points identified in the current state analysis

    Then complete these activities…

    • Prepare to socialize the roadmap
    • Ensure long-term vision is aligned with organizational objectives

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Use Info-Tech’s “Service Management Roadmap – Brought to Life” template to paint a picture of the future state

    The Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template contains a communication template to help communicate your vision of the future state

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Service Management Roadmap - Brought to Life template

    Use this template to demonstrate how existing pain points to delivering services will improve over time by painting a near- and long-term picture of how things will change. Also list specific initiatives that will be launched to affect the changes. Listing the values identified in the vision, mission, and values exercise will also demonstrate the team’s commitment to changing behavior to create better outcomes.

    Document your current state and list initiatives to address them

    1. Use the previous assessments and feedback from business or customers to identify current behaviors that need addressing.
    2. Focus on high-impact items for this document, not an extensive list.
    3. An example of step 1 and 2 are shown.
    4. List the initiatives or actions that will be used to address the specific pain points.

    An example of areas for improvement.

    INPUT

    • Current-state assessment outputs
    • Feedback from business

    OUTPUT

    • Service Management Roadmap Communication Tool, in the Service Management Roadmap Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Roadmap template

    Participants

    • All stakeholders

    Document your future state

    An example of document your furture state is shown.

    1. For each pain point document the expected behaviors, both short term and longer term.
    2. Write in terms that allow readers to understand what to expect from your service management practice.

    INPUT

    • Current-state assessment outputs
    • Feedback from business

    OUTPUT

    • Service Management Roadmap Communication Tool, in the Service Management Roadmap Presentation Template

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Roadmap template

    Participants

    • All stakeholders

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    4.1

    A screenshot of activity 4.1 is shown.

    Identify the pain points and initiatives to address them

    Identify items that the business can relate to and initiatives or actions to address them.

    4.2

    A screenshot of activity 4.2 is shown.

    Identify short- and long-term expectations for service management

    Communicate the benefits of executing the roadmap both short- and long-term gains.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Valence Howden

    Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, CIO Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Valence helps organizations be successful through optimizing how they govern, design, and execute strategies, and how they drive service excellence in all work. With 30 years of IT experience in the public and private sectors, he has developed experience in many information management and technology domains, with focus in service management, enterprise and IT governance, development and execution of strategy, risk management, metrics design and process design, and implementation and improvement.

    Photo of Graham Price

    Graham Price, Research Director, CIO Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Graham has an extensive background in IT service management across various industries with over 25 years of experience. He was a principal consultant for 17 years, partnering with Fortune 500 clients throughout North America, leveraging and integrating industry best practices in IT service management, service catalog, business relationship management, IT strategy, governance, and Lean IT and Agile.

    Photo of Sharon Foltz

    Sharon Foltz, Senior Workshop Director

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Sharon is a Senior Workshop Director at Info-Tech Research Group. She focuses on bringing high value to members via leveraging Info-Tech’s blueprints and other resources enhanced with her breadth and depth of skills and expertise. Sharon has spent over 15 years in various IT roles in leading companies within the United States. She has strong experience in organizational change management, program and project management, service management, product management, team leadership, strategic planning, and CRM across various global organizations.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility

    Extend the Service Desk to the Enterprise

    Bibliography

    • “CIOs Emerge as Disruptive Innovators.” CSC Global CIO Survey: 2014-2015. Web.
    • “Digital Transformation: How Is Your Organization Adapting?” CIO.com, 2018. Web.
    • Goran, Julie, Laura LaBerge, and Ramesh Srinivasan. “Culture for a digital age.” McKinsey, July 2017. Web.
    • The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change. Cornelius & Associates, 14 April 2012.
    • Wilkinson, Paul. “Culture, Ethics, and Behavior – Why Are We Still Struggling?” ITSM Tools, 5 July 2018. Web.

    Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}546|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,184 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • Organizations have been trying to promote equality for many years. Diversity and inclusion strategies and a myriad of programs have been implemented in companies across the world. Despite the attempts, many organizations still struggle to ensure that their workforce is representative of the populations they support or want to support.
    • IT brings another twist. Many IT companies and departments are based on the culture of white males, and underrepresented ethnic communities find it more of a challenge to fit in.
    • This sometimes means that talented minorities are less incentivized to join or stay in technology.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Diversity and inclusion cannot be a one-time campaign or a one-off initiative.
    • For real change to happen, every leader needs to internalize the value of creating and retaining diverse teams.

    Impact and Result

    • To stay competitive, IT leaders need to be more involved and commit to a plan to recruit and retain people of color in their departments and organizations. A diverse team is an answer to innovation that can differentiate your company.
    • Treat recruiting and retaining a diverse team as a business challenge that requires full engagement. Info-Tech offers a targeted solution that will help IT leaders build a plan to attract, recruit, engage, and retain people of color.

    Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should recruit and retain people of color in your IT department or organization, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in this endeavor.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Recruit people of color in IT

    Diverse teams are necessary to foster creativity and guide business strategies. Overcome limitations by recruiting people of color and creating a diverse workforce.

    • Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT – Phase 1: Recruit People of Color in IT
    • Support Plan
    • IT Behavioral Interview Question Library

    2. Retain people of color in IT

    Underrepresented employees benefit from an expansive culture. Create an inclusive environment and retain people of color and promote value within your organization.

    • Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT – Phase 2: Retain People of Color in IT

    Infographic

    Workshop: Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Setting the Stage

    The Purpose

    Introduce challenges and concerns around recruiting and retaining people of color.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a sense of direction.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduction to diversity conversations.

    1.2 Assess areas to focus on and determine what is right, wrong, missing, and confusing.

    1.3 Obtain feedback from your team about the benefits of working at your organization.

    1.4 Establish your employee value proposition (EVP).

    1.5 Discuss and establish your recruitment goals.

    Outputs

    Current State Analysis

    Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing Quadrant

    Draft EVP

    Recruitment Goals

    2 Refine Your Recruitment Process

    The Purpose

    Identify areas in your current recruitment process that are preventing you from hiring people of color.

    Establish a plan to make improvements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Optimized recruitment process

    Activities

    2.1 Brainstorm and research community partners.

    2.2 Review current job descriptions and equity statement.

    2.3 Update job description template and equity statement.

    2.4 Set team structure for interview and assessment.

    2.5 Identify decision-making structure.

    Outputs

    List of community partners

    Updated job description template

    Updated equity statement

    Interview and assessment structure

    Behavioral Question Library

    3 Culture and Management

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for an inclusive culture where your managers are supported.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Awareness of how to better support employees of color.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss engagement and belonging.

    3.2 Augment your onboarding materials.

    3.3 Create an inclusive culture plan.

    3.4 Determine how to support your management team.

    Outputs

    List of onboarding content

    Inclusive culture plan

    Management support plan

    4 Close the Loop

    The Purpose

    Establish mechanisms to gain feedback from your employees and act on them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize the plan to create your diverse and inclusive workforce.

    Activities

    4.1 Ask and listen: determine what to ask your employees.

    4.2 Create your roadmap.

    4.3 Wrap-up and next steps.

    Outputs

    List of survey questions

    Roadmap

    Completed support plan

    Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}339|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,449 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Organizations are struggling to understand what's involved in the analytics developer lifecycle to generate reusable insights faster.
    • Discover what it takes to become a citizen analytics developer. Identify the proper way to enable self-serve analytics.
    • Self-serve business intelligence/analytics is misunderstood and confusing to the business, especially with regards to the roles and responsibilities of IT and the business.
    • End users are dissatisfied due to a lack of access to the data and the absence of a single source of truth.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Organizations that take data seriously should:

    • Decouple processes in which data is separated from business processes and elevate the visibility of the organization's data assets.
    • Leverage a secure platform where data can be easily exchanged for insights generation.
    • Create density for analytics where resources are mobilized around analytics ideas to generate value.

    Analytics is a journey, not a destination. This journey can eventually result in some level of sophisticated AI/machine learning in your organization. Every organization needs to mobilize its resources and enhance its analytics capabilities to quickly and incrementally add value to data products and services. However, most organizations fail to mobilize their resources in this way.

    Impact and Result

    • Firms become more agile when they realize efficiencies in their analytics operating models and can quickly implement reusable analytics.
    • IT becomes more flexible and efficient in understanding the business' data needs and eliminates redundant processes.
    • Trust in data-driven decision making goes up with collaboration, engagement, and transparency.
    • There is a clear path to continuous improvement in analytics.

    Establish an Analytics Operating Model Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief that outlines Info-Tech’s methodology for assessing the business' analytics needs and aligning your data governance, capabilities, and organizational structure to deliver analytics faster.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your analytics needs

    This phase helps you understand your organization's data landscape and current analytics environment so you gain a deeper understanding of your future analytics needs.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 1: Define Your Analytics Needs

    2. Establish an analytics operating model

    This phase introduces you to data operating model frameworks and provides a step-by-step guide on how to capture the right analytics operating model for your organization.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 2: Establish an Analytics Operating Model
    • Analytics Operating Model Building Tool

    3. Implement your operating model

    This phase helps you implement your chosen analytics operating model, as well as establish an engagement model and communications plan.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 3: Implement Your Analytics Operating Model
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Analytics Needs

    The Purpose

    Achieve a clear understanding and case for data analytics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A successful analytics operating model starts with a good understanding of your analytical needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Understand your analytics needs.

    1.3 Draft analytics ideas and use cases.

    1.4 Capture minimum viable analytics.

    Outputs

    Documentation of analytics products and services

    2 Perform an Analytics Capability Assessment

    The Purpose

    Achieve a clear understanding of your organization's analytics capability and mapping across organizational functions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand your organization's data landscape and current analytics environment to gain a deeper understanding of your future analytics needs.

    Activities

    2.1 Capture your analytics capabilities.

    2.2 Map capabilities to a hub-and-spoke model.

    2.3 Document operating model results.

    Outputs

    Capability assessment results

    3 Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Capture the right analytics operating model for your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Explore data operating model frameworks.

    Capture the right analytics operating model for your organization using a step-by-step guide.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss your operating model results.

    3.2 Review your organizational structure’s pros and cons.

    3.3 Map resources to target structure.

    3.4 Brainstorm initiatives to develop your analytics capabilities.

    Outputs

    Target operating model

    4 Implement Your Analytics Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Formalize your analytics organizational structure and prepare to implement your chosen analytics operating model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Implement your chosen analytics operating model.

    Establish an engagement model and communications plan.

    Activities

    4.1 Document your target organizational structure and RACI.

    4.2 Establish an analytics engagement model.

    4.3 Develop an analytics communications plan.

    Outputs

    Reporting and analytics responsibility matrix (RACI)

    Analytics engagement model

    Analytics communications plan

    Analytics organizational chart

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}426|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
    • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
    • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive Azure bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
    • Often there are no consequences for overarchitecting or overspending on Azure.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their Azure spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

    Impact and Result

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish visibility.
    • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a cost accountability framework

    Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

    • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
    • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
    • Cloud Cost Management Policy
    • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

    2. Establish visibility

    Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

    • Service Cost Cheat Sheet for Azure

    3. Define processes and procedures

    Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define process for right-sizing, and define process for purchasing commitment discounts.

    • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
    • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

    4. Build an implementation plan

    Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

    • Cloud Cost Management Task List
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build a Cost Accountability Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles & responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state

    1.2 Determine cloud cost model

    1.3 Define roles & responsibilities

    Outputs

    Cloud cost management capability assessment

    Cloud cost model

    Roles & responsibilities

    2 Establish Visibility

    The Purpose

    Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop architectural patterns

    2.2 Define dashboards and reports

    2.3 Define account structure

    2.4 Document tagging requirements

    Outputs

    Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

    Dashboards and reports

    Account structure

    Tagging scheme

    3 Define Processes & Procedures

    The Purpose

    Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved capability of reducing costs.

    Documented processes & procedures for continuous improvement.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish governance for tagging

    3.2 Establish governance for costs

    3.3 Define right-sizing process

    3.4 Define purchasing process

    3.5 Define notification and alerts

    Outputs

    Tagging policy

    Cost control policy

    Right-sizing process

    Commitment purchasing process

    Notifications and alerts

    4 Build an Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Document next steps to implement & improve cloud cost management program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

    Activities

    4.1 Document process interaction changes

    4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

    4.3 Build implementation roadmap

    4.4 Build communication plan

    Outputs

    Changes to process interactions

    Cloud cost program KPIs

    Implementation roadmap

    Communication plan

    Measure IT Project Value

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}431|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,549 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • People treat benefits as a box to tick on the business case, deflating or inflating them to facilitate project approval.
    • Even if benefits are properly defined, they are usually forgotten once the project is underway.
    • Subsequent changes to project scope may impact the viability of the project’s business benefits, resulting in solutions that do not deliver expected value.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • It is rare for project teams or sponsors to be held accountable for managing and/or measuring benefits. The assumption is often that no one will ask if benefits have been realized after the project is closed.
    • The focus is largely on the project’s schedule, budget, and scope, with little attention paid to the value that the project is meant to deliver to the organization.
    • Without an objective stakeholder to hold people accountable for defining benefits and demonstrating their delivery, benefits will continue to be treated as red tape.
    • Sponsors will not take the time to define benefits properly, if at all. The project team will not take the time to ensure they are still achievable as the project progresses. When the project is complete, no one will investigate actual project success.

    Impact and Result

    • The project sponsor and business unit leaders must own project benefits; IT is only accountable for delivering the solution.
    • IT can play a key role in this process by establishing and supporting a benefits realization process. They can help business unit leaders and sponsors define benefits properly, identify meaningful metrics, and report on benefits realization effectively.
    • The project management office is ideally suited to facilitate this process by providing tools and templates, and a consistent and comparable view across projects.
    • Project managers are accountable for delivering the project, not for delivering the benefits of the project itself. However, they must ensure that changes to project scope are assessed for impact on benefits viability.

    Measure IT Project Value Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should establish a benefits legitimacy practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish benefits legitimacy during portfolio Intake

    This phase will help you define a benefits management process to help support effective benefits definition during portfolio intake.

    • Deliver Project Value With a Benefits Legitimacy Initiative – Phase 1: Establish Benefits Legitimacy During Portfolio Intake
    • Project Sponsor Role Description Template
    • Benefits Commitment Form Template
    • Right-Sized Business Case Template

    2. Maintain benefits legitimacy throughout project planning and execution

    This phase will help you define a process for effective benefits management during project planning and the execution intake phase.

    • Deliver Project Value With a Benefits Legitimacy Initiative – Phase 2: Maintain Benefits Legitimacy Throughout Project Planning and Execution
    • Project Benefits Documentation Workbook
    • Benefits Legitimacy Workflow Template (PDF)
    • Benefits Legitimacy Workflow Template (Visio)

    3. Close the deal on project benefits

    This phase will help you define a process for effectively tracking and reporting on benefits realization post-project.

    • Deliver Project Value With a Benefits Legitimacy Initiative – Phase 3: Close the Deal on Project Benefits
    • Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool
    • Benefits Lag Report Template
    • Benefits Legitimacy Handbook Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Measure IT Project Value

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Analyze the Current State of Benefits Management

    The Purpose

    Assess the current state of benefits management at your organization and establish a realistic target state.

    Establish project and portfolio baselines for benefits management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set achievable workshop goals and align stakeholder expectations.

    Establish a solid foundation for benefits management success.

    Activities

    1.1 Introductions and overview.

    1.2 Discuss attendee expectations and goals.

    1.3 Complete Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard.

    1.4 Perform right-wrong-confusing-missing analysis.

    1.5 Define target state for benefits management.

    1.6 Refine project levels.

    Outputs

    Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard report

    Right-wrong-confusing-missing analysis

    Stakeholder alignment around workshop goals and target state

    Info-Tech’s Project Intake Classification Matrix

    2 Establish Benefits Legitimacy During Portfolio Intake

    The Purpose

    Establish organizationally specific benefit metrics and KPIs.

    Develop clear roles and accountabilities for benefits management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An articulation of project benefits and measurements.

    Clear checkpoints for benefits communication during the project are defined.

    Activities

    2.1 Map the current portfolio intake process.

    2.2 Establish project sponsor responsibilities and accountabilities for benefits management.

    2.3 Develop organizationally specific benefit metrics and KPIs.

    2.4 Integrate intake legitimacy into portfolio intake processes.

    Outputs

    Info-Tech’s Project Sponsor Role Description Template

    Info-Tech’s Benefits Commitment Form Template

    Intake legitimacy process flow and RASCI chart

    Intake legitimacy SOP

    3 Maintain Benefits Legitimacy Throughout Project Planning and Execution

    The Purpose

    Develop a customized SOP for benefits management during project planning and execution.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure that all changes to the project have been recorded and benefits have been updated in preparation for deployment.

    Updated benefits expectations are included in the final sign-off package.

    Activities

    3.1 Map current project management process and audit project management documentation.

    3.2 Identify appropriate benefits control points.

    3.3 Customize project management documentation to integrate benefits.

    3.4 Develop a deployment legitimacy process flow.

    Outputs

    Customized project management toolkit

    Info-Tech’s Project Benefits Documentation Workbook

    Deployment of legitimacy process flow and RASCI chart

    Deployment of legitimacy SOP

    4 Close the Deal on Project Benefits

    The Purpose

    Develop a post-project benefits realization process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear project sponsorship accountabilities for post-project benefits tracking and reporting.

    A portfolio level benefits tracking tool for reporting on benefits attainment.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify appropriate benefits control points in the post-project process.

    4.2 Configure Info-Tech’s Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool.

    4.3 Define a post-project benefits reporting process.

    4.4 Formalize protocol for reporting on, and course correcting, benefit lags.

    4.5 Develop a post-project legitimacy process flow.

    Outputs

    Info-Tech’s Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool

    Post-Project legitimacy process flow and RASCI chart

    Post-Project Legitimacy SOP

    Info-Tech’s Benefits Legitimacy Handbook

    Info-Tech’s Benefits Legitimacy Workflow Template

    Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}372|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,779 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Organizations often tackle compliance efforts in an ad hoc manner, resulting in an ineffective use of resources.
    • The alignment of business objectives, information security, and data privacy is new for many organizations, and it can seem overwhelming.
    • GDPR is an EU regulation that has global implications; it likely applies to your organization more than you think.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Financial impact isn’t simply fines. A data controller fined for GDPR non-compliance may sue its data processor for damage.
    • Even day-to-day activities may be considered processing. Screen-sharing from a remote location is considered processing if the data shown onscreen contains personal data!
    • This is not simply an IT problem. Organizations that address GDPR in a siloed approach will not be as successful as organizations that take a cross-functional approach.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow a robust methodology that applies to any organization and aligns operational and situational GDPR scope. Info-Tech's framework allows organizations to tackle GDPR compliance in a right-sized, methodical approach.
    • Adhere to a core, complex GDPR requirement through the use of our documentation templates.
    • Understand how the risk of non-compliance is aligned to both your organization’s functions and data scope.
    • This blueprint will guide you through projects and steps that will result in quick wins for near-term compliance.

    Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should fast track your GDPR compliance efforts, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand your compliance requirements

    Understand the breadth of the regulation’s requirements and document roles and responsibilities.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 1: Understand Your Compliance Requirements
    • GDPR RACI Chart

    2. Define your GDPR scope

    Define your GDPR scope and prioritize initiatives based on risk.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 2: Define Your GDPR Scope
    • GDPR Initiative Prioritization Tool

    3. Satisfy documentation requirements

    Understand the requirements for a record of processing and determine who will own it.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 3: Satisfy Documentation Requirements
    • Record of Processing Template
    • Legitimate Interest Assessment Template
    • Data Protection Impact Assessment Tool
    • A Guide to Data Subject Access Requests

    4. Align your data breach requirements and security program

    Document your DPO decision and align security strategy to data privacy.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 4: Align Your Data Breach Requirements & Security Program

    5. Prioritize your GDPR initiatives

    Prioritize any initiatives driven out of Phases 1-4 and begin developing policies that help in the documentation effort.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 5: Prioritize Your GDPR Initiatives
    • Data Protection Policy
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Your Compliance Requirements

    The Purpose

    Kick-off the workshop; understand and define GDPR as it exists in your organizational context.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritize your business units based on GDPR risk.

    Assign roles and responsibilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Kick-off and introductions.

    1.2 High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.

    1.3 Identify and define GDPR initiative within your organization’s context.

    1.4 Determine what actions have been done to prepare; how have regulations been handled in the past?

    1.5 Identify key business units for GDPR committee.

    1.6 Document business units and functions that are within scope.

    1.7 Prioritize business units based on GDPR.

    1.8 Formalize stakeholder support.

    Outputs

    Prioritized business units based on GDPR risk

    GDPR Compliance RACI Chart

    2 Define Your GDPR Scope

    The Purpose

    Know the rationale behind a record of processing.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine who will own the record of processing.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the necessity for a record of processing.

    2.2 Determine for each prioritized business unit: are you a controller or processor?

    2.3 Develop a record of processing for most-critical business units.

    2.4 Perform legitimate interest assessments.

    2.5 Document an iterative process for creating a record of processing.

    Outputs

    Initial record of processing: 1-2 activities

    Initial legitimate interest assessment: 1-2 activities

    Determination of who will own the record of processing

    3 Satisfy Documentation Requirements and Align With Your Data Breach Requirements and Security Program

    The Purpose

    Review existing security controls and highlight potential requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the initiatives you’ll be working on align with existing controls and future goals.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine the appetite to align the GDPR project to data classification and data discovery.

    3.2 Discuss the benefits of data discovery and classification.

    3.3 Review existing incident response plans and highlight gaps.

    3.4 Review existing security controls and highlight potential requirements.

    3.5 Review all initiatives highlighted during days 1-3.

    Outputs

    Highlighted gaps in current incident response and security program controls

    Documented all future initiatives

    4 Prioritize GDPR Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Review project plan and initiatives and prioritize.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize outputs of the workshop, with a strong understanding of next steps.

    Activities

    4.1 Analyze the necessity for a data protection officer and document decision.

    4.2 Review project plan and initiatives.

    4.3 Prioritize all current initiatives based on regulatory compliance, cost, and ease to implement.

    4.4 Develop a data protection policy.

    4.5 Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.

    4.6 Present the GDPR project to key stakeholders.

    4.7 Workshop executive presentation and debrief.

    Outputs

    GDPR framework and prioritized initiatives

    Data Protection Policy

    List of key tools

    Communication plans

    Workshop summary documentation

    Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}397|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • There are no standardized processes for the intake of new ideas and no consistent view of the drivers needed to assess the value of these ideas.
    • IT is spending money on low-value services and doesn’t have the ability to understand and track value in order to prioritize IT investment.
    • CIOs are not trusted to drive innovation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The service portfolio empowers IT to be a catalyst in business strategy, change, and growth.
    • IT must drive value-based investment by understanding value of all services in the portfolio.
    • Organizations must assess the value of their services throughout their lifecycle to optimize business outcomes and IT spend.

    Impact and Result

    • Optimize IT investments by prioritizing services that provide more value to the business, ensuring that you do not waste money on low-value or out-of-date IT services.
    • Ensure that services are directly linked to business objectives, goals, and needs, keeping IT embedded in the strategic vision of the organization.
    • Enable the business to understand the impact of IT capabilities on business strategy.
    • Ensure that IT maintains a strategic and tactical view of the services and their value.
    • Drive agility and innovation by having a streamlined view of your business value context and a consistent intake of ideas.
    • Provide strategic leadership and create new revenue by understanding the relative value of new ideas vs. existing services.

    Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Service portfolio management enables organizations to become strategic value creators by establishing a dynamic view of service value. Understand the driving forces behind the need to manage services through their lifecycles.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish the service portfolio

    Establish and understand the service portfolio process by setting up the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 1: Establish the Service Portfolio
    • Service Portfolio Worksheet

    2. Develop a value assessment framework

    Use the value assessment tool to assess services based on the organization’s context of value.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 2: Develop a Value Assessment Framework
    • Value Assessment Tool
    • Value Assessment Example Tool

    3. Manage intake and assessment of initiatives

    Create a centralized intake process to manage all new service ideas.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 3: Manage Intake and Assessment of Initiatives
    • Service Intake Form

    4. Assess active services

    Continuously validate the value of the existing service and determine the future of service based on the value and usage of the service.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 4: Assess Active Services

    5. Manage and communicate the service portfolio

    Communicate and implement the service portfolio within the organization, and create a mechanism to seek out continuous improvement opportunities.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 5: Manage and Communicate the Service Portfolio
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish the Service Portfolio

    The Purpose

    Establish and understand the service portfolio process by setting up the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Understand at a high level the steps involved in managing the service portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Adapt the Service Portfolio Worksheet to organizational needs and create a plan to begin documenting services in the worksheet.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    1.2 Adapt the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Outputs

    Knowledge about the use of the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Adapt the worksheet to reflect organizational needs and structure.

    2 Develop a Value Assessment Framework

    The Purpose

    Understand the need for a value assessment framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the organizational context of value through a holistic look at business objectives.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Value Assessment Tool to validate and determine service value.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand value from business context.

    2.2 Determine the governing body.

    2.3 Assess culture and organizational structure.

    2.4 Complete the value assessment.

    2.5 Discuss value assessment score.

    Outputs

    Alignment on value context.

    Clear roles and responsibilities established.

    Ensure there is a supportive organizational structure and culture in place.

    Understand how to complete the value assessment and obtain a value score for selected services.

    Understand how to interpret the service value score.

    3 Manage Intake and Assessment of Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Create a centralized intake process to manage all new service ideas.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Encourage collaboration and innovation through a transparent, formal, and centralized service intake process.

    Activities

    3.1 Review or design the service intake process.

    3.2 Review the Service Intake Form.

    3.3 Design a process to assess and transfer service ideas.

    3.4 Design a process to transfer completed services to the service catalog.

    Outputs

    Create a centralized process for service intake.

    Complete the Service Intake Form for a specific initiative.

    Have a process designed to transfer approved projects to the PMO.

    Have a process designed for transferring of completed services to the service catalog.

    4 Assess Active Services

    The Purpose

    Continuously validate the value of existing services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure services are still providing the expected outcome.

    Clear next steps for services based on value.

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss/review management of active services.

    4.2 Complete value assessment for an active service.

    4.3 Determine service value and usage.

    4.4 Determine the next step for the service.

    4.5 Document the decision regarding the service outcome.

    Outputs

    Understand how active services must be assessed throughout their lifecycles.

    Understand how to assess an existing service.

    Place the service on the 2x2 matrix based on value and usage.

    Understand the appropriate next steps for services based on value.

    Formally document the steps for each of the IRMR options.

    5 Manage and Communicate Your Service Portfolio

    The Purpose

    Communicate and implement the service portfolio within the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Obtain buy-ins for the process.

    Create a mechanism to identify changes within the organization and to seek out continuous improvement opportunities for the service portfolio management process and procedures.

    Activities

    5.1 Create a communication plan for service portfolio and value assessment.

    5.2 Create a communication plan for service intake.

    5.3 Create a procedure to continuously validate the process.

    Outputs

    Document the target audience, the message, and how the message should be communicated.

    Document techniques to encourage participation and promote participation from the organization.

    Document the formal review process, including cycle, roles, and responsibilities.

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}55|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $83,641 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • Your organizational digital business strategy sits on the shelf because it fails to guide implementation.
    • Your organization has difficulty adapting new technologies or rethinking their existing business models.
    • Your organization lacks a clear vision for the digital customer journey.
    • Your management team lacks a framework to rethink how your organization delivers value today, which causes annual planning to become an ideation session that lacks focus.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Pre-pandemic digital strategies have been primarily focused on automation. However, your post-pandemic digital strategy must focus on driving resilience for growth opportunities.

    Impact and Result

    • Design a strategy that applies innovation to your business model, streamline and transform processes, and make use of technologies to enhance interactions with customers and employees.
    • Use digital for transforming non-routine cognitive activities and for derisking key elements of the value chain.
    • Create a balanced roadmap that improves digital maturity and prepares you for long-term success in a digital economy.

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Digital Business Strategy Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to identify top value chains and a digitally enabled growth opportunity, transform stakeholder journeys, and build a digital transformation roadmap.

    This blueprint guides you through a value-driven approach to digital transformation that allows you to identify what aspects of the business to transform, what technologies to embrace, what processes to automate, and what new business models to create. This approach to digital transformation unifies digital possibilities with your customer experiences.

    • Define Your Digital Business Strategy – Phases 1-4

    2. Digital Business Strategy Workbook – A tool to guide you in planning and prioritizing projects to build an effective digital business strategy.

    This tool guides you in planning and prioritizing projects to build an effective digital business strategy. Key activities include conducting a horizon scan, conducting a journey mapping exercise, prioritizing opportunities from a journey map, expanding opportunities into projects, and lastly, building the digital transformation roadmap using a Gantt chart visual to showcase project execution timelines.

    • Digital Strategy Workbook

    3. Digital Business Strategy Final Report Template – Use this template to capture the synthesized content from outputs of the activities.

    This deck is a visual presentation template for this blueprint. The intent is to capture the contents of the activities in a presentation PowerPoint. It uses sample data from “City of X” to demonstrate the digital business strategy.

    • Digital Business Strategy Final Report Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Two Existing Value Chains

    The Purpose

    Understand how your organization creates value today.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify opportunities for digital transformation in how you currently deliver value today.

    Activities

    1.1 Validate business context.

    1.2 Assess business ecosystem.

    1.3 Identify and prioritize value streams.

    1.4 Break down value stream into value chains.

    Outputs

    Business context

    Overview of business ecosystem

    Value streams and value chains

    2 Identify a Digitally Enabled Growth Opportunity

    The Purpose

    Leverage strategic foresight to evaluate how complex trends can evolve over time and identify opportunities to leapfrog competitors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify a leapfrog idea to sidestep competitors.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct a horizon scan.

    2.2 Identify leapfrog ideas.

    2.3 Identify impact to existing or new value chains.

    Outputs

    One leapfrog idea

    Corresponding value chain

    3 Transform Stakeholder Journeys

    The Purpose

    Design a journey map to empathize with your customers and identify opportunities to streamline or enhance existing and new experiences.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify a unified view of customer experience.

    Identify opportunities to automate non-routine cognitive tasks.

    Identify gaps in value delivery.

    Improve customer journey.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify stakeholder persona.

    3.2 Identify journey scenario.

    3.3 Conduct one journey mapping exercise.

    3.4 Identify opportunities to improve stakeholder journey.

    3.5 Break down opportunities into projects.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder persona

    Stakeholder scenario

    Journey map

    Journey-based projects

    4 Build a Digital Transformation Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build a customer-centric digital transformation roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Keep your team on the same page with key projects, objectives, and timelines.

    Activities

    4.1 Prioritize and categorize initiatives.

    4.2 Build roadmap.

    Outputs

    Digital goals

    Unified roadmap

    Further reading

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    After a major crisis, find your place in the digital economy.

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech is a provider of best-practice IT research advisory services that make every IT leader’s job easier.

    35,000 members sharing best practices you can leverage

    Millions spent developing tools and templates annually

    Leverage direct access to over 100 analysts as an extension of your team

    Use our massive database of benchmarks and vendor assessments

    Get up to speed in a fraction of the time

    Analyst Perspective

    Build business resilience and prepare for a digital economy.

    This is a picture of Senior Research Analyst, Dana Daher

    Dana Daher
    Senior Research Analyst

    To survive one of the greatest economic downturns since the Great Depression, organizations had to accelerate their digital transformation by engaging with the Digital Economy. To sustain growth and thrive as the pandemic eases, organizations must focus their attention on building business resilience by transforming how they deliver value today.
    This requires a value-driven approach to digital transformation that is capable of identifying what aspects of the business to transform, what technologies to embrace, what processes to automate, and what new business models to create. And most importantly, it needs to unify digital possibilities with your customer experiences.
    If there was ever a time for an organization to become a digital business, it is today.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Your organization has difficulty adapting new technologies or rethinking the existing business models.
    • Your management lacks a framework to rethink how your organization delivers value today, which causes annual planning to become an ideation session that lacks focus.
    • There is uncertainty on how to meet evolving customer needs and how to compete in a digital economy.

    Common Obstacles

    • Your organization might approach digital transformation as if we were still in 2019, not recognizing that the pandemic resulted in a major shift to an end-to-end digital economy.
    • Your senior-most leadership thinks digital is "IT's problem" because digital is viewed synonymously with technology.
    • On the other hand, your IT team lacks the authority to make decisions without the executives’ involvement in the discussion around digital.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Design a strategy that applies innovation to your business model, streamline and transform processes, and make use of technologies to enhance interactions with customers and employees.
    • Use digital for transforming non-routine cognitive activities and for de-risking key elements of the value chain.
    • Create a balanced roadmap that improves digital maturity and prepares you for long-term success in a digital economy.

    Info-Tech Insight

    After a major crisis, focus on restarting the growth engine and bolstering business resilience.

    Your digital business strategy aims to transform the business

    Digital Business Strategy

    • Looks for ways to transform the business by identifying what technologies to embrace, what processes to automate, and what new business models to create.
    • Unifies digital possibilities with your customer experiences.
    • Accountability lies with the executive leadership.
    • Must involve cross-functional participation from senior management from the different areas of the organization.

    IT Strategy

    • Aims to identify how to change, fix, or improve technology in support of the organization’s business strategy.
    • Accountability lies with the CIO.
    • Must involve IT management and gather strategic input from the business.

    Becoming a digital business

    Automate tasks to free up time for innovation.

    Business activities (tasks, procedures, and processes, etc.) are used to create, sell, buy, and deliver goods and services.

    When we convert information into a readable format used by computers, we call this digitization (e.g. converting paper into digital format). When we convert these activities into a format to be processed by a computer, we have digitalization (e.g. scheduling appointments online).

    These two processes alter how work takes place in an organization and form the foundation of the concept digital transformation.

    We maintain that digital transformation is all about becoming a “digital business” – an organization that performs more than 66% of all work activities via executable code.

    As organizations take a step closer to this optimal state, new avenues are open to identify advances to promote growth, enhance customer experiences, secure sustainability, drive operational efficiencies, and unearth potential future business ventures.

    Key Concepts:

    Digital: The representation of a physical item in a format used by computers

    Digitization: Conversion of information and processes into a digital format

    Digitalization: Conversion of information into a format to be processed by a computer

    Why transform your business?

    COVID-19 has irrefutably changed livelihoods, businesses, and the economy. During the pandemic, digital tools have acted as a lifeline, helping businesses and economies survive, and in the process, have acted as a catalyst for digital transformation.

    As organizations continue to safeguard business continuity and financial recovery, in the long term, recovery won’t be enough.

    Although many pandemic/recession recovery periods have occurred before, this next recovery period will present two first-time challenges no one has faced before. We must find ways to:

    • Recover from the COVID-19 recession.
    • Compete in a digital economy.

    To grow and thrive in this post-pandemic world, organizations must provide meaningful and lasting changes to brace for a future defined by digital technologies. – Dana Daher, Info-Tech Research Group

    We are amid an economic transformation

    What we are facing today is a paradigm shift transforming the ways in which we work, live, and relate to one another.

    In the last 60 years alone, performance and productivity have been vastly improved by IT in virtually all economic activities and sectors. And today, digital technologies continue to advance IT's contribution even further by bringing unprecedented insights into economic activities that have largely been untouched by IT.

    As technological innovation and the digitalization of products and services continue to support economic activities, a fundamental shift is occurring that is redefining how we live, work, shop, and relate to one another.

    These rapid changes are captured in a new 21st century term:

    The Digital Economy.

    90% of CEOs believe the digital economy will impact their industry. But only 25% have a plan in place. – Paul Taylor, Forbes, 2020

    Analyst Perspective

    Become a Digital Business

    this is a picture of Research Fellow, Kenneth McGee

    Kenneth McGee
    Research Fellow

    Today, the world faces two profoundly complex, mega-challenges simultaneously:

    1. Ending the COVID-19 pandemic and recession.
    2. Creating strategies for returning to business growth.

    Within the past year, healthcare professionals have searched for and found solutions that bring real hope to the belief the global pandemic/recession will soon end.

    As progress towards ending COVID-19 continues, business professionals are searching for the most effective near-term and long-term methods of restoring or exceeding the rates of growth they were enjoying prior to 2020.

    We believe developing a digital business strategy can deliver cost savings to help achieve near-term business growth while preparing an enterprise for long-term business growth by effectively competing within the digital economy of the future.

    The Digital Economy

    The digital economy refers to a concept in which all economic activity is facilitated or managed through digital technologies, data, infrastructure, services, and products (OECD, 2020).

    The digital economy captures decades of digital trends including:

    • Declining enterprise computing costs
    • Improvements in computing power and performance; unprecedent analytic capabilities
    • Rapid growth in network speeds, affordability, and geographic reach
    • High adoption rates of PCs, mobile, and other computing devices

    These trends among others have set the stage to permanently alter how buying and selling will take place within and between local, regional, national, and international economies.

    The emerging digital economy concept is so compelling that the world economists, financial experts, and others are currently investigating how they must substantially rewrite the rules governing how taxes, trade, tangible and intangible assets, and countless other financial issues will be assessed and valued in a digital economy.

    Download Info-Tech’s Digital Economy Report

    Signals of Change

    60%
    of People on Earth Use the Internet
    (DataReportal, 2021)
    20%
    of Global Retail Sales Performed via E-commerce
    (eMarketer, 2021)
    6.64T
    Global Business-to-Business
    E-commerce Market
    (Derived from The Business Research Company, 2021)
    9.6%
    of US GDP ($21.4T) accounted for by the digital economy ($2.05T)
    (Bureau of Economic Analysis, 2021)

    The digital economy captures technological developments transforming the way in which we live, work, and socialize

    Technological evolution

    this image contains a timeline of technological advances, from computers and information technology, to the digital economy of the future

    Info-Tech’s approach to digital business strategy

    A path to thrive in a digital economy.

    1. Identify top value chains to be transformed
    2. Identify a digitally enabled growth opportunity
    3. Transform stakeholder journeys
    4. Build a digital transformation roadmap

    Info-Tech Insight

    Pre-pandemic digital strategies have been primarily focused on automation. However, your post-pandemic digital strategy must focus on driving resilience for growth opportunities.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    • Understand how your organization creates value today to identify opportunities for digital transformation.
    • Leverage strategic foresight to evaluate how complex trends can evolve over time and identify opportunities to leapfrog competitors.
    • Design a journey map to empathize with your customers and identify opportunities to streamline or enhance existing and new experiences.
    • Create a balanced roadmap that improves digital maturity and prepares you for long-term success in a digital economy.

    A digital transformation starts by transforming how you deliver value today

    As digital transformation is an effort to transform how you deliver value today, it is important to understand the different value-generating activities that deliver an outcome for and from your customers.

    We do this by looking at value streams –which refer to the specific set of activities an industry player undertakes to create and capture value for and from the end consumer (and so the question to ask is, how do you make money as an organization?).

    Our approach helps you to digitally transform those value streams that generate the most value for your organization.

    Higher Education Value stream

    Recruitment → Admission → Student Enrolment → Instruction & Research → Graduation → Advancement

    Local Government Value Stream

    Sustain Land, Property, and the Environment → Facilitate Civic Engagement → Protect Local Health and Safety → Grow the Economy → Provide Regional Infrastructure

    Manufacturing Value Stream

    Design Product → Produce Product → Sell Product

    Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify your industry’s value streams

    Assess your external environment to identify new value generators

    Assessing your external environment allows you to identify trends that will have a high impact on how you deliver value today.

    Traditionally, a PESTLE analysis is used to assess the external environment. While this is a helpful tool, it is often too broad as it identifies macro trends that are not relevant to an organization's addressable market. That is because not every factor that affects the macro environment (for example, the country of operation) affects a specific organization’s industry in the same way.

    And so, instead of simply assessing the macro environment and trying to project its evolution along the PESTLE factors, we recommend to:

    • Conduct a PESTLE first and deduce, from the analysis, what are possible shifts in six characteristics of an organization’s industry, or
    • Proceed immediately with identifying evolutionary trends that impact the organization’s direct market.

    the image depicts the relationship of factors from the Macro Environment, to the Industry/Addressable Market, to the Organization. the macro environmental factors are Political; Economic; Social; Technological; Legal; and Environmental. the Industry/addressable market factors are the Customer; Talent; Regulation; technology and; Supply chain.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While PESTLE is helpful to scan the macro environment, the analysis often lacks relevance to an organization’s industry.

    An analysis of evolutionary shifts in five industry-specific characteristics would be more effective for identifying trends that impact the organization

    A Market Evolution Trend Analysis (META) identifies changes in prevailing market conditions that are directly relevant to an organization’s industry, and thus provides some critical input to the strategy design process, since these trends can bring about strategic risks or opportunities.
    Shifts in these five characteristics directly impact an organization:

    ORGANIZATION

    • Customer Expectations
    • Talent Availability
    • Regulatory System
    • Supply Chain Continuity
    • Technological Landscape

    Capture existing and new value generators through a customer journey map

    As we prioritize value streams, we break them down into value chains – that is the “string” of processes that interrelate that work.

    However, once we identify these value chains and determine what parts we wish to digitally transform, we take on the perspective of the user, as the way they interact with your products and services will be different to the view of those within the organization who implement and provide those services.

    This method allows us to build an empathetic and customer-centric lens, granting the capability to uncover challenges and potential opportunities. Here, we may define new experiences or redesign existing ones.

    This image contains an example of how a school might use a value chain and customer journey map. the value streams listed include: Recruitment; Admission; Student Enrolment; Instruction& Research; Graduation; and Advancement. the Value chain for the Instruction and Research Value stream. The value chain includes: Research; Course Creation, Delivery, and assessment. The Customer journey map for curricula delivery includes: Understanding the needs of students; Construct the course material; Deliver course material; Conduct assessment and; Upload Grades into system

    A digital transformation is not just about customer journeys but also about building business resilience

    Pre-pandemic, a digital transformation was primarily focused around improving customer experiences. Today, we are facing a paradigm shift in the way in which we capture the priorities and strategies for a digital transformation.

    As the world grows increasingly uncertain, organizations need to continue to focus on improving customer experience while simultaneously protecting their enterprise value.

    Ultimately, a digital transformation has two purposes:

    1. The classical model – whereby there is a focus on improving digital experiences.
    2. Value protection or the reduction of enterprise risk by systematically identifying how the organization delivers value and digitally transforming it to protect future cashflows and improve the overall enterprise value.
    Old Paradigm New Paradigm
    Predictable regulatory changes with incremental impact Unpredictable regulatory changes with sweeping impact
    Reluctance to use digital collaboration Wide acceptance of digital collaboration
    Varied landscape of brick-and-mortar channels Last-mile consolidation
    Customers value brand Customers value convenience/speed of fulfilment
    Intensity of talent wars depends on geography Broadened battlefields for the war for talent
    Cloud-first strategies Cloud-only strategies
    Physical assets Aggressive asset decapitalization
    Digitalization of operational processes Robotization of operational processes
    Customer experience design as an ideation mechanism Business resilience for value protection and risk reduction

    Key deliverable:

    Digital Business Strategy Presentation Template

    A highly visual and compelling presentation template that enables easy customization and executive-facing content.

    three images are depicted, which contain slides from the Digital Business Strategy presentation template, which will be available in 2022.

    *Coming in 2022

    Blueprint deliverables

    The Digital Business Strategy Workbook supports each step of this blueprint to help you accomplish your goals:

    Initiative Prioritization

    A screenshot from the Initiative Prioritization blueprint is depicted, no words are legible in the image.

    Use the weighted scorecard approach to evaluate and prioritize your opportunities and initiatives.

    Roadmap Gantt Chart

    A screenshot from the Roadmap Gantt Chart blueprint is depicted, no words are legible in the image.

    Populate your Gantt chart to visually represent your key initiative plan over the next 12 months.

    Journey Mapping Workbook

    A screenshot from the Journey Mapping Workbook blueprint is depicted, no words are legible in the image.

    Populate the journey maps to evaluate a user experience over its end-to-end journey.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 0 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    Call #1:
    Discuss business context and customize your organization’s capability map.
    Call #2:
    Assess business ecosystem.
    Call #3:
    Perform horizon scanning and trends identification.
    Call #5:
    Identify stakeholder personas and scenarios.
    Call #7:
    Discuss initiative generation and inputs into roadmap.
    Call #3:
    Identify how your organization creates value.
    Call #4:
    Discuss value chain impact.
    Call #6:
    Complete journey mapping exercise.
    Call #8:
    Summarize results and plan next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.
    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

    Workshop Requirements

    Business Inputs

    Gather business strategy documents and find information on:

    • Business goals
    • Current transformation initiatives
    • Business capabilities to create or enhance
    • Identify top ten revenue and expense generators
    • Identify stakeholders

    Interview the following stakeholders to uncover business context information:

    • CEO
    • CIO

    Download the Business Context Discovery Tool

    Optional Diagnostic

    • Assess your digital maturity (Concierge Service)

    Visit Assess Your Digital Maturity

    Phase 1

    Identify top value chains to be transformed

    • Understand the business
    • Assess your business ecosystem
    • Identify two value chains for transformation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Understand how your organization delivers value today and identify value chains to be transformed.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across all levels of the organization.

    Outcomes

    • Business ecosystem
    • Existing value chains to be transformed

    Step 1.1

    Understand the business

    Activities

    • Review business documents.

    Identify top value chains to be transformed

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    In this section you will gain an understanding of the business context for your strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    Business Context

    Understand the business context

    Understanding the business context is a must for all strategic initiatives. A pre-requisite to all strategic planning should be to elicit the business context from your business stakeholders.

    Inputs Document(s)/ Method Outputs
    Key stakeholders Strategy Document Stakeholders that are actively involved in, affected by or influence outcome of the organization, e.g. employers, customers, vendors.
    Vision and mission of the organization Website Strategy Document What the organization wants to achieve and how it strives to accomplish those goals.
    Business drivers CEO Interview Inputs and activities that drive the operational and financial results of the organization.
    Key targets CEO Interview Quantitative benchmarks to support strategic goals, e.g. double the enterprise EBITD, improve top-of-mind brand awareness by 15%,
    Strategic investment goals CFO Interview
    Digital Strategy
    Financial investments corresponding with strategic objectives of the organization, e.g. geographic expansion, digital investments.
    Top three value-generating lines of business Financial Document Identification of your top three value-generating products and services or lines of business.
    Goals of the organization over the next 12 months Strategy Document
    Corporate Retreat Notes
    Strategic goals to support the vision, e.g. hire 100 new sales reps, improve product management and marketing.
    Top business initiatives over the next 12 months Strategy Document
    CEO Interview
    Internal campaigns to support strategic goals, e.g. invest in sales team development, expand the product innovation team.
    Business model Strategy Document Products or services that the organization plans to sell, the identified market and customer segments, price points, channels and anticipated expenses.
    Competitive landscape Internal Research Analysis Who your typical or atypical competitors are.

    1.1 Understand the business context

    Objective: Elicit the business context with a careful review of business and strategy documents.

    1. Gather the strategy creation team and review your business context documents. This includes business strategy documents, interview notes from executive stakeholders, and other sources for uncovering the business strategy.
    2. Brainstorm in smaller groups answers to the question you were assigned:
      • What are the strengths and weaknesses of the organization?
      • What are some areas of improvement or opportunity?
      • What does it mean to have a digital business strategy?
    3. Discuss the questions above with participants and document key findings. Share with the group and work through the balanced scorecard questions to complete this exercise.
    4. Document your findings.

    Assess your digital readiness with Info-Tech’s Digital Maturity Assessment

    Input

    • Business Strategy Documents
    • Executive Stakeholder Interviews

    Output

    • Business Context Information

    Materials

    • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • Executive Team

    Step 1.2

    Assess your business ecosystem

    Activities

    • Identify disruptors and incumbents.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your digital business strategy cannot be formulated without a clear vision of the evolution of your industry.

    Identify top value chains to be transformed

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    In this section, we will assess who the incumbents and disruptors are in your ecosystem and identify who your stakeholders are.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    Business Ecosystem

    Assess your business ecosystem

    Understand the nature of your competition.

    Learn what your competitors are doing.

    To survive, grow, or transform in today's digital era, organizations must first have a strong pulse on their business ecosystem. Learning what your competitors are doing to grow their bottom line is key to identifying how to grow your own. Start by understanding who the key incumbents and disruptors in your industry are to identify where your industry is heading.

    Incumbents: These are established leaders in the industry that possess the largest market share. Incumbents often focus their attention to their most demanding or profitable customers and neglect the needs of those down market.

    Disruptors: Disruptors are primarily new entrants (typically startups) that possess the ability to displace the existing market, industry, or technology. Disruptors are often focused on smaller markets that the incumbents aren’t focused on. (Clayton Christenson, 1997)

    An image is shown demonstrating the relationship within an industry between incumbents, disruptors, and the organization. The incumbents are represented by two large purple circles. The disruptors are represented by 9 smaller blue circles, which represent smaller individual customer bases, but overall account for a larger portion of the industry.

    ’Disruption’ specifically refers to what happens when the incumbents are so focused on pleasing their most profitable customers that they neglect or misjudge the needs of their other segments.– Ilan Mochari, Inc., 2015

    Example Business Ecosystem Analysis

    Business Target Market & Customer Product/Service & Key Features Key Differentiators Market Positioning
    University XYZ
    • Local Students
    • Continuous Learner
    • Certificate programs
    • Associate degrees
    • Strong engineering department with access to high-quality labs
    • Strong community impact
    Affordable education with low tuition cost and access to bursaries & scholarships.
    University CDE University CDE
    • Local students
    • International students
    • Continuous learning students
    • Continuous learning offerings (weekend classes)
    • Strong engineering program
    • Strong continuous learning programs
    Outcome focused university with strong co-ops/internship programs and career placements for graduates
    University MNG
    • Local students
    • Non degree, freshman and continuous learning adults
    • Associate degrees
    • Certificate programs (IT programs)
    • Dual credit program
    • More locations/campuses
    • Greater physical presence
    • High web presence
    Nurturing university with small student population and classroom sizes. University attractive to adult learners.
    Disruptors Online Learning Company EFG
    • Full-time employees & executives– (online presence important)
    • Shorter courses
    • Full-time employees & executives– (online presence important)
    Competitive pricing with an open acceptance policy
    University JKL Online Credential Program
    • High school
    • University students
    • Adult learners
    • Micro credentials
    • Ability to acquire specific skills
    Borderless and free (or low cost) education

    1.2 Understand your business ecosystem

    Objective: Identify the incumbents and disruptors in your business ecosystem.

    1. Identify the key incumbents and disruptors in your business ecosystem.
      • Incumbents: These are established leaders in the industry that possess the largest market share.
      • Disruptors: Disruptors are primarily new entrants (startups) that possess the ability to displace the existing market, industry, or technology.
    2. Identify target market and key customers. Who are the primary beneficiaries of your products or service offerings? Your key customers are those who keep you in business, increase profits, and are impacted by your operations.
    3. Identify what their core products or services are. Assess what core problem their products solve for key customers and what key features of their solution support this.
    4. Assess what the competitors' key differentiators are. There are many differentiators that an organization can have, examples include product, brand, price, service, or channel.
    5. Identify what the organization’s value proposition is. Why do customers come to them specifically? Leverage insights from the key differentiators to derive this.
    6. Finally, assess how your organization derives value relative to your competitors.

    Input

    • Market Assessment

    Output

    • Key Incumbents and Disruptors

    Materials

    • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • Executive Team

    Step 1.3

    Value-chain prioritization

    Activities

    • Identify and prioritize value chains for innovation.

    Identify top value chains to be transformed

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify and prioritize how your organization currently delivers value today and identify value chains to be transformed.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    Prioritized Value Chains

    Determine what value the organization creates

    Identify areas for innovation.

    Value streams and value chains connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the market place by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment an organization operates within.

    Different types of value your organization creates

    This an example of a value chain which a school would use to analyze how their organization creates value. The value streams listed include: Recruitment; Admission; Student Enrolment; Instruction& Research; Graduation; and Advancement. the Value chain for the Student enrolment stream is displayed. The value chain includes: Matriculation; Enrolment into a Program and; Unit enrolment.

    Value Streams

    A value stream refers to the specific set of activities an industry player undertakes to create and capture value for and from the end consumer.

    Value Chains

    A value chain is a ”string” of processes within a company that interrelate and work together to meet market demand. Examining the value chain of a company will reveal how it achieves competitive advantage.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify value streams

    Begin with understanding your industry’s value streams

    Value Streams

    Recruitment

    • The promotion of the institution and the communication with prospective students is accommodated by the recruitment component.
    • Prospective students are categorized as domestic and international, undergraduate and graduate. Each having distinct processes.

    Admission

    • Admission into the university involves processes distinct from recruitment. Student applications are processed and evaluated and the students are informed of the decision.
    • This component is also concerned with transfer students and the approval of transfer credits.

    Student Enrolment

    • Student enrolment is concerned with matriculation when the student first enters the institution, and subsequent enrolment and scheduling of current students.
    • The component is also concerned with financial aid and the ownership of student records.

    Instruction & Research

    • Instruction involves program development, instructional delivery and assessment, and the accreditation of courses of study.
    • The research component begins with establishing policy and degree fundamentals and concerns the research through to publication and impact assessment.

    Graduation

    • Graduation is not only responsible for the ceremony but also the eligibility of the candidate for an award and the subsequent maintenance of transcripts.

    Advancement

    • Alumni relations are the first responsibility of advancement. This involves the continual engagement with former students.
    • Fundraising is the second responsibility. This includes the solicitation and stewardship of gifts from alumni and other benefactors.

    Value stream defined…

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities in the marketplace. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment in which an organization operates.

    There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams.

    • Core value streams are mostly externally facing. They deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map.
    • Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.

    An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers.

    Leverage your industry’s capability maps to identify value chains

    Business Capability Map Defined

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation, rather than how. Business capabilities:

    • Represent stable business functions.
    • Are unique and independent of each other.
    • Typically, will have a defined business outcome.

    A capability map is a great starting point to identify value chains within an organization as it is a strong indicator of the processes involved to deliver on the value streams.

    this image contains an example of a business capability map using the value streams identified earlier in this blueprint.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Leverage your industry reference architecture to define value streams and value chains.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify value streams

    Prioritize value streams to be supported or enhanced

    Use an evaluation criteria that considers both the human and business value generators that these streams provide.

    two identical value streams are depicted. The right most value stream has Student Enrolment and Instruction Research highlighted in green. between the two streams, are two boxes. In these boxes is the following: Business Value: Profit; Enterprise Value; Brand value. Human Value: Faculty satisfaction; Student satisfaction; Community impact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To produce maximum impact, focus on value streams that provide two-thirds of your enterprise value.

    Business Value

    Assess the value generators to the business, e.g. revenue dollars, enterprise value, cost or differentiation (competitiveness), etc.

    Human Value

    Assess the value generators to people, e.g. student/faculty satisfaction, well-being, and social cohesion.

    Identify value chains for transformation

    Value chains, pioneered by the academic Michael Porter, refer to the ”string” of processes within a company that interrelate and work together to meet market demand. An organization’s value chain is connected to the larger part of the value stream. This perspective of how value is generated encourages leaders to see each activity as a part of a series of steps required deliver value within the value stream and opens avenues to identify new opportunities for value generation.

    this image depicts two sample value chains for the value streams: student enrolment and Instruction & Research. Each value chain has a stakeholder associated with it. This is the primary stakeholder that seeks to gain value from that value chain.

    Prioritize value chains for transformation

    Once we have identified the key value chains within each value stream element, evaluate the individual processes within the value chain to identify opportunities for transformation. Evaluate the value chain processes based on the level of pain experienced by a stakeholder to accomplish that task, and the financial impact that level of the process has on the organization.

    this image depicts the same value chains as the image above, with a legend showing which steps have a financial impact, which steps have a high degree of risk, and which steps are prioritized for transformation. Matriculation and publishing are shown to have a financial impact. Research foundation is shown to have a high degree of risk, and enrollment into a program and conducting research are prioritized for transformation.

    1.3 Value chain analysis

    Objective: Determine how the organization creates value, and prioritize value chains for innovation.

    1. The first step of delivering value is defining how it will happen. Use the organization’s industry segment to start a discussion on how value is created for customers. Working back from the moment value is realized by the customer, consider the sequential steps required to deliver value in your industry segment.
    2. Define and validate the organization’s value stream. Write a short description of the value stream that includes a statement about the value provided and a clear start and end for the value stream.
    3. Prioritize the value streams based on an evaluation criteria that reflects business and human value generators to the organization.
    4. Identify value chains that are associated with each value stream. The value chains refer to a string of processes within the value stream element. Each value chain also captures a particular stakeholder that benefits from the value chain.
    5. Once we have identified the key value chains within each value stream element, evaluate the individual processes within the value chain and identify areas for transformation. Evaluate the value chain processes based on the level of pain or exposure to risk experienced by a stakeholder to accomplish that task and the financial impact that level of the process has on the organization.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify value streams and capability maps

    Input

    • Market Assessment

    Output

    • Key Incumbents and Disruptors

    Materials

    • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • Executive Team

    Phase 2

    Identify a digitally enabled growth opportunity

    • Conduct horizon scan
    • Identify leapfrog idea
    • Conduct value chain impact analysis

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Assess trends that are impacting your industry and identify strategic growth opportunities.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes

    Identify new growth opportunities and value chains impacted

    Phase 2.1

    Horizon scanning

    Activities

    • Scan the internal and external environment for trends.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Systematically scan your environment to identify avenues or opportunities to skip one or several stages of technological development and stay ahead of disruption.

    Identify a digitally enabled growth opportunity

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Scan the environment for external environment for megatrends, trends, and drivers. Prioritize trends and build a trends radar to keep track of trends within your environment.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    Growth opportunity

    Horizon scanning

    Understand how your industry is evolving.

    Horizon scanning is a systematic analysis of detecting early signs of future changes or threats.

    Horizon scanning involves scanning, analyzing, and communicating changes in an organization’s environment to prepare for potential threats and opportunities. Much of what we know about the future is based around the interactions and trajectory of macro trends, trends, and drivers. These form the foundations for future intelligence.

    Macro Trends

    A macro trend captures a large-scale transformative trend that could impact your addressable market.

    Trends

    A trend captures a business use case of the macro trend. Consider trends in relation to competitors in your industry.

    Drivers

    A driver is an underlying force causing the trend to occur. There can be multiple causal forces, or drivers, that influence a trend, and multiple trends can be influenced by the same causal force.

    Identify signals of change in the present and their potential future impacts.

    Identifying macro trends

    A macro trend captures a large-scale transformative trend that could change the addressable market. Here are some examples of macro trends to consider when horizon scanning for your own organization:

    Talent Availability

    • Decentralized workforce
    • Hybrid workforce
    • Diverse workforce
    • Skills gap
    • Digital workforce
    • Multigenerational workforce

    Customer Expectations

    • Personalization
    • Digital experience
    • Data ownership
    • Transparency
    • Accessibility

    Technological Landscape

    • AI & robotics
    • Virtual world
    • Ubiquitous connectivity,
    • Genomics
    • Materials (smart, nano, bio)

    Regulatory System

    • Market control
    • Economic shifts
    • Digital regulation
    • Consumer protection
    • Global green

    Supply Chain Continuity

    • Resource scarcity
    • Sustainability
    • Supply chain digitization
    • Circular supply chains
    • Agility

    Identifying trends and drivers

    A trend captures a business use case of a macro trend. Assessing trends can reduce some uncertainties about the future and highlight potential opportunities for your organization. A driver captures the internal or external forces that lead the trend to occur. Understanding and capturing drivers is important to understanding why these trends are occurring and the potential impacts to your value chains.

    This image contains a flow chart, demonstrating the relationship between Macro trends, Trends, and Drivers. in this example, the macro trend is Accessibility. The Trends, or patterns of change, are an increase in demands for micro-credentials, and Preference for eLearning. The Drivers, or the why, are addressing skill gaps for increase in demand for micro-credentials, and Accommodating adult/working learners- for Preference for eLearning.

    Leverage industry roundtables and trend reports to understand the art of the possible

    Uncover important business and industry trends that can inform possibilities for technology innovation.

    Explore trends in areas such as:

    • Machine Learning
    • Citizen Dev 2.0
    • Venture Architecture
    • Autonomous Organizations
    • Self-Sovereign Cloud
    • Digital Sustainability

    Market research is critical in identifying factors external to your organization and identifying technology innovation that will provide a competitive edge. It’s important to evaluate the impact each trend or opportunity will have in your organization and market.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Trends & Priorities Research Center

    Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify your industry’s value streams

    this image contains three screenshots from Rethinking Higher Education Report and 2021 Tech Trends Report

    Images are from Info-Tech’s Rethinking Higher Education Report and 2021 Tech Trends Report

    Example horizon scanning activity

    Macro Trends Trends Drivers
    Talent Availability Diversity Inclusive campus culture Systemic inequities
    Hybrid workforce Online learning staff COVID-19 and access to physical institutions
    Customer Expectations Digital experience eLearning for working learners Accommodate adult learners
    Accessibility Micro-credentials for non-traditional students Addressing skills gap
    Technological Landscape Artificial intelligence and robotics AI for personalized learning Hyper personalization
    IoT IoT for monitoring equipment Asset tracking
    Augmented reality Immersive education AR and VR Personalized experiences
    Regulatory System Regulatory System Alternative funding for research Changes in federal funding
    Global Green Environmental and sustainability education curricula Regulatory and policy changes
    Supply Chain Continuity Circular supply chains Vendors recycling outdated technology Sustainability
    Cloud-based solutions Cloud-based eLearning software Convenience and accessibility

    Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify your industry’s value streams

    Prioritize trends

    Develop a cross-industry holistic view of trends.

    Visualize emerging and prioritize action.

    Moving from horizon scanning to action requires an evaluation process to determine which trends can lead to growth opportunities. First, we need to make a short list of trends to analyze. For your digital strategy, consider trends on the time horizon that are under 24 months. Next, we need to evaluate the shortlisted opportunities by a second set of criteria: relevance to your organization and impact on industry.

    Timing

    The estimated time to disruption this trend will have for your industry. Assess whether the trend will require significant developments to support its entry into the ecosystem.

    Relevance

    The relevance of the trend to your organization. Does the trend fulfil the vision or goals of the organization?

    Impact

    The degree of impact the trend will have on your industry. A trend with high impact will drive new business models, products, or services.

    Prioritize trends to adopt into your organization

    Prioritize trends based on timing, impact, and relevance.

    Trend Timing
    (S/M/L)
    Impact
    (1-5)
    Relevance
    ( 1-5)
    1. Micro-credentialing S 5 5
    2. IoT-connected devices for personalized experience S 1 3
    3. International partnerships with educational institutions M
    4. Use of chatbots throughout enrollment process L
    5. IoT for energy management of campus facilities L
    6. Gamification of digital course content M
    7. Flexible learning curricula S 4 3
    Deprioritize trends
    that have a time frame
    to disruption of more
    than 24 months.
    this image contains a graph demonstrating the relationship between relevance (x axis) and Impact (Y axis).

    2.1 Scanning the horizon

    Objective: Generate trends

    60 minutes

    • Start by selecting macro trends that are occurring in your environment using the five categories. These are the large-scale transformative trends that impact your addressable market. Macro trends have three key characteristics:
      • They span over a long period of time.
      • They impact all geographic regions.
      • They impact governments, individuals, and organizations.
    • Begin to break down these macro trends into trends. Trends should reflect the direction of a macro trend and capture the pattern in events. Consider trends that directly impact your organization.
    • Understand the drivers behind these trends. Why are they occurring? What is driving them? Understanding the drivers helps us understand the value they may generate.
    • Deprioritize trends that are expected to happen beyond 24 months.
    • Prioritize trends that have a high impact and relevance to the organization.
    • If you identify more than one trend, discuss with the group which trend you would like to pursue and limit it to one opportunity.

    Input

    • Macro Trends
    • Trends

    Output

    • Trends Prioritization

    Materials

    • Digital Strategy Workbook

    Participants

    • Executive Team

    Step 2.2

    Leapfrogging ideation

    Activities

    • Identify leapfrog ideas.
    • Identify impact to value chain.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A systematic approach to leapfrog ideation is one of the most critical ways in which an organization can build the capacity for resilient innovation.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Evaluate trend opportunities and determine the strategic opportunities they pose. You will also work towards identifying the impact the trend has on your value chain.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Strategic growth opportunities
    • Value chain impact

    Leapfrog into the future

    Turn trends into growth opportunities.

    To thrive in the digital age, organizations must innovate big, leverage internal creativity, and prepare for flexibility.

    In this digital era, organizations are often playing catch up to a rapidly evolving technological landscape and following a strict linear approach to innovation. However, this linear catch-up approach does not help companies get ahead of competitors. Instead, organizations must identify avenues to skip one or several stages of technological development to leapfrog ahead of their competitors.

    The best way to predict the future is to invent it. – Alan Kay

    Leapfrogging takes place when an organization introduces disruptive innovation into the market and sidesteps competitors who are unable to mobilize to respond to the opportunities.

    Case Study

    Classroom of the Future

    Higher Education: Barco’s Virtual Classroom at UCL

    University College London (UCL), in the United Kingdom, selected Barco weConnect virtual classroom technology for its continuing professional development medical education offering. UCL uses the platform for synchronous teaching, where remote students can interact with a lecturer.

    One of the main advantages of the system is that it enables direct interaction with students through polls, questions, and whiteboarding. The system also allows you to track student engagement in real time.

    The system has also been leveraged for scientific research and publications. In their “Delphi” process, key opinion leaders were able to collaborate in an effective way to reach consensus on a subject matter. The processes that normally takes months were successfully completed in 48 hours (McCann, 2020).

    Results

    The system has been largely successful and has supported remote, real-time teaching, two-way engagement, engagement with international staff, and an overall enriched teaching experience.

    Funnel trends into leapfrog ideas

    Go from trend insights into ideas.

    Brainstorm ways of generating leapfrog ideas from trend insights.

    Dealing with trends is one of the most important tasks for innovation. It provides the basis of developing the future orientation of the organization. However, being aware of a trend is one thing, to develop strategies for response is another.

    To identify the impact the trend has on the organization, consider the four areas of growth strategies for the organization:

    1. New Customers: Leverage the trend to target new customers for existing products or services.
    2. New Business Models: Adjust the business model to capture a change in how the organization delivers value.
    3. New Markets: Enter or create new markets by applying existing products or services to different problems.
    4. New Product or Service Offerings: Introduce new products or services to the existing market.
    A funnel shaped image is depicted. At the top, at the entrance of the funnel, is the word Trend. At the bottom of the image, at the output of the funnel, is the word Opportunity.

    From trend to leapfrog ideas

    Trend New Customer New Market New Business Model New Product or Service
    What trends pose a high-immediate impact to the organization? Target new customers for existing products or services Enter or create new markets by applying existing products or services to different problems Adjust the business model to capture a change in how the organization delivers value Introduce new products or services to the existing market
    Micro-credentials for non-traditional students Target non-traditional learners/students - Online delivery Introduce mini MBA program

    2.2 Identify and prioritize opportunities

    60 minutes

    1. Gather the prioritized trend identified in the horizon scanning exercise (the trend identified to be “adopted” within the organization).
    2. Analyze each trend identified and assess whether the trend provides an opportunity for a new customers, new markets, new business models, or new products and services.

    Input

    • “Adopt” Trends

    Output

    • Trends to pursue
    • Breakdown of strategic opportunities that the trends pose

    Materials

    • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • Executive Team

    Step 2.3

    Value chain impact

    Activities

    • Identify impact to value chain.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Evaluate trend opportunities and determine the strategic opportunities they pose. Prioritize the opportunities and identify impact to your value chain.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Strategic growth opportunities

    Value chain analysis

    Identify implications of strategic growth opportunities to the value chains.

    As we identify and prioritize the opportunities available to us, we need to assess their impacts on value chains. Does the opportunity directly impact an existing value chain? Or does it open us to the creation of a new value chain?

    The value chain perspective allows an organization to identify how to best minimize or enhance impacts and generate value.
    As we move from opportunity to impact, it is important to break down opportunities into the relevant pieces so we can see a holistic picture of the sources of differentiation.

    this image depicts the value chain for the value stream, student enrolment.

    2.3 Value chain impact

    Objective: Identify impacts to the value chain from the opportunities identified.
    60 minutes

    1. Once you have identified the opportunity, turn back to the value stream, and with the working group, identify the value stream impacted most by the opportunity. Leverage the human impact/business impact criteria to support the identification of the value stream to be impacted.
    2. Within the value stream, brainstorm what parts of the value chain will be impacted by the new opportunity. Or ask whether this new opportunity provides you with a new value chain to be created.
    3. If this opportunity will require a new value chain, identify what set of new processes or steps will be created to support this new entrant.
    4. Identify any critical value chains that will be impacted by the new opportunity. What areas of the value chain pose the greatest risk? And where can we estimate the financial revenue will be impacted the most?

    Input

    • Opportunity

    Output

    • Value chains impacted

    Materials

    • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • Executive Team

    Phase 3

    Transform stakeholder journeys

    • Identify stakeholder personas and scenarios
    • Conduct journey map
    • Identify projects

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Take the prioritized value chains and create a journey map to capture the end-to-end experience of a stakeholder.

    Through a journey mapping exercise, you will identify opportunities to digitize parts of the journey. These opportunities will be broken down into functional initiatives to tackle in your strategy.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes

    1. Stakeholder persona
    2. Stakeholder scenario
    3. Stakeholder journey map
    4. Opportunities

    Step 3.1

    Identify stakeholder persona and journey scenario

    Activities

    • Identify stakeholder persona.
    • Identify stakeholder journey scenario.

    Transform stakeholder journeys

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    In this step, you with identify stakeholder personas and scenarios relating to the prioritized value chains.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A taxonomy of critical stakeholder journeys.

    Identify stakeholder persona and journey scenario

    From value chain to journey scenario.

    Stakeholder personas and scenarios help us build empathy towards our customers. It helps put us into the shoes of a stakeholder and relate to their experience to solve problems or understand how they experience the steps or processes required to accomplish a goal. A user persona is a valuable basis for stakeholder journey mapping.

    A stakeholder scenario describes the situation the journey map addresses. Scenarios can be real (for existing products and services) or anticipated.

    A stakeholder persona is a fictitious profile to represent a customer or a user segment. Creating this persona helps us understand who your customers really are and why they are using your service or product.

    Learn more about applying design thinking methodologies

    Identify stakeholder scenarios to map

    For your digital strategy, leverage the existing and opportunity value chains identified in phase 1 and 2 for journey mapping.

    Identify two existing value chains to be transformed.
    In section 1, we identified existing value chains to be transformed. For example, your stakeholder persona is a member of the faculty (engineering), and the scenario is the curricula design process.
    this image contains the value chains for instruction (engineering) and enrolment of engineering student. the instruction(engineering) value chain includes curricula research, curricula design, curricula delivery, and Assessment for the faculty-instructor. The enrolment of engineering student value chain includes matriculation, enrolment into a program, and unit enrolment for the student. In the instruction(engineering) value chain, curricula design is highlighted in blue. In the enrolment of engineering student value chain, Enrolment into a program is highlighted.
    Identify one new value chain.
    In section 2, we identified a new value chain. However, for a new opportunity, the scenario is more complex as it may capture many different areas of a value chain. Subsequently, a journey map for a new opportunity may require mapping all parts of the value chain.
    this image contains an example of a value chain for micro-credentialing (mini online MBA)

    Identify stakeholder persona

    Who are you transforming for?

    To define a stakeholder scenario, we need to understand who we are mapping for. In each value chain, we identified a stakeholder who gains value from that value chain. We now need to develop a stakeholder persona: a representation of the end user to gain a strong understanding of who they are, what they need, and their pains and gains.

    One of the best ways to flesh out your stakeholder persona is to engage with the stakeholders directly or to gather the input of those who may engage with them within the organization.

    For example, if we want to define a journey map for a student, we might want to gather the input of students or teaching faculty that have firsthand encounters with different student types and are able to define a common student type.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Run a survey to understand your end users and develop a stronger picture of who they are and what they are seeking to gain from your organization.

    Example Stakeholder Persona

    Name: Anne
    Age: 35
    Occupation: Engineering Faculty
    Location: Toronto, Canada

    Pains

    What are their frustrations, fears, and anxieties?

    • Time restraints
    • Using new digital tools
    • Managing a class while incorporating individual learning
    • Varying levels within the same class
    • Unmotivated students

    What do they need to do?

    What do they want to get done? How will they know they are successful?

    • Design curricula in a hybrid mode without loss of quality of experience of in-classroom learning.

    Gains

    What are their wants, needs, hopes, and dreams?

    • Interactive content for students
    • Curriculum alignment
    • Ability to run a classroom lab (in hybrid format)
    • Self-paced and self-directed learning opportunities for students

    (Adapted from Osterwalder, et al., 2014)

    Define a journey statement for mapping

    Now that we understand who we are mapping for, we need to define a journey statement to capture the stakeholder journey.
    Leverage the following format to define the journey statement.
    As a [stakeholder], I need to [prioritized value chain task], so that I can [desired result or overall goal].

    this image contains the instruction(engineering) value chain shown above. next to it is a stakeholder journey statement, which states: As an engineering faculty member, I want to design my curricula in a hybrid mode of delivery so that I can simulate in-classroom experiences.

    3.1 Identify stakeholder persona and journey scenario

    Objective: Identify stakeholder persona and journey scenario statement for journey mapping exercise.

    1. Start by identifying who your stakeholder is. Give your stakeholder a demographic profile – capture a typical stakeholder for this value chain.
    2. Identify what the gains and pains are during this value chain and what the stakeholder is seeking to accomplish.
    3. Looking at the value chain, create a statement that captures the goals and needs of the stakeholder. Use the following format to create a statement:
      As a [stakeholder], I need to [prioritized value chain task], so that I can [desired result or overall goal].

    Input

    • Prioritized Value Chains (existing and opportunity)

    Output

    • Stakeholder Persona
    • Stakeholder Journey Statement

    Materials

    • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)
    • Stakeholder Persona Canvas

    Participants

    • Executive Team
    • Stakeholders (if possible)
    • Individual who works directly with stakeholders

    Step 3.2

    Map stakeholder journeys

    Activities

    • Map stakeholder journeys.

    Transform stakeholder journeys

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Prioritize the journeys by focusing on what matters most to the stakeholders and estimating the organizational effort to improve those experiences.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Candidate journeys identified for redesign or build.

    Leverage customer journey mapping to capture value chains to be transformed

    Conduct a journey mapping exercise to identify opportunities for innovation or automation.

    A journey-based approach helps an organization understand how a stakeholder moves through a process and interacts with the organization in the form of touch points, channels, and supporting characters. By identifying pain points in the journey and the activity types, we can identify opportunities for innovation and automation along the journey.

    Embrace design thinking methodologies to elevate the stakeholder journey and to build a competitive advantage for your organization.

    this image contains an example of the result of a journey mapping exercise. the main headings are Awareness, Consideration, Acquisition, Service and, Loyalty.

    Internal vs. external stakeholder perspective

    In journey mapping, we always start with the stakeholder's perspective, then eventually transition into what the organization does business-wise to deliver value to each stakeholder. It is important to keep in mind both perspectives while conducting a journey mapping exercise as there are often different roles, processes, and technologies associated with each of the journey steps.

    Stakeholder Journey
    (External Perspective)

    • Awareness
    • Consideration
    • Selecting
    • Negotiating
    • Approving

    Business Processes
    (Internal Perspective)

    • Preparation
    • Prospecting
    • Presentation
    • Closing
    • Follow-Up

    Info-Tech Insight

    Take the perspective of an end user, who interacts with your products and services, as it is different from the view of those inside the organization, who implement and provide those services.

    Build a stakeholder journey map

    A stakeholder journey map is a tool used to illustrate the user’s perceptions, emotions, and needs as they move through a process and interact with the organization in the form of touch points, channels, and supporting characters.

    this image depicts an example of a stakeholder journey map, the headings in the map are: Journey Activity; Touch Points; Metrics; Nature of Activity; Key Moments & Pain Points; Opportunities

    Stakeholder Journey Map: Journey Activity

    The journey activity refers to the steps taken to accomplish a goal.

    The journey activity comprises the steps or sequence of tasks the stakeholder takes to accomplish their goal. These steps reflect the high-level process your candidates perform to complete a task or solve a problem.

    Stakeholder Journey Map: Touch Points

    Touch points are the points of interaction between a stakeholder and the organization.

    A touch point refers to any time a stakeholder interacts with your organization or brand. Consider three main points of interaction with the customer in the journey:

    • Before: How did they find out about you? How did they first contact you to start this journey? What channels or mediums were used?
      • Social media
      • Rating & reviews
      • Word of mouth
      • Advertising
    • During: How was the sale or service accomplished?
      • Website
      • Catalog
      • Promotions
      • Point of sale
      • Phone system
    • After: What happened after the sale or service?
      • Billing
      • Transactional emails
      • Marketing emails
      • Follow-ups
      • Thank-you emails

    Stakeholder Journey Map: Nature of Activity

    The nature of activity refers to the type of task the journey activity captures.

    We categorize the activity type to identify opportunities for automation. There are four main types of task types, which in combination (as seen in the table below) capture a task or job to be automated.

    Routine Non-Routine
    Cognitive Routine Cognitive: repeatable tasks that rely on knowledge work, e.g. sales, administration
    Prioritize for automation (2)
    Non-Routine Cognitive: infrequent tasks that rely on knowledge work, e.g. driving, fraud detection
    Prioritize for automation (3)
    Non-Routine Cognitive: infrequent tasks that rely on knowledge work, e.g. driving, fraud detection Prioritize for automation (3) Routine Manual: repeatable tasks that rely on physical work, e.g. manufacturing, production
    Prioritize for automation (1)
    Non-Routine Manual: infrequent tasks that rely on physical work, e.g. food preparation
    Not mature for automation

    Info-Tech Insight

    Where automation makes sense, routine manual activities should be transformed first, followed by routine cognitive activities. Non-routine cognitive activities are the final frontier.

    Stakeholder Journey Map: Metrics

    Metrics are a quantifiable measurement of a process, activity, or initiative.

    Metrics are crucial to justify expenses and to estimate growth for capacity planning and resourcing. There are multiple benefits to identifying and implementing metrics in a journey map:

    • Metrics provide accurate indicators for accurate IT and business decisions.
    • Metrics help you identify stakeholder touch point efficiencies and problems and solve issues before they become more serious.
    • Active metrics tracking makes root cause analysis of issues much easier.

    Example of journey mapping metrics: Cost, effort, turnaround time, throughput, net promoter score (NPS), satisfaction score

    Stakeholder Journey Map: Key Moments & Pain Points

    Key moments and pain points refer to the emotional status of a stakeholder at each stake of the customer journey.

    The key moments are defining pieces or periods in a stakeholder's experience that create a critical turning point or memory.

    The pain points are the critical problems that the stakeholder is facing during the journey or business continuity risks. Prioritize identifying pain points around key moments.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To identify key moments, look for moments that can dramatically influence the quality of the journey or end the journey prematurely. To improve the experience, analyze the hidden needs and how they are or aren’t being met.

    Stakeholder Journey Map: Opportunities

    An opportunity is an investment into people, process, or technology for the purposes of building or improving a business capability and accomplishing a specific organizational objective.

    An opportunity refers to the initiatives or projects that should address a stakeholder pain. Opportunities should also produce a demonstrable financial impact – whether direct (e.g. cost reduction) or indirect (e.g. risk mitigation) – and be evaluated based on how technically difficult it will be to implement.

    Customer

    Create new or different experiences for customers

    Workforce

    Generate new organizational skills or new ways of working

    Operations

    Improve responsiveness and resilience of operations

    Innovation

    Develop different products or services

    Example of stakeholder journey output: Higher Education

    Stakeholder: A faculty member
    Journey: As an engineering faculty member, I want to design my curricula in a hybrid mode of delivery so that I can simulate in-classroom experiences

    Journey activity Understanding the needs of students Construct the course material Deliver course material Conduct assessments Upload grades into system
    Touch Points
    • Research (primary or secondary)
    • Teaching and learning center
    • Training on tools
    • Office suite
    • Video tools
    • PowerPoint live
    • Chat (live)
    • Forum (FAQ
    • Online assessment tool
    • ERP
    • LMS
    Nature of Activity Non-routine cognitive Non-routine cognitive Non-routine cognitive Routine cognitive Routine Manual
    Metrics
    • Time to completion
    • Time to completion
    • Student satisfaction
    • Student satisfaction
    • Student scores
    Ken Moments & Pain Points Lack of centralized repository for research knowledge
    • Too many tools to use
    • Lack of Wi-Fi connectivity for students
    • Loss of social aspects
    • Adjusting to new forms of assessments
    No existing critical pain points; process already automated
    Opportunities
    • Centralized repository for research knowledge
    • Rationalize course creation tool set
    • Connectivity self-assessment/checklist
    • Forums for students
    • Implement an online proctoring tool

    3.2 Stakeholder journey mapping

    Objective: Conduct journey mapping exercise for existing value chains and for opportunities.

    1. Gather the working group and, with the journey mapping workbook, begin to map out the journey scenario statements identified in the value chain analysis. In total, there should be three journey maps:
      • Two for the existing value chains. Map out the specific point in the value chain that is to be transformed.
      • One for the opportunity value chain. Map out all parts of the value chain to be impacted by the new opportunity.
    2. Start with the journey activity and map out the steps involved to accomplish the goal of the stakeholder.
    3. Identify the touch points involved in the value chain.
    4. Categorize the nature of the activity in the journey activity.
    5. Identify metrics for the journey. How can we measure the success of the journey?
    6. Identify pain points and opportunities in parallel with one another.

    Input

    • Value Chain Analysis
    • Stakeholder Personas
    • Journey Mapping Scenario

    Output

    • Journey Map

    Materials

    • Digital Strategy Workbook, Stakeholder Journey tab

    Participants

    • Executives
    • Individuals in the organization that have a direct interaction with the stakeholders

    Info-Tech Insight

    Aim to build out 90% of the stakeholder journey map with the working team; validate the last 10% with the stakeholder themselves.

    Step 3.3

    Prioritize opportunities

    Activities

    • Prioritize opportunities.

    Transform stakeholder journeys

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Prioritize the opportunities that arose from the stakeholder journey mapping exercise.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    Prioritized opportunities

    Prioritization of opportunities

    Leverage design-thinking methods to prioritize opportunities.

    As there may be many opportunities arising from the journey map, we need to prioritize ideas to identify which ones we can tackle first – or at all. Leverage IDEO’s design-thinking “three lenses of innovation” to support prioritization:

    • Feasibility: Do you currently have the capabilities to deliver on this opportunity? Do we have the right partners, resources, or technology?
    • Desirability: Is this a solution the stakeholder needs? Does it solve a known pain point?
    • Viability: Does this initiative have an impact on the financial revenue of the organization? Is it a profitable solution that will support the business model? Will this opportunity require a complex cost structure?
    Opportunities Feasibility
    (L/M/H)
    Desirability
    (L/M/H)
    Viability
    (L/M/H)
    Centralized repository for research knowledge H H H
    Rationalize course creation tool set H H H
    Connectivity self-assessment/ checklist H M H
    Forums for students M H H
    Exam preparation (e.g. education or practice exams) H H H

    3.3 Prioritization of opportunities

    Objective: Prioritize opportunities for creating a roadmap.

    1. Gather the opportunities identified in the journey mapping exercise
    2. Assess the opportunities based on IDEO’s three lenses of innovation:
      • Feasibility: Do you currently have the capabilities to deliver on this opportunity? Do we have the right partners, resources, or technology?
      • Viability: Does this initiative have an impact on the financial revenue of the organization? Is it a profitable solution that will support the business model? Will this opportunity require a complex cost structure?
      • Desirability: Is this a solution the stakeholder needs? Does it solve a known pain point?
    3. Opportunities that score high in all three areas are prioritized for the roadmap.

    Input

    • Opportunities From Journey Map

    Output

    • Prioritized Opportunities

    Materials

    • Digital Strategy Workbook

    Participants

    • Executives

    Step 3.4

    Define digital goals

    Activities

    Transform stakeholder journeys

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Define a digital goal as it relates to the prioritized opportunities and the stakeholder journey map.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    Digital goals

    Define digital goals

    What digital goals can be derived from the stakeholder journey?

    With the prioritized set of opportunities for each stakeholder journey, take a step back and assess what the sum of these opportunities mean for the journey. What is the overall goal or objective of these opportunities? How do these opportunities change or facilitate the journey experience? From here, identify a single goal statement for each stakeholder journey.

    Stakeholder Scenario Prioritized Opportunities Goal
    Faculty (Engineering) As a faculty (Engineering), I want to prepare and teach my course in a hybrid mode of delivery Centralized repository for research knowledge
    Rationalized course creation tool set
    Support hybrid course curricula development through value-driven toolsets and centralized knowledge

    3.4 Define digital goals

    Objective: Identify digital goals derived from the journey statements.

    1. With the prioritized set of opportunities for each stakeholder journey (the two existing journeys and one opportunity journey) take a step back and assess what the sum of these opportunities means for each journey.
      • What is the overall goal or objective of these opportunities?
      • How do these opportunities change or facilitate the journey experience?
    2. From here, identify a single goal for each stakeholder journey.

    Input

    • Opportunities From Journey Map
    • Stakeholder Persona

    Output

    • Digital Goals

    Materials

    • Prioritization Matrix

    Participants

    • Executives

    Step 3.5

    Breakdown opportunities into series of initiatives

    Activities

    • Identify initiatives from the opportunities.

    Transform stakeholder journeys

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify people, process, and technology initiatives for the opportunities identified.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • People, process, and technology initiatives

    Break down opportunities into a series of initiatives

    Brainstorm initiatives for each high-priority opportunity using the framework below. Describe each initiative as a plan or action to take to solve the problem.

    Opportunity → Initiatives:

    People: What initiatives are required to manage people, data, and other organizational factors that are impacted by this opportunity?

    Process: What processes must be created, changed, or removed based on the data?

    Technology: What systems are required to support this opportunity?

    Break down opportunities into a series of initiatives

    Initiatives
    Centralized repository for research knowledge Technology Acquire and implement knowledge management application
    People Train researchers on functionality
    Process Periodically review and validate data entries into repository
    Initiatives
    Rationalize course creation toolset Technology Retire duplicate or under-used tools
    People Provide training on tool types and align to user needs
    Process Catalog software applications and tools across the organization
    Identify under-used or duplicate tools/applications

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ruthlessly evaluate if a initiative should stand alone or if it can be rolled up with another. Fewer initiatives or opportunities increases focus and alignment, allowing for better communication.

    3.5 Break down opportunities into initiatives

    Objective: Break down opportunities into people, process, and technology initiatives.

    1. Split into groups and identify initiatives required to deliver on each opportunity. Document each initiative on sticky notes.
    2. Have each team answer the following questions to identify initiatives for the prioritized opportunities:
      • People: What initiatives are required to manage people, data, and other organizational factors that are impacted by this opportunity?
      • Process: What processes must be created, changed, or removed based on the data?
      • Technology: What systems are required to support this opportunity?
    3. Document findings in the Digital Strategy Workbook.

    Input

    • Opportunities

    Output

    • Opportunity initiatives categorized by people, process and technology

    Materials

    • Digital Strategy Workbook

    Participants

    • Executive team

    Phase 4

    Build a digital transformation roadmap

    • Detail initiatives
    • Build a unified roadmap roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Build a digital transformation roadmap that captures people, process, and technology initiatives.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes

    • Digital transformation roadmap

    Step 4.1

    Detail initiatives

    Activities

    • Detail initiatives.

    Build a digital transformation roadmap

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Detail initiatives for each priority initiative on your horizon.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A roadmap for your digital business strategy.

    Create initiative profiles for each high-priority initiative on your strategy

    this image contains a screenshot of an example initiative profile

    Step 4.2

    Build a roadmap

    Activities

    • Create a roadmap of initiatives.

    Build a digital transformation roadmap

    Info-Tech Insight

    A roadmap that balances growth opportunities with business resilience will transform your organization for long-term success in the digital economy.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify timing of initiatives and build a Gantt chart roadmap.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A roadmap for your digital transformation and the journey canvases for each of the prioritized journeys.

    Build a roadmap to visualize your key initiative plan

    Visual representations of data are more compelling than text alone.

    Develop a high-level document that travels with the initiative from inception through executive inquiry, project management, and finally execution.

    A initiative needs to be discrete: able to be conceptualized and discussed as an independent item. Each initiative must have three characteristics:

    • Specific outcome: Describe an explicit change in the people, processes, or technology of the enterprise.
    • Target end date: When the described outcome will be in effect.
    • Owner: Who on the IT team is responsible for executing on the initiative.
    this image contains screenshots of a sample roadmap for supporting hybrid course curricula development through value-driven toolsets and centralized knowledge.

    4.2 Build your roadmap (30 minutes)

    1. For the Gantt chart:
      • Input the Roadmap Start Year date.
      • Change the months and year in the Gantt chart to reflect the same roadmap start year.
      • Populate the planned start and planned end date for the pre-populated list of high-priority initiatives in each category (people, process, and technology).

    Input

    • Initiatives
    • Initiative start & end dates
    • Initiative category

    Output

    • Digital strategy roadmap visual

    Materials

    • Digital Strategy Workbook

    Participants

    • Senior Executive

    Learn more about project portfolio management strategy

    Step 4.3

    Create a refresh strategy

    Activities

    • Refresh your strategy.

    Build a digital transformation roadmap

    Info-Tech Insight

    A digital strategy is a design process, it must be revisited to pressure test and account for changes in the external environment.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Detail a refresh strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Refresh strategy

    Create a refresh strategy

    It is important to dedicate time to your strategy throughout the year. Create a refresh plan to assess for the changing business context and its impact on the digital business strategy. Make sure the regular planning cycle is not the primary trigger for strategy review. Put a process in place to review the strategy and make your organization proactive. Start by examining the changes to the business context and how the effect would trickle downwards. It’s typical for organizations to build a refresh strategy around budget season and hold planning and touch points to accommodate budget approval time.
    Example:

    this image contains an example of a refresh strategy.

    4.3 Create a refresh strategy (30 minutes)

    1. Work with the digital strategy creation team to identify the time frequencies the organization should consider to refresh the digital business strategy. Time frequencies can also be events that trigger a review (i.e. changing business goals). Record the different time frequencies in the Refresh of the Digital Business Strategy slide of the section.
    2. Discuss with the team the different audience members for each time frequency and the scope of the refresh. The scope represents what areas of the digital business strategy need to be re-examined and possibly changed.

    Example:

    Frequency Audience Scope Date
    Annually Executive Leadership Resurvey, review/ validate, update schedule Pre-budget
    Touch Point Executive Leadership Status update, risks/ constraints, priorities Oct 2021
    Every Year (Re-build) Executive Leadership Full planning Jan 2022

    Input

    • Digital Business Strategy

    Output

    • Refresh Strategy

    Materials

    • Digital Business Strategy Presentation Template
    • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • Executive Leaders

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Design a Customer-Centric Digital Operating Model

    Design a Customer-Centric Digital Operating Model

    Establish a new way of working to deliver value on your digital transformation initiatives.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Drive project throughput by throttling resource capacity.

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

    Innovation needs design thinking.

    Digital Maturity Improvement Service

    Digital Maturity Improvement Service

    Prepare your organization for digital transformation – or risk falling behind.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Kenneth McGee

    this is a picture of Research Fellow, Kenneth McGee

    Research Fellow
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kenneth McGee is a Research Fellow within the CIO practice at Info-Tech Research Group and is focused on IT business and financial management issues, including IT Strategy, IT Budgets and Cost Management, Mergers & Acquisitions (M&A), and Digital Transformation. He also has extensive experience developing radical IT cost reduction and return-to-growth initiatives during and following financial recessions.

    Ken works with CIOs and IT leaders to help establish twenty-first-century IT organizational charters, structures, and responsibilities. Activities include IT organizational design, IT budget creation, chargeback, IT strategy formulation, and determining the business value derived from IT solutions. Ken’s research has specialized in conducting interviews with CEOs of some of the world’s largest corporations. He has also interviewed a US Cabinet member and IT executives at the White

    House. He has been a frequent keynote speaker at industry conventions, client sales kick-off meetings, and IT offsite planning sessions.

    Ken obtained a BA in Cultural Anthropology from Dowling College, Oakdale, NY, and has pursued graduate studies at Polytechnic Institute (now part of NYU University). He has been an adjunct instructor at State University of New York, Westchester Community College.

    Jack Hakimian

    this is a picture of Vice President of the Info-Tech Research Group, Jack Hakimian

    Vice President
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Jack has more than 25 years of technology and management consulting experience. He has served multi-billion dollar organizations in multiple industries including Financial Services and Telecommunications. Jack also served a number of large public sector institutions.

    Prior to joining the Info-Tech Research Group, he worked for leading consulting players such as Accenture, Deloitte, EY, and IBM.

    Jack led digital business strategy engagements as well as corporate strategy and M&A advisory services for clients across North America, Europe, the Middle East, and Africa. He is a seasoned technology consultant who has developed IT strategies and technology roadmaps, led large business transformations, established data governance programs, and managed the deployment of mission-critical CRM and ERP applications.

    He is a frequent speaker and panelist at technology and innovation conferences and events and holds a Master’s degree in Computer Engineering as well as an MBA from the ESCP-EAP European School of Management.

    Bibliography

    Abrams, Karin von. “Global Ecommerce Forecast 2021.” eMarketer, Insider Intelligence, 7 July 2021. Web.

    Christenson, Clayton. The Innovator's Dilemma: When New Technologies Cause Great Firms to Fail. Harvard Business School, 1997. Book.

    Drucker, Peter F., and Joseph A. Maciariello. Innovation and Entrepreneurship. Routledge, 2015.

    Eagar, Rick, David Boulton, and Camille Demyttenaere. “The Trends in Megatrends.” Arthur D Little, Prism, no. 2, 2014. Web.

    Enright, Sara, and Allison Taylor. “The Future of Stakeholder Engagement.” The Business of a Better World, October 2016. Web.

    Hatem, Louise, Daniel Ker, and John Mitchell. “A roadmap toward a common framework for measuring the digital economy.” Report for the G20 Digital Economy Task Force, OECD, 2020. Web.

    Kemp, Simon. “Digital 2021 April Statshot Report.” DataReportal, Global Digital Insights, 21 Apr. 2021. Web.

    Larson, Chris. “Disruptive Innovation Theory: 4 Key Concepts.” Business Insights, Harvard Business School, HBS Online, 15 Nov. 2016. Web.

    McCann, Leah. “Barco's Virtual Classroom at UCL: A Case Study for the Future of All University Classrooms?” rAVe, 2 July 2020. Web.

    Mochari, Ilan. “The Startup Buzzword Almost Everyone Uses Incorrectly.” Inc., 19 Nov. 2015. Web.

    Osterwalder, Alexander, et al. Value Proposition Design. Wiley, 2014.

    Reed, Laura. “Artificial Intelligence: Is Your Job at Risk?” Science Node, 9 August 2017.

    Rodeck, David. “Alphabet Soup: Understanding the Shape of a Covid-19 Recession.” Forbes, 8 June 2020. Web.

    Tapscott, Don. Wikinomics. Atlantic Books, 2014.

    Taylor, Paul. “Don't Be A Dodo: Adapt to the Digital Economy.” Forbes, 27 Aug. 2015. Web.

    The Business Research Company. "Wholesale Global Market Report 2021: COVID-19 Impact and Recovery to 2030." Research and Markets, January 2021. Press Release.

    “Topic 1: Megatrends and Trends.” BeFore, 11 October 2018.

    “Updated Digital Economy Estimates – June 2021.” Bureau of Economic Analysis, June 2021. Web.

    Williamson, J. N. The Leader Manager. John Wiley & Sons, 1984.

    Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}220|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

    Access to information about companies is more available to consumers than ever. Organizations must implement mechanisms to monitor and manage how information is perceived to avoid potentially disastrous consequences to their brand reputation.

    A negative event could impact your organization's reputation at any given time. Make sure you understand where such events may come from and have a plan to manage the inevitable consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential impact on your organization’s reputation requires efforts from multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how social media can affect your brand.
    • Organizational leadership is often caught unaware during crises, and their response plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant market upheavals.

    Impact and Result

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your reputation and brand with our Reputational Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization Deck – Use the research to better understand the negative impacts of vendor actions on your brand reputation.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential reputational impacts caused by vendors. Use Info-Tech's approach to look at the reputational impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

    2. Reputational Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the reputational impacts of negative vendor actions.

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate - possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Reputational Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Brand reputation is the most valuable asset an organization can protect.

    Analyst Perspective

    Organizations must diligently assess and protect their reputations, both in the market and internally.

    Social media, unprecedented access to good and bad information, and consumer reliance on others’ online opinions force organizations to dedicate more resources to protecting their brand reputation than ever before. Perceptions matter, and you should monitor and protect the perception of your organization with as much rigor as possible to ensure your brand remains recognizable and trusted.

    Photo of Frank Sewell, Research Director, Vendor Management, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Access to information about companies is more available to consumers than ever. A negative event could impact your organizational reputation at any time. As a result, organizations must implement mechanisms to monitor and manage how information is perceived to avoid potentially disastrous consequences to their brand reputation.

    Make sure you understand where negative events may come from and have a plan to manage the inevitable consequences.

    Common Obstacles

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential impact on your organization’s reputation requires efforts from multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how social media can affect your brand.

    Organizational leadership is often caught unaware during crises, and their response plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant market upheavals.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your reputation and brand with our Reputational Risk Impact Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to rapid changes in online media. Ongoing monitoring of social media and the vendors tied to their company is imperative to achieving success and avoiding reputational disasters.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and individual components of vendor risk branching off of it: 'Financial', 'Reputational', 'Operational', 'Strategic', 'Security', and 'Regulatory & Compliance'.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of scope:
    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Reputational risk impacts

    Potential losses to the organization due to risks to its reputation and brand

    In this blueprint, we’ll explore reputational risks (risks to the brand reputation of the organization) and their impacts.

    Identify potentially negative events to assess the overall impact on your organization and implement adaptive measures to respond and correct.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and the vendor risk component 'Reputational' highlighted.

    Protect your most valuable asset: your brand

    25%

    of a company’s market value is due to reputation (Transmission Private, 2021)

    94%

    of consumers say that a bad review has convinced them to avoid a business (ReviewTrackers, 2022)

    14 hours

    is the average time it takes for a false claim to be corrected on social media (Risk Analysis, 2018)
    Image of an umbrella covering the word 'BRAND' and three arrows approaching from above.

    What is brand recognition?

    And the cost of rebranding

    Brand recognition is the ability of consumers to recognize an identifying characteristic of one company versus a competitor.” (Investopedia)

    Most trademark valuation is based directly on its projected future earning power, based on income history. For a new brand with no history, evaluators must apply experience and common sense to predict the brand's earning potential. They can also use feedback from industry experts, market surveys, and other studies.” (UpCounsel)

    The cost of rebranding for small to medium businesses is about 10 to 20% of the recommended overall marketing budget and can take six to eight months (Ignyte).

    Stock image of a house with a money sign chimney.

    "All we are at our core is our reputation and our brand, and they are intertwined." (Phil Bode, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group)

    What your vendor associations say about you

    Arrows of multiple colors coalescing in an Earth labelled 'Your Brand', and then a red arrow that reads 'Reputation' points to the terms on the right.

    Bad Customer Reviews

    Breach of Data

    Poor Security Posture

    Negative News Articles

    Public Lawsuits

    Poor Performance

    How a major vendor protects its brand

    An ideal state
    • There is a dedicated brand protection department.
    • All employees are educated annually on brand protection policies and procedures.
    • Brand protection is tied to cybersecurity.
    • The organization actively monitors its brand and reputation through various media formats.
    • The organization has criteria for assessing x-party vendors and holds them accountable through ongoing monitoring and validation of their activities.

    Brand Protection
    Done Right

    Sticker for a '5 Star Rating'.

    Never underestimate the power of local media on your profits

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep in mind that too much exposure to media can be a negative in that it heightens the awareness of your organization to outside actors. If you do go through a period of increased exposure, make sure to advance your monitoring practices and vigilance.

    Story: Restaurant data breach

    Losing customer faith

    A popular local restaurant’s point of service (POS) machines were breached and the credit card data of their customers over a two-week period was stolen. The restaurant did the right thing: they privately notified the affected people, helped them set up credit monitoring services, and replaced their compromised POS system.

    Unfortunately, the local newspaper got wind of the breach. It published the story, leaving out that the restaurant had already notified affected customers and had replaced their POS machines.

    In response, the restaurant launched a campaign in the local paper and on social media to repair their reputation in the community and reassure people that they could safely transact at their business.

    For at least a month, the restaurant experienced a drastic decrease in revenue as customers either refused to come in to eat or paid only in cash. During this same period the restaurant was spending outside their budget on the advertising.
    Broken trust.

    Story: Monitor your subcontractors

    Trust but verify

    A successful general contractor with a reputation for fairness in their dealings needed a specialist to perform some expert carpentry work for a few of their clients.

    The contractor gave the specialist the clients’ contact information and trusted them to arrange the work.

    Weeks later, the contractor checked in with the clients and received a ton of negative feedback:

    • The specialist called them once and never called back.
    • The specialist refused to do the work as described and wanted to charge extra.
    • The specialist performed work to “fix” the issue but cut corners to lessen their costs.

    As a result, the contractor took extreme measures to regain the clients’ confidence and trust and lost other opportunities in the process.

    Stock image of a sad construction site supervisor.

    You work hard for your reputation. Don’t let others ruin it.

    Don’t forget to look within as well as without

    Stock image of a frustrated desk worker.

    Story: Internal reputation is vital

    Trust works both ways

    An organization’s relatively new IT and InfoSec department leadership have been upgrading the organization's systems and policies as fast as resources allow when the organization encounters a major breach of security.

    Trust in the developing IT and InfoSec departments' leadership wanes throughout the organization as people search for the root cause and blame the systems. This degradation of trust limits the effectiveness of the newly implemented process, procedures, and tools of the departments.

    The new leaders' abilities are called into question, and they must now rigorously defend and justify their decisions and positions to the executives and board.

    It will be some time before the two departments gain their prior trust and respect, and the new leaders face some tough times ahead regaining the organization's confidence.

    How could the new leaders approach the situation to mend their reputations in the wake of this (perhaps unfair) reputational hit?

    It is not enough to identify the potential risks; there must also be adequate controls in place to monitor and manage them

    Stock image of a fingerprint on a computer chip under a blacklight.

    Identify, manage, and monitor reputational risks

    Global markets
    • Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the changing global markets and recognize how their partnerships and subcontracts affect their brand.
    • Now more than ever, organizations need to be mindful of the larger global landscape and how their interactions within various regions can impact their reputation.
    Social media
    • Understanding how to monitor social media activity and online content will give you an edge in the current environment.
    • Changes in social media generally happen faster than companies can recognize them. If you are not actively monitoring those risks, the damage could set in before you even have a chance to respond.
    Global shortages
    • Organizations need to accept that shortages will recur periodically and that preparing for them will significantly increase the success potential of long-term plans.
    • Customers don’t always understand what is happening in the global supply chain and may blame you for poor service if you cannot meet demands as you have in the past.

    Which way is your reputation heading?

    • Do you understand and track items that might affect your reputation?
    • Do you understand the impact they may have on your business?

    Visualization of a Newton's Cradle perpetual motion device, aka clacky balls. The lifted ball is colored green with a smiley face and is labelled 'Your Brand Reputation'. The other four balls are red with a frowny face and are labelled 'Data Breach/ Lawsuit', 'Service Disruption', 'Customer Complaint', and 'Poor Delivery'.

    Identifying and understanding potential risks is essential to adapting to the ever-changing online landscape

    Info-Tech Insight

    Few organizations are good at identifying risks. As a result, almost none realistically plan to monitor, manage, and adapt their plans to mitigate those risks.

    Reputational risks

    Not protecting your brand can have disastrous consequences to your organization

    • Data breaches & lawsuits
    • Poor vendor performance
    • Service disruptions
    • Negative reviews

    Stock image of a smiling person on their phone rating something five stars.

    What to look for in vendors

    Identify potential reputational risk impacts
    • Check online reviews from both customers and employees.
    • Check news sites:
      • Has the vendor been affected by a breach?
      • Is the vendor frequently in the news – good or bad? Greater exposure can cause an uptick in hostile attacks, so make sure the vendor has adequate protections in line with its exposure.
    • Review its financials. Is it prime for an acquisition/bankruptcy or other significant change?
    • Review your contractual protections to ensure that you are made whole in the event something goes wrong. Has anything changed with the vendor that requires you to increase your protections?
    • Has anything changed in the vendor’s market? Is a competitor taking its business, or are its resources stretched on multiple projects due to increased demand?
    Illustration of business people in a city above various icons.

    Assessing Reputational Risk Impacts

    Zigzagging icons and numbers one through 7 alternating sides downward. Review Organizational Strategy
    Understand the organizational strategy to prepare for the “what if” game exercise.
    Identify & Understand Potential Risks
    Play the “what if” game with the right people at the table.
    Create a Risk Profile Packet for Leadership
    Pull all the information together in a presentation document.
    Validate the Risks
    Work with leadership to ensure that the proposed risks are in line with their thoughts.
    Plan to Manage the Risks
    Lower the overall risk potential by putting mitigations in place.
    Communicate the Plan
    It is important not only to have a plan but also to socialize it in the organization for awareness.
    Enact the Plan
    Once the plan is finalized and socialized put it in place with continued monitoring for success.
    (Adapted from Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance)

    Insight Summary

    Reputational risk impacts are often unanticipated, causing catastrophic downstream effects. Continuously monitoring your vendors’ actions in the market can help organizations head off brand disasters before they occur.

    Insight 1

    Understanding how to monitor social media activity and online content will give you an edge in the current environment.

    Do you have dedicated individuals or teams to monitor your organization's online presence? Most organizations review and approve the online content, but many forget the need to have analysts reviewing what others are saying about them.

    Insight 2

    Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the rapidly changing online environments and recognize how their partnerships and subcontractors’ actions can affect their brand.

    For example, do you understand how a simple news article raises your profile for short-term and long-term adverse events?

    Insight 3

    Socialize the risk management process throughout the organization to heighten awareness and enable employees to help protect the company’s reputation.

    Do you include a social media and brand protection policy in your annual education?

    Identify reputational risk

    Who should be included in the discussion?
    • While it is true that executive-level leadership defines the strategy for an organization, it is vital for those making decisions to make INFORMED decisions.
    • Getting input from your organization's marketing experts will enhance your brand's long-term protection.
    • Involving those who directly manage vendors and understand the market will aid in determining the forward path for relationships with your current vendors and identifying new emerging potential partners.
    • Organizations have a wealth of experience in their marketing departments that can help identify real-world negative scenarios.
    • Include vendor relationship managers to help track what is happening in the media for those vendors.
    Keep in mind: (R=L*I)
    Risk = Likelihood x Impact

    Impact tends to remain the same, while likelihood is a very flexible variable.

    Stock image of a flowchart asking 'Risk?', 'Yes', 'No'.

    Manage and monitor reputational risk impacts

    What can we realistically do about the risks?
    • Re-evaluate corporate policies frequently.
    • Ensure proper protections in contracts:
      • Limit the use of your brand name in the publicity and trademark clauses.
      • Make sure to include security protections for your data in the event of a breach; understand that reputation can rarely be made whole again once trust is breached.
    • Introduce continual risk assessment to monitor the relevant vendor markets.
    • Be adaptable and allow for innovations that arise from the current needs.
      • Capture lessons learned from prior incidents to improve over time and adjust your strategy based on the lessons.
    • Monitor your company’s and associated vendors’ online presence.
    • Track similar companies’ brand reputations to see how yours compares in the market.

    Social media is driving the need for perpetual diligence.

    Organizations need to monitor their brand reputation considering the pace of incidents in the modern age.

    Stock image of a person on a phone that is connected to other people.

    The “what if” game

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and financial impact, List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk

    Output: Comprehensive reputational risk profile on the specific vendor solution

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Reputational Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

    Participants: Vendor Management Coordinator, Organizational Leadership, Operations Experts (SMEs), Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager, Marketing

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to help senior leadership identify and pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the "what if" game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    2. Use the Reputational Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potential risk but manage the overall process to keep the discussion on track.
    3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

    Download the Reputational Risk Impact Tool

    Example: Low reputational risk

    We can see clearly in this example that the contractor suffered minimal impact from the specialist's behavior. Though they did take a hit to their overall reputation with a few customers, they should be able to course-correct with a minimal outlay of effort and almost no loss of revenue.

    Stock image of construction workers.

    Sample table of 'Sample Questions to Ask to Identify Reputational Impacts'. Column headers are 'Score', 'Weight', 'Question', and 'Comments or Notes'. At the bottom the 'Reputational Score' row has a low average score of '1.3' and '%100' total weight in their respective columns.

    Example: High reputational risk

    Note in the example how the tool can represent different weights for each of the criteria depending on your needs.

    Stock image of an older person looking out a window.

    Sample table of 'Sample Questions to Ask to Identify Reputational Impacts'. Column headers are 'Score', 'Weight', 'Question', and 'Comments or Notes'. At the bottom the 'Reputational Score' row has a high average score of '3.1' and '%100' total weight in their respective columns.

    Summary

    Be vigilant and adaptable to change
    • Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the changing global markets and recognize how their partnerships and subcontracts affect their brand.
    • Understanding how to monitor social media activity and online content will give you an edge in the current environment.
    • Bring the right people to the table to outline potential risks to your organization’s brand reputation.
    • Socialize the risk management process throughout the organization to heighten awareness and enable employees to help protect the company’s reputation.
    • Incorporate lessons learned from incidents into your risk management process to build better plans for future issues.
    Stock image of a person's face overlaid with many different images.

    Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to global factors in the market.

    Ongoing monitoring of online media and the vendors tied to company visibility is imperative to avoiding disaster.

    Bibliography

    "The CEO Reputation Premium: Gaining Advantage in the Engagement Era." Weber Shandwick, March 2015. Accessed June 2022.

    Glidden, Donna. "Don't Underestimate the Need to Protect Your Brand in Publicity Clauses." Info-Tech Research Group, June 2022.

    Greenaway, Jordan. "Managing Reputation Risk: A start-to-finish guide." Transmission Private, July 2020. Accessed June 2022.

    Jagiello, Robert D., and Thomas T. Hills. “Bad News Has Wings: Dread Risk Mediates Social Amplification in Risk Communication.” Risk Analysis, vol. 38, no. 10, 2018, pp. 2193-2207.

    Kenton, Will. "Brand Recognition.” Investopedia, Aug. 2021. Accessed June 2022.

    Lischer, Brian. "How Much Does it Cost to Rebrand Your Company?" Ignyte, October 2017. Accessed June 2022.

    "Powerful Examples of How to Respond to Negative Reviews." ReviewTrackers, 16 Feb. 2022. Accessed June 2022.

    Tonello, Matteo. “Strategic Risk Management: A Primer for Directors.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, 23 Aug. 2012. Web.

    "Valuation of Trademarks: Everything You Need to Know." UpCounsel, 2022. Accessed June 2022.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of 'Assessing Financial Risk Management'. Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization
    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.
    • Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.
    Sample of 'How to Assess Strategic Risk'. Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization
    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential strategic impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes affect strategic plans.
    • Organizational leadership is often caught unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility needed to adjust to significant market upheavals.
    Research coming soon. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. The key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs…not the other way around.
    • All vendors are not of equal importance to an organization. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Frank Sewell

    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Donna Glidden

    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Steven Jeffery

    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mark Roman

    Managing Partner
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Phil Bode

    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Sarah Pletcher

    Executive Advisor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Bickley

    Practice Lead
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Establish Data Governance – APAC Edition

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}348|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $172,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 63 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Organisations are faced with challenges associated with changing data landscapes, evolving business models, industry disruptions, regulatory and compliance obligations, and changing and maturing user landscapes and demands for data.
    • Although the need for a data governance program is often evident, organisations miss the mark when their data governance efforts are not directly aligned to delivering measurable business value by supporting key strategic initiatives, value streams, and their underlying business capabilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Your organisation’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the impact of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.
    • Ensure your data governance program delivers measurable business value by aligning the associated data governance initiatives with the business architecture.
    • Data governance must continuously align with the organisation’s enterprise governance function. It should not be perceived as an IT pet project, but rather as a business-driven initiative.

    Impact and Result

    Info-Tech’s approach to establishing and sustaining effective data governance is anchored in the strong alignment of organisational value streams and their business capabilities with key data governance dimensions and initiatives.

    • Align with enterprise governance, business strategy and organizational value streams to ensure the program delivers measurable business value.
    • Understand your current data governance capabilities and build out a future state that is right sized and relevant.
    • Define data governance leadership, accountability, and responsibility, supported by an operating model that effectively manages change and communication and fosters a culture of data excellence.

    Establish Data Governance – APAC Edition Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Data Governance Research – A step-by-step document to ensure that the people handling the data are involved in the decisions surrounding data usage, data quality, business processes, and change implementation.

    Data governance is a strategic program that will help your organisation control data by managing the people, processes, and information technology needed to ensure that accurate and consistent data policies exist across varying lines of the business, enabling data-driven insight. This research will provide an overview of data governance and its importance to your organization, assist in making the case and securing buy-in for data governance, identify data governance best practices and the challenges associated with them, and provide guidance on how to implement data governance best practices for a successful launch.

    • Establish Data Governance – Phases 1-3 – APAC

    2. Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook – A structured tool to assist with establishing effective data governance practices.

    This workbook will help your organisation understand the business and user context by leveraging your business capability map and value streams, developing data use cases using Info-Tech's framework for building data use cases, and gauging the current state of your organisation's data culture.

    • Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook – APAC

    3. Data Use Case Framework Template – An exemplar template to highlight and create relevant use cases around the organisation’s data-related problems and opportunities.

    This business needs gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organisation. This template provides a framework for data requirements and a mapping methodology for creating use cases.

    • Data Use Case Framework Template – APAC

    4. Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool – A visual roadmapping tool to assist with establishing effective data governance practices.

    This tool will help your organisation plan the sequence of activities, capture start dates and expected completion dates, and create a roadmap that can be effectively communicated to the organisation.

    • Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool – APAC

    5. Business Data Catalogue – A comprehensive template to help you to document the key data assets that are to be governed based on in-depth business unit interviews, data risk/value assessments, and a data flow diagram for the organisation.

    Use this template to document information about key data assets such as data definition, source system, possible values, data sensitivity, data steward, and usage of the data.

    • Business Data Catalogue – APAC

    6. Data Governance Program Charter Template – A program charter template to sell the importance of data governance to senior executives.

    This template will help get the backing required to get a data governance project rolling. The program charter will help communicate the project purpose, define the scope, and identify the project team, roles, and responsibilities.

    • Data Governance Program Charter Template – APAC

    7. Data Policies – A set of policy templates to support the data governance framework for the organisation.

    This set of policies supports the organisation's use and management of data to ensure that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of the organisation.

    • Data Governance Policy – APAC
    • Data Classification Policy, Standard, and Procedure – APAC
    • Data Quality Policy, Standard, and Procedure – APAC
    • Data Management Definitions – APAC
    • Metadata Management Policy, Standard, and Procedure – APAC
    • Data Retention Policy and Procedure – APAC
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish Data Governance – APAC Edition

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Business Context and Value

    The Purpose

    Identify key business data assets that need to be governed.

    Create a unifying vision for the data governance program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the value of data governance and how it can help the organisation better leverage its data.

    Gain knowledge of how data governance can benefit both IT and the business.

    Activities

    1.1 Establish business context, value, and scope of data governance at the organisation.

    1.2 Introduction to Info-Tech’s data governance framework.

    1.3 Discuss vision and mission for data governance.

    1.4 Understand your business architecture, including your business capability map and value streams.

    1.5 Build use cases aligned to core business capabilities.

    Outputs

    Sample use cases (tied to the business capability map) and a repeatable use case framework

    Vision and mission for data governance

    2 Understand Current Data Governance Capabilities and Plot Target-State Levels

    The Purpose

    Assess which data contains value and/or risk and determine metrics that will determine how valuable the data is to the organisation.

    Assess where the organisation currently stands in data governance initiatives.

    Determine gaps between the current and future states of the data governance program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a holistic understanding of organisational data and how it flows through business units and systems.

    Identify which data should fall under the governance umbrella.

    Determine a practical starting point for the program.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand your current data governance capabilities and maturity.

    2.2 Set target-state data governance capabilities.

    Outputs

    Current state of data governance maturity

    Definition of target state

    3 Build Data Domain to Data Governance Role Mapping

    The Purpose

    Determine strategic initiatives and create a roadmap outlining key steps required to get the organisation to start enabling data-driven insights.

    Determine timing of the initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish clear direction for the data governance program.

    Step-by-step outline of how to create effective data governance, with true business-IT collaboration.

    Activities

    3.1 Evaluate and prioritise performance gaps.

    3.2 Develop and consolidate data governance target-state initiatives.

    3.3 Define the role of data governance: data domain to data governance role mapping.

    Outputs

    Target-state data governance initiatives

    Data domain to data governance role mapping

    4 Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

    The Purpose

    Consolidate the roadmap and other strategies to determine the plan of action from day one.

    Create the required policies, procedures, and positions for data governance to be sustainable and effective.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritised initiatives with dependencies mapped out.

    A clearly communicated plan for data governance that will have full business backing.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify and prioritise next steps.

    4.2 Define roles and responsibilities and complete a high-level RACI.

    4.3 Wrap-up and discuss next steps and post-workshop support.

    Outputs

    Initialised roadmap

    Initialised RACI

    Further reading

    Establish Data Governance

    Deliver measurable business value.

    Analyst Perspective

    Establish a data governance program that brings value to your organisation.

    Picture of analyst

    Data governance does not sit as an island on its own in the organisation – it must align with and be driven by your enterprise governance. As you build out data governance in your organisation, it's important to keep in mind that this program is meant to be an enabling framework of oversight and accountabilities for managing, handling, and protecting your company's data assets. It should never be perceived as bureaucratic or inhibiting to your data users. It should deliver agreed-upon models that are conducive to your organisation's operating culture, offering clarity on who can do what with the data and via what means. Data governance is the key enabler for bringing high-quality, trusted, secure, and discoverable data to the right users across your organisation. Promote and drive the responsible and ethical use of data while helping to build and foster an organisational culture of data excellence.

    Crystal Singh

    Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The amount of data within organisations is growing at an exponential rate, creating a need to adopt a formal approach to governing data. However, many organisations remain uninformed on how to effectively govern their data. Comprehensive data governance should define leadership, accountability, and responsibility related to data use and handling and be supported by a well-oiled operating model and relevant policies and procedures. This will help ensure the right data gets to the right people at the right time, using the right mechanisms.

    Common Obstacles

    Organisations are faced with challenges associated with changing data landscapes, evolving business models, industry disruptions, regulatory and compliance obligations, and changing and maturing user landscape and demand for data. Although the need for a data governance program is often evident, organisations miss the mark when their data governance efforts are not directly aligned to delivering measurable business value. Initiatives should support key strategic initiatives, as well as value streams and their underlying business capabilities.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Info-Tech's approach to establishing and sustaining effective data governance is anchored in the strong alignment of organisational value streams and their business capabilities with key data governance dimensions and initiatives. Organisations should:

    • Align their data governance with enterprise governance, business strategy and value streams to ensure the program delivers measurable business value.
    • Understand their current data governance capabilities so as to build out a future state that is right-sized and relevant.
    • Define data leadership, accountability, and responsibility. Support these with an operating model that effectively manages change and communication and fosters a culture of data excellence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organisation's value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operating costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and increased business risk.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organisations build and sustain an effective data governance program.

    • Your organisation has recognised the need to treat data as a corporate asset for generating business value and/or managing and mitigating risk.
    • This has brought data governance to the forefront and highlighted the need to build a performance-driven enterprise program for delivering quality, trusted, and readily consumable data to users.
    • An effective data governance program is one that defines leadership, accountability. and responsibility related to data use and handling. It's supported by a well-oiled operating model and relevant policies and procedures, all of which help build and foster a culture of data excellence where the right users get access to the right data at the right time via the right mechanisms.

    As you embark on establishing data governance in your organisation, it's vital to ensure from the get-go that you define the drivers and business context for the program. Data governance should never be attempted without direction on how the program will yield measurable business value.

    'Data processing and cleanup can consume more than half of an analytics team's time, including that of highly paid data scientists, which limits scalability and frustrates employees.' – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Image is a circle graph and 30% of it is coloured with the number 30% in the middle of the graph

    'The productivity of employees across the organisation can suffer.' – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Respondents to McKinsey's 2019 Global Data Transformation Survey reported that an average of 30% of their total enterprise time was spent on non-value-added tasks because of poor data quality and availability. – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Common obstacles

    Some of the barriers that make data governance difficult to address for many organisations include:

    • Gaps in communicating the strategic value of data and data governance to the organisation. This is vital for securing senior leadership buy-in and support, which, in turn, is crucial for sustained success of the data governance program.
    • Misinterpretation or a lack of understanding about data governance, including what it means for the organisation and the individual data user.
    • A perception that data governance is inhibiting or an added layer of bureaucracy or complication rather than an enabling and empowering framework for stakeholders in their use and handling of data.
    • Embarking on data governance without firmly substantiating and understanding the organisational drivers for doing so. How is data governance going to support the organisation's value streams and their various business capabilities?
    • Neglecting to define and measure success and performance. Just as in any other enterprise initiative, you have to be able to demonstrate an ROI for time, resources and funding. These metrics must demonstrate the measurable business value that data governance brings to the organisation.
    • Failure to align data governance with enterprise governance.
    Image is a circle graph and 78% of it is coloured with the number 78% in the middle of the graph

    78% of companies (and 92% of top-tier companies) have a corporate initiative to become more data-driven. – Alation, 2020.

    Image is a circle graph and 58% of it is coloured with the number 58% in the middle of the graph

    But despite these ambitions, there appears to be a 'data culture disconnect' – 58% of leaders overestimate the current data culture of their enterprises, giving a grade higher than the one produced by the study. – Fregoni, 2020.

    The strategic value of data

    Power intelligent and transformative organisational performance through leveraging data.

    Respond to industry disruptors

    Optimise the way you serve your stakeholders and customers

    Develop products and services to meet ever-evolving needs

    Manage operations and mitigate risk

    Harness the value of your data

    The journey to being data-driven

    The journey to declaring that you are a data-driven organisation requires a pit stop at data enablement.

    The Data Economy

    Data Disengaged

    You have a low appetite for data and rarely use data for decision making.

    Data Enabled

    Technology, data architecture, and people and processes are optimised and supported by data governance.

    Data Driven

    You are differentiating and competing on data and analytics; described as a 'data first' organisation. You're collaborating through data. Data is an asset.

    Data governance is essential for any organisation that makes decisions about how it uses its data.

    Data governance is an enabling framework of decision rights, responsibilities, and accountabilities for data assets across the enterprise.

    Data governance is:

    • Executed according to agreed-upon models that describe who can take what actions with what information, when, and using what methods (Olavsrud, 2021).
    • True business-IT collaboration that will lead to increased consistency and confidence in data to support decision making. This, in turn, helps fuel innovation and growth.

    If done correctly, data governance is not:

    • An annoying, finger-waving roadblock in the way of getting things done.
    • Meant to solve all data-related business or IT problems in an organisation.
    • An inhibitor or impediment to using and sharing data.

    Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    Create impactful data governance by embedding it within enterprise governance

    A model is depicted to show the relationship between enterprise governance and data governance.

    Organisational drivers for data governance

    Data governance personas:

    Conformance: Establishing data governance to meet regulations and compliance requirements.

    Performance: Establishing data governance to fuel data-driven decision making for driving business value and managing and mitigating business risk.

    Two images are depicted that show the difference between conformance and performance.

    Data Governance is not a one-person show

    • Data governance needs a leader and a home. Define who is going to be leading, driving, and steering data governance in your organisation.
    • Senior executive leaders play a crucial role in championing and bringing visibility to the value of data and data governance. This is vital for building and fostering a culture of data excellence.
    • Effective data governance comes with business and IT alignment, collaboration, and formally defined roles around data leadership, ownership, and stewardship.
    Four circles are depicted. There is one person in the circle on the left and is labelled: Data Governance Leadership. The circle beside it has two people in it and labelled: Organisational Champions. The circle beside it has three people in it and labelled: Data Owners, Stewards & Custodians. The last circle has four people in it and labelled: The Organisation & Data Storytellers.

    Traditional data governance organisational structure

    A traditional structure includes committees and roles that span across strategic, tactical, and operational duties. There is no one-size-fits-all data governance structure. However, most organisations follow a similar pattern when establishing committees, councils, and cross-functional groups. Most organisations strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic and operational level. Several factors will influence the structure of the program, such as the focus of the data governance project and the maturity and size of the organisation.

    A triangular model is depicted and is split into three tiers to show the traditional data governance organisational structure.

    A healthy data culture is key to amplifying the power of your data.

    'Albert Einstein is said to have remarked, "The world cannot be changed without changing our thinking." What is clear is that the greatest barrier to data success today is business culture, not lagging technology.' – Randy Bean, 2020

    What does it look like?

    • Everybody knows the data.
    • Everybody trusts the data.
    • Everybody talks about the data.

    'It is not enough for companies to embrace modern data architectures, agile methodologies, and integrated business-data teams, or to establish centres of excellence to accelerate data initiatives, when only about 1 in 4 executives reported that their organisation has successfully forged a data culture.'– Randy Bean, 2020

    Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture

    • In a data-driven culture, decisions are made based on data evidence, not on gut instinct.
    • Data often has untapped potential. A data-driven culture builds tools and skills, builds users' trust in the condition and sources of data, and raises the data skills and understanding among their people on the front lines.
    • Building a data culture takes an ongoing investment of time, effort, and money. This investment will not achieve the transformation you want without data literacy at the grassroots level.

    Data-driven culture = 'data matters to our company'

    Despite investments in data initiative, organisations are carrying high levels of data debt

    Data debt is 'the accumulated cost that is associated with the sub-optimal governance of data assets in an enterprise, like technical debt.'

    Data debt is a problem for 78% of organisations.

    40% of organisations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

    66% of organisations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

    33% of organisations are not able to get value from a new system or technology investment.

    30% of organisations are unable to become data-driven.

    Source: Experian, 2020

    Absent or sub-optimal data governance leads to data debt

    Only 3% of companies' data meets basic quality standards. (Source: Nagle, et al., 2017)

    Organisations suspect 28% of their customer and prospect data is inaccurate in some way. (Source: Experian, 2020)

    Only 51% of organisations consider the current state of their CRM or ERP data to be clean, allowing them to fully leverage it. (Source: Experian, 2020)

    35% of organisations say they're not able to see a ROI for data management initiatives. (Source: Experian, 2020)

    Embrace the technology

    Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:

    • Data catalogue
    • Business data glossary
    • Data lineage
    • Metadata management

    While data governance tools and technologies are no panacea, leverage their automated and AI-enabled capabilities to augment your data governance program.

    Logos of data governance tools and technology.

    Measure success to demonstrate tangible business value

    Put data governance into the context of the business:

    • Tie the value of data governance and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.
    • Leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with senior leadership.

    Don't let measurement be an afterthought:

    Start substantiating early on how you are going to measure success as your data governance program evolves.

    Build a right-sized roadmap

    Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right-sized to deliver value in your organisation.

    Key considerations:

    • When building your data governance roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
    • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data governance partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
    • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organisation's fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolise the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data governance milestones.

    Sample milestones:

    Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Definition

    Define the home for data governance and other key roles around ownership and stewardship, as approved by senior leadership.

    Data Governance Charter and Policies

    Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.

    Data Culture Diagnostic

    Understand the organisation's current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.

    Use Case Build and Prioritisation

    Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritise accordingly.

    Business Data Glossary

    Build and/or refresh the business' glossary for addressing data definitions and standardisation issues.

    Tools & Technology

    Explore the tools and technology offering in the data governance space that would serve as an enabler to the program. (e.g. RFI, RFP).

    Key takeaways for effective business-driven data governance

    Data governance leadership and sponsorship is key.

    Ensure strategic business alignment.

    Build and foster a culture of data excellence.

    Evolve along the data journey.

    Make data governance an enabler, not a hindrance.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Your organisation's value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the impact of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

    Insight 1

    Data governance should not sit as an island in your organisation. It must continuously align with the organisation's enterprise governance function. It shouldn't be perceived as a pet project of IT, but rather as an enterprise-wide, business-driven initiative.

    Insight 2

    Ensure your data governance program delivers measurable business value by aligning the associated data governance initiatives with the business architecture. Leverage the measures of success or KPIs of the underlying business capabilities to demonstrate the value data governance has yielded for the organisation.

    Insight 3

    Data governance remains the foundation of all forms of reporting and analytics. Advanced capabilities such as AI and machine learning require effectively governed data to fuel their success.

    Tactical insight

    Tailor your data literacy program to meet your organisation's needs, filling your range of knowledge gaps and catering to your different levels of stakeholders. When it comes to rolling out a data literacy program, there is no one-size-fits-all solution. Your data literacy program is intended to fill the knowledge gaps about data, as they exist in your organisation. It should be targeted across the board – from your executive leadership and management through to the subject matter experts across different lines of the business in your organisation.

    Info-Tech's methodology for establishing data governance

    1. Build Business and User Context 2. Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities 3. Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan
    Phase Steps
    1. Substantiate Business Drivers
    2. Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance
    1. Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
    2. Gauge Your Organisation's Current Data Culture
    1. Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan
    Phase Outcomes
    • Your organisation's business capabilities and value streams
    • A business capability map for your organisation
    • Categorisation of your organisation's key capabilities
    • A strategy map tied to data governance
    • High-value use cases for data governance
    • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
    • An understanding your organisation's current data culture
    • A data governance roadmap and target-state plan comprising of prioritised initiatives

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook data-verified=

    Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

    Use the Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook as you plan, build, roll out, and scale data governance in your organisation.

    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Use Case Framework Template

    Data Use Case Framework Template

    This template takes you through a business needs gathering activity to highlight and create relevant use cases around the organisation's data-related problems and opportunities.

    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Business Data Glossary data-verified=

    Business Data Glossary

    Use this template to document the key data assets that are to be governed and create a data flow diagram for your organisation.

    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard data-verified=

    Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard

    Leverage Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic to understand how your organisation scores across 10 areas relating to data culture.

    Key deliverable:

    Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool

    Leverage this tool to assess your current data governance capabilities and plot your target state accordingly.

    This tool will help you plan the sequence of activities, capture start dates and expected completion dates, and create a roadmap that can be effectively communicated to the organisation.

    Data Governance Program Charter Template

    This template will help get the backing required to get a data governance project rolling. The program charter will help communicate the project purpose, define the scope, and identify the project team, roles, and responsibilities.

    Data Governance Policy

    This policy establishes uniformed data governance standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of your organisation

    Other Deliverables:

    • Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool
    • Data Governance Program Charter Template
    • Data Governance Policy

    Blueprint benefits

    Defined data accountability & responsibility

    Shared knowledge & common understanding of data assets

    Elevated trust & confidence in traceable data

    Improved data ROI & reduced data debt

    Support for ethical use and handling of data in a culture of excellence

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Leverage this blueprint's approach to ensure your data governance initiatives align and support your key value streams and their business capabilities.

    • Aligning your data governance program and its initiatives to your organisation's business capabilities is vital for tracing and demonstrating measurable business value for the program.
    • This alignment of data governance with value streams and business capabilities enables you to use business-defined KPIs and demonstrate tangible value.
    Screenshot from this blueprint on the Measurable Business Value

    In phases 1 and 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish the business context, define your business drivers and KPIs, and understand your current data governance capabilities and strengths.

    In phase 3, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and improving the relevant data governance capabilities so that data is well positioned to deliver on those defined business metrics.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    'Our team, has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.'

    Guided Implementation

    'Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keeps us on track.'

    Workshop

    'We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.'

    Consulting

    'Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.'

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Establish Data Governance project overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    1. Build Business and User context2. Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities3. Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan
    Best-Practice Toolkit
    1. Substantiate Business Drivers
    2. Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance
    1. Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
    2. Gauge Your Organisation's Current Data Culture
    1. Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan
    Guided Implementation
    • Call 1
    • Call 2
    • Call 3
    • Call 4
    • Call 5
    • Call 6
    • Call 7
    • Call 8
    • Call 9
    Phase Outcomes
    • Your organisation's business capabilities and value streams
    • A business capability map for your organisation
    • Categorisation of your organisation's key capabilities
    • A strategy map tied to data governance
    • High-value use cases for data governance
    • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
    • An understanding your organisation's current data culture
    • A data governance roadmap and target-state plan comprising of prioritised initiatives

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    An outline of what guided implementation looks like.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organisation. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Establish Business Context and Value Understand Current Data Governance Capabilities and Plot Target-State Levels Build Data Domain to Data Governance Role Mapping Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State
    Activities
    • Establish business context, value, and scope of data governance at the organisation
    • Introduction to Info-Tech's data governance framework
    • Discuss vision and mission for data governance
    • Understand your business architecture, including your business capability map and value streams
    • Build use cases aligned to core business capabilities
    • Understand your current data governance capabilities and maturity
    • Set target state data governance capabilities
    • Evaluate and prioritise performance gaps
    • Develop and consolidate data governance target-state initiatives
    • Define the role of data governance: data domain to data governance role mapping
    • Identify and prioritise next steps
    • Define roles and responsibilities and complete a high-level RACI
    • Wrap-up and discuss next steps and post-workshop support
    Deliverables
    1. Sample use cases (tied to the business capability map) and a repeatable use case framework
    2. Vision and mission for data governance
    1. Current state of data governance maturity
    2. Definition of target state
    1. Target-state data governance initiatives
    2. Data domain to data governance role mapping
    1. Initialised roadmap
    2. Initialised RACI
    3. Completed Business Data Glossary (BDG)

    Phase 1

    Build Business and User Context

    Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 1 is highlighted.

    'When business users are invited to participate in the conversation around data with data users and IT, it adds a fundamental dimension — business context. Without a real understanding of how data ties back to the business, the value of analysis and insights can get lost.' – Jason Lim, Alation

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Identify Your Business Capabilities
    • Define your Organisation's Key Business Capabilities
    • Develop a Strategy Map that Aligns Business Capabilities to Your Strategic Focus

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data Governance Leader/Data Leader (CDO)
    • Senior Business Leaders
    • Business SMEs
    • Data Leadership, Data Owners, Data Stewards and Custodians

    Step 1.1

    Substantiate Business Drivers

    Activities

    1.1.1 Identify Your Business Capabilities

    1.1.2 Categorise Your Organisation's Key Business Capabilities

    1.1.3 Develop a Strategy Map Tied to Data Governance

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Leverage your organisation's existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map, guided by Info-Tech's approach
    • Determine which business capabilities are considered high priority by your organisation
    • Map your organisation's strategic objectives to value streams and capabilities to communicate how objectives are realised with the support of data

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data governance initiative planning that's aligned with the organisation's business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

    Info-Tech Insight

    Gaining a sound understanding of your business architecture (value streams and business capabilities) is a critical foundation for establishing and sustaining a data governance program that delivers measurable business value.

    1.1.1 Identify Your Business Capabilities

    Confirm your organisation's existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map:

    1. If you have an existing business capability map, meet with the relevant business owners/stakeholders to confirm that the content is accurate and up to date. Confirm the value streams (how your organisation creates and captures value) and their business capabilities are reflective of the organisation's current business environment.
    2. If you do not have an existing business capability map, follow this activity to initiate the formulation of a map (value streams and related business capabilities):
      1. Define the organisation's value streams. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define how your organisation creates and captures value.
      2. Define the relevant business capabilities. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define the business capabilities.

    Note: A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities are business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as 'Marketing' or 'Research and Development.' They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Input

    • List of confirmed value streams and their related business capabilities

    Output

    • Business capability map with value streams for your organisation

    Materials

    • Your existing business capability map or the template provided in the Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook accompanying this blueprint

    Participants

    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group

    For more information, refer to Info-Tech's Document Your Business Architecture.

    Define or validate the organisation's value streams

    Value streams connect business goals to the organisation's value realisation activities. These value realisation activities, in turn, depend on data.

    If the organisation does not have a business architecture function to conduct and guide Activity 1.1.1, you can leverage the following approach:

    • Meet with key stakeholders regarding this topic, then discuss and document your findings.
    • When trying to identify the right stakeholders, consider: Who are the decision makers and key influencers? Who will impact this piece of business architecture related work? Who has the relevant skills, competencies, experience, and knowledge about the organisation?
    • Engage with these stakeholders to define and validate how the organisation creates value.
    • Consider:
      • Who are your main stakeholders? This will depend on the industry in which you operate. For example, customers, residents, citizens, constituents, students, patients.
      • What are your stakeholders looking to accomplish?
      • How does your organisation's products and/or services help them accomplish that?
      • What are the benefits your organisation delivers to them and how does your organisation deliver those benefits?
      • How do your stakeholders receive those benefits?

    Align data governance to the organisation's value realisation activities.

    Value streams enable the organisation to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organisation's value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the possibilities of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, negative impact to reputation and brand, and/or increased exposure to business risk.

    Example of value streams – Retail Banking

    Value streams connect business goals to the organisation's value realisation activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Retail Banking

    Value streams enable the organisation to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Model example of value streams for retail banking.

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech's Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

    Example of value streams – Higher Education

    Value streams connect business goals to the organisation's value realisation activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Higher Education

    Value streams enable the organisation to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Model example of value streams for higher education

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

    Example of value streams – Local Government

    Value streams connect business goals to the organisation's value realisation activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Local Government

    Value streams enable the organisation to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Model example of value streams for local government

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

    Example of value streams – Manufacturing

    Value streams connect business goals to the organisation's value realisation activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Manufacturing

    Value streams enable the organisation to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Model example of value streams for manufacturing

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

    Example of value streams – Retail

    Value streams connect business goals to the organisation's value realisation activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Retail

    Model example of value streams for retail

    Value streams enable the organisation to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    Define the organisation's business capabilities in a business capability map

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities represent stable business functions and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Business capabilities can be thought of as business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as 'Marketing' or 'Research and Development.'

    If your organisation doesn't already have a business capability map, you can leverage the following approach to build one. This initiative requires a good understanding of the business. By working with the right stakeholders, you can develop a business capability map that speaks a common language and accurately depicts your business.

    Working with the stakeholders as described above:

    • Analyse the value streams to identify and describe the organisation's capabilities that support them.
    • Consider: What is the objective of your value stream? (This can highlight which capabilities support which value stream.)
    • As you initiate your engagement with your stakeholders, don't start a blank page. Leverage the examples on the next slides as a starting point for your business capability map.
    • When using these examples, consider: What are the activities that make up your particular business? Keep the ones that apply to your organisation, remove the ones that don't, and add any needed.

    Align data governance to the organisation's value realisation activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organisation's business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    For more information, refer to Info-Tech's Document Your Business Architecture.

    Example business capability map – Retail Banking

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organisation's business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realisation capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Retail Banking

    Model example business capability map for retail banking

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

    Example business capability map – Higher Education

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organisation's business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realisation capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Higher Education

    Model example business capability map for higher education

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

    Example business capability map – Local Government

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organisation's business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realisation capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Local Government

    Model example business capability map for local government

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

    Example business capability map – Manufacturing

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organisation's business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realisation capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Manufacturing

    Model example business capability map for manufacturing

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

    Example business capability map - Retail

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organisation's business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realisation capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Retail

    Model example business capability map for retail

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    1.1.2 Categorise Your Organisation's Key Capabilities

    Determine which capabilities are considered high priority in your organisation.

    1. Categorise or heatmap the organisation's key capabilities. Consult with senior and other key business stakeholders to categorise and prioritise the business' capabilities. This will aid in ensuring your data governance future state planning is aligned with the mandate of the business. One approach to prioritising capabilities with business stakeholders is to examine them through the lens of cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, and/or by high value/high risk.
    2. Identify cost advantage creators. Focus on capabilities that drive a cost advantage for your organisation. Highlight these capabilities and prioritise programs that support them.
    3. Identify competitive advantage differentiators. Focus on capabilities that give your organisation an edge over rivals or other players in your industry.

    This categorisation/prioritisation exercise helps highlight prime areas of opportunity for building use cases, determining prioritisation, and the overall optimisation of data and data governance.

    Input

    • Strategic insight from senior business stakeholders on the business capabilities that drive value for the organisation

    Output

    • Business capabilities categorised and prioritised (e.g. cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, high value/high risk)

    Materials

    • Your existing business capability map or the business capability map derived in the previous activity

    Participants

    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group

    For more information, refer to Info-Tech's Document Your Business Architecture.

    Example of business capabilities categorisation or heatmapping – Retail

    This exercise is useful in ensuring the data governance program is focused and aligned to support the priorities and direction of the business.

    • Depending on the mandate from the business, priority may be on developing cost advantage. Hence the capabilities that deliver efficiency gains are the ones considered to be cost advantage creators.
    • The business' priority may be on maintaining or gaining a competitive advantage over its industry counterparts. Differentiation might be achieved in delivering unique or enhanced products, services, and/or experiences, and the focus will tend to be on the capabilities that are more end-stakeholder-facing (e.g. customer-, student-, patient,- and/or constituent-facing). These are the organisation's competitive advantage creators.

    Example: Retail

    Example of business capabilities categorisation or heatmapping – Retail

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    1.1.3 Develop a Strategy Map Tied to Data Governance

    Identify the strategic objectives for the business. Knowing the key strategic objectives will drive business-data governance alignment. It's important to make sure the right strategic objectives of the organisation have been identified and are well understood.

    1. Meet with senior business leaders and other relevant stakeholders to help identify and document the key strategic objectives for the business.
    2. Leverage their knowledge of the organisation's business strategy and strategic priorities to visually represent how these map to value streams, business capabilities, and, ultimately, to data and data governance needs and initiatives. Tip: Your map is one way to visually communicate and link the business strategy to other levels of the organisation.
    3. Confirm the strategy mapping with other relevant stakeholders.

    Guide to creating your map: Starting with strategic objectives, map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance to initiatives that support those capabilities. This is one approach to help you prioritise the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organisation.

    Input

    • Strategic objectives as outlined by the organisation's business strategy and confirmed by senior leaders

    Output

    • A strategy map that maps your organisational strategic objectives to value streams, business capabilities, and, ultimately, to data program

    Materials

    Participants

    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group

    Download Info-Tech's Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

    Example of a strategy map tied to data governance

    • Strategic objectives are the outcomes that the organisation is looking to achieve.
    • Value streams enable an organisation to create and capture value in the market through interconnected activities that support strategic objectives.
    • Business capabilities define what a business does to enable value creation in value streams.
    • Data capabilities and initiatives are descriptions of action items on the data and data governance roadmap and which will enable one or multiple business capabilities in its desired target state.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Start with the strategic objectives, then map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance initiatives that support those capabilities. This process will help you prioritise the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organisation.

    Example: Retail

    Example of a strategy map tied to data governance for retail

    For this strategy map, download Info-Tech's Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    Step 1.2

    Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance

    Activities

    1.2.1 Build High-Value Use Cases

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Leveraging your categorised business capability map to conduct deep-dive sessions with key business stakeholders for creating high-value uses cases
    • Discussing current challenges, risks, and opportunities associated with the use of data across the lines of business
    • Exploring which other business capabilities, stakeholder groups, and business units will be impacted

    Outcomes of this step

    • Relevant use cases that articulate the data-related challenges, needs, or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed ,will deliver value to the organisation

    Info-Tech Tip

    One of the most important aspects when building use cases is to ensure you include KPIs or measures of success. You have to be able to demonstrate how the use case ties back to the organisational priorities or delivers measurable business value. Leverage the KPIs and success factors of the business capabilities tied to each particular use case.

    1.2.1 Build High-Value Use Cases

    This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organisation.

    1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owner, stewards, SMEs) from a particular line of business as well as the relevant data custodian(s) to build cases for their units. Leverage the business capability map you created for facilitating this act.
    2. Leverage Info-Tech's framework for data requirements and methodology for creating use cases, as outlined in the Data Use Case Framework Template and seen on the next slide.
    3. Have the stakeholders move through each breakout session outlined in the Use Case Worksheet. Use flip charts or a whiteboard to brainstorm and document their thoughts.
    4. Debrief and document results in the Data Use Case Framework Template.
    5. Repeat this exercise with as many lines of the business as possible, leveraging your business capability map to guide your progress and align with business value.

    Tip: Don't conclude these use case discussions without substantiating what measures of success will be used to demonstrate the business value of the effort to produce the desired future state, as relevant to each particular use case.

    This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organisation.

    1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owner, stewards, SMEs) from a particular line of business as well the relevant data custodian(s) to build cases for their units. Leverage the business capability map you created for facilitating this act.
    2. Leverage Info-Tech's framework for data requirements and methodology for creating use cases, as outlined in the Data Use Case Framework Template and seen on the next slide.
    3. Have the stakeholders move through each breakout session outlined in the Use Case Worksheet. Use flip charts or a whiteboard to brainstorm and document their thoughts.
    4. Debrief and document results in the Data Use Case Framework Template
    5. Repeat this exercise with as many lines of the business as possible, leveraging your business capability map to guide your progress and align with business value.

    Tip: Don't conclude these use case discussions without substantiating what measures of success will be used to demonstrate the business value of the effort to produce the desired future state, as relevant to each particular use case.

    Input

    • Value streams and business capabilities as defined by business leaders
    • Business stakeholders' subject area expertise
    • Data custodian systems, integration, and data knowledge

    Output

    • Use cases that articulate data-related challenges, needs or opportunities that are tied to defined business capabilities and hence if addressed will deliver measurable value to the organisation.

    Materials

    • Your business capability map from activity 1.1.1
    • Info-Tech's Data Use Case Framework Template
    • Whiteboard or flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Markers/pens

    Participants

    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards and business SMEs
    • Data custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group

    Download Info-Tech's Data Use Case Framework Template

    Info-Tech's Framework for Building Use Cases

    Objective: This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organisation.

    Leveraging your business capability map, build use cases that align with the organisation's key business capabilities.

    Consider:

    • Is the business capability a cost advantage creator or an industry differentiator?
    • Is the business capability currently underserved by data?
    • Does this need to be addressed? If so, is this risk- or value-driven?

    Info-Tech's Data Requirements and Mapping Methodology for Creating Use Cases

    1. What business capability (or capabilities) is this use case tied to for your business area(s)?
    2. What are your data-related challenges in performing this today?
    3. What are the steps in this process/activity today?
    4. What are the applications/systems used at each step today?
    5. What data domains are involved, created, used, and/or transformed at each step today?
    6. What does an ideal or improved state look like?
    7. What other business units, business capabilities, activities, and/or processes will be impacted or improved if this issue was solved?
    8. Who are the stakeholders impacted by these changes? Who needs to be consulted?
    9. What are the risks to the organisation (business capability, revenue, reputation, customer loyalty, etc.) if this is not addressed?
    10. What compliance, regulatory, and/or policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?
    11. What measures of success or change should we use to prove the value of the effort (such as KPIs, ROI)? What is the measurable business value of doing this?

    The resulting use cases are to be prioritised and leveraged for informing the business case and the data governance capabilities optimisation plan.

    Taken from Info-Tech's Data Use Case Framework Template

    Phase 2

    Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities

    Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 2 is highlighted.

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
    • Gauge Your Organisation's Current Data Culture

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data Leadership
    • Data Ownership & Stewardship
    • Policies & Procedures
    • Data Literacy & Culture
    • Operating Model
    • Data Management
    • Data Privacy & Security
    • Enterprise Projects & Services

    Step 2.1

    Understand the Key Components of Data Governance

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Understanding the core components of an effective data governance program and determining your organisation's current capabilities in these areas:
      • Data Leadership
      • Data Ownership & Stewardship
      • Policies & Procedures
      • Data Literacy & Culture
      • Operating Model
      • Data Management
      • Data Privacy & Security
      • Enterprise Projects & Services

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
    • An understanding your organisation's current data governance capabilities

    Leverage Info-Tech's: Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool to assess your current data governance capabilities and plot your target state accordingly.

    This tool will help your organisation plan the sequence of activities, capture start dates and expected completion dates, and create a roadmap that can be effectively communicated to the organisation.

    Review: Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    Key components of data governance

    A well-defined data governance program will deliver:

    • Defined accountability and responsibility for data.
    • Improved knowledge and common understanding of the organisation's data assets.
    • Elevated trust and confidence in traceable data.
    • Improved data ROI and reduced data debt.
    • An enabling framework for supporting the ethical use and handling of data.
    • A foundation for building and fostering a data-driven and data-literate organisational culture.

    The key components of establishing sustainable enterprise data governance, taken from Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework:

    • Data Leadership
    • Data Ownership & Stewardship
    • Operating Model
    • Policies & Procedures
    • Data Literacy & Culture
    • Data Management
    • Data Privacy & Security
    • Enterprise Projects & Services

    Data Leadership

    • Data governance needs a dedicated head or leader to steer the organisation's data governance program.
    • For organisations that do have a chief data officer (CDO), their office is the ideal and effective home for data governance.
    • Heads of data governance also have titles such as director of data governance, director of data quality, and director of analytics.
    • The head of your data governance program works with all stakeholders and partners to ensure there is continuous enterprise governance alignment and oversight and to drive the program's direction.
    • While key stakeholders from the business and IT will play vital data governance roles, the head of data governance steers the various components, stakeholders, and initiatives, and provides oversight of the overall program.
    • Vital data governance roles include: data owners, data stewards, data custodians, data governance steering committee (or your organisation's equivalent), and any data governance working group(s).

    The role of the CDO: the voice of data

    The office of the chief data officer (CDO):

    • Has a cross-organisational vision and strategy for data.
    • Owns and drives the data strategy; ensures it supports the overall organisational strategic direction and business goals.
    • Leads the organisational data initiatives, including data governance
    • Is accountable for the policy, strategy, data standards, and data literacy necessary for the organisation to operate effectively.
    • Educates users and leaders about what it means to be 'data-driven.'
    • Builds and fosters a culture of data excellence.

    'Compared to most of their C-suite colleagues, the CDO is faced with a unique set of problems. The role is still being defined. The chief data officer is bringing a new dimension and focus to the organisation: "data." '
    – Carruthers and Jackson, 2020

    Who does the CDO report to?

    Example reporting structure.
    • The CDO should be a true C- level executive.
    • Where the organisation places the CDO role in the structure sends an important signal to the business about how much it values data.

    'The title matters. In my opinion, you can't have a CDO without executive authority. Otherwise no one will listen.'

    – Anonymous European CDO

    'The reporting structure depends on who's the 'glue' that ties together all these uniquely skilled individuals.'

    – John Kemp, Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group

    Data Ownership & Stewardship

    Who are best suited to be data owners?

    • Wherever they may sit in your organisation, data owners will typically have the highest stake in that data.
    • Data owners needs to be suitably senior and have the necessary decision-making power.
    • They have the highest interest in the related business data domain, whether they are the head of a business unit or the head of a line of business that produces data or consumes data (or both).
    • If they are neither of these, it's unlikely they will have the interest in the data (in terms of its quality, protection, ethical use, and handling, for instance) necessary to undertake and adopt the role effectively.

    Data owners are typically senior business leaders with the following characteristics:

    • Positioned to accept accountability for their data domain.
    • Hold authority and influence to affect change, including across business processes and systems, needed to improve data quality, use, handling, integration, etc.
    • Have access to a budget and resources for data initiatives such as resolving data quality issues, data cleansing initiatives, business data catalogue build, related tools and technology, policy management, etc.
    • Hold the influence needed to drive change in behaviour and culture.
    • Act as ambassadors of data and its value as an organisational strategic asset.

    Right-size your data governance organisational structure

    • Most organisations strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic, and operational level. Several factors will influence the structure of the program such as the focus of the data governance project as well as the maturity and size of the organisation.
    • Your data governance structure has to work for your organisation, and it has to evolve as the organisation evolves.
    • Formulate your blend of data governance roles, committees, councils, and cross-functional groups, that make sense for your organisation.
    • Your data governance organisational structure should not add complexity or bureaucracy to your organisation's data landscape; it should support and enable your principle of treating data as an asset.

    There is no one-size-fits-all data governance organisational structure.

    Example of a Data Governance Organisational Structure

    Critical roles and responsibilities for data governance

    Data Governance Working Groups

    Data governance working groups:

    • Are cross-functional teams
    • Deliver on data governance projects, initiatives, and ad hoc review committees.

    Data Stewards

    Traditionally, data stewards:

    • Serve on an operational level addressing issues related to adherence to standards/procedures, monitoring data quality, raising issues identified, etc.
    • Are responsible for managing access, quality, escalating issues, etc.

    Data Custodians

    • Traditionally, data custodians:
    • Serve on an operational level addressing issues related to data and database administration.
    • Support the management of access, data quality, escalating issues, etc.
    • Are SMEs from IT and database administration.

    Example: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organisation's value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

    Enabling business capabilities with data governance role definitions

    Example: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

    Operating Model

    Your operating model is the key to designing and operationalizing a form of data governance that delivers measurable business value to your organisation.

    'Generate excitement for data: When people are excited and committed to the vision of data enablement, they're more likely to help ensure that data is high quality and safe.' – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Operating Model

    Defining your data governance operating model will help create a well-oiled program that sustainably delivers value to the organisation and manages risks while building and fostering a culture of data excellence along the way. Some organisations are able to establish a formal data governance office, whether independent or attached to the office of the chief data officer. Regardless of how you are organised, data governance requires a home, a leader, and an operating model to ensure its sustainability and evolution.

    Examples of focus areas for your operating model:

    • Delivery: While there are core tenets to every data governance program, there is a level of variability in the implementation of data governance programs across organisations, sectors, and industries. Every organisation has its own particular drivers and mandates, so the level and rigour applied will also vary.
    • The key is to determine what style will work best in your organisation, taking into consideration your organisational culture, executive leadership support (present and ongoing), catalysts such as other enterprise-wide transformative and modernisation initiatives, and/or regulatory and compliances drivers.

    • Communication: Communication is vital across all levels and stakeholder groups. For instance, there needs to be communication from the data governance office up to senior leadership, as well as communication within the data governance organisation, which is typically made up of the data governance steering committee, data governance council, executive sponsor/champion, data stewards, and data custodians and working groups.
    • Furthermore, communication with the wider organisation of data producers, users, and consumers is one of the core elements of the overall data governance communications plan.

    Communication is vital for ensuring acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users as well as for sharing success stories of the program.

    Operating Model

    Tie the value of data governance and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.

    'Leading organisations invest in change management to build data supporters and convert the sceptics. This can be the most difficult part of the program, as it requires motivating employees to use data and encouraging producers to share it (and ideally improve its quality at the source)[.]' – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Operating Model

    Examples of focus areas for your operating model (continued):

    • Change management and issue resolution: Data governance initiatives will very likely bring about a level of organisational disruption, with governance recommendations and future state requiring potentially significant business change. This may include a redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units, which will require tweaking the organisation's culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data.
    • Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the steps necessary to adapt and reduce potential confrontation. By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

      Attempting to implement change without an effective communications plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

    • Performance measuring, monitoring and reporting: Measuring and reporting on performance, successes, and realisation of tangible business value are a must for sustaining, growing, and scaling your data governance program.
    • Aligning your data governance to the organisation's value realisation activities enables you to leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with your senior business leadership.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Launching a data governance program will bring with it a level of disruption to the culture of the organisation. That disruption doesn't have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

    Policies, Procedures & Standards

    'Data standards are the rules by which data are described and recorded. In order to share, exchange, and understand data, we must standardise the format as well as the meaning.' – U.S. Geological Survey

    Policies, Procedures & Standards

    • When defining, updating, or refreshing your data policies, procedures, and standards, ensure they are relevant, serve a purpose, and/or support the use of data in the organisation.
    • Avoid the common pitfall of building out a host of policies, procedures, and standards that are never used or followed by users and therefore don't bring value or serve to mitigate risk for the organisation.
    • Data policies can be thought of as formal statements and are typically created, approved, and updated by the organisation's data decision-making body (such as a data governance steering committee).
    • Data standards and procedures function as actions, or rules, that support the policies and their statements.
    • Standards and procedures are designed to standardise the processes during the overall data lifecycle. Procedures are instructions to achieve the objectives of the policies. The procedures are iterative and will be updated with approval from your data governance committee as needed.
    • Your organisation's data policies, standards, and procedures should not bog down or inhibit users; rather, they should enable confident data use and handling across the overall data lifecycle. They should support more effective and seamless data capture, integration, aggregation, sharing, and retention of data in the organisation.

    Examples of data policies:

    • Data Classification Policy
    • Data Retention Policy
    • Data Entry Policy
    • Data Backup Policy
    • Data Provenance Policy
    • Data Management Policy

    See Info-Tech's Data Governance Policy Template: This policy establishes uniformed data governance standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of your organisation.

    Data Domain Documentation

    Select the correct granularity for your business need

    Diagram of data domain documentation
    Sources: Dataversity; Atlan; Analytics8

    Data Domain Documentation Examples

    Data Domain Documentation Examples

    Data Culture

    'Organisational culture can accelerate the application of analytics, amplify its power, and steer companies away from risky outcomes.' – Petzold, et al., 2020

    A healthy data culture is key to amplifying the power of your data and to building and sustaining an effective data governance program.

    What does a healthy data culture look like?

    • Everybody knows the data.
    • Everybody trusts the data.
    • Everybody talks about the data.

    Building a culture of data excellence.

    Leverage Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic to understand your organisation's culture around data.

    Screenshot of Data Culture Scorecard

    Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for more information on the Data Culture Diagnostic

    Cultivating a data-driven culture is not easy

    'People are at the heart of every culture, and one of the biggest challenges to creating a data culture is bringing everyone into the fold.' – Lim, Alation

    It cannot be purchased or manufactured,

    It must be nurtured and developed,

    And it must evolve as the business, user, and data landscapes evolve.

    'Companies that have succeeded in their data-driven efforts understand that forging a data culture is a relentless pursuit, and magic bullets and bromides do not deliver results.' – Randy Bean, 2020

    Hallmarks of a data-driven culture

    There is a trusted, single source of data the whole company can draw from.

    There's a business glossary and data catalogue and users know what the data fields mean.

    Users have access to data and analytics tools. Employees can leverage data immediately to resolve a situation, perform an activity, or make a decision – including frontline workers.

    Data literacy, the ability to collect, manage, evaluate, and apply data in a critical manner, is high.

    Data is used for decision making. The company encourages decisions based on objective data and the intelligent application of it.

    A data-driven culture requires a number of elements:

    • High-quality data
    • Broad access and data literacy
    • Data-driven decision-making processes
    • Effective communication

    Data Literacy

    Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture.

    • Building a data-driven culture takes an ongoing investment of time, effort, and money.
    • This investment will not realise its full return without building up the organisation's data literacy.
    • Data literacy is about filling data knowledge gaps across all levels of the organisation.
    • It's about ensuring all users – senior leadership right through to core users – are equipped with appropriate levels of training, skills, understanding, and awareness around the organisation's data and the use of associated tools and technologies. Data literacy ensures users have the data they need and they know how to interpret and leverage it.
    • Data literacy drives the appetite, demand, and consumption for data.
    • A data-literate culture is one where the users feel confident and skilled in their use of data, leveraging it for making informed or evidence-based decisions and generating insights for the organisation.

    Data Management

    • Data governance serves as an enabler to all of the core components that make up data management:
      • Data quality management
      • Data architecture management
      • Data platform
      • Data integration
      • Data operations management
      • Data risk management
      • Reference and master data management (MDM)
      • Document and content management
      • Metadata management
      • Business intelligence (BI), reporting, analytics and advanced analytics, artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning (ML)
    • Key tools such as the business data glossary and data catalogue are vital for operationalizing data governance and in supporting data management disciplines such as data quality management, metadata management, and MDM as well as BI, reporting, and analytics.

    Enterprise Projects & Services

    • Data governance serves as an enabler to enterprise projects and services that require, use, share, sell, and/or rely on data for their viability and, ultimately, their success.
    • Folding or embedding data governance into the organisation's project management function or project management office (PMO) serves to ensure that, for any initiative, suitable consideration is given to how data is treated.
    • This may include defining parameters, following standards and procedures around bringing in new sources of data, integrating that data into the organisation's data ecosystem, using and sharing that data, and retaining that data post-project completion.
    • The data governance function helps to identify and manage any ethical issues, whether at the start of the project and/or throughout.
    • It provides a foundation for asking relevant questions as it relates to the use or incorporation of data in delivering the specific project or service. Do we know where the data obtained from? Do we have rights to use that data? Are there legislations, policies, or regulations that guide or dictate how that data can be used? What are the positive effects, negative impacts, and/or risks associated with our intended use of that data? Are we positioned to mitigate those risks?
    • Mature data governance creates organisations where the above considerations around data management and the ethical use and handling of data is routinely implemented across the business and in the rollout and delivery of projects and services.

    Data Privacy & Security

    • Data governance supports the organisation's data privacy and security functions.
    • Key tools include the data classification policy and standards and defined roles around data ownership and data stewardship. These are vital for operationalizing data governance and supporting data privacy, security, and the ethical use and handling of data.
    • While some organisations may have a dedicated data security and privacy group, data governance provides an added level of oversight in this regard.
    • Some of the typical checks and balances include ensuring:
      • There are policies and procedures in place to restrict and monitor staff's access to data (one common way this is done is according to job descriptions and responsibilities) and that these comply with relevant laws and regulations.
      • There's a data classification scheme in place where data has been classified on a hierarchy of sensitivity (e.g. top secret, confidential, internal, limited, public).
      • The organisation has a comprehensive data security framework, including administrative, physical, and technical procedures for addressing data security issues (e.g. password management and regular training).
      • Risk assessments are conducted, including an evaluation of risks and vulnerabilities related to intentional and unintentional misuse of data.
      • Policies and procedures are in place to mitigate the risks associated with incidents such as data breaches.
      • The organisation regularly audits and monitors its data security.

    Ethical Use & Handling of Data

    Data governance will support your organisation's ethical use and handling of data by facilitating definition around important factors, such as:

    • What are the various data assets in the organisation and what purpose(s) can they be used for? Are there any limitations?
    • Who is the related data owner? Who holds accountability for that data? Who will be answerable?
    • Where was the data obtained from? What is the intended use of that data? Do you have rights to use that data? Are there legislations, policies, or regulations that guide or dictate how that data can be used?
    • What are the positive effects, negative impacts, and/or risks associated with the use of that data?

    Ethical Use & Handling of Data

    • Data governance serves as an enabler to the ethical use and handling of an organisation's data.
    • The Open Data Institute (ODI) defines data ethics as: 'A branch of ethics that evaluates data practices with the potential to adversely impact on people and society – in data collection, sharing and use.'
    • Data ethics relates to good practice around how data is collected, used and shared. It's especially relevant when data activities have the potential to impact people and society, whether directly or indirectly (Open Data Institute, 2019).
    • A failure to handle and use data ethically can negatively impact an organisation's direct stakeholders and/or the public at large, lead to a loss of trust and confidence in the organisation's products and services, lead to financial loss, and impact the organisation's brand, reputation, and legal standing.
    • Data governance plays a vital role is building and managing your data assets, knowing what data you have, and knowing the limitations of that data. Data ownership, data stewardship, and your data governance decision-making body are key tenets and foundational components of your data governance. They enable an organisation to define, categorise, and confidently make decisions about its data.

    Step 2.2

    Gauge Your Organisation's Current Data Culture

    Activities

    2.2.1 Gauge Your Organisation's Current Data Culture

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Conduct a data culture survey or leverage Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic to increase your understanding of your organisation's data culture

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of your organisational data culture

    2.2.1 Gauge Your Organisation's Current Data Culture

    Conduct a Data Culture Survey or Diagnostic

    The objectives of conducting a data culture survey are to increase the understanding of the organisation's data culture, your users' appetite for data, and their appreciation for data in terms of governance, quality, accessibility, ownership, and stewardship. To perform a data culture survey:

    1. Identify members of the data user base, data consumers, and other key stakeholders for surveying.
    2. Conduct an information session to introduce Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic survey. Explain the objective and importance of the survey and its role in helping to understand the organisation's current data culture and inform the improvement of that culture.
    3. Roll out the Info-Tech Data Culture Diagnostic survey to the identified users and stakeholders.
    4. Debrief and document the results and scorecard in the Data Strategy Stakeholder Interview Guide and Findings document.

    Input

    • Email addresses of participants in your organisation who should receive the survey

    Output

    • Your organisation's Data Culture Scorecard for understanding current data culture as it relates to the use and consumption of data
    • An understanding of whether data is currently perceived to be an asset to the organisation

    Materials

    Screenshot of Data Culture Scorecard

    Participants

    • Participants include those at the senior leadership level through to middle management, as well as other business stakeholders at varying levels across the organisation
    • Data owners, stewards, and custodians
    • Core data users and consumers

    Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for details on launching a Data Culture Diagnostic.

    Phase 3

    Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan

    Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 3 is highlighted.

    'Achieving data success is a journey, not a sprint. Companies that set a clear course, with reasonable expectations and phased results over a period of time, get to the destination faster.' – Randy Bean, 2020

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Build your Data Governance Roadmap
    • Develop a target state plan comprising of prioritised initiatives

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data Governance Leadership
    • Data Owners/Data Stewards
    • Data Custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group(s)

    Step 3.1

    Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Build your data governance roadmap
    • Develop a target state plan comprising of prioritised initiatives

    Download Info-Tech's Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

    See Info-Tech's Data Governance Program Charter Template: A program charter template to sell the importance of data governance to senior executives.

    This template will help get the backing required to get a data governance project rolling. The program charter will help communicate the project purpose, define the scope, and identify the project team, roles, and responsibilities.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data governance initiative planning that's aligned with the organisation's business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

    Build a right-sized roadmap

    Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right sized to deliver value in your organisation.

    Key considerations:

    • When building your data governance roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
    • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data governance partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
    • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organisation's fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolise the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data governance milestones.

    Sample milestones:

    Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Definition

    Define the home for data governance and other key roles around ownership and stewardship, as approved by senior leadership.

    Data Governance Charter and Policies

    Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.

    Data Culture Diagnostic

    Understand the organisation's current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.

    Use Case Build and Prioritisation

    Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritise accordingly.

    Business Data Glossary/catalogue

    Build and/or refresh the business' glossary for addressing data definitions and standardisation issues.

    Tools & Technology

    Explore the tools and technology offering in the data governance space that would serve as an enabler to the program. (e.g. RFI, RFP).

    Recall: Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    Build an actionable roadmap

    Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Division

    Define key roles for getting started.

    Use Case Build & Prioritisation

    Start small and then scale – deliver early wins.

    Literacy Program

    Start understanding data knowledge gaps, building the program, and delivering.

    Tools & Technology

    Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you.

    Key components of your data governance roadmap

    Data Governance Program Charter Template – A program charter template to sell the importance of data governance to senior executives.

    This template will help get the backing required to get a data governance project rolling. The program charter will help communicate the project purpose, define the scope, and identify the project team, roles, and responsibilities.

    By now, you have assessed current data governance environment and capabilities. Use this assessment, coupled with the driving needs of your business, to plot your data Governance roadmap accordingly.

    Sample data governance roadmap milestones:

    • Define data governance leadership.
    • Define and formalise data ownership and stewardship (as well as the role IT/data management will play as data custodians).
    • Build/confirm your business capability map and data domains.
    • Build business data use cases specific to business capabilities.
    • Define business measures/KPIs for the data governance program (i.e. metrics by use case that are relevant to business capabilities).
    • Data management:
      • Build your data glossary or catalogue starting with identified and prioritised terms.
      • Define data domains.
    • Design and define the data governance operating model (oversight model definition, communication plan, internal marketing such as townhalls, formulate change management plan, RFP of data governance tool and technology options for supporting data governance and its administration).
    • Data policies and procedures:
      • Formulate, update, refresh, consolidate, rationalise, and/or retire data policies and procedures.
      • Define policy management and administration framework (i.e. roll-out, maintenance, updates, adherence, system to be used).
    • Conduct Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic or survey (across all levels of the organisation).
    • Define and formalise the data literacy program (build modules, incorporate into LMS, plan lunch and learn sessions).
    • Data privacy and security: build data classification policy, define classification standards.
    • Enterprise projects and services: embed data governance in the organisation's PMO, conduct 'Data Governance 101' for the PMO.

    Defining data governance roles and organisational structure at Organisation

    The approach employed for defining the data governance roles and supporting organisational structure for .

    Key Considerations:

    • The data owner and data steward roles are formally defined and documented within the organisation. Their involvement is clear, well-defined, and repeatable.
    • There are data owners and data stewards for each data domain within the organisation. The data steward role is given to someone with a high degree of subject matter expertise.
    • Data owners and data stewards are effective in their roles by ensuring that their data domain is clean and free of errors and that they protect the organisation against data loss.
    • Data owners and data stewards have the authority to make final decisions on data definitions, formats, and standard processes that apply to their respective data sets. Data owners and data stewards have authority regarding who has access to certain data.
    • Data owners and data stewards are not from the IT side of the organisation. They understand the lifecycle of the data (how it is created, curated, retrieved, used, archived, and destroyed) and they are well-versed in any compliance requirements as it relates to their data.
    • The data custodian role is formally defined and is given to the relevant IT expert. This is an individual with technical administrative and/or operational responsibility over data (e.g. a DBA).
    • A data governance steering committee exists and is comprised of well-defined roles, responsibilities, executive sponsors, business representatives, and IT experts.
    • The data governance steering committee works to provide oversight and enforce policies, procedures, and standards for governing data.
    • The data governance working group has cross-functional representation. This comprises business and IT representation, as well as project management and change management where applicable: data stewards, data custodians, business subject matter experts, PM, etc.).
    • Data governance meetings are coordinated and communicated about. The meeting agenda is always clear and concise, and meetings review pressing data-related issues. Meeting minutes are consistently documented and communicated.

    Sample: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organisation's value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

    Enable business capabilities with data governance role definitions.

    Sample: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

    Consider your technology options:

    Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:

    • Data catalogue
    • Business data glossary
    • Data lineage
    • Metadata management

    Logos of data governance tools and technology.

    These are some of the data governance tools and technology players. Check out SoftwareReviews for help making better software decisions.

    Make the data steward the catalyst for organisational change and driving data culture

    The data steward must be empowered and backed politically with decision-making authority, or the role becomes stale and powerless.

    Ensuring compliance can be difficult. Data stewards may experience pushback from stakeholders who must deliver on the policies, procedures, and processes that the data steward enforces.

    Because the data steward must enforce data processes and liaise with so many different people and departments within the organisation, the data steward role should be their primary full-time job function – where possible.

    However, in circumstances where budget doesn't allow a full-time data steward role, develop these skills within the organisation by adding data steward responsibilities to individuals who are already managing data sets for their department or line of business.

    Info-Tech Tip

    A stewardship role is generally more about managing the cultural change that data governance brings. This requires the steward to have exceptional interpersonal skills that will assist in building relationships across departmental boundaries and ensuring that all stakeholders within the organisation believe in the initiative, understand the anticipated outcomes, and take some level of responsibility for its success.

    Changes to organisational data processes are inevitable; have a communication plan in place to manage change

    Create awareness of your data governance program. Use knowledge transfer to get as many people on board as possible.

    Data governance initiatives must contain a strong organisational disruption component. A clear and concise communication strategy that conveys milestones and success stories will address the various concerns that business unit stakeholders may have.

    By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

    Governance recommendations will require significant business change. The redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units will require an overhaul of the organisation's culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data. Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the necessary steps to adapt and reduce potential confrontation.

    Because a data governance initiative will involve data-driven business units across the organisation, the governance team must present a compelling case for data governance to ensure acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users.

    Attempting to implement change without an effective communication plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Launching a data governance initiative is guaranteed to disrupt the culture of the organisation. That disruption doesn't have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

    Create a common data governance vision that is consistently communicated to the organisation

    A data governance program should be an enterprise-wide initiative.

    To create a strong vision for data governance, there must be participation from the business and IT. A common vision will articulate the state the organisation wishes to achieve and how it will reach that state. Visioning helps to develop long-term goals and direction.

    Once the vision is established, it must be effectively communicated to everyone, especially those who are involved in creating, managing, disposing, or archiving data.

    The data governance program should be periodically refined. This will ensure the organisation continues to incorporate best methods and practices as the organisation grows and data needs evolve.

    Info-Tech Tips

    • Use information from the stakeholder interviews to derive business goals and objectives.
    • Work to integrate different opinions and perspectives into the overall vision for data governance.
    • Brainstorm guiding principles for data and understand the overall value to the organisation.

    Develop a compelling data governance communications plan to get all departmental lines of business on board

    A data governance program will impact all data-driven business units within the organisation.

    A successful data governance communications plan involves making the initiative visible and promoting staff awareness. Educate the team on how data is collected, distributed, and used, what internal processes use data, and how that data is used across departmental boundaries.

    By demonstrating how data governance will affect staff directly, you create a deeper level of understanding across lines of business, and ultimately, a higher level of acceptance for new processes, rules, and guidelines.

    A clear and concise communications strategy will raise the profile of data governance within the organisation, and staff will understand how the program will benefit them and how they can share in the success of the initiative. This will end up providing support for the initiative across the board.

    A proactive communications plan will:

    • Assist in overcoming issues with data control, stalemates between stakeholder units, and staff resistance.
    • Provide a formalised process for implementing new policies, rules, guidelines, and technologies, and managing organisational data.
    • Detail data ownership and accountability for decision making, and identify and resolve data issues throughout the organisation.
    • Encourage acceptance and support of the initiative.

    Info-Tech Tip

    Focus on literacy and communication: include training in the communication plan. Providing training for data users on the correct procedures for updating and verifying the accuracy of data, data quality, and standardised data policies will help validate how data governance will benefit them and the organisation.

    Leverage the data governance program to communicate and promote the value of data within the organisation

    The data governance program is responsible for continuously promoting the value of data to the organisation. The data governance program should seek a variety of ways to educate the organisation and data stakeholders on the benefit of data management.

    Even if data policies and procedures are created, they will be highly ineffective if they are not properly communicated to the data producers and users alike.

    There needs to be a communication plan that highlights how the data producer and user will be affected, what their new responsibilities are, and the value of that change.

    To learn how to manage organisational change, refer to Info-Tech's Master Organisational Change Management Practices.

    Understand what makes for an effective policy for data governance

    It can be difficult to understand what a policy is, and what it is not. Start by identifying the differences between a policy and standards, guidelines, and procedures.

    Diagram of an effective policy for data governance

    The following are key elements of a good policy:

    Heading Descriptions
    Purpose Describes the factors or circumstances that mandate the existence of the policy. Also states the policy's basic objectives and what the policy is meant to achieve.
    Scope Defines to whom and to what systems this policy applies. Lists the employees required to comply or simply indicates 'all' if all must comply. Also indicates any exclusions or exceptions, i.e. those people, elements, or situations that are not covered by this policy or where special consideration may be made.
    Definitions Define any key terms, acronyms, or concepts that will be used in the policy. A standard glossary approach is sufficient.
    Policy Statements Describe the rules that comprise the policy. This typically takes the form of a series of short prescriptive and proscriptive statements. Sub-dividing this section into sub-sections may be required depending on the length or complexity of the policy.
    Non-Compliance Clearly describe consequences (legal and/or disciplinary) for employee non-compliance with the policy. It may be pertinent to describe the escalation process for repeated non-compliance.
    Agreement Confirms understanding of the policy and provides a designated space to attest to the document.

    Leverage myPolicies, Info-Tech's web-based application for managing your policies and procedures

    Most organisations have problems with policy management. These include:

    1. Policies are absent or out of date
    2. Employees largely unaware of policies in effect
    3. Policies are unmonitored and unenforced
    4. Policies are in multiple locations
    5. Multiple versions of the same policy exist
    6. Policies managed inconsistently across different silos
    7. Policies are written poorly by untrained authors
    8. Inadequate policy training program
    9. Draft policies stall and lose momentum
    10. Weak policy support from senior management

    Technology should be used as a means to solve these problems and effectively monitor, enforce, and communicate policies.

    Product Overview

    myPolicies is a web-based solution to create, distribute, and manage corporate policies, procedures, and forms. Our solution provides policy managers with the tools they need to mitigate the risk of sanctions and reduce the administrative burden of policy management. It also enables employees to find the documents relevant to them and build a culture of compliance.

    Some key success factors for policy management include:

    • Store policies in a central location that is well known and easy to find and access. A key way that technology can help communicate policies is by having them published on a centralised website.
    • Link this repository to other policies' taxonomies of your organisation. E.g. HR policies to provide a single interface for employees to access guidance across the organisation.
    • Reassess policies annually at a minimum. myPolicies can remind you to update the organisation's policies at the appropriate time.
    • Make the repository searchable and easily navigable.
    • myPolicies helps you do all this and more.
    myPolicies logo myPolicies

    Enforce data policies to promote consistency of business processes

    Data policies are short statements that seek to manage the creation, acquisition, integrity, security, compliance, and quality of data. These policies vary amongst organisations, depending on your specific data needs.

    • Policies describe what to do, while standards and procedures describe how to do something.
    • There should be few data policies, and they should be brief and direct. Policies are living documents and should be continuously updated to respond to the organisation's data needs.
    • The data policies should highlight who is responsible for the data under various scenarios and rules around how to manage it effectively.

    Examples of Data Policies

    Trust

    • Data Cleansing and Quality Policy
    • Data Entry Policy

    Availability

    • Acceptable Use Policy
    • Data Backup Policy

    Security

    • Data Security Policy
    • Password Policy Template
    • User Authorisation, Identification, and Authentication Policy Template
    • Data Protection Policy

    Compliance

    • Archiving Policy
    • Data Classification Policy
    • Data Retention Policy

    Leverage data management-related policies to standardise your data management practices

    Info-Tech's Data Management Policy:

    This policy establishes uniform data management standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of the organisation. This policy applies to all critical data and to all staff who may be creators and/or users of such data.

    Info-Tech's Data Entry Policy:

    The integrity and quality of data and evidence used to inform decision making is central to both the short-term and long-term health of an organisation. It is essential that required data be sourced appropriately and entered into databases and applications in an accurate and complete manner to ensure the reliability and validity of the data and decisions made based on the data.

    Info-Tech's Data Provenance Policy:

    Create policies to keep your data's value, such as:

    • Only allow entry of data from reliable sources.
    • Employees entering and accessing data must observe requirements for capturing/maintaining provenance metadata.
    • Provenance metadata will be used to track the lifecycle of data from creation through to disposal.

    Info-Tech's Data Integration and Virtualisation Policy:

    This policy aims to assure the organisation, staff, and other interested parties that data integration, replication, and virtualisation risks are taken seriously. Staff must use the policy (and supporting guidelines) when deciding whether to integrate, replicate, or virtualise data sets.

    Select the right mix of metrics to successfully supervise data policies and processes

    Policies are only as good as your level of compliance. Ensure supervision controls exist to oversee adherence to policies and procedures.

    Although they can be highly subjective, metrics are extremely important to data governance success.

    • Establishing metrics that measure the performance of a specific process or data set will:
      • Create a greater degree of ownership from data stewards and data owners.
      • Help identify underperforming individuals.
      • Allow the steering committee to easily communicate tailored objectives to individual data stewards and owners.
    • Be cautious when establishing metrics. The wrong metrics can have negative repercussions.
      • They will likely draw attention to an aspect of the process that doesn't align with the initial strategy.
      • Employees will work hard and grow frustrated as their successes aren't accurately captured.

    Policies are great to have from a legal perspective, but unless they are followed, they will not benefit the organisation.

    • One of the most useful metrics for policies is currency. This tracks how up to date the policy is and how often employees are informed about the policy. Often, a policy will be introduced and then ignored. Policies must be continuously reviewed by management and employees.
    • Some other metrics include adherence (including performance in tests for adherence) and impacts from non-adherence.

    Review metrics on an ongoing basis with those data owners/stewards who are accountable, the data governance steering committee, and the executive sponsors.

    Establish data standards and procedures for use across all organisational lines of business

    A data governance program will impact all data-driven business units within the organisation.

    • Data management procedures are the methods, techniques, and steps to accomplish a specific data objective. Creating standard data definitions should be one of the first tasks for a data governance steering committee.
    • Data moves across all departmental boundaries and lines of business within the organisation. These definitions must be developed as a common set of standards that can be accepted and used enterprise wide.
    • Consistent data standards and definitions will improve data flow across departmental boundaries and between lines of business.
    • Ensure these standards and definitions are used uniformly throughout the organisation to maintain reliable and useful data.

    Data standards and procedural guidelines will vary from company to company.

    Examples include:

    • Data modelling and architecture standards.
    • Metadata integration and usage procedures.
    • Data security standards and procedures.
    • Business intelligence standards and procedures.

    Info-Tech Tip

    Have a fundamental data definition model for the entire business to adhere to. Those in the positions that generate and produce data must follow the common set of standards developed by the steering committee and be accountable for the creation of valid, clean data.

    Changes to organisational data processes are inevitable; have a communications plan in place to manage change

    Create awareness of your data governance program, using knowledge transfer to get as many people on board as possible.

    By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

    Governance recommendations will require significant business change. The redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units will require an overhaul of the organisation's culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data. Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the necessary steps to adapt and reduce potential confrontation.

    Because a data governance initiative will involve data-driven business units across the organisation, the governance team must present a compelling case for data governance to ensure acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users.

    Attempting to implement change without an effective communications plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

    Data governance initiatives will very likely bring about a level of organisational disruption. A clear and concise communications strategy that conveys milestones and success stories will address the various concerns that business unit stakeholders may have.

    Info-Tech Tip

    Launching a data governance program will bring with it a level of disruption to the culture of the organisation. That disruption doesn't have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

    Other Deliverables:

    The list of supporting deliverables will help to kick start on some of the Data Governance initiatives

    • Data Classification Policy, Standard, and Procedure
    • Data Quality Policy, Standard, and Procedure
    • Metadata Management Policy, Standard, and Procedure
    • Data Retention Policy and Procurement

    Screenshot from Data Classification Policy, Standard, and Procedure

    Data Classification Policy, Standard, and Procedure

    Screenshot from Data Retention Policy and Procedure

    Data Retention Policy and Procedure

    Screenshot from Metadata Management Policy, Standard, and Procedure

    Metadata Management Policy, Standard, and Procedure

    Screenshot from Data Quality Policy, Standard, and Procedure

    Data Quality Policy, Standard, and Procedure

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    Picture of analyst

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team. Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Screenshot of example data governance strategy map.

    Build Your Business and User Context

    Work with your core team of stakeholders to build out your data governance strategy map, aligning data governance initiatives with business capabilities, value streams, and, ultimately, your strategic priorities.

    Screenshot of Data governance roadmap

    Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

    Develop a data governance future state roadmap and plan based on an understanding of your current data governance capabilities, your operating environment, and the driving needs of your business.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Streamline your data management program with our simplified framework.

    The First 100 Days as CDO

    Be the voice of data in a time of transformation.

    Research Contributors

    Name Position Company
    David N. Weber Executive Director - Planning, Research and Effectiveness Palm Beach State College
    Izabela Edmunds Information Architect Mott MacDonald
    Andy Neill Practice Lead, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Dirk Coetsee Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Graham Price Executive Advisor, Advisory Executive Services Info-Tech Research Group
    Igor Ikonnikov Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Jean Bujold Senior Workshop Delivery Director Info-Tech Research Group
    Rajesh Parab Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group
    Valence Howden Principal Research Director, CIO Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    Alation. “The Alation State of Data Culture Report – Q3 2020.” Alation, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Allott, Joseph, et al. “Data: The Next Wave in Forestry Productivity.” McKinsey & Company, 27 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Bean, Randy. “Why Culture Is the Greatest Barrier to Data Success.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 30 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Brence, Thomas. “Overcoming the Operationalization Challenge With Data Governance at New York Life.” Informatica, 18 March 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Bullmore, Simon, and Stuart Coleman. “ODI Inside Business – A Checklist for Leaders.” Open Data Institute, 19 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Canadian Institute for Health Information. “Developing and Implementing Accurate National Standards for Canadian Health Care Information.” Canadian Institute for Health Information. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Carruthers, Caroline, and Peter Jackson. “The Secret Ingredients of the Successful CDO.” IRM UK Connects, 23 Feb. 2017.

    Dashboards. “Useful KPIs for Healthy Hospital Quality Management.” Dashboards. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Dashboards. “Why (and How) You Should Improve Data Literacy in Your Organization Today.” Dashboards. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Datapine. “Healthcare Key Performance Indicators and Metrics.” Datapine. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Datapine. “KPI Examples & Templates: Measure what matters the most and really impacts your success.” Datapine. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Diaz, Alejandro, et al. “Why Data Culture Matters.” McKinsey Quarterly, Sept. 2018. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Everett, Dan. “Chief Data Officer (CDO): One Job, Four Roles.” Informatica, 9 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Experian. “10 Signs You Are Sitting On A Pile Of Data Debt.” Experian. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Fregoni, Silvia. “New Research Reveals Why Some Business Leaders Still Ignore the Data.” Silicon Angle, 1 Oct. 2020

    Informatica. Holistic Data Governance: A Framework for Competitive Advantage. Informatica, 2017. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Knight, Michelle. “What Is a Data Catalog?” Dataversity, 28 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Lim, Jason. “Alation 2020.3: Getting Business Users in the Game.” Alation, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    McDonagh, Mariann. “Automating Data Governance.” Erwin, 29 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    NewVantage Partners. Data-Driven Business Transformation: Connecting Data/AI Investment to Business Outcomes. NewVantage Partners, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Olavsrud, Thor. “What Is Data Governance? A Best Practices Framework For Managing Data Assets.” CIO.com, 18 March 2021. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Open Data Institute. “Introduction to Data Ethics and the Data Ethics Canvas.” Open Data Institute, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Open Data Institute. “The UK National Data Strategy 2020: Doing Data Ethically.” Open Data Institute, 17 Nov. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Open Data Institute. “What Is the Data Ethics Canvas?” Open Data Institute, 3 July 2019. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Pathak, Rahul. “Becoming a Data-Driven Enterprise: Meeting the Challenges, Changing the Culture.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 28 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Petzold, Bryan, et al. “Designing Data Governance That Delivers Value.” McKinsey & Company, 26 June 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Redman, Thomas, et al. “Only 3% of Companies’ Data Meets Basic Quality Standards.” Harvard Business Review. 11 Sept 2017.

    Smaje, Kate. “How Six Companies Are Using Technology and Data To Transform Themselves.” McKinsey & Company, 12 Aug. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Talend. “The Definitive Guide to Data Governance.” Talend. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    “The Powerfully Simple Modern Data Catalog.” Atlan, 2021. Web.

    U.S. Geological Survey. “Data Management: Data Standards.” U.S. Geological Survey. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Waller, David. “10 Steps to Creating a Data-Driven Culture.” Harvard Business Review, 6 Feb. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    “What Is the Difference Between A Business Glossary, A Data Dictionary, and A Data Catalog, and How Do They Play A Role In Modern Data Management?” Analytics8, 23 June 2021. Web.

    Wikipedia. “RFM (Market Research).” Wikipedia. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Windheuser, Christoph, and Nina Wainwright. “Data in a Modern Digital Business.” Thoughtworks, 12 May 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Wright, Tom. “Digital Marketing KPIs - The 12 Key Metrics You Should Be Tracking.” Cascade, 3 March 2021. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Create a Game Plan to Implement Cloud Backup the Right Way

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}469|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Storage & Backup Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /storage-and-backup-optimization
    • Cloud adoption is frequently driven by hype rather than careful consideration of the best-fit solution.
    • IT is frequently rushed into cloud adoption without appropriate planning.
    • Organizations frequently lack appropriate strategies to deal with cloud-specific backup challenges.
    • Insufficient planning for cloud backup can exacerbate problems rather than solving them, leading to poor estimates of the cost and effort involved, budget overruns, and failure to meet requirements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The cloud isn’t a magic bullet, but it tends to deliver the most value to organizations with specific use cases – frequently smaller organizations who are looking to avoid the cost of building or upgrading a data center.
    • Cloud backup does not necessarily reduce backup costs so much as it moves them around. Cloud backup distributes costs over a longer term. Organizations need to compare the difference in CAPEX and OPEX to determine if making the move makes financial sense.
    • The cloud can deliver a great deal of value for organizations who are looking to reduce the operational effort demanded by an existing tape library for second- or third-tier backups.
    • Data security risks in some cases may be overstated, depending on what on-premises security is available. However, targeting backup to the cloud introduces other risks that need to be considered before implementation is given the green light.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand if cloud backup is the right solution for actual organizational needs.
    • Make an informed decision about targeting backup to the cloud by considering the big picture TCO and effort level involved in adoption.
    • Have a ready strategy to mitigate the most common challenges with cloud adoption projects.
    • Develop a roadmap that lays out the required step-by-step to implement cloud backup.

    Create a Game Plan to Implement Cloud Backup the Right Way Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the benefits and risks of targeting backups to the cloud

    Build a plan to mitigate the risks associated with backing data up in the cloud.

    • Storyboard: Create a Game Plan to Implement Cloud Backup the Right Way

    2. Determine if the cloud can meet the organization's data requirements

    Assess if the cloud is a good fit for your organization’s backup data.

    • Cloud Backup Implementation Game Plan Tool

    3. Mitigate the Challenges of Backing Up to the Cloud

    Build a cloud challenge contingency plan.

    4. Build a Cloud Backup Implementation Roadmap

    Perform a gap analysis to determine cloud backup implementation initiatives.

    Infographic

    Workshop: Create a Game Plan to Implement Cloud Backup the Right Way

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Evaluate the business case for targeting backup at the cloud

    The Purpose

    Understand how cloud backup will affect backup and recovery processes

    Determine backup and recovery objectives

    Assess the value proposition of cloud backup

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A high-level understanding of the benefits of moving to cloud backup

    A best-fit analysis of cloud backup in comparison to organizational needs

    Activities

    1.1 Document stakeholder goals for cloud backup

    1.2 Document present backup processes

    1.3 Document ideal backup processes

    1.4 Review typical benefits of cloud backup

    Outputs

    Documented stakeholder goals

    Current backup process diagrams

    Ideal backup process diagram

    2 Identify candidate data sets and assess opportunities and readiness

    The Purpose

    Identify candidate data sets for cloud-based backup

    Determine RPOs and RTOs for candidate data sets

    Identify potential value specific to each data set for targeting backup at the cloud

    Evaluate organizational readiness for targeting backup at the cloud

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented recovery objectives

    Recommendations for cloud backup based on actual organizational needs and readiness

    Activities

    2.1 Document candidate data sets

    2.2 Determine recovery point and recovery time objectives for candidate data sets

    2.3 Identify potential value of cloud-based backup for candidate data sets

    2.4 Discuss the risk and value of cloud-based backup versus an on-premises solution

    2.5 Evaluate organizational readiness for cloud backup

    2.6 Identify data sets to move to the cloud

    Outputs

    Validated list of candidate data sets

    Specific RPOs and RTOs for core data sets

    An assessment of the value of cloud backup for data sets

    A tool-based recommendation for moving backups to the cloud

    3 Mitigate the challenges of backing up to the cloud

    The Purpose

    Understand different cloud provider models and their specific risks

    Identification of how cloud backup will affect IT infrastructure and personnel

    Strategize ways to mitigate the most common challenges of implementing cloud backup

    Understand the client/vendor relationship in cloud backup

    Understand the affect of cloud backup on data security

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Verified best-fit cloud provider model for organizational needs

    Verified strategy for meeting the most common challenges for cloud-based backup

    A strong understanding of how cloud backup will change IT

    Strategies for approaching vendors to ensure a strong footing in negotiations and clear expectations for the client/vendor relationship

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss the impact of cloud backup on infrastructure and IT environment

    3.2 Create a cloud backup risk contingency plan

    3.3 Document compliance and security regulations

    3.4 Identify client and vendor responsibilities for cloud backup

    3.5 Discuss and document the impact of cloud backup on IT roles and responsibilities

    3.6 Compile a list of implementation intiatives

    3.7 Evaluate the financial case for cloud backup

    Outputs

    Cloud risk assessment

    Documented contingency strategies for probabe risks

    Negotiation strategies for dealing with vendors

    A committed go/no-go decision on the value of cloud backup weighted against the effort of implementation

    4 Build a cloud backup implementation roadmap

    The Purpose

    Create a road map for implementing cloud backup

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine any remaining gaps between the present state and the ideal state for cloud backup

    Understand the steps and time frame for implementing cloud backup

    Allocate roles and responsibilities for the implementation intitiative

    A validated implementation road map

    Activities

    4.1 Perform a gap analysis to generate a list of implementation intiatives

    4.2 Prioritize cloud backup initiatives

    4.3 Assess risks and dependencies for critical implementation initiatives

    4.4 Assign ownership over implementation tasks

    4.5 Determine road map time frame and structure

    4.6 Populate the roadmap with cloud backup initiatives

    Outputs

    A validated gap analysis

    A prioritized list of cloud backup initiatives

    Documented dependencies and risks associated with implementation tasks

    A roadmap for targeting backups at the cloud

    Establish Effective Security Governance & Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}380|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $63,532 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • The security team is unsure of governance needs and how to manage them.
    • There is a lack of alignment between key stakeholder groups
    • There are misunderstandings related to the role of policy and process.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Good governance stems from a deep understanding of how stakeholder groups interact with each other and their respective accountabilities and responsibilities. Without these things, organizational functions tend to interfere with each other, blurring the lines between governance and management and promoting ad–hoc decision making that undermines governance.

    Impact and Result

    • The first phase of this project will help you establish or refine your security governance and management by determining the accountabilities, responsibilities, and key interactions of your stake holder groups.
    • In phase two, the project will guide you through the implementation of essential governance processes: setting up a steering committee, determining risk appetite, and developing a policy exception-handling process.

    Establish Effective Security Governance & Management Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish Effective Security Governance and Management Deck – A step-by-step guide to help you establish or refine the governance model for your security program.

    This storyboard will take you through the steps to develop a security governance and management model and implement essential governance processes.

    • Establish Effective Security Governance & Management – Phases 1-2

    2. Design Your Governance Model – A security governance and management model to track accountabilities, responsibilities, stakeholder interactions, and the implementation of key governance processes.

    This tool will help you determine governance and management accountabilities and responsibilities and use them to build a visual governance and management model.

    • Security Governance Model Templates (Visio)
    • Security Governance Model Templates (PDF)
    • Security Governance Model Tool

    3. Organizational Structure Template – A tool to address structural issues that may affect your new governance and management model.

    This template will help you to implement or revise your organizational structure.

    • Security Governance Organizational Structure Template

    4. Information Security Steering Committee Charter & RACI – Templates to formalize the role of your steering committee and the oversight it will provide.

    These templates will help you determine the role a steering committee will play in your governance and management model.

    • Information Security Steering Committee Charter
    • Information Security Steering Committee RACI Chart

    5. Security Policy Lifecycle Template – A template to help you model your policy lifecycle.

    Once this governing document is customized, ensure the appropriate security policies are developed as well.

    • Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    6. Security Policy Exception Approval Process Templates – Templates to establish an approval process for policy exceptions and bolster policy governance and risk management.

    These templates will serve as the foundation of your security policy exception approval processes.

    • Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow (Visio)
    • Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow (PDF)
    • Policy Exception Tracker
    • Information Security Policy Exception Request Form

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Establish Effective Security Governance & Management

    The key is in stakeholder interactions, not policy and process.

    Analyst Perspective

    It's about stakeholder interactions, not policy and process.

    Many security leaders complain about a lack of governance and management in their organizations. They have policies and processes but find neither have had the expected impact and that the organization is teetering on the edge of lawlessness, with stakeholder groups operating in ways that interfere with each other (usually due to poorly defined accountabilities).

    Among the most common examples is security's relationship to the business. When these groups don't align, they tend to see each other as adversaries and make decisions in line with their respective positions: security endorses one standard, the business adopts another.

    The consequences of this are vast. Such an organization is effectively opposed to itself. No wonder policy and process have not resolved the issue.

    At a practical level, good governance stems from understanding how different stakeholder groups interact, providing inputs and outputs to each other and modeling who is accountable for what. But this implied accountability model needs to be formalized (perhaps even modified) before governance can help all stakeholder groups operate as strategic partners with clearly defined roles, responsibilities, and decision-making power. Only when policies and processes reflect this will they serve as effective tools to support governance.

    Logan Rohde, Senior Research Analyst, Security & Privacy

    Logan Rohde
    Senior Research Analyst, Security & Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    Ineffective governance and management processes, if they are adopted at all, can lead to:
    • An organization unsure of governance needs and how to manage them.
    • A lack of alignment between key stakeholder groups.
    • Misunderstandings related to the role of policy and process.
    Most governance and management initiatives stumble because they do not address governance as a set of interactions and influences that stakeholders have with and over each other, seeing it instead as policy, process, and risk management. Challenges include:
    • Senior management disinterest
    • Stakeholders operating in silos
    • Separating governance from management
    You will be able to establish a robust governance model to support the current and future state of your organization by accounting for these three essential parts:
    1. Determine governance accountabilities.
    2. Define management responsibilities.
    3. Model stakeholders' interactions, inputs, and outputs as part of business and security operations.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Good governance stems from a deep understanding of how stakeholder groups interact with each other and their respective accountabilities and responsibilities. Without these things, organizational functions tend to interfere with each other, blurring the lines between governance and management and promoting ad hoc decision making that undermines governance.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who need to:

    • Establish security governance from scratch.
    • Improve security governance despite a lack of cooperation from the business.
    • Determine the accountabilities and responsibilities of each stakeholder group.

    This blueprint will solve the above challenges by helping you model your organization's governance structure and implement processes to support the essential governance areas: policy, risk, and performance metrics.

    Percentage of organizations that have yet to fully advance to a maturity-based approach to security

    70%

    Source: McKinsey, 2021

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • The business does not wish to be governed and does not seek to align with security on the basis of risk.
    • Various stakeholder groups essentially govern themselves, causing business functions to interfere with each other.
    • Security teams struggle to differentiate between governance and management and the purpose of each.

    Early adopter infrastructure

    63%
    Security leaders not reporting to the board about risk or incident detection and prevention.
    Source: LogRhythm, 2021

    46%
    Those who report that senior leadership is confident cybersecurity leaders understand business goals.
    Source: LogRhythm, 2021

    Governance isn't just policy and process

    Governance is often mistaken for an organization's formalized policies and processes. While both are important governance supports, they do not provide governance in and of themselves.

    For governance to work well, an organization needs to understand how stakeholder groups interact with each other. What inputs and outputs do they provide? Who is accountable? Who is responsible? These are the questions one needs to ask before designing a governance structure. Failing to account for any of these three elements tends to result in overlap, inefficiency, and a lack of accountability, creating flawed governance.

    Separate governance from management

    Oversight versus operations

    • COBIT emphasizes the importance of separating governance from management. These are complementary functions, but they refer to different parts of organizational operation.
    • Governance provides a decision-making apparatus based on predetermined requirements to ensure smooth operations. It is used to provide oversight and direction and hinges on established accountabilities
    • Simply put, governance refers to what an organization is and is not willing to permit in day-to-day operations, and it tends to make its presence known via the key areas of risk appetite, formal policy and process, and exception handling.
      • Note: These key areas do not provide governance in and of themselves. Rather, governance emerges in accordance with the decisions an organization has made regarding these areas. Sometimes, however, these "decisions" have not been formally or consciously made and the current state of the organization's operations becomes the default - even when it is not working well.
    • Management, by contrast, is concerned with executing business processes in accordance with the governance model, essentially, governance provides guidance for how to make decisions during daily management.

    "Information security governance is the guiding hand that organizes and directs risk mitigation efforts into a business-aligned strategy for the entire organization."

    Steve Durbin,
    Chief Executive,
    Information Security Forum, Forbes, 2023

    Models for governance and management

    Info-Tech's Governance and Management research uses the logic of COBIT's governance and management framework but distills this guidance into a practical, easy-to-implement series of steps, moving beyond the rudimentary logic of COBIT to provide an actionable and personalized governance model.

    Governance Cycle

    Management Cycle

    Clear accountabilities and responsibilities

    Complementary frameworks to simplify governance and management

    The distinction that COBIT draws between governance and management is roughly equivalent to that of accountability and responsibility, as seen in the RACI* model.

    There can be several stakeholders responsible for something, but only one party can be accountable.

    Use this guidance to help determine the accountabilities and responsibilities of your governance and management model.

    *Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed

    COBIT RACI chart

    Security governance framework

    A security governance framework is a system that will design structures, processes, accountability definitions, and membership assignments that lead the security department toward optimal results for the business.

    Governance is performed in three ways:

    1 Evaluate 2 Direct 3 Monitor
    For governance to be effective it must account for stakeholder interests and business needs. Determining what these are is the vital first step. Governance is used to determine how things should be done within an organization. It sets standards and provides oversight so decisions can be made during day-to-day management. Governance needs change and inefficiencies need to be revised. Therefore, monitoring key performance indicators is an essential step to course correct as organizational needs evolve.

    "Governance specifies the accountability framework and provides oversight to ensure that risks are adequately mitigated, while management ensures that controls are implemented to mitigate risks. Management recommends security strategies. Governance ensures that security strategies are aligned with business objectives and consistent with regulations."
    - EDUCAUSE

    Establish Effective Security Governance & Management

    SMART metrics

    Suggested targets to measure success

    Specific

    Measurable

    Achievable

    Relevant

    Time-Bound

    Examples
    Security's risk analyses will be included as part of the business decision-making process within three months after completing the governance initiative.
    Increase rate of security risk analysis using risk appetite within three months of project completion.
    Have stakeholder engagement supply input into security risk-management decisions within three months of completing phase one of blueprint.
    Reduce time to approve policy exceptions by 25%.
    Reduce security risk related to policy non-compliance by 50% within one year.
    Develop five KPIs to measure progress of governance and management within three months of completing blueprint.

    Info-Tech's methodology for security governance and management

    1. Design Your Governance Model 2. Implement Essential Governance Processes
    Phase Steps
    1. Evaluate
    2. Direct
    3. Monitor
    1. Implement Oversight
    2. Set Risk Appetite
    3. Implement Policy Lifecycle
    Phase Outcomes
    • Defined governance accountabilities
    • Defined management responsibilities
    • Record of key stakeholder interactions
    • Visual governance model
    • Key performance indicators (KPIs)
    • Established steering committee
    • Qualitative risk-appetite statements
    • Policy lifecycle
    • Policy exceptions-handling process

    Governance starts with mapping stakeholder inputs, outputs, and throughputs

    The key is in stakeholder interactions, not policy and process
    Good governance stems from a deep understanding of how stakeholder groups interact with each other and their respective accountabilities and responsibilities. Without these things, organizational functions tend to interfere with each other, blurring the lines between governance and management and promoting ad hoc decision making that undermines governance.

    Policy, process, and org. charts support governance but do not produce it on their own
    To be effective, these things need to be developed with the accountabilities and influence of the organizational functions that produce them.

    A lack of business alignment does not mean you're doomed to fail
    While the highest levels of governance maturity depend on strong security-business alignment, there are still tactics one can use to improve governance.

    All organizations have governance
    Sometimes it is poorly defined, ineffective, and occurs in the same place as management, but it exists at some level, acting as the decision-making apparatus for an organization (i.e. what can and cannot occur).

    Risk tolerances are variable across lines of business
    This can lead to misalignments between security and the business, as each may have their own tolerance for particular risks. The remedy is to understand the risk appetite of the business and allow this to inform security risk management decisions.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Security Governance Model Tool

    Security Governance Organizational Structure Template

    Information Security Steering Committee Charter & RACI

    Policy Exceptions-Handling Workflow

    Policy Exception Tracker and Request Form

    Key deliverable:

    Security Governance Model

    By the end of this blueprint, you will have created a personalized governance model to map your stakeholders' accountabilities, responsibilities, and key interactions.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits Business Benefits
    • Correct any overlapping and mismanaged security processes by assigning accountabilities and responsibilities to each stakeholder group.
    • Improve efficiency and effectiveness of the security program by separating governance from management.
    • Determine necessary inputs and outputs from stakeholder interactions to ensure the governance model functions as intended.
    • Improved support of business goals through security-business alignment.
    • Better risk management by defining risk appetite with security.
    • Increased stakeholder satisfaction via a governance model designed to meet their needs.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2
    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges. Call #2: Determine governance requirements.
    Call #3: Review governance model.
    Call #4: Determine KPIs.
    Call #5: Stand up steering committee.
    Call #6: Set risk appetite.
    Call #7: Establish policy lifecycle.
    Call #8: Revise exception-handing process.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 4 to 8 calls over the course of 2 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities Evaluate Direct Monitor Implement Essential Governance Processes Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)
    1.1 Prioritize governance accountabilities
    1.2 Prioritize management responsibilities
    1.3 Evaluate organizational structure
    2.1 Align with business
    2.2 Build security governance and management model
    2.3 Visualize security governance and management model
    3.1 Develop governance and management KPIs 4.1 Draft steering committee charter
    4.2 Complete steering committee RACI
    4.3 Draft qualitative risk statements
    4.4 Define policy management lifecycle
    4.5 Establish policy exception approval process
    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps
    Deliverables
    1. Prioritized list of accountabilities and responsibilities
    2. Revised organizational structure
    1. Security governance and management model
    1. Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool
    2. KPI Development Worksheet
    1. Steering committee charter and RACI
    2. Risk-appetite statements
    3. Policy management lifecycle
    4. Policy exception approval process

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Customize your journey

    The security governance and management blueprint pairs well with security design and security strategy.

    • The governance and management model you create in this blueprint will inform efforts to improve security, like revisiting security program design and your security strategy.
    • Work with your member services director, executive advisor, or technical counselor to scope the journey you need. They will work with you to align the subject matter experts to support your roadmap and workshops.

    Workshop Day 1 and Day 2
    Security Governance and Management

    Workshop Day 3 and Day 4
    Security Strategy Gap Analysis or Security Program Design Factors

    Phase 1

    Design Your Governance Model

    Phase 1
    1.1 Evaluate
    1.2 Direct
    1.3 Monitor

    Phase 2
    2.1 Implement Oversight
    2.2 Set Risk Appetite
    2.3 Implement Policy lifecycle

    Establish Security Governance & Management

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Prioritize governance accountabilities
    • Prioritize management responsibilities
    • Evaluate current organizational structure
    • Align with the business
    • Build security governance and management model
    • Finalize governance and management model
    • Develop governance and management KPIs

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative

    Step 1.1

    Evaluate

    Activities
    1.1.1 Prioritize governance accountabilities
    1.1.2 Prioritize management responsibilities
    1.1.3 Evaluate current organizational structure

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative

    Outcomes of this step

    • Defined governance accountabilities
    • Defined management responsibilities

    Design Your Governance Model

    Step 1.1 > Step 1.2 > Step 1.3

    Evaluate: Getting started

    Element Questions
    Compliance What voluntary or mandatory standards must be represented in my governance model?
    Legal What laws are the organization accountable to? Who is the accountable party?
    Business needs What does the business need to operate? What sort of informational or operational flows need to be accounted for?
    Culture How does the business operate? Are departments siloed or cooperative? Where does security fit in?
    Decision-making process How are decisions made? Who is involved? What information needs to be available to do so?
    Willingness to be governed Is the organization adverse to formal governance mechanisms? Are there any opportunities to improve alignment with the business?
    Relevant trends Are there recent developments (e.g. new privacy laws) that are likely to affect the organization in the future? Will this complicate or simplify governance modeling efforts?
    Stakeholder interests Who are the internal and external stakeholders that need to be represented in the governance model?

    The above is a summary of COBIT 2019 EDM01.01 Evaluate the governance system, along with Info-Tech-recommended questions to contextualize each element for your organization.

    1.1.1 Prioritize governance accountabilities

    1-2 hours

    Using the example on the next slide, complete the following steps.

    1. Download Info-Tech's Security Governance Model Tool using the link below and customize the stakeholder groups on tab 1 to reflect the makeup of your organization.
    2. Using the previous slide as a guide, evaluate your organization's internal and external pressures and discuss their possible impacts your governance and management model.
    3. Complete tab 2, Governance Prioritization, indicating your response to each prompt using the drop-down menus. The tool will score your responses and provide you with a prioritized list of governance accountabilities based on greatest need on tab 4, Governance Model Builder.
    4. Review the list and make any desired modifications to the prompts on tab 2 and then move on to Activity 1.1.2. (We will return to tab 4 in Step 2.1.) Remember to evaluate the results against the internal/external pressure analysis to ensure these details are reflected.

    Download the Security Governance Model Tool

    Input Output
    • List of governance pressures
  • Prioritized list of governance accountabilities
  • Materials Participants
    • Security Governance Model Tool
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Security Operations
    • Business representative (optional)

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool

    Tabs 2 and 3

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool

    1.1.2 Prioritize management responsibilities

    1 hours

    Using the examples on the previous slide, complete the following steps.

    1. Complete tab 3, Management Prioritization, indicating your response to each prompt using the drop-down menus. The tool will score your responses and provide you with a prioritized list of governance accountabilities based on greatest need on tab 4, Governance Model Builder.
    2. Review the list and make any desired modifications to the prompts on tab 3 and then move on to Activity 1.1.3. (We will return to tab 4 in Step 2.1.) Remember to evaluate the results against the internal/external pressure analysis to ensure these details are reflected.

    Download Security Governance Model Tool

    InputOutput
    • Pressure analysis
    • Prioritized list of management responsibilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Governance Model Tool
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative (optional)

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool

    Tab 4

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool Tab 4

    1.1.3 Evaluate current organizational structure

    1-3 hours

    1. Download and modify Info-Tech's Security Governance Organizational Structure Template to reflect the reporting structure at your organization. If such a document already exists, simply review it and move on to the next step below.
    2. Determine if the current organizational structure will negatively affect your ability to pursue the items in your prioritized lists from governance accountabilities and management responsibilities (e.g. conflicts of interest related to oversight or reporting), and discuss the feasibility of changing the current governance structure.
    3. Record these recommended changes and any other key points you'd like the business or other stakeholders to be aware of. We'll use this information in the business alignment exercise in Step 2.1

    Download the Security Governance Organizational Structure Template

    Input Output
    • Prioritized lists of governance accountabilities and management responsibilities
    • Updated organizational structure
    Materials Participants
    • Security Governance Organizational Structure Template
    • CISO

    Info-Tech resources

    Locate structural problems in advance

    • If you do not already have a diagram of your organization's reporting structure, use this template to create one. Examples are provided for high, medium, and low maturity.
    • The existing reporting structure will likely affect the governance model you create, as it may not be feasible to assign certain governance accountabilities and management responsibilities to certain stakeholders.
      • For example, it may make sense for the head of security to approve the security budget, but if they report to a CIO with greater authority that accountability will likely have to sit with the CIO instead.

    Download the Security Governance Organizational Structure Template

    Security Governance Organizational Structure

    Step 1.2

    Direct

    Activities
    1.2.1 Align with the business
    1.2.2 Build security governance and management model
    1.2.3 Finalize governance and management model

    This step involves the following participants:

    CISO

    CIO

    Business representative

    Outcomes of this step

    • Record of key stakeholder interactions
    • Visual governance model

    Design Your Governance Model

    Step 1.1 > Step 1.2 > Step 1.3

    Direct: Getting started

    Element Questions
    Business alignment Do we have a full understanding of the business's approach to risk and security's role to support business objectives?
    Organizational security process How well do our current processes work? Are we missing any key processes?
    Steering committee Will we use a dedicated steering committee to oversee security governance, or will another stakeholder assume this role?
    Security awareness Does the organization have a strong security culture? Does an effort need to be made to educate stakeholder groups on the role of security in the organization?
    Roles and responsibilities Does the organization use RACI charts or another system to define roles and document duties?
    Communication flows Do we have a good understanding of how information flows between stakeholder groups? Are there any gaps that need to be addressed (e.g. regular board reporting)?

    The above is a summary of COBIT 2019 EDM01.02 Direct the governance system, along with Info-Tech-recommended questions to contextualize each element for your organization.

    Embed security governance within enterprise governance

    Design structures, processes, authority definitions, and steering committee assignments to drive optimal business results.

    Embed security governance within enterprise governance

    1.2.1 Align with the business

    1-3 hours

    1. Request a meeting with the business to present your findings from the previous activities in Step 1.1. As you prepare for the meeting, remember to following points:
    • The goal here is to align, not to command. You want the business to see the security team as a strategic ally that supports the pursuit of business goals.
    • Make recommendations and explain any security risks associated with the direction the business wants to take, but the goal is not to strongarm the business into adopting your perspective.
    • Above all, listen to the business to learn more about how they relate to governance and what their priorities are. This will help you adapt your governance model to better support business needs.

    Info-Tech Insight
    A lack of business participation does not mean your governance initiative is doomed. From this lack, we can still infer their attitudes toward security governance, and we can account for this in our governance model. This may limit the maturity your program can reach, but it doesn't prevent improvements from being made to your current security governance.

    InputOutput
    • Prioritized lists of governance accountabilities and management responsibilities
    • Current organizational structure
    • List of recommendations or proposed changes
    • Security governance and management target state definition
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Means to capture key points of the conversation (e.g. notebook, recorded meeting)
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative

    1.2.2 Build security governance and management model

    1-2 hours

    Using the example on the next slide, complete the following steps:

    1. On tab 4, review the prioritized lists for governance accountabilities and management responsibilities and begin assigning them to the appropriate stakeholder groups.
    • Remember: Responsibilities can be assigned to up to four stakeholders, but there can be only one party listed as accountable.
  • Use the drop-down menus to record any interactions that occur between the groups (e.g. repots to, appoints, approves, oversees).
    • Documenting these interactions will help you ensure your governance program accounts for inputs and outputs that are required by, or that otherwise affect, your various stakeholder groups.

    Note: You may wish to review Info-Tech's governance model templates before completing this activity to get an idea of what you'll be working toward in this step. See slides 37-38.

    Download Security Governance Model Tool

    InputOutput
    • Prioritized lists of governance accountabilities and management responsibilities
    • Target state from business alignment exercise
    • Summary of governance model
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Governance Model Tool
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative (optional)

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool

    Tab 5

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool Tab 5

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool continued

    Tab 6

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool Tab 6

    1.2.3 Visualize your security governance and management model

    1-2 hours

    1. Download the Security Governance Model Templates using the link below and determine which of the three example models most closely resembles your own.
    2. Once you have chosen an example to work from, begin customizing it to reflect the governance model completed in Activity 1.2.2. See next slide for example.

    Note: You do not have to use these templates. If you prefer, you can use them as inspiration and design your own model.

    Download Security Governance Model Templates

    InputOutput
    • Results of Activity 2.1.2
    • Security governance and management model diagram
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Governance Model Templates
    • CISO

    Customize the template

    Customize the template

    Step 1.3

    Monitor

    Activities
    1.3.1 Develop governance and management KPIs

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Security team
    • Business representative

    Outcomes of this step

    Key performance indicators

    Design Your Governance Model

    Step 1.1 > Step 1.2 > Step 1.3

    Monitor: Getting started

    Element Questions
    Metrics Does the organization have a well-developed metrics program or will this need to be taken up as a separate effort? Have we considered what outcomes we are hoping to see as a result of implementing a new governance and management model?
    Existing and emerging threats What has changed or is likely to change in the future that may destabilize our governance program? What do we need to do to mitigate any security risks to our organizational governance and management?

    The above is a summary of COBIT 2019 EDM01.03 Monitor the governance system, along with Info-Tech-recommended questions to contextualize each element for your organization.

    1.3.1 Develop governance and management KPIs

    1-2 hours

    This activity is meant to provide a starting point for key governance metrics. To develop a comprehensive metrics program, see Info-Tech's Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity blueprint.

    1. Create a list of four to six outcomes you'd like to see as the result of your new governance model. Be as specific as you can; the better defied the outcome, the easier it will be to determine suitable KPI.
    2. For each desired outcome, determine what would best indicate that progress is being made toward that state.
    • Desired outcome: security team is consulted before critical business decisions are made.
    • Success criteria: the business evaluates Security's recommendations before starting new projects
    • Possible KPI: % of critical business decisions made with security consultation
    • See next slide for additional examples

    Note: Try to phrase each KPI using percents, which helps to add context to the metric and will make it easier to explain when reporting metrics in the future.

    Input Output
    • List of desired outcomes after new governance model implemented
    • Set of key performance indicators
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Security team
    • Business representative (optional)

    Example KPIs

    Desired Outcome Success Criteria Possible KPI
    Security team is consulted before critical business decisions are made The business evaluates Security's recommendations before starting new projects % of critical business decisions with Security consultation
    Greater alignment over risk appetite The business does not take on initiatives with excessive security risks % of incidents stemming from not following Security's risk management recommendations
    Reduced number of policy exceptions Policy exceptions are only granted when a clear need is present and a formal process is followed % of incidents stemming from policy exceptions
    Improved policy adherence Policies are understood and followed throughout the organization % of incidents stemming from policy violations

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Improved business alignment
    2. Developing formal process to manage security risks
    3. Separating governance from management
    Metric Current Goal
    % of critical business decisions with Security consultation 20% 100%
    % of incidents stemming from not following Security's risk management recommendations 65% 0%
    % of incidents stemming from policy exceptions 35% 5%
    % of incidents stemming from policy violations 40% 5%
    % of ad hoc decisions made (i.e. not accounted for by governance model 85% 5%
    % of accepted security risks evaluated against risk appetite 50% 100%
    % of deferred steering committee decisions (i.e. decisions not made ASAP after issue arises) 50% 5%
    % of policies approved within target window (e.g. 1 month) 20% 100%

    Phase 2

    Implement Essential Governance Processes

    Phase 1
    1.1 Evaluate
    1.2 Direct
    1.3 Monitor

    Phase 2
    2.1 Implement Oversight
    2.2 Set Risk Appetite
    2.3 Implement Policy Lifecycle

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Draft Steering Committee Charter
    • Complete Steering Committee RACI
    • Draft qualitative risk statements
    • Model policy lifecycle
    • Establish exceptions-handling process

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CRO
    • CIO
    • HR
    • Internal Audit
    • Business representative
    • Legal

    Establish Security Governance & Management

    Step 2.1

    Implement Oversight

    Activities
    2.1.1 Draft steering committee charter
    2.1.2 Complete steering committee RACI

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CRO
    • CIO
    • HR
    • Internal Audit
    • Business representative
    • Legal

    Outcomes of this step

    Steering Committee Charter and RACI

    Implement Essential Governance Processes

    Step 2.1 > Step 2.2 > Step 2.3

    2.1.1 Draft steering committee charter

    1-3 hours

    This activity is meant to provide a starting point for your steering committee. If a more comprehensive approach is desired, see Info-Tech's Improve Security Governance With a Security Steering Committee blueprint.

    1. Download the template using the link below and review the various sections of the document
    2. Review slides 50-51 to help determine the scope of your steering committee's role. Discuss with other stakeholder groups, as necessary, to determine the steering committee's duties, how often the group will meet, and what the regular meeting agenda will be.
    3. Customize the template to suit your organization's needs.

    Download Information Security Steering Committee Charter

    Input Output
    • N/A
    • Steering Committee
    Materials Participants
    • Information Security Steering Committee Charter Template
    • CISO
    • CRO
    • CIO
    • HR
    • Internal Audit
    • Business representative
    • Legal

    Steering committee membership

    Representation is key, but don't try to please everyone

    • For your steering committee to be effective, it should include representatives from across the organization. However, it is important not to overextend committee membership, which can interfere with decision making.
    • Participants should be selected based on the identified responsibilities of the security steering committee, and the number of people should be appropriate to the size and complexity of the organization.

    Example steering committee

    CISO
    CRO
    Internal Audit
    CIO
    Business Leaders
    HR
    Legal

    Download Information Security Steering Committee Charter

    Typical steering committee duties

    Strategic Oversight Policy Governance
    • Provide oversight and ensure alignment between information security governance and company objectives.
    • Assess the adequacy of resources and funding to sustain and advance successful security programs and practices for identifying, assessing, and mitigating cybersecurity risks across all business functions.
    • Review control audit reports and resulting remediation plans to ensure business alignment
    • Review the company's cyber insurance policies to ensure appropriate coverage.
    • Provide recommendations, based on security best practices, for significant technology investments.
    • Review policy-exception requests to determine if potential security risks can be accepted or if a workaround exists.
    • Assess the ramifications of updates to policies and standards.
    • Establish standards and procedures for escalating significant security incidents to the board, other steering committees, government agencies, and law enforcement, as appropriate.

    Typical steering committee duties

    Risk Governance Monitoring and Reporting
    • Review and approve the company's information risk governance structure.
    • Assess the company's high-risk information assets and coordinate planning to address information privacy and security needs.
    • Provide input to executive management regarding the enterprise's information security risk tolerance.
    • Review the company's cyber-response preparedness, incident response plans, and disaster recovery capabilities as applicable to the organization's information security strategy.
    • Promote an open discussion regarding information risk and integrate information risk management into the enterprise's objectives.
    • Receive periodic reports and coordinate with management on the metrics used to measure, monitor, and manage cyber risks posed to the company and to review periodic reports on selected security risk topics as the committee deems appropriate.
    • Monitor and evaluate the quality and effectiveness of the company's technology security, capabilities for disaster recovery, data protection, cyber threat detection, and cyber incident response, and management of technology-related compliance risks.

    2.1.2 Complete steering committee RACI

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the RACI template and review the membership roles. Customize the template to match the makeup of your steering committee.
    2. Read through each task in the left-hand column and determine who will be involved:
    • R - responsible: the person doing the action (can be multiple)
    • A - accountable: the owner of the task, usually a department head who delegates the execution of the task (only assigned to one stakeholder)
    • C - consulted: stakeholders that offer some kind of guidance, advice, or recommendation (can be multiple)
    • I - Informed: stakeholders that receive status updates about the task (can be multiple)

    Note: All tasks must have accountability and responsibility assigned (sometimes a single stakeholder is accountable and responsible). However, not all tasks will have someone consulted or informed.

    Download Information Security Steering Committee RACI Chart

    InputOutput
    • N/A
    • Defined roles and responsibilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • RACI Chart
    • CISO
    • CRO
    • CIO
    • HR
    • Internal Audit
    • Business representative
    • Legal

    Step 2.2

    Set Risk Appetite

    Activities
    2.2.1 Draft qualitative risk statements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative

    Outcomes of this step

    Qualitative risk appetite

    Implement Essential Governance Processes

    Step 2.1 > Step 2.2 > Step 2.3

    Know your appetite for risk

    What is an organizational risk appetite?

    Setting risk appetite is a key governance function, as it structures how your organization will deal with the risks it will inevitably face - when they can be accepted, when they need to be mitigated, and when they must be rejected entirely.

    It is important to note that risk appetite and risk tolerance are not the same. Risk appetite refers to the amount of risk the organization is willing to accept as part of doing business, whereas risk tolerance has more to do with individual risks affecting one or more lines of business that exceed that appetite. Such risks are often tolerated as individual cases that can be mitigated to an acceptable level of risk even though it exceeds the risk-appetite threshold.

    Chart Risk Appetite

    2.1.2 Draft qualitative risk-appetite statements

    1-3 hours

    This activity is meant to provide a starting point for risk governance. To develop a comprehensive risk-management program, see Info-Tech's Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program blueprint.

    1. Draft statements that express your attitudes toward the kinds of risks your organization faces. The point is to set boundaries to better understand when risk mitigation may be necessary.
    2. Examples:
    • We will not accept risks that may cause us to violate SLAs.
    • We will avoid risks that may prevent the organization from operating normally.
    • We will not accept risks that may result in exposure of confidential information.
    • We will not accept risks that may cause significant brand damage.
    • We will not accept risks that pose undue risk to human life or safety.
    InputOutput
    • Definitions for high, medium, low impact and frequency
    • Set of qualitative risk-appetite statements
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative

    Step 2.3

    Implement Policy Lifecycle

    Activities
    2.3.1 Model your policy lifecycle
    2.3.2 Establish exception-approval process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    Policy lifecycle

    Exceptions-handling process

    Implement Essential Governance Processes

    Step 2.1 > Step 2.2 > Step 2.3

    2.3.1 Model your policy lifecycle

    1-3 hours

    This activity is meant to provide a starting point for policy governance. To develop a comprehensive policy-management program, see Info-Tech's Develop and Deploy Security Policies blueprint.

    1. Review the sections within the Security Policy Lifecycle Template and delete any sections or subsections that do not apply to your organization.
    2. As necessary, modify the lifecycle and receive approved sign-off by your organization's leadership.
    3. Solicit feedback from stakeholders, specifically, IT department management and business stakeholders.

    Download the Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    InputOutput
    • N/A
    • Policy lifecycle
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Policy Lifecycle Template
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Develop the security policy lifecycle

    The security policy lifecycle is an integral component of the security policy program and adds value by:

    • Setting out a roadmap to define needs, develop required documentation, and implement, communicate, and measure your policy program.
    • Defining roles and responsibilities for the security policy suite.
    • Aligning the business goals, security program goals, and policy objectives.

    Security Policy Lifecycle

    Diagram inspired by: ComplianceBridge, 2021

    2.3.2 Establish exception-approval process

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the Security Policy Exception Approval Template and customize it to match your exception-handling process. Be sure to account for the recommendations on the next slide.
    2. Use the Policy Exception Tracker to record and monitor granted exceptions.

    Download the Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow

    Download the Security Policy Exception Tracker

    Input Output
    • Answers to questions provided
    • Exception-handling process
    Materials Participants
    • Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow
    • Security Policy Exception Tracker
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Determine criteria to grant policy exception

    A key part of security risk and policy governance

    • Not all policies can be complied with all the time. As technology and business needs change, sometimes exceptions must be granted for operations to continue smoothly.
    • Exceptions can be either short or long term.
      • Short-term exceptions are often granted until a particular security gap can be closed, such as allowing staff to temporarily use new laptops that have yet to receive a required VPN for remote access.
      • Long-term exceptions usually occur when closing the gap entirely is not feasible. For example, a legacy system may be unable to meet evolving security standards, but there is no room in the budget to replace it.
    • Having a formal approval process for exceptions and a record of granted exceptions will help you to stay on top of security risk governance.

    Before granting an exception:

    1. Assess security risks associated with doing so: are they acceptable?
    2. Look for another way to resolve the issue: is a suitable workaround possible?
    3. Evaluate mitigating controls: is it possible to provide an equivalent level of security via other means?
    4. Assign risk ownership: who will be accountable if an incident arises from the exception?
    5. Determine appeals process: when disagreements arise, how will the final decision be made?

    Sources: University of Virginia; CIS

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You have now established a formal governance model for your organization - congratulations! Building this model and determining stakeholders' accountabilities and responsibilities is a big step.

    Remember to continue to use the evaluate-direct-monitor framework to make sure your governance model evolves as organizational governance matures and priorities shift.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Build Governance Model
    Build a customized security governance model for your organization.

    Develop policy lifecycle
    Develop a policy lifecycle and exceptions-handling process.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Design a Business-Focused Security Program

    Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program

    Research contributors and experts

    Michelle Tran, Consulting Industry

    Michelle Tran
    Consulting Industry

    One anonymous contributor

    Bibliography

    Durbin, Steve. "Achieving The Five Levels Of Information Security Governance." Forbes, 4 Apr. 2023. Accessed 4 Apr. 2023.

    Eiden, Kevin, et al. "Organizational Cyber Maturity: A Survey of Industries." McKinsey & Company, 4 Aug. 2021. Accessed 25 Apr. 2023.

    "Information Security Exception Policy." Center for Internet Security, 2020. Accessed 14 Apr. 2023.

    "Information Security Governance." EDUCAUSE, n.d. Accessed 27 Apr. 2023.

    ISACA. COBIT 2019 Framework: Governance and Management Objectives. GF Books, 2018.

    Policies & Procedures Team. "Your Policy for Policies: Creating a Policy Management Framework." ComplianceBridge, 30 Apr. 2021. Accessed 27 Apr. 2023.

    "Security and the C-Suite: Making Security Priorities Business Priorities." LogRhythm, Feb. 2021. Accessed 25 Apr 2023.

    University of Virginia. "Policy, Standards, and Procedures Exceptions Process." Information Security at UVA, 1 Jun. 2022. Accessed 14 Apr. 2023

    Customer Relationship Management Platform Selection Guide

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}529|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $14,719 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 32 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Customer relationship management (CRM) suites are an indispensable part of a holistic strategy for managing end-to-end customer interactions.
    • After defining an approach to CRM, selection and implementation of the right CRM suite is a critical step in delivering concrete business value for marketing, sales, and customer service.
    • Despite the importance of CRM selection and implementation, many organizations struggle to define an approach to picking the right vendor and rolling out the solution in an effective and cost-efficient manner.
    • IT often finds itself in the unenviable position of taking the fall for CRM platforms that don't deliver on the promise of the CRM strategy.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT needs to be a trusted partner in CRM selection and implementation, but the business also needs to own the requirements and be involved from the beginning.
    • CRM requirements dictate the components of the target CRM architecture, such as deployment model, feature focus, and customization level. Savvy application directors recognize the points in the project where the CRM architecture model necessitates deviations from a "canned" roll-out plan.
    • CRM selection is a multi-step process that involves mapping target capabilities for marketing, sales, and customer service, assigning requirements across functional categories, determining the architecture model to prioritize criteria, and developing a comprehensive RFP that can be scored in a weighted fashion.
    • Companies that succeed with CRM implementation create a detailed roadmap that outlines milestones for configuration, security, points of implementation, data migration, training, and ongoing application maintenance.

    Impact and Result

    • A CRM platform that effectively meets the needs of marketing, sales, and customer service and delivers value.
    • Reduced costs during CRM selection.
    • Reduced implementation costs and time frame.
    • Faster time to results after implementation.

    Customer Relationship Management Platform Selection Guide Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Customer Relationship Management Platform Selection Guide – Speed up the process to build your business case and select your CRM solution.

    This blueprint will help you build a business case for selecting the right CRM platform, defining key requirements, and conducting a thorough analysis and scan of the ever-evolving CRM market space.

    • Customer Relationship Management Platform Selection Guide — Phases 1-3

    2. CRM Business Case Template – Document the key drivers for selecting a new CRM platform.

    Having a sound business case is essential for succeeding with a CRM. This template will allow you to document key drivers and impact, in line with the CRM Platform Selection Guide blueprint.

    • CRM Business Case Template

    3. CRM Request for Proposal Template

    Create your own request for proposal (RFP) for your customer relationship management (CRM) solution procurement process by customizing the RFP template created by Info-Tech.

    • CRM Request for Proposal Template

    4. CRM Suite Evaluation and RFP Scoring Tool

    The CRM market has many strong contenders and differentiation may be difficult. Instead of relying solely on reputation, organizations can use this RFP tool to record and objectively compare vendors according to their specific requirements.

    • CRM Suite Evaluation and RFP Scoring Tool

    5. CRM Vendor Demo Script

    Use this template to support your business's evaluation of vendors and their solutions. Provide vendors with scenarios that prompt them to display not only their solution's capabilities, but also how the tool will support your organization's particular needs.

    • CRM Vendor Demo Script

    6. CRM Use Case Fit Assessment Tool

    Use this tool to help build a CRM strategy for the organization based on the specific use case that matches your organizational needs.

    • CRM Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Customer Relationship Management Platform Selection Guide

    Speed up the process to build your business case and select your CRM solution.

    Table of Contents

    1. Analyst Perspective
    2. Executive Summary
    3. Blueprint Overview
    4. Executive Brief
    5. Phase 1: Understand CRM Functionality
    6. Phase 2: Build the Business Case and Elicit CRM requirements
    7. Phase 3: Discover the CRM Marketspace and Prepare for Implementation
    8. Conclusion

    Analyst Perspective

    A strong CRM platform is paramount to succeeding with customer engagement.

    Modern CRM platforms are the workhorses that provide functional capabilities and data curation for customer experience management. The market for CRM platforms has seen an explosion of growth over the last five years, as organizations look to mature their ability to deliver strong capabilities across marketing, sales, and customer service.

    IT needs to be a trusted partner in CRM selection and implementation, but the business also needs to own the requirements and be involved from the get-go.

    CRM selection must be a multistep process that involves defining target capabilities for marketing, sales, and customer service, prioritizing requirements across functional categories, determining the architecture model for the CRM environment, and developing a comprehensive RFP that can be scored in a weighted fashion.

    To succeed with CRM implementation, create a detailed roadmap that outlines milestones for configuration, security, points of implementation, data migration, training, and ongoing application maintenance.

    Photo of Ben Dickie, Research Lead, Customer Experience Strategy, Info-Tech Research Group. Ben Dickie
    Research Lead, Customer Experience Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Customer Relationship Management (CRM) suites are an indispensable part of a holistic strategy for managing end-to-end customer interactions. Selecting the right platform that aligns with your requirements is a significant undertaking.

    After defining an approach to CRM, selection and implementation of the right CRM suite is a critical step in delivering concrete business value for marketing, sales, and customer service.
    Common Obstacles

    Despite the importance of CRM selection and implementation, many organizations struggle to define an approach to picking the right vendor and rolling out the solution in an effective and cost-efficient manner.

    The CRM market is rapidly evolving and changing, making it tricky to stay on top of the space.

    IT often finds itself in the unenviable position of taking the fall for CRM platforms that don’t deliver on the promise of the CRM strategy.
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    CRM platform selection must be driven by your overall customer experience management strategy: link your CRM selection to your organization’s CXM framework.

    Determine if you need a CRM platform that skews toward marketing, sales, or customer service; leverage use cases to help guide selection.

    Ensure strong points of integration between CRM and other software such as MMS. A CRM should not live in isolation; it must provide a 360-degree view.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT must work in lockstep with its counterparts in marketing, sales, and customer service to define a unified vision for the CRM platform.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for selecting the right CRM platform

    1. Understand CRM Features 2. Build the Business Case & Elicit CRM Requirements 3. Discover the CRM Market Space & Prepare for Implementation
    Phase Steps
    1. Define CRM platforms
    2. Classify table stakes & differentiating capabilities
    3. Explore CRM trends
    1. Build the business case
    2. Streamline requirements elicitation for CRM
    3. Construct the RFP
    1. Discover key players in the CRM landscape
    2. Engage the shortlist & select finalist
    3. Prepare for implementation
    Phase Outcomes
    • Consensus on scope of CRM and key CRM capabilities
    • CRM selection business case
    • Top-level use cases and requirements
    • Completed CRM RFP
    • CRM market analysis
    • Shortlisted vendor
    • Implementation considerations

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    The CRM purchase process should be broken into segments:

    1. CRM vendor shortlisting with this buyer’s guide
    2. Structured approach to selection
    3. Contract review

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Call #1: Understand what a CRM platform is and the “art of the possible” for sales, marketing, and customer service. Call #2: Build the business case to select a CRM.

    Call #3: Define your key CRM requirements.

    Call #4: Build procurement items such as an RFP.
    Call #5: Evaluate the CRM solution landscape and shortlist viable options.

    Call #6: Review implementation considerations.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    INFO~TECH RESEARCH GROUP

    Customer Relationship Management Platform Selection Guide

    Speed up the process to build your business case and select your CRM solution.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Info-Tech Research Group Inc. is a global leader in providing IT research and advice. Info-Tech’s products and services combine actionable insight and relevant advice with ready-to-use tools and templates that cover the full spectrum of IT concerns.
    © 1997-2022 Info-Tech Research Group Inc.

    What exactly is a CRM platform?

    Our Definition: A customer relationship management (CRM) platform (or suite) is a core enterprise application that provides a broad feature set for supporting customer interaction processes, typically across marketing, sales and customer service. These suites supplant more basic applications for customer interaction management (such as the contact management module of an enterprise resource planning (ERP) platform or office productivity suite).

    A customer relationship management suite provides many key capabilities, including but not limited to:

    • Account management
    • Order history tracking
    • Pipeline management
    • Case management
    • Campaign management
    • Reports and analytics
    • Customer journey execution

    A CRM suite provides a host of native capabilities, but many organizations elect to tightly integrate their CRM solution with other parts of their customer experience ecosystem to provide a 360-degree view of their customers.

    Stock image of a finger touching a screen showing a stock chart.

    Info-Tech Insight

    CRM feature sets are rapidly evolving. Focus on the social component of sales, marketing, and service management features, as well as collaboration, to get the best fit for your requirements. Moreover, consider investing in best-of-breed social media management platforms (SMMPs) and internal collaboration tools to ensure sufficient functionality.

    Build a cohesive CRM selection approach that aligns business goals with CRM capabilities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Customers expect to interact with organizations through the channels of their choice. Now more than ever, you must enable your organization to provide tailored customer experiences.

    Customer expectations are on the rise: meet them!

    A CRM platform is a crucial system for enabling good customer experiences.

    CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE IS EVOLVING

    1. Thoughtfulness is in
        Connect with customers on a personal level
    2. Service over products
        The experience is more important than the product
    3. Culture is now number one
        Culture is the most overlooked piece of customer experience strategy
    4. Engineering and service finally join forces
        Companies are combining their technology and service efforts to create strong feedback loops
    5. The B2B world is inefficiently served
        B2B needs to step up with more tools and a greater emphasis placed on customer experience

    (Source: Forbes, 2019)

    Identifying organizational objectives of high priority will assist in breaking down business needs and CRM objectives. This exercise will better align the CRM systems with the overall corporate strategy and achieve buy-in from key stakeholders.

    A strong CRM platform supports a range of organizational objectives for customer engagement.

    Increase Revenue Enable lead scoring Deploy sales collateral management tools Improve average cost per lead via a marketing automation tool
    Enhance Market Share Enhance targeting effectiveness with a CRM Increase social media presence via an SMMP Architect customer intelligence analysis
    Improve Customer Satisfaction Reduce time-to-resolution via better routing Increase accessibility to customer service with live chat Improve first contact resolution with customer KB
    Increase Customer Retention Use a loyalty management application Improve channel options for existing customers Use customer analytics to drive targeted offers
    Create Customer-Centric Culture Ensure strong training and user adoption programs Use CRM to provide 360-degree view of all customer interactions Incorporate the voice of the customer into product development

    Succeeding with CRM selection and implementation has a positive effect on driving revenues and decreasing costs

    There are three buckets of metrics and KPIs where CRM will drive improvements

    The metrics of a smooth CRM selection and implementation process include:

    • Better alignment of CRM functionality to business needs.
    • Better functionality coverage of the selected platform.
    • Decreased licensing costs via better vendor negotiation.
    • Improved end-user satisfaction with the deployed solution.
    • Fewer errors and rework during implementation.
    • Reduced total implementation costs.
    • Reduced total implementation time.

    A successful CRM deployment drives revenue

    • Increased customer acquisition due to enhanced accuracy of segmentation and targeting, superior lead qualification, and pipeline management.
    • Increased customer satisfaction and retention due to targeted campaigns (e.g. customer-specific deals), quicker service incident resolution, and longitudinal relationship management.
    • Increased revenue per customer due to comprehensive lifecycle management tools, social engagement, and targeted upselling of related products and services (enabled by better reporting/analytics).

    A successful CRM deployment decreases cost

    • Deduplication of effort across business domains as marketing, sales, and service now have a common repository of customer information and interaction tools.
    • Increased sales and service agent efficiency due to their focus on selling and resolution, rather than administrative tasks and overhead.
    • Reduced cost-to-sell and cost-to-serve due to automation of activities that were manually intensive.
    • Reduced cost of accurate data due to embedded reporting and analytics functionality.

    CRM platforms sit at the core of a well-rounded customer engagement ecosystem

    At the center is 'Customer Relationship Management Platform' surrounded by 'Web Experience Management Platform', 'E-Commerce & Point-of-Sale Solutions', 'Social Media Management Platform', 'Customer Intelligence Platform', 'Customer Service Management Tools', and 'Marketing Management Suite'.

    Customer Experience Management (CXM) Portfolio

    Customer relationship management platforms are increasingly expansive in functional scope and foundational to an organization’s customer engagement strategy. Indeed, CRMs form the centerpiece for a comprehensive CXM system, alongside tools such as customer intelligence platforms and adjacent point solutions for sales, marketing, and customer service.

    Review Info-Tech’s CXM blueprint below to build a complete, end-to-end customer interaction solution portfolio that encompasses CRM alongside other critical components. The CXM blueprint also allows you to develop strategic requirements for CRM based on customer personas and external market analysis.

    Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

    Sample of the 'Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management' blueprint. Design an end-to-end technology strategy to drive sales revenue, enhance marketing effectiveness, and create compelling experiences for your customers.

    View the blueprint

    Considering a CRM switch? Switching software vendors drives high satisfaction

    Eighty percent of organizations are more satisfied after changing their software vendor.

    • Most organizations see not only a positive change in satisfaction with their new vendor, but also a substantial change in satisfaction.
    • What matters is making sure your organization is well-positioned to make a switch.
    • When it comes to switching software vendors, the grass really can be greener on the other side.

    Over half of organizations are 60%+ more satisfied after changing their vendor.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, "Switching Software Vendors Overwhelmingly Drives Increased Satisfaction", 2020.)

    IT is critical to the success of your CRM selection and rollout

    Today’s shared digital landscape of the CIO and CMO

    Info-Tech Insight

    Technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences: IT must stand shoulder to shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for customer relationship management.

    CIO

    IT Operations

    Service Delivery and Management

    IT Support

    IT Systems and Application

    IT Strategy and Governance

    Cybersecurity
    Collaboration and Partnership

    Digital Strategy = Transformation
    Business Goals | Innovation | Leadership | Rationalization

    Customer Experience
    Architecture | Design | Omnichannel Delivery | Management

    Insight (Market Facing)
    Analytics | Business Intelligence | Machine Learning | AI

    Marketing Integration + Operating Model
    Apps | Channels | Experiences | Data | Command Center

    Master Data
    Customer | Audience | Industry | Digital Marketing Assets
    CMO

    PEO Media

    Brand Management

    Campaign Management

    Marketing Tech

    Marketing Ops

    Privacy, Trust, and Regulatory Requirements

    (Source: ZDNet, 2020)

    CRM by the numbers

    1/3

    Statistical analysis of CRM projects indicates failures vary from 18% to 69%. Taking an average of those analyst reports, about one-third of CRM projects are considered a failure. (Source: CIO Magazine, 2017)

    92%

    92% of organizations report that CRM use is important for accomplishing revenue objectives. (Source: Hall, 2020)

    40%

    In 2019, 40% of executives name customer experience the top priority for their digital transformation. (Source: CRM Magazine, 2019)

    Case Study

    Align strategy and technology to meet consumer demand.
    INDUSTRY
    Entertainment
    SOURCE
    Forbes, 2017
    Challenge

    Beginning as a mail-out service, Netflix offered subscribers a catalog of videos to select from and have mailed to them directly. Customers no longer had to go to a retail store to rent a video. However, the lack of immediacy of direct mail as the distribution channel resulted in slow adoption.

    Blockbuster was the industry leader in video retail but was lagging in its response to industry, consumer, and technology trends around customer experience.

    Solution

    In response to the increasing presence of tech-savvy consumers on the internet, Netflix invested in developing its online platform as its primary distribution channel. The benefit of doing so was two-fold: passive brand advertising (by being present on the internet) and meeting customer demands for immediacy and convenience. Netflix also recognized the rising demand for personalized service and created an unprecedented, tailored customer experience.

    Results

    Netflix’s disruptive innovation is built on the foundation of great customer experience management. Netflix is now a $28-billion company, which is tenfold what Blockbuster was worth.

    Netflix used disruptive technologies to innovatively build a customer experience that put it ahead of the long-time video rental industry leader, Blockbuster.

    CRM Buyer’s Guide

    Phase 1

    Understand CRM Features

    Phase 1

    1.1 Define CRM platforms

    1.2 Classify table stakes & differentiating capabilities

    1.3 Explore CRM trends

    Phase 2

    2.1 Build the business case

    2.2 Streamline requirements elicitation for CRM

    2.3 Construct the RFP

    Phase 3

    3.1 Discover key players in the CRM landscape

    3.2 Engage the shortlist & select finalist

    3.3 Prepare for implementation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Set a level of understanding of CRM technology.
    • Define which CRM features are table stakes (standard) and which are differentiating.
    • Identify the “Art of the Possible” in a modern CRM from a sales, marketing, and service lens.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Applications manager
    • Project manager
    • Sales executive
    • Marketing executive
    • Customer service executive

    Understand CRM table stakes features

    Organizations can expect nearly all CRM vendors to provide the following functionality.

    Lead Management Pipeline Management Contact Management Campaign Management Customer Service Management
    • Tracks and captures a lead’s information, automatically building a profile. Leads are then qualified through contact scoring models. Assigning leads to sales is typically automated.
    • Enables oversight over future sales. Includes revenue forecasting based on past/present trends, tracking sales velocity, and identifying ineffective sales processes.
    • Tracks and stores customer data, including demography, account and billing history, social media, and contact information. Typically, records and fields can be customized.
    • Provides integrated omnichannel campaign functionality and data analysis of customer intelligence. Data insights can be used to drive new and effective marketing campaigns.
    • Provides integrated omnichannel customer experiences to provide convenient service. Includes case and ticket management, automated escalation rules, and third-party integrations.

    Identify differentiating CRM features

    While not always “must-have” functionality, these features may be the final dealbreaker when deciding between two CRM vendors.

    Image of clustered screens with various network and business icons surounding them.
    • Workflow Automation
      Automate repetitive tasks by creating workflows that trigger actions or send follow-up reminders for next steps.
    • Advanced Analytics and Reporting
      Provides customized dashboard visualizations, detailed reporting, AI-driven virtual assistants, data extraction & analysis, and ML forecasting.
    • Customizations and Open APIs
      Broad range of available customizations (e.g. for dashboards and fields), alongside ease of integration (e.g. via plugins or APIs).
    • Document Management
      Out-of-the-box centralized content repository for storing, uploading, and sharing documents.
    • Mobile Support
      Ability to support mobile devices, OSes, and platforms with a native application or HTML-based web-access.
    • Project and Task Management
      Native project and task management functionality, enhancing cross-team organization and communication.
    • Configure, Price, Quote (CPQ)
      Create and send quotes or proposals to prospective and current customers.

    Features aren’t everything – be wary of common CRM selection pitfalls

    You can have all the right features, but systemic problems will lead to poor CRM implementation. Dig out these root causes first to ensure a successful CRM selection.

    50% of organizations believe the quality of their CRM data is “very poor” or “neutral.”

    Without addressing data governance issues, CRMs will only be as good as your data.

    Source: (Validity 2020)
    27% of organizations report that bad data costs them 10% or more in lost revenue annually.
    42% rate the trust that users have in their data as “high” or “very high.”
    54% believe that sales forecasts are accurate or very accurate.
    69% attribute poor CRM governance to missing or incomplete data, followed by duplicate data, incorrect data, and expired data. Other data issues include siloed data or disparate systems.
    73% believe that they do not have a 360-degree view of their customers.

    Ensure you understand the “art of the possible” in the CRM landscape

    Knowing what is possible will help funnel which features are most suitable for your organization – having all the bells and whistles does not always equal strong ROI.

    Holistically examine the potential of any CRM solution through three main lenses: Stock image of a person working with dashboards.

    Sales

    Identify sales opportunities through recording customers’ interactions, generating leads, nurturing contacts, and forecasting revenues.
    Stock image of people experiencing digital ideas.

    Marketing

    Analyze customer interactions to identify upsell and cross-sell opportunities, drive customer loyalty, and use customer data for targeted campaigns.
    Stock image of a customer service representative.

    Customer Service

    Improve and optimize customer engagement and retention, leveraging customer data to provide round-the-clock omnichannel experiences.

    Art of the possible: Sales

    Stock image of a person working with dashboards.

    TRACK PROSPECT INTERACTIONS

    Want to engage with a prospect but don’t know what to lead with? CRM solutions can track and analyze many of the interactions a prospect has with your organization, including with fellow staff, their clickthrough rate on marketing material, and what services they are downloading on your website. This information can then auto-generate tasks to begin lead generation.

    COORDINATE LEAD SCORING

    Information captured from a prospect is generated into contact cards; missing data (such as name and company) can be auto-captured by the CRM via crawling sites such as LinkedIn. The CRM then centralizes and scores (according to inputted business rules) a lead’s potential, ensuring sales teams coordinate and keep a track of the lead’s journey without wrongful interference.

    AI-DRIVEN REVENUE FORECASTING

    Generate accurate forecasting reports using AI-driven “virtual assistants” within the CRM platform. These assistants are personal data scientists, quickly noting discrepancies, opportunities, and what-if scenarios – tasks that might take weeks to do manually. This pulled data is then auto-forecasted, with the ability to flexibly adjust to real-time data.

    Art of the possible: Marketing

    Stock image of people experiencing digital ideas.

    DRIVE LOYALTY

    Data captured and analyzed in the CRM from customer interactions builds profiles and a deeper understanding of customers’ interests. With this data, marketing teams can deliver personalized promotions and customer service to enhance loyalty – from sending a discount on a product the customer was browsing on the website, to providing notifications about delivery statuses.

    AUTOMATE WORKFLOWS

    Building customer profiles, learning spending habits, and charting a customer’s journey for upselling or cross-selling can be automated through workflows, saving hours of manual work. These workflows can immediately respond to customer enquiries or deliver offers to the customer’s preferred channel based on their prior usage.

    TARGETED CAMPAIGNING

    Information attained through a CRM platform directly informs any marketing strategy: identifying customer segments, spending habits, building a better product based on customer feedback, and identifying high-spending customers. With any new product or offering, it is straightforward for marketing teams to understand where to target their next campaign for highest impact.

    Art of the possible: Customer service

    Stock image of a customer service representative.

    OMNICHANNEL SUPPORT

    Rapidly changing demographics and modes of communications require an evolution toward omnichannel engagement. Many customers now expect to communicate with contact centers not just by voice, but via social media. Agents need customer information synced across each channel they use, meeting the customer’s needs where they are.

    INTELLIGENT SELF-SERVICE PORTALS

    Customers want their issues resolved as quickly as possible. Machine-learning self-service options deliver personalized customer experiences, which also reduce both agent call volume and support costs for the organization.

    LEVERAGING ANALYTICS

    The future of customer service is tied up with analytics. This not only entails AI-driven capabilities that fetch the agent relevant information, skills-based routing, and using biometric data (e.g. speech) for security. It also feeds operations leaders’ need for easy access to real insights about how their customers and agents are doing.

    Best-of-Breed Point Solutions

    Full CRM Suite

    Blue smiley face. Benefits
    • Features may be more advanced for specific functional areas and a higher degree of customization may be possible.
    • If a potential delay in real-time customer data transfer is acceptable, best-of-breeds provide a similar level of functionality to suites for a lower price.
    • Best-of-breeds allow value to be realized faster than suites, as they are easier and faster to implement and configure.
    • Rip and replace is easier, and vendor updates are relatively quick to market.
    Benefits
    • Everyone in the organization works from the same set of customer data.
    • There is a “lowest common denominator” for agent learning as consistent user interfaces lower learning curves and increase efficiency in usage.
    • There is a broader range of functionality using modules.
    • Integration between functional areas will be strong and the organization will be in a better position to enable version upgrades without risking invalidation of an integration point between separate systems.
    Green smiley face.
    Purple frowny face. Challenges
    • Best-of-breeds typically cover less breadth of functionality than suites.
    • There is a lack of uniformity in user experience across best-of-breeds.
    • Data integrity risks are higher.
    • Variable infrastructure may be implemented due to multiple disparate systems, which adds to architecture complexity and increased maintenance.
    • There is potential for redundant functionality across multiple best-of-breeds.
    Challenges
    • Suites exhibit significantly higher costs compared to point solutions.
    • Suite module functionality may not have the same depth as point solutions.
    • Due to high configuration availability and larger-scale implementation requirements, the time to deploy is longer than point solutions.
    Orange frowny face.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Even if a suite is missing a potential module, the proliferation of app extensions, integrations, and services could provide a solution. Salesforce’s AppExchange, for instance, offers a plethora of options to extend its CRM solution – from telephony integration, to gamification.

    CRM Buyer’s Guide

    Phase 2

    Build the Business Case & Elicit CRM Requirements

    Phase 1

    1.1 Define CRM platforms

    1.2 Classify table stakes & differentiating capabilities

    1.3 Explore CRM trends

    Phase 2

    2.1 Build the business case

    2.2 Streamline requirements elicitation for CRM

    2.3 Construct the RFP

    Phase 3

    3.1 Discover key players in the CRM landscape

    3.2 Engage the shortlist & select finalist

    3.3 Prepare for implementation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify goals, objectives, challenges, and costs to inform the business case for a new CRM platform.
    • Elicit and prioritize key requirements for your platform.
    • Port the requirements into Info-Tech’s CRM RFP Template.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Applications manager
    • Project manager
    • Sales executive
    • Marketing executive
    • Customer service executive

    Right-size the CRM selection team to ensure you get the right information but are still able to move ahead quickly

    Full-Time Resourcing: At least one of these five team members must be allocated to the selection initiative as a full-time resource.

    A silhouetted figure.

    IT Leader

    A silhouetted figure.

    Technical Lead

    A silhouetted figure.

    Business Analyst/
    Project Manager

    A silhouetted figure.

    Business Lead

    A silhouetted figure.

    Process Expert(s)

    This team member is an IT director or CIO who will provide sponsorship and oversight from the IT perspective. This team member will focus on application security, integration, and enterprise architecture. This team member elicits business needs and translates them into technology requirements. This team member will provide sponsorship from the business needs perspective. Typically, a CMO or SVP of sales. These team members are the sales, marketing, and service process owners who will help steer the CRM requirements and direction.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is critical for the selection team to determine who has decision rights. Organizational culture will play the largest role in dictating which team member holds the final say for selection decisions. For more information on stakeholder management and involvement, see this guide.

    Be prepared to define what issues you are trying to address and why a new CRM is the right approach

    Identify the current state and review the background of what you’ve done leading up to this point, goals you’ve been asked to meet, and challenges in solving known problems to help to set the stage for why your proposed solution is needed. If your process improvements have taken you as far as you can go without improved workflows or data, specify where the gaps are.
    Arrows with icons related to the text on the right merging into one arrow. Alignment

    Alignment to strategic goals is always important, but that is especially true with CRM because customer relationship management platforms are at the intersection of your organization and your customers. What are the strategic marketing, sales and customer service goals that you want to realize (in whole or in part) by improving your CRM ecosystem?

    Impact to your business

    Identify areas where your customers may be impacted by poor experiences due to inadequate or aging technology. What’s the impact on customer retention? On revenue?

    Impact to your organization

    Define how internal stakeholders within the organization are impacted by a sub-optimal CRM experience – what are their frustrations and pain points? How do issues with your current CRM environment prevent teams in sales, marketing, or service from doing their jobs?

    Impact to your department

    Describe the challenges within IT of using disparate systems, workarounds, poor data and reporting, lack of automation, etc., and the effect these challenges have on IT’s goals.

    Align the CRM strategy with the corporate strategy

    Corporate Strategy Unified Strategy CRM Strategy
    Spectrum spanning all columns.
    Your corporate strategy:
    • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
    • Identifies future goals and business aspirations.
    • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the future state.
    • The CRM strategy and the rationale for deploying a new CRM can be and should be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate business objectives (such as improving customer acquisition, entering new segments, or improving customer lifetime value).
    Your CRM strategy:
    • Communicates the organization’s budget and spending on CRM.
    • Identifies IT initiatives that will support the business and key CRM objectives.
    • Outlines staffing and resourcing for CRM initiatives.
    CRM projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance and the criticality of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning business strategies with CRM capabilities. Effective alignment between sales, marketing, customer service, operations, IT, and the business should happen daily. Alignment doesn’t just need to occur at the executive level, but also at each level of the organization.

    2.1 Create your list of goals and milestones for CRM

    1-3 hours

    Input: Corporate strategy, Target key performance indicators, End-user satisfaction results (if applicable)

    Output: Prioritized list of goals with milestones that can be met with a new or improved CRM solution

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, CRM Business Case Template

    Participants: CIO, Application managers, CMO/SVP sales, Marketing, sales or service SMEs

    1. Review strategic goals to identify alignment to your CRM selection project. For example, digital transformation may be enhanced or enabled with a CRM solution that supports better outreach to key customer segments through improved campaign management.
    2. Next, brainstorm tactical goals with your colleagues.
    3. Identify specific goals the organization has set for the business that may be supported by improved customer prospecting, customer service, or analytics functionality through a better CRM solution.
    4. Identify specific goals your organization will be able to make possible with a new or improved CRM solution.
    5. Prioritize this list and lead with the most important goal that can be reached at the one-year, six-month, and three-month milestones.
    6. Document in the goals section of your business case.

    Download the CRM Business Case Template and record the outputs of this exercise in the strategic business goals, business drivers, and technical drivers slides.

    Identify what challenges exist with the current environment

    Ensure you are identifying issues at a high level, so as not to drown in detail, but still paint the right picture. Identify technical issues that are impacting customer experience or business goals. Typical complaints for CRM solutions that are old or have been outgrown include:

    1.

    Lack of a flexible, configurable customer data model that supports complex relationships between accounts and contacts.

    2.

    Lack of a flexible, configurable customer data model that supports complex relationships between accounts and contacts.

    3.

    Lack of meaningful reports and useable dashboards, or difficulty in surfacing them.

    4.

    Poor change enablement resulting in business interruptions.

    5.

    Inability to effectively automate routine sales, marketing, or service tasks at scale via a workflow tool.

    6.

    Lack of proper service management features, such as service knowledge management.

    7.

    Inability to ingest customer data at scale (for example, no ability to automatically log e-mails or calls).

    8.

    Major technical deficiencies and outages – the incumbent CRM platform goes down, causing business disruption.

    9.

    The platform itself doesn’t exist in the current state – everything is done in Microsoft Excel!

    Separate business issues from technical issues, but highlight where they’re connected and where technical issues are causing business issues or preventing business goals from being reached.

    Before switching vendors, evaluate your existing CRM to see if it’s being underutilized or could use an upgrade

    The cost of switching vendors can be challenging, but it will depend entirely on the quality of data and whether it makes sense to keep it.
    • Achieving success when switching vendors first requires reflection. We need to ask why we are dissatisfied with our incumbent software.
    • If the product is old and inflexible, the answer may be obvious, but don’t be afraid to include your incumbent in your evaluation if your issues might be solved with an upgrade.
    • Look at your use-case requirements to see where you want to take the CRM solution and compare them to your incumbent’s roadmap. If they don’t match, switching vendors may be the only solution. If your roadmaps align, see if you’re fully leveraging the solution or will be able to start working through process improvements.
    Pie graph with a 20% slice. Pie graph with a 25% slice.

    20%

    Small/Medium Enterprises

    25%

    Large Enterprises
    only occasionally or rarely/never use their software (Source: Software Reviews, 2020; N = 45,027)
    Fully leveraging your current software now will have two benefits:
    1. It may turn out that poor leveraging of your incumbent software was the problem all along; switching vendors won’t solve the problem by itself. As the data to the right shows, a fifth of small/medium enterprises and a quarter of large enterprises do not fully leverage their incumbent software.
    2. If you still decide to switch, you’ll be in a good negotiating position. If vendors can see you are engaged and fully leveraging your software, they will be less complacent during negotiations to win you over.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Switching vendors won’t improve poor internal processes. To be fully successful and meet the goals of the business case, new software implementations must be accompanied by process review and improvement.

    2.2 Create your list of challenges as they relate to your goals and their impacts

    1-2 hours

    Input: Goals lists, Target key performance indicators, End-user satisfaction results (if applicable)

    Output: Prioritized list of challenges preventing or hindering customer experiences

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, CRM Business Case Template

    Participants: CIO, Application managers, CMO/SVP sales, Marketing, sales, or service SMEs

    1. Brainstorm with your colleagues to discuss your challenges with CRM today from an application and process lens.
    2. Identify how these challenges are impacting your ability to meet the goals and identify any that are creating customer-facing issues.
    3. Group together like areas and arrange in order of most impactful. Identify which of these issues will be most relevant to the business case for a new CRM platform.
    4. Document in the current-state section of your business case.
    5. Discuss and determine if the incumbent solution can meet your needs or if you’ll need to replace it with a different product.

    Download the CRM Business Case Template and document the outputs of this exercise in the current-state section of your business case.

    Determine costs of the solution

    Ensure the business case includes both internal and external costs related to the new CRM platform, allocating costs of project managers to improve accuracy of overall costs and level of success.

    CRM solutions include application costs and costs to design processes, install, and configure. These start-up costs can be a significant factor in whether the initial purchase is feasible.

    CRM Vendor Costs

    • Application licensing
    • Implementation and configuration
    • Professional services
    • Maintenance and support
    • Training
    • 3rd Party add-ons
    • Data transformation
    • Integration
    When thinking about vendor costs, also consider the matching internal cost associated with the vendor activity (e.g. data cleansing, internal support).

    Internal Costs

    • Project management
    • Business readiness
    • Change management
    • Resourcing (user groups, design/consulting, testing)
    • Training
    • Auditors (if regulatory requirements need vetting)
    Project management is a critical success factor at all stages of an enterprise application initiative from planning to post-implementation. Ensuring that costs for such critical areas are accurately represented will contribute to success.

    Download the blueprint Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable to define requirements for installation and configuration.

    Bring in the right resources to guarantee success. Work with the PMO or project manager to get help with creating the SOW.

    60% of IT projects are NOT finished “mostly or always” on time (Wellingtone, 2018).

    55% of IT personnel feel that the business objectives of their software projects are clear to them (Geneca, 2017).

    Document costs and expected benefits of the new CRM

    The business case should account for the timing of both expenditures and benefits. It is naïve to expect straight-line benefit realization or a big-bang cash outflow related to the solution implementation. Proper recognition and articulation of ramp-up time will make your business case more convincing.

    Make sure your timelines are realistic for benefits realization, as these will be your project milestones and your metrics for success.

    Example:
    Q1-Q2 Q3-Q6 Q6 Onwards

    Benefits at 25%

    At the early stages of an implementation, users are still learning the new system and go-live issues are being addressed. Most of the projected process improvements are likely to be low, zero, or even negative.

    Benefits at 75%

    Gradually, as processes become more familiar, an organization can expect to move closer to realizing the forecasted benefits or at least be in a position to recognize a positive trend toward their realization.

    Benefits at 100%

    In an ideal world, all projected benefits are realized at 100% or higher. This can be considered the stage where processes have been mastered, the system is operating smoothly, and change has been broadly adopted. In reality, benefits are often overestimated.

    Costs at 50%

    As with benefits, some costs may not kick in until later in the process or when the application is fully operational. In the early phases of implementation, factor in the cost of overlapping technology where you’ll need to run redundant systems and transition any data.

    Costs at 100%

    Costs are realized quicker than benefits as implementation activities are actioned, licensing and maintenance costs are introduced, and resourcing is deployed to support vendor activities internally. Costs that were not live in the early stages are an operational reality at this stage.

    Costs at 100%+

    Costs can be expected to remain relatively static past a certain point, if estimates accurately represented all costs. In many instances, costs can exceed original estimates in the business case, where costs were either underestimated, understated, or missed.

    2.3 Document your costs and expected benefits

    1-2 hours

    Input: Quotes with payment schedule, Budget

    Output: Estimated payment schedule and cost breakdown

    Materials: Spreadsheet or whiteboard, CRM Business Case Template

    Participants: CIO, Application managers, CMO/SVP sales, Marketing, sales, or service SMEs

    1. Estimate costs for the CRM solution. If you’re working with a vendor, provide the initial requirements to quote; otherwise, estimate as closely as you’re able.
    2. Calculate the five-year total cost for the solution to ensure the long-term budget is calculated.
    3. Break down costs for licenses, implementation, training, internal support, and hardware or hosting fees.
    4. Determine a reasonable breakdown of costs for the first year.
    5. Identify where residual costs of the old system may factor in if there are remaining contract obligations during the technology transition.
    6. Create a list of benefits expected to be realized within the same timeline.

    Sample of the table on the previous slide.

    Download the CRM Business Case Template and document the outputs of this exercise in the current-state section of your business case.

    Identify risks and dependencies to mitigate barriers to success as you look to roll out a CRM suite

    A risk assessment will be helpful to better understand what risks need to be mitigated to make the project a success and what risks are pending should the solution not be approved or be delayed.

    Risk Criteria Relevant Questions
    Timeline Uncertainty
    • How much risk is associated with the timeline of the CRM project?
    • Is this timeline realistic and can you reach some value in the first year?
    Success of Similar Projects
    • Have we undertaken previous projects that are similar?
    • Were those successful?
    • Did we note any future steps for improvement?
    Certainty of Forecasts
    • Where have the numbers originated?
    • How comfortable are the sponsors with the revenue and cost forecasts?
    Chance of Cost Overruns
    • How likely is the project to have cost overruns?
    • How much process and design work needs to be done prior to implementation?
    Resource Availability
    • Is this a priority project?
    • How likely are resourcing issues from a technical and business perspective?
    • Do we have the right resources?
    Change During Delivery
    • How volatile is the area in which the project is being implemented?
    • Are changes in the environment likely?
    • How complex are planned integrations?

    2.4 Identify risks to the success of the solution rollout and mitigation plan

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of goals and challenges, Target key performance indicators

    Output: Prioritized list of challenges preventing or hindering improvements for the IT teams

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, CRM Business Case Template

    Participants: CIO, Application managers, CMO/SVP sales, Marketing, sales, or service SMEs

    1. Brainstorm with your colleagues to discuss potential roadblocks and risks that could impact the success of the CRM project.
    2. Identify how these risks could impact your project.
    3. Document the ones that are most likely to occur and derail the project.
    4. Discuss potential solutions to mitigate risks.

    Download the CRM Business Case Template and document the outputs of this exercise in the risk and dependency section of your business case. If the risk assessment needs to be more complex, complete the Risk Indicator Analysis in Info-Tech’s Business Case Workbook.

    Start requirements gathering by identifying your most important use cases across sales, marketing, and service

    Add to your business case by identifying which top-level use cases will meet your goals.

    Examples of target use cases for a CRM project include:

    • Enhance sales acquisition capabilities (i.e. via pipeline management)
    • Enhance customer upsell and cross-sell capabilities
    • Improve customer segmentation and targeting capabilities for multi-channel marketing campaigns
    • Strengthen customer care capabilities to improve customer satisfaction and retention (i.e. via improved case management and service knowledge management)
    • Create actionable insights via enhanced reporting and analytics

    Info-Tech Insight

    Lead with the most important benefit and consider the timeline. Can you reach that goal and report success to your stakeholders within the first year? As you look toward that one-year goal, you can consider secondary benefits, some of which may be opportunities to bring early value in the solution.

    Benefits of a successful deployment of use cases will include:
    • Improved customer satisfaction
    • Improved operational efficiencies
    • Reduced customer turnover
    • Increased platform uptime
    • License or regulatory compliance
    • Positioned for growth

    Typically, we see business benefits in this order of importance. Lead with the outcome that is most important to your stakeholders.

    • Net income increases
    • Revenue generators
    • Cost reductions
    • Improved customer service

    Consider perspectives of each stakeholder to ensure functionality needs are met and high satisfaction results

    Best of breed vs. “good enough” is an important discussion and will feed your success.

    Costs can be high when customizing an ill-fitting module or creating workarounds to solve business problems, including loss of functionality, productivity, and credibility.

    • Start with use cases to drive the initial discussion, then determine which features are mandatory and which are nice-to-haves. Mandatory features will help determine high success for critical functionality and identify where “good enough” is an acceptable state.
    • Consider the implications to implementation and all use cases of buying an all-in-one solution, integration of multiple best-of-breed solutions, or customizing features that were not built into a solution.
    • Be prepared to shelve a use case for this solution and look to alternatives for integration where mandatory features cannot meet highly specialized needs that are outside of traditional CRM solutions.

    Pros and Cons

    Build vs. Buy

    Multi-Source Best of Breed

    Flexibility
    vs.
    architectural complexity

    Vendor Add-Ons & Integrations

    Lower support costs
    vs.
    configuration

    Multi-source Custom

    Flexibility
    vs.
    high skills requirements

    Single Source

    Lower support costs
    vs.
    configuration

    2.5 Define use cases and high-level features for meeting business and technical goals

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of goals and challenges

    Output: Use cases to be used for determining requirements

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, CRM Business Case Template

    Participants: CIO, Application managers, CMO/SVP sales, Marketing, sales, or service SMEs

    1. Identify the key customer engagement use cases that will support your overall goals as defined in the previous section.
    2. The following slide has examples of use case domains that will be enhanced from a CRM platform.
    3. Define high-level goals you wish to achieve in the first year and longer term. If you have more specific KPIs to add, and it is a requirement for your organization’s documentation, add them to this section.
    4. Take note of where processes will need to be improved to benefit from these use-case solutions – the tools are only as good as the process behind them.

    Download the CRM Business Case Template and document the outputs from this exercise in the current-state section of your business case.

    Understand the dominant use-case scenarios across organizations to narrow the list of potential CRM solutions

    Sales
    Enablement

    • Generate leads through multiple channels.
    • Rapidly sort, score, and prioritize leads based on multiple criteria.
    • Create in-depth sales forecasts segmented by multiple criteria (territory, representative, etc.).

    Marketing
    Management

    • Manage marketing campaigns across multiple channels (web, social, email, etc.).
    • Aggregate and analyze customer data to generate market intelligence.
    • Build and deploy customer-facing portals.

    Customer Service
    Management

    • Generate tickets, and triage customer service requests through multiple channels.
    • Track customer service interactions with cases.
    • There is a need to integrate customer records with contact center infrastructure.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Use your understanding of the CRM use case to accelerate the vendor shortlisting process. Since the CRM use case has a direct impact on the prioritization of a platform’s features and capabilities, you can rapidly eliminate vendors from contention or designate superfluous modules as out-of-scope.

    2.5.1 Use Info-Tech’s CRM Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool to align your CRM requirements to the vendor use cases

    30 min

    Input: Understanding of business objectives for CRM project, Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    Output: Use-case suitability

    Materials: Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    Participants: Core project team, Project managers

    1. Use the Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool to understand how your unique business requirements map into which CRM use case.
    2. This tool will assess your answers and determine your relative fit against the use-case scenarios.
    3. Fit will be assessed as “Weak,” “Moderate,” or “Strong.”
      1. Consider the common pitfalls, which were mentioned earlier, that can cause IT projects to fail. Plan and take clear steps to avoid or mitigate these concerns.
      2. Note: These use-case scenarios are not mutually exclusive, meaning your organization can align with one or more scenarios based on your answers. If your organization shows close alignment to multiple scenarios, consider focusing on finding a more robust solution and concentrate your review on vendors that performed strongly in those scenarios or meet the critical requirements for each.

    Download the CRM Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    Once you’ve identified the top-level use cases a CRM must support, elicit, and prioritize granular platform requirements.

    Understanding business needs through requirements gathering is the key to defining everything about what is being purchased, yet it is an area where people often make critical mistakes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To avoid creating makeshift solutions, an organization needs to gather requirements with the desired future state in mind.

    Risks of poorly scoped requirements

    • Fail to be comprehensive and miss certain areas of scope
    • Focus on how the solution should work instead of what it must accomplish
    • Have multiple levels of detail within the requirements, which are inconsistent and confusing
    • Drill all the way down into system-level detail
    • Add unnecessary constraints based on what is done today rather than focusing on what is needed for tomorrow
    • Omit constraints or preferences that buyers think are “obvious”

    Best practices

    • Get a clear understanding of what the system needs to do and what it is expected to produce
    • Test against the principle of MECE – requirements should be “mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive”
    • Explicitly state the obvious and assume nothing
    • Investigate what is sold on the market and how it is sold. Use language that is consistent with that of the market and focus on key differentiators – not table stakes
    • Contain the appropriate level of detail – the level should be suitable for procurement and sufficient for differentiating vendors

    Prioritize requirements to assist with vendor selection: focus on priority requirements linked to differentiated capabilities

    Prioritization is the process of ranking each requirement based on its importance to project success. Hold a meeting for the domain SMEs, implementation SMEs, project managers, and project sponsors to prioritize the requirements list. At the conclusion of the meeting, each requirement should be assigned a priority level. The implementation SMEs will use these priority levels to ensure efforts are targeted toward the proper requirements and to plan features available on each release. Use the MoSCoW Model of Prioritization to effectively order requirements.


    Pyramid of the MoSCoW Model.
    The MoSCoW model was introduced by Dai Clegg of Oracle UK in 1994.

    The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization

    Requirements must be implemented for the solution to be considered successful.

    Requirements that are high priority should be included in the solution if possible.

    Requirements are desirable but not necessary and could be included if resources are available.

    Requirements won’t be in the next release, but will be considered for the future releases.

    Base your prioritization on the right set of criteria

    Effective Prioritization Criteria

    Criteria

    Description

    Regulatory & Legal Compliance These requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Policy Compliance Unless an internal policy can be altered or an exception can be made, these requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Business Value Significance Give a higher priority to high-value requirements.
    Business Risk Any requirement with the potential to jeopardize the entire project should be given a high priority and implemented early.
    Likelihood of Success Especially in “proof of concept” projects, it is recommended that requirements have good odds.
    Implementation Complexity Give a higher priority to low implementation difficulty requirements.
    Alignment With Strategy Give a higher priority to requirements that enable the corporate strategy.
    Urgency Prioritize requirements based on time sensitivity.
    Dependencies A requirement on its own may be low priority, but if it supports a high-priority requirement, then its priority must match it.

    2.6 Identify requirements to support your use cases

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of goals and challenges

    Output: Use cases to be used for determining requirements

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Vendor Evaluation Workbook

    Participants: CIO, Application managers, CMO/SVP sales, Marketing, sales, or service SMEs

    1. Work with the team to identify which features will be most important to support your use cases. Keep in mind there will be some features that will require more effort to implement fully. Add that into your project plan.
    2. Use the features lists on the following slides as a guide to get started on requirements.
    3. Prioritize your requirements list into mandatory features and nice-to-have features (or use the MoSCoW model from the previous slides). This will help you to eliminate vendors who don’t meet bare minimums and to score remaining vendors.
    4. Use this same list to guide your vendor demos.

    Our Improve Requirements Gathering blueprint provides a deep dive into the process of eliciting, analyzing, and validating requirements if you need to go deeper into effective techniques.

    CRM features

    Table stakes vs. differentiating

    What is a table stakes/standard feature?

    • Certain features are standard for all CRM tools, but that doesn’t mean they are all equal.
    • The existence of features doesn’t guarantee their quality or functionality to the standards you need. Never assume that “Yes” in a features list means you don’t need to ask for a demo.
    • If Table Stakes are all you need from your CRM solution, the only true differentiator for the organization is price. Otherwise, dig deeper to find the best price to value for your needs.

    What is a differentiating/additional feature?

    • Differentiating features take two forms:
      • Some CRM platforms offer differentiating features that are vertical specific.
      • Other CRM platforms offer differentiating features that are considered cutting edge. These cutting-edge features may become table stakes over time.

    Table stakes features for CRM

    Account Management Flexible account database that stores customer information, account history, and billing information. Additional functionality includes: contact deduplication, advanced field management, document linking, and embedded maps.
    Interaction Logging and Order History Ability to view all interactions that have occurred between sales teams and the customer, including purchase order history.
    Basic Pipeline Management View of all opportunities organized by their current stage in the sales process.
    Basic Case Management The ability to create and manage cases (for customer service or order fulfilment) and associate them with designated accounts or contacts.
    Basic Campaign Management Basic multi-channel campaign management (i.e. ability to execute outbound email campaigns). Budget tracking and campaign dashboards.
    Reports and Analytics In-depth reports on CRM data with dashboards and analytics for a variety of audiences.
    Mobile Support Mobile access across multiple devices (tablets, smartphones and/or wearables) with access to CRM data and dashboards.

    Additional features for CRM

    Customer Information Management Customizable records with detailed demographic information and the ability to created nested accounts (accounts with associated sub-accounts or contact records).
    Advanced Case Management Ability to track detailed interactions with members or constituents through a case view.
    Employee Collaboration Capabilities for employee-to-employee collaboration, team selling, and activity streams.
    Customer Collaboration Capabilities for outbound customer collaboration (i.e. the ability to create customer portals).
    Lead Generation Capabilities for generating qualified leads from multiple channels.
    Lead Nurturing/Lead Scoring The ability to evaluate lead warmth using multiple customer-defined criteria.
    Pipeline and Deal Management Managing deals through cases, providing quotes, and tracking client deliverables.

    Additional features for CRM (Continued)

    Marketing Campaign Management Managing outbound marketing campaigns via multiple channels (email, phone, social, mobile).
    Customer Intelligence Tools for in-depth customer insight generation and segmentation, predictive analytics, and contextual analytics.
    Multi-Channel Support Capabilities for supporting customer interactions across multiple channels (email, phone, social, mobile, IoT, etc.).
    Customer Service Workflow Management Capabilities for customer service resolution, including ticketing and service management.
    Knowledge Management Tools for capturing and sharing CRM-related knowledge, especially for customer service.
    Customer Journey Mapping Visual workflow builder with automated trigger points and business rules engine.
    Document Management The ability to curate assets and attachments and add them to account or contact records.
    Configure, Price, Quote The ability to create sales quotes/proposals from predefined price lists and rules.

    2.7 Put it all together – port your requirements into a robust RFP template that you can take to market!

    1-2 hours
    1. Once you’ve captured and prioritized your requirements – and received sign-off on them from key stakeholders – it’s time to bake them into a procurement vehicle of your choice.
    2. For complex enterprise systems like a CRM platform, Info-Tech recommends that this should take the form of a structured RFP document.
    3. Use our CRM RFP Template and associated CRM RFP Scoring Tool to jump-start the process.
    4. The next step will be conducting a market scan to identify contenders, and issuing the RFP to a shortlist of viable vendors for further evaluation.

    Need additional guidance on running an effective RFP process? Our Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes with a Robust RFP Process has everything you need to ace the creation, administration and assessment of RFPs!

    Samples of the CRM Request for Proposal Template and CRM Suite Evaluation and RFP Scoring Tool.

    Download the CRM Request for Proposal Template

    Download the CRM Suite Evaluation and RFP Scoring Tool

    Identify whether vertical-specific CRM platforms are a best fit

    In mature vendor landscapes (like CRM) vendors begin to differentiate themselves by offering vertical-specific platforms, modules, or feature sets. These feature sets accelerate the implantation, decrease the platform’s learning curve, and drive user adoption. The three use cases below cover the most common industry-specific offerings:

    Public Sector

    • Constituent management and communication.
    • Constituent portal deployment for self-service.
    • Segment constituents based on geography, needs and preferences.

    Education

    • Top-level view into the student journey from prospect to enrolment.
    • Track student interactions with services across the institution.
    • Unify communications across different departments.

    Financial Services

    • Determine customer proclivity for new services.
    • Develop self-service banking portals.
    • Track longitudinal customer relationships from first account to retirement management.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Vertical-specific solutions require less legwork to do upfront but could cost you more in the long run. Interoperability and vendor viability must be carefully examined. Smaller players targeting niche industries often have limited integration ecosystems and less funding to keep pace with feature innovation.

    Rein-in ballooning scope for CRM selection projects

    Stretching the CRM beyond its core capabilities is a short-term solution to a long-term problem. Educate stakeholders about the limits of CRM technology.

    Common pitfalls for CRM selection

    • Tangential capabilities may require separate solutions. It is common for stakeholders to list features such as “content management” as part of the new CRM platform. While content management goes hand in hand with the CRM’s ability to manage customer interactions, document management is best handled by a standalone platform.

    Keeping stakeholders engaged and in line

    • Ballooning scope leads to stakeholder dissatisfaction. Appeasing stakeholders by over-customizing the platform will lead to integration and headaches down the road.
    • Make sure stakeholders feel heard. Do not turn down ideas in the midst of an elicitation session. Once the requirements-gathering sessions are completed, the project team has the opportunity to mark requirements as “out of scope” and communicate the reasoning behind the decision.
    • Educate stakeholders on the core functionality of CRM. Many stakeholders do not know the best-fit use cases for CRM platforms. Help end users understand what CRM is good at and where additional technologies will be needed.
    Stock image of a man leaping with a balloon.

    CRM Buyer’s Guide

    Phase 3

    Discover the CRM Market Space & Prepare for Implementation

    Phase 1

    1.1 Define CRM platforms

    1.2 Classify table stakes & differentiating capabilities

    1.3 Explore CRM trends

    Phase 2

    2.1 Build the business case

    2.2 Streamline requirements elicitation for CRM

    2.3 Construct the RFP

    Phase 3

    3.1 Discover key players in the CRM landscape

    3.2 Engage the shortlist & select finalist

    3.3 Prepare for implementation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Dive into the key players of the CRM vendor landscape.
    • Understand best practices for building a vendor shortlist.
    • Understand key implementation considerations for CRM.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Applications manager
    • Project manager
    • Sales executive
    • Marketing executive
    • Customer service executive

    Consolidating the Vendor Shortlist Up-Front Reduces Downstream Effort

    Put the “short” back in shortlist!

    • Radically reduce effort by narrowing the field of potential vendors earlier in the selection process. Too many organizations don’t funnel their vendor shortlist until nearing the end of the selection process. The result is wasted time and effort evaluating options that are patently not a good fit.
    • Leverage external data (such as SoftwareReviews) and expert opinion to consolidate your shortlist into a smaller number of viable vendors before the investigative interview stage and eliminate time spent evaluating dozens of RFP responses.
    • Having fewer RFP responses to evaluate means you will have more time to do greater due diligence.
    Stock image of river rapids.

    Review your use cases to start your shortlist

    Your Info-Tech analysts can help you narrow down the list of vendors that will meet your requirements.

    Next steps will include:
    1. Reviewing your requirements
    2. Checking out SoftwareReviews
    3. Shortlisting your vendors
    4. Conducting demos and detailed proposal reviews
    5. Selecting and contracting with a finalist!
    Image of a person presenting a dashboard of the steps on the left.

    Get to know the key players in the CRM landscape

    The proceeding slides provide a top-level overview of the popular players you will encounter in the CRM shortlisting process.

    Logos of the key players in the CRM landscape (Salesforce, Microsoft, Oracle, HubSpot, etc).

    Evaluate software category leaders through vendor rankings and awards

    SoftwareReviews

    Sample of SoftwareReviews' Data Quadrant Report. Title page of SoftwareReviews' Data Quadrant Report. The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

    Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

    Sample of SoftwareReviews' Emotional Footprint. Title page of SoftwareReviews' Emotional Footprint. The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

    Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

    SoftwareReviews

    Icon of a person.


    Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals.

    Icon of a magnifying glass over a chart.


    Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process.

    CLICK HERE to ACCESS

    Comprehensive software reviews to make better IT decisions

    We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    Icon of a tablet.


    Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization.

    Icon of a phone.


    User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

    SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech

    Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech, and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive unbiased data on today’s technology. Combined with the insights of our expert analysts, our members receive unparalleled support in their buying journey.

    Logo for Salesforce.
    Est. 1999 | CA, USA | NYSE: CRM

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account. Link for their LinkedIn profile. Link for their website.
    Sales Cloud Enterprise allows you to be more efficient, more productive, more everything than ever before as it allows you to close more deals, accelerate productivity, get more leads, and make more insightful decisions.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:
    • Breadth of features
    • Quality of features
    • Sales management functionality
    Areas to Improve:
    • Cost of service
    • Ease of implementation
    • Telephony and contact center management
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    8.0
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    8.3
    CX SCORE
    +77
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    83%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 600
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of a Salesforce screen. Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about Salesforce from our members for CRM? 'Very Frequently'.
    History of Salesforce in a vertical timeline.
    *Pricing correct as of August 2021. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.
    Logo for Salesforce.

    “Salesforce is the pre-eminent vendor in the CRM marketplace and is a force to be reckoned with in terms of the breadth and depth of its capabilities. The company was an early disruptor in the category, placing a strong emphasis from the get-go on a SaaS delivery model and strong end-user experience. This allowed them to rapidly gain market share at the expense of more complacent enterprise application vendors. A series of savvy acquisitions over the years has allowed Salesforce to augment their core Sales and Service Clouds with a wide variety of other solutions, from e-commerce to marketing automation to CPQ. Salesforce is a great fit for any organization looking to partner with a market leader with excellent functional breadth, strong interoperability, and a compelling technology and partner ecosystem. All of this comes at a price, however – Salesforce prices at a premium, and our members routinely opine that Salesforce’s commercial teams are overly aggressive – sometimes pushing solutions without a clear link to underpinning business requirements.”

    Ben Dickie
    Research Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Sales Cloud Essentials Sales Cloud Professional Sales Cloud Enterprise Sales Cloud Ultimate
    • Starts at $25*
    • Per user/mo
    • Small businesses after basic functionality
    • Starts at $75*
    • Per user/mo
    • Mid-market target
    • Starts at $150*
    • Per user/mo
    • Enterprise target
    • Starts at $300*
    • Per user/mo
    • Strong upmarket feature additions
    Logo for Microsoft.


    Est. 1975 | WA, USA | NYSE: MSFT

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account.Link for their LinkedIn profile.Link for their website.
    Dynamics 365 Sales is an adaptive selling solution that helps your sales team navigate the realities of modern selling. At the center of the solution is an adaptive, intelligent system – prebuilt and ready to go – that actively monitors myriad signals and distills them into actionable insights.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:

    • Business value created
    • Analytics and reporting
    • Lead management

    Areas to Improve:

    • Quote, contract, and proposals
    • Vendor support
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    8.1
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    8.3
    CX SCORE
    +84
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    82%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 198
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of a Microsoft screen.Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about Microsoft Dynamics from our Members? 'Very Frequently'.

    History of Microsoft in a vertical timeline.

    *Pricing correct as of June 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.
    Logo for Microsoft.
    “”

    “Microsoft Dynamics 365 is a strong and compelling player in the CRM arena. While Microsoft is no stranger to the CRM space, their offerings here have seen steady and marked improvement over the last five years. Good functional breadth paired with a modern user interface and best-in-class Microsoft stack compatibility ensures that we consistently see them on our members’ shortlists, particularly when our members are looking to roll out CRM capabilities alongside other components of the Dynamics ecosystem (such as Finance, Operations, and HR). Today, Microsoft segments the offering into discrete modules for sales, service, marketing, commerce, and CDP. While Microsoft Dynamics 365 is a strong option, it’s occasionally mired by concerns that the pace of innovation and investment lags Salesforce (its nearest competitor). Additionally, the marketing module of the product is softer than some of its competitors, and Microsoft themselves points organizations with complex marketing requirements to a strategic partnership that they have with Adobe.”

    Ben Dickie
    Research Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    D365 Sales Professional D365 Sales Enterprise D365 Sales Premium
    • Starts at $65*
    • Per user/mo
    • Midmarket focus
    • Starts at $95*
    • Per user/mo
    • Enterprise focus
    • Starts at $135*
    • Per user/mo
    • Enterprise focus with customer intelligence
    Logo for Oracle.


    Est. 1977 | CA, USA | NYSE: ORCL

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account.Link for their LinkedIn profile.Link for their website.
    Oracle Engagement Cloud (CX Sales) provides a set of capabilities to help sales leaders transition smoothly from sales planning and execution through customer onboarding, account management, and support services.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:

    • Quality of features
    • Activity and workflow management
    • Analytics and reporting

    Areas to Improve:

    • Marketing management
    • Product strategy & rate of improvement
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    7.8
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    7.9
    CX SCORE
    +77
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    78%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 140
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of an Oracle screen.Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about Oracle from our members for CRM? 'Frequently'.

    History of Oracle in a vertical timeline.

    Logo for Oracle.

    “Oracle is long-term juggernaut of the enterprise applications space. Their CRM portfolio is diverse – rather than a single stack, there are multiple Oracle solutions (many made by acquisition) that support CRM capabilities – everything from Siebel to JD Edwards to NetSuite to Oracle CX applications. The latter constitute Oracle’s most modern stab at CRM and are where the bulk of feature innovation and product development is occurring within their portfolio. While historically seen as lagging behind other competitors like Salesforce and Microsoft, Oracle has made excellent strides in improving their user experience (via their Redwoods design paradigm) and building new functional capabilities within their CRM products. Indeed, SoftwareReviews shows Oracle performing well in our most recent peer-driven reports. Nonetheless, we most commonly see Oracle as a pricier ecosystem play that’s often subordinate to a heavy Oracle footprint for ERP. Many of our members also express displeasure with Oracle as a vendor and highlight their heavy-handed “threat of audit” approach. ”

    Ben Dickie
    Research Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Oracle CX Sales - Pricing Opaque:

    “Request a Demo”

    Logo for SAP.


    Est. 1972 | Germany | NYSE: SAP

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account.Link for their LinkedIn profile.Link for their website.
    SAP is the third-largest independent software manufacturer in the world, with a presence in over 120 countries. Having been in the industry for over 40 years, SAP is perhaps best known for its ERP application, SAP ERP.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:

    • Ease of data integration

    Areas to Improve:

    • Lead management
    • Marketing management
    • Collaboration
    • Usability & intuitiveness
    • Analytics & reporting
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    7.4
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    7.8
    CX SCORE
    +74
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    75%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 108
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of a SAP screen.Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about SAP from our members for CRM? 'Occasionally'.

    History of SAP in a vertical timeline.

    *Pricing correct as of August 2021. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.
    Logo for SAP.

    “SAP is another mainstay of the enterprise applications market. While they have a sound breadth of capabilities in the CRM and customer experience space, SAP consistently underperforms in many of our relevant peer-driven SoftwareReviews reports for CRM and adjacent areas. CRM seems decidedly a secondary focus for SAP, behind their more compelling play in the enterprise resource planning (ERP) space. Indeed, most instances where we see SAP in our clients’ shortlists, it’s as an ecosystem play within a broader SAP strategy. If you’re blue on the ERP side, looking to SAP’s capabilities on the CRM front makes logical sense and can help contain costs. If you’re approaching a CRM selection from a greenfield lens and with no legacy vendor baggage for SAP elsewhere, experience suggests you’ll be better served by a vendor that places a higher degree of primacy on the CRM aspect of their portfolio.”

    Ben Dickie
    Research Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    SAP CRM - Pricing Opaque:

    “Request a Demo”

    Logo for pipedrive.


    Est. 2010 | NY, USA | Private

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account.Link for their LinkedIn profile.Link for their website.
    Pipedrive brings together the tools and data, the platform focuses sales professionals on fundamentals to advance deals through their pipelines. Pipedrive's goal is to make sales success inevitable - for salespeople and teams.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:

    • Sales Management
    • Account & Contact Management
    • Lead Management
    • Usability & Intuitiveness
    • Ease of Implementation

    Areas to Improve:

    • Customer Service Management
    • Marketing Management
    • Product Strategy & Rate of Improvement
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    8.3
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    8.4
    CX SCORE
    +85
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    85%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 262
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of a Pipedrive screen.Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about Pipedrive from our members for CRM? 'Occasionally'.

    History of Pipedrive in a vertical timeline.

    *Pricing correct as of June 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.
    Logo for Pipedrive.

    “A relatively new offering, Pipedrive has seen explosive growth over the last five years. They’re a vendor that has gone from near-obscurity to popping up frequently on our members’ shortlists. Pipedrive’s secret sauce has been a relentless focus on high-velocity sales enablement. Their focus on pipeline management, lead assessment and routing, and a good single pane of glass for sales reps has driven significant traction for the vendor when sales enablement is the driving rationale behind rolling out a new CRM platform. Bang for your buck is also strong with Pipedrive, with the vendor having a value-driven licensing and implementation model.

    Pipedrive is not without some shortcomings. It’s laser-focus on sales enablement is at the expense of deep capabilities for marketing and service management, and its profile lends itself better to SMBs and lower midmarket than it does large organizations looking for enterprise-grade CRM.”

    Ben Dickie
    Research Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Essential Advanced Professional Enterprise
    • Starts at $12.50*
    • Per user/mo
    • Small businesses after basic functionality
    • Starts at $24.90*
    • Per user/mo
    • Small/mid-sized businesses
    • Starts at $49.90*
    • Per user/mo
    • Lower mid-market focus
    • Starts at $99*
    • Per user/mo
    • Enterprise focus
    Logo for SugarCRM.


    Est. 2004 | CA, USA | Private

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account.Link for their LinkedIn profile.Link for their website.
    Produces Sugar, a SaaS-based customer relationship management application. SugarCRM is backed by Accel-KKR.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:

    • Ease of customization
    • Product strategy and rate of improvement
    • Ease of IT administration

    Areas to Improve:

    • Marketing management
    • Analytics and reporting
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    8.4
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    8.8
    CX SCORE
    +92
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    84%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 97
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of a SugarCRM screen.Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about SugarCRM from our members for CRM? 'Frequently'.
    History of SugarCRM in a vertical timeline.
    *Pricing correct as of August 2021. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.
    Logo for SugarCRM.

    “SugarCRM offers reliable baseline capabilities at a lower price point than other large CRM vendors. While SugarCRM does not offer all the bells and whistles that an Enterprise Salesforce plan might, SugarCRM is known for providing excellent vendor support. If your organization is only after standard features, SugarCRM will be a good vendor to shortlist.

    However, ensure you have the time and labor power to effectively implement and train on SugarCRM’s solutions. SugarCRM does not score highly for user-friendly experiences, with complaints centering on outdated and unintuitive interfaces. Setting up customized modules takes time to navigate, and SugarCRM does not provide a wide range of native integrations with other applications. To effectively determine whether SugarCRM does offer a feasible solution, it is recommended that organizations know exactly what kinds of integrations and modules they need.”

    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Sugar Professional Sugar Serve Sugar Sell Sugar Enterprise Sugar Market
    • Starts at $52*
    • Per user/mo
    • Min. 3 users
    • Small businesses
    • Starts at $80*
    • Per user/mo
    • Min. 3 users
    • Focused on customer service
    • Starts at $80*
    • Per user/mo
    • Min. 3 users
    • Focused on sales automation
    • Starts at $80*
    • Per user/mo
    • Min. 3 users
    • On-premises, mid-sized businesses
    • Starts at $1000*
    • Priced per month
    • Min. 10k contacts
    • Large enterprise
    Logo for .


    Est. 2006 | MA, USA | HUBS (NYSE)

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account.Link for their LinkedIn profile.Link for their website.
    Develops software for inbound customer service, marketing, and sales. Software includes CRM, SMM, lead gen, SEO, and web analytics.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:

    • Breadth of features
    • Product strategy and rate of improvement
    • Ease of customization

    Areas to Improve:

    • Ease of data integration
    • Customer service management
    • Telephony and call center management
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    8.3
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    8.4
    CX SCORE
    +84
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    86%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 97
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of a HubSpot screen.Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about HubSpot from our members for CRM? 'Frequently'.

    History of HubSpot in a vertical timeline.

    *Pricing correct as of August 2021. Listed in USD and absent discounts
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.
    Logo for HubSpot.

    “ HubSpot is best suited for small to mid-sized organizations that need a range of CRM tools to enable growth across sales, marketing campaigns, and customer service. Indeed, HubSpot offers a content management solution that offers a central storage location for all customer and marketing data. Moreover, HubSpot offers plenty of freemium tools for users to familiarize themselves with the software before buying. However, though HubSpot is geared toward growing businesses, smaller organizations may not see high ROI until they begin to scale. The “Starter” and “Professional” plans’ pricing is often cited by small organizations as a barrier to commitment, and the freemium tools are not a sustainable solution. If organizations can take advantage of discount behaviors from HubSpot (e.g. a startup discount), HubSpot will be a viable long-term solution. ”

    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Starter Professional Enterprise
    • Starts at $50*
    • Per month
    • Min. 2 users
    • Small businesses
    • Starts at $500*
    • Per month
    • Min. 5 users
    • Small/mid-sized businesses
    • Starts at $1200*
    • Billed yearly
    • Min. 10 users
    • Mid-sized/small enterprise
    Logo for Zoho.


    Est. 1996 | India | Private

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account.Link for their LinkedIn profile.Link for their website.
    Zoho Corporation offers a cloud software suite, providing a full operating system for CRM, alongside apps for finance, productivity, HR, legal, and more.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:

    • Business value created
    • Breadth of features
    • Collaboration capabilities

    Areas to Improve:

    • Usability and intuitiveness
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    8.7
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    8.9
    CX SCORE
    +92
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    85%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 152
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of a Zoho screen.Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about Zoho from our members for CRM? 'Occasionally'.

    History of Zoho in a vertical timeline.

    *
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.
    Logo for Zoho.

    “Zoho has a long list of software solutions for businesses to run end to end. As one of Zoho’s earliest software releases, though, ZohoCRM remains a flagship product. ZohoCRM’s pricing is incredibly competitive for mid/large enterprises, offering high business value for its robust feature sets. For those organizations that already utilize Zoho solutions (such as its productivity suite), ZohoCRM will be a natural extension.

    However, small/mid-sized businesses may wonder how much ROI they can get from ZohoCRM, when much of the functionality expected from a CRM (such as workflow automation) cannot be found until one jumps to the “Enterprise” plan. Given the “Enterprise” plan’s pricing is on par with other CRM vendors, there may not be much in a smaller organization’s eyes that truly distinguishes ZohoCRM unless they are already invested Zoho users.”

    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Standard Professional Enterprise Ultimate
    • Starts at $20*
    • Per user/mo
    • Small businesses after basic functionality
    • Starts at $35*
    • Per user/mo
    • Small/mid-sized businesses
    • Adds inventory management
    • Starts at $50*
    • Per user/mo
    • Mid-sized/small enterprise
    • Adds Zia AI
    • Starts at $65*
    • Per user/mo
    • Enterprise
    • Bundles Zoho Analytics
    Logo for Zendesk.


    Est. 2009 | CA, USA | ZEN (NYSE)

    bio

    Link for their Twitter account.Link for their LinkedIn profile.Link for their website.
    Software developer for customer service. Founded in Copenhagen but moved to San Francisco after $6 million Series B funding from Charles River Ventures and Benchmark Capital.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise CRM Rankings

    Strengths:

    • Quality of features
    • Breadth of features
    • Vendor support

    Areas to Improve:

    • Business value created
    • Ease of customization
    • Usability and intuitiveness
    Logo gif for SoftwareReviews.
    7.8
    COMPOSITE SCORE
    7.9
    CX SCORE
    +80
    EMOTIONAL FOOTPRINT
    72%
    LIKELINESS TO RECOMMEND
    DOWNLOAD REPORT 50
    REVIEWS
    Vendor scores are driven by real-world practitioner reviews via SoftwareReviews. Composite, CX, EF and NPS scores pulled from live data as of June 2022. Rankings and ”strengths” and ”areas to improve” pulled from January 2022 Category Report.
    Sample of a Zendesk screen.Vendor Pulse rating. How often do we hear about Zendesk from our members for CRM? 'Rarely'.

    History of Zendesk in a vertical timeline.

    *Pricing correct as of August 2021. Listed in USD and absent discounts
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.
    Logo for Zendesk.

    “Zendesk’s initial growth was grounded in word-of-mouth advertising, owing to the popularity of its help desk solution’s design and functionality. Zendesk Sell has followed suit, receiving strong feedback for the breadth and quality of its features. Organizations that have already reaped the benefits of Zendesk’s customer service suite will find Zendesk Sell a straightforward fit for their sales teams.

    However, it is important to note that Zendesk Sell is predominantly focused on sales. Other key components of a CRM, such as marketing, are less fleshed out. Organizations should ensure they verify what requirements they have for a CRM before choosing Zendesk Sell – if sales process requirements (such as forecasting, call analytics, and so on) are but one part of what the organization needs, Zendesk Sell may not offer the highest ROI for the pricing offered.”

    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Sell Team Sell Professional Sell Enterprise
    • Starts at $19*
    • Per user/mo
    • Max. 3 users
    • Small businesses
    • Basic functionality
    • Starts at $49*
    • Per user/mo
    • Small/mid-sized businesses
    • Advanced analytics
    • Starts at $99*
    • Per user/mo
    • Mid-sized/small enterprise
    • Task automation

    Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

    Icon of a person.
    Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals.
    Icon of a magnifying glass over a chart.
    Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process.
    CLICK HERE to ACCESS

    Comprehensive software reviews to make better IT decisions

    We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    Icon of a tablet.
    Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization.
    Icon of a phone.
    User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

    SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech

    Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech, and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive unbiased data on today’s technology. Combined with the insights of our expert analysts, our members receive unparalleled support in their buying journey.

    Conduct a day of rapid-fire vendor demos

    Zoom in on high-value use cases and answers to targeted questions

    Make sure the solution will work for your business

    Give each vendor 90 to 120 minutes to give a rapid-fire presentation. We suggest the following structure:

    • 30 minutes: company introduction and vision
    • 60 minutes: walk-through of two or three high-value demo scenarios
    • 30 minutes: targeted Q&A from the business stakeholders and procurement team
    To ensure a consistent evaluation, vendors should be asked analogous questions, and a tabulation of answers should be conducted.
    How to challenge the vendors in the investigative interview
    • Change the visualization/presentation.
    • Change the underlying data.
    • Add additional data sets to the artifacts.
    • Collaboration capabilities.
    • Perform an investigation in terms of finding BI objects and identifying previous changes, and examine the audit trail.
    Rapid-fire vendor investigative interview

    Invite vendors to come onsite (or join you via video conference) to demonstrate the product and to answer questions. Use a highly targeted demo script to help identify how a vendor’s solution will fit your organization’s particular business capability needs.

    Graphic of an alarm clock.
    To kick-start scripting your demo scenarios, leverage our CRM Demo Script Template.

    A vendor scoring model provides a clear anchor point for your evaluation of CRM vendors based on a variety of inputs

    A vendor scoring model is a systematic method for effectively assessing competing vendors. A weighted-average scoring model is an approach that strikes a strong balance between rigor and evaluation speed.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Even the best scoring model will still involve some “art” rather than science – scoring categories such as vendor viability always entails a degree of subjective interpretation.

    How do I build a scoring model?

    • Start by shortlisting the key criteria you will use to evaluate your vendors. Functional capabilities should always be a critical category, but you’ll also want to look at criteria such as affordability, architectural fit, and vendor viability.
    • Depending on the complexity of the project, you may break down some criteria into sub-categories to assist with evaluation (for example, breaking down functional capabilities into constituent use cases so you can score each one).
    • Once you’ve developed the key criteria for your project, the next step is weighting each criterion. Your weightings should reflect the priorities for the project at hand. For example, some projects may put more emphasis on affordability, others on vendor partnership.
    • Using the information collected in the subsequent phases of this blueprint, score each criterion from 1-100, then multiply by the weighting factor. Add up the weighted scores to arrive at the aggregate evaluation score for each vendor on your shortlist.

    What are some of the best practices?

    • While the criteria for each project may vary, it’s helpful to have an inventory of repeatable criteria that can be used across application selection projects. The next slide contains an example that you can add or subtract from.
    • Don’t go overboard on the number of criteria: five to 10 weighted criteria should be the norm for most projects. The more criteria (and sub-criteria) you must score against, the longer it will take to conduct your evaluation. Always remember, link the level of rigor to the size and complexity of your project! It’s possible to create a convoluted scoring model that takes significant time to fill out but yields little additional value.
    • Creation of the scoring model should be a consensus-driven activity among IT, procurement, and the key business stakeholders – it should not be built in isolation. Everyone should agree on the fundamental criteria and weights that are employed.
    • Consider using not just the outputs of investigative interviews and RFP responses to score vendors, but also third-party review services like SoftwareReviews.

    Define how you’ll score CRM proposals and demos

    Define key CRM selection criteria for your organization – this should be informed by the following goals, use cases, and requirements covered in the blueprint.

    Criteria

    Description

    Functional CapabilitiesHow well does the vendor align with the top-priority functional requirements identified in your accelerated needs assessment? What is the vendor’s functional breadth and depth?
    AffordabilityHow affordable is this vendor? Consider a three-to-five-year total cost of ownership (TCO) that encompasses not just licensing costs, but also implementation, integration, training, and ongoing support costs.
    Architectural FitHow well does this vendor align with our direction from an enterprise architecture perspective? How interoperable is the solution with existing applications in our technology stack? Does the solution meet our deployment model preferences?
    ExtensibilityHow easy is it to augment the base solution with native or third-party add-ons as our business needs may evolve?
    ScalabilityHow easy is it to expand the solution to support increased user, data, and/or customer volumes? Are there any capacity constraints of the solution?
    Vendor ViabilityHow viable is this vendor? Are they an established player with a proven track record, or a new and untested entrant to the market? What is the financial health of the vendor? How committed are they to the particular solution category?
    Vendor VisionDoes the vendor have a cogent and realistic product roadmap? Are they making sensible investments that align with your organization’s internal direction?
    Emotional FootprintHow well does the vendor’s organizational culture and team dynamics align to yours?
    Third-Party Assessments and/or ReferencesHow well-received is the vendor by unbiased, third-party sources like SoftwareReviews? For larger projects, how well does the vendor perform in reference checks (and how closely do those references mirror your own situation)?

    Decision Point: Select the Finalist

    After reviewing all vendor responses to your RFP, conducting vendor demos, and running a pilot project (if applicable), the time has arrived to select your finalist.

    All core selection team members should hold a session to score each shortlisted vendor against the criteria enumerated on the previous slide – based on an in-depth review of proposals, the demo sessions, and any pilots or technical assessments.

    The vendor that scores the highest in aggregate is your finalist.

    Congratulations – you are now ready to proceed to final negotiation and inking a contract. This blueprint provides a detailed approach on the mechanics of a major vendor negotiation.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s research to plan and execute your CRM implementation

    Use Info-Tech Research Group’s three phase implementation process to guide your own planning.
    The three phases of software implementation: 'Assess', 'Prepare', 'Govern & Course Correct'. Sample of the 'Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation' blueprint.

    Establish and execute an end-to-end, agile framework to succeed with the implementation of a major enterprise application.

    Visit this link

    Prepare for implementation: establish a clear resourcing plan

    Organizations rarely have sufficient internal staffing to resource a CRM project on their own. Consider the options for closing the gap in internal resource availability.

    The most common project resourcing structures for enterprise projects are:
    Your own staff +
    1. Management consultant
    2. Vendor consultant
    3. System integrator
    Info-Tech Insight

    When contemplating a resourcing structure, consider:

    • Availability of in-house implementation competencies and resources.
    • Timeline and constraints.
    • Integration environment complexity.

    Consider the following:

    Internal vs. External Roles and Responsibilities

    Clearly delineate between internal and external team responsibilities and accountabilities, and communicate this to your technology partner up front.

    Internal vs. External Accountabilities

    Accountability is different than responsibility. Your vendor or SI partner may be responsible for completing certain tasks, but be careful not to outsource accountability for the implementation – ultimately, the internal team will be accountable.

    Partner Implementation Methodologies

    Often vendors and/or SIs will have their own preferred implementation methodology. Consider the use of your partner's implementation methodology; however, you know what will work for your organization.

    Establish team composition

    1 – 2 hours

    Input: Skills assessment, Stakeholder analysis, Vendor partner selection

    Output: Team composition

    Materials: Sticky notes, Whiteboard, Markers

    Participants: Project team

    Use Info-Tech’s Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation to establish your team composition. Within that blueprint:

    1. Assess the skills necessary for an implementation. Inventory the competencies required for the implementation project team. Map your internal resources to each competency as applicable.
    2. Select your internal implementation team. Determine who needs to be involved closely with the implementation. Key stakeholders should also be considered as members of your implementation team.
    3. Identify the number of external consultants/support required for implementation. Consider your in-house skills, timeline considerations, integration environment complexity, and cost constraints as you make your team composition plan. Be sure to dedicate an internal resource to managing the vendor and partner relationships.
    4. Document the roles and responsibilities, accountabilities, and other expectations of your team as they relate to each step of the implementation.

    Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation

    Sample of the 'Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation' blueprint.Follow our iterative methodology with a task list focused on the business must-have functionality to achieve rapid execution and to allow staff to return to their daily work sooner.

    Visit this link

    Ensure your implementation team has a high degree of trust and communication

    If external partners are needed, dedicate an internal resource to managing the vendor and partner relationships.

    Communication

    Teams must have some type of communication strategy. This can be broken into:
    • Regularity: Having a set time each day to communicate progress and a set day to conduct retrospectives.
    • Ceremonies: Injecting awards and continually emphasizing delivery of value can encourage relationship-building and constructive motivation.
    • Escalation: Voicing any concerns and having someone responsible for addressing those concerns.

    Proximity

    Distributed teams create complexity as communication can break down. This can be mitigated by:
    • Location: Placing teams in proximity can close the barrier of geographical distance and time zone differences.
    • Inclusion: Making a deliberate attempt to pull remote team members into discussions and ceremonies.
    • Communication tools: Having the right technology (e.g. video conference) can help bring teams closer together virtually.

    Trust

    Members should trust other members are contributing to the project and completing their required tasks on time. Trust can be developed and maintained by:
    • Accountability: Having frequent quality reviews and feedback sessions. As work becomes more transparent, people become more accountable.
    • Role clarity: Having a clear definition of what everyone’s role is.

    Plan for your implementation of CRM based on deployment model

    Place your CRM application into your IT landscape by configuring and adjusting the tool based on your specific deployment method.

    Icon of a housing development.
    On-Premises

    1. Identify custom features and configuration items
    2. Train developers and IT staff on new software investment
    3. Install software
    4. Configure software
    5. Test installation and configuration
    6. Test functionality

    Icon of a cloud upload.
    SaaS-based

    1. Train developers and IT staff on new software investment
    2. Set up connectivity
    3. Identify VPN or internal solution
    4. Check firewalls
    5. Validate bandwidth regulations

    Integration is a top IT challenge and critical to the success of the CRM suite

    CRM suites are most effective when they are integrated with ERP and MarTech solutions.

    Data interchange between the CRM solution and other data sources is necessary

    Formulate a comprehensive map of the systems, hardware, and software with which the CRM solution must be able to integrate. Customer data needs to constantly be synchronized: without this, you lose out on one of the primary benefits of CRM. These connections must be bidirectional for maximum value (i.e. marketing data to the CRM, customer data to MMS).
    Specialized projects that include an intricate prospect or customer list and complex rules may need to be built by IT The more custom fields you have in your CRM suite and point solutions, the more schema mapping you will have to do. Include this information in the RFP to receive guidance from vendors on the ease with which integration can be achieved.

    Pay attention to legacy apps and databases

    If you have legacy CRM, POS, or customer contact software, more custom code will be required. Many vendors claim that custom integration can be performed for most systems, but custom comes at a cost. Don’t just ask if they can integrate; ask how long it will take and for references from organizations which have been successful in this.
    When assessing the current application portfolio that supports CRM, the tendency will be to focus on the applications under the CRM umbrella, relating mostly to marketing, sales, and customer service. Be sure to include systems that act as inputs to, or benefit due to outputs from, the CRM or similar applications.

    CRM data flow

    Example of a CRM data flow.

    Be sure to include enterprise applications that are not included in the CRM application portfolio. Popular systems to consider for POIs include billing, directory services, content management, and collaboration tools.

    Sample CRM integration map

    Sample of a CRM integration map.

    Scenario: Failure to address CRM data integration will cost you in the long run

    A company spent $15 million implementing a new CRM system in the cloud and decided NOT to spend an additional $1.5 million to do a proper cloud DI tool procurement. The mounting costs followed.

    Cost Element – Custom Data Integration

    $

    2 FTEs for double entry of sales order data $ 100,000/year
    One-time migration of product data to CRM $ 240,000 otc
    Product data maintenance $ 60,000/year
    Customer data synchronization interface build $ 60,000 otc
    Customer data interface maintenance $ 10,000/year
    Data quality issues $ 100,000/year
    New SaaS integration built in year 3 $ 300,000 otc
    New SaaS integration maintenance $ 150,000/year

    Cost Element – Data Integration Tool

    $

    DI strategy and platform implementation $1,500,000 otc
    DI tool maintenance $ 15,000/year
    New SaaS integration point in year 3 $ 300,000 otc
    Thumbs down color coded red to the adjacent chart. Custom integration is costing this organization $300,000/year for one SaaS solution.
    Thumbs up color coded blue to the adjacent chart.

    The proposed integration solution would have paid for itself in 3-4 years and saved exponential costs in the long run.

    Proactively address data quality in the CRM during implementation

    Data quality is a make-or-break issue in a CRM platform; garbage in is garbage out.
    • CRM suites are one of the leading offenders for generating poor-quality data. As such, it’s important to have a plan in place for structuring your data architecture in such a way the poor data quality is minimized from the get-go.
    • Having a plan for data quality should precede data migration efforts; some types of poor data quality can be mitigated prior to migration.
    • There are five main types of poor-quality data found in CRM platforms.
      • Duplicate data: Duplicate records can be a major issue. Leverage dedicated deduplication tools to eliminate them.
      • Stale data: Out-of-date customer information can reduce the usefulness of the platform. Use automated social listening tools to help keep data fresh.
      • Incomplete data: Records with missing info limit platform value. Specify data validation parameters to mandate that all fields are filled in.
      • Invalid and conflicting data: These can create cascading errors. Establishing conflict resolution rules in ETL tools for data integration can lessen issues.
    Info-Tech Insight

    If you have a complex POI environment, appoint data stewards for each major domain and procure a deduplication tool. As the complexity of CRM system-to-system integrations increases, so will the chance that data quality errors will crop up – for example, bidirectional POI with other sources of customer information dramatically increase the chances of conflicting/duplicate data.

    Profile data, eliminate dead weight, and enforce standards to protect data

    Identify and eliminate dead weight

    Poor data can originate in the firm’s CRM system. Custom queries, stored procedures, or profiling tools can be used to assess the key problem areas.

    Loose rules in the CRM system may lead to records of no significant value in the database. Those rules need to be fixed, but if changes are made before the data is fixed, users could encounter database or application errors, which will reduce user confidence in the system.

    • Conduct a data flow analysis: map the path that data takes through the organization.
    • Use a mass cleanup to identify and destroy dead weight data. Merge duplicates either manually or with the aid of software tools. Delete incomplete data, taking care to reassign related data.
    • COTS packages typically allow power users to merge records without creating orphaned records in related tables, but custom-built applications typically require IT expertise.

    Create and enforce standards and policies

    Now that the data has been cleaned, it’s important to protect the system from relapsing.

    Work with business users to find out what types of data require validation and which fields should have changes audited. Whenever possible, implement drop-down lists to standardize values and make programming changes to ensure that truncation ceases.

    • Truncated data is usually caused by mismatches in data structures during either one-time data loads or ongoing data integrations.
    • Don’t go overboard on assigning required fields; users will just put key data in note fields.
    • Discourage the use of unstructured note fields: the data is effectively lost except if it gets subpoenaed.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Data quality concerns proliferate with the customization level of your platform. The more extensive the custom integration points and module/database extensions that you have made, the more you will need to have a plan in place for managing data quality from a reactive and proactive standpoint.

    Create a formal communication process throughout the CRM implementation

    Establish a comprehensive communication process around the CRM enterprise roll-out to ensure that end users stay informed.

    The CRM kick-off meeting(s) should encompass: 'The high-level application overview', 'Target business-user requirements', 'Target quality of service (QoS) metrics', 'Other IT department needs', 'Tangible business benefits of application', 'Special consideration needs'. The overall objective for interdepartmental CRM kick-off meetings is to confirm that all parties agree on certain key points and understand platform rationale and functionality.

    The kick-off process will significantly improve internal communications by inviting all affected internal IT groups, including business units, to work together to address significant issues before the application process is formally activated.

    Department groups or designated trainers should take the lead and implement a process for:

    • Scheduling CRM platform roll-out/kick-off meetings.
    • Soliciting preliminary input from the attending groups to develop further training plans.
    • Establishing communication paths and the key communication agents from each department who are responsible for keeping lines open moving forward.

    Ensure requirements are met with robust user acceptance testing

    User acceptance testing (UAT) is a test procedure that helps to ensure end-user requirements are met. Test cases can reveal bugs before the suite is implemented.

    Five Secrets of UAT Success

    Bracket with colors corresponding the adjacent list items.

    1

    Create the plan With the information collected from requirements gathering, create the plan. Make sure this information is added to the main project plan documentation.

    2

    Set the agenda The time allotted will vary depending on the functionality being tested. Ensure that the test schedule allows for the resolution of issues and discussion.

    3

    Determine who will participate Work with the relevant stakeholders to identify the people who can best contribute to system testing. Look for experienced power users who have been involved in earlier decision making about the system.

    4

    Highlight acceptance criteria Together with the UAT group, pinpoint the criteria to determine system acceptability. Refer back to requirements specified in use cases in the initial requirements-gathering stages of the project.

    5

    Collect end user feedback Weaknesses in resolution workflow design, technical architecture, and existing customer service processes can be highlighted and improved on with ongoing surveys and targeted interviews.

    Calculate post-deployment metrics to assess measurable value of the project

    Track the post-deployment results from the project and compare the metrics to the current state and target state.

    CRM Selection and Implementation Metrics
    Description Formula Current or Estimated Target Post-Deployment
    End-User Satisfaction # of Satisfied Users
    # of End Users
    70% 90% 85%
    Percentage Over/Under Estimated Budget Amount Spent - 100%
    Budget
    5% 0% 2%
    Percentage Over/Under Estimated Timeline Project Length - 100%
    Estimated Timeline
    10% -5% -10%

    CRM Strategy Metrics
    Description Formula Current or Estimated Target Post-Deployment
    Number of Leads Generated (per month) # of Leads Generated 150 200 250
    Average Time to Resolution (in minutes) Time Spent on Resolution
    # of Resolutions
    30 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes
    Cost per Interaction by Campaign Total Campaign Spending
    # of Customer Interactions
    $17.00 $12.00 $12.00

    Select the Right CRM Platform

    CRM technology is critical to facilitate an organization’s relationships with customers, service users, employees, and suppliers. Having a structured approach to building a business case, defining key requirements, and engaging with the right shortlist of vendors to pick the best finalist is crucial.

    This selection guide allows organizations to execute a structured methodology for picking a CRM that aligns with their needs. This includes:
    • Alignment and prioritization of key business and technology drivers for a CRM selection business case.
    • Identification of key use cases and requirements for CRM.
    • Construction of a robust CRM RFP.
    • A strong market scan of key players.
    • A survey of crucial implementation considerations.
    This formal CRM selection initiative will drive business-IT alignment, identify sales and marketing automation priorities, and allow for the rollout of a platform that’s highly likely to satisfy all stakeholder needs.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Insight summary

    Stakeholder satisfaction is critical to your success

    Choosing a solution for a single use case and then expanding it to cover other purposes can be a way to quickly gain approvals and then make effective use of dollars spent. However, this can also be a nightmare if the product is not fit for purpose and requires significant customization effort for future use cases. Identify use cases early, engage stakeholders to define success, and recognize where you need to find balance between a single off-the-shelf CRM platform and adjacent MarTech or sales enablement systems.

    Build a business case

    An effective business case isn’t a single-purpose document for obtaining funding. It can also be used to drive your approach to product selection, requirements gathering, and ultimately evaluating stakeholder and user satisfaction.

    Use your business case to define use cases and milestones as well as success.

    Balance process with technology

    A new solution with old processes will result in incremental increased value. Evaluate existing processes and identify opportunities to improve and remove workarounds. Then define requirements.

    You may find that the tools you have would be adequate with an upgrade and tool optimization. If not, this exercise will prepare you to select the right solution for your current and future needs.

    Drive toward early value

    Lead with the most important benefit and consider the timeline. Most stakeholders will lose interest if they don’t realize benefits within the fist year. Can you reach your goal and report success within that timeline?

    Identify secondary, incremental customer engagement improvements that can be made as you work toward the overall goal to be achieved at the one-year milestone.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock image of an office worker. Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management
    • Any CRM project needs to be guided by the broader strategy around customer engagement. This blueprint explores how to create a strong technology enablement approach for CXM using voice of the customer analysis.
    Stock image of a target with arrows. Improve Requirements Gathering
    • 70% of projects that fail do so because of poor requirements. If you need to double-click on best practices for eliciting, analyzing, and validating requirements as you build up your CRM picklist and RFP, this blueprint will equip you with the knowledge and tools you need to hit the ground running.
    Stock image of a pen on paper. Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes with a Robust RFP Process
    • Managing a complex RFP process for an enterprise application like a CRM platform can be a challenging undertaking. This blueprint zooms into how to build, run, administer, and evaluate RFP responses effectively.

    Bibliography

    “Doomed From the Start? Why a Majority of Business and IT Teams Anticipate Their Software Development Projects Will Fail.” Geneca, 25 Jan. 2017. Web.

    Hall, Kerrie. “The State of CRM Data Management 2020.” Validity. 27 April 2020. Web.

    Hinchcliffe, Dion. “The Evolving Role of the CIO and CMO in Customer Experience.” ZDNet, 22 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Klie, L. “CRM Still Faces Challenges, Most Speakers Agree: CRM Systems Have Been Around for Decades, but Interoperability and Data Siloes Still Have to Be Overcome.” CRM Magazine, vol. 23, no. 5, 2019, pp. 13-14.

    Markman, Jon. "Netflix Knows What You Want... Before You Do." Forbes. 9 Jun. 2017. Web.

    Morgan, Blake. “50 Stats That Prove The Value Of Customer Experience.” Forbes, 24 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Taber, David. “What to Do When Your CRM Project Fails.” CIO Magazine, 18 Sept. 2017. Web.

    “The State of Project Management Annual Survey 2018.” Wellingtone, 2018. Web.

    “The History of Microsoft Dynamics.” Eswelt. 2021. Accessed 8 June 2022.

    “Unlock the Mysteries of Your Customer Relationships.” Harvard Business Review. 1 July 2014. Accessed 30 Mar. 2016.

    Create an Architecture for AI

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}344|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $604,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 49 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management

    This research is designed to help organizations who are facing these challenges:

    • Deliver on the AI promise within the organization.
    • Prioritize the demand for AI projects and govern the projects to prevent overloading resources.
    • Have sufficient data management capability.
    • Have clear metrics in place to measure progress and for decision making.

    AI requires a high level of maturity in all data management capabilities, and the greatest challenge the CIO or CDO faces is to mature these capabilities sufficiently to ensure AI success.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Build your target state architecture from predefined best-practice building blocks.
    • Not all business use cases require AI to increase business capabilities.
    • Not all organizations are ready to embark on the AI journey.
    • Knowing the AI pattern that you will use will simplify architecture considerations.

    Impact and Result

    • This blueprint will assist organizations with the assessment, planning, building, and rollout of their AI initiatives.
      • Do not embark on an AI project with an immature data management practice. Embark on initiatives to fix problems before they cripple your AI projects.
      • Using architecture building blocks will speed up the architecture decision phase.
    • The success rate of AI initiatives is tightly coupled with data management capabilities and a sound architecture.

    Create an Architecture for AI Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand why you need an underlying architecture for AI, review Info-Tech's methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess business use cases for AI readiness

    Define business use cases where AI may bring value. Evaluate each use case to determine the company’s AI maturity in people, tools, and operations for delivering the correct data, model development, model deployment, and the management of models in the operational areas.

    • Create an Architecture for AI – Phase 1: Assess Business Use Cases for AI Readiness
    • AI Architecture Assessment and Project Planning Tool
    • AI Architecture Assessment and Project Planning Tool – Sample

    2. Design your target state

    Develop a target state architecture to allow the organization to effectively deliver in the promise of AI using architecture building blocks.

    • Create an Architecture for AI – Phase 2: Design Your Target State
    • AI Architecture Templates

    3. Define the AI architecture roadmap

    Compare current state with the target state to define architecture plateaus and build a delivery roadmap.

    • Create an Architecture for AI – Phase 3: Define the AI Architecture Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create an Architecture for AI

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Answer “Where To?”

    The Purpose

    Define business use cases where AI may add value and assess use case readiness.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Know upfront if all required data resources are available in the required velocity, veracity, and variety to service the use case.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business vision.

    1.2 Identify and classify business use cases.

    1.3 Assess company readiness for each use case.

    1.4 Review architectural principles and download and install Archi.

    Outputs

    List of identified AI use cases

    Assessment of each use case

    Data sources needed for each use case

    Archi installed

    2 Define the Required Architecture Building Blocks

    The Purpose

    Define architecture building blocks that can be used across use cases and data pipeline.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The architectural building blocks ensure reuse of resources and form the foundation of a stepwise rollout.

    Activities

    2.1 ArchiMate modelling language overview.

    2.2 Architecture building block overview

    2.3 Identify architecture building blocks by use case.

    2.4 Define the target state architecture.

    Outputs

    A set of building blocks created in Archi

    Defined target state architecture using architecture building blocks

    3 Assess the Current State Architecture

    The Purpose

    Assess your current state architecture in the areas identified by the target state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Only evaluating the current state architecture that will influence your AI implementation.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify the current state capabilities as required by the target state.

    3.2 Assess your current state architecture.

    3.3 Define a roadmap and design implementation plateaus.

    Outputs

    Current state architecture documented in Archi

    Assessed current state using assessment tool

    A roadmap defined using plateaus as milestones

    4 Bridge the Gap and Create the Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Assess your current state against the target state and create a plan to bridge the gaps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a roadmap that will deliver immediate results and ensure long-term durability.

    Activities

    4.1 Assess the gaps between current- and target-state capabilities.

    4.2 Brainstorm initiatives to address the gaps in capabilities

    4.3 Define architecture delivery plateaus.

    4.4 Define a roadmap with milestones.

    4.5 Sponsor check-in.

    Outputs

    Current to target state gap assessment

    Architecture roadmap divided into plateaus

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}234|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,716 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Contract reviews are tedious, and reviewers may lack the skills and experience to effectively complete the process.
    • Vendors have a repository of contract terms and conditions that are road-tested and often biased in their favor.
    • Vendors change their contracts frequently through hyperlinked documents without notifying customers, and the onus is on you to stay compliant.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price. Too often, organizations focus on the price contained within their contracts, neglecting to address core terms and conditions that can end up costing multiples of the initial price.
    • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. Lawyers tend to look at general terms and conditions for legal risk and may not understand IT-specific components and business needs.

    Impact and Result

    • Align contract language to meet IT and business needs.
    • Communicate more effectively with Legal and the vendors.
    • Identify and reduce contractual and performance risk.
    • Understand the relationship between contract provisions.
    • Negotiate more effectively.

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should employ a systematic process for reviewing contracts, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess contract terms and conditions

    Review and assess your IT contracts for vendor-biased terms and conditions, and gain tips for getting vendors to take on their fair share of risk and become more accountable.

    • Contract Review Tool
    • Contract Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Contract Terms and Conditions

    The Purpose

    Understand IT contract clauses, improve risk identification, and be more effective at negotiating contract terms.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Increased awareness of how contract provisions relate to each other.

    Demystification of legalese and legal concepts.

    Increased ability to seek assistance from internal parties (e.g. Legal, Risk, and Procurement).

    Activities

    1.1 Review the Contract Review Tool.

    1.2 Review the Contract Playbook template.

    1.3 Review 35 contract provisions and reinforce key learnings with exercises (spread across three days)

    Outputs

    Partial completion of the template

    Exercise results and debrief

    Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}350|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $94,858 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Your on-premises Dynamics CRM or AX needs updating or replacing, and you’re not sure whether to upgrade or transition to the cloud with the new Microsoft Dynamics 365 platform. You’re also uncertain about what the cost might be or if there are savings to be had with a transition to the cloud for your enterprise resource planning system.
    • The new license model, Apps vs. Plans and Dual Use Rights in the cloud, includes confusing terminology and licensing rules that don’t seem to make sense. This makes it difficult to purchase proper licensing that aligns with your current on-premises setup and to maximize your choices in transition licenses.
    • There are different licensing programs for Dynamics 365 in the cloud. You need to decide on the most cost effective program for your company, for now and for the future.
    • Microsoft is constantly pressuring you to move to the cloud, but you don’t understand the why. You're uncertain if there's real value in such a strategic move right now, or if should you wait awhile.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on what’s best for you. Do a thorough current state assessment of your hardware and software needs and consider what will be required in the near future (one to four years).
    • Educate yourself. You should have a good understanding of your options from staying on-premises vs. an interim hybrid model vs. a lift and shift to the cloud.
    • Consider the overall picture. There might not be hard cost savings to be realized in the near term, given the potential increase in licensing costs over a CapEx to OpEx savings.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding the best time to transition, from a licensing perspective, could save you significant dollars over the next one to four years.
    • Planning and effectively mapping your current licenses to the new cloud user model will maximize your current investment into the cloud and fully leverage all available Microsoft incentives in the process.
    • Gaining the knowledge required to make the most informed transition decision, based on best timing, most appropriate licensing program, and maximized cost savings in the near term.
    • Engaging effectively with Microsoft and a competent Dynamics partner for deployment or licensing needs.

    Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should learn about Microsoft Dynamics 365 user-based cloud licensing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Timing

    Review to confirm if you are eligible for Microsoft cloud transition discounts and what is your best time to move to the cloud.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 1: Timing
    • Microsoft License Agreement Summary Tool
    • Existing CRM-AX License Summary Worksheet

    2. Licensing

    Begin with a review to understand user-based cloud licensing, then move to mapping your existing licenses to the cloud users and plans.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 2: Licensing
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 On-Premises License Transition Mapping Tool
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 User License Assignment Tool
    • Microsoft Licensing Programs Brief Overview

    3. Cost review

    Use your cloud mapping activity as well your eligible discounts to estimate your cloud transition licensing costs.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 3: Cost Review
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 Cost Estimator

    4. Analyze and decide

    Start by summarizing your choice license program, decide on the ideal time, then move on to total cost review.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 4: Analyze and Decide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand What You Own and What You Can Transition to the Cloud

    The Purpose

    Understand what you own and what you can transition to the cloud.

    Learn which new cloud user licenses to transition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All your licenses in one summary.

    Eligible transition discounts.

    Mapping of on-premises to cloud users.

    Activities

    1.1 Validate your discount availability.

    1.2 Summarize agreements.

    1.3 Itemize your current license ownership.

    1.4 Review your timing options.

    1.5 Map your on-premises licenses to the cloud-based, user-based model.

    Outputs

    Current agreement summary

    On-premises to cloud user mapping summary

    Understanding of cloud app and plan features

    2 Transition License Cost Estimate and Additional Costs

    The Purpose

    Estimate cloud license costs and other associated expenses.

    Summarize and decide on the best timing, users, and program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Good cost estimate of equivalent cloud user-based licenses.

    Understanding of when and how to move your on-premises licensing to the new Dynamics 365 cloud model.

    Activities

    2.1 Estimate cloud user license costs.

    2.2 Calculate additional costs related to license transitions.

    2.3 Review all activities.

    2.4 Summarize and analyze your decision.

    Outputs

    Cloud user licensing cost modeling

    Summary of total costs

    Validation of costs and transition choices

    An informed decision on your Dyn365 timing, licensing, and costs

    Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}370|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,075 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • The fast evolution of the cybersecurity landscape requires security training and awareness programs that are frequently updated and improved.
    • Security and awareness training programs often fail to engage end users. Lack of engagement can lead to low levels of knowledge retention.
    • Irrelevant or outdated training content does not properly prepare your end users to effectively defend the organization against security threats.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • One-time, annual training is no longer sufficient for creating an effective security awareness and training program.
    • By presenting security as a personal and individualized issue, you can make this new personal focus a driver for your organizational security awareness and training program.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a training program that delivers smaller amounts of information on a more frequent basis to minimize effort, reduce end-user training fatigue, and improve content relevance.
    • Evaluate and improve your security awareness and training program continuously to keep its content up-to-date. Leverage end-user feedback to ensure content remains relevant to those who receive it.

    Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a security awareness and training program that empowers end users, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop your training program

    Create or mature a security awareness and training program that is tailored to your organization.

    • Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users – Phase 1: Develop Your Training Program
    • Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool
    • End-User Security Job Description Template
    • Training Materials – Physical Computer Security
    • Training Materials – Cyber Attacks
    • Training Materials – Incident Response
    • Training Materials – Mobile Security
    • Training Materials – Passwords
    • Training Materials – Phishing
    • Training Materials – Social Engineering
    • Training Materials – Web Usage
    • Security Awareness and Training Vendor Evaluation Tool
    • Security Awareness and Training Metrics Tool
    • End-User Security Knowledge Test Template
    • Security Training Campaign Development Tool

    2. Design an effective training delivery plan

    Explore methods of training delivery and select the most effective solutions.

    • Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users – Phase 2: Design an Effective Training Delivery Plan
    • Information Security Awareness and Training Policy
    • Security Awareness and Training Gamification Guide
    • Mock Spear Phishing Email Examples
    • Security Training Email Templates
    • Security Awareness and Training Module Builder and Training Schedule
    • Security Training Campaign Development Tool
    • Security Training Program Manual
    • Security Awareness and Training Feedback Template
    • Security Awareness Month Week 1: Staying in Touch
    • Security Awareness Month Week 2: Sharing Special Moments
    • Security Awareness Month Week 3: Working and Networking
    • Security Awareness Month Week 4: Families and Businesses
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Outline the Plan for Long-term Program Improvement

    The Purpose

    Identify the maturity level of the existing security awareness and training program and set development goals.

    Establish program milestones and outline key initiatives for program development.

    Identify metrics to measure program effectiveness.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified the gaps between the current maturity level of the security awareness and training program and future target states.

    Activities

    1.1 Create a program development plan.

    1.2 Investigate and select metrics to measure program effectiveness.

    1.3 Execute some low-hanging fruit initiatives for collecting metrics: e.g. create a knowledge test, feedback survey, or gamification guide.

    Outputs

    Customized development plan for program.

    Tool for tracking metrics.

    Customized knowledge quiz ready for distribution.

    Customized feedback survey for training.

    Gamification program outline.

    2 Identify and Assess Audience Groups and Security Training Topics

    The Purpose

    Determine the unique audience groups within your organization and evaluate their risks and vulnerabilities.

    Prioritize training topics and audience groups to effectively streamline program development.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a comprehensive list of unique audience groups and the corresponding security training that each group should receive.

    Determined priority ratings for both audience groups and the security topics to be delivered.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify the unique audience groups within your organization and the threats they face.

    2.2 Determine the priority levels of the current security topics.

    2.3 Review audience groups and determine which topics need to be delivered to each group.

    Outputs

    Risk profile for each identified audience group.

    Priority scores for all training topics.

    List of relevant security topics for each identified audience group.

    3 Plan the Training Delivery

    The Purpose

    Identify all feasible delivery channels for security training within your organization.

    Build a vendor evaluation tool and shortlist or harvest materials for in-house content creation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of all potential delivery mechanisms for security awareness and training.

    Built a vendor evaluation tool and discussed a vendor shortlist.

    Harvested a collection of free online materials for in-house training development.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss potential delivery mechanisms for training, including the purchase and use of a vendor.

    3.2 If selecting a vendor, review vendor selection criteria and discuss potential vendor options.

    3.3 If creating content in-house, review and select available resources on the web.

    Outputs

    List of available delivery mechanisms for training.

    Vendor assessment tool and shortlist.

    Customized security training presentations.

    4 Create a Training Schedule for Content Deployment

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for deploying a pilot program to gather valuable feedback.

    Create an ongoing training schedule.

    Define the end users’ responsibilities towards security within the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a plan to deploy a pilot program.

    Created a schedule for training deployment.

    Defined role of end users in helping protect the organization against security threats.

    Activities

    4.1 Build training modules.

    4.2 Create an ongoing training schedule.

    4.3 Define and document your end users’ responsibilities towards their security.

    Outputs

    Documented modular structure to training content.

    Training schedule.

    Security job description template.

    End-user training policy.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}596|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Employee Development
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • Many organizations have introduced mentoring programs without clearly defining and communicating the purpose and goals around having a program; they simply jumped on the mentoring bandwagon.
    • As a result, these programs have little impact. They don’t add value for mentors, mentees, or the organization.
    • It can be difficult to design a program that is well-suited to your organization, will be adopted by employees, and will drive the results you are looking for.
    • In particular, it is difficult to successfully match mentors and mentees so both derive maximum value from the endeavor.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • As workforce composition shifts, there is a need for mentoring programs to move beyond the traditional senior–junior format option; organizational culture and goals will dictate the best approach.
    • An organization’s mentoring program doesn’t need to be restricted to one format; individual preferences and goals should also factor in. Be open to choosing format on a case-by-case basis.
    • Be sure to gain upper management buy-in and support early to ensure mentoring becomes a valued part of your organization.
    • Ensure that goal setting, communication, ongoing support for participants, and evaluation all play a role in your mentoring program.

    Impact and Result

    • Mentoring can have a significant positive impact on mentor, mentee, and organization.
    • Mentees gain guidance and advice on their career path and skill development. Mentors often experience re-engagement with their job and the satisfaction of helping another person.
    • Mentoring participants benefit from obtaining different perspectives of both the business and work-related problems. Participation in a mentoring program has been linked to greater access to promotions, pay raises, and increased job satisfaction.
    • Mentoring can have a number of positive outcomes for the organization, including breaking down silos, transferring institutional knowledge, accelerating leadership skills, fostering open communication and dialogue, and resolving conflict.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Align the mentoring program with the organizational culture and goals

    Build a best-fit program that creates a learning culture.

    • Storyboard: Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High Performing Learning Organization

    2. Assess the organizational culture and current mentoring program

    Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    • Mentoring Program Diagnostic

    3. Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    Track project progress and have all program details defined in a central location.

    • Mentoring Project Plan Template
    • Peer Mentoring Guidelines
    • Mentoring Program Guidelines

    4. Gather feedback from the mentoring program participants

    Evaluate the success of the program.

    • Mentoring Project Feedback Surveys Template

    5. Get mentoring agreements in place

    Improve your mentoring capabilities.

    • Mentee Preparation Checklist
    • Mentoring Agreement Template
    [infographic]

    Initiate Your Service Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}398|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • IT organizations continue attempting to implement service management, often based on ITIL, with limited success and without visible value.
    • More than half of service management implementations have failed beyond simply implementing the service desk and the incident, change, and request management processes.
    • Organizational structure, goals, and cultural factors are not considered during service management implementation and improvement.
    • The business lacks engagement and understanding of service management.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service management is an organizational approach. Focus on producing successful and valuable services and service outcomes for the customers.
    • All areas of the organization are accountable for governing and executing service management. Ensure that you create a service management strategy that improves business outcomes and provides the value and quality expected.

    Impact and Result

    • Identified structure for how your service management model should be run and governed.
    • Identified forces that impact your ability to oversee and drive service management success.
    • Mitigation approach to restraining forces.

    Initiate Your Service Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why service management implementations often fail and why you should establish governance for service management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the level of oversight you need

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective service management program with proper oversight.

    • Service Management Program Initiation Plan
    [infographic]

    Transform Your Field Technical Support Services

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}112|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • Redefine the role of deskside or field technicians as demand for service evolves and service teams are restructured.
    • Redefine the role of onsite technicians when the help desk is outsourced.
    • Define requirements when supplementing with outsourced field services teams.
    • Identify barriers to streamlining processes.
    • Look for opportunities to streamline processes and better use technical teams.
    • Communicate and manage change to support roles.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service needs to be defined in a way that considers the organizational need for local, hands-on technicians, the need for customer service, and the need to make the best use of resources that you have.
    • Service level agreements will need to be refined and metrics will need to be analyzed for capacity and skilled planning.
    • Organizational change management will be key to persuade users to engage with the technical team in a way that supports the new structure.

    Impact and Result

    • Many IT teams are struggling to keep up with demand while trying to refocus on customer service. With more remote workers than ever, organizations who have traditionally provided desktop and field services have been revaluating the role of the field service technicians. Add in the price of fuel, and there is even more reason to assess the support model.
    • Often changes to the way IT does support, especially if moving centralized support to an outsourcer, is met with resistance by end users who don’t see the value of phoning someone else when their local technician is still available to problem solve. This speaks to the need to ensure the central group is providing value to end users as well as the technical team.
    • With the challenges of finding the right number of technicians with the right skills, it’s time to rethink remote support and how that can be used to train and upskill the people you have. And it’s time to think about how to use field services tools to make the best use of your technician’s time.

    Transform Your Field Technical Support Services Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Transform Field Services Guide – A brief deck that outlines key migration steps to improve our remote client support services.

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Transform Your Field Technical Services Storyboard

    2. Transform Field Services Template – A template to create a transformation proposal.

    This template will help you to build your proposal to transform your field services.

    • Proposal to Transform Field Technical Services Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Transform Your Field Technical Support Services

    Improve service and reduce costs through digital transformation.

    Analyst Perspective

    Improve staffing challenges through digital transformation.

    Many IT teams are struggling to keep up with demand while trying to refocus on customer service. With more remote workers than ever, organizations who have traditionally provided desktop and field services have been revaluating the role of the field service technicians. Add in the price of fuel, and there is even more reason to assess the support model. Often changes to the way IT does support, especially if moving centralized support to an outsourcer, is met with resistance by end users who don’t see the value of phoning someone else when their local technician is still available to problem solve. This speaks to the need to ensure the central group is providing value to end users as well as the technical team. With the challenges of finding the right number of technicians with the right skills, it’s time to rethink remote support and how that can be used to train and upskill the people you have. And it’s time to think about how to use field services tools to make the best use of your technician’s time.

    The image contains a picture of Sandi Conrad.

    Sandi Conrad

    Principal Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    With remote work becoming a normal employee offering for many organizations, self-serve/self-solve becoming more prominent, and a common call out to improve customer service, there is a need to re-examine the way many organizations are supplying onsite support. For organizations with a small number of offices, a central desk with remote tools may be enough or can be combined with a concierge service or technical center, but for organizations with multiple offices it becomes difficult to provide a consistent level of service for all customers unless there is a team onsite for each location. This may not be financially possible if there isn’t enough work to keep a technical team busy full-time.

    Common Obstacles

    Where people have a choice between calling a central phone number or talking to the technician down the hall, the in-person experience often wins out. End users may resist changes to in-person support as work is rerouted to a centralized group by choosing to wait for their favorite technician to show up onsite rather than reporting issues centrally. This can make the job of the onsite technician more challenging as they need to schedule time in every visit for unplanned work. And where technicians need to support multiple locations, travel needs to be calculated into lost technician time and costs.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Service needs to be defined in a way that considers the organizational need for local, hands-on technicians, the need for customer service, and the need to make the best use of resources that you have.
    • Service-level agreements will need to be refined and metrics will need to be analyzed for capacity and skilled planning.
    • Organizational change management will be key to persuade users to engage with the technical team in a way that supports the new structure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Improving process will be helpful for smaller teams, but as teams expand or work gets more complicated, investment in appropriate tools to support field services technicians will enable them to be more efficient, reduce costs, and improve outcomes when visits are warranted.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who are looking to:

    • Redefine the role of deskside or field technicians as demand for service evolves and service teams are restructured.
    • Redefine the role of onsite technicians when the help desk is outsourced.
    • Define requirements when supplementing with outsourced field services teams.
    • Identify barriers to streamlining processes.
    • Look for opportunities to streamline processes and better use technical teams.
    • Communicate and manage change to support roles.

    With many companies having new work arrangements for users, where remote work may be a permanent offering or if your digital transformation is well underway, this provides an opportunity to rethink how field support needs to be done.

    What is field services?

    Field services is in-person support delivered onsite at one or more locations. Management of field service technicians may include queue management, scheduling service and maintenance requests, triaging incidents, dispatching technicians, ordering parts, tracking job status, and billing.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate what may be supported by field services and what should be supported by field services.

    What challenges are you trying to solve within your field services offering?

    Focus on the reasons for the change to ensure the outcome can be met. Common goals include improved customer service, better technician utilization, and increased response time and stability.

    • Discuss specific challenges the team feels are contributing to less-than-ideal customer service.
    • Does the team have the skills, knowledge, and tools they need to be successful? Technicians may be solving issues with the customer looking over their shoulder. Having quick access to knowledge articles or to subject matter experts who can provide deeper expertise remotely may be the difference between a single visit to resolve or multiple or extended visits.
    • What percentage of tickets would benefit from triage and troubleshooting done remotely before sending a technician onsite? Where there are a high number of no-fault-found visits, this may be imperative to improving technician availability.
    • Review method for distribution of tickets, including batching criteria and dispatching of technicians. Are tickets being dispatched efficiently? By location and/or priority? Is there an attempt to solve more tickets centrally? Should there be? What SLA adjustment is reasonable for onsite visits?
    • Has the support value been defined?
    The image contains a graph to demonstrate Case Casuals in Field Services, where the highest at 55% is break/fix.

    Field services will see the biggest improvements through technology updates

    Customer Intake

    Provide tools for scheduling technicians, self-serve and self- or assisted-solve through ITSM or CRM-based portal and visual remote tools.

    The image contains a picture to demonstrate the different field services.

    Triage and Troubleshoot

    Upgrade remote tools to visual remote solutions to troubleshoot equipment as well as software. Eliminate no-fault-found visits and improve first-time fix rate by visually inspecting equipment before technician deployments.

    Improve Communications

    FSM GPS and SMS updates can be set to notify customers when a technician is close by and can be used for customer sign-off to immediately update service records and launch survey or customer billing where applicable.

    Schedule Technicians

    Field service management (FSM) ITSM modules will allow skills-based scheduling for remote technicians and determine best route for multi-site visits.

    Enable Work From Anywhere

    FSM mobile applications can provide technicians with daily schedules, turn-by-turn directions, access to inventory, knowledge articles, maintenance, and warranty and asset records. Visual remote captures service records and enables access to SMEs.

    Manage Expectations

    Know where technicians are for routing to emergency calls and managing workload using field service management solutions with GPS.

    Digital transformation can dramatically improve customer and technician experience

    The image contains an arrown that dips and rises dramatically to demonstrate how digital transformation can dramatically increase customer and technician experience.
    Sources: 1 - TechSee, 2019; 2 - Glartek; 3 - Geoforce; 4 - TechSee, 2020

    Improve technician utilization and scheduling with field services management software

    Field services management (FSM) software is designed to improve scheduling of technicians by skills and location while reducing travel time and mileage. When integrated with ITSM software, the service record is transferred to the field technician for continuity and to prepare for the job. FSM mobile apps will enable technicians to receive schedule updates through the day and through GPS update the dispatcher as technicians move from site to site.

    FSM solutions are designed to manage large teams of technicians, providing automated dispatch recommendations based on skills matching and proximity.

    Routes can be mapped to reduce travel time and mileage and adjusted to respond to emergency requests by technician skills or proximity. Automation will provide suggestions for work allocation.

    Spare parts management may be part of a field services solution, enabling technicians to easily identify parts needed and update real-time inventory as parts are deployed.

    Push notifications in real-time streamline communications from the field to the office, and enable technicians to close service records while in the field.

    Dispatchers can easily view availability, assign work orders, attach notes to work orders, and immediately receive updates if technicians acknowledge or reject a job.

    Maintenance work can be built into online checklists and forms to provide a technician with step-by-step instructions and to ensure a complete review.

    Skills and location-based routing allow dispatchers to be able to see closest tech for emergency deployments.

    Improve time to resolve while cutting costs by using visual remote support tools

    Visual remote support tools enable live video sessions to clearly see what the client or field service technician sees, enabling the experts to provide real-time assistance where the experts will provide guidance to the onsite person. Getting a view of the technology will reduce issues with getting the right parts, tools, and technicians onsite and dramatically reduce second visits.

    Visual remote tools can provide secure connections through any smartphone, with no need for the client to install an application.

    The technicians can take control of the camera to zoom in, turn on the flashlight for extra lighting, take photos, and save video directly to the tickets.

    Optical character recognition allows automatic text capture to streamline process to check warranty, recalls, and asset history.

    Visual, interactive workflows enhance break/fix and inspections, providing step-by-step guidance visual evidence and using AI and augmented reality to assess the images, and can provide next steps by connecting to a visual knowledgebase.

    Integration with field service management tools will allow information to easily be captured and uploaded immediately into the service record.

    Self-serve is available through many of these tools, providing step-by-step instructions using visual cues. These solutions are designed to work in low-bandwidth environments, using Wi-Fi or cellular service, and sessions can be started with a simple link sent through SMS.

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}487|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

    The service desk is a major function within IT. Small enterprises with constrained resources need to look at designing a service desk that enables consistency in supporting the business and finds the right balance of documentation.

    Determining the right level of documentation to provide backup and getting the right level of data for good reporting may seem like a waste of time when the team is small, but this is key to knowing when to invest in more people, upgraded technology, and whether your efforts to improve service are successful.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    It’s easy to lose sight of the client experience when working as a small team supporting a variety of end users. Changing from a help desk to a service desk requires a focus on what it means to be a customer centric service desk and a change to the way the technicians think about providing support.

    • Make the best use of the team. Clearly define roles and responsibilities and monitor those wearing multiple hats to make sure they don’t burn out.
    • Build cross training and documentation into your culture to preserve service levels while giving team members time off to recharge.
    • Don’t discount the benefit of good tools. As volume increases, so does the likelihood of issues and requests getting missed. Look for tools that will help to keep a customer focus.

    Impact and Result

    • Improved workload distribution for technicians and enable prioritization based on work type, urgency, and impact.
    • Improved communications methods and messaging will help the technicians to set expectations appropriately and reduce friction between each other and their supported end users.
    • Best practices and use of industry standard tools will reduce administrative overhead while improving workload management.

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Storyboard – A step-by-step guide to help you identify and prioritize initiatives to become more customer centric.

    This blueprint provides a framework to quickly identify a plan for service desk improvements. It also provides references to build out additional skills and functionality as a continual improvement initiative.

    • Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Storyboard

    2. Maturity Assessment – An assessment to determine baseline maturity.

    The maturity assessment will provide a baseline and identify areas of focus based on level of current and target maturity.

    • IT Service Desk Maturity Assessment for Small Enterprise

    3. Standard Operating Procedure – A template to build out a clear, concise SOP right-sized for a small enterprise.

    The SOP provides an excellent guide to quickly inform new team members or contractors of your support approach.

    • Incident Management and Service Desk SOP for Small Enterprise

    4. Categorization Scheme – A template to build out an effective categorization scheme.

    The categorization scheme template provides examples of asset-based categories, resolution codes and status.

    • Service Desk Asset-Based Categories Template

    5. Improvement Plan – A template to present the improvement plan to stakeholders.

    This template provides a starting point for building your communications on planned improvements.

    • Service Desk Improvement Initiative
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise

    Turn your help desk into a customer-centric service desk.

    Analyst Perspective

    Small enterprises have many of the same issues as large ones, but with far fewer resources. Focus on the most important aspects to improve customer service.

    The service desk is a major function within IT. Small enterprises with constrained resources need to look at designing a service desk that enables consistency in supporting the business and finds the right balance of documentation.

    Evaluate documentation to ensure there is always redundancy built in to cover absences. Determining coverage will be an important factor, especially if vendors will be brought into the organization to assist during shortages. They will not have the same level of knowledge as teammates and may have different requirements for documentation.

    It is important to be customer centric, thinking about how services are delivered and communicated with a focus on providing self-serve at the appropriate level for your users and determining what information the business needs for expectation-setting and service level agreements, as well as communications on incidents and changes.

    And finally, don’t discount the value of good reporting. There are many reasons to document issues besides just knowing the volume of workload and may become more important as the organization evolves or grows. Stakeholder reporting, regulatory reporting, trend spotting, and staff increases are all good reasons to ensure minimum documentation standards are defined and in use.

    Photo of Sandi Conrad, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group. Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Table of Contents

    Title Page Title Page
    Blueprint benefits 6 Incident management 25
    Start / Stop / Continue exercise 10 Prioritization scheme 27
    Complete a maturity assessment 11 Define SLAs 29
    Select an ITSM tool 13 Communications 30
    Define roles & responsibilities 15 Reporting 32
    Queue management 17 What can you do to improve? 33
    Ticket handling best practices 18 Staffing 34
    Customer satisfaction surveys 19 Knowledge base & self-serve 35
    Categorization 20 Customer service 36
    Separate ticket types 22 Ticket analysis 37
    Service requests 23 Problem management 38
    Roadmap 39

    Insight summary

    Help desk to service desk

    It’s easy to lose sight of the client experience when working as a small team supporting a variety of end users. Changing from a help desk to a service desk requires a focus on what it means to be a customer-centric service desk and a change to the way the technicians think about providing support.

    Make the best use of the team

    • Clearly define primary roles and responsibilities, and identify when and where escalations should occur.
    • Divide the work in a way that makes the most sense based on intake patterns and categories of incidents or service requests.
    • Recognize who is wearing multiple hats, and monitor to make sure they don’t burn out or struggle to keep up.
    • Determine the most appropriate areas to outsource based on work type and skills required.

    Build cross-training into your culture

    • Primary role holders need time off and need to know the day-to-day work won’t be waiting for them when they come back.
    • The knowledge base is your first line of defense to make sure incidents don’t have to wait for resolution and to avoid having technicians remote in on their day off.
    • When volumes spike for incidents and service requests, everyone needs to be prepared to pitch in. Train the team to recognize and step up to the call to action.

    Don’t discount the benefit of good tools

    • When volume increases, so does the likelihood of missing issues and requests.
    • Designate a single solution to manage the workload, so there is one place to go for work orders, incident reporting, asset data, and more.
    • Set up self-serve for users so they have access to how-to articles and can check the status of tickets themselves.
    • Create a service catalog to make it easy for them to request the most frequent items easily.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Standard Operating Procedures

    Sample of the Standard Operating Procedures deliverable.

    Maturity Assessment

    Sample of the Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Categorization scheme

    Sample of the Categorization scheme deliverable.

    Improvement Initiative

    Sample of the Improvement Initiative deliverable.
    Create a standard operating procedure to ensure the support team has a consistent understanding of how they need to engage with the business.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    • Improve workload distribution for technicians and enable prioritization based on work type, urgency, and impact.
    • Improved communications methods and messaging will help the technicians set expectations appropriately and reduce friction between each other and their supported end users.
    • Best practices and use of industry-standard tools will reduce administrative overhead while improving workload management.

    Business benefits

    • IT taking a customer-centric approach will improve access to support and reduce interruptions to the way they do business.
    • Expectation setting and improved communications will allow the business to better plan their work around new requests and will have a better understanding of service level agreements.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is six to ten calls over the course of three to four months.

    The current state discussion will determine the path.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Current State & Vision

    Best Practices

    Service Requests & Incidents

    Communications

    Next Steps & Roadmap

    Call #1: Discuss current state & create a vision

    Call #2: Document roles & responsibilities

    Call #3:Review and define best practices for ticket handling Call #4: Review categorization

    Call #5: Discuss service requests & self-serve

    Call #6: Assess incident management processes
    Call #7: Assess and document reporting and metrics

    Call #8: Discuss communications methods

    Call #9: Review next steps

    Call #10: Build roadmap for updates

    For a workshop on this topic, see the blueprint Standardize the Service Desk

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Southwest CARE Center
    Logo for Southwest Care.
    INDUSTRY
    Healthcare

    Service Desk Project

    After relying on a managed service provider (MSP) for a number of years, the business hired Kevin to repatriate IT. As part of that mandate, his first strategic initiative was to build a service desk. SCC engaged Info-Tech Research Group to select and build a structure; assign roles and responsibilities; implement incident management, request fulfilment, and knowledge management processes; and integrate a recently purchased ITSM tool.

    Over the course of a four-day onsite engagement, SCC’s IT team worked with two Info-Tech analysts to create and document workflows, establish ticket handling guidelines, and review their technological requirements.

    Results

    The team developed a service desk standard operating procedure and an implementation roadmap with clear service level agreements.

    Southwest CARE Center (SCC) is a leading specialty healthcare provider in New Mexico. They offer a variety of high-quality services with a focus on compassionate, patient-centered healthcare.

    “Info-Tech helped me to successfully rebrand from an MSP help desk to an IT service desk. Sandi and Michel provided me with a customized service desk framework and SOP that quickly built trust within the organization. By not having to tweak and recalibrate my service desk processes through trial and error, I was able to save a year’s worth of work, resulting in cost savings of $30,000 to $40,000.” (Kevin Vigil, Director of Information Technology, Southwest CARE Center)

    The service desk is the cornerstone for customer satisfaction

    Bar charts comparing 'Dissatisfied' vs 'Satisfied End Users' in both 'Service Desk Effectiveness' and 'Timeliness'.
    N=63, small enterprise organizations from the End-User Satisfaction Diagnostic, at December 2021
    Dissatisfied was classified as those organizations with an average score less than 7.
    Satisfied was classified as those organizations with an average score greater or equal to 8.
    • End users who were satisfied with service desk effectiveness rated all other IT processes 36% higher than dissatisfied end users.
    • End users who were satisfied with service desk timeliness rated all other IT processes 34% higher than dissatisfied end-users.

    Improve the service desk with a Start, Stop, Continue assessment

    Use this exercise as an opportunity to discuss what’s working and what isn’t with your current help desk. Use this to define your goals for the improvement project, with a plan to return to the results and rerun the exercise on a regular basis.

    STOP

    • What service desk processes are counterproductive?
    • What service blockers exist that consistently undermine good results?
    • Are end-user relationships with individual team members negatively impacting satisfaction?
    • Make notes on initial ideas for improvement.

    START

    • What service process improvements could be implemented immediately?
    • What technical qualifications do individual staff members need to improve?
    • What opportunities exist to improve service desk communications with end users?
    • How can escalation and triage be more efficient?

    CONTINUE

    • What aspects of your current service desk are positive?
    • What processes are efficient and can be emulated elsewhere?
    • Where can you identify high levels of end-user satisfaction?

    Complete a maturity assessment to create a baseline and areas of focus

    The Service Desk Maturity Assessment tool helps organizations assess their service desk process maturity and focus the project on the activities that matter most.

    The tool will help guide improvement efforts and measure your progress.

    • The second tab of the tool walks through a qualitative assessment of your service desk practices. Questions will prompt you to evaluate how you are executing key activities. Select the answer in the drop-down menus that most closely aligns with your current state.
    • The third tab displays your rate of process completeness and maturity. You will receive a score for each phase, an overall score, and advice based on your performance.
    • Document the results of the efficiency assessment in the Service Desk Improvement Initiative.
    • The tool is intended for periodic use. Review your answers each year and devise initiatives to improve the process performance where you need it most.
    Sample of the Service Desk Maturity Assessment.

    Define your vision for the support structure

    Use this vision for communicating with the business and your IT team

    Consider service improvements and how those changes can be perceived by the organization. For example, offering multiple platforms, such as adding Macs to end-user devices, could translate to “Providing the right IT solutions for the way our employees want to work.”

    To support new platforms, you might need to look at the following steps to get there:
    • Evaluate skills needed – can you upskill generalists quickly, or will specialists be required? Determine training needs for support staff on new platforms.
    • Estimate uptake of the new platform and adjusting budgets – will these mostly be role-based decisions?
    • Determine what applications will work on the new platform and which will have a parity offering, which will require a solution like Parallels or VirtualBox, and which might need substitute applications.
    • What utilities will be needed to secure your solutions such as for encryption, antivirus, and firewalls?
    • What changes in the way you deploy and patch machines?
    • What level of support do you need to provide – just platform, or applications as well? What self-serve training can be made available?
    If you need to change the way you deploy equipment, you may want to review the blueprint Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify some high-level opportunities and plan out how these changes will impact the way you provide support today. Document steps you’ll need to follow to make it happen. This may include new offerings and product sourcing, training, and research.

    Facilitate service desk operations with an ITSM tool

    You don’t need to spend a fortune. Many solutions are free or low-cost for a small number of users, and you don’t necessarily have to give up functionality to save money.

    Encourage users to submit requests through email or self-serve to keep organized. Ensure that reporting will provide you with the basics without effort, but ensure report creation is easy enough if you need to add more.

    Consider tools that do more than just store tickets. ITSM tools for small enterprises can also assist with:
    • Equipment and software license management
    • Self-serve for password reset and improving the experience for end users to submit tickets
    • Software deployment
    • Onboarding and offboarding workflows
    • Integration with monitoring tools
    Info-Tech Insight Buying rather than building allows you the greatest flexibility and can provide enterprise-level functionality at small-enterprise pricing. Use Info-Tech’s IT Service Management Selection Guide to create a business case and list of requirements for your ITSM purchase.
    Logo for Spiceworks.
    Logo for ZenDesk. Logo for SysAid.
    Logo for ManageEngine.
    Logo for Vector Networks.
    Logo for Freshworks.
    Logo for Squadcast.
    Logo for Jira Software.
    Logos contain links

    ITSM implementations are the perfect time to fix processes

    Consider engaging a partner for the installation and setup as they will have the expertise to troubleshoot and get you to value quickly.

    Even with a partner, don’t rely on them to set up categories, prioritizations, and workflows. If you have unique requirements, you will need to bring your design work to the table to avoid getting a “standard install” that will need to be modified later.

    When we look at what makes a strong and happy product launch, it boils down to a few key elements:
    • Improving customer service, or at least avoiding a decline
    • Improving access to information for technical team and end users
    • Successfully taking advantage of workflows, templates, and other features designed to improve the technician and user experience
    • Using existing processes with the new tools, without having to completely reengineer how things are done
    For a complete installation guide, visit the blueprint Build an ITSM Implementation Plan
    To prepare for a quick time to value in setting up the new ITSM tool, prioritize in this order:
    1. Categorization and status codes
    2. Prioritization
    3. Divide tickets into incidents and service requests
    4. Create workflows for onboarding and offboarding (automate where you can)
    5. Track escalations to vendors
    6. Reporting
    7. Self-serve
    8. Equipment inventory (leading to hardware asset management)

    Define roles looking to balance between customer service and getting things done

    The team will need to provide backfill for each other with high volume, vacations, and leave, but also need to proactively manage interruptions appropriately as they work on projects.
    Icon of a bullseye. First contact – customer service, general knowledge
    Answers phones, chats, responds to email, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for end users.
    Icon of a pie chart. Analyst – experienced troubleshooter, general knowledge
    Answers phone when FC isn’t available, responds to email, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for first contact, escalates to other technicians or vendors.
    Icon of a lightbulb. Analyst – experienced troubleshooter, specialist
    Answers phones only when necessary, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for anyone in IT, consults with peers, escalates to vendors.
    Icon of gear on a folder. Engineer – deep expertise, specialist
    Answers phones only when necessary, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for anyone in IT, consults with peers, escalates to vendors.
    Icon of a handshake. Vendor, Managed Service Providers
    Escalation point per contract terms, must meet SLAs, communicate regularly with analysts and management as appropriate. Who escalates and who manages them?
    Row of colorful people.

    Note roles in the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Keep customers happy and technicians calm by properly managing your queue

    If ticket volume is too high or too dispersed to effectively have teams self-select tickets, assign a queue manager to review tickets throughout the day to ensure they’re assigned and on the technician’s schedule. This is particularly important for technicians who don’t regularly work out of the ticketing system. Follow up on approaching or missed SLAs.

    • Separate incidents (break fix) and service requests: Prioritize incidents over service requests to focus on getting users doing business as soon as possible. Schedule service requests for slower times or assign to technicians who are not working the front lines.
    • First in/first out…mostly: We typically look to prioritize incidents over service requests and only prioritize incidents if there are multiple people or VIPs affected. Where everything is equal, deal with the oldest first. Pause occasionally to deal with quick wins such as password resets.
    • Update ticket status and notes: Knowing what tickets are in progress and which ones are waiting on information or parts is important for anyone looking to pick up the next ticket. Make sure everyone is aware of the benefits of keeping this information up to date, so technicians know what to work on next without duplicating each other’s work.
    • Implement solutions quickly by using knowledge articles: Continue to build out the knowledge base to be able to resolve end-user issues quickly, check to see if additional information is needed before escalating tickets to other technicians.
    • Encourage end users to create tickets through the portal: Issues called in are automatically moved to the front of the queue, regardless of urgency. Make it easy for users to report issues using the portal and save the phone for urgent issues to allow appropriate prioritization of tickets.
    • Create a process to add additional resources on a regular basis to keep control of the backlog: A few extra hours once a week may be enough if the team is focused without interruptions.
    • Determine what backlog is acceptable to your users: Set that as a maximum time to resolve. Ideally, set up automated escalations for tickets that are approaching target SLAs, and build flexibility into schedules to have an “all hands on deck” option if the volume gets too high.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure your queue manager has an accurate escalation list and has the authority to assign tickets and engage with the technical team to manage SLAs; otherwise, SLAs will never be consistently managed.

    Best practices for ticket handling

    Accurate data leads to good decisions. If working toward adding staff members, reducing recurring incidents, gaining access to better tools, or demonstrating value to the business, tickets will enable reporting and dashboards to manage your day-to-day business and provide reports to stakeholders.
    • Provide an easy way for end users to electronically submit tickets and encourage them to do so. This doesn’t mean you shouldn’t still accept phone calls, but that should be encouraged for time sensitive issues.
    • Create and update tickets, but not at the expense of good customer service. Agents can start the ticket but shouldn’t spend five minutes creating the ticket when they should be troubleshooting the problem.
    • Update the ticket when the issue is resolved or needs to be escalated. If agents are escalating, they should make sure all relevant information is passed along to the next technician.
    • Update user of ETA if issue cannot be resolved quickly.
    • Update categories to reflect the actual issue and resolution.
    • Reference or link to the knowledge base article as the documented steps taken to resolve the incident.
    • Validate incident is resolved with client. Automate this process with ticket closure after a certain time.
    • Close or resolve the ticket on time.
    Ticket templates (or quick tickets) for common incidents can lead to fast creation, data input, and categorizations. Templates can reduce the time it takes to create tickets from two minutes to 30 seconds.
    Sample ticket template.

    Create a right-sized self-service portal

    Review tickets and talk to the team to find out the most frequent requests and the most frequent incidents that could be solved by the end user if there were clear instructions. Check with your user community to see what they would like to see in the portal.

    A portal is only as attractive as it is useful. Enabling ticket creation and review is the bare minimum and may not entice users to the portal if email is just as easy to use for ticket creation.

    Consider opening the portal to groups other than IT. HR, finance, and others may have information they want to share or forms to fill in or download where an employee portal rather than an IT portal could be helpful. Work with other departments to see if they would find value. Make sure your solution is easy to use when adding content. Low-code options are useful for this.

    Portals could be built in the ITSM solution or SharePoint/Teams and should include:

    • Easy ways to create and see status on all tickets
    • Manuals, how-to articles, links to training
    • Answers to common questions, could be a wiki or Q&A for users to help each other as well as IT
    • Could have a chatbot to help people find documents or to create a ticket

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider using video capture software to create short how-to videos for common questions. Vendors such as TechSmith Snagit , Vimeo Screen Recorder, Screencast-O-Matic Video Recording, and Movavi Screen Recording may be quick and easy to learn.

    49%

    49% of employees have trouble finding information at work

    35%

    Employees can cut time spent looking for information by 35% with quality intranet

    (Source: Liferay)

    Use customer satisfaction surveys to monitor service levels

    Transactional surveys are tied to specific interactions and provide a means of communication to help users communicate satisfaction or dissatisfaction with single interactions.
    • Keep it simple: One question to rate the service with opportunity to add a comment is enough to understand the sentiment and potential issues, and it will be more likely that the user will fill it out.
    • Follow up: Feedback will only be provided if customers think it’s being read and actioned. Set an alert to receive notification of any negative feedback and follow up within one or two business days to show you’re listening.

    A simple customer feedback form with smiley face scale.

    Relationship surveys can be run annually to obtain feedback on the overall customer experience.

    Inform yourself of how well you are doing or where you need improvement in the broad services provided.

    Provide a high-level perspective on the relationship between the business and IT.

    Help with strategic improvement decisions.

    Should be sent over a duration of time and to the entire customer base after they’ve had time to experience all the services provided by the service desk. This can be done on an annual basis.

    For example: Info-Tech’s End User Satisfaction Diagnostic. Included in your membership.

    Keep categorizations simple

    Asset categorization provides reports that are straightforward and useful for IT and that are typically used where the business isn’t demanding complex reports.

    Too many options can cause confusion; too few options provide little value. Try to avoid using “miscellaneous” – it’s not useful information. Test your tickets against your new scheme to make sure it works for you. Effective classification schemes are concise, easy to use correctly, and easy to maintain.

    Build out the categories with these questions:
    • What kind of asset am I working on? (type)
    • What general asset group am I working on? (category)
    • What particular asset am I working on? (sub-category)

    Create resolution codes to further modify the data for deeper reporting. This is typically a separate field, as you could use the same code for many categories. Keep it simple, but make sure it’s descriptive enough to understand the type of work happening in IT.

    Create and define simple status fields to quickly review tickets and know what needs to be actioned. Don’t stop the clock for any status changes unless you’re waiting on users. The elapsed time is important to measure from a customer satisfaction perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Think about how you will use the data to determine which components need to be included in reports. If components won’t be used for reporting, routing, or warranty, reporting down to the component level adds little value.

    Example table of categorizations.


    Need to make quick progress? Use Info-Tech Research Group’s Service Desk Asset-Based Categories template.

    1.1 Build or review your categories

    1-3 hours

    Input: Existing tickets

    Output: Categorization scheme

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers, Sample categorization scheme

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Discuss:

    • How can you use categories and resolution information to enhance reporting?
    • What level of detail do you need to be able to understand the data and take action? What level of detail is too much?
    • Are current status fields allowing you to accurately assess pending work at a glance?

    Draft:

    1. Start with existing categories and review, identifying duplicates and areas of inconsistency.
    2. Write out proposed resolution codes and status fields and critically assess their value.
    3. Test categories and resolution codes against a few recent tickets.
    4. Record the ticket categorization scheme in the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure.

    Download the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Separate tickets into service requests and incidents

    Tickets should be separated into different ticket types to be able to see briefly what needs to be prioritized. This may seem like a non-issue if you have a small team, but if you ever need to report how quickly you’re solving break-fix issues or whether you’re doing root cause analysis, this will save on future efforts. Separating ticket types may make it easier to route tickets automatically or to a new provider in the future.

    INCIDENTS

    SERVICE REQUESTS

    Icon of a bullseye.

    PRIORITIZATION

    Incidents will be prioritized based on urgency and impact to the organization. Service requests will be scheduled and only increase in prioritization if there is an issue with the request process (e.g. new hire start).
    Icon of a handshake.

    SLAs

    Did incidents get resolved according to prioritization rules? REPONSE & RESOLUTION Did service requests get completed on time? SCHEDULING & FULFILMENT
    Icon of a lightbulb.

    TRIAGE & ROOT CAUSE ANALYSIS

    Incidents will typically need triage at the service desk unless something is set up to go directly to a specialist. Service requests don’t need triage and can be routed automatically for approvals and fulfillment.

    “For me, the first key question is, is this keeping you from doing business? Is this a service request? Is it actually something that's broken? Well, okay. Now let's have the conversation about what's broken and keeping you from doing business.” (Anonymous CIO)

    Determine how service requests will be fulfilled

    Process steps for service requests: 'Request, Approve, Schedule, Fulfill, Notify requester, Close ticket'.

    • Identify standard requests, meaning any product approved for use and deployment in the organization.
    • Determine whether this should be published and how. Consider a service catalog with the ability to create tickets right from the request page. If there is an opportunity to automate fulfillment, build that into your workflow and project plans.
    • Create workflows for complicated requests such as onboarding, and build them into a template in the service desk tool. This will allow you to reduce the administrative work to deploy tasks.
    • Who will fulfill requests? There may be a need for more than one technician to be able to fulfill if volume dictates, but it’s important to determine what will be done by each level to quickly assign those tickets for scheduling. Define what will be done by each group of technicians.
    • Determine reasonable SLAs for most service requests. Identify which ones will not meet “normal” SLAs. As you build out a service catalog or automate fulfillment, SLAs can be refined.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Service requests are not as urgent as incidents and should be scheduled.

    Set the SLA based on time to fulfill, plus a buffer to schedule around more urgent service requests.

    1.2 Identify service requests and routing needs

    2-3 hours

    Input: Ticket data, Existing workflow diagrams

    Output: Workflow diagrams

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers, Visio

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Identify:

    1. Create your list of typical service requests and identify the best person to fulfill, based on complexity, documentation, specialty, access rights.
    2. Review service requests which include multiple people or departments, such as onboarding and offboarding
    3. Draw existing processes.
    4. Discuss challenges and critique existing process.
    5. Document proposed changes and steps that will need to be taken to improve the process.

    Download the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Incident management

    Critical incidents and normal incidents

    Even with a small team, it’s important to define a priority for response and resolution time for SLA and uptime reporting and extracting insights for continual improvement efforts.

    • Mission-critical systems or problems that affect many people should always come first (i.e. Severity Level 1).
    • The bulk of reported problems, however, are often individual problems with desktop PCs (i.e. Severity Level 3 or 4).
    • Some questions to consider when deciding on problem severity include:
      • How is productivity affected?
      • How many users are affected?
      • How many systems are affected?
      • How critical are the affected systems to the organization?
    • Decide how many severity levels the organization needs the service desk to have. Four levels of severity is ideal for most organizations.
    Go to incident management for SE

    Super-specialization of knowledge is also a common factor in smaller teams and is caused by complex architectures. While helpful, if that knowledge isn’t documented, it can walk out the door with the resource and the rest of the team is left scrambling.

    Lessons learned may be gathered for critical incidents but often are not propagated, which impacts the ability to solve recurring incidents.

    Over time, repeated incidents can have a negative impact on the customer’s perception that the service desk is a credible and essential service to the business.

    Cover image for 'Incident Management for Small Enterprise'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    1.3 Activity: Identify critical systems

    1 hour

    Input: Ticket data, Business continuity plan

    Output: Service desk SOP

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Discuss and document:

    1. Create a list of the most critical systems, and identify and document the escalation path.
    2. Review inventory of support documents for critical systems and identify any that require runbooks to ensure quick resolution in the event of an outage or major performance issue. Refer to the blueprint Incident Management for Small Enterprise to prioritize and document runbooks as needed.
    3. Review vendor agreements to determine if SLAs are appropriate to support needs. If there is a need for adjustments, determine options for modifying or renegotiating SLAs.

    Download the Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool

    Prioritization scheme

    Keep the priority scheme simple and meaningful, using this framework to communicate and report to stakeholders and set SLAs for response and resolution.
    1. Focus primarily on incidents. Service requests should always be medium urgency, unless there is a valid reason to move one to high level.
    2. Separate major outages from all other tickets as these are a major factor in business impact.
    3. Decide how many levels of severity are appropriate for your organization.
    4. Build a prioritization matrix, breaking down priority levels by impact and urgency.
    5. Build out the definitions of “impact” and “urgency” to complete the prioritization matrix.
    6. Run through examples of each priority level to make sure everyone is on the same page.
    A matrix of prioritization with rows as levels of 'IMPACT' and columns as levels of 'URGENCY'. Ratings range from 'Critical' at 'Extensive/Critical' to 'Low' at 'Low Impact/Low'.

    Document escalation rules and contacts

    Depending on the size of the team, escalations may be mostly to internal technical colleagues or could be primarily to vendors.

    • Ensure the list of escalation rules and contacts is accurate and available, adding expected SLAs for quick reference
    • If tickets are being escalated but shouldn’t be, ensure knowledge articles and training materials are up to date
    • Follow up on all external escalations, ensuring SLAs are respected
    • Publish an escalation path for clients if service is not meeting their needs (for internal and external providers) and automate escalations for tickets breaching SLAs
    Escalation rules strung together.
    User doesn’t know who will fix the issue but expects to see it done in a reasonable time. If issue cannot be resolved right away, set expectations for resolution time.
    • Document information so next technician doesn’t need to ask the same questions.
    • Escalate to the right technician the first time.
    • Check notes to catch up on the issue.
    • Run tests if necessary.
    • Contact user to troubleshoot and fix.
    • Meet SLAs or update client on new ETA.
    • Provide complete information to vendor.
    • Monitor resolution.
    • Follow up with vendor if delays.
    • Update client as needed.
    • Vendor will provide support according to agreement.
    • Encourage vendor to provide regular updates to IT.
    • Review vendor performance regularly.
    • IT will validate issue is resolved and close ticket.
    Validate user is happy with the experience

    Define, measure, and report on service level agreements

    Improving communications is the most effective way to improve customer service
    1. Set goals for time to respond and time to resolve for different incident levels, communicate to the technical team, and test ability to meet these goals.
    2. Set goals for time to fulfil for most service requests, document exceptions (e.g. onboarding).
    3. Create reports to measure against goals and determine what information will be most effective for reporting to the business.
    4. Management: Communicate expectations to the business leaders and end users.
    5. Management: Set regular cadence to meet with stakeholders to discuss expectations and review relevant metrics.
    6. Management: Determine how metrics will be tracked and reviewed to manage technical partners.
    Keep messaging simple
    • Be prepared with detailed reporting if needed, but focus on a few key metrics to inform stakeholders of progress against goals.
    • Use trending to tell a story, especially when presenting success stories.
    • Use appropriate media for each type of message. For example: SLAs can be listed on automated ticket responses or in a banner on the portal.

    Determine what communications are most important and who will do them

    Icon of a bperson ascending a staircase.

    PROACTIVE, PLANNED CHANGES

    From: Service Desk

    Messaging provided by engineer or director, sent to all employees; proactive planning with business unit leaders.

    Icon of a bullseye.

    OUTAGES & UPDATES

    From: Service Desk

    Use templates to send out concise messaging and updates hourly, with input from technical team working on restoring services to all; director to liaise with business stakeholders.

    Icon of a lightbulb.

    UPDATES TO SERVICES, SELF-SERVE

    From: Director

    Send announcements no more than monthly about new services and processes.

    Icon of a handshake.

    REGULAR STAKEHOLDER COMMUNICATIONS

    From: Director

    Monthly reporting to business and IT stakeholders on strategic and project goals, manage escalations.

    1.4 Create communications plan

    2 hours

    Input: Sample past communications

    Output: Communications templates

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Determine where templates are needed to ensure quick and consistent communications. Review sample templates and modify to suit your needs:

    1. Proactive, planned changes
    2. Outages and updates
    3. Updates to services, self-serve
    4. Regular stakeholder communications

    Download the communications templates

    Create reports that are useful and actionable

    Reporting serves two purposes:

    1. Accountability to stakeholders
    2. Identification of items that need action

    To determine what reports are needed, ask yourself:

    • What are your goals?
    • What story are you trying to tell?
    • What do you need to manage day to day?
    • What do you need to report to get funding?
    • What do you need to report to your stakeholders for service updates?

    Determine which metrics will be most useful to suit your strategic and operational goals

    STRATEGIC GOAL (stakeholders): Improve customer service evidenced by:

    TIME

    • Aged backlog
    • Service requests solved within SLA (could also look for quick ones, e.g. tickets solved in one day, % solved within one hour)
    • Volume of incidents and time to solve each type
    • Critical incidents solved in 4 hours
    • Incidents solved same day

    QUALITY

    • Percentage of tickets solved at first contact
    • SLAs missed
    • Percentage of services available to request through catalog
    • Percentage of tickets created through portal (speaks to quality of experience)
    • Customer satisfaction survey results – transactional and annual

    RESOURCES

    • Knowledge articles used by technicians
    • Knowledge articles used by end users
    • Tickets resolved at each technician level (volume)
    • Non-standard requests evaluated and fulfilled by volume & time served
    • Volume of recurring incidents
    OPERATIONAL GOALS: Report to director & technicians

    What else can you do to improve service?

    Review the next few pages to see if you need additional blueprints to help you:
    • Evaluate staffing and training needs to ensure the right number of resources are available and they have the skills they need for your environment.
    • Create self-service for end users to get quick answers and create tickets.
    • Create a knowledge base to ensure backup for technical expertise.
    • Develop customer service skills through training.
    • Perform ticket analysis to better understand your technical environment.

    Be agile in your approach to service

    It’s easy for small teams to get overwhelmed when covering for vacations, illness, or leave. Determine where priorities may be adjusted during busy or short-staffed times.

    • Have a plan to cross-train technicians and create comprehensive knowledge articles for coverage during vacations and unexpected absences.
    • Know where it makes sense to bring in vendors, such as for managed print services, or to cover for extended absences.
    • Look for opportunities to automate functions or reduce administrative overhead through workflows.
    • Identify any risks and determine how to mitigate, such as managing or changing administrative passwords.
    • Create self-serve to enable ticket creation and self-solve for those users who wish to use it.

    Staff the service desk to meet demand

    • With increasing complexity of support and demand on service desks, staff are often left feeling overwhelmed and struggling to keep up with ticket volume, resulting in long resolution times and frustrated end users.
    • However, it’s not as simple as hiring more staff to keep up with ticket volume. IT managers must have the data to support their case for increasing resources or even maintaining their current resources in an environment where many executives are looking to reduce headcount.
    • Without changing resources to match demand, IT managers will need to determine how to maximize the use of their resources to deliver better service.

    Cover image for 'Staff the Service Desk to Meet Demand'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Create and manage a knowledge base

    With a small team, it may seem redundant to create a knowledge base, but without key system and process workflows and runbooks, an organization is still at risk of bottlenecks and knowledge failure.

    • Use a knowledge base to document pre-escalation troubleshooting steps, known errors and workarounds, and runbook solutions.
    • Where incidents may have many root causes, document which are the most frequent solutions and where variations are typically used.
    • Start with an inventory of personal documents, compare and consolidate into the knowledge base, and ensure they are accurate and up to date.
    • Assign someone to review articles on a regular basis and flag for editing and archiving as the technical environment changes.
    • Supplement with vendor-provided or purchased content. Two options for purchased content include RightAnswers or Netformx.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Appeal to a broad audience. Use non-technical language whenever possible to help less technical readers. Identify error messages and use screenshots where it makes sense. Take advantage of social features like voting buttons to increase use.

    Optimize the service desk with a shift-left strategy

    • “Shift left” is a strategy which moves appropriate technical work to users through knowledge articles, automation and service catalogs, freeing up time for technicians to work on more complex issues.
    • Many organizations have built a great knowledge base but fail to see the value of it over time as it becomes overburdened with overlapping and out-of-date information. Knowledge capture, updating, and review must be embedded into your processes if you want to keep the knowledge base useful.
    • Similarly, the self-service portal is often deployed out of the box with little input from end users and fails to deliver its intended benefits. The portal needs to be designed from the end user’s point of view with the goal of self-resolution if it will serve its purpose of deflecting tickets.

    Cover image for 'Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Customer service isn’t just about friendliness

    Your team will all need to deal with end users at some point, and that may occur in times of high stress. Ensure the team has the skills they need to actively listen, stay positive, and de-escalate.

    Info-Tech’s customer service program is a modular approach to improve skills one area at a time. Delivering good customer service means being effective in these areas:
    • Customer focus – Focus on the customer and use a positive, caring, and helpful attitude.
    • Listening and verbal communication skills – Demonstrate empathy and patience, actively listen, and speak in user-friendly ways to help get your point across.
    • Written communication skills – Use appropriate tone, language, and terms in writing (whether via chat, email, or other).
    • Manage difficult situations – Remain calm and in control when dealing with difficult customers and situations.
    • Go the extra mile – Go beyond simply resolving the request to make each interaction positive and memorable.

    Deliver a customer service training program to your IT department

    • There’s a common misconception that customer service skills can’t be taught, so no effort is made to improve those skills.
    • Even when there is a desire to improve customer service, it’s hard for IT teams to make time for training and improvement when they’re too busy trying to keep up with tickets.
    • A talented service desk agent with both great technical and customer service skills doesn’t have to be a rare unicorn, and an agent without innate customer service skills isn’t a lost cause. Relevant and impactful customer service habits, techniques, and skills can be taught through practical, role-based training.
    • IT leaders can make time for this training through targeted, short modules along with continual on-the-job coaching and development.

    Cover image for 'Deliver Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Improve your ticket analysis

    Once you’ve got great data coming into the ticketing system, it’s important to rethink your metrics and determine if there are more insights to be found.

    Analyzing ticket data involves:
    • Collecting ticket data and keeping it clean. Based on the metrics you’re analyzing, define ticket expectations and keep the data up to date.
    • Showing the value of the service desk. SLAs are meaningless if they are not met consistently. The prerequisite to implementing proper SLAs is fully understanding the proper workload of the service desk.
    • Understanding – and improving – the user experience. You cannot improve the user experience without meaningful metrics that allow you to understand the user experience. Different user groups will have different needs and different expectations of the level of service. Your metrics should reflect those needs and expectations.

    Analyze your service desk ticket data

    Properly analyzing ticket data is challenging for the following reasons:
    • Poor ticket hygiene and unclear ticket handling
    • Service desk personnel are not sure where to start with analysis
    • Too many metrics are tracked to parse actionable data from the noise
    Ticket data won’t give you a silver bullet, but it can help point you in the right direction.

    Cover image for 'Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Start doing problem management

    Proactively focusing on root cause analysis will reduce the most disruptive incidents to the organization.

    • A focus on elimination of critical incidents and the more disruptive recurring incidents will reduce future workloads for the team and improve customer satisfaction.
    • This can be challenging when the team is already struggling with workload; however, setting a regular cadence to review tickets, looking for trends, and identifying at least one focus area a month can be a positive outcome for everyone.
    • Focus on the most impactful ticket or service first. The initial goal should be to reduce or eliminate critical and high-impact incidents. Once the high-stress situations are reduced, proactively scheduling the smaller but still time-consuming repeatable incidents can be done.
    • Where you have vendors involved, work with them to determine when root cause analysis must happen and where they’ll need to coordinate with your team or other supporting vendors.

    Problem management

    Problem management can be challenging because it requires skills and knowledge to go deep into a problem and troubleshoot the root cause of an issue, but it also requires uninterrupted time.
    • Problem management, however, can be taught, and the issue isn’t always hard to spot if you have time to look.
    • Using tried and true methods for walking through an issue step by step will enable the team to improve their investigative and troubleshooting skills.
    • Reduction of one or two major incidents and recurring incidents per month will pay off quickly in reducing reactive ticket volume and improve customer satisfaction.

    Cover image for 'Problem Management'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Create your roadmap with high-level requirements

    Determine what tasks and projects need to be completed to meet your improvement goals. Create a high-level project plan and balance with existing resources.

    Roadmap of high-level requirements with 'Goals' as row headers and their timelines mapped out across fiscal quarters.

    Bibliography

    Taylor, Sharon and Ivor Macfarlane. ITIL Small Scale Implementation. Office of Government Commerce, 2005.

    “Share, Collaborate, and Communicate on One Consistent Platform.” Liferay, n.d. Accessed 19 July 2022.

    Rodela, Jimmy. “A Beginner’s Guide to Customer Self-Service.” The Ascent, 18 May 2022. Web.

    Cost Optimization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}14|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}14|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}14|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Financial Management
    • Parent Category Link: /financial-management
    Minimize the damage of IT cost cuts

    Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}336|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Mainframes remain a critical part of an organization’s infrastructure and will need to support these platforms for the foreseeable future. Despite the importance, it can be a challenge for organizations to find qualified resources to support them. Meanwhile, companies are unsure of where to find help to train and develop their teams on mainframe technologies and are at risk of a skills gap within their teams.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mainframes continue to have wide usage, particularly in enterprise organizations. The complexity of moving or replatforming many of these applications means these platforms will be around for a long time still.
    • Companies need to be proactive about developing their teams to support their mainframe systems.

    Impact and Result

    • Companies can protect their assets by cultivating a pipeline of qualified resources to support their mainframe infrastructure.
    • There is a robust training ecosystem headed by large, reputable organizations to help develop and support companies' resources. You don’t have to do it alone.

    Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard – An overview of the solutions available to support your mainframe training and skills development needs.

    Your mainframes are not going to disappear overnight. These systems often support the most critical operations in your organization. You need to ensure you have the right qualified resources to support your platforms.

    • Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Streamline Application Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}403|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $64,272 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 40 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Maintenance
    • Parent Category Link: /maintenance
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations lack the critical management capabilities to balance maintenance with new development and ensure high product value.
    • Application management is often viewed as a support function rather than an enabler of business growth. Focus and investments are only placed on management when it becomes a problem.
    • The lack of governance and practice accountability leaves application management in a chaotic state: politics take over, resources are not strategically allocated, and customers are frustrated.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • New features, fixes, and enhancements are all treated the same and managed in a single backlog. Teams need to focus on prioritizing their efforts on what is valuable to the organization, not to a single department.
    • Business integration is not optional. The business (i.e. product owners) must be represented in guiding delivery efforts and performing ongoing validation and verification of new features and changes.

    Impact and Result

    • Justify the necessity to optimize application management. Gain a grounded understanding of stakeholder objectives and validate their achievability against the current maturity of application management.
    • Strengthen backlog management practices. Obtain a holistic picture of the business and technical impacts, risks, value, complexity, and urgency of each backlog item in order to justify its priority and relevance. Apply the appropriate management approach to each software product according to its criticality and value to the business.
    • Establish and govern a repeatable process. Develop a management process with well-defined steps, quality controls, and roles and responsibilities, and instill good practices to improve the success of delivery.

    Streamline Application Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should sustain your application management practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your priorities

    State the success criteria of your application management practice through defined objectives and metrics. Assess your maturity.

    • Streamline Application Management – Phase 1: Define Your Priorities
    • Application Management Strategy Template
    • Application Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Govern application management

    Structure your application management governance model with the right process and roles. Inject product ownership into your practice.

    • Streamline Application Management – Phase 2: Govern Application Management

    3. Build your optimization roadmap

    Build your application management optimization roadmap to achieve your target state.

    • Streamline Application Management – Phase 3: Build Your Optimization Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Streamline Application Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Priorities

    The Purpose

    State the success criteria of your application management practice through defined objectives and metrics.

    Assess your maturity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded stakeholder expectations

    Application management maturity and identification of optimization opportunities

    Activities

    1.1 Set your objectives.

    1.2 Assess your maturity.

    Outputs

    Application management objectives and metrics

    Application management maturity and optimization opportunities

    2 Govern Application Management

    The Purpose

    Structure your application management governance model with the right process and roles.

    Inject product ownership into your practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Management approach aligned to product value and criticality

    Management techniques to govern the product backlog

    Target-state application management process and roles

    Activities

    2.1 Select your management approach.

    2.2 Manage your single product backlog.

    2.3 Optimize your management process.

    2.4 Define your management roles.

    Outputs

    Application management approach for each application

    Product backlog management practices

    Application management process

    Application management roles and responsibilities and communication flow

    3 Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build your application management optimization roadmap to achieve your target state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Optimization opportunities

    Application management optimization roadmap

    Activities

    3.1 Build your optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    Application management optimization roadmap

    Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation by Building Brand Awareness

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}569|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions

    Brands that fail to invest in brand awareness are likely to face some, if not all these problems:

    • Lack of brand visibility and recognition
    • Inability to reach and engage with the buyers
    • Difficulties generating and converting leads
    • Low customer retention rate
    • Inability to justify higher pricing
    • Limited brand equity, business valuation, and sustainability

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Awareness brings visibility and traction to brands, which is essential in taking the market leadership position and becoming the trusted brand that buyers think of first.

    Brand awareness also significantly contributes to increasing brand equity, market valuation, and business sustainability.

    Impact and Result

    Building brand awareness allows for the increase of:

    • Brand visibility, perception, recognition, and reputation
    • Interactions and engagement with the target audience
    • Digital advertising performance and ROI
    • Conversion rates and sales wins
    • Revenue and profitability
    • Market share & share of voice (SOV)
    • Talents, partners, and investors attraction and retention
    • Brand equity, business growth, and market valuation

    Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation by Building Brand Awareness Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation by Building Brand Awareness Storyboard - Learn how to establish the brand foundation, create assets and workflows, and deploy effective brand awareness strategies and tactics.

    A two-step approach to building brand awareness, starting with defining the brand foundations and then implementing effective brand awareness strategies and tactics.

    • Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation by Building Brand Awareness Storyboard

    2. Define Brand's Personality and Message - Analyze your target market and develop key elements of your brand guidelines.

    With this set of tools, you will be able to capture and analyze your target market, your buyers and their journeys, define your brand's values, personality, and voice, and develop all the key elements of your brand guidelines to enable people within your organization and external resources to build a consistent and recognizable image across all assets and platforms.

    • Market Analysis Template
    • Brand Recognition Survey and Interview Questionnaire and List Template
    • External and Internal Factors Analysis Template
    • Buyer Personas and Journey Presentation Template
    • Brand Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values Template
    • Brand Value Proposition and Positioning Statement
    • Brand Voice Guidelines Template
    • Writing Style Guide Template
    • Brand Messaging Template
    • Writer Checklist

    3. Start Building Brand Awareness - Achieve strategic alignment.

    These tools will allow you to achieve strategic alignment and readiness, create assets and workflows, deploy tactics, establish Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and monitor and optimize your strategy on an ongoing basis.

    • Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template
    • Asset Creation and Management List
    • Campaign Workflows Template
    • Brand Awareness Strategy Rollout Plan Template
    • Survey Emails Best Practices Guidelines

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation By Building Brand Awareness

    Develop and deploy comprehensive, multi-touchpoint brand awareness strategies to become the trusted brand that buyers think of first.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst perspective

    Building brand awareness

    Achieving high brand awareness in a given market and becoming the benchmark for buyers

    is what every brand wants to achieve, as it is a guarantee of success. Building brand awareness,

    even though its immediate benefits are often difficult to see and measure, is essential for companies that want to stand out from their competitors and continue to grow in a sustainable way. The return on investment (ROI) may take longer, but the benefits are also greater than those achieved through short-term initiatives with the expectation of immediate, albeit often limited, results.

    Brands that are familiar to their target market have greater credibility, generate more sales,

    and have a more loyal customer base. CMOs that successfully execute brand awareness programs

    build brand equity and grow company valuation.

    This is a picture of Nathalie Vezina

    Nathalie Vezina
    Marketing Research Director
    SoftwareReviews Advisory

    Executive summary

    Brand leaders know that brand awareness is essential to the success of all marketing and sales activities. Brands that fail to invest in brand awareness are likely to face some, if not all these problems:

    • Lack of brand visibility and compelling storytelling.
    • Inability to reach the target audience.
    • Low engagement on digital platforms and with ads.
    • Difficulties generating and converting leads, or closing/winning sales/deals, and facing a high cost per acquisition.
    • Low/no interest or brand recognition, trust level, and customer retention rate.
    • Inability to justify higher pricing.

    Convincing stakeholders of the benefits of strong brand awareness can be difficult when the positive outcomes are hard to quantify, and the return on investment (ROI) is often long-term. Among the many obstacles brand leaders must overcome are:

    • Lack of longer-term corporate vision, focusing all efforts and resources on short-term growth strategies for a quick ROI.
    • Insufficient market and target buyers' information and understanding of the brand's key differentiator.
    • Misalignment of brand message, and difficulties creating compelling content that resonates with the target audience, generates interest, and keeps them engaged.
    • Limited or no resources dedicated to the development of the brand.

    Inspired by top-performing businesses and best practices, this blueprint provides the guidance and tools needed to successfully build awareness and help businesses grow. By following these guidelines, brand leaders can expect to:

    • Gain market intelligence and a clear understanding of the buyer's needs, your competitive advantage, and key differentiator.
    • Develop a clear and compelling value proposition and a human-centric brand messaging driven by the brand's values.
    • Increase online presence and brand awareness to attract and engage with buyers.
    • Develop a long-term brand strategy and execution plan.

    "A brand is the set of expectations, memories, stories, and relationships that, taken together, account for a consumer's decision to choose one product or service over another."

    – Seth Godin

    What is brand awareness?

    The act of making a brand visible and memorable.

    Brand awareness is the degree to which buyers are familiar with and recognize the attributes and image of a particular brand, product, or service. The higher the level of awareness, the more likely the brand is to come into play when a target audience enters the " buying consideration" phase of the buyer's journey.

    Brand awareness also plays an important role in building equity and increasing business valuation. Brands that are familiar to their target market have greater credibility, drive more sales and have a more loyal customer base.
    Building brand awareness allows increasing:

    • Brand visibility, perception, recognition, and reputation
    • Interactions and engagement with the target audience
    • Digital advertising performance and ROI
    • Conversion rates and sales wins
    • Revenue and profitability
    • Market share and share of voice (SOV)
    • Talents, partners, and investors attraction and retention
    • Brand equity, business growth, and market valuation

    "Products are made in a factory, but brands are created in the mind."
    Source: Walter Landor

    Capitalizing on a powerful brand

    A longer-term approach for an increased and more sustainable ROI.

    Market leader position

    Developing brand awareness is essential to increase the visibility and traction of a brand.

    Several factors may cause a brand to be not well-known. One reason might be that the brand recently launched, such as a startup. Another reason could be that the brand has rebranded or entered a new market.

    To become the trusted brand that buyers think of first in their target markets, it is critical for these brands to develop and deploy comprehensive, multi-touchpoint brand awareness strategies.

    A relationship leading to loyalty

    A longer-term brand awareness strategy helps build a strong relationship between the brand and the buyer, fostering a lasting and rewarding alliance.

    It also enables brands to reach and engage with their target audience effectively by using compelling storytelling and meaningful content.

    Adopting a more human-centric approach and emphasizing shared values makes the brand more attractive to buyers and can drive sales and gain loyalty.

    Sustainable business growth

    For brands that are not well established in their target market, short-term tactics that focus on immediate benefits can be ineffective. In contrast, long-term brand awareness strategies provide a more sustainable ROI (return on investment).

    Investing in building brand awareness can impact a business's ability to interact with its target audience, generate leads, and increase sales. Moreover, it can significantly contribute to boosting the business's brand equity and market valuation.

    "Quick wins may work in the short term, but they're not an ideal substitute for long-term tactics and continued success."
    Source: Forbes

    Impacts of low brand awareness on businesses

    Unfamiliar brands, despite their strong potential, won't thrive unless they invest in their notoriety.

    Brands that choose not to invest in longer-term awareness strategies and rely solely on short-term growth tactics in hopes of an immediate gain will see their ability to grow diminished and their longevity reduced due to a lack of market presence and recognition.

    Symptoms of a weakening brand include:

    • High marketing spending and limited result
    • Low market share or penetration
    • Low sales, revenue, and gross margin
    • Weak renewal rate, customer retention, and loyalty
    • Difficulties delivering on the brand promise, low/no trust in the brand
    • Limited brand equity, business valuation, and sustainability
    • Unattractive brand to partners and investors

    "Your brand is the single most important investment you can make in your business."
    Source: Steve Forbes

    Most common obstacles to increasing brand awareness

    Successfully building brand awareness requires careful preparation and planning.

    • Limited market intelligence
    • Unclear competitive advantage/key differentiator
    • Misaligned and inconsistent messaging and storytelling
    • Lack of long-term vision
    • and low prioritization
    • Limited resources to develop and execute brand awareness building tactics
    • Unattractive content that does not resonate, generates little or no interest and engagement

    Investing in the notoriety of the brand

    Become the top-of-mind brand in your target market.

    To stand out, be recognized by their target audience, and become major players in their industry, brands must adopt a winning strategy that includes the following elements:

    • In-depth knowledge and understanding of the market and audience
    • Strengthening digital presence and activities
    • Creating and publishing content relevant to the target audience
    • Reaching out through multiple touchpoints
    • Using a more human-centric approach
    • Ensure consistency in all aspects of the brand, across all media and channels

    How far are you from being the brand buyers think of first in your target market?

    This is an image of the Brand Awareness Pyramid.

    Brand awareness pyramid

    Based on David Aaker's brand loyalty pyramid

    Tactics for building brand awareness

    Focus on effective ways to gain brand recognition in the minds of buyers.

    This is an image of the Brand Awareness Journey Roadmap.

    Brand recognition requires in-depth knowledge of the target market, the creation of strong brand attributes, and increased presence and visibility.

    Understand the market and audience you're targeting

    Be prepared. Act smart.

    To implement a winning brand awareness-building strategy, you must:

    • Be aware of your competitor's strengths and weaknesses, as well as yours.
    • Find out who is behind the keyboard, and the user experience they expect to have.
    • Plan and continuously adapt your tactics accordingly.
    • Make your buyer the hero.

    Identify the brands' uniqueness

    Find your "winning zone" and how your brand uniquely addresses buyers' pain points.

    Focus on your key differentiator

    A brand has found its "winning zone" or key differentiator when its value proposition clearly shows that it uniquely solves its buyers' specific pain points.

    Align with your target audience's real expectations and successfully interact with them by understanding their persona and buyer's journey. Know:

    • How you uniquely address their pain points.
    • Their values and what motivates them.
    • Who they see as authorities in your field.
    • Their buying habits and trends.
    • How they like brands to engage with them.

    An image of a Venn diagram between the following three terms: Buyer pain point; Competitors' value proposition; your unique value proposition.  The overlapping zone is labeled the Winning zone.  This is your key differentiator.

    Give your brand a voice

    Define and present a consistent voice across all channels and assets.

    The voice reflects the personality of the brand and the emotion to be transmitted. That's why it's crucial to establish strict rules that define the language to use when communicating through the brand's voice, the type of words, and do's and don'ts.

    To be recognizable it is imperative to avoid inconsistencies. No matter how many people are behind the brand voice, the brand must show a unique, distinctive personality. As for the tone, it may vary according to circumstances, from lighter to more serious.

    Up to 80% Increased customer recognition when the brand uses a signature color scheme across multiple platforms
    Source: startup Bonsai
    23% of revenue increase is what consistent branding across channels leads to.
    Source: Harvard Business Review

    When we close our eyes and listen, we all recognize Ella Fitzgerald's rich and unique singing voice.

    We expect to recognize the writing of Stephen King when we read his books. For the brand's voice, it's the same. People want to be able to recognize it.

    Adopt a more human-centric approach

    If your brand was a person, who would it be?

    Human attributes

    Physically attractive

    • Brand identity
    • Logo and tagline
    • Product design

    Intellectually stimulating

    • Knowledge and ideas
    • Continuous innovation
    • Thought leadership

    Sociable

    • Friendly, likeable and fun
    • Confidently engage with audience through multiple touchpoints
    • Posts and shares meaningful content
    • Responsive

    Emotionally connected

    • Inspiring
    • Powerful influencer
    • Triggers emotional reactions

    Morally sound

    • Ethical and responsible
    • Value driven
    • Deliver on its promise

    Personable

    • Honest
    • Self-confident and motivated
    • Accountable

    0.05 Seconds is what it takes for someone to form an opinion about a website, and a brand.
    Source: 8ways

    90% of the time, our initial gut reaction to products is based on color alone.
    Source: startup Bonsai

    56% of the final b2b purchasing decision is based on emotional factors.
    Source: B@B International

    Put values at the heart of the brand-buyers relationship

    Highlight values that will resonate with your audience.

    Brands that focus on the values they share with their buyers, rather than simply on a product or service, succeed in making meaningful emotional connections with them and keep them actively engaged.

    Shared values such as transparency, sustainability, diversity, environmental protection, and social responsibility become the foundation of a solid relationship between a brand and its audience.

    The key is to know what motivates the target audience.

    86% of consumers claim that authenticity is one of the key factors they consider when deciding which brands they like and support.
    Source: Business Wire

    56% of the final decision is based on having a strong emotional connection with the supplier.
    Source: B2B International

    64% of today's customers are belief-driven buyers; they want to support brands that "can be a powerful force for change."
    Source: Edelman

    "If people believe they share values with a company, they will stay loyal to the brand."
    – Howard Schultz
    Source: Lokus Design

    Double-down on digital

    Develop your digital presence and reach out to your target audiences through multiple touchpoints.

    Beyond engaging content, reaching the target audience requires brands to connect and interact with their audience in multiple ways so that potential buyers can form an opinion.

    With the right message consistently delivered across multiple channels, brands increase their reach, create a buzz around their brand and raise awareness.

    73% of today's consumers confirm they use more than one channel during a shopping journey
    Source: Harvard Business Review

    Platforms

    • Website and apps
    • Social media
    • Group discussions

    Multimedia

    • Webinars
    • Podcasts
    • Publication

    Campaign

    • Ads and advertising
    • Landing pages
    • Emails, surveys drip campaigns

    Network

    • Tradeshows, events, sponsorships
    • Conferences, speaking opportunities
    • Partners and influencers

    Use social media to connect

    Reach out to the masses with a social media presence.

    Social media platforms represent a cost-effective opportunity for businesses to connect and influence their audience and tell their story by posting relevant and search-engine-optimized content regularly on their account and groups. It's also a nice gateway to their website.

    Building a relationship with their target buyer through social media is also an easy way for businesses to:

    • Understand the buyers.
    • Receive feedback on how the buyers perceive the brand and how to improve it.
    • Show great user experience and responsiveness.
    • Build trust.
    • Create awareness.

    75% of B2B buyers and 84% of C-Suite executives use social media when considering a purchase
    Source: LinkedIn Business

    92% of B2B buyers use social media to connect with leaders in the sales industry.
    Source: Techjury

    With over 4.5 billion social media users worldwide, and 13 new users signing up to their first social media account every second, social media is fast becoming a primary channel of communication and social interaction for many.
    Source: McKinsey

    Become the expert subject matter

    Raise awareness with thought leadership content.

    Thought leadership is about building credibility
    by creating and publishing meaningful, relevant content that resonates with a target audience.
    Thought leaders write and publish all kinds of relevant content such as white papers, ebooks, case studies, infographics, video and audio content, webinars, and research reports.
    They also participate in speaking opportunities, live presentations, and other high-visibility forums.
    Well-executed thought leadership strategies contribute to:

    • Raise awareness.
    • Build credibility.
    • Be recognized as a subject expert matter.
    • Become an industry leader.

    60% of buyers say thought leadership builds credibility when entering a new category where the brand is not already known.
    Source: Edelman | LinkedIn

    70% of people would rather learn about a company through articles rather than advertising.
    Source: Brew Interactive

    57% of buyers say that thought leadership builds awareness for a new or little-known brand.
    Source: Edelman | LinkedIn

    To achieve best results

    • Know the buyers' persona and journey.
    • Create original content that matches the persona of the target audience and that is close to their values.
    • Be Truthful and insightful.
    • Find the right tone and balance between being human-centric, authoritative, and bold.
    • Be mindful of people's attention span and value their time.
    • Create content for each phase of the buyer's journey.
    • Ensure content is SEO, keyword-loaded, and add calls-to-action (CTAs).
    • Add reason to believe, data to support, and proof points.
    • Address the buyers' pain points in a unique way.

    Avoid

    • Focusing on product features and on selling.
    • Publishing generic content.
    • Using an overly corporate tone.

    Promote personal branding

    Rely on your most powerful brand ambassadors and influencers: your employees.

    The strength of personal branding is amplified when individuals and companies collaborate to pursue personal branding initiatives that offer mutual benefits. By training and positioning key employees as brand ambassadors and industry influencers, brands can boost their brand awareness through influencer marketing strategies.

    Personal branding, when well aligned with business goals, helps brands leverage their key employee's brands to:

    • Increase the organization's brand awareness.
    • Broaden their reach and circle of influence.
    • Show value, gain credibility, and build trust.
    • Stand out from the competition.
    • Build employee loyalty and pride.
    • Become a reference to other businesses.
    • Increase speaking opportunities.
    • Boost qualified leads and sales.

    About 90% of organizations' employee network tends to be completely new to the brand.
    Source: Everyone Social

    8X more engagement comes from social media content shared by employees rather than brand accounts.
    Source: Entrepreneur

    561% more reach when brand messages are shared by employees on social media, than the same message shared by the Brand's social media.
    Source: Entrepreneur

    "Personal branding is the art of becoming knowable, likable and trustable."
    Source: Founder Jar, John Jantsch

    Invest in B2B influencer marketing

    Broaden your reach and audiences by leveraging the voice of influencers.

    Influencers are trusted industry experts and analysts who buyers can count on to provide reliable information when looking to make a purchase.

    Influencer marketing can be very effective to reach new audiences, increase awareness, and build trust. But finding the right influencers with the level of credibility and visibility brands are expecting can sometimes be challenging.

    Search for influencers that have:

    • Relevance of audience and size.
    • Industry expertise and credibility.
    • Ability to create meaningful content (written, video, audio).
    • Charismatic personality with values consistent with the brand.
    • Frequent publications on at least one leading media platform.

    76% of people say that they trust content shared by people over a brand.
    Source: Adweek


    44% increased media mention of the brand using B2B influencer marketers.
    Source: TopRank Marketing

    Turn your customers into brand advocates

    Establish customer advocacy programs and deliver a great customer experience.

    Retain your customers and turn them into brand advocates by building trust, providing an exceptional experience, and most importantly, continuously delivering on the brand promise.

    Implement a strong customer advocacy program, based on personalized experiences, the value provided, and mutual exchange, and reap the benefits of developing and growing long-term relationships.

    92% of individuals trust word-of-mouth recommendations, making it one of the most trust-rich forms of advertising.
    Source: SocialToaster

    Word-of-mouth (advocacy) marketing increases marketing effectiveness by 54%
    Source: SocialToaster

    Make your brand known and make it stick in people's minds

    Building and maintaining high brand awareness requires that each individual within the organization carry and deliver the brand message clearly and consistently across all media whether in person, in written communications, or otherwise.

    To achieve this, brand leaders must first develop a powerful, researched narrative that people will embrace and convey, which requires careful preparation.

    Target market and audience intel

    • Target market Intel
    • Buyer persona and journey/pain points
    • Uniqueness and positioning

    Brand attributes

    • Values at the heart of the relationship
    • Brand's human attributes

    Brand visibly and recall

    • Digital and social media presence
    • Thought leadership
    • Personal branding
    • Influencer marketing

    Brand awareness building plan

    • Long-term awareness and multi-touchpoint approach
    • Monitoring and optimization

    Short and long-term benefits of increasing brand awareness

    Brands are built over the long term but the rewards are high.

    • Stronger brand perception
    • Improved engagement and brand associations
    • Enhanced credibility, reputation, and trust
    • Better connection with customers
    • Increased repeat business
    • High-quality leads
    • Higher and faster conversion rate
    • More sales closed/ deals won
    • Greater brand equity
    • Accelerated growth

    "Strong brands outperform their less recognizable competitors by as much as 73%."
    Source: McKinsey

    Brand awareness building

    Building brand awareness, even though immediate benefits are often difficult to see and measure, is essential for companies to stand out from their competitors and continue to grow in a sustainable way.

    To successfully raise awareness, brands need to have:

    • A longer-term vision and strategy.
    • Market Intelligence, a clear value proposition, and key differentiator.
    • Consistent, well-aligned messaging and storytelling.
    • Digital presence and content.
    • The ability to reach out through multiple touchpoints.
    • Necessary resources.

    Without brand awareness, brands become less attractive to buyers, talent, and investors, and their ability to grow, increase their market value, and be sustainable is reduced.

    Brand awareness building methodology

    Define brands' personality and message

    • Gather market intel and analyze the market.
    • Determine the value proposition and positioning.
    • Define the brand archetype and voice.
    • Craft a compelling brand message and story.
    • Get all the key elements of your brand guidelines.

    Start building brand awareness

    • Achieve strategy alignment and readiness.
    • Create and manage assets.
    • Deploy your tactics, assets, and workflows.
    • Establish key performance indicators (KPIs).
    • Monitor and optimize on an ongoing basis.

    Toolkit

    • Market and Influencing Factors Analysis
    • Recognition Survey and Best Practices
    • Buyer Personas and Journeys
    • Purpose, Mission, Vision, Values
    • Value Proposition and Positioning
    • Brand Message, Voice, and Writing Style
    • Brand Strategy and Tactics
    • Asset Creation and Management
    • Strategy Rollout Plan

    Short and long-term benefits of increasing brand awareness

    Increase:

    • Brand perception
    • Brand associations and engagement
    • Credibility, reputation, and trust
    • Connection with customers
    • Repeat business
    • Quality leads
    • Conversion rate
    • Sales closed / deals won
    • Brand equity and growth

    It typically takes 5-7 brand interactions before a buyer remembers the brand.
    Source: Startup Bonsai

    Who benefits from this brand awareness research?

    This research is being designed for:
    Brand and marketing leaders who:

    • Know that brand awareness is essential to the success of all marketing and sales activities.
    • Want to make their brand unique, recognizable, meaningful, and highly visible.
    • Seek to increase their digital presence, connect and engage with their target audience.
    • Are looking at reaching a new segment of the market.

    This research will also assist:

    • Sales with qualified lead generation and customer retention and loyalty.
    • Human Resources in their efforts to attract and retain talent.
    • The overall business with growth and increased market value.

    This research will help you:

    • Gain market intelligence and a clear understanding of the target audience's needs and trends, competitive advantage, and key differentiator.
    • The ability to develop clear and compelling, human-centric messaging and compelling story driven by brand values.
    • Increase online presence and brand awareness activities to attract and engage with buyers.
    • Develop a long-term brand awareness strategy and deployment plan.

    This research will help them:

    • Increase campaign ROI.
    • Develop a longer-term vision and benefits of investing in longer-term initiatives.
    • Build brand equity and increase business valuation.
    • Grow your business in a more sustainable way.

    SoftwareReviews' brand awareness building methodology

    Phase 1 Define brands' personality and message

    Phase 2 Start building brand awareness

    Phase steps

    1.1 Gather market intelligence and analyze the market.

    1.2 Develop and document the buyer's persona and journey.

    1.3 Uncover the brand mission, vision statement, core values, value proposition and positioning.

    1.4 Define the brand's archetype and tone of voice, then craft a compelling brand messaging.

    2.1 Achieve strategy alignment and readiness.

    2.2 Create assets and workflows and deploy tactics.

    2.3 Establish key performance indicators (KPIs), monitor, and optimize on an ongoing basis.

    Phase outcomes

    • Target market and audience are identified and documented.
    • A clear value proposition and positioning are determined.
    • The brand personality, voice, and messaging are developed.
    • All the key elements of the brand guidelines are in place and ready to use, along with the existing logo, typography, color palette, and imagery.
    • A comprehensive and actionable brand awareness strategy, with tactics, KPIs, and metrics, is set and ready to execute.
    • A progressive and effective deployment plan with deliverables, timelines, workflows, and checklists is in place.
    • Resources are assigned.

    Insight summary

    Brands to adapt their strategies to achieve longer-term growth
    Brands must adapt and adjust their strategies to attract informed buyers who have access to a wealth of products, services, and brands from all over. Building brand awareness, even though immediate benefits are often difficult to see and measure, has become essential for companies that want to stand out from their competitors and continue to grow in a sustainable way.

    A more human-centric approach
    Brand personalities matter. Brands placing human values at the heart of the customer-brand relationship will drive interest in their brand and build trust with their target audience.

    Stand out from the crowd
    Brands that develop and promote a clear and consistent message across all platforms and channels, along with a unique value proposition, stand out from their competitors and get noticed.

    A multi-touchpoints strategy
    Engage buyers with relevant content across multiple media to address their pain points. Analyze touchpoints to determine where to invest your efforts.

    Going social
    Buyers expect brands to be active and responsive in their interactions with their audience. To build awareness, brands are expected to develop a strong presence on social media by regularly posting relevant content, engaging with their followers and influencers, and using paid advertising. They also need to establish thought leadership through content such as white papers, case studies, and webinars.

    Thought leaders wanted
    To enhance their overall brand awareness strategy, organizations should consider developing the personal brand of key executives. Thought leadership can be a valuable method to gain credibility, build trust, and drive conversion. By establishing thought leadership, businesses can increase brand mentions, social engagement, website traffic, lead generation, return on investment (ROI), and Net Promoter Score (NPS).

    Save time and money with SoftwareReviews' branding advice

    Collaborating with SoftwareReviews analysts for inquiries not only provides valuable advice but also leads to substantial cost savings during branding activities, particularly when partnering with an agency.

    Guided Implementation Purpose Measured Value
    Build brands' personality and message Get the key elements of the brand guidelines in place and ready to use, along with your existing logo, typography, color palette, and imagery, to ensure consistency and clarity across all brand touchpoints from internal communication to customer-facing materials. Working with SoftwareReviews analysts to develop brand guidelines saves costs compared to hiring an agency.

    Example: Building the guidelines with an agency will take more or less the same amount of time and cost approximately $80K.

    Start building brand awareness Achieve strategy alignment and readiness, then deploy tactics, assets, and other deliverables. Start building brand awareness and reap the immediate and long-term benefits.

    Working with SoftwareReviews analysts and your team to develop a long-term brand strategy and deployment will cost you less than a fraction of the cost of using an agency.

    Example: Developing and executing long-term brand awareness strategies with an agency will cost between $50-$75K/month over a 24-month period minimum.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Build brands' personality and message

    Phase 2

    Start building brand awareness

    • Call #1: Discuss concept and benefits of building brand awareness. Identify key stakeholders. Anticipate concerns and objections.
    • Call #2: Discuss target market intelligence, information gathering, and analysis.
    • Call #3: Review market intelligence information. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #4: Discuss value proposition and guide to find positioning and key differentiator.
    • Call #5: Review value proposition. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #6: Discuss how to build a comprehensive brand awareness strategy using SR guidelines and template.
    • Call #7: Review strategy. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #8: Second review of the strategy. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #9 (optional): Third review of the strategy. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #10: Discuss how to build the Execution Plan using SR template.
    • Call #11: Review Execution Plan. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #12: Second review of the Execution Plan. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #13 (optional): Third review of the Execution Plan. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #14: Discuss how to build a compelling storytelling and content creation.
    • Call #15: Discuss website and social media platforms and other initiatives.
    • Call #16: Discuss marketing automation and continuous monitoring.
    • Call #17 (optional): Discuss optimization and reporting
    • Call #18: Debrief and determine how we can help with next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Marketing Analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

    Brand awareness building tools

    Each step of this blueprint comes with tools to help you build brand awareness.

    Brand Awareness Tool Kit

    This kit includes a comprehensive set of tools to help you better understand your target market and buyers, define your brand's personality and message, and develop an actionable brand awareness strategy, workflows, and rollout plan.

    The set includes these templates:
    • Market and Influencing Factors Analysis
    • Recognition Survey and Best Practices
    • Buyer Personas and Journeys
    • Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values
    • Value Proposition and Positioning
    • Brand Message, Voice, and Writing Style
    • Brand Strategy and Tactics
    • Asset Creation and Management
    • Strategy Rollout Plan
    An image of a series of screenshots from the templates listed in the column to the left of this image.

    Get started!

    Know your target market and audience, deploy well-designed strategies based on shared values, and make meaningful connections with people.

    Phase 1

    Define brands' personality and message

    Phase 2

    Start building brand awareness

    Phase 1

    Define brands' personality and message

    Steps

    1.1 Gather market intelligence and analyze the market.
    1.2 Develop and document the buyer's persona and journey.
    1.3 Uncover the brand mission, vision statement, core values, positioning, and value proposition.
    1.4 Define the brand's archetype and tone of voice, then craft a compelling brand messaging.

    Phase outcome

    • Target market and audience are identified and documented.
    • A clear value proposition and positioning are determined.
    • The brand personality, voice, and messaging are developed.
    • All the key elements of the brand guidelines are in place. and ready to use, along with the existing logo, typography, color palette, and imagery..

    Build brands' personality and message

    Step 1.1 Gather market intelligence and analyze the market.

    Total duration: 2.5-8 hours

    Objective

    Analyze and document your competitive landscape, assess your strengths, weaknesses, opportunities,
    and threats, gauge the buyers' familiarity with your brand, and identify the forces of influence.

    Output

    This exercise will allow you to understand your market and is essential to developing your value proposition.

    Participants

    • Head of branding and key stakeholders

    MarTech
    May require you to:

    • Register to a Survey Platform.
    • Use, setup, or install platforms like CRM and/or Marketing Automation Platform.

    Tools

    1.1.1 SWOT and competitive landscape

    (60-120 min.)

    Analyze & Document

    Follow the instructions in the Market Analysis Template to complete the SWOT and Competitive Analysis, slides 4 to 7.

    1.1.3 Internal and External Factors

    (30-60 min.)

    Analyze

    Follow the instructions in the External and Internal Factors Analysis Template to perform the PESTLE, Porter's 5 Forces, and Internal Factors and VRIO Analysis.

    Transfer

    Transfer key information into slides 10 and 11 of the Market Analysis Template.

    Consult SoftwareReviews website to find the best survey and MarTech platforms or contact one of our analysts for more personalized assistance and guidance

    1.1.2 Brand recognition

    (60-300 min.)

    Prep

    Adapt the survey and interview questions in the Brand Recognition Survey Questionnaire and List Template.

    Determine how you will proceed to conduct the survey and interviews (internal or external resources, and tools).

    Refer to the Survey Emails Best Practices Guidelines for more information on how to conduct email surveys.

    Collect & Analyze

    Use the Brand Recognition Survey Questionnaire and List Template to build your list, conduct the survey /interviews, and collect and analyze the feedback received.

    Transfer

    Transfer key information into slides 8 and 9 of the Market Analysis Template.

    Brand performance diagnostic

    Have you considered diagnosing your brand's current performance before you begin building brand awareness?

    Audit your brand using the Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth blueprint.Collect and interpret qualitative and quantitative brand performance measures.

    The toolkit includes the following templates:

    • Surveys and interviews questions and lists
    • External and internal factor analysis
    • Digital and financial metrics analysis

    Also included is an executive presentation template to communicate the results to key stakeholders and recommendations to fix the uncovered issues.

    Build brands' personality and message

    Step 1.2 Develop and document the buyer's persona and journey.

    Total duration: 4-8 hours

    Objective

    Gather existing and desired customer insights and conduct market research to define and personify your buyers' personas and their buying behaviors.

    Output

    Provide people in your organization with clear direction on who your target buyers are and guidance on how to effectively reach and engage with them throughout their journey.
    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Key stakeholders from sales and product marketing

    MarTech
    May require you to:

    • Register to an Online Survey Platform (free version or subscription).
    • Use, setup, or installation of platforms like CRM and/or Marketing Automation Platform.

    Tools

    1.2.1 Buyer Personas and Journeys

    (240-280 min.)

    Research

    Identify your tier 1 to 3 customers using the Ideal Client Profile (ICP) Workbook. (Recommended)

    Survey and interview existing and desired customers based using the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool. (Recommended)

    Create

    Define and document your tier 1 to 3 Buyer Personas and Journeys using the Buyer Personas and Journeys Presentation Template.

    Consult SoftwareReviews website to find the best survey platform for your needs or contact one of our analysts for more personalized assistance and guidance

    Buyer Personas and Journeys

    A well-defined buyer persona and journey is a great way for brands to ensure they are effectively reaching and engaging their ideal buyers through a personalized buying experience.

    When properly documented, it provides valuable insights about the ideal customers, their needs, challenges, and buying decision processes allowing the development of initiatives that correspond to the target buyers.

    Build brands' personality and message

    Step 1.3 Uncover the brand mission, vision statement, core values, value proposition, and positioning.

    Total duration: 4-5.5 hours

    Objective
    Define the "raison d'être" and fundamental principles of your brand, your positioning in the marketplace, and your unique competitive advantage.

    Output
    Allows everyone in an organization to understand and align with the brand's raison d'être beyond the financial dimension, its current positioning and objectives, and how it intends to achieve them.
    It also serves to communicate a clear and appealing value proposition to buyers.

    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Chief Executive Officer (CEO)
    • Key stakeholders

    Tools

    • Brand Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values Template
    • Value Proposition and Positioning Statement Template

    1.3.1 Brand Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values

    (90-120 min.)

    Capture or Develop

    Capture or develop, if not already existing, your brand's purpose, mission, vision statement, and core values using slides 4 to 7 of the Brand Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values Template.

    1.3.2 Brand Value Proposition and Positioning

    (150-210 min.)

    Define

    Map the brand value proposition using the canvas on slide 5 of the Value Proposition and Positioning Statement Template, and clearly articulate your value proposition statement on slide 4.

    Optional: Use canvas on slide 7 to develop product-specific product value propositions.

    On slide 8 of the same template, develop your brand positioning statement.

    Build brands' personality and message

    Steps 1.4 Define the brand's archetype and tone of voice, and craft a compelling brand messaging.

    Total duration: 5-8 hours

    Objective

    Define your unique brand voice and develop a set of guidelines, brand story, and messaging to ensure consistency across your digital and non-digital marketing and communication assets.
    Output

    A documented brand personality and voice, as well as brand story and message, will allow anyone producing content or communicating on behalf of your brand to do it using a unique and recognizable voice, and convey the right message.

    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Content specialist
    • Chief Executive Officer and other key stakeholders

    Tools

    • Brand Voice Guidelines Template
    • Writing Style Guide Template
    • Brand Messaging Template
    • Writer Checklist Template

    1.4.1 Brand Archetype and Tone of Voice

    (120-240 min.)

    Define and document

    Refer to slides 5 and 6 of the Brand Voice Guidelines Template to define your brand personality (archetype), slide 7.

    Use the Brand Voice Guidelines Template to define your brand tone of voice and characteristics on slides 8 and 9, based on the 4 primary tone of voice dimensions, and develop your brand voice chart, slide 9.

    Set Rules

    In the Writing Style Guide template, outline your brand's writing principles, style, grammar, punctuation, and number rules.

    1.4.2 Brand Messaging

    (180-240 min.)

    Craft

    Use the Brand Messaging template, slides 4 to 7, to craft your brand story and message.

    Audit

    Create a content audit to review and approve content to be created prior to publication, using the Writer's Checklist template.

    Important Tip!

    A consistent brand voice leads to remembering and trusting the brand. It should stand out from the competitors' voices and be meaningful to the target audience. Once the brand voice is set, avoid changing it.

    Phase 2

    Start building brand awareness

    Steps

    2.1 Achieve strategy alignment and readiness.
    2.2 Create assets and workflows, and deploy tactics.
    2.3 Establish key performance indicators (KPIs), monitor, and optimize on an ongoing basis.

    Phase outcome

    • A comprehensive and actionable brand awareness strategy, with tactics, KPIs, and metrics, is set and ready to execute.
    • A progressive and effective deployment plan with deliverables, timelines, workflows, and checklists is in place.
    • Resources are assigned.

    Start building brand awareness

    Step 2.1 Achieve strategy readiness and alignment.

    Total duration: 4-5 hours

    Objective

    Now that you have all the key elements of your brand guidelines in place, in addition to your existing logo, typography, color palette, and imagery, you can begin to build brand awareness.

    Start planning to build brand awareness by developing a comprehensive and actionable brand awareness strategy with tactics that align with the company's purpose and objectives. The strategy should include achievable goals and measurables, budget and staffing considerations, and a good workload assessment.

    Output

    A comprehensive long-term, actionable brand awareness strategy with KPIs and measurables.

    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Key stakeholders

    Tools

    • Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template

    2.1.1 Brand Awareness Analysis

    (60-120 min.)

    Identify

    In slide 5 of the Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template, identify your top three brand awareness drivers, opportunities, inhibitors, and risks to help you establish your strategic objectives in building brand awareness.

    2.1.2 Brand Awareness Strategy

    (60-120 min.)

    Elaborate

    Use slides 6 to 10 of the Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template to elaborate on your strategy goals, key issues, and tactics to begin or continue building brand awareness.

    2.1.3 Brand Awareness KPIs and Metrics

    (180-240 min.)

    Set

    Set the strategy performance metrics and KPIs on slide 11 of the Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template.

    Monitor

    Once you start executing the strategy, monitor and report each quarter using slides 13 to 15 of the same document.

    Understanding the difference between strategies and tactics

    Strategies and tactics can easily be confused, but although they may seem similar at times, they are in fact quite different.

    Strategies and tactics are complementary.

    A strategy is a plan to achieve specific goals, while a tactic is a concrete action or set of actions used to implement that strategy.

    To be effective, brand awareness strategies should be well thought-out, carefully planned, and supported by a series of tactics to achieve the expected outcomes.

    Start building brand awareness

    Step 2.2 Create assets and workflows and deploy tactics.

    Total duration: 3.5-4.5 hours

    Objective

    Build a long-term rollout with deliverables, milestones, timelines, workflows, and checklists. Assign resources and proceed to the ongoing development of assets. Implement, manage, and continuously communicate the strategy and results to key stakeholders.

    Output

    Progressive and effective development and deployment of the brand awareness-building strategy and tactics.

    Participants

    • Head of branding

    Tools

    • Asset Creation and Management List
    • Campaign Workflows Template
    • Brand Awareness Strategy Rollout Plan Template

    2.2.1 Assets Creation List

    (60-120 min.)

    Inventory

    Inventory existing assets to create the Asset Creation and Management List.

    Assign

    Assign the persons responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed of the development of each asset, using the RACI model in the template. Ensure you identify and collaborate with the right stakeholders.

    Prioritize

    Prioritize and add release dates.

    Communicate

    Update status and communicate regularly. Make the list with links to the assets available to the extended team to consult as needed.

    2.2.2 Rollout Plan

    (60-120 min.)

    Inventory

    Map out your strategy deployment in the Brand Awareness Strategy Rollout Plan Template and workflow in the Campaign Workflow Template.

    Assign

    Assign the persons responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each tactic, using the RACI model in the template. Ensure you identify and collaborate with the right stakeholders.

    Prioritize

    Prioritize and adjust the timeline accordingly.

    Communicate

    Update status and communicate regularly. Make the list with links to the assets available to the extended team to consult as needed.

    Band Awareness Strategy Rollout Plan
    A strategy rollout plan typically includes the following:

    • Identifying a cross-functional team and resources to develop the assets and deploy the tactics.
    • Listing the various assets to create and manage.
    • A timeline with key milestones, deadlines, and release dates.
    • A communication plan to keep stakeholders informed and aligned with the strategy and tactics.
    • Ongoing performance monitoring.
    • Constant adjustments and improvements to the strategy based on data collected and feedback received.

    Start building brand awareness

    Step 2.3 Establish key performance indicators (KPIs), monitor, and optimize on an ongoing basis.

    Total duration: 3.5-4.5 hours

    Objective

    Brand awareness is built over a long period of time and must be continuously monitored in several ways. Measuring and monitoring the effectiveness of your brand awareness activities will allow you to constantly adjust your tactics and continue to build awareness.

    Output

    This step will provide you with a snapshot of your current level of brand awareness and interactions with the brand, and allow you to set up the tools for ongoing monitoring and optimization.

    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Digital marketing manager

    MarTech
    May require you to:

    • Register to an Online Survey Platform(free version or subscription), or
    • Use, setup, or installation of platforms like CRM and/or Marketing Automation Platform.
    • Use Google Analytics or other tracking tools.
    • Use social media and campaign management tools.

    Tools

    • Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template

    2.2.2 Rollout Plan

    (60-120 min.)

    Measure

    Monitor and record the strategy performance metrics in slides 12 to 15 of the Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics template, and gauge its performance against preset KPIs in slide 11. Make ongoing improvements to the strategy and assets.

    Communicate

    The same slides in which you monitor strategy performance can be used to report on the results of the current strategy to key stakeholders on a monthly or quarterly basis, as appropriate.

    Take this opportunity to inform stakeholders of any adjustments you plan to make to the existing plan to improve its performance. Since brand awareness is built over time, be sure to evaluate the results based on how long the strategy has been in place before making major changes.

    Consult SoftwareReviews website to find the best survey, brand monitoring and feedback, and MarTech platforms, or contact one of our analysts for more personalized assistance and guidance

    Measuring brand strategy performance
    There are two ways to measure and monitor your brand's performance on an ongoing basis.

    • By registering to brand monitoring and feedback platforms and tools like Meltwater, Hootsuite, Insights, Brand24, Qualtrics, and Wooltric.
    • Manually, using native analytics built in the platforms you're already using, such as Google and Social Media Analytics, or by gathering customer feedback through surveys, or calculating CAC, ROI, and more in spreadsheets.

    SoftwareReviews can help you choose the right platform for your need. We also equip you with manual tools, available with the Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growthblueprint to measure:

    • Surveys and interviews questions and lists.
    • External and internal factor analysis.
    • Digital and financial metrics analysis.
    • Executive presentation to report on performance.

    Related SoftwareReviews research

    An image of the title page for SoftwareReviews Create a Buyer Persona and Journey. An image of the title page for SoftwareReviews Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth.

    Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

    Get deeper buyer understanding and achieve product-market fit, with easier access to market and sales

    • Reduce time and resources wasted chasing the wrong prospects.
    • Increase open and click-through rates.
    • Perform more effective sales discovery.
    • Increase win rate.

    Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth

    Have a significant and well-targeted impact on business success and growth by knowing how your brand performs, identifying areas of improvement, and making data-driven decisions to fix them.

    • Increase brand awareness and equity.
    • Build trust and improve customer retention and loyalty.
    • Achieve higher and faster growth.

    Bibliography

    Aaker, David. "Managing Brand Equity." Simon & Schuster, 1991.
    "6 Factors for Brands to Consider While Designing Their Communication." Lokus Design, 23 Sept. 2022.
    "20 Advocacy Marketing Statistics You Need to Know." Social Toaster, n.d.
    Bazilian, Emma. "How Millennials and Baby Boomers Consume User-Generated Content And what brands can learn from their preferences." Adweek, January 2, 2017.
    B2B International, a Gyro: company, B2B Blog - Why Human-To-Human Marketing Is the Next Big Trend in a Tech-Obsessed World.
    B2B International, a Gyro: company, The State of B2B Survey 2019 - Winning with Emotions: How to Become Your Customer's First Choice.
    Belyh, Anastasia. "Brand Ambassador 101:Turn Your Personal Brand into Cash." Founder Jar, December 6, 2022.
    Brand Master Academy.com.
    Businesswire, a Berkshire Hathaway Company, "Stackla Survey Reveals Disconnect Between the Content Consumers Want & What Marketers Deliver." February 20, 2019.
    Chamat, Ramzi. "Visual Design: Why First Impressions Matter." 8 Ways, June 5, 2019.
    Cognism. "21 Tips for Building a LinkedIn Personal Brand (in B2B SaaS)."
    Curleigh, James. "How to Enhance and Expand a Global Brand." TED.
    "2019 Edelman Trust Barometer." Edelman.
    Erskine, Ryan. "22 Statistics That Prove the Value of Personal Branding." Entrepreneur, September 13, 2016.
    Forbes, Steve. "Branding for Franchise Success: How To Achieve And Maintain Brand Consistency Across A Franchise Network?" Forbes, 9 Feb. 2020.
    Godin, Seth. "Define: Brand." Seth's Blog, 30 Dec. 2009,
    Houragan, Stephen. "Learn Brand Strategy in 7 Minutes (2023 Crash Course)." YouTube.
    Jallad, Revecka. "To Convert More Customers, Focus on Brand Awareness." Forbes, October 22, 2019.
    Kingsbury, Joe, et al. "2021 B2B Thought Leadership Impact Study." Edelman, 2021.
    Kunsman, Todd. "The Anatomy of an Employee Influencer." EveryoneSocial, September 8, 2022.
    Landor, Walter. A Brand New World: The Fortune Guide to the 21st Century. Time Warner Books, 1999.
    Liedke, Lindsay. "37+ Branding Statistics For 2023: Stats, Facts & Trends." Startup Bonsai, January 2, 2023.
    Millman, Debbie. "How Symbols and Brands Shape our Humanity." TED, 2019.
    Nenova, Velina. "21 Eye-Opening B2B Marketing Statistics to Know in 2023." Techjury, February 9, 2023.
    Perrey, Jesko et al., "The brand is back: Staying relevant in an accelerating age." McKinsey & Company, May 1, 2015.
    Schaub, Kathleen. "Social Buying Meets Social Selling: How Trusted Networks Improve the Purchase Experience." LinkedIn Business, April 2014.
    Sopadjieva, Emma et al. "A Study of 46,000 Shoppers Shows That Omnichannel Retailing Works." Harvard Business Review, January 3, 2017.
    Shaun. "B2B Brand Awareness: The Complete Guide 2023." B2B House. 2023.
    TopRank Marketing, "2020 State of B2B Influencer Marketing Research Report." Influencer Marketing Report.

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}256|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,953 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 19 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Employees are not paying attention to policies. Awareness and understanding of what the security policy’s purpose is, how it benefits the organization, and the importance of compliance are overlooked when policies are distributed.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies do not explicitly outline responsibilities, are rarely comprehensive, and are difficult to implement, revise, and maintain.
    • Data breaches are still on the rise and security policies are not shaping good employee behavior or security-conscious practices.
    • Adhering to security policies is rarely a priority to users as compliance often feels like an interference to daily workflow. For a lot of organizations, security policies are not having the desired effect.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Creating good policies is only half the solution. Having a great policy management lifecycle will keep your policies current, effective, and compliant.
    • Policies must be reasonable, auditable, enforceable, and measurable. If the policy items don’t meet these requirements, users can’t be expected to adhere to them. Focus on developing policies to be quantified and qualified for them to be relevant.

    Impact and Result

    • Save time and money using the templates provided to create your own customized security policies mapped to the Info-Tech framework, which incorporates multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA).

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop and Deploy Security Policies Deck – A step-by-step guide to help you build, implement, and assess your security policy program.

    Our systematic approach will ensure that all identified areas of security have an associated policy.

  • Develop the security policy program.
  • Develop and implement the policy suite.
  • Communicate the security policy program.
  • Measure the security policy program.
    • Develop and Deploy Security Policies – Phases 1-4

    2. Security Policy Prioritization Tool – A structured tool to help your organization prioritize your policy suite to ensure that you are addressing the most important policies first.

    The Security Policy Prioritization Tool assesses the policy suite on policy importance, ease to implement, and ease to enforce. The output of this tool is your prioritized list of policies based on our policy framework.

    • Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    3. Security Policy Assessment Tool – A structured tool to assess the effectiveness of policies within your organization and determine recommended actions for remediation.

    The Security Policy Assessment Tool assesses the policy suite on policy coverage, communication, adherence, alignment, and overlap. The output of this tool is a checklist of remediation actions for each individual policy.

    • Security Policy Assessment Tool

    4. Security Policy Lifecycle Template – A customizable lifecycle template to manage your security policy initiatives.

    The Lifecycle Template includes sections on security vision, security mission, strategic security and policy objectives, policy design, roles and responsibilities for developing security policies, and organizational responsibilities.

    • Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    5. Policy Suite Templates – A best-of-breed templates suite mapped to the Info-Tech framework you can customize to reflect your organizational requirements and acquire approval.

    Use Info-Tech's security policy templates, which incorporate multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA), to ensure that your policies are clear, concise, and consistent.

    • Acceptable Use of Technology Policy Template
    • Application Security Policy Template
    • Asset Management Policy Template
    • Backup and Recovery Policy Template
    • Cloud Security Policy Template
    • Compliance and Audit Management Policy Template
    • Data Security Policy Template
    • Endpoint Security Policy Template
    • Human Resource Security Policy Template
    • Identity and Access Management Policy Template
    • Information Security Policy Template
    • Network and Communications Security Policy Template
    • Physical and Environmental Security Policy Template
    • Security Awareness and Training Policy Template
    • Security Incident Management Policy Template
    • Security Risk Management Policy Template
    • Security Threat Detection Policy Template
    • System Configuration and Change Management Policy Template
    • Vulnerability Management Policy Template

    6. Policy Communication Plan Template – A template to help you plan your approach for publishing and communicating your policy updates across the entire organization.

    This template helps you consider the budget time for communications, identify all stakeholders, and avoid scheduling communications in competition with one another.

    • Policy Communication Plan Template

    7. Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool – A tool to help you identify initiatives to develop your security awareness and training program.

    Use this tool to first identify the initiatives that can grow your program, then as a roadmap tool for tracking progress of completion for those initiatives.

    • Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define the Security Policy Program

    The Purpose

    Define the security policy development program.

    Formalize a governing security policy lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding the current state of policies within your organization.

    Prioritizing list of security policies for your organization.

    Being able to defend policies written based on business requirements and overarching security needs.

    Leveraging an executive champion to help policy adoption across the organization.

    Formalizing the roles, responsibilities, and overall mission of the program.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.

    1.3 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents.

    1.4 Prioritize the development of security policies.

    1.5 Discuss strategies to leverage stakeholder support.

    1.6 Plan to communicate with all stakeholders.

    1.7 Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    Outputs

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    2 Develop the Security Policy Suite

    The Purpose

    Develop a comprehensive suite of security policies that are relevant to the needs of the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Time, effort, and money saved by developing formally documented security policies with input from Info-Tech’s subject-matter experts.

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies.

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies.

    2.3 Develop a plan to gather feedback from users.

    2.4 Discuss a plan to submit policies for approval.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the risks and drivers that will influence policy development.

    Up to 14 customized security policies (dependent on need and time).

    3 Implement Security Policy Program

    The Purpose

    Ensure policies and requirements are communicated with end users, along with steps to comply with the new security policies.

    Improve compliance and accountability with security policies.

    Plan for regular review and maintenance of the security policy program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Streamlined communication of the policies to users.

    Improved end user compliance with policy guidelines and be better prepared for audits.

    Incorporate security policies into daily schedule, eliminating disturbances to productivity and efficiency.

    Activities

    3.1 Plan the communication strategy of new policies.

    3.2 Discuss myPolicies to automate management and implementation.

    3.3 Incorporate policies and processes into your security awareness and training program.

    3.4 Assess the effectiveness of security policies.

    3.5 Understand the need for regular review and update.

    Outputs

    Policy Communication Plan Template

    Understanding of how myPolicies can help policy management and implementation.

    Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool

    Security Policy Assessment Tool

    Action plan to regularly review and update the policies.

    Further reading

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Enhance your overall security posture with a defensible and prescriptive policy suite.

    Analyst Perspective

    A policy lifecycle can be the secret sauce to managing your policies.

    A policy for policy’s sake is useless if it isn’t being used to ensure proper processes are followed. A policy should exist for more than just checking a requirement box. Policies need to be quantified, qualified, and enforced for them to be relevant.

    Policies should be developed based on the use cases that enable the business to run securely and smoothly. Ensure they are aligned with the corporate culture. Rather than introducing hindrances to daily operations, policies should reflect security practices that support business goals and protection.

    No published framework is going to be a perfect fit for any organization, so take the time to compare business operations and culture with security requirements to determine which ones apply to keep your organization secure.

    Photo of Danny Hammond, Research Analyst, Security, Risk, Privacy & Compliance Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Danny Hammond
    Research Analyst
    Security, Risk, Privacy & Compliance Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Security breaches are damaging and costly. Trying to prevent and respond to them without robust, enforceable policies makes a difficult situation even harder to handle.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies are ineffective because they do not explicitly outline responsibilities and compliance requirements, and they are rarely comprehensive.
    • Without a strong lifecycle to keep policies up to date and easy to use, end users will ignore or work around poorly understood policies.
    • Time and money is wasted dealing with preventable security issues that should be pre-emptively addressed in a comprehensive corporate security policy program.
    Common Obstacles

    InfoSec leaders will struggle to craft the right set of policies without knowing what the organization actually needs, such as:

    • The security policies needed to safeguard infrastructure and resources.
    • The scope the security policies will cover within the organization.
    • The current compliance and regulatory obligations based on location and industry.
    InfoSec leaders must understand the business environment and end-user needs before they can select security policies that fit.
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s Develop and Deploy Security Policies takes a multi-faceted approach to the problem that incorporates foundational technical elements, compliance considerations, and supporting processes:

    • Assess what security policies currently exist within the organization and consider additional secure policies.
    • Develop a policy lifecycle that will define the needs, develop required documentation, and implement, communicate, and measure your policy program.
    • Draft a set of security policies mapped to the Info-Tech framework, which incorporates multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Creating good policies is only half the solution. Having a great policy management lifecycle will keep your policies current, effective, and compliant.

    Your Challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations design a program to develop and deploy security policies

    • A security policy is a formal document that outlines the required behavior and security controls in place to protect corporate assets.
    • The development of policy documents is an ambitious task, but the real challenge comes with communication and enforcement.
    • A good security policy allows employees to know what is required of them and allows management to monitor and audit security practices against a standard policy.
    • Unless the policies are effectively communicated, enforced, and updated, employees won’t know what’s required of them and will not comply with essential standards, making the policies powerless.
    • Without a good policy lifecycle in place, it can be challenging to illustrate the key steps and decisions involved in creating and managing a policy.

    The problem with security policies

    29% Of IT workers say it's just too hard and time consuming to track and enforce.

    25% Of IT workers say they don’t enforce security policies universally.

    20% Of workers don’t follow company security policies all the time.

    (Source: Security Magazine, 2020)

    Common obstacles

    The problem with security policies isn’t development; rather, it’s the communication, enforcement, and maintenance of them.

    • Employees are not paying attention to policies. Awareness and understanding of what the security policy’s purpose is, how it benefits the organization, and the importance of compliance are overlooked when policies are distributed.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies do not explicitly outline responsibilities, are rarely comprehensive, and are difficult to implement, revise, and maintain.
    • Date breaches are still on the rise and security policies are not shaping good employee behavior or security-conscious practices.
    • Adhering to security policies is rarely a priority to users as compliance often feels like an interference to daily workflow. For a lot of organizations, security policies are not having the desired effect.
    Bar chart of the 'Average cost of a data breach' in years '2019-20', '20-21', and '21-22'.
    (Source: IBM, 2022 Cost of a Data Breach; n=537)

    Reaching an all-time high, the cost of a data breach averaged US$4.35 million in 2022. This figure represents a 2.6% increase from last year, when the average cost of a breach was US$4.24 million. The average cost has climbed 12.7% since 2020.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    The right policy for the right audience. Generate a roadmap to guide the order of policy development based on organizational policy requirements and the target audience.

    Actions

    1. Develop policy lifecycle
    2. Identify compliance requirements
    3. Understand which policies need to be developed, maintained, or decommissioned
    I. Define Security Policy Program

    a) Security policy program lifecycle template

    b) Policy prioritization tool
    Clockwise cycle arrows at the centre of the table. II. Develop & Implement Policy Suite

    a) Policy template set

    Policies must be reasonable, auditable, enforceable, and measurable. Policy items that meet these requirements will have a higher level of adherence. Focus on efficiently creating policies using pre-developed templates that are mapped to multiple compliance frameworks.

    Actions

    1. Differentiate between policies, procedures, standards, and guidelines
    2. Draft policies from templates
    3. Review policies, including completeness
    4. Approve policies
    Gaining feedback on policy compliance is important for updates and adaptation, where necessary, as well as monitoring policy alignment to business objectives.

    Actions

    1. Enforce policies
    2. Measure policy effectiveness
    IV. Measure Policy Program

    a) Security policy tracking tool

    III. Communicate Policy Program

    a) Security policy awareness & training tool

    b) Policy communication plan template
    Awareness and training on security policies should be targeted and must be relevant to the employees’ jobs. Employees will be more attentive and willing to incorporate what they learn if they feel that awareness and training material was specifically designed to help them.

    Actions

    1. Identify any changes in the regulatory and compliance environment
    2. Include policy awareness in awareness and training programs
    3. Disseminate policies
    Build trust in your policy program by involving stakeholder participation through the entire policy lifecycle.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT/InfoSec Benefits

    • Reduces complexity within the policy creation process by using a single framework to align multiple compliance regimes.
    • Introduces a roadmap to clearly educate employees on the do’s and don’ts of IT usage within the organization.
    • Reduces costs and efforts related to managing IT security and other IT-related threats.

    Business Benefits

    • Identifies and develops security policies that are essential to your organization’s objectives.
    • Integrates security into corporate culture while maximizing compliance and effectiveness of security policies.
    • Reduces security policy compliance risk.

    Key deliverable:

    Security Policy Templates

    Templates for policies that can be used to map policy statements to multiple compliance frameworks.

    Sample of Security Policy Templates.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    The Info-Tech Security Policy Prioritization Tool will help you determine which security policies to work on first.
    Sample of the Security Policy Prioritization Tool.
    Sample of the Security Policy Assessment Tool.

    Security Policy Assessment Tool

    Info-Tech's Security Policy Assessment Tool helps ensure that your policies provide adequate coverage for your organization's security requirements.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Phase

    Purpose

    Measured Value

    Define Security Policy Program Understand the value in formal security policies and determine which policies to prepare to update, eliminate, or add to your current suite. Time, value, and resources saved with guidance and templates:
    1 FTE*3 days*$80,000/year = $1,152
    Time, value, and resources saved using our recommendations and tools:
    1 FTE*2 days*$80,000/year = $768
    Develop and Implement the Policy Suite Select from an extensive policy template offering and customize the policies you need to optimize or add to your own policy program. Time, value, and resources saved using our templates:
    1 consultant*15 days*$150/hour = $21,600 (if starting from scratch)
    Communicate Security Policy Program Use Info-Tech’s methodology and best practices to ensure proper communication, training, and awareness. Time, value, and resources saved using our training and awareness resources:
    1 FTE*1.5 days*$80,000/year = $408
    Measure Security Policy Program Use Info-Tech’s custom toolkits for continuous tracking and review of your policy suite. Time, value, and resources saved by using our enforcement recommendations:
    2 FTEs*5 days*$160,000/year combined = $3,840
    Time, value, and resources saved by using our recommendations rather than an external consultant:
    1 consultant*5 days*$150/hour = $7,200

    After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.

    Overall Impact

    9.5 /10

    Overall Average $ Saved

    $29,015

    Overall Average Days Saved

    25

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is six to ten calls over the course of two to four months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope security policy requirements, objectives, and any specific challenges.

    Call #2: Review policy lifecycle; prioritize policy development.

    Call #3: Customize the policy templates.

    Call #4: Gather feedback on policies and get approval.

    Call #5: Communicate the security policy program.

    Call #6: Develop policy training and awareness programs.

    Call #7: Track policies and exceptions.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Define the security policy program
    Develop the security policy suite
    Develop the security policy suite
    Implement security policy program
    Finalize deliverables and next steps
    Activities

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.

    1.3 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents.

    1.4 Prioritize the development of security policies.

    1.5 Discuss strategies to leverage stakeholder support.

    1.6 Plan to communicate with all stakeholders.

    1.7 Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies.

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies.

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies (continued).

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies (continued).

    2.3 Develop a plan to gather feedback from users.

    2.4 Discuss a plan to submit policies for approval.

    3.1 Plan the communication strategy for new policies.

    3.2 Discuss myPolicies to automate management and implementation.

    3.3 Incorporate policies into your security awareness and training program.

    3.4 Assess the effectiveness of policies.

    3.5 Understand the need for regular review and update.

    4.1 Review customized lifecycle and policy templates.

    4.2 Discuss the plan for policy roll out.

    4.3 Schedule follow-up Guided Implementation calls.

    Deliverables
    1. Security Policy Prioritization Tool
    2. Security Policy Lifecycle
    1. Security Policies (approx. 9)
    1. Security Policies (approx. 9)
    1. Policy Communication Plan
    2. Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool
    3. Security Policy Assessment Tool
    1. All deliverables finalized

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Phase 1

    Define the Security Policy Program

    Phase 1

    1.1 Understand the current state

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework

    1.3 Document your policy hierarchy

    1.4 Prioritize development of security policies

    1.5 Leverage stakeholders

    1.6 Develop the policy lifecycle

    Phase 2

    2.1 Customize policy templates

    2.2 Gather feedback from users on policy feasibility

    2.3 Submit policies to upper management for approval

    Phase 3

    3.1 Understand the need for communicating policies

    3.2 Use myPolicies to automate the management of your security policies

    3.3 Design, build, and implement your communications plan

    3.4 Incorporate policies and processes into your training and awareness programs

    Phase 4

    4.1 Assess the state of security policies

    4.2 Identify triggers for regular policy review and update

    4.3 Develop an action plan to update policies

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the current state of your organization’s security policies.
    • Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.
    • Prioritize the development of your security policies.
    • Leverage key stakeholders to champion the policy initiative.
    • Inform all relevant stakeholders of the upcoming policy program.
    • Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies

    Scenario 1: You have existing policies

    1. Use the Security Policy Prioritization Tool to identify any gaps between the policies you already have and those recommended based on your changing business needs.
    2. As your organization undergoes changes, be sure to incorporate new requirements in the existing policies.
    3. Sometimes, you may have more specific procedures for a domain’s individual security aspects instead of high-level policies.
    4. Group current policies into the domains and use the policy templates to create overarching policies where there are none and improve upon existing high-level policies.

    Scenario 2: You are starting from scratch

    1. To get started on new policies, use the Security Policy Prioritization Tool to identify the policies Info-Tech recommends based on your business needs. See the full list of templates in the Appendix to ensure that all relevant topics are addressed.
    2. Whether you’re starting from scratch or have incomplete/ad hoc policies, use Info-Tech’s policy templates to formalize and standardize security requirements for end users.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Policies are living, evolving documents that require regular review and update, so even if you have policies already written, you’re not done with them.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance

    You have an opportunity to improve your employee alignment and satisfaction, improve organizational agility, and obtain high policy adherence. This is achieved by translating your corporate culture into a policy-based compliance culture.

    Align your security policies to the Info-Tech Security Framework by using Info-Tech’s policy templates.

    Info-Tech’s security framework uses a best-of-breed approach to leverage and align with most major security standards, including:
    • ISO 27001/27002
    • COBIT
    • Center for Internet Security (CIS) Critical Controls
    • NIST Cybersecurity Framework
    • NIST SP 800-53
    • NIST SP 800-171

    Info-Tech Security Framework

    Info-Tech Security Framework with policies grouped into categories which are then grouped into 'Governance' and 'Management'.

    1.3 Document your policy hierarchy

    Structuring policy components at different levels allows for efficient changes and direct communication depending on what information is needed.

    Policy hierarchy pyramid with 'Security Policy Lifecycle' on top, then 'Security Policies', then 'IT and/or Supporting Documentation'.

    Defines the cycle for the security policy program and what must be done but not how to do it. Aligns the business, security program, and policies.
    Addresses the “what,” “who,” “when,” and “where.”

    Defines high-level overarching concepts of security within the organization, including the scope, purpose, and objectives of policies.
    Addresses the high-level “what” and “why.”
    Changes when business objectives change.

    Defines enterprise/technology – specific, detailed guidelines on how to adhere to policies.
    Addresses the “how.”
    Changes when technology and processes change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Design separate policies for different areas of focus. Policies that are written as single, monolithic documents are resistant to change. A hierarchical top-level document supported by subordinate policies and/or procedures can be more rapidly revised as circumstances change.

    1.3.1 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents

    Policy:
    • Provides emphasis and sets direction.
    • Standards, guidelines, and procedures must be developed to support an overarching policy.
    Arrows stemming from the above list, connecting to the three lists below.

    Standard:

    • Specifies uniform method of support for policy.
    • Compliance is mandatory.
    • Includes process, frameworks, methodologies, and technology.
    Two-way horizontal arrow.

    Procedure:

    • Step-by-step instructions to perform desired actions.
    Two-way horizontal arrow.

    Guideline:

    Recommended actions to consider in absence of an applicable standard, to support a policy.
    This model is adapted from a framework developed by CISA (Certified Information Systems Auditor).

    Supporting Documentation

    Considerations for standards

    Standards. These support policies by being much more specific and outlining key steps or processes that are necessary to meet certain requirements within a policy document. Ideally standards should be based on policy statements with a target of detailing the requirements that show how the organization will implement developed policies.

    If policies describe what needs to happen, then standards explain how it will happen.

    A good example is an email policy that states that emails must be encrypted; this policy can be supported by a standard such as Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption that specifically ensures that all email communication is encrypted for messages “in transit” from one secure email server that has TLS enabled to another.

    There are numerous security standards available that support security policies/programs based on the kind of systems and controls that an organization would like to put in place. A good selection of supporting standards can go a long way to further protect users, data, and other organizational assets
    Key Policies Example Associated Standards
    Access Control Policy
    • Password Management User Standard
    • Account Auditing Standard
    Data Security Policy
    • Cryptography Standard
    • Data Classification Standard
    • Data Handling Standard
    • Data Retention Standard
    Incident Response Policy
    • Incident Response Plan
    Network Security Policy
    • Wireless Connectivity Standard
    • Firewall Configuration Standard
    • Network Monitoring Standard
    Vendor Management Policy
    • Vendor Risk Management Standard
    • Third-Party Access Control Standard
    Application Security Policy
    • Application Security Standard

    1.4 Prioritize development of security policies

    The Info-Tech Security Policy Prioritization Tool will help you determine which security policies to work on first.
    • The tool allows you to prioritize your policies based on:
      • Importance: How relevant is this policy to organizational security?
      • Ease to implement: What is the effort, time, and resources required to write, review, approve, and distribute the policy?
      • Ease to enforce: How much effort, time, and resources are required to enforce the policy?
    • Additionally, the weighting or priority of each variable of prioritization can be adjusted.

    Align policies to recent security concerns. If your organization has recently experienced a breach, it may be crucial to highlight corresponding policies as immediately necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you have an existing policy that aligns with one of the Info-Tech recommended templates weight Ease to Implement and Ease to Enforce as HIGH (4-5). This will decrease the priority of these policies.

    Sample of the Security Policy Prioritization Tool.

    Download the Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    1.5 Leverage stakeholders to champion policies

    Info-Tech Insight

    While management support is essential to initiating a strong security posture, allow employees to provide input on the development of security policies. This cooperation will lead to easier incorporation of the policies into the daily routines of workers, with less resistance. The security team will be less of a police force and more of a partner.

    Executive champion

    Identify an executive champion who will ensure that the security program and the security policies are supported.

    Focus on risk and protection

    Security can be viewed as an interference, but the business is likely more responsive to the concepts of risk and protection because it can apply to overall business operations and a revenue-generating mandate.

    Communicate policy initiatives

    Inform stakeholders of the policy initiative as security policies are only effective if they support the business requirements and user input is crucial for developing a strong security culture.

    Current security landscape

    Leveraging the current security landscape can be a useful mechanism to drive policy buy-in from stakeholders.

    Management buy-in

    This is key to policy acceptance; it indicates that policies are accurate, align with the business, and are to be upheld, that funds will be made available, and that all employees will be equally accountable.

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}300|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    There are many challenges for I&O when it comes to digital transformation, including:

    • Legacy infrastructure technical debt
    • Skills and talent in the IT team
    • A culture that resists change
    • Fear of job loss

    These and many more will hinder your progress, which demonstrates the need to invest in modernizing your infrastructure, investing in training and hiring talent, and cultivating a culture that supports digital transformation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    By using the framework of culture, competencies, collaboration and capabilities, organizations can create dimensions in their I&O structure in order to shift from traditional infrastructure management to becoming a strategic enabler, driving agility, innovation, and operational excellence though the effective integration of people, process, and technology.

    Impact and Result

    By driving a customer-centric approach, delivering a successful transformation can be tailored to the business goals and drive adoption and engagement. Refining your roadmap through data and analytics will drive this change. Use third-party expertise to guide your transformation and help build that vision of the future.

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation – Unlock the full potential of your infrastructure with a digital transformation strategy and clear the barriers for success.

  • Be customer centric as opposed to being technology driven.
  • Understanding business needs and pain points is key to delivering solutions.
  • Approach infrastructure digital transformation in iterations and look at this as a journey.
    • Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation Storyboard
    • I&O Digital Transformation Maturity Assessment Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation

    Unlock the full potential of your infrastructure with a digital transformation strategy and clear the barriers to success.

    Analyst Perspective

    It’s not just about the technology!

    Many businesses fail in their endeavors to complete a digital transformation, but the reasons are complex, and there are many ways to fail, whether it is people, process, or technology. In fact, according to many surveys, 70% of digital transformations fail, and it’s mainly down to strategy – or the lack thereof.

    A lot of organizations think of digital transformation as just an investment in technology, with no vision of what they are trying to achieve or transform. So, out of the gate, many organizations fail to undergo a meaningful transformation, change their business model, or bring about a culture of digital transformation needed to be seriously competitive in their given market.

    When it comes to I&O leaders who have been given a mandate to drive digital transformation projects, they still must align to the vision and mission of the organization; they must still train and hire staff that will be experts in their field; they must still drive process improvements and align the right technology to meet the needs of a digital transformation.

    John Donovan

    John Donovan

    Principal Research Director, I&O
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Digital transformation requires I&O teams to shift from traditional infrastructure management to becoming a strategic enabler, driving agility, innovation, and operational excellence through effective integration of people, process, and technology.

    Insight 1

    Collaboration is a key component of I&O – Promote strong collaboration between I&O and other business functions. When doing a digital transformation, it is clear that this is a cross-functional effort. Business leaders and IT teams need to align their objectives, prioritize initiatives, and ensure that you are seamlessly integrating technologies with the new business functions.

    Insight 2

    Embrace agility and adaptability as core principles – As the digital landscape continues to evolve, it is paramount that I&O leaders are agile and adaptable to changing business needs, adopting new technology and implementing new innovative solutions. The culture of continuous improvement and openness to experimentation and learning will assist the I&O leaders in their journey.

    Insight 3

    Future-proof your infrastructure and operations – By anticipating emerging technologies and trends, you can proactively plan and organize your team for future needs. By investing in scalable, flexible infrastructure such as cloud services, automation, AI technologies, and continuously upskilling the IT staff, you can stay relevant and forward-looking in the digital space.

    Tactical insight

    An IT infrastructure maturity assessment is a foundational step in the journey of digital transformation. The demand will be on performance, resilience, and scalability. IT infrastructure must be able to support innovation and rapid deployment of services.

    Tactical insight

    Having a clear strategy, with leadership commitment along with hiring and training the right people, monitoring and measuring your progress, and ensuring it is a business-led journey will increase your chances of success.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    There are a lot of challenges for I&O when it comes to digital transformation, including:

    • Legacy infrastructure technical debt.
    • Skills and talent in the IT team.
    • A culture that resists change.
    • Fear of job loss.

    These and many more will hinder your progress, which demonstrates the need to invest in modernizing your infrastructure, investing in training and hiring talent, and cultivating a culture that supports digital transformation.

    Common Obstacles

    Many obstacles to digital transformation begin with non-I&O activities, including:

    • Lack of a clear vision and strategy.
    • Siloed organizational structure.
    • Lack of governance and data management.
    • Limited budget and resources.

    By addressing these obstacles, I&O will have a better chance of a successful transformation and delivering the full potential of digital technologies.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Building a culture of innovation by developing clear goals and creating a vision will be key.

    • Be customer centric as opposed to being technology driven.
    • Understand the business needs and pain points in order to effectively deliver solutions.
    • Approach infrastructure digital transformation in iterations and look at it as a journey.

    By completing the Info-Tech digital readiness questionnaire, you will see where you are in terms of maturity and areas you need to concentrate on.

    Info-Tech Insight

    By driving a customer-centric approach, delivering a successful transformation can be tailored to the business goals and drive adoption and engagement. Refining your roadmap through data and analytics will drive this change. Use third-party expertise to guide your transformation and help build that vision of the future.

    The cost of digital transformation

    The challenges that stand in the way of your success, and what is needed to reverse the risk

    What CIOs are saying about their challenges

    26% of those CIOs surveyed cite resistance to change, with entrenched viewpoints demonstrating a real need for a cultural shift to enhance the digital transformation journey.

    Source: Prophet, 2019.

    70% of digital transformation projects fall short of their objectives – even when their leadership is aligned, often with serious consequences.

    Source: BCG, 2020.

    Having a clear strategy and commitment from leadership, hiring and training the right people, monitoring and measuring your progress, and ensuring it is a business-led journey will increase your chances of success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cultural change, business alignment, skills training, and setting a clear strategy with KPIs to demonstrate success are all key to being successful in your digital journey.

    Small and medium-sized enterprises

    What business owners and CEOs are saying about their digital transformation

    57% of small business owners feel they must improve their IT infrastructure to optimize their operations.

    Source: SMB Story, 2023.

    64% of CEOs believe driving digital transformation at a rapid pace is critical to attracting and retaining talent and customers.

    Source: KPMG, 2022.

    Info-Tech Insight

    An IT infrastructure maturity assessment is a foundational step in the journey of digital transformation. The demand will be on performance, resilience, and scalability. IT infrastructure must be able to support innovation and rapid deployments.

    Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}604|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • Business architecture, including value stream and business capability models, is the tool you need to reposition your organization for post-COVID-19 success.
    • Your business architecture model represents your strategic business components. It guides the development of all other architectures to enable new and improved business function.
    • Evaluating your current business architecture, or indeed rebuilding it, creates a foundation for facilitated discussions and target state alignment between IT and the senior C-suite.
    • New projects and initiatives during COVID-19 must evolve business architecture so that your front-line workers and your customers are supported through the resolution of the pandemic. Specifically, your projects and initiatives must be directly traced to evolving your architecture.
    • Business architecture anchors downstream architectural iterations and initiatives. Measure business capability enablement results directly from projects and initiatives using a business architecture model.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on your most disruptive, game-changing innovations that have been on the backburner for some time. Here you will find the ingredients for post-pandemic success.

    Impact and Result

    • Craft your business architecture model, aligned to the current climate, to refocus on your highest priority goals and increase your chances of post-COVID-19 excellence.

    Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create minimum viable business architecture

    Create your minimum viable business architecture.

    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture Storyboard
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Healthcare
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Higher Education
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Manufacturing
    • Business Capability Modeling

    2. Identify COVID-19 critical capabilities for your industry

    If there are a handful of capabilities that your business needs to focus on right now, what are they?

    3. Brainstorm COVID-19 business opportunities

    Identify business opportunities.

    4. Enrich capability model with COVID-19 opportunities

    Enrich your capability model.

    [infographic]

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}152|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $97,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Your organization is looking to create consistency across all Agile teams to drive greater business results and alignment.
    • You are seeking to organically grow Agile capabilities within the organization through a set of support structures and facilitated through shared learning and capabilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Social capital can be an enabler, but also a barrier. People can only manage a finite number of relationships; ensure that the connections the Center of Excellence (CoE) facilitates are purposeful.
    • Don’t over govern. Empowerment is critical to enable improvements; set boundaries and let teams work inside them with autonomy.
    • Legitimize through listening. A CoE will not be leveraged unless it aligns with the needs of its users. Invest the time to align with the functional expectations of your Agile teams.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a set of service offerings aligned with both corporate objectives and the functional expectations of its customers to ensure broad support and utility of the invested resources.
    • Understand some of the cultural and processual challenges you will face when forming a center of excellence, and address them using Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build an Agile Center of Excellence, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Strategically align the Center of Excellence

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision.

    • Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence – Phase 1: Strategically Align the Center of Excellence

    2. Standardize the Center of Excellence’s service offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization.

    • Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence – Phase 2: Standardize the Center of Excellence’s Service Offerings

    3. Operate the Center of Excellence

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change.

    • Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence – Phase 3: Operationalize Your Agile Center of Excellence
    • ACE Satisfaction Survey
    • CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool
    • ACE Benefits Tracking Tool
    • ACE Communications Deck
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Determine Vision of CoE

    The Purpose

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision.

    Understand how your key stakeholders will impact the longevity of your CoE.

    Determine your CoE structure and staff.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Top-down alignment with strategic aims of the organization.

    A set of high-level use cases to form the CoE’s service offerings around.

    Visualization of key stakeholders, with their current and desired power and involvement documented.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives.

    1.2 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your Agile Center of Excellence (ACE) and business objectives.

    1.3 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Prioritized business objectives

    Business-aligned use cases to form CoE’s service offerings

    Stakeholder map of key influencers

    2 Define Service Offerings of CoE

    The Purpose

    Document the functional expectations of the Agile teams.

    Refine your business-aligned use cases with your collected data to achieve both business and functional alignment.

    Create a capability map that visualizes and prioritizes your key service offerings.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of some of the identified concerns, pain points, and potential opportunities from your stakeholders.

    Refined use cases that define the service offerings the CoE provides to its customers.

    Prioritization for the creation of service offerings with a capability map.

    Activities

    2.1 Classified pains and opportunities.

    2.2 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services.

    2.3 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map.

    Outputs

    Classified pains and opportunities

    Refined use cases based on pains and opportunities identified during ACE requirements gathering

    ACE Capability Map

    3 Define Engagement Plans

    The Purpose

    Align service offerings with an Agile adoption model so that teams have a structured way to build their skills.

    Standardize the way your organization will interact with the Center of Excellence to ensure consistency in best practices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Mechanisms put in place for continual improvement and personal development for your Agile teams.

    Interaction with the CoE is standardized via engagement plans to ensure consistency in best practices and predictability for resourcing purposes.

    Activities

    3.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model.

    3.2 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption.

    Outputs

    Adoption-aligned service offerings

    Role-based engagement plans

    4 Define Metrics and Plan Communications

    The Purpose

    Develop a set of metrics for the CoE to monitor business-aligned outcomes with.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The foundations of continuous improvement are established with a robust set of Agile metrics.

    Activities

    4.1 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives.

    4.2 Define target ACE performance metrics.

    4.3 Define Agile adoption metrics.

    4.4 Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile team.

    4.5 Create a communication plan for change.

    Outputs

    Business objective-aligned metrics

    CoE performance metrics

    Agile adoption metrics

    Assessment of organizational design

    CoE communication plan

    Further reading

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Achieve ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "Inconsistent processes and practices used across Agile teams is frequently cited as a challenge to adopting and scaling Agile within organizations. (VersionOne’s 13th Annual State of Agile Report [N=1,319]) Creating an Agile Center of Excellence (ACE) is a popular way to try to impose structure and improve performance. However, simply establishing an ACE does not guarantee you will be successful with Agile. When setting up an ACE you must: Define ACE services based on identified stakeholder needs. Staff the ACE with respected, “hands on” people, who deliver identifiable value to your Agile teams. Continuously evolve ACE service offerings to maximize stakeholder satisfaction and value delivered."

    Alex Ciraco, Research Director, Applications Practice Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • A CIO who is looking for a way to optimize their Agile capabilities and ensure ongoing alignment with business objectives.
    • An applications director who is looking for mechanisms to inject continuous improvement into organization-wide Agile practices.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Align your Agile support structure with business objectives and the functional expectations of its users.
    • Standardize the ways in which Agile teams develop and learn to create consistency in purpose and execution.
    • Track and communicate successes to ensure the long-term viability of an Agile Center of Excellence (ACE).

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Project managers who are tasked with managing Agile projects.
    • Application development managers who are struggling with establishing consistency, transparency, and collaboration across their teams.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Provide service offerings to their team members that will help them personally and collectively to develop desired skills.
    • Provide oversight and transparency into Agile projects and outcomes through ongoing monitoring.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Your organization has had some success with Agile, but needs to drive consistency across Agile teams for better business results and alignment.
    • You are seeking to organically grow Agile capabilities within the organization through a set of support services and facilitated through shared learning and capabilities.

    Complication

    • Organizational constraints, culture clash, and lack of continuous top-down support are hampering your Agile growth and maturity.
    • Attempts to create consistency across Agile teams and processes fail to account for the expectations of users and stakeholders, leaving them detached from projects and creating resistance.

    Resolution

    • Align the service offerings of your ACE with both corporate objectives and the functional expectations of its stakeholders to ensure broad support and utilization of the invested resources.
    • Understand some of the culture and process challenges you will face when forming an ACE, and address them using Info-Tech’s Agile adoption journey model.
    • Track the progress of the ACE and your Agile teams. Use this data to find root causes for issues, and ideate to implement solutions for challenges as they arise over time.
    • Effectively define and propagate improvements to your Agile teams in order to drive business-valued results.
    • Communicate progress to interested stakeholders to ensure long-term viability of the Center of Excellence (CoE).

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Define ACE services based on stakeholder needs.Don’t assume you know what your stakeholders need without talking to them.
    2. Staff the ACE strategically. Choose those who are thought leaders and proven change agents.
    3. Continuously improve based on metrics and feedback.Constantly monitor how your ACE is performing and adjust to feedback.

    Info-Tech’s Agile Journey related Blueprints

    1. Stabilize

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    Begin your Agile transformation with a comprehensive readiness assessment and a pilot project to adopt Agile development practices and behaviors that fit.

    2. Sustain

    YOU ARE HERE

    Spread Best Practices with an Agile Center of Excellence

    Form an ACE to support Agile development at all levels of the organization with thought leadership, strategic development support & process innovation.

    3. Scale

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Extend the benefits of your Agile pilot project into your organization by strategically scaling Agile initiatives that will meet stakeholders’ needs.

    4. Satisfy

    Transition to Product Delivery Introduce product-centric delivery practices to drive greater benefits and better delivery outcomes.

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives

    Supporting Capabilities and Practices

    Modernize Your SDLC

    Remodel the stages of your lifecycle to standardize your definition of a successful product.

    Build a Strong Foundation for Quality

    Instill quality assurance practices and principles in each stage of your software development lifecycle.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Fix, deploy, and support applications quicker though development and operations collaboration.

    What is an Agile Center of Excellence?

    NOTE: Organizational change is hard and prone to failure. Determine your organization’s level of readiness for Agile transformation (and recommended actions) by completing Info-Tech’s Agile Transformation Readiness Tool.

    An ACE amplifies good practices that have been successfully employed within your organization, effectively allowing you to extend the benefits obtained from your Agile pilot(s) to a wider audience.

    From the viewpoint of the business, members of the ACE provide expertise and insights to the entire organization in order to facilitate Agile transformation and ensure standard application of Agile good practices.

    From the viewpoint of your Agile teams, it provides a community of individuals that share experiences and lessons learned, propagate new ideas, and raise questions or concerns so that delivering business value is always top of mind.

    An ACE provides the following:

    1. A mechanism to gather thought leadership to maximize the accessibility and reach of your Agile investment.
    2. A mechanism to share innovations and ideas to facilitate knowledge transfer and ensure broadly applicable innovations do not go to waste.
    3. Strategic alignment to ensure that Agile practices are driving value towards business objectives.
    4. Purposeful good practices to ensure that the service offerings provided align with expectations of both your Agile practitioners and stakeholders.

    SIDEBAR: What is a Community of Practice? (And how does it differ from a CoE?)

    Some organizations prefer Communities of Practice (CoP) to Centers of Excellence (CoE). CoPs are different from CoEs:

    A CoP is an affiliation of people who share a common practice and who have a desire to further the practice itself … and of course to share knowledge, refine best practices, and introduce standards. CoPs are defined by their domain of interest, but the membership is a social structure comprised of volunteer practitioners

    – Wenger, E., R. A. McDermott, et al. (2002) Cultivating communities of practice: A guide to managing knowledge, Harvard Business Press.

    CoPs differ from a CoE mainly in that they tend to have no geographical boundaries, they hold no hierarchical power within a firm, and they definitely can never have structure determined by the company. However, one of the most obvious and telling differences lies in the stated motive of members – CoPs exist because they have active practitioner members who are passionate about a specific practice, and the goals of a CoP are to refine and improve their chosen domain of practice – and the members provide discretionary effort that is not paid for by the employer

    – Matthew Loxton (June 1, 2011) CoP vs CoE – What’s the difference, and Why Should You Care?, Wordpress.com

    What to know about CoPs:

    1. Less formal than a CoE
      • Loosely organized by volunteer practitioners who are interested in advancing the practice.
    2. Not the Authoritative Voice
      • Stakeholders engage the CoP voluntarily, and are not bound by them.
    3. Not funded by Organization
      • CoP members are typically volunteers who provide support in addition to their daily responsibilities.
    4. Not covered in this Blueprint
      • In depth analysis on CoPs is outside the scope of this Blueprint.

    What does an ACE do? Six main functions derived from Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G Framework

    1. Learning
    • Provide training and development and enable engagement based on identified interaction points to foster organizational growth.
  • Tooling
    • Promote the use of standardized tooling to improve efficiency and consistency throughout the organization.
  • Supporting
    • Enable your Agile teams to access subject-matter expertise by facilitating knowledge transfer and documenting good practices.
  • Governing
    • Create operational boundaries for Agile teams, and monitor their progress and ability to meet business objectives within these boundaries.
  • Monitoring
    • Demonstrate the value the CoE is providing through effective metric setting and ongoing monitoring of Agile’s effectiveness.
  • Guiding
    • Provide guidance, methodology, and knowledge for teams to leverage to effectively meet organizational business objectives.
  • Many organizations encounter challenges to scaling Agile

    Tackle the following barriers to Agile adoption with a business-aligned ACE.

    List based on reported impediments from VersionOne’s 13th Annual State of Agile Report (N=1,319)

    1. Organizational culture at odds with Agile values
    • The ACE identifies and measures the value of Agile to build support from senior business leaders for shifting the organizational culture and achieving tangible business benefits.
  • General organizational resistance to change
    • Resistance comes from a lack of trust. Optimized value delivery from Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model will build the necessary social capital to drive cultural change.
  • Inadequate management support and sponsorship
    • Establishing an ACE will require senior management support and sponsorship. Its formation sends a strong signal to the organizational leadership that Agile is here to stay.
  • Lack of skills/experience with Agile methods
    • The ACE provides a vehicle to absorb external training into an internal development program so that Agile capabilities can be grown organically within the organization.
  • Inconsistent processes and practices across teams
    • The ACE provides support to individual Agile teams and will guide them to adopt consistent processes and practices which have a proven track record in the organization.
  • Insufficient training and education
    • The ACE will assist teams with obtaining the Agile skills training they need to be effective in the organization, and support a culture of continuous learning.
  • Overcome your Agile scaling challenges with a business aligned ACE

    An ACE drives consistency and transparency without sacrificing the ability to innovate. It can build on the success of your Agile pilot(s) by encouraging practices known to work in your organization.

    Support Agile Teams

    Provide services designed to inject evolving good practices into workflows and remove impediments or roadblocks from your Agile team’s ability to deliver value.

    Maintain Business Alignment

    Maintain alignment with corporate objectives without impeding business agility in the long term. The ACE functions as an interface layer so that changing expectations can be adapted without negatively impacting Agile teams.

    Facilitate Learning Events

    Avoid the risk of innovation and subject-matter expertise being lost or siloed by facilitating knowledge transfer and fostering a continuous learning environment.

    Govern Improvements

    Set baselines, monitor metrics, and run retrospectives to help govern process improvements and ensure that Agile teams are delivering expected benefits.

    Shift Culture

    Instill Agile thinking and behavior into the organization. The ACE must encourage innovation and be an effective agent for change.

    Use your ACE to go from “doing” Agile to “being” Agile

    Organizations that do Agile without embracing the changes in behavior will not reap the benefits.

    Doing what was done before

    • Processes and Tools
    • Comprehensive Documentation
    • Contract Negotiation
    • Following a Plan

    Being Prescriptive

    Going through the motions

    • Uses SCRUM and tools such as Jira
    • Plans multiple sprints in detail
    • Talks to stakeholders once in a release
    • Works off a fixed scope BRD

    Doing Agile

    Living the principles

    • Individuals and Interactions
    • Working Software
    • Customer Collaboration
    • Responding to Change

    Being Agile

    “(‘Doing Agile’ is) just some rituals but without significant change to support the real Agile approach as end-to-end, business integration, value focus, and team empowerment.” - Arie van Bennekum

    Establishing a CoE does not guarantee success

    Simply establishing a Center of Excellence for any discipline does not guarantee its success:

    The 2019 State of DevOps Report found that organizations which had established DevOps CoEs underperformed compared to organizations which adopted other approaches for driving DevOps transformation. (Accelerate State of DevOps Report 2019 [N=~1,000])

    Still, Agile Centers of Excellence can and do successfully drive Agile adoption in organizations. So what sets the successful examples apart from the others? Here’s what some have to say:

    The ACE must be staffed with qualified people with delivery experience! … [It is] effectively a consulting practice, that can evolve and continuously improve its services … These services are collectively about ‘enablement’ as an output, more than pure training … and above all, the ability to empirically measure the progress” – Paul Blaney, TD Bank

    “When leaders haven’t themselves understood and adopted Agile approaches, they may try to scale up Agile the way they have attacked other change initiatives: through top-down plans and directives. The track record is better when they behave like an Agile team. That means viewing various parts of the organization as their customers.” – HBR, “Agile at Scale”

    “the Agile CoE… is truly meant to be measured by the success of all the other groups, not their own…[it] is meant to be serving the teams and helping them improve, not by telling them what to do, but rather by listening, understanding and helping them adapt.” - Bart Gerardi, PMI

    The CoE must also avoid becoming static, as it’s crucial the team can adjust as quickly as business and customer needs change, and evolve the technology as necessary to remain competitive.” – Forbes, “RPA CoE (what you need to know)”

    "The best CoEs are formed from thought leaders and change agents within the CoE domain. They are the process and team innovators who will influence your CoE roadmap and success. Select individuals who feel passionate about Agile." – Hans Eckman, InfoTech

    To be successful with your ACE, do the following…

    Info-Tech Insight

    Simply establishing an Agile Center of Excellence does not guarantee its success. When setting up your ACE, optimize its impact on the organization by doing the following 3 things:

    1. Define ACE services based on stakeholder needs. Be sure to broadly survey your stakeholders and identify the ACE functions and services which will best meet their needs. ACE services must clearly deliver business value to the organization and the Agile teams it supports.
    2. Staff the ACE strategically. Select ACE team members who have real world, hands-on delivery experience, and are well respected by the Agile teams they will serve. Where possible, select internal thought leaders in your organization who have the credibility needed to effect positive change.
    3. Continuously improve ACE services based on metrics and feedback. The value your ACE brings to the organization must be clear and measurable, and do not assume that your functions and services will remain static. You must regularly monitor both your metrics and feedback from your Agile teams, and adjust ACE behavior to improve/maximize these over time.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    This blueprint will walk you through the steps needed to build the foundations for operational excellence within an Agile Center of Excellence.

    Phase 1 - Strategically Align the CoE

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision. This alignment translates into the CoE mandate intended to enhance the way Agile will enable teams to meet business objectives.

    Phase 2 - Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization. Create and consolidate key performance indicators to measure the CoEs utility and whether or not the expected value is being translated to tangible results.

    Phase 3 - Operate the CoE

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change so that teams can grow within the Agile adoption model and optimize value delivery both within your Agile environment and across functions.

    Info-Tech’s Practice Adoption Journey

    Use Info-Tech’s Practice Adoption Journey model to establish your ACE. Building social capital (stakeholders’ trust in your ability to deliver positive outcomes) incrementally is vital to ensure that everyone is aligned to new mindsets and culture as your Agile practices scale.

    Trust & Competency ↓

    DEFINE

    Begin to document your development workflow or value chain, implement a tracking system for KPIs, and start gathering metrics and reporting them transparently to the appropriate stakeholders.

    ITERATE

    Use collected metrics and retrospectives to stabilize team performance by reducing areas of variability in your workflow and increasing the consistency at which targets are met.

    COLLABORATE

    Use information to support changes and adopt appropriate practices to make incremental improvements to the existing environment.

    EMPOWER

    Drive behavioral and cultural changes that will empower teams to be accountable for their own success and learning.

    INNOVATE

    Use your built-up trust and support practice innovation, driving the definition and adoption of new practices.

    Align your ACE with your organization’s strategy

    This research set will assist you with aligning your ACEs services to the objectives of the business in order to justify the resources and funding required by your Agile program.

    Business Objectives → Alignment ←ACE Functions

    Business justification to continue to fund a Center of Excellence can be a challenge, especially with traditional thinking and rigid stakeholders. Hit the ground running and show value to your key influencers through business alignment and metrics that will ensure that the ACE is worth continuous investment.

    Alignment leads to competitive advantage

    The pace of change in customer expectations, competitive landscapes, and business strategy is continuously increasing. It is critical to develop a method to facilitate ongoing alignment to shifting business and development expectations seamlessly and ensure that your Agile teams are able to deliver expected business value.

    Use Info-Tech’s CoE Operating Model to define the service offerings of your ACE

    Understand where your inputs and outputs lie to create an accessible set of service offerings for your Agile teams.

    The image shows a graphic of the COE Operating Model, showing the inputs and outputs, including Other CoEs (at top); Stakeholder Needs (at left); Metrics and Feedback (at bottom); and ACE Functions and Services (at right)

    Continuously improve the ACE to ensure long-term viability

    Improvement involves the continuous evaluation of the performance of your teams, using well-defined metrics and reasonable benchmarks that are supplemented by analogies and root-cause analysis in retrospectives.

    Monitor

    Monitor your metrics to ensure desired benefits are being realized. The ACE is responsible for ensuring that expected Agile benefits are achievable and on track. Monitor against your defined baselines to create transparency and accountability for desired outcomes.

    Iterate

    Run retrospectives to drive improvements and fixes into Agile projects and processes. Metrics falling short of expectations must be diagnosed and their root causes found, and fixes need to be communicated and injected back into the larger organization.

    Define

    Define metrics and set targets that align with the goals of the ACE. These metrics represent the ACEs expected value to the organization and must be measured against on a regular basis to demonstrate value to your key stakeholders.

    Beware the common risks of implementing your ACE

    Culture clash between Agile teams and larger organization

    Agile leverages empowered teams, meritocracy, and broad collaboration for success, but typical organizations are siloed and hierarchical with top down decision making. There needs to be a plan to enable a smooth transition from the current state towards the Agile target state.

    Persistence of tribal knowledge

    Agile relies on easy and open knowledge sharing, but organizational knowledge can sit in siloes. Employees may also try to protect their expertise for job security. It is important to foster knowledge sharing to ensure that critical know-how is accessible and doesn’t leave the organization with the individual.

    Rigid management structures

    Rigidity in how managers operate (performance reviews, human resource management, etc.) can result in cultural rejection of Agile. People need to be assessed on how they enable their teams rather than as individual contributors. This can help ensure that they are given sufficient opportunities to succeed. More support and less strict governance is key.

    Breakdown due to distributed teams

    When face-to-face interactions are challenging, ensure that you invest in the right communication technologies and remove cultural and process impediments to facilitate organization-wide collaboration. Alternative approaches like using documentation or email will not provide the same experience and value as a face-to-face conversation.

    The State of Maine used an ACE to foster positive cultural change

    CASE STUDY

    Industry - Government

    Source - Cathy Novak, Agile Government Leadership

    The State of Maine’s Agile Center of Excellence

    “The Agile CoE in the State of Maine is completely focused on the discipline of the methodology. Every person who works with Agile, or wants to work with Agile, belongs to the CoE. Every member of the CoE tells the same story, approaches the methodology the same way, and uses the same tools. The CoE also functions as an Agile research lab, experimenting with different standards and tools.

    The usual tools of project management – mission, goals, roles, and a high-level definition of done – can be found in Maine’s Agile CoE. For story mapping, teams use sticky notes on a large wall or whiteboard. Demonstrating progress this way provides for positive team dynamics and a psychological bang. The State of Maine uses a project management framework that serves as its single source of truth. Everyone knows what’s going on at all times and understands the purpose of what they are doing. The Agile team is continually looking for components that can be reused across other agencies and programs.”

    Results:

    • Realized positive culture change, leading to more collaborative and supportive teams.
    • Increased visibility of Agile benefits across functional groups.
    • Standardized methodology across Agile teams and increased innovation and experimentation with new standards and tools.
    • Improved traceability of projects.
    • Increased visibility and ability to determine root causes of problems and right the course when outcomes are not meeting expectations.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence – project overview

    1. Strategically align the Center of Excellence 2. Standardize the CoEs service offerings 3. Operate the Center of Excellence
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE.

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE.

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams.

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan.

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success.

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE.

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives.

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE.

    Guided Implementations
    • Align your ACE with the business.
    • Align your ACE with its users.
    • Dissect the key attributes of Agile adoption.
    • Form engagement plans for your Agile teams.
    • Discuss effective ACE metrics.
    • Conduct a baseline assessment of your Agile environment.
    • Interface ACE with your change management function.
    • Build a communications deck for key stakeholders.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1: Strategically align the ACE Module 2: Standardize the offerings of the ACE Module 3: Prepare for organizational change
    Phase 1 Outcome: Create strategic alignment between the CoE and organizational goals.

    Phase 2 Outcome: Build engagement plans and key performance indicators based on a standardized Agile adoption plan.

    Phase 3 Outcome: Operate the CoEs monitoring function, identify improvements, and manage the change needed to continuously improve.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Module 1 Workshop Module 2 Workshop Module 3 Workshop Module 4
    Activities

    Determine vision of CoE

    1.1 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives.

    1.2 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives.

    1.3 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders.

    Define service offerings of CoE

    2.1 Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities.

    2.2 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services.

    2.3 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map.

    Define engagement plans

    3.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model.

    3.2 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption.

    Define metrics and plan communications

    4.1 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives.

    4.2 Define target ACE performance metrics.

    4.3 Define Agile adoption metrics.

    4.4 Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile team.

    4.5 Create a communication plan for change.

    Deliverables
    1. Prioritized business objectives
    2. Business-aligned use cases to form CoEs service offerings
    3. Prioritized list of stakeholders
    1. Classified pains and opportunities
    2. Refined use cases based on pains and opportunities identified during ACE requirements gathering
    3. ACE capability map
    1. Adoption-aligned service offerings
    2. Role-specific engagement plans
    1. Business objective-aligned metrics
    2. ACE performance metrics
    3. Agile adoption metrics
    4. Assessment of organization design
    5. ACE Communication Plan

    Phase 1

    Strategically Align the Center of Excellence

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Begin by strategically aligning your Center of Excellence

    The first step to creating a high-functioning ACE is to create alignment and consensus amongst your key stakeholders regarding its purpose. Engage in a set of activities to drill down into the organization’s goals and objectives in order to create a set of high-level use cases that will evolve into the service offerings of the ACE.

    Phase 1 - Strategically Align the CoE

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision. This alignment translates into the CoE mandate intended to enhance the way Agile will enable teams to meet business objectives.

    Phase 2 - Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization. Create and consolidate key performance indicators to measure the CoEs utility and whether or not the expected value is being translated to tangible results.

    Phase 3 - Operate the CoE

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change so that teams can grow within the Agile adoption model and optimize value delivery both within your Agile environment and across functions.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Strategically align the ACE

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1

    Step 1.1: Determine the vision of your ACE

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Align your ACE with the business.

    Then complete these activities…

    1.1.1 Optional: Baseline your ACE maturity.

    1.1.2 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives.

    1.1.3 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives.

    1.1.4 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders.

    1.1.5 Select a centralized or decentralized model for your ACE.

    1.1.6 Staff your ACE strategically.

    Step 1.2: Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Align your ACE with its users.

    Then complete these activities…

    1.2.1 Form the Center of Excellence.

    1.2.2 Gather and document your existing Agile practices for the CoE.

    1.2.3 Interview stakeholders to align ACE requirements with functional expectations.

    1.2.4 Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities.

    1.2.5 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services.

    1.2.6 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map.

    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    • Aligning your ACE with the functional expectations of its users is just as critical as aligning with the business. Invest the time to understand how the ACE fits at all levels of the organization to ensure its highest effectiveness.

    Phase 1, Step 1: Determine the vision of your ACE

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    1.1.1 Optional: Baseline your ACE maturity.

    1.1.2 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives.

    1.1.3 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives.

    1.1.4 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders.

    1.1.5 Select a centralized or decentralized model for your ACE.

    1.1.6 Staff your ACE strategically.

    Outcomes:

    • Gather your leadership to position the ACE and align it with business priorities.
    • Form a set of high-level use cases for services that will support the enablement of business priorities.
    • Map the stakeholders of the ACE to visualize expected influence and current support levels for your initiative.

    What does an ACE do? Six main functions derived from Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G Framework

    1. Learning
    • Provide training and development and enable engagement based on identified interaction points to foster organizational growth.
  • Tooling
    • Promote the use of standardized tooling to improve efficiency and consistency throughout the organization.
  • Supporting
    • Enable your Agile teams to access subject-matter expertise by facilitating knowledge transfer and documenting good practices.
  • Governing
    • Create operational boundaries for Agile teams, and monitor their progress and ability to meet business objectives within these boundaries.
  • Monitoring
    • Demonstrate the value the CoE is providing through effective metric setting and ongoing monitoring of Agile’s effectiveness.
  • Guiding
    • Provide guidance, methodology, and knowledge for teams to leverage to effectively meet organizational business objectives.
  • OPTIONAL: If you have an existing ACE, use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to baseline current practices

    1.1.1 Existing CoE Maturity Assessment

    Purpose

    If you already have established an ACE, use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to baseline its current maturity level (this will act as a baseline for comparison after you complete this Blueprint). Assessing your ACEs maturity lets you know where you currently are, and where to look for improvements.

    Steps

    1. Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to assess the maturity of your ACE.
    2. Complete the assessment tool with all members of your ACE team to determine your current Maturity score.
    3. Document the results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    The image is a screen capture of the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool

    Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool.

    Get your Agile leadership together and position the ACE

    Stakeholder Role Why they are essential players
    CIO/ Head of IT Program sponsor: Champion and set the tone for the Agile program. Critical in gaining and maintaining buy-in and momentum for the spread of Agile service offerings. The head of IT has insight and influence to drive buy-in from executive stakeholders and ensure the long-term viability of the ACE.
    Applications Director Program executor: Responsible for the formation of the CoE and will ensure the viability of the initial CoE objectives, use cases, and service offerings. Having a coordinator who is responsible for collating performance data, tracking results, and building data-driven action plans is essential to ensuring continuous success.
    Agile Subject-Matter Experts Program contributor: Provide information on the viability of Agile practices and help build capabilities on existing best practices. Agile’s success relies on adoption. Leverage the insights of people who have implemented and evangelized Agile within your organization to build on top of a working foundation.
    Functional Group Experts Program contributor: Provide information on the functional group’s typical processes and how Agile can achieve expected benefits. Agile’s primary function is to drive value to the business – it needs to align with the expected capabilities of existing functional groups in order to enhance them for the better.

    Align your ACE with your organization’s strategy

    This research set will assist you with aligning your ACEs services to the objectives of the business in order to justify the resources and funding required by your Agile program.

    Business Objectives → Alignment ←ACE Functions

    Business justification to continue to fund a Center of Excellence can be a challenge, especially with traditional thinking and rigid stakeholders. Hit the ground running and show value to your key influencers through business alignment and metrics that will ensure that the ACE is worth continuous investment.

    Alignment leads to competitive advantage

    The pace of change in customer expectations, competitive landscapes, and business strategy is continuously increasing. It is critical to develop a method to facilitate ongoing alignment to shifting business and development expectations seamlessly and ensure that your Agile teams are able to deliver expected business value.

    Activity: Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives

    1.1.2 2 Hours

    Input

    • Organizational business objectives

    Output

    • Prioritized business objectives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. List the primary high-level business objectives that your organization aims to achieve over the course of the following year (focusing on those that ACE can impact/support).
    2. Prioritize these business objectives while considering the following:
    • Criticality of completion: How critical is the initiative in enabling the business to achieve its goals?
    • Transformational impact: To what degree is the foundational structure of the business affected by the initiative (rationale: Agile can support impact on transformational issues)?
  • Document the hypothesized role of Agile in supporting these business objectives. Take the top three prioritized objectives forward for the establishment of your ACE. While in future years or iterations you can inject more offerings, it is important to target your service offerings to specific critical business objectives to gain buy-in for long-term viability of the CoE.
  • Sample Business Objectives:

    • Increase customer satisfaction.
    • Reduce time-to-market of product releases.
    • Foster a strong organizational culture.
    • Innovate new feature sets to differentiate product. Increase utilization rates of services.
    • Reduce product delivery costs.
    • Effectively integrate teams from a merger.
    • Offer more training programs for personal development.
    • Undergo a digital transformation.

    Understand potential hurdles when attempting to align with business objectives

    While there is tremendous pressure to align IT functions and the business due to the accelerating pace of change and technology innovation, you need to be aware that there are limitations in achieving this goal. Keep these challenges at the top of mind as you bring together your stakeholders to position the service offerings of your ACE. It is beneficial to make your stakeholders self-aware of these biases as well, so they come to the table with an open mind and are willing to find common ground.

    The search for total alignment

    There are a plethora of moving pieces within an organization and total alignment is not a plausible outcome.

    The aim of a group should not be to achieve total alignment, but rather reframe and consider ways to ensure that stakeholders are content with the ways they interact and that misalignment does not occur due to transparency or communication issues.

    “The business” implies unity

    While it may seem like the business is one unified body, the reality is that the business can include individuals or groups (CEO, CFO, IT, etc.) with conflicting priorities. While there are shared business goals, these entities may all have competing visions of how to achieve them. Alignment means compromise and agreement more than it means accommodating all competing views.

    Cost vs. reputation

    There is a political component to alignment, and sometimes individual aspirations can impede collective gain.

    While the business side may be concerned with cost, those on the IT side of things can be concerned with taking on career-defining projects to bolster their own credentials. This conflict can lead to serious breakdowns in alignment.

    Panera Bread used Agile to adapt to changing business needs

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Food Services

    Source Scott Ambler and Associates, Case Study

    Challenge

    Being in an industry with high competition, Panera Bread needed to improve its ability to quickly deliver desired features to end customers and adapt to changing business demands from high internal growth.

    Solution

    Panera Bread engaged in an Agile transformation through a mixture of Agile coaching and workshops, absorbing best practices from these engagements to drive Agile delivery frameworks across the enterprise.

    Results

    Adopting Agile delivery practices resulted in increased frequency of solution delivery, improving the relationship between IT and the business. Business satisfaction increased both with the development process and the outcomes from delivery.

    The transparency that was needed to achieve alignment to rapidly changing business needs resulted in improved communication and broad-scale reduced risk for the organization.

    "Agile delivery changed perception entirely by building a level of transparency and accountability into not just our software development projects, but also in our everyday working relationships with our business stakeholders. The credibility gains this has provided our IT team has been immeasurable and immediate."

    – Mike Nettles, VP IT Process and Architecture, Panera Bread

    Use Info-Tech’s CoE Operating Model to define the service offerings of your ACE

    Understand where your inputs and outputs lie to create an accessible set of service offerings for your Agile teams.

    Functional Input

    • Application Development
    • Project Management
    • CIO
    • Enterprise Architecture
    • Data Management
    • Security
    • Infrastructure & Operations
    • Who else?

    The image shows a graphic of the COE Operating Model, showing the inputs and outputs, including Other CoEs (at top); Stakeholder Needs (at left); Metrics and Feedback (at bottom); and ACE Functions and Services (at right)

    Input arrows represent functional group needs, feedback from Agile teams, and collaboration with other CoEs and CoPs

    Output arrows represent the services the CoE delivers and the benefits realized across the organization.

    ACE Operating Model: Governance & Metrics

    Governance & Metrics involves enabling success through the management of the ACEs resources and services, and ensuring that organizational structures evolve in concert with Agile growth and maturity. Your focus should be on governing, measuring, implementing, and empowering improvements.

    Effective governance will function to ensure the long-term effectiveness and viability of your ACE. Changes and improvements will happen continuously and you need a way to decide which to adopt as best practices.

    "Organizations have lengthy policies and procedures (e.g. code deployment, systems design, how requirements are gathered in a traditional setting) that need to be addressed when starting to implement an Agile Center of Excellence. Legacy ideas that end up having legacy policy are the ones that are going to create bottlenecks, waste resources, and disrupt your progress." – Doug Birgfeld, Senior Partner, Agile Wave

    Governance & Metrics

    • Manage organizational Agile standards, policies, and procedures.
    • Define organizational boundaries based on regulatory, compliance, and cultural requirements.
    • Ensure ongoing alignment of service offerings with business objectives.
    • Adapt organizational change management policies to reflect Agile practices.
    • CoE governance functions include:
      • Policy Management
      • Change Management
      • Risk Management
      • Stakeholder Management
      • Metrics/Feedback Monitoring

    ACE Operating Model: Services

    Services refers to the ability to deliver resourcing, guidance, and assistance across all Agile teams. By creating a set of shared services, you enable broad access to specialized resources, knowledge, and insights that will effectively scale to more teams and departments as Agile matures in your organization.

    A Services model:

    • Supports the organization by standardizing and centralizing service offerings, ensuring consistency of service delivery and accessibility across functional groups.
    • Provides a mechanism for efficient knowledge transfer and on-demand support.
    • Helps to drive productivity and project efficiencies through the organization by disseminating best practices.

    Services

    • Provide reference, support, and re-assurance to implement and adapt organizational best practices.
    • Interface relevant parties and facilitate knowledge transfer through shared learning and communities of practice.
    • Enable agreed-upon service levels through standardized support structures.
    • Shared services functions include:
      • Engagement Planning
      • Knowledge Management
      • Subject-Matter Expertise
      • Agile Team Evaluation

    ACE Operating Model: Technology

    Technology refers to a broad range of supporting tools to enable employees to complete their day-to-day tasks and effectively report on their outcomes. The key to technological support is to strike the right balance between flexibility and control based on your organization's internal and external constraints (policy, equipment, people, regulatory, etc.).

    "We sometimes forget the obvious truth that technology provides no value of its own; it is the application of technology to business opportunities that produces return on investment." – Robert McDowell, Author, In Search of Business Value

    Technology

    • Provide common software tools to enable alignment to organizational best practices.
    • Enable access to locally desired tools while considering organizational, technical, and scaling constraints.
    • Enable communication with a technical subject matter expert (SME).
    • Enable reporting consistency through training and maintenance of reporting mechanisms.
    • Technology functions can include:
      • Vendor Management
      • Application Support
      • Tooling Standards
      • Tooling Use Cases

    ACE Operating Model: Staff

    Staff is all about empowerment. The ACE should support and facilitate the sharing of ideas and knowledge sharing. Create processes and spaces where people are encouraged to come together, learn from, and share with each other. This setting will bring up new ideas to enhance productivity and efficiency in day-to-day activities while maintaining alignment with business objectives.

    "An Agile CoE is legitimized by its ability to create a space where people can come together, share, and learn from one another. By empowering teams to grow by themselves and then re-connect with each other you allow the creativity of your employees to flow back into the CoE." – Anonymous, Founder, Agile consultancy group

    Staff

    • Develop and provide training and day-to-day coaching that are aligned with organizational engagement and growth plans.
    • Include workflow change management to assist traditional roles with accommodating Agile practices.
    • Support the facilitation of knowledge transfer from localized Agile teams into other areas of the organization.
    • Achieve team buy-in and engagement with ACE services and capabilities. Provide a forum for collaboration and innovation.
    • People functions can include:
      • Onboarding
      • Coaching
      • Learning Facilitation

    Form use cases to align your ACE with business objectives

    What is a use case?

    A use case tells a story about how a system will be used to achieve a goal from the perspective of a user of that system. The people or other systems that interact with the use case are called “actors.” Use cases describe what a system must be able to do, not how it will do it.

    How does a use case play a role in building your ACE?

    Use cases are used to guide design by allowing you to highlight the intended function of a service provided by the Center of Excellence while maintaining a business focus. Jumping too quickly to a solution without fully understanding user and business needs leads to the loss of stakeholder buy-in and the Centers of Excellence rejection by teams.

    Hypothesized ACE user needs →Use Case←Business objective

    Activity: Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives

    1.1.3 2 Hours

    Input

    • Prioritized business objectives
    • ACE functions

    Output

    • ACE use cases

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. Using your prioritized business objectives and the six functions of a CoE, create high-level use cases for each point of alignment that describe how the Center of Excellence will better facilitate the realization of that business objective.
    2. For each use case, define the following:
      • Name: Generalized title for the use case.
      • Description: A high-level description of the expected CoE action.
    AGILE CENTER OF EXCELLENCE FUNCTIONS:
    Guiding Learning Tooling Supporting Governing Monitoring
    BUSINESS OBJECTIVES Reduce time-to-market of product releases
    Reduce product delivery costs
    Effectively integrate teams from a merger

    Activity: Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives (continued)

    1.1.3 2 Hours

    The image shows the Reduce time-to-market of product releases row from the table in the previous section, filled in with sample information.

    Your goal should be to keep these as high level and generally applicable as possible as they provide an initial framework to further develop your service offerings. Begin to talk about the ways in which the ACE can support the realization of your business objectives and what those interactions may look like to customers of the ACE.

    Involve all relevant stakeholders to discuss the organizational goals and objectives of your ACE

    Avoid the rifts in stakeholder representation by ensuring you involve the relevant parties. Without representation and buy-in from all interested parties, your ACE may omit and fail to meet long-term organizational goals.

    By ensuring every group receives representation, your service offerings will speak for the broad organization and in turn meet the needs of the organization as a whole.

    • Business Units: Any functional groups that will be expected to engage with the ACE in order to achieve their business objectives.
    • Team Leads: Representation from the internal Agile community who is aware of the backgrounds, capabilities, and environments of their respective Agile teams.
    • Executive Sponsors: Those expected to evangelize and set the tone and direction for the ACE within the executive ranks of the organization. These roles are critical in gaining buy-in and maintaining momentum for ACE initiatives.

    Organization

    • ACE
      • Executive Sponsors
      • Team Leads
      • Business Units

    Activity: Prioritize your ACE stakeholders

    1.1.4 1 Hour

    Input

    • Prioritized business objectives

    Output

    • Prioritized list of stakeholders

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. Using your prioritized business objectives, brainstorm, as a group, the potential list of stakeholders (representatives from business units, team leads, and executive sponsors) that would need to be involved in setting the tone and direction of your ACE.
    2. Evaluate each stakeholder in terms of power, involvement, impact, and support.
    • Power: How much influence does the stakeholder have? Enough to drive the CoE forward or into the ground?
    • Involvement: How interested is the stakeholder? How involved is the stakeholder in the project already?
    • Impact: To what degree will the stakeholder be impacted? Will this significantly change how they do their job?
    • Support: Is the stakeholder a supporter of the project? Neutral? A resister?
  • Map each stakeholder to an area on the power map on the next slide based on his or her level of power and involvement.
  • Vary the size of the circle to distinguish stakeholders that are highly impacted by the ACE from those who are not. Color each circle to show each stakeholder’s estimated or gauged level of support for the project.
  • Prioritize your ACE stakeholders (continued)

    1.1.4 1 Hour

    The image shows a matrix on the left, and a legend on the right. The matrix is labelled with Involvement at the bottom, and Power on the left side, and has the upper left quadrant labelled Keep Satisfied, the upper right quadrant labelled Key players, the lower right quadrant labelled Keep informed, and the lower left quadrant labelled Minimal effort.

    Should your ACE be Centralized or Decentralized?

    An ACE can be organized differently depending on your organization’s specific needs and culture.

    The SAFe Model:©

    “For smaller enterprises, a single centralized [ACE] can balance speed with economies of scale. However, in larger enterprises—typically those with more than 500 – 1,000 practitioners—it’s useful to consider employing either a decentralized model or a hub-and-spoke model.”

    The image shows 3 models: centralized, represented by a single large circle; decentralized, represented by 5 smaller circles; and hub-and-spoke, represented by a central circle, connected to 5 surrounding circles.

    © Scaled Agile, Inc.

    The Spotify Model:

    Spotify avoids using an ACE and instead spreads agile practices using Squads, Tribes, Chapters, Guilds, etc.

    It can be a challenging model to adopt because it is constantly changing, and must be fundamentally supported by your organization’s culture. (Linders, Ben. “Don't Copy the Spotify Model.” InfoQ.com. 6 Oct. 2016.)

    Detailed analysis of The Spotify Model is out of scope for this Blueprint.

    The image shows the Spotify model, with two sections, each labelled Tribe, and members from within each Tribe gathered together in a section labelled Guild.

    Activity: Select a Centralized or Decentralized ACE Model

    1.1.5 30 minutes

    Input

    • Prioritized business objectives
    • Use Cases
    • Organization qualities

    Output

    • Centralized or decentralized ACE model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. Using your prioritized business objectives, your ACE use cases, your organization size, structure, and culture, brainstorm the relative pros and cons of a centralized vs decentralized ACE model.
    2. Consider this: to improve understanding and acceptance, ask participants who prefer a centralized model to brainstorm the pros and cons of a decentralized model, and vice-versa.
    3. Collectively decide whether your ACE should be centralized, decentralized or hub-and-spoke and document it.
    Centralized ACE Decentralized ACE
    Pros Cons Pros Cons
    Centralize Vs De-centralize Considerations Prioritized Business Objectives
    • Neutral (objectives don’t favor either model)
    • Neutral (objectives don’t favor either model)
    ACE Use Cases
    • Neutral (use cases don’t favor either model)
    • Neutral (use cases don’t favor either model)
    Organization Size
    • Org. is small enough for centralized ACE
    • Overkill for a small org. like ours
    Organization Structure
    • All development done in one location
    • Not all locations do development
    Organization Culture
    • All development done in one location
    • Decentralized ACE may have yield more buy-in

    SELECTED MODEL: Centralized ACE

    Activity: Staff your ACE strategically

    1.1.6 1 Hour

    Input

    • List of potential ACE staff

    Output

    • Rated list of ACE staff

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. Identify your list of potential ACE staff (this may be a combination of full time and contract staff).
    2. Add/modify/delete the rating criteria to meet your specific needs.
    3. Discuss and adjust the relative weightings of the rating criteria to best suit your organization’s needs.
    4. Rate each potential staff member and compare results to determine the best suited staff for your ACE.
    Candidate: Jane Doe
    Rating Criteria Criteria Weighting Candidate's Score (1-5)
    Candidate has strong theoretical knowledge of Agile. 8% 4
    Candidate has strong hands on experience with Agile. 18% 5
    Candidate has strong hands on experience with Agile. 10% 4
    Candidate is highly respected by the Agile teams. 18% 5
    Candidate is seen as a thought leader in the organization. 18% 5
    Candidate is seen as a change agent in the organization. 18% 5
    Candidate has strong desire to be member of ACE staff. 10% 3
    Total Weighted Score 4.6

    Phase 1, Step 2: Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    1.2.1 Form the Center of Excellence.

    1.2.2 Gather and document your existing Agile practices for the CoE.

    1.2.3 Interview stakeholders to align ACE requirements with functional expectations.

    1.2.4 Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities.

    1.2.5 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services.

    1.2.6 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map.

    Outcomes:

    • Collect data regarding the functional expectations of the Agile teams.
    • Refine your business-aligned use cases with your collected data to achieve both business and functional alignment.
    • Create a capability map that visualizes and prioritizes your key service offerings.

    Structure your ACE with representation from all of your key stakeholders

    Now that you have a prioritized list of stakeholders, use their influence to position the ACE to ensure maximum representation with minimal bottlenecks.

    By operating within a group of your key players, you can legitimize your Center of Excellence by propagating the needs and interests of those who interface and evangelize the CoE within the larger organization.

    The group of key stakeholders will extend the business alignment you achieved earlier by refining your service offerings to meet the needs of the ACEs customers. Multiple representations at the table will generate a wide arrangement of valuable insights and perspectives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While holistic representation is necessary, ensure that the list is not too comprehensive and will not lead to progress roadblocks. The goal is to ensure that all factors relevant to the organization are represented; too many conflicting opinions may create an obstruction moving forward.

    ACE

    • Executive Sponsors
    • Team Leads
    • Business Units

    Determine how you will fund your ACE

    Choose the ACE funding model which is most aligned to your current system based on the scenarios provided below. Both models will offer the necessary support to ensure the success of your Agile program going forward.

    Funding Model Funding Scenario I Funding Scenario II
    Funded by the CIO Funded by the CIO office and a stated item within the general IT budget. Charged back to supported functional groups with all costs allocated to each functional group’s budget.
    Funded by the PMO Charged back to supported functional groups with all costs allocated to each functional group’s budget. Charged back to supported functional groups with all costs allocated to each functional group’s budget.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your funding model may add additional key influencers into the mix. After you choose your funding model, ensure that you review your stakeholder map and add anyone who will have a direct impact in the viability and stability of your ACE.

    Determine how you will govern your ACE

    An Agile Center of Excellence is unique in the way you must govern the actions of its customers. Enable “flexible governance” to ensure that Agile teams have the ability to locally optimize and innovate while still operating within expected boundaries.

    ACE Governing Body

    ↑ Agile Team → ACE ← Agile Team ↑

    Who should take on the governance role?

    The governing body can be the existing executive or standing committees, or a newly formed committee involving your key ACE influencers and stakeholders.

    Flexible governance means that your ACE set boundaries based on your cultural, regulatory, and compliance requirements, and your governance group monitors your Agile teams’ adherence to these boundaries.

    Governing Body Responsibilities

    • Review and approve ACE strategy annually and ensure that it is aligned with current business strategy.
    • Provide detailed quality information for board members.
    • Ensure that the ACE is adequately resourced and that the organization has the capacity to deliver the service offerings.
    • Assure that the ACE is delivering benefits and achieving targets.
    • Assure that the record keeping and reporting systems are capable of providing the information needed to properly assess the quality of service.

    Modify your resourcing strategy based on organizational need

    Your Agile Center of Excellence can be organized either in a dedicated or a virtual configuration, depending on your company’s organizational structure and complexity.

    There is no right answer to how your Center of Excellence should be resourced. Consider your existing organizational structure and culture, the quality of relationships between functional groups, and the typical budgetary factors that would weigh on choosing between a virtual and dedicated CoE structure.

    COE Advantages Disadvantages
    Virtual
    • No change in organization structure required, just additional task delegation to your Agile manager or program manager.
    • Less effort and cost to implement.
    • Investment in quality is proportional to return.
    • Resources are shared between practice areas, and initiatives will take longer to implement.
    • Development and enhancement of best practices can become difficult without a centralized knowledge repository.
    Dedicated
    • Demonstrates a commitment to the ACEs long-term existence.
    • Allows for dedicated maintenance of best practices.
    • Clear lines of accountability for Agile processes.
    • Ability to develop highly skilled employees as their responsibilities are not shared.
    • Requires dedicated resources that can in turn be more costly.
    • Requires strong relationships with the functional groups that interface with the ACE.

    Staffing the ACE: Understand virtual versus dedicated ACE organizational models

    Virtual CoE

    The image shows an organizational chart titled Virtual CoE, with Head of IT at the top, then PMO and CoE Lead/Apps Director at the next level. The chart shows that there is crossover between the CoE Lead's reports, and the PMO's, indicated through dotted lines that connect them.

    • Responsibilities for CoE are split and distributed throughout departments on a part-time basis.
    • CoE members from the PMO report to apps director who also functions as the CoE lead on a part-time basis.

    The image shows a organizational chart titled Dedicated CoE, with all CoE members under the CoE.

    • Requires re-organization and dedicated full-time staff to run the CoE with clear lines of responsibility and accountability.
    • Hiring or developing highly skilled employees who have a sole function to facilitate and monitor quality best practices within the IT department may be necessary.

    Activity: Form the Center of Excellence

    1.2.1 1 Hour

    Input

    • N/A

    Output

    • ACE governance and resourcing plan

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. As a group, discuss if there is an existing body that would be able to govern the Center of Excellence. This body will monitor progress on an ongoing basis and assess any change requests that would impact the CoEs operation or goals.
    • List current governing bodies that are closely aligned with your current Agile environment and determine if the group could take on additional responsibilities.
    • Alternatively, identify individuals who could form a new ACE governing body.
  • Using the results of Exercise 1.1.6 in Step 1, select the individuals who will participate in the Center of Excellence. As a rough rule of thumb for sizing, an ACE staffed with 3-5 people can support 8-12 Agile Teams.
  • Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Leverage your existing Agile practices and SMEs when establishing the ACE

    The synergy between Agile and CoE relies on its ability to build on existing best practices. Agile cannot grow without a solid foundation. ACE gives you the way to disseminate these practices and facilitate knowledge transfer from a centralized sharing environment. As part of defining your service offerings, engage with stakeholders across the organization to evaluate what is already documented so that it can be accommodated in the ACE.

    Documentation

    • Are there any existing templates that can be leveraged (e.g. resource planning, sprint planning)?
    • Are there any existing process documents that can be leveraged (e.g. SIPOC, program frameworks)?
    • Are there any existing standards documents the CoE can incorporate (e.g. policies, procedures, guidelines)?

    SMEs

    • Interview existing subject-matter experts that can give you an idea of your current pains and opportunities.
    • You already have feedback from those in your workshop group, so think about the rest of the organization:
      • Agile practitioners
      • Business stakeholders
      • Operations
      • Any other parties not represented in the workshop group

    Metrics

    • What are the current metrics being used to measure the success of Agile teams?
    • What metrics are currently being used to measure the completion of business objectives?
    • What tools or mediums are currently used for recording and communicating metrics?

    Info-Tech Insight

    When considering existing practices, it is important to evaluate the level of adherence to these practices. If they have been efficiently utilized, injecting them into ACE becomes an obvious decision. If they have been underutilized, however, it is important to understand why this occurred and discuss how you can drive higher adherence.

    Examples of existing documents to leverage

    People

    • Agile onboarding planning documents
    • Agile training documents
    • Organizational Agile manifesto
    • Team performance metrics dashboard
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication plan
    • Development team engagement plan
    • Organizational design and structure
    • Roles and responsibilities chart (i.e. RACI)
    • Compensation plan Resourcing plan

    Process

    • Tailored Scrum process
    • Requirements gathering process
    • Quality stage-gate checklist (including definitions of ready and done)
    • Business requirements document
    • Use case document
    • Business process diagrams
    • Entity relationship diagrams
    • Data flow diagrams
    • Solution or system architecture
    • Application documentation for deployment
    • Organizational and user change management plan
    • Disaster recovery and rollback process
    • Test case templates

    Technology

    • Code review policies and procedures
    • Systems design policies
    • Build, test, deploy, and rollback scripts
    • Coding guidelines
    • Data governance and management policies
    • Data definition and glossary
    • Request for proposals (RFPs)
    • Development tool standards and licensing agreements
    • Permission to development, testing, staging, and production environments
    • Application, system, and data integration policies

    Build upon the lessons learned from your Agile pilots

    The success of your Center of Excellence relies on the ability to build sound best practices within your organization’s context. Use your previous lessons learned and growing pains as shared knowledge of past Agile implementations within the ACE.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    Draw on the experiences of your initial pilot where you learned how to adapt the Agile manifesto and practices to your specific context. These lessons will help onboard new teams to Agile since they will likely experience some of the same challenges.

    Download

    Documents for review include:

    • Tailored Scrum Process
    • Agile Pilot Metrics
    • Info-Tech’s Agile Pilot Playbook

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Draw on previous scaling Agile experiences to help understand how to interface, facilitate, and orchestrate cross-functional teams and stakeholders for large and complex projects. These lessons will help your ACE teams develop collaboration and problem-solving techniques involving roles with different priorities and lines of thinking.

    Download

    Documents for review include:

    • Agile Program Framework
    • Agile Pilot Program Metrics
    • Scaled Agile Development Process
    • Info-Tech’s Scaling Agile Playbook

    Activity: Gather and document your existing Agile practices for the CoE

    1.2.2 Variable time commitment based on current documentation state

    Input

    • Existing practices

    Output

    • Practices categorized within operating model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Compile a list of existing practices that will be shared by the Center of Excellence. Consider any documents, templates, or tools that are used regularly by Agile teams.
    2. Evaluate the level of adherence to use of the practices (whether the practice is complied with regularly or not) with a high, medium, or low. Low compliance will need a root-cause analysis to understand why and how to remedy the situation.
    3. Determine the best fit for each practice under the ACE operational model.
    Name Type Adherence Level CoE Best Fit Source
    1 Tailored Scrum process Process High Shared Services Internal Wiki
    2
    3

    Activity: Interview stakeholders to understand the ACE functional expectations

    1.2.3 30-60 Minutes per interview

    Interview Stakeholders (from both Agile teams and functional areas) on their needs from the ACE. Ensure you capture both pain points and opportunities. Capture these as either Common Agile needs or Functional needs. Document using the tables below:

    Common Agile Needs
    Common Agile Needs
    • Each Agile Team interprets Agile differently
    • Need common approach to Agile with a proven track record within the organization
    • Making sure all Team members have a good understanding of Agile
    • Common set of tool(s) with a proven track record, along with a strong understanding of how to use the tool(s) efficiently and effectively
    • Help troubleshooting process related questions
    • Assistance with addressing the individual short comings of each Agile Team
    • Determining what sort of help each Agile Team needs most
    • Better understanding of the role played by Scrum Master and associated good practices
    • When and how do security/privacy/regulatory requirements get incorporated into Agile projects
    Functional Needs Ent Arch Needs
    • How do we ensure Ent Arch has insight and influence on Agile software design
    • Better understanding of Agile process
    • How to measure compliance with reference architectures

    PMO Needs

    • Better understanding of Agile process
    • Understanding role of PM in Agile
    • Project status reports that determine current level of project risk
    • How does project governance apply on Agile projects
    • What deliverables/artifacts are produced by Agile projects and when are they completed

    Operations Needs

    • Alignment on approaches for doing releases
    • Impact of Agile on change management and support desk processes
    • How and when will installation and operation instructions be available in Agile

    Activity: Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities

    1.2.4 Half day

    Input

    • Identified requirements

    Output

    • Classified pains and opportunities

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Review the listed pain points from the data gathering process. Sort the pain points on sticky notes into technology, governance, people, and shared services.
    2. Consider opportunities under each defining element based on the identified business requirements.
    3. Document your findings.
    4. Discuss the results with the project team and prioritize the opportunities.
      • Where do the most pains occur?
      • What opportunities exist to alleviate pains?
    Governance Shared Services Technology People
    Pain Points
    Opportunities

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Activity: Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services

    1.2.5 1 Hour

    Input

    • Use cases from activity 1.1.2

    Output

    • Refined use cases based on data collection

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Refine your initial use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives using your classified pain points and opportunities.
    2. Add use cases to address newly realized pain points.
    3. Determine the functions and services the CoE can offer to address the identified requirements.
    4. Evaluate the outputs in the form of realized benefits and extracted inefficiencies.

    Possible ACE use cases:

    • Policy Management
    • Change Management
    • Risk Management
    • Stakeholder Management
    • Engagement Planning
    • Knowledge Management
    • Subject-Matter Expertise
    • Agile Team Evaluation
    • Operations Support
    • Onboarding
    • Coaching
    • Learning Facilitation
    • Communications Training
    • Vendor Management
    • Application Support
    • Tooling Standards

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Activity: Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map

    1.2.6 1 Hour

    Input

    • Use cases from activity 1.2.4

    Output

    • ACE capability map

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Review the refined and categorized list of service offerings.
    2. Determine how these new capabilities will add, remove, or enhance your existing service and capabilities.
    3. Categorize the capabilities into the following groups:
    • Governance and Metrics
    • Services
    • Staff
    • Technology
  • Label the estimated impact of the service offering based on your business priorities for the year. This will guide your strategy for implementing your Agile Center of Excellence moving forward.
  • Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Activity: Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map (continued)

    Governance

    Policy Management (Medium Potential)

    Change Management (High Potential)

    Risk Management (High Potential)

    Stakeholder Management (High Potential)

    Metrics/Feedback Monitoring (High Potential)

    Shared Services

    Engagement Planning (High Potential)

    Knowledge Management (High Potential)

    Subject-Matter Expertise (High Potential)

    Agile Team Evaluation (High Potential)

    Operations Support (High Potential)

    People

    Onboarding (Medium Potential)

    Coaching (High Potential)

    Learning Facilitation (High Potential)

    Internal Certification Program (Low Potential)

    Communications Training (Medium Potential)

    Technology

    Vendor Management (Medium Potential)

    Application Support (Low Potential)

    Tooling Standards (High Potential)

    Checkpoint: Are you ready to standardize your CoEs service offerings?

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Self-Auditing Guidelines

    • Have you identified and prioritized the key business objectives for the upcoming year that the ACE will align with?
    • Do you have a high-level set of use cases for points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives?
    • Have you mapped your stakeholders and identified the key players that will have an influence over the future success of your ACE?
    • Have you identified how your organization will fund, resource, and govern the ACE?
    • Have you collected data to understand the functional expectations of the users the ACE is intended to serve?
    • Have you refined your use cases to align with both business objectives and functional expectations?

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.2 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives

    Our analyst team will help you organize and prioritize your business objectives for the year in order to ensure that the service offerings the ACE offers are delivering consistent business value.

    1.1.3 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives

    Our analyst team will help you turn your prioritized business objectives into a set of high-level use cases that will provide the foundation for defining user-aligned services.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.1.4 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders

    Our analysts will walk you through an exercise of mapping and prioritizing your Centers of Excellence stakeholders based on impact and power within so you can ensure appropriate presentation of interests within the organization.

    1.2.4 Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities

    Our analyst team will help you solidify the direction of your Center of Excellence by overlaying your identified needs, pain points, and potential opportunities in a matrix guided by Info-Tech’s CoE operating model.

    1.2.5 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services

    Our analyst team will help you further refine your business-aligned use cases with the functional expectations from your Agile teams and stakeholders, ensuring the ACEs long-term utility.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.2.6 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map

    Our analysts will walk you through creating your Agile Centers of Excellence capability map and help you to prioritize which service offerings are critical to the success of your Agile teams in meeting their objectives.

    Phase 2

    Standardize the Centers of Excellence Service Offerings

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    The ACE needs to ensure consistency in service delivery

    Now that you have aligned the CoE to the business and functional expectations, you need to ensure its service offerings are consistently accessible. To effectively ensure accessibility and delegation of shared services in an efficient way, the CoE needs to have a consistent framework to deliver its services.

    Phase 1 - Strategically Align the CoE

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision. This alignment translates into the CoE mandate intended to enhance the way Agile will enable teams to meet business objectives.

    Phase 2 - Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization. Create and consolidate key performance indicators to measure the CoEs utility and whether or not the expected value is being translated to tangible results.

    Phase 3 - Operate the CoE

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change so that teams can grow within the Agile adoption model and optimize value delivery both within your Agile environment and across functions.

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2

    Step 2.1: Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Dissect the key attributes of Agile adoption.

    Then complete these activities…

    2.1.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model.

    Step 2.2: Create an ACE engagement plan

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Form engagement plans for your Agile teams.

    Then complete these activities…

    2.2.1 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption.

    Step 2.3: Define metrics to measure success

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Discuss effective ACE metrics.

    Then complete these activities…

    2.3.1 Collect existing team-level metrics.

    2.3.2 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives.

    2.3.3 Define target ACE performance metrics.

    2.3.4 Define Agile adoption metrics.

    2.3.5 Consolidate metrics for stakeholder impact.

    2.3.6 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Benefits Tracking Tool to monitor, evaluate, refine, and ensure continued business value.

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • Standardizing your service offerings allows you to have direct influence on the dissemination of best practices.

    Phase 2, Step 1: Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    2.1.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model.

    Outcomes:

    • Refine your previously determined use cases within the Agile adoption model to ensure that teams can be assisted at any level of Agile adoption.
    • Understand the key attributes of Agile adoption and how they impact success.

    Understand the implementation challenges that the ACE may face

    Culture clash between ACE and larger organization

    It is important to carefully consider the compatibility between the current organizational culture and Agile moving forward. Agile compels empowered teams, meritocracy, and broad collaboration for success; while typical organizational structures are siloed and hierarchical and decisions are delegated from the top down.

    This is not to say that the culture of the ACE has to match the larger organizational culture; part of the overarching aim of the ACE is to evolve the current organizational culture for the better. The point is to ensure you enable a smooth transition with sufficient management support and a team of Agile champions.

    The changing role of middle management

    Very similar to the culture clash challenge, cultural rigidity in how middle managers operate (performance review, human resource management, etc.) can cause cultural rejection. They need to become enablers for high performance and give their teams the sufficient tools, skills, and opportunities to succeed and excel.

    What impedes Agile adoption?

    Based on a global survey of Agile practitioners (N=1,319)*:

    52% Organizational culture at odds with agile values

    44% Inadequate management support and sponsorship

    48% General organization resistance to change

    *Respondents were able to make multiple selections

    (13th Annual State of Agile Report, VersionOne, 2019)

    Build competency and trust through a structured Agile adoption plan

    The reality of cultural incompatibility between Agile and traditional organization structures necessitates a structured adoption plan. Systematically build competency so teams can consistently achieve project success and solidify trust in your teams’ ability to meet business needs with Agile.

    By incrementally gaining the trust of management as you build up your Agile capabilities, you enable a smooth cultural transition to an environment where teams are empowered, adapt quickly to changing needs, and are trusted to innovate and make successes out of their failures.

    Optimized value delivery occurs when there is a direct relationship between competency and trust. There will be unrealized value when competency or trust outweigh the other. That value loss increases as either dimension of adoption continues to grow faster than the other.

    The image shows a graph with Competency on the x-axis and Trust on the y-axis. There are 3 sections: Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3, in subsequently larger arches in the background of the graph. The graph shows two diagonal arrows, the bottom one labelled Current Value Delivery and the top one labelled Optimized Value Delivery. The space between the two arrows is labelled Value Loss.

    Use Info-Tech’s Practice Adoption Optimization Model to systematically increase your teams’ ability to deliver

    Using Info-Tech’s Practice adoption optimization model will ensure you incrementally build competency and trust to optimize your value delivery.

    Agile adoption at its core, is about building social capital. Your level of trust with key influencers increases as you continuously enhance your capabilities, enabling the necessary cultural changes away from traditional organizational structures.

    Trust & Competency ↓

    DEFINE

    Begin to document your development workflow or value chain, implement a tracking system for KPIs, and start gathering metrics and reporting them transparently to the appropriate stakeholders.

    ITERATE

    Use collected metrics and retrospectives to stabilize team performance by reducing areas of variability in your workflow and increasing the consistency at which targets are met.

    COLLABORATE

    Use information to support changes and adopt appropriate practices to make incremental improvements to the existing environment.

    EMPOWER

    Drive behavioral and cultural changes that will empower teams to be accountable for their own success and learning.

    INNOVATE

    Use your built-up trust and support practice innovation, driving the definition and adoption of new practices.

    Review these key attributes of Agile adoption

    Agile adoption is unique to every organization. Consider these key attributes within your own organizational context when thinking about levels of Agile adoption.

    Adoption Attributes

    Team Organization

    Considers the degree to which teams are able to self-organize based on internal organizational structures (hierarchy vs. meritocracy) and inter-team capabilities.

    Team Coordination

    Considers the degree to which teams can coordinate, both within and across functions.

    Business Alignment

    Considers the degree to which teams can understand and/or map to business objectives.

    Coaching

    Considers what kind of coaching/training is offered and how accessible the training is.

    Empowerment

    Considers the degree to which teams are able and capable to address project, process, and technical challenges without significant burden from process controls and bureaucracy.

    Failure Tolerance

    Considers the degree to which stakeholders are risk tolerant and if teams are capable of turning failures into learning outcomes.

    Why are these important?

    These key attributes function as qualities or characteristics that, when improved, will successively increase the degree to which the business trusts your Agile teams’ ability to meet their objectives.

    Systematically improving these attributes as you graduate levels of the adoption model allows the business to acclimatize to the increased capability the Agile team is offering, and the risk of culture clash with the larger organization decreases.

    Start to consider at what level of adoption each of your service offerings become useful. This will allow you to standardize the way your Agile teams interact with the CoE.

    Activity: Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model

    2.1.1 1.5 Hours

    Input

    • List of service offerings

    Output

    • Service offerings categorized within adoption model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Team
    1. Gather the list of your categorized use cases.
    2. Based on Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model, categorize which use cases would be useful to help the Agile team graduate to the next level of adoption.
      • Conceptualize: Begin to document your workflow or value chain, implement a tracking system for KPIs, and gather metrics and report them transparently to the appropriate stakeholders.
      • Iterate: Use collected metrics to stabilize team performance by reducing areas of variability in your workflow and increasing the consistency at which targets are met.
      • Collaborate: Use information to drive changes and adopt appropriate Agile practices to make incremental improvements to the existing environment.
      • Empower: Drive behavioral and cultural changes that will empower teams to be accountable for their own successes given the appropriate resources.
      • Innovate: Use your built-up trust to begin to make calculated risks and innovate more, driving new best practices into the CoE.

    The same service offering could be offered at different levels of adoption. In these cases, you will need to re-visit the use case and differentiate how the service (if at all) will be delivered at different levels of adoption.

    1. Use this opportunity to brainstorm alternative or new use cases for any gaps identified. It is the CoEs goal to assist teams at every level of adoption to meet their business objectives. Use a different colored sticky note for these so you can re-visit and map out their inputs, outputs, metrics, etc.

    Activity: Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model (continued)

    2.1.1 1.5 Hours

    Input

    • List of service offerings

    Output

    • Service offerings categorized within adoption model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Team

    Example:

    Service Offerings
    Level 5: Innovate
    Level 4: Empower
    Level 3: Collaborate Coaching -- Communications Training
    Level 2: Iterate Tooling Standards
    Level 1: Conceptualize

    Learning Facilitation

    Draw on the service offerings identified in activity 1.2.4

    Phase 2, Step 2: Create an ACE engagement plan

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    2.2.1 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption.

    Outcomes:

    • Understand the importance of aligning with the functional expectations of your ACE customers.
    • Understand the relationship between engagement and continuous improvement.
    • Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption to standardize the way customers interact with the ACE.

    Enable Agile teams to interface with ACE service offerings to meet their business objectives

    A Center of Excellence aligned with your service offerings is only valuable if your CoEs customers can effectively access those services. At this stage, you have invested in ensuring that your CoE aligns to your business objectives and that your service offerings align to its customers. Now you need to ensure that these services are accessible in the day-to-day operation of your Agile teams.

    Engagement Process → Service Offering

    Use backwards induction from your delivery method to the service offering. This is an effective method to determine the optimal engagement action for the CoE, as it considers the end customer as the driver for best action for every possible situation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your engagement process should be largely informed by your ACE users. Teams have constraints as well as in-the-trenches concerns and issues. If your service offerings don’t account for these, it can lead to rejection of the culture you are trying to inspire.

    Show the way, do not dictate

    Do not fix problems for your Agile teams, give them the tools and knowledge to fix the problems themselves.

    Facilitate learning to drive success

    A primary function of your ACE is to transfer knowledge to Agile teams to increase their capability to achieve desired outcomes.

    While this can take the form of coaching, training sessions, libraries, and wikis, a critical component of ACE is creating interactions where individuals from Agile teams can come together and share their knowledge.

    Ideas come from different experiences. By creating communities of practice (CoP) around topics that the ACE is tasked with supporting (e.g. Agile business analysts), you foster social learning and decrease the likelihood that change will result in some sort of cultural rejection.

    Consider whether creating CoPs would be beneficial in your organization’s context.

    "Communities of practice are a practical way to frame the task of managing knowledge. They provide a concrete organizational infrastructure for realizing the dream of a learning organization." – Etienne Wenger, Digital Habitats: Stewarding technology for communities

    A lack of top-down support will result in your ACE being underutilized

    Top-down support is critical to validate the CoE to its customers and ensure they feel compelled to engage with its services. Relevancy is a real concern for the long-term viability of a CoE and championing its use from a position of authority will legitimize its function and deter its fading from relevancy of day-to-day use for Agile teams.

    Although you are aligning your engagement processes to the customers of your Agile Center of Excellence, you still need your key influencers to champion its lasting organizational relevancy. Don’t let your employees think the ACE is just a coordinating body or a committee that is convenient but non-essential – make sure they know that it drives their own personal growth and makes everyone better as a collective.

    "Even if a CoE is positioned to meet a real organizational need, without some measure of top-down support, it faces an uphill battle to remain relevant and avoid becoming simply one more committee in the eyes of the wider organization. Support from the highest levels of the organization help fight the tendency of the larger organization to view the CoE as a committee with no teeth and tip the scales toward relevancy for the CoE." – Joe Shepley, VP and Practice Lead, Doculabs

    Info-Tech Insight

    Stimulate top-down support with internal certifications. This allows your employees to gain accreditation while at the same time encouraging top-down support and creating a compliance check for the continual delivery and acknowledgement of your evolving best practices.

    Ensure that best practices and lessons learned are injected back into the ACE

    For your employees to continuously improve, so must the Center of Excellence. Ensure the ACE has the appropriate mechanisms to absorb and disseminate best practices that emerge from knowledge transfer facilitation events.

    Facilitated Learning Session →Was the localized adaption well received by others in similar roles? →Document Localized Adaptation →Is there broad applicability and benefit to the proposed innovation? →CoE Absorbs as Best Practice

    Continuous improvement starts with the CoE

    While facilitating knowledge transfer is key, it is even more important that the Center of Excellence can take localized adaptations from Agile teams and standardize them as best practices when well received. If an individual were to leave without sharing their knowledge, the CoE and the larger organization will lose that knowledge and potential innovation opportunities.

    Experience matters

    To organically grow your ACE and be cost effective, you want your teams to continuously improve and to share that knowledge. As individual team members develop and climb the adoption model, they should participate as coaches and champions for less experienced groups so that their knowledge is reaching the widest audience possible.

    Case study: Agile learning at Spotify

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Digital Media

    Source Henrik Kniberg & Anders Ivarsson, 2012

    Methods of Agile learning at Spotify

    Spotify has continuously introduced innovative techniques to facilitate learning and ensure that that knowledge gets injected back into the organization. Some examples are the following:

    • Hack days: Self-organizing teams, referred to as squads, come together, try new ideas, and share them with their co-workers. This facilitates a way to stay up to date with new tools and techniques and land new product innovations.
    • Coaching: Every squad has access to an Agile coach to help inject best practices into their workflow – coaches run retrospectives, sprint planning meetings, facilitate one-on-one coaching, etc.
    • Tribes: Collections of squads that hold regular gatherings to show the rest of the tribe what they’ve been working on so others can learn from what they are doing.
    • Chapters: People with similar skills within a tribe come together to discuss their area of expertise and their specific challenges.
    • Guilds: A wide-reaching community of interest where members from different tribes can come together to share knowledge, tools, and codes, and practice (e.g. a tester guild, an Agile coaching guild).

    The image shows the Spotify model, with two sections, each labelled Tribe, and members from within each Tribe gathered together in a section labelled Guild.

    "As an example of guild work, we recently had a ‘Web Guild Unconference,’ an open space event where all web developers at Spotify gathered up in Stockholm to discuss challenges and solutions within their field."

    Activity: Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption

    2.2.1 30 Minutes per role

    Input

    • Categorized use cases

    Output

    • Role-based engagement plans

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Team
    1. On the top bar, define the role you are developing the engagement plan for. This will give you the ability to standardize service delivery across all individuals in similar roles.
    2. Import your categorized service offerings for each level of adoption that you think are applicable to the given role.
    3. Using backwards induction, determine the engagement processes that will ensure that those service offerings are accessible and fit the day-to-day operations of the role.
    4. Fill in the template available on the next slide with each role’s engagement plan.

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Example engagement plan: Developer

    2.2.1 30 Minutes per role

    Role: Developer
    Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
    Service Offering
    1. Onboarding
    2. Coaching
    3. Learning Facilitation
    1. Tooling Standards
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Communications Training
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Subject-Matter Expertise
    2. Coaching
    1. Knowledge Management
    Engagement Process
    1. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager.
    2. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager.
    3. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    1. When determined to have graduated to level 2, receive standard Agile tooling standards training.
    2. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    1. When determined to have graduated to level 3, receive standard Agile communications training.
    2. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings
    1. Peer-based training on how to effectively self-organize.
    2. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager.
    1. Review captured key learnings from last and have CoE review KPIs related to any area changed.

    Example engagement plan: Tester

    2.2.1 30 Minutes per role

    Role: Tester
    Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5
    Service Offering
    1. Onboarding
    2. Coaching
    1. Product Training
    2. Communications Training
    1. Communications Training
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Subject-Matter Expertise
    2. Coaching
    1. Tooling Standards
    2. Training
    3. Coaching
    Engagement Process
    1. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager.
    1. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    2. Provide training on effective methods for communicating with development teams based on organizational best practices.
    1. When determined to have graduated to level 3, receive standard training based on organizational testing best practices. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    1. Peer-to-peer training with level 5 certified coach.
    2. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager. .
    1. Periodic updates of organizational tooling standards based on community of practice results.
    2. Automation training.
    3. Provide coaching to level 1 developers on a rotating basis to develop facilitation skills.

    Example engagement plan: Product Owner

    2.2.1 30 Minutes per role

    Role: Product Owner
    Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
    Service Offering
    1. Onboarding
    2. Coaching
    1. Coaching
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Coaching
    2. Communications Training
    3. Learning Facilitation
    1. Coaching
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Coaching
    2. Learning Facilitation
    Engagement Process
    1. Provide onboarding materials for Agile product owners.
    2. Provide bi-weekly reviews and subsequent guidance at the end of retrospective processes.
    1. Provide monthly reviews and subsequent guidance based on retrospective results.
    2. Bi-weekly mandatory community of practice meetings
    1. When determined to have graduated to level 3, receive standard training based on organizational testing best practices.
    2. Bi-weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    1. Provide monthly reviews and subsequent guidance based on retrospective results.
    2. Bi-weekly mandatory community of practice meetings
    1. Provide quarterly reviews and subsequent guidance based on retrospective results.
    2. Bi-weekly mandatory community of practice meetings

    Phase 2, Step 3: Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    2.3.1 Define existing team-level metrics.

    2.3.2 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives.

    2.3.3 Define target ACE performance metrics.

    2.3.4 Define Agile adoption metrics.

    2.3.5 Consolidate your metrics for stakeholder impact.

    2.3.6 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Benefits Tracking Tool to monitor, evaluate, refine, and ensure continued business value.

    Outcomes:

    • Understand the importance of aligning with the functional expectations of your ACE customers.
    • Understand the relationship between engagement and continuous improvement.
    • Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption to standardize the way customers interact with the ACE.

    Craft metrics that will measure the success of your Agile teams

    Quantify measures that demonstrate the effectiveness of your ACE by establishing distinct metrics for each of your service offerings. This will ensure that you have full transparency over the outputs of your CoE and that your service offerings maintain relevance and are utilized.

    Questions to Ask

    1. What are leading indicators of improvements that directly affect the mandate of the CoE?
    2. How do you measure process efficiency and effectiveness?

    Creating meaningful metrics

    Specific

    Measureable

    Achievable

    Realistic

    Time-bound

    Follow the SMART framework when developing metrics for each service offering.

    Adhering to this methodology is a key component of the lean management methodology. This framework will help you avoid establishing general metrics that aren’t relevant.

    "It’s not about telling people what they are doing wrong. It’s about constantly steering everyone on the team in the direction of success, and never letting any individual compromise the progress of the team toward success." – Mary Poppendieck, qtd. in “Questioning Servant Leadership”

    For important advice on how to avoid the many risks associated with metrics, refer to Info-Tech’s Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively.

    Ensure your metrics are addressing criteria from different levels of stakeholders and enterprise context

    There will be a degree of overlap between the metrics from your business objectives, service offerings, and existing Agile teams. This is a positive thing. If a metric can speak to multiple benefits it is that much more powerful in commuting successes to your key stakeholders.

    Existing metrics

    Business objective metrics

    Service offering metrics

    Agile adoption metrics

    Finding points of overlap means that you have multiple stakeholders with a vested interest in the positive trend of a specific metric. These consolidated metrics will be fundamental for your CoE as they will help build consensus through communicating the success of the ACE in a common language for a diverse audience.

    Activity: Define existing team-level metrics

    2.3.1 1 Hour

    Input

    • Current metrics

    Output

    • Service offerings categorized within adoption model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Team
    1. Gather any metrics related documentation that you collected during your requirements gathering in Phase 1.
    2. Collect team-level metrics for your existing Agile teams:
      • Examine outputs from any feedback mechanisms you have (satisfaction surveys, emails, existing SLAs, burndown charts, resourcing costs, licensing costs per sprint, etc.).
      • Look at historical trends and figures when available. Be careful of frequent anomalies as these may indicate a root cause that needs to be addressed.
      • Explore the definition of specific metrics across different functional teams to ensure consistency of measurement and reporting.
    Team Objective Expected Benefits Metrics
    Improve productivity
    • Improve transparency with business decisions
    • Team burndown and velocity
    • Number of releases per milestone
    Increase team morale and motivation
    • Teams are engaged and motivated to develop new opportunities to deliver more value quicker.
    • Team satisfaction with Agile environment
    • Degree of engagement in ceremonies
    Improve transparency with business decisions
    • Teams are engaged and motivated to develop new opportunities to deliver more value quicker.
    • Stakeholder satisfaction with completed product
    • Number of revisions to products in demonstrations

    Activity: Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives

    2.3.2 1 Hour

    Input

    • Organizational business objectives from Phase 1

    Output

    • Metrics aligned to organizational business objectives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. List the business objectives that you determined in 1.1.2.
    2. Create a shortlist of expected benefits from those business objectives. These will help to drive metrics that align with the intended purpose of completing those business objectives, and affirm they are aligned to realizable benefits.
    3. Define metrics that speak to the benefits of your business objectives. While engaging in this process, ensure to document the collection method for each metrics.
    Business Objectives Expected Benefits Metrics
    Decrease time-to-market of product releases
    • Faster feedback from customers.
    • Increased customer satisfaction.
    • Competitive advantage.
    Decrease time-to-market of product releases
    • Alignment to organizational best practices.
    • Improved team productivity.
    • Greater collaboration across functional teams.
    • Policy and practice adherence and acknowledgement
    • Number of requests for ACE services
    • Number of suggestions to improve Agile best practices and ACE operations

    Activity: Define target ACE performance metrics

    2.3.3 1 Hour

    Input

    • Service offerings
    • Satisfaction surveys
    • Usage rates

    Output

    • CoE performance metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. Define metrics to measure the success of each of your service offerings.
    2. Create a shortlist of expected benefits from those business objectives. These will help to drive metrics that align with the intended purpose of those service offerings, and affirm they are aligned to realizable benefits.
    3. Define metrics that speak to the benefits of your service offerings.
    4. Compare these to your team performance metrics.
    Service Offering Expected Benefits Metrics
    Knowledge management
    • Comprehensive knowledgebase that accommodates various company products and office locations.
    • Easily accessible resources.
    • Number of practices extracted from ACE and utilized
    • Frequency of updates to knowledgebase
    Tooling standards
    • Tools adhere to company policies, security guidelines, and regulations.
    • Improved support of tools and technologies.
    • Tools integrate and function well with enterprise systems.
    • Number of teams and functional groups using standardized tools
    • Number of supported standardized tools
    • Number of new tools added to the standards list
    • Number of tools removed from standards list

    Activity: Define Agile adoption metrics

    2.3.4 1 Hour

    Input

    • Agile adoption model

    Output

    • Agile adoption metrics
    1. Define metrics to measure the success of each of your service offerings.
    2. Create a shortlist of expected benefits from those business objectives. These will help to drive metrics that align with the intended purpose of those service offerings, and affirm they are aligned to realizable benefits.
    3. Define metrics that speak to the benefits of your service offerings.
    4. It is possible that you will need to adjust these metrics after baselines are established when you begin to operate the ACE. Keep this in mind moving forward.
    Adoption attributes Expected Benefits Metrics
    Team organization
    • Acquisition of the appropriate roles and skills to successfully deliver products.
    • Degree of flexibility to adjust team compositions on a per project basis
    Team coordination
    • Ability to successfully undertake large and complex projects involving multiple functional groups.
    • Number of ceremonies involving teams across functional groups
    Business alignment
    • Increased delivery of business value from process optimizations.
    • Number of business-objective metrics surpassing targets
    Coaching
    • Teams are regularly trained with new and better best practices.
    • Number of coaching and training requests
    Empowerment
    • Teams can easily and quickly modify processes to improve productivity without following a formal, rigorous process.
    • Number of implemented changes from team retrospectives
    Failure tolerance
    • Stakeholders trust teams will adjust when failures occur during a project.
    • Degree of stakeholder trust to address project issues quickly and effectively

    Activity: Consolidate your metrics for stakeholder impact

    2.3.5 30 Minutes

    Input

    • New and existing Agile metrics

    Output

    • Consolidated Agile metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. Take all the metrics defined from the previous activities and compare them as a group.
    2. If there are overlapping metrics that are measuring similar outcomes or providing similar benefits, see if there is a way to merge them together so that a single metric can report outcomes to multiple stakeholders. This reduces the amount of resources invested in metrics gathering and helps to show consensus or alignment between multiple stakeholder interests.
    3. Compare these to your existing Agile metrics, and explore ways to consolidate existing metrics that are established with some of your new metrics. Established metrics are trusted and if they can be continued it can be viewed as beneficial from a consensus and consistency perspective to your stakeholders.

    Activity: Use Info-Tech’s ACE Benefits Tracking Tool to monitor, evaluate, refine, and ensure continued business value

    2.3.6 1 Hour

    Purpose

    The CoE governance team can use this tool to take ownership of the project’s benefits, track progress, and act on any necessary changes to address gaps. In the long term, it can be used to identify whether the team is ahead, on track, or lagging in terms of benefits realization.

    Steps

    1. Enter your identified metrics from the following activities into the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool.
    2. Input your baselines from your data collection (Phase 3) and a goal value for each metric.
    3. Document the results at key intervals as defined by the tool.
    4. Use the summary report to identify metrics that are not tracking well for root cause analysis and communicate with key stakeholders the outcomes of your Agile Center of Excellence based on your communication schedule from Phase 3, Step 3.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool.

    Checkpoint: Are you ready to operate your ACE?

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Self Auditing Guidelines

    • Have you categorized your ACE service offerings within Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model?
    • Have you formalized engagement plans to standardize the access to your service offerings?
    • Do you understand the function of learning events and their criticality to the function of the ACE?
    • Do you understand the key attributes of Agile adoption and how social capital leads to optimized value delivery?
    • Have you defined metrics for different goals (adoption, effective service offerings, business objectives) of the ACE?
    • Do your defined metrics align to the SMART framework?

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model

    Our analyst team will help you categorize the Centers of Excellence service offerings within Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model to help standardize the way your organization engages with the Center of Excellence.

    2.2.1 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption

    Our analyst team will help you structure engagement plans for each role within your Agile environment to provide a standardized pathway to personal development and consistency in practice.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.3.2 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives

    Our analysts will walk you through defining a set of metrics that align with your Agile business objectives identified in Phase 1 of the blueprint so the CoEs monitoring function can ensure ongoing alignment during operation.

    2.3.3 Define target ACE performance metrics

    Our analysts will walk you through defining a set of metrics that monitors how successful the ACE has been at providing its services so that business and IT stakeholders can ensure the effectiveness of the ACE.

    2.3.4 Define Agile adoption metrics

    Our analyst team will help you through defining a set of metrics that aligns with your organization’s fit of the Agile adoption model in order to provide a mechanism to track the progress of Agile teams maturing in capability and organizational trust.

    Phase 3

    Operationalize Your Agile Center of Excellence

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Operate your ACE to drive optimized value from your Agile teams

    The final step is to engage in monitoring of your metrics program to identify areas for improvement. Using metrics as a driver for operating your ACE will allow you to identify and effectively manage needed change, as well as provide you with the data necessary to promote outcomes to your stakeholders to ensure the long-term viability of the ACE within your organization.

    Phase 1 - Strategically Align the CoE

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision. This alignment translates into the CoE mandate intended to enhance the way Agile will enable teams to meet business objectives.

    Phase 2 - Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization. Create and consolidate key performance indicators to measure the CoEs utility and whether or not the expected value is being translated to tangible results.

    Phase 3 - Operate the CoE

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change so that teams can grow within the Agile adoption model and optimize value delivery both within your Agile environment and across functions.

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Operate the CoE

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): Variable depending on communication plan

    Step 3.1: Optimize the success of your ACE

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Conduct a baseline assessment of your Agile environment.

    Then complete these activities…

    3.1.1 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Satisfaction Survey to help establish your baseline.

    3.1.2 Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to measure the maturity level of your ACE.

    3.1.3 Prioritize ACE actions by monitoring your metrics.

    Step 3.2: Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Interface with the ACE with your change management function.

    Then complete these activities…

    3.2.1 Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile teams.

    3.2.2 Determine the root cause of each metric falling short of expectations.

    3.2.3 Brainstorm solutions to identified issues.

    3.2.4 Review your metrics program.

    3.2.5 Create a communication plan for change.

    Step 3.3: Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Build a communications deck for key stakeholders.

    Then complete these activities…

    3.3.1 Use the outputs from your metrics tracking tool to communicate progress.

    3.3.2 Summarize adjustments in areas where the ACE fell short.

    3.3.3 Review the effectiveness of your service offerings.

    3.3.4 Evaluate your ACE Maturity.

    3.3.5 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Communications Deck to deliver your outcomes to the key stakeholders.

    Phase 3 Results & Insights:

    Inject improvements into your Agile environment with operational excellence. Plan changes and communicate them effectively, monitor outcomes on a regular basis, and keep stakeholders in the loop to ensure that their interests are being looked after to ensure long-term viability of the CoE.

    Phase 3, Step 1: Optimize the success of your ACE

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Tools:

    3.1.1 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Satisfaction Survey to help establish your baseline.

    3.1.2 Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to measure the maturity level of your ACE.

    3.1.3 Prioritize ACE actions by monitoring your metrics.

    Outcomes:

    • Conduct a baseline assessment of your ACE to measure against using a variety of data sources, including interviews, satisfaction surveys, and historical data.
    • Use the Benefits Tracking Tool to start monitoring the outcomes of the ACE and to keep track of trends.

    Ensure the CoE is able to collect the necessary data to measure success

    Establish your collection process to ensure that the CoE has the necessary resources to collect metrics and monitor progress, that there is alignment on what data sources are to be used when collecting data, and that you know which stakeholder is interested in the outcomes of that metric.

    Responsibility

    • Does the CoE have enough manpower to collect the metrics and monitor them?
    • If automated through technology, is it clear who is responsible for its function?

    Source of metric

    • Is the method of data collection standardized so that multiple people could collect the data in the same way?

    Impacted stakeholder

    • Do you know which stakeholder is interested in this metric?
    • How often should the interested stakeholder be informed of progress?

    Intended function

    • What is the expected benefit of increasing this metric?
    • What does the metric intend to communicate to the stakeholder?

    Conduct a baseline assessment of your ACE to measure success

    Establishing the baseline performance of the ACE allows you to have a reasonable understanding of the impact it is having on meeting business objectives. Use user satisfaction surveys, stakeholder interviews, and any current metrics to establish a concept of how you are performing now. Setting new metrics can be a difficult task so it is important to collect as much current data as possible. After the metrics have been established and monitored for a period of time, you can revisit the targets you have set to ensure they are realistic and usable.

    Without a baseline, you cannot effectively:

    • Establish reasonable target metrics that reflect the performance of your Center of Excellence.
    • Identify, diagnose, and resolve any data that deviates from expected outcomes.
    • Measure ongoing business satisfaction given the level of service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Invest the needed time to baseline your activities. These data points are critical to diagnose successes and failures of the CoE moving forward, and you will need them to be able to refine your service offerings as business conditions or user expectations change. While it may seem like something you can breeze past, the investment is critical.

    Use a variety of sources to get the best picture of your current state; a combination of methods provides the richest insight

    Interviews

    What to do:

    • Conduct interviews (or focus groups) with key influencers and Agile team members.

    Benefits:

    • Data comes from key business decision makers.
    • Identify what is top of mind for your top-level stakeholders.
    • Ask follow-up questions for detail.

    Challenges:

    • This will only provide a very high-level view.
    • Interviewer biases may skew the results.

    Surveys

    What to do:

    • Distribute an Agile-specific stakeholder satisfaction survey. The survey should be specific to identify factors of your current environment.

    Benefits:

    • Every end user/business stakeholder will be able to provide feedback.
    • The survey will be simple to develop and distribute.

    Challenges:

    • Response rates can be low if stakeholders do not understand the value in their opinions.

    Historical Data

    What to do:

    • Collect and analyze existing Agile data such as past retrospectives, Agile team metrics, etc.

    Benefits:

    • Get a full overview of current service offerings, past issues, and current service delivery.
    • Allows you to get an objective view of what is really going on within your Agile teams.

    Challenges:

    • Requires a significant time investment and analytical skills to analyze the data and generate insights on business satisfaction and needs.

    Use Info-Tech’s ACE Satisfaction Survey to help establish your baseline

    3.1.1 Baseline satisfaction survey

    Purpose

    Conduct a user satisfaction survey prior to setting your baseline for your ACE. This will include high-level questions addressing your overall Agile environment and questions addressing teams’ current satisfaction with their processes and technology.

    Steps

    1. Modify the satisfaction survey template to suit your organization and the service offerings you have defined for the Agile Center of Excellence.
    2. Distribute the satisfaction survey to any users who are expected to interface with the ACE.
    3. Document the results and communicate them with the relevant key stakeholders.
    4. Combine these results with historical data points (if available) and stakeholder interviews to get a holistic picture of your current state.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the ACE Satisfaction Survey.

    Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to measure the maturity level of your ACE

    3.1.2 CoE maturity assessment

    Purpose

    Assessing your ACEs maturity lets you know where they currently are and what to track to get them to the next step. This will help ensure your ACE is following good practices and has the appropriate mechanisms in place to serve your stakeholders.

    Steps

    1. Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to assess the maturity of your ACE.
    2. Complete the assessment tool with all members of your ACE team to determine your maturity score.
    3. Document the results and communicate them with the relevant key stakeholders.
    4. Combine these results with historical data points (if available) and stakeholder interviews to get a holistic picture of your ACE maturity level.

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool.

    Activity: Prioritize ACE actions by monitoring your metrics

    3.1.3 Variable time commitment

    Input

    • Metrics from ACE Benefits Tracking Tool

    Output

    • Prioritized actions for the ACE

    Materials

    • ACE Benefits Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Review your ACE Benefits Tracking Tool periodically (at the end of sprint cycles, quarterly, etc.) and document metrics that are trending or actively falling short of goals or expectations.
    2. Take the documented list and have the ACE staff consider what actions or decisions can be prioritized to help mend the identified gaps. Look for any trends that could potentially speak to a larger problem or a specific aspect of the ACE or the organizational Agile environment that is not functioning as expected.
    3. Take the opportunity to review metrics that are also tracking above expected value to see if there are any lessons learned that can be extended to other ACE service offerings (e.g. effective engagement or communication strategies) so that the organization can start to learn what is effective and what is not based on their internal struggles and challenges. Spreading successes is just as important as identifying challenges in a CoE model.

    Phase 3, Step 2: Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    3.2.1 Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile teams.

    3.2.2 Determine the root cause of each metric falling short of expectations.

    3.2.3 Brainstorm solutions to identified issues

    3.2.4 Review your metrics program.

    3.2.5 Create a communication plan for change.

    Outcomes:

    • Understand how your existing change management process interfaces with the Center of Excellence.
    • Identify issues and ideate solutions to metrics falling short of expectations.
    • Create a communication plan to prepare groups for any necessary change.

    Manage the adaptation of teams as they adopt Agile capabilities

    As Agile spreads, be cognizant of your cultural tolerance to change and its ability to deliver on such change. Change will happen more frequently and continuously, and there may be conceptual (change tolerance) or capability (delivery tolerance) roadblocks along the way that will need to be addressed.

    The Agile adoption model will help to graduate both the tolerance to change and tolerance to deliver over time. As your level of competency to deliver change increases, organizational tolerance to change, especially amongst management, will increase as well. Remember that optimized value delivery comes from this careful balance of aptitude and trust.

    Tolerance to change

    Tolerance to change refers to the conceptual capacity of your people to consume and adopt change. Change tolerance may become a barrier to success because teams might be too engrained with current structures and processes and find any changes too disruptive and uncomfortable.

    Tolerance to deliver

    Tolerance to deliver refers to the capability to deliver on expected change. While teams may be tolerant, they may not have the necessary capacity, skills, or resources to deliver the necessary changes successfully. The ACE can help solve this problem with training and coaching, or possibly by obtaining outside help where necessary.

    Understand how the ACE interfaces with your current change management process

    As the ACE absorbs best practices and identifies areas for improvement, a change management process should be established to address the implementation and sustainability of change without introducing significant disruptions and costs.

    To manage a continuously changing environment, your ACE will need to align and coordinate with organizational change management processes. This process should be capable of evaluating and incorporating multiple change initiatives continuously.

    Desired changes will need to be validated, and localized adaptations will need to be disseminated to the larger organization, and current state policy and procedures will need to be amended as the adoption of Agile spreads and capabilities increase.

    The goal here is to have the ACE governance group identify and interface with parties relevant to successfully implementing any specific change.

    INFO-TECH RELATED RESEARCH:

    Strategy and Leadership: Optimize Change Management

    Optimize your stakeholder management process to identify, prioritize, and effectively manage key stakeholders.

    Where should your Agile change requests come from?

    Changes to the services, structure, or engagement model of your ACE can be triggered from various sources in your organization. You will see that proposed changes may be requested with the best intentions; however, the potential impacts they may have to other areas of the organization can be significant. Consult all sources of ACE change requests to obtain a consensus that your change requests will not deteriorate the ACEs performance and use.

    ACE Governance

    • Sources of ACE Change Requests
      • ACE Policies/Stakeholders
        • Triggers for Change:
          • Changes in business and functional group objectives.
          • Dependencies and legacy policies and procedures.
      • ACE Customers
        • Triggers for Change:
          • Retrospectives and post-mortems.
          • Poor fit of best practices to projects.
      • Metrics
        • Triggers for Change:
          • Performance falling short of expectations.
          • Lack of alignment with changing objectives.
      • Tools and Technologies
        • Triggers for Change:
          • New or enhanced tools and technologies.
          • Changes in development and technology standards.

    Note: Each source of ACE change requests may require a different change management process to evaluate and implement the change.

    Activity: Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile teams

    3.2.1 1.5 Hours

    Input

    • Understanding of team and organization structure

    Output

    • Current assessment of organizational design

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Development team
    1. Identify everyone who is directly or indirectly involved in projects completed by Agile teams. This can include those that are:
    • Informed of a project’s progress.
    • Expected to interface with the Agile team for solution delivery (e.g. DevOps).
    • Impacted by the success of the delivered solutions.
    • Responsible for the removal of impediments faced by the Agile team.
  • Indicate how each role interacts with the others and how frequently these interactions occur for a typical project. Do this by drawing a diagram on a whiteboard using labelled arrows to indicate types and frequency of interactions.
  • Identify the possible communication, collaboration, and alignment challenges the team will face when working with other groups.
  • Agile Team n
    Group Type of Interaction Potential challenges
    Operations
    • Release management
    • Past challenges transitioning to DevOps.
    • Communication barrier as an impediment.
    PMO
    • Planning
    • Product owner not located with team in organization.
    • PMO still primarily waterfall; need Agile training/coaching

    Activity: Determine the root cause of each metric falling short of expectations

    3.2.2 30 Minutes per metric

    Input

    • Metrics from Benefits Tracking Tool

    Output

    • Root causes to issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Take each metric from the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool that is lagging behind or has missed expectations and conduct an analysis of why it is performing that way.
    2. Conduct individual webbing sessions to clarify the issues. The goal is to drive out the reasons why these issues are present or why scaling Agile may introduce additional challenges.
    3. Share and discuss these findings with the entire team.

    Example:

    • Lack of best-practice documentation
      • Why?
        • Knowledge siloed within teams
        • No centralized repository for best practices
          • Why?
            • No mechanisms to share between teams
              • Why? Root causes
                • Teams are not sharing localized adaptations
                • CoE is not effectively monitoring team communications
            • Access issues at team level to wiki
              • Why? Root causes
                • Administration issues with best-practice wiki
                • Lack of ACE visibility into wiki access

    Activity: Brainstorm solutions to identified issues

    3.2.3 30 Minutes per metric

    Input

    • Root causes of issues

    Output

    • Fixes and solutions to scaling Agile issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Development team
    1. Using the results from your root-cause analysis, brainstorm potential solutions to the identified problems. Frame your brainstorming within the following perspectives: people, process, and technology. Map these solutions using the matrix below.
    2. Synthesize your ideas to create a consolidated list of initiatives.
      1. Highlight the solutions that can address multiple issues.
      2. Collaborate on how solutions can be consolidated into a single initiative.
    3. Write your synthesized solutions on sticky notes.
    SOLUTION CATEGORY
    People Process Technology
    ISSUES Poor face-to-face communication
    Lack of best-practice documentation

    Engage those teams affected by change early to ensure they are prepared

    Strategically managing change is an essential component to ensure that the ACE achieves its desired function. If the change that comes with adopting Agile best practices is going to impact other functions and change their expected workflows, ensure they are well prepared and the benefits for said changes are clearly communicated to them.

    Necessary change may be identified proactively (dependency assessments, system integrity, SME indicates need, etc.) or reactively (through retrospectives, discussions, completing root-cause analyses, etc.), but both types need to be handled the same way – through proper planning and communication with the affected parties.

    Plan any necessary change

    Understand the points where other groups will be affected by the adoption of Agile practices and recognize the potential challenges they may face. Plan changes to accommodate interactions between these groups without roadblocks or impediments.

    Communicate the change

    Structure a communication plan based on your identified challenges and proposed changes so that groups are well prepared to make the necessary adjustments to accommodate Agile workflows.

    Review and modify your metrics and baselines to ensure they are achievable in changing environments

    Consider the possible limitations that will exist from environmental complexities when measuring your Agile teams. Dependencies and legacy policies and procedures that pose a bottleneck to desired outcomes will need to be changed before teams can be measured justifiably. Take the time to ensure the metrics you crafted earlier are plausible in your current environment and there is not a need for transitional metrics.

    Are your metrics achievable?

    Specific

    Measureable

    Achievable

    • Adopting Agile is a journey, not just a destination. Ensure that the metrics a team is measured against reflect expectations for the team’s current level of Agile adoption and consider external dependencies that may limit their ability to achieve intended results.

    Realistic

    Time-bound

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use metrics as diagnostics, not as motivation. Teams will find ways to meet metrics they are measured by making sacrifices and taking unneeded risk to do so. To avoid dysfunction in your monitoring, use metrics as analytical tools to inform decision making, not as a yardstick for judgement.

    Activity: Review your metrics program

    3.2.4 Variable time commitment

    Input

    • Identified gaps
    • Agile team interaction points

    Output

    • ACE baselines
    • Past measurements

    Materials

    • ACE Benefits Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. Now that you have identified gaps in your current state, see if those will have any impact on the achievability of your current metrics program.
    2. Review your root-cause analyses and brainstormed solutions, and hypothesize whether or not they will have any downstream impact to goal attainment. It is possible that there is no impact, but as cross-functional collaboration increases, the likelihood that groups will act as bottlenecks or impediments to expected performance will increase.
    3. Consider how any changes will impact the interaction points between teams based on the results from activity 3.2.1: Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile teams. If there are too many negative impacts it may be a sign to re-consider the hypothesized solution to the problem and consider alternatives.
    4. In any cases where a metric has been altered, adjust its goal measurement to reflect its changes in the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool.

    Case study: Agile change at the GSA

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Government

    Source Navin Vembar, Agile Government Leadership

    Challenge

    The GSA is tasked with completed management of the Integrated Award Environment (IAE).

    • The IAE manages ten federal information technology systems that enable registering, searching, and applying for federal awards, as well as tracking them.
    • The IAE also manages the Federal Service Desk.

    The IAE staff had to find a way to break down the problem of modernization into manageable chunks that would demonstrate progress, but also had to be sure to capture a wide variety of user needs with the ability to respond to those needs throughout development.

    Had to work out the logistics of executing Agile change within the GSA, an agency that relies heavily on telework. In the case of modernization, they had a product owner in Florida while the development team was spread across the metro Washington, DC area.

    Solution

    Agile provided the ability to build incremental successes that allowed teams successful releases and built enthusiasm around the potential of adopting Agile practices offered.

    • GSA put in place an organization framework that allowed for planning of change at the portfolio level to enable the change necessary to allow for teams to execute tasks at the project level.
    • A four-year plan with incremental integration points allowed for larger changes on a quarterly basis while maintaining a bi-weekly sprint cycle.
    • They adopted IBM’s RTC tool for a Scrum board and on Adobe Connect for daily Scrum sessions to ensure transparency and effectiveness of outcomes across their collocated teams.

    Create a clear, concise communication plan

    Communication is key to avoid surprises and lost productivity created by the implementation of changes.

    User groups and the business need to be given sufficient notice of an impending change. Be concise, be comprehensive, and ensure that the message is reaching the right audience so that no one is blindsided and unable to deliver what is needed. This will allow them to make appropriate plans to accept the change, minimizing the impact of the change on productivity.

    Key Aspects of a Communication Plan

    • The method of communication (email, meetings, workshops, etc.).
    • The delivery strategy (who will deliver the message?).
    • The communication responsibility structure.
    • The communication frequency.
    • A feedback mechanism that allows you to review the effectiveness of your plan.
    • The message that you need to present.

    Communicating change

    • What is the change?
    • Why are we doing it?
    • How are we going to go about it?
    • What are we trying to achieve?
    • How often will we be updated?

    (Cornelius & Associates, The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change)

    Apply the following principles to enhance the clarity of your message

    1. Be Consistent
    • "This is important because..."
      • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
      • Test your communication and obtain feedback before delivering your message.
      • A lack of consistency can be perceived as deception.
  • Be Clear
    • "This means..."
      • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
      • Choice of language is important.
      • Don’t use jargon.
  • Be Relevant
    • "This affects you because..."
      • Talk about what matters to the audience.
      • Talk about what matters to the change initiative.
      • Tailor the details of the message to each audience’s specific concerns.
      • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
  • Be Concise
    • "In summary..."
      • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
  • Activity: Create a communication plan for change

    3.2.5 1.5 Hours

    Input

    • Desired messages
    • Stakeholder list

    Output

    • Communication plan

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • CoE
    1. Define the audience(s) for your communications. Consider who needs to be the audience of your different communication events and how it will impact them.
    2. Identify who the messenger will be to deliver the message.
    3. Identify your communication methods. Decide on the methods you will use to deliver each communication event. Your delivery method may vary depending on the audience it is targeting.
    4. Establish a timeline for communication releases. Set dates for your communication events. This can be recurring (weekly, monthly, etc.) or one-time events.
    5. Determine what the content of the message must include. Use the guidelines on the following slide to ensure the message is concise and impactful.

    Note: It is important to establish a feedback mechanism to ensure that the communication has been effective in communicating the change to the intended audiences. This can be incorporated into your ACE satisfaction surveys.

    Audience Messenger Format Timing Message
    Operations Development team Email
    • Monthly (major release)
    • Ad hoc (minor release and fixes)
    Build ready for release
    Key stakeholders CIO Meeting
    • Monthly unless dictated otherwise
    Updates on outcomes from past two sprint cycles

    Phase 3, Step 3: Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities/Tools:

    3.3.1 Use the outputs from your metrics tracking tool to communicate progress.

    3.3.2 Summarize adjustments in areas where the ACE fell short.

    3.3.3 Re-conduct satisfaction surveys and compare against your baseline.

    3.3.4 Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to baseline current practices

    3.3.5 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Communications Deck to deliver your outcomes to the key stakeholders.

    Outcomes:

    • Conduct a retrospective of your ACE to enable the continuous improvement of your Agile program.
    • Structure a communications deck to communicate with stakeholders the outcomes from introducing the ACE to the organization.

    Reflect on your ACEs performance to lead the way to enterprise agility

    After functioning for a period of time, it is imperative to review the function of your ACE to ensure its continual alignment and see in what ways it can improve.

    At the end of the year, take the time to deliberately review and discuss:

    1. The effectiveness and use of your ACEs service offerings.
    2. What went well or wrong during the ACEs operation.
    3. What can be done differently to improve reach, usability, and effectiveness.
    4. Bring together Agile teams and discuss the processes they follow and inquire about suggestions for improvement.

    What is involved?

    • Use your metrics program to diagnose areas of issue and success. The diagnostic value of your metrics can help lead conversations with your Agile teams when attempting to inquire about suggestions for improvement.
    • Leverage your satisfaction surveys from the creation of your ACE and compare them against satisfaction surveys run after a year of operation. What are the lessons learned between then and now?
    • While it is primarily conducted by the ACE team, keep in mind it is a collaborative function and should involve all members, including Agile teams, product owners, Scrum masters, etc.

    Communicating with your key influencers is vital to ensure long-term operation of the ACE

    To ensure the long-term viability of your ACE and that your key influencers will continue funding, you need to demonstrate the ROI the Center of Excellence has provided.

    The overlying purpose of your ACE is to effectively align your Agile teams with corporate objectives. This means that there have to be communicable benefits that point to the effort and resources invested being valuable to the organization. Re-visit your prioritized stakeholder list and get ready to show them the impact the ACE has had on business outcomes.

    Communication with stakeholders is the primary method of building and developing a lasting relationship. Correct messaging can build bridges and tear down barriers, as well as soften opposition and bolster support.

    This section will help you to prepare an effective communication piece that summarizes the metrics stakeholders are interested in, as well as some success stories or benefits that are not communicable through metrics to provide extra context to ongoing successes of the ACE.

    INFO-TECH RELATED RESEARCH:

    Strategy and Leadership: Manage Stakeholder Relations

    Optimize your stakeholder management process to identify, prioritize, and effectively manage key stakeholders.

    Involve key stakeholders in your retrospectives to justify the funding for your ACE

    Those who fund the ACE have a large influence on the long-term success of your ACE. If you have not yet involved your stakeholders, you need to re-visit your organizational funding model for the ACE and ensure that your key stakeholders include the key decision makers for your funding. While they may have varying levels of interest and desires for granularity of data reporting, they need to at least be informed on a high level and kept as champions of the ACE so that there are no roadblocks to the long-term viability of this program.

    Keep this in mind as the ACE begins to demonstrate success, as it is not uncommon to have additional members added to your funding model as your service scales, especially in the chargeback models.

    As new key influencers are included, the ACEs governing group must ensure that collective interests may align and that more priorities don’t lead to derailment.

    The image shows a matrix. The matrix is labelled with Involvement at the bottom, and Power on the left side, and has the upper left quadrant labelled Keep Satisfied, the upper right quadrant labelled Key players, the lower right quadrant labelled Keep informed, and the lower left quadrant labelled Minimal effort. In the matric, there are several roles shown, with roles such as CFO, Apps Director, Funding Group, and CIO highlighted in the Key players section.

    Use the outputs from your metrics tracking tool to communicate progress

    3.3.1 1 Hour

    Use the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool to track the progress of your Agile environment to monitor whether or not the ACE is having a positive impact on the business’ ability to meet its objectives. The outputs will allow you to communicate incremental benefits that have been realized and point towards positive trends that will ensure the long-term buy-in of your key influencers.

    For communication purposes, use this tool to:

    • Re-visit who the impacted or interested stakeholders are so you can tailor your communications to be as impactful as possible for each key influencer of the ACE.

    The image shows a screen capture of the Agile CoE Metrics Tracking sheet.

    • Collate the benefits of the current projects undertaken by the Center of Excellence to give an overall recap of the ACEs impact.

    The image is a screen capture of the Summary Report sheet.

    Communicate where the ACE fell short

    Part of communicating the effectiveness of your ACE is to demonstrate that it is able to remedy projects and processes when they fall short of expectations and brainstorm solutions that effectively address these challenges. Take the opportunity to summarize where results were not as expected, and the ways in which the ACE used its influence or services to drive a positive outcome from a problem diagnosis. Stakeholders do not want a sugar-coated story – they want to see tangible results based on real scenarios.

    Summarizing failures will demonstrate to key influencers that:

    • You are not cherry-picking positive metrics to report and that the ACE faced challenges that it was able to overcome to drive positive business outcomes.
    • You are being transparent with the successes and challenges faced by the ACE, fostering increased trust within your stakeholders regarding the capabilities of Agile.
    • Resolution mechanisms are working as intended, successfully building failure tolerance and trust in change management policies and procedures.

    Activity: Summarize adjustments in areas where the ACE fell short

    3.3.2 15 Minutes per metric

    Input

    • Diagnosed problems from tracking tool
    • Root-cause analyses

    Output

    • Summary of change management successes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. Create a list of items from the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool that fell short of expectations or set goals.
    2. For each point, create a brief synopsis of the root-cause analysis completed and summarize the brainstormed solution and its success in remedying the issue. If this process is not complete, create a to-date summary of any progress.
    3. Choose two to three pointed success stories from this list that will communicate broad success to your set of stakeholders.
    Name of metric that fell short
    Baseline measurement 65% of users satisfied with ACE services.
    Goal measurement 80% of users satisfied with ACE services.
    Actual measurement 70% of users satisfied with ACE services.
    Results of root-cause analysis Onboarding was not extensive enough; teams were unaware of some of the services offered, rendering them unsatisfied.
    Proposed solution Revamp onboarding process to include capability map of service offered.
    Summary of success TBD

    Re-conduct surveys with the ACE Satisfaction Survey to review the effectiveness of your service offerings

    3.3.3 Re-conduct satisfaction surveys and compare against your baseline

    Purpose

    This satisfaction survey will give you a template to follow to monitor the effectiveness of your ACEs defined service offerings. The goal is to understand what worked, and what did not, so you can add, retract, or modify service offerings where necessary.

    Steps

    1. Re-use the satisfaction survey to measure the effectiveness of the service offerings. Add questions regarding specific service offerings where necessary.
    2. Cross-analyze your satisfaction survey with metrics tied to your service offerings to help understand the root cause of the issues.
    3. Use the root-cause analysis exercises from step 3.2 to find the root causes of issues.
    4. Create a set of recommendations to add, amend, or improve any existing service offerings.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the ACE Satisfaction Survey.

    Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to baseline current practices

    3.3.4 ACE Maturity Assessment

    Purpose

    Assess your ACEs maturity by using Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool. Assessing your ACEs maturity lets you know where you currently are, and where to look for improvements. Note that your optimal Maturity Level will depend on organizational specifics (e.g. a small organization with a handful of Agile Teams can be less mature than a large organization with hundreds of Agile Teams).

    Steps

    1. Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to assess the maturity of your ACE.
    2. Complete the assessment tool with all members of your ACE team to determine your current Maturity score.
    3. Document the results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool.

    Use Info-Tech’s ACE Communications Deck to deliver your outcomes to the key stakeholders

    3.3.5 Structure communications to each of your key stakeholders

    Purpose

    The ACE Communications Deck will give you a template to follow to effectively communicate with your stakeholders and ensure the long-term viability of your Agile Center of Excellence. Fill in the slides as instructed and provide each stakeholder with a targeted view of the successes of the ACE.

    Steps

    1. Determine who your target audience is for the Communications Deck – you may desire to create one for each of your key stakeholders as they may have different sets of interests.
    2. Fill out the ACE Communications Deck with the suggested inputs from the exercises you have completed during this research set.
    3. Review communications with members of the ACE to ensure that there are no communicable benefits that have been missed or omitted in the deck.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the ACE Communications Deck.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • An understanding of social capital as the key driver for organizational Agile success, and how it optimizes the value delivery of your Agile teams.
    • Importance of flexible governance to balance the benefits of localized adaptation and centralized control.
    • Alignment of service offerings with both business objectives and functional expectations as critical to ensuring long-term engagement with service offerings.

    Processes Optimized

    • Knowledge management and transfer of Agile best practices to new or existing Agile teams.
    • Optimization of service offerings for Agile teams based on organizational culture and objectives.
    • Change request optimization via interfacing ACE functions with existing change management processes.
    • Communication planning to ensure transparency during cross-functional collaboration.

    Deliverables Completed

    • A set of service offerings offered by the Center of Excellence that are aligned with the business, Agile teams, and related stakeholders.
    • Engagement plans for Agile team members based on a standardized adoption model to access the ACEs service offerings.
    • A suite of Agile metrics to measure effectiveness of Agile teams, the ACE itself, and its ability to deliver positive outcomes.
    • A communications plan to help create cross-functional transparency over pending changes as Agile spreads.
    • A communications deck to communicate Agile goals, actions, and outcomes to key stakeholders to ensure long-term viability of the CoE.

    Research contributors and experts

    Paul Blaney, Technology Delivery Executive, Thought Leader and passionate Agile Advocate

    Paul has been an Agile practitioner since the manifesto emerged some 20 years ago, applying and refining his views through real life experience at several organizations from startups to large enterprises. He has recently completed the successful build out of the inaugural Agile Delivery Centre of Excellence at TD bank in Toronto.

    John Munro, President Scrum Masters Inc.

    John Munro is the President of Scrum Masters Inc., a software optimization professional services firm using Agile, Scrum, and Lean to help North American firms “up skill” their software delivery people and processes. Scrum Masters’ unique, highly collaborative “Master Mind” consulting model leverages Agile/Lean experts on a biweekly basis to solve clients’ technical and process challenges.

    Doug Birgfeld, Senior Partner Agile Wave

    Doug has been a leader in building great teams, Agile project management, and business process innovation for over 20 years. As Senior Partner and Chief Evangelist at Agile Wave, his mission is to educate and to learn from all those who care about effective government delivery, nationally.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    Agile is a cultural shift. Don't just do Agile, be Agile.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods in the organization.

    Improve Application Development Throughput

    Drive down your delivery time by eliminating development inefficiencies and bottlenecks while maintaining high quality.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Accelerate software deployment through Dev and Ops collaboration.

    Related Info-Tech research (continued)

    Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence

    Optimize your organization’s enterprise application capabilities with a refined and scalable methodology.

    Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program

    Be proactive; it costs exponentially more to fix a problem the longer it goes unnoticed.

    Optimize the Change Management Process

    Right-size your change management process.

    Improve Requirements Gathering

    Back to basics: great products are built on great requirements.

    Bibliography

    Ambler, Scott. “Agile Requirements Change Management.” Agile Modeling. Scott Amber + Associates, 2014. Web. 12 Apr. 2016.

    Ambler, Scott. “Center of Excellence (CoEs).” Disciplined Agile 2.0: A Process Decision Framework for Enterprise I.T. Scott Amber + Associates. Web. 01 Apr. 2016.

    Ambler, Scott. “Transforming From Traditional to Disciplined Agile Delivery.” Case Study: Disciplined Agile Delivery Adoption. Scott Amber + Associates, 2013. Web.

    Beers, Rick. “IT – Business Alignment Why We Stumble and the Path Forward.” Oracle Corporation, July 2013. Web.

    Cornelius & Associates. “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, n.d. Web.

    Craig, William et al. “Generalized Criteria and Evaluation Method for Center of Excellence: A Preliminary Report.” Carnegie Mellon University Research Showcase @ CMU – Software Engineering Institute. Dec. 2009. Web. 20 Apr. 2016.

    Forsgren, Dr. Nicole et al (2019), Accelerate: State of DevOps 2019, Google, https://services.google.com/fh/files/misc/state-of-devops-2019.pdf

    Gerardi, Bart (2017), Agile Centers of Excellence, PMI Projectmanagement.com, https://www.projectmanagement.com/articles/405819/Agile-Centers-of-Excellence

    Gerardi, Bart (2017), Champions of Agile Adoption, PMI Projectmanagement.com, https://www.projectmanagement.com/articles/418151/Champions-of-Agile-Adoption

    Gerardi, Bart (2017), The Roles of an Agile COE, PMI Projectmanagement.com, https://www.projectmanagement.com/articles/413346/The-Roles-of-an-Agile-COE

    Hohl, P. et al. “Back to the future: origins and directions of the ‘Agile Manifesto’ – views of the originators.” Journal of Software Engineering Research and Development, vol. 6, no. 15, 2018. https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s40411-0...

    Kaltenecker, Sigi and Hundermark, Peter. “What Are Self-Organising Teams?” InfoQ. 18 July 2014. Web. 14 Apr. 2016.

    Kniberg, Henrik and Anderson Ivarsson. “Scaling Agile @ Spotify with Tribes, Squads, Chapters & Guilds.” Oct. 2012. Web. 30 Apr. 2016.

    Kumar, Alok et al. “Enterprise Agile Adoption: Challenges and Considerations.” Scrum Alliance. 30 Oct. 2014. Web. 30 May 2016.

    Levison, Mark. “Questioning Servant Leadership.” InfoQ, 4 Sept. 2008. Web. https://www.infoq.com/news/2008/09/servant_leadership/

    Linders, Ben. “Don't Copy the Spotify Model.” InfoQ.com. 6 Oct. 2016.

    Loxton, Matthew (June 1, 2011), CoP vs CoE – What’s the difference, and Why Should You Care?, Wordpress.com

    McDowell, Robert, and Bill Simon. In Search of Business Value: Ensuring a Return on Your Technology Investment. SelectBooks, 2010

    Novak, Cathy. “Case Study: Agile Government and the State of Maine.” Agile Government Leadership, n.d. Web.

    Pal, Nirmal and Daniel Pantaleo. “Services are the Language and Building Blocks of an Agile Enterprise.” The Agile Enterprise: Reinventing your Organization for Success in an On-Demand World. 6 Dec. 2015. Springer Science & Business Media.

    Rigby, Darrell K. et al (2018), Agile at Scale, Harvard Business Review, https://hbr.org/2018/05/agile-at-scale

    Scaledagileframework.com, Create a Lean-Agile Center of Excellence, Scaled Agile, Inc, https://www.scaledagileframework.com/lace/

    Shepley, Joe. “8 reasons COEs fail (Part 2).” Agile Ramblings, 22 Feb. 2010. https://joeshepley.com/2010/02/22/8-reasons-coes-fail-part-2/

    Stafford, Jan. “How upper management misconceptions foster Agile failures.” TechTarget. Web. 07 Mar. 2016.

    Taulli, Tom (2020), RPA Center Of Excellence (CoE): What You Need To Know For Success, Forbes.com, https://www.forbes.com/sites/tomtaulli/2020/01/25/rpa-center-of-excellence-coe-what-you-need-to-know-for-success/#24364620287a

    Telang, Mukta. “The CMMI Agile Adoption Model.” ScrumAlliance. 29 May 2015. Web. 15 Apr. 2016.

    VersionOne. “13th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne. 2019. Web.

    Vembar, Navin. “Case Study: Agile Government and the General Services Administration (Integrated Award Environment).” Agile Government Leadership, n.d. Web.

    Wenger, E., R. A. McDermott, et al. (2002), Cultivating communities of practice: A guide to managing knowledge, Harvard Business Press.

    Wenger, E., White, N., Smith, J.D. Digital Habitats; Stewarding Technology for Communities. Cpsquare (2009).

    Evolve Your Business Through Innovation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}330|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • Innovation teams are tasked with the responsibility of ensuring that their organizations are in the best position to succeed while the world is in a period of turmoil, chaos, and uncertainty.
    • CIOs have been expected to help the organization transition to remote work and collaboration instantaneously.
    • CEOs are under pressure to redesign, and in some cases reinvent, their business model to cope with and compete in a new normal.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    It is easy to get swept up during a crisis and cling to past notions of normal. Unfortunately, there is no controlling the fact that things have changed fundamentally, and it is now incumbent upon you to help your organization adapt and evolve. Treat this as an opportunity because that is precisely what this is.

    Impact and Result

    There are some lessons we can learn from innovators who have succeeded through past crises and from those who are succeeding now.

    There are a number of tactics an innovation team can employ to help their business evolve during this time:

    1. Double down on digital transformation (DX)
    2. Establish a foresight capability
    3. Become a platform for good

    Evolve Your Business Through Innovation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Evolve your business through innovation

    Download our guide to learn what you can do to evolve your business and innovate your way through uncertainty.

    • Evolve Your Business Through Innovation Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Change Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}3|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}3|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}3|upsells{/j2store}
    • Download01-Title: Change Management Executive Brief
    • Download-01: Visit Link
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $35,031
    • member rating average days saved: 34
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Every company needs some change management. Both business and IT teams benefit from knowing what changes when.

    incident, problem, problemchange

    Terms of use

     These Terms of Use state the terms and conditions under which you may use this website and the Services, which are the property of Tymans Group BV. ("TY"). Your use of this site and the Services constitutes acceptance of these Terms of Use.
    1. General Use Restrictions

    TY services, advice, materials, products, websites, and networks (collectively the "Services") are to be used for the User (meaning a named individual user that uses the publicly available Services or is authorized by TY in a service agreement to use the Services that require paid access) use and benefit only pursuant to the terms and limitations of the paid subscription and may not be disclosed, disseminated or distributed to any other party, except as TY otherwise agrees in writing. The User will not circumvent any encryption or otherwise gain access to Services for which the User has not been expressly granted the appropriate rights of access.

    The User will not use the Services for or knowingly transmit to TY or upload to any TY site or network any illegal, improper, or unacceptable material or use them for illegal, improper, or unacceptable practices, including without limitation the dissemination of any defamatory, fraudulent, infringing, abusive, lewd, obscene or pornographic material, viruses, trojan horses, time bombs, worms, or other harmful code designed to interrupt, destroy, or limit the functionality of any software, hardware or communications equipment, unsolicited mass email or other internet-based advertising campaigns, privacy breaches, denial of use attacks, spoofing, or impersonation.

    1. Copyright

    The Services are © Tymans Group BV. All rights reserved.

    The Services are owned by and copyrighted by TY and other parties and may contain trademarks of TY or others. They are protected by Canadian, US, and international copyright and trademark laws and conventions.

    User may use the Services solely for his or their own information purposes pursuant to the terms and limitations of the paid subscription. The User may download any of the Service's tools or templates for his or her individual use but may not distribute any articles, tools, templates, or blueprints internally, subject to the exceptions below. The User may create derivative works from the Service's tools or templates and distribute these for internal use but may not distribute these derivative works externally for any commercial or resale purposes.

    Any other reproduction or dissemination of the Services in any form or by any means is forbidden without TY's written permission, and without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the User will not:

    • A. record and re-transmit the Service over any network (including any local area network), except as otherwise stated above;
    • B. use any Service in any timesharing, service bureau, bulletin board, or similar arrangement or public display;
    • C. post any Service to any other online service (including bulletin boards or the internet);
    • D. sublicense, lease, sell, offer for sale or assign the Service; or
    • E. use TY's name or any excerpts from the Services in the promotion of its products or services.
    1. Users

    Users must be authorized to use the Services by TY. Users must maintain and protect the confidentiality of any password(s) and are responsible for ensuring that the passwords are effective. Users shall advise TY immediately if they discover that their password has been compromised at the following number: 1-888-670-8889. If you are an organization that is party to a service agreement with TY, references in these Terms of Use to "User(s)" include you, and you are responsible for compliance by named individual Users within your organization with these Terms of Use.

    1. User Perspective

    For the benefit of all Users, TY's research services include the ability for Users to (i) participate in the creation of research by contributing User perspectives for publication on TY's websites and (ii) participate in industry-specific community groups and other forums by contributing discussion posts. All such contributions are voluntary with the full consent of the User. If your account is used to contribute content to TY's websites (collectively, "User Contributions"), you agree to accept sole responsibility for those User Contributions, including the information, statements, facts, and material contained in any form or medium (e.g., text, audio, video, and photographic) therein. To the extent Users contribute any feedback to TY (as User Contributions or otherwise), TY may use that feedback to assess, improve, and market its products. To the extent Users contribute to research, TY may incorporate those contributions within the research Services without the necessity of attribution. You grant us and our affiliates a worldwide, irrevocable, royalty-free, nonexclusive license to use, reproduce, create derivative works of, distribute publicly display, and publish User Contributions. You agree you will not attempt to enforce any so-called "moral rights" in User Contributions against us or our affiliates.

    By using TY's research services, you agree that none of your User Contributions will:

    • Infringe on the intellectual property, trade secret, privacy, publicity, or other rights of others;
    • Contain false statements or misrepresentations that could damage TY or any third party;
    • Include obscene, libelous, defamatory, threatening, harassing, abusive, hateful, sexually explicit, sexually-oriented, profane, or embarrassing material, as determined by TY in its sole discretion;
    • Be illegal or otherwise objectionable;
    • Contain the personal information of any third party, including, without limitation, addresses, phone numbers, email addresses, Social Security numbers, and credit card numbers;
    • Encourage or facilitate insider trading or anti-competitive behavior;
    • Include commercial advertisements or solicitations; or
    • Purport to or actually provide legal or professional advice.

    BecauseTY's Web sites are available to the public, User Contributions on TY's Web sites are not Confidential Information.

    Although you are solely responsible for the content you provide, and we do not have a policy of reviewing or monitoring all User Contributions, we reserve the right to pre-screen and/or monitor User Contributions. If we become aware of User Contributions that violate these Terms of Service or that we believe to be otherwise objectionable, we may reject or delete them or take other action without notice to you and at our sole discretion.

    If you believe that any User Contributions appear to violate these Terms of Service, or if you believe any other user is engaged in illegal, harassing, or objectionable behavior, please contact us.

    1. Non-Disclosure of Confidential Information

    In these Terms of Use, "Confidential Information" means information of a commercially sensitive or proprietary character that is marked as confidential or that a reasonable person would understand to be confidential. The "Disclosing Party" is the party disclosing Confidential Information, and the "Receiving Party" is the party receiving Confidential Information. However, Confidential Information does not include information that:

    • was in the public domain at the time of communication to the Receiving Party or is later placed in the public domain by the Disclosing Party;
    • entered the public domain through no fault of the Receiving Party subsequent to the time of disclosure hereunder to the Receiving Party;
    • was in the Receiving Party's possession free of any obligation of confidence prior to disclosure hereunder; or
    • was developed by employees or agents of the Receiving Party independently of and without reference to any Confidential Information.

    The Receiving Party shall not disclose, publish or communicate the Confidential Information to any third party without the prior written consent of the Disclosing Party. However, the Receiving Party may disclose the Confidential Information to a third party who has a need to know the Confidential Information and (i) is an accountant, attorney, underwriter, or advisor under a duty of confidentiality; or (ii) is under a written obligation of confidentiality at least as restrictive as this Agreement and to the extent required by law.

    TY may create or use anonymized data for purposes such as benchmarking, analytics, and other good-faith business purposes. Anonymized data is not the Confidential Information of Users.

    1. Term

    Many of the Services are "subscription" services that have a fixed Term and must be renewed in writing at the end of the term for services to continue. The contractual term of membership is generally one (1) to three (3) years in length and is agreed to by the parties in writing. Workshops purchased as part of membership expire without refund or credit at the end of the membership period covered by the purchase. Workshops purchased outside membership expire without refund or credit one (1) year after purchase. TY may terminate a User's access at any time if the User or the entity paying for the User's access violates the terms of use or subscription or any other agreement with TY.

    1. Cancellation

    As the Services are paid in advance for a committed membership term, a service agreement or membership cannot be terminated by a User for convenience during a contractual term.

    1. Changes

    TY strives to innovate. TY may update, upgrade or otherwise change or discontinue content, features, or other aspects of its Services. TY will not make changes that cumulatively degrade the quality of a paid subscription to the Services. TY also reserves the right to change the terms and conditions applicable to your use of the Services unless TY has otherwise agreed in a service agreement. Use of the Services after such changes shall be deemed to be acceptance by the User of such changes. These terms were last revised on June 8, 2022.

    1. Accuracy of Information and Warranty

    The information contained in the Services has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable, but TY does not warrant the completeness, timeliness, or accuracy of any information contained in the Services. The Services are intended to: help identify business risks; provide insights based on industry research; and help you focus on certain matters which may be affecting your business. TY does not provide legal, accounting, or other professional advice, nor should any advice from TY be construed as such. We encourage you to seek professional advice whenever necessary.

    TY expressly excludes and disclaims all express or implied conditions, representations, and warranties, including, without limitation, any implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, to the extent allowable by law.

    Although TY takes reasonable steps to screen Services for infection by viruses, worms, Trojan horses, or other code manifesting contaminating or destructive properties before making the Services available, TY cannot guarantee that any Service will be free of infection.

    User assumes sole responsibility for the selection of the Services to achieve its intended results. The opinions expressed in the Services are subject to change without notice.

    TY does not endorse third-party products or services. TY assesses and analyzes the effectiveness and appropriateness of information technology in the context of a general business environment only unless specifically hired by a User to assess in the context of their own environment.

    1. Limitation of Liability

    In no event is TY liable for any special, indirect, consequential, incidental, punitive, or other damages however caused, whether in contract, tort, negligence, strict liability, operation of law, or otherwise (including without limitation damages for lost profits, business interruption or loss arising out of the use of or inability to use the Services, or any information provided in the Services, or claims attributable to errors, omissions or other inaccuracies in the Service or interpretations thereof), even if TY has been advised of the possibility of such damages. TY's total liability shall in no event exceed the amount paid by the User for the Service in question.

    The User acknowledges that TY has set its prices and sold the Services to it in reliance on the limitations of liability and disclaimers of warranties and damages set forth herein and that the same form a fundamental and essential basis of the bargain between the parties. They shall apply even if the contract between the User and TY is found to have failed in its fundamental or essential purpose or has been fundamentally breached.

    1. Links to Third-Party Sites

    Any third-party sites that are linked to the Services are not under TY's control. TY is not responsible for anything on the linked sites, including without limitation any content, links to other sites, any changes to those sites, or any policies those sites may have. TY provides links as a convenience only, and such links do not imply any endorsement by TY of those sites.

    1. Investment Advice

    The Services are not intended to be used for the purpose of, or as a basis for, making investment decisions or recommendations with respect to securities of any company or industry, and TY assumes no liability for decisions made, in whole or in part, on the basis of any information contained in the Services.

    1. Governing Law

    This site and any service agreement are governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada, excluding any conflicts of law provisions and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. Any legal action against TY shall take place in the courts of the province of Antwerp, Belgium. The parties attorn to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Ontario.

    1. Entire Agreement

    These standard terms of use, together with any service agreements and statements of work signed by the parties, contains the complete and exclusive statement of Agreement between the parties and supersedes all purchase order terms and conditions, understandings, proposals, negotiations, representations, or warranties of any kind whether written or oral.

    1. Privacy

    A User's right to privacy is of paramount importance to TY. See our Privacy Policy for more detail. The identity of our research clients is not considered personal or confidential information, and we may disclose that information for promotion and marketing purposes.

    1. Contact Information

    Attn: General Counsel

    legal@tymansgroup.com

    (US): 1-917-473-8669

    (BE): 32-468-142-754

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}341|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Because ROI is a financial concept, it can be difficult to apply ROI to anything that produces intangible value.
    • It is a lot harder to apply ROI to functions like data and analytics than it is to apply it to functions like sales without misrepresenting its true purpose.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The standard ROI formula cannot be easily applied to data and analytics and other critical functions across the organization.
    • Data and analytics ROI strategy is based on the business problem being solved.
    • The ROI score itself doesn’t have to be perfect. Key decision makers need to agree on the parameters and measures of success.

    Impact and Result

    • Agreed-upon ROI parameters
    • Defined measures of success
    • Optimized ROI program effectiveness by establishing an appropriate cadence between key stakeholders

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Data and Analytics ROI Strategy Deck – A guide for positioning ROI to maximize the value of data and analytics.

    This research is meant to ensure that data and analytics executives are aligned with the key business decision makers. Focus on the value you are trying to achieve rather than perfecting the ROI score.

    • Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics Storyboard

    2. Data and Analytics Service to Business ROI Map – An aligned ROI approach between key decision makers and data and analytics.

    A tool to be used by business and data and analytics decision makers to facilitate discussions about how to approach ROI for data and analytics.

    • Data and Analytics Service to Business ROI Map
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics

    Data and analytics ROI strategy is based on the business problem being solved and agreed-upon value being generated.

    Analyst Perspective

    Missing out on a significant opportunity for returns could be the biggest cost to the project and its sponsor.

    This research is directed to the key decision makers tasked with addressing business problems. It also informs stakeholders that have any interest in ROI, especially when applying it to a data and analytics platform and practice.

    While organizations typically use ROI to measure the performance of their investments, the key to determining what investment makes sense is opportunity cost. Missing out on a significant opportunity for return could be the biggest cost to the project and its sponsor. By making sure you appropriately estimate costs and value returned for all data and analytics activities, you can prioritize the ones that bring in the greatest returns.

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst,
    Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Ben Abrishami-Shirazi
    Technical Counselor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary – ROI on Data and Analytics

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Return on investment (ROI) is a financial term, making it difficult to articulate value when trying to incorporate anything that produces something intangible.

    The more financial aspects there are to a professional function (e.g. sales and commodity-related functions), the easier it is to properly assess the ROI.

    However, for functions that primarily enable or support business functions (such as IT and data and analytics), it is a lot harder to apply ROI without misrepresenting its true purpose.

    • Apples and oranges – There is no simple way to apply the standard ROI formula to data and analytics among other critical functions across the organization.
    • Boiling the ocean – Obsession with finding a way to calculate a perfect ROI on data and analytics.
    • Not getting the big picture – Data and analytics teams suffer a skill set deficit when it comes to commercial acumen.
    • Not seeing eye to eye – ROI does not account for time in its calculation, making it prone to misalignment between stakeholders.

    Approach ROI for data and analytics appropriately:

    • Answer the following questions:
      • What is the business problem?
      • Whose business problem is it?
      • What is the objective?
    • Define measures of success based on the answers to the questions above.
    • Determine an appropriate cadence to continuously optimize the ROI program for data and analytics in collaboration with business problem owners.

    Info-Tech Insight

    ROI doesn’t have to be perfect. Parameters and measures of success need to be agreed upon with the key decision makers.

    Glossary

    Return on Investment (ROI): A financial term used to determine how much value has been or will be gained or lost based on the total cost of investment. It is typically expressed as a percentage and is supported by the following formula:

    Payback: How quickly money is paid back (or returned) on the initial investment.
    Business Problem Owner (BPO): A leader in the organization who is accountable and is the key decision maker tasked with addressing a business problem through a series of investments. BPOs may use ROI as a reference for how their financial investments have performed and to influence future investment decisions.
    Problem Solver: A key stakeholder tasked with collaborating with the BPO in addressing the business problem at hand. One of the problem solver’s responsibilities is to ensure that there is an improved return on the BPO’s investments.
    Return Enhancers: A category for capabilities that directly or indirectly enhance the return of an investment.
    Cost Savers: A category for capabilities that directly or indirectly save costs in relation of an investment.
    Investment Opportunity Enablers: A category for capabilities that create or enable a new investment opportunity that may yield a potential return.
    Game Changing Components: The components of a capability that directly yield value in solving a business problem.

    ROI strategy on data and analytics

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates the ROI strategy on data and analytics.

    ROI roles

    Typical roles involved in the ROI strategy across the organization

    CDOs and CAOs typically have their budget allocated from both IT and business units.

    This is evidenced by the “State of the CIO Survey 2023” reporting that up to 63% of CDOs and CAOs have some budget allocated from within IT; therefore, up to 37% of budgets are entirely funded by business executives.

    This signifies the need to be aligned with peer executives and to use mechanisms like ROI to maximize the performance of investments.

    Source: Foundry, “State of the CIO Survey 2023.”

    Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}458|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $34,099 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • IT staff are overwhelmed with manual repetitive work.
    • You have little time for projects.
    • You cannot move as fast as the business wants.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Optimize before you automate.
    • Foster an engineering mindset.
    • Build a process to iterate.

    Impact and Result

    • Begin by automating a few tasks with the highest value to score quick wins.
    • Define a process for rolling out automation, leveraging SDLC best practices.
    • Determine metrics and continually track the success of the automation program.

    Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why you should reduce manual repetitive work with IT automation.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify automation candidates

    Select the top automation candidates to score some quick wins.

    • Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation – Phase 1: Identify Automation Candidates
    • IT Automation Presentation
    • IT Automation Worksheet

    2. Map and optimize process flows

    Map and optimize process flows for each task you wish to automate.

    • Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation – Phase 2: Map & Optimize Process Flows

    3. Build a process for managing automation

    Build a process around managing IT automation to drive value over the long term.

    • Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation – Phase 3: Build a Process for Managing Automation

    4. Build automation roadmap

    Build a long-term roadmap to enhance your organization's automation capabilities.

    • Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation – Phase 4: Build Automation Roadmap
    • IT Automation Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Automation Candidates

    The Purpose

    Identify top candidates for automation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Plan to achieve quick wins with automation for early value.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify MRW pain points.

    1.2 Drill down pain points into tasks.

    1.3 Estimate the MRW involved in each task.

    1.4 Rank the tasks based on value and ease.

    1.5 Select top candidates and define metrics.

    1.6 Draft project charters.

    Outputs

    MRW pain points

    MRW tasks

    Estimate of MRW involved in each task

    Ranking of tasks for suitability for automation

    Top candidates for automation & success metrics

    Project charter(s)

    2 Map & Optimize Processes

    The Purpose

    Map and optimize the process flow of the top candidate(s).

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Requirements for automation of the top task(s).

    Activities

    2.1 Map process flows.

    2.2 Review and optimize process flows.

    2.3 Clarify logic and finalize future-state process flows.

    Outputs

    Current-state process flows

    Optimized process flows

    Future-state process flows with complete logic

    3 Build a Process for Managing Automation

    The Purpose

    Develop a lightweight process for rolling out automation and for managing the automation program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ability to measure and to demonstrate success of each task automation, and of the program as a whole.

    Activities

    3.1 Kick off your test plan for each automation.

    3.2 Define process for automation rollout.

    3.3 Define process to manage your automation program.

    3.4 Define metrics to measure success of your automation program.

    Outputs

    Test plan considerations

    Automation rollout process

    Automation program management process

    Automation program metrics

    4 Build Automation Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build a roadmap to enhance automation capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear timeline of initiatives that will drive improvement in the automation program to reduce MRW.

    Activities

    4.1 Build a roadmap for next steps.

    Outputs

    IT automation roadmap

    Further reading

    Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation

    Free up time for value-adding jobs.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Automation cuts both ways.

    Automation can be very, very good, or very, very bad.
    Do it right, and you can make your life a whole lot easier.
    Do it wrong, and you can suffer some serious pain.
    All too often, automation is deployed willy-nilly, without regard to the overall systems or business processes in which it lives.
    IT professionals should follow a disciplined and consistent approach to automation to ensure that they maximize its value for their organization.

    Derek Shank,
    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • IT staff are overwhelmed with manual repetitive work.
    • You have little time for projects.
    • You cannot move as fast as the business wants.

    Complication

    • Automation is simple to say, but hard to implement.
    • Vendors claim automation will solve all your problems.
    • You have no process for managing automation.

    Resolution

    • Begin by automating a few tasks with the highest value to score quick wins.
    • Define a process for rolling out automation, leveraging SDLC best practices.
    • Determine metrics and continually track the success of the automation program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Optimize before you automate.The current way isn’t necessarily the best way.
    2. Foster an engineering mindset.Your team members may not be process engineers, but they should learn to think like one.
    3. Build a process to iterate.Effective automation can't be a one-and-done. Define a lightweight process to manage your program.

    Infrastructure & operations teams are overloaded with work

    • DevOps and digital transformation initiatives demand increased speed.
    • I&O is still tasked with security and compliance and audit.
    • I&O is often overloaded and unable to keep up with demand.

    Manual repetitive work (MRW) sucks up time

    • Manual repetitive work is a fact of life in I&O.
    • DevOps circles refer to this type of work simply as “toil.”
    • Toil is like treading water: it must be done, but it consumes precious energy and effort just to stay in the same place.
    • Some amount of toil is inevitable, but it's important to measure and cap toil, so it does not end up overwhelming your team's whole capacity for engineering work.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Follow our methodology to focus IT automation on reducing toil.

    Manual hand-offs create costly delays

    • Every time there is a hand-off, we lose efficiency and productivity.
    • In addition to the cost of performing manual work itself, we must also consider the impact of lost productivity caused by the delay of waiting for that work to be performed.

    Every queue is a tire fire

    Queues create waste and are extremely damaging. Like a tire fire, once you get started, they’re almost impossible to stamp out!

    Increase queues if you want

    • “More overhead”
    • “Lower quality”
    • “More variability”
    • “Less motivation”
    • “Longer cycle time”
    • “Increased risk”

    (Source: Edwards, citing Donald G. Reinersten: The Principles of Product Development Flow: Second Generation Lean Product Development )

    Increasing complexity makes I&O’s job harder

    Every additional layer of complexity multiplies points of failure. Beyond a certain level of complexity, troubleshooting can become a nightmare.

    Today, Operations is responsible for the outcomes of a full stack of a very complex, software-defined, API-enabled system running on infrastructure they may or may not own.
    – Edwards

    Growing technical debt means an ever-rising workload

    • Enterprises naturally accumulate technical debt.
    • All technology requires care and feeding.
    • I&O cannot control how much technology it’s expected to support.
    • I&O faces a larger and larger workload as technical debt accumulates.

    The systems built under each new technology paradigm never fully replace the systems built under the old paradigms. It’s not uncommon for an enterprise to have an accumulation of systems built over 10-15 years and have no budget, risk appetite, or even a viable path to replace them all. With each shift, who bares [SIC] the brunt of the responsibility for making sure the old and the new hang together? Operations, of course. With each new advance, Operations juggles more complexity and more layers of legacy technologies than ever before.
    – Edwards

    Most IT shops can’t have a dedicated engineering team

    • In most organizations, the team that builds things is best equipped to support them.
    • Often the knowledge to design systems and the knowledge to run those systems naturally co-exists in the same personnel resources.
    • When your I&O team is trying to do engineering work, they can end up frequently interrupted to perform operational tasks.
    A Venn Diagram is depicted which compares People who build things with People who run things. the two circles are almost completely overlapping, indicating the strong connection between the two groups.

    Personnel resources in most IT organizations overlap heavily between “build” and “run.”

    IT operations must become an engineering practice

    • Usually you can’t double your staff or double their hours.
    • IT professionals must become engineers.
    • We do this by automating manual repetitive work and reducing toil.
    Two scenarios are depicted. The first scenario is found at a hypothetical work camp, in which one employee performs the task of manually splitting firewood with an axe. In order to split twice as much firewood, the employee would need to spend twice the time. The second scenario is Engineering Operations. in this scenario, a wood processor is used to automate the task, allowing far more wood to be split in same amount of time.

    Build your Sys Admin an Iron Man suit

    Some CIOs see a Sys Admin and want to replace them with a Roomba. I see a Sys Admin and want to build them an Iron Man suit.
    – Deepak Giridharagopal, CTO, Puppet

    Two Scenarios are depicted. In one, an employee is replaced by automation, represented by a Roomba, reducing costs by laying off a single employee. In the second scenario, the single employee is given automated tools to do their job, represented by an iron-man suit, leading to a 10X boost in employee productivity.

    Use automation to reduce risk

    Consistency

    When we automate, we can make sure we do something the same way every time and produce a consistent result.

    Auditing and Compliance

    We can design an automated execution that will ship logs that provide the context of the action for a detailed audit trail.

    Change

    • Enterprise environments are continually changing.
    • When context changes, so does the procedure.
    • You can update your docs all you want, but you can't make people read them before executing a procedure.
    • When you update the procedure itself, you can make sure it’s executed properly.

    Follow Info-Tech’s approach: Start small and snowball

    • It’s difficult for I&O to get the staffing resources it needs for engineering work.
    • Rather than trying to get buy-in for resources using a “top down” approach, Info-Tech recommends that I&O score some quick wins to build momentum.
    • Show success while giving your team the opportunity to build their engineering chops.

    Because the C-suite relies on upwards communication — often filtered and sanitized by the time it reaches them — executives don’t see the bottlenecks and broken processes that are stalling progress.
    – Andi Mann

    Info-Tech’s methodology employs a targeted approach

    • You aren’t going to automate IT operations end-to-end overnight.
    • In fact, such a large undertaking might be more effort than it’s worth.
    • Info-Tech’s methodology employs a targeted approach to identify which candidates will score some quick wins.
    • We’ll demonstrate success, gain momentum, and then iterate for continual improvement.

    Invest in automation to reap long-term rewards

    • All too often people think of automation like a vacuum cleaner you can buy once and then forget.
    • The reality is you need to perform care and feeding for automation like for any other process or program.
    • To reap the greatest rewards you must continually invest in automation – and invest wisely.

    To get the full ROI on your automation, you need to treat it like an employee. When you hire an employee, you invest in that person. You spend time and resources training and nurturing new employees so they can reach their full potential. The investment in a new employee is no different than your investment in automation.– Edwards

    Measure the success of your automation program

    Example of How to Estimate Dollar Value Impact of Automation
    Metric Timeline Target Value
    Hours of manual repetitive work 12 months 20% reduction $48,000/yr.(1)
    Hours of project capacity 18 months 30% increase $108,000/yr.(2)
    Downtime caused by errors 6 months 50% reduction $62,500/yr.(3)

    1 15 FTEs x 80k/yr.; 20% of time on MRW, reduced by 20%
    2 15 FTEs x 80k/yr.; 30% project capacity, increased by 30%
    3 25k/hr. of downtime.; 5 hours per year of downtime caused by errors

    Automating failover for disaster recovery

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Financial Services
    Source Interview

    Challenge

    An IT infrastructure manager had established DR failover procedures, but these required a lot of manual work to execute. His team lacked the expertise to build automation for the failover.

    Solution

    The manager hired consultants to build scripts that would execute portions of the failover and pause at certain points to report on outcomes and ask the human operator whether to proceed with the next step.

    Results

    The infrastructure team reduced their achievable RTOs as follows:
    Tier 1: 2.5h → 0.5h
    Tier 2: 4h → 1.5h
    Tier 3: 8h → 2.5h
    And now, anyone on the team could execute the entire failover!

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Reduce Manual Repetitive Work With IT Automation – project overview

    1. Select Candidates 2. Map Process Flows 3. Build Process 4. Build Roadmap
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Identify MRW pain points

    1.2 Drill down pain points into tasks

    1.3 Estimate the MRW involved in each task

    1.4 Rank the tasks based on value and ease

    1.5 Select top candidates and define metrics

    1.6 Draft project charters

    2.1 Map process flows

    2.2 Review and optimize process flows

    2.3 Clarify logic and finalize future-state process flows

    3.1 Kick off your test plan for each automation

    3.2 Define process for automation rollout

    3.3 Define process to manage your automation program

    3.4 Define metrics to measure success of your automation program

    4.1 Build automation roadmap

    Guided Implementations

    Introduce methodology.

    Review automation candidates.

    Review success metrics.

    Review process flows.

    Review end-to-end process flows.

    Review testing considerations.

    Review automation SDLC.

    Review automation program metrics.

    Review automation roadmap.

    Onsite Workshop Module 1:
    Identify Automation Candidates
    Module 2:
    Map and Optimize Processes
    Module 3:
    Build a Process for Managing Automation
    Module 4:
    Build Automation Roadmap
    Phase 1 Results:
    Automation candidates and success metrics
    Phase 2 Results:
    End-to-end process flows for automation
    Phase 3 Results:
    Automation SDLC process, and automation program management process
    Phase 4 Results:
    Automation roadmap

    Availability and Capacity Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}10|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}10|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}10|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10.0
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,950
    • member rating average days saved: 10
    • Parent Category Name: Resilient IT Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /resilience/resilient-operations-and-it
    Develop your availability and capacity management plant and align it with exactly what the business expects.

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}216|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,860 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 14 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Most IT organizations do not have standard RFP templates and tools.
    • Many RFPs lack sufficient requirements.
    • Most RFP team members are not adequately trained on RFP best practices.
    • Most IT departments underestimate the amount of time that is required to perform an effective RFP.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Vendors generally do not like RFPs
      Vendors view RFPs as time consuming and costly to respond to and believe that the decision is already made.
    • Dont ignore the benefits of an RFI
      An RFI is too often overlooked as a tool for collecting information from vendors about their product offerings and services.
    • Leverage a pre-proposal conference to maintain an equal and level playing field
      Pre-proposal conference is a convenient and effective way to respond to vendors’ questions ensuring all vendors have the same information to provide a quality response.

    Impact and Result

    • A bad or incomplete RFP results in confusing and incomplete vendor RFP responses which consume time and resources.
    • Incomplete or misunderstood requirements add cost to your project due to the change orders required to complete the project.

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Storyboard – Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results

    Discover a proven process for your RFPs. Review Info-Tech’s process and understand how you can prevent your organization from leaking negotiation leverage while preventing vendors from taking control of your RFP. Our 7-phase process prevents a bad RFP from taking your time, money, and resources.

    • Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process Storyboard

    2. Define your RFP Requirements Tool – A convenient tool to gather your requirements and align them to your negotiation strategy.

    Use this tool to assist you and your team in documenting the requirements for your RFP. Use the results of this tool to populate the requirements section of your RFP.

    • RFP Requirements Worksheet

    3. RFP Development Suite of Tools – Use Info-Tech’s RFP, pricing, and vendor response tools and templates to increase your efficiency in your RFP process.

    Configure this time-saving suite of tools to your organizational culture, needs, and most importantly the desired outcome of your RFP initiative. This suite contains four unique RFP templates. Evaluate which template is appropriate for your RFP. Also included in this suite are a response evaluation guidebook and several evaluation scoring tools along with a template to report the RFP results to stakeholders.

    • RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool
    • Vendor Pricing Tool
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Short-Form RFP Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template
    • Excel Form RFP Tool
    • RFP Evaluation Guidebook
    • RFP Evaluation Tool
    • Vendor TCO Tool
    • Consolidated Vendor RFP Response Evaluation Summary
    • Vendor Recommendation Presentation

    Infographic

    Workshop: Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Foundation for Creating Requirements

    The Purpose

    Problem Identification

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Current process mapped and requirements template configured

    Activities

    1.1 Overview and level-setting

    1.2 Identify needs and drivers

    1.3 Define and prioritize requirements

    1.4 Gain business authorization and ensure internal alignment

    Outputs

    Map Your Process With Gap Identification

    Requirements Template

    Map Your Process With Gap Identification

    Requirements Template

    Map Your Process With Gap Identification

    Requirements Template

    Map Your Process With Gap Identification

    Requirements Template

    2 Creating a Sourcing Process

    The Purpose

    Define Success Target

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Baseline RFP and evaluation templates

    Activities

    2.1 Create and issue RFP

    2.2 Evaluate responses/proposals and negotiate the agreement

    2.3 Purchase goods and services

    Outputs

    RFP Calendar Tool

    RFP Evaluation Guidebook

    RFP Respondent Evaluation Tool

    3 Configure Templates

    The Purpose

    Configure Templates

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Templates

    Activities

    3.1 Assess and measure

    3.2 Review templates

    Outputs

    Long-Form RFP Template

    Short-Form RFP Template

    Excel-Based RFP Template

    Further reading

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes with a Robust RFP Process

    Lack of RFP Process Causes...
    • Stress
    • Confusion
    • Frustration
    • Directionless
    • Exhaustion
    • Uncertainty
    • Disappointment
    Solution: RFP Process
    Steps in an RFP Process, 'Identify Need', 'Define Business Requirements', 'Gain Business Authorization', 'Perform RFI/RFP', 'Negotiate Agreement', 'Purchase Good and Services', and 'Assess and Measure Performance'.
    • Best value solutions
    • Right-sized solutions
    • Competitive Negotiations
    • Better requirements that feed negotiations
    • Internal alignment on requirements and solutions
    • Vendor Management Governance Plan
    Requirements
    • Risk
    • Legal
    • Support
    • Security
    • Technical
    • Commercial
    • Operational
    • Vendor Management Governance
    Templates, Tools, Governance
    • RFP Template
    • Your Contracts
    • RFP Procedures
    • Pricing Template
    • Evaluation Guide
    • Evaluation Matrix
    Vendor Management
    • Scorecards
    • Classification
    • Business Review Meetings
    • Key Performance Indicators
    • Contract Management
    • Satisfaction Survey

    Analyst Perspective

    Consequences of a bad RFP

    Photo of Steven Jeffery, Principal Research Director, Vendor Management, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group

    “A bad request for proposal (RFP) is the gift that keeps on taking – your time, your resources, your energy, and your ability to accomplish your goal. A bad RFP is ineffective and incomplete, it creates more questions than it answers, and, perhaps most importantly, it does not meet your organization’s expectations.”

    Steven Jeffery
    Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
    Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Most IT organizations are absent of standard RFP templates, tools, and processes.
    • Many RFPs lack sufficient requirements from across the business (Legal, Finance, Security, Risk, Procurement, VMO).
    • Most RFP team members are not adequately trained on RFP best practices.
    • Most IT departments underestimate the amount of time required to perform an effective RFP.
    • An ad hoc sourcing process is a common recipe for vendor performance failure.

    Common Obstacles

    • Lack of time
    • Lack of resources
    • Right team members not engaged
    • Poorly defined requirements
    • Too difficult to change supplier
    • Lack of a process
    • Lack of adequate tools/processes
    • Lack of a vendor communications plan that includes all business stakeholders.
    • Lack of consensus as to what the ideal result should look like.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Establish a repeatable, consistent RFP process that maintains negotiation leverage and includes all key components.
    • Create reusable templates to expedite the RFP evaluation and selection process.
    • Maximize the competition by creating an equal and level playing field that encourages all the vendors to respond to your RFP.
    • Create a process that is clear and understandable for both the business unit and the vendor to follow.
    • Include Vendor Management concepts in the process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A well planned and executed sourcing strategy that focuses on solid requirements, evaluation criteria, and vendor management will improve vendor performance.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your challenge is to determine the best sourcing tool to obtain vendor information on capabilities, solution(s), pricing and contracting: RFI, RFP, eRFX.

    Depending on your organization’s knowledge of the market, your available funding, and where you are in the sourcing process, there are several approaches to getting the information you need.

    An additional challenge is to answer the question “What is the purpose of our RFX?”

    If you do not have in-depth knowledge of the market, available solutions, and viable vendors, you may want to perform an RFI to provide available market information to guide your RFP strategy.

    If you have defined requirements, approved funding, and enough time, you can issue a detailed, concise RFP.

    If you have “the basics” about the solution to be acquired and are on a tight timeframe, an “enhanced RFI” may fit your needs.

    This blueprint will provide you with the tools and processes and insights to affect the best possible outcome.

    Executive Summary

    Common Obstacles

    • Lack of process/tools
    • Lack of input from stakeholders
    • Stakeholders circumventing the process to vendors
    • Vendors circumventing the process to key stakeholders
    • Lack of clear, concise, and thoroughly articulated requirements
    • Waiting until the vendor is selected to start contract negotiations
    • Waiting until the RFP responses are back to consider vendor management requirements
    • Lack of clear communication strategy to the vendor community that the team adheres to

    Many organizations underestimate the time commitment for an RFP

    70 Days is the average duration of an IT RFP.

    The average number of evaluators is 5-6

    4 Is the average number of vendor submissions, each requiring an average of two to three hours to review. (Source: Bonfire, 2019. Note: The 2019 Bonfire report on the “State of the RFP” is the most recent published.)

    “IT RFPs take the longest from posting to award and have the most evaluators. This may be because IT is regarded as a complex subject requiring complex evaluation. Certainly, of all categories, IT offers the most alternative solutions. The technology is also changing rapidly, as are the requirements of IT users – the half-life of an IT requirement is less than six months (half the requirements specified now will be invalid six months from now). And when the RFP process takes up two of those months, vendors may be unable to meet changed requirements when the time to implement arrives. This is why IT RFPs should specify the problem to be resolved rather than the solution to be provided. If the problem resolution is the goal, vendors are free to implement the latest technologies to meet that need.” (Bonfire, “2019 State of the RFP”)

    Why Vendors Don’t Like RFPs

    Vendors’ win rate

    44%

    Vendors only win an average of 44% of the RFPs they respond to (Loopio, 2022).
    High cost to respond

    3-5%

    Vendors budget 3-5% of the anticipated contract value to respond (LinkedIn, 2017, Note: LinkedIn source is the latest information available).
    Time spent writing response

    23.8 hours

    Vendors spend on average 23.8 hours to write or respond to your RFP (Marketingprofs, 2021).

    Negative effects on your organization from a lack of RFP process

    Visualization titled 'Lack of RFP Process Causes' with the following seven items listed.

    Stress, because roles and responsibilities aren’t clearly defined and communication is haphazard, resulting in strained relationships.

    Confusion, because you don’t know what the expected or desired results are.

    Directionless, because you don’t know where the team is going.

    Uncertainty, with many questions of your own and many more from other team members.

    Frustration, because of all the questions the vendors ask as a result of unclear or incomplete requirements.

    Exhaustion, because reviewing RFP responses of insufficient quality is tedious.

    Disappointment in the results your company realizes.

    (Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP)

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Develop an inclusive and thorough approach to the RFP Process

    Steps in an RFP Process, 'Identify Need', 'Define Business Requirements', 'Gain Business Authorization', 'Perform RFI/RFP', 'Negotiate Agreement', 'Purchase Good and Services', and 'Assess and Measure Performance'.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. The secret to managing an RFP is to make it as manageable and as thorough as possible. The RFP process should be like any other aspect of business – by developing a standard process. With a process in place, you are better able to handle whatever comes your way, because you know the steps you need to follow to produce a top-notch RFP.
    2. The business then identifies the need for more information about a product/service or determines that a purchase is required.
    3. A team of stakeholders from each area impacted gather all business, technical, legal, and risk requirements. What are the expectations of the vendor relationship post-RFP? How will the vendors be evaluated?
    4. Based on the predetermined requirements, either an RFI or an RFP is issued to vendors with a predetermined due date.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight

    Without a well defined, consistent RFP process, with input from all key stakeholders, the organization will not achieve the best possible results from its sourcing efforts.

    Phase 1 insight

    Vendors are choosing to not respond to RFPs due to their length and lack of complete requirements.

    Phase 2 insight

    Be clear and concise in stating your requirements and include, in addition to IT requirements, procurement, security, legal, and risk requirements.

    Phase 3 insight

    Consider adding vendor management requirements to manage the ongoing relationship post contract.

    Tactical insight

    Consider the RFP Evaluation Process as you draft the RFP, including weighting the RFP components. Don’t underestimate the level of effort required to effectively evaluate responses – write the RFP with this in mind.

    Tactical insight

    Provide strict, prescriptive instructions detailing how the vendor should submit their responses. Controlling vendor responses will increase your team’s efficiency in evaluations while providing ease of reference responses across multiple vendors.

    Key deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverables:

    Info-Tech provides you with the tools you need to go to market in the most efficient manner possible, with guidance on how to achieve your goals.

    Sample of

    Long-Form RFP Template
    For when you have complete requirements and time to develop a thorough RFP.
    Sample of the Long-Form RFP Template deliverable. Short-Form RFP Template
    When the requirements are not as extensive, time is short, and you are familiar with the market.
    Sample of the Short-Form RFP Template deliverable.
    Lean RFP Template
    When you have limited time and some knowledge of the market and wish to include only a few vendors.
    Sample of the Lean RFP Template deliverable. Excel-Form RFP Template
    When there are many requirements, many options, multiple vendors, and a broad evaluation team.
    Sample of the Excel-Form RFP Template deliverable.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits
    • Side-by-side comparison of vendor capabilities
    • Pricing alternatives
    • No surprises
    • Competitive solutions to deliver the best results
    Mutual IT and Business Benefits
    • Reduced time to implement
    • Improved alignment between IT /Business
    • Improved vendor performance
    • Improved vendor relations
    Business Benefits
    • Budget alignment, reduced cost
    • Best value
    • Risk mitigation
    • Legal and risk protections

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is seven to twelve calls over the course of four to six months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    Phase 5

    Phase 6

    Phase 7

    Call #1: Identify the need Call #3: Gain business authorization Call #5: Negotiate agreement strategy Call #7: Assess and measure performance
    Call #2: Define business requirements Call #4: Review and perform the RFX or RFP Call #6: Purchase goods and services

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3
    Activities
    Answer “What problem do we need to solve?”

    1.1 Overview and level-setting

    1.2 Identify needs and drivers

    1.3 Define and prioritize requirements

    1.4 Gain business authorization and ensure internal alignment

    Define what success looks like?

    2.1 Create and issue RFP

    2.2 Evaluate responses/ proposals and negotiate the agreement.

    2.3 Purchase goods and services

    Configure Templates

    3.1 Assess and measure

    3.2 Review tools

    Deliverables
    1. Map your process with gap identification
    2. RFP Requirements Worksheet
    1. RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool
    2. RFP Evaluation Guidebook
    3. RFP Evaluation Tool
    1. Long-form RFP Template
    2. Short-form RFP Template
    3. Excel-based RFP Tool
    4. Lean RFP Template

    Phase 1

    Identify Need

    Steps

    1.1 Establish the need to either purchase goods/services (RFP) or acquire additional information from the market (RFI).

    Steps in an RFP Process with the first step, 'Identify Need', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • IT
    • Sourcing/Procurement
    • Finance

    Identify the need based on business requirements, changing technology, increasing vendor costs, expiring contracts, and changing regulatory requirements.

    Outcomes of this phase

    Agreement on the need to go to market to make a purchase (RFP) or to acquire additional information (RFI) along with a high-level agreement on requirements, rough schedule (is there time to do a full blown RFP or are you time constrained, which may result in an eRFP) and the RFP team is identified.

    Identify Need
    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Identify the Need for Your RFP

    • An RFP is issued to the market when you are certain that you intend to purchase a product/service and have identified an adequate vendor base from which to choose as a result of:

      • IT Strategy
      • Changes in technology
      • Marketplace assessment
      • Contract expiration/renewal
      • Changes in regulatory requirements
      • Changes in the business’ requirements
    • An RFI is issued to the market when you are uncertain as to available technologies or supplier capabilities and need budgetary costs for planning purposes.
    • Be sure to choose the right RFx tool for your situation!
    Stock photo of a pen circling the word 'needs' on a printed document.

    Phase 2

    Define Your RFP Requirements

    Steps

    2.1 Define and classify the technical, business, financial, legal, and support and security requirements for your business.

    Steps in an RFP Process with the second step, 'Define Business Requirements', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT
    • Legal
    • Finance
    • Risk management
    • Sourcing/Procurement
    • Business stakeholders

    Outcomes of this phase

    A detailed list of required business, technical, legal and procurement requirements classified as to absolute need(s), bargaining and concession need(s), and “nice to haves.”

    Define Business Requirements

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Define RFP Requirements

    Key things to consider when defining requirements

    • Must be inclusive of the needs of all stakeholders: business, technical, financial, and legal
    • Strive for clarity and completeness in each area of consideration.
    • Begin defining your “absolute,” “bargaining,” “concession,” and ‘”dropped/out of scope” requirements to streamline the evaluation process.
    • Keep the requirements identified as “absolute” to a minimum, because vendors that do not meet absolute requirements will be removed from consideration.
    • Do you have a standard contract that can be included or do you want to review the vendor’s contract?
    • Don’t forget Data Security!
    • Begin defining your vendor selection criteria.
    • What do you want the end result to look like?
    • How will you manage the selected vendor after the contract? Include key VM requirements.
    • Defining requirements can’t be rushed or you’ll find yourself answering many questions, which may create confusion.
    • Collect all your current spend and budget considerations regarding the needed product(s) and service(s).

    “Concentrate on the needs of the organization and not the wants of the individuals when creating requirements to avoid scope creep.” (Donna Glidden, ITRG Research Director)

    Leverage the “ABCD” approach found in our Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively blueprint:
    https://tymansgrpup.com/research/ss/prepare-for-negotiations-more-effectively

    2.1 Prioritize your requirements

    1 hr to several days

    Input: List of all requirements from IT and IT Security, Business, Sourcing/Procurement, Risk Management, and Legal

    Output: Prioritized list of RFP requirements approved by the stakeholder team

    Materials: The RFP Requirements Worksheet

    Participants: All stakeholders impacted by the RFP: IT, IT Security, the Business, Sourcing/ Procurement, Risk Management, Legal

    1. Use this tool to assist you and your team in documenting the requirements for your RFP. Leverage it to collect and categorize your requirements in preparation for negotiations. Use the results of this tool to populate the requirements section of your RFP.
    2. As a group, review each of the requirements and determine their priority as they will ultimately relate to the negotiations.
      • Prioritizing your requirements will set up your negotiation strategy and streamline the process.
      • By establishing the priority of each requirement upfront, you will save time and effort in the selection process.
    3. Review RFP requirements with stakeholders for approval.

    Download the RFP Requirements Worksheet

    Phase 3

    Gain Business Authorization

    Steps

    3.1 Obtain business authorization from the business, technology, finance and Sourcing/Procurement

    Steps in an RFP Process with the third step, 'Gain Business Authorization', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • Technology and finance (depending upon the business)
    • Sourcing/Procurement

    Outcomes of this phase

    Approval by all key stakeholders to proceed with the issuing of the RFP and to make a purchase as a result.

    Gain Business Authorization

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Gain Business Authorization

    Gain authorization for your RFP from all relevant stakeholders
    • Alignment of stakeholders
    • Agreement on final requirements
    • Financial authorization
    • Commitment of resources
    • Agreement on what constitutes vendor qualification
    • Finalization of selection criteria and their prioritization

    Obtaining cross-function alignment will clear the way for contract, SOW, and budget approvals and not waste any of your and your vendor’s resources in performing an RFP that your organization is not ready to implement or invest financial and human resources in.

    Stock photo of the word 'AUTHORIZED' stamped onto a white background with a much smaller stamp laying beside it.

    Phase 4

    Create and Issue

    Steps

    4.1 Build your RFP

    4.2 Decide RFI or not

    4.3 Create your RFP

    4.4 Receive & answer questions

    4.5 Perform Pre-Proposal Conference

    4.6 Evaluate responses

    Steps in an RFP Process with the fourth step, 'Perform RFI/RFP', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • The RFP owner
    • IT
    • Business SMEs/stakeholders

    Outcomes of this phase

    RFP package is issued to vendors and includes the date of the Pre-Proposal Conference, which should be held shortly after RFP release and includes all parties.

    SME’s/stakeholders participate in providing answers to RFP contact for response to vendors.

    Create and Issue Your RFP/RFI

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Build your RFP with evaluation in mind

    Easing evaluation frustrations

    At the beginning of your RFP creation process consider how your requirements will impact the vendor’s response. Concentrate on the instructions you provide the vendors and how you wish to receive their responses. View the RFP through the lens of the vendors and envision how they are going to respond to the proposal.

    Limiting the number of requirements included in the RFP will increase the evaluation team’s speed when reviewing vendors’ responses. This is accomplished by not asking questions for common features and functionality that all vendors provide. Don’t ask multiple questions within a question. Avoid “lifting” vendor-specific language to copy into the RFP as this will signal to vendors who their competition might be and may deter their participation. Concentrate your requirement questions to those areas that are unique to your solution to reduce the amount of time required to evaluate the vendors’ response.

    Things to Consider When Creating Your RFP:

    • Consistency is the foundation for ease of evaluation.
    • Provide templates, such as an Excel worksheet, for the vendor’s pricing submissions and for its responses to close-ended questions.
    • Give detailed instructions on how the vendor should organize their response.
    • Limit the number of open-ended questions requiring a long narrative response to must-have requirements.
    • Organize your requirements and objectives in a numerical outline and have the vendor respond in the same manner, such as the following:
      • 1
      • 1.1
      • 1.1.1

    Increase your response quality

    Inconsistent formatting of vendor responses prevents an apples-to-apples evaluation between vendor responses. Evaluation teams are frequently challenged and are unable to evaluate vendors’ responses equally against each other for the following reasons:

    Challenges
    • Vendor responses are submitted with different and confusing nomenclature
    • Inconsistent format in response
    • Disparate order of sections in the vendors responses
    • Different style of outlining their responses, e.g. 1.1 vs. I.(i)
    • Pricing proposal included throughout their response
    • Responses are comingled with marketing messages
    • Vendor answers to requirements or objectives are not consolidated in a uniform manner
    • Disparate descriptions for response subsections
    Prevention
    • Provide specific instructions as to how the vendor is to organize their response:
      • How to format and outline the response
      • No marketing material
      • No pricing in the body of the response
    • Provide templates for pricing, technical, operational, and legal aspects.

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Perform Request for Information

    Don’t underestimate the importance of the RFI

    As the name implies, a request for information (RFI) is a tool for collecting information from vendors about the companies, their products, and their services. We find RFIs useful when faced with a lot of vendors that we don’t know much about, when we want to benchmark the marketplace for products and services, including budgetary information, and when we have identified more potential vendors than we care to commit a full RFP to.

    RFIs are simpler and less time-consuming than RFPs to prepare and evaluate, so it can make a lot of sense to start with an RFI. Eliminating unqualified vendors from further consideration will save your team from weeding through RFP responses that do not meet your objectives. For their part, your vendors will appreciate your efforts to determine up-front which of them are the best bets before asking them to spend resources and money producing a costly proposal.

    While many organizations rarely use RFIs, they can be an effective tool in the vendor manager’s toolbox when used at the right time in the right way. RFIs can be deployed in competitive targeted negotiations.

    A Lean RFP is a two-stage strategy that speeds up the typical RFP process. The first stage is like an RFI on steroids, and the second stage is targeted competitive negotiation.

    Don’t rely solely on the internet to qualify vendors; use an RFI to acquire additional information before finalizing an RFP.

    4.2.1 In a hurry? Consider a Lean RFP instead of an RFP

    Several days
    1. Create an RFI with all of the normal and customary components. Next, add a few additional RFP-like requirements (e.g. operational, technical, and legal requirements). Make sure you include a request for budgetary pricing and provide any significant features and functionality requirements so that the vendors have enough information to propose solutions. In addition, allow the vendors to ask questions through your single point of coordination and share answers with all of the vendors. Finally, notify the vendors that you will not be doing an RFP.
    2. Review the vendors’ proposals and evaluate their proposals against your requirements along with their notional or budgetary pricing.
    3. Have the evaluators utilize the Lean RFP Template to record their scores accordingly.
    4. After collecting the scores from the evaluators, consolidate the scores together to discuss which vendors – we recommend two or three – you want to present demos.
    5. Based on the vendors’ demos, the team selects at least two vendors to negotiate contract and pricing terms with intent of selecting the best-value vendor.
    6. The Lean RFP shortens the typical RFP process, maintains leverage for your organization, and works great with low- to medium-spend items (however your organization defines them). You’ll get clarification on vendors’ competencies and capabilities, obtain a fair market price, and meet your internal clients’ aggressive timelines while still taking steps to protect your organization.

    Download the Lean RFP Template

    Download the RFP Evaluation Tool

    4.2.1 In a hurry? Consider a Lean RFP instead of an RFP continued

    Input

    • List of technical, operational, business, and legal requirements
    • Budgetary pricing ask

    Output

    • A Lean RFP document that includes the primary components of an RFP
    • Lean RFP vendors response evaluation

    Materials

    • Lean RFP Template
    • RFP Evaluation Tool
    • Contracting requirements
    • Pricing

    Participants

    • IT
    • Business
    • Finance
    • Sourcing/Procurement

    Case Study

    A Lean RFP saves time
    INDUSTRY: Pharmaceutical
    SOURCE: Guided Implementation
    Challenge
    • The vendor manager (VM) was experiencing pressure to shorten the expected five-month duration to perform an RFP for software that planned, coordinated, and submitted regulatory documents to the US Food and Drug Administration.
    • The VM team was not completely familiar with the qualified vendors and their solutions.
    • The organization wanted to capitalize on this opportunity to enhance its current processes with the intent of improving efficiencies in documentation submissions.
    Solution
    • Leveraging the Lean RFP process, the team reduced the 200+ RFP questionnaire into a more manageable list of 34 significant questions to evaluate vendor responses.
    • The team issued the Lean RFP and requested the vendors’ responses in three weeks instead of the five weeks planned for the RFP process.
    • The team modified the scoring process to utilize a simple weighted-scoring methodology, using a scale of 1-5.
    Results
    • The Lean RFP scaled back the complexity of a large RFP.
    • The customer received three vendor responses ranging from 19 to 43 pages and 60-80% shorter than expected if the RFP had been used. This allowed the team to reduce the evaluation period by three weeks.
    • The duration of the RFx process was reduced by more than two months – from five months to just under three months.

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    4.3.1 RFP Calendar

    1 hour

    Input: List duration in days of key activities, RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool, For all vendor-inclusive meetings, include the dates on your RFP calendar and reference them in the RFP

    Output: A timeline to complete the RFP that has the support of each stakeholder involved in the process and that allows for a complete and thorough vendor response.

    Materials: RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool

    Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. As a group, identify the key activities to be accomplished and the amount of time estimated to complete each task:
      1. Identify who is ultimately accountable for the completion of each task
      2. Determine the length of time required to complete each task
    2. Use the RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool to build the calendar specific to your needs.
    3. Include vendor-related dates in the RFP, i.e., Pre-Proposal Conference, deadline for RFP questions as well as response.

    Download the RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool

    Draft your RFP

    Create and issue your RFP, which should contain at least the following:
    • The ability for the vendors to ask clarifying questions (in writing, sent to the predetermined RFP contact)
    • Pre-Proposal/Pre-Bid Conference schedule where vendors can receive the same answer to all clarifying written questions
    • A calendar of events (block the time on stakeholder calendars – see template).
    • Instructions to potential vendors on how they should construct and return their response to enable effective and timely evaluation of each offer.
    • Requirements; for example: Functional, Operational, Technical, and Legal.
    • Specification drawings as if applicable.
    • Consider adding vendor management requirements – how do you want to manage the relationship after the deal is done?
    • A pricing template for vendors to complete that facilitates comparison across multiple vendors.
    • Contract terms required by your legal team (or your standard contract for vendors to redline as part of their response and rated/ranked accordingly).
    • Create your RFP with the evaluation process and team in mind to ensure efficiency and timeliness in the process. Be clear, concise, and complete in the document.
    • Consistency and completeness is the foundation for ease of evaluation.
    • Give vendors detailed instruction on how to structure and organize their response.
    • Limit the number of open-ended questions requiring a long narrative response.
    • Be sure to leverage Info-Tech’s proven and field-tested Short-Form, Long-Form, and Lean RFP Templates provided in this blueprint.

    Create a template for the vendors’ response

    Dictating to the vendors the format of their response will increase your evaluation efficiency
    Narrative Response:

    Create either a Word or Excel document that provides the vendor with an easy vehicle for their response. This template should include the question identifier that ties the response back to the requirement in the RFP. Instruct vendors to include the question number on any ancillary materials they wish to include.

    Pricing Response:

    Create a separate Excel template that the vendors must use to provide their financial offer. This template should include pricing for hardware, software, training, implementation, and professional services, as well as placeholders for any additional fees.

    Always be flexible in accepting alternative proposals after the vendor has responded with the information you requested in the format you require.

    Stock image of a paper checklist in front of a laptop computer's screen.

    4.3.2 Vendor Pricing Tool

    1 hour

    Input: Identify pricing components for hardware, software, training, consulting/services, support, and additional licenses (if needed)

    Output: Vendor Pricing Tool

    Materials: RFP Requirements Worksheet, Pricing template

    Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. Using a good pricing template will prevent vendors from providing pricing offers that create a strategic advantage designed to prevent you from performing an apples-to-apples comparison.
    2. Provide specific instructions as to how the vendor is to organize their pricing response, which should be submitted separate from the RFP response.
    3. Configure and tailor pricing templates that are specific to the product and/or services.
    4. Upon receipt of all the vendor’s responses, simply cut and paste their total response to your base template for an easy side-by-side pricing comparison.
    5. Do not allow vendors to submit financial proposals outside of your template.

    Download the Vendor Pricing Tool

    Three RFP Templates

    Choose the right template for the right sourcing initiative

    • Short-Form
    • Use the Short-Form RFP Template for simple, non-complex solutions that are medium to low dollar amounts that do not require numerous requirements.

    • Long-Form
    • We recommend the Long-Form RFP Template for highly technical and complex solutions that are high dollar and have long implementation duration.

    • Excel-Form
    • Leverage the Excel-Form RFP Tool for requirements that are more specific in nature to evaluate a vendor’s capability for their solution. This template is designed to be complete and inclusive of the RFP process, e.g., requirements, vendor response, and vendor response evaluation scoring.

    Like tools in a carpenters’ tool box or truck, there is no right or wrong template for any job. Take into account your organization culture, resources available, time frame, policies, and procedures to pick the right tool for the job. (Steve Jeffery, Principal Research Director, Vendor Management, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group)

    4.3.3 Short-Form RFP Template

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

    Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all participants agree to

    Materials: Short-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

    Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    • This is a less complex RFP that has relatively basic requirements and perhaps a small window in which the vendors can respond. As with the long-form RFP, exhibits are placed at the end of the RFP, an arrangement that saves both your team and the vendors time. Of course, the short-form RFP contains less-specific instructions, guidelines, and rules for vendors’ proposal submissions.
    • We find that short-form RFPs are a good choice when you need to use something more than a request for quote (RFQ) but less than an RFP running 20 or more pages. It’s ideal, for example, when you want to send an RFP to only one vendor or to acquire items such as office supplies, contingent labor, or commodity items that don’t require significant vendor risk assessment.

    Download the Short-Form RFP Template

    4.3.4 Long-Form RFP Template

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

    Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all stakeholders agree to

    Materials: Long-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

    Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    • A long-form or major RFP is an excellent tool for more complex and complicated requirements. This template is for a baseline RFP.
    • It starts with best-in-class RFP terms and conditions that are essential to maintaining your control throughout the RFP process. The specific requirements for the business, functional, technical, legal, and pricing areas should be included in the exhibits at the end of the template. That makes it easier to tailor the RFP for each deal, since you and your team can quickly identify specific areas that need modification. Grouping the exhibits together also makes it convenient for both your team to review and the vendors to respond.
    • You can use this sample RFP as the basis for your template RFP, taking it all as is or picking and choosing the sections that best meet the mission and objectives of the RFP and your organization.

    Download the Long-Form RFP Template

    4.3.5 Excel-Form RFP Tool

    Several weeks

    Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

    Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all stakeholders agree to

    Materials: Excel-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

    Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    • The Excel-Form RFP Tool is used as an alternative to the other RFP toolsets if you have multiple requirements and have multiple vendors to choose from.
    • Requirements are written as a “statement” and the vendor can select from five answers as to their ability to meet the requirements, with the ability to provide additional context and materials to augment their answers, as needed.
    • Requirements are listed separately in each tab, for example, Business, Legal, Technical, Security, Support, Professional Services, etc.

    Download the Excel-Form RFP Template

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Answer Vendor Questions

    Maintaining your equal and level playing field among vendors

    • Provide an adequate amount of time from the RFP issue date to the deadline for vendor questions. There may be multiple vendor staff/departments that need to read the RFP and then discuss their response approach and gather any clarifying questions, so we generally recommend three to five business days.
    • There should be one point of contact for all Q&A, which should be submitted in writing via email only. Be sure to plan for enough time to get the answers back from the RFP stakeholders.
    • After the deadline, collect all Q&A and begin the process of consolidating into one document.
    Large silver question mark.
    • Be sure to anonymize both vendor questions and your responses, so as not to reveal who asked or answered the question.
    • Send the document to all RFP respondents via your sourcing tool or BCC in an email to the point of contact, with read receipt requested. That way, you can track who has received and opened the correspondence.
    • Provide the answers a few days prior to the Pre-Proposal Conference to allow all respondents time to review the document and prepare any additional questions.
    • Begin the preparation for the Pre-Proposal Conference.

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Conduct Pre-Proposal Conference

    Maintain an equal and level playing field

    • Consolidate all Q&A to be presented to all vendors during the Pre-Proposal Conference.
    • If the Pre-Proposal Conference is conducted via conference call, be sure to record the session and advise all participants at the beginning of the call.
    • Be sure to have key stakeholders present on the call to answer questions.
    • Read each question and answer, after which ask if there are any follow up questions. Be sure to capture them and then add them to the Q&A document.
    • Remind respondents that no further questions will be entertained during the remainder of the RFP response period.
    • Send the updated and completed document to all vendors (even if circumstances prevented their attending the Pre-Proposal Conference). Use the same process as when you sent out the initial answers: via email, blind copy the respondents and request read/receipt.

    “Using a Pre-Proposal Conference allows you to reinforce that there is a level playing field for all of the vendors…that each vendor has an equal chance to earn your business. This encourages and maximizes competition, and when that happens, the customer wins.” (Phil Bode, Principal Research Director, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Pre-Proposal Conference Agenda

    Modify this agenda for your specific organization’s culture
    1. Opening Remarks & Welcome – RFP Manager
      1. Agenda review
      2. Purpose of the Pre-Proposal Conference
    2. Review Agenda
      1. Introduction of your (customer) attendees
    3. Participating Vendor Introduction (company name)
    4. Executive or Sr. Leadership Comments (limit to five minutes)
      1. Importance of the RFP
      2. High-level business objective or definition of success
    5. Review Key Dates in the RFP

    (Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Jeffery et al., 2019)
    1. Review of any Technical Drawings or Information
      1. Key technical requirements and constraints
      2. Key infrastructure requirements and constraints
    2. Review of any complex RFP Issues
      1. Project scope/out of scope
    3. Question &Answer
      1. Vendors’ questions in alphabetical order
    4. Review of Any Specific Instructions for the Respondents
    5. Conclusion/Closing
      1. Review how to submit additional questions
      2. Remind vendors of the single point of contact

    Allow your executive or leadership sponsor to leave the Pre-Proposal Conference after they provide their comments to allow them to continue their day while demonstrating to the vendors the importance of the project.

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Evaluate Responses

    Other important information

    • Consider separating the pricing component from the RFP responses before sending them to reviewers to maintain objectivity until after you have received all ratings on the proposals themselves.
    • Each reviewer should set aside focused time to carefully read each vendor’s response
    • Read the entire vendor proposal – they spent a lot time and money responding to your request, so please read everything.
    • Remind reviewers that they should route any questions to the vendor through the RFP manager.
    • Using the predetermined ranking system for each section, rate each section of the response, capturing any notes, questions, or concerns as you proceed through the document(s).
    Stock photo of a 'Rating' meter with values 'Very Bad to 'Excellent'.

    Use a proven evaluation method

    Two proven methods to reviewing vendors’ proposals are by response and by objective

    The first, by response, is when the evaluator reviews each vendor’s response in its entirety.

    The second, reviewing by objective, is when the evaluator reviews each vendor’s response to a single objective before moving on to the next.

    By Response

    Two-way arrow with '+ Pros' in green on the left and 'Cons -' in red on the right.

    By Objective

    Two-way arrow with '+ Pros' in green on the left and 'Cons -' in red on the right.

    • Each response is thoroughly read all the way through.
    • Response inconsistencies are easily noticed.
    • Evaluators obtain a good feel for the vendor's response.
    • Evaluators will lose interest as they move from one response to another.
    • Evaluation will be biased if the beginning of response is subpar, influencing the rest of the evaluation.
    • Deficiencies of the perceived favorite vendor are overlooked.
    • Evaluators concentrate on how each objective is addressed.
    • Evaluators better understand the responses, resulting in identifying the best response for the objective.
    • Evaluators are less susceptible to supplier bias.
    • Electronic format of the response hampers response review per objective.
    • If a hard copy is necessary, converting electronic responses to hard copy is costly and cumbersome.
    • Discipline is required to score each vendor's response as they go.

    Maintain evaluation objectivity by reducing response evaluation biases

    Evaluation teams can be naturally biased during their review of the vendors’ responses.

    You cannot eliminate bias completely – the best you can do is manage it by identifying these biases with the team and mitigating their influence in the evaluation process.

    Vendor

    The evaluator only trusts a certain vendor and is uncomfortable with any other vendor.
    • Evaluate the responses blind of vendor names, if possible.
    Centerpiece for this table, titled 'BIAS' and surrounding by iconized representations of the four types listed.

    Account Representatives

    Relationships extend beyond business, and an evaluator doesn't want to jeopardize them.
    • Craft RFP objectives that are vendor neutral.

    Technical

    A vendor is the only technical solution the evaluator is looking for, and they will not consider anything else.
    • Conduct fair and open solution demonstrations.

    Price

    As humans, we can justify anything at a good price.
    • Evaluate proposals without awareness of price.

    Additional insights when evaluating RFPs

    When your evaluation team includes a member of the C-suite or senior leadership, ensure you give them extra time to sufficiently review the vendor's responses. When your questions require a definitive “Yes”/“True” or “No”/“False” responses, we recommend giving the maximum score for “Yes”/“True” and the minimum score for “No”/“False”.
    Increase your efficiency and speed of evaluation by evaluating the mandatory requirements first. If a vendor's response doesn't meet the minimum requirements, save time by not reviewing the remainder of the response. Group your RFP questions with a high-level qualifying question, then the supporting detailed requirements. The evaluation team can save time by not evaluating a response that does not meet a high-level qualifying requirement.

    Establish your evaluation scoring scale

    Define your ranking scale to ensure consistency in ratings

    Within each section of your RFP are objectives, each of which should be given its own score. Our recommended approach is to award on a scale of 0 to 5. With such a scale, you need to define every level. Below are the recommended definitions for a 0 to 5 scoring scale.

    Score Criteria for Rating
    5 Outstanding – Complete understanding of current and future needs; solution addresses current and future needs
    4 Competent – Complete understanding and adequate solution
    3 Average – Average understanding and adequate solution
    2 Questionable – Average understanding; proposal questionable
    1 Poor – Minimal understanding
    0 Not acceptable – Lacks understanding
    Stock photo of judges holding up their ratings.

    Weigh the sections of your RFP on how important or critical they are to the RFP

    Obtain Alignment on Weighting the Scores of Each Section
    • There are many ways to score responses, ranging from extremely simple to highly complicated. The most important thing is that everyone responsible for completing scorecards is in total agreement about how the scoring system should work. Otherwise, the scorecards will lose their value, since different weighting and scoring templates were used to arrive at their scores.
    • You can start by weighting the scores by section, with all sections adding up to 100%.
    Example RFP Section Weights
    Pie chart of example RFP section weights, 'Operational, 20%', 'Service-Level Agreements, 20%', 'Financial, 20%', 'Legal/Contractual, 15%', 'Technical, 10%' 'Functional, 15%'.
    (Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Jeffery et al., 2019)

    Protect your negotiation leverage with these best practices

    Protect your organization's reputation within the vendor community with a fair and balanced process.
    • Unless you regularly have the evaluators on your evaluation team, always assume that the team members are not familiar nor experienced with your process and procedures.
    • Do not underestimate the amount of preparations required to ensure that your evaluation team has everything they need to evaluate vendors’ responses without bias.
    • Be very specific about the expectations and time commitment required for the evaluation team to evaluate the responses.
    • Explain to the team members the importance of evaluating responses without conflicts of interest, including the fact that information contained within the responses and all discussions within the team are considered company owned and confidential.
    • Include examples of the evaluation and scoring processes to help the evaluators understand what they should be doing.
    • Finally – don’t forget to the thank the evaluation team and their managers for their time and commitment in contributing to this essential decision.
    Stock photo of a cork board with 'best practice' spelled out by tacked bits of paper, each with a letter in a different font.

    Evaluation teams must balance commercial vs. technical requirements

    Do not alter the evaluation weights after responses are submitted.
    • Evaluation teams are always challenged by weighing the importance of price, budget, and value against the technical requirements of “must-haves” and super cool “nice-to-haves.”
    • Encouraging the evaluation team not to inadvertently convert the nice-to-haves to must-haves will prevent scope creep and budget pressure. The evaluation team must concentrate on the vendors’ responses that drive the best value when balancing both commercial and technical requirements.
    Two blocks labelled 'Commercial Requirements' and 'Technical Requirements' balancing on either end of a flat sheet, which is balancing on a silver ball.

    4.6.1 Evaluation Guidebook

    1 hour

    Input: RFP responses, Weighted Scoring Matrix, Vendor Response Scorecard

    Output: One or two finalists for which negotiations will proceed

    Materials: RFP Evaluation Guidebook

    Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. Info-Tech provides an excellent resource for your evaluation team to better understand the process of evaluating vendor response. The guidebook is designed to be configured to the specifics of your RFP, with guidance and instructions to the team.
    2. Use this guidebook to provide instruction to the evaluation team as to how best to score and rate the RFP responses.
    3. Specific definitions are provided for applying the numerical scores to the RFP objectives will ensure consistency among the appropriate numerical score.

    Download the RFP Evaluation Guidebook

    4.6.2 RFP Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    1-4 hours

    Input: Each vendor’s RFP response, A copy of the RFP (less pricing), A list of the weighted criteria incorporated into a vendor response scorecard

    Output: A consolidated ranked and weighted comparison of the vendor responses with pricing

    Materials: Vendor responses, RFP Evaluation Tool

    Participants: Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. Using the RFP outline as a base, develop a scorecard to evaluate and rate each section of the vendor response, based on the criteria predetermined by the team.
    2. Provide each stakeholder with the scorecard when you provide the vendor responses for them to review and provide the team with adequate time to review each response thoroughly and completely.
    3. Do not, at this stage, provide the pricing. Allow stakeholders to review the responses based on the technical, business, operational criteria without prejudice as to pricing.
    4. Evaluators should always be reminded that they are evaluating each vendor’s response against the objectives and requirements of the RFP. The evaluators should not be evaluating each vendor’s response against one another.
    5. While the team is reviewing and scoring responses, review and consolidate the vendor pricing submissions into one document for a side-by-side comparison.

    Download the RFP Evaluation Tool

    4.6.3 Total Cost of Owners (TCO)

    1-2 hours

    Input: Consolidated vendor pricing responses, Consolidated vendor RFP responses, Current spend within your organization for the product/service, if available, Budget

    Output: A completed TCO model summarizing the financial results of the RFP showing the anticipated costs over the term of the agreement, taking into consideration the impact of renewals.

    Materials: Vendor TCO Tool, Vendor pricing responses

    Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement

    • Use Info-Tech’s Vendor TCO Tool to normalize each vendor’s pricing proposal and account for the lifetime cost of the product.
    • Fill in pricing information (the total of all annual costs) from each vendor's returned Pricing Proposal.
    • The tool will summarize the net present value of the TCO for each vendor proposal.
    • The tool will also provide the rank of each pricing proposal.

    Download the Vendor TCO Tool

    Conduct an evaluation team results meeting

    Follow the checklist below to ensure an effective evaluation results meeting

    • Schedule the evaluation team’s review meeting well in advance to ensure there are no scheduling conflicts.
    • Collect the evaluation team’s scores in advance.
    • Collate scores and provide an initial ranking.
    • Do not reveal the pricing evaluation results until after initial discussions and review of the scoring results.
    • Examine both high and low scores to understand why the team members scored the response as they did.
    • Allow the team to discuss, debate, and arrive at consensus on the ranking.
    • After consensus, reveal the pricing to examine if or how it changes the ranking.
    • Align the team on the next steps with the applicable vendors.

    4.6.4 Consolidated RFP Response Scoring

    1-2 hours

    Input: Vendor Response Scorecard from each stakeholder, Consolidated RFP responses and pricing, Any follow up questions or items requiring further vendor clarification.

    Output: An RFP Response Evaluation Summary that identifies the finalists based on pre-determined criteria.

    Materials: RFP Evaluation Tool from each stakeholder, Consolidated RFP responses and pricing.

    Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. Collect from the evaluation team all scorecards and any associated questions requiring further clarification from the vendor(s). Consolidate the scorecards into one for presentation to the team and key decision makers.
    2. Present the final scores to the team, with the pricing evaluation, to determine, based on your needs, two or three finalists that will move forward to the next steps of negotiations.
    3. Discuss any scores that are have large gaps, e.g., a requirement with a score of one from one evaluator and the same requirement with a score five from different evaluator.
    4. Arrive at a consensus of your top one or two potential vendors.
    5. Determine any required follow-up actions with the vendors and include them in the Evaluation Summary.

    Download the Consolidated Vender RFP Response Evaluation Summary

    4.6.5 Vendor Recommendation Presentation

    1-3 hours
    1. Use the Vendor Recommendation Presentation to present your finalist and obtain final approval to negotiate and execute any agreements.
    2. The Vendor Recommendation Presentation provides leadership with:
      1. An overview of the RFP, its primary goals, and key requirements
      2. A summary of the vendors invited to participate and why
      3. A summary of each component of the RFP
      4. A side-by-side comparison of key vendor responses to each of the key/primary requirements, with ranking/weighting results
      5. A summary of the vendor’s responses to key legal terms
      6. A consolidated summary of the vendors’ pricing, augmented by the TCO calculations for the finalist(s).
      7. The RFP team’s vendor recommendations based on its findings
      8. A summary of next steps with dates
      9. Request approval to proceed to next steps of negotiations with the primary and secondary vendor

    Download the Vendor Recommendation Presentation

    4.6.5 Vendor Recommendation Presentation

    Input

    • Consolidated RFP responses, with a focus on key RFP goals
    • Consolidated pricing responses
    • TCO Model completed, approved by Finance, stakeholders

    Output

    • Presentation deck summarizing the key findings of the RFP results, cost estimates and TCO and the recommendation for approval to move to contract negotiations with the finalists

    Materials

    • Consolidated RFP responses, including legal requirements
    • Consolidated pricing
    • TCO Model
    • Evaluators scoring results

    Participants

    • IT
    • Finance
    • Business stakeholders
    • Legal
    • Sourcing/Procurement

    Caution: Configure templates and tools to align with RFP objectives

    Templates and tools are invaluable assets to any RFP process

    • Leveraging templates and tools saves time and provides consistency to your vendors.
    • Maintain a common repository of your templates and tools with different versions and variations. Include a few sentences with instructions on how to use the template and tools for team members who might not be familiar with them.

    Templates/Tools

    RFP templates and tools are found in a variety of places, such as previous projects, your favorite search engine, or by asking a colleague.

    Sourcing

    Regardless of the source of these documents, you must take great care and consideration to sanitize any reference to another vendor, company, or name of the deal.

    Review

    Then you must carefully examine the components of the deal before creating your final documents.

    Popular RFP templates include:

    • RFP documents
    • Pricing templates
    • Evaluation and scoring templates
    • RFP requirements
    • Info-Tech research

    Phase 5

    Negotiate Agreement(s)

    Steps

    5.1 Perform negotiation process

    Steps in an RFP Process with the fifth step, 'Negotiate Agreement', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Procurement
    • Vendor management
    • Legal
    • IT stakeholders
    • Finance

    Outcomes of this phase

    A negotiated agreement or agreements that are a result of competitive negotiations.

    Negotiate Agreement(s)

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Negotiate Agreement

    You should evaluate your RFP responses first to see if they are complete and the vendor followed your instructions.


    Then you should:

    • Plan negotiation(s) with one or more vendors based on your questions and opportunities identified during evaluation.
    • Select finalist(s).
    • Apply selection criteria.
    • Resolve vendors’ exceptions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Be certain to include any commitments made in the RFP, presentations, and proposals in the agreement – dovetails to underperforming vendor.

    Centerpiece of the table, titled 'Negotiation Process'.

    Leverage Info-Tech's negotiation process research for additional information

    Negotiate before you select your vendor:
    • Negotiating with two or more vendors will maintain your competitive leverage while decreasing the time it takes to negotiate the deal.
    • Perform legal reviews as necessary.
    • Use sound competitive negotiations principles.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Providing contract terms in an RFP can dramatically reduce time for this step by understanding the vendor’s initial contractual position for negotiation.

    Phase 6

    Purchase Goods and Services

    Steps

    6.1 Purchase Goods & Services

    Steps in an RFP Process with the sixth step, 'Purchase Goods and Services', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Procurement
    • Vendor management
    • IT stakeholders

    Outcomes of this phase

    A purchase order that completes the RFP process.

    The beginning of the vendor management process.

    Purchase Goods and Services

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Purchase Goods and Services

    Prepare to purchase goods and services

    Prepare to purchase goods and services by completing all items on your organization’s onboarding checklist.
    • Have the vendor complete applicable tax forms.
    • Set up the vendor in accounts payable for electronic payment (ACH) set-up.
    Then transact day-to-day business:
    • Provide purchasing forecasts.
    • Complete applicable purchase requisition and purchase orders. Be sure to reference the agreement in the PO.
    Stock image of a computer monitor with a full grocery cart shown on the screen.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As a customer, honoring your contractual obligations and commitments will ensure that your organization is not only well respected but considered a customer of choice.

    Phase 7

    Assess and Measure Performance

    Steps

    7.1 Assess and measure performance against the agreement

    Steps in an RFP Process with the seventh step, 'Assess and Measure Performance', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Vendor management
    • Business stakeholders
    • Senior leadership (as needed)
    • IT stakeholders
    • Vendor representatives & senior management

    Outcomes of this phase

    A list of what went well during the period – it’s important to recognize successes

    A list of areas needing improvement that includes:

    • A timeline for each item to be completed
    • The team member(s) responsible

    Purchase Goods and Services

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Assess and Measure Performance

    Measure to manage: the job doesn’t end when the contract is signed.

    • Classify vendor
    • Assess vendor performance
    • Manage improvement
    • Conduct periodic vendor performance reviews or quarterly business reviews
    • Ensure contract compliance for both the vendor and your organization
    • Build knowledgebase for future
    • Re-evaluate and improve appropriately your RFP processes

    Info-Tech Insight

    To be an objective vendor manager, you should also assess and measure your company’s performance along with the vendor’s performance.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Upon completion of this blueprint, guided implementation, or workshop, your team should have a comprehensive, well-defined end-to-end approach to performing a quality sourcing event. Leverage Info-Tech’s industry-proven tools and templates to provide your organization with an effective approach to maintain your negotiation leverage, improve the ease with which you evaluate vendor proposals, and reduce your risk while obtaining the best market value for your goods and services.

    Additionally, your team will have a foundation to execute your vendor management principles. These principles will assist your organization in ensuring you receive the perceived value from the vendor as a result of your competitive negotiations.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Final Thoughts: RFP Do’s and Don’ts

    DO

    • Leverage your team’s knowledge
    • Document and explain your RFP process to stakeholders and vendors
    • Include contract terms in your RFP
    • Consider vendor management requirements up front
    • Plan to measure and manage performance after contract award leveraging RFP objectives
    • Seek feedback from the RFP team for process improvements

    DON'T

    • Reveal your budget
    • Do an RFP in a vacuum
    • Send an RFP to a vendor your team is not willing to award the business to
    • Hold separate conversations with candidate vendors during your RFP process
    • Skimp on the requirements definition to speed the process
    • Tell the vendor they are selected before negotiating

    Bibliography

    “2022 RFP Response Trends & Benchmarks.” Loopio, 2022. Web.

    Corrigan, Tony. “How Much Does it Cost to Respond to an RFP?” LinkedIn, March 2017. Accessed 10 Dec. 2019

    “Death by RFP:7 Reasons Not to Respond.” Inc. Magazine, 2013. Web.

    Jeffery, Steven, George Bordon, and Phil Bode. The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, 3rd ed. Info-Tech Research Group, 2019.

    “RFP Benchmarks: How Much Time and Staff Firms Devote to Proposals.” MarketingProfs, 2020. Web.

    “State of the RFP 2019.” Bonfire, 2019. Web.

    “What Vendors Want (in RFPs).” Vendorful, 2020. Web.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock photo of two people looking at a tablet. Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively
    • Negotiations are about allocating risk and money – how much risk is a party willing to accept at what price point?
    • Using a cross-functional/cross-insight team structure for negotiation preparation yields better results.
    • Soft skills aren’t enough and theatrical negotiation tactics aren’t effective.
    Stock photo of two people in suits shaking hands. Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively
    • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price. Too often, organizations focus on the price contained within their contracts, neglecting to address core terms and conditions that can end up costing multiples of the initial price.
    • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. Lawyers tend to look at general terms and conditions for legal risk and may not understand IT-specific components and business needs.
    Stock photo of three people gathered around a computer. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Vendor management must be an IT strategy. Solid vendor management is an imperative – IT organizations must develop capabilities to ensure that services are delivered by vendors according to service-level objectives and that risks are mitigated according to the organization's risk tolerance.
    • Visibility into your IT vendor community. Understand how much you spend with each vendor and rank their criticality and risk to focus on the vendors you should be concentrating on for innovative solutions.

    Recruit IT Talent

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}574|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $17,565 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Attract & Select
    • Parent Category Link: /attract-and-select
    • Changing workforce dynamics and increased transparency have shifted the power from employers to job seekers, stiffening the competition for talent.
    • Candidate expectations match high consumer expectations and affect the employer brand, the consumer brand, and overall organizational reputation. Delivering a positive candidate experience (CX2) is no longer optional.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Think about your candidates as consumers. Truly understanding their needs will attract great talent and build positive brand perceptions.
    • The CX2 starts sooner than you think. It encompasses all candidate interactions with an organization and begins before the formal application process.
    • Don’t try to emulate competitors. By differentiating your CX2, you build a competitive advantage.

    Impact and Result

    • Design a candidate-centric talent acquisition process that addresses candidate feedback from both unsuccessful and successful candidates.
    • Use design-thinking principles to focus your redesign on moments that matter to candidates to reduce unnecessary work or ad-hoc initiatives that don’t matter to candidates.

    Recruit IT Talent Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should redesign your CX2, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish your current process and set redesign goals

    Map the organization’s current state for CX2 and set high-level objectives and metrics.

    • Win the War for Talent With a Killer Candidate Experience – Phase 1: Establish Your Current Process and Set Redesign Goals
    • Candidate Experience Project Charter
    • Talent Metrics Library
    • Candidate Experience Process Mapping Template
    • Candidate Experience Assessment Tool

    2. Use design thinking to assess the candidate experience

    Strengthen the candidate lifecycle by improving upon pain points through design thinking methods and assessing the competitive landscape.

    • Win the War for Talent With a Killer Candidate Experience – Phase 2: Use Design Thinking to Assess the Candidate Experience
    • Design Thinking Primer
    • Empathy Map Template
    • Journey Map Guide

    3. Redesign the candidate experience

    Create action, communications, and training plans to establish the redesigned CX2 with hiring process stakeholders.

    • Win the War for Talent With a Killer Candidate Experience – Phase 3: Redesign the Candidate Experience
    • Candidate Experience Best Practices Action Guide
    • Candidate Experience Action and Communication Plan
    • Candidate Experience Service Level Agreement Template

    4. Appendix

    Leverage data collection and workshop activities.

    • Win the War for Talent With a Killer Candidate Experience – Appendix: Data Collection and Workshop Activities
    • Candidate Experience Phase One Data Collection Guide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Recruit IT Talent

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Your Current Process and Set Redesign Goals

    The Purpose

    Assess the organization’s current state for CX2.

    Set baseline metrics for comparison with new initiatives.

    Establish goals to strengthen the CX2.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gained understanding of where the organization is currently.

    Established where the organization would like to be and goals to achieve the new state.

    Activities

    1.1 Review process map of current candidate lifecycle.

    1.2 Analyze qualitative and quantitative data gathered.

    1.3 Set organizational objectives and project goals.

    1.4 Set metrics to measure progress on high-level goals.

    Outputs

    Process map

    CX2 data analyzed

    Candidate Experience Project Charter

    2 Use Design Thinking to Assess the Candidate Experience

    The Purpose

    Apply design thinking methods to identify pain points in your candidate lifecycle.

    Assess the competition and analyze results.

    Empathize with candidates and their journey.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Segments with pain points have been identified.

    Competitor offering and differentiation has been analyzed.

    Candidate thoughts and feelings have been synthesized.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify extreme users.

    2.2 Conduct an immersive empathy session or go through the process as if you were a target candidate.

    2.3 Identify talent competitors.

    2.4 Analyze competitive landscape.

    2.5 Synthesize research findings and create empathy map.

    2.6 Journey map the CX2.

    Outputs

    Extreme users identified

    Known and unknown talent competitor’s CX2 analyzed

    Empathy map created

    Journey map created

    3 Redesign the Candidate Experience

    The Purpose

    Create a communications and action plan and set metrics to measure success.

    Set expectations with hiring managers and talent acquisition specialists through a service level agreement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Action plan created.

    Metrics set to track progress and assess improvement.

    Service level agreement completed and expectations collaboratively set.

    Activities

    3.1 Assess each stage of the lifecycle.

    3.2 Set success metrics for priority lifecycle stages.

    3.3 Select actions from the Candidate Experience Best Practices Action Guide.

    3.4 Brainstorm other potential (organization-specific) solutions.

    3.5 Set action timeline and assign accountabilities.

    3.6 Customize service level agreement guidelines.

    Outputs

    CX2 lifecycle stages prioritized

    Metrics to measure progress set

    CX2 best practices selected

    Candidate Experience Assessment Tool

    Candidate Experience Action and Communication Plan

    Service level agreement guidelines.

    Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}176|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Through growth, both organic and acquisition, you have a significant footprint of projects and applications.
    • Projects and applications have little in common with one another, all with their own history and pedigree.
    • You need to look across your portfolio of applications and projects to see if they will collectively help the organization achieve its goals.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Stakeholders don’t care about the minutia and activities involved in project and application portfolio management.
    • Timely delivery of effective and important applications that deliver value throughout their life are the most important factors driving business satisfaction with IT.

    Impact and Result

    • Define an organizing principle that will structure your projects and applications in a way that matters to your stakeholders.
    • Bridge application and project portfolio data using the organizing principle that matters to communicate with stakeholders across the organization.
    • Create a dashboard that brings together the benefits of both project and application portfolio management to improve visibility and decision making.

    Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should integrate your application and project portfolios, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the three ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define the principle that organizes your portfolios, objectives, and stakeholders

    To bring your portfolios together, you need to start with learning about your objectives, principles, and stakeholders.

    • Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value – Phase 1: Define the Principle That Organizes Your Portfolios, Objectives, and Stakeholders
    • Integrated Portfolio Dashboard Tool
    • Integrated Portfolio Dashboard Tool – Example

    2. Take stock of what brings you closer to your goals

    Get a deeper understanding of what makes up your organizing principle before learning about your applications and projects that are aligned with your principles.

    • Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value – Phase 2: Take Stock of What Brings You Closer to Your Goals

    3. Bring it all together

    Bound by your organizing principles, bring your projects and applications together under a single dashboard. Once defined, determine the rollout and communication plan that suits your organization.

    • Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value – Phase 3: Bring It All Together
    • Integrated Portfolio Communication and Roadmap Plan
    • Integrated Portfolio Communication and Roadmap Plan Example
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Looking at Your Principles

    The Purpose

    Determine your organizational objectives and organizing principle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear understanding of where you need to go as an organization.

    A clear way to enable all parts of your portfolio to come together.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine your organization’s objectives.

    1.2 Determine your key stakeholders.

    1.3 Define your organizing principle.

    1.4 Decompose your organizing principle into its core components.

    Outputs

    Determined organizing principle for your applications and projects

    2 Understanding Your Applications

    The Purpose

    Get a clear view of the applications that contribute to your organization’s objectives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A key element of IT value delivery is its applications. Gaining awareness allows you to evaluate if the right value is being provided.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine your complete list of applications.

    2.2 Determine the health of your applications.

    2.3 Link your applications to the organization’s core components.

    Outputs

    List of applications

    Application list with health statistics filled in

    List of applications with health metrics bound to the organization’s core components

    3 Understanding Your Projects

    The Purpose

    Get a clear view of your project portfolio and how it relates to your applications and their organizing principle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of your project portfolio.

    Activities

    3.1 List all in-flight projects and vital health statistics.

    3.2 Map out the key programs and projects in your portfolio to the application’s core components.

    Outputs

    List of projects

    List of projects mapped to applications they impact

    4 Rolling Out the New Dashboard

    The Purpose

    Bring together your application and project portfolios in a new, easy-to-use dashboard with a full rollout plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Dashboard available for use

    Roadmap and communication plan to make dashboard implementable and tangible

    Activities

    4.1 Test the dashboard.

    4.2 Define your refresh cadence.

    4.3 Plan your implementation.

    4.4 Develop your communication plan.

    Outputs

    Validated dashboards

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}175|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Your organization has started to realize benefits from adopting Agile principles and practices. However, these advances are contained within your IT organization.
    • You are seeking to extend Agile development beyond IT into other areas of the organization. You are looking for a coordinated approach aligned to business priorities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Not all lessons from scaling Agile to IT are transferable. IT Agile scaling processes are tailored to IT’s scope, team, and tools, which may not account for diverse attributes within your organization.
    • Control may be necessary for coordination. With increased time-to-value, enforcing consistent cadences, reporting, and communication is a must if teams are not disciplined or lack good governance.
    • Extend Agile in departments tolerant to change. Incrementally roll out Agile in departments where its principles are accepted (e.g. a culture that embraces failures as lessons).

    Impact and Result

    • Complete an assessment of your prior efforts to scale Agile across IT to gauge successful, consistent adoption. Identify the business objectives and the group drivers that are motivating the extension of Agile to the business.
    • Understand the challenges that you may face when extending Agile to business partners. Investigate the root causes of existing issues that can derail your efforts.
    • Ideate solutions to your scaling challenges and envision a target state for your growing Agile environment. Your target state should realize new opportunities to drive more business value and eliminate current activities driving down productivity.
    • Coordinate the implementation and execution of your scaling Agile initiatives with an implementation action plan. This collaborative document will lay out the process, roles, goals, and objectives needed to successfully manage your Agile environment.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should extend Agile practices to improve product delivery, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess your readiness to scale agile vertically

    Assess your readiness to scale Agile vertically by identifying and mitigating potential Agile maturity gaps remaining after scaling Agile across your IT organization.

    • Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT – Phase 1: Assess Your Readiness to Scale Agile Vertically
    • Agile Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Establish an enterprise scaled agile framework

    Complete an overview of various scaled Agile models to help you develop your own customized delivery framework.

    • Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT – Phase 2: Establish an Enterprise Scaled Agile Framework
    • Framework Selection Tool

    3. Create your implementation action plan

    Determine the effort and steps required to implement your extended delivery framework.

    • Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT – Phase 3: Create Your Implementation Action Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Current State of Agile Maturity

    The Purpose

    Assess your readiness to scale Agile vertically.

    Identify and mitigate potential Agile maturity gaps remaining after scaling Agile across your IT organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    IT Agile maturity gaps identified and mitigated to ensure successful extension of Agile to the business

    Activities

    1.1 Characterize your Agile implementation using the CLAIM model.

    1.2 Assess the maturity of your Agile teams and organization.

    Outputs

    Maturity gaps identified with mitigation requirements

    2 Establish an Enterprise Scaled Agile Framework

    The Purpose

    Complete a review of scaled Agile models to help you develop your own customized delivery framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A customized Agile delivery framework

    Activities

    2.1 Explore various scaled frameworks.

    2.2 Select an appropriate scaled framework for your enterprise.

    2.3 Define the future state of your team and the communication structure of your functional business group.

    Outputs

    Blended framework delivery model

    Identification of team and communication structure impacts resulting from the new framework

    3 Create Your Implementation Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Create your implementation action plan for the new Agile delivery framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clearly defined action plan

    Activities

    3.1 Define your value drivers.

    3.2 Brainstorm the initiatives that must be completed to achieve your target state.

    3.3 Estimate the effort of your Agile initiatives.

    3.4 Define your Agile implementation action plan.

    Outputs

    List of target state initiatives

    Estimation of effort to achieve target state

    An implementation action plan

    Measure and Manage Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Lack of understanding of what is truly driving customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction.
    • Lack of insight into who our satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
    • Lack of a system for early detection of declines in satisfaction.
    • Lack of clarity on what to improve and how resources should be allocated.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • All software companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about and will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.
    • Obstacles:
      • Use of metrics that don’t provide the insight needed to make impactful changes that will boost satisfaction and ultimately, retention and profit.
      • Lack of a clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers, metric definitions and/or standard methods of measurement, and a consistent monitoring cadence.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding of who your satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
    • Understanding of the true drivers of satisfaction and dissatisfaction among your customer segments.
    • Establishment of a repeatable process and cadence for effective satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
    • Development of an executable customer satisfaction improvement plan that identifies customer journey pain points and areas of dissatisfaction, and outlines how to improve them.
    • Knowledge of where money, time, and other resources are needed most to improve satisfaction levels and ultimately increase retention.

    Measure and Manage Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Measure and Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics that Matter the Most Deck – An overview of how to understand what drives customer satisfaction and how to measure and manage it for improved business outcomes.

    Understand the true drivers of customer satisfaction and build a process for managing and improving customer satisfaction.

    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Measure and Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics that Matter the Most

    Understand what truly keeps your customer satisfied. Start to measure what matters to improve customer experience and increase satisfaction and advocacy. 

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst perspective

    Understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction enable the delivery of real customer value

    The image contains a picture of Emily Wright.

    “Healthy customer relationships are the paramount to long-term growth. When customers are satisfied, they remain loyal, spend more, and promote your company to others in their network. The key to high satisfaction is understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction to enable the delivery of real customer value.

    Most companies believe they know who their satisfied customers are and what keeps them satisfied, and 76% of B2B buyers expect that providers understand their unique needs (Salesforce Research, 2020). However, on average B2B companies have customer experience scores of less than 50% (McKinsey, 2016). This disconnect between customer expectations and provider experience indicates that businesses are not effectively measuring and monitoring satisfaction and therefore are not making meaningful enhancements to their service, offerings, and overall experience.

    By focusing on the underlying drivers of customer satisfaction, organizations develop a truly accurate picture of what is driving deep satisfaction and loyalty, ensuring that their company will achieve sustainable growth and stay competitive in a highly competitive market.”

    Emily Wright

    Senior Research Analyst, Advisory

    SoftwareReviews

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    SoftwareReviews’ Approach

    Getting a truly accurate picture of satisfaction levels among customers, and where to focus efforts to improve satisfaction, is challenging. Providers often find themselves reacting to customer challenges and being blindsided when customers leave. More effective customer satisfaction measurement is possible when providers self-assess for the following challenges:

    • Lack of understanding of what is truly driving customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction.
    • Lack of insight into who our satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
    • Lack of a system for early detection of declines in satisfaction.
    • Lack of clarity of what needs to be improved and how resources should be allocated.
    • Lack of reliable internal data for effective customer satisfaction monitoring.

    What separates customer success leaders from developing a full view of their customers are several nagging obstacles:

    • Use of metrics that don’t provide the insight needed to make impactful changes that will boost satisfaction and ultimately, retention and profit.
    • Friction from customers participating in customer satisfaction studies.
    • Lack of data, or integrated databases from which to track, pull, and analyze customer satisfaction data.
    • Lack a clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers, metric definitions, and/or standard methods of measurement and a consistent monitoring cadence.
    • Lack of time, resources, or technology to uncover and effectively measure and monitor satisfaction drivers.

    Through the SoftwareReviews’ approach, customer success leaders will:

    • Understand who your satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
    • Understand the true drivers of satisfaction and dissatisfaction among your customer segments.
    • Establish a repeatable process and cadence for effective satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
    • Develop an executable customer satisfaction improvement plan that identifies customer journey pain points and areas of dissatisfaction, and outlines how to improve them.
    • Know where money, time, and resources are needed most to improve satisfaction levels and ultimately retention.

    Overarching SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    All companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about. This will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.

    Healthy Customer Relationships are vital for long-term success and growth

    Measuring customer satisfaction is critical to understanding the overall health of your customer relationships and driving growth.

    Through effective customer satisfaction measurement, organizations can:

    Improve Customer Experience

    Increase Retention and CLV

    Increase Profitability

    Reduce Costs

    • Provide insight into where and how to improve.
    • Enhance experience, increase loyalty.
    • By providing strong CX, organizations can increase revenue by 10-15% (McKinsey, 2014).
    • Far easier to retain existing customers than to acquire new ones.
    • Ensuring high satisfaction among customers increases Customer Lifetime Value (CLV) through longer tenure and higher spending.
    • NPS Promoter score has a customer lifetime value that's 600%-1,400% higher than a Detractor (Bain & Company, 2015).
    • Highly satisfied customers spend more through expansions and add-ons, as well as through their long tenure with your company.
    • They also spread positive word of mouth, which brings in new customers.
    • “Studies demonstrate a strong correlation between customer satisfaction and increased profits — with companies with high customer satisfaction reporting 5.7 times more revenue than competitors.” (Matthew Loper, CEO and Co-Founder of WELLTH, 2022)
    • Measuring, monitoring, and maintaining high satisfaction levels reduces costs across the board.
    • “Providing a high-quality customer experience can save up to 33% of customer service costs” (Deloitte, 2018).
    • Satisfied customers are more likely to spread positive word of mouth which reduces acquisition / marketing costs for your company.

    “Measuring customer satisfaction is vital for growth in any organization; it provides insights into what works and offers opportunities for optimization. Customer satisfaction is essential for improving loyalty rate, reducing costs and retaining your customers.”

    -Ken Brisco, NICE, 2019

    Poor customer satisfaction measurement is costly

    Virtually all companies measure customer satisfaction, but few truly do it well. All too often, customer satisfaction measurement consists of a set of vanity metrics that do not result in actionable insight for product/service improvement. Improper measurement can result in numerous consequences:

    Direct and Indirect Costs

    Being unaware of true drivers of satisfaction that are never remedied costs your business directly through customer churn, service costs, etc.

    Tarnished Brand

    Tarnished brand through not resolving issues drives dissatisfaction; dissatisfied customers share their negative experiences, which can damage brand image and reputation.

    Waste Limited Resources

    Putting limited resources towards vanity programs and/or fixes that have little to no bearing on core satisfaction drivers wastes time and money.

    “When customer dissatisfaction goes unnoticed, it can slowly kill a company. Because of the intangible nature of customer dissatisfaction, managers regularly underestimate the magnitude of customer dissatisfaction and its impact on the bottom line.”

    - Lakshmiu Tatikonda, “The Hidden Costs of Customer Dissatisfaction”, 2013

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Most companies struggle to understand what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true satisfaction drivers, tech providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, avoiding the numerous harmful consequences that result from average customer satisfaction measurement.

    Does your customer satisfaction measurement process need improvement?

    Getting an accurate picture of customer satisfaction is no easy task. Struggling with any of the following means you are ready for a detailed review of your customer satisfaction measurement efforts:

    • Not knowing who your most satisfied customers are.
    • Lacking early detection for declining satisfaction – either reactive, or unaware of dissatisfaction as it’s occurring.
    • Lacking a process for monitoring changes in satisfaction and lack ability to be proactive; you feel blindsided when customers leave.
    • Inability to fix the problem and wasting money on the wrong areas, like vanity metrics that don’t bring value to customers.
    • Spending money and other resources towards fixes based on a gut feeling, without quantifying the real root cause drivers and investing in their improvement.
    • Having metrics and data but lacking context; don’t know what contributed to the metrics/results, why people are dissatisfied or what contributes to satisfaction.
    • Lacking clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers / customer segments.
    • Difficulty tying satisfaction back to financial results.

    Customers are more satisfied with software vendors who understand the difference between surface level and short-term satisfaction, and deep or long-term satisfaction

    Surface-level satisfaction

    Surface-level satisfaction has immediate effects, but they are usually short-term or limited to certain groups of users. There are several factors that contribute to satisfaction including:

    • Novelty of new software
    • Ease of implementation
    • Financial savings
    • Breadth of features

    Software Leaders Drive Deep Satisfaction

    Deep satisfaction has long-term and meaningful impacts on the way that organizations work. Deep satisfaction has staying power and increases or maintains satisfaction over time, by reducing complexity and delivering exceptional quality for end-users and IT alike. This report found that the following capabilities provided the deepest levels of satisfaction:

    • Usability and intuitiveness
    • Quality of features
    • Ease of customization
    • Vendor-specific capabilities

    The above solve issues that are part of everyday problems, and each drives satisfaction in deep and meaningful ways. While surface-level satisfaction is important, deep and impactful capabilities can sustain satisfaction for a longer time.

    Deep Customer Satisfaction Among Software Buyers Correlates Highly to “Emotional Attributes”

    Vendor Capabilities and Product Features remain significant but are not the primary drivers

    The image contains a graph to demonstrate a correlation to Satisfaction, all Software Categories.
    Source: SoftwareReviews buyer reviews (based on 82,560 unique reviews).

    Driving deep satisfaction among software customers vs. surface-level measures is key

    Vendor capabilities and product features correlate significantly to buyer satisfaction

    Yet, it’s the emotional attributes – what we call the “Emotional Footprint”, that correlate more strongly

    Business-Value Created and Emotional Attributes are what drives software customer satisfaction the most

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate Software Buyer Satisfaction Drivers and Emotional Attributes are what drives software customer satisfaction.

    Software companies looking to improve customer satisfaction will focus on business value created and the Emotional Footprint attributes outlined here.

    The essential ingredient is understanding how each is defined by your customers.

    Leaders focus on driving improvements as described by customers.

    SoftwareReviews Insight:

    These true drivers of satisfaction should be considered in your customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring efforts. The experience customers have with your product and brand is what will differentiate your brand from competitors, and ultimately, power business growth. Talk to a SoftwareReviews Advisor to learn how users rate your product on these satisfaction drivers in the SoftwareReviews Emotional Footprint Report.

    Benefits of Effective Customer Satisfaction Measurement

    Our research provides Customer Success leaders with the following key benefits:

    • Ability to know who is satisfied, dissatisfied, and why.
    • Confidence in how to understand or uncover the factors behind customer satisfaction; understand and identify factors driving satisfaction, dissatisfaction.
    • Ability to develop a clear plan for improving customer satisfaction.
    • Knowledge of how to establish a repeatable process for customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring that allows for proactivity when declines in satisfaction are detected.
    • Understanding of what metrics to use, how to measure them, and where to find the right information/data.
    • Knowledge of where money, time, and other resources are needed most to drive tangible customer value.

    “81% of organizations cite CX as a competitive differentiator. The top factor driving digital transformation is improving CX […] with companies reporting benefits associated with improving CX including:

    • Increased customer loyalty (92%)
    • An uplift in revenue (84%)
    • Cost savings (79%).”

    – Dan Cote, “Advocacy Blooms and Business Booms When Customers and Employees Engage”, Influitive, 2021

    The image contains a screenshot of a thought model that focuses on Measure & Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most.

    Who benefits from improving the measurement and monitoring of customer satisfaction?

    This Research Is Designed for:

    • Customer Success leaders and marketers who are:
      • Responsible for understanding how to benchmark, measure, and understand customer satisfaction to improve satisfaction, NPS, and ROI.
      • Looking to take a more proactive and structured approach to customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
      • Looking for a more effective and accurate way to measure and understand how to improve customer satisfaction around products and services.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Understand the factors driving satisfaction and dissatisfaction.
    • Know which customers are satisfied/dissatisfied.
    • Know where time, money, and resources are needed the most in order to improve or maintain satisfaction levels.
    • Develop a formal plan to improve customer satisfaction.
    • Establish a repeatable process for customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring that allows for proactivity when declines in satisfaction are detected.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Customer Success Leaders, Marketing and Sales Directors and Managers, Product Marketing Managers, and Advocacy Managers/Coordinators who are responsible for:
      • Product improvements and enhancements
      • Customer service and onboarding
      • Customer advocacy programs
      • Referral/VoC programs

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Coordinate and align on customer experience efforts and actions.
    • Gather and make use of customer feedback to improve products, solutions, and services provided.
    • Provide an amazing customer experience throughout the entirety of the customer journey.

    SoftwareReviews’ methodology for measuring the customer satisfaction metrics that matter the most

    1. Identify true customer satisfaction drivers

    2. Develop metrics dashboard

    3. Develop customer satisfaction measurement and management plan

    Phase Steps

    1. Identify data sources, documenting any gaps in data
    2. Analyze all relevant data on customer experiences and outcomes
    3. Document top satisfaction drivers
    1. Identify business goals, problems to be solved / define business challenges and marketing/customer success goals
    2. Use SR diagnostic to assess current state of satisfaction measurement, assessing metric alignment to satisfaction drivers
    3. Define your metrics dashboard
    4. Develop common metric definitions, language for discussing, and standards for measuring customer satisfaction
    1. Determine committee structure to measure performance metrics over time
    2. Map out gaps in satisfaction along customer journey/common points in journey where customers are least dissatisfied
    3. Build plan that identifies weak areas and shows how to fix using SR’s emotional footprint, other measures
    4. Create plan and roadmap for CSat improvement
    5. Create communication deck

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Documented satisfaction drivers
    2. Documented data sources and gaps in data
    1. Current state customer satisfaction measurement analysis
    2. Common metric definitions and measurement standards
    3. Metrics dashboard
    1. Customer satisfaction measurement plan
    2. Customer satisfaction improvement plan
    3. Customer journey maps
    4. Customer satisfaction improvement communication deck
    5. Customer Satisfaction Committee created

    Insight summary

    Understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction enable the delivery of real customer value

    All software companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about and which will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.

    Positive experiences drive satisfaction more so than features and cost

    According to our analysis of software buyer reviews data*, the biggest drivers of satisfaction and likeliness to recommend are the positive experiences customers have with vendors and their products. Customers want to feel that:

    1. Their productivity and performance is enhanced, and the vendor is helping them innovate and grow as a company.
    2. Their vendor inspires them and helps them to continually improve.
    3. They can rely on the vendor and the product they purchased.
    4. They are respected by the vendor.
    5. They can trust that the vendor will be on their side and save them time.
    *8 million data points across all software categories

    Measure Key Relationship KPIs to gauge satisfaction

    Key metrics to track include the Business Value Created score, Net Emotional Footprint, and the Love/Hate score (the strength of emotional connection).

    Orient the organization around customer experience excellence

    1. Arrange staff incentives around customer value instead of metrics that are unrelated to satisfaction.
    2. Embed customer experience as a core company value and integrate it into all functions.
    3. Make working with your organization easy and seamless for customers.

    Have a designated committee for customer satisfaction measurement

    Best in class organizations create customer satisfaction committees that meet regularly to measure and monitor customer satisfaction, resolve issues quickly, and work towards improved customer experience and profit outcomes.

    Use metrics that align to top satisfaction drivers

    This will give you a more accurate and fulsome view of customer satisfaction than standard satisfaction metrics alone will.

    Guided Implementation

    What is our GI on measuring and managing the customer satisfaction metrics that matter most?

    Identify True Customer Satisfaction Drivers

    Develop Metrics Dashboard Develop Customer Satisfaction Measurement and Management Plan

    Call #1: Discuss current pain points and barriers to successful customer satisfaction measurement, monitoring and maintenance. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #2: Discuss all available data, noting any gaps. Develop plan to fill gaps, discuss feasibility and timelines. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #3: Walk through SoftwareReviews reports to understand EF and satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 3 days.

    Call #4: Segment customers and document key satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 2 week.

    Call #5: Document business goals and align them to metrics. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #6: Complete the SoftwareReviews satisfaction measurement diagnostic. Plan next call – 3 days.

    Call #7: Score list of metrics that align to satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 2 days.

    Call #8: Develop metrics dashboard and definitions. Plan next call – 2 weeks.

    Call #9: Finalize metrics dashboard and definitions. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #10: Discuss committee and determine governance. Plan next call – 2 weeks.

    Call #11: Map out gaps in satisfaction along customer journey as they relate to top satisfaction drivers. Plan next call –2 weeks.

    Call #12: Develop plan and roadmap for satisfaction improvement. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #13: Finalize plan and roadmap. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call # 14: Review and coach on communication deck.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    For guidance on marketing applications, we can arrange a discussion with an Info-Tech analyst.

    Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

    Software Reviews offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”
    Included within Advisory Membership Optional add-ons

    Bibliography

    “Are you experienced?” Bain & Company, Apr. 2015. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

    Brisco, Ken. “Measuring Customer Satisfaction and Why It’s So Important.” NICE, Feb. 2019. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

    CMO.com Team. “The Customer Experience Management Mandate.” Adobe Experience Cloud Blog, July 2019. Accessed 14 June. 2022.

    Cote, Dan. “Advocacy Blooms and Business Booms When Customers and Employees Engage.” Influitive, Dec. 2021. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

    Fanderl, Harald and Perrey, Jesko. “Best of both worlds: Customer experience for more revenues and lower costs.” McKinsey & Company, Apr. 2014. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

    Gallemard, Jeremy. “Why – And How – Should Customer Satisfaction Be Measured?” Smart Tribune, Feb. 2020. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

    Kumar, Swagata. “Customer Success Statistics in 2021.” Customer Success Box, 2021. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

    Lakshmiu Tatikonda, “The Hidden Costs of Customer Dissatisfaction”, Management Accounting Quarterly, vol. 14, no. 3, 2013, pp 38. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

    Loper, Matthew. “Why ‘Customer Satisfaction’ Misses the Mark – And What to Measure Instead.” Newsweek, Jan. 2022. Accessed 16 June. 2022.

    Maechler, Nicolas, et al. “Improving the business-to-business customer experience.” McKinsey & Company, Mar. 2016. Accessed 16 June.

    “New Research from Dimension Data Reveals Uncomfortable CX Truths.” CISION PR Newswire, Apr. 2017. Accessed 7 June. 2022.

    Sheth, Rohan. 75 Must-Know Customer Experience Statistics to move Your Business Forward in 2022.” SmartKarrot, Feb. 2022. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

    Smith, Mercer. “111 Customer Service Statistics and Facts You Shouldn’t Ignore.” HelpScout, May 2022. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

    “State of the Connected Customer.” Salesforce, 2020. Accessed 14 June. 2022

    “The true value of customer experiences.” Deloitte, 2018. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

    Architect Your Big Data Environment

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}202|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • Organizations may understand the transformative potential of a big data initiative, but they struggle to make the transition from the awareness of its importance to identifying a concrete use case for a pilot project.
    • The big data ecosystem is crowded and confusing, and a lack of understanding of it may cause paralysis for organizations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don’t panic, and make use of the resources you already have. The skills, tools, and infrastructure for big data can break any budget quickly, but before making rash decisions, start with the resources you have in-house.
    • Big data as a service (BDaaS) is making big waves. BDaaS removes many of the hurdles associated with implementing a big data strategy and vastly lowers the barrier of entry.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow Info-Tech’s methodology for understanding the types of modern approaches to big data tools, and then determining which approach style makes the most sense for your organization.
    • Based on your big data use case, create a plan for getting started with big data tools that takes into account the backing of the use case, the organization’s priorities, and resourcing available.
    • Put a repeatable framework in place for creating a comprehensive big data tool environment that will help you decide on the necessary tools to help you realize the value from your big data use case and scale for the future.

    Architect Your Big Data Environment Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should find your optimal approach to big data tools, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Plant the foundations of your big data tool architecture

    Identify your big data use case and your current data-related capabilities.

    • Architect Your Big Data Environment – Phase 1: Plant the Foundations of Your Big Data Tool Architecture
    • Big Data Execution Plan Presentation
    • Big Data Architecture Planning Tool

    2. Weigh your big data architecture decision criteria

    Determine your capacity for big data tools, as well as the level of customizability and security needed for your solution to help justify your implementation style decision.

    • Architect Your Big Data Environment – Phase 2: Weigh Your Big Data Architecture Decision Criteria

    3. Determine your approach to implementing big data tools

    Analyze the three big data implementation styles, select your approach, and complete the execution plan for your big data initiative.

    • Architect Your Big Data Environment – Phase 3: Determine Your Approach To Implementing Big Data Tools
    [infographic]

    Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}357|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Project Management Office
    • Parent Category Link: /project-management-office
    • You use Microsoft tools to manage your work, projects, and/or project portfolio.
    • Its latest offering, Project for the web, is new and you’re not sure what to make of it. Microsoft says it will soon replace Microsoft Project and Project Online, but the new software doesn’t seem to do what the old software did.
    • The organization has adopted M365 for collaboration and work management. Meetings happen on Teams, projects are scoped a bit with Planner, and the operations group uses Azure Boards to keep track of what they need to get done.
    • Despite your reservations about the new project management software, Microsoft software has become even more ubiquitous.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The various MS Project offerings (but most notably the latest, Project for the web) hold the promise of integrating with the rest of M365 into a unified work management solution. However, out of the box, Project for the web and the various platforms within M365 are all disparate utilities that need to be pieced together in a purpose-built manner to make use of them for holistic work management purposes. If you’re looking for a cohesive product out of the box, look elsewhere. If you’re looking to assemble a wide array of work, project, and portfolio management functions across different functions and departments, you may have found what you seek.
    • Rather than choosing tools based on your gaps, assess your current maturity level so that you optimize your investment in the Microsoft landscape.

    Impact and Result

    Follow Info-Tech’s path in this blueprint to:

    • Perform a tool audit to trim your work management tool landscape.
    • Navigate the MS Project and M365 licensing landscape.
    • Make sense of what to do with Project for the web and take the right approach to rolling it out (i.e. DIY or MS Gold Partner driven) based upon your needs.
    • Create an action plan to inform next steps.

    After following the program in this blueprint, you will be prepared to advise the organization on how to best leverage the rapidly shifting work management options within M365 and the place of MS Project within it.

    Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should make sense of the MS Project and M365 landscapes, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Determine your tool needs

    Assess your work management tool landscape, current state maturity, and licensing needs to inform a purpose-built work management action plan.

    • M365 Task Management Tool Guide
    • M365 Project Management Tool Guide
    • M365 Project Portfolio Management Tool Guide
    • Tool Audit Workbook
    • Force Field Analysis Tool
    • Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool
    • Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Workbook (With Tool Analysis)
    • Project Management Maturity Assessment Workbook (With Tool Analysis)

    2. Weigh your MS Project implementation options

    Get familiar with Project for the web’s extensibility as well as the MS Gold Partner ecosystem as you contemplate the best implementation approach(s) for your organization.

    • None
    • None

    3. Finalize your implementation approach

    Prepare a boardroom-ready presentation that will help you communicate your MS Project and M365 action plan to PMO and organizational stakeholders.

    • Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Driving Forces and Risks

    The Purpose

    Assess the goals and needs as well as the risks and constraints of a work management optimization.

    Take stock of your organization’s current work management tool landscape.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear goals and alignment across workshop participants as well as an understanding of the risks and constraints that will need to be mitigated to succeed.

    Current-state insight into the organization’s work management tool landscape.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Explore the M365 work management landscape.

    1.3 Identify driving forces for change.

    1.4 Analyze potential risks.

    1.5 Perform current-state analysis on work management tools.

    Outputs

    Business context

    Current-state understanding of the task, project, and portfolio management options in M365 and how they align with the organization’s ways of working

    Goals and needs analysis

    Risks and constraints analysis

    Work management tool overview

    2 Determine Tool Needs and Process Maturity

    The Purpose

    Determine your organization’s work management tool needs as well as its current level of project management and project portfolio management process maturity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of your tooling needs and your current levels of process maturity.

    Activities

    2.1 Review tool audit dashboard and conduct the final audit.

    2.2 Identify current Microsoft licensing.

    2.3 Assess current-state maturity for project management.

    2.4 Define target state for project management.

    2.5 Assess current-state maturity for project portfolio management.

    2.6 Define target state for project portfolio management.

    Outputs

    Tool audit

    An understanding of licensing options and what’s needed to optimize MS Project options

    Project management current-state analysis

    Project management gap analysis

    Project portfolio management current-state analysis

    Project portfolio management gap analysis

    3 Weigh Your Implementation Options

    The Purpose

    Take stock of your implementation options for Microsoft old project tech and new project tech.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An optimized implementation approach based upon your organization’s current state and needs.

    Activities

    3.1 Prepare a needs assessment for Microsoft 365 and Project Plan licenses.

    3.2 Review the business case for Microsoft licensing.

    3.3 Get familiar with Project for the web.

    3.4 Assess the MS Gold Partner Community.

    3.5 Conduct a feasibility test for PFTW.

    Outputs

    M365 and Project Plan needs assessment

    Business case for additional M365 and MS Project licensing

    An understand of Project for the web and how to extend it

    MS Gold Partner outreach plan

    A go/no-go decision for extending Project for the web on your own

    4 Finalize Implementation Approach

    The Purpose

    Determine the best implementation approach for your organization and prepare an action plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A purpose-built implementation approach to help communicate recommendations and needs to key stakeholders.

    Activities

    4.1 Decide on the implementation approach.

    4.2 Identify the audience for your proposal.

    4.3 Determine timeline and assign accountabilities.

    4.4 Develop executive summary presentation.

    Outputs

    An implementation plan

    Stakeholder analysis

    A communication plan

    Initial executive presentation

    5 Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    The Purpose

    Finalize your M365 and MS Project work management recommendations and get ready to communicate them to key stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Time saved in developing and communicating an action plan.

    Stakeholder buy-in.

    Activities

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Outputs

    Finalized executive presentation

    A gameplan to communicate your recommendations to key stakeholders as well as a roadmap for future optimization

    Further reading

    Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization

    View your task management, project management, and project portfolio management options through the lens of M365.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Microsoft Project is an enigma

    Microsoft Project has dominated its market since being introduced in the 1980s, yet the level of adoption and usage per license is incredibly low.

    The software is ubiquitous, mostly considered to represent its category for “Project Management.” Yet, the software is conflated with its “Portfolio Management” offerings as organizations make platform decisions with Microsoft Project as the incorrectly identified incumbent.

    And incredibly, Microsoft has dominated the next era of productivity software with the “365” offerings. Yet, it froze the “Project” family of offerings and introduced the not-yet-functional “Project for the web.”

    Having a difficult time understanding what to do with, and about, Microsoft Project? You’re hardly alone. It’s not simply a question of tolerating, embracing, or rejecting the product: many who choose a competitor find they’re still paying for Microsoft Project-related licensing for years to come.

    If you’re in the Microsoft 365 ecosystem, use this research to understand your rapidly shifting landscape of options.

    (Barry Cousins, Project Portfolio Management Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    You use Microsoft (MS) tools to manage your work, projects, and/or project portfolio.

    Their latest offering, Project for the web, is new and you’re not sure what to make of it. Microsoft says it will soon replace Microsoft Project and Project Online, but the new software doesn’t seem to do what the old software did.

    The organization has adopted M365 for collaboration and work management. Meetings happen on Teams, projects are scoped a bit with Planner, and the operations group uses Azure Boards to keep track of what they need to get done.

    Despite your reservations about the new project management software, Microsoft software has become even more ubiquitous.

    Common Obstacles

    M365 provides the basic components for managing tasks, projects, and project portfolios, but there is no instruction manual for making those parts work together.

    M365 isn’t the only set of tools at play. Business units and teams across the organization have procured other non-Microsoft tools for work management without involving IT.

    Microsoft’s latest project offering, Project for the web, is still evolving and you’re never sure if it is stable or ready for prime time. The missing function seems to involve the more sophisticated project planning disciplines, which are still important to larger, longer, and costlier projects.

    Common Obstacles

    Follow Info-Tech’s path in this blueprint to:

    • Perform a tool audit to trim your work management tool landscape.
    • Navigate the MS Project and M365 licensing landscape.
    • Make sense of what to do with Project for the web and take the right approach to rolling it out (i.e. DIY or MS Gold Partner driven) for your needs.
    • Create an action plan to inform next steps.

    After following the program in this blueprint, you will be prepared to advise the organization on how to best leverage the rapidly shifting work management options within M365 and the place of MS Project within it.

    M365 and, within it, O365 are taking over

    Accelerated partly by the pandemic and the move to remote work, Microsoft’s market share in the work productivity space has grown exponentially in the last two years.

    70% of Fortune 500 companies purchased 365 from Sept. 2019 to Sept. 2020. (Thexyz blog, 2020)

    In its FY21 Q2 report, Microsoft reported 47.5 million M365 consumer subscribers – an 11.2% increase from its FY20 Q4 reporting. (Office 365 for IT Pros, 2021)

    As of September 2020, there were 258,000,000 licensed O365 users. (Thexyz blog, 2020)

    In this blueprint, we’ll look at what the what the phenomenal growth of M365 means for PMOs and project portfolio practitioners who identify as Microsoft shops

    The market share of M365 warrants a fresh look at Microsoft’s suite of project offerings

    For many PMO and project portfolio practitioners, the footprint of M365 in their organizations’ work management cultures is forcing a renewed look at Microsoft’s suite of project offerings.

    The complicating factor is this renewed look comes at a transitional time in Microsoft’s suite of project and portfolio offerings.

    • The market dominance of MS Project Server and Project Online are wanning, with Microsoft promising the end-of-life for Online sometime in the coming years.
    • Project Online’s replacement, Project for the web, is a viable task management and lightweight project management tool, but its viability as a replacement for the rigor of Project Online is at present largely a question mark.
    • Related to the uncertainty and promise around Project for the web, the Dataverse and the Power Platform offer a glimpse into a democratized future of work management tools but anything specific about that future has yet to solidify.

    Microsoft Project has 66% market share in the project management tool space. (Celoxis, 2018)

    A copy of MS project is sold or licensed every 20 seconds. (Integent, 2013)

    MS Project is evolving to meet new work management realities

    It also evolved to not meet the old project management realities.

    • The lines between traditional project management and operational task management solutions are blurring as organizations struggle to keep up with demands.
    • To make the software easier to use, modern work management doesn’t involve the complexities from days past. You won’t find anywhere to introduce complex predecessor-successor relationships, unbalanced assignments with front-loading or back-loading, early-start/late-finish, critical path, etc.
    • “Work management” is among the latest buzzwords in IT consulting. With Project for the web (PFTW), Azure Boards, and Planner, Microsoft is attempting to compete with lighter and better-adopted tools like Trello, Basecamp, Asana, Wrike, and Monday.com.
    • Buyers of project and work management software have struggled to understand how PFTW will still be usable if it gets the missing project management function from MS Project.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Beware of the Software Granularity Paradox.

    Common opinion 1: “Plans and estimates that are granular enough to be believable are too detailed to manage and maintain.”

    Common opinion 2: “Plans simple enough to publish aren’t detailed enough to produce believable estimates.”

    In other words, software simple enough to get widely adopted doesn’t produce believable plans. Software that can produce believable plans is too complex to use at scale.

    A viable task and project management option must walk the line between these dichotomies.

    M365 gives you the pieces, but it’s on PMO users to piece them together in a viable way

    With the new MS Project and M365, it’s on PMOs to avoid the granularity paradox and produce a functioning solution that fits with the organization’s ways of working.

    Common perception still sees Microsoft Project as a rich software tool. Thus, when we consider the next generation of Microsoft Project, it’s easy to expect a newer and friendlier version of what we knew before.

    In truth, the new solution is a collection of partially integrated but largely disparate tools that each satisfy a portion of the market’s needs. While it looks like a rich collection of function when viewed through high-level requirements, users will find:

    • Overlaps, where multiple tools satisfy the same functional requirement (e.g. “assign a task”)
    • Gaps, where a tool doesn’t quite do enough and you’re forced to incorporate another tool (e.g. reverting back to Microsoft Project for advanced resource planning)
    • Islands, where tools don’t fluently talk to each other (e.g. Planner data integrated in real-time with portfolio data, which requires clunky, unstable, decentralized end-user integrations with Microsoft Power Automate)
    A colourful arrangement of Microsoft programs arranged around a pile of puzzle pieces.

    Info-Tech's approach

    Use our framework to best leverage the right MS Project offerings and M365 components for your organization’s work management needs.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. A simple to follow framework to help you make sense of a chaotic landscape.
    2. Practical and tactical tools that will help you save time.
    3. Leverage industry best practices and practitioner-based insights.
    An Info-Tech framework titled 'Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization, subtitle 'View your task, project, and portfolio management options through the lens of Microsoft 365'. There are four main sections titled 'Background', 'Approaches', 'Deployments', and 'Portfolio Outcomes'. In '1) Background' are 'Analyze Content', 'Assess Constraints', and 'Determine Goals and Needs'. In '2) Approaches' are 'DIY: Are you ready to do it yourself?' 'Info-Tech: Can our analysts help?', and 'MS Gold Partner: Are you better off with a third party?'. In '3) Deployments' are five sections: 'Personal Task Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Person. 'Team Task Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Team. 'Project Portfolio Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Project. 'Project Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Functionally Incomplete. 'Enterprise Project and Portfolio Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Underadopted. In '4) Portfolio Outcomes' are 'Informed Steering Committee', 'Increased Project Throughput', 'Improved Portfolio Responsiveness', 'Optimized Resource Utilization', and 'Reduced Monetary Waste'.

    Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization

    View your task, project, and portfolio management options through the lens of Microsoft 365.

    1. Background

    • Analyze Content
    • Assess Constraints
    • Determine Goals and Needs

    2. Approaches

    • DIY – Are you ready to do it yourself?
    • Info-Tech – Can our analysts help?
    • MS Gold Partner – Are you better off with a third party?

    3. Deployments

      Task Management

    • Personal Task Management
      • Who does it? Knowledge workers
      • What is it? To-do lists
      • Common Approaches
        • Paper list and sticky notes
        • Light task tools
      • Applications
        • Planner
        • To Do
      • Level of Rigor 1/5
      • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Person
    • Team Task Management
      • Who does it? Groups of knowledge workers
      • What is it? Collaborative to-do lists
      • Common Approaches
        • Kanban boards
        • Spreadsheets
        • Light task tools
      • Applications
        • Planner
        • Azure Boards
        • Teams
      • Level of Rigor 2/5
      • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Team
    • Project Management

    • Project Portfolio Management
      • Who does it? PMO Directors, Portfolio Managers
      • What is it?
        • Centralized list of projects
        • Request and intake handling
        • Aggregating reporting
      • Common Approaches
        • Spreadsheets
        • PPM software
        • Roadmaps
      • Applications
        • Project for the Web
        • Power Platform
      • Level of Rigor 3/5
      • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Project
    • Project Management
      • Who does it? Project Managers
      • What is it? Deterministic scheduling of related tasks
      • Common Approaches
        • Spreadsheets
        • Lists
        • PM software
        • PPM software
      • Applications
        • Project Desktop Client
      • Level of Rigor 4/5
      • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Functionally Incomplete
    • Enterprise Project and Portfolio Management

    • Enterprise Project and Portfolio Management
      • Who does it? PMO and ePMO Directors, Portfolio Managers, Project Managers
      • What is it?
        • Centralized request and intake handling
        • Resource capacity management
        • Deterministic scheduling of related tasks
      • Common Approaches
        • PPM software
      • Applications
        • Project Online
        • Project Desktop Client
        • Project Server
      • Level of Rigor 5/5
      • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Underadopted

    4. Portfolio Outcomes

    • Informed Steering Committee
    • Increased Project Throughput
    • Improved Portfolio Responsiveness
    • Optimized Resource Utilization
    • Reduced Monetary Waste

    Info-Tech's methodology for Determine the Future of MS Project for Your Organization

    1. Determine Your Tool Needs

    2. Weigh Your MS Project Implementation Options

    3. Finalize Your Implementation Approach

    Phase Steps

    1. Survey the M365 Work Management Tools
    2. Perform a Process Maturity Assessment to Help Inform Your M365 Starting Point
    3. Consider the Right MS Project Licenses for Your Stakeholders
    1. Get Familiar With Extending Project for the Web Using Power Apps
    2. Assess the MS Gold Partner Community
    1. Prepare an Action Plan

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Work Management Tool Audit
    2. MS Project and Power Platform Licensing Needs
    3. Project Management and Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment
    1. Project for the Web Readiness Assessment
    2. MS Gold Partner Outreach Plan
    1. MS Project and M365 Action Plan Presentation

    Insight Summary

    Overarching blueprint insight: Microsoft Parts Sold Separately. Assembly required.

    The various MS Project offerings (but most notably the latest, Project for the web) hold the promise of integrating with the rest of M365 into a unified work management solution. However, out of the box, Project for the web and the various platforms within M365 are all disparate utilities that need to be pieced together in a purpose-built manner to make use of them for holistic work management purposes.

    If you’re looking for a cohesive product out of the box, look elsewhere. If you’re looking to assemble a wide array of work, project, and portfolio management functions across different functions and departments, you may have found what you seek

    Phase 1 insight: Align your tool choice to your process maturity level.

    Rather than choosing tools based on your gaps, make sure to assess your current maturity level so that you optimize your investment in the Microsoft landscape.

    Phase 2 insight: Weigh your options before jumping into Microsoft’s new tech.

    Microsoft’s new Project plans (P1, P3, and P5) suggest there is a meaningful connection out of the box between its old tech (Project desktop, Project Server, and Project Online) and its new tech (Project for the web).

    However, the offerings are not always interoperable.

    Phase 3 insight: Keep the iterations small as you move ahead with trials and implementations.

    Organizations are changing as fast as the software we use to run them.

    If you’re implementing parts of this platform, keep the changes small as you monitor the vendors for new software versions and integrations.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable: Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    The Action Plan will help culminate and present:

    • Context and Constraints
    • DIY Implementation Approach
    Or
    • MS Partner Implementation Approach
    • Future-State Vision and Goals
    Samples of Info-Tech's key deliverable 'Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template'.

    Tool Audit Workbook

    Sample of Info-Tech deliverable 'Tool Audit Workbook'.

    Assess your organization's current work management tool landscape and determine what tools drive value for individual users and teams and which ones can be rationalized.

    Force Field Analysis

    Sample of Info-Tech deliverable 'Force Field Analysis'.

    Document the driving and resisting forces for making a change to your work management tools.

    Maturity Assessments

    Sample of Info-Tech deliverable 'Maturity Assessments'.

    Use these assessments to identify gaps in project management and project portfolio management processes. The results will help guide process improvement efforts and measure success and progress.

    Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool

    Sample of Info-Tech deliverable 'Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool'.

    Determine the best licensing options and approaches for your implementation of Microsoft Project.

    Curate your work management tools to harness valuable portfolio outcomes

    • Increase Project Throughput

      Do more projects by ensuring the right projects and the right amount of projects are approved and executed.
    • Support an Informed Steering Committee

      Easily compare progress of projects across the portfolio and enable the leadership team to make decisions.
    • Improve portfolio responsiveness

      Make the portfolio responsive to executive steering when new projects and changing priorities need rapid action.
    • Optimize Resource Utilization

      Assign the right resources to approved projects and minimize the chronic over-allocation of resources that leads to burnout.
    • Reduce Monetary Waste

      Terminate low-value projects early and avoid sinking additional funds into unsuccessful ventures.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 4 months.

      Introduction

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
    • Phase 1

    • Call #2: Explore the M365 work management landscape.
    • Call #3: Discuss Microsoft Project Plans and their capabilities.
    • Call #4: Assess current-state maturity.
    • Phase 2

    • Call #5: Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps.
    • Call #6: Assess the MS Gold Partner Community.
    • Phase 3

    • Call #7: Determine approach and deployment.
    • Call #8: Discuss action plan.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1
    Assess Driving Forces and Risks

    Day 2
    Determine Tool Needs and Process Maturity

    Day 3
    Weigh Your Implementation Options

    Day 4
    Finalize Implementation Approach

    Day 5
    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    • 1.1 Review the business context.
    • 1.2 Explore the M365 work management landscape.
    • 1.3 Identify driving forces for change.
    • 1.4 Analyze potential risks.
    • 1.5 Perform current-state analysis on work management tools.
    • 2.1 Review tool audit dashboard and conduct the final audit.
    • 2.2 Identify current Microsoft licensing.
    • 2.3 Assess current-state maturity for project management.
    • 2.4 Define target state for project management.
    • 2.5 Assess current-state maturity for project portfolio management.
    • 2.6 Define target state for project portfolio management.
    • 3.1 Prepare a needs assessment for Microsoft 365 and Project Plan licenses.
    • 3.2 Review the business case for Microsoft licensing.
    • 3.3 Get familiar with Project for the web.
    • 3.4 Assess the MS Gold Partner Community.
    • 3.5 Conduct a feasibility test for PFTW.
    • 4.1 Decide on the implementation approach.
    • 4.2 Identify the audience for your proposal.
    • 4.3 Determine timeline and assign accountabilities.
    • 4.4 Develop executive summary presentation.
    • 5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
    • 5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Force Field Analysis
    2. Tool Audit Workbook
    1. Tool Audit Workbook
    2. Project Management Maturity Assessment
    3. Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment
    1. Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool
    1. Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan
    1. Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan

    Determine the Future of Microsoft Project for Your Organization

    Phase 1: Determine Your Tool Needs

    Phase 1: Determine Your Tool Needs

    Phase 2: Weigh Your Implementation Options Phase 3: Finalize Your Implementation Approach
    • Step 1.1: Survey the M365 work management landscape
    • Step 1.2: Explore the Microsoft Project Plans and their capabilities
    • Step 1.3: Assess the maturity of your current PM & PPM capabilities
    • Step 2.1: Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps
    • Step 2.2: Assess the MS Gold Partner Community
    • Step 3.1: Prepare an action plan

    Phase Outcomes

    • Tool Audit
    • Microsoft Project Licensing Analysis
    • Project Management Maturity Assessment
    • Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessments

    Step 1.1

    Survey the M365 Work Management Landscape

    Activities

    • 1.1.1 Distinguish between task, project, and portfolio capabilities
    • 1.1.2 Review Microsoft’s offering for task, project, and portfolio management needs
    • 1.1.4 Assess your organizational context and constraints
    • 1.1.3 Explore typical deployment options

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assessing your organization’s context for project and project portfolio management
    • Documenting the organization’s constraints
    • Establishing the organization’s goals and needs

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director
    • Resource Managers
    • Project Managers
    • Knowledge Workers

    Outcomes of Step

    • Knowledge of the Microsoft ecosystem as it relates to task, project, and portfolio management
    • Current organizational context and constraints

    Don’t underestimate the value of interoperability

    The whole Microsoft suite is worth more than the sum of its parts … if you know how to put it together.

    38% of the worldwide office suite market belongs to Microsoft. (Source: Statistica, 2021)

    1 in 3 small to mid-sized organizations moving to Microsoft Project say they are doing so because it integrates well with Office 365. (Source: CBT Nuggets, 2018)

    There’s a gravity to the Microsoft ecosystem.

    And while there is no argument that there are standalone task management tools, project management tools, or portfolio management tools that are likely more robust, feature-rich, and easier to adopt, it’s rare that you find an ecosystem that can do it all, to an acceptable level.

    That is the value proposition of Microsoft: the ubiquity, familiarity, and versatility. It’s the Swiss army knife of software products.

    The work management landscape is evolving

    With M365, Microsoft is angling to become the industry leader, and your organization’s hub, for work management.

    Workers lose up to 40% of their time multi-tasking and switching between applications. (Bluescape, 2018)

    25 Context switches – On average, workers switch between 10 apps, 25 times a day. (Asana, 2021)

    “Work management” is among the latest buzzwords in IT consulting.

    What is work management? It was born of a blurring of the traditional lines between operational or day-to-day tasks and project management tasks, as organizations struggle to keep up with both operational and project demands.

    To make the software easier to use, modern work management doesn’t involve the complexities from days past. You won’t find anywhere to introduce complex predecessor-successor relationships, unbalanced assignments with front-loading or back-loading, early-start/late-finish, critical path, etc.

    Indeed, with Project for the web, Azure Boards, Planner, and other M365 utilities, Microsoft is attempting to compete with lighter and better-adopted tools (e.g. Trello, Wike, Monday.com).

    The Microsoft world of work management can be understood across three broad categories

    1. Task Management

      Task management is essentially the same as keeping track of a to-do list. While you can have a project-related task, you can also have a non-project-related task. The sum of project and non-project tasks make up the work that you need to complete.
    2. Project Management

      Project management (PM) is a methodical approach to planning and guiding project processes from start to finish. Implementing PM processes helps establish repeatable steps and controls that enable project success. Documentation of PM processes leads to consistent results and dependable delivery on expectations.
    3. Portfolio Management

      Project portfolio management (PPM) is a strategic approach to approving, prioritizing, resourcing, and reporting on project. In addition, effective PPM should nurture the completion of projects in the portfolio in the most efficient way and track the extent to which the organization is realizing the intended benefits from completed projects.

    The slides ahead explain each of these modes of working in the Microsoft ecosystem in turn. Further, Info-Tech’s Task, Project, and Project Portfolio Management Tool Guides explain these areas in more detail.

    Use Info-Tech’s Tool Guides assess your MS Project and M365 work management options

    Lean on Info-Tech’s Tool Guides as you navigate Microsoft’s tasks management, project management, and project portfolio management options.

    • The slides ahead take you through a bird’s-eye view of what your MS Project and M365 work management options look like across Info-Tech’s three broad categories
    • In addition to these slides, Info-Tech has three in-depth tool guides that take you through your operational task management, project management, and project portfolio management options in MS Project and M365.
    • These tool guides can be leveraged as you determine whether Microsoft has the required toolset for your organization’s task, project, and project portfolio management needs.

    Download Info-Tech’s Task Management, Project Management, and Project Portfolio Management Tool Guides

    Task Management Overview

    What is task management?

    • It is essentially the same as keeping track of a to-do list. While you can have a project-related task, you can also have a non-project-related task. The sum of project and non-project tasks make up the work that you need to complete.

    What are the benefits of task management using applications within the MS suite?

    • Many organizations already own the tools and don't have to go out and buy something separately.
    • There is easy integration with other MS applications.

    What is personal task management?

    • Tools that allow you to structure work that is visible only to you. This can include work from tasks you are going to be completing for yourself and tasks you are completing as part of a larger work effort.

    What is team task management?

    • Tools that allow users to structure work that is visible to a group. When something is moved or changed, it affects what the group is seeing because it is a shared platform.

    Get familiar with the Microsoft product offerings for task management

    A diagram of Microsoft products and what they can help accomplish. It starts on the right with 'Teams' and 'Outlook'. Both can flow through to 'Personal Task Management' with products 'Teams Tasks' and 'To-Do', but Teams also flows into 'Team Task Management' with products 'Planner' and 'Project for the web'. See the next two slides for more details on these modes of working.

    Download the M365 Task Management Tool Guide

    Personal Task Management

    The To-Do list

    • Who does it?
      • Knowledge workers
    • What is it?
      • How each knowledge worker organizes their individual work tasks in M365
    • When is it done?
      • As needed throughout the day
    • Where is it done?
      • Paper
      • Digital location
    • How is it done?
      • DIY and self-developed
      • Usually not repeatable and evolves depending on work location and tools available
      • Not governed

    Microsoft differentiator:

    Utilities like Planner and To-Do make it easier to turn what are often ad hoc approaches into a more repeatable process.

    Team Task Management

    The SharedTo-Do list

    • Who does it?
      • Groups of knowledge workers
    • What is it?
      • Temporary and permanent collections of knowledge workers
    • When is it done?
      • As needed or on a pre-determined cadence
    • Where is it done?
      • Paper
      • Digital location
    • How is it done?
      • User norms are established organically and adapted based upon the needs of the team.
      • To whatever extent processes are repeatable in the first place, they remain repeatable only if the team is a collective.
      • Usually governed within the team and not subject to wider visibility.

    Microsoft differentiator:

    Teams has opened personal task management tactics up to more collaborative approaches.

    Project Management Overview

    2003

    Project Server: This product serves many large enterprise clients, but Microsoft has stated that it is at end of life. It is appealing to industries and organizations where privacy is paramount. This is an on-premises system that combines servers like SharePoint, SQL, and BI to report on information from Project Desktop Client. To realize the value of this product, there must be adoption across the organization and engagement at the project-task level for all projects within the portfolio.

    2013

    Project Online: This product serves many medium enterprise clients. It is appealing for IT departments who want to get a rich set of features that can be used to intake projects, assign resources, and report on project portfolio health. It is a cloud solution built on the SharePoint platform, which provides many users a sense of familiarity. However, due to the bottom-up reporting nature of this product, again, adoption across the organization and engagement at the project task level for all projects within the portfolio is critical.

    2020

    Project for the web: This product is the newest on the market and is quickly being evolved. Many O365 enthusiasts have been early adopters of Project for the web despite its limited features when compared to Project Online. It is also a cloud solution that encourages citizen developers by being built on the MS Power Platform. This positions the product well to integrate with Power BI, Power Automate, and Power Apps. It is, so far, the only MS product that lends itself to abstracted portfolio management, which means it doesn’t rely on project task level engagement to produce portfolio reports. The portfolio can also run with a mixed methodology by funneling Project, Azure Boards, and Planner boards into its roadmap function.

    Get familiar with the Microsoft product offerings for project management

    A diagram of Microsoft products and what they can help accomplish in Personal and Team Project Management. Products listed include 'Project Desktop Client', 'Project Online', 'SharePoint', 'Power Platform', 'Azure DevOps', 'Project for the web', Project Roadmap', 'Project Home', and 'Project Server'. See the next slide for more details on personal and team project management as modes of working.

    Download the M365 Project Management Tool Guide

    Project Management

    Orchestrating the delivery of project work

    • Who does it?
      • Project managers
    • What is it?
      • Individual project managers developing project plans and schedules in the MS Project Desktop Client
    • When is it done?
      • Throughout the lifecycle of the project
    • Where is it done?
      • Digital location
    • How is it done?
      • Used by individual project managers to develop and manage project plans.
      • Common approaches may or may not involve reconciliation of resource capacity through integration with Active Directory.
      • Sometimes usage norms are established by organizational project management governance standards, though individual use of the desktop client is largely ungoverned.

    Microsoft differentiator:

    For better or worse, Microsoft’s core solution is veritably synonymous with project management itself and has formally contributed to the definition of the project management space.

    Project Portfolio Management Overview

    Optimize what you’re already using and get familiar with the Power Platform.

    What does PPM look like within M365?

    • The Office suite in the Microsoft 365 suite boasts the world’s most widely used application for the purposes of abstracted and strategic PPM: Excel. For the purposes of PPM, Excel is largely implemented in a suboptimal fashion, and as a result, organizations fail to gain PPM adoption and maturation through its use.
    • Until very recently, Microsoft toolset did not explicitly address abstracted PPM needs.
    • However, with the latest version of M365 and Project for the web, Microsoft is boasting of renewed PPM capabilities from its toolset. These capabilities are largely facilitated through what Microsoft is calling its Power Platform (i.e. a suite of products that includes Power, Power Apps, and Power Automate).

    Explore the Microsoft product offering for abstracted project portfolio management

    A diagram of Microsoft products for 'Adaptive or Abstracted Portfolio Management'. Products listed include 'Excel', 'MS Lists', 'Forms', 'Teams', and the 'Power Platform' products 'Power BI', 'Power Apps', and 'Power Automate'. See the next slide for more details on adaptive or abstracted portfolio management as a mode of working.

    Download the M365 Project Portfolio Management Tool Guide

    Project Portfolio Management

    Doing the right projects, at the right time, with the right resources

    • Who does it?
      • PMO directors; portfolio managers
    • What is it?
      A strategic approach to approving, prioritizing, resourcing, and reporting on projects using applications in M365 and Project for the web. In distinction to enterprise PPM, a top-down or abstracted approach is applied, meaning PPM data is not tied to project task details.
    • Where is it done?
      • Digital tool, either homegrown or commercial
    • How is it done?
      • Currently in M365, PPM approaches are largely self-developed, though Microsoft Gold Partners are commonly involved.
      • User norms are still evolving, along with the software’s (Project for the web) function.

    Microsoft differentiator:

    Integration between Project for the web and Power Apps allows for custom approaches.

    Project Portfolio Management Overview

    Microsoft’s legacy project management toolset has contributed to the definition of traditional or enterprise PPM space.

    A robust and intensive bottom-up approach that requires task level roll-ups from projects to inform portfolio level data. For this model to work, reconciliation of individual resource capacity must be universal and perpetually current.

    If your organization has low or no maturity with PPM, this approach will be tough to make successful.

    In fact, most organizations under adopt the tools required to effectively operate with the traditional project portfolio management. Once adopted and operationalized, this combination of tools gives the executives the most precise view of the current state of projects within the portfolio.

    Explore the Microsoft product offering for enterprise project portfolio management

    A diagram of Microsoft products for 'Enterprise or Traditional Portfolio Management'. Products listed include 'Project Desktop Client', 'SharePoint', 'Project Online', 'Azure DevOps', 'Project Roadmaps', and 'Project Home'. See the next slide for more details on this as a mode of working.

    Download the M365 Project Portfolio Management Tool Guide

    Enterprise Project and Portfolio Management

    Bottom-up approach to managing the project portfolio

    • Who does it?
      • PMO and ePMO directors; portfolio managers
      • Project managers
    • What is it?
      • A strategic approach to approving, prioritizing, resourcing, and reporting on projects using applications in M365 and Project for the web. In distinction to enterprise PPM, a top-down or abstracted approach is applied, meaning PPM data is not tied to project task details.
    • Where is it done?
      • Digital tool that is usually commercial.
    • How is it done?
      • Microsoft Gold Partner involvement is highly likely in successful implementations.
      • Usage norms are long established and customized solutions are prevalent.
      • To be successful, use must be highly governed.
      • Reconciliation of individual resource capacity must be universal and perpetually current.

    Microsoft differentiator:

    Microsoft’s established network of Gold Partners helps to make this deployment a viable option.

    Assess your current tool ecosystem across work management categories

    Use Info-Tech’s Tool Audit Workbook to assess the value and satisfaction for the work management tools currently in use.

    • With the modes of working in mind that have been addressed in the previous slides and in Info-Tech’s Tool Guides, the activity slides ahead encourage you to engage your wider organization to determine all of the ways of working across individuals and teams.
    • Depending on the scope of your work management optimization, these engagements may be limited to IT or may extend to the business.
    • Use Info-Tech’s Tool Audit Workbook to help you gather and make sense of the tool data you collect. The result of this activity is to gain insight into the tools that drive value and fail to drive value across your work management categories with a view to streamline the organization’s tool ecosystem.

    Download Info-Tech’s Tool Audit Workbook

    Sample of Info-Tech's Tool Audit Workbook.

    1.2.1 Compile list of tools

    1-3 hours

    Input: Information on tools used to complete task, project, and portfolio tasks

    Output: Analyzed list of tools

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Tool Audit Workbook

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers, Business Stakeholders

    1. Identify the stakeholder groups that are in scope. For each group that you’ve identified, brainstorm the different tools and artifacts that are necessary to get the task, project, and project portfolio management functions done.
    2. Make sure to record the tool name and specify its category (standard document, artifact, homegrown solution, or commercial solution).
    3. Think about and discuss how often the tool is being used for each use case across the organization. Document whether its use is required. Then assess reporting functionality, data accuracy, and cost.
    4. Lastly, give a satisfaction rating for each use case.

    Excerpt from the Tool Audit Workbook

    Excerpt from Info-Tech's Tool Audit Workbook on compiling tools.

    1.2.1 Review dashboard

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of key PPM decision points, List of who is accountable for PPM decisions, List of who has PPM decision-making authority

    Output: Prioritized list of PPM decision-making support needs

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Tool Audit Workbook

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, CIO

    Discuss the outputs of the Dashboards tab to inform your decision maker on whether to pass or fail the tool for each use case.

    Sample of a BI dashboard used to evaluate the usefulness of tools. Written notes include: 'Slice the data based on stakeholder group, tool, use case, and category', and 'Review the results of the questionnaire by comparing cost and satisfaction'.

    1.2.1 Execute final audit

    1 hour

    Input: List of key PPM decision points, List of who is accountable for PPM decisions, List of who has PPM decision-making authority

    Output: Prioritized list of PPM decision-making support needs

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Tool Audit Workbook

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, CIO

    1. Using the information available, schedule time with the leadership team to present the results.
    2. Identify the accountable party to make the final decision on what current tools pass or fail the final audit.
    3. Mind the gap presented by the failed tools and look to possibilities within the M365 and Microsoft Project suite. For each tool that is deemed unsatisfactory for the future state, mark it as “Fail” in column O on tab 2 of the Tool Audit Workbook. This will ensure the item shows in the “Fail” column on tab 4 of the tool when you refresh the data.
    4. For each of the tools that “fail” your audit and that you’re going to make recommendations to rationalize in a future state, try to capture the annual total current-state spending on licenses, and the work modes the tool currently supports (i.e. task, project, and/or portfolio management).
    5. Additionally, start to think about future-state replacements for each tool within or outside of the M365/MS Project platforms. As we move forward to finalize your action plan in the last phase of this blueprint, we will capture and present this information to key stakeholders.

    Document your goals, needs, and constraints before proceeding

    Use Info-Tech’s Force Field Analysis Tool to help weigh goals and needs against risks and constraints associated with a work management change.

    • Now that you have discussed the organization’s ways of working and assessed its tool landscape – and made some initial decisions on some tool options that might need to change across that landscape – gather key stakeholders to define (a) why a change is needed at this time and (b) to document some of the risks and constraints associated with changing.
    • Info-Tech’s Force Field Analysis Tool can be used to capture these data points. It takes an organizational change management approach and asks you to consider the positive and negative forces associated with a work management tool change at this time.
    • The slides ahead walk you through a force field analysis activity and help you to navigate the relevant tabs in the Tool.

    Download Info-Tech's Force Field Analysis Tool

    Sample of Info-Tech's Force Field Analysis Tool.

    1.2.1 Identify goals and needs (1 of 2)

    Use tab 1 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook to assess goals and needs.

    30 minutes

    Input: Opportunities associated with determining the use case for Microsoft Project and M365 in your organization

    Output: Plotted opportunities based on probability and impact

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Force Field Analysis Tool

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers

    1. Brainstorm opportunities associated with exploring and/or implementing Microsoft Project and the Microsoft 365 suite of products for task, project, and project portfolio management.
    2. Document relevant opportunities in tab 1 of the Force Field Analysis Tool. For each driving force for the change (note: a driving force can include goals and needs) that is identified, provide a category that explains why the driving force is a concern (i.e. with this force is the organization looking to mature, integrate, scape, or accelerate?).
    3. In addition, assess the ease of achieving or realizing each goal or need and the impact of realizing them on the PMO and/or the organization.
    4. See the next slide for a screenshot that helps you navigate tab 1 of the Tool.

    Download the Force Field Analysis Tool

    1.2.1 Identify goals and needs (2 of 2)

    Screenshot of tab 1 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook.

    Screenshot of tab 1 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook. There are five columns referred to as columns B through F with the headings 'Opportunities', 'Category', 'Source', 'Ease of Achieving', and 'Impact on PMO/Organization'.

    In column B on tab 1, note the specific opportunities the group would like to call out.

    In column C, categorize the goal or need being articulated by the list of drop-down options: will it accelerate the time to benefit? Will it help to integrate systems and data sources? Will it mature processes and the organization overall? Will it help to scale across the organization? Choose the option that best aligns with the opportunity.

    In column D, categorize the source of the goal or need as internal or external.

    In column E, use the drop-down menus to indicate the ease of realizing each goal or need for the organization. Will it be relatively easy to manifest or will there be complexities to implementing it?

    In column F, use the drop-down menus to indicate the positive impact of realizing or achieving each need on the PMO and/or the organization.

    On tab 3 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook, your inputs on tab 1 are summarized in graphical form from columns B to G. On tab 3, these goals and needs results are contrasted with your inputs on tab 2 (see next slide).

    1.2.2 Identify risk and constraints (1 of 2)

    Use tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook to assess opposing forces to change.

    30 minutes

    Input: Risks associated with determining the use case for Microsoft Project and M365 in your organization

    Output: Plotted risks based on probability and impact

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Force Field Analysis Tool

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers

    1. With the same working group from 1.2.1, brainstorm risks, constraints, and other opposing forces pertaining to your potential future state.
    2. Document relevant opposing forces in tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Tool. For each opposing force for the change (note: a driving force can include goals and needs) that is identified, provide a category that explains why the opposing force is a concern (i.e. will it impact or is it impacted by time, resources, maturity, budget, or culture?).
    3. In addition, assess the likelihood of the risk or constraint coming to light and the negative impact of it coming to light for your proposed change.
    4. See the next slide for a screenshot that helps you navigate tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Tool.

    Download the Force Field Analysis Tool

    1.2.2 Identify risk and constraints (2 of 2)

    Screenshot of tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook.

    Screenshot of tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook. There are five columns referred to as columns B through F with the headings 'Risks and Constraints', 'Category', 'Source', 'Likelihood of Constraint/Risk/Resisting Force Being Felt', and 'Impact to Derailing Goals and Needs'.

    In column B on tab 2, note the specific risks and constraints the group would like to call out.

    In column C, categorize the risk or constraint being articulated by the list of drop-down options: will it impact or is it impacted by time, resources, budget, culture or maturity?

    In column D, categorize the source of the goal or need as internal or external.

    In column E, use the drop-down menus to indicate the likelihood of each risk or constraint materializing during your implementation. Will it definitely occur or is there just a small chance it could come to light?

    In column F, use the drop-down menus to indicate the negative impact of the risk or constraint to achieving your goals and needs.

    On tab 3 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook, your inputs on tab 2 are summarized in graphical form from columns I to N. On tab 3, your risk and constraint results are contrasted with your inputs on tab 1 to help you gauge the relative weight of driving vs. opposing forces.

    Step 1.2

    Explore the Microsoft Project Plans and their capabilities

    Activities

    • 1.1.1 Review the Microsoft 365 licensing features
    • 1.1.2 Explore the Microsoft Project Plan licenses
    • 1.1.3 Prepare a needs assessment for Microsoft 365 and Project Plan licenses

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review the suite of task management, project management, and project portfolio management options available in Microsoft 365.
    • Prepare a preliminary checklist of required M365 apps for your stakeholders.

    This step usually involves the following participants:

    • PMO/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • CIO and other executive stakeholders
    • Other project portfolio stakeholders (project and IT workers)

    Outcomes of Step

    • Preliminary requirements for an M365 project management and project portfolio management tool implementation

    Microsoft recently revamped its project plans to balance its old and new tech

    Access to the new tech, Project for the web, comes with all license types, while Project Online Professional and Premium licenses have been revamped as P3 and P5.

    Navigating Microsoft licensing is never easy, and Project for the web has further complicated licensing needs for project professionals.

    As we’ll cover in step 2.1 of this blueprint, Project for the web can be extended beyond its base lightweight work management functionality using the Power Platform (Power Apps, Power Automate, and Power BI). Depending on the scope of your implementation, this can require additional Power Platform licensing.

    • In this step, we will help you understand the basics of what’s already included in your enterprise M365 licensing as well as what’s new in Microsoft’s recent Project licensing plans (P1, P3, and P5).
    • As we cover toward the end of this step, you can use Info-Tech’s MS Project and M365 Licensing Tool to help you understand your plan and licensing needs. Further assistance on licensing can be found in the Task, Project, and Portfolio Management Tool Guides that accompany this blueprint and Info-Tech’s Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era.

    Download Info-Tech’s Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era

    Licensing features for knowledge workers

    Please note that licensing packages are frequently subject to change. This is up to date as of August 2021. For the most up-to-date information on licensing, visit the Microsoft website.

    Bundles are extremely common and can be more cost effective than à la carte options for the Microsoft products.

    The biggest differentiator between M365 and O365 is that the M365 product also includes Windows 10 and Enterprise Mobility and Security.

    The color coding in the diagram indicates that the same platform/application suite is available.

    Platform or Application M365 E3 M365 E5 O365 E1 O365 E3 O365 E5
    Microsoft Forms X X X X X
    Microsoft Lists X X X X X
    OneDrive X X X X X
    Planner X X X X X
    Power Apps for Office 365 X X X X X
    Power Automate for Office X X X X X
    Power BI Pro X X
    Power Virtual Agents for Teams X X X X X
    SharePoint X X X X X
    Stream X X X X X
    Sway X X X X X
    Teams X X X X X
    To Do X X X X X

    Get familiar with Microsoft Project Plan 1

    Please note that licensing packages are frequently subject to change. This is up to date as of August 2021. For the most up to date information on licensing, visit the Microsoft website.

    Who is a good fit?

    • New project managers
    • Zero-allocation project managers
    • Individuals and organizations who want to move out of Excel into something less fragile (easily breaking formulas)

    What does it include?

    • Access to Project Home, a landing page to access all project plans you’ve created or have been assigned to.
    • Access to Grid View, Board View, and Timeline (Gantt) View to plan and manage your projects with Project for the web
    • Sharing Project for the web plans across Microsoft Teams channels
    • Co-authoring on project plans

    When does it make sense?

    • Lightweight project management
    • No process to use bottom-up approach for resourcing data
    • Critical-path analysis is not required
    • Organization does not have an appetite for project management rigor

    Get familiar with Microsoft Project Plan 3

    Please note that licensing packages are frequently subject to change. This is up to date as of August 2021. For the most up to date information on licensing, visit the Microsoft website.

    Who is a good fit?

    • Experienced and dedicated project managers
    • Organizations with complex projects
    • Large project teams are required to complete project work
    • Organizations have experience using project management software

    What does it include?

    Everything in Project Plan 1 plus the following:

    • Reporting through Power BI Report template apps (note that there are no pre-built reports for Project for the web)
    • Access to build a Roadmap of projects from Project for the web and Azure DevOps with key milestones, statuses, and deadlines
    • Project Online to submit and track timesheets for project teams
    • MS Project Desktop Client to support resource management

    When does it make sense?

    • Project management is an established discipline at the organization
    • Critical-path analysis is commonly used
    • Organization has some appetite for project management rigor
    • Resources are expected to submit timesheets to allow for more precise resource management data

    Get familiar with Microsoft Project Plan 5

    Please note that licensing packages are frequently subject to change. This is up to date as of August 2021. For the most up to date information on licensing, visit the Microsoft website.

    Who is a good fit?

    • Experienced and dedicated project managers
    • Experienced and dedicated PMO directors
    • Dedicated portfolio managers
    • Organizations proficient at sustaining data in a standard tool

    What does it include?

    Everything in Project Plan 3 plus the following:

    • Portfolio selection and optimization
    • Demand management
    • Enterprise resource planning and management through deterministic task and resource scheduling
    • MS Project Desktop Client to support resource management

    When does it make sense?

    • Project management is a key success factor at the organization
    • Organization employs a bottom-up approach for resourcing data
    • Critical-path analysis is required
    • Formal project portfolio management processes are well established
    • The organization is willing to either put in the time, energy, and resources to learn to configure the system through DIY or is willing to leverage a Microsoft Partner to help them do so

    What’s included in each plan (1 of 2)

    Plan details are up to date as of September 2021. Plans and pricing can change often. Visit the Microsoft website to validate plan options and get pricing details.
    MS Project Capabilities Info-Tech's Editorial Description P1 P3 P5
    Project Home Essentially a landing page that allows you to access all the project plans you've created or that you're assigned to. It amalgamates plans created in Project for the web, the Project for the web app in Power Apps, and Project Online. X X X
    Grid view One of three options in which to create your project plans in Project for the web (board view and timeline view are the other options). You can switch back and forth between the options. X X X
    Board view One of three options in which to create your project plans in Project for the web (grid view and timeline view are the other options). You can switch back and forth between the options. X X X
    Timeline (Gantt) view One of three options in which to create your project plans in Project for the web (board view and grid view are the other options). You can switch back and forth between the options. X X X
    Collaboration and communication This references the ability to add Project for the web project plans to Teams channels. X X X
    Coauthoring Many people can have access to the same project plan and can update tasks. X X X
    Project planning and scheduling For this the marketing lingo says "includes familiar scheduling tools to assign project tasks to team members and use different views like Grid, Board, and Timeline (Gantt chart) to oversee the schedule." Unclear how this is different than the project plans in the three view options above. X X X

    X - Functionality Included in Plan

    O - Functionality Not Included in Plan

    What’s included in each plan (2 of 2)

    Plan details are up to date as of September 2021. Plans and pricing can change often. Visit the Microsoft website to validate plan options and get pricing details.
    MS Project Capabilities Info-Tech's Editorial Description P1 P3 P5
    Reporting This seems to reference Excel reports and the Power BI Report Template App, which can be used if you're using Project Online. There are no pre-built reports for Project for the web, but third-party Power Apps are available. O X X
    Roadmap Roadmap is a platform that allows you to take one or more projects from Project for the web and Azure DevOps and create an organizational roadmap. Once your projects are loaded into Roadmap you can perform additional customizations like color status reporting and adding key days and milestones. O X X
    Timesheet submission Project Online and Server 2013 and 2016 allow team members to submit timesheets if the functionality is required. O X X
    Resource management The rich MS Project client supports old school, deterministic project scheduling at the project level. O X X
    Desktop client The full desktop client comes with P3 and P5, where it acts as the rich editor for project plans. The software enjoys a multi-decade market dominance as a project management tool but was never paired with an enterprise collaboration server engine that enjoyed the same level of success. O X X
    Portfolio selection and optimization Portfolio selection and optimization has been offered as part of the enterprise project and portfolio suite for many years. Most people taking advantage of this capability have used a Microsoft Partner to formalize and operationalize the feature. O O X
    Demand Management Enterprise demand management is targeted at the most rigorous of project portfolio management practices. Most people taking advantage of this capability have used a Microsoft Partner to formalize and operationalize the feature. O O X
    Enterprise resource planning and management The legacy MS Project Online/Server platform supports enterprise-wide resource capacity management through an old-school, deterministic task and resource scheduling engine, assuming scaled-out deployment of Active Directory. Most people succeeding with this capability have used a Microsoft Partner to formalize and operationalize the feature. O O X

    X - Functionality Included in Plan

    O - Functionality Not Included in Plan

    Use Info-Tech’s MS Project and M365 Licensing Tool

    Leverage the analysis in Info-Tech’s MS Project & M365 Licensing Tool to help inform your initial assumptions about what you need and how much to budget for it.

    • The Licensing Tool can help you determine what Project Plan licensing different user groups might need as well as additional Power Platform licensing that may be required.
    • It consists of four main tabs: two set-up tabs where you can validate the plan and pricing information for M365 and MS Project; an analysis tab where you set up your user groups and follow a survey to assess their Project Plan needs; and another analysis tab where you can document your Power Platform licensing needs across your user groups.
    • There is also a business case tab that breaks down your total licensing needs. The outputs of this tab can be used in your MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template, which we will help you develop in phase three of this blueprint.

    Download Info-Tech's Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool

    Sample of Info-Tech's Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool.

    1.2.1 Conduct a needs assessment

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of key user groups/profiles, Number of users and current licenses

    Output: List of Microsoft applications/capabilities included with each license, Analysis of user group needs for Microsoft Project Plan licenses

    Materials: Microsoft Project & 365 Licensing Tool

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers

    1. As a group, analyze the applications included in your current or desired 365 license and calculate any additional Power Platform licensing needs.
    2. Screenshot of the 'Application/Capabilities' screen from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool'.
    3. Within the same group, use the drop-down menus to analyze your high-level MS Project requirements by selecting whether each capability is necessary or not.
    4. Your inputs to the needs assessment will determine the figures in the Business Case tab. Consider exporting this information to PDF or other format to distribute to stakeholders.
    5. Screenshot of the 'Business Case' tab from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool'.

    Download Info-Tech's Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool

    Step 1.3

    Assess the maturity of your current PM & PPM capabilities

    Activities

    • Assess current state project and project portfolio management processes and tools
    • Determine target state project and project portfolio management processes and tools

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess current state project and project portfolio management processes and tools
    • Determine target state project and project portfolio management processes and tools

    This step usually involves the following participants:

    • PMO/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • CIO and other executive stakeholders
    • Other project portfolio stakeholders (project and IT workers)

    Outcomes of Step

    • Current and target state maturity for project management and project portfolio management processes

    Project portfolio management and project management are more than tools

    Implementing commercial tools without a matching level of process discipline is a futile exercise, leaving organizations frustrated at the wasted time and money.

    • The tool is only as good as the data that is input. There is often a misunderstanding that a tool will be “automatic.” While it is true that a tool can help make certain processes easier and more convenient by aggregating information, enhancing reporting, and coauthoring, it will not make up the data. If data becomes stale, the tool is no longer valid for accurate decision making.
    • Getting people onboard and establishing a clear process is often the hardest part. As IT folk, it can be easy to get wrapped up in the technology. All too often excitement around tools can drown out the important requisites around people and process. The reality is people and process are a necessary condition for a tool to be successful. Having a tool will not be sufficient to overcome obstacles like poor stakeholder buy-in, inadequate governance, and the absence of a standard operating procedure.

    • Slow is the way to go. When deciding what tools to purchase, start small and scale up rather than going all in and all too often ending up with many unused features and fees.

    "There's been a chicken-egg debate raging in the PPM world for decades: What comes first, the tool or the process? It seems reasonable to say, ‘We don't have a process now, so we'll just adopt the one in the tool.’ But you'll soon find out that the tool doesn't have a process, and you needed to do more planning and analysis before buying the tool." (Barry Cousins, Practice Lead, Project Portfolio Management)

    Assess your process maturity to determine the right tool approach

    Take the time to consider and reflect on the current and target state of the processes for project portfolio management and project management.

    Project Portfolio Management

    • Status and Progress Reporting
      1. Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

        PPM is the practice of selecting the right projects and ensuring the organization has the necessary resources to complete them. PPM should enable executive decision makers to make sense of the excess of demand and give IT the ability to prioritize those projects that are most valuable to the business.
      2. Resource Management

      3. Project Management

        1. Initiation
        2. Planning
        3. Execution
        4. Monitoring and Controlling
        5. Closing
        Tailor a project management framework to fit your organization. Formal methodologies aren’t always the best fit. Take what you can use from formal frameworks and define a right-sized approach to your project management processes.
      4. Project Closure

      5. Benefits Tracking

    Info-Tech’s maturity assessment tools can help you match your tools to your maturity level

    Use Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool and Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool.

    • The next few slides in this step take you through using our maturity assessment tools to help gauge your current-state and target-state maturity levels for project management (PM) and project portfolio management (PPM).
    • In addition to the process maturity assessments, these workbooks also help you document current-state support tools and desired target-state tools.
    • The outputs of these workbooks can be used in your MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template, which we will help you develop in phase three of this blueprint.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool and Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Samples of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool and Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool.

    Conduct a gap analysis survey for both project and project portfolio management.

    • Review the category and activity statements: For each gap analysis tab in the maturity assessments, use the comprehensive activity statements to identify gaps for the organization.
    • Assess the current state: To assess the current state, evaluate whether the statement should be labeled as:
      • Absent: There is no evidence of any activities supporting this process.
      • Initial: Activity is ad hoc and not well defined.
      • Defined: Activity is established and there is moderate adherence to its execution.
      • Repeatable: Activity is established, documented, repeatable, and integrated with other phases of the process.
      • Managed: Activity execution is tracked by gathering qualitative and quantitative feedback

    Once this is documented, take some time to describe the type of tool being used to do this (commercial, home-grown, standardized document) and provide additional details, where applicable.

    Define the target state: Repeat the assessment of activity statements for the target state. Then gauge the organizational impact and complexity of improving each capability on a scale of very low to very high.

    Excerpt from Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool, the 'PPM Current State Target State Maturity Assessment Survey'. It has five columns whose purpose is denoted in notes. Column 1 'Category within the respective discipline'; Column 2 'Statement to consider'; Column 3 'Select the appropriate answer for current and target state'; Column 4 'Define the tool type'; Column 5 'Provide addition detail about the tool'.

    Analyze survey results for project and project portfolio management maturity

    Take stock of the gap between current state and target state.

    • What process areas have the biggest gap between current and target state?
    • What areas are aligned across current and target state?

    Identify what areas are currently the least and most mature.

    • What process area causes the most pain in the organization?
    • What process area is the organization’s lowest priority?

    Note the overall current process maturity.

    • After having done this exercise, does the overall maturity come as a surprise?
    • If so, what are some of the areas that were previously overlooked?
    A table and bar graph documenting and analysis of maturity survey results. The table has four columns labelled 'Process Area', 'Current Process Completeness', 'Current Maturity Level', and 'Target State Maturity'. Rows headers in the 'Process Area' column are 'Intake, Approval, and Prioritization', 'Resource Management', 'Portfolio Reporting', 'Project Closure and Benefits Realization', 'Portfolio Administration', and finally 'Overall Maturity'. The 'Current Process Completeness' column's values are in percentages. The 'Current Maturity Level' and 'Target State Maturity' columns' values can be one of the following: 'Absent', 'Initial', 'Defined', 'Repeatable', or 'Managed'. The bar chart visualizes the levels of the 'Target State' and 'Current State' with 'Absent' from 0-20%, 'Initial' from 20-40%, 'Defined' from 40-60%, 'Repeatable' from 60-80%, and 'Managed' from 80-100%.
    • Identify process areas with low levels of maturity
    • Spot areas of inconsistency between current and target state.
    • Assess the overall gap to get a sense of the magnitude of the effort required to get to the target state.
    • 100% doesn’t need to be the goal. Set a goal that is sustainable and always consider the value to effort ratio.

    Screenshot your results and put them into the MS Project and M365 Action Plan Template.

    Review the tool overview and plan to address gaps (tabs 3 & 4)

    Tool Overview:

    Analyze the applications used to support your project management and project portfolio management processes.

    Look for:

    • Tools that help with processes across the entire PM or PPM lifecycle.
    • Tools that are only used for one specific process.

    Reflect on the overlap between process areas with pain points and the current tools being used to complete this process.

    Consider the sustainability of the target-state tool choice

    Screenshot of a 'Tool Overview' table. Chart titled 'Current-to-Target State Supporting Tools by PPM Activity' documenting the current and target states of different supporting tools by PPM Activity. Tools listed are 'N/A', 'Standardized Document', 'Homegrown Tool', and 'Commercial Tool'.

    You have the option to create an action plan for each of the areas of improvement coming out of your maturity assessment.

    This can include:

    • Tactical Optimization Action: What is the main action needed to improve capability?
    • Related Actions: Is there a cross-over with any actions for other capabilities?
    • Timeframe: Is this near-term, mid-term, or long-term?
    • Proposed Start Date
    • Proposed Go-Live Date
    • RACI: Who will be responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed?
    • Status: What is the status of this action item over time?

    Determine the Future of Microsoft Project for Your Organization

    Phase 2: Weigh Your Implementation Options

    Phase 1: Determine Your Tool Needs

    Phase 2: Weigh Your Implementation Options

    Phase 3: Finalize Your Implementation Approach
    • Step 1.1: Survey the M365 work management landscape
    • Step 1.2: Perform a process maturity assessment to help inform your M365 starting point
    • Step 1.3: Consider the right MS Project licenses for your stakeholders
    • Step 2.1: Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps
    • Step 2.2: Assess the MS Gold Partner Community
    • Step 3.1: Prepare an action plan

    Phase Outcomes

    • A decision on how best to proceed (or not proceed) with Project for the web
    • A Partner outreach plan

    Step 2.1

    Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps

    Activities

    • Get familiar with Project for the web: how it differs from Microsoft’s traditional project offerings and where it is going
    • Understand the basics of how to extend Project for the web in Power Apps
    • Perform a feasibility test

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Get familiar with Project for the web
    • Understand the basics of how to extend Project for the web in Power Apps
    • Perform a feasibility test to determine if taking a DIY approach to extending Project for the web is right for your organization currently

    This step usually involves the following participants:

    • Portfolio Manager (PMO Director)
    • Project Managers
    • Other relevant PMO stakeholders

    Outcomes of Step

    • A decision on how best to proceed (or not proceed) with Project for the web

    Project for the web is the latest of Microsoft’s project management offerings

    What is Project for the web?

    • First introduced in 2019 as Project Service, Project for the web (PFTW) is Microsoft’s entry into the world of cloud-based work management and lightweight project management options.
    • Built on the Power Platform and leveraging the Dataverse for data storage, PFTW integrates with the many applications that M365 users are already employing in their day-to-day work management and collaboration activities.
    • It is available as a part of your M365 subscription with the minimum activation of P1 license – it comes with P3 and P5 licenses as well.
    • From a functionality and user experience perspective, PFTW is closer to applications like Planner or Azure Boards than it is to traditional MS Project options.

    What does it do?

    • PFTW allows for task and dependency tracking and basic timeline creation and scheduling and offers board and grid view options. It also allows real-time coauthoring of tasks among team members scheduled to the same project.
    • PFTW also comes with a product/functionality Microsoft calls Roadmap, which allows users to aggregate multiple project timelines into a single view for reporting purposes.

    What doesn't it do?

    • With PFTW, Microsoft is offering noticeably less traditional project management functionality than its existing solutions. Absent are table stakes project management capabilities like critical path, baselining, resource load balancing, etc.

    Who is it for?

    • Currently, in its base lightweight project management option, PFTW is targeted toward occasional or part-time project managers (not the PMP-certified set) tasked with overseeing and/or collaborating on small to mid-sized initiatives and projects.

    Put Project for the web in perspective

    Out of the box, PFTW occupies a liminal space when it comes to work management options

    • More than a task management tool, but not quite a full project management tool
    • Not exactly a portfolio management tool, yet some PPM reporting functionality is inherent in the PFTW through Roadmap

    The table to the right shows some of the functionality in PFTW in relation to the task management functionality of Planner and the enterprise project and portfolio management functionality of Project Online.

    Table 2.1a Planner Project for the web Project Online
    Coauthoring on Tasks X X
    Task Planning X X X
    Resource Assignments X X X
    Board Views X X X
    MS Teams Integration X X X
    Roadmap X X
    Table and Gantt Views X X
    Task Dependency Tracking X X
    Timesheets X
    Financial Planning X
    Risks and Issues Tracking X
    Program Management X
    Advanced Portfolio Management X

    Project for the web will eventually replace Project Online

    • As early as 2018 Microsoft has been foreshadowing a transition away from the SharePoint-backed Project environments of Server and Online toward something based in Common Data Service (CDS) – now rebranded as the Dataverse.
    • Indeed, as recently as the spring of 2021, at its Reimagine Project Management online event, Microsoft reiterated its plans to sunset Project Online and transition existing Online users to the new environment of Project for the web – though it provided no firm dates when this might occur.
      • The reason for this move away from Online appears to be an acknowledgment that the rigidity of the tool is awkward in our current dynamic, collaborative, and overhead-adverse work management paradigm.
      • To paraphrase a point made by George Bullock, Sr. Product Marketing Manager, for Microsoft at the Reimagine Project Management event, teams want to manage work as they see fit, but the rigidity of legacy solutions doesn’t allow for this, leading to a proliferation of tools and data sprawl. (This comment was made during the “Overview of Microsoft Project” session during the Reimagine event.)

    PFTW is Microsoft’s proposed future-state antidote to this challenge. Its success will depend on how well users are able to integrate the solution into a wider M365 work management setting.

    "We are committed to supporting our customers on Project Online and helping them transition to Project for the Web. No end-of-support has been set for Project Online, but when the time comes, we will communicate our plans on the transition path and give you plenty of advance notice." (Heather Heide, Program Manager, Microsoft Planner and Project. This comment was made during the “Overview of Microsoft Project” session during the Reimagine event.)

    Project for the web can be extended beyond its base lightweight functionality

    Project for the web can be extended to add more traditional and robust project and project portfolio management functionality using the Power Platform.

    Microsoft plans to sunset Project Online in favor of PFTW will at first be a head-scratcher for those familiar with the extensive PPM functionality in Project Online and underwhelmed by the project and portfolio management in PFTW.

    However, having built the solution upon the Power Platform, Microsoft has made it possible to take the base functionality in PFTW and extend it to create a more custom, organizationally specific user experience.

    • With a little taste of what can be done with PFTW by leveraging the Power Platform – and, in particular, Power Apps – it becomes more obvious how we, as users, can begin to evolve the base tool toward a more traditional PPM solution and how, in time, Microsoft’s developers may develop the next iteration of PFTW into something more closely resembling Project Online.

    Before users get too excited about using these tools to build a custom PPM approach, we should consider the time, effort, and skills required. The slides ahead will take you through a series of considerations to help you gauge whether your PMO is ready to go it alone in extending the solution.

    Extending the tool enhances functionality

    Table 2.1a in this step displayed the functionality in PFTW in relation to the task management tool Planner and the robust PPM functionality in Online.

    The table to the right shows how the functionality in PFTW can differ from the base solution and Project Online when it is extended using the model-driven app option in Power Apps.

    Caveat: The list of functionality and processes in this table is sample data.

    This functionality is not inherent in the solution as soon as you integrate with Power Apps. Rather it must be built – and your success in developing these functions will depend upon the time and skills you have available.

    Table 2.1b Project for the web PFTW extended with PowerApps Project Online
    Critical Path X
    Timesheets X
    Financial Planning X X
    Risks and Issues Tracking X X
    Program Management X
    Status Updates X
    Project Requests X
    Business Cases X
    Project Charters X
    Resource Planning and Capacity Management X X
    Project Change Requests X

    Get familiar with the basics of Power Apps before you decide to go it alone

    While the concept of being able to customize and grow a commercial PPM tool is enticing, the reality of low-code development and application maintenance may be too much for resource-constrained PMOs.

    Long story short: Extending PFTW in Power Apps is time consuming and can be frustrating for the novice to intermediate user.

    It can take days, even weeks, just to find your feet in Power Apps, let alone to determine requirements to start building out a custom model-driven app. The latter activity can entail creating custom columns and tables, determining relationships between tables to get required outputs, in addition to basic design activities.

    Time-strapped and resource-constrained practitioners should pause before committing to this deployment approach. To help better understand the commitment, the slides ahead cover the basics of extending PFTW in Power Apps:

    1. Dataverse environments.
    2. Navigating Power App Designer and Sitemap Designer
    3. Customizing tables and forms in the Dataverse

    See Info-Tech’s M365 Project Portfolio Management Tool Guide for more information on Power Apps in general.

    Get familiar with Power Apps licensing

    Power Apps for 365 comes with E1 through E5 M365 licenses (and F3 and F5 licenses), though additional functionality can be purchased if required.

    While extending Project for the web with Power Apps does not at this time, in normal deployments, require additional licensing from what is included in a E3 or E5 license, it is not out of the realm of possibility that a more complex deployment could incur costs not included in the Power Apps for 365 that comes with your enterprise agreement.

    The table to the right shows current additional licensing options.

    Power Apps, Per User, Per App Plan

    Per User Plan

    Cost: US$10 per user per app per month, with a daily Dataverse database capacity of 40 MB and a daily Power Platform request capacity of 1,000. Cost: US$40 per user per month, with a daily Dataverse database capacity of 250 MB and a daily Power Platform request capacity of 5,000.
    What's included? This option is marketed as the option that allows organizations to “get started with the platform at a lower entry point … [or those] that run only a few apps.” Users can run an application for a specific business case scenario with “the full capabilities of Power Apps” (meaning, we believe, that unlicensed users can still submit data via an app created by a licensed user). What's included? A per-user plan allows licensed users to run unlimited canvas apps and model-driven apps – portal apps, the licensing guide says, can be “provisioned by customers on demand.” Dataverse database limits (the 250 MB and 5,000 request capacity mentioned above) are pooled at the per tenant, not the per user plan license, capacity.

    For more on Power Apps licensing, refer to Info-Tech’s Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era for more information.

    What needs to be configured?

    Extending Project for the web requires working with your IT peers to get the right environments configured based upon your needs.

    • PFTW data is stored in the Microsoft Dataverse (formerly Common Data Service or CDS).
    • The organization’s Dataverse can be made up of one to many environments based upon its needs. Environments are individual databases with unique proprieties in terms of who can access them and what applications can store data in them.
    • Project for the web supports three different types of environments: default, production, and sandbox.
    • You can have multiple instances of a custom PFTW app deployed across these environments and across different users – and the environment you choose depends upon the use case of each instance.

    Types of Environments

    • Default Environment

      • It is the easiest to deploy and get started with the PFTW Power App in the default environment. However, it is also the most restricted environment with the least room for configuration.
      • Microsoft recommends this environment for simple deployments or for projects that span the organization. This is because everyone in the organization is by default a member of this environment – and, with the least room for configuration, the app is relatively straightforward.
      • At minimum, you need one project license to deploy PFTW in the default environment.
    • Production Environment

      • This environment affords more flexibility for how a custom app can be configured and deployed. Unlike the default environment, deploying a production environment is a manual process (through the Power Platform Admin Center) and security roles need to be set to limit users who can access the environment.
      • Because users can be limited, production environments can be used to support more advanced deployments and can support diverse processes for different teams.
      • At present, you need at least five Project licenses to deploy to production environments.
    • Sandbox Environment

      • This environment is for users who are responsible for the creation of custom apps. It offers the same functionality as a production environment but allows users to make changes without jeopardizing a production environment.

    Resources to provide your IT colleagues with to help in your PFTW deployment:

    1. Project for the web admin help (Product Documentation, Microsoft)
    2. Advanced deployment for Project for the web (Video, Microsoft)
    3. Get Started with Project Power App (Product Support Documentation, Microsoft)
    4. Project for the Web Security Roles (Product Support Documentation, Microsoft)

    Get started creating or customizing a model-driven app

    With the proper environments procured, you can now start extending Project for the web.

    • Navigate to the environment you would like to extend PFTW within. For the purposes of the slides ahead, we’ll be using a sandbox environment for an example. Ensure you have the right access set up for production and sandbox environments of your own (see links on previous slide for more assistance).
    • To begin extending PFTW, the two core features you need to be familiar with before you start in Power Apps are (1) Tables/Entities and (2) the Power Apps Designer – and in particular the Site Map.

    From the Power Apps main page in 365, you can change your environment by selecting from the options in the top right-hand corner of the screen.

    Screenshot of the Power Apps “Apps” page in a sandbox environment. The Project App will appear as “Project” when the application is installed, though it is also easy to create an app from scratch.

    Model-driven apps are built around tables

    In Power Apps, tables (formerly called entities and still referred to as entities in the Power Apps Designer) function much like tables in Excel: they are containers of columns of data for tracking purposes. Tables define the data for your app, and you build your app around them.

    In general, there are three types of tables:

    • Standard: These are out-of-the box tables included with a Dataverse environment. Most standard tables can be customized.
    • Managed: These are tables that get imported into an environment as part of a managed solution. Managed tables cannot be customized.
    • Custom: These types of tables can either be imported from another solution or created directly in the Dataverse environment. To create custom tables, users need to have System Administrator or System Customizer security roles within the Dataverse.

    Tables can be accessed under Data banner on the left-hand panel of your Power Apps screen.

    The below is a list of standard tables that can be used to customize your Project App.

    A screenshot of the 'Data' banner in 'Power Apps' and a list of table names.

    Table Name

    Display Name

    msdyn_project Project
    msdyn_projectchange Change
    msdyn_projectprogram Program
    msdyn_projectrequest Request
    msdyn_projectrisk Risk
    msdyn_projectissue Issue
    msdyn_projectstatusreport Status

    App layouts are designed in the Power App Designer

    You configure tables with a view to using them in the design of your app in the Power Apps Designer.

    • If you’re customizing a Project for the web app manually installed into your production or sandbox environment, you can access Designer by highlighting the app from your list of apps on the Apps page and clicking “Edit” in the ribbon above.
      • If you’re creating a model-driven app from scratch, Designer will open past the “Create a New App” intro screen.
      • If you need to create separate apps in your environment for different PMOs or business units, it is as easy to create an app from scratch as it is to customize the manual install.
    • The App Designer is where you can design the layout of your model-driven app and employ the right data tables.
    Screenshot of the 'App Designer' screen in 'Power Apps'.

    The Site Map determines the navigation for your app, i.e. it is where you establish the links and pages users will navigate. We will review the basics of the sitemap on the next few slides.

    The tables that come loaded into your Project Power App environment (at this time, 37) via the manual install will appear in the Power Apps Designer in the Entity View pane at the bottom of the page. You do not have to use all of them in your design.

    Navigate the Sitemap Designer

    With the components of the previous two slides in mind, let’s walk through how to use them together in the development of a Project app.

    As addressed in the previous slide, the sitemap determines the navigation for your app, i.e. it is where you establish the links and the pages that users will navigate.

    To get to the Sitemap Designer, highlight the Project App from your list of apps on the Apps page and click “Edit” in the ribbon above. If you’re creating a model-driven app from scratch, Designer will open past the “Create a New App” intro screen.

    • To start designing your app layout, click the pencil icon beside the Site Map logo on the App Designer screen.
    • This will take you into the Sitemap Designer (see screenshot to the right). This is where you determine the layout of your app and the relevant data points (and related tables from within the Dataverse) that will factor into your Project App.
    • In the Sitemap Designer, you simply drag and drop the areas, groups, and subareas you want to see in your app’s user interface (see next slide for more details).
    Screenshot of the 'Sitemap Designer' in 'Power Apps'.

    Use Areas, Groups, and Subareas as building blocks for your App

    Screenshots of the main window and the right-hand panel in the 'Sitemap Designer', and of the subarea pop-up panel where you connect components to data tables. The first two separate elements into 'Area', 'Group', and 'Subarea'.

    Drag and drop the relevant components from the panel on the right-hand side of the screen into the main window to design the core pieces that will be present within your user interface.

    For each subarea in your design, use the pop-up panel on the right-hand side of the screen to connect your component the relevant table from within your Dataverse environment.

    How do Areas, Groups, and Subareas translate into an app?

    Screenshots of the main window in the 'Sitemap Designer' and of a left-hand panel from a published 'Project App'. There are notes defining the terms 'Area', 'Group', and 'Subarea' in the context of the screenshot.

    The names or titles for your Areas and Groups can be customized within the Sitemap Designer.

    The names or titles for your Subareas is dependent upon your table name within the Dataverse.

    Area: App users can toggle the arrows to switch between Areas.

    Group: These will change to reflect the chosen Area.

    Subarea: The tables and forms associated with each subarea.

    How to properly save and publish your changes made in the Sitemap Designer and Power Apps Designer:

    1. When you are done making changes to your components within the Sitemap Designer, and want your changes to go live, hit the “Publish” button in the top right corner; when it has successfully published, select “Save and Close.”
    2. You will be taken back to the Power App Designer homepage. Hit “Save,” then “Publish,” and then finally “Play,” to go to your app or “Save and Close.”

    How to find the right tables in the Dataverse

    While you determine which tables will play into your app in the Sitemap Designer, you use the Tables link to customize tables and forms.

    Screenshots of the tables search screen and the 'Tables' page under the 'Data' banner in 'Power Apps'.

    The Tables page under the Data banner in Power Apps houses all of the tables available in your Dataverse environment. Do not be overwhelmed or get too excited. Only a small portion of the tables in the Tables folder in Power Apps will be relevant when it comes to extending PFTW.

    Find the table you would like to customize and/or employ in your app and select it. The next slides will look at customizing the table (if you need to) and designing an app based upon the table.

    To access all the tables in your environment, you’ll need to ensure your filter is set correctly on the top right-hand corner of the screen, otherwise you will only see a small portion of the tables in your Dataverse environment.

    If you’re a novice, it will take you some time to get familiar with the table structure in the Dataverse.

    We recommend you start with the list of tables listed on slide. You can likely find something there that you can use or build from for most PPM purposes.

    How to customize a table (1 of 3)

    You won’t necessarily need to customize a table, but if you do here are some steps to help you get familiar with the basics.

    Screenshot of the 'Columns' tab, open in the 'msdyn_project table' in 'Power Apps'.

    In this screenshot, we are clicked into the msdyn_project (display name: Project) table. As you can see, there are a series of tabs below the name of the table, and we are clicked into the Columns tab. This is where you can see all of the data points included in the table.

    You are not able to customize all columns. If a column that you are not able to customize does not meet your needs, you will need to create a custom column from the “+Add column” option.

    “Required” or “Optional” status pertains to when the column or field is used within your app. For customizable or custom columns this status can be set when you click into each column.

    How to customize a table (2 of 3)

    Create a custom “Status” column.

    By way of illustrating how you might need to customize a table, we’ll highlight the “msdyn_project_statecode” (display name: Project Status) column that comes preloaded in the Project (msdyn_project) table.

    • The Project Status column only gives you a binary choice. While you are able to customize what that binary choice is (it comes preloaded with “Active” and “Inactive” as the options) you cannot add additional choices – so you cannot set it to red/yellow/green, the most universally adopted options for status in the project portfolio management world.
    • Because of this, let’s look at the effort involved in creating a choice and adding a custom column to your table based upon that choice.
    Screenshots of the '+New choice' button in the 'Choices' tab and the 'New choice' pane that opens when you click it.

    From within the Choices tab, click “+New choice” option to create a custom choice.

    A pane will appear to the right of your screen. From there you can give your choice a name, and under the “Items” header, add your list of options.

    Click save. Your custom choice is now saved to the Choices tab in the Dataverse environment and can be used in your table. Further customizations can be made to your choice if need be.

    How to customize a table (3 of 3)

    Back in the Tables tab, you can put your new choice to work by adding a column to a table and selecting your custom choice.

    Screenshots of the pop-up window that appear when you click '+Add Column', and details of what happens when you select the data type 'Choice'.

    Start by selecting “+ Add Column” at the top left-hand side of your table. A window will appear on the right-hand side of the page, and you will have options to name your column and choose the data type.

    As you can see in this screenshot to the left, data type options include text, number and date types, and many more. Because we are looking to use our custom choice for this example, we are going to choose “Choice.”

    When you select “Choice” as your data type, all of the choice options available or created in your Dataverse environment will appear. Find your custom choice – in this example the one name “RYG Status” – and click done. When the window closes, be sure to select “Save Table.”

    How to develop a Form based upon your table (1 of 3 – open the form editor)

    A form is the interface users will engage with when using your Project app.

    When the Project app is first installed in your environment, the main user form will be lacking, with only a few basic data options.

    This form can be customized and additional tabs can be added to your user interface.

    1. To do this, go to the table you want to customize.
    2. In the horizontal series of tabs at the top of the screen, below the table title select the “Forms” option.
    3. Click on the main information option or select Edit Form for the form with “Main” under its form type. A new window will open where you can customize your form.
    Screenshot of the 'Forms' tab, open in the 'msdyn_project' table in 'Power Apps'.

    Select the Forms tab.

    Start with the form that has “Main” as its Format Type.

    How to develop a Form based upon your table (2 of 3 – add a component)

    Screenshot of the 'Components' window in 'Power Apps' with a list of layouts as a window to the right of the main screen where you can name and format the chosen layout.

    You can add element like columns or sections to your form by selecting the Components window.

    In this example, we are adding a 1-Column section. When you select that option from the menu options on the left of the screen, a window will open to the right of the screen where you can name and format the section.

    Choose the component you would like to add from the layout options. Depending on the table element you are looking to use, you can also add input options like number inputs and star ratings and pull in related data elements like a project timeline.

    How to develop a Form based upon your table (3 of 3 – add table columns)

    Screenshot of the 'Table Columns' window in 'Power Apps' and instructions for adding table columns.

    If you click on the “Table Columns” option on the left-hand pane, all of the column options from within your table will appear in alphabetical order.

    When clicked within the form section you would like to add the new column to, select the column from the list of option in the left-hand pane. The new data point will appear within the section. You can order and format section elements as you would like.

    When you are done editing the form, click the “Save” icon in the top right-hand corner. If you are ready for your changes to go live within your Project App, select the “Publish” icon in the top right-hand corner. Your updated form will go live within all of the apps that use it.

    The good and the bad of extending Project for the web

    The content in this step has not instructed users how to extend PFTW; rather, it has covered three basic core pieces of Power Apps that those interesting in PFTW need to be aware of: Dataverse environments, the Power Apps and Sitemaps Designers, and Tables and associated Forms.

    Because we have only covered the very tip of the iceberg, those interested in going further and taking a DIY approach to extending PFTW will need to build upon these basics to unlock further functionality. Indeed, it takes work to develop the product into something that begins to resemble a viable enterprise project and portfolio management solution. Here are some of the good and the bad elements associated with that work:

    The Good:

    • You can right-size and purpose build: add as much or as little project management rigor as your process requires. Related, you can customize the solution in multiple ways to suit the needs of specific business units or portfolios.
    • Speed to market: it is possible to get up and running quickly with a minimum-viable product.

    The Bad:

    • Work required: to build anything beyond MVP requires independent research and trial and error.
    • Time required: to build anything beyond MVP requires time and skills that many PMOs don’t have.
    • Shadow support costs: ungoverned app creation could have negative support and maintenance impacts across IT.

    "The move to Power Platform and low code development will […increase] maintenance overhead. Will low code solution hit problems at scale? [H]ow easy will it be to support hundreds or thousands of small applications?

    I can hear the IT support desks already complaining at the thought of this. This part of the puzzle is yet to hit real world realities of support because non developers are busy creating lots of low code applications." (Ben Hosking, Software Developer and Blogger, "Why low code software development is eating the world")

    Quick start your extension with the Accelerator

    For those starting out, there is a pre-built app you can import into your environment to extend the Project for the web app without any custom development.

    • If the DIY approach in the previous slides was overwhelming, and you don’t have the budget for a MS Partner route in the near-term, this doesn’t mean that evolving your Project for the web app is unattainable.
    • Thanks to a partnership between OnePlan (one of the MS Gold Partners we detail in the next step) and Microsoft, Project for the web users have access to a free resource to help them evolve the base Project app. It’s called the “Project for the web Accelerator” (commonly referred to as “the Accelerator” for short).
    • Users interested in learning more about, and accessing, this free resource should refer to the links below:
      1. The Future of Microsoft Project Online (source: OnePlan).
      2. Introducing the Project Accelerator (source: Microsoft).
      3. Project for the web Accelerator (source: GitHub)
    Screen shot from one of the dashboards that comes with the Accelerator (image source: GitHub).

    2.1.1 Perform a feasibility test (1 of 2)

    15 mins

    As we’ve suggested, and as the material in this step indicates, extending PFTW in a DIY fashion is not small task. You need a knowledge of the Dataverse and Power Apps, and access to the requisite skills, time, and resources to develop the solution.

    To determine whether your PMO and organization are ready to go it alone in extending PFTW, perform the following activity:

    1. Convene a collection of portfolio, project, and PMO staff.
    2. Using the six-question survey on tab 5 of the Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool (see screenshot to the right) as a jumping off point for a discussion, consider the readiness of your PMO or project organization to undertake a DIY approach to extending and implementing PFTW at this time.
    3. You can use the recommendations on tab 5 of the Microsoft Project & 365 Licensing Tool to inform your next steps, and input the gauge graphic in section 4 of the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template.
    Screenshots from the 'Project for the Web Extensibility Feasibility Test'.

    Go to tab 5 of the Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool

    See next slide for additional activity details

    2.1.1 Perform a feasibility test (2 of 2)

    Input: The contents of this step, The Project for the Web Extensibility Feasibility Test (tab 5 in the Microsoft Project & 365 Licensing Tool)

    Output: Initial recommendations on whether to proceed and how to proceed with a DIY approach to extending Project for the web

    Materials: The Project for the Web Extensibility Feasibility Test (tab 5 in the Microsoft Project & 365 Licensing Tool)

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), Project Managers, Other relevant PMO stakeholders

    Step 2.2

    Assess the Microsoft Gold Partner Community

    Activities

    • Review what to look for in a Microsoft Partner
    • Determine whether your needs would benefit from reaching out to a Microsoft Partner
    • Review three key Partners from the North American market
    • Create a Partner outreach plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review what to look for in a Microsoft Partner.
    • Determine whether your needs would benefit from reaching out to a Microsoft Partner.
    • Review three key Partners from the North American market.

    This step usually involves the following participants:

    • Portfolio Manager (PMO Director)
    • Project Managers
    • Other relevant PMO stakeholders

    Outcomes of Step

    • A better understanding of MS Partners
    • A Partner outreach plan

    You don’t have to go it alone

    Microsoft has an established community of Partners who can help in your customizations and implementations of Project for the web and other MS Project offerings.

    If the content in the previous step seemed too technical or overly complex in a way that scared you away from a DIY approach to extending Microsoft’s latest project offering (and at some point in the near future, soon to be its only project offering), Project for the web, fear not.

    You do not have to wade into the waters of extending Project for the web alone, or for that matter, in implementing any other MS Project solution.

    Instead, Microsoft nurtures a community of Silver and Gold partners who offer hands-on technical assistance and tool implementation services. While the specific services provided vary from partner to partner, all can assist in the customization and implementation of any of Microsoft’s Project offerings.

    In this step we will cover what to look for in a Partner and how to assess whether you are a good candidate for the services of a Partner. We will also highlight three Partners from within the North American market.

    The basics of the Partner community

    What is a Microsoft Partner?

    Simply put, an MS Gold Partner is a software or professional services organization that provides sales and services related to Microsoft products.

    They’re resellers, implementors, integrators, software manufacturers, trainers, and virtually any other technology-related business service.

    • Microsoft has for decades opted out of being a professional services organization, outside of its very “leading edge” offerings from MCS (Microsoft Consulting Services) for only those technologies that are so new that they aren’t yet supported by MS Partners.
    • As you can see in the chart on the next slide, to become a silver or gold certified partner, firms must demonstrate expertise in specific areas of business and technology in 18 competency areas that are divided into four categories: applications and infrastructure, business applications, data and AI, and modern workplace and security.

    More information on what it takes to become a Microsoft Partner:

    1. Partner Center (Document Center, Microsoft)
    2. Differentiate your business by attaining Microsoft competencies (Document Center, Microsoft)
    3. Partner Network Homepage (Webpage, Microsoft)
    4. See which partner offer is right for you (Webpage, Microsoft)

    Types of partnerships and qualifications

    Microsoft Partner Network

    Microsoft Action Pack

    Silver Competency

    Gold Competency

    What is it?

    The Microsoft Partner Network (MPN) is a community that offers members tools, information, and training. Joining the MPN is an entry-level step for all partners. The Action Pack is an annual subscription offered to entry-level partners. It provides training and marketing materials and access to expensive products and licenses at a vastly reduced price. Approximately 5% of firms in the Microsoft Partner Network (MPN) are silver partners. These partners are subject to audits and annual competency exams to maintain silver status. Approximately 1% of firms in the Microsoft Partner Network (MPN) are gold partners. These partners are subject to audits and annual competency exams to maintain Gold status.

    Requirements

    Sign up for a membership Annual subscription fee While requirements can vary across competency area, broadly speaking, to become a silver partner firms must:
    • Pass regular exams and skills assessments, with at least two individuals on staff with Microsoft Certified Professional Status.
    • Hit annual customer, revenue, and licensing metrics.
    • Pay the annual subscription fee.
    While requirements can vary across competency area, broadly speaking, to become a gold partner firms must:
    • Pass regular exams and skills assessments, with at least two individuals on staff with Microsoft Certified Professional Status.
    • Hit annual customer, revenue, and licensing metrics.
    • Pay the annual subscription fee.

    Annual Fee

    No Cost $530 $1800 $5300

    When would a MS Partner be helpful?

    • Project management and portfolio management practitioners might look into procuring the services of a Microsoft Partner for a variety of reasons.
    • Because services vary from partner to partner (help to extend Project for the web, implement Project Server or Project Online, augment PMO staffing, etc.) we won’t comment on specific needs here.
    • Instead, the three most common conditions that trigger the need are listed to the right.

    Speed

    When you need to get results faster than your staff can grow the needed capabilities.

    Cost

    When the complexity of the purchase decision, implementation, communication, training, configuration, and/or customization cannot be cost-justified for internal staff, often because you’ll only do it once.

    Expertise & Skills

    When your needs cannot be met by the core Microsoft technology without significant extension or customization.

    Canadian Microsoft Partners Spotlight

    As part of our research process for this blueprint, Info-Tech asked Microsoft Canada for referrals and introductions to leading Microsoft Partners. We spent six months collaborating with them on fresh research into the underlying platform.

    These vendors are listed below and are highlighted in subsequent slides.

    Spotlighted Partners:

    Logo for One Plan. Logo for PMO Outsource Ltd. Logo for Western Principles.

    Please Note: While these vendors were referred to us by Microsoft Canada and have a footprint in the Canadian market, their footprints extend beyond this to the North American and global markets.

    A word about our approach

    Photo of Barry Cousins, Project Portfolio Management Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group.
    Barry Cousins
    Project Portfolio Management Practice Lead
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our researchers have been working with Microsoft Project Online and Microsoft Project Server clients for years, and it’s fair to say that most of these clients (at some point) used a Microsoft Partner in their deployment. They’re not really software products, per se; they’re platforms. As a Microsoft Partner in 2003 when Project Server got its first big push, I heard it loud and clear: “Some assembly required. You might only make 7% on the licensing, but the world’s your oyster for services.”

    In the past few years, Microsoft froze the market for major Microsoft Project decisions by making it clear that the existing offering is not getting updates while the new offering (Project for the web) doesn’t do what the old one did. And in a fascinating timing coincidence, the market substantially adopted Microsoft 365 during that period, which enables access to Project for the web.

    Many of Info-Tech’s clients are justifiably curious, confused, and concerned, while the Microsoft Partners have persisted in their knowledge and capability. So, we asked Microsoft Canada for referrals and introductions to leading Microsoft Partners and spent six months collaborating with them on fresh research into the underlying platform.

    Disclosure: Info-Tech conducted collaborative research with the partners listed on the previous slide to produce this publication. Market trends and reactions were studied, but the only clients identified were in case studies provided by the Microsoft Partners. Info-Tech’s customers have been, and remain, anonymous. (Barry Cousins, Project Portfolio Management Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group)

    MS Gold Partner Spotlight:

    OnePlan

    Logo for One Plan.
    Headquarters: San Marcos, California, and Toronto, Ontario
    Number of Employees: ~80
    Active Since: 2007 (as EPMLive)
    Website: www.oneplan.ai

    Who are they?

    • While the OnePlan brand has only been the marketplace for a few years, the company has been a major player in MS Gold Partner space for well over a decade.
    • Born out of EPMLive in the mid-aughts, OnePlan Solutions has evolved through a series of acquisitions, including Upland, Tivitie, and most recently Wicresoft.

    What do they do?

    • Software: Its recent rebranding is largely because OnePlan Solutions is as much a software company as it is a professional services firm. The OnePlan software product is an impressive solution that can be used on its own to facilitate the portfolio approaches outlined on the next slide and that can also integrate with the tools your organization is already using to manage tasks (see here for a full rundown of the solutions within the Microsoft stack and beyond OnePlan can integrate with).
    • Beyond its ability to integrate with existing solutions, as a software product, OnePlan has modules for resource planning, strategic portfolio planning, financial planning, time tracking, and more.

    • PPM Consulting Services: The OnePlan team also offers portfolio management consulting services. See the next slide for a list of its approaches to project portfolio management.

    Markets served

    • US, Canada, Europe, and Australia

    Channel Differentiation

    • OnePlan scales to all the PPM needs of all industry types.
    • Additionally, OnePlan offers insights and functionality specific to the needs of BioTech-Pharma.

    What differentiates OnePlan?

    • OnePlan co-developed the Project Accelerator for Project for the web with Microsoft. The OnePlan team’s involvement in developing the Accelerator and making it free for users to access suggests it is aligned to and has expertise in the purpose-built and collaborative vision behind Microsoft’s move away from Project Online and toward the Power Platform and Teams collaboration.
    • 2021 MS Gold Partner of the Year. At Microsoft’s recent Microsoft Inspire event, OnePlan was recognized as the Gold Partner of the Year for Project and Portfolio Management as well as a finalist for Power Apps and Power Automate.
    • OnePlan Approaches: Below is a list of the services or approaches to project portfolio management that OnePlan provides. See its website for more details.
      • Strategic Portfolio Management: Align work to objectives and business outcomes. Track performance against the proposed objectives outcomes.
      • Agile Portfolio Management: Implement Agile practices across the organization, both at the team and executive level.
      • Adaptive Portfolio Management: Allow teams to use the project methodology and tools that best suit the work/team. Maintain visibility and decision making across the entire portfolio.
      • Professional Services Automation: Use automation to operate with greater efficiency.

    "OnePlan offers a strategic portfolio, financial and resource management solution that fits the needs of every PMO. Optimize your portfolio, financials and resources enterprise wide." (Paul Estabrooks, Vice President at OnePlan)

    OnePlan Case Study

    This case study was provided to Info-Tech by OnePlan.

    Brambles

    INDUSTRY: Supply Chain & Logistics
    SOURCE: OnePlan

    Overview: Brambles plays a key role in the delivery or return of products amongst global trading partners such as manufacturers, distributors and retailers.

    Challenge

    Brambles had a variety of Project Management tools with no easy way of consolidating project management data. The proliferation of project management solutions was hindering the execution of a long-term business transformation strategy. Brambles needed certain common and strategic project management processes and enterprise project reporting while still allowing individual project management solutions to be used as part of the PPM platform.

    Solution

    As part of the PMO-driven business transformation strategy, Brambles implemented a project management “operating system” acting as a foundation for core processes such as project intake, portfolio management, resource, and financial planning and reporting while providing integration capability for a variety of tools used for project execution.

    OnePlan’s new Adaptive PPM platform, combining the use of PowerApps and OnePlan, gives Brambles the desired PPM operating system while allowing for tool flexibility at the execution level.

    Results

    • Comprehensive picture of progress across the portfolio.
    • Greater adoption by allowing flexibility of work management tools.
    • Modern portfolio management solution that enables leadership to make confident decision.

    Solution Details

    • OnePlan
    • Project
    • Power Apps
    • Power Automate
    • Power BI
    • Teams

    Contacting OnePlan Solutions

    www.oneplan.ai

    Joe Larscheid: jlarscheid@oneplan.ai
    Paul Estabrooks: pestabrooks@oneplan.ai
    Contact Us: contact@oneplan.ai
    Partners: partner@oneplan.ai

    Partner Resources. OnePlan facilitates regular ongoing live webinars on PPM topics that anyone can sign up for on the OnePlan website.

    For more information on upcoming webinars, or to access recordings of past webinars, see here.

    Additional OnePlan Resources

    1. How to Extend Microsoft Teams into a Collaborative Project, Portfolio and Work Management Solution (on-demand webinar, OnePlan’s YouTube channel)
    2. What Does Agile PPM Mean To The Modern PMO (on-demand webinar, OnePlan’s YouTube channel)
    3. OnePlan is fused with the Microsoft User Experience (blog article, OnePlan)
    4. Adaptive Portfolio Management Demo – Bringing Order to the Tool Chaos with OnePlan (product demo, OnePlan’s YouTube channel)
    5. How OnePlan is aligning with Microsoft’s Project and Portfolio Management Vision (blog article, OnePlan)
    6. Accelerating Office 365 Value with a Hybrid Project Portfolio Management Solution (product demo, OnePlan’s YouTube channel)

    MS Gold Partner Spotlight:

    PMO Outsource Ltd.

    Logo for PMO Outsource Ltd.

    Headquarters: Calgary, Alberta, and Mississauga, Ontario
    Website: www.pmooutsource.com

    Who are they?

    • PMO Outsource Ltd. is a Microsoft Gold Partner and PMI certified professional services firm based in Alberta and Ontario, Canada.
    • It offers comprehensive project and portfolio management offerings with a specific focus on project lifecycle management, including demand management, resource management, and governance and communication practices.

    What do they do?

    • Project Online and Power Platform Expertise. The PMO Outsource Ltd. team has extensive knowledge in both Microsoft’s old tech (Project Server and Desktop) and in its newer, cloud-based technologies (Project Online, Project for the web, the Power Platform, and Dynamics 365). As the case study in two slides demonstrates, PMO Outsource Ltd. Uses its in-depth knowledge of the Microsoft suite to help organizations automate project and portfolio data collection process, create efficiencies, and encourage cloud adoption.
    • PPM Consulting Services: In addition to its Microsoft platform expertise, the PMO Outsource Ltd. team also offers project and portfolio management consulting services, helping organizations evolve their process and governance structures as well as their approaches to PPM tooling.

    Markets served

    • Global

    Channel Differentiation

    • PMO Outsource Ltd. scales to all the PPM needs of all industry types.

    What differentiates PMO Outsource Ltd.?

    • PMO Staff Augmentation. In addition to its technology and consulting services, PMO Outsource Ltd. offers PMO staff augmentation services. As advertised on its website, it offers “scalable PMO staffing solutions. Whether you require Project Managers, Business Analysts, Admins or Coordinators, [PMO Outsource Ltd.] can fulfill your talent search requirements from a skilled pool of resources.”
    • Multiple and easy-to-understand service contract packages. PMO Outsource Ltd. offers many prepackaged service offerings to suit PMOs’ needs. Those packages include “PMO Management, Admin, and Support,” “PPM Solution, Site and Workflow Configuration,” and “Add-Ons.” For full details of what’s included in these services packages, see the PMO Outsource Ltd. website.
    • PMO Outsource Ltd. Services: Below is a list of the services or approaches to project portfolio management that PMO Outsource Ltd. Provides. See its website for more details.
      • Process Automation, Workflows, and Tools. Facilitate line of sight by tailoring Microsoft’s technology to your organization’s needs and creating custom workflows.
      • PMO Management Framework. Receive a professionally managed PPM methodology as well as governance standardization of processes, tools, and templates.
      • Custom BI Reports. Leverage its expertise in reporting and dashboarding to create the visibility your organization needs.

    "While selecting an appropriate PPM tool, the PMO should not only evaluate the standard industry tools but also analyze which tool will best fit the organization’s strategy, budget, and culture in the long run." (Neeta Manghnani, PMO Strategist, PMO Outsource Ltd.)

    PMO Outsource Ltd. Case Study

    This case study was provided to Info-Tech by PMO Outsource Ltd.

    SAMUEL

    INDUSTRY: Manufacturing
    SOURCE: PMO Outsource Ltd.

    Challenge

    • MS Project 2013 Server (Legacy/OnPrem)
    • Out-of-support application and compliance with Office 365
    • Out-of-support third-party application for workflows
    • No capability for resource management
    • Too many manual processes for data maintenance and server administration

    Solution

    • Migrate project data to MS Project Online
    • Recreate workflows using Power Automate solution
    • Configure Power BI content packs for Portfolio reporting and resource management dashboards
    • Recreate OLAP reports from legacy environment using Power BI
    • Cut down nearly 50% of administrative time by automating PMO/PPM processes
    • Save costs on Server hardware/application maintenance by nearly 75%

    Full Case Study Link

    • For full details about how PMO Outsource Ltd. assisted Samuel in modernizing its solution and creating efficiencies, visit the Microsoft website where this case study is highlighted.

    Contacting PMO Outsource Ltd.

    www.pmooutsource.com

    700 8th Ave SW, #108
    Calgary, AB T2P 1H2
    Telephone : +1 (587) 355-3745
    6045 Creditview Road, #169
    Mississauga, ON L5V 0B1
    Telephone : +1 (289) 334-1228
    Information: info@pmooutsource.com
    LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/company/pmo-outsource/

    Partner Resources. PMO Outsource Ltd.’s approach is rooted within a robust and comprehensive PPM framework that is focused on driving strategic outcomes and business success.

    For a full overview of its PPM framework, see here.

    Additional PMO Outsource Ltd. Resources

    1. 5 Benefits of PPM tools and PMO process automation (blog article, PMO Outsource Ltd.)
    2. Importance of PMO (blog article, PMO Outsource Ltd.)
    3. Meet the Powerful and Reimagined PPM tool for Everyone! (video, PMO Outsource Ltd. LinkedIn page)
    4. MS Project Tips: How to add #Sprints to an existing Project? (video, PMO Outsource Ltd. LinkedIn page)
    5. MS Project Tips: How to add a milestone to your project? (video, PMO Outsource Ltd. LinkedIn page)
    6. 5 Benefits of implementing Project Online Tools (video, PMO Outsource Ltd. LinkedIn page)

    MS Gold Partner Spotlight:

    Western Principles

    Logo for Western Principles.

    Headquarters: Vancouver, British Columbia
    Years Active: 16 Years
    Website: www.westernprinciples.com

    Who are they?

    • Western Principles is a Microsoft Gold Partner and UMT 360 PPM software provider based in British Columbia with a network of consultants across Canada.
    • In the last sixteen years, it has successfully conducted over 150 PPM implementations, helping in the implementation, training, and support of Microsoft Project offerings as well as UMT360 – a software solution provider that, much like OnePlan, enhances the PPM capabilities of the Microsoft platform.

    What do they do?

    • Technology expertise. The Western Principles team helps organizations maximize the value they are getting form the Microsoft Platform. Not only does it offer expertise in all the solutions in the MS Project ecosystem, it also helps organizations optimize their use and understanding of Teams, SharePoint, the Power Platform, and more. In addition to the Microsoft platform, Western Principles is partnered with many other technology providers, including UMT360 for strategic portfolio management, the Simplex Group for project document controls, HMS for time sheets, and FluentPro for integration, back-ups, and migrations.
    • PPM Consulting Services: In addition to its technical services and solutions, Western Principles offers PPM consulting and staff augmentation services.

    Markets served

    • Canada

    Channel Differentiation

    • Western Principles scales to all the PPM needs of all industry types, public and private sector.
    • In addition, its website offers persona-specific information based on the PPM needs of engineering and construction, new product development, marketing, and more.

    What differentiates Western Principles?

    • Gold-certified UMT 360 partner. In addition to being a Microsoft Gold Partner, Western Principles is a gold-certified UMT 360 partner. UMT 360 is a strategic portfolio management tool that integrates with many other work management solutions to offer holistic line of sight into the organization’s supply-demand pain points and strategic portfolio management needs. Some of the solutions UMT 360 integrates with include Project Online and Project for the web, Azure DevOps, Jira, and many more. See here for more information on the impressive functionality in UMT360.
    • Sustainment Services. Adoption can be the bane of most PPM tool implementations. Among the many services Western Principles offers, its “sustainment services” stand out. According to Western Principles’ website, these services are addressed to those who require “continual maintenance, change, and repair activities” to keep PPM systems in “good working order” to help maximize ROI.
    • Western Principles Services: In addition to the above, below is a list of some of the services that Western Principles offers. See its website for a full list of services.
      • Process Optimization: Determine your requirements and process needs.
      • Integration: Create a single source of truth.
      • Training: Ensure your team knows how to use the systems you implement.
      • Staff Augmentation: Provide experienced project team members based upon your needs.

    "One of our principles is to begin with the end in mind. This means that we will work with you to define a roadmap to help you advance your strategic portfolio … and project management capabilities. The roadmap for each customer is different and based on where you are today, and where you need to get to." (Western Principles, “Your Strategic Portfolio Management roadmap,” Whitepaper)

    Contacting Western Principles

    www.westernprinciples.com

    610 – 700 West Pender St.
    Vancouver, BC V6C 1G8
    +1 (800) 578-4155
    Information: info@westernprinciples.com
    LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/company/western-principle...

    Partner Resources. Western Principles provides a multitude of current case studies on its home page. These case studies let you know what the firm is working on this year and the type of support it provides to its clientele.

    To access these case studies, see here.

    Additional Western Principles Resources

    1. Program and Portfolio Roll ups with Microsoft Project and Power BI (video, Western Principles YouTube Channel)
    2. Dump the Spreadsheets for Microsoft Project Online (video, Western Principles YouTube Channel)
    3. Power BI for Project for the web (video, Western Principles YouTube Channel)
    4. How to do Capacity Planning and Resource Management in Microsoft Project Online [Part 1 & Part 2] (video, Western Principles YouTube Channel)
    5. Extend & Integrate Microsoft Project (whitepaper, Western Principles)
    6. Your COVID-19 Return-to-Work Plan (whitepaper, Western Principles)

    Watch Info-Tech’s Analyst-Partner Briefing Videos to lean more

    Info-Tech was able to sit down with the partners spotlighted in this step to discuss the current state of the PPM market and Microsoft’s place within it.

    • All three partners spotlighted in this step contributed to Info-Tech’s research process for this publication.
    • For two of the partners, OnePlan and PMO Outsource Ltd., Info-Tech was able to record a conversation where our analysts and the partners discuss Microsoft’s current MS Project offerings, the current state of the PPM tool market, and the services and the approaches of each respective partner.
    • A third video briefing with Western Principles has not happened yet due to logistical reasons. We are hoping we can include a video chat with our peers at Western Principles in the near future.
    Screenshot form the Analyst-Partner Briefing Videos. In addition to the content covered in this step, you can use these videos for further information about the partners to inform your next steps.

    Download Info-Tech’s Analyst-Partner Briefing Videos (OnePlan & PMO Outsource Ltd.)

    2.2.1 Create a partner outreach plan

    1-3 hours

    Input: Contents of this step, List of additional MS Gold Partners

    Output: A completed partner outreach program

    Materials: MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers, CIO

    1. With an understanding of the partner ecosystem, compile a working group of PMO peers and stakeholders to produce a gameplan for engaging the MS Gold Partner ecosystem.
      • For additional partner options see Microsoft’s Partner Page.
    2. Using slide 20 in Info-Tech’s MS Project and M365 Action Plan Template, document the Partners you would want or have scheduled briefings with.
      • As you go through the briefings and research process, document the pros and cons and areas of specialized associated with each vendor for your particular work management implementation.

    Download the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    2.2.2 Document your PM and PPM requirements

    1-3 hours

    Input: Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment, Project Management Maturity Assessment

    Output: MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    Materials: Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment, Project Management Maturity Assessment, MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers, CIO

    1. As you prepare to engage the Partner Community, you should have a sense of where your project management and project portfolio management gaps are to better communicate your tooling needs.
    2. Leverage tab 4 from both your Project Portfolio Management Assessment and Project Management Assessment from step 1.3 of this blueprint to help document and communicate your requirements. Those tabs prioritize your project and portfolio management needs by highest impact for the organization.
    3. You can use the outputs of the tab to inform your inputs on slide 23 of the MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template to present to organizational stakeholders and share with the Partners you are briefing with.

    Download the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    Determine the Future of Microsoft Project for Your Organization

    Phase 3: Finalize Your Implementation Approach

    Phase 1: Determine Your Tool NeedsPhase 2: Weigh Your Implementation Options

    Phase 3: Finalize Your Implementation Approach

    • Step 1.1: Survey the M365 work management landscape
    • Step 1.2: Perform a process maturity assessment to help inform your M365 starting point
    • Step 1.3: Consider the right MS Project licenses for your stakeholders
    • Step 2.1: Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps
    • Step 2.2: Assess the MS Gold Partner Community
    • Step 3.1: Prepare an action plan

    Phase Outcomes

    An action plan concerning what to do with MS Project and M365 for your PMO or project organization.

    Step 3.1

    Prepare an action plan

    Activities

    • Compile the current state results
    • Prepare an Implementation Roadmap
    • Complete your presentation deck

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess the impact of organizational change for the project
    • Develop your vision for stakeholders
    • Compile the current state results and document the implementation approach
    • Create clarity through a RACI and proposed implementation timeline

    This step usually involves the following participants:

    • Portfolio Manager (PMO Director)
    • PMO Admin Team
    • Business Analysts
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of Step

    • Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan

    Assess the impact of organizational change

    Be prepared to answer: “What’s in it for me?”

    Before jumping into licensing and third-party negotiations, ensure you’ve clearly assessed the impact of change.

    Tailor the work effort involved in each step, as necessary:

    1. Assess the impact
      • Use the impact assessment questions to identify change impacts.
    2. Plan for change
      • Document the impact on each stakeholder group.
      • Anticipate their response.
      • Curate a compelling message for each stakeholder group.
      • Develop a communication plan.
    3. Act according to plan
      • Identify your executive sponsor.
      • Enable the sponsor to drive change communication.
      • Coach managers on how they can drive change at the individual level.

    Impact Assessment Questions

    • Will the change impact how our clients/customers receive, consume, or engage with our products/services?
    • Will there be a price increase?
    • Will there be a change to compensation and/or rewards?
    • Will the vision or mission of the job change?
    • Will the change span multiple locations/time zones?
    • Are multiple products/services impacted by this change?
    • Will staffing levels change?
    • Will this change increase the workload?
    • Will the tools of the job be substantially different?
    • Will a new or different set of skills be needed?
    • Will there be a change in reporting relationships?
    • Will the workflow and approvals be changed?
    • Will there be a substantial change to scheduling and logistics?

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices blueprint

    Develop your vision for stakeholders

    After careful analysis and planning, it’s time to synthesize your findings to those most impacted by the change.

    Executive Brief

    • Prepare a compelling message about the current situation.
    • Outline the considerations the working group took into account when developing the action plan.
    • Succinctly describe the recommendations proposed by the working group.

    Goals

    • Identify the goals for the project.
    • Explain the details for each goal to develop the organizational rationale for the project.
    • These goals are the building blocks for the change communication that the executive sponsor will use to build a coalition of sponsors.

    Future State Vision

    • Quantify the high-level costs and benefits of moving forward with this project.
    • Articulate the future- state maturity level for both the project and project portfolio management process.
    • Reiterate the organizational rationale and drivers for change.

    "In failed transformations, you often find plenty of plans, directives, and programs, but no vision…A useful rule of thumb: If you can’t communicate the vision to someone in five minutes or less and get a reaction that signifies both understanding and interest, you are not yet done…" (John P. Kotter, Leading Change)

    Get ready to compile the analysis completed throughout this blueprint in the subsequent activities. The outputs will come together in your Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan.

    Use the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template to help communicate your vision

    Our boardroom-ready presentation and communication template can be customized using the outputs of this blueprint.

    • Getting stakeholders to understand why you are recommending specific work management changes and then communicating exactly what those changes are and what they will cost is key to the success of your work management implementation.
    • To that end, the slides ahead walk you through how to customize the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template.
    • Many of the current-state analysis activities you completed during phase 1 of this blueprint can be directly made use of within the template as can the decisions you made and requirements you documented during phase 2.
    • By the end of this step, you will have a boardroom-ready presentation that will help you communicate your future-state vision.
    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template with a note to 'Update the presentation or distribution date and insert your name, role, and organization'.

    Download Info-Tech’s Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    3.1.1 Compile current state results

    1-3 hours

    Input: Force Field Analysis Tool, Tool Audit Workbook, Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool, Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Output: Section 1: Executive Brief, Section 2: Context and Constraints

    Materials: Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director, PMO Admin Team, Business Analysts, Project Managers

    1. As a group, review the results of the tools introduced throughout this blueprint. Use this information along with organizational knowledge to document the business context and current state.
    2. Update the driving forces for change and risks and constraints slides using your outputs from the Force Field Analysis Tool.
    3. Update the current tool landscape, tool satisfaction, and tool audit results slides using your outputs from the Tool Audit Workbook.
    4. Update the gap analysis results slides using your outputs from the Project Management and Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tools.

    Screenshots of 'Business Context and Current State' screen from the 'Force Field Analysis Tool', the 'Tool Audit Results' screen from the 'Tool Audit Workbook', and the 'Project Portfolio Management Gap Analysis Results' screen from the 'PM and PPM Maturity Assessments Tool'.

    Download the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    3.2.1 Option A: Prepare a DIY roadmap

    1-3 hours; Note: This is only applicable if you have chosen the DIY route

    Input: List of key PPM decision points, List of who is accountable for PPM decisions, List of who has PPM decision-making authority

    Output: Section 3: DIY Implementation Approach

    Materials: Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director, PMO Admin Team, Business Analysts, Project Managers

    1. As a group, review the results of the Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool. Use this information along with organizational knowledge and discussion with the working group to complete Section 3: DIY Implementation Approach.
    2. Copy and paste your results from tab 5 of the Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool. Update the Implementation Approach slide to detail the rationale for selecting this option.
    3. Update the Action Plan to articulate the details for total and annual costs of the proposed licensing solution.
    4. Facilitate a discussion to determine roles and responsibilities for the implementation. Based on the size, risk, and complexity of the implementation, create a reasonable timeline.
    Screenshots from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template' outlining the 'DIY Implementation Approach'.

    Download the Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

    3.2.1 Option b: Prepare a Partner roadmap

    1-3 hours; Note: This is only applicable if you have chosen the Partner route

    Input: Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool, Information on Microsoft Partners

    Output: Section 4: Microsoft Partner Implementation Route

    Materials: Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director, PMO Admin Team, Business Analysts, Project Managers

    1. As a group, review the results of the Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool. Use this information along with organizational knowledge and discussion with the working group to complete Section 4: Microsoft Partner Implementation Route.
    2. Copy and paste your results from tab 5 of the Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool. Update the Implementation Approach slide to detail the rationale for selecting this option.
    3. Develop an outreach plan for the Microsoft Partners you are planning to survey. Set targets for briefing dates and assign an individual to own any back-and-forth communication. Document the pros and cons of each Partner and gauge interest in continuing to analyze the vendor as a possible solution.
    4. Facilitate a discussion to determine roles and responsibilities for the implementation. Based on the size, risk, and complexity of the implementation, create a reasonable timeline.

    Screenshots from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template' outlining the 'Microsoft Partner Implementation Route'.

    Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

    3.1.2 Complete your presentation deck

    1-2 hours

    Input: Outputs from the exercises in this blueprint

    Output: Section 5: Future-State Vision and Goals

    Materials: Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director, PMO Admin Team, Business Analysts, Project Managers

    1. Put the finishing touches on your presentation deck by documenting your future- state vision and goals.
    2. Prepare to present to your stakeholders.
      • Understand your audience, their needs and priorities, and their degree of knowledge and experiences with technology. This informs what to include in your presentation and how to position the message and goal.
    3. Review the deck beginning to end and check for spelling, grammar, and vertical logic.
    4. Practice delivering the vision for the project through several practice sessions.

    Screenshots from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template' regarding finishing touches.

    Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

    Pitch your vision to key stakeholders

    There are multiple audiences for your pitch, and each audience requires a different level of detail when addressed. Depending on the outcomes expected from each audience, a suitable approach must be chosen. The format and information presented will vary significantly from group to group.

    Audience

    Key Contents

    Outcome

    Business Executives

    • Section 1: Executive Brief
    • Section 2: Context and Constraints
    • Section 5: Future-State Vision and Goals
    • Identify executive sponsor

    IT Leadership

    • Sections 1-5 with a focus on Section 3 or 4 depending on implementation approach
    • Get buy-in on proposed project
    • Identify skills or resourcing constraints

    Business Managers

    • Section 1: Executive Brief
    • Section 2: Context and Constraints
    • Section 5: Future-State Vision and Goals
    • Get feedback on proposed plan
    • Identify any unassessed risks and organizational impacts

    Business Users

    • Section 1: Executive Brief
    • Support the organizational change management process

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Knowledge Gained
    • How you work: Work management and the various ways of working (personal and team task management, strategic project portfolio management, formal project management, and enterprise project and portfolio management).
    • Where you need to go: Project portfolio management and project management current- and target-state maturity levels.
    • What you need: Microsoft Project Plans and requisite M365 licensing.
    • The skills you need: Extending Project for the web.
    • Who you need to work with: Get to know the Microsoft Gold Partner community.
    Deliverables Completed
    • M365 Tool Guides
    • Tool Audit Workbook
    • Force Field Analysis Tool
    • Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    Contact your account representative for more information
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Perform a work management tool audit

    Gain insight into the tools that drive value or fail to drive value across your work management landscape with a view to streamline the organization’s tool ecosystem.

    Prepare an action plan for your tool needs

    Prepare the right work management tool recommendations for your IT teams and/or business units and develop a boardroom-ready presentation to communicate needs and next steps.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Neeta Manghnani
    PMO Strategist
    PMO Outsource Ltd.

    Photo of Neeta Manghnani, PMO Strategist, PMO Outsource Ltd.
    • Innovative, performance-driven executive with significant experience managing Portfolios, Programs & Projects, and technical systems for international corporations with complex requirements. A hands-on, dynamic leader with over 20 years of experience guiding and motivating cross-functional teams. Highly creative and brings a blend of business acumen and expertise in multiple IT disciplines, to maximize the corporate benefit from capital investments.
    • Successfully deploys inventive solutions to automate processes and improve the functionality, scalability and security of critical business systems and applications. Leverages PMO/PPM management and leadership skills to meet the strategic goals and business initiatives.

    Robert Strickland
    Principal Consultant & Owner
    PMO Outsource Ltd.

    Photo of Robert Strickland, Principal Consultant and Owner, PMO Outsource Ltd.
    • Successful entrepreneur, leader, and technologist for over 15 years, is passionate about helping organizations leverage the value of SharePoint, O365, Project Online, Teams and the Power Platform. Expertise in implementing portals, workflows and collaboration experiences that create business value. Strategic manager with years of successful experience building businesses, developing custom solutions, delivering projects, and managing budgets. Strong transformational leader on large implementations with a technical pedigree.
    • A digital transformation leader helping clients move to the cloud, collaborate, automate their business processes and eliminate paper forms, spreadsheets and other manual practices.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
      Time is money; spend it wisely.
    • Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices
      Holistically balance IT supply and demand to avoid overallocation.
    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects
      Spend less time managing processes and more time delivering results

    Bibliography

    “13 Reasons not to use Microsoft Project.” Celoxis, 14 Sept. 2018. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Advisicon. “Project Online vs Project for the Web.” YouTube, 13 Nov. 2013. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Branscombe, Mary. “Is Project Online ready to replace Microsoft Project?” TechRepublic, 23 Jan. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Chemistruck, Dan. “The Complete Office 365 and Microsoft 365 Licensing Comparison.” Infused Innovations, 4 April 2019. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Compare Project management solutions and costs.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Day to Day Dynamics 365. “Microsoft Project for the web - Model-driven app.” YouTube, 29 Oct. 2019. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Deploying Project for the web.” Microsoft, 24 Aug. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Differentiate your business by attaining Microsoft competencies.” Microsoft, 26 Jan. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Extend & Integrate Microsoft Project.” Western Principles. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Get Started with Project Power App.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Hosking, Ben. “Why low code software development is eating the world.” DevGenius, May 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “How in the World is MS Project Still a Leading PM Software?” CBT Nuggets, 12 Nov. 2018. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Integent. “Project for the Web - Create a Program Entity and a model-driven app then expose in Microsoft Teams.” YouTube, 25 Mar. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Introducing the Project Accelerator.” Microsoft, 10 Mar. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Join the Microsoft Partner Network.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Kaneko, Judy. “How Productivity Tools Can Lead to a Loss of Productivity.” Bluescape, 2 Mar. 2018 Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Kotter, John. Leading Change. Harvard Business School Press, 1996.

    Leis, Merily. “What is Work Management.” Scoro. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Liu, Shanhong. “Number of Office 365 company users worldwide as of June 2021, by leading country.” Statistica, 2021. Web.

    Manghnani, Neeta. “5 Benefits of PPM tools and PMO process automation.” PMO Outsource Ltd., 11 Apr. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Microsoft 365 and Office 365 plan options.” Microsoft, 31 Aug. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Microsoft 365 for enterprise.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021

    “Microsoft Office 365 Usage Statistics.” Thexyz blog, 18 Sept. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Microsoft Power Apps, Microsoft Power Automate and Microsoft Power Virtual Agents Licensing Guide.” Microsoft, June 2021. Web.

    “Microsoft Project service description.” Microsoft, 31 Aug. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Microsoft Project Statistics.” Integent Blog, 12 Dec. 2013. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Nanji, Aadil . Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era. Info-Tech Research Group, 12 Mar. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Number of Office 365 company users worldwide as of June 2021, by leading country.” Statista, 8 June 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Overcoming disruption in a digital world.” Asana. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Pajunen, Antti. “Customizing and extending Project for the web.” Day to Day Dynamics 365, 20 Jan. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Partner Center Documentation.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Pragmatic Works. “Building First Power Apps Model Driven Application.” YouTube, 21 June 2019. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Project architecture overview.” Microsoft, 27 Mar. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Project for the web Accelerator.” GitHub. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Project for the web admin help.” Microsoft, 28 Oct. 2019. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Project for the Web – The New Microsoft Project.” TPG. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Project for the Web Security Roles.” Microsoft, 1 July 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “Project Online: Project For The Web vs Microsoft Project vs Planner vs Project Online.” PM Connection, 30 Nov. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Redmond, Tony. “Office 365 Insights from Microsoft’s FY21 Q2 Results.” Office 365 for IT Pros, 28 Jan. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Reimagine Project Management with Microsoft. “Advanced deployment for Project for the web.” YouTube, 4 Aug. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Reimagine Project Management with Microsoft. “Overview of Microsoft Project.” YouTube, 29 July 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “See which partner offer is right for you.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Shalomova, Anna. “Microsoft Project for Web 2019 vs. Project Online: What’s Best for Enterprise Project Management?” FluentPro, 23 July 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Speed, Richard. “One Project to rule them all: Microsoft plots end to Project Online while nervous Server looks on.” The Register, 28 Sept. 2018. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Spataro, Jared. “A new vision for modern work management with Microsoft Project.” Microsoft, 25 Sept. 2018. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Stickel, Robert. “OnePlan Recognized as Winner of 2021 Microsoft Project & Portfolio Management Partner of the Year.” OnePlan, 8 July 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Stickel, Robert. “The Future of Project Online.” OnePlan, 2 Mar. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Stickel, Robert. “What It Means to be Adaptive.” OnePlan, 24 May 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “The Future of Microsoft Project Online.” OnePlan. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Weller, Joe. “Demystifying Microsoft Project Licensing.” Smartsheet, 10 Mar. 2016. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Western Principles Inc. “Dump the Spreadsheets for Microsoft Project Online.” YouTube, 2 July 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Western Principles Inc. “Project Online or Project for the web? Which project management system should you use?” YouTube, 11 Aug. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    “What is Power Query?” Microsoft, 22 July 2021. Web.

    Wicresoft. “The Power of the New Microsoft Project and Microsoft 365.” YouTube, 29 May 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Wicresoft. “Why the Microsoft Power Platform is the Future of PPM.” YouTube, 11 June 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

    Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}378|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,756 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • The demand for qualified cybersecurity professionals far exceeds supply. As a result, organizations are struggling to protect their data against the evolving threat landscape.
    • It is a constant challenge to know what skills will be needed in the future, and when and how to acquire them.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Plan for the inevitable. All industries are expected to be affected by the talent gap in the coming years. Plan ahead to address your organization’s future needs.
    • Base skills acquisition decisions on the five key factors to define skill needs. Create an impact scale for the five key factors (data criticality, durability, availability, urgency, and frequency) that reflects your organizational strategy, initiatives, and pressures.
    • A skills gap will always exist to some degree. The threat landscape is constantly changing, and your workforce’s skill sets must evolve as well.

    Impact and Result

    • Organizations must align their security initiatives to talent requirements such that business objectives are achieved and the business is cyber ready.
    • Identify if there are skill gaps in your current workforce.
    • Decide how you’ll acquire needed skills based on characteristics of need for each skill.

    Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a technical skills acquisition strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify skill needs for target state

    Identify what skills will be needed in your future state.

    • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan – Phase 1: Identity Skill Needs for Target State
    • Security Initiative Skills Guide
    • Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

    2. Identify technical skill gaps

    Align role requirements with future initiative skill needs.

    • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan – Phase 2: Identify Technical Skill Gaps
    • Current Workforce Skills Assessment
    • Technical Skills Workbook
    • Information Security Compliance Manager
    • IT Security Analyst
    • Chief Information Security Officer
    • Security Administrator
    • Security Architect

    3. Develop a sourcing plan for future work roles

    Acquire skills based on the impact of the five key factors.

    • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Skills Sourcing Plan for Future Work Roles – Phase 3: Develop a Sourcing Plan for Future Work Roles
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Skill Needs for Target State

    The Purpose

    Determine the skills needed in your workforce and align them to your organization’s security roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Insight on what skills your organization will need in the future.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the importance of aligning security initiatives skill needs with workforce requirements.

    1.2 Identify needed skills for future initiatives.

    1.3 Prioritize the initiative skill gaps.

    Outputs

    Security Initiative Skills Guide

    Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

    2 Define Technical Skill Requirements

    The Purpose

    Identify and create technical skill requirements for key work roles that are needed to successfully execute future initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Increased understanding of the NICE Cybersecurity Workforce Framework.

    Standardization of technical skill requirements of current and future work roles.

    Activities

    2.1 Assign work roles to the needs of your future environment.

    2.2 Discuss the NICE Cybersecurity Workforce Framework.

    2.3 Develop technical skill requirements for current and future work roles.

    Outputs

    Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    3 Acquire Technical Skills

    The Purpose

    Assess your current workforce against their role’s skill requirements.

    Discuss five key factors that aid acquiring skills.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A method to acquire skills in future roles.

    Activities

    3.1 Continue developing technical skill requirements for current and future work roles.

    3.2 Conduct Current Workforce Skills Assessment.

    3.3 Discuss methods of acquiring skills.

    3.4 Develop a plan to acquire skills.

    Outputs

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    4 Plan to Execute Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Assist with communicating the state of the skill gap in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Strategy on how to acquire skills needs of the organization.

    Activities

    4.1 Review skills acquisition plan.

    4.2 Discuss training and certification opportunities for staff.

    4.3 Discuss next steps for closing the skills gap.

    4.4 Debrief.

    Outputs

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Select an ERP Implementation Partner

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}591|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $77,174 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Resource Planning
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-resource-planning
    • Enterprise application implementations are complex, and their success is critical to business operations.
    • Selecting the right software implementation partner is as important for the success of the ERP initiative as selecting the right software.
    • System implementation often thrusts the product into the spotlight, with the implementation partner being an afterthought, and all too often organizational needs are ignored altogether.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • ERP implementation is not a one-and-done exercise. Most often it is the start of a multi-year working relationship between the software vendor or systems integrator and your organization. Take the time to find the right fit to ensure success.
    • The conventional approach to ERP implementation partner selection puts the ERP vendor and systems integrators in the driver's seat with little regard to your specific needs as an organization. You need to take an eyes-wide-open approach to your organization’s strengths and weaknesses to properly select and manage the implementation partner relationship.
    • Self-assessment is the critical first step in a successful implementation. Every organization has a unique combination of critical success factors (CSFs) that will be required to unlock the potential of their ERP. You must find the right partner or partners whose strengths complement your weaknesses to ensure your success.
    • Before you start knocking on vendors’ doors, ensure you have a holistic request that encompasses the strategic, tactical, operational, and commodity factors required for the success of your ERP implementation.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s implementation partner selection process to find the right fit for your organization.
    • Understand the enterprise application CSFs and determine the unique requirements of your organization through this lens.
    • Define your implementation partner requirements separately from your software requirements and allow vendors to respond to those specifically.
    • Use our assessment tools to score and assess the CSFs required to select the right software implementation partners.

    Select an ERP Implementation Partner Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should focus on selecting the right implementation partner, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify your strategic needs

    Review the CSFs that are of strategic importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    • Select an ERP Implementation Partner Workbook

    2. Review your tactical, commodity, and operational needs

    Review the CSFs that are of tactical, commodity, and operational importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    3. Build your RFx and evaluate the responses

    Review your RFx and build an initial list of vendor/implementors to reach out to. Finally, build your evaluation checklist to rate the incoming responses.

    • Short-Form RFP Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Supplementary RFx Material
    • RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select an ERP Implementation Partner

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Organizational Strategic Needs

    The Purpose

    Review the critical success factors that are of strategic importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    ERP strategy model defined

    Strategic needs identified

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Build your ERP strategy model.

    1.3 Assess your strategic needs.

    Outputs

    ERP strategy model

    ERP strategy model

    Strategic needs analysis

    2 Review Your Tactical, Commodity, and Operational Needs

    The Purpose

    Review the critical success factors that are of tactical, commodity, and operational importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Tactical, commodity, and operational needs identified

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your tactical needs.

    2.2 Assess your commodity needs.

    2.3 Assess your operational needs.

    Outputs

    Tactical needs analysis

    Commodity needs analysis

    Operational needs analysis

    3 Build Your RFx

    The Purpose

    Review your RFx and build an initial list of vendor/implementors to reach out to. Finally, build your evaluation checklist to rate the incoming responses.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Target vendor list

    Activities

    3.1 Decide on an RFI or RFP.

    3.2 Complete the RFx with the needs analysis.

    3.3 Build a list of targeted vendors

    Outputs

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Target vendor list

    4 Evaluate Vendors

    The Purpose

    Build a scoring template for use in vendor evaluation to ensure consistent comparison criteria are used.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A consistent and efficient evaluation process

    Activities

    4.1 Assign weightings to the evaluation criteria.

    4.2 Run a vendor evaluation simulation to validate the process.

    Outputs

    Completed partner evaluation tool

    IT Asset Management (ITAM) Market Overview

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}62|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Asset Management
    • Parent Category Link: /asset-management
    • Data management is challenging at the best of times but managing assets that change on a daily basis are difficult without automation and a good asset tool.
    • For organizations moving beyond basic hardware inventory, knowing what to look for to prepare for future processes seems impossible.
    • Using price as the leading criteria or just as an add-on to your ITSM solution may frustrate your efforts, especially if managing complex licensing is part of your mandate.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • If the purchase is happening independent of process design or review, it’s easy to end up with a solution that doesn’t fit your environment.
    • The complexity of your environment should be a significant factor in choosing an IT asset management solution.
    • Imagining the possibilities and understanding the differences between IT asset tools will drive you to the right solution for long term gain in managing dynamic assets.

    Impact and Result

    • Regardless of whether your IT environment is on-premises, in the cloud, or a complex hybrid of the two, knowing where your asset funds are allocated is key to right-sizing costs and reducing risks of non-compliance or lost assets.
    • Choosing the right tools for the job will be key to your success.

    IT Asset Management (ITAM) Market Overview Research & Tools

    Start here: Read the Market Overview

    Read the Market Overview to understand what features and capabilities are available in ITAM tools. The right features match is key to making a data heavy and challenging process easier for your team.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • IT Asset Management Market Overview

    1. Prepare your project plan and selection process

    Use the Info-Tech templates to identify and document your requirements, plan your project, and prepare to engage with vendors.

    • ITAM Project Charter Template
    • ITAM Demonstration Script Template
    • Proof of Concept Template
    • ITAM Vendor Evaluation Workbook
    [infographic]

    Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}166|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Devices
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-devices
    • Windows 10 is going EOL in 2025.That is closer than you think.
    • Many of your endpoints are not eligible for the Windows 11 upgrade. You can’t afford to replace all your endpoints this year. How do you manage this Microsoft initiated catastrophe?
    • You want to stay close to the leading edge of technology and services, but how do you do that while keeping your spending in check and within budget?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Windows 11 is a step forward in security, which is one of the primary reasons for the release of the new operating system. Windows 11 comes with a list of hardware requirements that enable the use of tools and features that, when combined, will reduce malware infections.

    Impact and Result

    Windows 11 hardware requirements will result in devices that are not eligible for the upgrade. Companies will be left to spend money on replacement devices. Following the Info-Tech guidance will help clients properly budget for hardware replacements before Windows 10 is no longer supported by Microsoft. Eligible devices can be upgraded, but Info-Tech guidance can help clients properly plan the upgrade using the upgrade ring approach.

    Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11 Deck – A look into some of the pros and cons of Microsoft’s latest desktop operating system, along with guidance on moving forward with this inevitable upgrade.

    Discover the reason for the release of Windows 11, what you require to be eligible for the upgrade, what features were added or updated, and what features were removed. Our guidance will assist you with a planned and controlled rollout of the Windows 11 upgrade. We also provide guidance on how to approach a device refresh plan if some devices are not eligible for Windows 11. The upgrade is inevitable, but you have time, and you have options.

    • Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11 Storyboard

    2. What Are My Options If My Devices Cannot Upgrade to Windows 11? – Build a Windows 11 Device Replacement budget with our Hardware Asset Management Budgeting Tool.

    This tool will help you budget for a hardware asset refresh and to adjust the budget as necessary to accommodate any unexpected changes. The tool can easily be modified to assist in developing and justifying the budget for hardware assets for a Windows 11 project. Follow the instructions on each tab and feel free to play with the HAM budgeting tool to fit your needs.

    • HAM Budgeting Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11

    The upgrade is inevitable, but you have time, and you have options.

    Analyst Perspective

    Upgrading to Windows 11 is easy, and while it should be properly investigated and planned, it should absolutely be an activity you undertake.

    “You hear that Mr. Anderson? That is the sound of inevitability.” ("The Matrix Quotes" )

    The fictitious Agent Smith uttered those words to Keanu Reeves’ character, Neo, in The Matrix in 1999, and while Agent Smith was using them in a very sinister and figurative context, the words could just as easily be applied to the concept of upgrading to the Windows 11 operating system from Microsoft in 2022.

    There have been two common, recurring themes in the media since late 2019. One is the global pandemic and the other is cyber-related crime. Microsoft is not in a position to make an impact on a novel coronavirus, but it does have the global market reach to influence end-user technology and it appears that it has done just that. Windows 11 is a step forward in endpoint security and functionality. It also solidifies the foundation for future innovations in end-user operating systems and how they are delivered. Windows-as-a-Service (WAAS) is the way forward for Microsoft. Windows 10 is living on borrowed time, with a defined end of support date of October 14, 2025. Upgrading to Windows 11 is easy, and while it should be properly investigated and planned, it should absolutely be an activity you undertake.

    It is inevitable!

    P.J. Ryan

    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Windows 10 is going EOL in 2025. That is closer than you think.
    • Many of your endpoints are not eligible for the Windows 11 upgrade. You can’t afford to replace all your endpoints this year. How do you manage this Microsoft-initiated catastrophe?
    • You want to stay close to the leading edge of technology and services, but how do you do that while keeping your spending in check and within budget?

    Common Obstacles

    • The difference between Windows 10 and Windows 11 is not clear. Windows 11 looks like Windows 10 with some minor changes, mostly cosmetic. Many online users don’t see the need. Why upgrade? What are the benefits?
    • The cost of upgrading devices just to be eligible for Windows 11 is high.
    • Your end users don’t like change. This is not going to go over well!

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Spend wisely. Space out your endpoint replacements and upgrades over several years. You do not have to upgrade everything right away.
    • Be patient. Windows 11 contained some bugs when it was initially released. Microsoft fixed most of the issues through monthly quality updates, but you should ensure that you are comfortable with the current level of functionality before you upgrade.
    • Use the upgrade ring approach. Test your applications with a small group first, and then stage the rollout to increasingly larger groups over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is a lot of talk about Windows 11, but this is only an operating system upgrade, and it is not a major one. Understand what is new, what is added, and what is missing. Check your devices to determine how many are eligible and ineligible. Many organizations will have to spend capital on endpoint upgrades. Solid asset management practices will help.

    Insight summary

    Windows 11 is a step forward in security, which is one of the primary reasons for the release of the new operating system.

    Windows 11 comes with a list of hardware requirements that enable the use of tools and features that, when combined, will reduce malware infections.

    The hardware requirements for Windows 11 enable security features such as password-less logon, disk encryption, increased startup protection with secure boot, and virtualization-based security.

    Many organizations will have to spend capital on endpoint upgrades.

    Microsoft now insists that modern hardware is required for Windows 11 for not only security but also for improved stability. That same hardware requirement will mean that many devices that are only three or four years old (as well as older ones) may not be eligible for Windows 11.

    Windows 11 is a virtualization challenge for some providers.

    The hardware requirements for physical devices are also required for virtual devices. The TPM module appears to be the biggest challenge. Oracle VirtualBox and Citrix Hypervisor as well as AWS and Google are unable to support Windows 11 virtual devices as of the time of writing.

    Windows 10 will be supported by Microsoft until October 2025.

    That will remove some of the pressure felt due to the ineligibility of many devices and the need to refresh them. Take your time and plan it out, keeping within budget constraints. Use the upgrade ring approach for systems that are eligible for the Windows 11 upgrade.

    New look and feel, and a center screen taskbar.

    Corners are rounded, some controls look a little different, but overall Windows 11 is not a dramatic shift from Windows 10. It is easier to navigate and find features. Oh, and yes, the taskbar (and start button) is shifted to the center of the screen, but you can move them back to the left if desired.

    The education industry gets extra attention with the release of Windows 11.

    Windows 11 comes with multiple subscription-based education offerings, but it also now includes a new lightweight SE edition that is intended for the K-8 age group. Microsoft also released a Windows 11 Education SE specific laptop, at a very attractive price point. Other manufacturers also offer Windows 11 SE focused devices.

    Why Windows 11?

    Windows 10 was supposed to be the final desktop OS from Microsoft, wasn’t it?

    Maybe. It depends who you ask.

    Jerry Nixon, a Microsoft developer evangelist, gained notoriety when he uttered these words while at a Microsoft presentation as part of Microsoft Ignite in 2015: “Right now we’re releasing Windows 10, and because Windows 10 is the last version of Windows, we’re all still working on Windows 10,” (Hachman). Microsoft never officially made that statement. Interestingly enough, it never denied the comments made by Jerry Nixon either.

    Perhaps Microsoft released a new operating system as a financial grab, a way to make significant revenue?

    Nope.

    Windows 11 is a free upgrade or is included with any new computer purchase.

    Market share challenges?

    Doubtful.

    It’s true that Microsoft's market share of desktop operating systems is dropping while Apple OS X and Google Chrome OS are rising.

    In fact, Microsoft has relinquished over 13% of the market share since 2012 and Apple has almost doubled its market share. BUT:

    Microsoft is still holding 75.12% of the market while Apple is in the number 2 spot with 14.93% (gs.statcounter.com).

    The market share is worth noting for Microsoft but it hardly warrants a new operating system.

    New look and feel?

    Unlikely

    New start button and taskbar orientation, new search window, rounded corners, new visual look on some controls like the volume bar, new startup sound, new Windows logo, – all minor changes. Updates could achieve the same result.

    Security?

    Likely the main reason.

    Windows 11 comes with a list of hardware requirements that enable the use of tools and features that, when combined, will reduce malware infections.

    The hardware requirements for Windows 11 enable security features such as password-less logon, disk encryption, increased startup protection with secure boot, and virtualization-based security.

    The features are available on all Windows 11 physical devices, due to the common hardware requirements.

    Windows 11 hardware-based security

    These hardware options and features were available in Windows 10 but not enforced. With Windows 11, they are no longer optional. Below is a description and explanation of the main features.

    Feature What it is How it works
    TPM 2.0 (Trusted Platform Module) Chip TPM is a chip on the motherboard of the computer. It is used to store encryption keys, certificates, and passwords. TPM does this securely with tamper-proof prevention. It can also generate encryption keys and it includes its own unique encryption key that cannot be altered (helpdeskgeek.com). You do not need to enter your password once you setup Windows Hello, so the password is no longer easy to capture and steal. It is set up on a device per device basis, meaning if you go to a different device to sign in, your Windows Hello authentication will not follow you and you must set up your Hello pin or facial recognition again on that particular device. TPM (Trusted Platform Module) can store the credentials used by Windows Hello and encrypt them on the module.
    Windows Hello Windows Hello is an alternative to using a password for authentication. Users can use a pin, a fingerprint, or facial recognition to authenticate.
    Device Encryption Device encryption is only on when your device is off. It scrambles the data on your disk to make it unreadable unless you have the key to unscramble it. If your endpoint is stolen, the contents of the hard drive will remain encrypted and cannot be accessed by anyone unless they can properly authenticate on the device and allow the system to unscramble the encrypted data.
    UEFI Secure Boot Capable UEFI is an acronym for Unified Extensible Firmware Interface. It is an interface between the operating system and the computer firmware. Secure Boot, as part of the firmware interface, ensures that only unchangeable and approved software and drivers are loaded at startup and not any malware that may have infiltrated the system (Lumunge). UEFI, with Secure Boot, references a database containing keys and signatures of drivers and runtime code that is approved as well as forbidden. It will not let the system boot up unless the signature of the driver or run-time code that is trying to execute is approved. This UEFI Secure boot recognition process continues until control is handed over to the operating system.
    Virtualization Based Security (VBS) and Hypervisor-Protected Code Integrity (HVCI) VBS is security based on virtualization capabilities. It uses the virtualization features of the Windows operating system, specifically the Hyper-V hypervisor, to create and isolate a small chunk of memory that is isolated from the operating system. HVCI checks the integrity of code for violations. The Code Integrity check happens in the isolated virtual area of memory protected by the hypervisor, hence the acronym HVCI (Hypervisor Protected Code Integrity) (Murtaza). In the secure, isolated region of memory created by VBS with the hypervisor, Windows will run checks on the integrity of the code that runs various processes. The isolation protects the stored item from tampering by malware and similar threats. If they run incident free, they are released to the operating system and can run in the standard memory space. If issues are detected, the code will not be released, nor will it run in the standard memory space of the operating system, and damage or compromise will be prevented.

    How do all the hardware-based security features work?

    This scenario explains how a standard boot up and login should happen.

    You turn on your computer. Secure Boot authorizes the processes and UEFI hands over control to the operating system. Windows Hello works with TPM and uses a pin to authenticate the user and the operating systems gives you access to the Windows environment.

    Now imagine the same process with various compromised scenarios.

    You turn on your computer. Secure Boot does not recognize the signature presented to it by the second process in the boot sequence. You will be presented with a “Secure Boot Violation” message and an option to reboot. Your computer remains protected.

    You boot up and get past the secure boot process and UEFI passes control over to the Windows 11 operating system. Windows Hello asks for your pin, but you cannot remember the pin and incorrectly enter it three times before admitting temporary defeat. Windows Hello did not find a matching pin on the TPM and will not let you proceed. You cannot log in but in the eyes of the operating system, it has prevented an unauthorized login attempt.

    You power up your computer, log in without issue, and go about your morning routine of checking email, etc. You are not aware that malware has infiltrated your system and modified a page in system memory to run code and access the operating system kernel. VBS and HVCI check the integrity of that code and detect that it is malicious. The code remains isolated and prevented from running, protecting your system.

    TPM, Hello, UEFI with Secure Boot, VBS and HVCI all work together like a well-oiled machine.

    “Microsoft's rationale for Windows 11's strict official support requirements – including Secure Boot, a TPM 2.0 module, and virtualization support – has always been centered on security rather than raw performance.” – Andrew Cunningham, arstechnica.com

    “Windows 11 raises the bar for security by requiring hardware that can enable protections like Windows Hello, Device Encryption, virtualization-based security (VBS), hypervisor-protected code integrity (HVCI), and Secure Boot. These features in combination have been shown to reduce malware by 60% on tested devices.” – Steven J. Vaughan-Nichols, Computerworld

    Can any device upgrade to Windows 11?

    In addition to the security-related hardware requirements listed previously, which may exclude some devices from Windows 11 eligibility, Windows 11 also has a minimum requirement for other hardware components.

    Windows 7 and Windows 10 were publicized as being backward compatible and almost any hardware would be able to run those operating systems. That changed with Windows 11. Microsoft now insists that modern hardware is required for Windows 11 for not only security but also improved stability.

    Software Requirement

    You must be running Windows 10 version 2004 or greater to be eligible for a Windows 11 upgrade (“Windows 11 Requirements”).

    Complete hardware requirements for Windows 11

    • 1 GHz (or faster) compatible 64-bit processor with two or more cores
    • 4 GB RAM
    • 64 GB or more of storage space
    • Compatible with DirectX 12 or later with WDDM 2.0 driver
      • DirectX connects the hardware in your computer with Windows. It allows software to display graphics using the video card or play audio, as long as that software is DirectX compatible. Windows 11 requires version 12 (“What are DirectX 12 compatible graphics”).
      • WDDM is an acronym for Windows Display Driver Model. WDDM is the architecture for the graphics driver for Windows (“Windows Display Driver Model”).
      • Version 2.0 of WDDM is required for Windows 11.
    • 720p display greater than 9" diagonally with 8 bits per color channel
    • UEFI Secure Boot capable
    • TPM 2.0 chip
    • (“Windows 11 Requirements”)

    Windows 11 may challenge your virtual environment

    When Windows 11 was initially released, some IT administrators experienced issues when trying to install or upgrade to Windows 11 in the virtual world.

    The Challenge

    The issues appeared to be centered around the Windows 11 hardware requirements, which must be detected by the Windows 11 pre-install check before the operating system will install.

    The TPM 2.0 chip requirement was indeed a challenge and not offered as a configuration option with Citrix Hypervisor, the free VMware Workstation Player or Oracle VM VirtualBox when Windows 11 was released in October 2021, although it is on the roadmap for Oracle and Citrix Hypervisor. VMware provides alternative products to the free Workstation Player that do support a virtual TPM. Oracle and Citrix reported that the feature would be available in the future and Windows 11 would work on their platforms.

    Short-Term Solutions

    VMware and Microsoft users can add a vTPM hardware type when configuring a virtual Windows 11 machine. Microsoft Azure does offer Windows 11 as an option as a virtual desktop. Citrix Desktop-As-A-Service (DAAS) will connect to Azure, AWS, or Google Cloud and is only limited by the features of the hosting cloud service provider.

    Additional Insight

    According to Microsoft, any VM running Windows 11 must meet the following requirements (“Virtual Machine Support”):

    • It must be a generation 2 VM, and upgrading a generation 1 VM to Windows 11 (in-place) is not possible
    • 64 GB of storage or greater
    • Secure Boot capable with the virtual TPM enabled
    • 4 GB of memory or greater
    • 2 or more virtual processors
    • The CPU of the physical computer that is hosting the VM must meet the Windows 11 (“Windows Processor Requirements”)

    What’s new or updated in Windows 11?

    The following two slides highlight some of the new and updated features in Windows 11.

    Security

    The most important change with Windows 11 is what you cannot see – the security. Windows 11 adds requirements and controls to make the user and device more secure, as described in previous slides.

    Taskbar

    The most prominent change in relation to the look and feel of Windows 11 is the shifting of the taskbar (and Start button) to the center of the screen. Some users may find this more convenient but if you do not and prefer the taskbar and start button back on the left of your screen, you can change it in taskbar settings.

    Updated Apps

    Paint, Photos, Notepad, Media Player, Mail, and other standard Windows apps have been updated with a new look and in some cases minor enhancements.

    User Interface

    The first change users will notice after logging in to Windows 11 is the new user interface – the look and feel. You may not notice the additional colors added to the Windows palette, but you may have thought that the startup sound was different, and the logo also looks different. You would be correct. Other look-and-feel items that changed include the rounded corners on windows, slightly different icons, new wallpapers, and controls for volume and brightness are now a slide bar. File explorer and the settings app also have a new look.

    Microsoft Teams

    Microsoft Teams is now installed on the taskbar by default. Note that this is for a personal Microsoft account only. Teams for Work or School will have to be installed separately if you are using a work or school account.

    What’s new or updated in Windows 11?

    Snap Layouts

    Snap layouts have been enhanced and snap group functionality has been added. This will allow you to quickly snap one window to the side of the screen and open other Windows in the other side. This feature can be accessed by dragging the window you wish to snap to the left or right edge of the screen. The window should then automatically resize to occupy that half of the screen and allow you to select other Windows that are already open to occupy the remaining space on the screen. You can also hover your mouse over the maximize button in the upper right-hand corner of the window. A small screen with multiple snap layouts will appear for your selection. Multiple snapped Windows can be saved as a “Snap Group” that will open together if one of the group windows are snapped in the future.

    Widgets

    Widgets are expanding. Microsoft started the re-introduction of widgets in Windows 10, specifically focusing on the weather. Widgets now include other services such as news, sports, stock prices, and others.

    Android Apps

    Android apps can now run in Windows 11. You will have to use the Amazon store to access and install Android apps, but if it is available in the Amazon store, you can install it on Windows 11.

    Docking

    Docking has improved with Windows 11. Windows knows when you are docked and will minimize apps when you undock so they are not lost. They will appear automatically when you dock again.

    This is not intended to be an inclusive list but does cover some of the more prominent features.

    What’s missing from Windows 11?

    The following features are no longer found in Windows 11:

    • Backward compatibility
      • The introduction of the hardware requirements for Windows 11 removed the backward compatibility (from a hardware perspective) that made the transition from previous versions of Windows to their successor less of a hardware concern. If a computer could run Windows 7, then it could also run Windows 10. That does not automatically mean it can also run Windows 11.
    • Internet Explorer
      • Internet Explorer is no longer installed by default in Windows 11. Microsoft Edge is now the default browser for Windows. Other browsers can also be installed if preferred.
    • Tablet mode
      • Windows 11 does not have a "tablet" mode, but the operating system will maximize the active window and add more space between icons to make selecting them easier if the 2-in-1 hardware detects that you wish to use the device as a tablet (keyboard detached or device opened up beyond 180 degrees, etc.).
    • Semi-annual updates
      • It may take six months or more to realize that semi-annual feature updates are missing. Microsoft moved to an annual feature update schema but continued with monthly quality updates with Windows 11.
    • Specific apps
      • Several applications have been removed (but can be manually added from the Microsoft Store by the user). They include:
        • OneNote for Windows 10
        • 3D Viewer
        • Paint 3D
        • Skype
    • Cortana (by default)
      • Cortana is missing from Windows 11. It is installed but not enabled by default. Users can turn it on if desired.

    Microsoft included a complete list of features that have been removed or deprecated with Windows 11, which can be found here Windows 11 Specs and System Requirements.

    Windows 11 editions

    • Windows 11 is offered in several editions:
      • Windows 11 Home
      • Windows 11 Pro
      • Windows 11 Pro for Workstations
      • Windows 11 Enterprise Windows 11 for Education
      • Windows 11 SE for Education
    • Windows 11 hardware requirements and security features are common throughout all editions.
    • The new look and feel along with all the features mentioned previously are common to all editions as well.
    • Windows Home
      • Standard offering for home users
    • Pro versus Pro for Workstations
      • Windows 11 Pro and Pro for Workstations are both well suited for the business environment with available features such as support for Active Directory or Azure Active Directory, Windows Autopilot, OneDrive for Business, etc.
      • Windows Pro for Workstations is designed for increased demands on the hardware with the higher memory limits (2 TB vs. 6 TB) and processor count (2 CPU vs. 4 CPU).
      • Windows Pro for Workstations also features Resilient File System, Persistent Memory, and SMB Direct. Neither of these features are available in the Windows 11 Pro edition.
      • Windows 11 Pro and Pro for Workstations are both very business focused, although Pro may also be a common choice for non-business users (Home and Education).
    • Enterprise Offerings
      • Enterprise licenses are subscription based and are part of the Microsoft 365 suite of offerings.
      • Windows 11 Enterprise is Windows 11 Pro with some additional addons and functionality in areas such as device management, collaboration, and security services.
      • The level of the Microsoft 365 Enterprise subscription (E3 or E5) would dictate the additional features and functionality, such as the complete Microsoft Defender for Endpoint suite or the Microsoft phone system and Audio Conferencing, which are only available with the E5 subscription.

    Windows 11 Education Editions

    With the release of a laptop targeted specifically at the education market, Microsoft must be taking notice of the Google Chrome educational market penetration, especially with headlines like these.

    “40 Million Chromebooks in Use in Education” (Thurrott)

    “The Unprecedented Growth of the Chromebook Education Market Share” (Carklin)

    “Chromebooks Gain Market Share as Education Goes Online” (Hruska)

    “Chromebooks Gain Share of Education Market Despite Shortages” (Mandaro)

    “Chromebook sales skyrocketed in Q3 2020 with online education fueling demand” (Duke)

    • Education licenses are subscription based and are part of the Microsoft 365 suite of offerings. Educational pricing is one benefit of the Microsoft 365 Education model.
    • Windows 11 Education is Windows 11 Pro with some additional addons and functionality similar to the Enterprise offerings for Windows 11 in areas such as device management, collaboration, and security services. Windows 11 Education also adds some education specific settings such as Classroom Tools, which allow institutions to add new students and their devices to their own environment with fewer issues, and includes OneNote Class Notebook, Set Up School PCs app, and Take a Test app.
    • The level of the Microsoft 365 Education subscription (A3 or A5) would dictate the additional features and functionality, such as the complete Microsoft Defender for Endpoint suite or the Microsoft phone system and Audio Conferencing, which are only available with the A5 subscription.
    • Windows 11 SE for Education:
      • A cloud-first edition of Windows 11 specifically designed for the K-8 education market.
      • Windows 11 SE is a light version of Windows 11 that is designed to run on entry-level devices with better performance and security on that hardware.
      • Windows 11 SE requires Intune for Education and only IT admins can install applications.
    • Microsoft and others have come out with Windows SE specific devices at a low price point.
      • The Microsoft Surface Laptop SE comes pre-loaded with Windows 11 SE and can be purchased for US$249.00.
      • Dell, Asus, Acer, Lenovo, and others also offer Windows 11 SE specific devices (“Devices for Education”).

    Initial Reactions

    Below you can find some actual initial reactions to Windows 11.

    Initial reactions are mixed, as is to be expected with any new release of an operating system. The look and feel is new, but it is not a huge departure from the Windows 10 look and feel. Some new features are well received such as the snap feature.

    The shift of the taskbar (and start button) is the most popular topic of discussion online when it comes to Windows 11 reactions. Some love it and some do not. The best part about the shift of the taskbar is that you can adjust it in settings and move it back to its original location.

    The best thing about reactions is that they garner attention, and thanks in part to all the online reactions and comments, Microsoft is continually improving Windows 11 through quality updates and annual feature releases.

    “My 91-year-old Mum has found it easy!” Binns, Paul ITRG

    “It mostly looks quite nice and runs well.” Jmbpiano, Reddit user

    “It makes me feel more like a Mac user.” Chang, Ben Info-Tech

    “At its core, Windows 11 appears to be just Windows 10 with a fresh coat of paint splashed all over it.” Rouse, Rick RicksDailyTips.com

    “Love that I can snap between different page orientations.” Roberts, Jeremy Info-Tech

    “I finally feel like Microsoft is back on track again.” Jawed, Usama Neowin

    “A few of the things that seemed like issues at first have either turned out not to be or have been fixed with patches.” Jmbpiano, Reddit user

    “The new interface is genuinely intuitive, well-designed, and colorful.” House, Brett AnandTech

    “No issues. Have it out on about 50 stations.” Sandrews1313, Reddit User

    “The most striking change is to the Start menu.” Grabham, Dan pocket-lint.com

    How do I upgrade to Windows 11?

    The process is very similar to applying updates in Windows 10.

    • Windows 11 is offered as an upgrade through the standard Windows 10 update procedure. Windows Update will notify you when the Windows 11 upgrade is ready (assuming your device is eligible for Windows 11).
      • Allow the update (upgrade in this case) to proceed, reboot, and your endpoint will come back to life with Windows 11 installed and ready for you.
    • A fresh install can be delivered by downloading the required Windows 11 installation media from the Microsoft Software Download site for Windows 11.
    • Business users can control the timing and schedule of the Windows 11 rollout to corporate endpoints using Microsoft solutions such as WSUS, Configuration Manager, Intune and Endpoint Manager, or by using other endpoint management solutions.
    • WSUS and Configuration Manager will have to sync the product category for Windows 11 to manage the deployment.
    • Windows Update for Business policies will have to use the target version capability rather than using the feature update referrals alone.
    • Organizations using Intune and a Microsoft 365 E3 license will be able to use the Feature Update Deployments page to select Windows 11.
    • Other modern endpoint management solutions may also allow for a controlled deployment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The upgrade itself may be a simple process but be prepared for the end-user reactions that will follow. Some will love it but others will despise it. It is not an optional upgrade in the long run, so everyone will have to learn to accept it.

    When can I upgrade to Windows 11?

    You can upgrade right now BUT there is no need to rush. Windows 11 was released in October 2021 but that doesn’t mean you have to upgrade everyone right away. Plan this out.

    • Build deployment rings into your Windows 11 upgrade approach: This approach, also referred to as Canary Releases or deployment rings, allows you to ensure that IT can support users if there's a major problem with the upgrade. Instead of disrupting all end users, you are only disrupting a portion of end users.
      • Deploy the initial update to your test environment.
      • After testing is successful or changes have been made, deploy Windows 11 to your pilot group of users.
      • After the pilot group gives you the thumbs up, deploy to the rest of production in phases. Phases are sometimes by office/location, sometimes by department, sometimes by persona (i.e. defer people that don't handle updates well), and usually by a combination of these factors.
      • Increase the size of each ring as you progress.
    • Always back up your data before any upgrade.

    Deployment Ring Example

    Pilot Ring - Individuals from all departments - 10 users

    Ring #1 - Dev, Finance - 20 Users

    Ring #2 - Research - 100 Users

    Ring #3 - Sales, IT, Marketing - 500 Users

    Upgrade your eligible devices and users to Windows 11

    Build Windows 11 Deployment Rings

    Instructions:

    1. Identify who will be in the pilot group. Use individuals instead of user groups.
    2. Identify how many standard rings you need. This number will be based on the total number of employees per office.
    3. Map groups to rings. Define which user groups will be in each ring.
    4. Allow some time to elapse between upgrades. Allow the first group to work with Windows 11 and identify any potential issues that may arise before upgrading the next group.
    5. Track and communicate. Record all information into a spreadsheet like the one on the right. This will aid in communication and tracking.
    Ring Department or Group Total Users Delay Time Before Next Group
    Pilot Ring Individuals from all departments 10 Three weeks
    Ring 1 Dev Finance 20 Two weeks
    Ring 2 Research 100 One week
    Ring 3 Sales, IT Marketing 500 N/A

    What are my options if my devices cannot upgrade to Windows 11?

    Don’t rush out to replace all the ineligible endpoint devices. You have some time to plan this out. Windows 10 will be available and supported by Microsoft until October 2025.

    Use asset management strategies and budget techniques in your Windows 11 upgrade approach:

    • Start with current inventory and determine which devices will not be eligible for upgrade to Windows 11.
    • Prioritize the devices for replacement, taking device age, the role of the user the device supports, and delivery times for remote users into consideration.
    • Take this opportunity to review overall device offerings and end-user compute strategy. This will help decide which devices to offer going forward while improving end-user satisfaction.
    • Determine the cost for replacement devices:
      • Compare vendor offerings using an RFP process.
    • Use the hardware asset management planning spreadsheet on the next slide to budget for the replacements over the coming months leading up to October 2025.

    Leverage Info-Tech research to improve your end-user computing strategy and hardware asset management processes:

    New to End User Computing Strategies? Start with Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy.

    New to IT asset management? Use Info-Tech’s Implement Hardware Asset Management blueprint.

    Use Info-Tech’s HAM Budgeting Tool to plan your hardware asset budget

    Build a Windows 11 Device Replacement Budget

    The link below will open up a hardware asset management (HAM) budgeting tool. This tool can easily be modified to assist in developing and justifying the budget for hardware assets for the Windows 11 project. The tool will allow you to budget for hardware asset refresh and to adjust the budget as needed to accommodate any changes. Follow the instructions on each tab to complete the tool.

    A sample of a possible Windows 11 budgeting spreadsheet is shown on the right, but feel free to play with the HAM budgeting tool to fit your needs.

    HAM Budgeting Tool

    Windows 11 Replacement Schedule
    2022 2023 2024 2025
    Department Total to replace Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Left to allocate
    Finance 120 20 20 20 10 10 20 20 0
    HR 28 15 13 0
    IT 30 15 15 0
    Research 58 8 15 5 20 5 5 0
    Planning 80 10 15 15 10 15 15 0
    Other 160 5 30 5 15 15 30 30 30 0
    Totals 476 35 38 35 35 35 35 38 35 50 35 35 35 35 0

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy

    This project helps support the workforce of the future by answering the following questions: What types of computing devices, provisioning models, and operating systems should be offered to end users? How will IT support devices? What are the policies and governance surrounding how devices are used? What actions are we taking and when? How do end-user devices support larger corporate priorities and strategies?

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    This project will help you analyze the current state of your HAM program, define assets that will need to be managed, and build and involve the ITAM team from the beginning to help embed the change. It will also help you define standard policies, processes, and procedures for each stage of the hardware asset lifecycle, from procurement through to disposal.

    Bibliography

    aczechowski, et al. “Windows 11 Requirements.” Microsoft, 3 June 2022. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    Binns, Paul. Personal interview. 07 June 2022.

    Butler, Sydney. “What Is Trusted Platform Module (TPM) and How Does It Work?” Help Desk Geek, 5 August 2021. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Carklin, Nicolette. “The Unprecedented Growth of the Chromebook Education Market Share.” Parallels International GmbH, 26 October 2021. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Chang, Ben. Personal interview. 26 May 2022.

    Cunningham, Andrew. “Why Windows 11 has such strict hardware requirements, according to Microsoft.” Ars Technica, 27 August 2021. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Dealnd-Han, et al. “Windows Processor Requirements.” Microsoft, 9 May 2022. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    “Desktop Operating Systems Market Share Worldwide.” Statcounter Globalstats, June 2021–June 2022. Accessed 17 May 2022.

    “Devices for education.” Microsoft, 2022. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    Duke, Kent. “Chromebook sales skyrocketed in Q3 2020 with online education fueling demand.” Android Police, 16 November 2020. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Grabham, Dan. “Windows 11 first impressions: Our initial thoughts on using Microsoft's new OS.” Pocket-Lint, 24 June 2021. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Hachman, Mark. “Why is there a Windows 11 if Windows 10 is the last Windows?” PCWorld, 18 June 2021. Accessed 17 May 2022.

    Howse, Brett. “What to Expect with Windows 11: A Day One Hands-On.” Anandtech, 16 November 2020. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Hruska, Joel. “Chromebooks Gain Market Share as Education Goes Online.” Extremetech, 26 October 2020. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Jawed, Usama. “I am finally excited about Windows 11 again.” Neowin, 26 February 2022. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Jmbpiano. “Windows 11 - What are our initial thoughts and feelings?” Reddit, 22 November 2021. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Lumunge, Erick. “UEFI and Legacy boot.” OpenGenus, n.d. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Bibliography

    Mandaro, Laura. “Chromebooks Gain Share of Education Market Despite Shortages.” The Information, 9 September 2020. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Murtaza, Fawad. “What Is Virtualization Based Security in Windows?” Valnet Inc, 24 October 2021. Accessed 17 May 2022.

    Roberts, Jeremy. Personal interview. 27 May 2022.

    Rouse, Rick. “My initial thoughts about Windows 11 (likes and dislikes).” RicksDailyTips.com, 5 September 2021. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Sandrews1313. “Windows 11 - What are our initial thoughts and feelings?” Reddit, 22 November 2021. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    “The Matrix Quotes." Quotes.net, n.d. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Thurrott, Paul.” Google: 40 Million Chromebooks in Use in Education.” Thurrott, 21 January 2020. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Vaughan-Nichols, Steven J. “The real reason for Windows 11.” Computerworld, 6 July 2021, Accessed 19 May 2022.

    “Virtual Machine Support.” Microsoft,3 June 2022. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    “What are DirectX 12 compatible graphics and WDDM 2.x.” Wisecleaner, 20 August 2021. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    “Windows 11 Specs and System Requirements.” Microsoft, 2022. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    “Windows Display Driver Model.” MiniTool, n.d. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    Adopt Change Management Practices and Succeed at IT Organizational Redesign

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}393|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /organizational-design

    Organizational redesigns frequently fail when it comes to being executed. This leads to:

    • The loss of critical talent and institutional knowledge.
    • An inability to deliver on strategic goals and objectives.
    • Financial and time losses to the organization.

    Organizational redesigns fail during implementation primarily because they do not consider the change management required to succeed.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Implementing your organizational design with good change management practices is more important than defining the new organizational structure.

    Implementation is often negatively impacted due to:

    • Employees not understanding the need to redesign the organizational structure or operating model.
    • Employees not being communicated with or engaged throughout the process, which can cause chaos.
    • Managers not being prepared or trained to have difficult conversations with employees.

    Impact and Result

    When good change management practices are used and embedded into the implementation process:

    • Employees feel respected and engaged, reducing turnover and productivity loss.
    • The desired operating structure can be implemented faster, enabling the delivery of strategic objectives.
    • Gaps and disorganization are avoided, saving the organization time and money.

    Invest change management for your IT redesign.

    Adopt Change Management Practices and Succeed at IT Organizational Redesign Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Adopt Change Management Practices and Succeed at IT Organizational Redesign Deck – Succeed at implementing your IT organizational structure by adopting the necessary change management practices.

    The best IT organizational structure will still fail to be implemented if the organization does not leverage and use good change management practices. Consider practices such as aligning the structure to a meaningful vision, preparing leadership, communicating frequently, including employees, and measuring adoption to succeed at organizational redesign implementation.

    • Adopt Change Management Practices and Succeed at IT Organizational Redesign Storyboard

    2. IT Organizational Redesign Pulse Survey Template – A survey template that can be used to measure the success of your change management practices during organizational redesign implementation.

    Taking regular pulse checks of employees and managers during the transition will enable IT Leaders to focus on the right practices to enable adoption.

    • IT Organizational Redesign Pulse Survey Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Adopt Change Management Practices & Succeed at IT Organizational Redesign

    The perfect IT organizational structure will fail to be implemented if there is no change management.

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t doom your organizational redesign efforts

    The image contains a picture of Brittany Lutes.

    After helping hundreds of organizations across public and private sector industries redesign their organizational structure, we can say there is one thing that will always doom this effort: A failure to properly identify and implement change management efforts into the process.

    Employees will not simply move forward with the changes you suggest just because you as the CIO are making them. You need to be prepared to describe the individual benefits each employee can expect to receive from the new structure. Moreover, it has to be clear why this change was needed in the first place. Redesign efforts should be driven by a clear need to align to the organization’s vision and support the various objectives that will need to take place.

    Most organizations do a great job defining a new organizational structure. They identify a way of operating that tells them how they need to align their IT capabilities to deliver on strategic objectives. What most organizations do poorly is invest in their people to ensure they can adopt this new way of operating.

    Brittany Lutes
    Research Director, Organizational Transformation

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Organizational redesigns frequently fail when it comes to being executed. This leads to:

    • The loss of critical talent and institutional knowledge.
    • An inability to deliver on strategic goals and objectives.
    • Financial and time losses to the organization.

    Organizational redesigns fail during implementation primarily because they do not consider the change management required to succeed.

    Implementation of the organizational redesign is often impacted when:

    • Employees do not understand the need to redesign the organizational structure or operating model.
    • Employees are not communicated with or engaged throughout the process, which can cause chaos.
    • Managers are not prepared or trained to have difficult conversations with employees.

    Essentially, implementation is impacted when change management is not included in the redesign process.

    When good change management practices are used and embedded into the implementation process:

    • Employees feel respected and engaged, reducing turnover and productivity loss.
    • The desired operating structure can be implemented faster, enabling the delivery of strategic objectives.
    • Gaps and disorganization are avoided, saving the organization time and money.

    Invest in change management for your IT redesign.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Implementing your organizational design with good change management practices is more important than defining the new organizational structure.

    Your challenge

    This research enables organizations to succeed at their organizational redesign:

    • By implementing the right change management practices. These methods prevent:
      • The loss of critical IT employees who will voluntarily exit the organization.
      • Employees from creating rumors that will be detrimental to the change.
      • Confusion about why the change was needed and how it will benefit the strategic objectives the organization is seeking to achieve.
      • Spending resources (time, money, and people) on the initiative longer than is necessary.

    McKinsey reported less than 25% of organizational redesigns are successful. Which is worse than the average change initiative, which has a 70% failure rate.

    Source: AlignOrg, 2020.

    The value of the organizational redesign efforts is determined by the percentage of individuals who adopt the changes and operate in the desired way of working.

    When organizations properly use organizational design processes, they are:

    4× more likely to delight customers

    13× more effective at innovation

    27× more likely to retain employees

    Source: The Josh Bersin Company, 2022

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make implementing an organizational redesign difficult to address for many organizations:

    • You communicated the wrong message to the wrong audience at the wrong time. Repeatedly.
    • There is a lack of clarity around the drivers for an organizational redesign.
    • A readiness assessment was not completed ahead of the changes.
    • There is no flexibility built into the implementation approach.
    • The structure is not aligned to the strategic goals of IT and the organization.
    • IT leadership is not involved in their staff’s day-to-day activities, making it difficult to suggest realistic changes.

    Don’t doom your organizational redesign with poor change management

    Only 17% of frontline employees believe the lines of communication are open.

    Source: Taylor Reach Group, 2019

    43% Percentage of organizations that are ineffective at the organizational design methodology.

    Source: The Josh Bersin Company, 2022.

    Change management is a must for org design

    Forgetting change management is the easiest way to fail at redesigning your IT organizational structure

    • Change management is not a business transformation.
    • Change management consists of the practices and approaches your organization takes to support your people through a transformation.
    • Like governance, change management happens regardless of whether it is planned or ad hoc.
    • However, good change management will be intentional and agile, using data to help inform the next action steps you will take.
    • Change management is 100% focused on the people and how to best support them as they learn to understand the need for the change, what skills they must have to support and adopt the change, and eventually to advocate for the change.

    "Organizational transformation efforts rarely fail because of bad design, but rather from lack of sufficient attention to the transition from the old organization to the new one."

    – Michael D. Watkins & Janet Spencer. ”10 Reason Why Organizational Change Fails.”

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Redesigning the IT structure depends on good change management

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's approach, and good change management.

    Common changes in organizational redesigns

    Entirely New Teams

    Additions, reductions, or new creations. The individuals that make up a functional team can shift.

    New Team Members

    As roles become defined, some members might be required to shift and join already established groups.

    New Responsibilities

    The capabilities individuals will be accountable or responsible for become defined.

    New Ways of Operating

    From waterfall to Agile, collaborative to siloed, your operating model provides insight into the ways roles will engage one another.

    Top reasons organizational redesigns fail

    1. The rationale for the redesign is not clear.
    2. Managers do not have the skills to lead their teams through a change initiative like organizational redesign.
    3. You communicated the wrong messages at the wrong times to the wrong audiences.
    4. Frontline employees were not included in the process.
    5. The metrics you have to support the initiative are countering one another – if you have metrics at all.
    6. Change management and project management are being treated interchangeably.

    Case study: restructuring to reduce

    Clear Communication & Continuous Support

    Situation

    On July 26th, 2022, employees at Shopify – an eCommerce platform – were communicated to by their CEO that a round of layoffs was about to take place. Effective that day, 1,000 employees or 10% of the workforce would be laid off.

    In his message to staff, CEO Tobi Lutke admitted he had assumed continual growth in the eCommerce market when the COVID-19 pandemic forced many consumers into online shopping. Unfortunately, it was clear that was not the case.

    In his communications, Tobi let people know what to expect throughout the day, and he informed people what supports would be made available to those laid off. Mainly, employees could expect to see a transparent approach to severance pay; support in finding new jobs through coaching, connections, or resume creation; and ongoing payment for new laptops and internet to support those who depend on this connectivity to find new jobs.

    Results

    Unlike many of the other organizations (e.g. Wayfair and Peloton) that have had to conduct layoffs in 2022, Shopify had a very positive reaction. Many employees took to LinkedIn to thank their previous employer for all that they had learned with the organization and to ask their network to support them in finding new opportunities. Below is a letter from the CEO:

    The image contains a screenshot of a letter from the CEO.

    Shopify, 2022.
    Forbes, 2022.

    Aligned to a Meaningful Vision

    An organizational redesign must be aligned to a clear and meaningful vision of the organization.

    Define the drivers for organizational redesign

    And align the structure to execute on those drivers.

    • Your structure should follow your strategy. However, 83% of people in an organization do not fully understand the strategy (PWC, 2017).
    • How can employees be expected to understand why the IT organization needs to be restructured to meet a strategy if the strategy itself is still vague and unclear?
    • When organizations pursue a structural redesign, there are often a few major reasons:
      • Digital/organizational transformation
      • New organizational strategy
      • Acquisition or growth of products, services, or capabilities
      • The need to increase effectiveness
      • Cost savings
    • Creating a line of sight for your employees and leadership team will increase the likelihood that they want to adopt this structure.

    “The goal is to align your operating model with your strategy, so it directly supports your differentiating capabilities.”

    – PWC, 2017.

    How to align structure to strategy

    Recommended action steps:

    • Describe the end state of the organizational structure and how long you anticipate it will take to reach that state. It's important that employees be able to visualize the end state of the changes being made.
    • Ensure people understand the vision and goals of the IT organization. Are you having discussions about these? Are managers discussing these? Do people understand that their day-to-day job is intended to support those goals?
    • Create a visual:
      • The goals of the organization → align to the initiatives IT → which require this exact structure to deliver.
    • Do not assume people are willing to move forward with this vision. If people are not willing, assess why and determine if there are benefits specific to the individual that can support them in adopting the future state.
    • Define and communicate the risks of not making the organizational structure changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A trending organizational structure or operating model should never be the driver for an organizational redesign.

    IT Leaders Are Not Set Up To Succeed

    Empower these leaders to have difficult conversations.

    Lacking key leadership capabilities in managers

    Technical leaders are common in IT, but people leaders are necessary during the implementation of an organizational structure.

    • Managers are important during a transformational change for many reasons:
      • Managers play a critical role in being able to identify the skill gaps in employees and to help define the next steps in their career path.
      • After the sponsor (CIO) has communicated to the group the what and the why, the personal elements of the change fall to managers.
      • Managers’ displays of disapproval for the redesign can halt the transformation.
    • However, many managers (37%) feel uncomfortable talking to employees and providing feedback if they think it will elicit a negative response (Taylor Reach Group, 2019).
    • Unfortunately, organizational redesign is known for eliciting negative responses from employees as it generates fears around the unknown.
    • Therefore, managers must be able to have conversations with employees to further the successful implementation and adoption of the structure.

    “Successful organizational redesign is dependent on the active involvement of different managerial levels."

    – Marianne Livijn, “Managing Organizational Redesign: How Organizations Relate Macro and Micro Design.”

    They might be managers, but are they leaders?

    Recommended action steps:

    • Take time to speak with managers one on one and understand their thoughts, feelings, and understanding of the change.
    • Ensure that middle-managers have an opportunity to express the benefits they believe will be realized through the proposed changes to the organizational chart.
    • Provide IT leaders with leadership training courses (e.g. Info-Tech’s Leadership Programs).
    • Do not allow managers to start sharing and communicating the changes to the organizational structure if they are not demonstrating support for this change. Going forward, the group is all-in or not, but they should never demonstrate not being bought-in when speaking to employees.
    • Ensure IT leaders want to manage people, not just progress to a management position because they cannot climb a technical career ladder within the proposed structure. Provide both types of development opportunities to all employees.
    • Reduce the managers’ span of control to ensure they can properly engage all direct reports and there is no strain on the managers' time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    47% of direct reports do not agree that their leader is demonstrating the change behaviors. Often, a big reason is that many middle-managers do not understand their own attitudes and beliefs about the change.

    Source: McKinsey & Company “How Do We Manage the Change Journey?”

    Check out Info-Tech’s Build a Better Manager series to support leadership development

    These blueprints will help you create strong IT leaders who can manage their staff and themselves through a transformation.

    Build a Better Manager: Basic Management Skills

    Build a Better Manager: Personal Leadership

    Build a Better Manager: Manage Your People

    Build Successful Teams

    Transparent & Frequent Communication

    Provide employees with several opportunities to hear information and ask questions about the changes.

    Communication must be done with intention

    Include employees in the conversation to get the most out of your change management.

    • Whether it is a part of a large transformation or a redesign to support a specific goal of IT, begin thinking about how you will communicate the anticipated changes and who you will communicate those changes to right away.
    • The first group of people who need to understand why this initiative is important are the other IT leaders. If they are not included in the process and able to understand the foundational drivers of the initiative, you should not continue to try and gain the support of other members within IT.
    • Communication is critical to the success of the organizational redesign.
    • Communicating the right information at the right time will make the difference between losing critical talent and emerging from the transition successfully.
    • The sponsor of this redesign initiative must be able to communicate the rationale of the changes to the other members of leadership, management, and employees.
    • The sponsor and their change management team must then be prepared to accept the questions, comments, and ideas that members of IT might have around the changes.

    "Details about the new organization, along with details of the selection process, should be communicated as they are finalized to all levels of the organization.”

    – Courtney Jackson, “7 Reasons Why Organizational Structures Fail.”

    Two-way communication is necessary

    Recommended action steps:

    • Don't allow rumors to disrupt this initiative – be transparent with people as early as possible.
    • If the organizational restructure will not result in a reduction of staff – let them know! If someone's livelihood (job) is on the line, it increases the likelihood of panic. Let's avoid panic.
    • Provide employees with an opportunity to voice their concerns, questions, and recommendations – so long as you are willing to take that information and address it. Even if the answer to a recommendation is "no" or the answer to a question is "I don't know, but I will find out," you've still let them know their voice was heard in the process.
    • As the CIO, ensure that you are the first person to communicate the changes. You are the sponsor of this initiative – no one else.
    • Create communications that are clear and understandable. Imagine someone who does not work for your organization is hearing the information for the first time. Would they be able to comprehend the changes being suggested?
    • Conduct a pulse survey on the changes to identify whether employees understand the changes and feel heard by the management team.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The project manager of the organizational redesign should not be the communicator. The CIO and the employees’ direct supervisor should always be the communicators of key change messages.

    Communication spectrum

    An approach to communication based on the type of redesign taking place

    ← Business-Mandated Organizational Redesign

    Enable Alignment & Increased Effectiveness

    IT-Driven & Strategic Organizational Redesign →

    Reduction in roles

    Cost savings

    Requires champions who will maintain employee morale throughout

    Communicate with key individuals ahead of time

    Restructure of IT roles

    Increase effectiveness

    Lean on managers & supervisors to provide consistent messaging

    Communicate the individual benefits of the change

    Increase in IT Roles

    Alignment to business model

    Frequent and ongoing communication from the beginning

    Collaborate with IT groups for input on best structure

    Include Employees in the Redesign Process

    Stop talking at employees and ensure they are involved in the changes impacting their day-to-day lives.

    Employees will enable the change

    Old-school approaches to organizational redesign have argued employee engagement is a hinderance to success – it’s not.

    • We often fail to include the employees most impacted by a restructuring in the redesign process. As a result, one of the top reasons employees do not support the change is that they were not included in the change.
    • A big benefit of including employees in the process is it mitigates the emergence of a rumor mill.
    • Moreover, being open to suggestions from staff will help the transformation succeed.
    • Employees can best describe what this transition might entail on a day-to-day basis and the supports they will require to succeed in moving from their current state to their future state.
      • CIOs and other IT leaders are often too far removed from the day-to-day to best describe what will or will not work.
    • When employees feel included in the process, they are more likely to feel like they had a choice in what and how things change.

    "To enlist employees, leadership has to be willing to let things get somewhat messy, through intensive, authentic engagement and the involvement of employees in making the transformation work."

    – Michael D. Watkins & Janet Spencer, “10 Reasons Why Organizational Change Fails.”

    Empowering employees as change agents

    Recommended action steps:

    • Do not tell employees what benefits they will gain from this new change. Instead, ask them what benefits they anticipate.
    • Ask employees what challenges they anticipate, and identify actions that can be taken to minimize those challenges.
    • Identify who the social influencers are in the organization by completing an influencer map. The informal social networks in your organization can be powerful drivers of change when the right individuals are brought onboard.
    • Create a change network using those influencers. The change network includes individuals who represent all levels within the organization and can represent the employee perspective. Use them to help communicate the change and identify opportunities to increase the success of adoption: “Engaging influencers in change programs makes them 3.8 times more likely to succeed," (McKinsey & Company, 2020).
    • Ask members of the change network to identify possible resistors of the new IT structure and inform you of why they might be resisting the changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Despite the persistent misconceptions, including employees in the process of a redesign reduces uncertainty and rumors.

    Monitor employee engagement & adoption throughout the redesign

    Only 22% of organizations include the employee experience as a part of the design process

    – The Josh Bersin Company, 2022.
    1 2 3
    Monitor IT Employee Experience

    When Prosci designed their Change Impact Analysis, they identified the ways in which roles will be impacted across 10 different components:

    • Location
    • Process
    • Systems
    • Tools
    • Job roles
    • Critical behaviors
    • Mindset/attitudes/beliefs
    • Reporting structure
    • Performance reviews
    • Compensation

    Engaging employees in the process so that they can define how their role might be impacted across these 10 categories not only empowers the employee, but also ensures they are a part of the process.

    Source: Prosci, 2019.

    Conduct an employee pulse survey

    See the next slide for more information on how to create and distribute this survey.

    Employee Pulse Survey

    Conduct mindful and frequent check-ins with employees

    Process to conduct survey:

    1. Using your desired survey solution (e.g. MS Forms, SurveyMonkey, Qualtrics) input the questions into the survey and send to staff. A template of the survey in MS Forms is available here: IT Organizational Redesign Pulse Survey Template.
    2. When sending to staff, ensure that the survey is anonymous and reinforce this message.
    3. Leverage the responses from the survey to learn where there might be opportunities to improve the transformation experience (aligning the structure to the vision, employee inclusion, communication, or managerial support for the change). Review the recommended action steps in this research set for help.
    4. This assessment is intended for frequent but purposeful use. Only send out the survey when you have taken actions in order to improve adoption of the change or have provided communications. The Employee Pulse Survey should be reevaluated on a regular basis until adoption across all four categories reaches the desired state (80-100% adoption is recommended).

    The image contains a screenshot of the employee pulse survey.

    Define Key Metrics of Adoption & Success

    Metrics have a dual benefit of measuring successful implementation and meeting the original drivers.

    Measuring the implementation is a two-pronged approach

    Both employee adoption and the transformation of the IT structure need to be measured during implementation

    • Organizations that are going through any sort of transformation – such as organizational redesign – should be measuring whether they are successfully on track to meet their target or have already met that goal.
    • Throughout the organizational structure transition, a major factor that will impact the success of that goal is employee willingness to move forward with the changes.
    • However, rather than measuring these two components using hard data, we rely on gut checks that let us know if we think we are on track to gaining adoption and operating in the desired future state.
    • Given how fluid employees and their responses to change can be, conducting a pulse survey at a regular (but strategically identified) interval will provide insight into where the changes will be adopted or resisted.

    “Think about intentionally measuring at the moments in the change storyline where feedback will allow leaders to make strategic decisions and interventions.”

    – Bradley Wilson, “Employee Survey Questions: The Ultimate Guide.”

    Report that the organizational redesign for IT was a success

    Recommended action steps:

    • Create clear metrics related to how you will measure the success of the organizational redesign, and communicate those metrics to people. Ensure the metrics are not contrary to the goals of other initiatives or team outcomes.
    • Create one set of metrics related to adoption and another set of metrics tied to the successful completion of the project objective.
      • Are people changing their attitudes and behaviors to reflect the required outcome?
      • Are you meeting the desired outcome of the organizational redesign?
    • Use the metrics to inform how you move forward. Do not attempt the next phase of the organizational transformation before employees have clearly indicated a solid understanding of the changes.
    • Ensure that any metrics used to measure success will not negatively interfere with another team’s progress. The metrics of the group need to work together, not against each other.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Getting 100% adoption from employees is unlikely. However, if employee adoption is not sitting in the 80-90% range, it is not recommended that you move forward with the next phase of the transformation.

    Example sustainment metrics

    Driver Goal Measurement Key Performance Indicator (KPI)
    Workforce Challenges and Increased Effectiveness Employee Engagement The change in employee engagement before, during, and after the new organizational structure is communicated and implemented.
    Increased Effectiveness Alignment of Demand to Resources Does your organization have sufficient resources to meet the demands being placed on your IT organization?
    Increased Effectiveness and Workforce Challenges Role Clarity An increase in role clarity or a decrease in role ambiguity.

    Increased Effectiveness

    Reduction in Silos

    Employee effectiveness increases by 27% and efficiency by 53% when provided with role clarity (Effectory, 2019).
    Increased Effectiveness Reduction in Silos Frequency of communication channels created (scrum meetings, Teams channels, etc.) specific to the organizational structure intended to reduce silos.
    Operating in a New Org. Structure Change Adoption Rate The percentage of employees who have adopted their defined role within the new organizational chart in 3-, 6-, and 12-month increments.
    Workforce Challenges Turnover Rate The number of employees who voluntarily leave the organization, citing the organizational redesign.
    Workforce Challenges Active Resistors The number of active resistors anticipated related to the change in organizational structure versus the number of active resistors that actually present themselves to the organizational restructuring.
    New Capabilities Needed Gap in Capability Delivery The increase in effectiveness in delivering on new capabilities to the IT organization.
    Operating in a New Org. Structure Change Adoption Rate The percentage of employees who found the communication around the new organizational structure clear, easy to understand, and open to expressing feedback.
    Lack of Business Understanding or Increased Effectiveness Business Satisfaction with IT Increase in business satisfaction toward IT products and services.
    Workforce Challenges Employee Performance Increase in individual employee performances on annual/bi-annual reviews.
    Adoption Pulse Assessment Increase in overall adoption scores on pulse survey.
    Adoption Communication Effectiveness Reduction in the number of employees who are still unsure why the changes are required.
    Adoption Leadership Training Percentage of members of leadership attending training to support their development at the managerial level.

    Change Management ≠ Project Management

    Stop treating the two interchangeably.

    IT organizations struggle to mature their OCM capabilities

    Because frankly they didn’t need it

    • Change management is all about people.
    • If the success of your organization is dependent on this IT restructuring, it is important to invest the time to do it right.
    • This means it should not be something done off the side of someone's desk.
    • Hire a change manager or look to roles that have a responsibility to deliver on organizational change management.
    • While project success is often measured by if it was delivered on time, on budget, and in scope, change management is adaptable. It can move backward in the process to secure people's willingness to adopt the required behaviors.
    • Strategic organizations recognize it’s not just about pushing an initiative or project forward. It’s about making sure that your employees are willing to move that initiative forward too.
    • A major organizational transformation initiative like restructuring requires you lean into employee adoption and buy-in.

    “Only if you have your employees in mind can you implement change effectively and sustainably.”

    – Creaholic Pulse Feedback, “Change Management – And Why It Has to Change.”

    Take the time to educate & communicate

    Recommended action steps:

    • Do not treat change management and project management as synonymous.
    • Hire a change manager to support the organizational redesign transformation.
    • Invest the resources (time, money, people) that can support the change and enable its success. This can look like:
      • Training and development.
      • Hiring the right people.
      • Requesting funds during the redesign process to support the transition.
    • Create a change management plan – and be willing to adjust the timelines or actions of this plan based on the feedback you receive from employees.
    • Implement the new organizational structure in a phased approach. This allows time to receive feedback and address any fears expressed by staff.

    Info-Tech Insight

    OCM is often not included or used due to a lack of understanding of how it differs from project management.

    And an additional five experts across a variety of organizations who wish to remain anonymous.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Amanda Mathieson Research Director Heather Munoz Executive Counselor Valence Howden Principal Research Director
    Ugbad Farah Research Director Lisa Hager Duncan Executive Counselor Alaisdar Graham Executive Counselor
    Carlene McCubbin Practice Lead

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    • Organizational redesign is only as successful as the process leaders engage in.
    • Benchmarking your organizational redesign to other organizations will not work.
    • You could have the best IT employees in the world, but if they aren’t structured well, your organization will still fail in reaching its vision.
    • A well-defined strategic workforce plan (SWP) isn’t just a nice-to-have, it’s a must-have.
    • Integrate as much data as possible into your workforce plan to best prepare you for the future. Without knowledge of your future initiatives, you are filling hypothetical holes.
    • To be successful, you need to understand your strategic initiatives, workforce landscape, and external and internal trends.
    • Organizational design implementations can be highly disruptive for IT staff and business partners. Without a structured approach, IT leaders may experience high turnover, decreased productivity, and resistance to change.
    • CIOs walk a tightrope as they manage operational and emotional turbulence while aiming to improve business satisfaction with IT. Failure to achieve balance could result in irreparable failure.

    Bibliography

    Aronowitz, Steven, et al. “Getting Organizational Design Right,” McKinsey, 2015. Web.
    Ayers, Peg. “5 Ways to Engage Your Front-Line Staff.” Taylor Reach Group, 2019. Web.
    Bushard, Brian, and Carlie Porterfield. “Meta Reportedly Scales Down, Again – Here Are the Major US Layoffs This Year.” Forbes, September 28, 2022. Web.
    Caruci, Ron. “4 Organizational Design Issues that Most Leaders Misdiagnose.” Harvard Business Review, 2019.
    “Change Management – And Why It Has to Change.” Creaholic Pulse Feedback. Web.
    “Communication Checklist for Achieving Change Management.” Prosci, 27 Oct. 2022. Web.
    “Defining Change Impact.” Prosci. 29 May 2019. Web.
    “The Definitive Guide To Organization Design.” The Josh Bersin Company, 2022.
    Deshler, Reed. “Five Reasons Organizational Redesigns Fail to Deliver.” AlignOrg. 28 Jan. 2020. Web.
    The Fit for Growth Mini Book. PwC, 12 Jan. 2017.
    Helfand, Heidi. Dynamic Reteaming: The Art and Wisdom of Changing Teams. 2nd ed., O’Reilly Media, 2020.
    Jackson, Courtney. “7 Reasons Why Organizational Structures Fail.” Scott Madden Consultants. Web.
    Livijn, Marianne. Managing Organizational Redesign: How Organizations Relate Macro and Micro Design. Doctoral dissertation. Department of Management, Aarhus University, 2020.
    Lutke, Tobias. “Changes to Shopify’s Team.” Shopify. 26 July 2022.
    McKinsey & Company. “How Do We Manage the Change Journey?” McKinsey & Company.2020.
    Pijnacker, Lieke. “HR Analytics: Role Clarity Impacts Performance.” Effectory, 29 Sept. 2019. Web.
    Tompkins, Teri C., and Bruce G. Barkis. “Conspiracies in the Workplace: Symptoms and Remedies.” Graziadio Business Review, vol. 21, no. 1, 2021.Web.
    “Understanding Organizational Structures.” SHRM,2022.
    Watkins, Michael D., and Janet Spencer. “10 Reasons Why Organizational Change Fails.” I by IMD, 10 March 2021. Web.
    Wilson, Bradley. “Employee Survey Questions: The Ultimate Guide.” Perceptyx, 1 July 2020. Web.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}432|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,059 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • All too often, the portfolio of programs and projects looks more like a random heap than a strategically organized and balanced collection of investments that will drive the business forward.
    • Portfolio managers know that with the right kind of information and the right level of process maturity they can get better results through the portfolio; however, organizations often assume (falsely) that the required level of maturity is out of reach from their current state and perpetually delay improvements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The information needed to define clear and usable criteria for organizing the portfolio of programs and projects already exists. Portfolio managers only need to identify the sources of that information and institute processes for regularly reviewing that information in order to define those criteria.
    • Once a portfolio manager has a clear idea of the goals and constraints that shape what ought to be included (or removed) from the portfolio and once these have been translated into clear and usable portfolio criteria, basic portfolio management processes can be instituted to ensure that these criteria are used consistently throughout the various stages of the project lifecycle.
    • Portfolio management frameworks and processes do not need to be built from scratch. Well-known frameworks – such as the one outlined in COBIT 5 APO05 – can be instituted in a way that will allow even low-maturity organizations to start organizing their portfolio.
    • Organizations do not need to grow into portfolio management frameworks to get the benefits of an organized portfolio; instead, they can grow within such frameworks.

    Impact and Result

    • An organized portfolio will ensure that the projects and programs included in it are strategically aligned and can actually be executed within the finite constraints of budgetary and human resource capacity.
    • Portfolio managers are better empowered to make decisions about which projects should be included in the portfolio (and when) and are better empowered to make the very tough decisions about which projects should be removed from the portfolio (i.e. cancelled).
    • Building and maturing a portfolio management framework will more fully integrate the PMO into the broader IT management and governance frameworks, making it a more integral part of strategic decisions and a better business partner in the long run.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should maintain an organized portfolio of programs and projects, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current state of the portfolio and PPM processes

    Analyze the current mix of programs and projects in your portfolio and assess the maturity of your current PPM processes.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 1: Assess the Current State of the Portfolio and PPM Processes
    • Project Portfolio Organizer
    • COBIT APO05 (Manage Portfolio) Alignment Workbook

    2. Enhance portfolio organization through improved PPM criteria and processes

    Enhance and optimize your portfolio management processes to ensure portfolio criteria are clearly defined and consistently applied across the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 2: Enhance Portfolio Organization Through Improved PPM Criteria and Processes
    • Portfolio Management Standard Operating Procedures

    3. Implement improved portfolio management practices

    Implement your portfolio management improvement initiatives to ensure long-term sustainable adoption of new PPM practices.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 3: Implement Improved Portfolio Management Practices
    • Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Portfolio Mix and Portfolio Process Current State

    The Purpose

    Analyze the current mix of the portfolio to determine how to better organize it according to organizational goals and constraints.

    Assess which PPM processes need to be enhanced to better organize the portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An analysis of the existing portfolio of projects (highlighting areas of concern).

    An analysis of the maturity of current PPM processes and their ability to support the maintenance of an organized portfolio.

    Activities

    1.1 Pre-work: Prepare a complete project list.

    1.2 Define existing portfolio categories, criteria, and targets.

    1.3 Analyze the current portfolio mix.

    1.4 Identify areas of concern with current portfolio mix.

    1.5 Review the six COBIT sub-processes for portfolio management (APO05.01-06).

    1.6 Assess the degree to which these sub-processes have been currently achieved at the organization.

    1.7 Assess the degree to which portfolio-supporting IT governance and management processes exist.

    1.8 Perform a gap analysis.

    Outputs

    Analysis of the current portfolio mix

    Assessment of COBIT alignment and gap analysis.

    2 Define Portfolio Target Mix, Criteria, and Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Define clear and usable portfolio criteria.

    Record/design portfolio management processes that will support the consistent use of portfolio criteria at all stages of the project lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly defined and usable portfolio criteria.

    A portfolio management framework that supports the consistent use of the portfolio criteria across all stages of the project lifecycle.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify determinants of the portfolio mix, criteria, and constraints.

    2.2 Define the target mix, portfolio criteria, and portfolio metrics.

    2.3 Identify sources of funding and resourcing.

    2.4 Review and record the portfolio criteria based upon the goals and constraints.

    2.5 Create a PPM improvement roadmap.

    Outputs

    Portfolio criteria

    Portfolio metrics for intake, monitoring, closure, termination, reprioritization, and benefits tracking

    Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap

    3 Design Improved Portfolio Sub-Processes

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the portfolio criteria are used to guide decision making at each stage of the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Processes that support decision making based upon the portfolio criteria.

    Processes that ensure the portfolio remains consistently organized according to the portfolio criteria.

    Activities

    3.1 Ensure that the metrics used for each sub-process are based upon the standard portfolio criteria.

    3.2 Establish the roles, accountabilities, and responsibilities for each sub-process needing improvement.

    3.3 Outline the workflow for each sub-process needing improvement.

    Outputs

    A RACI chart for each sub-process

    A workflow for each sub-process

    4 Change Impact Analysis and Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the portfolio management improvement initiatives are sustainably adopted in the long term.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Stakeholder engagement.

    Sustainable long-term adoption of the improved portfolio management practices.

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct a change impact analysis.

    4.2 Create a stakeholder engagement plan.

    Outputs

    Change Impact Analysis

    Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    Completed Portfolio Management SOP

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}449|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Your team’s time is burned up by incident response.
    • Manual repetitive work uses up expensive resources.
    • You don’t have the visibility to ensure the availability the business demands.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Sell the project to the business.
    • Leverage the Operations Center to improve IT Operations.

    Impact and Result

    • Clarify lines of accountability and metrics for success.
    • Implement targeted initiatives and track key metrics for continual improvement.

    Optimize the IT Operations Center Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should Optimize the IT Operations Center, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Lightning Phase: Pluck Low-Hanging Fruit for Quick Wins

    Get quick wins to demonstrate early value for investments in IT Operations.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Lightning Phase: Pluck Low-Hanging Fruit for Quick Wins

    2. Get buy-in

    Get buy-in from business stakeholders by speaking their language.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Phase 1: Get Buy-In
    • IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool
    • IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation
    • IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker

    3. Define accountability and metrics

    Formalize process and task accountability and develop targeted metrics.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Phase 2: Define Accountability and Metrics
    • IT Operations Center RACI Charts Template

    4. Assess gaps and prioritize initiatives

    Identify pain points and determine the top solutions.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Phase 3: Assess Gaps and Prioritize Initiatives
    • IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker
    • IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool

    5. Launch initiatives and track metrics

    Lay the foundation for implementation and continual improvement.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Phase 4: Launch Initiatives and Track Metrics
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Check Foundation

    The Purpose

    Ensure base maturity in IT Operations processes.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Verify that foundation is in place to proceed with Operations Center project.

    Activities

    1.1 Evaluate base maturity.

    Outputs

    IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool

    2 Define Accountabilities

    The Purpose

    Define accountabilities for Operations processes and tasks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented accountabilities.

    Activities

    2.1 Pluck low-hanging fruit for quick wins.

    2.2 Complete process RACI.

    2.3 Complete task RACI.

    Outputs

    Project plan

    Process RACI

    Task RACI

    3 Map the Challenge

    The Purpose

    Define metrics and identify accountabilities and gaps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of initiatives to address pain points.

    Activities

    3.1 Define metrics.

    3.2 Define accountabilities.

    3.3 Identify gaps.

    Outputs

    IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker

    4 Build Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Develop an action plan to boost KPIs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Action plan and success criteria.

    Activities

    4.1 Prioritize initiatives.

    Outputs

    IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool

    5 Map Out Implementation

    The Purpose

    Build an implementation plan for continual improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Continual improvement against identified metrics and KPIs.

    Activities

    5.1 Build implementation plan.

    Outputs

    IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker

    Further reading

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Stop burning budget on non-value-adding activities.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    The Network Operations Center is not in Kansas anymore.

    "The old-school Network Operations Center of the telecom world was heavily peopled and reactionary. Now, the IT Operations Center is about more than network monitoring. An effective Operations Center provides visibility across the entire stack, generates actionable alerts, resolves a host of different incidents, and drives continual improvement in the delivery of high-quality services.
    IT’s traditional siloed approach cannot provide the value the business demands. The modern Operations Center breaks down these silos for the end-to-end view required for a service-focused approach."

    Derek Shank,
    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • IT Operations Managers
    • IT Infrastructure Managers
    • CIOs

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Improve reliability of services.
    • Reduce the cost of incident response.
    • Reduce the cost of manual repetitive work (MRW).

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Business Analysts
    • Project Managers
    • Business Relationship Managers

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Develop appropriate non-functional requirements.
    • Integrate non-functional requirements into solution design and project implementation.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Your team’s time is burned up by incident response.
    • MRW burns up expensive resources.
    • You don’t have the visibility to ensure the availability the business demands.

    Complication

    • The increasing complexity of technology has resulted in siloed teams of specialists.
    • The business views IT Operations as a cost center and doesn’t want to provide resources to support improvement initiatives.

    Resolution

    • Pluck low-hanging fruit for quick wins.
    • Obtain buy-in from business stakeholders by speaking their language.
    • Clarify lines of accountability and metrics for success.
    • Implement targeted initiatives and track key metrics for continual improvement.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Sell the project to the business. Your first job is a sales job because executive sponsorship is key to project success.
    2. Worship the holy trinity of metrics: impact of downtime, cost of incident response, and time spent on manual repetitive work (MRW).
    3. Invest in order to profit. Improving the Operations Center takes time and money. Expect short-term pain to realize long-term gain.

    The role of the Network Operations Center has changed

    • The old approach was technology siloed and the Network Operations Center (NOC) only cared about the network.
    • The modern Operations Center is about ensuring high availability of end-user services, and requires cross-functional expertise and visibility across all the layers of the technology stack.
    A pie chart is depicted. The data displayed on the chart, in decreasing order of size, include: Applications; Servers; LAN; WAN; Security; Storage. Source: Metzler, n.d.

    Most organizations lack adequate visibility

    • The rise of hybrid cloud has made environments more complex, not less.
    • The increasing complexity makes monitoring and incident response more difficult than ever.
    • Only 31% of organizations use advanced monitoring beyond what is offered by cloud providers.
    • 69% perform no monitoring, basic monitoring, or rely entirely on the cloud provider’s monitoring tools.
    A Pie chart is depicted. Two data are represented on the chart. The first, representing 69% of the chart, is: Using no monitoring, basic monitoring, or relying only on the cloud vendor's monitoring. the second, representing 31% of the chart, is Using advanced monitoring beyond what cloud vendors provide. Source: InterOp ITX, 2018

    Siloed service level agreements cannot ensure availability

    You can meet high service level agreements (SLAs) for functional silos, but still miss the mark for service availability. The business just wants things to work!

    this image contains Info-Tech's SLA-compliance rating chart, which displays the categories: Available, behaving as expected; Slow/degraded; and Unavailable, for each of: Webserver; Database; Storage; Network; Application; and, Business Service

    The cost of downtime is massive

    Increasing reliance on IT makes downtime hurt more than ever.
    98% of enterprises lose $100,000+.
    81% of enterprises lose $300,000+ per hour of downtime.

    This is a bar graph, showing the cost per hour of downtime, against the percentage of enterprises.

    Source: ITIC, 2016

    IT is asked to do more with less

    Most IT budgets are staying flat or shrinking.

    57% of IT departments expect their budget to stay flat or to shrink from 2018 to 2019.

    This image contains a pie chart with two data, one is labeled: Increase; representing 43% of the chart. The other datum is labeled: Shrink or stay flat, and represents 57% of the chart.

    Unify and streamline IT Operations

    A well-run Operations Center ensures high availability at reasonable cost. Improving your Operations Center results in:

    • Higher availability
    • Increased reliability
    • Improved project capacity
    • Higher business satisfaction

    Measure success with the holy trinity of metrics

    Focus on reducing downtime, cost of incident response, and MRW.

    This image contains a Funnel Chart showing the inputs: Downtime; Cost of Incident Response; MRW; and the output: Reduce for continual improvement

    Start from the top and employ a targeted approach

    Analyze data to get buy-in from stakeholders, and use our tools and templates to follow the process for continual improvement in IT Operations.

    This image depicts a cycle, which includes: Data analysis; Executive Sponsorship; Success Criteria; Gap Assessment; Initiatives; Tracking & Measurement

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Optimize the IT Operations Center – project overview

    Launch the Project

    Identify Enterprise Services

    Identify Line of Business Services

    Complete Service Definitions

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    🗲 Pluck Low-Hanging Fruit for Quick Wins

    1.1 Ensure Base Maturity Is in Place

    1.2 Make the Case

    2.1 Define Accountabilities

    2.2 Define Metrics

    3.1 Assess Gaps

    3.2 Plan Initiatives

    4.1 Lay Foundation

    4.2 Launch and Measure

    Guided Implementations

    Discuss current state.

    Review stakeholder presentation.

    Review RACIs.

    Review metrics.

    Discuss gaps.

    Discuss initiatives.

    Review plan and metric schedule.

    Onsite Workshop Module 1:

    Clear understanding of project objectives and support obtained from the business.

    Module 2:

    Enterprise services defined and categorized.

    Module 3:

    LOB services defined based on user perspective.

    Module 4:

    Service record designed according to how IT wishes to communicate to the business.

    Phase 1 Results:

    Stakeholder presentation

    Phase 2 Results:
    • RACIs
    • Metrics
    Phase 3 Results:
    • Gaps list
    • Prioritized list of initiatives
    Phase 4 Results:
    • Implementation plan
    • Continual improvement tracker

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Pre-Workshop Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Activities

    Check Foundation

    Define Accountabilities

    Map the Challenge

    Build Action Plan

    Map Out Implementation

    1.1 Ensure base maturity.

    🗲 Pluck low-hanging fruit for quick wins.

    2.1 Complete process RACI.

    2.2 Complete task RACI.

    3.1 Define metrics.

    3.2 Define accountabilities.

    3.2 Identify gaps.

    4.1 Prioritize initiatives.

    5.1 Build implementation plan.

    Deliverables
    1. IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool
    1. IT Operations Center RACI Charts Template
    1. IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker
    1. IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool
    1. IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker

    PHASE 🗲

    Pluck Low-Hanging Fruit for Quick Wins

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Conduct a ticket-trend analysis

    Generate reports on tickets from your IT service management (ITSM) tool. Look for areas that consume the most resources, such as:

    • Recurring tickets.
    • Tickets that have taken a long time to resolve.
    • Tickets that could have been resolved at a lower tier.
    • Tickets that were unnecessarily or improperly escalated.

    Identify issues

    Analyze the tickets:

    • Look for recurring tickets that may indicate underlying problems.
    • Ask tier 2 and 3 technicians to flag tickets that could have been resolved at a lower tier.
    • Identify painful and/or time consuming service requests.
    • Flag any manual repetitive work.

    Write the issues on a whiteboard.

    Oil & Gas IT reduces manual repetitive maintenance work

    CASE STUDY
    Industry Oil & Gas
    Source Interview

    Challenge

    The company used a webserver to collect data from field stations for analytics. The server’s version did not clear its cache – it filled up its own memory and would not overwrite, so it would just lock up and have to be rebooted manually.

    Solution

    The team found out that the volumes and units of data would cause the memory to fill at a certain time of the month. They wrote a script to reboot the machine and set up a planned outage during the appropriate weekend each month.

    Results

    The team never had to do manual reboots again – though they did have to tweak their reboot script not to rely on their calendar, after a shift in production broke the pattern between memory consumption and the calendar.

    Rank the issues

    🗲.1.1 10 minutes

    1. Assign each participant five sticky dots to use for voting.
    2. Have each participant place any number of dots beside the issue(s) of their choice.
    3. Count the dots and rank the top three most important issues.

    INPUT

    • List of issues

    OUTPUT

    • Top three issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky dots

    Participants

    • Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • I&O team members

    Brainstorm solutions

    🗲.1.2 10 minutes

    1. Write the three issues at the top of a whiteboard, each at the head of its own column.
    2. Focusing on one issue at a time, brainstorm potential solutions for each issue. Have one person write all the proposed solutions on the board beneath the issue.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Do not censor or evaluate the proposed solutions at this time. During brainstorming, focus on coming up with as many potential solutions as possible, no matter how infeasible or outlandish.

    INPUT

    • Top three issues

    OUTPUT

    • Potential solutions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • I&O team members

    Evaluate and rank potential solutions

    🗲.1.3 30 minutes

    1. Score the solutions from 1-5 on each of the two dimensions:
    • Attainability
    • Probable efficacy
  • Identify the top scoring solution for each issue. In the event of a tie, vote to determine the winner.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Quick wins are the best of both worlds. To get a quick win, pick a solution that is both readily attainable and likely to have high impact.

    INPUT

    • Potential solutions

    OUTPUT

    • Ranked list of solutions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • I&O team members

    Develop metrics to measure the effectiveness of solutions

    You should now have a top potential solution for each pain point.

    For each pain point and proposed solution, identify the metric that would indicate whether the solution had been effective or not. For example:

    • Pain point: Too many unnecessary escalations for SharePoint issues.
    • Solution: Train tier 1 staff to resolve SharePoint tickets.
    • Metric: % of SharePoint tickets resolved at tier 1.

    Design solutions

    • Some solutions explain themselves. E.g., hire an extra service desk person.
    • Others require more planning and design, as they involve a bespoke solution. E.g., improve asset management process or automate onboarding of new users.
    • For the solutions that require planning, take the time to design each solution fully before rushing to implement it.

    Build solutions

    • Build any of the solutions that require building. For example, any scripting for automations requires the writing of those scripts, and any automated ticket routing requires configuration of your ITSM tool.
    • Part of the build phase for many solutions should also involve designing the tests of those solutions.

    Test solutions – refine and iterate

    • Think about the expected outcome and results of the solutions that require testing.
    • Test each solution under production-like circumstances to see if the results and behavior are as expected.
    • Refine and iterate upon the solutions as necessary, and test again.

    Implement solutions and measure results

    • Before implementing each solution, take a baseline measurement of the metric that will measure success.
    • Implement the solutions using your change management process.
    • After implementation, measure the success of the solution using the appropriate metric.
    • Document the results and judge whether the solution has been effective.

    Use the top result as a case study to obtain buy-in

    Your most effective solution will make a great case study.

    Write up the results and input the case study into the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.

    This image contains a screenshot of info-tech's default format for presenting case studies.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    this is a picture of an Info-Tech Analyst
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    🗲.1.2 This image contains a screenshot from section 🗲.1.2 of this blueprint.

    Identify issues

    Look for areas that aren’t working optimally.

    🗲.1.3 this image contains a screenshot from section 🗲.1.3 of this blueprint.

    Evaluate and rank potential solutions

    Sort the wheat from the chaff and plan for quick wins.

    PHASE 1

    Get Buy-In

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Step 1.1: Ensure Base Maturity Is in Place

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess maturity of base IT Operations processes.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool

    Base processes underpin the Operations Center

    • Before you optimize your Operations Center, you should have foundational ITSM processes in place: service desk, and incident, problem, and change management.
    • Attempting to optimize Operations before it rests on a solid foundation can only lead to frustration.

    IT Operations Center

    • Service Desk
    • Incident Management
    • Problem Management
    • Change Management

    Info-Tech Insight

    ITIL isn’t dead. New technology such as cloud solutions and advanced monitoring tools have transformed how ITSM processes are implemented, but have not obviated them.

    Assess maturity of prerequisite processes

    1.1.1 IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool

    • Don’t try to prematurely optimize your Operations Center.
    • Before undertaking this project, you should already have a base level of maturity in the four foundational IT Operations processes.
    • Complete the IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool to assess your current level in service desk, incident management, problem management, and change management.
    this image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's IT Operations Center Prerequisite Assessment

    Make targeted improvements on prerequisite processes if necessary

    If there are deficiencies in any of your foundational processes, take the time to remedy those first before proceeding with Optimize the IT Operations Center. See Info-Tech’s other blueprints:

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Strengthen your service desk to build a strong ITSM foundation.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Don’t let persistent problems govern your department.

    Optimize Change Management

    Turn and face the change with a right-sized change management process.

    Step 1.2: Make the Case

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Estimate the impact of downtime for top five applications.
    • Estimate the cost of incident response.
    • Estimate the cost of MRW.
    • Set success metrics and estimate the ROI of the Operations Center project.
    • IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation

    Obtaining buy-in is critical

    Buy-in from top-level stakeholders is critical to the success of the project.

    Before jumping into your initiatives, take the time to make the case and bring the business on board.

    Factors that “prevent us from improving the NOC”

    This image contains a graph of factors that prevent us from improving the NOC. In decreasing order, they include: Lack of strategic guidance from our vendors; The unwillingness of our management to accept new risk; Lack of adequate software tools; Our internal processes; Lack of management vision; Lack of funding; and Lack of personnel resources. There is a red circle drawn around the last three entries, with the words: Getting Buy-in Removes the Top Three Roadblocks to Improvement!. Source: Metzier, n.d

    List your top five applications

    List your top five applications for business criticality.

    Don’t agonize over decisions at this point.

    Generally, the top applications will be customer facing, end-user facing for the most critical business units, or critical for health and safety.

    Estimate impact of downtime

    • Come up with a rough, back-of-the-napkin estimate of the hourly cost of downtime for each application.
    • Complete page two of the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.
    • Estimate loss of revenue per hour, loss of productivity per hour, and IT cost per incident resolution hour.
    • Pull a report on incident hours/outages in the past year from your ITSM tool. Multiply the total cost per incident hour by the incident hours per year to determine the current cost per year of service disruptions for each service.
    • Add up the cost for each of the top five services.
    • Now you can show the business a hard value number that quantifies your availability issues.

    Estimate salary cost of non-value-adding work

    Complete page three of the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.

    • Estimate annual wage cost of incident response: multiply incident response hours per year (take from your ITSM tool) by the average hourly wage of incident responders.
    • Estimate annual cost of MRW: multiply MRW hours per year (take from ITSM tool or from time-keeping tool, or use best guess based on talking to staff members) by the average hourly wage of IT staff performing MRW.
    • Add the two numbers together to calculate the non-value-adding IT salary cost per year.
    • Express the previous number as a percentage of total IT salary. Everything that is not incident response or MRW is value-adding work.

    Now you have the holy trinity of metrics: set some targets

    The holy trinity of metrics:

    • Cost of downtime
    • % of salary on incident response
    • % of salary on MRW

    You want to reduce the above numbers. Set some back-of-the-napkin targets for percentage reductions for each of these areas. These are high-level metrics that business stakeholders will care about.

    Take your best guess at targets. Higher maturity organizations will have less potential for reduction from a percentage point of view (eventually you hit diminishing returns), while organizations just beginning to optimize their Operations Center have the potential for huge gains.

    Calculate the potential gains of targets

    Complete page five of the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.

    • Multiply the targeted/estimated % reductions of the costs by your current costs to determine the potential savings/benefits.
    • Do a back-of-the napkin estimate of the cost of the Operations Center improvement project. Use reasonable numbers for cost of personnel time and cost of tools, and be sure to include ongoing personnel time costs – your time isn’t free and continual improvement takes work and effort.
    • Calculate the ROI.

    Fill out the case study

    • Complete page six of the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation. If you completed the lightning phase, use the results of your own quick win project(s) as an example of feasibility.
    • If you did not complete the lightning phase, delete this slide, or use an example of what other organizations have achieved to demonstrate feasibility.
    This image contains a screenshot of info-tech's default format for presenting case studies.

    Present to stakeholders

    • Deliver the presentation to key stakeholders.
    • Focus on the high-level story that the current state is costing real dollars and wages, and that these losses can be minimized through process improvements.
    • Be up front that many of the numbers are based on estimates, but be prepared to defend the reasonableness of the estimates.

    Gain buy-in and identify project sponsor

    • If the business is on board with the project, determine one person to be the executive sponsor for the project. This person should have a strong desire to see the project succeed, and should have some skin in the game.

    Formalize communication with the project sponsor

    • Establish how you will communicate with the sponsor throughout the project (e.g. weekly or monthly e-mail updates, bi-weekly meetings).
    • Set up a regular/recurring cadence and stick to it, so it can be put on auto-pilot. Be clear about who is responsible for initiating communication and sticking to the reporting schedule.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tailor communication to the sponsor. The project sponsor is not the project manager. The sponsor’s role is to drive the project forward by allocating appropriate resources and demonstrating highly visible support to the broader organization. The sponsor should be kept in the loop, but not bothered with minutiae.

    Note the starting numbers for the holy trinity

    Use the IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker:

    • Enter your starting numbers for the holy trinity of metrics.
    • After planning and implementing initiatives, this tracker will be used to update against the holy trinity to assess the success of the project on an ongoing basis and to drive continual improvement.

    PHASE 2

    Define Accountability and Metrics

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Step 2.1: Define Accountabilities

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Formalize RACI for key processes.
    • Formalize RACI for key tasks.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed RACIs

    List key Operations Center processes

    Compile a list of processes that are key for the Operations Center.

    These processes should include the four foundational processes:

    • Service Desk
    • Incident Management
    • Problem Management
    • Change Management

    You may also want to include processes such as the following:

    • Event Management
    • Configuration Management

    Avoid listing processes you have yet to develop – stick with those already playing a role in your current state.

    Formalize RACI for key processes

    Use the IT Operations Center RACI Charts Template. Complete a RACI for each of the key processes involved in the IT Operations Center.

    RACI:

    • Responsible (does the work on a day-to-day basis)
    • Accountable (reviews, signs off, and is held accountable for outcomes)
    • Consulted (input is sought to feed into decision making)
    • Informed (is given notification of outcomes)

    As a best practice, no more than one person should be responsible or accountable for any given process. The same person can be both responsible and accountable for a given process, or it could be two different people.

    Avoid making someone accountable for a process if they do not have full visibility into the process for appropriate oversight, or do not have time to give the process sufficient attention.

    Formalize RACI for IT tasks

    Now think about the actual tasks or work that goes on in IT. Which roles and individuals are accountable for which tasks or pieces of work?

    In this case, more than one role/person can be listed as responsible or accountable in the RACI because we’re talking about types or categories of work. No conflict will occur because these individuals will be responsible or accountable for different pieces of work or individual tasks of the same type. (e.g. all service desk staff are responsible for answering phones and inputting tickets into the ITSM tool, but no more than one staff member is responsible for the input of any given ticket from a specific phone call).

    Step 2.2: Define Metrics

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Cascade operational metrics from the holy trinity.
    • Evaluate metrics and identify key performance indicators (KPIs).
    • Cascade performance assessment (PA) metrics to support KPIs.
    • Build feedback loop for PA metrics.

    Outcomes of this step

    • KPIs
    • PA metrics

    Metrics must span across silos for shared accountability

    To adequately support the business goals of the organization, IT metrics should span across functional silos.

    Metrics that span across silos foster shared accountability across the IT organization.

    Metrics supported by all groups

    three grain silos are depicted. below, are the words IT Groups, with arrows pointing from the words to each of the three silos.

    Cascade operational metrics from the holy trinity

    Focus on the holy trinity of metrics.

    From these, cascade down to operational metrics that contribute to the holy trinity. It is possible that an operational metric may support more than one trinity metric. For example:

    a flow chart is depicted. two input circles point toward a central circle, and two output circles point away. the input circles include: Cost of Downtime; Cost of Incident Response. The central circle reads: Mean time to restore service. the output circles include the words: Tier 1 Resolution Rate; %% of Known Errors Captured in ITSM Tool.

    Evaluate metrics and identify KPIs

      • Evaluate your operational metrics and determine which ones are likely to have the largest impact on the holy trinity of metrics.
      • Identify the ten metrics likely to have the most impact: these will be your KPIs moving forward.
      • Enter these KPIs into the IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker.
      this image depicts a cycle around the term KPI. The cycle includes: Objective; Measurement; optimization; strategy; performance; evaluation

    Beware how changing variables/context can affect metrics

    • Changes in context can affect metrics drastically. It’s important to keep the overall context in mind to avoid being led astray by certain numbers taken in isolation.
    • For example, a huge hiring spree might exhaust the stock of end-user devices, requiring time to procure hardware before the onboarding tickets can be completely fulfilled. You may have improved your onboarding process through automation, but see a large increase in average time to onboard a new user. Keep an eye out for such anomalies or fluctuations, and avoid putting too much stock in any single operational KPI.
    • Remember, operational KPIs are just a heuristic tool to support the holy trinity of metrics.

    Determine accountability for KPIs

    • For each operational KPI, assign one person to be accountable for that KPI.
    • Be sure the person in charge has the necessary authority and oversight over the processes and personnel that most affect that KPI – otherwise it makes little sense to hold the individual accountable.
    • Consulting your process RACIs is a good place to start.
    • Record the accountable person for each KPI in the IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Match accountability with authority. The person accountable for each KPI should be the one who has the closet and most direct control over the work and processes that most heavily impact that KPI.

    Cascade PA metrics to support KPIs

    KPIs are ultimately driven by how IT does its work, and how individuals work is driven by how their performance is assessed and evaluated.

    For the top KPIs, be sure there are individual PA metrics in place that support the KPI, and if not, develop the appropriate PA metrics.

    For example:

    • KPI: Mean time to resolve incidents
    • PA metric: % of escalations that followed SOP (e.g. not holding onto a ticket longer than supposed to)
    • KPI: Number of knowledge base articles written
    • PA metric: Number of knowledge base articles written/contributed to

    Communicate key changes in PA metrics

    Any changes from the previous step will take time and effort to implement and make stick.

    Changing people’s way of working is extremely difficult.

    Build a communication and implementation plan about rolling out these changes, emphasize the benefits for everyone involved, and get buy-in from the affected staff members.

    Build feedback loops for PA metrics

    Now that PA metrics support your Operations Center’s KPIs, you should create frequent feedback loops to drive and boost those PA metrics.

    Once per year or once per quarter is not frequent enough. Managers should meet with their direct reports at least monthly and review their reports’ performance against PA metrics.

    Use a “set it and forget it” implementation, such as a recurring task or meeting in your calendar.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    this is a picture of an Info-Tech Analyst

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    2.2.1 This image contains a screenshot from section 2.2.1 of this blueprint.

    Cascade operational metrics from the holy trinity

    Rank goals based on business impact and stakeholder pecking order.

    2.2.2 this image contains a screenshot from section 2.2.2 of this blueprint.

    Determine accountability for KPIs

    Craft a concise and compelling elevator pitch that will drive the project forward.

    PHASE 3

    Assess Gaps and Prioritize Initiatives

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Step 3.1: Assess Gaps

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess visibility provided by monitoring.
    • Assess process workflows and identify areas for automation.
    • Assess requests and identify potential for automation.
    • Assess Operations Center staff capabilities.
    • Conduct a root cause analysis on the gaps/pain points.

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of gaps
    • List of root causes

    Measure current state of KPIs and identify lagging ones

    Take a baseline measurement of each operational KPI.

    If historical data is available, compare the present state measurement to data points collected over the last year or so.

    Review the measured KPIs.

    Identify any KPIs that seem lagging or low, or that may be particularly important to influence.

    Record lagging KPIs in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Assess visibility provided by monitoring

    List the top five most critical business services supported by IT.
    Assess the current state of your monitoring tools.

    For each business service, rate the level of visibility your monitoring tools allow from the following options:

    1. We have no visibility into the service, or lack visibility into crucial elements.
    2. We have basic visibility (up/down) into all the IT components that support the service.
    3. We have basic visibility (up/down) into the end service itself, in addition to all the IT components that make it up.
    4. We have some advanced visibility into some aspects of the service and/or its IT components.
    5. We have a full, end-to-end view of performance across all the layers of the stack, as well as the end business service itself.

    Identify where more visibility may be necessary

    For most organizations it isn’t practical to have complete visibility into everything. For the areas in which visibility is lacking into key services, think about whether more visibility is actually required or not. Consider some of the following questions:

    • How great is the impact of this service being unavailable?
    • Would greater visibility into the service significantly reduce the mean time to restore the service in the event of incidents?

    Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations CenterGap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Assess alerting

    Assess alerting for your most critical services.

    Consider whether any of the following problems occur:

    • Often receive no alert(s) in the event of critical outages of key services (we find out about critical outages from the service desk).
    • We are regularly overwhelmed with too many alerts to investigate properly.
    • Our alerts are rarely actionable.
    • We often receive many false alerts.

    Identify areas for potential improvement in the managing of alerts. Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Assess process workflows and identify areas for automation

    Review your process flows for base processes such as Service Desk, Incident Management, Problem Management, and Change Management.

    Identify areas in the workflows where there may be defects, inefficiencies, or potential for improvement or automation.

    Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    See the blueprint Prepare for Cognitive Service Management for process workflows and areas to look for automation possibilities.

    Prepare for Cognitive Service Management

    Make ready for AI-assisted IT operations.

    Assess requests and identify potential for automation

    • Assess the most common work orders or requests handled by the Operations Center group (i.e. this does not include requests fulfilled by the help desk).
    • Which work orders are the most painful? That is, what common work orders involve the greatest effort or the most manual work to fulfill?
    • Fulfillment of common, recurring work orders is MRW, and should be reduced or removed if possible.
    • Consider automation of certain work orders, or self-service delivery.
    • Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Assess Operations Center staff capabilities

    • Assess the skills and expertise of your team members.
    • Consider some of the following:
      • Are there team members who could perform their job more effectively by picking up certain skills or proficiencies?
      • Are there team members who have the potential to shift into more valuable or useful roles, given the appropriate training?
      • Are there individual team members whose knowledge is crucial for operations, and whose function cannot be taken up by others?

    Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Train to avoid pain. All too often organizations expose themselves to significant key person risk by relying on the specialized skills and knowledge of one team member. Use cross training to remedy such single points of failure before the risk materializes.

    Brainstorm pain points

    Brainstorm any pain points not discussed in the previous areas.

    Pain points can be specific operational issues that have not yet been considered. For example:

    • Tom is overwhelmed with tickets.
    • Our MSP often breaches SLA.
    • We don’t have a training budget.

    Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations CenterGap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Conduct a root cause analysis on the gaps/pain points

    • Pain points can often be symptoms of other deficiencies, or somewhat removed from the actual problem.
    • Using the 5 Whys, conduct a root cause analysis on the pain points for which the causes are not obvious.
    • For each pain point, ask “why” for a sequence of five times, attempting to proceed to the root cause of the issue. This root cause is the true gap that needs to be remedied to resolve the pain point.
    • For example:
      • The Wi-Fi network often goes down in the afternoon.
        • Why?: Its bandwidth gets overloaded.
        • Why?: Many people are streaming video.
        • Why?: There’s a live broadcast of a football game at that time.
      • Possible solutions:
        • Block access to the streaming services.
        • Project the game on a screen in a large conference room and encourage everyone to watch it there.

    Step 3.2: Plan Initiatives

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Brainstorm initiatives to boost KPIs and address gaps.
    • Prioritize potential initiatives.
    • Decide which initiatives to include on the roadmap.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Targeted improvement roadmap

    Brainstorm initiatives to boost KPIs and address gaps

    Prioritize potential initiatives

    3.2.1 IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool

    • Use the IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool.
    • Enter the initiatives into the tool.
    • For each initiative, input the following ranking criteria:
      • The metric/KPI’s estimated degree of impact on the holy trinity.
      • The gap or pain point’s estimated degree of impact on the metric/KPI.
      • The initiative’s estimated degree of positive impact on the gap or pain point
      • The initiative’s attainability.
    • Estimate the resourcing capacity required for each initiative.
    • For accurate capacity assessment, input as “force include” all current in-flight projects handled by the Operations Center group (including those unrelated to the Operations Center project).

    Decide which initiatives to include on the roadmap

    • Not all initiatives will be worth pursuing – and especially not all at once.
    • Consider the results displayed on the final tab of the IT Operations CenterInitiative Prioritization Tool.
    • Based on the prioritization and taking capacity into account, decide which initiatives to include on your roadmap.
    • Sometimes, for operational or logistical reasons, it may make sense to schedule an initiative at a time other than its priority might dictate. Make such exceptions on a case-by-case basis.

    Assign an owner to each initiative, and provide resourcing

    • For each initiative, assign one person to be the owner of that initiative.
    • Be sure that person has the authority and the bandwidth necessary to drive the initiative forward.
    • Secure additional resourcing for any initiatives you want to include on your roadmap that are lacking capacity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You must invest resources in order to reduce the time spent on non-value-adding work.

    "The SRE model of working – and all of the benefits that come with it – depends on teams having ample capacity for engineering work. If toil eats up that capacity, the SRE model can’t be launched or sustained. An SRE perpetually buried under toil isn’t an SRE, they are just a traditional long-suffering SysAdmin with a new title."– David N. Blank-Edelman

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    this is a picture of an Info-Tech Analyst

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    3.1.1 This image contains a screenshot from section 3.1.1 of this blueprint.

    Conduct a root cause analysis on the gaps/pain points

    Find out the cause, so you can come up with solutions.

    3.2.1 this image contains a screenshot from section 3.2.1 of this blueprint.

    Prioritize potential initiatives

    Don’t try to boil the ocean. Target what’s manageable and what will have the most impact.

    PHASE 4

    Launch Initiatives and Track Metrics

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Step 4.1: Lay Foundation

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build initiative communication plan.
    • Develop a testing plan for each technical initiative.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication plan
    • Testing plan(s)

    Expect resistance to change

    • It’s not as simple as rolling out what you’ve designed.
    • Anything that affects people’s way of working will inevitably be met with suspicion and pushback.
    • Be prepared to fight the battle.
    • "The hardest part is culture. You must get people to see the value of automation. Their first response is ‘We've been doing it this way for 10 years, why do we need to do it another way?’ It's hard to get someone out of their comfort zone to learn something new, especially when they've been at an organization for 20 years. You need to give them incentives."– Cyrus Kalatbari, Senior IT Architect, Infrastructure/Cloud

    Communicate changes in advance, along with their benefits!

    • Communicate changes well in advance of the date(s) of implementation.
    • Emphasize the benefits of the changes – not just for the organization, but for employees and staff members.
    • Advance communication of changes helps make them more palatable, and builds trust in employees by making them feel informed of what’s going on.

    Involve IT staff in design and implementation of changes

    • As you communicate the coming changes, take the opportunity to involve any affected staff members who have not yet participated in the project.
    • Solicit their feedback and get them to help design and implement the initiatives that involve significant changes to their roles.

    Develop a testing plan for each technical initiative

    • Some initiatives, such as appointing a new change manager or hiring a new staff member, do not make sense to test.
    • On the other hand, technical initiatives such as automation scripts, new monitoring tools or dashboards, and changed alert thresholds should be tested thoroughly before implementation.
    • For each technical initiative, think about the expected results and performance if it were to run in production, and build a test plan to ensure it behaves as expected and there are no corner cases.

    Test technology initiatives and iterate if necessary

    • Test each technical initiative under a variety of circumstances, with as close an environment to production as possible.
    • Try to develop corner cases or unusual or unexpected situations, and see if any of these will break the functionality or produce unintended or unexpected results.
    • Document the results of the testing, and iterate on the initiative and test again if necessary.

    "The most important things – and the things that people miss – are prerequisites and expected results. People jump out and build scripts, then the scripts go into the ditch, and they end up debugging in production." – Darin Stahl, Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations

    Step 4.2: Launch and Measure

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Launch initiatives and track adoption and effectiveness.
    • Investigate initiatives that appear ineffective.
    • Measure success with the holy trinity.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Continual improvement roadmap

    Establish a review cycle for each metric

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Don’t measure what doesn’t matter. If a metric is not going to be reviewed or reported on for informational or decision-making purposes, it should not be tracked.

    Launch initiatives and track adoption and effectiveness

    • Launch the initiatives.
    • Some initiatives will need to proceed through your change management process in order to roll out, but others will not.
    • Track the adoption of initiatives that require it.
      • Some initiatives will require tracking of adoption, whereas others will not.
      • For example, hiring a new service desk staff member does not require tracking of adoption, but implementing a new process for ticket handling does.
      • The implementation plan should include a way to measure the adoption of such initiatives, and regularly review the numbers to see if the implementation has been successful.
    • For all initiatives, measure their effectiveness by continuing to track the KPI/metric that the initiative is intended to influence.

    Assess metrics according to review cycle for continual improvement

    • Assess metrics according to the review cycle.
    • Note whether metrics are improving in the right direction or not.
    • Correlate changes in the metrics with measures of the adoption of the initiatives – see whether initiatives that have been adopted are moving the needle on the KPIs they are intended to.

    Investigate initiatives that appear ineffective

    • If the adoption of an initiative has succeeded, but the expected impact of that initiative on the KPI has not taken place, investigate further and conduct a root causes analysis to determine why this is the case.
    • Sometimes, anomalies or fluctuations will occur that cause the KPI not to move in accordance with the success of the initiative. In this case, it’s just a fluke and the initiative can still be successful in influencing the KPI over the long term.
    • Other times, the initiative may prove mostly or entirely ineffective, either due to misdesign of the initiative itself, a change of circumstances, or other compounding factors or complexities. If the initiative proves ineffective, consider iterating modifications of the initiative and continuing to measure the effect on KPIs – or perhaps killing the initiative altogether.
    • Remember that experimentation is not a bad thing – it’s okay that not every initiative will always prove worthwhile.

    Measure success with the holy trinity

    • Report to business stakeholders on the effect on the holy trinity of metrics at least annually.
    • Calculate the ROI of the project after two years and compare the results to the targeted ROI you initially presented in the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.
    This image contains a Funnel Chart showing the inputs: Downtime; Cost of Incident Response; MRW; and the output: Reduce for continual improvement

    Iterate on the Operations Center process for continual improvement

    This image depicts a cycle, which includes: Data analysis; Executive Sponsorship; Success Criteria; Gap Assessment; Initiatives; Tracking & Measurement

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    this is a picture of an Info-Tech Analyst

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    4.1.1This image contains a screenshot from section 3.1.1 of this blueprint.

    Communicate changes in advance, along with their benefits!

    Rank goals based on business impact and stakeholder pecking order.

    4.1.2 this image contains a screenshot from section 3.2.1 of this blueprint.

    Develop a testing plan for each technical initiative

    Craft a concise and compelling elevator pitch that will drive the project forward.

    Research contributors and experts
    This is a picture of Cyrus Kalatbari, IT infrastructure/cloud architect

    Cyrus Kalatbari, IT Infrastructure/Cloud Architect

    Cyrus’ in-depth knowledge cutting across I&O and service delivery has enhanced the IT operations of multiple enterprise-class clients.

    This is a picture of Derek Cullen, Chief Technology Officer

    Derek Cullen, Chief Technology Officer

    Derek is a proven leader in managing enterprise-scale development, deployment, and integration of applications, platforms, and systems, with a sharp focus on organizational transformation and corporate change.

    This is a picture of Phil Webb, Senior Manager

    Phil Webb, Senior Manager – Unified Messaging and Mobility

    Phil specializes in service delivery for cloud-based and hybrid technology solutions, spanning requirements gathering, solution design, new technology introduction, development, integration, deployment, production support, change/release delivery, maintenance, and continuous improvement.

    This is a picture of Richie Mendoza, IT Services Delivery Consultant

    Richie Mendoza, IT Services Delivery Consultant

    Ritchie’s accomplishments include pioneering a cloud capacity management process and presenting to the Operations team and to higher management, while providing a high level of technical leadership in all phases of capacity management activities.

    This is a picture of Rob Thompson, Solutions Architect

    Rob Thomson, Solutions Architect

    Rob is an IT leader with a track record of creating and executing digital transformation initiatives to achieve the desired outcomes by integrating people, process, and technology into an efficient and effective operating model.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Create a Configuration Management Roadmap

    Right-size your CMDB to improve IT operations.

    Harness Configuration Management Superpowers

    Build a CMDB around the IT services that are most important to the organization.

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    Automation, SDI, and DevOps – build a cheat sheet to manage a changing Infrastructure & Operations environment.

    Develop an Availability and Capacity Management Plan

    Manage capacity to increase uptime and reduce costs.

    Establish a Program to Enable Effective Performance Monitoring

    Maximize the benefits of infrastructure monitoring investments by diagnosing and assessing transaction performance, from network to server to end-user interface.

    Bibliography

    Baker, Dan, and Hal Baylor. “How Benchmarking & Streamlining NOC Operations Can Lower Costs & Boost Effectiveness.” Top Operator, Mar. 2017. Web.

    Blank-Edelman, David. Seeking SRE: Conversations About Running Production Systems at Scale. O'Reilly, 2018. Web.

    CA Technologies. “IT Transformation to Next-Generation Operations Centers: Assure Business Service Reliability by Optimizing IT Operations.” CA Technologies, 2014. Web.

    Ditmore, Jim. “Improving Availability: Where to Start.” Recipes for IT, n.d. Web.

    Ennis, Shawn. “A Phased Approach for Building a Next-Generation Network Operations Center.” Monolith Software, 2009. Web.

    Faraclas, Matt. “Why Does Infrastructure Operations Still Suck?” Ideni, 25 Feb. 2016. Web.

    InterOp ITX. “2018 State of the Cloud.” InterOp ITX, Feb. 2018. Web.

    ITIC. “Cost of Hourly Downtime Soars: 81% of Enterprises Say it Exceeds $300K On Average.” ITIC, 2 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Joe the IT Guy. “Availability Management Is Harder Than it Looks.” Joe the IT Guy, 10 Feb. 2016. Web.

    ---. “Do Quick Wins Exist for Availability Management?” Joe the IT Guy, 15 May 2014. Web.

    Lawless, Steve. “11 Top Tips for Availability Management.” Purple Griffon, 4 Jan. 2019. Web.

    Metzler, Jim. “The Next Generation Network Operations Center: How the Focus on Application Delivery is Redefining the NOC.” Ashton, Metzler & Associates, n.d. Web.

    Nilekar, Shirish. “Beyond Redundancy: Improving IT Availability.” Network Computing, 28 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Slocum, Mac. “Site Reliability Engineering (SRE): A Simple Overview.” O’Reilly, 16 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Spiceworks. “The 2019 State of IT.” Spiceworks, 2019. Web

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}602|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Train & Develop
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • 52% of small business owners agree that labor quality is their most important problem, and 76% of executives expect the talent market to get even more challenging.
    • The problem? You can't compete on salary, training budgets are slim, you need people skilled in all areas, and even one resignation represents a large part of your workforce.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The usual, reactive approach to workforce management is risky:
      • Optimizing tactics helps you hire faster, train more, and negotiate better contracts.
      • But fulfilling needs as they arise costs more, has greater risk of failure, and leaves you unprepared for future needs.
    • In a small enterprise where every resource counts, in which one hire represents 10% of your workforce, it is essential to get it right.

    Impact and Result

    • Workforce planning helps you anticipate future needs.
    • More lead time means better decisions at lower cost.
    • Small Enterprises benefit most, since every resource counts.

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management Deck – Find out why workforce planning is critical for small enterprises.

    Use this storyboard to lay the foundation of people and resources management practices in your small enterprise IT department.

    • The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management – Phases 1-3

    2. Workforce Planning Workbook – Use the tool to successfully complete all of the activities required to define and estimate your workforce needs for the future.

    Use these concise exercises to analyze your department’s talent current and future needs and create a skill sourcing strategy to fill the gaps.

    • Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises

    3. Knowledge Transfer Tools – Use these templates to identify knowledge to be transferred.

    Work through an activity to discover key knowledge held by an employee and create a plan to transfer that knowledge to a successor.

    • IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    4. Development Planning Tools – Use these tools to determine priority development competencies.

    Assess employees’ development needs and draft a development plan that fits with key organizational priorities.

    • IT Competency Library
    • Leadership Competencies Workbook
    • IT Employee Career Development Workbook
    • Individual Competency Development Plan
    • Learning Methods Catalog for IT Employees

    Infographic

    Workshop: The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Your Foundations

    The Purpose

    Set project direction and analyze workforce needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Planful needs analysis ensures future workforce supports organizational goals.

    Activities

    1.1 Set workforce planning goals and success metrics.

    1.2 Identify key roles and competency gaps.

    1.3 Conduct a risk analysis to identify future needs.

    1.4 Determine readiness of internal successors.

    Outputs

    Work with the leadership team to:

    Extract key business priorities.

    Set your goals.

    Assess workforce needs.

    2 Create Your Workforce Plan

    The Purpose

    Conduct a skill sourcing analysis, and determine competencies to develop internally.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A careful analysis ensures skills are being sourced in the most efficient way, and internal development is highly aligned with organizational objectives.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine your skill sourcing route.

    2.2 Determine priority competencies for development.

    Outputs

    Create a workforce plan.

    2.Determine guidelines for employee development.

    3 Plan Knowledge Transfer

    The Purpose

    Discover knowledge to be transferred, and build a transfer plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure key knowledge is not lost in the event of a departure.

    Activities

    3.1 Discover knowledge to be transferred.

    3.2 Identify the optimal knowledge transfer methods.

    3.3 Create a knowledge transfer plan.

    Outputs

    Discover tacit and explicit knowledge.

    Create a knowledge transfer roadmap.

    4 Plan Employee Development

    The Purpose

    Create a development plan for all staff.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A well-structured development plan helps engage and retain employees while driving organizational objectives.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify target competencies & draft development goals

    4.2 Select development activities and schedule check-ins.

    4.3 Build manager coaching skills.

    Outputs

    Assess employees.

    Prioritize development objectives.

    Plan development activities.

    Build management skills.

    Further reading

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Quickly start getting the right people, with the right skills, at the right time

    Is this research right for you?

    Research Navigation

    Managing the people in your department is essential, whether you have three employees or 300. Depending on your available time, resources, and current workforce management maturity, you may choose to focus on the overall essentials, or dive deep into particular areas of talent management. Use the questions below to help guide you to the right Info-Tech resources that best align with your current needs.

    Question If you answered "no" If you answered "yes"

    Does your IT department have fewer than 15 employees, and is your organization's revenue less than $25 million (USD)?

    Review Info-Tech's archive of research for mid-sized and large enterprise clients.

    Follow the guidance in this blueprint.

    Does your organization require a more rigorous and customizable approach to workforce management?

    Follow the guidance in this blueprint.

    Review Info-Tech's archive of research for mid-sized and large enterprise clients.

    Analyst Perspective

    Workforce planning is even more important for small enterprises than large organizations.

    It can be tempting to think of workforce planning as a bureaucratic exercise reserved for the largest and most formal of organizations. But workforce planning is never more important than in small enterprises, where every individual accounts for a significant portion of your overall productivity.

    Without workforce planning, organizations find themselves in reactive mode, hiring new staff as the need arises. They often pay a premium for having to fill a position quickly or suffer productivity losses when a critical role goes unexpectedly vacant.

    A workforce plan helps you anticipate these challenges, come up with solutions to mitigate them, and allocate resources for the most impact, which means a greater return on your workforce investment in the long run.

    This blueprint will help you accomplish this quickly and efficiently. It will also provide you with the essential development and knowledge transfer tools to put your plan into action.

    This is a picture of Jane Kouptsova

    Jane Kouptsova
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    52% of small business owners agree that labor quality is their most important problem.1

    Almost half of all small businesses face difficulty due to staff turnover.

    76% of executives expect the talent market to get even more challenging.2

    Common Obstacles

    76% of executives expect workforce planning to become a top strategic priority for their organization.2

    But…

    30% of small businesses do not have a formal HR function.3

    Small business leaders are often left at a disadvantage for hiring and retaining the best talent, and they face even more difficulty due to a lack of support from HR.

    Small enterprises must solve the strategic workforce planning problem, but they cannot invest the same time or resources that large enterprises have at their disposal.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    A modular, lightweight approach to workforce planning and talent management, tailored to small enterprises

    Clear activities that guide your team to decisive action

    Founded on your IT strategy, ensuring you have not just good people, but the right people

    Concise yet comprehensive, covering the entire workforce lifecycle from competency planning to development to succession planning and reskilling

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every resource counts. When one hire represents 10% of your workforce, it is essential to get it right.

    1CNBC & SurveyMonkey. 2ADP. 3Clutch.

    Labor quality is small enterprise's biggest challenge

    The key to solving it is strategic workforce planning

    Strategic workforce planning (SWP) is a systematic process designed to identify and address gaps in today's workforce, including pinpointing the human capital needs of the future.

    Linking workforce planning with strategic planning ensures that you have the right people in the right positions, in the right places, at the right time, with the knowledge, skills, and attributes to deliver on strategic business goals.

    SWP helps you understand the makeup of your current workforce and how well prepared it is or isn't (as the case may be) to meet future IT requirements. By identifying capability gaps early, CIOs can prepare to train or develop current staff and minimize the need for severance payouts and hiring costs, while providing clear career paths to retain high performers.

    52%

    of small business owners agree that labor quality is their most important problem.1

    30%

    30% of small businesses have no formal HR function.2

    76%

    of senior leaders expect workforce planning to become the top strategic challenge for their organization.3

    1CNBC & SurveyMonkey. 2Clutch. 3ADP.

    Workforce planning matters more for small enterprises

    You know that staffing mistakes can cost your department dearly. But did you know the costs are greater for small enterprises?

    The price of losing an individual goes beyond the cost of hiring a replacement, which can range from 0.5 to 2 times that employee's salary (Gallup, 2019). Additional costs include loss of productivity, business knowledge, and team morale.

    This is a major challenge for large organizations, but the threat is even greater for small enterprises, where a single individual accounts for a large proportion of IT's productivity. Losing one of a team of 10 means 10% of your total output. If that individual was solely responsible for a critical function, your department now faces a significant gap in its capabilities. And the effect on morale is much greater when everyone is on the same close-knit team.

    And the threat continues when the staffing error causes you not to lose a valuable employee, but to hire the wrong one instead. When a single individual makes up a large percentage of your workforce, as happens on small teams, the effects of talent management errors are magnified.

    A group of 100 triangles is shown above a group of 10 triangles. In each group, one triangle is colored orange, and the rest are colored blue.

    Info-Tech Insight

    One bad hire on a team of 100 is a problem. One bad hire on a team of 10 is a disaster.

    This is an image of Info-Tech's small enterprise guide o people and resource management.

    Blueprint pre-step: Determine your starting point

    People and Resource management is essential for any organization. But depending on your needs, you may want to start at different stages of the process. Use this slide as a quick reference for how the activities in this blueprint fit together, how they relate to other workforce management resources, and the best starting point for you.

    Your IT strategy is an essential input to your workforce plan. It defines your destination, while your workforce is the vessel that carries you there. Ensure you have at least an informal strategy for your department before making major workforce changes, or review Info-Tech's guidance on IT strategy.

    This blueprint covers the parts of workforce management that occur to some extent in every organization:

    • Workforce planning
    • Knowledge transfer
    • Development planning

    You may additionally want to seek guidance on contract and vendor management, if you outsource some part of your workload outside your core IT staff.

    Track metrics

    Consider these example metrics for tracking people and resource management success

    Project Outcome Metric Baseline Target
    Reduced training costs Average cost of training (including facilitation, materials, facilities, equipment, etc.) per IT employee
    Reduced number of overtime hours worked Average hours billed at overtime rate per IT employee
    Reduced length of hiring period Average number of days between job ad posting and new hire start date
    Reduced number of project cancellations due to lack of capacity Total of number of projects cancelled per year
    Increased number of projects completed per year (project throughput) Total number of project completions per year
    Greater net recruitment rate Number of new recruits/Number of terminations and departures
    Reduced turnover and replacement costs Total costs associated with replacing an employee, including position coverage cost, training costs, and productivity loss
    Reduced voluntary turnover rate Number of voluntary departures/Total number of employees
    Reduced productivity loss following a departure or termination Team or role performance metrics (varies by role) vs. one year ago

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1:

    Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Assess current workforce needs.

    Call #4: Determine skill sourcing route.

    Call #6:

    Identify knowledge to be transferred.

    Call #8: Draft development goals and select activities.

    Call #3: Explore internal successor readiness.

    Call #5:Set priority development competencies.

    Call #7: Create a knowledge transfer plan.

    Call #9: Build managers' coaching & feedback skills.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 4 to 6 calls over the course of 3 to 4 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    1.Lay Your Foundations 2. Create Your Workforce Plan 3. Plan Knowledge Transfer 3. Plan Employee Development Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)
    Activities

    1.1 Set workforce planning goals and success metrics

    1.2 Identify key roles and competency gaps

    1.3 Conduct a risk analysis to identify future needs

    1.4 Determine readiness of internal successors

    1.5 Determine your skill sourcing route

    1.6 Determine priority competencies for development

    3.1 Discover knowledge to be transferred

    3.2 Identify the optimal knowledge transfer methods

    3.3 Create a knowledge transfer plan

    4.1 Identify target competencies & draft development goals

    4.2 Select development activities and schedule check-ins

    4.3 Build manager coaching skills

    Outcomes

    Work with the leadership team to:

    1. Extract key business priorities
    2. Set your goals
    3. Assess workforce needs

    Work with the leadership team to:

    1. Create a workforce plan
    2. Determine guidelines for employee development

    Work with staff and managers to:

    1. Discover tacit and explicit knowledge
    2. Create a knowledge transfer roadmap

    Work with staff and managers to:

    1. Assess employees
    2. Prioritize development objectives
    3. Plan development activities
    4. Build management skills

    Info-Tech analysts complete:

    1. Workshop report
    2. Workforce plan record
    3. Action plan

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Each onsite day is structured with group working sessions from 9-11 a.m. and 1:30-3:30 p.m. and includes Open Analyst Timeslots, where our facilitators are available to expand on scheduled activities, capture and compile workshop results, or review additional components from our comprehensive approach.

    This is a calendar showing days 1-4, and times from 8am-5pm

    Phase 1

    Workforce Planning

    Workforce Planning

    Knowledge Transfer

    Development Planning

    Identify needs, goals, metrics, and skill gaps.

    Select a skill sourcing strategy.

    Discover critical knowledge.

    Select knowledge transfer methods.

    Identify priority competencies.

    Assess employees.

    Draft development goals.

    Provide coaching & feedback.

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Phase Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Managers
    • Human resource partner (if applicable)

    Additional Resources

    Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises

    Phase pre-step: Gather resources and participants

    1. Ensure you have an up-to-date IT strategy. If you don't have a formal strategy in place, ensure you are aware of the main organizational objectives for the next 3-5 years. Connect with executive stakeholders if necessary to confirm this information.
      If you are not sure of the organizational direction for this time frame, we recommend you consult Info-Tech's material on IT strategy first, to ensure your workforce plan is fully positioned to deliver value to the organization.
    2. Consult with your IT team and gather any documentation pertaining to current roles and skills. Examples include an org chart, job descriptions, a list of current tasks performed/required, a list of company competencies, and a list of outsourced projects.
    3. Gather the right participants. Most of the decisions in this section will be made by senior leadership, but you will also need input from front-line managers. Ensure they are available on an as-needed basis. If your organization has an HR partner, it can also be helpful to involve them in your workforce planning process.

    Formal workforce planning benefits even small teams

    Strategic workforce planning (SWP) is a systematic process designed to identify and address gaps in your workforce today and plan for the human capital needs of the future.

    Your workforce plan is an extension of your IT strategy, ensuring that you have the right people in the right positions, in the right places, at the right time, with the knowledge, skills, and attributes to deliver on strategic business goals.

    SWP helps you understand the makeup of your current workforce and how well prepared it is or isn't (as the case may be) to meet future IT requirements. By identifying capability gaps early, CIOs can prepare to train or develop current staff and minimize the need for severance payouts and hiring costs, while providing clear career paths to retain high performers.

    The smaller the business, the more impact each individual's performance has on the overall success of the organization. When a given role is occupied by a single individual, the organization's performance in that function is determined wholly by one employee. Creating a workforce plan for a small team may seem excessive, but it ensures your organization is not unexpectedly hit with a critical competency gap.

    Right-size your workforce planning process to the size of your enterprise

    Small organizations are 2.2 times more likely to have effective workforce planning processes.1 Be mindful of the opportunities and risks for organizations of your size as you execute the project. How you build your workforce plan will not change drastically based on the size of your organization; however, the scope of your initiative, the size of your team, and the tactics you employ may vary.

    Small Organization

    Medium Organization

    Large Organization

    Project Opportunities

    • Project scope is much more manageable.
    • Communication and planning can be more manageable.
    • Fewer roles can clarify prioritization needs and promotability.
    • Project scope is more manageable.
    • Moderate budget for workforce planning initiatives is needed.
    • Communication and enforcement is easier.
    • Larger candidate pool to pull from.
    • Greater career path options for staff.
    • In-house expertise may be available

    Project Risks

    • Limited resources and time to execute the project.
    • In-house expertise is unlikely.
    • Competencies may be informal and not documented.
    • Limited overlap in responsibilities, resulting in fewer redundancies.
    • Limited staff with experience for the project.
    • Workforce planning may be a lower priority and difficult to generate buy-in for.
    • Requires more staff to manage workforce plan and execute initiatives.
    • Less collective knowledge on staff strengths may make career planning difficult.
    • Geographically dispersed business units make collaboration and communication difficult.

    1 McLean & Company Trends Report 2014

    1.1 Set project outcomes and success metrics

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm key pain points that the IT department experiences due to the lack of a workforce plan. Ask them to consider turnover, retention, training, and talent acquisition.
    2. Discuss any key themes that arise and brainstorm your desired project outcomes. Keep a record of these for future reference and to aid in stakeholder communication.
    3. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      1. For each desired outcome, consider what metrics you could use to track progress. Keep your initial list of pain points in mind as you brainstorm metrics.
      2. Write each of the metric suggestions on a whiteboard and agree to track 3-5 metrics. Set targets for each metric. Consider the effort required to obtain and track the metric, as well as its reliability.
      3. Assign one individual for tracking the selected metrics. Following the meeting, that individual will be responsible for identifying the baseline and targets, and reporting on metrics progress.

    Input

    Output

    • List of workforce data available
    • List of workforce metrics to track the workforce plan's impact

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Leadership team
    • Human resource partner (if applicable)

    1.2 Identify key roles and competency gaps

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, identify all strategic, core, and supporting roles by reviewing the organizational chart:
      1. Strategic: What are the roles that must be filled by top performers and cannot be left vacant in order to meet strategic objectives?
      2. Core: What roles are important to drive operational excellence?
      3. Supporting: What roles are required for day-to-day work, but are low risk if the role is vacant for a period of time?
    2. Working individually or in small groups, have managers for each identified role define the level of competence required for the job. Consider factors such as:
      1. The difficulty or criticality of the tasks being performed
      2. The impact on job outcomes
      3. The impact on the performance of other employees
      4. The consequence of errors if the competency is not present
      5. How frequently the competency is used on the job
      6. Whether the competency is required when the job starts or can be learned or acquired on the job within the first six months
    3. Continue working individually and rate the level of proficiency of the current incumbent.
    4. As a group, review the assessment and make any adjustments.

    Record this information in the Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises.

    Download the Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises

    1.2 Identify key roles and competency gaps

    Input Output
    • Org chart, job descriptions, list of current tasks performed/required, list of company competencies
    • List of competency gaps for key roles
    Materials Participants
    • Leadership team
    • Managers

    Conduct a risk-of-departure analysis

    A risk-of-departure analysis helps you plan for future talent needs by identifying which employees are most likely to leave the organization (or their current role).

    A risk analysis takes into account two factors: an employee's risk for departure and the impact of departure:

    Employees are high risk for departure if they:

    • Have specialized or in-demand skills (tenured employees are more likely to have this than recent hires)
    • Are nearing retirement
    • Have expressed career aspirations that extend outside your organization
    • Have hit a career development ceiling at your organization
    • Are disengaged
    • Are actively job searching
    • Are facing performance issues or dismissal OR promotion into a new role

    Employees are low risk for departure if they:

    • Are a new hire or new to their role
    • Are highly engaged
    • Have high potential
    • Are 5-10 years out from retirement

    If you are not sure where an employee stands with respect to leaving the organization, consider having a development conversation with them. In the meantime, consider them at medium risk for departure.

    To estimate the impact of departure, consider:

    • The effect of losing the employee in the near- and medium-term, including:
      • Impact on the organization, department, unit/team and projects
      • The cost (in time, resources, and productivity loss) to replace the individual
      • The readiness of internal successors for the role

    1.3 Conduct a risk analysis to identify future needs

    1-3 hours

    Preparation: Your estimation of whether key employees are at risk of leaving the organization will depend on what you know of them objectively (skills, age), as well as what you learn from development conversations. Ensure you collect all relevant information prior to conducting this activity. You may need to speak with employees' direct managers beforehand or include them in the discussion.

    • As a group, list all your current employees, and using the previous slide for guidance, rank them on two parameters: risk of departure and impact of departure, on a scale of low to high. Record your conclusions in a chart like the one on the right. (For a more in-depth risk assessment, use the "Risk Assessment Results" tab of the Key Roles Succession Planning Tool.)
    • Employees that fall in the "Mitigate" quadrant represent key at-risk roles with at least moderate risk and moderate impact. These are your succession planning priorities. Add these roles to your list of key roles and competency gaps, and include them in your workforce planning analysis.
    • Employees that fall in the "Manage" quadrants represent secondary priorities, which should be looked at if there is capacity after considering the "Mitigate" roles.

    Record this information in the Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises.

    This is an image of the Risk analysis for risk of departure to importance of departure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't be afraid to rank most or all your staff as "high impact of departure." In a small enterprise, every player counts, and you must plan accordingly.

    1.3 Conduct a risk analysis to identify future needs

    Input Output
    • Employee data on competencies, skills, certifications, and performance. Input from managers from informal development conversations.
    • A list of first- and second-priority at-risk roles to carry forward into a succession planning analysis
    Materials Participants
    • Leadership team
    • Managers

    Determine your skill sourcing route

    The characteristics of need steer hiring managers to a preferred choice, while the marketplace analysis will tell you the feasibility of each option.

    Sourcing Options

    Preferred Options

    Final Choice

    four blue circles

    A right facing arrow

    Two blue circles A right facing arrow One blue circle
    State of the Marketplace

    State of the Marketplace

    Urgency: How soon do we need this skill? What is the required time-to-value?

    Criticality: How critical, i.e. core to business goals, are the services or systems that this skill will support?

    Novelty: Is this skill brand new to our workforce?

    Availability: How often, and at what hours, will the skill be needed?

    Durability: For how long will this skill be needed? Just once, or indefinitely for regular operations?

    Scarcity: How popular or desirable is this skill? Do we have a large enough talent pool to draw from? What competition are we facing for top talent?

    Cost: How much will it cost to hire vs. contract vs. outsource vs. train this skill?

    Preparedness: Do we have internal resources available to cultivate this skill in house?

    1.4 Determine your skill sourcing route

    1-3 hours

    1. Identify the preferred sourcing method as a group, starting with the most critical or urgent skill need on your list. Use the characteristics of need to guide your discussion. If more than one option seems adequate, carry several over to the next step.
    2. Consider the marketplace factors applicable to the skill in question and use these to narrow down to one final sourcing decision.
      1. If it is not clear whether a suitable internal candidate is available or ready, refer to the next activity for a readiness assessment.
    3. Be sure to document the rationale supporting your decision. This will ensure the decision can be clearly communicated to any stakeholders, and that you can review on your decision-making process down the line.

    Record this information in the Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider developing a pool of successors instead of pinning your hopes on just one person. A single pool of successors can be developed for either one key role that has specialized requirements or even multiple key roles that have generic requirements.

    Input

    Output

    • List of current and upcoming skill gaps
    • A sourcing decision for each skill

    Materials

    Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Human resource partner (if applicable)

    1.5 Determine readiness of internal successors

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, and ensuring you include the candidates' direct managers, identify potential successors for the first role on your list.
    2. Ask how effectively the potential successor would serve in the role today. Review the competencies for the key role in terms of:
      1. Relationship-building skills
      2. Business skills
      3. Technical skills
      4. Industry-specific skills or knowledge
    3. Determine what competencies the succession candidate currently has and what must be learned. Be sure you know whether the candidate is open to a career change. Don't assume – if this is not clear, have a development conversation to ensure everyone is on the same page.
    4. Finally, determine how difficult it will be for the successor to acquire missing skills or knowledge, whether the resources are available to provide the required development, and how long it will take to provide it.
    5. As a group, decide whether training an internal successor is a viable option for the role in question, considering the successor's readiness and the characteristics of need for the role. If a clear successor is not readily apparent, consider:
      1. If the development of the successor can be fast-tracked, or if some requirements can be deprioritized and the successor provided with temporary support from other employees.
      2. If the role in question is being discussed because the current incumbent is preparing to leave, consider negotiating an arrangement that extends the incumbent's employment tenure.
    6. Record the decision and repeat for the next role on your list.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A readiness assessment helps to define not just development needs, but also any risks around the organization's ability to fill a key role.

    Input

    Output

    • List of roles for which you are considering training internally
    • Job descriptions and competency requirements for the roles
    • List of roles for which internal successors are a viable option

    Materials

    Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Candidates' direct managers, if applicable

    Use alternative work arrangements to gain time to prepare successors

    Alternative work arrangements are critical tools that employers can use to achieve a mutually beneficial solution that mitigates the risk of loss associated with key roles.

    Alternative work arrangements not only support employees who want to keep working, but more importantly, they allow the business to retain employees that are needed in key roles who are departure risks due to retirement.

    Viewing retirement as a gradual process can help you slow down skill loss in your organization and ensure you have sufficient time to train successors. Retiring workers are becoming increasingly open to alternative work arrangements. Among employed workers aged 50-75, more than half planned to continue working part-time after retirement.
    Source: Statistics Canada.

    Flexible work options are the most used form of alternative work arrangement

    A bar graph showing the percent of organizations who implemented alternate work arrangement, for Flexible work options; Contract based work; Part time roles; Graduated retirement programs; Part year jobs or job sharing; Increased PTO for employees over a certain age.

    Source: McLean & Company, N=44

    Choose the alternative work arrangement that works best for you and the employee

    Alternative Work Arrangement Description Ideal Use Caveats
    Flexible work options Employees work the same number of hours but have flexibility in when and where they work (e.g. from home, evenings). Employees who work fairly independently with no or few direct reports. Employee may become isolated or disconnected, impeding knowledge transfer methods that require interaction or one-on-one time.
    Contract-based work Working for a defined period of time on a specific project on a non-salaried or non-wage basis. Project-oriented work that requires specialized knowledge or skills. Available work may be sporadic or specific projects more intensive than the employee wants. Knowledge transfer must be built into the contractual arrangement.
    Part-time roles Half days or a certain number of days per week; indefinite with no end date in mind. Employees whose roles can be readily narrowed and upon whom people and critical processes are not dependent. It may be difficult to break a traditionally full-time job down into a part-time role given the size and nature of associated tasks.
    Graduated retirement Retiring employee has a set retirement date, gradually reducing hours worked per week over time. Roles where a successor has been identified and is available to work alongside the incumbent in an overlapping capacity while he or she learns. The role may only require a single FTE, and the organization may not be able to afford the amount of redundancy inherent in this arrangement.

    Choose the alternative work arrangement that works best for you and the employee

    Alternative Work Arrangement Description Ideal Use Caveats
    Part-year jobs or job sharing Working part of the year and having the rest of the year off, unpaid. Project-oriented work where ongoing external relationships do not need to be maintained. The employee is unavailable for knowledge transfer activities for a large portion of the year. Another risk is that the employee may opt not to return at the end of the extended time off with little notice.
    Increased paid time off Additional vacation days upon reaching a certain age. Best used as recognition or reward for long-term service. This may be a particularly useful retention incentive in organizations that do not offer pension plans. The company may not be able to financially afford to pay for such extensive time off. If the role incumbent is the only one in the role, this may mean crucial work is not being done.
    Altered roles Concentration of a job description on fewer tasks that allows the employee to focus on his or her specific expertise. Roles where a successor has been identified and is available to work alongside the incumbent, with the incumbent's new role highly focused on mentoring. The role may only require a single FTE, and the organization may not be able to afford the amount of redundancy inherent in this arrangement.

    Phase 2

    Knowledge Transfer

    Workforce Planning

    Knowledge Transfer

    Development Planning

    Identify needs, goals, metrics, and skill gaps.

    Select a skill sourcing strategy.

    Discover critical knowledge.

    Select knowledge transfer methods.

    Identify priority competencies.

    Assess employees.

    Draft development goals.

    Provide coaching & feedback.

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Phase Participants

    • Leadership/management team
    • Incumbent & successor

    Additional Resources

    IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Determine your skill sourcing route

    Knowledge transfer plans have three key components that you need to complete for each knowledge source:

    Define what knowledge needs to be transferred

    Each knowledge source has unique information which needs to be transferred. Chances are you don't know what you don't know. The first step is therefore to interview knowledge sources to find out.

    Identify the knowledge receiver

    Depending on who the information is going to, the knowledge transfer tactic you employ will differ. Before deciding on the knowledge receiver and tactic, consider three key factors:

    • How will this knowledge be used in the future?
    • What is the next career step for the knowledge receiver?
    • Are the receiver and the source going to be in the same location?

    Identify which knowledge transfer tactics you will use for each knowledge asset

    Not all tactics are good in every situation. Always keep the "knowledge type" (information, process, skills, and expertise), knowledge sources' engagement level, and the knowledge receiver in mind as you select tactics.

    Don't miss tacit knowledge

    There are two basic types of knowledge: "explicit" and "tacit." Ensure you capture both to get a well-rounded overview of the role.

    Explicit Tacit
    • "What knowledge" – knowledge can be articulated, codified, and easily communicated.
    • Easily explained and captured – documents, memos, speeches, books, manuals, process diagrams, facts, etc.
    • Learn through reading or being told.
    • "How knowledge" – intangible knowledge from an individual's experience that is more from the process of learning, understanding, and applying information (insights, judgments, and intuition).
    • Hard to verbalize, and difficult to capture and quantify.
    • Learn through observation, imitation, and practice.

    Types of explicit knowledge

    Types of tacit knowledge

    Information Process Skills Expertise

    Specialized technical knowledge.

    Unique design capabilities/methods/models.

    Legacy systems, details, passwords.

    Special formulas/algorithms/ techniques/contacts.

    • Specialized research & development processes.
    • Proprietary production processes.
    • Decision-making processes.
    • Legacy systems.
    • Variations from documented processes.
    • Techniques for executing on processes.
    • Relationship management.
    • Competencies built through deliberate practice enabling someone to act effectively.
    • Company history and values.
    • Relationships with key stakeholders.
    • Tips and tricks.
    • Competitor history and differentiators.

    e.g. Knowing the lyrics to a song, building a bike, knowing the alphabet, watching a YouTube video on karate.

    e.g. Playing the piano, riding a bike, reading or speaking a language, earning a black belt in karate.

    Embed your knowledge transfer methods into day-to-day practice

    Multiple methods should be used to transfer as much of a person's knowledge as possible, and mentoring should always be one of them. Select your method according to the following criteria:

    Info-Tech Insight

    The more integrated knowledge transfer is in day-to-day activities, the more likely it is to be successful, and the lower the time cost. This is because real learning is happening at the same time real work is being accomplished.

    Type of Knowledge

    • Tacit knowledge transfer methods are often informal and interactive:
      • Mentoring
      • Multi-generational work teams
      • Networks and communities
      • Job shadowing
    • Explicit knowledge transfer methods tend to be more formal and one way:
      • Formal documentation of processes and best practices
      • Self-published knowledge bases
      • Formal training sessions
      • Formal interviews

    Incumbent's Preference/Successor's Preference

    Ensure you consult the employees, and their direct manager, on the way they are best prepared to teach and learn. Some examples of preferences include:

    1. Prefer traditional classroom learning, augmented with participation, critical reflection, and feedback.
    2. May get bored during formal training sessions and retain more during job shadowing.
    3. Prefer to be self-directed or self-paced, and highly receptive to e-learning and media.
    4. Prefer informal, incidental learning, tend to go immediately to technology or direct access to people. May have a short attention span and be motivated by instant results.
    5. May be uncomfortable with blogs and wikis, but comfortable with SharePoint.

    Cost

    Consider costs beyond the monetary. Some methods require an investment in time (e.g. mentoring), while others require an investment in technology (e.g. knowledge bases).

    The good news is that many supporting technologies may already exist in your organization or can be acquired for free.

    Methods that cost time may be difficult to get underway since employees may feel they don't have the time or must change the way they work.

    2.1 Create a knowledge transfer plan

    1-3 hours

    1. Working together with the current incumbent, brainstorm the key information pertaining to the role that you want to pass on to the successor. Use the IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template to ensure you don't miss anything.
      • Consider key knowledge areas, including:
        • Specialized technical knowledge.
        • Specialized research and development processes.
        • Unique design capabilities/methods/models.
        • Special formulas/algorithms/techniques.
        • Proprietary production processes.
        • Decision-making criteria.
        • Innovative sales methods.
        • Knowledge about key customers.
        • Relationships with key stakeholders.
        • Company history and values.
      • Ask questions of both sources and receivers of knowledge to help determine the best knowledge transfer methods to use.
        • What is the nature of the knowledge? Explicit or tacit?
        • Why is it important to transfer?
        • How will the knowledge be used?
        • What knowledge is critical for success?
        • How will the users find and access it?
        • How will it be maintained and remain relevant and usable?
        • What are the existing knowledge pathways or networks connecting sources to recipients?
    2. Once the knowledge has been identified, use the information on the following slides to decide on the most appropriate methods. Be sure to consult the incumbent and successor on their preferences.
    3. Prioritize your list of knowledge transfer activities. It's important not to try to do too much too quickly. Focus on some quick wins and leverage the success of these initiatives to drive the project forward. Follow these steps as a guide:
      1. Take an inventory of all the tactics and techniques which you plan to employ. Eliminate redundancies where possible.
      2. Start your implementation with your highest risk role or knowledge item, using explicit knowledge transfer tactics. Interviews, use cases, and process mapping will give you some quick wins and will help gain momentum for the project.
      3. Then move forward to other tactics, the majority of which will require training and process design. Pick 1-2 other key tactics you would like to employ and build those out. For tactics that require resources or monetary investment, start with those that can be reused for multiple roles.

    Record your plan in the IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template.

    Download the IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    Download the Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Info-Tech Insight

    Wherever possible, ask employees about their personal learning styles. It's likely that a collaborative compromise will have to be struck for knowledge transfer to work well.

    2.1 Create a knowledge transfer plan

    Input

    Output

    • List of roles for which you need to transfer knowledge
    • Prioritized list of knowledge items and chosen transfer method

    Materials

    Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Incumbent
    • Successor

    Not every transfer method is effective for every type of knowledge

    Knowledge Type
    Tactic Explicit Tacit
    Information Process Skills Expertise
    Interviews Very Strong Strong Strong Strong
    Process Mapping Medium Very Strong Very Weak Very Weak
    Use Cases Medium Very Strong Very Weak Very Weak
    Job Shadow Very Weak Medium Very Strong Very Strong
    Peer Assist Strong Medium Very Strong Very Strong
    Action Review Medium Medium Strong Strong
    Mentoring Weak Weak Strong Very Strong
    Transition Workshop Strong Strong Strong Weak
    Storytelling Weak Weak Strong Very Strong
    Job Share Weak Weak Very Strong Very Strong
    Communities of Practice Strong Weak Very Strong Very Strong

    This table shows the relative strengths and weaknesses of each knowledge transfer tactic compared against four different knowledge types.

    Not all techniques are effective for all types of knowledge; it is important to use a healthy mixture of techniques to optimize effectiveness.

    Employees' engagement can impact knowledge transfer effectiveness

    Level of Engagement
    Tactic Disengaged/ Indifferent Almost Engaged - Engaged
    Interviews Yes Yes
    Process Mapping Yes Yes
    Use Cases Yes Yes
    Job Shadow No Yes
    Peer Assist Yes Yes
    Action Review Yes Yes
    Mentoring No Yes
    Transition Workshop Yes Yes
    Storytelling No Yes
    Job Share Maybe Yes
    Communities of Practice Maybe Yes

    When considering which tactics to employ, it's important to consider the knowledge holder's level of engagement. Employees who you would identify as being disengaged may not make good candidates for job shadowing, mentoring, or other tactics where they are required to do additional work or are asked to influence others.

    Knowledge transfer can be controversial for all employees as it can cause feelings of job insecurity. It's essential that motivations for knowledge transfer are communicated effectively.

    Pay particular attention to your communication style with disengaged and indifferent employees, communicate frequently, and tie communication back to what's in it for them.

    Putting disengaged employees in a position where they are mentoring others can be a risk, as their negativity could influence others not to participate, or it could negate the work you're doing to create a positive knowledge sharing culture.

    Employees' engagement can impact knowledge transfer effectiveness

    Effort by Stakeholder

    Tactic

    Business Analyst

    IT Manager

    Knowledge Holder

    Knowledge Receiver

    Interviews

    These tactics require the least amount of effort, especially for organizations that are already using these tactics for a traditional requirements gathering process.

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Process Mapping

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Use Cases

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Job Shadow

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Peer Assist

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Action Review

    These tactics generally require more involvement from IT management and the BA in tandem for preparation. They will also require ongoing effort for all stakeholders. It's important to gain stakeholder buy-in as it is key for success.

    Low

    Medium

    Medium

    Low

    Mentoring

    Medium

    High

    High

    Medium

    Transition Workshop

    Medium

    Low

    Medium

    Low

    Storytelling

    Medium

    Medium

    Low

    Low

    Job Share

    Medium

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    Communities of Practice

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Phase 3

    Development Planning

    Workforce Planning

    Knowledge Transfer

    Development Planning

    Identify needs, goals, metrics, and skill gaps.

    Select a skill sourcing strategy.

    Discover critical knowledge.

    Select knowledge transfer methods.

    Identify priority competencies.

    Assess employees.

    Draft development goals.

    Provide coaching & feedback.

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Phase Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Managers
    • Employees

    Additional Resources

    Effective development planning hinges on robust performance management

    Your performance management framework is rooted in organizational goals and defines what it means to do any given role well.

    Your organization's priority competencies are the knowledge, skills and attributes that enable an employee to do the job well.

    Each individual's development goals are then aimed at building these priority competencies.

    Mission Statement

    To be the world's leading manufacturer and distributor of widgets.

    Business Goal

    To increase annual revenue by 10%.

    IT Department Objective

    To ensure reliable communications infrastructure and efficient support for our sales and development teams.

    Individual Role Objective

    To decrease time to resolution of support requests by 10% while maintaining quality.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without a performance management framework, your employees cannot align their development with the organization's goals. For detailed guidance, see Info-Tech's blueprint Setting Meaningful Employee Performance Measures.

    What is a competency?

    The term "competency" refers to the collection of knowledge, skills, and attributes an employee requires to do a job well.

    Often organizations have competency frameworks that consist of core, leadership, and functional competencies.

    Core competencies apply to every role in the organization. Typically, they are tied to organizational values and business mission and/or vision.

    Functional competencies are at the department, work group, or job role levels. They are a direct reflection of the function or type of work carried out.

    Leadership competencies generally apply only to people managers in the organization. Typically, they are tied to strategic goals in the short to medium term

    Generic Functional
    • Core
    • Leadership
    • IT
    • Finance
    • Sales
    • HR

    Use the SMART model to make sure goals are reasonable and attainable

    S

    Specific: Be specific about what you want to accomplish. Think about who needs to be involved, what you're trying to accomplish, and when the goal should be met.

    M

    Measurable: Set metrics that will help to determine whether the goal has been reached.

    A

    Achievable: Ensure that you have both the organizational resources and employee capability to accomplish the goal.

    R

    Relevant: Goals must align with broader business, department, and development goals in order to be meaningful.

    T

    Time-bound: Provide a target date to ensure the goal is achievable and provide motivation.

    Example goal:

    "Learn Excel this summer."

    Problems:

    Not specific enough, not measurable enough, nor time bound.

    Alternate SMART goal:

    "Consult with our Excel expert and take the lead on creating an Excel tool in August."

    3.2 Identify target competencies & draft development goals

    1 hour

    Pre-work: Employees should come to the career conversation having done some self-reflection. Use Info-Tech's IT Employee Career Development Workbook to help employees identify their career goals.

    1. Pre-work: Managers should gather any data they have on the employee's current proficiency at key competencies. Potential sources include task-based assessments, performance ratings, supervisor or peer feedback, and informal conversation.

      Prioritize competencies. Using your list of priority organizational competencies, work with your employees to help them identify two to four competencies to focus on developing now and in the future. Use the Individual Competency Development Plan template to document your assessment and prioritize competencies for development. Consider the following questions for guidance:
      1. Which competencies are needed in my current role that I do not have full proficiency in?
      2. Which competencies are related to both my career interests and the organization's priorities?
      3. Which competencies are related to each other and could be developed together or simultaneously?
    2. Draft goals. Ask your employee to create a list of multiple simple goals to develop the competencies they have selected to work on developing over the next year. Identifying multiple goals helps to break development down into manageable chunks. Ensure goals are concrete, for example, if the competency is "communication skills," your development goals could be "presentation skills" and "business writing."
    3. Review goals:
      1. Ask why these areas are important to the employee.
      2. Share your ideas and why it is important that the employee develop in the areas identified.
      3. Ensure that the goals are realistic. They should be stretch goals, but they must be achievable. Use the SMART framework on the previous slide for guidance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Lack of career development is the top reason employees leave organizations. Development activities need to work for both the organization and the employee's own development, and clearly link to advancing employees' careers either at the organization or beyond.

    Download the IT Employee Career Development Workbook

    Download the Individual Competency Development Plan

    3.2 Identify target competencies & draft development goals

    Input

    Output

    • Employee's career aspirations
    • List of priority organizational competencies
    • Assessment of employee's current proficiency
    • A list of concrete development goals

    Materials

    Participants

    • Employee
    • Direct manager

    Apply a blend of learning methods

    • Info-Tech recommends the 70-20-10 principle for learning and development, which places the greatest emphasis on learning by doing. This experiential learning is then supported by feedback from mentoring, training, and self-reflection.
    • Use the 70-20-10 principle as a guideline – the actual breakdown of your learning methods will need to be tailored to best suit your organization and the employee's goals.

    Spend development time and effort wisely:

    70%

    On providing challenging on-the-job opportunities

    20%

    On establishing opportunities for people to develop learning relationships with others, such as coaching and mentoring

    10%

    On formal learning and training programs

    Internal initiatives are a cost-effective development aid

    Internal Initiative

    What Is It?

    When to Use It

    Special Project

    Assignment outside of the scope of the day-to-day job (e.g. work with another team on a short-term initiative).

    As an opportunity to increase exposure and to expand skills beyond those required for the current job.

    Stretch Assignment

    The same projects that would normally be assigned, but in a shorter time frame or with a more challenging component.

    Employee is consistently meeting targets and you need to see what they're capable of.

    Training Others

    Training new or more junior employees on their position or a specific process.

    Employee wants to expand their role and responsibility and is proficient and positive.

    Team Lead On an Assignment

    Team lead for part of a project or new initiative.

    To prepare an employee for future leadership roles by increasing responsibility and developing basic managerial skills.

    Job Rotation

    A planned placement of employees across various roles in a department or organization for a set period of time.

    Employee is successfully meeting and/or exceeding job expectations in their current role.

    Incorporating a development objective into daily tasks

    What do we mean by incorporating into daily tasks?

    The next time you assign a project to an employee, you should also ask the employee to think about a development goal for the project. Try to link it back to their existing goals or have them document a new goal in their development plan.

    For example: A team of employees always divides their work in the same way. Their goal for their next project could be to change up the division of responsibility so they can learn each other's roles.

    Another example:

    "I'd like you to develop your ability to explain technical terms to a non-technical audience. I'd like you to sit down with the new employee who starts tomorrow and explain how to use all our software, getting them up and running."

    Info-Tech Insight

    Employees often don't realize that they are being developed. They either think they are being recognized for good work or they are resentful of the additional workload.

    You need to tell your employees that the activity you are asking them to do is intended to further their development.

    However, be careful not to sell mundane tasks as development opportunities – this is offensive and detrimental to engagement.

    Establish manager and employee accountability for following up

    Ensure that the employee makes progress in developing prioritized competencies by defining accountabilities:

    Tracking Progress

    Checking In

    Development Meetings

    Coaching & Feedback

    Employee accountability:

    • Employees need to keep track of what they learn.
    • Employees should take the time to reflect on their progress.

    Manager accountability:

    • Managers need to make the time for employees to reflect.

    Employee accountability:

    • Employees need to provide managers with updates and ask for help.

    Manager accountability:

    • Managers need to check in with employees to see if they need additional resources.

    Employee accountability:

    • Employees need to complete assessments again to determine whether they have made progress.

    Manager accountability:

    • Managers should schedule monthly meetings to discuss progress and identify next steps.

    Employee accountability:

    • Employees should ask their manager and colleagues for feedback after development activities.

    Manager accountability:

    • Managers can use both scheduled meetings and informal conversations to provide coaching and feedback to employees.

    3.3 Select development activities and schedule check-ins

    1-3 hours

    Pre-work: Employees should research potential development activities and come prepared with a range of suggestions.

    Pre-work: Managers should investigate options for employee development, such as internal training/practice opportunities for the employee's selected competencies and availability of training budget.

    1. Communicate your findings about internal opportunities and external training allowance to the employee. This can also be done prior to the meeting, to help guide the employee's own research. Address any questions or concerns.
    2. Review the employee's proposed list of activities, and identify priority ones based on:
      1. How effectively they support the development of priority competencies.
      2. How closely they match the employee's original goals.
      3. The learning methods they employ, and whether the chosen activities support a mix of different methods.
      4. The degree to which the employee will have a chance to practice new skills hands-on.
      5. The amount of time the activities require, balanced against the employee's work obligations.
    3. Guide the employee in selecting activities for the short and medium term. Establish an understanding that this list is tentative and subject to ongoing revision during future check-ins.
      1. If in doubt about whether the employee is over-committing, err on the side of fewer activities to start.
    4. Schedule a check-in for one month out to review progress and roadblocks, and to reaffirm priorities.
    5. Check-ins should be repeated regularly, typically once a month.

    Download the Learning Methods Catalog

    Info-Tech Insight

    Adopt a blended learning approach using a variety of techniques to effectively develop competencies. This will reinforce learning and accommodate different learning styles. See Info-Tech's Learning Methods Catalog for a description of popular experiential, relational, and formal learning methods.

    3.3 Select development activities and schedule check-ins

    Input

    Output

    • List of potential development activities (from employee)
    • List of organizational resources (from manager)
    • A selection of feasible development activities
    • Next check-in scheduled

    Materials

    Participants

    • Employee
    • Direct manager

    Tips for tricky conversations about development

    What to do if…

    Employees aren't interested in development:

    • They may have low aspiration for advancement.
    • Remind them about the importance of staying current in their role given increasing job requirements.
    • Explain that skill development will make their job easier and make them more successful at it; sell development as a quick and effective way to learn the skill.
    • Indicate your support and respond to concerns.

    Employees have greater aspiration than capability:

    • Explain that there are a number of skills and capabilities that they need to improve in order to move to the next level. If the specific skills were not discussed during the performance appraisal, do not hesitate to explain the improvements that you require.
    • Inform the employee that you want them to succeed and that by pushing too far and too fast they risk failure, which would not be beneficial to anyone.
    • Reinforce that they need to do their current job well before they can be considered for promotion.

    Employees are offended by your suggestions:

    • Try to understand why they are offended. Before moving forward, clarify whether they disagree with the need for development or the method by which you are recommending they be developed.
    • If it is because you told them they had development needs, then reiterate that this is about helping them to become better and that everyone has areas to develop.
    • If it is about the development method, discuss the different options, including the pros and cons of each.

    Coaching and feedback skills help managers guide employee development

    Coaching and providing feedback are often confused. Managers often believe they are coaching when they are just giving feedback. Learn the difference and apply the right approach for the right situation.

    What is coaching?

    A conversation in which a manager asks questions to guide employees to solve problems themselves.

    Coaching is:

    • Future-focused
    • Collaborative
    • Geared toward growth and development

    What is feedback?

    Information conveyed from the manager to the employee about their performance.

    Feedback is:

    • Past-focused
    • Prescriptive
    • Geared toward behavior and performance

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't forget to develop your managers! Ensure coaching, feedback, and management skills are part of your management team's development plan.

    Understand the foundations of coaching to provide effective development coaching:

    Knowledge Mindset Relationship
    • Understand what coaching is and how to apply it:
    • Identify when to use coaching, feedback, or other people management practices, and how to switch between them.
    • Know what coaching can and cannot accomplish.
    • When focusing on performance, guide an employee to solve problems related to their work. When focusing on development, guide an employee to reach their own development goals.
    • Adopt a coaching mindset by subscribing to the following beliefs:
    • Employees want to achieve higher performance and have the potential to do so.
    • Employees have a unique and valuable perspective to share of the challenges they face as well as the possible solutions.
    • Employees should be empowered to realize solutions themselves to motivate them in achieving goals.
    • Develop a relationship of trust between managers and employees:
    • Create an environment of psychological safety where employees feel safe to be open and honest.
    • Involve employees in decision making and inform employees often.
    • Invest in employees' success.
    • Give and expect candor.
    • Embrace failure.

    Apply the "4A" behavior-focused coaching model

    Using a model allows every manager, even those with little experience, to apply coaching best practices effectively.

    Actively Listen

    Ask

    Action Plan

    Adapt

    Engage with employees and their message, rather than just hearing their message.

    Key active listening behaviors:

    • Provide your undivided attention.
    • Observe both spoken words and body language.
    • Genuinely try to understand what the employee is saying.
    • Listen to what is being said, then paraphrase back what you heard.

    Ask thoughtful, powerful questions to learn more information and guide employees to uncover opportunities and/or solutions.

    Key asking behaviors:

    • Ask open-ended questions.
    • Ask questions to learn something you didn't already know.
    • Ask for reasoning (the why).
    • Ask "what else?"

    Hold employees and managers accountable for progress and results.

    During check-ins, review each development goal to ensure employees are meeting their targets.

    Key action planning behaviors:

    Adapt to individual employees and situations.

    Key adapting behaviors:

    • Recognize employees' unique characteristics.
    • Appreciate the situation at hand and change your behavior and communication in order to best support the individual employee.

    Use the following questions to have meaningful coaching conversations

    Opening Questions

    • What's on your mind?
    • Do you feel you've had a good week/month?
    • What is the ideal situation?
    • What else?

    Problem-Identifying Questions

    • What is most important here?
    • What is the challenge here for you?
    • What is the real challenge here for you?
    • What is getting in the way of you achieving your goal?

    Problem-Solving Questions

    • What are some of the options available?
    • What have you already tried to solve this problem? What worked? What didn't work?
    • Have you considered all the possibilities?
    • How can I help?

    Next-Steps Questions

    • What do you need to do, and when, to achieve your goal?
    • What resources are there to help you achieve your goal? This includes people, tools, or even resources outside our organization.
    • How will you know when you have achieved your goal? What does success look like?

    The purpose of asking questions is to guide the conversation and learn something you didn't already know. Choose the questions you ask based on the flow of the conversation and on what information you would like to uncover. Approach the answers you get with an open mind.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid the trap of "hidden agenda" questions, whose real purpose is to offer your own advice.

    Use the following approach to give effective feedback

    Provide the feedback in a timely manner

    • Plan the message you want to convey.
    • Provide feedback "just-in-time."
    • Ensure recipient is not preoccupied.
    • Try to balance the feedback; refer to successful as well as unsuccessful behavior.

    Communicate clearly, using specific examples and alternative behaviors

    • Feedback must be honest and helpful.
    • Be specific and give a recent example.
    • Be descriptive, not evaluative.
    • Relate feedback to behaviors that can be changed.
    • Give an alternative positive behavior.

    Confirm their agreement and understanding

    • Solicit their thoughts on the feedback.
    • Clarify if not understood; try another example.
    • Confirm recipient understands and accepts the feedback.

    Manager skill is crucial to employee development

    Development is a two-way street. This means that while employees are responsible for putting in the work, managers must enable their development with support and guidance. The latter is a skill, which managers must consciously cultivate.

    For more in-depth management skills development, see the Info-Tech "Build a Better Manager" training resources:

    Bibliography

    Anderson, Kelsie. "Is Your IT Department Prepared for the 4 Biggest Challenges of 2017?" 14 June 2017.
    Atkinson, Carol, and Peter Sandiford. "An Exploration of Older Worker Flexible Working Arrangements in Smaller Firms." Human Resource Management Journal, vol. 26, no. 1, 2016, pp. 12–28. Wiley Online Library.
    BasuMallick, Chiradeep. "Top 8 Best Practices for Employee Cross-Training." Spiceworks, 15 June 2020.
    Birol, Andy. "4 Ways You Can Succeed With a Staff That 'Wears Multiple Hats.'" The Business Journals, 26 Nov. 2013.
    Bleich, Corey. "6 Major Benefits To Cross-Training Employees." EdgePoint Learning, 5 Dec. 2018.
    Cancialosi, Chris. "Cross-Training: Your Best Defense Against Indispensable Employees." Forbes, 15 Sept. 2014.
    Cappelli, Peter, and Anna Tavis. "HR Goes Agile." Harvard Business Review, Mar. 2018.
    Chung, Kai Li, and Norma D'Annunzio-Green. "Talent Management Practices of SMEs in the Hospitality Sector: An Entrepreneurial Owner-Manager Perspective." Worldwide Hospitality and Tourism Themes, vol. 10, no. 4, Jan. 2018.
    Clarkson, Mary. Developing IT Staff: A Practical Approach. Springer Science & Business Media, 2012.
    "CNBC and SurveyMonkey Release Latest Small Business Survey Results." Momentive, 2019. Press Release. Accessed 6 Aug. 2020.
    Cselényi, Noémi. "Why Is It Important for Small Business Owners to Focus on Talent Management?" Jumpstart:HR | HR Outsourcing and Consulting for Small Businesses and Startups, 25 Mar. 2013.
    dsparks. "Top 10 IT Concerns for Small Businesses." Stratosphere Networks IT Support Blog - Chicago IT Support Technical Support, 16 May 2017.
    Duff, Jimi. "Why Small to Mid-Sized Businesses Need a System for Talent Management | Talent Management Blog | Saba Software." Saba, 17 Dec. 2018.
    Employment and Social Development Canada. "Age-Friendly Workplaces: Promoting Older Worker Participation." Government of Canada, 3 Oct. 2016.
    Exploring Workforce Planning. Accenture, 23 May 2017.
    "Five Major IT Challenges Facing Small and Medium-Sized Businesses." Advanced Network Systems. Accessed 25 June 2020.
    Harris, Evan. "IT Problems That Small Businesses Face." InhouseIT, 17 Aug. 2016.
    Heathfield, Susan. "What Every Manager Needs to Know About Succession Planning." Liveabout, 8 June 2020.
    ---. "Why Talent Management Is an Important Business Strategy." Liveabout, 29 Dec. 2019.
    Herbert, Chris. "The Top 5 Challenges Facing IT Departments in Mid-Sized Companies." ExpertIP, 25 June 2012.
    How Smaller Organizations Can Use Talent Management to Accelerate Growth. Avilar. Accessed 25 June 2020.
    Krishnan, TN, and Hugh Scullion. "Talent Management and Dynamic View of Talent in Small and Medium Enterprises." Human Resource Management Review, vol. 27, no. 3, Sept. 2017, pp. 431–41.
    Mann Jackson, Nancy. "Strategic Workforce Planning for Midsized Businesses." ADP, 6 Feb. 2017.
    McCandless, Karen. "A Beginner's Guide to Strategic Talent Management (2020)." The Blueprint, 26 Feb. 2020.
    McFeely, Shane, and Ben Wigert. "This Fixable Problem Costs U.S. Businesses $1 Trillion." Gallup.com, 13 Mar. 2019.
    Mihelič, Katarina Katja. Global Talent Management Best Practices for SMEs. Jan. 2020.
    Mohsin, Maryam. 10 Small Business Statistics You Need to Know in 2020 [May 2020]. 4 May 2020.
    Ramadan, Wael H., and B. Eng. The Influence of Talent Management on Sustainable Competitive Advantage of Small and Medium Sized Establishments. 2012, p. 15.
    Ready, Douglas A., et al. "Building a Game-Changing Talent Strategy." Harvard Business Review, no. January–February 2014, Jan. 2014.
    Reh, John. "Cross-Training Employees Strengthens Engagement and Performance." Liveabout, May 2019.
    Rennie, Michael, et al. McKinsey on Organization: Agility and Organization Design. McKinsey, May 2016.
    Roddy, Seamus. "The State of Small Business Employee Benefits in 2019." Clutch, 18 Apr. 2019.
    SHRM. "Developing Employee Career Paths and Ladders." SHRM, 28 Feb. 2020.
    Strandberg, Coro. Sustainability Talent Management: The New Business Imperative. Strandberg Consulting, Apr. 2015.
    Talent Management for Small & Medium-Size Businesses. Success Factors. Accessed 25 June 2020.
    "Top 10 IT Challenges Facing Small Business in 2019." Your IT Department, 8 Jan. 2019.
    "Why You Need Workforce Planning." Workforce.com, 24 Oct. 2022.

    Build an Application Department Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}180|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $220,866 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 34 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Application delivery has modernized. There are increasing expectations on departments to deliver on organizational and product objectives with increasing velocity.
    • Application departments produce many diverse, divergent products, applications, and services with expectations of frequent updates and changes based on rapidly changing landscapes

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There is no such thing as a universal “applications department.” Unlike other domains of IT, there are no widely accepted frameworks that clearly outline universal best practices of application delivery and management.
    • Different software needs and delivery orientations demand a tailored structure and set of processes, especially when managing a mixed portfolio or multiple delivery methods.

    Impact and Result

    Understand what your department’s purpose is through articulating its strategy in three steps:

    • Determining your application department’s values, principles, and orientation.
    • Laying out the goals, objectives, metrics, and priorities of the department.
    • Building a communication plan to communicate your overall department strategy.

    Build an Application Department Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build an application department strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take stock of who you are

    Consider and record your department’s values, principles, orientation, and capabilities.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 1: Take Stock of Who You Are
    • Application Department Strategy Supporting Workbook

    2. Articulate your strategy

    Define your department’s strategy through your understanding of your department combined with everything that you do and are working to do.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 2: Articulate Your Strategy
    • Application Department Strategy Template

    3. Communicate your strategy

    Communicate your department’s strategy to your key stakeholders.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 3: Communicate Your Strategy

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build an Application Department Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Take Stock of Who You Are

    The Purpose

    Understand what makes up your application department beyond the applications and services provided.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Articulating your guiding principles, values, capabilities, and orientation provides a foundation for expressing your department strategy.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify your team’s values and guiding principles.

    1.2 Define your department’s orientation.

    Outputs

    A summary of your department’s values and guiding principles

    A clear view of your department’s orientation and supporting capabilities

    2 Articulate Your Strategy

    The Purpose

    Lay out all the details that make up your application department strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed application department strategy canvas containing everything you need to communicate your strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Write your application department vision statement.

    2.2 Define your application department goals and metrics.

    2.3 Specify your department capabilities and orientation.

    2.4 Prioritize what is most important to your department.

    Outputs

    Your department vision

    Your department’s goals and metrics that contribute to achieving your department’s vision

    Your department’s capabilities and orientation

    A prioritized roadmap for your department

    3 Communicate Your Strategy

    The Purpose

    Lay out your strategy’s communication plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Your application department strategy presentation ready to be presented to your stakeholders.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify your stakeholders.

    3.2 Develop a communication plan.

    3.3 Wrap-up and next steps

    Outputs

    List of prioritized stakeholders you want to communicate with

    A plan for what to communicate to each stakeholder

    Communication is only the first step – what comes next?

    Don't try this at home

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    Brilliant little and very amusing way to deal with a scammer.

    But do not copy this method as it will actually reveal quite a bit and confirm that your email is valid and active.

    Click to watch Joe Lycett

     

    Demystify the New PMBOK Guide and PMI Certifications

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}446|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • There is lots of confusion with the latest edition of A Guide to The Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide).
    • The Project Management Professional (PMP) certification is not satisfying the needs of PMOs.
    • There is still a divide on whether the focus should be on the PMP or an Agile-related certification.
    • The PMP certification has lost its sizzle while other emerging certifications have started to penetrate the market. It’s hard to distinguish which certifications still hold weight.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The PMP certification is still valuable and worth your time in 2023.
    • There are still over a million active PMP-certified individuals worldwide.
    • PMP can make you more money.

    Impact and Result

    • Study the market trends for certification options as they emerge and evolve.
    • Go with longstanding, reputable certifications, but be ready to pivot if they are not adding value.
    • Look at the job market as an indicator of certification demands.
    • There are a lot of certification options out there, and every day there seems to be a new one that pops up. Wait and see how the market reacts before investing your time and money in a new certification.

    Demystify the New PMBOK Guide and PMI Certifications Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Demystify the New PMBOK and PMI Certifications Storyboard – A guide to validate if the PMP is still valuable. It will also provide clarity related to the updated PMBOK 7th edition.

    This publication will validate if the PMP certification is still valuable and worth your time. In addition, you will gain different perspectives related to other PMI and non-PMI certifications. You will gain a better understanding of the evolution of the PMBOK Guide, and the significant changes made from PMBOK 6th edition to the 7th edition.

    • Demystify the New PMBOK and PMI Certifications Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Demystify the New PMBOK Guide and the PMI Certifications

    The PMP certification is still valuable and worth your time in 2023.

    Analyst Perspective

    The PMP (Project Management Professional) certification is still worth your time.

    Long Dam

    I often get asked, “Is the PMP worth it?” I then proceed with a question of my own: “If it gets you an interview or a foot in the door or bolsters your salary, would it be worth it?” Typically, the answer is a resounding “YES!”

    CIO magazine ranked the PMP as the top project management certification in North America because it demonstrates that you have the specific skills employers seek, dedication to excellence, and the capacity to perform at the highest levels.

    Given its popularity and the demand in the marketplace, I strongly believe it is still worth your time and investment. The PMP is a globally recognized certification that has dominated for decades. It is hard to overlook the fact that the Project Management Institute (PMI) has more than 1.2 million PMP certification holders worldwide and is still considered the gold standard for project management.

    Yes, it’s worth it. It gets you interviews, a foot in the door, and bolsters your salary. Oh, and it makes you a more complete project manager.

    Long Dam, PMP, PMI-ACP, PgMP, PfMP

    Principal Research Director, Project Portfolio Management Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • There is lots of confusion with the latest A Guide to The Project Management Body of Knowledge (aka PMBOK Guide).
    • The Project Management Professional (PMP) certification is not satisfying the needs of PMOs.
    • There is still a divide on whether the focus should be on the PMP or an Agile-related certification.

    The PMP certification has lost its sizzle while other emerging certifications have started to penetrate the market. It’s hard to distinguish which certification still holds weight.

    Common Obstacles

    • Poor understanding and lack of awareness of other PMI certifications outside of the PMP.
    • There are too many competing certifications out there, and it’s hard to decipher which ones to choose.
    • PMI certifications typically take a lot of effort to obtain and maintain.

    There are other, less intensive certifications available. It’s unclear what will be popular in the future.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Study the market trends for certification options as they emerge and evolve.
    • Go with longstanding reputable certifications, but be ready to pivot if they are not adding value.
    • Look at the job market as an indicator for certification demands.

    There are a lot of certification options out there, and every day there seems to be a new one that pops up. Wait and see how the market reacts before investing your time and money in a new certification.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The PMP certification is still valuable and worthy of your time in 2023.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guide Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of the this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    The PMP dominated the market for decades and got over 1 million people certified

    Total active project management professional holders from December 2021 versus July 2022

    Info-Tech Insight

    The PMI’s flagship PMP certification numbers have not significantly increased from 2021 to 2022. However, PMP substantially outpaces all competitors with over 1.2 million certified PMPs.

    Source: projectmanagement.com

    The PMP penetrated over 200 countries

    PMP is the global project management gold standard.

    • CIO magazine ranked the PMP as the top project management certification because it demonstrates you have the specific skills employers seek, dedication to excellence, and the capacity to perform at the highest levels.
    • It delivers real value in the form of professional credibility, deep knowledge, and increased earning potential. Those benefits have staying power.
    • The PMP now includes predictive, Agile, and hybrid approaches.
    • The PMP demonstrates expertise across the wide array of planning and work management styles.

    Source: PMI, “PMP Certification.” PMI, “Why You Should Get the PMP.”

    The PMP was valuable in the past specifically because it was the standard

    79% of project managers surveyed have the PMP certification out of 30,000 respondents in 40 countries.

    The PMP became table stakes for jobs in project management and PMO’s.

    Work desk with project management written in middle. Arrows point to: Goals, planning, risks, control, teamwork, cost, communication, and problem solving.

    Source: PMI’s Earning Power: Project Management Salary Survey—Twelfth Edition (2021)

    The PMP put itself on a collision course with Agile

    • The Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP) was introduced in 2012 which initially clashed with the PMP for project management supremacy from the PMI.
    • Then the Disciplined Agile (DA) was introduced in 2019, which further compounded the issue and caused even more confusion with both the PMP and the PMI-ACP certification.
    • Instead of complementing the PMP, these certifications began to inadvertently compete with it head-to-head.

    There is a new PMBOK Guide Seventh Edition in town

    The PMI made its most significant changes between 2017 and 2021.

    Chart showing editions of the PMBOK guide from 1996 to 2021.

    Timeline adapted from Wikipedia, “Project Management Body of Knowledge.”

    Roughly every 3-5 years, the PMI has released a new PMBOK version. It’s unclear if there will be an eighth edition.

    The market got confused by PMBOK Guide – Seventh Edition

    PMBOK guide version 5 considered the gold standard, version 6 first included Agile and version 7 was the most radical change.

    • Die-hard traditional project managers have a hard time grasping why the PMI messed around with the PMBOK Guide. There is sentiment that the PMBOK Guide V7 got diluted.
    • Naysayers do not think that the PMBOK Guide V7 hit the mark and found it to be a concession to Agilists.
    • The PMBOK Guide V7 was significantly trimmed down by almost two-thirds to 274 pages whereas the PMBOK V6 ballooned to 756 pages!
    • Some Agile practitioners found this to be a refreshing, bold move from the PMI. Most, however, ignored or resisted it.
    PMBOK Guide: A guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge Seventh Edition.  AND The Standard for Project Management.

    PMBOK Guide – Seventh edition released in 2021

    • The PMBOK Guide – Seventh Edition was released in late 2021. It was the most radical change since 1987. For the first time, the PMI went from a process-based standard to a principles-based standard, and the guide went from knowledge areas to project performance domains. This may have diluted the traditional predictive project management practices. However, it was offset by incorporating more iterative, Agile, and hybrid approaches.
    • The market is confused and is clearly shifting toward Agile and away from the rigor that is typically associated with the PMI.
    • The PMI transitioned most of the process-based standards & ITTO to their new digital PMIStandards+ online platform, which can be found here (access for PMI members only).
    • The PMBOK Guide is not the sole basis of the certification exam; however, it can be used as one of several reference resources. Using the exam content outline (ECO) is the way forward, which can be found here.

    The Agile certification seems to be the focus for the PMI in the coming years

    • The PMI started to get into the Agile game with the introduction of Agile certifications, which is where all the confusion started. Although the PMI-ACP & the DASM have seen a steady uptake recently, it appears to be at the expense of the PMP certification.
    • The PMI acquired the Discipline Agile (DA) in late 2019, which expanded their offerings and capabilities for project managers and teams to choose their “way of working.”
    • This was an important milestone for the PMI to address the new way of working for Agile practitioners with this offering to provide more options and to better support enterprise agility.
    PMI-ACP & the DASM have seen a steady uptake recently.

    Source: projectmanagement.com as of July 2022

    The PMI has lost more certified PMPs than they have gained so far in 2022

    The PMI has lost more certified PMPs than they have gained so far in 2022.

    PMP

    PMP – Project Management Professional

    It is a concerning trend that their bread and butter, the PMP flagship certification, has largely stalled in 2022. We are unsure if this was attributed to them being displaced by competitors such as the Agile Alliance, their own Agile offerings, or the market’s lackluster reaction to PMBOK Guide – Seventh Edition.

    Source: projectmanagement.com as of July 2022

    The PMI’s total memberships have stalled since September 2021

    The PMIs total memberships have stalled since September 2021.

    PMI: Project Management Insitute

    The PMI’s membership appears to have a direct correlation to the PMP numbers. As the PMP number stalls, so do the PMI’s memberships.

    Source: projectmanagement.com as of July 2022

    The PMP and the PMBOK Guide are more focused on project management

    The knowledge and skills were not all that helpful for running programs, portfolios, and PMOs.
    • It became evident that other certifications were more tightly aligned to program and portfolio management for the PMOs. The PMI provides the following:
      • Program Management Professional (PgMP)
      • Portfolio Management Professional (PfMP)
    • Axelos also has certifications for program management and portfolio management, such as:
      • Managing Successful Programmes (MSP)
      • Management of Portfolios (MoP)
      • Portfolio, Programme, and Project Offices (P3O)

    The market didn’t know what to do with the PgMP or the PfMP

    These were relatively unknown certifications for Program and Portfolio Management.

    • The PMI’s story was that you would start as a project manager with the PMP certification and then the natural progression would be toward either Program Management (PgMP) or Portfolio Management (PfMP).
    • The uptake for the PgMP and the PfMP certification has been insignificant and underwhelming. The appetite and the demand for PMO-aligned certifications has been lackluster since their inception.
    PgMP - Program Management Professional and PfMP - Portfolio Management Professioanal Certifications are relatively unkown. PgMP only has 3780 members since 2007, and PfMP has 1266 since 2014.

    Source: projectmanagement.com as of July 2022

    There are other non-PMI certifications to consider

    Depending on your experience level

    List of non-PMI certifications based on specialization. List of non-PMI certifications based on years of experience.  Divided into 3 categories: 0-3 years, 3+ years, and 8+ years of experience.

    Other non-PMI project management certifications

    Non-PMI project management certifications

    PRINCE2 and CSM appear to be the more popular ones in the market.

    In April 2022, CIO.com outlined other popular project management certifications outside of the PMI.

    Source: CIO.com

    Project managers have an image problem among senior leaders

    There is a perception that PMs are just box-checkers and note-takers.

    • Project managers are seen as tactical troubleshooters rather than strategic partners. This suggests a widespread lack of understanding of the value and impact of project management at the C-suite level.
    • Very few C-suite executives associate project managers with "realizing visions," being "essential," or being "changemakers."
    • Strong strategic alignment between the PMO and the C-suite helps to reinforce the value of project management capabilities in achieving wider strategic aims.

    Source: PMI, Narrowing The Talent Gap, 2021

    Hiring practices have yet to change in response to the PMI’s moves

    The PMP is still the standard, even for organizations transitioning to Agile and PMO/portfolio jobs.

    • Savvy business leaders are still unsure about how Agile will impact them in the long term.
    • According to the Narrowing the Talent Gap report, PMI and PwC’s latest global research indicates that talent strategies haven’t changed much. There’s a widespread lack of focus on developing and retaining existing project managers, and a lack of variety and innovation in attracting and recruiting new talent. The core problem is that there isn’t a business case for investment in talent.

    Noteworthy Agile certifications to consider

    AGILE Certified Practioner(PMI-ACP) and Certified ScrumMaster(CSM) certification details.

    Source: PMI, “Agile Certifications,” and ScrumAlliance, “Become a Certified ScrumMaster.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is a lot of chatter about which Agile certification is better, and the jury is still out with no consensus. There are pros and cons to both certifications. We believe the PMI-ACP will give you more mileage and flexibility because of its breath of coverage in the Agile practice compared to the CSM.

    The talent shortage is a considerable risk to organizations

    • According to the PMI’s 2021 Talent Gap report1, the talent gap is likely to impact every region. By 2030, at least 13 million project managers are expected to have retired, creating additional challenges for recruitment. To close the gap, 25 million new project professionals are needed by 2030.
    • Young project managers will change the profession. Millennials and Generation Z are bringing fresh perspectives to projects. Learning to work alongside these younger generations isn't optional, as they increasingly dominate the labor force and extend their influence.
    • Millennials have already arrived: According to Pew Research2, this group surpassed Gen X in 2016 and is now the largest generation in the US labor force.

    1. PMI, Talent Gap, 2021.
    2. PM Network, 2019.

    Money talks – the PMP is still your best payoff

    It is a financially rewarding profession!

    The median salary for PMP holders in the US is 25% higher than those without PMP certification.

    On a global level, the Project Management Professional (PMP) certification has been shown to bolster salary levels. Holders of the PMP certification report higher median salaries than those without a PMP certification – 16% higher on average across the 40 countries surveyed.

    Source: PMI, Earning Power, 2021

    Determine which skills and capabilities are needed in the coming years

    • A scan of 2022 PM and PMO postings still shows continued dominance of the PMP certification requirement.
    • People and relationships have become more important than predicting budgets and timelines.
    • The PMI and PwC Global Survey on Transformation and Project Management 2021 identified the top five skills/capabilities for project managers (in order of priority):
      1. Relationship building
      2. Collaborative leadership
      3. Strategic thinking
      4. Creative problem solving
      5. Commercial awareness

    Source: PMI, Narrowing The Talent Gap, 2021.

    Prepare for product delivery by focusing on top digital-age skills

    According to the PMI Megatrends 2022 report, they have identified six areas as the top digital-age skills for product delivery:

    1. Innovative mindset
    2. Legal and regulatory compliance knowledge
    3. Security and privacy knowledge
    4. Data science skills
    5. Ability to make data-driven decisions
    6. Collaborative leadership skills

    Many organizations aren’t considering candidates who don’t have project-related qualifications. Indeed, many more are increasing the requirements for their qualifications than those who are reducing it.

    Source: PMI, Narrowing The Talent Gap, 2021

    Prioritize training and development at the C-suite level

    Currently, there is an imbalance with more emphasis of training on tools, processes, techniques, and methodologies rather than business acumen skills, collaboration, and management skills. With the explosion of remote work, training needs to be revamped and, in some cases, redesigned altogether to accommodate remote employees.

    Train of gears Labeled: Training. Gears from left to right are labeled: Knowledge, coaching, skills, developement, and experience.

    Lack of strategic prioritization is evident in how training and development is being done, with organizations largely not embracing a diversity of learning preferences and opportunities.

    Source: PMI, Narrowing The Talent Gap, 2021

    PM is evolving into a more strategic role

    • Ensure program and portfolio management roles are supported by the most appropriate certifications.
    • For project managers that have evolved beyond the iron triangle of managing projects, there is applicability to the PgMP and the PfMP for program managers, portfolio managers, and those in charge of PMOs.
    • Although these certifications have not been widely adopted due to lack of awareness and engagement at the decision-maker level, they still hold merit and prestige within the project management community.

    Project managers are evolving. No longer creatures of scope, schedule, and budget alone, they are now – enabled by new technology – focusing on influencing outcomes, building relationships, and achieving the strategic goals of their organizations.

    Source: PMI, Narrowing the Talent Gap, 2021

    Overhaul your recruitment practices to align with skills/capabilities

    World map with cartoon profile images, linked in a network.

    Talent managers will need to retool their toolbox to fill the capability gap and to look beyond where the role is geographically based by embracing flexible staffing models.

    They will need to evolve their talent strategies in line with changing business priorities.

    Organizations should be actively working to increase the diversity of candidates and upskilling young people in underrepresented communities as a priority.

    Most organizations are still relying on traditional approaches to recruit talent. Although we are prioritizing power skills and business acumen, we are still searching in the same, shrinking pool of talent.

    Source: PMI, Narrowing the Talent Gap, 2021.

    Bibliography

    “Agile Certifications for Every Step in Your Career.” PMI. Web.

    “Become a Certified ScrumMaster and Help Your Team Thrive.” ScrumAlliance. Web.

    “Become a Project Manager.” PMI. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    Bucero, A. “The Next Evolution: Young Project Managers Will Change the Profession: Here's What Organizations Need to Know.” PM Network, 2019, 33(6), 26–27.

    “Certification Framework.” PMI. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    “Certifications.” PMI. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    DePrisco, Mike. Global Megatrends 2022. “Foreword.” PMI, 2022. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    Earning Power: Project Management Salary Survey. 12th ed. PMI, 2021. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    “Global Research From PMI and PwC Reveals Attributes and Strategies of the World’s Leading Project Management Offices.” PMI, 1 Mar. 2022. Press Release. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    Narrowing the Talent Gap. PMI, 2021. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    “PMP Certification.” PMI. Accessed 4 Aug. 2022.

    “Project Management Body of Knowledge.” Wikipedia, Wikimedia Foundation, 29 Aug. 2022.

    “Project Portfolio Management Pulse Survey 2021.” PwC. Accessed 30 Aug. 2022.

    Talent Gap: Ten-Year Employment Trends, Costs, and Global Implications. PMI. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    “The Critical Path.” ProjectManagement.com. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    “True Business Agility Starts Here.” PMI. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    White, Sarah K. and Sharon Florentine. “Top 15 Project Management Certifications.” CIO.com, 22 Apr. 2022. Web.

    “Why You Should Get the PMP.” PMI. Accessed 14 Sept. 2022.

    ChatGPT Beyond the hype. What can it do for you?

    Summary of the deck.

    ChatGPT is a generative AI tool developed by OpenAI, a non-profit founded by Silicon Valley titans, including Elon Musk and Sam Altman. It is designed to interact with users in a way that mimics human dialogue. The tool became available via a research release on November 30, 2022, and was an immediate hit – within a week; it attracted more than a million users. Functionally, ChatGPT is designed to answer questions, but it is not the first one. The concept has existed for decades. While it is very powerful, it has also attracted criticism. 

    IT Operations, strategy

    Register to read more …

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}173|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $39,942 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 23 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Almost two-thirds of organizations report that they have too many or far too many applications due to sprawl from poorly managed portfolios, and application managers are spending too much time supporting non-critical applications and not enough time on their most vital ones.
    • The necessary pieces of rationalization are rarely in one place. You need to assemble the resources to collect vital rationalization criteria.
    • There is a lack of standard practices to define the business value that the applications in a portfolio provide, and without value rationalization, decisions are misaligned to business needs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    There is no “one size fits all.” Applying a rigid approach to rationalization with inflexible inputs can delay or prevent you from realizing value. Play to your strengths and build a framework that aligns to your goals and limitations.

    Impact and Result

    • Define the roles, responsibilities, and outputs for application rationalization within your application portfolio management practice.
    • Build a tailored application rationalization framework (ARF) aligned with your motivations, goals, and limitations.
    • Apply the various application assessments to produce the information that your dispositions will be based on.
    • Initiate an application portfolio roadmap that will showcase your rationalization decisions to key stakeholders.

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should rationalize your applications and why you need a framework that is specific to your goals and limitations, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Lay your foundations

    Define the motivations, goals, and scope of your rationalization effort. Build the action plan and engagement tactics to roll out the rationalization activities.

    • Build an Application Rationalization Framework – Phase 1: Lay Your Foundations
    • Application Rationalization Tool

    2. Plan your application rationalization framework

    Understand the core assessments performed in application rationalizations. Define your application rationalization framework and degree of rigor in applying these assessments based on your goals and limitations.

    • Build an Application Rationalization Framework – Phase 2: Plan Your Application Rationalization Framework

    3. Test and adapt your application rationalization framework

    Test your application rationalization framework using Info-Tech’s tool set on your first iteration. Perform a retrospective and adapt your framework based on that experience and outcomes.

    • Build an Application Rationalization Framework – Phase 3: Test and Adapt Your Application Rationalization Framework
    • Application TCO Calculator
    • Value Calculator

    4. Initiate your roadmap

    Review, determine, and prioritize your dispositions to ensure they align to your goals. Initiate an application portfolio roadmap to showcase your rationalization decisions to key stakeholders.

    • Build an Application Rationalization Framework – Phase 4: Initiate Your Roadmap
    • Disposition Prioritization Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Your Foundations

    The Purpose

    Define the goals, scope, roles, and responsibilities of your rationalization effort.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined motivations, long and short-term goals, and metrics for your rationalization effort.

    Definition of application.

    Defined roles and responsibilities for your rationalization effort.

    Activities

    1.1 Define motivations and goals for rationalization.

    1.2 Define “application.”

    1.3 Identify team and responsivities.

    1.4 Adapt target dispositions.

    1.5 Initiate Application Rationalization Framework (ARF).

    Outputs

    Goals, motivations, and metrics for rationalizations

    Definition of “Application”

    Defined dispositions

    Defined core APM team and handoffs

    2 Assess Business Value

    The Purpose

    Review and adapt Info-Tech’s methodology and toolset.

    Assess business value of applications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Tailored application rationalization framework

    Defined business value drivers

    Business value scores for applications

    Activities

    2.1 Review Application Rationalization Tool.

    2.2 Review focused apps, capabilities, and areas of functionality overlap.

    2.3 Define business value drivers.

    2.4 Determine the value score of focused apps.

    Outputs

    Application Rationalization Tool

    List of functional overlaps

    Weighed business value drivers

    Value scores for focused application

    Value Calculator

    3 Gather Application Information

    The Purpose

    Continue to review and adapt Info-Tech’s methodology and toolset.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Tailored application rationalization framework

    TCO values for applications

    Technical health review of applications

    Recommended dispositions for applications

    Activities

    3.1 Determine TCO for focused apps.

    3.2 Determine technical health of focused apps.

    3.3 Review APA.

    3.4 Review recommended dispositions.

    3.5 Perform retrospective of assessments and adapt ARF.

    Outputs

    TCO of focused applications

    TCO Calculator

    Technical health of focused apps

    Defined rationalization criteria

    Recommended disposition for focused apps

    4 Gather, Assess, and Select Dispositions

    The Purpose

    Review and perform high-level prioritization of dispositions.

    Build a roadmap for dispositions.

    Determine ongoing rationalization and application portfolio management activities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Application Portfolio Roadmap

    Prioritized Dispositions

    Activities

    4.1 Determine dispositions.

    4.2 Prioritize dispositions.

    4.3 Initiate portfolio roadmap.

    4.4 Build an action plan for next iterations and ongoing activities.

    4.5 Finalize ARF.

    Outputs

    Disposition Prioritization Tool

    Application portfolio roadmap

    Action plan for next iterations and ongoing activities

    Further reading

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    Manage your application portfolio to minimize risk and maximize value.

    Analyst Perspective

    "You're not rationalizing for the sake of IT, you’re rationalizing your apps to create better outcomes for the business and your customers. Consider what’s in it for delivery, operations, the business, and the customer." – Cole Cioran, Senior Director – Research, Application Delivery and Management

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • Application portfolio managers, application portfolio management (APM) teams, or any application leaders who are tasked with making application portfolio decisions.
    • Application leaders looking to align their portfolios to the organization’s strategy.
    • Application leaders who need a process for rationalizing their applications.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Measure the business value of your applications.
    • Rationalize your portfolio to determine the best disposition for each application.
    • Initiate a roadmap that will showcase the future of your applications.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CIOs and other business leaders who need to understand the applications in their portfolio, the value they contribute to the business, and their strategic direction over a given timeline.
    • Steering committees and/or the PMO that needs to understand the process by which application dispositions are generated.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Build their reputation as an IT leader who drives the business forward.
    • Define the organization’s value statement in the context of IT and their applications.
    • Visualize the roadmap to the organization’s target application landscape.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Almost two-thirds of organizations report that they have too many or far too many applications due to sprawl from poorly managed portfolios (Flexera, 2015).
    • Application managers are spending too much time supporting non-critical applications and not enough time on their most vital ones.
    • Application managers need their portfolios to be current and effective and evolve continuously to support the business or risk being marginalized.

    Complication

    • The necessary pieces of rationalization are rarely in one place. You need to assemble the resources to collect vital rationalization criteria.
    • There is a lack of standard practices to define the business value that the applications in a portfolio provide and, without value rationalization, decisions are misaligned to business needs.

    Resolution

    • Define the roles, responsibilities, and outputs for application rationalization within your application portfolio management (APM) and other related practices.
    • Build a tailored application rationalization framework (ARF) aligned with your motivations, goals, and limitations.
    • Apply the various application assessments to produce the information, which your dispositions will be based on, and adapt your ARF based on the experiences of your first iteration.
    • Review, determine, and prioritize your application dispositions to create a portfolio strategy aligned to your goals.
    • Initiate an application portfolio roadmap, which will showcase your rationalization decisions to key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no one size fits all.

    Applying a rigid approach with inflexible inputs can delay or prevent you from realizing value. Play to your strengths and build a framework that aligns to your goals and limitations.

    Business value must drive your decisions.

    Of the 11 vendor capabilities asked about by Info-Tech’s SoftwareReviews, “business value created” has the second highest relationship with overall software satisfaction.

    Take an iterative approach.

    Larger approaches take longer and are more likely to fail. Identify the applications that best address your strategic objectives, then: rationalize, learn, repeat.

    Info-Tech recommends a disciplined, step-by-step approach as outlined in our Application Portfolio Strategy Program

    Step 1 "No Knowledge": Define application capabilities and visualize lifecycle stages

    Application Discovery

    1. Build in Application Portfolio Management Principles.
    2. Conduct Application Alignment.
    3. Build Detailed Application Inventory

    Step 2 "No Strategy": Rationalize application portfolio and visualize strategic directions

    Application Rationalization

    1. Set Your Rationalization Framework
    2. Conduct Assessment & Assign Dispositions
    3. Create an Application Portfolio Roadmap

    Step 3 "No Plan": Build a product roadmap and visualize the detailed plan

    Detailed Disposition Planning

    1. Conduct an Impact Assessment
    2. Determine the Details of the Disposition
    3. Create Detailed Product Roadmaps

    This blueprint focuses on step 2 of Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Strategy Program. Our methodology assumes you have completed the following activities, which are outlined in Discover Your Applications.

    • Collected your full application inventory (including Shadow IT)
    • Aligned applications to business capabilities
    • Determined redundant applications
    • Identified appropriate subject matter experts (business and technical) for your applications

    Info-Tech's four-phase methodology

    Phase 1

    Lay Your Foundations

    • Define Motivations, Goals, and Scope
    • Iteration and Engagement Planning

    This phase is intended to establish the fundamentals in launching either a rationalization initiative or ongoing practice.

    Here we define goals, scope, and the involvement of various roles from both IT and the business.

    Phase 2

    Plan Your ARF

    • Establish Rationalization Inputs and Current Gaps

    This phase is intended to review a high-level approach to rationalization and determine which analyses are necessary and their appropriate level of depth.

    Here we produce an initial ARF and discuss any gaps in terms of the availability of necessary data points and additional collection methods that will need to be applied.

    Phase 3

    Test and Adapt Your ARF

    • Perform First Iteration Analysis
    • First Iteration Retrospective and Adaptation

    This phase is intended to put the ARF into action and adapt as necessary to ensure success in your organization.

    If appropriate, here we apply Info-Tech’s ARF and toolset and test it against a set of applications to determine how best to adapt these materials for your needs.

    Phase 4

    Initiate Your Roadmap

    • Prioritize and Roadmap Applications
    • Ongoing Rationalization and Roadmapping

    This phase is intended to capture results of rationalization and solidify your rationalization initiative or ongoing practice.

    Here we aim to inject your dispositions into an application portfolio roadmap and ensure ongoing governance of APM activities.

    There is an inconsistent understanding and ownership of the application portfolio

    What can I discover about my portfolio?

    Application portfolios are misunderstood.

    Portfolios are viewed as only supportive in nature. There is no strategy or process to evaluate application portfolios effectively. As a result, organizations build a roadmap with a lack of understanding of their portfolio.

    72% of organizations do not have an excellent understanding of the application portfolio (Capgemini).

    How can I improve my portfolio?

    Misalignment between Applications and Business Operations

    Applications fail to meet their intended function, resulting in duplication, a waste of resources, and a decrease in ROI. This makes it harder for IT to justify to the business the reasons to complete a roadmap.

    48% of organizations believe that there are more applications than the business requires (Capgemini).

    How can my portfolio help transform the business?

    IT's budget is to keep the lights on.

    The application portfolio is complex and pervasive and requires constant support from IT. This makes it increasingly difficult for IT to adopt or develop new strategies since its immediate goal will always be to fix what already exists. This causes large delays and breaks in the timeline to complete a roadmap.

    68% of IT directors have wasted time and money because they did not have better visibility of application roadmaps (ComputerWeekly).

    Roadmaps can be the solution, but stall when they lack the information needed for good decision making

    An application portfolio roadmap provides a visual representation of your application portfolio, is used to plan out the portfolio’s strategy over a given time frame, and assists management in key decisions. But…

    • You can’t change an app without knowing its backend.
    • You can't rationalize what you don't know.
    • You can’t confirm redundancies without knowing every app.
    • You can’t rationalize without the business perspective.

    A roadmap is meaningless if you haven’t done any analysis to understand the multiple perspectives on your applications.

    Application rationalization ensures roadmaps reflect what the business actually wants and needs

    Application rationalization is the practice of strategically identifying business applications across an organization to determine which applications should be kept, replaced, retired, or consolidated (TechTarget).

    Discover, Improve, and Transform Through Application Rationalization

    Your application rationalization effort increases the maturity of your roadmap efforts by increasing value to the business. Go beyond the discover phase – leverage application rationalization insights to reach the improve and transform phases.

    Strong Apps Are Key to Business Satisfaction

    79% of organizations with high application suite satisfaction believe that IT offers the organization a competitive edge over others in the industry. (Info-Tech Research Group, N=230)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Companies with an effective portfolio are twice as likely to report high-quality applications, four times as likely to report high proficiency in legacy apps management, and six times as likely to report strong business alignment.

    Rationalization comes at a justified cost

    Rationalization can reduce costs and drive innovation

    Projecting the ROI of application rationalization is difficult and dangerous when used as the only marker for success.

    However, rationalization, when done effectively, will help drop operational or maintenance costs of your applications as well as provide many more opportunities to add value to the business.

    A graph with Time on the X-axis and Cost on the Y axis. The graph compares cost before rationalization, where the cost of the existing portfolio is high, with cost after rationalization, where the cost of the existing portfolio is reduced. The graph demonstrates a decrease in overall portfolio spend after rationalization

    Organizations lack a strategic approach to application rationalization, leading to failure

    IT leaders strive to push the business forward but are stuck in a cycle of reaction where they manage short-term needs rather than strategic approaches.

    Why Is This the Case?

    Lack of Relevant Information

    Rationalization fails without appropriately detailed, accurate, and up-to-date information. You need to identify what information is available and assemble the teams to collect and analyze it.

    Failure to Align With Business Objectives

    Rationalization fails when you lack a clear list of strategic and collaborative priorities; priorities need to be both IT and non-IT related to align with the business objectives and provide value.

    IT Leaders Fails to Justify Projects

    Adhering to a rigid rationalization process can be complex and costly. Play to your strengths and build an ARF based on your goals and limitations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Misaligned portfolio roadmaps are known to lead teams and projects into failure!
    Building an up-to-date portfolio roadmap that aligns business objectives to IT objectives will increase approval and help the business see the long-term value of roadmapping.

    Don’t start in the middle; ensure you have the basics down

    Application portfolio strategy practice maturity stages

    1. Discover Your Applications
    2. Improve
    3. Transform
    A graph with Rigor of APM Practice on the X-axis and Value to the Business on the Y-axis. The content of the graph is split into the 3 maturity stages, Discover, Improve, and Transform. With each step, the Value to the Business and Rigor of APM Practice increase.

    Disambiguate your systems and clarify your scope

    Define the items that make up your portfolio.

    Broad or unclear definitions of “application” can complicate the scope of rationalization. Take the time to define an application and come to a common understanding of the systems which will be the focus of your rationalization effort.

    Bundling systems under common banner or taking a product view of your applications and components can be an effective way to ensure you include your full collection of systems, without having to perform too many individual assessments.

    Scope

    Single... Capability enabled by... Whole...
    Digital Product + Service Digital Platform Platform Portfolio Customer Facing
    Product (one or more apps) Product Family Product Portfolio

    Application Application Architecture Application Portfolio Internal

    A graphic listing the following products: UI, Applications, Middleware, Data, and Infrastructure. A banner reading APIs runs through all products, and UI, Applications, and Middleware are bracketed off as Application

    Info-Tech’s framework can be applied to portfolios of apps, products, and their related capabilities or services.

    However you organize your tech stack, Info-Tech’s application rationalization framework can be applied.

    Understand the multiple lenses of application rationalization and include in your framework

    There are many lenses to view your applications. Rationalize your applications using all perspectives to assess your portfolio and determine the most beneficial course of action.

    Application Alignment - Architect Perspective

    How well does the entire portfolio align to your business capabilities?

    Are there overlaps or redundancies in your application features?

    Covered in Discover Your Applications.

    Business Value - CEO Perspective

    Is the application producing sufficient business value?

    Does it impact profitability, enable capabilities, or add any critical factor that fulfills the mission and vision?

    TCO - CIO Perspective

    What is the overall cost of the application?

    What is the projected cost as your organization grows? What is the cost to maintain the application?

    End User

    How does the end user perceive the application?

    What is the user experience?

    Do the features adequately support the intended functions?

    Is the application important or does it have high utilization?

    Technical Value - App Team Perspective

    What is the state of the backend of the application?

    Has the application maintained sufficient code quality? Is the application reliable? How does it fit into your application architecture?

    Each perspective requires its own analysis and is an area of criteria for rationalization.

    Apply the appropriate amount of rigor for your ARF based on your specific goals and limitations

    Ideally, the richer the data the better the results, but the reality is in-depth analysis is challenging and you’ll need to play to your strengths to be successful.

    Light-Weight Assessment

    App to capability alignment.

    Determine overlaps.

    Subjective 1-10 scale

    Subjective T-shirt size (high, med., low)

    End-user surveys

    Performance temperature check

    Thorough Analysis

    App to process alignment.

    Determine redundancies.

    Apply a value measurement framework.

    Projected TCO with traceability to ALM & financial records.

    Custom build interviews with multiple end users

    Tool and metric-based analysis

    There is no one-size-fits all rationalization. The primary goal of this blueprint is to help you determine the appropriate level of analysis given your motivations and goals for this effort as well as the limitations of resources, timeline, and accessible information.

    Rationalize and build your application portfolio strategy the right way to ensure success

    Big-Bang Approach

    • An attempt to assess the whole portfolio at once.
    • The result is information overload.
    • Information gathered is likely incomplete and/or inaccurate.
    • Tangible benefits are a long time away.

    Covert Approach

    • Information is collected behind the scenes and whenever information sources are available.
    • Assumptions about the business use of applications go unconfirmed.

    Corner-of-the-Desk Approach

    • No one is explicitly dedicated to building a strategy or APM practices.
    • Information is collected whenever the application team has time available.
    • Benefits are pushed out and value is lost.

    Iterative Approach

    • Carried out in phases, concentrating on individual business units or subsets of applications.
    • Priority areas are completed first.
    • The APM practice strengthens through experience.

    Sponsored Mandate Approach

    • The appropriate business stakeholders participate.
    • Rationalization is given project sponsors who champion the practice and communicate the benefits across the organization.

    Dedicated Approach

    • Rationalization and other APM activities are given a budget and formal agenda.
    • Roles and responsibilities are assigned to team members.

    Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment Diagnostic to add the end users’ perspective to your decision making

    Prior to Blueprint: Call 1-888-670-8889 to inquire about or request the Application Portfolio Assessment.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The approach in this blueprint has been designed in coordination with Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic. While it is not a prerequisite, your project will experience the best results and be completed much quicker by taking advantage of our diagnostic offering prior to initiating the activities in this blueprint.

    Use the program diagnostic to:

    • Assess the importance and satisfaction of enterprise applications.
    • Solicit feedback from your end users on applications being used.
    • Understand the strengths and weaknesses of your current applications.
    • Perform a high-level application rationalization initiative.

    Integrate diagnostic results to:

    • Target which applications to analyze in greater detail.
    • Expand on the initial application rationalization results with a more comprehensive and business-value-focused criteria.

    Use Info-Tech’s Application Rationalization Tool to determine and then visualize your application portfolio strategy

    At the center of this project is an Application Rationalization Tool that is used as a living document of your:

      1. Customizable Application Rationalization Framework

      2. Recommendation Dispositions

      3. Application Portfolio Roadmap (seen below)

    Use the step-by-step advice within this blueprint to rationalize your application portfolio and build a realistic and accurate application roadmap that drives business value.

    Central to our approach to application rationalization are industry-leading frameworks

    Info-Tech uses the APQC and COBIT5 frameworks for certain areas of this research. Contextualizing application rationalization within these frameworks clarifies its importance and role and ensures that our assessment tool is focused on key priority areas. The APQC and COBIT5 frameworks are used as a starting point for assessing application effectiveness within specific business capabilities of the different components of application rationalization.

    APQC is one of the world's leading proponents of business benchmarking, best practices, and knowledge management research.

    COBIT 5 is the leading framework for the governance and management of enterprise IT.

    In addition to industry-leading frameworks, our best-practice approach is enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

    Our peer network of over 33,000 happy clients proves the effectiveness of our research.

    Our team conducts 1,000+ hours of primary and secondary research to ensure that our approach is enhanced by best practices.

    A public utility organization is using Info-Tech’s approach for rationalization of its applications for reduced complexity

    Case Study

    Industry: Public Sector

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    Challenge

    • The public utility has a complex application portfolio, with a large number of applications custom-built that provide limited functionality to certain business groups.
    • The organization needed to move away from custom point solutions and adopt more hosted solutions to cater to larger audiences across business domains.
    • The organization required a comprehensive solution for the following:
      • Understanding how applications are being used by business users.
      • Unraveling the complexity of its application landscape using a formal rationalization process.

    Solution

    • The organization went through a rationalization process with Info-Tech in a four-day onsite engagement to determine the following:
      • Satisfaction level and quality evaluation of end users’ perception of application functionality.
      • Confirmation on what needs to be done with each application under assessment.
      • The level of impact the necessary changes required for a particular application would have on the greater app ecosystem.
      • Prioritization methodology for application roadmap implementation.

    Results

    • Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment Diagnostic report helped the public utility understand what applications users valued and found difficult to use.
    • The rationalization process gave insight into situations where functionality was duplicated across multiple applications and could be consolidated within one application.
    • The organization determined that its application portfolio was highly complex, and Info-Tech provided a good framework for more in-depth analysis.
    • The organization now has a rationalization process that it can take to other business domains.

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}38|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}38|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Disaster Recovery Planning
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $92,268
    • member rating average days saved: 36
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk
    The show must go on. Make sure your IT has right-sized DR capabilities.

    Create and Implement an IoT Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}57|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Disruptive & Emerging Technologies
    • Parent Category Link: /disruptive-emerging-technologies

    While the Internet of Things (IoT) or smart devices have the potential to transform businesses, they have to be implemented strategically to drive value. The business often engages directly with vendors, and many IoT solutions are implemented as point solutions with IT being brought in very late in the process.

    This leads to challenges with integration, communication, and data aggregation and storage. IT is often also left grappling with many new devices that need to be inventoried, added to lifecycle management practices, and secured.

    Unlock the true potential of IoT with early IT involvement

    As IoT solutions become more common, IT leaders must work closely with business stakeholders early in the process to ensure that IoT solutions make the most of opportunities and mitigate risks.

    1. Ensure that IoT solutions meet business needs: Assess IoT solutions to ensure that they meet business requirements and align with business strategy.
    2. Make integration and management smooth: Build and execute plans so IoT devices integrate with existing infrastructure and multiple devices can be managed efficiently.
    3. Ensure privacy and security: IoT solutions should meet clearly outlined privacy and security requirements and comply with regulations such as GDPR and CCPA.
    4. Collect and store data systematically: Manage what data will be collected and aggregated and how it will be stored so that the business can recognize value from the data with minimal risk.

    Create and Implement an IoT Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create and Implement an IoT Strategy Deck – A framework to assess and onboard IoT devices into your environment.

    The storyboard will help to create a steering committee and a playbook to quickly assess IoT ideas to determine the best way to support these ideas, test them in Proof of concepts, when appropriate, and give the business the confidence they need to get the right solution for the job and to know that IT can support them long term.

    • Create and Implement an IoT Strategy – Phases 1-3

    2. Steering Committee Charter Template – Improve governance starting with a steering committee charter to help you clearly define the role of the steering committee to improve outcomes.

    Create a steering committee to improve success of IoT implementations.

    • IoT Steering Committee Charter Template

    3. IoT Solution Playbook – Create an IoT playbook to define a framework to quickly assess new solutions and determine the best time and method for onboarding into your operational environment.

    Create a framework to quickly evaluate IoT solutions to mitigate risks and increase success.

    • IoT Solution Playbook

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Create and Implement an IoT Strategy

    Gain control of your IoT environment

    Create and Implement an IoT Strategy

    Gain control of your IoT environment

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Table of Contents

    Page Contents Page Contents
    4 Analyst Perspective 27 Phase 2: Define the intake & assessment process
    5 Executive Summary 29 Define requirements for requesting new IoT solutions
    7 Common Obstacles 32 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – BA/BRM
    8 Framework 38 Define criteria for assessing proposals and projects – data specialists
    9 Insight Summary 43 Define criteria for assessing proposals & projects – Privacy & Security
    10 Blueprint deliverables 47 Define criteria for assessing proposals & projects – Infrastructure & Operations
    11 Blueprint benefits 48 Define service objectives & evaluation process
    13 Measure the value of IoT 49 Phase 3: Prepare for a proof of value
    15 Guided Implementation 58 Create a template for designing a proof of value
    16 Phase 1: Define your governance process 59 Communications
    21 Define the committee’s roles & responsibilities 60 Research contributors and experts
    23 Define the IoT steering committee’s vision statement and mandate 61 Related InfoTech Research
    26 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects

    Analyst perspective

    IoT is an extremely efficient automated data collection system which produces millions of pieces of data. Many organizations will purchase point solutions to help with their primary business function to increase efficiency, increase profitability, and most importantly provide scalable services that cannot exist without automated data collection and analytical tools.

    Most of the solutions available are designed to perform a specific function within the parameters of the devices and applications designed by vendors. As these specific use cases proliferate within any organization, the data collected can end up housed in many places, owned by each specific business unit and used only for the originally designed purpose. Imagine though, if you could take the health information of many patients, anonymize it, and compare overall health of specific regions, rather than focusing only on the patient record as a correlated point; or many data points within cities to look at pedestrian, bike, and vehicle traffic to better plan infrastructure changes, improve city plans, and monitor pollution, then compared to other cities for additional modeling.

    In order to make these dramatic shifts to using many IoT solutions, it’s time to look at creating an IoT strategy that will ensure all systems meet strategic goals and will enable disparate data to be aggregated for greater insights. The act of aggregation of systems and data will require additional scrutiny to mitigate the potential perils for privacy, management, security, and auditability

    The strategy identifies who stewards use of the data, who manages devices, and how IT enables broader use of this technology. But with the increased volume of devices and data, operational efficiency as part of the strategy will also be critical to success.

    This project takes you through the process of defining vision and governance, creating a process for evaluating proposed solutions for proof of value, and implementing operational effectiveness.

    Photo of Sandi Conrad, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The business needs to move quickly to adopt new ways to collect and analyze data or automate actions. IoT may be the right answer, but it can be complex and create new challenges for IT teams.

    Many of these solutions are implemented by vendors as point solutions, but more organizations are recognizing they need to bring the data in-house to start driving insights.

    As IoT solutions become more prolific, the need to get more involved in securing and managing these solutions has become evident.

    Common Obstacles

    The business is often engaging directly with the vendors to better understand how they can benefit from these solutions, and IT is often brought in when the solution is ready to go live.

    When IT isn’t involved early, there may be challenges around integrations, communications, and getting access to data.

    Management becomes challenging as many devices are suddenly entering the environment, which need to be inventoried, added to lifecycle management practices, and secured.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach starts with assessing the proposed solutions to:

    • Ensure they will meet the business need.
    • Understand data structure for integration to central data store.
    • Ensure privacy and security needs can be met.
    • Determine effort and technical requirements for integration into the infrastructure and appropriate onboarding into operations.

    Early intervention will improve results. IoT is one of the biggest challenges for IT departments to manage today. The large volume of devices and lack of insight into vendor solutions is making it significantly harder to plan for upgrades and contract renewals, and to guarantee security protocols are being met. Create a multistep onboarding process, starting with an initial assessment process to increase success for the business, then look to derive additional benefits to the business and mitigate risks.

    Your challenge

    Scaling up and out from an IoT point solution is complicated and requires collaboration from stakeholders that may not have worked well together before
    • Point solutions may be installed and configured with support outsourced to vendors, where integrations may be light or non-existent.
    • Each point solution will be owned by the business, with data used for a specific purpose, and may only require infrastructure support from the internal IT department.
    • Operational needs must be met to protect the business’ investment, and without involving IT early, agreements may be signed that don’t meet long-term goals of high value at reasonable prices.
    • To fully realize value from multiple disparate systems, a cohesive strategy to bring together data will be required, but with that comes a need to improve technology, determine data ownership, and improve oversight with strengthened security, privacy, and communications.
    • Where IoT is becoming a major source of data, taking a piecemeal approach will no longer be enough to be successful.

    IoT solutions may be chosen by the business, but to be successful and meet their requirements, a partnership with IT will ensure better communications with the service provider for a less stressful implementation with governance over security needs and protection of the organization’s data, and it will ensure that continual value is enabled through effective operations.

    Pie chart titled 'IoT project success' with '12% Fully successful', '30% Mostly successful', '40% Mostly unsuccessful', and 'Not at all successful'.
    (Source: Beecham Research qtd. in Software AG)

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make IoT challenging to implement for many organizations:
    • Solutions managed outside of IT, whether through an operational technology team or an outsourced vender, will require a comprehensive approach that encourages collaboration, common understandings of risk, and the ability to embrace change.
    • Technical expertise required will be broad and deep for a multi-solution implementation. Many types of devices, with varied connections and communications methods, will need to be architected with flexibility to accommodate changing technology and scalability needs.
    • Understanding the myriad options available and where it makes sense to deploy cutting-edge vs. proven technologies, as well as edge computing and digital twins.
    • External consultants specializing in IoT may need to be engaged to make these complex solutions successful, and they also need to be skilled in facilitating discussions within teams to bring them to a common understanding.
    • Analysis skills and a data strategy will be key to successfully correlating data from multiple sources, and AI will be key to making sense of vast amounts of data available and be able to use it for predictive work. According to the Microsoft IoT Signals report of October 2020, “79% of organizations adopt AI as part of their IoT solution, and those who do perceive IoT to be more critical to their company’s success (95% vs. 82%) and are more satisfied with IoT (96% vs. 87%).“
    Pie chart with two tiers titled 'Challenges to using IT'. The inner circle are challenge categories like 'Security', 'Lack of budget/staff', and the outer circle are the more specific challenges within them, such as 'Concerned about consumer privacy' and 'No human resources to implement & manage'.
    (Source: Microsoft IoT Signals, Edition 2, October 2020 n=3,000)

    Internet of Things Framework

    Interoperability of multiple IoT systems and data will be required to maximize value.

    GOVERNANCE

    What should I build? What are my concerns?
    Where should I build it? Why does it need to be built?

    DATA MODEL ——› BUSINESS OPERATING MODEL
    Data quality
    Metadata
    Persistence
    Lifecycle
    Sales, marketing
    Product manufacturing
    Service delivery
    Operations

    |—›

    BUSINESS USE CASE

    ‹—|
    Customer facing Internal facing ROI
    ˆ
    |
    ETHICS
    Deliberate misuse
    Unintentional consequences
    Right to informed consent
    Active vs. passive consent
    Bias
    Profit vs. common good
    Acceptable/fair use
    Responsibility assignment
    Autonomous action
    Transparency
    Vendor ethical implications
    ˆ
    |
    TECHNICAL OPERATIONAL MODEL
    Personal data
    Customer data
    Non-customer data
    Public data
    Third-party business data
    Data rights/proprietary data
    Identification
    Vendor data
    Profiling (Sharing/linkage of data sets)

    CONTROLS

    How do I operate and maintain it?

    1. SECURITY
      • Risk identification and assessment
      • Threat modeling – ineffective because of scale
      • Dumb, cheap endpoints without users
      • Massive attack surface
      • Data/system availability
      • Physical access to devices
      • Response to anonymized individuals
    2. COMPLIANCE
      • Internal
      • External
        NIST, SOC, ISO
        Profession/industry
      • Ethics
      • Regulatory
        PII, GDPR, PIPEDA
        Audit process
    1. OPERATIONAL STANDARDS
      • Industry best practices
      • Open standards vs. proprietary ones
      • Standardization
      • Automation
      • Vendor management
    2. TECHNICAL OPERATIONAL MODEL
      • Platforms
      • Insourcing/outsourcing
      • Acquisition
      • Asset management
      • Patching
      • Data protection
      • Source image control
      • Software development lifecycle
      • Vendor management
      • Disposition/disposal

    BRIDGING THE PHYSICAL WORLD AND THE VIRTUAL WORLD

    How should it be built?

    Diagram with 'Physical World' 'Internet of Things Devices' on the left, connected to 'Virtual World' 'Central Compute (Cloud/Data Center)', 'Edge Computing', and 'Business Systems and Applications' via 'Data - data-verified= Data Normalization' from physical to virtual and 'Instructions' from virtual to physical.">

    Insight summary

    Real value to the business will come from insights derived from data

    Many point solutions will solve many business issues and produce many data sets. Ensure your strategy includes plans on how to leverage data to further your organizational goals. A data specialist will make a significant difference in helping you determine how best to aggregate and analyze data to meet those needs.

    Provide the right level of oversight to help the business adopt IoT

    Regardless of who is initiating the request or installing the solution, it’s critical to have a framework that protects the organization and their data and a plan for managing the devices.

    The business doesn’t always know what questions to ask, so it’s important for IT to enable them if moving to a business-led innovation model, and it’s critical to helping them achieve business value early.

    Do a pre-implementation assessment to engage early and at the right level

    Many IoT solutions are business- and vendor-led and are hosted outside of the organization or managed inside the business unit.

    Having IT engage early allows the business to determine what level of support is appropriate for them, allows IT to ensure data integrity, and allows IT to ensure that security, privacy, and long-term operational needs are managed appropriately.

    Blueprint deliverables

    IoT Steering Committee Charter

    Create a steering committee to improve success of IoT implementations

    Sample of the IoT Steering Committee Charter.

    IoT Solution Playbook

    Create a framework to quickly evaluate IoT solutions to mitigate risks and increase success

    Sample of the IoT Solution Playbook.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Aggregation of processes and data may have compelling implications for increasing effectiveness of the business, but this may also increase risk. A framework will help to drive value while putting in appropriate guardrails.
    • IoT use cases may be varied within many industries, and the use of many types of sensors and devices complicates management and maintenance. A common understanding of how devices will be tracked, managed, and maintained is imperative to IT securing their systems and data.
    • A pilot program to evaluate effectiveness and either reject or move forward with a plan to onboard the solution as quickly as possible will ensure quick time to value and enable immediate implementation of controls to meet operational and security requirements.

    Business Benefits

    • Aggregation of many disparate groups of data can provide new insights into the way an organization interacts with its clients and how clients are using products and services.
    • As organizations innovate and new IoT solutions are introduced to the environment, solutions need to be evaluated quickly to determine if they’re going to meet the business case and then determine what needs to be put in place for technology, process, and policy to ensure success.
    • As new solutions are introduced, anyone who may be impacted through this new data-collection process will need to be informed and feel secure in the way information is analyzed and managed. This project will provide the framework to quickly assess the risks and develop a communications plan.

    Evaluate digital transformation opportunities with these guiding principles for smart solutions

    Problem & opportunity focus
    • Search for real problems to solve, with visible improvement possibilities
    • Don’t choose technology for technology’s sake
    • Keep an eye to the future
    • Strategic foresight
    Piece by piece
    • Avoid the “Big Bang” approach
    • Test technologies in multiple conditions
    • Run inexpensive pilots
    • Increase flexibility
    • Technology ecosystem
    User buy-in
    • Collaborate with the community
    • Gain and sustain support
    • Increase uptake of city technology
    • Crowdsource community ideas
    Recommendations:
    Focus on real problems • Be a fast follower • Build a technology ecosystem

    Info-Tech Insight

    When looking for a quick win, consider customer journey mapping exercises to find out what it takes to do the work today, for example, map the journey to apply for a building permit, renew a license, or register a patient.

    Measure the value of IoT

    There is a broad range of solutions for IoT all designed to collect information and execute actions in a way designed to increase profitability and/or improve services. McKinsey estimates value created through interoperability will account for 40% to 60% of the potential value of IoT applications.

    Revenue Generating
    • Production increases and efficiency
    • Reliability as data quality increases
    • New product development opportunities through better understanding of how your products are used
    • New product offerings with automated data collection and analysis of aggregated data
    Improved outcomes
    • Improved wellness programs for employees and patients through proactive health management
      • Reduction in health care/insurance costs
      • Reduction in time off for illness
    • Reduction in human error
    • Improved safety – fewer equipment malfunction incidents
    • Sustainability – reduction in emissions
    Increased access to data, especially if aggregating with other data sources, will increase opportunities for data analysis leading to more informed decision making.
    Cost Avoidance
    • Cost efficiency – lower energy consumption, less waste, improved product consumption
    • Reliability – reduced downtime of equipment due to condition-based maintenance
    • Security – decrease in malware attacks
    Operational Metrics
    • # supported devices
    • % of projects using IoT
    • % of managed systems
    • % of increase in equipment optimization

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 4 to 8 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3
    Call #1: Determine steering committee members and mandates.

    Call #2: Define process for meeting and assessing requests.

    Call #3: Define the intake process.

    Call #4: Define the role of the BRM & assessment criteria.

    Call #5: Define the process to secure funding.

    Call #6: Define assessment requirements for other IT groups.

    Call #7: Define proof of value process.

    Create and Implement an IoT Strategy

    Phase 1

    Define your governance process

    Steering Committee

    1.1 Define the committee’s roles and responsibilities in the IoT Steering Committee Charter

    1.2 Define the IoT steering committee’s vision statement and mandates

    1.3 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and roles and responsibilities

    Intake Process

    2.1 Define requirements for requesting new IoT solutions

    2.2 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – BA/BRM

    2.3 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Data specialists

    2.4 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Privacy & Security

    2.5 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Infrastructure & Operations

    2.6 Define service objectives and evaluation process

    Proof of Value

    3.1 Determine the criteria for running a proof of value

    3.2 Define the template and process for running a proof of value

    This phase will provide the following activities

    • Create the steering committee project charter
    If a steering committee exists, it may be appropriate to define IoT governance under their mandate. If a committee doesn’t already exist or their mandate will not include IoT, consider creating a committee to set standards and processes and quickly evaluate solutions for feasibility and implementation.

    Create an IoT steering committee to ensure value will be realized and operational needs will be met

    The goals of the steering committee should be:

    • To align IoT initiatives with organizational goals. 
    • To effectively evaluate, approve, and prioritize IoT initiatives.
    • To approve IoT strategy & evaluation criteria.
    • To reinforce and define risk evaluation criteria as they relate to IoT technology.
    • To review pilot results and confirm the value achievement of approved IoT initiatives.
    • To ensure the investment in IoT technology can be integrated and managed using defined parameters.

    Assemble the right team to ensure the success of your IoT ecosystem

    Business stakeholders will provide clarity for their strategy and provide input into how they envision IoT solutions furthering those goals and how they may gain relevant insights from secondary data.

    As IoT solutions move beyond their primary goals, it will be critical to evaluate the continually increasing data to mitigate risks of unintended consequences as new data sets converge. The security team will need to evaluate solutions and enforce standards.

    CDO and analysts will assess opportunities for data convergence to create new insights into how your services are used.

    Lightbulb with the word 'Value' surrounded by categories relative to the adjacent paragraph, 'Data Scientists', 'Security and Privacy', 'Business Leaders', 'IT Executives', 'Operations', and 'Infrastructure & Enterprise Architects'. IT stakeholders will be driving these projects forward and ensuring all necessary resources are available and funded.

    Operational plans will include asset management, monitoring, and support to meet functional goals and manage throughout the asset lifecycle.

    Each solution added to the environment will need to be chosen and architected to meet primary functions and secondary data collection.

    Identify IoT steering committee participants to ensure broad assessment capabilities are available

    • The committee should include team members experienced enough to provide an effective assessment of IoT projects, and to provide input and oversight regarding business value, privacy, security, operational support, infrastructure, and architectural support.
    • A data specialist will be critical for evaluating opportunities to expand use of data and ensure data can be effectively validated and aggregated. Additional oversight will be needed to review aggregated data to protect against the unintended consequences of having data combined and creating personas that will identify individuals.
    • Additional experts may be invited to committee meetings as appropriate, and ideas should be discussed and clarified with the business unit bringing the ideas forward or that may be impacted by solutions.
    • Invite appropriate IT and business leaders to the initial meeting to gain agreement and form the governance model.

    Determine responsibilities of the committee to gain consensus and universal understanding

    Icon of binoculars. STRATEGIC
    ALIGNMENT
    • Define the IoT vision in alignment with the organizational strategy and mission.
    • Define strategy, policies and communication requirements for IoT projects.
    • Assess and bring forward proposals to utilize IoT to further organizational strategy.
    Icon of a person walking up an ascending bar graph. VALUE
    DELIVERY
    • Define criteria for evaluating and prioritizing proposals and projects.
    • Validate the IoT proposals to ensure value drivers are understood and achievable.
    • Identify opportunities to combine data sets for secondary analysis and insights.
    Icon of a lightbulb. RISK
    OPTIMIZATION
    • Evaluate data and combined data sets to avoid unintended consequences.
    • Ensure security standards are adhered to when integrating new solutions.
    • Reinforce privacy regulations, policy, and communications requirements.
    Icon of an arrow in a bullseye. RESOURCE
    OPTIMIZATION
    • Identify and validate investment and resource requirements.
    • Evaluate technical requirements and capabilities.
    • Align IoT management requirements to operations goals within IT.
    Icon of a handshake. PERFORMANCE
    MANAGEMENT
    • Assess validity of pilot project plan, including success criteria.
    • Identify corner cases to assess functionality and potential risks beyond core features.
    • Monitor progress, evaluate results, and ensure organizational needs will be met.
    • Evaluate pilot to determine if it will be moved into full production, reworked, or rejected.

    1.1 Exercise:
    Define the committee’s roles & responsibilities in the IoT steering committee charter

    1-3 hours

    Input: Current policies and assessment tools for security and privacy, Current IT strategy for introducing new solutions and setting standards

    Output: List of roles and responsibilities, High-level discussion points

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Steering committee workbook

    Participants: IT executive, Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s)

    1. Identify and document core and auxiliary members of the committee, ensuring all important facets of the IoT environment can be assessed.
    2. Identify and document the committee chair.
    3. Gain consensus on responsibilities of the steering committee.

    Download the IoT Steering Committee Charter

    Define the vision statement for the IoT committee to clarify mandate and communicate to stakeholders

    The vision statement will define what you’re trying to achieve and how. You may have the statement already solidified, but if not, start with brainstorming several outcomes and narrow to less than 5 focus areas.

    A vision statement should be concise and should be in support of the overall IT strategy and organizational mission. The vision statement will be used as a high-level guide for defining and assessing proposed solutions and evaluating potential outcomes. It can be used as a limiter to quickly weed out ideas that don’t fit within the mandate, but it can also inspire new ideas.

    • Support innovation
    • Enable the business
    • Enable operations for continual value

    New York City has a broad plan for implementing IoT to meet several aspects of their overall strategy and subsequently their IT strategy. Their strategic plan includes several focus areas that will benefit from IoT:
    • A vibrant democracy
    • An inclusive economy
    • Thriving neighborhoods
    • Healthy lives
    • Equity and excellence in education
    • A livable climate
    • Efficient mobility
    • Modern infrastructure
    Their overall mission is: “OneNYC 2050 is a strategy to secure our city’s future against the challenges of today and tomorrow. With bold actions to confront our climate crisis, achieve equity, and strengthen our democracy, we are building a strong and fair city. Join us.”

    In order to accomplish this overall mission, they’ve created a specific IT vision statement: “Improve digital infrastructure to meet the needs of the 21st century.”

    This may seem broad, and it includes not just IoT, but also the need to upgrade infrastructure to be able to enable IoT as a tool to meet the needs to collect data, take action, and better understand how people move and live within the city. You can read more of their strategy at this
    link: http://onenyc.cityofnewyork.us/about/

    1.2 Exercise:
    Define the IoT steering committee’s vision statement and mandate

    1 hour

    Input: Organizational vision and IT strategy

    Output: Vision statement

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Steering committee workbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: IT executive, Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s)

    1. Starting with the organizational mission statement, brainstorm areas of focus with the steering committee and narrow down the statement.
    2. Make sure it’s broad enough to encompass your goals, but succinct enough to allow you to identify projects that don’t meet the vision.
    3. Test with a few existing ideas.
    4. Document in your steering committee charter.

    Download the IoT Steering Committee Charter

    Use the COPIS methodology to define your project review process

    COPIS is a customer-focused methodology used to focus on the areas around the process, ensuring a holistic view starting with who the customer is and what they need, then building out the process and defining what will be required to be successful and who will be involved in fulfilling the work.

    Customer

    • Executive leadership
    • Business leaders

    Outputs

    • Risk assessment
    • Approvals to proceed
    • Pilot plan
    • Assessment to approve for production or reject

    Process

    • Review proposals
    • Ask questions and discuss with proposer & committee
    • Review pilot & testing plan
    • Engage with IT Team to define requirements

    Inputs

    • Request form including:
    • New idea
    • Business value defined
    • Data collected
    • Initial risk assessment
    • Implementation plan
    • Definition of success

    Suppliers

    • IT operations team
    • Device and software vendors
    • IT leaders
    • Risk committee
    Agenda & process flow



    Determine where people will access request form Ending point
    Sequence of right-facing arrows labelled 'Agenda & process flow'. Text in each arrow from left to right reads 'Confirm attendees required are in attendance', 'Review open action items', 'Assess new items', 'Assess prioritization', 'Review metrics & pilots in progress', 'Decisions & recommendations'.

    Create a committee charter to ensure roles are clarified and mandates can be met

    The purpose of the committee is to quickly assess and protect organizational interests while furthering the needs of the business

    The committee needs to be seen as an enabler to the business, not as a gatekeeper, so it must be thorough but responsive.

    The charter should include:
    • The vision to ensure clarity of purpose.
    • IoT mandates to focus the committee on assessment criteria.
    • Roles, responsibilities, and assignments to engage the right people who will provide the kind of guidance needed to ensure success.
    • Procedures to make the best use of each committee member’s time.
    • Process flow to guide evaluations to avoid unnecessary delays while reducing organizational risks.
    Stock image of someone reading on a tablet.

    1.3 Exercise:
    Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects

    2-3 hours

    Input: Schedules of committee members, Process documentation for evaluating new technology

    Output: Procedures for reviewing proposals, Reference documentation for evaluating proposals

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Steering committee workbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: IT executive, Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s)

    1. Discuss as a group how often you will meet for reviews and project updates. Which roles will have veto rights on project approvals?
    2. Define the intake process and requirements for scheduling based on average lead time to get the group together and preview documentation.
    3. Identify where process documentation already exists to use for evaluation of proposals and projects, and what needs to be created to quickly move from evaluation to action phases.
    4. Define basic rules of engagement.
    5. Define process flow using COPIS methodology as a framework. Note the different stages that may be part of the intake flow. Some business partners may bring solutions to IT, and others may just have an idea that needs to be solutioned.

    Download the IoT Steering Committee Charter

    Create and Implement an IoT Strategy

    Phase 2

    Define the intake and assessment process

    Steering Committee

    1.1 Define the committee’s roles and responsibilities in the IoT Steering Committee Charter

    1.2 Define the IoT steering committee’s vision statement and mandates

    1.3 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and roles and responsibilities

    Intake Process

    2.1 Define requirements for requesting new IoT solutions

    2.2 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – BA/BRM

    2.3 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Data specialists

    2.4 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Privacy & Security

    2.5 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Infrastructure & Operations

    2.6 Define service objectives and evaluation process

    Proof of Value

    3.1 Determine the criteria for running a proof of value

    3.2 Define the template and process for running a proof of value

    This phase will provide the following activities

    • Define requirements for requesting new IoT solutions
    • Define procedures for review proposals and projects
    • Define service objectives and evaluation process for reviewing proposals and projects

    Determine what information is necessary to start the intake process

    To encourage your business leaders to engage IT in evaluating and appropriately supporting the solution, start with an intake process that is simple and easily populated with business information.
    • Review intake forms from the PMO or build your own from the IoT Solution Playbook:
    • Start by asking for a clear picture of the solution. Ensure the requester can clearly articulate the business benefit to the solution, including what issues are being resolved and what success looks like.
    • Requesters may not be expected to seek out all relevant information to make the decision.
      • Consider providing a business analyst (BA) to assist with data gathering for further assessment and to launch the review process.
      • Review may require additional steps if it is not clear the proposed solution will perform as expected and could include conversations with the vendor or a determination that a full requirements-gathering process may need to be done.
    • Typically, a BA will launch the review process to have appropriate experts assess the feasibility of the solution; assess regulatory, privacy, and security concerns; and determine the level of involvement needed by IT and the project managers.
    • Have options for different starting points. Some requesters may be further along in their research as they know exactly what they want, while others will be early in the idea stage. Don’t discourage innovation by creating more work than they’re able to execute.

    Business goals and benefits are important to ensure the completed solution meets the intended purpose and enables appropriate collection, analysis, and use of data in the larger business context.

    Ongoing operational support and service need to be considered to ensure ongoing value, and adherence to security and privacy policies is critical.

    2.1 Exercise:
    Define requirements for requesting new IoT solutions

    1 hour

    Input: Business requirements for requesting IT solutions

    Output: Request form for business users, Section 1 of the IoT Solution Playbook

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, IoT Solution Playbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: IT executive, Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s)

    1. Review template for the IoT Solution Playbook to ensure it meets your needs; modify as necessary.
    2. Determine requirements for initiating an assessment.
      1. Will a business case be necessary to start, or can the assessment feed into the business case?
      2. How can you best access the work already done by the requester to not start over?
      3. Determine the right questions to understand how they will define success to ensure this solution will do what they need.
      4. Do you need a breakdown of the way they do the job today?
      5. What level of authorization needs to be on the request to move forward?
    3. Try to balance the effort of the requester against their role. Don’t expect them to investigate solutions beyond the business value.
    4. Provide them with a means to provide you any information they have gathered, especially if they have already spoken to vendors.

    Download the IoT Solution Playbook

    Define what role the BA or BRM will play to support the request process

    Identify questions that will need to be answered in order to assess if the solution will be fit for purpose, to help build out business cases, and to enable the appropriate assessments and engagement with project managers and technical teams.
    • Project sponsorship is key to moving the project ahead. Ensure the project sponsor and business owner will be in alignment on the solution and business needs.
    • Note any information that will help to prioritize this project among all other requests. This will feed into implementation timing and the project management needs, resourcing, and vendor engagement required.
    • Determine if a proof of value would be an asset. A proof of value can be time consuming, but it can mitigate the risks of large-scale failures.
    • Ask about data collection and data type, which will be a major part of the assessment for the data team and for security, privacy, infrastructure, and operational assessments.
    • Determine if any actions will need to be taken, which might include data transfer, notifications and alerts, or others. This may require additional discussions on actuators, RPA, data stores, and integrations.
    • Determine if any automation will be part of the solution, as this will help to inform future discussions on power, connectivity, security, and privacy.

    Download the blueprint Embed Business Relationship Management in IT if you need help to support the business in a more strategic manner.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding the business issue more deeply can help the business analyst determine if the solution needs a review of business process as well as helping to build out the requirements well enough to improve chances of success.

    The BA should be able to determine initial workload and involvement of project managers and evaluators.

    Clearly articulate the business benefits to secure funding and resources

    If the business users need to build a business case, the information being collected will help to define the value, estimate costs, and evaluate risk

    IoT point solutions can be straightforward to articulate the business benefits as they will have very specific benefits which will likely fit into one of these categories:
    • Financial – to increase profitability or reduce costs through predictive maintenance and efficiency.
    • Business Development – innovation for new products, services, and methodologies
    • Improve specific outcomes – typically these will be industry specific, such as improved patient health care, reduced traffic congestion or use of city resources, improved billing, or fire prevention for utility companies.

    As you start to look at the bigger picture of how these different systems can bring together disparate data sets, the benefits will be harder to define, and the costs to implement this next level of data analysis can be daunting and expensive.

    This doesn’t necessitate a complete alignment of data collection purposes; there may be benefits to improving operations in secondary areas such as updating HVAC systems to reduce energy costs in a hospital, though the updated systems may also include sensors to monitor air quality and further improve patient outcomes.

    In these cases, there may be future opportunities to use this data in unexpected ways, but even where there aren’t, applying the same standards for security, privacy, and operations should apply.

    Table titled 'Increasing productivity through efficiency and yield are the top benefits organizations expect to see from IoT implementations' with three columns, one for type of benefit (ie efficiency, yield, quality, etc), one for different IoT implementations and one for percent increase.
    (Microsoft IoT Signals Report 2020, n= 3,000 IT Professionals)

    2.2 Exercise – BA/BRM: Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects

    1 hour

    Input: Process documentation for evaluating new technology, Business case requirements

    Output: Interview questions and assessment criteria for BA/BRM

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, IoT Solution Playbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: Business analyst or business relationship manager, IT executive(s), Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s)

    1. Review template for the IoT Solution Playbook to ensure it meets your needs; modify as necessary.
    2. Identify the questions that will need to be asked of the business to determine whether the request will be fit for purpose.
    3. Additional questions may help to:
      1. Identify project sponsors to determine if requirements are defined or need to be, and who will champion this project through to implementation.
      2. Identify what additional work will be needed for you to shepherd the project through the various stage gates.
      3. Identify any prioritization criteria including business-specific milestones and outcomes.
    4. Document when a formal business case needs to be created.

    Download the IoT Solution Playbook

    Assess the vendor’s solution for accessibility to ensure data will be available and useable

    Data governance, including stewardship and ownership; lineage; and the ability to scale, deduplicate, normalize, validate, and aggregate disparate data will be critical to being able to analyze data to execute on strategic goals.

    If your organization isn’t poised to manage and make the best use of the data, see Info-Tech’s related blueprints:

    Relevant Research: Diagnostic:
    Data ownership is important to establish early on, as the owner(s) will be accountable for how data is used and accessed. Data needs to be owned by the organization (not the vendor) and needs to be accessible for:
    • Regulatory compliance.
    • Data quality and validation.
    • Data normalization.
    • Data aggregation and analysis.
    Vendor assessments need to investigate how data will be accessed, where data is normalized and how data will be validated.
    Data validation will have different levels of importance depending on the use case. Where data validation is critical, there may be a need to double up sensors in key areas, validate against adjacent sensors, better understand how and where data will be collected.
    • Infrared sensors may include intelligence to count people or objects.
    • Cameras might require manual counts but may provide better images.
    • Good quality images may require technology to distort faces for privacy.
    If data validation will include non-sensor data, such as validation against a security access database or visitor log, access to the data for validation may be required in near real time.

    Determine how often you need to access and download data

    Requirements will vary depending on whether sensors are collecting data for later analysis or if they are actuators that need to process data at the source.

    Determine where the data will reside and how it will be structured. If it will be open and controlled within your own environment, confer with your data team to ensure the solution is integrated into your data systems. If, however, the solution is a point solution which will be hosted by the vendor, understand who will be normalizing the data and how frequently you can export or transfer it into your own data repository. If APIs will need to be installed to enable data transfer, work with the vendor to test them.

    Self-contained or closed solutions may be quick to install and configure and may require minimal technical support from within your own IT team, but they will not provide visibility to the inner workings of the solution. This may create issues around integration and interoperability which could limit the functionality and usability beyond the point solution.

    If the solution chosen is a closed system, determine how you will need to interact with the vendor to gain access to the data. Interoperability may not be an option, so work with the vendor to set up a regular cadence for accessing the data.

    Questions for the vendor could include:

    1. How often can we access the data? Will the vendor push it on a regular basis? Is it on demand?
    2. Or will we need to pull the data? Is there an API?
    3. Will the data be normalized?
    4. Will the data be transferred, or will the vendor keep a historical record?
    5. Are there additional fees for archiving or for data extraction?
    Stock image of a large key inserted into the screen of a laptop.

    Identify whether digital twins are needed

    Create a virtual world to safely test and fail without impacting the real-world applications.

    As actuators are processing information and executing actions, there may be a benefit to assess the effectiveness and impact of various scenarios in a safe environment. Digital twins enable the creation of a virtual world to test these new use cases using real world scenarios.

    These virtual replicas will not be necessary for every IoT application as many solutions will be very straightforward in their application. But for those complex systems, such as smart buildings, smart cities and mechanically complex projects, digital twins can be created to run multiple simulations to aid in business continuity planning, performance assessments, R&D and more.

    Due to the expense and complexity of creating a full digital twin, carefully weighing the benefits, and identifying how it will be used, can help to build the business case to invest in the technology. Without the skills in house, reliance on a vendor to create the model and test scenarios will likely be part of the overall solution.

    The assessment will also include understanding what data will be transferred into the model, how often it will be updated, how it will be protected and who will need to be involved in the modeling process.

    Download the blueprint: Double Your Organization’s Effectiveness With a Digital Twin. if you need more information on how to leverage digital twin technology.

    Stock image of a twin mirroring the original person's action.

    To fully realize value in IoT, think beyond single use case solutions to leverage the data collected

    Expertise in data analysis will be key to moving forward with an enterprise approach to IoT and the data it produces.
    • A single IoT solution can add hundreds of sensors, collecting a wide variety of data for specific purposes. If multiple solutions are in place, there may be divergent data sets that may never be seen by anyone other than their specific data stewards.
    • Many organizations have started out with one or two solutions that support their primary business and may include some more mature offerings such as HVAC systems, which have used sensors for years. However, not all data is used today. In many cases, data is used for anomaly detection to improve operations, and only the non-standard information is used for alerting. McKinsey estimates less than 1% of data is used in these applications, with the remaining data stored or deleted, rather than used for optimization and predictive analysis.
    • Thinking beyond the initial use cases, there may be opportunities to create new services, improve services for existing products, or improve insights through analysis of juxtaposed data.
    • McKinsey reports up to $11.1 trillion a year in economic value may be possible by 2025 through the linking of the physical and digital worlds. Personal devices and all industries are potential growth areas – though factories and anywhere that could use predictive maintenance, cities, retail, and transportation will see the largest probable increases. Interoperability was identified as being required to maximize value, accounting for 40% to 60% of the potential value of IT applications.
    • Where data is used to correct and control anomalies, very little data is retained and used for optimization or predictive analysis. By taking a deliberate approach to normalize, correlate, and analyze data, organizations can gain insight into the way their products are used, benefit from predictive maintenance, improve health care, reduce costs, and more.
    (Source: McKinsey, 2015)

    By 2025 an estimated data volume of 79.4 zettabytes will be attributed to connected IoT devices. (Statistia)

    Build data governance and analysis into your strategy to find new insights from correlating new and existing data

    As a point solution, IoT provides a means to collect large amounts of data quickly and act. When determining the use case for IoT and best fit solutions, it’s important to think about what data needs to be collected and what actions will need to be coordinated. As the need for more than just a few IoT solutions surfaces, the complexity and potential usefulness of data increases. This can lead to significant changes to the scope of data collection, storage, and analysis and may lead to unintended consequences.
    • Some industries, such as governments looking to build smart cities, will have a very broad range of opportunities for IoT devices, as well as high levels of difficulty managing very disparate systems; other industries, such as healthcare, will have very focused prospects for data collection and analysis.
    • In any case, the introduction of new IoT solutions can create very large amounts of data quickly, and if used only for a single purpose, there may be lost opportunity for expanding use of data to better understand your product, customers, or environment.
    • Don’t limit analysis to only IoT-collected data, as this can be consolidated with other sources for validation, enhancement, and insights. For example, fleet transponders can be connected to travel logs and dispatch records for validation and evaluation of fuel and resource consumption.
    • Determine the best time and methods for consolidation and normalization; consider using data consolidation vendors if the expertise is not available in-house.
    • As data combines, there may be unintended consequences of unique anonymous identifiers combining to identify employees or customers, and the potential for privacy breeches will need to be evaluated as all new systems come on-line.

    “We find very little IoT data in real life flows through analytics solutions, regardless of customer size. Even in the large organizations, they tend to build at-purpose applications, rather than creating those analytical scenarios or think of consolidating the IoT data in a data lake like environment.” (Rajesh Parab, Info-Tech Research Group)

    2.3 Exercise – data specialists: Define criteria for assessing proposals and projects

    1-2 hours

    Input: Process documentation for evaluating new technology, Data governance documents

    Output: Interview questions and assessment criteria for data specialists

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, IoT Solution Playbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: Business analyst or business relationship manager, IT executive, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s), Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff

    1. Review template for the IoT Solution Playbook to ensure it meets your needs; modify as necessary.
    2. Identify the questions that will need to be asked of the solution to ensure data governance and accessibility needs will be met.
    3. Additional questions may help to:
      1. Identify data owners or stewards to determine who will have authority over data and ensure their needs will be met.
      2. Identify what additional work will be needed for the data team to access, validate, normalize, and centralize data.
      3. Identify any concerns that will identify the solution as unviable.
      4. Identify any risks to data accessibility which will require mitigation.

    This initial review is designed to identify risks to data ownership or integrity and ensure data is available for additional uses as deemed appropriate to the organizational goals. This assessment is designed to find major flaws and to mitigate and integrate should the project be approved as viable.

    Download the IoT Solution Playbook

    Security assessments will need to include risk reviews specific to IoT

    The increase of data collectors and actuators creates a large attack surface that could easily provide an entry point for hackers to connect into an organization’s network. Assess existing protocols and risk registry to ensure all IoT systems are reviewed for security threats.

    The significant increase in devices and applications will require a review of security practices related to IoT to understand and mitigate risks. Even if the data collected is not considered integral to the business, such as with automated HVAC systems or an aquarium monitoring system, the devices can provide an entry point to access the network.

    IoT and ICS devices are functionally diverse and may include more mature solutions that have been acquired many times over. There are a wide variety of protocols that may not be recognized by vulnerability scanners as safe to operate in your environment. Many of these solutions will be agentless and may not be picked up by scanners on the network. Without knowing these devices exist or understanding the data traffic patterns, protecting the devices, data, and systems they’re attached to becomes challenging.

    Discovery and vulnerability scanners tuned specifically for IoT to look for and allow unusual protocols and traffic patterns will enable these devices to operate as designed without being shut down by vulnerability scanners protecting more traditional devices and traffic on an IT network. Orphaned devices can be found and removed. Solutions that will provide detailed asset inventories and network topologies will improve vulnerability detection.

    Systems that are air gapped or completely segregated may provide a layer of protection between IoT devices and the corporate network, but this may create additional difficulties in vulnerability assessment, identifying and responding to active threats, or managing the operational side. Additionally, if there are still functional connections between these systems for traffic to flow back to central repositories, operational systems, or remote connections, there are still potential threats.

    If security controls are not yet documented, see Info-Tech’s related blueprints:

    Relevant Research: Diagnostic:

    Align risk assessments to your existing risk registry, to quickly approve low-risk solutions and mitigate high risk

    Work with the business owner to understand how these systems are designed to work. Tracking normal patterns of behavior and traffic flow may be key to fine-tuning security settings to accommodate these solutions and prevent false positive shutdowns, especially if using automated remediation. Is the business owner identified, and will they be accessible throughout the lifecycle of the solution?

    Physical security: Will these systems be accessible to the public, and can they be secured in a way to minimize theft and vandalism? Will they require additional housing or waterproofing? Could access be completely secured? For example, could anyone access and install malware on a disconnected camera’s SD card?

    Security settings: For ease of service and installation, a vendor may use default security settings and passwords. This can create easy access for hackers to access the network and access sensitive data. Is there a possibility of IP theft though access by sensors? Determine who will have remote access to the system, and if the vendor will be supporting the system, will they be using least privilege or zero trust models? Determine their adherence to your security policy.

    Internet and network access and monitoring: Review connectivity and data transmission requirements and whether these can be accommodated in a way that balances security with operational needs. Will there be a need for air gapping, firewalls, or secure tunnelling, and will these solutions allow for discovery and monitoring? Can the vendor guarantee there are no back doors built into the code? Will the system be monitored for unauthorized access and activity, and what is the response process? Can it be integrated into your security operations center?

    Failover state: IoT devices with actuators or that may impact health and safety will need to be examined. Can you ensure actions in event of a failure will not be negatively impactful? For example, a door that locks on failover and cannot be opened from the inside will create safety risks; however, a door that opens on failover could result in theft of property or IP. Who controls and can access these settings?

    Firmware updates: Assess the history of updates released by the vendor and determine how these updates are sent to the devices and validated. Ensure the product has been developed using trusted platforms with security lifecycle models. Many devices will have embedded security solutions. Ensure these can be integrated into organizational security solutions and risk mitigation strategies.

    Enterprise IoT strategy will require a focus on privacy and risk

    Data aggregation creates new privacy concerns as data may be used outside of the original project parameters. The change of scope will need to be evaluated to determine personally identifiable information and what new issues it can create for the program, organization, and your audience.

    As a point solution, IoT provides a means to collect large amounts of data and, if actuators are completing tasks, act quickly. When determining the use case for IoT and best fit solutions, it’s important to think about what data needs to be collected and what actions will need to be coordinated.

    As the need for more than just a few IoT solutions surfaces, the complexity and potential usefulness of data increases. This can lead to significant changes to the scope of data collection, storage, and analysis, and may lead to unintended consequences.

    Questions to ask your vendors:
    1. Where may there be physical access to sensors and a possibility of theft, and can the data be encrypted?
    2. What type of information is captured by sensors and stored in the solution?
    3. Where is personally identifiable information captured, and where is it stored? How will you meet regulatory requirements such as GDPR? Where does the data fit within existing retention policies, and how long should it be kept?
    4. Will there be a need to post signage or update privacy statements in response to the information being collected?

    If data classification, privacy, and security controls are not yet documented, see Info-Tech’s related blueprints:

    Relevant Research:

    Don’t make assumptions about the type of data gathered with devices – ask the vendor to clearly state how and what is collected

    Carefully review how this information can be used by machine learning, in combination with other solutions, and if there is a possibility of unintended consequences that will create issues for your customers and therefore your own data sets.

    Look for ways of capturing information that will meet your business requirements while mitigating risk of capturing personally identifiable information. Examples would be LiDAR to capture movement instead of video, or AI to blur faces or license plate numbers at time of image capture.

    This chart identifies data collected by smartphone accelerometers which could be used to identify and profile an individual and understand their behaviors.

    Mobile device accelerometer data

    Table of Mobile device accelerometer data with columns 'Detection of sound vibrations', 'Body movements', and 'Motion trajectory of the device', and a key for color-coding labelling purple items as 'Health', yellow items as 'Personality traits, moods & emotions', and green items 'Identification'.
    Overview of sensitive inferences that can be drawn from accelerometer data. (Source: Association for Computing Machinery, 2019.)

    2.4 Exercise – Privacy & Security specialists: Define criteria for assessing proposals and projects

    1-2 hours

    Input: Process documentation for evaluating new technology, Data governance documents

    Output: Interview questions and assessment criteria for Privacy & Security specialists

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, IoT Solution Playbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: Business analyst or business relationship manager, IT executive, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s), Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff

    1. Review template for the IoT Solution Playbook to ensure it meets your needs; modify as necessary.
    2. Identify the questions that will need to be asked of the solution to ensure security and privacy needs will be met.
    3. Additional questions may help to:
      1. Identify biggest risks created by a large influx of sensors and additional vendors.
      2. Identify options for mitigating risks for privacy and regulatory requirements.

    This initial review is designed to identify risks to data ownership or integrity and ensure data is available for additional uses as deemed appropriate to the organizational goals. This assessment is designed to find major flaws and to mitigate and integrate should the project be approved as viable.

    Download the IoT Solution Playbook

    Review infrastructure requirements to proactively engage with vendors

    A modernized architecture will provide needed flexibility for onboarding new IoT solutions as well as providing the structure to collect, transport, and house data; however, not everything will be on the network. Knowing requirements for integrations, communications, and support will eliminate surprises during implementation.

    The supporting applications will be collecting and analyzing data for each of these solutions, with most being hosted on public clouds or privately by the vendor. Access to the applications for data collection may require APIs or other middleware to transfer data outside of their application. Data transfer may be unimportant if the data collected will stand alone and never be integrated to other systems, but it will be critical if IoT plans include retrieving, aggregating, and analyzing data from most systems. If these systems are closed, determine the process to get this information, whether it’s through scheduled exports or batch transfers.

    Determine if data will be backed up by the vendor or if backups are the responsibility of your team. Work with the business owner to better understand business continuity requirements to plan appropriately for data transmission, storage, and archiving.

    Network and communications will vary dramatically depending on where sensors and actuators are located. On-premises solutions may rely on Wi-Fi on your network or may require an air-gapped or segregated network. External sensors may rely on public Wi-Fi, cellular, or satellite, and this may impact reliability and serviceability. If manual data collection is required, such as collecting SD cards on trail cams, who will be responsible, and will they have the tools and data repository they need to upload data manually? Are you able to work with the vendor to estimate traffic on these networks, and how will that impact costs for cellular or satellite service?

    Investigate power requirements. On-premises solutions may require additional wiring, but if using wind or solar, what is the backup? If using batteries, what is the expected lifespan? Who will be monitoring, and who will be changing the batteries?

    Determine monitoring requirements. Who should be responsible for performance monitoring, outages, data transmission, and validation? Is this a vendor premium service or a process to manage in-house? If managed by the vendor, discuss required SLAs and their ability to meet them.

    If your organization is dealing with technical debt and older architecture which could prevent progress, see Info-Tech’s related blueprints to build out the foundation.

    Relevant Research:

    Determine operational readiness to support and secure IoT solutions

    Availability and capacity planning, business continuity planning, and management of all operational and support requirements will need to be put in place. Execution of controls, maintenance plans, and operational support will be required to mitigate risks and reduce value of the solutions.

    One of the biggest challenges organizations that have already adopted IoT face is management of these systems. Without an accurate inventory, it’s impossible to know how secure the IoT systems are. Abandoned sensors, stolen cameras, and old and unpatched firmware all contribute to security risks.

    Existing asset management solutions may provide the right solution, but they are limited in many cases by the discovery tools in place. Many discovery tools are designed to scan the network and may not have access to segregated or air-gapped networks or a means to access anything in the cloud or requiring remote access. Evaluate the effectiveness of current tools, and if they prove to be inadequate, look for solutions that are geared specifically to IoT as they may provide additional useful management capabilities.

    IoT management tools will provide more than just inventory. They can discover IoT devices in a variety of environments, possibly adding micro-agents to access device attributes such as name, type, and date of build, and allowing metadata and tags to be added. Additionally, these solutions will provide the means to deploy firmware updates, change configuration settings, send notifications if devices are taken offline, and run vulnerability assessments. Some may even have diagnostics tools for troubleshooting and remediation.

    If operational processes aren’t in place, see Info-Tech’s related blueprints to build out the foundation.

    Relevant Research: Diagnostic:

    Identify what needs to happen to onboard these solutions into your support portfolio

    Evaluate support options to determine the best way to support the business. Even if support is completely outsourced, a support plan will be critical for holding vendors to account, bringing support in-house if support doesn’t meet your needs, and understanding dependencies while navigating through incidents and problem- and change-enablement processes.

    Regular maintenance for your team may include battery swaps, troubleshooting camera outages or intermittent sensors, or deploying patches. Understand the support requirements for the product lifecycle and who will be responsible for that work. If the vendor will be applying patches and upgrading firmware, get clarity on how often and how they’ll be deployed and validated. Ask the vendor about support documentation and offerings.

    Determine the best ways of collecting inventory on the solution. Determine what the solution offers to help with this process; however, if the project plan requires specific location details to add sensors, the project list may be the best way to initially onboard the sensors into inventory.

    Determine if warranty offerings are an appropriate solution for devices in each project, to schedule and record appropriate maintenance details and plan replacements as sensors reach end of life. Document dependencies for future planning.

    Stock image of an electrical worker fixing a security camera.

    2.5 Exercise – Infrastructure & Operations specialists: Define criteria for assessing proposals and projects

    1-2 hours

    Input: Process documentation for evaluating new technology, Data governance documents

    Output: Interview questions and assessment criteria for Infrastructure & Operations specialists

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, IoT Solution Playbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: Business analyst or business relationship manager, IT executive, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s), Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff

    1. Review template for the IoT Solution Playbook to ensure it meets your needs; modify as necessary.
    2. Identify the questions that will need to be asked of the solutions to ensure the solutions can be integrated into the existing environment and operational processes.
    3. Additional questions may help to:
      1. Reduce risks and project failures from solutions that will be difficult to integrate or secure.
      2. Improve project planning for projects that are often driven by the vendor and the business.
      3. Reduce operational risks due to lack of integration with asset and operational processes.

    This initial review is designed to identify risks to data ownership or integrity and ensure data is available for additional uses as deemed appropriate to the organizational goals. This assessment is designed to find major flaws and to mitigate and integrate should the project be approved as viable.

    Download the IoT Solution Playbook

    2.6 Exercise: Define service objectives and evaluation process

    1 hour

    Input: List of criteria in the playbook, Understanding of resource availability of solution evaluators

    Output: Steering committee criteria for progressing projects through the process

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, IoT Steering Committee Charter workbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: Business analyst or business relationship manager, IT executive, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s), Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff

    Now that you’ve defined the initial review requirements, meet as a group once more to finalize the process for reviewing requests. Look for ways to speed the process, including asynchronous communications and reviews. Consider meeting as a group for any solutions that may be deemed high risk or highly complex.

    1. Agree on what can be identified as a reasonable SLA to respond to the business on these requests.
    2. Agree on methods of communication between committee members and the business.
    3. Determine the criteria for determining when a proof of value should be initiated, and who will lead the process.

    Download the IoT Steering Committee Charter

    Create and Implement an IoT Strategy

    Phase 3

    Prepare for a Proof of Value

    Steering Committee

    1.1 Define the committee’s roles and responsibilities in the IoT Steering Committee Charter

    1.2 Define the IoT steering committee’s vision statement and mandates

    1.3 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and roles and responsibilities

    Intake Process

    2.1 Define requirements for requesting new IoT solutions

    2.2 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – BA/BRM

    2.3 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Data specialists

    2.4 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Privacy & Security

    2.5 Define procedures for reviewing proposals and projects – Infrastructure & Operations

    2.6 Define service objectives and evaluation process

    Proof of Value

    3.1 Determine the criteria for running a proof of value

    3.2 Define the template and process for running a proof of value

    This phase will provide the following activities

    • Create proof of value criteria
    • Create proof of value template

    A proof of value can quickly help you prove value or fail fast

    Investing a small amount of time and money up front will validate the possibility of your proposed solution.

    A proof of value will require a vision and definition of your criteria for success, which will be necessary to determine if the project should go ahead. It should take no longer than three months and may be as short as a week.

    When should you run a proof of value?

    • When it is difficult to confirm that the solution is fit for purpose.
    • When the value of the solution is indeterminate.
    • When the solution is early in its lifecycle and not widely proven in the marketplace.
    • When scalability is questionable or unproven.
    • When the solution requires customization or configuration.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Where a solution is well known in the market, requires minimal customization, and is proven to be fit for purpose, a shorter evaluation or conversations with reference clients or partners may be all that is necessary.

    Table titled 'Reasons IoT proof of value projects fail'. There is a column for type of project (ie Scaling, Business, etc), one for reasons, and one for percentages.
    (Microsoft IoT Signals Report 2020, n= 3,000 IT Professionals)

    3.1 Exercise: Define the criteria for running a proof of value

    1 hour

    Input: Agreement of steering committee members to create a process to mitigate risk for complex solutions.

    Output: Proof of value template for use as appropriate to evaluate IoT solutions.

    Materials: IoT Solution Playbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: Business analyst or business relationship manager, IT executive, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s), Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff

    1. As a group, review the circumstances for when to run a proof of value.
    2. Determine who will help to build the proof of value plan.
    3. Determine requirements for participation in the proof of value process. Consider project size, complexity and risk and visibility.

    Download IoT Solution Playbook

    Design your proof of value to test the viability of the solution

    Engage the right stakeholders early to gather feedback and analysis and determine suitability

    Determine the proof of value methodology to ensure plan allows for fast testing
    • Go back to the original request: What are the goals for implementing this solution? Has this been clearly defined with criteria for success?
    • Define the technical team that will configure the solution, including vendors and technicians. Ensure the vendor fully understands your use cases and goals. Identify the level of support you’ll need to be implement and assess the solution.
    • Define the testing team, including technical and business users. Complete a journey map if needed to define the use case(s) at the right level of detail.
    • Ensure the test use case(s) have been defined and they all agree on the definition of success.
    • Make sure the team is available to do the testing and provide feedback, as high adoption will improve feedback which will be critical to successfully implementing the full solution.
    • Determine how to evaluate scalability with process, resources, and capacity.
    • Evaluate the risks and obstacles to reject the solution or mitigate and prevent scope creep.
    • Evaluate the vendor’s roadmap, training materials, and technical support options.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Additional information on building out a process for testing new technology can be found in the blueprint: Exploit Disruptive Infrastructure Technology.

    “Although scope creep is not the only nemesis a project can have, it does tend to have the farthest reach. Without a properly defined project and/or allowing numerous changes along the way, a project can easily go over budget, miss the deadline, and wreak havoc on project success.” (University Alliance, Villanova University)

    Define your objectives for the proof of value

    Referencing documents submitted to the committee, continue to refine the problem statement.

    Objectives are a key first step to show the solution will meet your needs.
    • Every technology is designed to solve a problem faced by somebody somewhere. For each technology that your team has decided to move forward with, identify and clearly state the problem it would solve.
    • A clear problem statement is a crucial part of a new technology’s business case. It is impossible to earn buy-in from the rest of the organization without demonstrating the necessity of a solution.
    • Perfection is impossible to achieve, especially during a proof of value (POV). However, knowing the pain points of the way things are done without this technology, and noting a reduction in pain and increase in efficiency and accuracy of data gathering will help in the initial feedback of the tests. Ensure the proof of value includes data validation to test accuracy.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Know your metrics going into the proof of value. Document performance, quality, and time to do the work and compare to metrics in the proof of value. Agree on what success looks like, to ensure that improvements are substantial enough to justify the expense and effort of implementing the solution.

    Questions to consider:
    • What are the project’s goals?
    • What is the desired future state?
    • What problems must be solved to call the POV a viable solution?
    • Where will the project be rolled out? Are there any concerns about communications and power that may need to be addressed?
    • Are there any risks to watch for?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Be sure to avoid scope creep! Remember: the goal of the proof of value project is to produce a minimum case for viability in a carefully defined area. Reserve a detailed accounting of costs and benefits for after the proof of value stage.

    Define use cases to test against current methods

    Outline the solution to the problem

    Determine how the solution should perform in completing tasks. Be careful not to focus too heavily on how things are done today: You’re looking for dramatic improvements, not going back to existing workarounds.
    • The use case will help to define the scope of the project, define adjacent use cases or tasks that will be out of scope, and to contain the test to a reasonable effort and time frame, while still testing core functionality.
    • Map processes based on expectations of how the solution should work, and compare these to the way things are done today. Identify if there are obvious improvements to the existing processes that if done, would change the existing results significantly. Take this into account when reviewing results. (This will also be useful if the project isn’t approved or is delayed.)
    • Identify where tasks and data collection will be automated and where they will need to stay manual or require additional integrations or solutions such as RPA. These other solutions may not factor into the proof of value but will need to be identified on the solution roadmap if it goes ahead.

    Blocks with arrows in between them, like an example of a step progression.

    Define steps to reach these goals today:
    • Discuss steps to completion
    • Effort to collect data
    • Effort to validate and correct data
    • Effort and ability to use the data for decision making, understanding your customers, and process improvements
    • Quality of data available with current methods compared to quality and volume of data using an IoT solution

    Determine the appropriate project team

    Bring in team members from the business and technical sides to test for those functions that matter most to each team. This effort will enable them to quickly identify risks and mitigate them as part of the product rollout or start the process to look at alternative solutions.
    • Stakeholders: Anyone who is impacted by the new technology and who will end up using, approving, or implementing it. Identify team members who will be willing and able to test the systems for data quality, collection, and workflow improvements.
    • Data analysts: Include someone who can validate the usefulness of data to meet the needs of the organization.
    • Security & Privacy: Include these team members to validate their expectations of how privacy and security needs can be met.
    • Infrastructure & Operations: These team members can test integrations, data collections, traffic flow, etc.
    • Vendor: Discuss what part the vendor can play in setting up the solution for running the proof of value.
    • Other business units: Identify business units that could benefit or be impacted by this solution. Invite them to participate in the roof of value, but remember to contain scope.
    Leverage the insights of the diverse working group
    • Processes are designed to transform inputs into outputs. All business activities can be mapped into processes.
    • A process map illustrates the sequence of actions and decisions that transform an input into an output.
    • Effective mapping gives managers an “aerial” view of the company’s processes, making it easier to identify inefficiencies, reduce waste, and ultimately streamline operations.
    • To identify business processes, have group members familiar with the affected business units identify how jobs are typically accomplished within those units.
    • Ensure they have the time to test the solution and provide valid feedback.

    Estimate the resources required for the pilot

    Time, money, technology, resources

    The benefit of running a proof of value is to make a decision on viability of a solution without the expense of implementing a full solution. This isn’t necessary for low-risk, highly proven solutions, which could be validated with references instead.

    Estimate

    Estimate the number of hours needed to implement the proof of value.

    Estimate

    Estimate the hours needed for business users to test.

    Estimate

    Estimate the costs of technology. If the solution can be run in a vendor sandbox or in a test/dev instance in the cloud, you may be able to keep these costs very low.

    Determine

    Determine the appropriate number of devices to test in multiple locations and environments; work with the vendor to see if they have evaluation devices or discounts for proof of value purposes.

    Conduct a post-proof of value review to finalize the decision to move forward

    Gather evaluators together to ensure the pilot team completed their assessments. A common failure of pilots is making assumptions around the level of participation that has taken place.
    • The core working group is responsible for producing a vision of the future and outlining new technology’s disruptive potential. The actual implementation of the proof of value (purchasing the hardware, negotiating the SLA with the vendor) is beyond the committee’s responsibilities.
    • If the proof of value goes ahead, the facilitator should block some time to evaluate the completed project against the key performance indicators identified in the initial plan.
    • Use the Proof of Value Template section of the IoT Solution Playbook to document POV requirements as well as finalizing the feedback loop.
    • Determine ratings for the proof of value to identify which solutions are not viable and which levels of viability are worth moving forward. Some viable solutions may need a different vendor, and some may need customization or multiple integrations. This is important for the project team to move ahead with the implementation.
    • Encourage everyone to provide enough feedback on the various processes to be confident in their declarations of worthiness and to confirm the proof of value was thorough.
    • Communicate your working group’s findings and success to a wide audience to gain interest in IoT solutions as well as to encourage the business to work with the committee to integrate solutions into the governance and operational structure.

    3.2 Exercise: Create a template for designing a proof of value

    1-3 hours

    Input: Agreement of steering committee members to create a process to mitigate risk for complex solutions

    Output: Proof of value template for use as appropriate to evaluate IoT solutions

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, IoT Solution Playbook

    Participants: Steering committee, which may include: Business analyst or business relationship manager, IT executive, Senior data specialist, Senior business executive(s), Privacy & Security senior staff, Infrastructure & Operations senior staff

    1. As a group, review the Proof of Value Template section of the IoT Solution Playbook to determine if it will meet the needs of your business and technical groups.
    2. Determine who will work with the business to create the proof of value plan.
    3. Modify the template to suit your needs, keeping in mind a need for clarity of purpose, communications throughout the POV, and clearly stated goals and definitions of success.
    4. Set a target timeframe to run the POV, preferably no longer than 90 days.
    5. Determine appropriate steps to take for POVs that do not garner the expected participation to qualify a solution to move forward.
    6. Determine appropriate reporting for the evaluation process.

    Download IoT Solution Playbook

    Communications

    As with any new product, marketing and communications will be an important first step in letting the business know how to engage IT in its assessments of IoT innovations. As these solutions prove themselves, or even as you help the business to find better solutions, share your successes with the rest of the organization.

    Business units are already being courted by the vendors, so it’s up to IT to insert themselves in the process in a way that helps improve the success of the business team while still meeting IT’s objectives.

    Your customers will not willingly engage in highly bureaucratic processes and need to see a reason to engage.

    1. Keep the intake process simple.
    2. Provide support to answer the tough questions.
    3. Be clear on the benefits to the organization and the business unit by engaging with your group, and be clear about how you will help within a reasonable time frame.
      • IT will help navigate the vendor prerequisites, contracts, and product setup.
      • IT will assume some of the responsibility for the solution, especially around security and privacy.
      • The business unit will reap the rewards of the solution with minimal operational effort.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider building your playbook into your service catalog to make it easy for business users to start the request process. From there, you can create workflows and notifications, track progress, set and meet SLAs, and enable efficient asynchronous communications.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of John Burwash, Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group.

    John Burwash
    Senior Director, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    INFO~TECH RESEARCH GROUP

    Info-Tech Research Group is an IT research and advisory firm with over 23 years of experience helping enterprises around the world with managing and improving core IT processes. They write highly relevant and unbiased research to help leaders make strategic, timely, and well-informed decisions.

    External contributors
    4 external contributors have asked to remain anonymous.

    Photo of Jennifer Jones, Senior Research Advisor, Industry, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Jennifer Jones
    Senior Research Advisor, Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Photo of Aaron Shum, Vice President, Security, Privacy & Risk, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Aaron Shum
    Vice President, Security, Privacy & Risk
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Photo of Rajesh Parab, Research Director, Applications, Data & Analytics, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Rajesh Parab
    Research Director, Applications, Data & Analytics
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Photo of Frank Sargent, Senior Director Practice Lead, Security, Privacy & Risk, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Frank Sargent
    Senior Director Practice Lead, Security, Privacy & Risk
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Photo of Scott Young, Principal Research Advisor, Infrastructure, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Scott Young
    Principal Research Advisor, Infrastructure
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Photo of Rocco Rao, Director, Research Advisor, Industry, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Rocco Rao
    Director, Research Advisor, Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    Ayyaswamy, Regu, et al. “IoT Is Enabling Enterprise Strategies for New Beginnings.” Tata Consulting Services, 2020. Web.

    “Data Volume of Internet of Things (IoT) Connections Worldwide in 2019 and 2025.” Statistia, 2020.

    Dos Santos, Daniel, et al. “Cybersecurity in Building Automation Systems (BAS).” Forescout, 2020. Web.

    Earle, Nick. “Overcoming the Barriers to Global IoT Connectivity: How Regional Operators Can Reap Rewards From IoT.” IoTNow, 30 June 2021. Web.

    Faludi, Rob. “How Do IoT Devices Communicate?” Digi, 26 Mar. 2021. Web.

    Halper, Fern, and Philip Russom. “TDWI IoT Data Readiness Guide, Interpreting Your Assessment Score.” Cloudera, 2018. Web.

    Horwitz, Lauren. “IoT Enterprise Deployments Continue Apace, Despite COVID-19.” IoT World Today, 22 Apr. 2021.

    “How Does IoT Data Collection Work?” Digiteum, 13 Feb. 2020. Web.

    “IoT Data: How to Collect, Process, and Analyze Them.” Spiceworks, 26 Mar. 2019. Web.

    IoT Signals Report: Edition 2, Hypothesis Group for Microsoft, Oct. 2020. Web.

    King, Stacey. “4 Key Considerations for Consistent IoT Manageability and Security.” Forescout, 22 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Krämer, Jurgen. “Why IoT Projects Fail and How to Beat the Odds.” Software AG, 2020. Web.

    Kröger, Jacob Leon, et al. “Privacy Implications of Accelerometer Data: A Review of Possible Inferences” ICCSP, Jan. 2019, pp. 81-7. Web.

    Manyika, James, et al. “Unlocking the Potential of the Internet of Things.” McKinsey Global Institute, 1 June 2015. Web.

    Ricco, Emily. “How To Run a Successful Proof of Concept – Lessons From Hubspot.” Filtered. Web.

    Rodela, Jimmy. “The Blueprint, Your Complete Guide to Proof of Concept.” Motley Fool, 2 Jan 2021. Web.

    Sánchez, Julia, et al. “An Integral Pedagogical Strategy for Teaching and Learning IoT Cybersecurity.” Sensors, vol. 20, no. 14, July 2020, p. 3970.

    The IoT Generation of Vulnerabilities. SC Media, 2020. E-book.

    Woods, James P., Jr. “How Consumer IoT Devices Can Break Your Security.” HPE, 2 Nov. 2021.

    Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}104|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $100,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • You don’t know where to start when it comes to building an innovation program for your organization.
    • You need to create a culture of innovation in your business, department, or team.
    • Past innovation efforts have been met with resistance and cynicism.
    • You don’t know what processes you need to support business-led innovation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Innovation is about people, not ideas or processes. Innovation does not require a formal process, a dedicated innovation team, or a large budget; the most important success factor for innovation is culture. Companies that facilitate innovative behaviors like growth mindset, collaboration, and taking smart risks are most likely to see the benefits of innovation.

    Impact and Result

    • Outperform your peers by 30% by adopting an innovative approach to your business.
    • Move quickly to launch your innovation practice and beat the competition.
    • Develop the skills and capabilities you need to sustain innovation over the long term.

    Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program Storyboard – A step-by-step process to create the innovation culture, processes, and tools you need for business-led innovation.

    This storyboard includes three phases and nine activities that will help you define your purpose, align your people, and build your practice.

    • Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program – Phases 1-3

    2. Innovation Program Template – An executive communication deck summarizing the outputs from this research.

    Use this template in conjunction with the activities in the main storyboard to create and communicate your innovation program. This template uses sample data from a fictional retailer, Acme Corp, to illustrate an ideal innovation program summary.

    • Innovation Program Template

    3. Job Description – Chief Innovation Officer

    This job description can be used to hire your Chief Innovation Officer. There are many other job descriptions available on the Info-Tech website and referenced within the storyboard.

    • Chief Innovation Officer

    4. Innovation Ideation Session Template – Use this template to facilitate innovation sessions with the business.

    Use this framework to facilitate an ideation session with members of the business. Instructions for how to customize the information and facilitate each section is included within the deck.

    • Innovation Ideation Session Template

    5. Initiative Prioritization Workbook – Use this spreadsheet template to easily and transparently prioritize initiatives for pilot.

    This spreadsheet provides an analytical and transparent method to prioritize initiatives based on weighted criteria relevant to your business.

    • Initiative Prioritization Workbook

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Ambitions

    The Purpose

    Define your innovation ambitions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a better understanding of why you are innovating and what your organization will gain from an innovation program.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand your innovation mandate.

    1.2 Define your innovation ambitions.

    1.3 Determine value proposition & metrics.

    Outputs

    Complete the "Our purpose" section of the Innovation Program Template

    Complete "Vision and guiding principles" section

    Complete "Scope and value proposition" section

    Success metrics

    2 Align Your People

    The Purpose

    Build a culture, operating model, and team that support innovation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a plan to address culture gaps and identify and implement your operating model.

    Activities

    2.1 Foster a culture of innovation.

    2.2 Define your operating model.

    Outputs

    Complete "Building an innovative culture" section

    Complete "Operating model" section

    3 Develop Your Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Create the capability to facilitate innovation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a resourcing plan and prioritization templates to make your innovation program successful.

    Activities

    3.1 Build core innovation capabilities.

    3.2 Develop prioritization criteria.

    Outputs

    Team structure and resourcing requirements

    Prioritization spreadsheet template

    4 Build Your Program

    The Purpose

    Finalize your program and complete the final deliverable.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Walk away with a complete plan for your innovation program.

    Activities

    4.1 Define your methodology to pilot projects.

    4.2 Conduct a program retrospective.

    Outputs

    Complete "Operating model" section in the template

    Notable wins and goals

    Further reading

    Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program

    Transform your business by adopting the culture and practices that drive innovation.

    Analyst Perspective

    Innovation is not about ideas, it's about people.

    Many organizations stumble when implementing innovation programs. Innovation is challenging to get right, and even more challenging to sustain over the long term.

    One of the common stumbling blocks we see comes from organizations focusing more on the ideas and the process than on the culture and the people needed to make innovation a way of life. However, the most successful innovators are the ones which have adopted a culture of innovation and reinforce innovative behaviors across their organization. Organizational cultures which promote growth mindset, trust, collaboration, learning, and a willingness to fail are much more likely to produce successful innovators.

    This research is not just about culture, but culture is the starting point for innovation. My hope is that organizations will go beyond the processes and methodologies laid out here and use this research to dramatically improve their organization's performance.

    Kim Rodriguez

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez
    Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    As a leader in your organization, you need to:

    • Understand your organization's innovation goals.
    • Create an innovation program or structure.
    • Develop a culture of innovation across your team or organization.
    • Demonstrate an ability to innovate and grow the business.

    Common Obstacles

    In the past, you might have experienced one or more of the following:

    • Innovation initiatives lose momentum.
    • Cynicism and distrust hamper innovation.
    • Innovation efforts are unfocused or don't provide the anticipated value.
    • Bureaucracy has created a bottleneck that stifles innovation.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Understand the different types of innovation.
    • Develop a clear vision, scope, and focus.
    • Create organizational culture and behaviors aligned with your innovation ambitions.
    • Adopt an operational model and methodologies best suited for your culture, goals, and budget.
    • Successfully run a pilot program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no single right way to approach innovation. Begin with an understanding of your innovation ambitions, your existing culture, and the resources available to you, then adopt the innovation operating model that is best suited to your situation.

    Note: This research is written for the individual who is leading the development of the innovation. This role is referred to as the Chief Innovation Officer (CINO) throughout this research but could be the CIO, CTO, IT director, or another business leader.

    Why is innovation so challenging?

    Most organizations want to be innovative, but very few succeed.

    • Bureaucracy slows innovation: Innovation requires speed – it is important to fail fast and early so you can iterate to improve the final solution. Small, agile organizations like startups tend to be more risk tolerant and can move more quickly to iterate on new ideas compared to larger organizations.
    • Change is uncomfortable: Most people are profoundly uncomfortable with failure, risk, and unknowns – three critical components of innovation. Humans are wired to think efficiently rather than innovatively, which leads to confirmation bias and lack of ingenuity.
    • You will likely fail: Innovation initiatives rarely succeed on the first try – Harvard Business Review estimates between 70% and 90% of innovation efforts fail. Organizations which are more tolerant of failure tend to be significantly more innovative than those which are not (Review of Financial Studies, 2014).

    Based on a survey of global innovation trends and practices:

    75%

    Three-quarters of companies say innovation is a top-three priority.
    Source: BCG, 2021

    30%

    But only 30% of executives say their organizations are doing it well.
    Source: BCG, 2019

    The biggest obstacles to innovation are cultural

    The biggest obstacles to innovation in large companies

    Based on a survey of 270 business leaders.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2018

    A bar graph from the Harvard Business Review

    The most common challenges business leaders experience relate to people and culture. Success is based on people, not ideas.

    Politics, turf wars, and a lack of alignment: territorial departments, competition for resources, and unclear roles are holding back the innovation efforts of 55% of respondents.

    FIX IT
    Senior leadership needs to be clear on the innovation goals and how business units are expected to contribute to them.

    Cultural issues: many large companies have a culture that rewards operational excellence and disincentivizes risk. A history of failed innovation attempts may result in significant resistance to new change efforts.

    FIX IT
    Cultural change takes time. Ensure you are rewarding collaboration and risk-taking, and hire people with fresh new perspectives.

    Inability to act on signals crucial to the future of the business: only 18% of respondents indicated their organization was unaware of disruptions, but 42% said they struggled with acting on leading indicators of change.

    FIX IT
    Build the ability to quickly run pilots or partner with startups and incubators to test out new ideas without lengthy review and approval processes.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2018

    Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program

    Define your purpose, assess your culture, and build a practice that delivers true innovation.

    An image summarizing how to define your purpose, align your people, and Build your Practice.
    1 Source: Boston Consulting Group, 2021
    2 Source: Boston Consulting Group, 2019
    3 Source: Harvard Business Review, 2018

    Use this research to outperform your peers

    A seven-year review showed that the most innovative companies outperformed the market by upwards of 30%.

    A line graph showing the Normalized Market Capitalization for 2020.

    Innovators are defined as companies that were listed on Fast Company World's 50 Most Innovative Companies for 2+ years.

    Innovation is critical to business success.

    A 25-year study by Business Development Canada and Statistics Canada showed that innovation was more important to business success than management, human resources, marketing, or finance.

    Executive brief case study

    INDUSTRY: Healthcare
    SOURCE: Interview

    Culture is critical

    This Info-Tech member is a nonprofit, community-based mental health organization located in the US. It serves about 25,000 patients per year in community, school, and clinic settings.

    This organization takes its innovation culture very seriously and has developed methodologies to assess individual and team innovation readiness as well as innovation types, which it uses to determine everyone's role in the innovation process. These assessments look at knowledge of and trust in the organization, its innovation profile, and its openness to change. Innovation enthusiasts are involved early in the process when it's important to dream big, while more pragmatic perspectives are incorporated later to improve the final solution.

    Results

    The organization has developed many innovative approaches to delivering healthcare. Notably, they have reimagined patient scheduling and reduced wait times to the extent that some patients can be seen the same day. They are also working to improve access to mental health care despite a shortage of professionals.

    Developing an Innovative Culture

    • Innovation Readiness Assessment
    • Coaching Specific to Innovation Profile
    • Innovation Enthusiasts Involved Early
    • Innovation Pragmatists Involved Later
    • High Success Rate of Innovation

    Define innovation roles and responsibilities

    A table showing key innovation roles and responsibilities.

    Info-Tech's methodology for building your enterprise innovation program

    1. Define Your Purpose

    2. Align Your People

    3. Build Your Practice

    Phase Steps

    1. Understand your mandate
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    3. Build core innovation capabilities
    1. Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies
    2. Define your pilot project methodology
    3. Conduct a program retrospective

    Phase Outcomes

    Understand where the mandate for innovation comes from, and what the drivers are for pursuing innovation. Define what innovation means to your organization, and set the vision, mission, and guiding principles. Articulate the value proposition and key metrics for measuring success.

    Understand what it takes to build an innovative culture, and what types of innovation structure are most suited to your innovation goals. Define an innovation methodology and build your core innovation capabilities and team.

    Gather ideas and understand how to assess and prioritize initiatives based on standardized metrics. Develop criteria for tracking and measuring the success of pilot projects and conduct a program retrospective.

    Innovation program taxonomy

    This research uses the following common terms:

    Innovation Operating Model
    The operating model describes how the innovation program delivers value to the organization, including how the program is structured, the steps from idea generation to enterprise launch, and the methodologies used.
    Examples: Innovation Hub, Grassroots Innovation.

    Innovation Methodology
    Methodologies describe the ways the operating model is carried out, and the approaches used in the innovation practice.
    Examples: Design Thinking, Weighted Criteria Scoring

    Chief Innovation Officer
    This research is written for the person or team leading the innovation program – this might be a CINO, CIO, or other leader in the organization.

    Innovation Team
    The innovation team may vary depending on the operating model, but generally consists of the individuals involved in facilitating innovation across the organization. This may be, but does not have to be, a dedicated innovation department.

    Innovation Program
    The program for generating ideas, running pilot projects, and building a business case to implement across the enterprise.

    Pilot Project
    A way of testing and validating a specific concept in the real world through a minimum viable product or small-scale implementation. The pilot projects are part of the overall pilot program.

    Insight summary

    Innovation is about people, not ideas or processes
    Innovation does not require a formal process, a dedicated innovation team, or a large budget; the most important success factor for innovation is culture. Companies that facilitate innovative behaviors like growth mindset, collaboration, and the ability to take smart risk are most likely to see the benefits of innovation.

    Very few are doing innovation well
    Only 30% of companies consider themselves innovative, and there's a good reason: innovation involves unknowns, risk, and failure – three situations that people and organizations typically do their best to avoid. Counter this by removing the barriers to innovation.

    Culture is the greatest barrier to innovation
    In a survey of 270 business leaders, the top three most common obstacles were politics, turf wars, and alignment; culture issues; and inability to act on signals crucial to the business (Harvard Business Review, 2018). If you don't have a supportive culture, your ability to innovate will be significantly reduced.

    Innovation is a means to an end
    It is not the end itself. Don't get caught up in innovation for the sake of innovation – make sure you are getting the benefits from your investments. Measurable success factors are critical for maintaining the long-term success of your innovation engine.

    Tackle wicked problems
    Innovative approaches are better at solving complex problems than traditional practices. Organizations that prioritize innovation during a crisis tend to outperform their peers by over 30% and improve their market position (McKinsey, 2020).

    Innovate or die
    Innovation is critical to business growth. A 25-year study showed that innovation was more important to business success than management, human resources, marketing, or finance (Statistics Canada, 2006).

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Sample Job Descriptions and Organization Charts

    Determine the skills, knowledge, and structure you need to make innovation happen.

    Sample Job Descriptions and Organization Charts

    Ideation Session Template

    Facilitate an ideation session with your staff to identify areas for innovation.

    Ideation Session Template

    Initiative Prioritization Workbook

    Evaluate ideas to identify those which are most likely to provide value.

    Prioritization Workbook

    Key deliverable:

    Enterprise Innovation Program Summary

    Communicate how you plan to innovate with a report summarizing the outputs from this research.

    Enterprise Innovation Program Summary

    Measure the value of this research

    US businesses spend over half a trillion dollars on innovation annually. What are they getting for it?

    • The top innovators(1) typically spend 5-15% of their budgets on innovation (including R&D).
    • This research helps organizations develop a successful innovation program, which delivers value to the organization in the form of new products, services, and methods.
    • Leverage this research to:
      • Get your innovation program off the ground quickly.
      • Increase internal knowledge and expertise.
      • Generate buy-in and excitement about innovation.
      • Develop the skills and capabilities you need to drive innovation over the long term.
      • Validate your innovation concept.
      • Streamline and integrate innovation across the organization.

    (1) based on BCG's 50 Most Innovative Companies 2022

    30%

    The most innovative companies outperform the market by 30%.
    Source: McKinsey & Company, 2020

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided implementation

    What does a typical guided implementation (GI) on this topic look like?

    Phase 0 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Finish

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Understand your mandate.
    (Activity 1.1)

    Call #3: Innovation vision, guiding principles, value proposition, and scope.
    (Activities 1.2 and 1.3)

    Call #4: Foster a culture of innovation. (Activity 2.1)

    Call #5: Define your methodology. (Activity 2.2)

    Call #6: Build core innovation capabilities. (Activity 2.3)

    Call #7: Build your ideation and pilot programs. (Activities 3.1 and 3.2)

    Call #8: Identify success metrics and notable wins. (Activity 3.3)

    Call #9: Summarize results and plan next steps.

    A GI is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of three to six months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 Session 4

    Wrap Up

    Activities

    Define Your Ambitions

    Align Your People

    Develop Your Capabilities

    Build Your Program

    Next Steps and
    Wrap Up (offsite)

    1. Understand your innovation mandate (complete activity prior to workshop)
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    1. Build core innovation capabilities
    2. Develop prioritization criteria
    1. Define your methodology to pilot projects
    2. Conduct a program retrospective
    1. Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    2. Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Our purpose
    2. Message from the CEO
    3. Vision and guiding principles
    4. Scope and value proposition
    5. Success metrics
    1. Building an innovative culture
    2. Operating model
    1. Core capabilities and structure
    2. Idea evaluation prioritization criteria
    1. Program retrospective
    2. Notable wins
    3. Executive summary
    4. Next steps
    1. Completed enterprise innovation program
    2. An engaged and inspired team

    Phase 1: Define Your Purpose

    Develop a better understanding of the drivers for innovation and what success looks like.

    Purpose

    People

    Practice

    1. Understand your mandate
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    3. Build core innovation capabilities
    1. Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies
    2. Define your pilot project methodology
    3. Conduct a program retrospective

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand your innovation mandate, including its drivers, scope, and focus.
    • Define what innovation means to your organization.
    • Develop an innovation vision and guiding principles.
    • Articulate the value proposition and proposed metrics for evaluating program success.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CINO
    • Business executives

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Transportation
    SOURCE: Interview

    ArcBest
    ArcBest is a multibillion-dollar shipping and logistics company which leverages innovative technologies to provide reliable and integrated services to its customers.

    An Innovative Culture Starts at the Top
    ArcBest's innovative culture has buy-in and support from the highest level of the company. Michael Newcity, ArcBest's CEO, is dedicated to finding better ways of serving their customers and supports innovation across the company by dedicating funding and resources toward piloting and scaling new initiatives.
    Having a clear purpose and mandate for innovation at all levels of the organization has resulted in extensive grassroots innovation and the development of a formalized innovation program.

    Results
    ArcBest has a legacy of innovation, going back to its early days when it developed a business intelligence solution before anything else existed on the market. It continues to innovate today and is now partnering with start-ups to further expand its innovation capabilities.

    "We don't micromanage or process-manage incremental innovation. We hire really smart people who are inspired to create new things and we let them run – let them create – and we celebrate it.
    Our dedication to innovation comes from the top – I am both the President and the Chief Innovation Officer, and innovation is one of my top priorities."

    Michael Newcity

    Michael Newcity
    President and Chief Innovation Officer ArcBest

    1.1 Understand your innovation mandate

    Before you can act, you need to understand the following:

    • Where is the drive for innovation coming from?
      The source of your mandate dictates the scope of your innovation practice – in general, innovating outside the scope of your mandate (i.e. trying to innovate on products when you don't have buy-in from the product team) will not be successful.
    • What is meant by "innovation"?
      There are many different definitions for innovation. Before pursuing innovation at your organization, you need to understand how it is defined. Use the definition in this section as a starting point, and craft your own definition of innovation.
    • What kind of innovation are you targeting?
      Innovation can be internal or external, emergent or deliberate, and incremental or radically transformative. Understanding what kind of innovation you want is the starting point for your innovation practice.

    The source of your mandate dictates the scope of your influence

    You can only influence what you can control.

    Unless your mandate comes from the CEO or Board of Directors, driving enterprise-wide innovation is very difficult. If you do not have buy-in from senior business leaders, use lighthouse projects and a smaller innovation practice to prove the value of innovation before taking on enterprise innovation.

    In order to execute on a mandate to build innovation, you don't just need buy-in. You need support in the form of resources and funding, as well as strong leadership who can influence culture and the authority to change policies and practices that inhibit innovation.

    For more resources on building relationships in your organization, refer to Info-Tech's Become a Transformational CIO blueprint.

    What is "innovation"?

    Innovation is often easier to recognize than define.

    Align on a useful definition of innovation for your organization before you embark on a journey of becoming more innovative.

    Innovation is the practice of developing new methods, products or services which provide value to an organization.

    Practice
    This does not have to be a formal process – innovation is a means to an end, not the end itself.

    New
    What does "new" mean to you?

    • New application of an existing method
    • Developing a completely original product
    • Adopting a service from another industry

    Value
    What does value mean to you? Look to your business strategy to understand what goals the organization is trying to achieve, then determine how "value" will be measured.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Some innovations are incremental, while some are radically transformative. Decide what kind of innovation you want to cultivate before developing your strategy.

    We can categorize innovation in three ways

    Evaluate your goals with respect to innovation: focus, strategy, and potential to transform.

    Focus: Where will you innovate?

    Focus

    Strategy: To what extent will you guide innovation efforts?

    Strategy

    Potential: How radical will your innovations be?

    Potential

    What are your ambitions?

    1. Develop a better understanding of what type of innovation you are trying to achieve by plotting out your goals on the categories on the left.
    2. All categories are independent of one another, so your goals may fall anywhere on the scales for each category.
    3. Understanding your innovation ambitions helps establish the operating model best suited for your innovation practice.
    4. In general, innovation which is more external, deliberate, and radical tends to be more centralized.

    Activity 1.1 Understand your innovation mandate

    1 hour

    1. Schedule a 30-minute discussion with the person (i.e. CEO) or group (i.e. Board of Directors) ultimately requesting the shift toward innovation. If there is no external party, then conduct this assessment yourself.
    2. Facilitate a discussion that addresses the following questions:
    • What is meant by "innovation"?
    • What are they hoping to achieve through innovation?
    • What is the innovation scope? Are any areas off-limits (i.e. org structure, new products, certain markets)?
    • What is the budget (i.e. people, money) they are willing to commit to innovation?
    • What type of innovation are they pursuing?
    1. Record this information and complete the "Our Purpose" section of the Innovation Program Template.

    Download the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Knowledge of the key decision maker/sponsor for innovation

    Output

    • Understanding of the mandate for innovation, including definition, value, scope, budget, and type of innovation

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO
    • CEO, CTO, or Board of Directors (whoever is requesting/sponsoring the pursuit of innovation)

    1.2 Define your innovation ambitions

    Articulate your future state through a vision and guiding principles.

    • Vision and purpose make up the foundation on which all other design aspects will be based. These aspects should not be taken lightly, but rather they should be the force that aligns everyone to work toward a common outcome. It is incumbent on leaders to make them part of the DNA of the organization – to drive organization, structure, culture, and talent strategy.
    • Your vision statement is a future-focused statement that summarizes what you hope to achieve. It should be inspirational, ambitious, and concise.
    • Your guiding principles outline the guardrails for your innovation practice. What will your focus be? How will you approach innovation? What is off-limits?
    • Define the scope and focus for your innovation efforts. This includes what you can innovate on and what is off limits.

    Your vision statement is your North Star

    Articulate an ambitious, inspirational, and concise vision statement for your innovation efforts.

    A strong vision statement:

    • Is future-focused and outlines what you want to become and what you want to achieve.
    • Provides focus and direction.
    • Is ambitious, focused, and concise.
    • Answers: What problems are we solving? Who and what are we changing?

    Examples:

    • "We create radical new technologies to solve some of the world's hardest problems." – Google X, the Moonshot Factory
    • "To be the most innovative enterprise in the world." – 3M
    • "To use our imagination to bring happiness to millions of people." – Disney

    "Good business leaders create a vision, articulate the vision, passionately own the vision, and relentlessly drive it to completion." – Jack Welch, Former Chairman and CEO of GE

    Your guiding principles are the guardrails for creativity

    Strong guiding principles give your team the freedom and direction to innovate.

    Strong guiding principles:

    • Focus on the approach, i.e. how things are done, as opposed to what needs to be done.
    • Are specific to the organization.
    • Inform and direct decision making with actionable statements. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.
    • Are long-lasting and based on values, not solutions.
    • Are succinct and easily digestible.
    • Can be measured and verified.
    • Answers: How do we approach innovation? What are our core values

    Craft your guiding principles using these examples

    Encourage experimentation and risk-taking
    Innovation often requires trying new things, even if they might fail. We encourage experimentation and learn from failure, so that new ideas can be tested and refined.

    Foster collaboration and cross-functional teams
    Innovation often comes from the intersection of different perspectives and skill sets.

    Customer-centric
    Focus on creating value for the end user. This means understanding their needs and pain points, and using that knowledge to develop new methods, products, or services.

    Embrace diversity and inclusivity
    Innovation comes from a variety of perspectives, backgrounds, and experiences. We actively seek out and encourage diversity and inclusivity among our team members.

    Foster a culture of learning and continuous improvement
    Innovation requires continuous learning, development, and growth. We facilitate a culture that encourages learning and development, and that seeks feedback and uses it to improve.

    Flexible and adaptable
    We adapt to changes in the market, customer needs, and new technologies, so that it can continue to innovate and create value over time.

    Data-driven
    We use performance metrics and data to guide our innovation efforts.

    Transparency
    We are open and transparent in our processes and let the business needs guide our innovation efforts. We do not lead innovation, we facilitate it.

    Activity 1.2 Craft your vision statement and guiding principles

    1-2 hours

    1. Gather your innovation team and key program sponsors. Review the guidelines for creating vision statements and guiding principles, as well as your mandate and focus for innovation.
    2. As a group, discuss what you hope to achieve through your innovation efforts.
    3. Separately, have each person write down their ideas for a vision statement. Bring the group back together and share ideas. Group the concepts together and construct a single statement which outlines your aspirational vision.
    4. As a group, review the example guiding principles.
    5. Separately, have each person write down three to five guiding principles. Bring the group back together and share ideas. Group similar concepts together and consolidate duplicate ideas. From this list, construct six to eight guiding principles.
    6. Document your vision and guiding principles in the appropriate sections of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Understanding of your innovation mandate
    • Business vision, mission, and values
    • Sample vision statements and guiding principles

    Output

    • Vision statement
    • Guiding principles

    Materials

    • In person: Whiteboard/flip charts, sticky notes, pens, and notepads
    • Virtual: Consider using a shared document, virtual whiteboard, or online facilitation tool like MURAL
    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO
    • Innovation sponsors
    • Business leaders
    • Innovation team

    1.3 Determine your value proposition and metrics

    Justify the existence of the innovation program with a strong value proposition.

    • The value proposition for developing an innovation program will be different for each organization, depending on what the organization hopes to achieve. Consider your mandate for innovation as well as the type of innovation you are pursuing when crafting the value proposition.
    • Some of the reasons organizations may pursue innovation:
      • Business growth: Respond to market disruption; create new customers; take advantage of opportunities.
      • Branding: Create market differentiation; increase customer satisfaction and retention; adapt to customer needs.
      • Profitability: Improve products, services, or operations to increase competitiveness and profitability; develop more efficient processes.
      • Culture: Foster a culture of creativity and experimentation within the organization, encouraging employees to think outside the box.
      • Positive impact: Address social challenges such as poverty and climate change.

    Develop a strong value proposition for your innovation program

    Demonstrate the value to the business.

    A strong value proposition not only articulates the value that the business will derive from the innovation program but also provides a clear focus, helps to communicate the innovation goals, and ultimately drives the success of the program.

    Focus
    Prioritize and focus innovation efforts to create solutions that provide real value to the organization

    Communicate
    Communicate the mandate and benefits of innovation in a clear and compelling way and inspire people to think differently

    Measure Success
    Measure the success of your program by evaluating outcomes based on the value proposition

    Track appropriate success metrics for your innovation program

    Your success metrics should link back to your organizational goals and your innovation program's value proposition.

    Revenue Growth: Increase in revenue generated by new products or services.

    Market Share: Percentage of total market that the business captures as a result of innovation.

    Customer Satisfaction: Reviews, customer surveys, or willingness to recommend the company.

    Employee Engagement: Engagement surveys, performance, employee retention, or turnover.

    Innovation Output: The number of new products, services, or processes that have been developed.

    Return on Investment: Financial return on the resources invested in the innovation process.

    Social Impact: Number of people positively impacted, net reduction in emissions, etc.

    Time to Launch: The time it takes for a new product or service to go from idea to launch.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The total impact of innovation is often intangible and extremely difficult to capture in performance metrics. Focus on developing a few key metrics rather than trying to capture the full value of innovation.

    How much does innovation cost?

    Company Industry Revenue(2)
    (USD billions)
    R&D Spend
    (USD billions)
    R&D Spend
    (% of revenue)
    Apple Technology $394.30 $26.25 6.70%
    Microsoft Technology $203.10 $25.54 12.50%
    Amazon.com Retail $502.20 $67.71 13.40%
    Alphabet Technology $282.10 $37.94 13.40%
    Tesla Manufacturing $74.90 $3.01 4.00%
    Samsung Technology $244.39 (2021)(3) $19.0 (2021) 7.90%
    Moderna Pharmaceuticals $23.39 $2.73 11.70%
    Huawei Technology $99.9 (2021)4 Not reported -
    Sony Technology $83.80 Not reported -
    IBM Technology $60.50 $1.61 2.70%
    Meta Software $118.10 $32.61 27.60%
    Nike Commercial goods $49.10 Not reported -
    Walmart Retail $600.10 Not reported -
    Dell Technology $105.30 $2.60 2.50%
    Nvidia Technology $28.60 $6.85 23.90%


    The top innovators(1) in the world spend 5% to 15% of their revenue on innovation.

    Innovation requires a dedicated investment of time, money, and resources in order to be successful. The most innovative companies, based on Boston Consulting Group's ranking of the 50 most innovative companies in the world, spend significant portions of their revenue on research and development.

    Note: This data uses research and development as a proxy for innovation spending, which may overestimate the total spend on what this research considers true innovation.

    (1) Based on Boston Consulting Group's ranking of the 50 most innovative companies in the world, 2022
    (2) Macrotrends, based on the 12 months ending Sept 30, 2022
    (3) Statista
    (4) CNBC, 2022

    Activity 1.3 Develop your value proposition and performance metrics

    1 hour

    1. Review your mandate and vision statement. Write down your innovation goals and desired outcomes from pursuing innovation, prioritize the desired outcomes, and select the top five.
    2. For each desired outcome, develop one to two metrics which could be used to track its success. Some outcomes are difficult to track, so get creative when it comes to developing metrics. If you get stuck, think about what would differentiate a great outcome from an unsuccessful one.
    3. Once you have developed a list of three to five key metrics, read over the list and ensure that the metrics you have developed don't negatively influence your innovation. For example, a metric of the number of successful launches may drive people toward launching before a product is ready.
    4. For each metric, develop a goal. For example, you may target 1% revenue growth over the next fiscal year or 20% energy use reduction.
    5. Document your value proposition and key performance metrics in the appropriate sections of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Understanding of your innovation mandate
    • Vision statement

    Output

    • Value proposition
    • Performance metrics

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO

    Phase 2: Align Your People

    Create a culture that fosters innovative behaviors and puts processes in place to support them.

    Purpose

    People

    Practice

    1. Understand your mandate
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    3. Build core innovation capabilities
    1. Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies
    2. Define your pilot project methodology
    3. Conduct a program retrospective

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the key aspects of innovative cultures, and the behaviors associated with innovation.
    • Assess your culture and identify gaps.
    • Define your innovation operating model based on your organizational culture and the focus for innovation.
    • Build your core innovation capabilities, including an innovation core team (if required based on your operating model).

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CINO
    • Innovation team

    2.1 Foster a culture of innovation

    Culture is the most important driver of innovation – and the most challenging to get right.

    • Fostering a culture of innovation requires a broad approach which considers the perspectives of individuals, teams, leadership, and the overall organization.
    • If you do not have support from leadership, it is very difficult to change organizational culture. It may be more effective to start with an innovation pilot or lighthouse project in order to gain support before addressing your culture.
    • Rather than looking to change outcomes, focus on the behaviors which lead to innovation – such as growth mindset and willingness to fail. If these aren't in place, your ability to innovate will be limited.
    • This section focuses on the specific behaviors associated with increased innovation. For additional resources on implementing these changes, refer to Info-Tech's other research:

    Info-Tech's Fix Your IT Culture can help you promote innovative behaviors

    Refer to Improve IT Team Effectiveness to address team challenges

    Build a culture of innovation

    Focus on behaviors, not outcomes.

    The following behaviors and key indicators either stifle or foster innovation.

    Stifles Innovation Key Indicators Fosters Innovation Key Indicators
    Fixed mindset "It is what it is" Growth mindset "I wonder if there's a better way"
    Performance focused "It's working fine" Learning focused "What can we learn from this?"
    Fear of reprisal "I'll get in trouble" Psychological safety "I can disagree"
    Apathy "We've always done it this way" Curiosity "I wonder what would happen if…"
    Cynicism "It will never work" Trust "You have good judgement"
    Punishing failure "Who did this?" Willingness to fail "It's okay to make mistakes"
    Individualism "How does this benefit me?" Collaboration "How does this benefit us?"
    Homogeneity "We never disagree" Diversity and inclusion "We appreciate different views"
    Excessive bureaucracy "We need approval" Autonomy "I can do this"
    Risk avoidance "We can't try that" Appropriate risk-taking "How can we do this safely?"

    Ensure you are not inadvertently stifling innovation.
    Review the following to ensure that the desired behaviors are promoted:

    • Hiring practices
    • Performance evaluation metrics
    • Rewards and incentives
    • Corporate policies
    • Governance structures
    • Leadership behavior

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Commercial Real Estate and Retail
    SOURCE: Interview

    How not to approach innovation.

    This anonymous national organization owned commercial properties across the country and had the goal of becoming the most innovative real estate and retail company in the market.

    The organization pursued innovation in the digital solutions space across its commercial and retail properties. Within this space, there were significant differences in risk tolerance across teams, which resulted in the more risk-tolerant teams excluding the risk-averse members from discussions in order to circumvent corporate policies on risk tolerance. This resulted in an adversarial and siloed culture where each group believed they knew better than the other, and the more risk-averse teams felt like they were policing the actions of the risk-tolerant group.

    Results

    Morale plummeted, and many of the organization's top people left. Unfortunately, one of the solutions did not meet regulatory requirements, and the company faced negative media coverage and legal action. There was significant reputational damage as a result.

    Lessons Learned

    Considering differences in risk tolerance and risk appetite is critical when pursuing innovation. While everyone doesn't have to agree, leadership needs to understand the different perspectives and ensure that no one party is dominating the conversation over the others. An understanding of corporate risk tolerance and risk appetite is necessary to drive innovation.

    All perspectives have a place in innovation. More risk tolerant perspectives should be involved early in the ideas-generation phase, and risk-averse perspectives should be considered later when ideas are being refined.

    Speed should not override safety or circumvent corporate policies.

    Understand your risk tolerance and risk appetite

    Evaluate and align the appetite for risk.

    • It is important to understand the organization's risk tolerance as well as the desire for risk. Consider the following risk categories when investigating the organization's views on risk:
      • Financial risk: the potential for financial or property loss.
      • Operational risk: the potential for disruptions to operations.
      • Reputational risk: the potential for negative impact to brand or reputation.
      • Compliance risk: the potential for loss due to non-compliance with laws and regulations.
    • Greater risk tolerance typically enables greater innovation. Understand the varying levels of risk tolerance across your organization, and how these differences might impact innovation efforts.

    An arrow showing the directions of risk tolerance.

    It is more important to match the level of risk tolerance to the degree of innovation required. Not all innovation needs to be (or can feasibly be) disruptive.
    Many factors impact risk tolerance including:

    • Regulation
    • Organization size
    • Country
    • Industry
    • Personal experience
    • Type of risk

    Use Info-Tech's Security Risk Management research to better understand risk tolerance

    Activity 2.1 Assess your innovation culture

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the behaviors which support and stifle innovation and give each behavior a score from 1 (stifling innovation) to 5 (fostering innovation). Any behaviors which fall below a 4 on this scale should be prioritized in your efforts to create an innovative culture.
    2. Review the following policies and practices to determine how they may be contributing to the behaviors you see in your organization:
      1. Hiring practices
      2. Performance evaluation metrics
      3. Rewards, recognition, and incentives
      4. Corporate policies
      5. Governance structures
      6. Leadership behavior
    3. Identify three concrete actions you can take to correct any behaviors which are stifling innovation. Examples might be revising a policy which punishes failure or changing performance incentives to reward appropriate risk taking.
    4. Summarize your findings in the appropriate section of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Innovation behaviors

    Output

    • Understanding of your organization's culture
    • Concrete actions you can take to promote innovation

    Materials

    • List of innovative behaviors
    • Relevant policies and documents to review
    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO

    2.2 Define your innovation model

    Set up your innovation practice for success using proven models and methodologies.

    • There are many ways to approach innovation, from highly distributed forms where it's just part of everyone's job to very centralized and arm's-length innovation hubs or even outsourced innovation via startups. You can combine different approaches to create your own approach.
    • You may or may not have a formal innovation team, but if you do, their role is to facilitate innovation – not lead it. Innovation is most effective when it is led by the business.
    • There are many tools and methodologies you can use to facilitate innovation. Choose the one (or combination) that best suits your needs.

    Select the right model

    There is no one right way to pursue innovation, but some methods are better than others for specific situations and goals. Consider your existing culture, your innovation goals, and your budget when selecting the right methodology for your innovation.

    Model Description Advantages Disadvantages Good when…
    Grassroots Innovation Innovation is the responsibility of everyone, and there is no centralized innovation team. Ideas are piloted and scaled by the person/team which produces it.
    • Can be used in any organization or team
    • Can support low or high degree of structure
    • Low funding requirement
    • Requires a strong innovation culture
    • Often does not produce results since people don't have time to focus on innovation
    • Innovation culture is strong
    • Funding is limited
    • Goal is internal, incremental innovation
    Community of Practice Innovation is led by a cross-divisional Community of Practice (CoP) which includes representation from across the business. Champions consult with their practice areas and bring ideas forward.
    • Bringing people together can help stimulate and share ideas
    • Low funding requirement
    • Able to support many types of innovation
    • Some people may feel left out if they can't be involved
    • May not produce results if people are too busy to dedicate time to innovate
    • Innovation culture is present
    • Funding is limited
    • Goal is incremental or disruptive innovation
    Innovation Enablement
    *Most often recommended*
    A dedicated innovation team with funding set aside to support pilots with a high degree of autonomy, with the role of facilitating business-led innovation.
    • Most flexible of all options
    • Supports business-led innovation
    • Can deliver results quickly
    • Can enable a higher degree of innovation
    • Requires dedicated staff and funding
    • Innovation culture is present
    • Funding is available
    • Goal is internal or external, incremental or radical innovation
    Center of Excellence Dedicated team responsible for leading innovation on behalf of the organization. Generally, has business relationship managers who gather ideas and liaise with the business.
    • Can deliver results quickly
    • Can offer a fresh perspective
    • Can enable a higher degree of innovation
    • Requires dedicated staff and funding
    • Is typically separate from the business
    • Results may not align with the business needs or have adequate input
    • Innovation culture is weak
    • Funding is significant
    • Goal is external, disruptive innovation
    Innovation Hub An arm's length innovation team is responsible for all or much of the innovation and may not interact much with the core business.
    • Can deliver results quickly
    • Can be extremely innovative
    • Expensive
    • Results may not align with the business needs or have adequate/any input
    • Innovation culture is weak
    • Funding is very significant
    • Goal is external, radical innovation
    Outsourced Innovation Innovation is outsourced to an external organization which is not linked to the primary organization. This can take the form of working with or investing in startups.
    • Can lead to more innovative ideas than internal innovation
    • Investments can become a diverse revenue stream if startups are successful
    • Innovation does not rely on culture
    • Higher risk of failure
    • Less control over goals or focus
    • Results may not align with the business needs or have any input from users
    • Innovation does not rely on culture
    • Funding is significant
    • Goal is external or internal, radical innovation

    Use the right methodologies to support different stages of your innovation process

    A chart showing methodologies to support different stages of the integration process.

    Adapted from Niklaus Gerber via Medium, 2022

    Methodologies are most useful when they are aligned with the goals of the innovation organization.

    For example, design thinking tends to be excellent for earlier innovation planning, while Agile can allow for faster implementation and launch of initiatives later in the process.

    Consider combining two or more methodologies to create a custom approach that best suits your organization's capabilities and goals.

    Sample methodologies

    A robust innovation methodology ensures that the process for developing, prioritizing, selecting, implementing, and measuring initiatives is aligned with the results you are hoping to achieve.

    Different types of problems (drivers for innovation) may necessitate different methodologies, or a combination of methodologies.

    Hackathon: An event which brings people together to solve a well-defined problem.

    Design Thinking: Creative approach that focuses on understanding the needs of users.

    Lean Startup: Emphasizes rapid experimentation in order to validate business hypotheses.

    Design Sprint: Five-day process for answering business questions via design, prototyping, and testing.

    Agile: Iterative design process that emphasizes project management and retrospectives.

    Three Horizons: Framework that looks at opportunities on three different time horizons.

    Innovation Ambition Matrix: Helps organizations categorize projects as part of the core offering, an adjacent offering, or completely new.

    Global Innovation Management: A process of identifying, developing and implementing new ideas, products, services, or processes using alternative thinking.

    Blue Ocean Strategy: A methodology that helps organizations identify untapped market space and create new markets via unique value propositions.

    Activity 2.2 Design your innovation model

    1-2 hours

    1. Think about the following factors which influence the design of your innovation practice:
      1. Existing organizational culture
      2. Available funding to support innovation
      3. Type of innovation you are targeting
    2. Review the innovation approaches, and identify which approach is most suitable for your situation. Note why this approach was selected.
    3. Review the innovation methodologies and research those of interest. Select two to five methodologies to use for your innovation practice.
    4. Document your decisions in the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Understanding of your mandate and existing culture

    Output

    • Innovation approach
    • Selected methodologies

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO
    • Innovation team

    2.3 Build your core innovation capabilities

    Develop the skills, knowledge, and experience to facilitate successful innovation.

    • Depending on the approach you selected in step 2.2, you may or may not require a dedicated innovation team. If you do, use the job descriptions and sample organization charts to build it. If not, focus on developing key capabilities which are needed to facilitate innovation.
    • Diversity is key for successful innovation – ensure your team (formal or otherwise) includes diverse perspectives and backgrounds.
    • Use your guiding principles when hiring and training your team.
    • Focus on three core roles: evangelists, enablers, and experts.

    Focus on three key roles when building your innovation team

    Types of roles will depend on the purpose and size of the innovation team.

    You don't need to grow them all internally. Consider partnering with vendors and other organizations to build capabilities.

    Evangelists

    Visionaries who inspire, support, and facilitate innovation across the business. Their responsibilities are to drive the culture of innovation.

    Key skills and knowledge:

    • Strong communication skills
    • Relationship-building
    • Consensus-building
    • Collaboration
    • Growth mindset

    Sample titles:

    • CINO
    • Chief Transformation Officer
    • Chief Digital Officer
    • Innovation Lead
    • Business Relationship Manager

    Enablers

    Translate ideas into tangible business initiatives, including assisting with business cases and developing performance metrics.

    Key skills and knowledge:

    • Critical thinking skills
    • Business knowledge
    • Facilitation skills
    • Consensus-building
    • Relationship-building

    Sample titles:

    • Product Owner
    • Design Thinking Lead
    • Data Scientist
    • Business Analyst
    • Human Factors Engineer
    • Digital Marketing Specialist

    Experts

    Provide expertise in product design, delivery and management, and responsible for supporting and executing on pilot projects.

    Key skills and knowledge:

    • Project management skills
    • Technical expertise
    • Familiarity with emerging technologies
    • Analytical skills
    • Problem-solving skills

    Sample titles:

    • Product Manager
    • Scrum Master/Agile Coach
    • Product Engineer/DevOps
    • Product Designer
    • Emerging tech experts

    Sample innovation team structure (large enterprise)

    Visualize the whole value delivery process end-to-end to help identify the types of roles, resources, and capabilities required. These capabilities can be sourced internally (i.e. grow and hire internally) or through collaboration with centers of excellence, commercial partners, etc.

    A flow chart of a sample innovation team structure.

    Streamline your process by downloading Info-Tech's job description templates:

    Activity 2.3 Build your innovation team

    2-3 hours

    1. Review your work from the previous activities as well as the organizational structure and the job description templates.
    2. Start a list with two columns: currently have and needed. Start listing some of the key roles and capabilities from earlier in this step, categorizing them appropriately.
    3. If you are using an organizational structure for your innovation process, start to frame out the structure and roles for your team.
    4. Develop a list of roles you need to hire, and the key capabilities you need from candidates. Using the job descriptions, write job postings for each role.
    5. Record your work in the appropriate section of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Previous work
    • Info-Tech job description templates

    Output

    • List of capabilities required
    • Org chart
    • Job postings for required roles

    Materials

    • Note-taking capability
    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Fix Your IT Culture

    • Promote psychological safety and growth mindset within your organization.
    • Develop the organizational behaviors that lead to innovation.

    Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    • Address behaviors, processes, and cultural factors which impact team effectiveness.
    • Grow the team's ability to address challenges and navigate volatile, uncertain, complex and ambiguous environments.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • Transformation and change are increasingly becoming the new normal. While this normality may help make people more open to change in general, specific changes still need to be planned, communicated, and managed. Agility and continuous improvement are good but can degenerate into volatility if change isn't managed properly.

    Phase 3: Build Your Practice

    Define your innovation process, streamline pilot projects, and scale for success.

    Purpose

    People

    Practice

    1. Understand your mandate
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    3. Build core innovation capabilities
    1. Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies
    2. Define your pilot project methodology
    3. Conduct a program retrospective

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build the methodologies needed to elicit ideas from the business.
    • Develop criteria to evaluate and prioritize ideas for piloting.
    • Define your pilot program methodologies and processes, including criteria to assess and compare the success of pilot projects.
    • Conduct an end-of-year program retrospective to evaluate the success of your innovation program.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CINO
    • Innovation team

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Government
    SOURCE: Interview

    Confidential US government agency

    The business applications group at this government agency strongly believes that innovation is key to progress and has instituted a formal innovation program as part of their agile operations. The group uses a Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe) with 2-week sprints and a 12-week program cycle.

    To support innovation across the business unit, the last sprint of each cycle is dedicated toward innovation and teams do not commit to any other during these two weeks. At the end of each innovation sprint, ideas are presented to leadership and the valuable ones were either implemented initially or were given time in the next cycle of sprints for further development. This has resulted in a more innovative culture across the practice.

    Results

    There have been several successful innovations since this process began. Notably, the agency had previously purchased a robotic process automation platform which was only being used for a few specific applications. One team used their innovation sprint to expand the use cases for this solution and save nearly 10,000 hours of effort.

    Standard 12-week Program Cycle
    An image of a standard 12-week program

    Design your innovation operating model to maximize value and learning opportunities

    Pilots are an iterative process which brings together innovators and business teams to test and evaluate ideas.

    Your operating model should include several steps including ideation, validation, evaluation and prioritization, piloting, and a retrospective which follows the pilot. Use the example on this slide when designing your own innovation operating model.

    An image of the design process for innovation operation model.

    3.1 Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies

    Engage the business to generate ideas, then prioritize based on value to the business.

    • There are many ways of generating ideas, from informal discussion to formal ideation sessions or submission forms. Whatever you decide to use, make sure that you're getting the right information to evaluate ideas for prioritization.
    • Use quantitative and qualitative metrics to evaluate ideas generated during the ideation process.
      • Quantitative metrics might include potential return on investment (ROI) or effort and resources required to implement.
      • Qualitative metrics might include alignment with the organizational strategy or the level of risk associated with the idea.

    Engage the business to generate ideas

    There are many ways of generating innovative ideas. Pick the methods that best suit your organization and goals.

    Design Thinking
    A structured approach that encourages participants to think creatively about the needs of the end user.

    An image including the following words: Empathize, Define; Ideate; Test.

    Ideation Workshop
    A formal session that is used to understand a problem then generate potential solutions. Workshops can incorporate the other methodologies (such as brainstorming, design thinking, or mind mapping) to generate ideas.

    • Define the problem
    • Generate ideas
    • Capture ideas
    • Evaluate and prioritize
    • Assign next steps

    Crowdsourcing
    An informal method of gathering ideas from a large group of people. This can be a great way to generate many ideas but may lack focus.

    Value Proposition Canvas
    A visual tool which helps to identify customer (or user) needs and design products and services that meet those needs.

    an image of the Value Proposition Canvas

    Evaluate ideas and focus on those with the greatest value

    Evaluation should be transparent and use both quantitative and qualitative metrics. The exact metrics used will depend on your organization and goals.

    It is important to include qualitative metrics as these dimensions are better suited to evaluating highly innovative ideas and can capture important criteria like alignment with overall strategy and feasibility.

    Develop 5 to 10 criteria that you can use to evaluate and prioritize ideas. Some criteria may be a pass/fail (for example, minimum ROI) and some may be comparative.

    Evaluate
    The first step is to evaluate ideas to determine if they meet the minimum criteria. This might include quantitative criteria like ROI as well as qualitative criteria like strategic alignment and feasibility.

    Prioritize
    Ideas that pass the initial evaluation should be prioritized based on additional criteria which might include quantitative criteria such as potential market size and cost to implement, and qualitative criteria such as risk, impact, and creativity.

    Quantitative Metrics

    Quantitative metrics are objective and easily comparable between initiatives, providing a transparent and data-driven process for evaluation and prioritization.
    Examples:

    • Potential market size
    • ROI
    • Net present value
    • Payback period
    • Number of users impacted
    • Customer acquisition cost
    • Customer lifetime value
    • Breakeven analysis
    • Effort required to implement
    • Cost to implement

    Qualitative Metrics

    Qualitative metrics are less easily comparable but are equally important when it comes to evaluating ideas. These should be developed based on your organization strategy and innovation goals.
    Examples:

    • Strategy alignment
    • Impact on users
    • Uncertainty and risk
    • Innovation potential
    • Culture impact
    • Feasibility
    • Creativity and originality
    • Type of innovation

    Activity 3.1 Develop prioritization metrics

    1-3 hours

    1. Review your mandate, purpose, innovation goals and the sample prioritization and evaluation metrics.
    2. Write down a list of your goals and their associated metrics, then prioritize which are the most important.
    3. Determine which metrics will be used to evaluate ideas before they move on to the prioritization stage, and which metrics will be used to compare initiatives in order to determine which will receive further investment.
    4. For each evaluation metric, determine the minimum threshold required for an idea to move forward. For each prioritization metric identify the definition and how it will be evaluated. Qualitative metrics may require more precise definitions than quantitative metrics.
    5. Enter your metrics into the Initiative Prioritization Template.

    Input

    • Innovation mandate
    • Innovation goals
    • Sample metrics

    Output

    • Evaluation and prioritization metrics for ideas

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip charts
    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • Innovation leader

    Download the Initiative Prioritization Template

    3.2 Build your program to pilot initiatives

    Test and refine ideas through real-world pilot projects.

    • The purpose of your pilot is to test and refine ideas in the real world. In order to compare pilot projects, it's important to track key performance indicators throughout the pilot. Measurements should be useful and comparable.
    • Innovation facilitators are responsible for supporting pilot projects, including designing the pilot, setting up metrics, tracking outcomes, and facilitating retrospectives.
    • Pilots generally follow an Agile methodology where ideas may be refined as the pilot proceeds, and the process iterates until either the idea is discarded or it has been refined into an initiative which can be scaled.
    • Expect that most pilots will fail the first time, and many will fail completely. This is not a loss; lessons learned from the retrospective can be used to improve the process and later pilots.

    Use pilot projects to test and refine initiatives before scaling to the rest of the organization

    "Learning is as powerful as the outcome." – Brett Trelfa, CIO, Arkansas Blue Cross

    1. Clearly define the goals and objectives of the pilot project. Goals and objectives ensure that the pilot stays on track and can be measured.
    2. Your pilot group should include a variety of participants with diverse perspectives and skill sets, in order to gather unique insights.
    3. Continuously track the progress of the pilot project. Regularly identify areas of improvement and implement changes as necessary to refine ideas.
    4. Regularly elicit feedback from participants and iterate in order to improve the final innovation. Not all pilots will be successful, but every failure can help refine future solutions.
    5. Consider scalability. If the pilot project is successful, it should be scalable and the lessons learned should be implemented in the larger organization.

    Sample pilot metrics

    Metrics are used to validate and test pilot projects to ensure they deliver value. This is an important step before scaling to the rest of the organization.

    Adoption: How many end users have adopted the pilot solution?

    Utilization: Is the solution getting utilized?

    Support Requests: How many support requests have there been since the pilot was initiated?

    Value: Is the pilot delivering on the value that it proposed? For example, time savings.

    Feasibility: Has the feasibility of the solution changed since it was first proposed?

    Satisfaction: Focus groups or surveys can provide feedback on user/customer satisfaction.

    A/B Testing: Compare different methods, products or services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ensure standard core metrics are used across all pilot projects so that outcomes can be compared. Additional metrics may be used to refine and test hypotheses through the pilot process.

    Activity 3.2 Build your program to pilot initiatives

    1-2 hours

    1. Gather the innovation team and review your mandate, purpose, goals, and the sample innovation operating model and metrics.
    2. As a group, brainstorm the steps needed from idea generation to business case. Use sticky notes if in person, or a collaboration tool if remote.
    3. Determine the metrics that will be used to evaluate ideas at each decision step (for example, prior to piloting). Outline what the different decisions might be (for example, proceed, refine or discard) and what happens as a result of each decision.
    4. Document your final steps and metrics in the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Innovation mandate
    • Innovation goals
    • Sample metrics

    Output

    • Pilot project methodology
    • Pilot project metrics

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template
    • Sticky notes (in person) or digital collaboration tool (if remote)

    Participants

    • Innovation leader
    • Innovation team

    3.3 Conduct a program retrospective

    Generate value from your successful pilots by scaling ideas across the organization.

    • The final step in the innovation process is to scale ideas to the enterprise in order to realize the full potential.
    • Keeping track of notable wins is important for showing the value of the innovation program. Track performance of initiatives that come out of the innovation program, including their financial, cultural, market, and brand impacts.
    • Track the success of the innovation program itself by evaluating the number of ideas generated, the number of pilots run and the success of the pilots. Keep in mind that many failed pilots is not a failure of the program if the lessons learned were valuable.
    • Complete an innovation program retrospective every 6 to 12 months in order to adjust and make any changes if necessary to improve your process.

    Retrospectives should be objective, constructive, and action-oriented

    A retrospective is a review of your innovation program with the aim of identifying lessons learned, areas for improvement, and opportunities for growth.

    During a retrospective, the team will reflect on past experiences and use that information to inform future decision making and improve outcomes.

    The goal of a retrospective is to learn from the past and use that knowledge to improve in the future.

    Objective

    Ensure that the retrospective is based on facts and objective data, rather than personal opinions or biases.

    Constructive

    Ensure that the retrospective is a positive and constructive experience, with a focus on finding solutions rather than dwelling on problems.

    Action-Oriented

    The retrospective should result in a clear action plan with specific steps to improve future initiatives.

    Activity 3.3 Conduct a program retrospective

    1-2 hours

    1. Post a large piece of paper on the wall with a timeline from the last year. Include dates and a few key events, but not much more. Have participants place sticky notes in the spots to describe notable wins or milestones that they were proud of. This can be done as part of a formal meeting or asynchronously outside of meetings.
    2. Bring the innovation team together and review the poster with notable wins. Do any themes emerge? How does the team feel the program is doing? Are there any changes needed?
    3. Consider the metrics you use to track your innovation program success. Did the scaled projects meet their targets? Is there anything that could be refined about the innovation process?
    4. Evaluate the outcomes of your innovation program. Did it meet the targets set for it? Did the goals and innovation ambitions come to fruition?
    5. Complete this step every 6 to 12 months to assess the success of your program.
    6. Complete the "Notable Wins" section of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Innovation mandate
    • Innovation goals
    • Sample metrics

    Output

    • Notable wins
    • Action items for refining the innovation process

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template
    • Sticky notes (in person) or digital collaboration tool (if remote)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Innovation team
    • Others who have participated in the innovation process

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

    • A user's perspective while interacting with the products and services is very different from the organization's internal perspective while implementing and provisioning those. A design-based organization balances the two perspectives to drive user-satisfaction over end-to-end journeys.

    Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint

    • Build and test a prototype in four days using Info-Tech's Innovation Design Sprint Methodology.
    • Create an environment for co-creation between IT and the business.

    Fund Innovation With a Minimum Viable Business Case

    • Our approach guides you through effectively designing a solution, de-risking a project through impact reduction techniques, building and pitching the case for your project, and applying the business case as a mechanism to ensure that benefits are realized.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Congratulations on launching your innovation program!

    You have now completed your innovation strategy, covering the following topics:

    • Executive Summary
    • Our Purpose
    • Scope and Value Proposition
    • Guiding Principles
    • Building an Innovative Culture
    • Program Structure
    • Success Metrics
    • Notable Wins

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Accelerate Digital Transformation With a Digital Factory

    • Understand the foundations of good design: purpose, organizational support, and leadership.
    • Understand the design of the operating model: structure and organization, management practices, culture, environment, teams, technology platforms, and meaningful metrics and KPIs.

    Sustain and Grow the Maturity of Innovation in Your Enterprise

    • Unlock your innovation potential by looking at your innovation projects on both a macro and micro level.
    • Innovation capacity is directly linked with creativity; allow your employees' creativity to flourish using Info-Tech's positive innovation techniques.

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    • Design a strategy that applies innovation to your business model, streamline and transform processes, and make use of technologies to enhance interactions with customers and employees.
    • Create a balanced roadmap that improves digital maturity and prepares you for long-term success in a digital economy.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez
    Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kim is a professional engineer and Registered Communications Distribution Designer with over a decade of experience in management and engineering consulting spanning healthcare, higher education, and commercial sectors. She has worked on some of the largest hospital construction projects in Canada, from early visioning and IT strategy through to design, specifications, and construction administration. She brings a practical and evidence-based approach, with a track record of supporting successful projects.
    Kim holds a Bachelor's degree in Mechatronics Engineering from University of Waterloo.

    Joanne Lee

    Joanne Lee
    Principal Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Joanne is an executive with over 25 years of experience in digital technology and management consulting across both public and private entities from solution delivery to organizational redesign across Canada and globally.
    Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, Joanne was a management consultant within KPMG's CIO management consulting services and the Western Canadas Digital Health Practice lead. She has held several executive roles in the industry with the most recent position as Chief Program Officer for a large $450M EHR implementation. Her expertise spans cloud strategy, organizational design, data and analytics, governance, process redesign, transformation, and PPM. She is passionate about connecting people, concepts, and capital.
    Joanne holds a Master's in Business and Health Policy from the University of Toronto and a Bachelor of Science (Nursing) from the University of British Columbia.

    Jack Hakimian

    Jack Hakimian
    Senior Vice President
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Jack has more than 25 years of technology and management consulting experience. He has served multi-billion-dollar organizations in multiple industries including Financial Services and Telecommunications. Jack also served a number of large public sector institutions.
    He is a frequent speaker and panelist at technology and innovation conferences and events and holds a Master's degree in Computer Engineering as well as an MBA from the ESCP-EAP European School of Management.

    Michael Tweedie

    Michael Tweedie
    Practice Lead, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mike Tweedie brings over 25 years as a technology executive. He's led several large transformation projects across core infrastructure, application, and IT services as the head of Technology at ADP Canada. He was also the Head of Engineering and Service Offerings for a large French IT services firm, focused on cloud adoption and complex ERP deployment and management.
    Mike holds a Bachelor's degree in Architecture from Ryerson University.

    Mike Schembri

    Mike Schembri
    Senior Executive Advisor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mike is the former CIO of Fuji Xerox Australia and has 20+ years' experience serving IT and wider business leadership roles. Mike has led technical and broader business service operations teams to value and growth successfully in organizations ranging from small tech startups through global IT vendors, professional service firms, and manufacturers.
    Mike has passion for strategy and leadership and loves working with individuals/teams and seeing them grow.

    John Leidl

    John Leidl
    Senior Director, Member Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    With over 35 years of IT experience, including senior-level VP Technology and CTO leadership positions, John has a breadth of knowledge in technology innovation, business alignment, IT operations, and business transformation. John's experience extends from start-ups to corporate enterprise and spans higher education, financial services, digital marketing, and arts/entertainment.

    Joe Riley

    Joe Riley
    Senior Workshop Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Joe ensures our members get the most value out of their Info-Tech memberships by scoping client needs, current state and desired business outcomes, and then drawing upon his extensive experience, certifications, and degrees (MBA, MS Ops/Org Mgt, BS Eng/Sci, ITIL, PMP, Security+, etc.) to facilitate our client's achievement of desired and aspirational business outcomes. A true advocate of ITSM, Joe approaches technology and technology practices as a tool and enabler of people, core business, and competitive advantage activities.

    Denis Goulet

    Denis Goulet
    Senior Workshop Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Denis is a transformational leader and experienced strategist who has worked with 100+ organizations to develop their digital, technology, and governance strategies.
    He has held positions as CIO, Chief Administrative Office (City Manager), General Manager, Vice President of Engineering, and Management Consultant, specializing in enterprise and technology strategy.

    Cole Cioran

    Cole Cioran
    Managing Partner
    Info-Tech Research Group

    I knew I wanted to build great applications that would delight their users. I did that over and over. Along the way I also discovered that it takes great teams to deliver great applications. Technology only solves problems when people, processes, and organizations change as well. This helped me go from writing software to advising some of the largest organizations in the world on how to how to build a digital delivery umbrella of Product, Agile, and DevOps and create exceptional products and services powered by technology.

    Carlene McCubbin

    Carlene McCubbin
    Research Lead, CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    During her tenure at Info-Tech, Carlene has led the development of Info-Tech's Organization and Leadership practice and worked with multiple clients to leverage the methodologies by creating custom programs to fit each organization's needs.
    Before joining Info-Tech, Carlene received her Master of Communications Management from McGill University, where she studied development of internal and external communications, government relations, and change management.

    Isabelle Hertanto

    Isabelle Hertanto
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Isabelle Hertanto has over 15 years of experience delivering specialized IT services to the security and intelligence community. As a former federal officer for Public Safety Canada, Isabelle trained and led teams on data exploitation and digital surveillance operations in support of Canadian national security investigations. Since transitioning into the private sector, Isabelle has held senior management and consulting roles across a variety of industry sectors, including retail, construction, energy, healthcare, and the broader Canadian public sector.

    Hans Eckman

    Hans Eckman
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Hans Eckman is a business transformation leader helping organizations connect business strategy and innovation to operational excellence. He supports Info-Tech members in SDLC optimization, Agile and DevOps implementation, CoE/CoP creation, innovation program development, application delivery, and leadership development. Hans is based out of Atlanta, Georgia.

    Valence Howden

    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    With 30 years of IT experience in the public and private sector, Valence has developed experience in many Information Management and Technology domains, with a particular focus in the areas of Service Management, Enterprise and IT Governance, Development and Execution of Strategy, Risk Management, Metrics Design and Process Design, and Implementation and Improvement. Prior to joining Info-Tech, he served in technical and client-facing roles at Bell Canada and CGI Group Inc., as well as managing the design, integration, and implementation of services and processes in the Ontario Public Sector.

    Clayton Gillett

    Clayton Gillett
    Managing Partner
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Clayton Gillett is a Managing Partner for Info-Tech, providing technology management advisory services to healthcare clients. Clayton joined Info-Tech with more than 28 years of experience in health care information technology. He has held senior IT leadership roles at Group Health Cooperative of Puget Sound and OCHIN, as well as advisory or consulting roles at ECG Management Consultants and Gartner.

    Donna Bales

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Donna Bales is a Principal Research Director in the CIO Practice at Info-Tech Research Group specializing in research and advisory services in IT risk, governance, and compliance. She brings over 25 years of experience in strategic consulting and product development and has a history of success in leading complex, multi-stakeholder industry initiatives.

    Igor Ikonnikov

    Igor Ikonnikov
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Igor Ikonnikov is a Research and Advisory Director in the Data and Analytics practice. Igor has extensive experience in strategy formation and execution in the information management domain, including master data management, data governance, knowledge management, enterprise content management, big data, and analytics.
    Igor has an MBA from the Ted Rogers School of Management (Toronto, Canada) with a specialization in Management of Technology and Innovation.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Michael Newcity

    Michael Newcity
    Chief Innovation Officer
    ArcBest

    Kevin Yoder

    Kevin Yoder
    Vice President, Innovation
    ArcBest

    Gary Boyd

    Gary Boyd
    Vice President, Information Systems & Digital Transformation
    Arkansas Blue Cross and Blue Shield

    Brett Trelfa

    Brett Trelfa
    Chief Information Officer
    Arkansas Blue Cross and Blue Shield

    Kristen Wilson-Jones

    Kristen Wilson-Jones
    Chief Technology & Product Officer
    Medcurio

    Note: additional contributors did not wish to be identified

    Bibliography

    Altringer, Beth. "A New Model for Innovation in Big Companies" Harvard Business Review. 19 Nov. 2013. Accessed 30 Jan. 2023. https://hbr.org/2013/11/a-new-model-for-innovation-in-big-companies
    Arpajian, Scott. "Five Reasons Why Innovation Fails" Forbes Magazine. 4 June 2019. Accessed 31 Jan. 2023. https://www.forbes.com/sites/forbestechcouncil/2019/06/04/five-reasons-why-innovation-fails/?sh=234e618914c6
    Baldwin, John & Gellatly, Guy. "Innovation Capabilities: The Knowledge Capital Behind the Survival and Growth of Firms" Statistics Canada. Sept. 2006. Accessed 30 Jan. 2023. https://www.bdc.ca/fr/documents/other/innovation_capabilities_en.pdf
    Bar Am, Jordan et al. "Innovation in a Crisis: Why it is More Critical Than Ever" McKinsey & Company, 17 June 2020. Accessed 12 Jan. 2023. <https://www.mckinsey.com/capabilities/strategy-and-corporate-finance/our-insights/innovation-in-a-crisis-why-it-is-more-critical-than-ever >
    Boston Consulting Group, "Most Innovative Companies 2021" BCG, April 2021. Accessed 30 Jan. 2023. https://web-assets.bcg.com/d5/ef/ea7099b64b89860fd1aa3ec4ff34/bcg-most-innovative-companies-2021-apr-2021-r.pdf
    Boston Consulting Group, "Most Innovative Companies 2022" BGC, 15 Sept. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023. https://www.bcg.com/en-ca/publications/2022/innovation-in-climate-and-sustainability-will-lead-to-green-growth
    Christensen, Clayton M. The Innovator's Dilemma: When New Technologies Cause Great Firms to Fail. Harvard Business Review Press, 2016.
    Gerber, Niklaus. "What is innovation? A beginner's guide into different models, terminologies and methodologies" Medium. 20 Sept 2022. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://world.hey.com/niklaus/what-is-innovation-a-beginner-s-guide-into-different-models-terminologies-and-methodologies-dd4a3147
    Google X, Homepage. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023. https://x.company/
    Harnoss, Johann D. & Baeza, Ramón. "Overcoming the Four Big Barriers to Innovation Success" Boston Consulting Group, 24 Sept. 2019. Accessed 30 Jan 2023. https://www.bcg.com/en-ca/publications/2019/overcoming-four-big-barriers-to-innovation-success
    Jaruzelski, Barry et al. "Global Innovation 1000 Study" Pricewaterhouse Cooper, 30 Oct. 2018. Accessed 13 Jan. 2023. <https://www.strategyand.pwc.com/gx/en/insights/innovation1000.html>
    Kharpal, Arjun. "Huawei posts first-ever yearly revenue decline as U.S. sanctions continue to bite, but profit surges" CNBC. 28 March 2022. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://www.cnbc.com/2022/03/28/huawei-annual-results-2021-revenue-declines-but-profit-surges.html
    Kirsner, Scott. "The Biggest Obstacles to Innovation in Large Companies" Harvard Business Review, 30 July 2018. Accessed 12 Jan. 2023. <https://hbr.org/2018/07/the-biggest-obstacles-to-innovation-in-large-companies>
    Macrotrends. "Apple Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/AAPL/apple/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Microsoft Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/MSFT/microsoft/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Amazon Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/AMZN/amazon/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Alphabet Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/GOOG/alphabet/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Tesla Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/TSLA/tesla/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Moderna Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/MRNA/moderna/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Sony Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/SONY/sony/revenue
    Macrotrends. "IBM Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/IBM/ibm/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Meta Platforms Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/META/meta-platforms/revenue
    Macrotrends. "NIKE Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/NKE/nike/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Walmart Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/WMT/walmart/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Dell Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/DELL/dell/revenue
    Macrotrends. "NVIDIA Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/NVDA/nvidia/revenue
    Sloan, Paul. "How to Develop a Vision for Innovation" Innovation Management, 10 Aug. 2009. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://innovationmanagement.se/2009/08/10/how-to-develop-a-vision-for-innovation/
    Statista. "Samsung Electronics' global revenue from 2005 to 2021" Statista. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://www.statista.com/statistics/236607/global-revenue-of-samsung-electronics-since-2005/
    Tichy, Noel & Ram Charan. "Speed, Simplicity, Self-Confidence: An Interview with Jack Welch" Harvard Business Review, 2 March 2020. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://hbr.org/1989/09/speed-simplicity-self-confidence-an-interview-with-jack-welch
    Weick, Karl and Kathleen Sutcliffe. Managing the Unexpected: Sustained Performance in a Complex World, Third Edition. John Wiley & Sons, 2015.
    Xuan Tian, Tracy Yue Wang, Tolerance for Failure and Corporate Innovation, The Review of Financial Studies, Volume 27, Issue 1, 2014, Pages 211–255, Accessed https://doi.org/10.1093/rfs/hhr130

    The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}196|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Global regulatory climate disclosure requirements are still evolving and are not consistent.
    • Sustainability is becoming a corporate imperative, but IT’s role is not fully clear.
    • The environmental, social, and governance (ESG) data challenge is large and continually expanding in scope.
    • Collecting the necessary data and managing ethical issues across supply chains is a daunting task.
    • Communicating long-term value is difficult when customer and employee expectations are shifting.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An organization's approach to ESG cannot be static or tactical. It is a moving landscape that requires a flexible, holistic approach across the organization. Cross-functional coordination is essential in order to be ready to respond to changing conditions.
    • Even though the ESG data requirements are large and continually expanding in scope, many organizations have well-established data frameworks and governance practices in place to meet regulatory obligations such as Sarbanes–Oxley that should used as a starting point.

    Impact and Result

    • Organizations will have greater success if they focus their ESG program efforts on the ESG factors that will have a material impact on their company performance and their key stakeholders.
    • Continually evaluating the evolving ESG landscape and its impact on key stakeholders will enable organizations to react quickly to changing conditions.
    • A successful ESG program requires a collaborative and integrated approach across key business stakeholders.
    • Delivering high-quality metrics and performance indicators requires a flexible and digital data approach, where possible, to enable data interoperability.

    The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations Deck – Learn why sustainability is becoming a key measurement of corporate performance and how to set your organization up for success.

    Understand the foundational components and drivers of the broader concept of sustainability: environmental, social, and governance (ESG) and IT’s roles within an organization’s ESG program. Learn about the functional business areas involved, the roles they play and how they interact with each other to drive program success.

    • The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations Storyboard

    Infographic

    Further reading

    The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations

    Design to enable an active response to changing conditions.

    Analyst Perspective

    Environmental, social, and governance (ESG) is a corporate imperative that is tied to long-term value creation. An organization's social license to operate and future corporate performance depends on managing ESG factors well.

    Central to an ESG program is having a good understanding of the ESG factors that may have a material impact on enterprise value and key internal and external stakeholders. A comprehensive ESG strategy supported by strong governance and risk management is also essential to success.

    Capturing relevant data and applying it within risk models, metrics, and internal and external reports is necessary for sharing your ESG story and measuring your progress toward meeting ESG commitments. Consequently, the data challenges have received a lot of attention, and IT leaders have a role to play as strategic partner and enabler to help address these challenges. However, ESG is more than a data challenge, and IT leaders need to consider the wider implications in managing third parties, selecting tools, developing supporting IT architecture, and ensuring ethical design.

    For many organizations, the ESG program journey has just begun, and collaboration between IT and risk, procurement, and compliance will be critical in shaping program success.

    This is a picture of Donna Bales, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Global regulatory climate disclosure requirements are still evolving and are not consistent.
    • Sustainability is becoming a corporate imperative, but IT's role is not fully clear.
    • The ESG data challenge is large and continually expanding in scope.
    • Collecting the necessary data and managing ethical issues across supply chains is a daunting task.
    • Communicating long-term value is difficult when customer and employee expectations are shifting.

    Common Obstacles

    • The data necessary for data-driven insights and accurate disclosure is often hampered by inaccurate and incomplete primary data.
    • Other challenges include:
      • Approaching ESG holistically and embedding it into existing governance, risk, and IT capabilities.
      • Building knowledge and adapting culture throughout all levels of the organization.
      • Monitoring stakeholder sentiment and keeping strategy aligned to expectations.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Use this blueprint to educate yourself on ESG factors and the broader concept of sustainability.
    • Learn about Info-Tech's ESG program approach and use it as a framework to begin your ESG program journey.
    • Identify changes that may be needed in your organizational operating model, strategy, governance, and risk management approach.
    • Discover areas of IT that may need to be prioritized and resourced.

    Info-Tech Insight

    An organization's approach to ESG cannot be static or tactical. ESG is a moving landscape that requires a flexible, holistic approach across the organization. It must become part of the way you work and enable an active response to changing conditions.

    This is an image of Info-Tech's thoughtmap for eight steps of the ESG Program Journey

    Putting ESG in context

    ESG has moved beyond the tipping point to corporate table stakes

    • In recent years, ESG issues have moved from voluntary initiatives driven by corporate responsibility teams to an enterprise-wide strategic imperative.
    • Organizations are no longer being measured by financial performance but by how they contribute to a sustainable and equitable future, such as how they support sustainable innovation through their business models and their focus on collaboration and inclusion.
    • A corporation's efforts toward sustainability is measured by three components: environmental, social, and governance.

    Sustainability

    The ability of a corporation and broader society to endure and survive over the long term by managing adverse impacts well and promoting positive opportunities.

    This is an image of the United Nation's 17 sustainable goals.

    Source: United Nations

    Putting "E," "S," and "G" in context

    Corporate sustainability depends on managing ESG factors well

    • Environmental, social, and governance are the component pieces of a sustainability framework that is used to understand and measure how an organization impacts or is affected by society as a whole.
    • Human activities, particularly fossil fuel burning since the mid twentieth century, have increased greenhouse gas concentration, resulting in observable changes to the atmosphere, ocean, cryosphere, and biosphere.
    • The E in ESG relates to the positive and negative impacts an organization may have on the environment, such as the energy it takes in and the waste it discharges.
    • The S in ESG is the most ambiguous component in the framework, as social impact relates not only to risks but also prosocial behaviour. It's the most difficult to measure but can have significant financial and reputational impact on corporations if material and poorly managed.
    • The G in ESG is foundational to the realization of S and E. It encompasses how well an organization integrates these considerations into the business and how well the organization engages with key stakeholders, receives feedback, and is transparent with its intentions.

    Common examples of ESG issues include: Environmental: Climate change, greenhouse gas emissions (CHG), deforestation, biodiversity, pollution, water, waste, extended producer responsibility, etc. Social: Customer relations, employee relations, labor, human rights, occupational health and safety, community relations, supply chains, etc. Governance: Board management practices, succession planning, compensation, diversity, equity and inclusion, regulatory compliance, corruption, fraud, data hygiene and security, etc. Source: Getting started with ESG - Sustainalytics

    Understanding the drivers behind ESG

    $30 trillion is expected to be transferred from the baby boomers to Generation Z and millennials over the next decade
    – Accenture

    Drivers

    • The rapid rise of ESG investing
    • The visibility of climate change is driving governments, society, and corporations to act and to initiate and support net zero goals.
    • A younger demographic that has strong convictions and financial influence
    • A growing trend toward mandatory climate and diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) disclosures required by global regulators
    • Recent emphasis by regulators on board accountability and fiduciary duty
    • Greater societal awareness of social issues and sustainability
    • A new generation of corporate leadership that is focused on sustainable innovation

    The evolving regulatory landscape

    Global regulators are mobilizing toward mandatory regulatory climate disclosure

    Canada

    • Canadian Securities Administrators (CSA) NI 51-107 Disclosure of Climate-related Matters

    Europe

    • European Commission, Sustainable Finance Disclosure Regulation (SFDR)
    • European Commission, EU Supply Chain Act
    • Germany – The German Supply Chain Act (GSCA)
    • Financial Conduct Authority UK, Proposal (DP 21/4) Sustainability Disclosure Requirements and investment labels
    • UK Modern Slavery Act, 2015

    United States

    • Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) 33-11042– The Enhancement and Standardization of Climate-Related Disclosures for Investors
    • SEC 33-11038 Cybersecurity Risk Management, Strategy, Governance, and Incident Disclosure
    • Nasdaq Board Diversity Rule (5605(f))

    New Zealand

    • New Zealand, The Financial Sector (Climate-related Disclosures and Other Matters) Amendment Act 2021

    Begin by setting your purpose

    Consider your role as a corporation in society and your impact on key stakeholders

    • The impact of a corporation can no longer be solely measured by financial impact but also its impact on social good. Corporations have become real-world actors that impact and are affected by the environment, people, and society.
    • An ESG program should start with defining your organization's purpose in terms of corporate responsibility, the role it will play, and how it will endure over time through managing adverse impacts and promoting positive impacts.
    • Corporations should look inward and outward to assess the material impact of ESG factors on their organization and key internal and external stakeholders.
    • Once stakeholders are identified, consider how the ESG factors might be perceived by delving into what matters to stakeholders and what drives their behavior.

    Understanding your stakeholder landscape is essential to achieving ESG goals

    Internal Stakeholders: Board; Management; Employees. External Stakeholders: Activists; Regulators; Customers; Lenders; Government; Investors; Stakeholders; Community; Suppliers

    Assess ESG impact

    Materiality assessments help to prioritize your ESG strategy and enable effective reporting

    • The concept of materiality as it relates to ESG is the process of gaining different perspectives on ESG issues and risks that may have significant impact (both positive and negative) on or relevance to company performance.
    • The objective of a materiality assessment is to identify material ESG issues most critical to your organization by looking a broad range of social and environmental factors. Its purpose is to narrow strategic focus and enable an organization to assess the impact of financial and non-financial risks aggregately.
    • It helps to make the case for ESG action and strategy, assess financial impact, get ahead of long-term risks, and inform communication strategies.
    • Organizations can leverage assessment tools from Sustainalytics or SASB Standards to help assess ESG risks or use guidance or benchmarking information from industry associations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Survey key stakeholders to obtain a more holistic viewpoint of expectations and the industry landscape and gain credibility through the process.

    Use a materiality matrix to understand ESG exposure

    This is an image of a materiality matrix used to understand ESG exposure.

    Example: Beverage Company

    Follow a holistic approach

    To deliver on your purpose, sustainability must be integrated throughout the organization

    • An ESG program cannot be implemented in a silo. It must be anchored on its purpose and supported by a strong governance structure that is intertwined with other functional areas.
    • Effective governance is essential to instill trust, support sound decision making, and manage ESG.
    • Governance extends beyond shareholder rights to include many other factors, such as companies' interactions with competitors, suppliers, and governments. More transparency is sought on:
      • Corporate behavior, executive pay, and oversight of controls.
      • Board diversity, compensation, and skill set.
      • Oversight of risk management, particularly risks related to fraud, product, data, and cybersecurity

    "If ESG is the framework of non-financial risks that may have a material impact on the company's stakeholders, corporate governance is the process by which the company's directors and officers manage those risks."
    – Zurich Insurance

    A pyramid is depicted. The top of the pyramid is labeled Continual Improvement, and the following terms are inside this box. Governance: Strategy; Risk Management; Metrics & Targets. At the bottom of the pyramid is a box with right facing arrows, labeled Transparency and Disclosure. This is Informed by the TCFD Framework

    Governance and organization approach

    There is no one-size-fits-all approach

    47% of companies reported that the full board most commonly oversees climate related risks and opportunities while 20% delegate to an existing board governance committee (EY Research, 2021).

    • The organizational approach to ESG will differ across industry segments and corporations depending on material risks and their upstream and downstream value change. However, the accountability for ESG sits squarely at the CEO and board level.
    • Some organizations have taken the approach of hiring a Chief Sustainability Officer to work alongside the CEO on execution of ESG goals and stakeholder communication, while others use other members of the strategic leadership to drive the desired outcomes.
    Governance Layer Responsibilities
    Board
    • Overall accountability lies with the full board. Some responsibilities may be delegated to newly formed dedicated ESG governance committee.
    Oversight
    Executive leadership
    • Accountable for sustainability program success and will work with CEO to set ESG purpose and goals.
    Oversight and strategic direction
    Management
    • Senior management drives execution; sometimes led by a cross-functional committee.
    Execution

    Strategy alignment

    "74% of finance leaders say that investors increasingly use nonfinancial information in their decision-making."

    – "Aligning nonfinancial reporting..." EY, 2020

    • Like any journey, the ESG journey requires knowing where you are starting from and where you are heading to.
    • Once your purpose is crystalized, identify and surface gaps between where you want to go as an organization (your purpose and goals) and what you need to deliver as an organization to meet the expectations of your internal and external stakeholders (your output).
    • Using the results of the materiality assessment, weigh the risk, opportunities, and financial impact to help prioritize and determine vulnerabilities and where you might excel.
    • Finally, evaluate and make changes to areas of your business that need development to be successful (culture, accountability and board structure, ethics committee, etc.)

    Gap analysis example for delivering reporting requirements

    Organizational Goals

    • Regulatory Disclosure
      • Climate
      • DEI
      • Cyber governance
    • Performance Tracking/Annual Reporting
      • Corporate transparency on ESG performance via social, annual circular
    • Evidence-Based Business Reporting
      • Risk
      • Board
      • Suppliers

    Risk-size your ESG goals

    When integrating ESG risks, stick with a proven approach

    • Managing ESG risks is central to making sound organizational decisions regarding sustainability but also to anticipating future risks.
    • Like any new risk type, ESG risk should be interwoven into your current risk management and control framework via a risk-based approach.
    • Yet ESG presents some new risk challenges, and some risk areas may need new control processes or enhancements.
    NET NEW ENHANCEMENT
    Climate disclosure Data quality management
    Assurance specific to ESG reporting Risk sensing and assessment
    Supply chain transparency tied back to ESG Managing interconnections
    Scenario analysis
    Third-party ratings and monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    Integrate ESG risks early, embrace uncertainty by staying flexible, and strive for continual improvement.

    A funnel chart is depicted. The inputs to the funnel are: Strategy - Derive ESG risks from strategy, and Enterprise Risk Appetite. Inside the funnel, are the following terms: ESG; Data; Cyber. The output of the funnel is: Evidence based reporting ESG Insights & Performance metrics

    Managing supplier risks

    Suppliers are a critical input into an organization's ESG footprint

    "The typical consumer company's supply chain ... [accounts] for more than 80% of greenhouse-gas emissions and more than 90% of the impact on air, land, water, biodiversity, and geological resources."
    – McKinsey & Company, 2016

    • Although companies are accustomed to managing third parties via procurement processes, voluntary due-diligence, and contractual provisions, COVID-19 surfaced fragility across global supply chains.
    • The mismanagement of upstream and downstream risks of supply chains can harm the reputation, operations, and financial performance of businesses.
    • To build resiliency to and visibility of supply chain risk, organizations need to adapt current risk management programs, procurement practices, and risk assessment tools and techniques.
    • Procurement departments have an enhanced function, effectively acting as gatekeepers by performing due diligence, evaluating performance, and strengthening the supplier relationship through continual feedback and dialogue.
    • Technologies such as blockchain and IoT are starting to play a more dominant role in supply chain transparency.

    Raw materials are upstream and consumers are downstream.

    "Forty-five percent of survey respondents say that they either have no visibility into their upstream supply chain or that they can see only as far as their first-tier suppliers."
    – "Taking the pulse of shifting supply chains," McKinsey & Company, 2022

    Metrics and targets

    Metrics are key to stakeholder transparency, measuring performance against goals, and surfacing organizational blind spots

    • ESG metrics are qualitative or quantitative insights that measure organizations' performance against ESG goals. Along with traditional business metrics, they assist investors with assessing the long-term performance of companies based on non-financial ESG risks and opportunities.
    • Metrics, key performance indicators (KPIs), and key risk indicators (KRIs) are used to measure how ESG factors affect an organization and how an organization may impact any of the underlying issues related to each ESG factor.
    • There are several reporting standards that offer specific ESG performance metrics, such as the Global Reporting Institute (GRI), Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB), and World Economic Forum (WEF).
    • For climate-related disclosures, global regulators are converging on the Task Force for Climate-related Disclosures (TCFD) and the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB).

    Example metrics for ESG factors

    Example metrics for environment include greenhouse gas emissions, water footprint, renewable energy share, and % of recycled material. Example social metrics include rates of injury, proportion of spend on local supplies, and percentage of gender or ethnic groups in management roles. Example governance metrics include annual CEO compensation compared to median, number of PII data breaches, and completed number of supplier assessments.

    The impact of ESG on IT

    IT plays a critical role in achieving ESG goals

    • IT groups have a critical role to play in helping organizations develop strategic plans to meet ESG goals, measure performance, monitor risks, and deliver on disclosure requirements.
    • IT's involvement extends from the CIO providing input at a strategic level to leading the charge within IT to instill new goals and adapt the culture toward one focused on sustainability.
    • To set the tone, CIOs should begin by updating their IT governance structure and setting ESG goals for IT.
    • IT leaders will need to think about resource use and efficiency and incorporate this into their IT strategy.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT leaders need to work collaboratively with risk management to optimize decision making and continually improve ESG performance and disclosure.

    "A great strategy meeting is a meeting of the minds."
    – Max McKeown

    The data challenge

    The ESG data requirement is large and continually expanding in scope

    • To meet ESG objectives, corporations are challenged with collecting non-financial data from across functional business and geographical locations and from their supplier base and supply chains.
    • One of the biggest impediments to ESG implementation is the lack of high-quality data and of mature processes and tools to support data collection.
    • The data challenge is compounded by the availability and usability of data, immature and fragmented standards that hinder comparability, and workflow integration.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep your data model flexible and digital where possible to enable data interoperability.

    A flow chart is depicted. the top box is labeled ESG Program. Below that are Boxes labeled Tactical and Strategic. Below the Tactical Box, is a large X showing a lack of connection to the following points: Duplicative; Inefficient/Costly. Below the box labeled Strategic are the following terms: Data-Driven; Reusable; Digital.

    "You can have data without information, but you cannot have information without data."
    – Daniel Keys Moran

    It's more than a data challenge

    Organizations will rely on IT for execution, and IT leaders will need to be ready

    Data Management: Aggregated Reporting; Supplier Management; Cyber Management; Operational Management; Ethical Design(AI, Blockchain); IT Architecture; Resource Efficiency; Processing & Tooling; Supplier Assessment.

    Top impacts on IT departments

    1. ESG requires corporations to keep track of ESG-related risks of third parties. This will mean more robust assessments and monitoring.
    2. Many areas of ESG are new and will require new processes and tools.
    3. The SEC has upped the ante recently, requiring more rigorous accountability and reporting on cyber incidents.
    4. New IT systems and architecture may be needed to support ESG programs.
    5. Current reporting frameworks may need updating as regulators move to digital.
    6. Ethical design will need to be considered when AI is used to support risk/data management and when it is used as part of product solutions.

    Key takeaways

    • It's critical for organizations to look inward and outward to assess the material impact of ESG factors on their organization and key internal and external stakeholders.
    • ESG requires a flexible, holistic approach across the organization. It must become part of the way you work and enable an active response to changing conditions.
    • ESG introduces new risks that should not be viewed in isolation but interwoven into your current risk management and control framework via a risk-based approach.
    • Identify and integrate risks early, embrace uncertainty by staying flexible, and strive for continual improvement.
    • Metrics are key to telling your ESG story. Place the appropriate importance on the information that will be reported.
    • Recognize that the data challenge is complex and evolving and design your data model to be flexible, interoperable, and digital.
    • IT's role is far reaching, and IT will have a critical part in managing third parties, selecting tools, developing supporting IT architecture, and using ethical design.

    Definitions

    TERM DEFINITON
    Corporate Social Responsibility Management concept whereby organizations integrate social and environmental concerns in their operations and interactions with their stakeholders.
    Chief Sustainability Officer Steers sustainability commitments, helps with compliance, and helps ensure internal commitments are met. Responsibilities may extend to acting as a liaison with government and public affairs, fostering an internal culture, acting as a change agent, and leading delivery.
    ESG An acronym that stands for environment, social, and governance. These are the three components of a sustainability program.
    ESG Standard Contains detailed disclosure criteria including performance measures or metrics. Standards provide clear, consistent criteria and specifications for reporting. Typically created through consultation process.
    ESG Framework A broad contextual model for information that provides guidance and shapes the understanding of a certain topic. It sets direction but does not typically delve into the methodology. Frameworks are often used in conjunction with standards.
    ESG Factors The factors or issues that fall under the three ESG components. Measures the sustainability performance of an organization.
    ESG Rating An aggregated score based on the magnitude of an organization's unmanaged ESG risk. Ratings are provided by third-party rating agencies and are increasingly being used for financing, transparency to investors, etc.
    ESG Questionnaire ESG surveys or questionnaires are administered by third parties and used to assess an organization's sustainability performance. Participation is voluntary.
    Key Risk Indicator (KRI) A measure to indicate the potential presence, level, or trend of a risk.
    Key Performance Indicator (KPI) A measure of deviation from expected outcomes to help a firm see how it is performing.
    Materiality Material topics are topics that have a direct or indirect impact on an organization's ability to create, preserve, or erode economic, environment and social impact for itself and its stakeholder and society as a whole
    Materiality Assessment A materiality assessment is a tool to identify and prioritize the ESG issues most critical to the organization.
    Risk Sensing The range of activities carried out to identify and understand evolving sources of risk that could have a significant impact on the organization (e.g. social listening).
    Sustainability The ability of an organization and broader society to endure and survive over the long term by managing adverse impacts well and promoting positive opportunities.
    Sustainalytics Now part of Morningstar. Sustainalytics provides ESG research, ratings, and data to institutional investors and companies.
    UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights (UNGPs) UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights (UNGPs) provide an essential methodological foundation for how impacts across all dimensions should be assessed.

    Reporting & standard frameworks

    STANDARD DEFINITION AND FOCUS
    CDP CDP has created standards and metrics for comparing sustainability impact. Focuses on environmental data (e.g. carbon, water, and forests) and on data disclosure and benchmarking.
    (Formally Carbon Disclosure Project) Audience: All stakeholders
    Dow Jones Sustainability Indices (DJSI) Heavy on corporate governance and company performance. Equal balance of economic, environmental, and social.
    Audience: All stakeholders
    Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) International standards organization that has a set of standards to help organizations understand and communicate their impacts on climate change and social responsibility. The standard has a strong emphasis on transparency and materiality, especially on social issues.
    Audience: All stakeholders
    International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) Standard-setting board that sits within the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) Foundation. The IFRS Foundation is a not-for-profit, public-interest organization established to develop high-quality, understandable, enforceable, and globally accepted accounting and sustainability disclosure standards.
    Audience: Investor-focused
    United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (UNSDG) Global partnership across sectors and industries to achieve sustainable development for all (17 Global Goals)
    Audience: All stakeholders
    Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB) Industry-specific standards to help corporations select topics that may impact their financial performance. Focus on material impacts on financial condition or operating performance.
    Audience: Investor-focused
    Task Force Of Climate-related Disclosures (TCFD; created by the Financial Stability Board) Standards framework focused on the impact of climate risk on financial and operating performance. More broadly the disclosures inform investors of positive and negative measures taken to build climate resilience and make transparent the exposure to climate-related risk.
    Audience: Investors, financial stakeholders

    Bibliography

    Anne-Titia Bove and Steven Swartz, McKinsey, "Starting at the source: Sustainability in supply chains", 11 November 2016

    Accenture, "The Greater Wealth Transfer – Capitalizing on the intergenerational shift in wealth", 2012

    Beth Kaplan, Deloitte, "Preparing for the ESG Landscape, Readiness and reporting ESG strategies through controllership playbook", 15 February 2022

    Bjorn Nilsson et al, McKinsey & Company, "Financial institutions and nonfinancial risk: How corporates build resilience," 28 February 2022

    Bolden, Kyle, Ernst and Young, "Aligning nonfinancial reporting with your ESG strategy to communicate long-term value", 18 Dec. 2020

    Canadian Securities Administrators, "Canadian securities regulators seek comment on climate-related disclosure requirements", 18 October 2021

    Carol A. Adams et al., Global Risk Institute, "The double-materiality concept, Application and issues", May 2021

    Dunstan Allison-Hope et al, BSR, "Impact-Based Materiality, Why Companies Should-Focus Their Assessments on Impacts Rather than Perception", 3 February 2022

    EcoVadis, "The World's Most Trusted Business Sustainability Ratings",

    Ernst and Young, "Four opportunities for enhancing ESG oversight", 29 June 2021

    Federal Ministry of Labour and Social Affairs, The Act on Corporate Due Diligence Obligations in Supply Chains (Gesetz über die unternehmerischen Sorgfaltspflichten in Lieferketten)", Published into Federal Law Gazette, 22, July 2021

    "What Every Company Needs to Know", Sustainalytics

    Global Risk Institute, The GRI Perspective, "The materiality madness: why definitions matter", 22 February 2022

    John P Angkaw "Applying ERM to ESG Risk Management", 1 August 2022

    Hillary Flynn et al., Wellington Management, "A guide to ESG materiality assessments", June 2022

    Katie Kummer and Kyle Lawless, Ernst and Young, "Five priorities to build trust in ESG", 14 July 2022

    Knut Alicke et al., McKinsey & Company, "Taking the pulse of shifting supply chains", 26 August 2022

    Kosmas Papadopoulos and Rodolfo Arauj. The Harvard School Forum on Corporate Governance, "The Seven Sins of ESG Management", 23 September 2020

    KPMG, Sustainable Insight, "The essentials of materiality assessment", 2014

    Lorraine Waters, The Stack, "ESG is not an environmental issue, it's a data one", 20 May 2021

    Marcel Meyer, Deloitte, "What is TCFD and why does it matter? Understanding the various layers and implications of the recommendations",

    Michael W Peregnne et al., "The Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, The Important Legacy of the Sarbanes Oxley Act," 30 August 2022

    Michael Posner, Forbes, "Business and Human Rights: Looking Ahead To The Challenges Of 2022", 15 December 2021

    Myles Corson and Tony Kilmas, Ernst and Young, "How the CFO can balance competing demands and drive future growth", 3 November 2020

    Novisto, "Navigating Climate Data Disclosure", 2022

    Novisto, "XBRL is coming to corporate sustainability reporting", 17 April 2022

    "Official Journal of the European Union, Regulation (EU) 2019/2088 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 November 2019 on sustainability-related disclosures in the financial services sector", 9 December 2019

    Osler, "ESG and the future of sustainability", Podcast, 01 June 2022

    Osler, "The Rapidly Evolving World of ESG Disclosure: ISSB draft standards for sustainability and climate related disclosures", 19 May 2022

    Sarwar Choudhury and Zach Johnston, Ernst and Young "Preparing for Sox-Like ESG Regulation", 7 June 2022

    Securities and Exchange Commission, "The Enhancement and Standardization of Climate-related Disclosures for Investors", 12 May 2022

    "Securities and Exchange Commission, SEC Proposes Rules on Cybersecurity, Risk Management, Strategy, Governance, and Incident Disclosure by Public Companies, 9 May 2022

    Sean Brown and Robin Nuttall, McKinsey & Company, "The role of ESG and purpose", 4 January 2022

    Statement by Chair Gary Gensler, "Statement on ESG Disclosure Proposal", 25 May 2022

    Svetlana Zenkin and Peter Hennig, Forbes, "Managing Supply Chain Risk, Reap ESG Rewards", 22 June 2022

    Task Force on Climate Related Financial Disclosures, "Final Report, Recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures", June 2017

    World Economic Forum, "Why sustainable governance and corporate integrity are crucial for ESG", 29 July 2022

    World Economic Forum (in collaboration with PwC) "How to Set Up Effective Climate Governance on Corporate Boards, Guiding Principles and questions", January 2019

    World Economic Forum, "Defining the "G" in ESG Governance Factors at the Heart of Sustainable Business", June 2022

    World Economic Forum, "The Risk and Role of the Chief Integrity Officer: Leadership Imperatives in and ESG-Driven World", December 2021

    World Economic Forum, "How to Set Up Effective Climate Governance on Corporate Boards Guiding principles and questions", January 2019

    Zurich Insurance, "ESG and the new mandate for corporate governance", 2022

    Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}447|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • As an IT leader, you’re responsible for steering the realization of business strategy through wise investments in and responsible stewardship of assets, applications, portfolios, programs, products, and projects.
    • You need a tool to help align goals and facilitate processes across business units. You’re aware of a tool space called Strategic Portfolio Management, and it looks like it could help, but you’re unsure of how it’s different from some of the existing tools you already pay for and don’t use to their full functionality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    As a software space, strategic portfolio management lacks a unified definition. In the same way that it took many years for project portfolio management to stabilize as a concept distinct from traditional enterprise project management, strategic portfolio management is experiencing a similar period of formational uncertainty. Unpacking what’s truly new and valuable in helping to define strategy and drive strategic outcomes versus what’s just repackaged as SPM is an important first step, but it's not an easy undertaking.

    Impact and Result

    In this concise publication, we will cut through the marketing to unpack what strategic portfolio management is, and what makes it distinct from similar capabilities. We’ll help to situate you in the space and assess the extent to which your tooling needs can be met by a strategic portfolio management offering.

    Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Storyboard – A guide to help you drive strategic outcomes.

    In this concise publication we introduce you to strategic portfolio management and consider the extent to which your organization can leverage an SPM application to help drive strategic outcomes.

    • Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Storyboard

    2. Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment Tool – Use this tool to determine if your organization can benefit from the features and functionality of an SPM approach.

    Use this Excel workbook to determine if your organization can benefit from the features and functionality of an SPM approach or whether you need something more like a traditional project portfolio management tool.

    • Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management

    Separate what's new and valuable from bloated claims on the hype cycle.

    Analyst Perspective

    Do you need strategic portfolio management, or do you need to do portfolio management more strategically?

    Travis Duncan, Research Director, PPM and CIO Strategy

    Travis Duncan
    Research Director, PPM and CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    While the market is eager to get users into what they're calling "strategic portfolio management," there's a lot of uncertainty out there about what this market is and how it's different from other, more established portfolio disciplines – most significantly, project portfolio management.

    Indeed, if you look at how the space is covered within the industry, you'll encounter a dog's breakfast of players, a comparison of apples and oranges: Jira in the same quadrants as Planisware, Smartsheets in the same profiles as Planview and ServiceNow. While each of the individual players is impressive, their areas of focus are unique and the extent to which they should be compared together under the category of strategic portfolio management is questionable.

    It speaks to some of the grey area within the SPM space more generally, which is at a bit of a crossroads: Will it formally shed the guardrails of its antecedents to become its own space, or will it devolve into a bait and switch through which capabilities that struggled to gain much traction beyond IT settings seek to infiltrate the business and grow their market share under a different name?

    Part of it is up to the rest of us as users and potential customers. Clarifying what we need before we jump into something simply because our prior attempts failed will help determine whether we need a unique space for strategic portfolio management or whether we simply need to do portfolio management more strategically.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    • As an IT leader, you're responsible for steering the realization of business strategy through wise investments in/ and responsible stewardship of: assets, applications, portfolios, programs, products, and projects.
    • You need a tool to help align goals and facilitate processes and communications across business units. You're aware of a tool space called strategic portfolio management, and it looks like it could help, but you're unsure of how it's different from some of the existing tools you already license.
    • As a software space, strategic portfolio management lacks a unified definition. Unpacking what's truly new in helping to define strategy and drive strategic outcomes versus what's just repackaged as SPM is no small undertaking.
    • Because SPM can span different business units, ways of working, and roles, getting buy-in, alignment, and adoption can be even more precarious than it is when implementing other types of solutions.
    • In this concise publication, we will cut through the marketing to unpack what strategic portfolio management is and what makes it distinct from similar capabilities.
    • Assess the extent to which your tooling needs can be met by a strategic portfolio management offering or the extent to which you may need to look at other software categories.
    • With a better understanding of the space, we hope to help facilitate better internal discussions around the value of SPM for your business needs.

    Info-Tech Insight
    In the same way that it took many years for PPM to stabilize as a concept distinct from traditional enterprise project management, strategic portfolio management is experiencing a similar period of formational uncertainty. In a space that can be all things to all users, clarify your actual needs before jumping onto a bandwagon and ending up with something that you don't need, and that the organization can't adopt.

    Strategic portfolio management is enterprise portfolio management

    Evolved from various other capabilities and vendor solutions, strategic portfolio management (SPM) seeks to connect strategy to execution.

    While the concept of 'strategic portfolio management' has been written about within project portfolio management circles for nearly 20 years, SPM, as a distinct organizational competence and software category, is a relatively new and largely vendor-driven capability.

    First emerging in the discourse during the mid-to-late 2010s, SPM has evolved from its roots in traditional enterprise project portfolio management. Though, as we will discuss, it has other antecedents not limited to PPM.

    In this publication, we'll unpack what SPM is, how it is distinct (and, in turn, how it is not distinct) from PPM and other capabilities, and we will consider the extent to which your organization can and should leverage an SPM application to help drive strategic outcomes.

    –The increasing need to deliver value from digital initiatives is giving rise to strategic portfolio management, a digital investment management discipline that enables strategy realization in complex dynamic environments."
    – OnePlan, "Is Strategic Portfolio Management the Future of PPM?"

    Only 2% of business leaders are confident that they will achieve 80% to 100% of their strategic objectives.
    Source: Smith, 2022

    Put strategic portfolio management in context

    SPM is a new stage in the history of project portfolio management more generally. While it's emerging as a distinct capability, and it borrows from capabilities beyond PPM, unpacking its distinctiveness is best done by first understanding its source.

    Understand the recent triggers for strategic portfolio management

    Triggers for the emergence of strategic portfolio management in the discourse include the pace of technology-introduced change, the waning of enterprise project management, and challenges around enterprise PPM tool adoption.

    Spot the difference?

    Scope, focus, and audience are just a few of the factors distinguishing what the market calls "SPM" from traditional PPM.

    Project Portfolio Management Differentiator Strategic Portfolio Management
    Work-Level (Tactical) Primary Orientation High-Level (Strategic)
    CIO Accountable for Outcomes CxO
    Project Manager Responsible for Outcomes Product Management Organization
    Project Managers, PMO Staff Targeted Users Business Leaders, ePMO Staff
    Project Portfolio(s) Essential Scope Multi-Portfolio (Project, Application, Product, Program, etc.)
    IT Project Delivery and Business Results Delivery Core Focus Business Strategy and Change Delivery
    Project Scope Change Impact Sensitivity Enterprise Scope
    IT and/or Business Benefit Language of Value Value Stream
    Project Timelines Main View Strategy Roadmaps
    Resource Capacity Primary Currency Money
    Work-Assignment Details Modalities of Planning Value Milestones & OKRs
    Work Management Modalities of Execution Governance (Project, Product, Strategy, Program, etc.)
    Project Completion Definitions of "Done" Business Capability Realization

    Info-Tech Insight
    The distinction between the two capabilities is not necessarily as black and white as the table above would have it (some "PPM" tools offer what we're identifying above as "SPM" capabilities), but it can be helpful to think in these binaries when trying to distinguish the two capabilities. At the very least, SPM broadens its scope to target more executive and business users, and functions best when it's speaking at a higher level, to a business audience.

    Strategic portfolio management offers a more holistic view of the enterprise

    At its best, strategic portfolio management can accommodate various paradigms of work management and incorporate different types of portfolio management.

    Perhaps the biggest evolution from traditional PPM that strategic portfolio management promises is that it casts a wider net in terms of the types of work it tracks (and how it tracks that work) and the types of portfolios it accommodates.

    Not bound to the concepts of "projects" and a "project portfolio" specifically, SPM broadens its scope to encompass capabilities like product and product portfolio management, enterprise architecture management, security and risk management, and more.

    • Where a PPM solution only shows one piece of the puzzle, SPM looks at the entire investment ecosystem, tracking strategic goals, the ideas generated to help achieve those goals, and all the various kinds of investments made in the service of those goals.
    • what's more, where traditional PPM tools required users to adhere to a certain way of working and managing tasks, SPM is more flexible, relying on integrations across various ways of working to provide higher-level insight on the progress of work and the achievement of goals.

    Deliver business strategy and change effectively

    Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Framework

    "An SPM tool will capture business strategy, business capabilities, operating models, the enterprise architecture and the project portfolio with unmatched visibility into how they all relate. This will give...a robust understanding of the impact of a proposed IT change " and enable IT and business to act like cocreators driving innovation."
    – Paula Ziehr

    You might need a strategic portfolio management tool if–

    If you find yourself facing any of these situations, it might be time to step away from your PPM tool and into an SPM approach:

    • Your organization is facing a large implementation that will cross multiple departmental units and requires alignment across senior leadership (e.g. a digital transformation initiative).
    • You currently have disparate systems tracking different portfolios (project, product, applications, etc.) and types of investments, but lack insight into the whole in terms of how work efforts and investments tie back to strategy realization.
    • You are an ePMO or a strategy realization office that doesn't manage work necessarily, but that rather ensures that the work, assets, and capabilities that are funded connect to strategy and drive the realization of strategy.

    Sixty one percent of leaders acknowledge their companies struggle to bridge the gap between creating a strategy and executing on that strategy.
    Source: StrategyBlocks, 2020

    Get to know your strategic portfolio management stakeholders

    In terms of users, SPM's focus is further up the org chart than most applications, relying on high-level but usable outputs to help drive decision making.

    ePMO or Strategy Realization Office Senior Leadership and Executive Stakeholders Business Leads and IT Directors and Managers
    SPM tools are best facilitated through enterprise PMOs or strategy realization offices. After all, in enterprises, these are the entities charged with the planning, execution, and tracking of strategy.

    Their roles within the tool typically entail:

    • Helping to facilitate processes and collect data.
    • Data quality and curation.
    • Report distribution and consumption.
    As those with the accountability and authority to drive the organization's strategy, you could argue that these stakeholders are the primary stakeholders for an SPM tool.

    Their roles within the tool typically entail:

    • Using strategy map and ideation functionalities.
    • Using reports to steward strategy realization.
    SPM targets more business users as well as senior IT managers and directors.

    Their roles within the tool typically entail:

    • Using strategy map and ideation functionalities.
    • Providing updates to ePMOs on progress.

    What should you look for in a strategic portfolio management tool? (1 of 2)

    Standard features for SPM include:

    Name Description
    Analytics and Reporting SPM should provide access to real-time dashboards and data interpretation, which can be exported as reports in a range of formats.
    Strategy Mapping and Road Mapping SPM should provide access to up-to-date timeline views of strategies and initiatives, including the ability to map such things as dependencies, market needs, funding, priorities, governance, and accountabilities.
    Value Tracking and Measurement SPM should include the ability to forecast, track, and measure return on investment for strategic investments. This includes accommodations for various paradigms of value delivery (e.g. traditional value delivery and measurement, OKRs, as well as value mapping and value streams).
    Ideation and Innovation Management SPM should include the ability to facilitate innovation management processes across the organization, including the ability to support stage gates from ideation through to approval; to articulate, socialize, and test ideas; perform impact assessments; create value canvas and OKR maps; and prioritize.
    Multi-Portfolio Management SPM should include the ability to perform various modalities of portfolio management and portfolio optimization, including project portfolio management, applications portfolio management, asset portfolio management, etc.
    Interoperability/APIs An SPM tool should enable seamless integration with other applications for data interoperability.

    What should you look for in a strategic portfolio management tool? (2 of 2)

    Advanced features for SPM can include:

    Name Description
    Product Management SPM can include product-management-specific functionality, including the ability to connect product families, roadmaps, and backlogs to enterprise goals and priorities, and track team-level activities at the sprint, release, and campaign levels.
    Enterprise Architecture Management SPM can include the ability to define and map the structure and operation of an organization in order to effectively coordinate various domains of architecture and governance (e.g. business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, security architecture, etc.) in order to effectively plan and introduce change.
    Security and Risk Management SPM can include the ability to identify and track enterprise risks and ensure compliance controls are met.
    Lean Portfolio Management SPM can include the ability to plan and report on portfolio performance independent from task level details of product, program, or project delivery.
    Investment and Financial Management SPM can include the ability to forecast, track, and report on financials at various levels (strategy, product, program, project, etc.).
    Multi-Methodology Delivery SPM can include the ability to plan and execute work in a way that accommodates various planning and delivery paradigms (predictive, iterative, Kanban, lean, etc.).

    What's promising within the space?

    As this space continues to stabilize, the following are some promising associations for business and IT enablement.

    1. SPM accommodates various ways of working.
    • Where traditional PPM and work management tools required that users change their processes and tasking paradigms to fit within the tool's rigid task management and data structures, the best SPM tools are those that are adaptable to various ways of working and can accommodate many tasking and work management models.
    • Sometimes this is done through extensive integrations and APIs that pull data from existing work management applications into a single view within the SPM tool, and other times, this is done by abstracting the task-level details into a higher-level reporting structure (it can depend on the solution). In any event, the best SPMs are bound to one work management model.
    2. SPM puts the focus on value and change.
    • With its focus on the planning and execution of strategy, SPM can't avoid putting a spotlight on value and value realization. The best SPM tools include the ability to forecast, track, and measure return on investment for strategic investments, and they accommodate for various paradigms of value delivery (e.g. traditional value delivery and measurement, OKRs, as well as value mapping and value streams).
    • Of course, you can't realize value without successfully fostering change. And while SPM tools don't necessarily offer functionality explicitly identifiable as organizational change management, they can act as agents of change in putting the spotlight on the execution of change at the executive level.
    3. SPM fosters a coherent approach to demand management.
    • With its goal of ensuring that strategy informs the organization of portfolios and guides the selection of projects and delivery of products, SPM can potentially bring some order to what is often a chaotic demand-management landscape, ensuring that planned and in-progress work is well justified from an ROI perspective.

    What's of concern within the space?

    As a progeny from other capabilities, SPM has some risks and connotations potential users should be wary of.

    1. The space is rife with IT buzzwords and, as a concept, is sometimes used as a repackaging of failing concepts.
    • You don't need to spend too much time engaging with the literature around SPM before you notice the marketing appeals heavily to concepts like "digitalization," "digital transformation," "continual innovation," "agility/Agile," and the like. While these are all important concepts, and the pursuit of them is worthwhile in many cases, there's no denying they're used as consultant and vendor buzzwords, deployed to excite our imaginations, without necessarily providing much meat around what they mean or how they're deployed and successfully sustained.
    • Indeed, many concepts and capabilities that appear in relation to SPM are on the downward swing of industry hype cycles, suggesting that SPM may be being used by vendors and consultants as another attempt to repackage and capitalize on these concepts even as practitioners grow weary and suspicious of the marketing claims built up around them.
    2. Some solutions that identify as SPM are not.
    • Because it's on the upward swing of its place in the hype cycle, many established PPM and service management vendors are applying the 'strategic portfolio management" label to their products without necessarily doing anything different from a functionality perspective to fit within the space. As a result, SPM vendor landscapes can compare work management, project management, demand management tools, and more. Users who want SPM functionality need to stay frosty to ensure they get what they pay for.
    3. SPM tools may have a capacity blind spot.
    • The biggest barrier to getting things done and done well in modern enterprises is approving more work than you have the capacity to deliver. While SPM offerings can help with better demand management, not many of them cover the capacity side with the same level of improvement.

    Does your organization need a strategic portfolio management tool?

    Use Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment to gauge your readiness for SPM.

    • As noted in previous places in this deck, there is often a grey area in the market between project portfolio management tools and strategic portfolio management tools.
    • Some PPM tools offer SPM functionality, while some SPM tools avoid traditional PPM outcomes and stay at a higher, strategic level.
    • Depending on the scope of your PMO or portfolio optimization needs, you may need a tool that has just one, or both, of these capabilities.
    • Use Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment to help you assess whether you require a high-level strategy management tool, a more low-level project portfolio management tool, or a mix of both.

    Download Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment

    1.1 Assess your needs

    10 to 20 minutes

    1. The Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment is a 41-question survey broken up into three parts: (1) PMO Type, (2) Features and Functionality, (3) Roles.
    2. Go through each section using the provided dropdowns to help identify the orientation of your PMO, the feature and functionality needs of your office, as well as the roles whose needs will need to be serviced through the potential tool implementation.

    This screenshot shows a sample output from the assessment. Based upon your inputs, you'll be grouped within three ranges:

    1. Green: Based upon your inputs, you will benefit from an SPM tool.
    2. Yellow: You may benefit from an SPM tool, but you may also require something more traditional. Clarify your requirements before proceeding.
    3. Red: you're unlikely to leverage many of the benefits of an SPM tool at this time. Look for a more tactical solution.

    Sample Output from the assessment tool

    Input Output
    • Understanding of existing project management, project portfolio management, and work management applications.
    • Recommendation on PPM/SPM tool type
    Materials Participants
    • Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment tool
    • Portfolio managers and/or ePMO directors
    • Project managers and product managers
    • Business stakeholders

    Explore the SPM vendor landscape

    Use Info-Tech's application selection resources to help find the right solution for your organization.

    If the analysis in the previous slides suggested you can benefit from an SPM tool, you can quick-start your vendor evaluation process with SoftwareReviews.

    SoftwareReviews has extensive coverage of not just the SPM space, but of the project portfolio management (pictured to the top right) and project management spaces as well. So, from the tactical to the strategic, SoftwareReviews can help you find the right tools.

    Further, as you settle in on a shortlist, you can begin your vendor analysis using our rapid application selection methodology (see framework on bottom right). For more information see our The Rapid Application Selection Framework blueprint.

    Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework

    Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework (RASF)

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
    Drive IT project throughput by throttling resource capacity.

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for your PMO
    Turn planning into action with a realistic PMO timeline.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio
    Align portfolio management practices with COBIT (APO05: Manage Portfolio)

    Bibliography

    Angliss, Katy, and Pete Harpum. Strategic Portfolio Management: In the Multi-Project and Program Organization. Book. Routledge. 30 Dec. 2022.

    Anthony, James. "95 Essential Project Management Statistics: 2022 Market Share & Data Analysis." Finance Online. 2022. Web. Accessed 21 March 2022

    Banham, Craig. "Integrating strategic planning with portfolio management." Sopheon. Webinar. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Garfein, Stephen J. "Executive Guide to Strategic Portfolio Management: roadmap for closing the gap between strategy and results." PMI. Conference Paper. Oct. 2007. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Garfein, Stephen J. "Strategic Portfolio Management: A smart, realistic and relatively fast way to gain sustainable competitive advantage." PMI. Conference Paper. 2 March 2005. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Hontar, Yulia. "Strategic Portfolio Management." PPM Express. Blog 16 June 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Milsom, James. "6 Strategic Portfolio Management Trends for 2023." i-nexus. Blog. 25 Jan. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Milsom, James. "Strategic Portfolio Management 101." i-nexus. 8 Dec. 2021. Blog . Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    OnePlan, "Is Strategic Portfolio Management the Future of PPM?" YouTube. 17 Nov. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    OnePlan. "Strategic Portfolio Management for Enterprise Agile." YouTube. 27 May 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Piechota, Frank. "Strategic Portfolio Management: Enabling Successful Business Outcomes." Shibumi. Blog . 31 May 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    ServiceNow. "Strategic Portfolio Management—The Thing You've Been Missing." ServiceNow. Whitepaper. 2021. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Smith, Shepherd, "50+ Eye-Opening Strategic Planning Statistics" ClearPoint Strategy. Blog. 13 Sept. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    SoftwareAG. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management (SPM)?" SoftwareAG. Blog. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Stickel, Robert. "What It Means to be Adaptive." OnePlan. Blog. 24 May 2021. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    UMT360. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management?" YouTube. Webinar. 22 Oct. 2020. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Wall, Caroline. "Elevating Strategy Planning through Strategic Portfolio Management." StrategyBlocks. Blog. 26 Feb. 2020. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Westmoreland, Heather. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management." Planview. Blog. 19 Oct 2002. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Wiltshire, Andrew. "Shibumi Included in Gartner Magic Quadrant for Strategic Portfolio Management for the 2nd Straight Year." Shibumi. Blog. 20 Apr. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Ziehr, Paula. "Keep your eye on the prize: Align your IT investments with business strategy." SoftwareAG. Blog. 5 Jul. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}369|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting

    Business operations in high-risk areas of the world contend with complex threat environments and risk scenarios that often require a unique response. But traditional approaches to security strategy often miss these jurisdictional risks, leaving organizations vulnerable to threats that range from cybercrime and data breaches to fines and penalties.

    Security leaders need to identify high-risk jurisdictions, inventory critical assets, identify vulnerabilities, assess risks, and identify security controls necessary to mitigate those risks.

    Secure operations and protect critical assets in high-risk regions

    Across risks that include insider threats and commercial surveillance, the two greatest vulnerabilities that organizations face in high-risk parts of the world are travel and compliance. Organizations can make small adjustments to their security program to address these risks:

    1. Support high-risk travel: Put measures and guidelines in place to protect personnel, data, and devices before, during, and after employee travel.
    2. Mitigate compliance risk: Consider data residency requirements, data breach notification, cross-border data transfer, and third-party risks to support business growth.

    Using these two prevalent risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions as examples, this research walks you through the steps to analyze the threat landscape, assess security risks, and execute a response to mitigate them.

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions – A step-by-step approach to mitigating jurisdictional security and privacy risks.

    Traditional approaches to security strategy often miss jurisdictional risks. Use this storyboard to make small adjustments to your security program to mitigate security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    • Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions – Phases 1-3

    2. Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map Tool – A tool to inventory, assess, and treat jurisdictional risks.

    Use this tool to track jurisdictional risks, assess the exposure of critical assets, and identify mitigation controls. Use the geographic heatmap to communicate inherent jurisdictional risk with key stakeholders.

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map Tool

    3. Guidelines for Key Jurisdictional Risk Scenarios – Two structured templates to help you develop guidelines for two key jurisdictional risk scenarios: high-risk travel and compliance risk

    Use these two templates to develop help you develop your own guidelines for key jurisdictional risk scenarios. The guidelines address high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    • Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Context for Risk Assessment

    The Purpose

    Assess business requirements and evaluate security pressures to set the context for the security risk assessment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the goals of the organization in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Assess the threats to critical assets in these jurisdictions and capture stakeholder expectations for information security.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine assessment scope.

    1.2 Determine business goals.

    1.3 Determine compliance obligations.

    1.4 Determine risk appetite.

    1.5 Conduct pressure analysis.

    Outputs

    Business requirements

    Security pressure analysis

    2 Analyze Key Risk Scenarios for High-Risk Jurisdictions

    The Purpose

    Build key risk scenarios for high-risk jurisdictions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact should malicious agents exploit them.

    Assess risk exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify critical assets.

    2.2 Identify threats.

    2.3 Assess risk likelihood.

    2.4 Assess risk impact.

    Outputs

    Key risk scenarios

    Jurisdictional risk exposure

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map

    3 Build Risk Treatment Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Prioritize and treat jurisdictional risks to critical assets.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build an initiative roadmap to reduce residual risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify and assess risk response.

    3.2 Assess residual risks.

    3.3 Identify security controls.

    3.4 Build initiative roadmap.

    Outputs

    Action plan to mitigate key risk scenarios

    Further reading

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Assessments often omit jurisdictional risks. Are your assets exposed?

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Operations in high-risk jurisdictions face unique security scenarios.

    The image contains a picture of Michel Hebert.

    Michel Hébert

    Research Director

    Security and Privacy

    Info-Tech Research Group


    The image contains a picture of Alan Tang.

    Alan Tang

    Principal Research Director

    Security and Privacy

    Info-Tech Research Group


    Traditional approaches to security strategies may miss key risk scenarios that critical assets face in high-risk jurisdictions. These include high-risk travel, heightened insider threats, advanced persistent threats, and complex compliance environments. Most organizations have security strategies and risk management practices in place, but securing global operations requires its own effort. Assess the security risk that global operations pose to critical assets. Consider the unique assets, threats, and vulnerabilities that come with operations in high-risk jurisdictions. Focus on the business activities you support and integrate your insights with existing risk management practices to ensure the controls you propose get the visibility they need. Your goal is to build a plan that mitigates the unique security risks that global operations pose and secures critical assets in high-risk areas. Don’t leave security to chance.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Security leaders who support operations in many countries struggle to mitigate security risks to critical assets. Operations in high-risk jurisdictions contend with complex threat environments and security risk scenarios that often require a unique response.
    • Security leaders need to identify critical assets, assess vulnerabilities, catalog threats, and identify the security controls necessary to mitigate related operational risks.

    Common Obstacles

    • Securing operations in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional due diligence. Each jurisdiction involves a different risk context, which complicates efforts to identify, assess, and mitigate security risks to critical assets.
    • Security leaders need to engage the organization with the right questions and identify high-risk vulnerabilities and security risk scenarios to help stakeholders make an informed decision about how to assess and treat the security risks they face in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech has developed an effective approach to protecting critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    This approach includes tools for:

    • Evaluating the security context of your organization’s high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Identifying security risk scenarios unique to high-risk jurisdictions and assessing the exposure of critical assets.
    • Planning and executing a response.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations with global operations must contend with a more diverse set of assets, threats, and vulnerabilities when they operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Security leaders need to take additional steps to secure operations and protect critical assets.

    Business operations in high-risk jurisdictions face a more complex security landscape

    Information security risks to business operations vary widely by region.

    The 2022 Allianz Risk Barometer surveyed 2,650 business risk specialists in 89 countries to identify the most important risks to operations. The report identified cybercrime, IT failures, outages, data breaches, fines, and penalties as the most important global business risks in 2022, but their results varied widely by region. The standout finding of the 2022 Allianz Risk Barometer is the return of security risks as the most important threat to business operations. Security risks will continue to be acute beyond 2022, especially in Africa, the Middle East, Europe, and the Asia-Pacific region, where they will dwarf risks of supply chain interruptions, natural catastrophe, and climate change.

    Global operations in high-risk jurisdictions contend with more diverse threats. These security risk scenarios are not captured in traditional security strategies.

    The image contains a picture of the world map that has certain areas of the map highlighted in various shades of blue based on higher security-related business risks.

    Figures represent the number of cybersecurity risks business risk specialists selected as a percentage of all business risks (Allianz, 2022). Higher scores indicate jurisdictions with higher security-related business risks. Jurisdictions without data are in grey.

    Different jurisdictions’ commitment to cybersecurity also varies widely, which increases security risks further

    The Global Cybersecurity Index (GCI) provides insight into the commitment of different countries to cybersecurity.

    The index assesses a country’s legal framework to identify basic requirements that public and private stakeholders must uphold and the legal instruments prohibiting harmful actions.

    The 2020 GCI results show overall improvement and strengthening of the cybersecurity agenda globally, but significant regional gaps persist. Of the 194 countries surveyed:

    • 33% had no data protection legislation.
    • 47% had no breach notification measures in place.
    • 50% had no legislation on the theft of personal information.
    • 19% still had no legislation on illegal access.

    Not every jurisdiction has the same commitment to cybersecurity. Protecting critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional due diligence.

    The image contains a picture of the world map that has certain areas of the map highlighted in various shades of blue based on scores in relation to the Global Security Index.

    The diagram sets out the score and rank for each country that took part in the Global Cybersecurity Index (ITU, 2021)

    Higher scores show jurisdictions with a lower rank on the CGI, which implies greater risk. Jurisdictions without data are in grey.

    Securing critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional effort

    Traditional approaches to security strategy may miss these key risk scenarios.

    As a result, security leaders who support operations in many countries need to take additional steps to mitigate security risks to critical assets.

    Guide stakeholders to make informed decisions about how to assess and treat the security risks and secure operations.

    • Engage the organization with the right questions.
    • Identify critical assets and assess vulnerabilities.
    • Catalogue threats and build risk scenarios.
    • Identify the security controls necessary to mitigate risks.

    Work with your organization to analyze the threat landscape, assess security risks unique to high-risk jurisdictions, and execute a response to mitigate them.

    This project blueprint works through this process using the two most prevalent risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions: high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance
    The image contains a screenshot of an Info-Tech thought model regarding secure global operations in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Travel risk is the first scenario we use as an example throughout the blueprint

    • This project blueprint outlines a process to identify, assess, and mitigate key risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions. We use two common key risk scenarios as examples throughout the deck to illustrate how you create and assess your own scenarios.
    • Supporting high-risk travel is the first scenario we will study in-depth as an example. Business growth, service delivery, and mergers and acquisitions can lead end users to travel to high-risk jurisdictions where staff, devices, and data are at risk.
    • Compromised or stolen devices can provide threat actors with access to data that could compromise the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage or expose the organization to regulatory risk.

    The project blueprint includes template guidance in Phase 3 to help you build and deploy your own travel guidelines to protect critical assets and support end users before they leave, during their trip, and when they return.

    Before you leave

    • Identify high-risk countries.
    • Enable controls.
    • Limit what you pack.

    During your trip

    • Assume you are monitored.
    • Limit access to systems.
    • Prevent theft.

    When you return

    • Change your password.
    • Restore your devices.

    Compliance risk is the second scenario we use as an example

    • Mitigating compliance risk is the second scenario we will study as an example in this blueprint. The legal and regulatory landscape is evolving rapidly to keep step with the pace of technological change. Security and privacy leaders are expected to mitigate the risk of noncompliance as the organization expands to new jurisdictions.
    • Later sections will show how to think through at least four compliance risks, including:
      • Cross-border data transfer
      • Third-party risk management
      • Data breach notification
      • Data residency

    The project blueprint includes template guidance in Phase 3 to help you deploy your own compliance governance controls as a risk mitigation measure.

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions: Info-Tech’s methodology

    1. Identify Context

    2. Assess Risks

    3. Execute Response

    Phase Steps

    1. Assess business requirements
    2. Evaluate security pressures
    1. Identify risks
    2. Assess risk exposure
    1. Treat security risks
    2. Build initiative roadmap

    Phase Outcomes

    • Internal security pressures that capture the governance, policies, practices, and risk tolerance of the organization
    • External security pressures that capture the expectations of customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners
    • A heatmap that captures not only the global exposure of your critical assets but also the business processes they support
    • A security risk register to allow for the easy transfer of critical assets’ global security risk data to your organization’s enterprise risk management practice
    • A roadmap of prioritized initiatives to apply relevant controls and secure global assets
    • A set of key risk indicators to monitor and report your progress

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Business Security Requirements

    Identify the context for the global security risk assessment, including risk appetite and risk tolerance.

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap

    Identify critical global assets and the threats they face in high-risk jurisdictions and assess exposure.

    Mitigation Plan

    Roadmap of initiatives and security controls to mitigate global risks to critical assets. Tools and templates to address key security risk scenarios.

    Key deliverable:

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture information security risks to critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions. The tool generates a world chart that illustrates the risks global operations face to help you engage the business and execute a response.

    Blueprint benefits

    Protect critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions

    IT Benefits

    Assess and remediate information security risk to critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Easily integrate your risk assessment with enterprise risk assessments to improve communication with the business.

    Illustrate key information security risk scenarios to make the case for action in terms the business understands.

    Business Benefits

    Develop mitigation plans to protect staff, devices, and data in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Support business growth in high-risk jurisdictions without compromising critical assets.

    Mitigate compliance risk to protect your organization’s reputation, avoid fines, and ensure business continuity.

    Quantify the impact of securing global operations

    The tool included with this blueprint can help you measure the impact of implementing the research

    • Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to describe the key risk scenarios you face, assess their likelihood and impact, and estimate the cost of mitigating measures. Working through the project in this way will help you quantify the impact of securing global operations.
    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool. The image contains a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdiction.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    • Review existing information security and risk management metrics and the output of the tools included with the blueprint.
    • Identify metrics to measure the impact of your risk management efforts. Focus specifically on high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Compare your results with those in your overall security and risk management program.

    ID

    Metric

    Why is this metric valuable?

    How do I calculate it?

    1.

    Overall Exposure – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Illustrates the overall exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool. Calculate the impact times the probability rating for each risk. Take the average.

    2.

    # Risks Identified – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs risk tolerance assessments.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    3.

    # Risks Treated – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs residual risk assessments.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    4.

    Mitigation Cost – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs cost-benefit analysis to determine program effectiveness.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    5.

    # Security Incidents – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs incident trend calculations to determine program effectiveness.

    Draw the information from your service desk or IT service management tool.

    6.

    Incident Remediation Cost – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs cost-benefit analysis to determine program effectiveness.

    Estimate based on cost and effort, including direct and indirect cost such as business disruptions, administrative finds, reputational damage, etc.

    7.

    TRENDS: Program Effectiveness – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    # of security incidents over time. Remediation : Mitigation costs over time

    Calculate based on metrics 5 to 7.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs.

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Call #1: Scope project requirements, determine assessment scope, and discuss challenges.

    Phase 2

    Call #2: Conduct initial risk assessment and determine risk tolerance.

    Call #3: Evaluate security pressures in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Call #4: Identify risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Call #5: Assess risk exposure.

    Phase 3

    Call #6: Treat security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Days 1

    Days 2-3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Identify Context

    Key Risk Scenarios

    Build Roadmap

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope.

    1.1.2 Determine business goals.

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations.

    1.2.1 Determine risk appetite.

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis.

    2.1.1 Identify assets.

    2.1.2 Identify threats.

    2.2.1 Assess risk likelihood.

    2.2.2 Assess risk impact.

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response.

    3.1.2 Assess residual risks.

    3.2.1 Identify security controls.

    3.2.2 Build initiative roadmap.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Business requirements for security risk assessment
    2. Identification of high-risk jurisdictions
    3. Security threat landscape for high-risk jurisdictions
    1. Inventory of relevant threats, critical assets, and their vulnerabilities
    2. Assessment of adverse effects should threat agents exploit vulnerabilities
    3. Risk register with key risk scenarios and heatmap of high-risk jurisdictions
    1. Action plan to mitigate key risk scenarios
    2. Investment and implementation roadmap
    1. Completed information security risk assessment for two key risk scenarios
    2. Risk mitigation roadmap

    No safe jurisdictions

    Stakeholders sometimes ask information security and privacy leaders to produce a list of safe jurisdictions from which to operate. We need to help them see that there are no safe jurisdictions, only relatively risky ones. As you build your security program, deepen the scope of your risk assessments to include risk scenarios critical assets face in different jurisdictions. These risks do not need to rule out operations, but they may require additional mitigation measures to keep staff, data, and devices safe and reduce potential reputational harms.

    Traditional approaches to security strategy often omit jurisdictional risks.

    Global operations must contend with a more complex security landscape. Secure critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions with a targeted risk assessment.

    The two greatest risks are high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    You can mitigate them with small adjustments to your security program.

    Support High-Risk Travel

    When securing travel to high-risk jurisdictions, you must consider personnel safety as well as data and device security. Put measures and guidelines in place to protect them before, during, and after travel.

    Mitigate Compliance Risk

    Think through data residency requirements, data breach notification, cross-border data transfer, and third-party risks to support business growth and mitigate compliance risks in high-risk jurisdictions to protect your organization’s reputation and avoid hefty fines or business disruptions.

    Phase 1

    Identify Context

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess business requirements to understand the goals of the organization’s global operations, as well as its risk governance, policies, and practices.
    • Evaluate jurisdictional security pressures to understand threats to critical assets and capture the expectations of external stakeholders, including customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners, and assess risk tolerance.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • IT leadership
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance

    Step 1.1

    Assess Business Requirements

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope

    1.1.2 Identify enterprise goals in high-risk jurisdictions

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • IT leadership
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assess business requirements to understand the goals of the organization’s global operations, as well as its risk governance, policies, and practices.

    Focus the risk assessment on high-risk jurisdictions

    Traditional approaches to information security strategy often miss threats to global operations

    • Successful security strategies are typically sensitive to risks to different IT systems and lines of business.
    • However, securing global operations requires additional focus on high-risk jurisdictions, considering what makes them unique.
    • This first phase of the project will help you evaluate the business context of operations in high-risk jurisdictions, including:
      • Enterprise and security goals.
      • Lines of business, physical locations, and IT systems that need additional oversight.
      • Unique compliance obligations.
      • Unique risks and security pressures.
      • Organizational risk tolerance in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Focus your risk assessment on the business activities security supports in high-risk jurisdictions and the unique threats they face to bridge gaps in your security strategy.

    Identify jurisdictions with higher inherent risks

    Your security strategy may not describe jurisdictional risk adequately.

    • Security strategies list lines of business, physical locations, and IT systems the organization needs to secure and those whose security will depend on a third-party. You can find additional guidance on fixing the scope and boundaries of a security strategy in Phase 1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.
    • However, security risks vary widely from one jurisdiction to another according to:
      • Active cyber threats.
      • Legal and regulatory frameworks.
      • Regional security and preparedness capabilities.
    • Your first task is to identify high-risk jurisdictions to target for additional oversight.

    Work closely with your enterprise risk management function.

    Enterprise risk management functions are often tasked with developing risk assessments from composite sources. Work closely with them to complete your own assessment.

    Countries at heightened risk of money laundering and terrorism financing are examples of high-risk jurisdictions. The Financial Action Task Force and the U.S. Treasury publish reports three times a year that identify Non-Cooperative Countries or Territories.

    Develop a robust jurisdictional assessment

    Design an intelligence collection strategy to inform your assessment

    Strategic Intelligence

    White papers, briefings, reports. Audience: C-Suite, board members

    Tactical Intelligence

    Internal reports, vendor reports. Audience: Security leaders

    Operational intelligence

    Indicators of compromise. Audience: IT Operations

    Operational intelligence focuses on machine-readable data used to block attacks, triage and validate alerts, and eliminate threats from the network. It becomes outdated in a matter of hours and is less useful for this exercise.

    Determine travel risks to bolster your assessments

    Not all locations and journeys will require the same security measures.

    • Travel risks vary significantly according to destination, the nature of the trip, and traveler profile.
    • Access to an up-to-date country risk rating system enables your organization and individual staff to quickly determine the overall level of risk in a specific country or location.
    • Based on this risk rating, you can specify what security measures are required prior to travel and what level of travel authorization is appropriate, in line with the organization's security policy or travel security procedures.
    • While some larger organizations can maintain their own country risk ratings, this requires significant capacity, particularly to obtain the necessary information to keep these regularly updated.
    • It may be more effective for your organization to make use of the travel risk ratings provided by an external security information provider, such as a company linked to your travel insurance or travel booking service, if available.
    • Alternatively, various open-source travel risk ratings are available via embassy travel sites or other website providers.

    Without a flexible system to account for the risk exposures of different jurisdictions, staff may perceive measures as a hindrance to operations.

    Develop a tiered risk rating

    The example below outlines potential risk indicators for high-risk travel.

    Rating

    Description

    Low

    Generally secure with adequate physical security. Low violent crime rates. Some civil unrest during significant events. Acts of terrorism rare. Risks associated with natural disasters limited and health threats mainly preventable.

    Moderate

    Periodic civil unrest. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups active with sporadic acts of terrorism. Staff at risk from common and violent crime. Transport and communications services are unreliable and safety records are poor. Jurisdiction prone to natural disasters or disease epidemics.

    High

    Regular periods of civil unrest, which may target foreigners. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups very active and threaten political or economic stability. Violent crime rates high, often targeting foreigners. Infrastructure and emergency services poor. May be regular disruption to transportation or communications services. Certain areas off-limits to foreigners. Jurisdictions experiencing natural disasters or epidemics are considered high risk.

    Extreme

    Undergoing active conflict or persistent civil unrest. Risk of being caught up in a violent incident or attack is very high. Authorities may have lost control of significant portions of the country. Lines between criminality and political and insurgent violence are blurred. Foreigners are likely to be denied access to parts of the country. Transportation and communication services are severely degraded or nonexistent. Violence presents a direct threat to staff security.

    Ratings are formulated by assessing several types of risk, including conflict, political/civil unrest, terrorism, crime, and health and infrastructure risks.

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope

    1 – 2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm a list of high-risk jurisdictions to target for additional assessment. Write down as many items as possible to include in:
    • Lines of business
    • Physical locations
    • IT systems

    Pay close attention to elements of the assessment that are not in scope.

  • Discuss the response and the rationale for targeting each of them for additional risk assessments. Identify security-related concerns for different lines of business, locations, user groups, IT systems, and data.
  • Record your responses and your comments in the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Relevant threat intelligence
    • A list of high-risk jurisdictions to focus your risk assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Position your efforts in a business context

    Securing critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions is a business imperative

    • Many companies relegate their information security strategies to their IT department. Aside from the strain the choice places on a department that already performs many different functions, it wrongly implies that mitigating information security risk is simply an IT problem.
    • Managing information security risks is a business problem. It requires that organizations identify their risk appetite, prioritize relevant threats, and define risk mitigation initiatives. Business leaders can only do these activities effectively in a context that recognizes the business and financial benefits of implementing protections.
    • This is notably true of businesses with operations in many different countries. Each jurisdiction has its own set of security risks the organization must account for, as well as unique local laws and regulations that affect business operations.
    • In high-risk jurisdictions, your efforts must consider the unique operational challenges your organization may not face in its home country. Your efforts to secure critical assets will be most successful if you describe key risk scenarios in terms of their impact on business goals.
    • You can find additional guidance on assessing the business context of a security strategy in Phase 1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Do you understand the unique business context of operations in high-risk jurisdictions?

    1.1.2 Identify business goals

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm the primary and secondary business goals of the organization. Focus your assessment on operations in high-risk jurisdictions you identified in Exercise 1.1.1. Review:
    • Relevant corporate and IT strategies.
    • The business goal definitions and indicator metrics in tab 2, “Goals Definition,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • Limit business goals to no more than two primary goals and three secondary goals. This limitation will help you prioritize security initiatives at the end of the project.
  • For each business goal, identify up to two security alignment goals that will support business goals in high-risk jurisdictions.
  • Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Your goals for the security risk assessment for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Record business goals

    Capture the results in the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    1. Record the primary and secondary business goals you identified in tab 3, “Goals Cascade,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    2. Next, record the two security alignment goals you selected for each business goal based on the tool’s recommendations.
    3. Finally, review the graphic diagram that illustrates your goals on tab 6, “Results,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    4. Revisit this exercise whenever operations expands to a new jurisdiction to capture how they contribute to the organization’s mission and vision and how the security program can support them.
    The image contains a screenshot of Tab 3, Goals Cascade.

    Tab 3, Goals Cascade

    The image contains a screenshot of Tab 6, Results.

    Tab 6, Results

    Analyze business goals

    Assess how operating in multiple jurisdictions adds nuance to your business goals

    • Security leaders need to understand the direction of the business to propose relevant security initiatives that support business goals in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Operating in different jurisdictions carries its own degree of risk. The organization is subject not only to the information security risks and legal frameworks of its country of origin but also to those associated with international jurisdictions.
    • You need to understand where your organization operates and how these different jurisdictions contribute to your business goals to support their performance and protect the firm’s reputation.
    • This exercise will make an explicit link between security and privacy concerns in high-risk jurisdictions, what the business cares about, and what security is trying to accomplish.

    If the organization is considering a merger and acquisition project that will expand operations in jurisdictions with different travel risk profiles, the security organization needs to revise the security strategy to ensure the organization can support high-risk travel and mitigate risks to critical assets.

    Identify compliance obligations

    Data compliance obligations loom large in high-risk jurisdictions

    The image contains four hexagons, each with their own words. SOX, PCI DSS, HIPAA, HITECH.

    Security leaders are familiar with most conventional regulatory obligations that govern financial, personal, and healthcare data in North America and Europe.

    The image contains four hexagons, each with their own words. Residency, Cross-Border Transfer, Breach Notification, Third-Party Risk Mgmt.

    Data privacy concerns, nationalism, and the economic value of data are all driving jurisdictions to adopt data residency and data localization and to shut down the cross-border transfer of data.

    The next step requires you to consider the compliance obligations the organization needs to meet to support the business as it expands to other jurisdictions through natural growth, mergers, and acquisitions.

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm compliance obligations in target jurisdictions. Focus your assessment on operations in high-risk jurisdictions.
    2. Include:

    • Laws
    • Governing regulations
    • Industry standards
    • Contractual agreements
  • Record your compliance obligations and comments on tab 4, “Compliance Obligations,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • If you need to take full stock of the laws and regulations in place in the jurisdictions where you operate that you are not familiar with, consider seeking local legal counsel to help you navigate this exercise.
  • Input

    Output

    • Legal and compliance frameworks in target jurisdictions
    • Mandatory and voluntary compliance obligations for target jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Step 1.2

    Evaluate Security Pressures

    Activities

    1.2.1 Conduct initial risk assessment

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis

    1.2.3 Determine risk tolerance

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    Identify threats to global assets and capture the security expectations of external stakeholders, including customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners, and determine risk tolerance.

    Evaluate security pressures to set the risk context

    Perform an initial assessment of high-risk jurisdictions to set the context.

    Assess:

    • The threat landscape.
    • The security pressures from key stakeholders.
    • The risk tolerance of your organization.

    You should be able to find the information in your existing security strategy. If you don’t have the information, work through the next three steps of the project blueprint.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate evaluating security pressures, as described in the text above.

    Some jurisdictions carry inherent risks

    • Jurisdictional risks stem from legal, regulatory, or political factors that exist in different countries or regions. They can also stem from unexpected legal changes in regions where critical assets have exposure. Understanding jurisdictional risks is critical because they can require additional security controls.
    • Jurisdictional risk tends to be higher in jurisdictions:
      • Where the organization:
        • Conducts high-value or high-volume financial transactions.
        • Supports and manages critical infrastructure.
        • Has high-cost data or data whose compromise could undermine competitive advantage.
        • Has a high percentage of part-time employees and contractors.
        • Experiences a high rate of employee turnover.
      • Where state actors:
        • Have a low commitment to cybersecurity, financial, and privacy legislation and regulation.
        • Support cybercrime organizations within their borders.

    Jurisdictional risk is often reduced to countries where money laundering and terrorist activities are high. In this blueprint, the term refers to the broader set of information security risks that arise when operating in a foreign country or jurisdiction.

    Five key risk scenarios are most prevalent

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance

    Security leaders who support operations in many countries need to take additional steps to mitigate security risks to critical assets. The goal of the next two exercises is to analyze the threat landscape and security pressures unique to high-risk jurisdictions, which will inform the construction of key scenarios in Phase 2. These five scenarios are most prevalent in high-risk jurisdictions. Keep them in mind as you go through the exercises in this section.

    1.2.1 Assess jurisdictional risk

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 2, “Risk Assessment,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following risk elements with a focus on high-risk jurisdictions:
    3. Review each question in tab 2 of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool and select the most appropriate response.

    Input

    Output

    • Existing security strategy
    • List of organizational assets
    • Historical data on information security incidents
    • Completed risk assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    For more information on how to complete the risk assessment questionnaire, see Step 1.2.1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 3, “Pressure Analysis,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following pressure elements with a focus on high-risk jurisdictions:
    • Compliance and oversight
    • Customer expectations
    • Business expectations
    • IT expectations
  • Review each question in the questionnaire and provide the most appropriate response using the drop-down list. It may be helpful to consult with the appropriate departments to obtain their perspectives.
  • For more information on how to complete the pressure analysis questionnaire, see Step 1.3 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Input

    Output

    • Information on various pressure elements within the organization
    • Existing security strategy
    • Completed pressure analysis

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business leaders
    • Compliance

    A low security pressure means that your stakeholders do not assign high importance to information security. You may need to engage stakeholders with the right key risk scenarios to illustrate jurisdictional risk and generate support for new security controls.

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Assess risk tolerance

    • Risk tolerance expresses the types and amount of risk the organization is willing to accept in pursuit of its goals.
    • These expectations can help you identify, manage, and report on key risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • For instance, an organization with a low risk tolerance will require a stronger information security program to minimize operational security risks.
    • It’s up to business leaders to determine the risks they are willing to accept. They may need guidance to understand how system-level risks affect the organization’s ability to pursue its goals.

    A formalized risk tolerance statement can help:

    • Support risk-based security decisions that align with business goals.
    • Provide a meaningful rationale for security initiatives.
    • Improve the transparency of investments in the organization’s security program.
    • Provide guidance for monitoring inherent risk and residual risk exposure.

    The role of security professionals is to identify and analyze key risk scenarios that may prevent the organization from reaching its goals.

    1.2.3 Determine risk tolerance

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 4, “Risk Tolerance,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following risk tolerance elements:
    • Recent IT problems, especially downtime and data recovery issues
    • Historical security incidents
  • Review any relevant documentation, including:
    • Existing security strategy
    • Business impact assessments
    • Service-level agreements

    For more information on how to complete the risk tolerance questionnaire, see Step 1.4 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Input

    Output

    • Existing security strategy
    • Data on recent IT problems and incidents
    • Business impact assessments
    • Completed risk tolerance statement

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Review the output of the results tab

    • The organizational risk assessment provides a high-level assessment of inherent risks in high-risk jurisdictions. Use the results to build and assess key risk scenarios in Phase 2.
    • Use the security pressure analysis to inform stakeholder management efforts. A low security pressure indicates that stakeholders do not yet grasp the impact of information security on organizational goals. You may need to communicate its importance before you discuss additional security controls.
    • Jurisdictions in which organizations have a low risk tolerance will require stronger information security controls to minimize operational risks.
    The image contains a screenshot of the organizational risk assessment. The image contains a screenshot of the security pressure analysis. The image contains a screenshot of the risk tolerance curve.

    Phase 2

    Assess Security Risks to Critical Assets

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify critical assets, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact a successful threat event would have on the organization.
    • Assess risk exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions for each risk scenario through an analysis of its likelihood and impact.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Step 2.1

    Identify Risks

    Activities

    2.1.1 Identify assets

    2.1.2 Identify threats

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Define risk scenarios that identify critical assets, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact a successful threat event would have on the organization.

    This blueprint focuses on mitigating jurisdictional risks

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Risk Management Framework. The framework includes: Risk Identification, Risk Assessment, Risk Response, and Risk Governance.

    For a deeper dive into building a risk management program, see Info-Tech’s core project blueprints on risk management:

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program

    Draft key risk scenarios to illustrate adverse events

    Risk scenarios help decision-makers understand how adverse events affect business goals.

    • Risk-scenario building is the process of identifying the critical factors that contribute to an adverse event and crafting a narrative that describes the circumstances and consequences if it were to happen.
    • Risk scenarios set up the risk analysis stage of the risk assessment process. They are narratives that describe in detail:
      • The asset at risk.
      • The threat that can act against the asset.
      • Their intent or motivation.
      • The circumstances and threat actor model associated with the threat event.
      • The potential effect on the organization.
      • When or how often the event might occur.

    Risk scenarios are further distilled into a single sentence or risk statement that communicates the essential elements from the scenario.

    Well-crafted risk scenarios have four components

    The second phase of the project will help you craft meaningful risk scenarios

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    An actor capable of harming an asset

    Anything of value that can be affected and results in loss

    Technique an actor uses to affect an asset

    How loss materializes

    Examples: Malicious or untrained employees, cybercriminal groups, malicious state actors

    Examples: Systems, regulated data, intellectual property, people

    Examples: Credential compromise, privilege escalation, data exfiltration

    Examples: Loss of data confidentiality, integrity, or availability; impact on staff health & safety

    Risk scenarios are concise, four to six sentence narratives that describe the core elements of forecasted adverse events. Use them to engage stakeholders with the right questions and guide them to make informed decisions about how to address and treat security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    The next slides review five key risk scenarios prevalent in high-risk jurisdictions. Use them as examples to develop your own.

    Travel to high-risk jurisdictions requires special measures to protect staff, devices, and data

    Governmental, academic, and commercial advisors compile lists of jurisdictions that pose greater travel risks annually.

    For instance, in the US, these lists might include countries that are:

    • Subjects of travel warnings by the US Department of State.
    • Identified as high risk by other US government sources such as:
      • The Department of the Treasury Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC).
      • The Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI).
      • The Office of the Director of National Intelligence (ODNI).
    • Compiled from academic and commercial sources, such as Control Risks.

    When securing travel to high-risk jurisdictions, you must consider personnel safety as well as data and device security.

    The image contains a diagram to present high-risk jurisdictions.

    The diagram presents high-risk jurisdictions based on US governmental sources (2021) listed on this slide.

    High-risk travel

    Likelihood: Medium

    Impact: Medium

    Key Risk Scenario #1

    Malicious state actors, cybercriminals, and competitors can threaten staff, devices, and data during travel to high-risk jurisdictions. Device theft or compromise may occur while traveling through airports, accessing hotel computer and phone networks, or in internet cafés or other public areas. Threat actors can exploit data from compromised or stolen devices to undermine the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage. They can also infect compromised devices with malware that delivers malicious payloads once they reconnect with home networks.

    Threat Actor:

    • Malicious state actors
    • Cybercriminals
    • Competitors

    Assets:

    • Staff
    • IT systems
    • Sensitive data

    Effect:

    • Compromised staff health and safety
    • Loss of data
    • Lost of system integrity

    Methods:

    • Identify, steal, or target mobile devices.
    • Compromise network, wireless, or Bluetooth connections.
    • Leverage stolen devices as a means of infecting other networks.
    • Access devices to track user location.
    • Activate microphones on devices to collect information.
    • Intercept electronic communications users send from high-risk jurisdictions.

    The data compliance landscape is a jigsaw puzzle of data protection and data residency requirements

    Since the EU passed the GDPR in 2016, jurisdictions have turned to data regulations to protect citizen data

    Data privacy concerns, nationalism, and the economic value of data are all driving jurisdictions to adopt data residency, breach notification, and cross-border data transfer regulations. As 2021 wound down to a close, nearly all the world’s 30 largest economies had some form of data regulation in place. The regulatory landscape is shifting rapidly, which complicates operations as organizations grow into new markets or engage in merger and acquisition activities.

    Global operations require special attention to data-residency requirements, data breach notification requirements, and cross-border data transfer regulations to mitigate compliance risk.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the data regulations placed in various places around the world.

    Compliance risk

    Likelihood: Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #2

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulatory landscape threaten organizations’ ability to meet their compliance obligations from local legal and regulatory frameworks. Organizations risk reputational damage, administrative fines, criminal charges, and loss of market share. In extreme cases, organizations may lose their license to operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Shifts in the regulatory landscape can involve additional requirements for data residency, cross-border data transfer, data breach notification, and third-party risk management.

    Threat Actor:

    • Local, regional, and national state actors

    Asset:

    • Reputation, market share
    • License to operate

    Effect:

    • Administrative fines
    • Loss of reputation, brand trust, and consumer loyalty
    • Loss of market share
    • Suspension of business operations
    • Lawsuits due to collective actions and claims
    • Criminal charges

    Methods:

    • Shifts in the privacy and security regulatory landscape, including requirements for:
      • Data residency.
      • Cross-border data transfer.
      • Data breach notification.
      • Third-party security and privacy risk management.

    The incidence of insider threats varies widely by jurisdiction in unexpected ways

    On average, companies in North America, the Middle East, and Africa had the most insider incidents in 2021, while those in the Asia-Pacific region had the least.

    The Ponemon Institute set out to understand the financial consequences that result from insider threats and gain insight into how well organizations are mitigating these risks.

    In the context of this research, insider threat is defined as:

    • Employee or contractor negligence.
    • Criminal or malicious insider activities.
    • Credential theft (imposter risk).

    On average, the total cost to remediate insider threats in 2021 was US$15.4 million per incident.

    In all regions, employee or contractor negligence occurred most frequently. Organizations in North America and in the Middle East and Africa were most likely to experience insider threat incidents in 2021.

    the image contains a diagram of the world, with various places coloured in different shades of blue.

    The diagram represents the average number of insider incidents reported per organization in 2021. The results are analyzed in four regions (Ponemon Institute, 2022)

    Insider threat

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #3

    Malicious insiders, negligent employees, and credential thieves can exploit inside access to information systems to commit fraud, steal confidential or commercially valuable information, or sabotage computer systems. Insider threats are difficult to identify, especially when security is geared toward external threats. They are often familiar with the organization’s data and intellectual property as well as the methods in place to protect them. An insider may steal information for personal gain or install malicious software on information systems. They may also be legitimate users who make errors and disregard policies, which places the organization at risk.

    Threat Actor:

    • Malicious insiders
    • Negligent employees
    • Infiltrators

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • Employee credentials
    • IT systems

    Effects:

    • Loss of system integrity
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Financial loss

    Methods:

    • Infiltrators may compromise credentials.
    • Malicious or negligent insiders may use corporate email to steal or share sensitive data, including:
      • Regulated data.
      • Intellectual property.
      • Critical business information.
    • Malicious agents may facilitate data exfiltration, as well as open-port and vulnerability scans.

    The risk of advanced persistent threats is more prevalent in Central and South America and the Asia-Pacific region

    Attacks from advanced persistent threat (APT) actors are more sophisticated than traditional ones.

    • More countries will use legal indictments as part of their cyber strategy. Exposing toolsets of APT groups carried out at the governmental level will drive more states to do the same.
    • Expect APTs to increasingly target network appliances like VPN gateways as organizations continue to sustain hybrid workforces.
    • The line between APTs and state-sanctioned ransomware groups is blurring. Expect cybercriminals to wield better tools, mount more targeted attacks, and use double-extortion tactics.
    • Expect more disruption and collateral damage from direct attacks on critical infrastructure.

    Top 10 Significant Threat Actors:

    • Lazarus
    • DeathStalker
    • CactusPete
    • IAmTheKing
    • TransparentTribe
    • StrongPity
    • Sofacy
    • CoughingDown
    • MuddyWater
    • SixLittleMonkeys

    Top 10 Targets:

    • Government
    • Banks
    • Financial Institutions
    • Diplomatic
    • Telecommunications
    • Educational
    • Defense
    • Energy
    • Military
    • IT Companies
    The image contains a world map coloured in various shades of blue.
    Top 12 countries targeted by APTs (Kaspersky, 2020)

    Track notable APTs to revise your list of high-risk jurisdictions and review the latest tactics and techniques

    Governmental advisors track notable APT actors that pose greater risks.

    The CISA Shields Up site, SANS Storm Center site, and MITRE ATT&CK group site provide helpful and timely information to understand APT risks in different jurisdictions.

    The following threat actors are currently associated with cyberattacks affiliated with the Russian government.

    Activity Group

    Risks

    APT28 (GRU)

    Known as Fancy Bear, this threat group has been tied to espionage since 2004. They compromised the Hillary Clinton campaign, amid other major events.

    APT29 (SVT)

    Tied to espionage since 2008. Reportedly compromised the Democratic National Committee in 2015. Cited in the 2021 SolarWinds compromise.

    Buhtrap/RTM Group

    Group focused on financial targets since 2014. Currently known to target Russian and Ukrainian banks.

    Gamaredon

    Operating in Crimea. Aligned with Russian interests. Has previously targeted Ukrainian government officials and organizations.

    DEV-0586

    Carried out wiper malware attacks on Ukrainian targets in January 2022.

    UNC1151

    Active since 2016. Linked to information operation campaigns and the distribution of anti-NATO material.

    Conti

    Most successful ransomware gang of 2021, with US$188M revenue. Supported Russian invasion of Ukraine, threatening attacks on allied critical infrastructure.

    Sources: MITRE ATT&CK; Security Boulevard, 2022; Reuters, 2022; The Verge, 2022

    Advanced persistent threat

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #4

    Advanced persistent threats are state actors or state-sponsored affiliates with the means to avoid detection by anti-malware software and intrusion detection systems. These highly-skilled and persistent malicious agents have significant resources with which to bypass traditional security controls, establish a foothold in the information technology infrastructure, and exfiltrate data undetected. APTs have the resources to adapt to a defender’s efforts to resist them over time. The loss of system integrity and data confidentiality over time can lead to financial losses, business continuity disruptions, and the destruction of critical infrastructure.

    Threat Actor:

    • State actors
    • State-sponsored affiliates

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • IT systems
    • Critical infrastructure

    Effects:

    • Loss of system integrity
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Financial loss
    • Business continuity disruptions
    • Infrastructure destruction

    Methods:

    • Persistent, consistent attacks using the most advanced threats and tactics to bypass security defenses.
    • The goal of APTs is to maintain access to networks for prolonged periods without being detected.
    • The median dwell time differs widely between regions. FireEye reported the mean dwell time for 2018:
      • Americas: 71 days
      • Europe, Middle East, and Africa: 177 days
      • Asia-Pacific: 204 days
    Sources: Symantec, 2011; FireEye, 2019

    Threat agents have deployed invasive technology for commercial surveillance in at least 76 countries since 2015

    State actors and their affiliates purchased and used invasive spyware from companies in Europe, Israel, and the US.

    • “Customers are predominantly repressive regimes looking for new ways to control the flow of information and stifle dissent. Less than 10% of suspected customers are considered full democracies by the Economist Intelligence Unit.” (Top10VPN, 2021)
    • Companies based in economically developed and largely democratic states are profiting off the technology.
    • The findings demonstrate the need to consider geopolitical realities when assessing high-risk jurisdictions and to take meaningful action to increase layered defenses against invasive malware.
    • Spyware is having an increasingly well-known impact on civil society. For instance, since 2016, over 50,000 individual phone numbers have been identified as potential targets by NSO Group, the Israeli manufacturers of the notorious Pegasus Spyware. The target list contained the phone numbers of politicians, journalists, activists, doctors, and academics across the world.
    • The true number of those affected by spyware is almost impossible to determine given that many fall victim to the technology and do not notice.
    The image contains a map of the world with various countries highlighted in shades of blue.

    Countries where commercial surveillance tools have been deployed (“Global Spyware Market Index,” Top10VPN, 2021)

    The risks and effects of spyware vary greatly

    Spyware can steal mundane information, track a user’s every move, and everything in between.

    Adware

    Software applications that display advertisements while the program is running.

    Keyboard Loggers

    Applications that monitor and record keystrokes. Malicious agents use them to steal credentials and sensitive enterprise data.

    Trojans

    Applications that appear harmless but inflict damage or data loss to a system.

    Mobile Spyware

    Surveillance applications that infect mobile devices via SMS or MMS channels, though the most advanced can infect devices without user input.

    State actors and their affiliates use system monitors to track browsing habits, application usage, and keystrokes and capture information from devices’ GPS location data, microphone, and camera. The most advanced system monitor spyware, such as NSO Group’s Pegasus, can infect devices without user input and record conversations from end-to-end encrypted messaging systems.

    Commercial surveillance

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: Medium

    Key Risk Scenario #5

    Malicious agents can deploy malware on end-user devices with commercial tools available off the shelf to secretly monitor the digital activity of users. Attacks exploit widespread vulnerabilities in telecommunications protocols. They occur through email and text phishing campaigns, malware embedded in untested applications, and sophisticated zero-click attacks that deliver payloads without requiring user interactions. Attacks target sensitive as well as mundane information. They can be used to track employee activities, investigate criminal activity, or steal credentials, credit card numbers, or other personally identifiable information.

    Threat Actor:

    • State actors
    • State-sponsored affiliates

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • Staff health and safety
    • IT systems

    Effects:

    • Data breaches
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Increased risk to staff health and safety
    • Misuse of private data
    • Financial loss

    Methods:

    • Email and text phishing attacks that delivery malware payloads
    • Sideloading untested applications from a third-party source rather than an official retailer
    • Sophisticated zero-click attacks that deliver payloads without requiring user interaction

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    The tool included with this blueprint can help you draft risk scenarios and risk statements in this section.

    The risk register will capture a list of critical assets and their vulnerabilities, the threats that endanger them, and the adverse effect your organization may face.

    The image includes two screenshots of the jurisdictional risk register and heatmap tool. The image contains a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdiction.

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    2.1.1 Identify assets

    1 – 2 hours

    1. As a group, consider critical or mission-essential functions in high-risk jurisdictions and the systems on which they depend. Brainstorm a list of the organization’s mission-supporting assets in high-risk jurisdictions. Consider:
    • Staff
    • Critical IT systems
    • Sensitive data
    • Critical operational processes
  • On a whiteboard, brainstorm the potential adverse effect of malicious agents in high-risk jurisdictions compromising critical assets. Consider the impact on:
    • Information systems.
    • Sensitive or regulated data.
    • Staff health and safety.
    • Critical operations and objectives.
    • Organizational finances.
    • Reputation and brand loyalty

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Business impact analyses
    • A list of the organization’s mission-supporting assets

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Whiteboard
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • System owner
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    The image contains an example of the activity mentioned in the text above.

    Model threats to narrow the range of scenarios

    Motives and capabilities to perform attacks on critical assets vary across different threat actors.

    Category

    Actions

    Motivation

    Sophistication

    Nation-states

    Cyberespionage, cyberattacks

    Geopolitical

    High. Dedicated resources and personnel, extensive planning and coordination.

    Proxy organizations

    Espionage, destructive attacks

    Geopolitical, Ideological, Profit

    Moderate. Some planning and support functions and technical expertise.

    Cybercrime

    Theft, fraud, extortion

    Profit

    Moderate. Some planning and support functions and technical expertise.

    Hacktivists

    Disrupt operations, attack brands, release sensitive data

    Ideological

    Low. Rely on widely available tools that require little skill to deploy.

    Insiders

    Destruction or release of sensitive data, theft, exposure through negligence

    Incompetence, Discontent

    Internal access. Acting on their own or in concert with any of the above.

    • Criminals, hacktivists, and insiders vary in sophistication. Some criminal groups demonstrate a high degree of sophistication; however, a large cyber event that damages critical infrastructure does not align with their incentives to make money at minimal risk.
    • Proxy actors conduct offensive cyber operations on behalf of a beneficiary. They may be acting on behalf of a competitor, national government, or group of individuals.
    • Nation-states engage in long-term espionage and offensive cyber operations that support geopolitical and strategic policy objectives.

    2.1.2 Identify threats

    1 – 2 hours

    1. Review the outputs from activity 1.1.1 and activity 2.1.1.
    2. Identify threat agents that could undermine the security of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions. Include internal and external actors.
    3. Assess their motives, means, and opportunities.
    • Which critical assets are most attractive? Why?
    • What paths and vulnerabilities can threat agents exploit to reach critical assets without going through a control?
    • How could they defeat existing controls? Draw on the MITRE framework to inform your analysis.
    • Once agents defeat a control, what further attack can they launch?

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    Input

    Output

    • Jurisdictional assessment from activity 1.1.1
    • Critical assets from activity 2.1.1
    • Potential vulnerabilities from:
      • Security control gap analysis
      • Security risk register
    • Threat intelligence
    • MITRE framework
    • A list of critical assets, threat agents, vulnerabilities, and potential attack vectors.

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Whiteboard
    • Security team
    • Infrastructure & Operations team
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    2.1.2 Identify threats (continued)

    1 – 2 hours

    1. On a whiteboard, brainstorm how threat agents will exploit vulnerabilities in critical assets to reach their goal. Redefine attack vectors to capture what could result from a successful initial attack.

    For example:

    • State actors and cybercriminals may steal or compromise end-user devices during travel to high-risk jurisdictions using malware they embed in airport charging stations, internet café networks, or hotel business centers.
    • Compromised devices may infect corporate networks and threaten sensitive data once they reconnect to them.

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    The image contains a screenshot of activity 2.1.2 as described in the text above.

    Bring together the critical risk elements into a single risk scenario

    Summarize the scenario further into a single risk statement

    Risk Scenario: High-Risk Travel

    State actors and cybercriminals can threaten staff, devices, and data during travel to high-risk jurisdictions. Device theft or compromise may occur while traveling through airports, accessing hotel computer and phone networks, or in internet cafés or other public areas. Threat actors can exploit data from compromised or stolen devices to undermine the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage. They can also infect compromised devices with malware that delivers malicious payloads once they reconnect with home networks.

    Risk Statement

    Cybercriminals compromise end-user devices during travel to high-risk jurisdictions, jeopardizing staff safety and leading to loss of sensitive data.

    Risk Scenario: Compliance Risk

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulatory landscape threaten an organization’s ability to meet its compliance obligations from local legal and regulatory frameworks. Organizations that fail to do so risk reputational damage, administrative fines, criminal charges, and loss of market share. In extreme cases, organizations may lose their license to operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Shifts in the regulatory landscape can involve additional requirements for data residency, cross-border data transfer, data breach notification, and third-party risk management.

    Risk Statement

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulations landscape threaten our ability to remain compliant, leading to reputational and financial loss.

    Fill out the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    The tool is populated with data from two key risk scenarios: high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    The image includes two screenshots of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    1. Label the risk in Tab 3, Column B.
    2. Record your risk scenario in Tab 3, Column C.
    3. Record your risk statement in Tab 3, Column D.
    4. Identify the applicable jurisdictions in Tab 3, Column E.
    5. You can further categorize the scenario as:
      • an enterprise risk (Column G).
      • an IT risk (Column H).

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    Step 2.2

    Assess Risk Exposure

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify existing controls

    2.2.2 Assess likelihood and impact

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assess risk exposure for each risk scenario through an analysis of its likelihood and impact.

    Brush up on risk assessment essentials

    The next step will help you prioritize IT risks based on severity.

    Likelihood of Occurrence X Likelihood of Impact = Risk Severity

    Likelihood of occurrence: How likely the risk is to occur.

    Likelihood of impact: The likely impact of a risk event.

    Risk severity: The significance of the risk.

    Evaluate risk severity against the risk tolerance thresholds and the cost of risk response.

    Identify existing controls before you proceed

    Existing controls will reduce the inherent likelihood and impact of the risk scenario you face.

    Existing controls were put in place to avoid, mitigate, or transfer key risks your organization faced in the past. Without considering existing controls, you run the risk of overestimating the likelihood and impact of the risk scenarios your organization faces in high-risk jurisdictions.

    For instance, the ability to remote-wipe corporate-owned devices will reduce the potential impact of a device lost or compromised during travel to high-risk jurisdictions.

    As you complete the risk assessment for each scenario, document existing controls that reduce their inherent likelihood and impact.

    2.2.1 Document existing controls

    6-10 hours

    1. Document the Risk Category and Existing Controls in the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.
      • Tactical controls apply to individual risks only. For instance, the ability to remote-wipe devices mitigates the impact of a device lost in a high-risk jurisdiction.
      • Strategic controls apply to multiple risks. For instance, deploying MFA for critical applications mitigates the likelihood that malicious actors can compromise a lost device and impedes their access in devices they do compromise.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios
    • Existing controls for risk scenarios

    Materials

    Participants

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Assess the risk scenarios you identified in Phase 1

    The risk register is the central repository for risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    • Use the second tab of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to create likelihood, impact, and risk tolerance assessment scales to evaluate every risk event effectively.
    • Severity-level assessment is a “first pass” of your risk scenarios that will reveal your organization’s most severe risks in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • You can incorporate expected cost calculations into your evaluation to assess scenarios in greater detail.
    • Expected cost represents how much you would expect to pay in an average year for each risk event. Expected cost calculations can help compare IT risks to non-IT risks that may not use the same scales and communicate system-level risk to the business in a language they will understand.

    Expected cost calculations may not be practical. Determining robust likelihood and impact values to produce cost estimates can be challenging and time consuming. Use severity-level assessments as a first pass to make the case for risk mitigation measures and take your lead from stakeholders.

    The image contains two screenshots of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture and analyze your data.

    2.2.2 Assess likelihood and impact

    6-10 hours

    1. Assign each risk scenario a likelihood of occurrence and a likely impact level that represents the impact of the scenario on the whole organization considering existing controls. Record your results in Tab 3, column R and S, respectively.
    2. You can further dissect likelihood and impact into component parameters but focus first on total likelihood and impact to keep the task manageable.
    3. As you input the first few likelihood and impact values, compare them to one another to ensure consistency and accuracy. For instance, is a device lost in a high-risk jurisdiction truly more impactful than a device compromised with commercial surveillance software?
    4. The tool will calculate the probability of risk exposure based on the likelihood and consequence associated with the scenario. The results are published in Tab 3, Column T.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios
    • Assessed the likelihood of occurrence and impact for all identified risk events

    Materials

    Participants

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Refine your risk assessment to justify your estimates

    Document the rationale behind each value and the level of consensus in group discussions.

    Stakeholders will likely ask you to explain some of the numbers you assigned to likelihood and impact assessments. Pointing to an assessment methodology will give your estimates greater credibility.

    • Assign one individual to take notes during the assessment exercise.
    • Have them document the main rationale behind each value and the level of consensus.

    The goal is to develop robust intersubjective estimates of the likelihood and impact of a risk scenario.

    We assigned a 50% likelihood rating to a risk scenario. Were we correct?

    Assess the truth of the following statements to test likelihood assessments. In this case, do these two statements seem true?

    • The risk event will likely occur once in the next two years, all things being equal.
    • In two nearly identical organizations, one out of two will experience the risk event this year.
    The image includes a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdictions.

    Phase 3

    Execute Response

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.
    • Build an initiative roadmap that identifies and applies relevant controls to protect critical assets. Identify key risk indicators to monitor progress.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Step 3.1

    Treat Security Risks

    Activities

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Analyze and select risk responses

    The next step will help you treat the risk scenarios you built in Phase 2.

    Identify

    Identify risk responses.

    Predict

    Predict the effectiveness of the risk response, if implemented, by estimating the residual likelihood and impact of the risk.

    Calculate

    The tool will calculate the residual severity of the risk after applying the risk response.

    The first part of the phase outlines project activities. The second part elaborates on high-risk travel and compliance risk, the two key risk scenarios we are following throughout the project. Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture your work.

    Analyze likelihood and impact to identify response

    The image contains a diagram of he risk response analysis. Risk Transfer and Risk Avoidance has the most likelihood, and Risk Acceptance and Risk Mitigation have the most impact. Risk Avoidance has the most likelihood and most impact in regards to risk response.

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response

    Complete the following steps for each risk scenario.

    1. Identify a risk response action that will help reduce the likelihood of occurrence or the impact if the scenario were to occur. Indicate the type of risk response (avoidance, mitigation, transfer, acceptance, or no risk exists).
    2. Assign each risk response action a residual likelihood level and a residual impact level. This is the same step you performed in Activity 2.2.2, but you are now are estimating the likelihood and impact of the risk event after you implemented the risk response action successfully. The Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool will generate a residual risk severity level for each risk event.
    3. Identify the potential Risk Action Owner (Project Manager) if the response is selected and turned into an IT project, and document this in the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool .
    4. For each risk event, document risk response actions, residual likelihood and impact levels, and residual risk severity level.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • Risk scenario mitigation plan

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    Step 3.2

    Mitigate Travel Risk

    Activities

    3.2.1 Develop a travel policy

    3.2.2 Develop travel procedures

    3.2.3 Design high-risk travel guidelines

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Identify controls to mitigate jurisdictional risk

    This section provides guidance on the most prevalent risk scenarios identified in Phase 2 and provides a more in-depth examination of the two most prevalent ones, high-risk travel and compliance risk. Determine the appropriate response to each risk scenario to keep global risks to critical assets aligned with the organization’s risk tolerance.

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance

    Travel risk is a common concern in organizations with global operations

    • The security of staff, devices, and data is one of the biggest challenges facing organizations with a global footprint. Working and traveling in unpredictable environments will aways carry a degree of risk, but organizations can do much to develop a safer and more secure working environment.
    • Compromised or stolen devices can provide threat actors with access to data that could compromise the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage or expose the organization to regulatory risk.
    • For many organizations, security risk assessments, security plans, travel security procedures, security training, and incident reporting systems are a key part of their operating language.
    • The following section provides a simple structure to help organizations demystify travel in high-risk jurisdictions.

    The image contains a diagram to present high-risk jurisdictions.

    Before you leave

    • Identify high-risk countries.
    • Enable controls.
    • Limit what you pack.

    During your trip

    • Assume you are monitored.
    • Limit access to systems.
    • Prevent theft.

    When you return

    • Change your password.
    • Restore your devices.

    Case study

    Higher Education: Camosun College

    Interview: Evan Garland

    Frame additional security controls as a value-added service.

    Situation

    The director of the international department at Camosun College reached out to IT security for additional support. Department staff often traveled to hostile environments. They were concerned malicious agents would either steal end-user devices or compromise them and access sensitive data. The director asked IT security for options that would better protect traveling staff, their devices, and the information they contain.

    Challenges

    First, controls would need to admit both work and personal use of corporate devices. Staff relied exclusively on work devices for travel to mitigate the risk of personal device theft. Personal use of corporate devices during travel was common. Second, controls needed to strike the right balance between friction and effortless access. Traveling staff had only intermittent access to IT support. Restrictive controls could prevent them from accessing their devices and data altogether.

    Solution

    IT consulted staff to discuss light-touch solutions that would secure devices without introducing too much complexity or compromising functionality. They then planned security controls that involved user interaction and others that did not and identified training requirements.

    Results

    Controls with user interaction

    Controls without user interaction

    • Multifactor authentication for college systems and collaboration platforms
    • Password manager for both work and personal use for staff for stronger passwords and practices
    • Security awareness training to help traveling staff identify potential threats while traveling through airports or accessing public Wi-Fi.
    • Drive encryption and always-on VPN to protect data at rest and in transit
    • Increased setting for phishing and spam filtering for traveling staff email
    • Enhanced anti-malware/endpoint detection and response (EDR) solution for traveling laptops

    Build a program to mitigate travel risks

    There is no one-size-fits-all solution.

    The most effective solution will take advantage of existing risk management policies, processes, and procedures at your organization.

    • Develop a framework. Outline the organization’s approach to high-risk travel, including the policies, procedures, and mechanisms put in place to ensure safe travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Draft a policy. Outline the organization’s risk attitude and key security principles and define roles and responsibilities. Include security responsibilities and obligations in job descriptions of staff members and senior managers.
    • Provide flexible options. Inherent travel risk will vary from one jurisdiction to another. You will likely not find an approach that works for every case. Establish locally relevant measures and plans in different security contexts and risk environments.
    • Look for quick wins. Identify measures or requirements that you can establish quickly but that can have a positive effect on the security of staff, data, and devices.
    • Monitor and review. Undertake periodic reviews of the organization’s security approach and management framework, as well as their implementation, to ensure the framework remains effective.

    3.2.1 Develop a travel policy

    1. Work with your business leaders to build a travel policy for high-risk jurisdictions. The policy should be a short and accessible document structured around four key sections:
      • A statement on the importance of staff security and safety, the scope of the policy, and who it applies to (staff, consultants, contractors, volunteers, visitors, accompanying dependants, etc.).
      • A principles section explaining the organization’s security culture, risk attitude, and the key principles that shape the organization’s approach to staff security and safety.
      • A responsibilities section setting out the organization’s security risk management structure and the roles and actions allocated to specific positions.
      • A minimal security requirements section establishing the specific security requirements that must be in place in all locations and specific locations.
    2. Common security principles include:
    • Shared responsibility – Managing risks to staff is a shared organizational responsibility.
    • Acknowledgment of risk – Managing security will not remove all risks. Staff need to appreciate, as part of their informed consent, that they are still exposed to risk.
    • Primacy of life – Staff safety is of the highest importance. Staff should never place themselves at excessive risk to meet program objectives or protect property.
    • Proportionate risk – Risks must be assessed to ensure they are proportionate to the benefits organizational activities provide and the ability to manage those risks.
    • Right to withdraw – Staff have the right to withdraw from or refuse to take up work in a particular area due to security concerns.
    • No right to remain – The organization has the right to suspend activities that it considers too dangerous.
  • Cross-reference the organization’s other governing policies that outline requirements related to security risk management, such as the health and safety policy, access control policy, and acceptable use of security assets.
  • Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Travel policy for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Develop security plans for high-risk travel

    Security plans advise staff on how to manage the risk identified in assessments.

    Security plans are key country documents that outline the security measures and procedures in place and the responsibilities and resources required to implement them. Security plans should be established in high-risk jurisdictions where your organization has a regular, significant presence. Security plans must remain relevant and accessible documents that address the specific risks that exist in that location, and, if appropriate, are specific about where the measures apply and who they apply to. Plans should be updated regularly, especially following significant incidents or changes in the operating environment or activities.

    Key Components

    Critical information – One-page summary of pertinent information for easy access and quick reference (e.g. curfew times, no-go areas, important contacts).

    Overview – Purpose and scope of the document, responsibilities for security plan, organization’s risk attitude, date of completion and review date, and a summary of the security strategy and policy.

    Current Context – Summary of current operating context and overall security situation; main risks to staff, assets, and operations; and existing threats and risk rating.

    Procedures – Simple security procedures that staff should adhere to in order to prevent incidents and how to respond should problems arise. Standard operating procedures (SOPs) should address key risks identified in the assessment.

    Security levels – The organization's security levels/phases, with situational indicators that reflect increasing risks to staff in that context and location and specific actions/measures required in response to increasing insecurity.

    Incident reporting – The procedures and responsibilities for reporting security-related incidents; for example, the type of incidents to be reported, the reporting structure, and the format for incident reporting.

    Determine travel risk

    Tailor your risk response to the security risk assessment you conducted in earlier stages of this project.

    Ratings are formulated by assessing several types of risk, including conflict, political/civil unrest, terrorism, crime, and health and infrastructure risks.

    Rating

    Description (Examples)

    Recommended Action

    Low

    Generally secure with adequate physical security. Low violent crime rates. Some civil unrest during significant events. Acts of terrorism rare. Risks associated with natural disasters limited and health threats mainly preventable.

    Basic personal security, travel, and health precautions required.

    Moderate

    Periodic civil unrest. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups active with sporadic acts of terrorism. Staff at risk from common and violent crime. Transport and communications services are unreliable and safety records are poor. Jurisdiction prone to natural disasters or disease epidemics.

    Increased vigilance and routine security procedures required.

    High

    Regular periods of civil unrest, which may target foreigners. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups very active and threaten political or economic stability. Violent crime rates high and targeting of foreigners is common. Infrastructure and emergency services poor. May be regular disruption to transportation or communications services. Certain areas off-limits to foreigners. Jurisdictions experiencing a natural disaster or a disease epidemic are considered high risk.

    High level of vigilance and effective, context-specific security precautions required.

    Extreme

    Undergoing active conflict or persistent civil unrest. Risk of being caught up in a violent incident or attack is very high. Civil authorities may have lost control of significant portions of the country. Lines between criminality and political and insurgent violence are blurred. Foreigners are likely to be denied access to significant parts of the country. Transportation and communication services are severely degraded or non-existent. Violence presents a direct threat to staff security.

    Stringent security precautions essential and may not be sufficient to prevent serious incidents.

    Program activities may be suspended and staff withdrawn at very short notice.

    3.2.2 Develop travel procedures

    1. Work with your business leaders to build travel procedures for high-risk jurisdictions. The procedures should be tailored to the risk assessment and address the risk scenarios identified in Phase 2.
    2. Use the categories outlined in the next two slides to structure the procedure. Address all types of travel, detail security measures, and outline what the organization expects of travelers before, during, and after their trip.
    3. Consider the implementation of special measures to limit the impact of a potential security event, including:
      • Information end-user device loaner programs.
      • Temporary travel service email accounts.
    4. Specify what happens when staff add personal travel to their work trip to cover issues such as insurance, check-in, actual travel times, etc.
    5. Discuss the rationale for each procedure. Ensure the components align with the policy statements outlined in the high-risk travel policy developed in the previous step.

    Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • High-risk travel policy
    • Travel procedures for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Draft procedures to mitigate travel risks

    Address all types of travel, detail security measures, and outline what the organization expects of travelers before, during, and after their trip

    Introduction

    Clarifies who the procedures apply to. Highlights any differences in travel security requirements or support provided to staff, consultants, partners, and official visitors.

    Travel risk ratings

    Explains the travel or country risk rating system, how staff access the information, the different categories and indicators, and their implications.

    Roles and responsibilities

    Clarifies the responsibilities of travelers, their line managers or contact points, and senior management regarding travel security and how this changes for destinations with higher risk ratings.

    Travel authorization

    Stipulates who in the organization authorizes travel, the various compliance measures required, and how this changes for destinations with higher risk ratings.

    Travel risk assessment

    Explains when travel risk assessments are required, the template that should be used, and who approves the completed assessments.

    Travel security procedures should specify what happens when staff add personal travel to their work trip to cover issues such as insurance, check-in, actual travel times, etc.

    Pre-travel briefings

    Outlines the information that must be provided to travelers prior to departure, the type of briefing required and who provides it, and how these requirements change as risk ratings increase.

    Security training

    Explain security training required prior to travel. This may vary depending on the country’s risk rating. Includes information on training waiver system, including justifications and authorization.

    Traveler profile forms

    Travelers should complete a profile form, which includes personal details, emergency contacts, medical details, social media footprint, and proof-of-life questions (in contexts where there are abduction risks).

    Check-in protocol

    Specifies who travelers must maintain contact with while traveling and how often, as well as the escalation process in case of loss of contact. The frequency of check-ins should reflect the increase in the risk rating for the destination.

    Emergency procedures

    Outlines the organization's emergency procedures for security and medical emergencies.

    3.2.3 Design high-risk travel guidelines

    • Supplement the high-risk travel policies and procedures with guidelines to help international travelers stay safe.
    • The document is intended for an end-user audience and should reflect your organization’s policies and procedures for the use of information and information systems during international travel.
    • Use the Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel template in concert with this blueprint to provide guidance on what end users can do to stay safe before they leave, during their trip, and when they return.
    • Consider integrating the guidelines into specialized security awareness training sessions that target end users who travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • The guidelines should supplement and align with existing technical controls.

    Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • High-risk travel policy
    • High-risk travel procedure
    • Travel guidelines for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel template

    Step 3.3

    Mitigate Compliance Risk

    Activities

    3.3.1 Identify data localization obligations

    3.3.2 Integrate obligations into IT system design

    3.3.3 Document data processing activities

    3.3.4 Choose the right mechanism

    3.3.5 Implement the appropriate controls

    3.3.6 Identify data breach notification obligations

    3.3.7 Integrate data breach notification into incident response

    3.3.8 Identify vendor security and data protection requirements

    3.3.9 Build due diligence questionnaire

    3.3.10 Build appropriate data processing agreement

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Compliance risk is a prevalent risk in organizations with a global footprint

    • The legal and regulatory landscape is evolving rapidly to keep step with the pace of technological change. Security and privacy leaders are expected to mitigate the risk of noncompliance as the organization expands to new jurisdictions.
    • Organizations with a global footprint must stay abreast of local regulations and provide risk management guidance to business leaders to support global operations.
    • This sections describes four compliance risks in this context:
      • Cross-border data transfer
      • Third-party risk management
      • Data breach notification
      • Data residency

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Data Residency

    Gap Controls

    • Identify and document the data localization obligations for the jurisdictions that the organization is operating in.
    • Design and implement IT systems that satisfy the data localization requirements.
    • Comply with data localization obligations within each jurisdiction.

    Heatmap of Global Data Residency Regulations

    The image contains a screenshot of a picture of a world map with various shades of blue to demonstrate the heatmap of global data residency regulations.
    Source: InCountry, 2021

    Examples of Data Residency Requirements

    Country

    Data Type

    Local Storage Requirements

    Australia

    Personal data – heath record

    My Health Records Act 2012

    China

    Personal information — critical information infrastructure operators

    Cybersecurity law

    Government cloud data

    Opinions of the Office of the Central Leading Group for Cyberspace Affairs on Strengthening Cybersecurity Administration of Cloud Computing Services for Communist Party and Government Agencies

    India

    Government email data

    The Public Records Act of 1993

    Indonesia

    Data held by electronic system operator for the public service

    Regulation 82 concerning “Electronic System and Transaction Operation”

    Germany

    Government cloud service data

    Criteria for the procurement and use of cloud services by the federal German administration

    Russia

    Personal data

    The amendments of Data Protection Act No. 152 FZ

    Vietnam

    Data held by internet service providers

    The Decree on Management, Provision, and Use of Internet Services and Information Content Online (Decree 72)

    US

    Government cloud service data

    Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement: Network Penetration Reporting and Contracting for Cloud Services (DFARS Case 2013-D018)

    3.3.1 Identify data localization obligations

    1-2 hours

    1. Work with your business leaders to identify and document the jurisdictions where your organization is operating in or providing services and products to consumers within.
    2. Work with your legal team to identify and document all relevant data localization obligations for the data your organization generates, collects, and processes in order to operate your business.
    3. Record your data localization obligations in the table below.

    Jurisdiction

    Relevant Regulations

    Local Storage Requirements

    Date Type

    Input

    Output

    • List of jurisdictions your organization is operating in
    • Relevant security and data protection regulations
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Completed list of data localization obligations

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.2 Integrate obligations into your IT system design

    1-2 hours

    1. Work with your IT department to design the IT architecture and systems to satisfy the data localization requirements.
    2. The table below provides a checklist for integrating privacy considerations into your IT systems.

    Item

    Consideration

    Answer

    Supporting Document

    1

    Have you identified business services that process data that will be subject to localization requirements?

    2

    Have you identified IT systems associated with the business services mentioned above?

    3

    Have you established a data inventory (i.e. data types, business purposes) for the IT systems mentioned above?

    4

    Have you established a data flow diagram for the data identified above?

    5

    Have you identified the types of data that should be stored locally?

    6

    Have you confirmed whether a copy of the data locally stored will satisfy the obligations?

    7

    Have you confirmed whether an IT redesign is needed or whether modifications (e.g. adding a server) to the IT systems would satisfy the obligations?

    8

    Have you confirmed whether access from another jurisdiction is allowed?

    9

    Have you identified how long the data should be stored?

    Input

    Output

    • Data localization obligations
    • Business services that process data that will be subject to localization requirements
    • IT systems associated with business services
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Completed checklist of localization obligations for IT system design

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Cross-Border Transfer

    Gap Controls

    • Know where you transfer your data.
    • Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different requirements for the cross-border transfer of personal data.
    • Adopt and implement a proper cross-border data transfer mechanism in accordance with applicable privacy laws and regulations.
    • Re-evaluate at appropriate intervals.

    Which cross-border transfer mechanism should I choose?

    Transfer Mechanism

    Advantages

    Disadvantages

    Standard Contractual Clauses (SCC)

    • Easy to implement
    • No DPA (data processing agreement) approval
    • Not suitable for complex data transfers
    • Do not meet business agility
    • Needs legal solution

    Binding Corporate Rules (BCRs)

    • Meets business agility needs
    • Raises trust in the organization
    • Doubles as solution for art. 24/25 of the GDPR
    • Sets high compliance maturity level
    • Takes time to draft/implement
    • Requires DPA approval (scrutiny)
    • Requires culture of compliance
    • Approved by one "lead" authority and two other "co-lead“ authorities
    • Takes usually between six and nine months for the approval process only

    Code of Conduct

    • Raises trust in the sector
    • Self-regulation instead of law
    • No code of conduct approved yet
    • Takes time to draft/implement
    • Requires DPA approval and culture of compliance
    • Needs of organization may not be met

    Certification

    • Raises trust in the organization
    • No certification schemes available yet
    • Risk of compliance at minimum necessary
    • Requires audits

    Consent

    • Legal certainty
    • Transparent
    • Administrative burden
    • Some data subjects are incapable of consenting all or nothing

    3.3.3 Document data processing activities

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify and document the following information:
      • Name of business process
      • Purposes of processing
      • Lawful basis
      • Categories of data subjects and personal data
      • Data subject categories
      • Which system the data resides in
      • Recipient categories
      • Third country/international organization
      • Documents for appropriate safeguards for international transfer (adequacy, SCCs, BCRs, etc.)
      • Description of mitigating measures

    Input

    Output

    • Name of business process
    • Categories of personal data
    • Which system the data resides
    • Third country/international organization
    • Documents for appropriate safeguards for international transfer
    • Completed list of data processing activities

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.4 Choose the right mechanism

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different requirements for the cross-border transfer of personal data. For example, the EU’s GDPR and China’s Personal Information Protection Law require proper cross-border transfer mechanisms before the data transfers. Your organization should decide which cross-border transfer mechanism is the best fit for your cross-border data transfer scenarios.
    2. Use the following table to identify and document the pros and cons of each data transfer mechanism and the final decision.

    Data Transfer Mechanism

    Pros

    Cons

    Final Decision

    SCC

    BCR

    Code of Conduct

    Certification

    Consent

    Input

    Output

    • List of relevant data transfer mechanisms
    • Assessment of the pros and cons of each mechanism
    • Final decision regarding which data transfer mechanism is the best fit for your organization

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.5 Implement the appropriate controls

    1-3 hours

    • One of the most common mechanisms is standard contractual clauses (SCCs).
    • Use Info-Tech’s Standard Contractual Clauses Template to facilitate your cross-border transfer activities.
    • Identify and check whether the following core components are covered in your SCC and record the results in the table below.
    # Core Components Status Note
    1 Purpose and scope
    2 Effect and invariability of the Clauses
    3 Description of the transfer(s)
    4 Data protection safeguards
    5 Purpose limitation
    6 Transparency
    7 Accuracy and data minimization
    8 Duration of processing and erasure or return of data
    9 Storage limitation
    10 Security of processing
    11 Sensitive data
    12 Onward transfers
    13 Processing under the authority of the data importer
    14 Documentation and compliance
    15 Use of subprocessors
    16 Data subject rights
    17 Redress
    18 Liability
    19 Local laws and practices affecting compliance with the Clauses
    20 Noncompliance with the Clauses and termination
    21 Description of data processing activities, such as list of parties, description of transfer, etc.
    22 Technical and organizational measures
    InputOutput
    • Description of the transfer(s)
    • Duration of processing and erasure or return of data
    • Onward transfers
    • Use of subprocessors
    • Etc.
    • Draft of the standard contractual clauses (SCC)
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: High

    Impact: Medium to High

    Data Breach

    Gap Controls

    • Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different obligations for data breach reporting.
    • Document the notification obligations for various business scenarios, such as controller to DPA, controller to data subject, and processor to controller.
    • Integrate breach notification obligations into security incident response process.

    Examples of Data Breach Notification Obligations

    Location

    Regulation/ Standard

    Reporting Obligation

    EU

    GDPR

    72 hours

    China

    PIPL

    Immediately

    US

    HIPAA

    No later than 60 days

    Canada

    PIPEDA

    As soon as feasible

    Global

    PCI DSS

    • Visa – immediately after breach discovered
    • Mastercard – within 24 hours of discovering breach
    • American Express – immediately after breach discovered

    Summary of US State Data Breach Notification Statutes

    The image contains a graph to show the summary of the US State Data Breach Notification Statutes.

    Source: Davis Wright Tremaine

    3.3.6 Identify data breach notification obligations

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different obligations for data breach reporting.
    2. Document the notification obligations for various business scenarios, such as controller to DPA, controller to data subject, and processor to controller.
    3. Record your data breach obligations in the table below.
    Region Regulation/Standard Reporting Obligation

    Input

    Output

    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Documentation of data breach reporting obligations in applicable jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.7 Integrate data breach notification into incident response

    1-2 hours

    • Integrate breach notification obligations into the security incident response process. Understand the security incident management framework.
    • All incident runbooks follow the same process: detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activity.
    • The table below provides a basic checklist for you to consider when implementing your data breach and incident handling process.
    # Phase Considerations Status Notes
    1 Prepare Ensure the appropriate resources are available to best handle an incident.
    2 Detect Leverage monitoring controls to actively detect threats.
    3 Analyze Distill real events from false positives.
    4 Contain Isolate the threat before it can cause additional damage.
    5 Eradicate Eliminate the threat from your operating environment.
    6 Recover Restore impacted systems to a normal state of operations.
    7 Report Report data breaches to relevant regulators and data subjects if required.
    8 Post-Incident Activities Conduct a lessons-learned post-mortem analysis.
    InputOutput
    • Security and data protection incident response steps
    • Key considerations for integrating data breach notifications into incident response
    • Data breach notifications integrated into the incident response process
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Security team
    • Privacy team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: High

    Impact: Medium to High

    Third-Party Risk

    Gap Controls

    • Build an end-to-end third-party security and privacy risk management process.
    • Perform internal due diligence prior to selecting a service provider.
    • Stipulate the security and privacy protection obligations of the third party in a legally binding document such as contract or data processing agreement, etc.

    End-to-End Third-Party Security and Privacy Risk Management

    1. Pre-Contract
    • Due diligence check
  • Signing of Contract
    • Data processing agreement
  • Post-Contract
    • Continuous monitoring
    • Regular check or audit
  • Termination of Contract
    • Data deletion
    • Access deprovisioning

    Examples of Vendor Security Management Requirements

    Region

    Law/Standard

    Section

    EU

    General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

    Article 28 (1)

    Article 46 (1)

    US

    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

    §164.308(b)(1)

    US

    New York Department of Financial Services Cybersecurity Requirements

    500.11(a)

    Global

    ISO 27002:2013

    15.1.1

    15.1.2

    15.1.3

    15.2.1

    15.2.2

    US

    NIST 800-53

    SA-12

    SA-12 (2)

    US

    NIST Cybersecurity Framework

    ID-SC-1

    ID-SC-2

    ID-SC-3

    ID-SC-4

    Canada

    OSFI Cybersecurity Guidelines

    4.25

    4.26

    3.3.8 Identify vendor security and data protection requirements

    1-2 hours

    • Effective vendor security risk management is an end-to-end process that includes assessment, risk mitigation, and periodic reassessments.
    • An efficient and effective assessment process can only be achieved when all stakeholders are participating.
    • Identify and document your vendor security and data protection requirements in the table below.
    Region Law/Standard Section Requirements

    Input

    Output

    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Documentation of vendor security and data protection obligations in applicable jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.9 Build due diligence questionnaire

    1-2 hours

    Perform internal due diligence prior to selecting a service provider.

    1. Build and right-size your vendor security questionnaire by leveraging Info-Tech’s Vendor Security Questionnaire template.
    2. Document your vendor security questionnaire in the table below.
    # Question Vendor Request Vendor Comments
    1 Document Requests
    2 Asset Management
    3 Governance
    4 Supply Chain Risk Management
    5 Identify Management, Authentication, and Access Control
    InputOutput
    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Business security and data protection requirements and expectations
    • Draft of due diligence questionnaire
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.10 Build appropriate data processing agreement

    1-2 hours

    1. Stipulate the security and privacy protection obligations of the third party in a legally binding document such as contract or data processing agreement, etc.
    2. Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Processing Agreement Template to put the language into your legally binding document.
    3. Use the table below to check whether core components of a typical DPA are covered in your document.
    # Core Components Status Note
    1 Processing of personal data
    2 Scope of application and responsibilities
    3 Processor's obligations
    4

    Controller's obligations

    5 Data subject requests
    6 Right to audit and inspection
    7 Subprocessing
    8 Data breach management
    9 Security controls
    10 Transfer of personal data
    11 Duty of confidentiality
    12 Compliance with applicable laws
    13 Service termination
    14 Liability and damages
    InputOutput
    • Processing of personal data
    • Processor’s obligations
    • Controller’s obligations
    • Subprocessing
    • Etc.
    • Draft of data processing agreement (DPA)
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    By following Info-Tech’s methodology for securing global operations, you have:

    • Evaluated the security context of your organization’s global operations.
    • Identified security risks scenarios unique to high-risk jurisdictions and assessed the exposure of critical assets.
    • Planned and executed a response.

    You have gone through a deeper analysis of two key risk scenarios that affect global operations:

    • Travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Compliance risk.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshop@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    The image contains a picture of Michel Hebert.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team. Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    The image contains a screenshot of High-Risk Travel Jurisdictions.

    Identify High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Develop requirements to identify high-risk jurisdictions.

    The image contains a screenshot of Build Risk Scenarios.

    Build Risk Scenarios

    Build risk scenarios to capture assets, vulnerabilities, threats, and the potential effect of a compromise.

    External Research Contributors

    Ken Muir

    CISO

    LMC Security

    Premchand Kurup

    CEO

    Paramount Computer Systems

    Preeti Dhawan

    Manager, Security Governance

    Payments Canada

    Scott Wiggins

    Information Risk and Governance

    CDPHP

    Fritz Y. Jean Louis

    CISO

    Globe and Mail

    Eric Gervais

    CIO

    Ovivo Water

    David Morrish

    CEO

    MBS Techservices

    Evan Garland

    Manager, IT Security

    Camosun College

    Jacopo Fumagalli

    CISO

    Axpo

    Dennis Leon

    Governance and Security Manager

    CPA Canada

    Tero Lehtinen

    CIO

    Planmeca Oy

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    • Build a program to identify, evaluate, assess, and treat IT risks.
    • Monitor and communicate risks effectively to support business decision making.

    Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program

    • Develop a program focused on assessing and managing information system risks.
    • Build a governance structure that integrates security risks within the organization’s broader approach to risk management.

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    • Build a holistic, risk-aware strategy that aligns to business goals.
    • Develop a roadmap of prioritized initiatives to implement the strategy over 18 to 36 months.

    Bibliography

    2022 Cost of Insider Threats Global Report.” Ponemon Institute, NOVIPRO, 9 Feb. 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “Allianz Risk Barometer 2022.” Allianz Global Corporate & Specialty, Jan. 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    Bickley, Shaun. “Security Risk Management: a basic guide for smaller NGOs”. European Interagency Security Forum (EISF), 2017. Web.

    “Biden Administration Warns against spyware targeting dissidents.” New York Times, 7 Jan 22. Accessed 20 Jan 2022.

    Boehm, Jim, et al. “The risk-based approach to cybersecurity.” McKinsey & Company, October 2019. Web.

    “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM Security, July 2021. Web.

    “Cyber Risk in Asia-Pacific: The Case for Greater Transparency.” Marsh & McLennan Companies, 2017. Web.

    “Cyber Risk Index.” NordVPN, 2020. Accessed 25 May 22

    Dawson, Maurice. “Applying a holistic cybersecurity framework for global IT organizations.” Business Information Review, vol. 35, no. 2, 2018, pp. 60-67.

    “Framework for improving critical infrastructure cybersecurity.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 16 Apr 2018. Web.

    “Global Cybersecurity Index 2020.” International Telecommunication Union (ITU), 2021. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “Global Risk Survey 2022.” Control Risks, 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “International Travel Guidance for Government Mobile Devices.” Federal Mobility Group (FMG), Aug. 2021. Accessed 18 Nov 2021.

    Kaffenberger, Lincoln, and Emanuel Kopp. “Cyber Risk Scenarios, the Financial System, and Systemic Risk Assessment.” Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, September 2019. Accessed 11 Jan 2022.

    Koehler, Thomas R. Understanding Cyber Risk. Routledge, 2018.

    Owens, Brian. “Cybersecurity for the travelling scientist.” Nature, vol. 548, 3 Aug 2017. Accessed 19 Jan. 2022.

    Parsons, Fintan J., et al. “Cybersecurity risks and recommendations for international travellers.” Journal of Travel Medicine, vol. 1, no. 4, 2021. Accessed 19 Jan 2022.

    Quinn, Stephen, et al. “Identifying and estimating cybersecurity risk for enterprise risk management.” National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Interagency or Internal Report (IR) 8286A, Nov. 2021.

    Quinn, Stephen, et al. “Prioritizing cybersecurity risk for enterprise risk management.” NIST, IR 8286B, Sept. 2021.

    “Remaining cyber safe while travelling security recommendations.” Government of Canada, 27 April 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2022.

    Stine, Kevin, et al. “Integrating cybersecurity and enterprise risk management.” NIST, IR 8286, Oct. 2020.

    Tammineedi, Rama. “Integrating KRIs and KPIs for effective technology risk management.” ISACA Journal, vol. 4, 1 July 2018.

    Tikk, Eneken, and Mika Kerttunen, editors. Routledge Handbook of International Cybersecurity. Routledge, 2020.

    Voo, Julia, et al. “National Cyber Power Index 2020.” Belfer Center for Science and International Affairs, Harvard Kennedy School, Sept. 2020. Web.

    Zhang, Fang. “Navigating cybersecurity risks in international trade.” Harvard Business Review, Dec 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 22.

    Appendix

    Insider Threat

    Key Risk Scenario

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Gap Controls

    The image contains a picture of the Gap Controls. The controls include: Policy and Awareness, Identification, Monitoring and Visibility, which leads to Cooperation.

    • Identification: Effective and efficient management of insider threats begins with a threat and risk assessment to establish which assets and which employees to consider, especially in jurisdictions associated with sensitive or critical data. You need to pay extra attention to employees who are working in satellite offices in jurisdictions with loose security and privacy laws.
    • Monitoring and Visibility: Organizations should monitor critical assets and groups with privileged access to defend against malicious behavior. Implement an insider threat management platform that provides your organization with the visibility and context into data movement, especially cross-border transfers that might cause security and privacy breaches.
    • Policy and Awareness Training: Insider threats will persist without appropriate action and culture change. Training and consistent communication of best practices will mitigate vulnerabilities to accidental or negligent attacks. Customized training materials using local languages and role-based case studies might be needed for employees in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Cooperation: An effective insider threat management program should be built with cross-team functions such as Security, IT, Compliance and Legal, etc.

    For more holistic approach, you can leverage our Reduce and Manage Your Organization’s Insider Threat Risk blueprint.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You can’t just throw tools at a human problem. While organizations should monitor critical assets and groups with privileged access to defend against malicious behavior, good management and supervision can help detect attacks and prevent them from happening in the first place.

    Insider threats are not industry specific, but malicious insiders are

    Industry

    Actors

    Risks

    Tactics

    Motives

    State and Local Government

    • Full-time employees
    • Current employees
    • Privileged access to personally identifiable information, financial assets, and physical property
    • Abuse of privileged access
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Financial gain
    • Recognition
    • Benefiting foreign entity

    Information Technology

    • Equal mix of former and current employees
    • Privileged access to networks or systems as well as data
    • Highly technical attacks
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Revenge
    • Financial gain

    Healthcare

    • Majority were full-time and current employees
    • Privileged access to customer data with personally identifiable information, financial assets
    • Abuse of privileged access
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Financial gain
    • Entitlement

    Finance and Insurance

    • Majority were full-time and current employees
    • Authorized users
    • Electronic financial assets
    • Privileged access to customer data
    • Created or used fraudulent accounts
    • Fraudulent purchases
    • Identity theft
    • Financial gain
    • Gambling addiction
    • Family pressures
    • Multiple motivations

    Source: Carnegie Mellon University Software Engineering Institute, 2019

    Advanced Persistent Threat

    Key Risk Scenario #4

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Gap Controls

    The image contains a screenshot of the Gap Controls listed: Prevent, Detect, Analyze, Respond.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Effective anti-malware, diligent patching and vulnerability management, and strong human-centric security are essential.

    Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it, and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs.

    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape.

    Respond: Organizations can’t rely on ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Best practices moving forward

    Defense in Depth

    Lock down your organization. Among other tactics, control administrative privileges, leverage threat intelligence, use IP whitelisting, adopt endpoint protection and two-factor authentication, and formalize incident response measures.

    Block Indicators

    Information alone is not actionable. A successful threat intelligence program contextualizes threat data, aligns intelligence with business objectives, and then builds processes to satisfy those objectives. Actively block indicators and act upon gathered intelligence.

    Drive Adoption

    Create organizational situational awareness around security initiatives to drive adoption of foundational security measures: network hardening, threat intelligence, red-teaming exercises, and zero-day mitigation, policies, and procedures.

    Supply Chain Security

    Security extends beyond your organization. Ensure your organization has a comprehensive view of your organizational threat landscape and a clear understanding of the security posture of any managed service providers in your supply chain.

    Awareness and Training

    Conduct security awareness and training. Teach end users how to recognize current cyberattacks before they fall victim – this is a mandatory first line of defense.

    Additional Resources

    Follow only official sources of information to help you assess risk

    The image contains an image highlighting a few additional resources.

    As misinformation is a major attack vector for malicious actors, follow only reliable sources for cyberalerts and actionable intelligence. Aggregate information from these reliable sources.

    Federal Cyber Agency Alerts

    Informational Resources

    Info-Tech Insight

    The CISA Shields Up site provides the latest cyber risk updates on the Russia-Ukraine conflict and should provide the most value in staying informed.

    Infrastructure and Operations Priorities 2023

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}54|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Disruptive & Emerging Technologies
    • Parent Category Link: /disruptive-emerging-technologies
    • Get out of your I&O silo. I&O teams must be expected to work alongside and integrate with cyber security operations.
    • Being unprepared for new ESG reporting mandates without a clear and validated ESG reporting process puts your organization at risk.
    • Get ahead of inflationary pressures with early budgetary planning and identify the gap between the catchup projects and required critical net new investments.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Establish I&O within an AI governance program to build trust in AI results, behaviors, and limit legal exposure.
    • Develop data governance program that includes an I&O data steward for oversight.
    • Ready or not, the metaverse is coming to an infrastructure near you. Start expanding I&O technologies and processes to support a metaverse infrastructure.

    Impact and Result

    • Provide a framework that highlight the impacts the threats of an economic slowdown, growing regulatory reporting requirements, cyber security attacks and opportunity that smart governance over AI, data stewardship and the looming explosion of augmented reality and Web 3.0 technologies.
    • Info-Tech can help communicate your I&O priorities into compelling cases for your stakeholders.

    Infrastructure and Operations Priorities 2023 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Infrastructure & Operations Priorities 2023 – A framework to dive deeper into the trends most relevant to you and your organization

    Discover Info-Tech's six priorities for Infrastructure & Operations leaders.

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Infrastructure &Operations Priorities 2023

    Navigate the liminal space between threats and opportunities.

    2023: A liminal space between threats and opportunities

    Over the last several years, successful CEOs turned to their Infrastructure and Operations (I&O) departments to survive the effects of the pandemic. It was I&O leaders who were able to reconfigure critical infrastructure on the fly to support remote work, adapt to critical supply chain shortages, and work with lines of business managers to innovate operational workflows.

    2023 promises to bring a new set of challenges. Building on the credibility established during the pandemic, I&O is in a unique position to influence the direction a business will take to be successful in a time of austerity.

    I&O members are going to be asked to mitigate the threats of volatility from recession pressures, new cybersecurity attacks, and operational process and litigation from regulatory mandates. At the same time, I&O members are being asked for fundamental digital transformation items to realize long-term opportunities to their organizations in 2023.

    Seemingly counter-intuitive in a time of economic slowdown, organizations in 2023 will want to start the groundwork to realizing the I&O opportunities that unstructured data and artificial intelligence have promised, while prepping for what has been mislabeled as the Metaverse.

    If you are in a traditionally risk adverse industry, you’re more likely to be impacted by the threat mitigation.

    Opportunistic I&O members will use 2023 to proactively jumpstart digital transformation.

    Introduction

    Welcome to the Info-Tech 2023 I&O Priorities Report

    If I&O members learned anything from the last few years, it’s how to tactically respond to the disruptive waves often arising from sources external to the organization. The good news is that Info-Tech’s I&O priorities report provides forward-looking insights to help members become more proactive to the tsunami of change predicted in our Trends Report to happen over the next three to five years.

    Info-Tech I&O priorities are generated through a phased approach. The first phase senses and identifies mega and macro tends in the digital landscape to formulate hypotheses about the trends for the next three to five years. These hypotheses are validated by sending out a survey to Info-Tech members. The responses from 813 members was used to produce an Info-Tech Trends Report focused on major long-term trends.

    The I&O Priorities were determined by combining the I&O member responses within the Info-tech Trends Survey with insightful signals from secondary research, economic markets, regulatory bodies, industry organizations, and vendors. The six I&O priorities identified in this report are presented in a framework that highlight the impacts of an economic slowdown, growing regulatory reporting requirements, cybersecurity threats, smart governance of AI, embracing stewardship of data, and the looming explosion of augmented reality and Web 3.0 technologies.

    We also have a challenge exercise to help you communicate which priorities to focus your I&O organization on. Additionally, we linked some Info-tech research and tools related to the priorities that help your I&O organization formulate actionable plans for each area.

    Priorities

    Six forward-looking priorities for the next year.

    Focus

    Activity to help select which priorities are relevant for you.

    Actions

    Actionable Info-tech research and tools to help you deliver.

    Infrastructure & Operations priorities

    The I&O priorities were determined by combining I&O member responses from the Tech Trends and Priorities 2023 survey with insightful signals from secondary research, economic markets, regulatory bodies, industry organizations, and vendors.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Infrastructure & Operations priorities.

    I&O Priorities 2023

    The image contains a screenshot of the I&O Priorities.

    I&O priorities framework

    Threats signals

    Enhance I&O Cybersecurity

    Produce ESG Reporting

    Recession Readiness

    Get out of your silo. Forget your job description and start doing what needs to be done.

    Infrastructure rarely has authority in these areas, but somehow it ends up with many of the responsibilities. You can't afford to be reactive. Forget about your traditional silo and get out in front of these topics. Not in your job description? Find out whose job it is and make them aware. Better yet – take charge! If you're going to be responsible you might as well be in control.

    Opportunities signals

    AI Governance: Watching the Watchers

    Prep for A Brave New Metaverse

    Data Governance: Cornerstone of Value

    Proper stewardship of data is an I&O must. If thought you had problems with your unstructured data, wait until you see the data sprawl coming from the metaverse.

    I&O needs to be so much more than just an order taker for the dev teams and lines of business. The sprawl of unstructured data in Word, Excel, PDF and PowerPoint was bad historically; imagine those same problems at metaverse scale! Simple storage and connectivity is no longer enough – I&O must move upstream with more sophisticated service and product offerings generated through proper governance and stewardship.

    Challenge: Expand the I&O border

    The hidden message in this report is that I&O priorities extend beyond the traditional scope of I&O functions. I&O members need to collaborate across functional areas to successfully address the priorities presented in this report.

    Info-Tech can help! Align your priorities with our material on how to Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy. Use a modified version of the Strategy Initiative Template (next slide) to convey your strong opinion on the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about. And do so in a way that is familiar so they will easily understand.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Maturity Ladder.
    Info-Tech 2023 Trends Survey Results

    Call your Executive Advisor or Counselor to help identify the one or two key messages you want to bring forward for success in 2023!

    Info-Tech IT Strategy Initiative Template, from the IT Strategy Presentation Template & Priorities Report Initiative Template

    .
    The image contains a screenshot of a template for your priorities.

    Protect from threats

    Get out of your silo. Forget your job description and just start doing what needs to be done.

    Enhance I&O Cybersecurity

    Produce ESG Reporting

    Recession Readiness

    Enhance cybersecurity response

    SIGNALS

    Cybersecurity incidents are
    a clear and present danger
    to I&O members.

    Cybersecurity incidents have
    a large financial impact
    on organizations.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Of the surveyed I&O members, 53% identified cybersecurity incidents as the number one threat disrupting their operations in 2023. It’s understandable, as over 18% of surveyed I&O members experienced a cybersecurity incident in 2022. Alarmingly, 10% of surveyed I&O members didn’t know if they had a cybersecurity incident. The impact to the organization was with 14% of those incidents directly impacting their organizations for anywhere from 6 to 60 days.

    The 2022 report “Cost of a Data Breach” was conducted by IBM and the Ponemon Institute using data from 550 companies (across 17 countries) that experienced a security incident during a 12-month period ending in March 2022. It highlighted that the average total organizational cost of a security breach globally was USD 4.35M (locally these numbers expand to USA at USD 9.44M, Canada at USD 5.64, UK at USD 5.05M, Germany at USD 4.85M).

    (Source: IBM, 2022)

    Enhance cybersecurity response

    SIGNALS

    Organizations' exposure comes from internal and external sources.

    The right tools and process can reduce the impact of a cybersecurity incident.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    The IBM/Ponemon Institute report highlighted the following:

    • 59% of organizations didn’t deploy a zero-trust architecture on critical infrastructure to reduce exposure.
    • 19% of the breaches originated from within their business partner eco-system.
    • 45% were cloud-based.

    (Source: IBM, 2022)

    The IBM/Ponemon Institute report also identified technologies and procedures to reduce the fiscal impacts of cybersecurity breaches. Having a dedicated security incident response team with a regularly tested plan reduced the incident cost by an average of USD 2.66M. A fully implemented AI security deduction and response automation system can provide average incident savings of 27.6%.

    Enhance cybersecurity response

    SIGNALS

    Cybersecurity spending is a major and expanding expenditure for our members.

    Cybersecurity is going
    to include brand misinformation.

    For 36% of surveyed I&O members, cybersecurity consumed between 10-20% of their total budget in 2022. Moreover, cybersecurity defense funding is expected to increase for 57% of I&O members.

    A third of surveyed I&O members viewed misinformation as a major risk to their organization for 2023 and 2024. Only 38% of the I&O members reported that they will have software in place to monitor and manage social media posts.

    Increasing environment and regulatory complexity demands more sophisticated cybersecurity operations.

    Infrastructure teams must be expected to work alongside and integrate with cybersecurity operations.

    Enhance cybersecurity response

    CALL TO ACTION

    Get out of your I&O silo and form cross-functional cybersecurity teams.

    I&O priority actions

    Establish a cross-functional security steering committee to coordinate security processes and technologies. The complexity of managing security across modern applications, cloud, IoT, and network infrastructure that members operate is greater than ever before and requires coordinated teamwork.

    Contain the cyber threat with zero trust (ZT) architecture. Extend ZT to network and critical infrastructure to limit exposure.

    Leverage AI to build vigilant security intelligence. Smart I&O operators will make use of AI automation to augment their security technologies to help detect threats and contain security incidents on critical infrastructure.

    Enhance cybersecurity response

    I&O priority actions

    Build specialized cybersecurity incident management protocols with your service desk. Build integrated security focused teams within service desk operations that continually test and improve security incident response protocols internally and with specialized security vendors. In some organizations, security incident response teams extend beyond traditional infrastructure into social media. Work cross-functionally to determine the risk exposure to misinformation and incident response procedures.

    Treat lost or stolen equipment as a security incident. Develop hardware asset management protocols for tracking and reporting on these incidents and keep a record of equipment disposal. Implement tools that allow for remote deletion of data and report on lost or stolen equipment.

    Produce ESG reporting

    SIGNALS

    Government mandates present an operational risk to I&O members.

    ESG reporting is
    often incomplete.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Surveyed members identified government-enacted policy changes to be a top risk to disrupting to their business operations in 2023. One of the trends identified by Info-Tech is that the impact of regulations on environmental, social, and governance (ESG) reporting are being rolled out by governments worldwide.

    Alarmingly, only 7% of surveyed members responded that they could very accurately report on their carbon footprint and 23% said they were not able to report accurately at all.

    Produce ESG reporting

    SIGNALS

    ESG mandates are being rolled out globally.

    ESG reporting has greatly expanded since a 2017 report by Task Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD, 2017) which recommended that organizations disclose climate-related financial metrics for investors to appropriately price climate-related risks to share price. In 2021, the Swiss Finance Institute research paper (Sautner, 2021) identified 29 countries that require ESG reporting, primarily for larger public companies, financial institutions, and state-owned corporations.

    Global ESG mandates

    The image contains a screenshot of a world map that demonstrates the Global ESG Mandates.

    29 nations with ESG mandates identified by the Swiss Finance Institute

    Produce ESG reporting

    SIGNALS

    ESG mandates are being rolled out globally.

    The EU has mandated ESG reporting for approximately 11,700 large public companies with more than 500 employees under the Non-Financial Reporting Directive (NFRD), since 2014. The EU is going to replace the NFRD with the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (European Council, 2022), which has set a 3-year timetable for escalating the ESG reporting level to what is estimated to be about 75% of EU total turnover (WorldFavor, 2022).

    • 2024: Companies with 500 or more employees.
    • 2025: Companies with 250 or more employee or 40M EU in revenue/20M in total assets.
    • 2026: SMEs, smaller credit financial, and captive insurance institutions.

    It's been a long time since most enterprises had to report on things like power efficiency factors.

    But don't think that being in the cloud will insulate you from a renewed interest in ESG reporting.

    Produce ESG reporting

    CALL TO ACTION

    Being unprepared for new ESG reporting mandates without a clear and validated ESG reporting process puts your organization at risk.

    I&O priority actions

    Understand ESG risk exposure. Define the gap between what ESG reporting is required in your jurisdiction and current reporting capabilities to meet them. Build the I&O role with responsibility for ESG reporting.

    Include vendors in ESG reporting. Review infrastructure facilities with landlords, utilities, and hosting providers to see if they can provide ESG reporting on sustainable power generation, then map it to I&O power consumption as part of their contractual obligations. Ask equipment vendors to provide ESG reporting on manufacturing materials and energy consumption to boot-strap data collection.

    Implement a HAM process to track asset disposal and other types of e-waste. Update agreements with disposal vendors to get reporting on waste and recycle volumes.

    Produce ESG reporting

    I&O priority actions

    Implement an ESG reporting framework. There are five major ESG reporting frameworks being used globally. Select one of the frameworks below that makes sense for your organization, and implement it.

    ISO 14001 Environmental Management: Part of the ISO Technical Committee family of standards that allows your organization to understand its legal requirements to become certified in ESG.

    Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Reporting Standards: GRI has been developing ESG reporting standards since 1997. GRI provides a modular ESG framework applicable to all sizes and sectors of organizations worldwide.

    Principles for Responsible Investment: UN-developed framework for ESG reporting framework for disclosure in responsible investments.

    Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB): ESG report framework to be used by investors.

    UN Global Compact: ESG reporting framework based on 10 principles that organizations can voluntarily contribute data to.

    Implement a HAM process to track asset disposal and other types of e-waste. Update agreements with disposal vendors to get reports on waste and recycle volumes.

    Recession readiness

    SIGNALS

    Managing accelerated technical debt.

    Recessionary pressures.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    I&O members experienced a spike in technical debt following the global pandemic economic shutdown, workforce displacement, and highly disrupted supply chains. 2023 presents a clear opportunity to work on these projects.

    The shortages in workforce and supply chain have accelerated inflation post pandemic. Central banks have started to slow down inflation in 2022 by raising interest rates. However, the World Bank has forecast a potential 2% rise in interest rates as the battle with inflation continues into 2023 and beyond, which could set off a global slowdown in GDP growth to 0.5%, qualifying as a recession. If interest rates continue to climb, I&O members may struggle with the higher cost of capital for their investments.

    (Source: World Bank Organization, 2022)

    Recession readiness

    SIGNALS

    I&O budgets expected to increase.

    Focused budgetary increases.

    Despite economists’ prediction of a looming recession and inflationary pressures, only 11% of I&O members surveyed indicated that they anticipated any reduction in IT budgets for 2023. In fact, 44% of I&O members expected an increase of IT budgets of between 6% and 30%.

    These increases in budget are not uniform across all investments. Surveyed I&O members indicated that the largest anticipated budget increases (compared to 2022) were in the areas of:

    • AI/machine learning ( +7.5%)
    • 5G (+7%)
    • Data Mesh/Fabric and Data Lake infrastructure (+5.7% and +4.4%, respectively)
    • Mixed reality technologies (augmented or virtual reality) (+3.3%)
    • Next generation cybersecurity (+1.7%)

    "2022 has been the first true opportunity to start getting caught up on technical debt stemming from the post pandemic supply chain and resource shortages. That catch-up is going to continue for some time.

    Unfortunately, the world isn't sitting still while doing that. In fact, we see new challenges around inflationary pressures. 2023 planning is going to be a balancing act between old and new projects."

    Paul Sparks,
    CTO at Brookshire Grocery Company

    Recession readiness

    SIGNALS

    Tough choices on budgetary spends.

    The responses indicated that I&O members expect decreased reinvestment for 2023 for the following:

    • API programming (-21.7%)
    • Cloud computing (-19.4%)
    • 44% of I&O members indicated if 2023 requires costs cutting, 5-20% of their cloud computing investment will be at risk of the chopping block!
    • Workforce management (-9.4%)
    • No-code /low-code infrastructure (-5.3%)

    Make sure you can clearly measure the value of all budgeted I&O activities.

    Anything that can't demonstrate clear value to leadership is potentially on the chopping block.

    Recession readiness

    CALL TO ACTION

    Get ahead of inflationary pressures with early budgetary planning, and identify the gap between the catch-up projects and required critical net new investments.

    II&O priority actions

    Hedge against inflation on infrastructure projects. Develop and communicate value-based strategies to lock in pricing and mitigate inflationary risk with vendors.

    Communicate value-add on all I&O budgeted items. Define an infrastructure roadmap to highlight which projects are technical debt and which are new strategic investments, and note their value to the organization.

    Look for cost saving technologies. Focus on I&O projects that automate services to increase productivity and optimize head count.

    Realize opportunities

    Build on a record of COVID-related innovation success and position the enterprise to take advantage of 2023.

    AI governance: Watching the watchers

    Data stewardship: Cornerstone of value

    Prep for a brave new metaverse

    AI governance: Watching the watchers

    SIGNALS

    Continued investment
    in AI technologies

    AI technology is permeating diverse I&O functional areas.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    About 32% of survey respondents who work in I&O said that they already invest in AI, and 40% intend to invest in 2023.

    I&O members have identified the following areas as the top five focal points for AI uses within their organizations.

    • Automated repetitive, low-level tasks
    • Business analytics or intelligence
    • Identification of risks and improvement of security response
    • Monitoring and governance
    • Sensor data analysis

    AI governance: Watching the watchers

    SIGNALS

    Consequences for misbehaving AI.

    I&O leaders can expect to have silos of AI in pockets scattered across the enterprise. Without oversight on the learning model and the data used for training and analytics there is a risk of overprovisioning, which could reduce the efficiency and effectiveness of AI models and results.

    This scale advantage of AI could result in operational inefficiencies without oversight. For example, bad governance means garbage in / garbage out. Which is worse: getting 100 outputs from a system with a 1% error rate, or getting 10,000 outputs from a system with an 1% error rate?

    These are just the operational issues; legally you can be on the hook, as well. The EU Parliament has issued a civil liability regime for AI (European Parliament, n.d.) which imposes liability to operators of AI systems, regardless of whether they acted with operational due diligence. Additionally, the IEEE (IEEE, 2019) is advocating for legal frameworks and accountability for AI that violates human rights and privacy laws and causes legal harm.

    Who is going to instill standards for AI Operations? Who is going to put in the mechanisms to validate and explain the output of AI black boxes?

    If you said it’s going to end up
    being Infrastructure and Operations – you were right!

    AI governance: Watching the watchers

    CALL TO ACTION

    Establish I&O within an AI governance program to build trust in AI results and behaviors and limit legal exposure.

    I&O priority actions

    Define who has overall AI accountability for AI governance within I&O. This role is responsible for establishing strategic governance metrics over AI use and results, and identifying liability risks.

    Maintain an inventory of AI use. Conduct an audit of where AI is used within I&O, and identify gaps in documentation and alignment with I&O processes and organizational values.

    Define an I&O success map. Provide transparency of AI use by generating pseudo code of AI models, and scorecard AI decision making with expected predictions and behavioral actions taken.

    AI governance: Watching the watchers

    Manage bias in AI decision making. Work with AI technology vendors to identify how unethical bias can enter the results, using operational data sets for validation prior to rollout.

    Protect AI data sets from manipulation. Generate new secure storage for AI technology audit trails on AI design making and results. Work with your security team to ensure data sets used by AI for training can’t be corrupted.

    Data governance: Cornerstone of value

    SIGNALS

    Data volumes grow
    with time.

    Data is seen as a source for generating new value.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Of surveyed I&O members, 63% expected to see the data storage grow by at least 10% in 2023, and 15% expected a 30% or more growth in data storage volumes.

    I&O members identified the top three ways data brings value to the organization:

    • Helping reduce operational costs.
    • Presenting value-added to existing products and services.
    • Acquiring new customers.

    Data governance: Cornerstone of value

    SIGNALS

    Approach to data analysis is primarily done in-house.

    85% of surveyed I&O members are doing data analysis with custom-made or external tools. Interestingly, 10% of I&O members do not conduct any data analysis.

    Members are missing a formal data governance process.

    81% of surveyed I&O members do not have a formal or automated process for data governance. Ironically, 24% of members responded that they aim to have publicly accessible data-as-a-service or information repositories.

    Despite investment in data initiatives, organizations carry high levels of data debt.

    Info-Tech research, Establish Data Governance, points out that data debt, the accumulated cost associated with sub-optimal governance of data assets, is a problem for 78% of organizations.

    What the enterprise expects out of enterprise storage is much more complicated in 2023.

    Data protection and governance are non-negotiable aspects of enterprise storage, even when it’s unstructured.

    Data governance: Cornerstone of value

    SIGNALS

    Data quality is the primary driver for data governance.

    The data governance market
    is booming.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    In the 2022 Zaloni survey of data governance professionals, 71% indicated that consistent data quality was the top metric for data governance, followed by reduced time to insight and regulatory compliance.

    (Source: Zaloni DATAVERSITY, 2022)

    The Business Research Company determined that the global data governance market is expected to grow from $3.28 billion in 2022 to $7.42 billion in 2026 at a CAGR of 22.7% in response to 74 zettabytes of data in 2021, with a growth rate of 1.145 trillion MB of new data being created every day.

    (Source: Business Research Company, 2022)

    Data governance: Cornerstone of value

    CALL TO ACTION

    Develop a data governance program that includes an I&O data steward for oversight.

    I&O priority actions

    Establish an I&O data steward. Make data governance by establishing a data steward role with accountability for governance. The steward works collaboratively with DataOPs to control access to I&O data, enforce policies, and reduce the time to make use of the data.

    Define a comprehensive storage architecture. If you thought you had a data sprawl problem before, wait until you see the volume of data generated from IoT and Web 3.0 applications. Get ahead of the problem by creating an infrastructure roadmap for structured and unstructured data storage.

    Build a solid backbone for AI Operations using data quality best practices. Data quality is the foundation for generation of operational value from the data and artificial intelligence efforts. Focus on using a methodology to build a culture of data quality within I&O systems and applications that generate data rather than reactive fixes.

    Look to partner with third-party vendors for your master data management (MDM) efforts. Modern MDM vendors can work with your existing data fabrics/lake and help leverage your data governance policies into the cloud.

    Prep for a brave new metaverse

    SIGNALS

    From science fiction to science fact.

    The term metaverse was coined in 1992 by Neal Stephenson and is a common theme in science fiction. For most I&O surveyed professionals, the term metaverse conjures up more confusion than clarity, as it’s not one place, but multiple metaverse worlds. The primordial metaverse was focused on multiplayer gaming and some educational experiences. It wasn’t until recently that it gained a critical mass in the fashion and entertainment industries with the use of non-fungible tokens (NFT). The pandemic created a unique opportunity for metaverse-related technologies to expand Web 3.0.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Prep for a brave new metaverse

    SIGNALS

    Collaboration and beyond.

    On one hand, metaverse technologies virtual reality(VR)/augmented reality (AR) headsets can be a method of collaborating internally within a single organization. About 10% of our surveyed I&O members engaged this type of collaborative metaverse in 2022, with another 24% looking to run proof of concept projects in 2023. However, there is a much larger terrain for metaverse projects outside of workforce collaboration, which 17% of surveyed I&O members are planning to engage with in 2023.

    These are sophisticated new metaverse worlds, and digital twins of production environments are being created for B2B collaboration, operations, engineering, healthcare, architecture, and education that include the use of block chain, NFTs, smart contracts, and other Web 3.0 technologies

    “They are the audiovisual bodies that people use to communicate with each other in the Metaverse.”

    Neal Stephenson,
    Snow Crash 1992

    Prep for a brave new metaverse

    SIGNALS

    Metaverse requires multidimensional security.

    Security in the context of the metaverse presents new challenges to I&O. The infrastructure that runs the metaverse is still vulnerable to “traditional” security threats. New attack vectors include financial and identity fraud, privacy and data loss, along with new cyber-physical threats which are predicted to occur as the metaverse begins to integrate with IoT and other 3D objects in the physical world.

    The ultimate in "not a product" – the metaverse promises to be a hodgepodge of badly standardized technologies for the near future.

    Be prepared to take care of pets and not cattle for the foreseeable future, but keep putting the fencing around the ranch.

    Prep for a brave new metaverse

    SIGNALS

    Generating new wave of sophisticated engineering coming.

    Economics boom around metaverse set to explode.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Beyond the current online educational resources, there are reputable universities around the world, including Stanford University, that are offering courses on metaverse and Web 3.0 concepts.

    (Source: Arti, 2022)

    So, what’s providing the impetus for all this activity and investment? Economics. In their 2022 report, Metaverse and Money, Citi estimated that the economic value of the metaverse(s) will have 900M to 1B VR/AR users and 5 billion Web 3.0 users with market sizes of $1-2T and $8-$13T, respectively. Yes, that’s a “T” for Trillions.

    (Source: Ghose, 2022)

    Prep for a brave new metaverse

    CALL TO ACTION

    Ready or not, the metaverse is coming to an infrastructure near you. Start expanding I&O technologies and processes to support a metaverse infrastructure.

    I&O priority actions

    Develop a plan for network upgrades.

    A truly immersive VR/AR experience requires very low latency. Identify gaps and develop a plan to enhance your network infrastructure surrounding your metaverse space(s) and end users.

    Extend security posture into the metaverse.

    Securing the infrastructure that runs your metaverse is going to extend the end-user equipment used to navigate it. More importantly, security policies need to encompass the avatars that navigate it and the spatial web that they interact with, which can include physical world items like IoT.

    Prep for a brave new metaverse

    I&O priority actions

    Metaverse theft prevention

    Leverage existing strategies to identify management in the metaverse. Privacy policies need to extend their focus to data loss prevention within the metaverse.

    Collaborate

    The skill set required to build, deploy, manage, and support the metaverse is complex. Develop a metaverse support organization that extends beyond I&O functions into security, DevOps, and end-user experiences.

    Educate

    Web 3.0 technologies and business models are complex. Education of I&O technical- and commerce-focused team members is going to help prevent you from getting blindsided. Seek out specialized training programs for technical staff and strategic education for executives, like the Wharton School of Business certification program.

    Authors

    John Annand

    Theo Antoniadis

    John Annand

    Principal Research Director

    Theo Antoniadis

    Principal Research Director

    Contributors

    Paul Sparks,
    CTO at Brookshire Grocery Company

    2 Anonymous Contributors

    Figuring out the true nature of the “Turbo” button of his 486DX100 launched John on a 20-year career in managed services and solution architecture, exploring the secrets of HPC, virtualization, and DIY WANs built with banks of USR TotalControl modems. Today he focuses his research and advisory on software-defined infrastructure technologies, strategy, organization, and service design in an increasingly Agile and DevOps world.

    Theo has decades of operational and project management experience with start-ups and multinationals across North America and Europe. He has held various consulting, IT management and operations leadership positions within telecommunications, SaaS, and software companies.

    Bibliography

    “3 Cybersecurity Trends that are Changing Financial Data Management." FIMA US. Accessed August 2022.
    Arti. “While much of the world is just discovering the Metaverse, a number of universities have already established centers for studying Web 3." Analytics Insight. 10 July 2022.
    “Artificial intelligence (AI) for cybersecurity." IBM. Accessed September 2022
    “Business in the Metaverse Economy." Wharton School of University of Pennsylvania. Accessed October 2022.
    “Cost of a data breach 2022: A million-dollar race to detect and respond." IBM. Accessed September 2022.
    “Countries affected by mandatory ESG reporting – here’s the list." New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment. Accessed September 2022.
    “Countries affected by mandatory ESG reporting – here’s the list.” WorldFavor. Accessed September 2022.
    Crenshaw, Caroline A. “SEC Proposes to Enhance Disclosures by Certain Investment Advisers and Investment Companies About ESG Investment Practices." U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission. May 2022.
    “Cutting through the metaverse hype: Practical guidance and use cases for business." Avanade. Accessed October 2022.
    “Data Governance Global Market Sees Growth Rate Of 25% Through 2022." The Business Research Company. August 2022.
    “DIRECTIVE 2014/95/EU OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 22 October 2014 amending Directive 2013/34/EU as regards disclosure of non-financial and diversity information by certain large undertakings and groups." UER-Lex. Accessed September 2022.
    "Ethically Aligned Design: A Vision for Prioritizing Human Well-being with Autonomous and Intelligent Systems." IEEE. March 2019.
    “European Parliament resolution of 20 October 2020 with recommendations to the Commission on a civil liability regime for artificial intelligence." European Parliament. Accessed October 2022.
    Ghose, Ronit et al. "Metaverse and Money." Citi GPS. March 2022.
    Hernandez, Roberto, et al. “Demystifying the metaverse." PWC. Accessed August 2022.
    Info-Tech Trends Report Survey, 2023; N=813.
    “ISO 14000 Family: Environmental Management." ISO. Accessed October 2022.
    Knight, Michelle & Bishop, Annie, ”The 2022 State of Cloud Data Governance.“ Zaloni DATAVERSITY. 2022.

    Bibliography

    Kompella, Kashyap, “What is AI governance and why do you need it?“ TechTarget. March 2022.
    “Management of electronic waste worldwide in 2019, by method." Statista. 2022.
    “Model Artificial Intelligence Governance Framework and Assessment Guide.“ World Economic Forum. Accessed September 2022.
    “Model Artificial Intelligence Governance Framework." PDPC Singapore. Accessed October 2022.
    “New rules on corporate sustainability reporting: provisional political agreement between the Council and the European Parliament.“ European Council. June 2022.
    "OECD Economic Outlook Volume 2022." OECD iLibrary. June 2022.
    "Recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures." TCFD. Accessed August 2022.
    “Risk of Global Recession in 2023 Rises Amid Simultaneous Rate Hikes.” World Bank Organization. September 2022.
    Sautner, Zacharias, et al. “The Effects of Mandatory ESG Disclosure around the World.” SSRN. November 2021.
    Sondergaard, Peter. “AI GOVERNANCE – WHAT ARE THE KPIS? AND WHO IS ACCOUNTABLE?“ The Sondergaard Group. November 2019.
    Srivastavam Sudeep, “How can your business enter the Metaverse?." Appinventiv.
    September 2022.
    “Standards Overview." SASB. Accessed October 2022.
    Stephenson, Neal. Snow Crash. Bantam Books, 1992.
    “Sustainability Reporting Standards." Global Reporting Initiative. Accessed October 2022.
    “The Ten Principles of the UN Global Compact." UN Global Compact. Accessed October 2022.
    Tian Tong Lee, Sheryl. "China Unveils ESG Reporting Guidelines to Catch Peers.” Bloomberg. May 2022.
    “What are the Principles for Responsible Investment?" UNPRI. Accessed October 2022.
    "What is the EU's Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD)?" WorldFavor.
    June 2022.
    West, Darrell M. “Six Steps to Responsible AI in the Federal Government.“ Brookings Institution. March 2022. Web.

    Renovate the Data Center

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}497|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Center & Facilities Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /data-center-and-facilities-optimization
    • 33% of enterprises will be undertaking facility upgrades or refreshes in 2010 aimed at extending the life of their existing data centers.
    • Every upgrade or refresh targeting specific components in the facility to address short-term pain will have significant impact on the data center environment as a whole. Planning upfront and establishing a clear project scope will minimize expensive changes in later years.
    • This solution set will provide you with step-by-step design, planning, and selection tools to define a Data Center renovation plan to reduce cost and risk while supporting cost-effective long-term growth for power, cooling, standby power, and fire protection renovations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • 88% of organizations cited they would spend more time and effort on documenting and identifying facility requirements for initial project scoping. Organizations can prevent scope creep by conducting the necessary project planning up front and identify requirements and the effect that the renovation project will have in all areas of the data center facility.
    • Data Center facilities renovations must include the specific requirements related to power provisioning, stand-by power, cooling, and fire protection - not just the immediate short-term pain.
    • 39% of organizations cited they would put more emphasis on monitoring contractor management and performance to improve the outcome of the data center renovation project.

    Impact and Result

    • Early internal efforts to create a budget and facility requirements yields better cost and project outcomes when construction begins. Each data center renovation project is unique and should have its own detailed budget.
    • Upfront planning and detailed project scoping can prevent a cascading impact on data center renovation projects to other areas of the data center that can increase project size, scope and spend.
    • Contractor selection is one of the most important first steps in a complex data center renovation. Organizations must ensure the contractor selected has experience specifically in data center renovation.

    Renovate the Data Center Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and understand the renovation project.

    • Storyboard: Renovate the Data Center
    • None
    • Data Center Annual Review Checklist

    2. Renovate power in the data center.

    • Data Center Power Requirements Calculator

    3. Renovate cooling in the data center.

    • Data Center Cooling Requirements Calculator

    4. Renovate standby power in the data center.

    • Data Center Standby Power Requirements Calculator

    5. Define current and future fire protection requirements.

    • Fire Protection & Suppression Engineer Selection Criteria Checklist
    • None

    6. Assess the opportunities and establish a clear project scope.

    • Data Center Renovation Project Charter
    • Data Center Renovation Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    7. Establish a budget for the data center renovation project.

    • Data Center Renovation Budget Tool

    8. Select a general contractor to execute the project.

    • None
    • Data Center Renovation Contractor Scripted Interview
    • Data Center Renovation Contractor Scripted Interview Scorecard
    • Data Center Renovation Contractor Reference Checklist
    [infographic]

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}327|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $23,245 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • End users often have a disjointed experience while interacting with your organization in using its products and services.
    • You have been asked by your senior leadership to start a new or revive an existing design or innovation function within your organization. However, your organization has dismissed design thinking as the latest “management fad” and does not buy into the depth and rigor that design thinking brings.
    • The design or innovation function lives on the fringes of your organization due to its apathy towards design thinking or tumultuous internal politics.
    • You, as a CIO, want to improve the user satisfaction with the IT services your team provides to both internal and external users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A user’s perspective while interacting with the products and services is very different from the organization’s internal perspective while implementing and provisioning those. A design-based organization balances the two perspectives to drive user-satisfaction over end-to-end journeys.
    • Top management must have a design thinker – the guardian angel of the balance between exploration (i.e. discovering new business models) and exploitation (i.e. leveraging existing business models).
    • Your approach to adopt design thinking must consider your organization’s specific goals and culture. There’s no one-size-fits-all approach.

    Impact and Result

    • User satisfaction, with the end-to-end journeys orchestrated by your organization, will significantly increase.
    • Design-centric organizations enjoy disproportionate financial rewards.

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt design thinking in your organization, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. What is design thinking?

    The focus of this phase is on revealing what designers do during the activity of designing, and on building an understanding of the nature of design ability. We will formally examine the many definitions of design thinking from experts in this field. At the core of this phase are several case studies that illuminate the various aspects of design thinking.

    • Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization – Phase 1: What Is Design Thinking?
    • Victor Scheinman's Experiment for Design

    2. How does an organization benefit from design thinking?

    This phase will illustrate the relevance of design in strategy formulation and in service-design. At the core of this phase are several case studies that illuminate these aspects of design thinking. We will also identify the trends impacting your organization and establish a baseline of user-experience with the journeys orchestrated by your organization.

    • Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization – Phase 2: How Does an Organization Benefit From Design Thinking?
    • Trends Matrix (Sample)

    3. How do you build a design organization?

    The focus of this phase is to:

  • Measure the design-centricity of your organization and subsequently, identify the areas for improvement.
  • Define an approach for a design program that suites your organization’s specific goals and culture.
    • Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization – Phase 3: How Do You Build a Design Organization?
    • Report on How Design-Centric Is Your Organization (Sample)
    • Approach for the Design Program (Sample)
    • Interview With David Dunne on Design Thinking
    • Interview With David Dunne on Design Thinking (mp3)
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 What Is Design Thinking?

    The Purpose

    The focus of this module is on revealing what designers do during the activity of designing, and on building an understanding of the nature of design ability. We will also review the report on the design-centricity of your organization and subsequently, earmark the areas for improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An intimate understanding of the design thinking

    An assessment of design-centricity of your organization and identification of areas for improvement

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss case studies on how designers think and work

    1.2 Define design thinking

    1.3 Review report from Info-Tech’s diagnostic: How design-centric is your organization?

    1.4 Earmark areas for improvement to raise the design-centricity of your organization

    Outputs

    Report from Info-Tech’s diagnostic: ‘How design-centric is your organization?’ with identified areas for improvement.

    2 How Does an Organization Benefit From Design Thinking?

    The Purpose

    In this module, we will discuss the relevance of design in strategy formulation and service design. At the core of this module are several case studies that illuminate these aspects of design thinking. We will also identify the trends impacting your organization. We will establish a baseline of user experience with the journeys orchestrated by your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An in-depth understanding of the relevance of design in strategy formulation and service design

    An understanding of the trends that impact your organization

    A taxonomy of critical customer journeys and a baseline of customers’ satisfaction with those

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss relevance of design in strategy through case studies

    2.2 Articulate trends that impact your organization

    2.3 Discuss service design through case studies

    2.4 Identify critical customer journeys and baseline customers’ satisfaction with those

    2.5 Run a simulation of design in practice

    Outputs

    Trends that impact your organization.

    Taxonomy of critical customer journeys and a baseline of customers’ satisfaction with those.

    3 How to Build a Design Organization

    The Purpose

    The focus of this module is to define an approach for a design program that suits your organization’s specific goals and culture.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An approach for the design program in your organization. This includes aspects of the design program such as its objectives and measures, its model (one of the five archetypes or a hybrid one), and its governance.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify objectives and key measures for your design thinking program

    3.2 Structure your program after reviewing five main archetypes of a design program

    3.3 Balance between incremental and disruptive innovation

    3.4 Review best practices of a design organization

    Outputs

    An approach for your design thinking program: objectives and key measures; structure of the program, etc.

    Modernize Your Applications

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}178|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Application modernization is essential to stay competitive and productive in today’s digital environment. Your stakeholders have outlined their digital business goals that IT is expected to meet.
    • Your application portfolio cannot sufficiently support the flexibility and efficiency the business needs because of legacy challenges.
    • Your teams do not have a framework to illustrate, communicate, and justify the modernization effort and organizational changes in the language your stakeholders understand.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Build your digital applications around continuous modernization. End-user needs, technology, business direction, and regulations rapidly change in today’s competitive and fast-paced industry. This reality will quickly turn your modern applications into shelfware. Build continuous modernization at the center of your digital application vision to keep up with evolving business, end-user, and IT needs.
    • Application modernization is organizational change management. If you build and modernize it, they may not come. The crux of successful application modernization is centered on the strategic, well-informed, and onboarded adoption of changes in key business areas, capabilities, and processes. Organizational change management must be front and center so that applications are fit for purpose and are something that end users want and need to use.
    • Business-IT collaboration is not optional. Application modernization will not be successful if your lines of business (LOBs) and IT are not working together. IT must empathize how LOBs operate and proactively support the underlying operational systems. LOBs must be accountable for all products leveraging modern technologies and be able to rationalize the technical feasibility of their digital application vision.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish the digital application vision. Gain a grounded understanding of the digital application construct and prioritize these attributes against your digital business goals.
    • Define your modernization approach. Obtain a thorough view of your business and technical complexities, risks, and impacts. Employ the right modernization techniques based on your organization’s change tolerance.
    • Build your roadmap. Clarify the organizational changes needed to support modernization and adoption of your digital applications.

    Modernize Your Applications Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should strategically modernize your applications, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Set your vision

    Describe your application vision and set the right modernization expectations with your stakeholders.

    • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 1: Set Your Vision

    2. Identify your modernization opportunities

    Focus your modernization efforts on the business opportunities that your stakeholders care about.

    • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 2: Identify Your Modernization Opportunities

    3. Plan your modernization

    Describe your modernization initiatives and build your modernization tactical roadmap.

    • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 3: Plan Your Modernization
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Your Applications

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set Your Vision

    The Purpose

    Discuss the goals of your application modernization initiatives

    Define your digital application vision and priorities

    List your modernization principles

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear application modernization objectives and high priority value items

    Your digital application vision and attributes

    Key principles that will guide your application modernization initiatives

    Activities

    1.1 State Your Objectives

    1.2 Characterize Your Digital Application

    1.3 Define Your Modernization Principles

    Outputs

    Application modernization objectives

    Digital application vision and attributes definitions

    List of application modernization principles and guidelines

    2 Identify Your Modernization Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Identify the value streams and business capabilities that will benefit the most from application modernization

    Conduct a change tolerance assessment

    Build your modernization strategic roadmap

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the value delivery improvements modernization can bring

    Recognizing the flexibility and tolerance of your organization to adopt changes

    Select an approach that best fits your organization’s goals and capacity

    Activities

    2.1 Identify the Opportunities

    2.2 Define Your Modernization Approach

    Outputs

    Value streams and business capabilities that are ideal modernization opportunities

    Your modernization strategic roadmap based on your change tolerance and modernization approach

    3 Plan Your Modernization

    The Purpose

    Identify the most appropriate modernization technique and the scope of changes to implement your techniques

    Develop an actionable tactical roadmap to complete your modernization initiatives

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear understanding of what must be changed to the organization and application considering your change tolerance

    An achievable modernization plan

    Activities

    3.1 Shortlist Your Modernization Techniques

    3.2 Roadmap Your Modernization Initiatives

    Outputs

    Scope of your application modernization initiatives

    Your modernization tactical roadmap

    Project Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}48|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}48|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $303,499
    • member rating average days saved: 42
    • Parent Category Name: Project Portfolio Management and Projects
    • Parent Category Link: /ppm-and-projects

    The challenge

    • Ill-defined or even lack of upfront project planning will increase the perception that your IT department cannot deliver value because most projects will go over time and budget.
    • The perception is those traditional ways of delivering projects via the PMBOK only increase overhead and do not have value. This is less due to the methodology and more to do with organizations trying to implement best-practices that far exceed their current capabilities.
    • Typical best-practices are too clinical in their approach and place unrealistic burdens on IT departments. They fail to address the daily difficulties faces by staff and are not sized to fit your organization.
    • Take a flexible approach and ensure that your management process is a cultural and capacity fit for your organization. Take what fits from these frameworks and embed them tailored into your company.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • The feather-touch is often the right touch. Ensure that you have a lightweight approach for most of your projects while applying more rigor to the more complex and high-risk developments.
    • Pick the right tools. Your new project management processes need the right tooling to be successful. Pick a tool that is flexible enough o accommodate projects of all sizes without imposing undue governance onto smaller projects.
    • Yes, take what fits within your company from frameworks, but there is no cherry-picking. Ensure your processes stay in context: If you do not inform for effective decision-making, all will be in vain. Develop your methods such that guide the way to big-picture decision taking and support effective portfolio management.

    Impact and results 

    • The right amount of upfront planning is a function of the type of projects you have and your company. The proper levels enable better scope statements, better requirements gathering, and increased business satisfaction.
    • An investment in a formal methodology is critical to projects of all sizes. An effective process results in more successful projects with excellent business value delivery.
    • When you have a repeatable and consistent approach to project planning and execution, you can better communicate between the IT project managers and decision-makers.
    • Better communication improves the visibility of the overall project activity within your company.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started.

    Read our executive brief to understand why you should tailor project management practices to the type of projects you do and your company and review our methodology. We show you how we can support you.

    Lay the groundwork for project management success

    Assess your current capabilities to set the right level of governance.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 1: Lay the Groundwork for PM Success (ppt)
    • Project Management Triage Tool (xls)
    • COBIT BAI01 (Manage Programs and Projects) Alignment Workbook (xls)
    • Project Level Definition Matrix (xls)
    • Project Level Selection Tool (xls)
    • Project Level Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Project Management SOP Template (doc)

    Small project require a lightweight framework

    Increase small project's throughput.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 2: Build a Lightweight PM Process for Small Initiatives (ppt)
    • Level 1 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Closure Checklist Template (doc)

    Build the standard process medium and large-scale projects

    The standard process contains fully featured initiation and planning.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 3: Establish Initiation and Planning Protocols for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Stakeholder and Impact Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Level 2 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Kick-Off Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Scope Statement Template (doc)
    • Project Staffing Plan(xls)
    • Communications Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Customer/Sponsor Project Status Meeting Template (doc)
    • Level 2 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Quality Management Workbook (xls)
    • Benefits Management Plan Template (xls)
    • Risk Management Workbook (xls)

    Build a standard process for the execution and closure of medium to large scale projects

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 4: Develop Execution and Closing Procedures for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Team Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Light Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Detailed Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Light Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Detailed Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Deliverable Acceptance Form Template (doc)
    • Handover to Operations Template (doc)
    • Post-Mortem Review Template (doc)
    • Final Sign-Off and Acceptance Form Template (doc)

    Implement your project management standard operating procedures (SOP)

    Develop roll-out and training plans, implement your new process and track metrics.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 5: Implement Your PM SOP (ppt)
    • Level 2 Project Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Process Costing Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Training Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Training Monitoring Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (MS Project)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (xls)

     

     

    Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}190|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $194,553 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 32 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • IT governance is the number-one predictor of value generated by IT, yet many organizations struggle to organize their governance effectively.
    • Current IT governance does not address the changing goals, risks, or context of the organization, so IT spend is not easily linked to value.
    • The right people are not making the right decisions about IT.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations do not have a governance framework in place that optimally aligns IT with the business objectives and direction.
    • Implementing IT governance requires the involvement of key business stakeholders who do not see IT’s value in corporate governance and strategy.
    • The current governance processes are poorly designed, making the time to decisions too long and driving non-compliance.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s four-step process to optimize your IT governance framework.
    • Our client-tested methodology supports the enablement of IT-business alignment, decreases decision-making cycle times, and increases IT’s transparency and effectiveness in decisions around benefits realization, risks, and resources.
    • Successful completion of the IT governance redesign will result in the following outcomes:
      1. Align IT with the business context.
      2. Assess the current governance framework.
      3. Redesign the governance framework.
      4. Implement governance redesign.

    Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should redesign IT governance, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Align IT with the business context

    Align IT’s direction with the business using the Statement of Business Context.

    • Redesign IT Governance to Drive Optimal Business Results – Phase 1: Align IT With the Business Context
    • Make the Case for an IT Governance Redesign
    • Stakeholder Power Map Template
    • IT Governance Stakeholder Communication Planning Tool
    • PESTLE Analysis Template
    • Business SWOT Analysis Template
    • Statement of Business Context Template

    2. Assess the current governance framework

    Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of current governance using the Current State Assessment.

    • Redesign IT Governance to Drive Optimal Business Results – Phase 2: Assess the Current Governance Framework
    • Current State Assessment of IT Governance

    3. Redesign the governance framework

    Build a redesign of the governance framework using the Future State Design template.

    • Redesign IT Governance to Drive Optimal Business Results – Phase 3: Redesign the Governance Framework
    • Future State Design for IT Governance
    • IT Governance Terms of Reference

    4. Implement governance redesign

    Create an implementation plan to jump-start the communication of the redesign and set it up for success.

    • Redesign IT Governance to Drive Optimal Business Results – Phase 4: Implement Governance Redesign
    • Redesign IT Governance to Drive Optimal Business Results Executive Presentation Template
    • IT Governance Implementation Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify the Need for Governance

    The Purpose

    Identify the need for governance in your organization and engage the leadership team in the redesign process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish an engagement standard for the leadership of your organization in the IT governance redesign.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify stakeholders.

    1.2 Make the case for improved IT governance.

    1.3 Customize communication plan.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder Power Map

    Make the Case Presentation

    Communication Plan

    2 Align IT With the Business Context

    The Purpose

    Create a mutual understanding with the business leaders of the current state of the organization and the state of business it is moving towards.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The understanding of the business context will provide an aligned foundation on which to redesign the IT governance framework.

    Activities

    2.1 Review documents.

    2.2 Analyze frameworks.

    2.3 Conduct brainstorming.

    2.4 Finalize the Statement of Business Context.

    Outputs

    PESTLE Analysis

    SWOT Analysis

    Statement of Business Context

    3 Assess the Current Governance Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish a baseline of the current governance framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop guidelines based off results from the current state that will guide the future state design.

    Activities

    3.1 Create committee profiles.

    3.2 Build governance structure map.

    3.3 Establish governance guidelines.

    Outputs

    Current State Assessment

    4 Redesign the Governance Framework

    The Purpose

    Redesign the governance structure and the committees that operate within it.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build a future state of governance where the relationships and processes that are built drive optimal business results.

    Activities

    4.1 Build governance structure map.

    4.2 Create committee profiles.

    Outputs

    Future State Design

    IT Governance Terms of Reference

    5 Implement Governance Redesign

    The Purpose

    Build a roadmap for implementing the governance redesign.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a transparent and relationship-oriented implementation strategy that will pave the way for a successful redesign implementation.

    Activities

    5.1 Identify next steps for the redesign.

    5.2 Establish communication plan.

    5.3 Lead executive presentation.

    Outputs

    Implementation Plan

    Executive Presentation

    Further reading

    Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results

    Avoid bureaucracy and achieve alignment with a minimalist approach.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Governance optimization is achieved where decision making, authority, and context meet.

    "Governance is something that is done externally to IT and well as internally by IT, with the intention of providing oversight to direct the organization to meet goals and keep things on target.

    Optimizing IT governance is the most effective way to consistently direct IT spend to areas that provide the most value in producing or supporting business outcomes, yet it is rarely done well.

    IT governance is more than just identifying where decisions are made and who has the authority to make them – it must also provide the context and criteria under which decisions are made in order to truly provide business value" (Valence Howden, Director, CIO Practice Info-Tech Research Group)

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • CIOs
    • CTOs
    • IT Directors

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Achieve and maintain executive and business support for optimizing IT governance.
    • Optimize your governance structure.
    • Build high-level governance processes.
    • Build governance committee charters and set accountability for decision making.
    • Plan the transition to the optimized governance structure and processes.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Executive Leadership
    • IT Managers
    • IT Customers
    • Project Managers

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Improve alignment between business decisions and IT initiatives.
    • Establish a mechanism to validate, redirect, and reprioritize IT initiatives.
    • Realize greater value from more effective decision making.
    • Receive a better overall quality of service.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • IT governance is the #1 predictor of value generated by IT, yet many organizations struggle to organize their governance effectively.*
    • Current IT governance does not address the changing goals, risks, or context of the organization so IT spend is not easily linked to value.
    • The right people are not making the right decisions about IT.

    Complication

    • Organizations do not have a governance framework in place that optimally aligns IT with the business objectives and direction.
    • Implementing IT governance requires the involvement of key business stakeholders who do not see IT’s value in governance and strategy.
    • The current governance processes are poorly designed, creating long decision-making cycles and driving non-compliance with regulation.

    Resolution

    • Use Info-Tech’s four-step process for optimizing your IT governance framework. Our client-tested methodology supports the enablement of IT-business alignment, decreases decision-making cycle times, and increases IT’s transparency and effectiveness in making decisions around benefits realization, risks, and resources.
    • Successful completion of the IT governance redesign will result in the following outcomes:
      1. Align IT with the business context.
      2. Assess the current governance framework.
      3. Redesign the governance framework.
      4. Implement governance redesign.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Establish IT-business fusion. In governance, alignment is not enough. Merge IT and the business through governance to ensure business success.
    • With great governance comes great responsibility. Involve relevant business leaders, who will be impacted by IT outcomes, to take on governing responsibility of IT.
    • Let IT manage and the business govern. IT governance should be a component of enterprise governance, allowing IT leaders to focus on managing.

    IT governance is...

    An enabling framework for decision-making context and accountabilities for related processes.

    A means of ensuring business-IT collaboration, leading to increased consistency and transparency in decision making and prioritization of initiatives.

    A critical component of ensuring delivery of business value from IT spend and driving high satisfaction with IT.

    IT governance is not...

    An annoying, finger-waving roadblock in the way of getting things done.

    Limited to making decisions about technology.

    Designed tacitly; it is purposeful, with business objectives in mind.

    A one-time project; you must review and revalidate the efficiency.

    Avoid common misconceptions of IT governance

    Don’t blur the lines between governance and management; each has a unique role to play. Confusing these results in wasted time and confusion around ownership.

    Governance

    A cycle of 'Governance Processes' and 'Management Processes'. On the left side of the cycle 'Governance Processes' begins with 'Evaluate', then 'Direct', then 'Monitor'. This leads to 'Management Processes' on the right side with 'Plan', 'Build', 'Run', and 'Monitor', which then feeds back into 'Evaluate'.

    Management

    IT governance sets direction through prioritization and decision making, and monitors overall IT performance.

    Governance aligns with the mission and vision of the organization to guide IT.

    Management is responsible for executing on, operating, and monitoring activities as determined by IT governance.

    Management makes decisions for implementing based on governance direction.

    The IT Governance Framework

    An IT governance framework is a system that will design structures, processes, authority definitions, and membership assignments that lead IT toward optimal results for the business.

    Governance is performed in three ways:
    1. Evaluate

      Governance ensures that business goals are achieved by evaluating stakeholder needs, criteria, metrics, portfolio, risk, and definition of value.
    2. Direct

      Governance sets the direction of IT by delegating priorities and determining the decisions that will guide the IT organization.
    3. Monitor

      Governance establishes a framework to monitor performance, compliance to regulation, and progress on expected outcomes.

    "Everyone needs good IT, but no one wants to talk about it. Most CFOs would rather spend time with their in-laws than in an IT steering-committee meeting. But companies with good governance consistently outperform companies with bad. Which group do you want to be in?" (Martha Heller, President, Heller Search Associates)

    Create impactful IT governance by embedding it within enterprise governance

    The business should engage in IT governance and IT should influence the direction of the business.

    Enterprise Governance

    IT Governance

    Authority for enterprise governance falls to the board and executive management.

    Responsibilities Include:
    • Provide strategic direction for the organization.
    • Ensure objectives are met.
    • Set the risk standards or profile.
    • Delegate resources responsibly.
    –› Engage in –›

    ‹– Influence ‹–

    Governance of IT is a component of enterprise governance.

    Responsibilities Include:
    • Build structure, authority, process, and membership designations in a governance framework.
    • Ensure the IT organization is aligned with business goals.
    • Influence the direction of the business to ensure business success.

    Identify signals of sub-optimal IT governance within any of these domains

    If you notice any of these signals, governance redesign is right for you!

    Inability to Realize Benefits

    1. IT is unable to articulate the value of its initiatives or spend.
    2. IT is regularly delegated unplanned projects.
    3. The is no standard approach to prioritization.
    4. Projects do not meet target metrics.

    Resource Misallocation

    1. Resources are wasted due to duplication or overlap in IT initiatives.
    2. IT projects fail at an unacceptable rate, leading to wasted resources.
    3. IT’s costs continue to increase without reciprocal performance increase.

    Misdiagnosed Risks

    1. Risk appetite is incorrectly identified or not identified at all.
    2. Disagreement on the approach to risk in the organization.
    3. Increasing rate of IT incidents related to risk.
    4. IT is failing to meet regulatory requirements.

    Dissatisfied Stakeholders

    1. There are no ways to measure stakeholder satisfaction with IT.
    2. Business strategies and IT strategies are misaligned.
    3. IT’s relationship with key stakeholders is unstable and there is a lack of mutual trust.

    A majority of organizations experience significant alignment gaps

    The majority of organizations and their key stakeholders experience highly visible gaps in the alignment of IT investments and organizational goals.

    There are two bars with percentages of their length marked out for different CXO responses. The possible responses are from '1, Critical Gap' to '7, No Gap'. The top bar says '57% of CXOs identify a major gap in IT's ability to support business goals', and shows 13% answered '1, Critical Gap', 22% answered '2', and 22% answered '3'. The bottom bar says '84% of CXOs often perceive that IT is investing in areas that do not support the business' and shows 38% answered '1, Critical Gap', 33% answered '2', and 13% answered '3'.

    88% of CIOs believe that their governance is not effective. (Info-Tech Diagnostics)

    Leverage governance as the catalyst for connecting IT and the business

    49% of firms are misaligned on current performance expectations for IT.

    • 49% Misaligned
    • 51% Aligned

    67% of firms are misaligned on the target role for IT.

    • 34% Highly Misaligned
    • 33% Somewhat Misaligned
    • 33% Aligned

    A well-designed IT governance framework will hep you to:

    1. Make sure IT keeps up with the evolving business context.
    2. Align IT with the mission and the vision of the organization.
    3. Optimize the speed and quality of decision making.
    4. Meet regulatory and compliance needs in the external environment.
    5. (Info-Tech Diagnostics)

    Align with business goals through governance to attain business-IT fusion

    Create a state of business-IT fusion, in which the two become one.

    Without business-IT fusion, IT will go in a different direction, leading to a divergence of purpose and outcomes. IT can transform into a fused partner of the business by ensuring that they govern toward the same goal.

    Firefighter
    • Delivers lower value
    • Duplication of effort
    • Unclear risk profile
    • High risk exposure
    Three sets of arrows, each pointing upward and arranged in an ascending stair pattern. The first, lowest set of arrows has a large blue arrow with a small green arrow veering off to the side, unaligned. The second, middle set of arrows has a large blue arrow with a medium green arrow overlaid on its center, somewhat aligned. The third, highest set of arrows has half of a large blue arrow, and the other half is a large green arrow, aligned. Business Partner
    • Increased speed of decision making
    • Aligned with business priorities
    • Optimized utility of people, financial, and time resources
    • Monitors and mitigates risk and compliance issues

    Redesign IT governance in accordance with COBIT and proven good practice

    Info-Tech’s approach to governance redesign is rooted in COBIT, the world-class and open-source IT governance standard.

    COBIT begins with governance, EDM – Evaluate, Direct, and Monitor.

    We build upon these standards with industry best practices and add a practical approach based on member feedback.

    This blueprint will help you optimize your governance framework.

    The upper image is a pyramid with 'Info-Tech Insights, Analysts, Experts, Clients' on top, 'IT Governance Best Practices' in the middle, and 'COBIT 5' on the bottom, indicating that Info-Tech's Governance guidance is based in COBIT 5. 'This project will focus on EDM01, Set/Maintain Governance Framework.'

    Use Info-Tech’s approach to implementing an IT governance redesign

    The four phases of Info-Tech’s governance redesign methodology will help you drive greater value for the business.

    1. Align IT With the Business Context
      Align IT’s direction with the business using the Statement of Business Context Template.
    2. Assess the Current Governance Framework
      Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of current governance using the Current State Assessment of IT Governance.
    3. Redesign the Governance Framework
      Build a redesign of the governance framework using the Future State Design for IT Governance tool.
    4. Implement Governance Redesign
      Create an IT Governance Implementation Plan to jumpstart the communication of the redesign and set it up for success.
    5. Continuously assess your governance framework to ensure alignment.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s insights for an optimal redesign process

    Common Pitfalls

    Info-Tech Solutions

    Phase 1

    There must be an active understanding of the current and future state of the business for governance to address the changing needs of the business. –›
    1. Make the case for a governance redesign.
    2. Create a custom communication plan to facilitate support.
    3. Establish a collectively agreed upon statement of business context.

    Phase 2

    Take a proactive approach to revising your governance framework. Understand why you are making decisions before actually making them. –›
    1. Conduct the IT governance current state assessment.
    2. Create governance guidelines for redesign.

    Phase 3

    Keep the current and future goals in sight to build an optimized governance framework that maintains the minimum bar of oversight required. –›
    1. Redesign the future state of IT governance in your organization.

    Phase 4

    Don’t overlook the politics and culture of your organization in redesigning your governance framework. –›
    1. Rationalize steps in an implementation plan.
    2. Outline a communication strategy to navigate culture and politics.
    3. Construct an executive presentation to facilitate transparency for the governing framework.

    Leverage both COBIT and Info-Tech-defined metrics to evaluate the success of your redesign

    These metrics will help you determine the extent to which your governance is supporting your business goals, and whether the governance in place promotes business-IT fusion.

    Benefits Realization

    1. Percent of IT-enabled investments where benefit realization is monitored through the full economic life. (COBIT-defined metric)
    2. Percent of enterprise strategic goals and requirements supported by IT strategic goals. (COBIT-defined metric)
    3. Percent of IT services where expected benefits are realized or exceeded. (COBIT-defined metric)

    Resources

    1. Satisfaction level of business and IT executives with IT-related costs and capabilities. (COBIT-defined metric)
    2. Average time to turn strategic IT objectives into an agreed-upon and approved initiative. (COBIT-defined metric)
    3. Number of deviations from resource utilization plan.

    Risks

    1. Number of security incidents causing financial loss, business disruption, or public embarrassment. (COBIT-defined metric)
    2. Number of issues related to non-compliance with policies. (COBIT-defined metric)
    3. Percentage of enterprise risk assessments that include IT-related risks. (COBIT-defined metric)
    4. Frequency with which the risk profile is updated. (COBIT-defined metric)

    Stakeholders

    1. Change in score of alignment with the scope of the planned portfolio of programs and services (using CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic).
    2. Percent of executive management roles with clearly defined accountabilities for IT decisions. (COBIT-defined metric)
    3. Percent of business stakeholders satisfied that IT service delivery meets agreed-upon service levels. (COBIT-defined metric)
    4. Percent of key business stakeholders involved in IT governance.

    Capture monetary value by establishing and monitoring key metrics

    While benefits of governance are often qualitative, the power of effective governance can be demonstrated through quantitative financial gains.

    Scenario 1 – Realizing Expected Gains

    Scenario 2 – Mitigating Unexpected Losses

    Metric

    Track the percentage of initiatives that provided expected ROI year over year. The optimization of the governance framework should generate an increase in this metric. Monitor this metric for continuous improvement opportunities. Track the financial losses related to non-compliance with policy or regulation. An optimized governance framework should better protect the organization against policy breach and mitigate the possibility and impact of “rogue” actions.

    Formula

    ROI of all initiatives / number of initiatives in year 2 – ROI of all initiatives / number of initiatives in year 1

    The expected result should be positive.

    Cost of non-compliance in year 2 – cost of non-compliance in year 1

    The expected result should be negative.

    Redesign IT governance to achieve optimal business outcomes

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Healthcare
    Source: Info-Tech

    Situation

    The IT governance had been structured based on regulations and had not changed much since it was put in place. However, a move to become an integration and service focused organization had moved the organization into the world of web services, Agile development, and service-oriented architecture.

    Complication

    The existing process was well defined and entrenched, but did not enable rapid decision making and Agile service delivery. This was due to the number of committees where initiatives were reviewed, made worse by their lack of approval authority. This led to issues moving initiatives forward in the timeframes required to meet clinician needs and committed governmental deadlines.

    In addition, the revised organizational mandate had created confusion regarding the primary purpose and function of the organization and impacted the ability to prioritize spend on a limited budget.

    To complicate matters further, there was political sensitivity tied to the membership and authority of different governing committees.

    Result:

    The CEO decided that a project would be initiated by the Enterprise Architecture Group, but managed by an external consultant to optimize and restructure the governance within the organization.

    The purpose of using the external consultant was to help remove internal politics from the discussion. This allowed the organization to establish a shared view of the organization’s revised mission and IT’s role in its execution.

    The exercise led to the removal of one governing committee and the merger of two others, modification to committee authority and membership, and a refined decision-making context that was agreed to by all parties.

    The redesigned governance process led to a 30% reduction in cycle time from intake to decision, and a 15% improvement in alignment of IT spend with strategic priorities.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Redesign IT Governance – project overview

    Align IT With the Business Context

    Assess the Current State

    Redesign Governance

    Implement Redesign

    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Identify Stakeholders
    1.2 Make the Case
    1.3 Present to Executives
    1.4 Customize Comm. Plan
    1.5 Review Documents
    1.6 Analyze Frameworks
    1.7 Conduct Brainstorming
    1.8 Finalize the SoBC
    2.1 Create Committee Profiles

    2.2 Build a Governance Structure Map

    2.3 Establish Governance Guidelines

    3.1 Build Governance Structure Map

    3.2 Create Committee Profiles

    3.3 Leverage Process Specific Governance Blueprints

    4.1 Identify Next Steps for the Redesign

    4.2 Establish Communication Plan

    4.3 Lead Executive Presentation

    Guided Implementations

    • Move towards gaining buy-in from the business if necessary. Then identify the major components of the SoBC.
    • Review SoBC and discuss a strategy to engage key stakeholders in the redesign.
    • Explore the process of identifying the four major elements of governance. Build guidelines for the future state.
    • Review the current state of governance and discuss the implications and guidelines.
    • Identify the changes that will need to be made.
    • Review redesigned structure and authority.
    • Review redesigned process and membership.
    • Discuss and review the implementation plan.
    • Prepare the presentation for the executives. Provide support on any final questions.
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Align IT with the business context
    Module 2:
    Assess the current governance framework
    Module 3:
    Redesign the governance framework
    Module 4:
    Implement governance redesign
    Phase 1 Results:
    • Align IT’s direction with the business.
    Phase 2 Results:
    • Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of current governance and build guidelines.
    Phase 3 Results:
    • Establish a redesign of the governance framework.
    Phase 4 Results:
    • Create an implementation plan for the communication of the redesign.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1

    Workshop Day 2

    Workshop Day 3

    Workshop Day 4

    Workshop Day 5

    Task – Identify the Need for Governance Task – Align IT with the Business Context Task – Assess the Current State Task – Redesign Governance Framework Task – Implement Governance Redesign

    Activities

    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders
    • 1.2 Make the Case
    • 1.3 Present to Executives
    • 1.4 Customize Communication Plan
    • 2.1 Review Documents
    • 2.2 Analyze Frameworks
    • 2.3 Conduct Brainstorming
    • 2.4 Finalize the Statement of Business Context
    • 3.1 Create Committee Profiles
    • 3.2 Build Governance Structure Map
    • 3.3 Establish Governance Guidelines
    • 4.1 Build Governance Structure Map
    • 4.2 Create Committee Profiles
    • 4.3 Leverage Process Specific Governance Blueprints
    • 5.1 Identify Next Steps for the Redesign
    • 5.2 Establish Communication Plan
    • 5.3 Lead Executive Presentation

    Deliverables

    1. Make the Case Presentation
    2. Stakeholder Power Map Template
    3. Communication Plan
    1. PESTLE Analysis
    2. SWOT Analysis
    3. Statement of Business Context
    1. Current State Assessment
    1. Future State Design Tool
    2. IT Governance Terms of Reference
    1. Implementation Plan
    2. Executive Presentation

    Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results

    PHASE 1

    Align IT With the Business Context

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Align IT With the Business Context

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2-4 weeks
    Step 1.1: Identify the Need for Governance Step 1.2: Create the Statement of Business Context
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Understand the core concepts of IT governance.
    • Create a strategy for key stakeholder support.
    • Identify key communication milestones.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Identify and discuss the process of engaging senior leadership.
    • Review findings from business analysis.
    • Review diagnostic and interview outcomes.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Identify stakeholders.
    • Make the case to executives.
    • Build a communication plan.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Review business documents.
    • Review the PESTLE and SWOT analyses.
    • Analyze outcomes of CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic.
    • Complete the Statement of Business Context.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Make the Case for an IT Governance Redesign
    • Stakeholder Power Map Template
    • IT Governance Stakeholder Communication Planning Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • PESTLE Analysis Template
    • Business SWOT Analysis Template
    • CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic
    • Statement of Business Context Template

    Phase 1: Align IT With the Business Context

    1 2 3 4
    Align IT With the Business Context Assess the Current Governance Framework Redesign the Governance Framework Implement Governance Redesign

    Activities:

    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders
    • 1.2 Customize Make the Case Presentation
    • 1.3 Present to Executives
    • 1.4 Customize Communication Plan
    • 1.5 Review Business Documents
    • 1.6 Analyze Business Frameworks
    • 1.7 Conduct Brainstorming Efforts
    • 1.8 Finalize the SoBC

    Outcomes:

    • Make the case for a governance redesign.
    • Create a custom communication plan to facilitate support for the redesign process.
    • Establish a collectively agreed upon statement of business context.

    Set up business-driven governance by gaining an understanding of the business context

    Fuse IT with the business by establishing a common context of what the business is trying to achieve. Align IT with the business by developing an understanding of the business state, creating a platform to build a well-aligned governance framework.

    "IT governance philosophies can no longer be a ‘black box’ … IT governance can no longer be ignored by senior executives." (Iskandar and Mohd Salleh, University of Malaya, International Journal of Digital Society)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Get consensus on the changing state of business. There must be an active understanding of the current and future state of the business for governance to address the changing needs of the business.

    The source for the governance redesign directive will dictate the route for attaining leadership buy-in

    "Without an awareness of IT governance, there is no chance that it will be followed … The higher the percentage of managers who can describe your governance, the higher the governance performance." (Jeanne Ross, Director, MIT Center for Information Systems Research)

    The path you will choose for your governance buy-in tactics will be based on the original directive to redesign governance.

    Enterprise Directive.
    In the case that the redesign is an enterprise directive, jump directly to building a communication plan.

    IT Directive.
    In the case that the redesign is an IT directive, make the case to get the business on board.

    Use the Make the Case presentation template to get buy-in from the business

    Supporting Tool icon 1A Convince senior management to redesign governance

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Identify Stakeholders
      Determine which business stakeholders will be impacted or involved in the redesign process.
    2. Customize the Presentation
      Identify specific pain points regarding IT-business alignment.
    3. Present to Executives
      Present the make the case presentation.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Use the Make the Case customizable deliverable to lead a boardroom-quality presentation proving the specific need for senior executive involvement in the governance redesign.

    Determine which business stakeholders will be impacted or involved in the redesign process

    Associated Activity icon 1.1 Identify the stakeholders for the IT governance redesign

    It is vital to identify key business and IT stakeholders before the IT governance redesign has begun. Consider whose input and influence will be necessary in order to align with the business context and redesign the governance framework accordingly.

    Business

    • Shareholders
    • Board
    • Chief Executive Officer
    • –› Example: the CEO wants to know how IT will support the achievement of strategic corporate objectives.
    • Chief Financial Officer
    • Chief Operating Officer
    • Business Executives
    • Business Process Owners
    • Strategy Executive Committee
    • Chief Risk Officer
    • Chief Information Security Officer
    • Architecture Board
    • Enterprise Risk Committee
    • Head of Human Resources
    • Compliance
    • Audit

    IT

    • Chief Information Officer
    • –› Example: the CIO would like validation from the business with regards to prioritization criteria.
    • Head Architect
    • Head of Development
    • Head of IT Operations
    • Head of IT Administration
    • Service Manager
    • Information Security Manager
    • Business Continuity Manager
    • Privacy Officer

    External

    • Government Agency
    • –› Example: some governments mandate that organizations develop and implement an IT governance framework.
    • Audit Firm

    Build a power map to prioritize stakeholders

    Associated Activity icon 1.1 2-4 hours

    Stakeholders may have competing concerns – that is, concerns that cannot be addressed with one solution. The governance redesigner must prioritize their time to address the concerns of the stakeholders who have the most power and who are most impacted by the IT governance redesign.

    Draw a stakeholder power map to visualize the importance of various stakeholders and their concerns, and to help prioritize your time with those stakeholders.

    • Power: How much influence does the stakeholder have? Enough to drive the project forward or into the ground?
    • Involvement: How interested is the stakeholder? How much involvement does the stakeholder have in the project already?
    • Impact: To what degree will the stakeholder be impacted? Will this significantly change the job?
    • Support: Is the stakeholder a supporter of the project? Neutral? A resistor?
    A power map of stakeholders with two axes and four quadrants. The vertical axis is 'Low Power' on the bottom and 'High Power' on top. The horizontal axis is 'Low Involvement' on the left and 'High Involvement' on the right. The top left quadrant is labeled 'Keep satisfied' and contains 'CFO', a Strongly Impacted Resistor, and 'COO', a Weakly Impacted Resistor. The top right quadrant is labeled 'Key Players' and contains 'CIO' and 'CEO', both Strongly Impacted Supporters. The bottom left quadrant is labeled 'Minimal effort' and contains 'Marketing Head', a Weakly Impacted Neutral, and 'Production Head', a Moderately Impacted Neutral. The bottom right quadrant is labeled 'Keep informed' and contains 'Director of Ops', a Strongly Impacted Supporter, and 'Chief Architect', a Strongly Impacted Neutral.

    Download Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Power Map Template to help you visualize your key stakeholders.

    Build a power map to prioritize stakeholders

    Associated Activity icon 1.1

    It is important to identify who will be impacted and who has power, and the level of involvement they have in the governance redesign. If they have power, will be highly impacted, and are not involved in governance, you have already lost – because they will resist later. You need to get them involved early.

    • Focus on key players – relevant stakeholders who have high power, are highly impacted, and should have a high level of involvement.
    • Engage the stakeholders that are impacted most and have the power to impede the success of redesigning IT governance.
      • For example, if a CFO, who has the power to block project funding, is heavily impacted and not involved, the IT governance redesign success will be put at risk.
    • Some stakeholders may have influence over others so you should focus your efforts on the influencer rather than the influenced.
      • For example, if an uncooperative COO is highly influenced by the Director of Operations, it is recommended to engage the latter.

    The same power map of stakeholders with two axes and four quadrants, but with focus points and notes. The vertical axis is 'Low Power' on the bottom and 'High Power' on top. The horizontal axis is 'Low Involvement' on the left and 'High Involvement' on the right. The top left quadrant is labeled 'Keep satisfied' and contains 'CFO', a Strongly Impacted Resistor, and 'COO', a Weakly Impacted Resistor, as well as a dotted line moving 'CFO' to the top right quadrant with the note 'A) needs to be engaged'. The top right quadrant is labeled 'Key Players' and contains 'CIO' and 'CEO', both Strongly Impacted Supporters, as well as the new required position of 'CFO'. The bottom left quadrant is labeled 'Minimal effort' and contains 'Marketing Head', a Weakly Impacted Neutral, and 'Production Head', a Moderately Impacted Neutral. The bottom right quadrant is labeled 'Keep informed' and contains 'Director of Ops', a Strongly Impacted Supporter, and 'Chief Architect', a Strongly Impacted Neutral, as well as a line from 'Director of Ops' to 'COO' in the top left quadrant with a note that reads 'B) Influences'.

    Identify specific pain points regarding business-IT alignment

    Associated Activity icon 1.2 2-4 hours

    INPUT: Signal Questions, CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic

    OUTPUT: List of Categorized Pain Points

    Materials: Make the Case for an IT Governance Redesign

    Participants: Identified Key Business Stakeholders

    1. Consider Signals for Redesign
      Refer to the Executive Brief for questions to identify pain points related to governance.
      • Benefits Realization
      • Resources
      • Risks
      • Stakeholders
    2. Conduct CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic
      Assess the current state of alignment between the CIO and the major stakeholders of the organization.

    See the CEO-CIO Alignment Program for more information.

    Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostic

    Why CEO-CIO Alignment?

    The CEO-CIO Alignment Program helps you understand the gaps between what the CEO wants for IT and what the CIO wants for IT. The program will also evaluate the current state of IT, from a strategic and tactical perspective, based on the CEO’s opinion.

    The CEO-CIO Alignment Program helps to:

    • Evaluate how the executive leadership currently feels about the IT organization’s performance along the following dimensions:
      • IT budgeting and staffing
      • IT strategic planning
      • Degree of project success
      • IT-business alignment
    • Answer the question, “What does the CEO want from IT?”
    • Understand the CEO’s perception of and vision for IT in the business.
    • Define the current and target roles for IT. Understanding IT’s current and target roles, in the eyes of the CEO, is crucial to creating IT governance. By focusing the IT governance on achieving the target role, you will ensure that the senior leadership will support the implementation of the IT governance.

    To conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment Program, follow the steps outlined below.

    1. Select the senior business leader to participate in the program. While Info-Tech suggests that the CEO participate, you might have other senior stakeholders who should be involved.
    2. Send the survey link to your senior business stakeholder and ensure the survey’s completion.
    3. Complete your portion of the survey.
    4. Hold a meeting to discuss the results and document your findings.

    See the CEO-CIO Alignment Program for more information.

    Present the “Make the Case” for IT governance redesign

    Associated Activity icon 1.3 30 minutes

    1. Review Finalized Stakeholder List
      Consolidate a list of the most important and impactful stakeholders who need further convincing to participate in the governance redesign and implementation.
    2. Present the Deck
      Include the information gathered throughout the discovery into the presentation deck and hold a meeting to review the findings.

    Business

    • Shareholders
    • Board
    • Chief Executive Officer
    • Chief Financial Officer
    • Chief Operating Officer
    • Business Executives
    • Strategy Executive Committee
    • Chief Risk Officer
    • Architecture Board
    • Enterprise Risk Committee
    • Head of Human Resources
    • Compliance

    IT

    • Chief Information Officer

    External

    • Government Agency
    • Audit Firm

    Use the Make the Case for an IT Governance Redesign template for more information.

    Create a custom communication plan to facilitate support for the redesign process

    Supporting Tool icon 1B Create a plan to engage the key stakeholders

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Identify Stakeholders
      Determine which business stakeholders will be involved (refer to Activity 1.1).
    2. Customize Communication Plan
      Follow up with individual communication plans.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Create personal communication plans to provide individualized engagement, instead of assuming that everyone will respond to the same communication style.

    Download the IT Governance Stakeholder Communication Planning Tool for more information.

    Create a communication plan to engage key stakeholders

    Associated Activity icon 1.4 1 hour
    1. Input Stakeholders
      Determine which business stakeholders will be involved (refer to Activity 1.1). Then, insert their position on the power map, the rationale to inform them, the timing of communications, and what inputs they will be needed to provide.

      Stakeholder role

      Power map position

      Why inform them

      When to inform them

      What we need from them

      Chief Executive Officer
      Chief Financial Officer
      Chief Operating Officer
    2. Identify Communication Strategy
      Outline the most effective communication plan for that stakeholder. Identify how to best communicate to the stakeholders to make sure they are appropriately engaged in the redesign process.

      Vehicle

      Audience

      Purpose

      Frequency

      Owner

      Distribution

      Level of detail

      Status Report IT Managers Project progress and deliverable status Weekly CIO, John Smith Email Details for milestones, deliverables, budget, schedule, issues, next steps
      Status Report Marketing Manager Project progress Monthly CIO, John Smith Email High-level detail for major milestone update and impact to the marketing unit

    Establish a collectively agreed upon statement of business context (SoBC)

    Supporting Tool icon 1C Document the mutual understanding of the business context

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Review Business Documents
      Review business documents from broad areas of the business to assess the business context.
    2. Analyze Business Frameworks
      Analyze business frameworks to articulate the current and projected future business context.
    3. Brainstorm With Key Stakeholders
      Conduct stakeholder brainstorming efforts to gain insights from key business stakeholders.
    4. Finalize the SoBC
      Document and sign the SoBC with identified stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Use the Statement of Business Context customizable deliverable as a point of reference that will guide the direction of the governance redesign.

    Use the Statement of Business Context to identify the critical information needed to guide governance

    Components of the SoBC

    1. Mission
      • Who are you as an organization?
      • Who are your internal and external customers?
      • What are your core business functions?

      Example (Higher Education)
      Nurture global leaders and provide avenues for intellectual exploration.
    2. Vision
      • Is your vision statement future-facing?
      • Is your vision statement concise?
      • Is your vision statement achievable?
      • Does your vision statement involve change?

      Example
      Be a catalyst for creating the future leaders of tomorrow through dynamic and immersive educational experiences. The university will be recognized for being a prestigious innovative research hub and educational institution.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Statement of Business Context Template with the Mission and Vision Statements.

    Use the Statement of Business Context to identify the critical information needed to guide governance (cont.)

    More Components of the SoBC

    1. Strategic Objectives
      • What are the strategic initiatives of the organization?
      • Do you have a roadmap to accomplish your mission?
      • What are the primary goals of senior leaders for the organization?

      Example
      1. Meeting government regulation
      2. Revenue generation
      3. Top research quality
      4. High teaching quality
    Sample of Info-Tech's Statement of Business Context Template with Strategic Objectives.
    1. State of Business
      • Consider what the current state and future state are.
      • How does the operating model used define the state?
      • How do industry trends shape the business?
      • What internal changes impact the business model?

      Example
      Our organization aims to make quick decisions and navigate the fast-paced industry with agility, uniting the development and operational sides of the business.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Statement of Business Context Template with State of the Business.

    Leverage core concepts to determine the direction of the organization’s state of the business

    1. Mission
    2. Vision
    3. Strategic Objectives
    –›
    1. State of Business

    2. Work through if your organization’s state is small vs. large, public vs. private, and lean vs. DevOps vs. traditional.

    Small

    IT team is 30 people or less.

    Large

    IT team is more than 30 people.

    Public

    Wholly or partly funded by the government.

    Private

    No government funding is provided.
    Lean: The business aims to eliminate any waste of resources (time, effort, or money) by removing steps in the business process that do not create value. Devops/Agile: Our organization aims to make quick decisions and navigate the fast-paced industry with agility. Uniting the development and operational sides of the business. Hierarchical: Departments in the organization are siloed by function. The organization is top-down and hierarchical, and takes more time with decision making.

    ‹– Multi-State (any combination) –›

    Review business documents to assess business context

    Associated Activity icon 1.5 2-4 hours

    INPUT: Strategic Documents, Financial Documents

    OUTPUT: Mission, Vision, Strategic Objectives

    Materials: Corporate Documents

    Participants: IT Governance Redesign Owner

    Start assessing the state of the business context by leveraging easily accessible information. Many organization have strategic plans, documents, and presentations that already include a large portion of the information for the SoBC – use these sources first.

    Instructions

    1. Strategic Documents
      Leverage your organization’s strategic documents to gain understanding of the business context.

    2. Documents to Review:
    • Corporate strategy document.
    • Business unit strategy documents.
    • Annual general reports.
  • Financial Documents
    Leverage your organization’s financial documents to gain understanding of the business context.

  • Documents to Review:
    • Look for large capital expenditures.
    • Review operating costs.
    • Business cases submitted.

    Review strategic planning documents

    Overview

    Some organizations (and business units) create an authoritative strategy document. These documents contain the organization’s corporate aspirations and outline initiatives, reorganizations, and shifts in strategy. Additionally, some documents contain strategic analysis (Porter’s Five Forces, etc.).

    Action

    • Read through any of the following:
      • Corporate strategy document
      • Business unit strategy documents
      • Annual general reports
    • Watch out for key future-looking words:
      • We will be…
      • We are planning to…

    Overt Statements

    • Corporate objectives and initiatives are often explicitly stated in these documents. Look for statements that begin with phrases such as “Our corporate objectives are…”
    • Remember that different organizations use different terminology – if you cannot find the word “goal” or “objective” then look for “pillar,” “imperative,” “theme,” etc.
    • Ask a business partner to assist if you need some help.

    Covert, Outdated, and Non-Existent Statements

    • Some corporate objectives and initiatives will be mentioned in passing and will require clarification, for example:
      “As we continue to penetrate new markets, we will be diversifying our manufacturing geography to simplify distribution.”
    • Some corporate strategies may be outdated and therefore of limited use for understanding the state of business – validate the statement to ensure it is up to date.
    • Some organizations lack a strategic plan altogether. Use stakeholder interviews to identify imperatives and validate conflicting statements before moving on.

    Review financial documentation

    Overview

    Departmental budgets highlight the new projects that will launch in the next fiscal year. The overwhelming majority of these projects will have IT implications. Additionally, identifying where the department is spending money will allow you to identify business unit initiatives and operational change.

    Action

    • Scan budgets:
      • Look for large capital expenditures
      • Review operating costs
      • Review business cases submitted
    • Look for abnormalities or changes:
      • What does an increase in spending mean?
      • Does IT need to change as a result?

    Capital Budgets

    • Capital expenditures are driven by projects, which map to corporate goals and initiatives.
    • Look for large capital expenditures and cross-reference the outflows with any project plans that have been collected.
    • If an expenditure cannot be explained by project plans, request additional information.

    Operating Budgets

    • Major changes to operating costs typically reflect changes to a business unit. Some of these changes affect IT capabilities and can be classified as corporate initiatives.
    • Changes that should be classified as corporate initiatives are expansion or contraction of a labor force, outsourcing initiatives, and significant process changes.
    • Changes that should not be classified as corporate initiatives are changes in third-party fees, consulting engagements, and changes caused by inflation or growth.

    Analyze business frameworks to articulate context

    Associated Activity icon 1.6 2-4 hours

    INPUT: Industry Research, Organizational Research, Analysis Templates

    OUTPUT: PESTLE and SWOT Analysis

    Materials: Computer or Whiteboards and Markers

    Participants: IT Governance Redesign Owner

    If corporate documents denoting the key components of the SoBC are not easily available, or do not provide all information required, refer to business analysis frameworks to discover internal and external trends that impact the mission, vision, strategic objectives, and state of the business.

    1. Conduct a PESTLE Analysis
      The PESTLE analysis will support the organization in identifying external factors that impact the business. Keep watch for trends and changes in the industry.
    2. Political

      Economic

      Social

      Technological

      Legal

      Environmental

    3. Conduct a SWOT Analysis
      The SWOT analysis will be more specific to the organization and the industry in which it operates. Identify the unique strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats for your organization.
    4. Strengths

      Weaknesses

      Opportunities

      Threats

    Conduct a PESTLE analysis

    Associated Activity icon 1.6 Conduct a PESTLE analysis
    • Break participants into teams and divide the categories amongst them:
      • Political trends
      • Economic trends
      • Social trends
      • Technological trends
      • Legal trends
      • Environmental trends
    • Have each group identify relevant trends under their respective categories. You must relate each trend back to the business by considering:
      • How does this affect my business?
      • Why do we care?
    • Use the prompt questions on the next slide to help the brainstorming process.
    • Have each team present its list and have remaining teams give feedback and additional suggestions.

    Political. Examine political factors such as taxes, environmental regulations, and zoning restrictions.

    Economic Examine economic factors such as interest rates, inflation rate, exchange rates, the financial and stock markets, and the job market.

    Social. Examine social factors such as gender, race, age, income, disabilities, educational attainment, employment status, and religion.

    Technological. Examine technological factors such as servers, computers, networks, software, database technologies, wireless capabilities, and availability of software as a service.

    Legal. Examine legal factors such as trade laws, labor laws, environmental laws, and privacy laws.

    Environmental. Examine environmental factors such as green initiatives, ethical issues, weather patterns, and pollution.

    Download Info-Tech’s PESTLE Analysis Template to help get started.

    Review these questions to help you conduct a PESTLE analysis

    For each prompt below, always try to answer the question: how does this affect my business?

    Political

    • Will a change in government (at any level) affect your organization?
    • Do inter-government or trade relations affect you?
    • Are there shareholder needs or demands that must be considered?

    Economical

    • How are your costs changing (moving off-shore, fluctuations in markets, etc.)?
    • Do currency fluctuations have an effect on your business?
    • Can you attract and pay for top-quality talent (e.g. desirable location, reasonable cost of living, changes to insurance requirements)?

    Social

    • What are the demographics of your customers or employees?
    • What are the attitudes of your customers or staff (do they require social media, collaboration, transparency of costs, etc.)?
    • What is the general lifecycle of an employee (i.e. is there high turnover)?
    • Is there a market of qualified staff?
    • Is your business seasonal?

    Technological

    • Do you require constant technology upgrades (faster network, new hardware, etc.)?
    • What is the appetite for innovation within your industry or business?
    • Are there demands for increasing data storage, quality, BI, etc.?
    • Are you looking at cloud technologies?
    • What is the stance on “bring your own device”?
    • Are you required to do a significant amount of development work in-house?

    Legal

    • Are there changes to trade laws?
    • Are there changes to regulatory requirements, e.g. data storage policies or privacy policies?
    • Are there union factors that must be considered?

    Environmental

    • Is there a push towards being environmentally friendly?
    • Does the weather have any effect on your business (hurricanes, flooding, etc.)?

    Conduct a SWOT analysis on the business

    Associated Activity icon 1.6 Conduct a business SWOT analysis

    Break the group into two teams.

    Assign team A internal strengths and weaknesses.

    Assign team B external opportunities and threats.

    • Have the teams brainstorm items that fit in their assigned grids. Use the prompt questions on the next slide to help you with your SWOT analysis.
    • Pick someone from each group to fill in the grids on the whiteboard.
    • Conduct a group discussion about the items on the list. Identify implications for IT and opportunities to innovate as you did for the other business and external drivers.
    Helpful
    to achieve the objective
    Harmful
    to achieve the objective
    Internal Origin
    attributes of the organization
    Strength Weaknesses
    External Origin
    attributes of the environment
    Opportunities Threats

    Download Info-Tech’s Business SWOT Analysis Template to help get started.

    Review these questions to help you conduct your SWOT analysis on the business

    Strengths (Internal)

    • What competitive advantage does your organization have?
    • What do you do better than anyone else?
    • What makes you unique (human resources, product offering, experience, etc.)?
    • Do you have location advantages?
    • Do you have price, cost, or quality advantages?
    • Does your organizational culture offer an advantage (hiring the best people, etc.)?

    Weaknesses (Internal)

    • What areas of your business require improvement?
    • Are there gaps in capabilities?
    • Do you have financial vulnerabilities?
    • Are there leadership gaps (succession, poor management, etc.)?
    • Are there reputational issues?
    • Are there factors that are making you lose sales?

    Opportunities (External)

    • Are there market developments or new markets?
    • Industry or lifestyle trends, e.g. move to mobile?
    • Are there geographical changes in the market?
    • Are there new partnerships or M&A opportunities?
    • Are there seasonal factors that can be used to the advantage of the business?
    • Are there demographic changes that can be used to the advantage of the business?

    Threats (External)

    • Are there obstacles that the organization must face?
    • Are there issues with respect to sourcing of staff or technologies?
    • Are there changes in market demand?
    • Are your competitors making changes that you are not making?
    • Are there economic issues that could affect your business?

    Conduct brainstorming efforts to gain insights from key business stakeholders

    Associated Activity icon 1.7 2-4 hours

    INPUT: SoBC Template

    OUTPUT: Completed SoBC

    Materials: Computer, Phone, or Other Mechanism of Connection

    Participants: CEO, CFO, COO, CMO, CHRO, and Business Unit Owners

    There are two ways to gather primary knowledge on the key components of the SoBC:

    1. Stakeholder Interviews
      Approach each individual to have a conversation about the key components of the SoBC. Go through the SoBC and fill it in together.
    2. Stakeholder Survey
      In the case that you are in a very large organization, create a stakeholder survey. Input the key components of the SoBC into an online survey maker and send it off the key stakeholders.

    Use the SoBC as the guide to both the interview and the survey. Be clear about the purpose of understanding the business context when connecting with key business stakeholders to participate in the brainstorming. This is a perfect opportunity to establish or develop a relationship with the stakeholders who will need to buy into the redesigned governance framework since it will involve and impact them significantly.

    Go directly to the information source – the key stakeholders

    Overview

    Talking to key stakeholders will allow you to get a holistic view of the business strategy. You will be able to ask follow-up questions to get a better understanding of abstract or complex concepts. Interviews also allow you to have targeted discussions with specific stakeholders who have in-depth subject-matter knowledge.

    Action

    • Talk to key stakeholders:
      • Structure focused, i.e. CEO or CFO
      • Customer focused, i.e. CMO or Head of Sales
      • Operational focused, i.e. COO
      • Lower-level employees or managers
    • Listen for key pains that IT could alleviate.

    Overcome the Unstructured Nature of Interviews

    • Interviewees will often explicitly state objectives and initiatives.
    • However, interviews are less formal and less structured than objective-oriented strategy documents. Objectives are often stated using informal language.
      “We’re talking rev gen here. That’s the name of the game. If we can get a foothold in India, there’s huge upside potential.” (VP Marketing)
    • Further analysis might translate this into a corporate imperative: increase revenue by growing our market share in India to 8% by January of next year.
    • If an imperative is unclear, ask the stakeholder for more detail.
    • Understand how key stakeholders evaluate, direct, and monitor their own areas of the business; this will give you insight as to their style.

    Receive final sign-off to proceed with developing the IT governance redesign

    Associated Activity icon 1.8 30 minutes

    Document any project assumptions or constraints. Before proceeding with the IT governance activities, validate the statement of business context with senior stakeholders. When consensus has been reached, have them sign the final page of the document.

    How to ensure sign-off:

    • Schedule a meeting with the senior stakeholders and conduct a review of the document. This meeting presents a great opportunity to deliver your interpretation of management expectations and make any modifications.
    • Obtaining stakeholder approval in person ensures there is no miscommunication or misunderstandings around the tasks that need to be accomplished to develop a successful IT governance.
    • This is an iterative process; if senior stakeholders have concerns over certain aspects of the document, revise and review again.
    • Final sign-off should only take place when mutual understanding has been reached.

    Download the SoBC Template and complete for final approval.

    Info-Tech Tip

    In most circumstances, you should have the SoBC validated with the following stakeholders:

    • CIO
    • CEO
    • CFO
    • Business Unit Leaders

    Understand the business context to set the foundation for governance redesign

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Healthcare
    Source: Info-Tech

    Challenge

    The new business direction to become an integrator shifted focus to faster software iteration and on enabling integration and translation technologies, while moving away from creating complete, top-to-bottom IT solutions to be leveraged by clinicians and patients.

    Internal to the IT organization, this created a different in perspective on what was important to prioritize: foundational elements, web services, development, or data compliance issues. There was no longer agreement on which initiatives should move forward.

    Solution

    A series of mandatory meetings were held with key decision makers and SMEs within the organization in order to re-orient everyone on the overall purpose, goals, and outcomes of the organization.

    All attendees were asked to identify what they saw as the mission and vision of the organization.

    Finally, clinicians and patient representatives were brought in to describe how they were going to use the services the organization was providing and how it would enable better patient outcomes.

    Results

    Identifying the purpose of the work the IT organization was doing and how the services were going to be used realigned the different perspectives in the context of the healthcare outcomes they enabled.

    This activity provided a unifying view of the purpose and the state of the business. Understanding the business context prepared the organization to move forward with the governance redesign.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1

    Sample of activity 1.1 'Determine which business stakeholders will be impacted or involved in the redesign process'. Identify Relevant Stakeholders

    Build a list of relevant stakeholders and identify their position on the stakeholder power map.

    1.4

    Sample of activity 1.4 'Create a communication plan to engage key stakeholders'. Communication Plan

    Build customized communication plans to engage the key stakeholders in IT governance redesign.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.7

    Sample of activity 1.7 'Review business documents to assess business context'. Gather Business Information

    Review business documents, leverage business analysis tools, and brainstorm with key executives to document the Statement of Business Context.

    1.8

    Sample of activity 1.8 'Receive final sign-off to proceed with developing the IT Governance redesign'. Finalize the Statement of Business Context

    Get final approval and acceptance on the Statement of Business Context that will guide your redesign.

    Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results

    PHASE 2

    Assess the Current Governance Framework

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Assess the Current Governance Framework

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 2.1: Outline the Current State AssessmentStep 2.2: Review the Current State Assessment
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Connect the current business state identified in Phase 1 with the current state of governance.
    • Identify the key elements of current governance.
    • Begin building the structure and committee profiles.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Review the current governing bodies that were identified.
    • Review the current structure that was identified.
    • Determine the strengths, weaknesses, and guidelines from the implications in the current state assessment.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Identify stakeholders.
    • Make the case to executives.
    • Build a communication plan.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create committee profiles.
    • Build governance structure map.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Current State Assessment of IT Governance
    With these tools & templates:
    • Current State Assessment of IT Governance

    Phase 2: Assess the Current Governance Framework

    1 2 3 4
    Align IT With the Business Context Assess the Current Governance Framework Redesign the Governance Framework Implement Governance Redesign

    Activities:

    • 2.1 Create Committee Profiles
    • 2.2 Build a Governance Structure Map
    • 2.3 Establish Governance Guidelines

    Outcomes:

    • Use the Current State Assessment of IT Governance to determine governance guidelines.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t be passive; take action! Take an active approach to revising your governance framework. Understand why you are making decisions before actually making them.

    Explore the current governance that exists within your organization

    Your current governance framework will give you a strong understanding of the way the key stakeholders in your business currently view IT governance.

    "Much of the focus of governance today has been on the questions:
    • Are we doing [things] the right way?
    • And are we getting them done well?"
    –› "We need to shift to…
    • Are we doing the right things?
    • Are we getting the benefits?
    • What are the outcomes?
    • What do we want to achieve?
    • How do we make intelligent decisions about what will help us achieve those outcomes?"
    (John Thorp, Author of The Information Paradox)

    Leverage this understanding of IT governance to determine where governance is occurring and how it transpires.

    Conduct a current state assessment

    Supporting Tool icon 2A Assess the current governance framework

    Use this tool to critically assess each governing body to determine the areas of improvement that are necessary in order to achieve optimal business results.

    1. Identify All Governing Bodies
      Some bodies govern intentionally, and some govern through habit and practice. Outline all bodies that take on an element of governance.
    2. Create a Governance Structure Map
      Configure the structural relationships for the governing bodies using the structure map.
    3. Reveal Strengths and Weaknesses
      Identify the strengths and weaknesses of the governance structure, authority definitions, processes, and membership.
    4. Establish Governance Guidelines
      Based on the SoBC, express clear and applicable guidelines to improve on the weaknesses while retaining the strengths of your governance framework.

    Download the Current State Assessment of IT Governance to work toward these outcomes

    Conduct a current state assessment to identify governance guidelines

    Supporting Tool icon 2A Assess the current governance framework

    How to use the Current State Assessment of IT Governance deliverable: Follow the steps below to create a cohesive understanding of the current state of IT governance and the challenges that the current system poses.

    Part A – Committee Profiles

    1. Identify Governing Bodies
    2. Leverage Committee Templates
    3. Create Committee Profiles
      Use the Committee Profile Template

    Part B – Structure Map

    1. Assess Inputs and Outputs to Express Structural Relationships
    2. Create Structure Map
      Use the Governance Structure Map

    Part C – Governance Guidelines

    1. Choose Operating Model Template
    2. Identify Strengths and Weaknesses
    3. Establish Governance Guidelines
      Use the Governance Guideline Template

    What makes up the “governance framework”?

    There are four major elements of the governance framework:

    1. Structure
      Structural relationships are shown by mapping the connections between committees.
    2. Authority
      Each committee will have a purpose and area of decision making that it is accountable for.
    3. Process
      The process includes the inputs, outputs, and activities required for the committee to function.
    4. Membership The individuals or roles who sit on each committee. Take into account members’ knowledge, capability, and political influence.

    Create governing board or committee profiles

    Supporting Tool icon 2A.1 Assess the current governance framework

    Part A – Committee Profiles

    1. Identify Governing Bodies

      Establish where governance happens and who is governing. For different organizations, the governance framework will contain a variety of governing bodies or people. Use a list format to identify governing bodies that exist in your organization.
    2. Leverage Committee Templates

      Use the templates provided. Create a profile for each governing body that currently operates in your IT governance framework as listed in step 1.
    3. Create Committee Profiles

      Identify what they are governing and how they are governing.
      Using the profiles created in step 2, identify each body’s membership roles, purpose, decision areas, inputs, and outputs. Refer to the example text in the template to guide you, but feel free to adjust the text to reflect the reality of your governing body. Screenshot of the 'Committee Template - Executive Management Committee'.
      Consider the following domains of governance:
      (refer to Executive Brief)
      • Benefits realization
      • Risks
      • Resources
      Refer to our examples for some common governing bodies.

    Consistently define the components of governance in the committee profiles

    Membership

    Membership Roles
    Insert information here that reflects who the individuals are that sit on that governing body and what their role is. Include other important information about the individuals’ knowledge, skills, or capabilities that are relevant.

    Authority

    Purpose
    Define why the committee was established in the first place.

    Decision Areas
    Explain the specific areas of decision making this group is responsible for overseeing.

    Process

    Inputs
    Consider the information and materials that are needed to make decisions.

    Outputs
    Describe the outcomes of the committee. Think about decisions that were made through the governance process.

    Screenshot of the components of governance section from the 'Committee Template'.

    Map out relationships on the Governance Map

    Supporting Tool icon 2A.2 Assess the current governance framework

    Part B – Structure Map

    Structure
    1. Assess Inputs and Outputs

      Governing Bodies

      Inputs

      Outputs

      Committee #1
      Committee #2
      Committee #3
      CFO
      IT Director
      CIO
      To understand relationships between governing bodies, list the inputs and outputs for each unique committee that rely on other committees in the table provided.
    2. Create Structure Map
      Sample of the 'Current State Structure Map'. Using the outline provided, create your own governance structure map to represent the way the governing bodies interact and feed into each other. This is crucial to ensure that the governing structure is streamlined. It will ensure that communication occurs efficiently and that there are no barriers to making decisions swiftly.

    Outline the governance structure in the governance structure map

    Associated Activity icon 2.2 30 minutes
    The 'Current State Structure Map' from the last slide, but with added description. There are three tiers of groups. At the bottom is 'Run', described as 'The lowest level of governance will be an oversight of more specific initiatives and capabilities within IT.' 'Design and Build', described as 'The second tier of groups will oversee prioritization of a certain area of governance as well as second-tier decisions that feed into strategic decisions.' At the top is 'Strategy', described as 'These groups will focus on decisions that directly connect to the strategic direction of the organization.' The specific groups laid out in the map are 'Risk and Compliance Committee' which straddle the line between 'Run' and 'Design and Build', 'Portfolio Review Board' and 'IT Steering Committee (ITSC)' both of which straddle the line between 'Design and Build' and 'Strategy', 'Executive Management Committee (EMC)' which is in 'Strategy', and 'Other' in all tiers.

    Identify strengths and weaknesses of the governance framework

    Supporting Tool icon 2A.3 Assess the current governance framework

    Part C – Governance Guidelines

    1. Choose Business State Template Choose the template that represents the identified future state of business in the Statement of Business Context. Mini sample of the 'State of Business' table from the 'Statement of Business Context'.
    2. Identify Strengths and Weaknesses Input the major strengths and weaknesses of your governance that were highlighted in the brainstorming activity. Mini sample of a Strengths and Weaknesses table.
    3. Establish Governance Guidelines Draw your own implications from the strength and weaknesses that will drive the design of your governance in its future state. These guidelines should be concise and easy to implement. Mini sample of an expanded Strengths and Weaknesses table including a row for 'Implication/Guideline'. Note: Refer to the example guidelines in the Current State Assessment of IT Governance after you have considered your own specific guidelines. The examples are supplementary for your convenience.

    Distinguish your business state from the others to ensure implications act as accurate guidelines

    Business State Options

    1

    Small

    IT team is 30 people or less.

    Large

    IT team is more than 30 people.

    2

    Public

    Wholly or partly funded by the government.

    Private

    No government funding is provided.

    3

    Lean: The business aims to eliminate any waste of resources (time, effort, or money) by removing steps in the business process that do not create value.Devops: Our organization aims to make quick decisions and navigate the fast-paced industry with agility. Uniting the development and operational sides of the business. Hierarchical: Departments in the organization are siloed by function. The organization is top-down and hierarchical, and takes more time with decision making.

    ‹– Multi-State (any combination) –›

    Multi-State Example A: If you are small organization that is publicly funded and you are shifting towards a lean methodology, combine the implications of all those groups in a way that fits your organization.

    Multi-State Example B: Your organization is shifting from a more traditional state of operating to combining the development and operations groups. Use hierarchical implications to govern one group and DevOps implications for the other.

    Identify strengths and weaknesses of the governance framework

    Associated Activity icon 2.3 2 hours

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Input Strengths of Governance
      Include useful components of the current framework; that may include elements that are operating well, fit the future state, or are required due to regulations or statutes.
    2. Determine Weaknesses and Challenges
      Discuss the pain points of the current governance framework by looking through the lenses of structure, authority, process, or membership.

    Consider:

    • Where is governance not meeting expectations?
    • Are we doing the right things?
    • Are we getting the benefits?
    • What are the outcomes?
    • What do we want to achieve?
    • How do we make intelligent decisions about what will help us achieve those outcomes?
    *Example

    Structure

    Authority

    Process

    Membership

    Strength

    • We must maintain a legal compliance committee due to the high level of legislation in the industry
    • The ITSC gathers and prioritizes investment options, saving time for the EMC
    • The EMC only make decisions on investments that are greater than $200,000
    • The legal board has a narrow focus, allowing it to maintain its necessary purpose efficiently
    • The information flow from ITSC to the EMC allows the EMC to spend their time effectively
    • The CIO sits on the EMC and the ITSC
    • The EMC is made up of senior leadership who have stakes in all areas of the business

    Weakness

    • Wrong number (too many/little groups)
    • Relationship is misaligned (input/output problems)
    • The tier it sits on the map is misguided
    • Duplication of the same tier of decisions in different groups
    • Approval for one specific topic occurs in more than one group
    • Lack of clarity in which group makes which decisions
    • Intake – where the information is coming from is the wrong source/inaccurate
    • Time to decision (too slow)
    • Poor results of governance (redoing projects, low value)
    • There is lack of knowledge in committee membership
    • Misplaced seniority (too Jr./Sr.)
    • Lack of representation in group (breadth across the business or depth of specific area)

    Derive governance implications from strengths and weaknesses

    Associated Activity icon 2.3 2-4 hours

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Copy and paste your strengths and weaknesses from part B into the template that reflects your business state.
    2. Draw your own implications from the strengths and weaknesses that will drive the design of your governance in its future state. These guidelines should be concise and practical.
    *Example

    Structure

    Authority

    Process

    Membership

    Strength

    Weakness

    Implication / Guideline

    • Make sure that the decision-making authority for most areas are at the lower tier
    • Governing bodies should be lower in the organization
    • One overarching governing body – directing priorities
    • High authority at a lower point of the organization
    • Highest tier is responsible for major budget shifts
    • High-level tier - reporting and feed in from lower level groups
    • Prioritization and sequencing occur at the mid-tier
    • Lowest governing tiers will have direct links to the customer to allow for interaction
    • Project or initiative owner as the leader of the body

    Note: Use the examples of guidelines provided in the Current State Assessment of IT Governance to help formulate your own.

    Conduct a current state assessment to identify guidelines for the future state of governance

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Healthcare
    Source: Anonymous

    Challenge

    Over time, the organization had to create a large amount of governing committees and subcommittees in order to comply with governance frameworks applied to them and to meet regulatory compliance requirements.

    The current structure was no longer optimal to meet the newly identified mandate of the organization. However, the organization did not want to start from scratch and scrap the elements that worked, such as the dates and times that had been embedded into the organization.

    Solution

    A current state assessment was planned and executed in order to review what was currently being done and identify what could be retained and what should be added, changed, or removed to improve the governance outcomes.

    The scope involved examining how current and near-term governance needs were, or were not, met through the existing structure, bodies, and their processes.

    The organization investigated governance approaches of organizations with similar governance needs and with similar constraints to model their own.

    Results

    The outputs of this exercise included:

    • A list of effective practices and committee guidelines that could be leveraged with little to no change in the future state.
    • A list of opportunities to streamline the structure and processes.

    These guidelines were used to drive recommendations for improvements to the governance structures and processes in the organization.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    Sample of activity 2.1 'Outline the governance structure in the governance structure map'. Create Current State Structure and Profiles

    Take the time to clearly articulate the current governance framework of your organization. Outline the structure and build the committee profiles for the governing bodies in your organization.

    2.3

    Sample of activity 2.3 'Identify strengths and weaknesses of the governance framework'. Determine Strengths, Weaknesses, and Guidelines

    Evaluate the strengths of your governance framework, the weaknesses that it exhibits, and the guidelines that will help maintain the strengths and alleviate the pains.

    Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results

    PHASE 3

    Redesign the Governance Framework

    Phase 3 Guided Implementation

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Redesign the Governance Framework

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks
    Step 3.1: Understand the Redesign Process Step 3.2: Review Governance Structure Step 3.3: Review Governance Committees
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review the guidelines from the current state assessment.
    • Begin modifying the governance structure, authorities, processes, and memberships.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Determine the impact of the guidelines on the structural layout of the framework.
    • Determine the impact of the guidelines on the authority element of the framework.
    Finalize phase deliverable:
    • Determine the impact of the guidelines on the processes within the framework.
    • Determine the impact of the guidelines on the membership element of the framework.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Break down guidelines to make sure they are actionable and realistic.
    • Identify what to add, modify, or remove.
    • Review additional sources of information.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Build and review the governance structure map.
    • Identify additions, changes, or reductions in governing bodies and their areas of authority.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Use the template provided to build committee profiles for each identified committee.
    • Identify the membership, purpose, decision areas, inputs, and outputs of each.
    • Build committee charters if needed.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Current State Assessment
    • Future State Design for IT Governance
    With these tools & templates:
    • Future State Design for IT Governance
    With these tools & templates:
    • Future State Design for IT Governance
    • IT Governance Terms of Reference

    Phase 3: Redesign the Governance Framework

    1 2 3 4
    Align IT With the Business Context Assess the Current Governance Framework Redesign the Governance Framework Implement Governance Redesign

    Activities:

    • 3.1 Build a Governance Structure Map
    • 3.2 Create Committee Profiles
    • 3.3 Leverage Process-Specific Governance Blueprints

    Outcomes:

    • Use the Future State Design for IT Governance template to build the optimal governance framework for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep the current and future goals in sight to build an optimized governance framework that maintains the minimum bar of oversight required.

    Anticipate the outcomes of the Future State Design for IT Governance tool

    Supporting Tool icon 3A Redesign the governance frameworks

    Use this tool to guide your organization toward transformative outcomes gleaned from an optimized governance framework.

    1. Implement Structural Guidelines
      Determine what governing bodies to add, change, or remove from your governance structure.
    2. Create a Governance Structure Map
      Configure the structural relationships for the redesigned governing bodies using the structure map.
    3. Build Effective Committees
      Use the IT Governance Terms of Reference to build profiles for each newly created committee and to alter any existing committees.
    4. Determine Follow-up Governance Support
      Access external material on governance from other Info-Tech blueprints that will help with specific governance areas.

    Download the Future State Design for IT Governance template to work toward these outcomes.

    Use the Future State Design for IT Governance tool to create a custom governance framework for your organization

    Supporting Tool icon 3A Redesign the governance frameworks

    How to use the Future State Design for IT Governance deliverable: Follow the steps below to redesign the future state of IT governance. Use the guidelines to respond to challenges identified in the current governance framework based on the current state assessment.

    Part A – Structure Map

    Part B – Committee Profiles

    1a. Input Structural Guidelines 1b. Input Authority Guidelines 1a. Input Process Guidelines 1b. Input Member Guidelines
    2. Guiding Questions
    Do governing bodies operate at a tier that matches the guidelines?

    Do governing bodies focus on the decisions that align with the guidelines?
    2. Guiding Questions
    Do the process inputs and outputs reflect the structure and authority guidelines?

    Do governing bodies engage the right people who have the roles, capacity, and knowledge to govern?
    3. Add / Change (Tier/Authority) / Remove
    Governing Bodies – Structure
    3. Adapt / Refine
    Governing Bodies – Profiles
    4. Use the Structure Map to Show Redesign Use the IT Governance Terms of Reference for Redesign

    Connect key learnings to initiate governance redesign

    The future state design will reflect the state of business that was identified in Phase 1 along with the guidelines defined in Phase 2 to build a governance framework that promotes business-IT fusion.

    Statement of Business Context –› Current State Assessment

    Identified Future Business State

    Structure
    Authority

    Leverage the structure and authority guidelines to build the governance structure.

    Defined Governance Guidelines

    Process
    Membership

    Leverage the process and membership guidelines to build the governance committees.

    Future State Design

    Use structure and authority guidelines to build a new governance structure map

    Supporting Tool icon 3A.1 Redesign the governance frameworks

    Part A – Structure Map

    Structure
    Authority
    1a. Structural Guidelines1b. Authority Guidelines
    Input the guidelines from the current state assessment to guide the redesign.

    2. Leverage Guiding Questions

    Use the guiding questions provided to assess the needed changes.
    Guiding Questions


    Do governing bodies operate at a tier that matches the guidelines?


    Do governing bodies focus on the decisions that align with the guidelines?
    Build the “where/why” of governance. Consider at what tier each committee will reside and what area of governance will be part of its domain. Modify the current structure; do not start from scratch.

    3. Add / Change (Tier/Authority) / Remove

    Determine changes to structure or authority that will be occurring for each of the current governing bodies. Work within the current structure as much as possible.A mini sample of an 'Add/Change/Remove' table for governing bodies.

    4. Use the Structure Map to Show Redesign

    Create your own governance structure map to represent the way the governing bodies interact and feed into each other. A mini sample of the 'Current State Structure Map' from before.

    Maintain as much of the existing framework as possible in the redesign

    Associated Activity icon 3.1 2-4 hours

    Future State Design

    • Structure
    • Authority

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Keep the number of added or removed committees as low as possible, while still optimizing. The less change to the structure, the easier it will be to implement.

    Refer to the example to help guide your committee redesign.

      Determine:
    1. Do the guidelines impact committees you already have? Will you have to modify the tier or the authority of those committees?
    2. Do the guidelines require you to build a new committee to meet needs?
    3. Do the guidelines require you to remove a committee that isn’t necessary?

    All Governing Bodies

    Add

    Change

    Remove

    ITSC Structure

    Authority
    Delegate the authority of portfolio investment decisions over $200K to this body
    Portfolio Review Board This committee no longer needs to exist since its authority of portfolio investment decisions over $200K has been redelegated
    Risk and Compliance Committee Create a new governing body to address increasing risk and compliance issues that face the organization

    Outline the new governance structure in the governance structure map in the Future State Design for IT Governance tool

    Associated Activity icon 3.1 The 'Current State Structure Map' from before, but with some abbreviated terms. There are three tiers of groups. At the bottom is 'Run', described as 'The lowest level of governance will be an oversight of more specific initiatives and capabilities within IT.' 'Design and Build', described as 'The second tier of groups will oversee prioritization of a certain area of governance as well as second-tier decisions that feed into strategic decisions.' At the top is 'Strategy', described as 'These groups will focus on decisions that directly connect to the strategic direction of the organization.' The specific groups laid out in the map are 'Risk and Compliance Committee' which straddle the line between 'Run' and 'Design and Build', 'Portfolio Review Board' and 'ITSC' both of which straddle the line between 'Design and Build' and 'Strategy', 'EMC' which is in 'Strategy', and 'Other' in all tiers.

    Use process and membership guidelines along with the IT Governance Terms of Reference to build committees

    Supporting Tool icon 3A.2 Redesign the governance frameworks

    Part B – Committee Profiles

    Process
    Membership
    1a. Process Guidelines 1b. Authority Guidelines
    Input the guidelines from the current state assessment to guide the redesign.

    2. Leverage Guiding Questions

    Use the guiding questions provided to assess the needed changes.
    Guiding Questions
    Do the process inputs and outputs reflect the structure and authority guidelines?

    Do governing bodies engage the right people who have the roles, capacity, and knowledge to govern?
    Build the “what/how” of governance. Build out the process and procedures that each committee will use.

    3. Adapt / Refine Governing Body Profiles

    Using your customized guidelines, create a profile for each committee.

    We have provided templates for some common committees. To make these committee profiles reflective of your organization, use the information you have gathered in your Current State Assessment of IT Governance guidelines.

    For a more detailed approach to building out specific charters for each committee refer to the IT Governance Terms of Reference.

    A mini sample of the 'Committee Template - Executive Management Committee'.

    A mini sample of the 'IT Governance Terms of Reference'.

    Use the IT Governance Terms of Reference to establish operational procedures for governing bodies

    Associated Activity icon 3.2 3-6 hours

    Future State Design

    • Process
    • Membership

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The people on the committee matter. Governance committee membership does not have to correspond with the organizational structure, but it should correspond with the purpose and decision areas of the governance structure.

    Refer to the example to help guide your committee redesign.

      Determine:
    1. Do the guidelines alter the members needed to achieve the outcomes?
    2. Do the guidelines change the purpose and decision areas of the committee?
    3. How do the new structure’s guidelines impact the inputs and outputs of the governing body?

    Screenshot of the 'Committee Template - Executive Management Committee'.

    Add depth to the committee profiles using the IT Governance Terms of Reference

    Supporting Tool icon 3A.3 Redesign the governance frameworks

    Refer to the sections outlined below to build a committee charter for your governance committees. Four examples are provided in the tool and can be edited for your convenience. They are: Executive Management Committee, IT Steering Committee, Portfolio Review Board, and Risk and Compliance Committee.

    1. Purpose
    2. Goals
    3. Responsibilities
    4. Committee Members
    5. RACI
    6. Procedures
    7. Agenda

    Be sure to embed the domains of governance in the charters so that committees focus on the appropriate elements of benefits realization, risk optimization, and resource optimization.

    Download the IT Governance Terms of Reference for more in-depth committee charters.

    Three pillars of planning effective governance meetings

    The effectiveness of the governance is reliant on the ability to work within operational dependencies that will exist in the governance framework. Consider these questions to guide the duration, frequency, and sequencing of your governing body meetings.

    Frequency

    • What is the quantity of decisions that must be made?
    • Is a rapid or urgent response typically required?

    Duration

    • How long should your meeting run based on your meeting frequency and the volume of work to be accomplished?

    Sequencing

    • Are there other decisions that rely on the outcomes of this meeting?
    • Are there any decisions that must be made first for others to occur?
    A venn diagram of the three pillars of planning effective governance meetings, 'Frequency', 'Duration', and 'Sequencing'.

    Leverage process-specific governance blueprints

    Associated Activity icon 3.3

    If there are specific areas of IT governance that you require further support on, refer to Info-Tech’s library of DIY blueprints, Guided Implementations, and workshops for further support. We cover IT governance in the following areas:

    Enterprise Architecture Governance

    Service Portfolio Governance

    Security Governance

    Titlecard of 'Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework' blueprint. Titlecard of 'Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management' blueprint. Titlecard of 'Build a Security Governance and Management Plan' blueprint.

    Consider the challenges and solutions when identifying a multi-state reality for your business state

    A multi-state business will face unique challenges in navigating the redesign process with the goal of combining all related business states in governance.

    1. Divergent Governance Models
      Separate the governance groups that need to function differently, and bring them back together at the highest level.
    2. Reflecting the Organizational Structure
      Unlike single-state governance, multi-state organizations should model the governance framework in reflection of the organizational structure.
    3. Combining Implications
      Prioritize which implications are the most important and make sure they work first, then see what else fits (e.g. start with regulation, then insert lean guidelines).

    The multi-state business will not fit into one “box” – consider implications from the overlapping business states.

    As business needs change, ensure that you establish triggers to reassess the design of your governance framework.

    Leverage the outcomes of the Current State Assessment and Statement of Business Context to build the future state

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Healthcare
    Source: Info-Tech

    Challenge

    Identifying the committees and processes that should be in place in the target state required a lot of different inputs.

    A number of high-profile senior management team members were still resistant to the overall idea of applying governance to their initiatives since they were clinician driven.

    The approach and target state, including the implementation plan, had to be approved and built out.

    Solution

    The information pulled together from the current state assessment, including best practices and jurisdictional scans, were tied together with the updated mandate and future state, and a list of recommended improvements were documented.

    The improvements were presented to the optimization committee and the governance committee members to ensure agreement on the approach and confirm the timeline for agreed improvements.

    Results

    A future state mapping of the new committee structure was created, as well as the revised membership requirements, responsibilities, and terms of reference.

    The approved recommendations were prioritized and turned into an implementation plan, with each improvement being assigned an owner who would be responsible for driving the effort to completion.

    Integration points in other processes, like SDLC, where change would be required were highlighted and included in the implementation plan.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    Sample of activity 3.1 'Maintain as much of the existing framework as possible in the redesign'. Redesign the Governance Structure

    Identify committees that need to be added, ones that must be changed, and the no-longer-needed governing bodies in an optimized and streamlined structure. Draw it out in the governance structure map.

    3.2

    Sample of activity 3.2 'Utilize the IT Governance Terms of Reference to establish operational procedures for governing bodies'. Redesign the Governing Bodies

    Use the IT Governance Terms of Reference and the Committee Template to build a committee profile for each governing body identified. Use these activities to build out and establish the processes of the modified governing groups.

    Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results

    PHASE 4

    Implement Governance Redesign

    Phase 4 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 4: Implement Governance Redesign

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2-3 weeks
    Step 4.1: Identify Steps for Implementation Step 4.2: Finalized Implementation Plan
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Identify major steps required to implement the governance redesign.
    • Outline the components and milestones of the implementation plan.
    • Review materials needed for the executive presentation.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Review the major milestones identified in the implementation plan.
    • Discuss potential challenges and stakeholder objections.
    • Strategize for the executive presentation.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Then complete these activities…
    • Identify next steps for the redesign.
    • Establish a communication plan.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Review the implementation plan.
    • Assess any challenging milestones and build implementation strategies.
    • Finalize the executive presentation.
    With these tools & templates:
    • IT Governance Implementation Plan
    • Redesign IT Governance to Drive Optimal Business Results Executive Presentation Template
    With these tools & templates:
    • IT Governance Implementation Plan
    • Redesign IT Governance to Drive Optimal Business Results Executive Presentation Template

    Phase 4: Implement Governance Redesign

    1 2 3 4
    Align IT With the Business Context Assess the Current Governance Framework Redesign the Governance Framework Implement Governance Redesign

    Activities:

    • 4.1 Identify Next Steps for the Redesign
    • 4.2 Establish a Communication Plan
    • 4.3 Lead the Executive Presentation

    Outcomes:

    • Rationalize steps in the Implementation Plan tool.
    • Construct an executive presentation to facilitate transparency for the governing framework.

    Anticipate and overcome implementation obstacles for the redesign

    Often high-level organizational changes create challenges. We will help you break down the barriers to optimal IT governance by addressing key obstacles.

    Key Obstacles

    Solutions

    Identifying Steps The prioritization must be driven by the common view of what is important for the organization to succeed. Prioritize the IT governance next steps according to the value they are anticipated to provide to the business.
    Communicating the Redesign The redesign of IT governance will bring impactful changes to diverse stakeholders across the organization. This phase will help you plan communication strategies for the different stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t overlook the politics and culture of your organization while redesigning your governance framework.

    Create an implementation roadmap to organize a plan for the redesign

    Supporting Tool icon 4A Create an implementation and communication plan

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Identify Tasks
      Decide on the order of tasks for your implementation plan. Consider the dependencies of actions and plan the sequence accordingly.
    2. Determine Communication Method
      Identify the most appropriate and impactful method of communicating at each milestone identified in step 1.

    Download the IT Governance Implementation Plan to organize your customized implementation and communication plan.

    Screenshot of a table in the 'IT Governance Implementation Plan'.

    Outline next steps for governance redesign

    Associated Activity icon 4.1

    INPUT: Tasks Identified in the Future State Design

    OUTPUT: Identified Tasks for Implementation as Well as the Audience

    Materials: N/A

    Participants: IT Governance Redesign Owner

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Keep these questions in mind as you analyze and assess what steps to take first in the redesign implementation.

    1. What needs to happen?
      Use the identified changes from the redesign as your guiding list of tasks that need to occur. If they are larger tasks, break them down into smaller parts to make the milestones more achievable.
    2. What are the dependencies?
      Throughout the implementation of the redesign, certain tasks will need to occur to enable other tasks to be performed. Make sure to clearly identify what dependencies exist in the implementation process and clearly identify the order of the tasks.
    3. Who do the changes impact?
      Consider the groups and individuals that will be impacted by changes to the governance framework. This includes key business stakeholders, IT leaders, members of governing boards, and anyone who provides an input or requires an output from one of the committees.

    Use a big-bang approach to implement the IT governance redesign

    While there are other methods to implementing change, the big-bang approach is the most effective for governance redesign and will maintain the momentum of the change as well as the support needed to make it successful.

    Phased

    Parallel

    Big Bang

    Implementation of redesign occurs in steps over a significant period of time.

    Three arrows, each beginning where the previous one ends, separated.

    Components of the redesign are brought into the governance framework, while maintaining some of the old components.

    Three arrows, each beginning slightly after the previous one begins, overlapping.

    Implementation of redesign occurs all at once. This requires significant preparation.

    One large arrow, spanning the length of the other grouped arrows, circled to emphasize.
    • Some committees will be operating under a new structure while others are not, which will undermine the changes being made.
    • This method proliferates a lack of transparency and trust.
    • Releasing IT governance in parallel leads to members sitting on too many boards and spending too much time on governance.
    • There will be a lack of clarity on a committee’s authority.
    • This approach will lead to consistency and transparency in the new process.
    • The change will be clear and fully embedded in the organization with stronger boundaries and well-defined expectations.

    Determine the most effective and impactful communication mediums for relevant stakeholders

    Associated Activity icon 4.2 1 hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Consider the Individual or Group
      Consider the group and individuals identified in step 4.1. Determine the most appropriate mechanism for communicating with that person or group. Keep in mind: If they are local, how much influence they have and if they are already engaged in the redesign process.
    2. Consider the Message
      The type of message that you are communicating will vary in impact and importance depending on the task. Make sure that the communication medium reflects your message. Keep in mind: If the you are communicating an important or more personal issue, the medium should be more personal as well.

    Screenshot of the same table in the 'IT Governance Implementation Plan'.

    Communicate the changes that result from the redesign

    Plan the message first, then deliver it to your stakeholders through the most appropriate medium to avoid message avoidance or confusion.

    Communication Medium

    Face-to-Face Communication

    Face-to-face communication helps to ensure that the audience is receiving and understanding a clear message, and allows them to voice their concerns and clarify any confusion or questions.

    • Use one-on-one meetings for key stakeholders and large organizational meetings to introduce large changes in the redesign.
    Emails

    Use email to communicate information to broad audiences. In addition, use email as the mass feedback mechanism.

    • Use email to follow up on meetings, or to invite people to next ones, but not as the sole medium of communication.
    Internal Website or Drive

    Use an internal website or drive as an information repository.

    • Store meeting minutes, policies, procedures, terms of reference, and feedback online to ensure transparency.

    Message Delivery

    1. Plan Your Message
      Emphasize what the audience really needs to know and how the change will impact them.
    2. Test Your Message
      If possible, test your communications with a small audience (2-3 people) first to get feedback and adjust messages before delivering them more broadly.
    3. Deliver and Repeat Your Message
      “Tell them what you’re going to tell them, then tell them, then tell them what you told them.”
    4. Gather Feedback and Evaluate Communications
      Evaluate the effectiveness of the communications (through surveys, stakeholder interviews, or metrics) to ensure the message was delivered and received successfully and communication goals were met.

    Construct an executive presentation to facilitate transparency for the governing framework

    Supporting Tool icon 4B Present the redesign to the key business stakeholders

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Identify Stakeholders
      Determine which business stakeholders have been the most involved in the redesign process.
    2. Customize Presentation
      Use the deliverables that you have built throughout this redesign to communicate the changes to the structure, authority, processes, and memberships in the governance framework.
    3. Present to Executives
      Present the executive presentation to the key business stakeholders who have been involved in the redesign process.

    Info-Tech best Practice

    Use the Executive Presentation customizable deliverable to lead a boardroom-quality presentation outlining the process and outcomes of the IT governance redesign.

    Present the executive presentation

    Associated Activity icon 4.3 1 hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Input SoBC Outcomes
      Input the outcomes of the SoBC. Specify the state of the business you have identified through the process of Phase 1.
    2. Input Current State Framework and Guidelines
      Input the outcomes of the current state assessment. Explain the process you used to identify the current governance framework and how you determined the strengths, weaknesses, and guidelines.
    3. Input Redesigned Governance Framework
      Input the governance redesign outcomes. Explain the process you used to modify and reconstruct the governance framework to drive optimal business results. Show the new structure and committee profiles.

    Use the Redesign IT Governance to Drive Optimal Business Results Executive Presentation Template for more information.

    Implement the governance redesign to optimize governance and, in turn, business results

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Healthcare
    Source: Info-Tech

    Challenge

    Members of the project management group and in the larger SDLC process identified a lack of clarity on how to best govern active projects and initiatives that were moving through the governance process during the changes to the governance framework.

    These projects had already begun under the old frameworks and applying the redesigned governance framework would lead to work duplication and wasted time.

    Solution

    The organization decided that instead of applying the redesign to all initiatives across the organization, it would only be applied to new initiatives and ones that were still working within the first part of the “gating” process, where revised intake information could still be provided.

    Active initiatives that fell into the grandfathered category were identified and could proceed based on the old process. Yet, those that did not receive this status were provided carry-over lead time to revise their documentation during the changes.

    Results

    The implementation plan and timeframes were approved and an official change-over date identified.

    A communication plan was provided, including the grandfathered approach to be used with in-flight initiatives.

    A review cycle was also established for three months after launch to ensure the process was working as expected and would be repeated annually.

    The revised process improved the cycle time by 30% and improved the ability of the organization to govern high-speed requests and decisions.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Insights

    • IT governance requires business leadership.
      Instead of IT managing and governing IT, engage business leaders to take responsibility for governing IT.
    • With great governance comes great responsibility.
      Involve relevant business leaders, who will be impacted by IT outcomes, to share governing authority of IT.
    • Establish IT-business fusion.
      In governance, alignment is not enough. Merge IT and the business through governance to ensure business success.

    Knowledge Gained

    • There must be an active understanding of the current and future state of the business for governance to address the changing needs of the business.
    • Take a proactive approach to revising your governance framework. Understand why you are making decisions before actually making them.
    • Keep the current and future goals in sight to build an optimized governance framework that maintains the minimum bar of oversight required.

    Processes Optimized

    • EDM01 – Establishing a Governance Framework
    • Understanding the four elements of governance:
      • Structure
      • Authority
      • Process
      • Members
    • Embedding the benefits realization criteria, risk optimization, and resource optimization in governance.

    Deliverables Completed

    • Statement of Business Context
    • Current State Assessment of IT Governance
    • Future State Design for IT Governance
    • IT Governance Implementation Plan

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    4.1

    Sample of activity 4.1 'Outline next steps for governance redesign'. Build and Deploy the Implementation Plan

    Construct a list of tasks and consider the individuals or groups that those tasks will impact when implementing the governance redesign. Ensure consistent and transparent communication for successful outcomes.

    4.3

    Sample of activity 4.3 'Present the Executive Presentation'. Build the Executive Presentation

    Insert the state of business, current state, and future state design outcomes into a presentation to inform the key business stakeholders on the process and outcomes of the governance redesign.

    Research contributors and experts

    Deborah Eyzaguirre, IT Business Relationship Manager, UNT System

    Herbert Kraft, MIS Manager, Prairie Knights Casino

    Roslyn Kaman, CFO, Miles Nadal JCC

    Nicole Haggerty, Associate Professor of Information Systems, Ivey Business School

    Chris Austin, CTO, Ivey Business School

    Adriana Callerio, IT Director Performance Management, Molina Healthcare Inc.

    Joe Evers, Consulting Principal, JcEvers Consulting Corp

    Huw Morgan, IT Research Executive

    Joy Thiele, Special Projects Manager, Dunns Creek Baptist Church

    Rick Daoust, CIO, Cambrian College

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Bibliography

    A.T. Kearney. “The 7 Habits of Highly Effective Governance.” A.T. Kearney, 2008. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Bertolini, Phil. “The Transformational Effect of IT Governance.” Government Finance Review, Dec. 2012. Web. Nov. 2016.

    CGI. “IT Governance and Managed Services – Creative a win-win relationship” CGI Group Inc., 2015. Web. Dec. 2016.

    De Haes, Steven, and Wim Van Grembergen. “An Exploratory Study into the Design of an IT Governance Minimum Baseline through Delphi Research.” Communications of the Association for Information Systems: Vol. 22 , Article 24. 2008. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Deloitte LLP. “The Role of Senior Leaders in IT Governance.” The Wall Street Journal, 22 Jun. 2015. Web. Oct. 2016.

    Dragoon, Alice. “Four Governance Best Practices.” CIO From IDG, 15 Aug. 2003. Web. Dec. 2016.

    du Preez, Gert. “Company Size Matters: Perspectives on IT Governance.” PricewaterhouseCoopers, Aug. 2011. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Hagen, Christian, et. al. “Building a Capability-Driven IT Organization.” A.T. Kearney, Jun. 2011. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Heller, Martha. “Five Best Practices for IT Governance.” CFO.com, 27 Aug. 2012. Web. Oct. 2016.

    Hoch, Detlev, and Payan, Miguel. “Establishing Good IT Governance in the Public Sector.” McKinsey Dusseldorf, Mar. 2008. Web. Oct. 2016.

    Horne, Andrew, and Brian Foster. “IT Governance Is Killing Innovation.” Harvard Business Review, 22 Aug. 2013. Web. Dec. 2016.

    ISACA. “COBIT 5: Enabling Processes.” ISACA, 2012. Web. Oct. 2016.

    IT Governance Institute. “An Executive View of IT Governance.” IT Governance Institute, in association with PricewaterhouseCoopers. 2009. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Bibliography continued

    IT Governance Institute. “IT Governance Roundtable: Defining IT Governance.” IT Governance Institute, 2009. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Macgregor, Stuart. “The linchpin between Corporate Governance and IT Governance.” The Open Group’s EA Forum Johannesburg and Cape Town, Nov. 2013. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Mallette, Debra. “Implementing IT Governance An Introduction.” ISACA San Francisco Chapter, 23 Sep. 2009. Web. Oct. 2016.

    Massachusetts Institute of Technology. “IT Governance Introduction.” MIT Centre for Information System Research, 2016. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Mueller, Lynn, et. al. “IBM IT Governance Approach – Business Performance through IT Execution.” IBM Redbooks, Feb. 2008. Web. Nov. 2016.

    National Computing Centre. “IT Governance: Developing a successful governance strategy.” The National Computing Centre, Nov. 2005. Web. Oct. 2016.

    Pittsburgh ISACA Chapter. “Practical Approach to COBIT 5.0.” Pittsburgh ISACA Chapter, 17 Sep. 2012. Web. Nov. 2016.

    PricewaterhouseCoopers. “Great by governance: Improve IT performance and Value While Managing Risks.” PricewaterhouseCoopers, Nov. 2014. Web. Dec. 2016.

    PricewaterhouseCoopers. “IT Governance in Practice: Insights from leading CIOs.” PricewaterhouseCoopers, 2006. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Routh, Richard L. “IT Governance Part 1 of 2.” Online video clip. YouTube. The Institute of CIO Excellence, 01 Aug. 2012. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Salleh, Noor Akma Mohd, et. al. “IT Governance in Airline Industry: A Multiple Case Study.” International Journal of Digital Society, Dec. 2010. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Bibliography continued

    Speckert, Thomas, et. al. “IT Governance in Organizations Facing Decentralization – Case Study in Higher Education.” Department of Computer and Systems Sciences. Stockholm University, 2014. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Thorp, John. The Information Paradox—Realizing the Business Benefits of Information Technology. Revised Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003 (written jointly with Fujitsu).

    Vandervost, Guido, et. al. “IT Governance for the CxO.” Deloitte, Nov. 2013. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Weill, Peter, and Jeanne W. Ross. “IT Governance: How Top Performers Manage IT Decision Rights for Superior Results.” Boston: Harvard Business School, 2004. Print. Oct. 2016.

    Wong, Daron, et. al. “IT Governance in Oil and Gas: CIO Roundtable, Priorities for Surviving and Thriving in Lean Times.” Online video clip. YouTube. IT Media Group, Jun. 2016. Web. Nov. 2016.

    Configuration management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}4|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}4|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}4|upsells{/j2store}
    • Download01-Title: Harness the power of Configuration Management Executive Brief
    • Download-01: Visit Link
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Configuration management is all about being able to manage your assets within the support processes. That means to record what you need. Not less than that, and not more either.

    Asset Management, Configuration Management, Lifecycle Management

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}573|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Attract & Select
    • Parent Category Link: /attract-and-select

    Tech layoffs have been making the news over the past year, with thousands of Big Tech employees having been laid off. After years of record low unemployment in IT, many leaders are looking to take advantage of these layoffs to fill their talent gaps.

    However, IT leaders need to determine their response – wait and see the impact of the recession on budgets and candidate expectations, or dive in and secure great talent to execute today on strategic needs. This research is designed to help those IT leaders who are looking to take advantage employee effective talents to secure talent.

    • With the impact of the economic slowdown still unknown, the first question IT leaders need to ask is whether now is the time to act.
    • Even with these layoffs, IT unemployment rates are at record lows, with many organizations continuing to struggle to attract talent. While these layoffs have opened a window, IT leaders need to act quickly to secure great talent.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The “where has the talent gone?” puzzle has been solved. Many tech firms over-hired and were able to outcompete everyone, but it wasn’t sustainable. This correction won’t impact unemployment numbers in the short term – the job force is just in flux right now.

    Impact and Result

    This research is designed to help IT leaders understand the talent market and to provide winning tactics to those looking to take advantage of the layoffs to fill their hiring needs.

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Storyboard – A snapshot of the current talent market in IT and quick tactics IT leaders can employ to improve their hiring process to find and attract tech talent.

    Straightforward tactics you can execute to successfully recruit IT staff impacted by layoffs.

    • Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Storyboard

    2. IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool – Use this tool to document the current and future talent acquisition process.

    To hire efficiently, create a clear, consistent talent acquisition process. The IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool will help to:

  • Map out the current talent acquisition workflow
  • Identify areas of opportunity and potential gaps in the current process
    • IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs

    Simple tactics to secure the right talent in times of economic uncertainty.

    Why are the layoffs making the news?

    After three years of record low unemployment rates in IT and organizations struggling to hire IT talent into their organization, the window appears to be opening with tens of thousands layoffs from Big Tech employers.

    Big brand organizations such as Microsoft, Alphabet, Amazon, Twitter, Netflix, and Meta have been hitting major newswires, but these layoffs aren't exclusive to the big names. We've also seen smaller high-growth tech organizations following suit. In fact, in 2022, it's estimated that there were more than 160,997 layoffs across over 1,045 tech organizations. This trend has continued into 2023. By mid-February 2023, there were already 108,754 employees laid off at 385 tech companies (Layoffs.fyi).(1)

    While some of these layoffs have been openly connected to economic slowdown, others are pointing to the layoffs being a correction for over-hiring during the pandemic. It is also important to note that many of these workers were not IT employees, as these organizations also saw cuts across other areas of the business such as sales, marketing, recruitment, and operations.

    (1)This global database is constantly being updated, and these numbers are changing on an ongoing basis. For up-to-date statistics, see https://layoffs.fyi

    While tech layoffs have been making the news, so far many of these layoffs have been a correction to over-hiring, with most employees laid off finding work, if they want it, within three months.

    IT leaders need to determine their response – wait and see the impact of the recession on budgets and candidate expectations or dive in and secure great talent to execute today on strategic needs.

    This research is designed to help IT leaders understand the talent market and provide winning strategies to those looking to take advantage of the layoffs to fill their hiring needs.

    Three key drivers for Big Tech layoffs

    Economic uncertainty

    Globally, economists are predicting an economic slowdown, though there is not a consistent prediction on the impact. We have seen an increase in interest rates and inflation, as well as reduced investment budgets.

    Over-hiring during the pandemic

    High growth and demand for digital technologies and services during the early pandemic led to over-hiring in the tech industry. Many organizations overestimated the future demand and had to rebalance staffing as a result.

    New automation investments

    Many tech organizations that have conducted layoffs are still in a growth mindset. This is demonstrated though new tech investments by these companies in products like chatbots and RPA to semi-automate processes to reduce the need for certain roles.

    Despite layoffs, the labor market remains competitive

    There were at least 160,997 layoffs from more than 1,045 tech companies last year (2022). (Layoffs.fyi reported as of Feb 21/2023)

    But just because Big Tech is laying people off doesn't mean the IT job market has cooled.

    Between January and October 2022 technology- focused job postings rose 25% compared to the same period in 2021, and there were more than 375,000 tech jobs posted in October of 2022.
    (Dice: Tech Jobs Report.)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The "where has the talent gone?" puzzle has been solved. Many tech firms over-hired and were able to outcompete everyone, but it wasn't sustainable. This correction won't impact unemployment numbers in the short term – the job force is just in flux right now.

    So far, many of the layoffs have been a market correction

    Tech Layoffs Since COVID-19

    This is an image of a combo line graph plotting the number of tech layoffs from Q1 2020 to Q4 2022.

    Source: Layoffs.fyi - Tech Layoff Tracker and Startup Layoff Lists

    Tech Companies Layoffs vs. Early Pandemic Hiring # of People

    This is an image of a bar graph plotting Tech Companies Layoffs vs. Early Pandemic Hiring # of People

    Source: Yahoo Finance. Q4 '19 to Q3 '22

    Tech Layoffs between 2020 Q3- 2022 Q1 remained very low across the sector. In fact, outside of the initial increase at the start of the pandemic, layoffs have remained at historic low levels of around 1% (HBR, 2023). While the layoffs look significant in isolation, when you compare these numbers to pandemic hiring and growth for these organizations, the figures are relatively small.

    The first question IT leaders need to ask is whether now is the time to act

    The big gamble many CIOs face is whether to strike now to secure talent or to wait to better understand the impact of the recession. While two-thirds of IT professionals are still expecting their budgets to increase in 2023, CIOs must account for the impact of inflation and the recession on their IT budgets and staffing decisions (see Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program).

    Ultimately, while unemployment is low today, it's common to see unemployment numbers drop right before a recession. If that is the case, then we will see more talent entering the market, possibly at more competitive salaries. But organizations that wait to hire risk not having the staff they need to execute on their strategy and finding themselves in a hiring freeze. CIOs need to decide on how to approach the economic uncertainty and where to place their bets.

    Looking ahead to 2023, how do you anticipate your IT spending will change compared to spending in 2022?

    This is an image of anticipated changes to IT spending compared to 2022 for the following categories: Decrease of more than 30%; Decrease between 16-30%; Decrease between 6-15%; Decrease between 1-5%; No Change; Increase between 1-5%; Increase between 6-15%; Increase between 16-30%; Increase of more than 30%

    Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Organizations ready to take advantage will need to act fast when layoffs happen

    Organizations looking to fill hiring needs or grow their IT/digital organization will need to be strategic and efficient when it comes to recruitment. Regardless of the number of layoffs, it continues to be an employee market when it comes to IT roles.

    While it is likely that the recession will impact unemployment rates, so far, the market remains hot, and the number of open roles continues to grow. This means that organizations that want to take advantage need to act quickly when news hits.

    Leaders not only need to compete with other organizations for talent, but the other challenge hiring organizations will need to compete with is that many in tech received generous severance packages and will be considering taking time off. To take advantage, leaders need to establish a plan and a clear employee value proposition to entice these highly skilled workers to get off the bench.

    Why you need to act fast:

    • Unemployment rates remain low:
      • Tech unemployment's rates in the US dropped to 1.5% in January 2023 (CompTIA), compared to overall unemployment which is at 3.4% in the US as of January 2023 (Yahoo Finance). While the layoffs look significant, we can see that many workers have been rehired into the labor market.
    • Long time-to-hire results in lost candidates:
      • According to Info-Tech's IT Talent Trend Report, 58% of IT leaders report time-to-hire is longer than two months. This timing increases for tech roles which require unique skills or higher seniority. IT leaders who can increase the timeline for their requirement process are much more likely to be able to take advantage of tech layoffs.

    IT must take a leading role in IT recruitment to take advantage of layoffs

    A personal connection is the differentiator when it comes to talent acquisition

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in talent acquisition and the effectiveness of this process in the IT department. The more involved they are, the higher the effectiveness.(1)

    More IT leadership involvement

    An image of two upward facing arrows. The left arrow is faded purple, and the right arrow is dark purple.

    Higher recruitment effectiveness

    Involved leaders see shorter times to hire

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in the talent acquisition process and time to fill vacant positions. The more involved they are, the shorter the time to hire.(2)

    Involved leaders are an integral part of effective IT departments

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in talent acquisition and overall IT department effectiveness. Those that are more involved have higher levels of effectiveness.(3)

    Increased IT Leadership in Recruitment Is Directly Correlated to Recruitment Effectiveness.

    This is an image of a combo bar graph plotting Overall Effectiveness for IT leadership involvement in recruitment.

    Focus your layoff recruitment strategy on critical and strategic roles

    If you are ready to take advantage of tech layoffs, focus hiring on critical and strategic roles, rather than your operational backfills. Roles related to security, cloud migration, data and analytics, and digital transformation are more likely to be shielded from budget cuts and are logical areas to focus on when looking to recruit from Big Tech organizations.

    Additionally, within the IT talent market, scarcity is focused in areas with specialized skill sets, such as security and architecture, which are dynamic and evolving faster than other skill sets. When looking to recruit in these areas, it's critical that you have a targeted recruitment approach; this is why tech layoffs represent a strong opportunity to secure talent in these specialized areas.

    ROLES DIFFICULT TO FILL

    An image of a bar graph plotting roles by difficulty to fill.

    Info-Tech Talent Trends 2022 Survey

    Four quick tactics to take advantage of Big Tech layoffs

    TALENT ACQUISITION PROCESS TO TAKE ADVANTAGE OF LAYOFFS

    This is an image of the talent acquisition process to take advantage of layoffs. It involves the following four steps: 1 Prepare organization and job ads for recruitment.  2 Actively track and scan for layoff activity.  3 Prioritize and screen candidates using salary benchmarks and keywords.  4 Eliminate all unnecessary hiring process steps.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: IT job ad review.

    Call #4: Identify screening and sourcing opportunities.

    Call #5: Review your IT talent acquisition process.

    Call #3: Employee value proposition review.

    Call #7: Refine your talent acquisition process.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Tactics to take advantage of tech layoffs

    Activities

    1.1 Spot check your employee value proposition
    1.2 Update job advertisements
    1.3 Document your talent acquisition process
    1.4 Refine your talent acquisition process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • IT hiring manager
    • Human resources
    • Marketing/public relations

    Outcomes of this step

    Streamlined talent acquisition process tailored to take advantage of tech layoffs.

    This is an image of the talent acquisition process to take advantage of layoffs. It involves the following fo steps: 1 Prepare organization and job ads for recrtment.  2 Actively track and scan for layoff aivity.  3 Prioritize and screen candidates using salary benchmarks and kwords.  4 Eliminate all unnecessary hiring process steps.

    Requisition: update job ads and secure approval to hire

    Critical steps:

    1. Ensure you have secured budget and hiring approval.
    2. Identify an IT recruitment partner within the IT organization who will be accountable for working with HR throughout the process and who will actively track and scan for recruitment opportunities.
    3. Update your IT job descriptions.
    4. Spot check your employee value proposition (EVP) to appeal to targeted candidates (Exercise 1.1).
    5. Write employee job ads for relevant skills and minimum viable experience (Exercise 1.2).
    6. Work with HR to develop your candidate outreach messages – ensure that your outreach is empathetic, aligns with your EVP, and focuses on welcoming them to apply to a role.

    The approval process to activate a requisition can be one of the longest stages in the talent acquisition process. Ensure all your roles are up to date and approved so you can trigger outreach as soon as news hits; otherwise, you'll be late before you've even begun.

    Your employee value proposition (EVP) is a key tool for attracting and retaining talent

    Any updates to your EVP need to be a genuine reflection of the employee experience at your organization – and should resonate internally and externally.

    Internal (retention) perspective: These characteristics help to retain new and existing talent by ensuring that new hires' expectations are met and that the EVP is experienced throughout the organization.

    External (attraction) perspective: These characteristics help to attract talent and are targeted so the right candidates are motivated to join, while those who aren't a good fit will self-select out.

    McLean & Company's Employee Value Proposition Framework

    This is an image of McLean & Company's Employee Value Proposition Framework.  It is divided into Retain and Attract.  under Retain, are the following three headings: Aligned; Accurate; Aspirational.  Under Attract are: Compelling; Clear; Comprehensive.

    Source: McLean & Company

    1.1 Spot check your EVP

    1-3 hours

    1. Review your existing IT employee value proposition. If you do not have an EVP, see Info-Tech's comprehensive research Improve the IT Recruitment Process to draft a new EVP.
    2. Invite a representative group of employees to participate in a working group to improve your employee value proposition. Ask each participant to brainstorm the top five things they value most about working at the organization.
    3. Consider the following categories: work environment, career advancement, benefits, and ESG and diversity impact. Brainstorm as a group if there is anything unique your organization offers with regard to these categories.
    4. Compare your notes to your existing EVP, identify up to four key statements to focus on for the EVP, ensuring that your EVP speaks to at least one of the categories above. Remove any statements that no longer speak to who you are as an organization or what you offer.

    Input

    • Existing employee value proposition
    • Employee Engagement Surveys (If Available)

    Output

    • Updated employee value proposition

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Job ad template

    Participants

    • Representative group of internal employees.
    • HR
    • Marketing/PR (if possible)

    Four critical factors considered by today's job seeker

    1. Be specific about remote work policies: Include verbiage about whether there is an option to work hybrid or remote. 81% of job seekers stated that whether a job is remote, hybrid, or in-person was a top factor in whether they'd accept an offer (Benefits Canada, 2022).
    2. Career advancement and stability: "37% of Gen Z employees and 25% of millennial employees are currently looking for a job that offers career progression transparency — or, in other words, a job with clear opportunities for growth. This is significantly higher than our findings for older generations Gen X (18%) and baby boomers (7%)," (Lattice, 2021).
    3. Unique benefits: Consider your unique benefits – it's not the Big Tech "fun perks" like slides and ping pong that drive interest. Employees are increasingly looking for roles with long-term benefits programs. 90% of job seekers consider higher pension contributions to be a key factor, and 85% are considering bonuses/profit sharing" (Benefits Canada, 2022). Candidates may accept lower total compensation in exchange for flexibility, culture, work/life balance that was lacking in the start-up scene or the mega-vendors' fast-paced world.
    4. ESG and diversity impact: Include details of how the candidate will make a societal impact through their role, and how the company is acting on climate and sustainability. "Nearly two in five [Gen Z's and millennials] say they have rejected a job or assignment because it did not align with their values," (Deloitte Global, 2022).

    Update or establish job ads for candidate outreach

    Take the time up front to update your IT job descriptions and to write effective job advertisements. A job advertisement is an external-facing document that advertises a position with the intent of attracting job applicants. It contains key elements from the job description as well as information on the organization and its EVP. A job description informs a job ad, it doesn't replace it.
    When updating job descriptions and job ads, it's critical that your requirements are an accurate representation of what you need in the position. For the job ads especially, focus on the minimum requirements for the role, highlight your employee value proposition, and ensure that they are using inclusive language.
    Don't be lulled into using a job description as a posting when there's a time crunch to fill a position – use your preparation time to complete this key step.

    Three tips to consider when building a job ad

    Include the minimum desired requirements

    Include the required skills, responsibilities, and certifications required. Instead of looking for a unicorn, look for what you need and a demonstrated ability to learn. 70% of business executives say they are getting creative about sourcing for skills rather than just considering job experience (Deloitte Insights, 2022).

    Strategically include certifications

    When including certifications, ensure you have validated the process to be certified – i.e. if you are hiring for a role with 3-5 years' experience, ensure that the certification does not take 5-10 years of experience be eligible.

    Use inclusive language

    Consider having a review group within your IT organization to ensure the language is inclusive, that the responsibilities don't read as overly complex, and that it is an accurate representation of the organization's culture.

    1.2 Update or build job ads

    1-3 hours

    1. Begin with a copy of the job ad you are looking to fill, if you haven't begun to draft the role, start with Info-Tech's Job Description Library and Info-Tech's Job Ad Template.
    2. Review the job accountabilities, rank each responsibility based on its importance and volume of work. Determine if there are any responsibilities that are uncommon to be executed by the role and remove unnecessary responsibilities.
    3. For each of the job accountabilities, identify if there is a level of experience, knowledge or competency that would be the minimum bar for a candidate. Remove technical skills, specific technologies, and competencies that aren't directly relevant to the role, responsibilities or values.
    4. Review the education and requirements, and ensure that any certification or educational background is truly needed or suggested.
    5. Use the checklist on the following tab to review and update your job ad.

    Input

    • Job description
    • Employee value proposition
    • Job ad template

    Output

    • Completed job ad

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Web share

    Participants

    • Representative group of internal employees.
    • HR
    • Marketing/PR (if possible)

    1.2 Job ad checklist:

    A job ad needs to be two things: effective and inclusive.

    Effective

    The job ad does include:

    The organization's logo.
    Description of the organization.
    Information about benefits.
    A link to the organization's website and social media platforms.
    Steps in the application process and what candidates can expect.

    The job ad:

    Paints an accurate picture of key aspects of the role.
    Tells a story to show potential candidates how the role and organization will fit into their career path (outlines potential career paths, growth opportunities, training, etc.).
    Does not contain too many details and tasks that would overwhelm applicants.
    Highlights the employer brand in a manner that conveys the EVP and markets the organization to attract potential applicants.
    Includes creative design or formatting to make the ad stand out.
    The job ad speaks to the audience by using targeted language (e.g. using creative language when recruiting for a creative role).
    The job ad has been reviewed by HR, Marketing, PR.

    Inclusive

    The job ad does NOT include:

    Industry jargon or abbreviations that are not spelled out.
    Personality characteristics and unnecessary adjectives that would deter qualified candidates (e.g. extroverted, aggressive, competitive).
    A list of specific academic disciplines or schools, GPA requirements, or inflated degree requirements.

    The job ad:

    Uses gender-neutral language and does not contain terms that indicate traits that are typically associated with a specific gender.
    Can be viewed and applications can be completed on mobile devices.
    Focuses on results, day-to-day requirements, competencies, and transferrable skills.
    Includes design that is accessible (e.g. alternative text is provided for images, clear posting structure with headings, color is not used to convey information).

    Sourcing: Set up news trackers and review layoff source lists

    • Set up news and social media trackers to track layoff updates, and ensure you have an IT staff member on standby to complete a more detailed opportunity analysis when layoffs happen.
    • Use layoff source lists such as Layoffs.fyi to actively track organizations that have laid people off, noting the industry, location, and numbers in order to identify potential candidates. Limit your future analysis to locations that would be geographically possible to hire from.
    • Review open-source lists of laid-off employees to quickly identify potential candidates for your organization.
    • Many organizations that have completed layoffs have established outplacement programs to help laid-off staff find new roles. Set a plan in motion with HR to reach out to organizations once a layoff has occurred to understand their layoff support program.

    The key to successful sourcing is for IT to take an active role in identifying which organizations impacted by layoffs would be a good fit, and to quickly respond by searching open-source lists and LinkedIn to reach out potential candidates.

    Consider leveraging open-source lists

    Layoffs.fyi has been tracking and reporting on layoffs since the start of COVID-19. While they are not an official source of information, the site has more than a million views per month and is a strong starting point for IT leaders looking to source candidates from tech layoffs beyond the big organizations that are making the news.

    The site offers a view of companies with layoffs by location, industry, and the source of the info. Additionally, it often lists the names and contact information of laid-off employees, which you can leverage to start your deeper LinkedIn outreach or candidate screening.

    This is an image of two screenshots of open source lists from Layoffs.fyi

    Screenshots from Layoffs.fyi.

    Screening: Prioritize by considering salary benchmarks and keywords

    • Determine a set of consistent pre-screening questions to leverage while screening candidates, which every candidate must answer, including knockout questions.
    • Prioritize by going for salary ranges you can afford: It is important to be aware of what companies are paying within the tech arena, so you know if your salary bands are within a competitive range.
    • Pre-screen resumes using appropriate keywords that are critical for the role, and widen the terms if you do not have enough candidates. Given the pool you are looking to recruit from, consider removing criteria specifically related to education or certifications; instead, prioritize skills and on-the-job experience.

    Screening is one of the most time-consuming stages of the TA process. For each open position, it can take 23 hours to screen resumes (Toolbox, 2021). In fact, 52% of TA leaders believe that screening candidates from a large pool of applicants is the hardest part of recruitment (Ideal, 2021).

    Compensation comparison reports

    Keep in mind that the market may be shifting rapidly as layoffs proliferate, so what the data shows, particularly on free-to-use sites with little data-checking, may not be current and may be overstated. Info-Tech does not provide salary analysis; however, there are publicly available reports and online websites with self-reported data.

    This list contains several market data sources for the tech industry, which may be a good starting point for comparison. Info-Tech is not affiliated with or endorsing any of these market data sources.

    Aon Global Cyber Security Compensation and Talent Survey
    Aon – Radford Surveys Radford Global Technology Survey
    Culpepper Comprehensive Compensation Survey Solution for Technology-Focused Companies
    Modis 2022 IT Compensation Guide
    Motion Recruitment 2023 Tech Salary Guide
    Mondo 2022 Salary Guide for roles & jobs across the technology, creative & digital marketing industries.
    Willis Towers Watson Willis Towers Watson Data Services - Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent Survey Report - U.S.
    Michael Page Salary Guide 2022 for the Greater Toronto Area Technology Industry
    Willis Towers Watson Willis Towers Watson Data Services - Tech, Media, and Gaming
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Executive Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Middle Management, Professional and Support Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Executive Survey Report - U.S.
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Middle Management, Professional and Support Survey Report - U.S.

    Work with your HR partner to streamline your talent acquisition process

    A slow talent acquisition process presents multiple risks to your ability to recruit. Candidates are likely having multiple hiring conversations, and you could lose a good candidate just by being slower than another organization. Additionally, long hiring processes are also an indicator of a high level of bureaucracy in an organization, which may turn off tech candidates who are used to faster-paced decision making.

    Reducing your time-to-hire needs to be a strategic priority, and companies that manage to do this are reaping the benefits: There is a statistically significant relationship between time to fill vacant positions and overall IT department effectiveness. The shorter the time to fill a position, the higher the effectiveness (Bika, 2019).

    Key Considerations for Optimizing your Talent Acquisition Process

    Key Considerations for Optimizing your Talent Acquisition Process

    Review the end-to-end experience

    50%

    of job seekers surveyed had "declined a job offer due to poor [candidate] experience," (Echevarria, 2020).

    Reduce the time to hire

    55%

    "of candidates believe that it should take one to two weeks from the first interview to being offered the job," (Duszyński, 2021).

    Be clear on Timelines

    83%

    "of candidates say it would greatly improve the overall experience if employers provided a clear timeline of the hiring process," (Miller, n.d.).

    Time to hire: Identify solutions to drive efficient hiring

    1. Document all steps between screening and hiring and remove any unnecessary steps.
    2. Create clearly defined interview guides to ensure consistent questioning by interviewers.
    3. Enable hiring managers to schedule their own interviews.
    4. Determine who needs to approve an offer. Streamline the number of approvals, if possible.
    5. Eliminate unnecessary background checks. Many companies have eliminated reference checks, for example, after determining that it was it was not adding value to their decision.
    6. Identify and track key metrics across your talent acquisition process.

    It is critical to partner with your HR department on optimizing this process, as they are typically the process owners and will have deep knowledge of the rationale for decisions. Together, you can identify some opportunities to streamline the process and improve the time to hire.

    4.1 Document your TA process

    1-3 hours

    1. If you have a documented talent acquisition process, begin with that; if not, open the IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool and map the stages of the talent acquisition process with your HR leader. Stages are the top level in the process (e.g. requisition, sourcing, screening).
    2. Identify all the stakeholders involved in IT talent acquisition and document these in the tool.
    3. Next, identify the steps required for each stage. These are more detailed actions that together will complete the stage (e.g. enter requisition into ATS, intake meeting). Ask subject matter experts to add steps to their portion of the process and document these in the cells.
    4. For each step in the stage, record the time required and the number of people who are involved.

    Input

    • Existing talent acquisition (TA) process document
    • Any TA process metrics
    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Output

    • Documented TA process

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • HR
    • IT leaders
    • Hiring manager

    Download the IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Example of steps in each stage of the TA process

    Activities

    Requisition

    Source

    Screen

    Interview & Assess

    Offer

    Background Check

    Vacancy identified Posted on website Resumes screened in system Interviews scheduled Offer letter drafted Reference checks conducted
    Requisition submitted Posted on job boards Resume screened by recruited First round interviews Offer letter sent Medical checks conducted
    Requisition approved Identification of layoff sources Resumed reviewed by hiring manager Assessment Negotiations Other background checks conducted
    Job description updated Review layoff source lists Screening calls Second round interview First date confirmed
    Job ad updated Screening questions developed Candidates selected
    Intake meeting

    4.2 Refine your TA process

    1-3 hours

    1. Collectively identify any:
      1. Inconsistent applications: Activities that are done differently by different participants.
      2. Bottlenecks: A place in the process where activity is constrained and holds up next steps.
      3. Errors: When a mistake occurs requiring extra time, resources, or rework.
      4. Lack of value: An activity that adds little to no value (often a legacy activity).
    2. Work with HR to identify any proposed solutions to improve consistency, reduce bottlenecks, errors, or eliminate steps that lack value. Document your proposed solutions in tab 3 of the IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool.
    3. Identify any new steps needed that would drive greater efficiency, including the tactics suggested in this research. Document any proposed solutions in tab 3.
    4. For each proposed solution, evaluate the general level of effort and impact required to move forward with that solution and select the appropriate classification from the drop-down.
    5. Determine if you will move forward with the proposed solution at this time. Update the TA workflow with your decisions.

    Input

    • Existing talent acquisition (TA) process document
    • Any TA process metrics
    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Output

    • Documented TA process

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • HR
    • IT leaders
    • Hiring manager

    Use Info-Tech's IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool to document current challenges & target solutions.

    Map your process and identify opportunities to streamline

    This is an image of the talent aquisitions workflow page from Info-Tech's Map your process and identify opportunities to streamline

    Brainstorm and select solutions to improve your process

    This is an image of the Effort Analysis page from Info-Tech's Brainstorm and select solutions to improve your process

    Key considerations when optimizing your process

    • Put yourself in each stakeholder's shoes (candidate, HR, hiring manager). Think through what they need from the process.
    • Challenge assumptions and norms. It can be tempting to get caught up in "how we do it today." Think beyond how it is today.
    • Question timing of activities and events. Identify if they are occurring when they need to.
    • Rebalance work to align with priorities. Identify if work can be redistributed or condensed to use time more efficiently.
    • Distinguish when consistency will add value and when there should be process flexibility.
    • Question the value. For each activity, ask "What value does this activity add?"

    Select metrics to measure Talent Acquisition process improvement

    METRICS INFORMATION
    Metric Definition Calculation
    Average applicants per posting The average number of applicants received per post. Number of applications / Number of postings
    Average number of interviews for open job positions Average number of interviews for open job positions. Total number of interviews / Total number of open job positions
    Average external time to fill Average number of calendar days from when the requisition is issued to when a candidate accepts the position from outside the organization. External days to fill / External candidates
    Pipeline throughput Percentage of candidates advancing through to the next stage. (Number of candidates in chosen stage / Number of candidates in preceding stage) * 100
    External offer acceptance rate Percentage of job offers extended to external candidates that were accepted. (Number of job offers that are accepted / Number of job offers extended) * 100
    Percentage of target group hired The percentage of a target group that was hired. Number of FTE hired / Target number of FTE to be hired
    Average time to hire Average number of calendar days between first contact with the candidate and when they accept the offer. Sum of number of days between first contact and offer acceptance / External candidates
    Quality of hire Percentage of new hires achieving a satisfactory appraisal at their first assessment. New hires who achieve a satisfactory rating at their first appraisal / Total number of new hires
    Vacancy rate Percentage of positions being actively recruited for at the end of the reporting period. Count of vacant positions / (Headcount + Vacant positions)

    Bibliography

    "81% of Employees Factoring Hybrid Work Into Job Search: Survey." BenefitsCanada.com, 16 June 2022.
    Andre, Louie. "40 Notable Candidate Experience Statistics: 2023 Job Application Trends & Challenges." Financesonline.Com, 15 Mar. 2023.
    Bika, Nikoletta. "Key Hiring Metrics: Useful Benchmarks for Tech Roles." Recruiting Resources: How to Recruit and Hire Better, 10 Jan. 2019.
    "Bureau of Labor Statistics Labor Market Revisions Contribute to Conflicting Signals in Latest Tech Employment Data, CompTIA Analysis Finds." CompTIA, 3 Feb. 2023. Press release.
    Byrnes, Amy. "ICIMS Insights Workforce Report: Time to Press the Reset Button?" ICIMS | The Leading Cloud Recruiting Software, 1 Dec. 2022.
    Cantrell, Sue, et al. "The Skills-Based Organization: A New Operating Model for Work and the Workforce." Deloitte Insights, 8 Sept. 2022.
    deBara, Deanna. "Top Findings from Lattice's Career Progression Survey." Lattice, 13 Sept. 2021. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Duszyński, Maciej. "Candidate Experience Statistics (Survey of 1,000+ Americans)." Zety, 14 Oct. 2019.
    Duszyński, Maciej. "Candidate Experience Statistics." Zety, 2021.
    Echevarria, Desiree. "2020 Candidate Experience Report." Career Plug, 17 Mar. 2021.
    Ghosh, Prarthana. "Candidate Screening and Selection Process: The Complete Guide for 2021." Spiceworks, 26 Feb. 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2021
    "Introduction - Dice Tech Job Report: Tech Hiring Trends by Location, Industry, Role and Skill." Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Lee, Roger. "Tech Layoff Tracker and Startup Layoff Lists." Layoffs.fyi. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Miller, Kandace. "Candidate Experience And Engagement Metrics You Should Be Tracking." ConveyIQ, n.d. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Min, Ji-A. "Resume Screening: A How-To Guide for Recruiters." Ideal, 15 Mar. 2021. Web.
    Palmeri, Shelby. "2023 Candidate Experience Research: Strategies for Recruiting." CareerPlug, 6 Feb. 2023.
    Semenova, Alexandra. "Jobs Report: U.S. Economy Adds 517,000 Jobs in January, Unemployment Rate Falls to 3.4% as Labor Market Stuns." Yahoo!Finance, 3 Feb. 2023.
    Sozzi, Brian. "Big Tech Layoffs: What Companies Such as Amazon and Meta Have in Common." Yahoo!News, 6 Feb. 2023.
    Tarki, Atta. "Despite Layoffs, It's Still a Workers' Labor Market." Harvard Business Review, 30 Jan. 2023.
    The Deloitte Global 2022 Gen Z and Millennial Survey. Deloitte Global, 2022. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    "Uncover the Employee Value Proposition." McLean & Company, 21 Jun. 2022. Accessed 22 Feb. 2023.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}184|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $41,674 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This is in contention with product-centric delivery practices. This form of delivery acknowledges the reality that solutions of all shapes and sizes deliver continual and evolving business value over their lifetime.
    • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
    • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Delivering products doesn’t mean you will stop delivering projects! Product-centric delivery is intended to address the misalignment between the long-term delivery of value that organizations demand and the nature of traditional project-focused environments.

    Impact and Result

    • We will help you build a proposal deck to make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.
    • You will build this proposal deck by answering key questions about product-centric delivery so you can identify:
      • A common definition of product.
      • How this form of delivery differs from traditional project-centric approaches.
      • Key challenges and benefits.
      • The capabilities needed to effectively own products and deliver value.
      • What you are asking of stakeholders.
      • A roadmap of how to get started.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make the Case for Product Delivery Deck – A guide to help align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    This project will help you define “product” for your organization, define your drivers and goals for moving to product delivery, understand the role of product ownership, lay out the case to your stakeholders, and communicate what comes next for your transition to product.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Storyboard

    2. Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template – A template to help you capture and detail your case for product delivery.

    Build a proposal deck to help make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template

    3. Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook – A tool to capture the results of exercises to build your case to change your product delivery method.

    This workbook is designed to capture the results of the exercises in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Storyboard. Each worksheet corresponds to an exercise in the storyboard. The workbook is also a living artifact that should be updated periodically as the needs of your team and organization change.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Table of Contents

    Define product

    Define your drivers and goals

    Understand the role of product ownership

    Communicate what comes next

    Make the case to your stakeholders

    Appendix: Additional research

    Appendix: Product delivery strategy communication

    Appendix: Manage stakeholder influence

    Appendix: Product owner capability details

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Products are the lifeblood of an organization. They deliver the capabilities needed to deliver value to customers, internal users, and stakeholders.
    • Organizations are under pressure to align the value they provide with the organization’s goals and overall company vision.
    • You need to clearly convey the direction and strategy of your product portfolio to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.
    Common Obstacles
    • IT organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This is in contention with product-centric delivery.
    • Product delivery acknowledges the reality that solutions of all shapes and sizes deliver continual and evolving business value over their lifetime.
    • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
    • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Info-Tech will enable you to build a proposal deck to make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.
    • You will build this proposal deck by answering key questions about product-centric delivery so you can identify:
      • A common definition of product.
      • How this form of delivery differs from traditional project-centric approaches.
      • Key challenges and benefits.
      • The capabilities needed to effectively own products and deliver value.
      • What you are asking of stakeholders.
      • A roadmap of how to get started.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Delivering products doesn’t mean you will stop delivering projects! Product-centric delivery is intended to address the misalignment between the long-term delivery of value that organizations demand and the nature of traditional project-focused environments.

    Many executives perceive IT as being poorly aligned with business objectives

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey data highlights the importance of IT initiatives in supporting the business in achieving its strategic goals.

    However, Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (2021; N=58) data indicates that CEOs perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals.

    Info-Tech CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, 2021 (N=58)

    40% Of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.

    34% Of business stakeholders are supporters of their IT departments (n=334).

    40% Of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Great technical solutions are not the primary driver of IT success. Focusing on delivery of digital products that align with organizational goals will produce improved outcomes and will foster an improved relationship between business and IT.

    Increase product success by involving IT, business, and customers in your product roadmaps, planning, and delivery

    Product management and delivery seek to promote improved relationships among IT, business, and customers, a critical driver for business satisfaction.

    IT

    Stock image of an IT professional.

    1

    Collaboration

    IT, business, and customers work together through all stages of the product lifecycle, from market research through the roadmapping and delivery processes and into maintenance and retirement. The goal is to ensure the risks and dependencies are realized before work is committed.

    Stakeholders, Customers, and Business

    Stock image of a business professional.

    2

    Communication

    Prioritize high-value modes of communication to break down existing silos and create common understanding and alignment across functions. This approach increases transparency and visibility across the entire product lifecycle.

    3

    Integration

    Explore methods to integrate the workflows, decision making, and toolsets among the business, IT, and customers. The goal is to become more reactive to changes in business and customer expectations and more proactive about market trends.

    Product does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of products.
    Every organization and industry has a different definition of what a product is. Organizations structure their people, processes, and technologies according to their definition of the products they manage. Conflicting product definitions between teams increase confusion and misalignment of product roadmaps.

    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.” (Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance) “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.” (TechTarget) “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.” (Mark Curphey)

    Organizations need a common understanding of what a product is and how it pertains to the business.

    This understanding needs to be accepted across the organization.

    “There is not a lot of guidance in the industry on how to define [products]. This is dangerous because what will happen is that product backlogs will be formed in too many areas. All that does is create dependencies and coordination across teams … and backlogs.” (Chad Beier, “How Do You Define a Product?” Scrum.org)

    Products enable the long-term and continuous delivery of value

    Diagram laying out the lifecycles and roadmaps contributing to the 'Continuous delivery of value'. Beginning with 'Project Lifecycle' in which Projects with features and services end in a Product Release that is disconnected from the continuum. Then the 'Hybrid Lifecycle' and 'Product Lifecycle' which are connected by a 'Product Roadmap' and 'Product Backlog' have Product Releases that connect to the continuum.

    Phase 1

    Build the case for product-centric delivery

    Phase 1
    1.1 Define product
    1.2 Define your drivers and goals
    1.3 Understand the role of product ownership
    1.4 Communicate what comes next
    1.5 Make the case to your stakeholders

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define product in your context.
    • Define your drivers and goals for moving to product delivery.
    • Understand the role of product ownership.
    • Communicate what comes next for your transition to product.
    • Lay out the case to your stakeholders.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 1.1

    Define product

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Define “product” in your context
    • 1.1.2 Consider examples of what is (and is not) a product in your organization
    • 1.1.3 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A clear definition of product in your organization’s context.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Exercise 1.1.1 Define “product” in your context

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Your enterprise/organizational definition of products and services

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Discuss what “product” means in your organization.
    2. Create a common, enterprise-wide definition for “product.”
    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.” (Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance) “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.” (TechTarget) “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.” (Mark Curphey)

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product-Centric Delivery Workbook.

    Example: What is a product?

    Not all organizations will define products in the same way. Take this as a general example:

    “A tangible solution, tool, or service (physical or digital) that enables the long-term and evolving delivery of value to customers and stakeholders based on business and user requirements.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    A proper definition of product recognizes three key facts:

    1. Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    2. Products are not just “apps” but can be software or services that drive the delivery of value.
    3. There is more than one stakeholder group that derives value from the product or service.
    Stock image of an open human head with gears and a city for a brain.

    How do we know what is a product?

    What isn’t a product:
    • Features (on their own)
    • Transactions
    • Unstructured data
    • One-time solutions
    • Non-repeatable processes
    • Solutions that have no users or consumers
    • People or teams
    You have a product if the given item...
    • Has end users or consumers
    • Delivers quantifiable value
    • Evolves or changes over time
    • Has predictable delivery
    • Has definable boundaries
    • Has a cost to produce and operate

    Exercise 1.1.2 Consider examples of what is (and is not) a product in your organization

    15 minutes

    Output: Examples of what is and isn’t a product in your specific context.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Leverage the definition you created in exercise 1.1.1 and the explanation on the slide What is a product?
    2. Pick examples that effectively show the difference between products and non-products and facilitate a conversation on the ones that seem to be on the line. Specific server instances, or instances of providing a service, are worthwhile examples to consider.
    3. From the list you come up with, take the top three examples and put them into the Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template.
    Example:
    What isn’t a product?
    • Month-end SQL scripts to close the books
    • Support Engineer doing a password reset
    • Latest research project in R&D
    What is a product?
    • Self-service password reset portal
    • Oracle ERP installation
    • Microsoft Office 365

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Product delivery practices should consider everything required to support it, not just what users see.

    Cross-section of an iceberg above and below water with visible product delivery practices like 'Funding', 'External Relationships', and 'Stakeholder Management' above water and internal product delivery practices like 'Product Governance', 'Business Functionality', and 'R&D' under water. There are far more processes below the water.

    Products and services share the same foundation and best practices

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. Product is used for consistency but would apply to services as well.

    Product = Service

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:
    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Exercise 1.1.3 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    30-60 minutes

    Output: List of differences between project and product delivery

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Consider project delivery and product delivery.
    2. Discuss what some differences are between the two.
      Note: This exercise is not about identifying the advantages and disadvantages of each style of delivery. This is to identify the variation between the two.
    Theme Project Delivery (Current) Product Delivery (Future)
    Timing Defined start and end Does not end until the product is no longer needed
    Funding Funding projects Funding products and teams
    Prioritization LoB sponsors Product owner
    Capacity Management Project management Managed by product team

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Project Product
    Fund projects — Funding –› Fund products or teams
    Line of business sponsor — Prioritization –› Product owner
    Makes specific changes to a product —Product management –› Improves product maturity and support
    Assignment of people to work — Work allocation –› Assignment of work to product teams
    Project manager manages — Capacity management –› Team manages capacity

    Info-Tech Insights

    • Product ownership should be one of your first areas of focus when transitioning from project to product delivery.
    • Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    Diagram laying out the lifecycles and roadmaps contributing to the 'Continuous delivery of value'. Beginning with 'Project Lifecycle' in which Projects with features and services end in a Product Release that is disconnected from the continuum. Then the 'Hybrid Lifecycle' and 'Product Lifecycle' which are connected by a 'Product Roadmap' and 'Product Backlog' have Product Releases that connect to the continuum. Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release.

    Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Step 1.2

    Define your drivers and goals

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery
    • 1.2.2 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A clear understanding of your motivations and desired outcomes for moving to product delivery.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Exercise 1.2.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Organizational drivers to move to product-centric delivery.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify your pain points in the current delivery model.
    2. What is the root cause of these pain points?
    3. How will a product-centric delivery model fix the root cause (drivers)?
    Pain Points
    • Lack of ownership
    Root Causes
    • Siloed departments
    Drivers
    • Accountability

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Exercise 1.2.2 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    30 minutes

    Output: Goals for product-centric delivery

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Review the differences between project and product delivery from exercise 1.1.3 and the list of drivers from exercise 1.2.1.
    2. Define your goals for achieving a product-centric organization.
      Note: Your drivers may have already covered the goals. If so, review if you would like to change the drivers based on your renewed understanding of the differences between project and product delivery.
    Pain Points
    • Lack of ownership
    Root Causes
    • Siloed departments
    Drivers
    • Accountability
    Goals
    • End-to-end ownership

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Step 1.3

    Understand the role of product ownership

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Identify product ownership capabilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product owner capabilities that you agree are critical to start your product transformation.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Accountability for the delivery of value through product ownership is not optional

    Tree of 'Enterprise Goals and Priorities' leading to 'Product' through a 'Product Family'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    People treat the assignment of accountability for products (aka product ownership) as optional. Without assigning accountability up front, your transition to product delivery will stall. Accountable individuals will be focused on the core outcome for product delivery, which is the delivery of the right value, at the right time, to the right people.

    Description of the tree levels shown in the diagram on the left. First is 'Enterprise Goals and Priorities', led by 'Executive Leadership' using the 'Enterprise Strategic Roadmap'. Second is 'Product Family', led by 'Product Manager' using the 'Product Family Roadmap'. Last is 'Product', led by the 'Product Owner' using the 'Product Roadmap' and 'Backlog' on the strategic end, and 'Releases' on the Tactical end. In the holistic context, 'Product Family is considered 'Strategic' while 'Product' is 'Tactical'.

    Recognize the different product owner perspectives

    Business
    • Customer facing, revenue generating
    Technical
    • IT systems and tools
    Operations
    • Keep the lights on processes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Recognize that product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.” (Robbin Schuurman, “Tips for Starting Product Owners”)

    Implement the Info-Tech product owner capability model

    As discussed in Build a Better Product Owner, most product owners operate with an incomplete knowledge of the skills and capabilities needed to perform the role. Common gaps include focusing only on product backlogs, acting as a proxy for product decisions, and ignoring the need for key performance indicators (KPIs) and analytics in both planning and value realization. 'Product Owner Capabilities': 'Vision', 'Leadership', 'Product Lifecycle Management', 'Value Realization'.
    Vision
    • Market Analysis
    • Business Alignment
    • Product Roadmap
    Leadership
    • Soft Skills
    • Collaboration
    • Decision Making
    Product Lifecycle Management
    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run
    Value Realization
    • KPIs
    • Financial Management
    • Business Model

    Details on product ownership capabilities can be found in the appendix.

    Exercise 1.3.1 Identify product ownership capabilities

    60 minutes

    Output: Product owner capability mapping

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Write down the capabilities product owners need to perform their duties (one per sticky note) in order to describe product ownership in your organization. Consider people, processes, and tools.
    2. Mark each capability with a plus (current capability), circle (some proficiency), or dash (missing capability).
    3. Discuss each capability and place on the appropriate quadrant.

    'Product Owner Capabilities': 'Vision', 'Leadership', 'Product Lifecycle Management', 'Value Realization'.

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Differentiate between product owners and product managers

    Product Owner (Tactical Focus)
    • Backlog management and prioritization
    • Epic/story definition, refinement in conjunction with business stakeholders
    • Sprint planning with Scrum Master
    • Working with Scrum Master to minimize disruption to team velocity
    • Ensuring alignment between business and Scrum teams during sprints
    • Profit and loss (P&L) product analysis and monitoring
    Product Manager (Strategic Focus)
    • Product strategy, positioning, and messaging
    • Product vision and product roadmap
    • Competitive analysis and positioning
    • New product innovation/definition
    • Release timing and focus (release themes)
    • Ongoing optimization of product-related marketing and sales activities
    • P&L product analysis and monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Product owner” and “product manager” are terms that should be adapted to fit your culture and product hierarchy. These are not management relationships but rather a way to structure related products and services that touch the same end users.

    Step 1.4

    Communicate what comes next

    Activities
    • 1.4.1 How do we get started?

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A now, next, later roadmap indicating your overall next steps.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Make a plan in order to make a plan!

    Consider some of the techniques you can use to validate your strategy.

    Cyclical diagram of the 'Continuous Delivery of Value' within 'Business Value'. Surrounding attributes are 'User Centric', 'Adaptable', 'Accessible', 'Private & Secured', 'Informative & Insightful', 'Seamless Application Connection', 'Relationship & Network Building', 'Fit for Purpose'.

    Go to your backlog and prioritize the elements that need to be answered sooner rather than later.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Regulatory requirements or questions to answer around accessibility, security, privacy.
    • Stress testing any new processes against situations that may occur.
    Learning Milestones

    The completion of a set of artifacts dedicated to validating business opportunities and hypotheses.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Align teams on product strategy prior to build
    • Market research and analysis
    • Dedicated feedback sessions
    • Provide information on feature requirements
    Stock image of people learning.
    Sprint Zero (AKA Project-before-the-project)

    The completion of a set of key planning activities, typically the first sprint.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Focus on technical verification to enable product development alignment
    • Sign off on architectural questions or concerns
    Stock photo of a person writing on a board of sticky notes.

    The “Now, Next, Later” roadmap

    Use this when deadlines and delivery dates are not strict. This is best suited for brainstorming a product plan when dependency mapping is not required.

    • Now
      What are you going to do now?
    • Next
      What are you going to do very soon?
    • Later
      What are you going to do in the future?
    A priority map laid out as a half rainbow with 'Now' as the inner, 'Next' as the middle, and 'Later' as the outer. Various 'Features', 'Releases', and an 'MVP' are mapped into the sections.
    (Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017)

    Exercise 1.4.1 How do we get started?

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Product transformation critical steps and basic roadmap

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify what the critical steps are for the organization to embrace product-centric delivery.
    2. Group each critical step by how soon you need to address it:
      • Now: Let’s do this ASAP.
      • Next: Sometime very soon, let’s do these things.
      • Later: Much further off in the distance, let’s consider these things.
    A priority map laid out as a half rainbow with 'Now' as the inner, 'Next' as the middle, and 'Later' as the outer. Various 'Features', 'Releases', and an 'MVP' are mapped into the sections.
    (Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017)

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Example

    Example table for listing tasks to complete Now, Next, or Later

    Step 1.5

    Make the case to your stakeholders

    Activities
    • 1.5.1 Identify what support you need from your stakeholders
    • 1.5.2 Build your pitch for product delivery

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A deliverable that helps make the case for product delivery.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Develop a stakeholder strategy to define your product owner landscape

    Stakeholder Influence

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner is able to accomplish.

    Product teams operate within this network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    See the appendix for activities and guidance on how to devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Image of four puzzle pieces being put together, labelled 'Product Lifecycle', 'Project Delivery', 'Operational Support', 'and Stakeholder Management'.

    Exercise 1.5.1 Identify what support you need from your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Output: Clear understanding of stakeholders, what they need from you, and what you need from them.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. If you don’t yet know who your stakeholders are, consider completing one or more of the stakeholder management exercises in the appendix.
    2. Identify your key stakeholders who have an interest in solution delivery.
    3. Consider their perspective on product-centric delivery. (For example: For head of support, what does solution delivery mean to them?)
    4. Identify what role each stakeholder would play in the transformation.
      • This role represents what you need from them for this transformation to product-centric delivery.
    Stakeholder
    What does solution delivery mean to them?
    What do you need from them in order to be successful?

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Exercise 1.5.2 Build your pitch deck

    30 minutes (and up)

    Output: A completed presentation to help you make the case for product delivery.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Take the results from the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook and transfer them into the presentation template.
    2. Follow the instructions on each page listed in the instruction bubbles to know what results to place where.
    3. This is meant to be a template; you are welcome to add and remove slides as needed to suit your audience!

    Sample of slides from the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook with instruction bubbles overlaid.

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Appendix

    Additional research to start your journey

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product Delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Build a Better Product Owner

    • Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    • Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    • Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    • Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    • Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    • Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    • Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    • Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Application Portfolio Management

    Application Portfolio Management (APM) Research Center

    • See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management for Small Enterprises

    • There is no one-size-fits-all rationalization. Tailor your framework to meet your goals.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    • Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    • Manage your application portfolio to minimize risk and maximize value.

    Modernize Your Applications

    • Justify modernizing your application portfolio from both business and technical perspectives.

    Review Your Application Strategy

    • Ensure your applications enable your business strategy.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    • Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Streamline Application Management

    • Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    • Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    • Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    • Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    • Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    • Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    • Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    • Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    • Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Org Design and Performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    • Have the right people, in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    • Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    • Measure employee sentiment to drive IT performance

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    • Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • PMOs, if you don't know who is responsible for org change, it's you.

    Appendix

    Product delivery strategy communication

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we demonstrate how the product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path, and as a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    Diagram on how to get from product owner capabilities to 'Business Value Realization' through 'Product Roadmap' with a 'Tiered Backlog', 'Delivery Capacity and Throughput' via a 'Product Delivery Pipeline'.
    (Adapted from: Pichler, “What Is Product Management?”)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver.
    Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    Two-part diagram showing the 'Product Backlog' segmented into '1. Current: Features/ Stories', '2. Near-term: Capabilities', and '3. Future: Epics', and then the 'Product Roadmap' with the same segments placed into a timeline.

    Multiple roadmap views can communicate differently, yet tell the same truth

    Product managers and product owners have many responsibilities, and a roadmap can be a useful tool to complete those objectives through communication or organization of tasks.

    However, not all roadmaps address the correct audience and achieve those objectives. Care must be taken to align the view to the given audience.

    Pie Chart showing the surveyed most important reason for using a product roadmap. From largest to smallest are 'Communicate a strategy', 'Plan and prioritize', 'Communicate milestones and releases', 'Get consensus on product direction', and 'Manage product backlog'.
    Surveyed most important reason for using a product roadmap (Source: ProductPlan, 2018)

    Audience
    Business/ IT leaders Users/Customers Delivery teams
    Roadmap View
    Portfolio Product Technology
    Objectives
    To provide a snapshot of the portfolio and priority apps To visualize and validate product strategy To coordinate and manage teams and show dev. progress
    Artifacts
    Line items or sections of the roadmap are made up of individual apps, and an artifact represents a disposition at its highest level. Artifacts are generally grouped by various product teams and consist of strategic goals and the features that realize those goals. Artifacts are grouped by the teams who deliver that work and consist of features and technical enablers that support those features.

    Appendix

    Managing stakeholder influence

    From Build a Better Product Owner

    Step 1.3 (from Build a Better Product Owner)

    Manage Stakeholder Influence

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Visualize interrelationships to identify key influencers
    • 1.3.2 Group your product owners into categories
    • 1.3.3 Prioritize your stakeholders
    • 1.3.4 Delegation Poker: Reach better decisions

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    To be successful, product owners need to identify and manage all stakeholders for their products. This step will build a stakeholder map and strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers
    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers
    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization
    • Better understanding of decision-making approaches and delegation
    Product Owner Foundations
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3

    Develop a product owner stakeholder strategy

    Stakeholder Influence

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner is able to accomplish.

    Product owners operate within this network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    First, product owners must identify members of their stakeholder network. Next, they should devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Without accomplishing these missing pieces, product owners will encounter obstacles, resistance, or unexpected changes.

    Image of four puzzle pieces being put together, labelled 'Product Lifecycle', 'Project Delivery', 'Operational Support', 'and Stakeholder Management'.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Legend
    Black arrow with a solid line and single direction. Black arrows indicate the direction of professional influence
    Green arrow with a dashed line and bi-directional. Dashed green arrows indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product operates in. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Use “connectors” to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantive relationships with your stakeholders.

    1.3.1 Visualize interrelationships to identify key influencers

    60 minutes

    Input: List of product stakeholders

    Output: Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. List direct stakeholders for your product.
    2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
      1. Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      2. Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.
    5. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps product owners categorize their stakeholders by their level or influence and ownership in the product and/or teams.

    Stakeholder prioritization map split into four quadrants along two axes, 'Influence', and 'Ownership/Interest': 'Players' (high influence, high interest); 'Mediators' (high influence, low interest); 'Noisemakers' (low influence, high interest); 'Spectators' (low influence, low interest). Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.
    • Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
    • Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    1.3.2 Group your product owners into categories

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder map

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify your stakeholder’s interest in and influence on your Agile implementation as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model below to determine each stakeholder’s category.
    3. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.
    Same stakeholder prioritization map as before but with example positions mapped onto it.
    Level of Influence
    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Stakeholder prioritization table with 'Stakeholder Category' as row headers ('Player', 'Mediator', 'Noisemaker', 'Spectator') and 'Level of Support' as column headers ('Supporter', 'Evangelist', 'Neutral', 'Blocker'). Importance ratings are 'Critical', 'High', 'Medium', 'Low', and 'Irrelevant'.

    Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by rating the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would recommend your product? These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive the focus of your attention. The table to the right indicates how stakeholders are ranked.

    1.3.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder matrix, Stakeholder prioritization

    Output: Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would endorse your product?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.
    3. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.
    Stakeholder Category Level of Support Prioritization
    CMO Spectator Neutral Irrelevant
    CIO Player Supporter Critical

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    Stakeholder strategy map assigning stakeholder strategies to stakeholder categories, as described in the adjacent table.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, the product owner can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers, while ensuring the needs of the Mediators and Players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence; high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence; low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence; high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence; low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Appendix

    Product owner capability details

    From Build a Better Product Owner

    Develop product owner capabilities

    Capability 'Vision' with sub-capabilities 'Market Analysis, 'Business Alignment', and 'Product Roadmap'.

    Each capability has three components needed for successful product ownership.

    Definitions are on the following slides.

    Central diagram title 'Product Owner Capabilities'.

    Define the skills and activities in each component that are directly related to your product and culture.

    Capability 'Leadership' with sub-capabilities 'Soft Skills', 'Collaboration', and 'Decision Making'.
    Capability 'Product Lifecycle Management' with sub- capabilities 'Plan', 'Build', and 'Run'. Capability 'Value Realization' with sub-capabilities 'KPIs', 'Financial Management', and 'Business Model'.

    Capabilities: Vision

    Market Analysis

    • Unique solution: Identify the target users and unique value your product provides that is not currently being met.
    • Market size: Define the size of your user base, segmentation, and potential growth.
    • Competitive analysis: Determine alternative solutions, products, or threats that affect adoption, usage, and retention.

    Business Alignment

    • SWOT analysis: Complete a SWOT analysis for your end-to-end product lifecycle. Use Info-Tech’s Business SWOT Analysis Template.
    • Enterprise alignment: Align product to enterprise goals, strategies, and constraints.
    • Delivery strategy: Develop a delivery strategy to achieve value quickly and adapt to internal and external changes.

    Product Roadmap

    • Roadmap strategy: Determine the duration, detail, and structure of your roadmap to accurately communicate your vision.
    • Value prioritization: Define criteria used to evaluate and sequence demand.
    • Go to market strategy: Create organizational change management, communications, and a user implementation approach.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data comes from many places and may still not tell the complete story.

    Capability 'Vision' with sub-capabilities 'Market Analysis, 'Business Alignment', and 'Product Roadmap'.

    “Customers are best heard through many ears.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Leadership

    Soft Skills

    • Communication: Maintain consistent, concise, and appropriate communication using SMART guidelines (specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely).
    • Integrity: Stick to your values, principles, and decision criteria for the product to build and maintain trust with your users and teams.
    • Influence: Manage stakeholders using influence and collaboration over contract negotiation.

    Collaboration

    • Stakeholder management: Build a communications strategy for each stakeholder group, tailored to individual stakeholders.
    • Relationship management: Use every interaction point to strengthen relationships, build trust, and empower teams.
    • Team development: Promote development through stretch goals and controlled risks to build team capabilities and performance.

    Decision Making

    • Prioritized criteria: Remove personal bias by basing decisions off data analysis and criteria.
    • Continuous improvement: Balance new features with the need to ensure quality and create an environment of continuous improvement.
    • Team empowerment/negotiation: Push decisions to teams closest to the problem and solution, using Delegation Poker to guide you.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners cannot be just a proxy for stakeholder decisions. The product owner owns product decisions and management of all stakeholders.

    Capability 'Leadership' with sub-capabilities 'Soft Skills', 'Collaboration', and 'Decision Making'.

    “Everything walks the walk. Everything talks the talk.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Product lifecycle management

    Plan

    • Product backlog: Follow a schedule for backlog intake, refinement, updates, and prioritization.
    • Journey map: Create an end-user journey map to guide adoption and loyalty.
    • Fit for purpose: Define expected value and intended use to ensure the product meets your end user’s needs.

    Build

    • Capacity management: Work with operations and delivery teams to ensure consistent and stable outcomes.
    • Release strategy: Build learning, release, and critical milestones into a repeatable release plan.
    • Compliance: Build policy compliance into delivery practices to ensure alignment and reduce avoidable risk (privacy, security).

    Run

    • Adoption: Focus attention on end-user adoption and proficiency to accelerate value and maximize retention.
    • Support: Build operational support and business continuity into every team.
    • Measure: Measure KPIs and validate expected value to ensure product alignment to goals and consistent product quality.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners must actively manage the full lifecycle of the product.

    Capability 'Product Lifecycle Management' with sub- capabilities 'Plan', 'Build', and 'Run'.

    “Pay fantastic attention to detail. Reward, recognize, celebrate.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Value realization

    Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

    • Usability and user satisfaction: Assess satisfaction through usage monitoring and end-user feedback.
    • Value validation: Directly measure performance against defined value proposition, goals, and predicted ROI.
    • Fit for purpose: Verify the product addresses the intended purpose better than other options.

    Financial Management

    • P&L: Manage each product as if it were its own business with profit and loss statements.
    • Acquisition cost/market growth: Define the cost of acquiring a new consumer, onboarding internal users, and increasing product usage.
    • User retention/market share: Verify product usage continues after adoption and solution reaches new user groups to increase value.

    Business Model

    • Defines value proposition: Dedicate your primary focus to understanding and defining the value your product will deliver.
    • Market strategy and goals: Define your acquisition, adoption, and retention plan for users.
    • Financial model: Build an end-to-end financial model and plan for the product and all related operational support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Most organizations stop with on-time and on-budget. True financial alignment needs to define and manage the full lifecycle P&L.

    Capability 'Value Realization' with sub-capabilities 'KPIs', 'Financial Management', and 'Business Model'.

    “The competition is anyone the customer compares you with.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Avoid common capability gaps

    Vision

    • Focusing solely on backlog refining (tactical only)
    • Ignoring or failing to align product roadmap to enterprise goals
    • Operational support and execution
    • Basing decisions on opinion rather than market data
    • Ignoring or missing internal and external threats to your product

    Leadership

    • Failing to include feedback from all teams who interact with your product
    • Using a command-and-control approach
    • Viewing product owner as only a delivery role
    • Acting as a proxy for stakeholder decisions
    • Avoiding tough strategic decisions in favor of easier tactical choices

    Product Lifecycle Management

    • Focusing on delivery and not the full product lifecycle
    • Ignoring support, operations, and technical debt
    • Failing to build knowledge management into the lifecycle
    • Underestimating delivery capacity, capabilities, or commitment
    • Assuming delivery stops at implementation

    Value Realization

    • Focusing exclusively on “on time/on budget” metrics
    • Failing to measure a 360-degree end-user view of the product
    • Skipping business plans and financial models
    • Limiting financial management to project/change budgets
    • Ignoring market analysis for growth, penetration, and threats

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    A, Karen. “20 Mental Models for Product Managers.” Medium, Product Management Insider, 2 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Adams, Paul. “Product Teams: How to Build & Structure Product Teams for Growth.” Inside Intercom, 30 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Agile Alliance. “Product Owner.” Agile Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Banfield, Richard, et al. “On-Demand Webinar: Strategies for Scaling Your (Growing) Enterprise Product Team.” Pluralsight, 31 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Blueprint. “10 Ways Requirements Can Sabotage Your Projects Right From the Start.” Blueprint, 2012. Web.

    Breddels, Dajo, and Paul Kuijten. “Product Owner Value Game.” Agile2015 Conference, 2015. Web.

    Cagan, Martin. “Behind Every Great Product.” Silicon Valley Product Group, 2005. Web.

    Cohn, Mike “What is a product?” Mountain Goat Software, 16 Sept. 2016, Web

    Connellan, Thomas K. Inside the Magic Kingdom. Bard Press, 1997. Print.

    Curphey, Mark, “Product Definition.” slideshare.net, 25 Feb. 2007. Web

    Eringa, Ron. “Evolution of the Product Owner.” RonEringa.com, 12 June 2016. Web.

    Fernandes, Thaisa. “Spotify Squad Framework - Part I.” Medium.com, 6 March 2017. Web.

    Galen, Robert. “Measuring Product Ownership – What Does ‘Good’ Look Like?” RGalen Consulting, 5 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Halisky, Merland, and Luke Lackrone. “The Product Owner’s Universe.” Agile Alliance, Agile2016, 2016. Web.

    Kamer, Jurriaan. “How to Build Your Own ‘Spotify Model’.” Medium.com, 9 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Kendis Team. “Exploring Key Elements of Spotify’s Agile Scaling Model.” Medium.com, 23 July 2018. Web.

    Lindstrom, Lowell. “7 Skills You Need to Be a Great Product Owner.” Scrum Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Lukassen, Chris. “The Five Belts Of The Product Owner.” Xebia.com, 20 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Management 3.0. “Delegation Poker Product Image.” Management 3.0, n.d. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “Scaling Product Management: Secrets to Defeating Common Challenges.” ProductPlan, 12 July 2019. Web.

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    McCloskey, Heather. “When and How to Scale Your Product Team.” UserVoice, 21 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Mironov, Rich. “Scaling Up Product Manager/Owner Teams: Rich Mironov's Product Bytes.” Rich Mironov's Product Bytes, Mironov Consulting, 12 April 2014 . Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “A Product Owner Self-Assessment.” Barry Overeem, 6 March 2017. Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “Retrospective: Using the Team Radar.” Barry Overeem, 27 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “How to Scale the Scrum Product Owner.” Roman Pichler, 28 June 2016 . Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Product Management Framework.” Pichler Consulting Limited, 2014. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Sprint Planning Tips for Product Owners.” LinkedIn, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “What Is Product Management?” Pichler Consulting Limited, 26 Nov. 2014. Web.

    Radigan, Dan. “Putting the ‘Flow' Back in Workflow With WIP Limits.” Atlassian, n.d. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Agile Product Management.” Scrum.org, 28 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on (Business) Value.” Scrum.org, 30 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Scrum.org, 5 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on the Product Vision.” Scrum.org, 29 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Starting Product Owners.” Scrum.org, 27 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Sharma, Rohit. “Scaling Product Teams the Structured Way.” Monetary Musings, 28 Nov. 2016. Web.

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    Steiner, Anne. “Start to Scale Your Product Management: Multiple Teams Working on Single Product.” Cprime, 6 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Shirazi, Reza. “Betsy Stockdale of Seilevel: Product Managers Are Not Afraid To Be Wrong.” Austin VOP #50, 2 Oct. 2018. Web.

    “The Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” The Standish Group, 2015. Web.

    Theus, Andre. “When Should You Scale the Product Management Team?” ProductPlan, 7 May 2019. Web.

    Tolonen, Arto. “Scaling Product Management in a Single Product Company.” Smartly.io, 26 Apr. 2018. Web.

    Ulrich, Catherine. “The 6 Types of Product Managers. Which One Do You Need?” Medium.com, 19 Dec. 2017. Web.

    VersionOne. “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    Verwijs, Christiaan. “Retrospective: Do The Team Radar.” Medium.com, 10 Feb. 2017. Web.

    “How do you define a product?” Scrum.org, 4 April 2017, Web.

    “Product Definition.” TechTarget, Sept. 2005. Web

    Bibliography – Product Roadmap

    Ambysoft. “2018 IT Project Success Rates Survey Results.” Ambysoft. 2018. Web.

    Bastow, Janna. “Creating Agile Product roadmaps Everyone Understands.” ProdPad, 22 Mar. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bastow, Janna. “The Product Tree Game: Our Favorite Way To Prioritize Features.” ProdPad, 21 Feb. 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Chernak, Yuri. “Requirements Reuse: The State of the Practice.” 2012, Herzlia, Israel, 2012 IEEE International Conference on Software Science, Technology and Engineering, 12 June 2012. Web.

    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Harrin, Elizabeth. “Learn What a Project Milestone Is.” The Balance Careers, 10 May 2018. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    “How to create a product roadmap.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “How to Master the 3 Horizons of Product Strategy.” Aha!, 24 Sept. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “The Product Roadmap vs. the Technology Roadmap.” Aha!, 23 June 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Juncal, Shaun. “How Should You Set Your Product Roadmap Timeframes?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile, Inc., 2017. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “What is a Minimum Viable Product (MVP)?” LEANSTACK, 12 June 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. “10 Tips for Creating an Agile Product Roadmap.” Roman Pichler, 20 July 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. Strategize: Product Strategy and Product Roadmap Practices for the Digital Age. Pichler Consulting, 2016.

    “Product Roadmap Contents: What Should You Include?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Saez, Andrea. “Why Your Roadmap Is Not a Release Plan.” ProdPad, 23 Oct. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples.” Scrum.org, 7 Dec. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Emily Archer, Lead Business Analyst, Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency.

    Emily Archer
    Lead Business Analyst,
    Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency

    Emily Archer is a consultant currently working with Fortune 500 clients to ensure the delivery of successful projects, products, and processes. She helps increase the business value returned for organizations’ investments in designing and implementing enterprise content hubs and content operations, custom web applications, digital marketing, and e-commerce platforms.

    Photo of David Berg, Founder & CTO, Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg
    Founder & CTO
    Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg is a product commercialization expert that has spent the last 20 years of his career delivering product management and business development services across a broad range of industries. Early in his career, David worked with product management and engineering teams to build core network infrastructure products that secure and power the internet we benefit from today. David’s experience also includes working with clean technologies in the area of clean power generation, agritech, and Internet of Things infrastructure. Over the last five years, David has been focused on his latest venture, Strainprint Technologies, a data and analytics company focused on the medical cannabis industry. Strainprint has built the largest longitudinal medical cannabis dataset in the world with the goal to develop an understanding of treatment behavior, interactions, and chemical drivers to guide future product development.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Blank photo template.

    Kathy Borneman
    Digital Product Owner, SunTrust Bank

    Kathy Borneman is a senior product owner who helps people enjoy their jobs again by engaging others in end-to-end decision making to deliver software and operational solutions that enhance the client experience and allow people to think and act strategically.

    Photo of Charlie Campbell, Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions.

    Charlie Campbell
    Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions

    Charlie Campbell is an experienced problem solver with the ability to quickly dissect situations and recommend immediate actions to achieve resolution, liaise between technical and functional personnel to bridge the technology and communication gap, and work with diverse teams and resources to reach a common goal.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Yarrow Diamond, Sr. Director, Business Architecture, Financial Services.

    Yarrow Diamond
    Sr. Director, Business Architecture
    Financial Services

    Yarrow Diamond is an experienced professional with expertise in enterprise strategy development, project portfolio management, and business process reengineering across financial services, healthcare and insurance, hospitality, and real estate environments. She has a master’s in Enterprise Architecture from Penn State University, LSSMBB, PMP, CSM, ITILv3.

    Photo of Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA, Enterprise Business Systems Analyst, Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA
    Enterprise Business Systems Analyst,
    Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey has a history in software development and implementation as a Business Analyst and Project Manager for financial and taxation software vendors. Active in the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA), Cari participated on the writing team for the BA Body of Knowledge 3.0 and the certification exam.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Kieran Gobey, Senior Consultant Professional Services, Blueprint Software Systems.

    Kieran Gobey
    Senior Consultant Professional Services
    Blueprint Software Systems

    Kieran Gobey is an IT professional with 24 years of experience, focused on business, technology, and systems analysis. He has split his career between external and internal customer-facing roles, and this has resulted in a true understanding of what is required to be a Professional Services Consultant. His problem-solving skills and ability to mentor others have resulted in successful software implementations.

    Kieran’s specialties include deep system troubleshooting and analysis skills, facilitating communications to bring together participants effectively, mentoring, leadership, and organizational skills.

    Photo of Rupert Kainzbauer, VP Product, Digital Wallets, Paysafe Group.

    Rupert Kainzbauer
    VP Product, Digital Wallets
    Paysafe Group

    Rupert Kainzbauer is an experienced senior leader with a passion for defining and delivering products that deliver real customer and commercial benefit. Together with a team of highly experienced and motivated product managers, he has successfully led highly complex, multi-stakeholder payments initiatives, from proposition development and solution design through to market delivery. Their domain experience is in building online payment products in high-risk and emerging markets, remittance, prepaid cards, and mobile applications.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Saeed Khan, Founder, Transformation Labs.

    Saeed Khan
    Founder,
    Transformation Labs

    Saeed Khan has been working in high tech for 30 years in both Canada and the US and has held a number of leadership roles in Product Management over that time. He speaks regularly at conferences and has been writing publicly about technology product management since 2005.

    Through Transformation Labs, Saeed helps companies accelerate product success by working with product teams to improve their skills, practices, and processes. He is a cofounder of ProductCamp Toronto and currently runs a Meetup group and global Slack community called Product Leaders, the only global community of senior-level product executives.

    Photo of Hoi Kun Lo, Product Owner, Nielsen.

    Hoi Kun Lo
    Product Owner
    Nielsen

    Hoi Kun Lo is an experienced change agent who can be found actively participating within the IIBA and WITI groups in Tampa, FL, and a champion for Agile, architecture, diversity, and inclusion programs at Nielsen. She is currently a Product Owner in the Digital Strategy team within Nielsen Global Watch Technology.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Abhishek Mathur, Sr Director, Product Management, Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur
    Sr Director, Product Management
    Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur is a product management leader, an artificial intelligence practitioner, and an educator. He has led product management and engineering teams at Clarifai, IBM, and Kasisto to build a variety of artificial intelligence applications within the space of computer vision, natural language processing, and recommendation systems. Abhishek enjoys having deep conversations about the future of technology and helping aspiring product managers enter and accelerate their careers.

    Photo of Jeff Meister, Technology Advisor and Product Leader.

    Jeff Meister
    Technology Advisor and Product Leader

    Jeff Meister is a technology advisor and product leader. He has more than 20 years of experience building and operating software products and the teams that build them. He has built products across a wide range of industries and has built and led large engineering, design, and product organizations.

    Jeff most recently served as Senior Director of Product Management at Avanade, where he built and led the product management practice. This involved hiring and leading product managers, defining product management processes, solution shaping and engagement execution, and evangelizing the discipline through pitches, presentations, and speaking engagements.

    Jeff holds a Bachelor of Applied Science (Electrical Engineering) and a Bachelor of Arts from the University of Waterloo, an MBA from INSEAD (Strategy), and certifications in product management, project management, and design thinking.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Vincent Mirabelli, Principal, Global Project Synergy Group.

    Vincent Mirabelli
    Principal,
    Global Project Synergy Group

    With over 10 years of experience in both the private and public sectors, Vincent Mirabelli possesses an impressive track record of improving, informing, and transforming business strategy and operations through process improvement, design and re-engineering, and the application of quality to business analysis, project management, and process improvement standards.

    Photo of Oz Nazili, VP, Product & Growth, TWG.

    Oz Nazili
    VP, Product & Growth
    TWG

    Oz Nazili is a product leader with a decade of experience in both building products and product teams. Having spent time at funded startups and large enterprises, he thinks often about the most effective way to deliver value to users. His core areas of interest include Lean MVP development and data-driven product growth.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Mark Pearson, Principal IT Architect, First Data Corporation.

    Mark Pearson
    Principal IT Architect
    First Data Corporation

    Mark Pearson is an executive business leader grounded in the process, data, technology, and operations of software-driven business. He knows the enterprise software landscape and is skilled in product, technology, and operations design and delivery within information technology organizations, outsourcing firms, and software product companies.

    Photo of Brenda Peshak, Product Owner, Widget Industries, LLC.

    Brenda Peshak
    Product Owner,
    Widget Industries, LLC

    Brenda Peshak is skilled in business process, analytical skills, Microsoft Office Suite, communication, and customer relationship management (CRM). She is a strong product management professional with a Master’s focused in Business Leadership (MBL) from William Penn University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Mike Starkey, Director of Engineering, W.W. Grainger.

    Mike Starkey
    Director of Engineering
    W.W. Grainger

    Mike Starkey is a Director of Engineering at W.W. Grainger, currently focusing on operating model development, digital architecture, and building enterprise software. Prior to joining W.W. Grainger, Mike held a variety of technology consulting roles throughout the system delivery lifecycle spanning multiple industries such as healthcare, retail, manufacturing, and utilities with Fortune 500 companies.

    Photo of Anant Tailor, Cofounder & Head of Product, Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor
    Cofounder & Head of Product
    Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor is a cofounder at Dream Payments where he currently serves as the COO and Head of Product, having responsibility for Product Strategy & Development, Client Delivery, Compliance, and Operations. He has 20+ years of experience building and operating organizations that deliver software products and solutions for consumers and businesses of varying sizes.

    Prior to founding Dream Payments, Anant was the COO and Director of Client Services at DonRiver Inc, a technology strategy and software consultancy that he helped to build and scale into a global company with 100+ employees operating in seven countries.

    Anant is a Professional Engineer with a Bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering from McMaster University and a certificate in Product Strategy & Management from the Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Angela Weller, Scrum Master, Businessolver.

    Angela Weller
    Scrum Master, Businessolver

    Angela Weller is an experienced Agile business analyst who collaborates with key stakeholders to attain their goals and contributes to the achievement of the company’s strategic objectives to ensure a competitive advantage. She excels when mediating or facilitating teams.

    Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}11|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}11|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}11|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $22,900
    • member rating average days saved: 20
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    The service desk is typically the first point of contact for clients and staff who need something. Make sure your team is engaged, involved, knowledgeable, and gives excellent customer service.

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}253|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $48,932 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 42 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Many IT and security leaders struggle to understand zero trust and how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources.
    • The need to move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach is clear. The path to getting there is complex and expensive.
    • Zero trust as a principle is a moving target due to competing definitions and standards. A strategy that adapts evolving best practices must be supported by business stakeholders.
    • Full zero trust includes many components. Performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Apply zero trust to key protect surfaces. A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Impact and Result

    Every organization should have a zero trust strategy and the roadmap to deploy it must always be tested and refined. Our unique approach:

    • Assess resources and determine zero trust readiness.
    • Prioritize initiatives and build out roadmap.
    • Deploy zero trust and monitor with zero trust progress metrics.

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Zero Trust Roadmap Deck – The purpose of the storyboard is to provide a detailed description of the steps involving in building a roadmap for implementing zero trust.

    The storyboard contains five easy-to-follow steps on building a roadmap for implementing zero trust, from aligning initiatives to business goals to establishing metrics for measuring the progress and effectiveness of a zero trust implementation.

    • Build a Zero Trust Roadmap – Phases 1-5

    2. Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool – A tool to identify key protect surfaces and map them to business goals.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by having it focus on key protect surfaces that are aligned to the goals of the business.

    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    3. Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool – A tool to perform a gap analysis between the organization's current implementation of zero trust controls and its desired target state and to build a roadmap to achieve the target state.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by creating a roadmap that is aligned with the current state of the organization when it comes to zero trust and its desired target state.

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    4. Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool – A tool to identify and evaluate solutions for identified zero trust initiatives.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by identifying the best solutions for zero trust initiatives.

    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    5. Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool – A tool to identify metrics to measure the progress and efficiency of the zero trust implementation.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by identifying metrics that will allow the organization to monitor how the zero trust implementation is progressing, and whether it is proving to be effective.

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    6. Zero Trust Communication Deck – A template to present the zero trust template to key stakeholders.

    Use this template to present the zero trust strategy and roadmap to ensure all key elements are captured.

    • Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    The Purpose

    Align business goals to protect surfaces.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A better understanding of how business goals can map to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand business and IT strategy and plans.

    1.2 Define business goals.

    1.3 Identify five critical protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    1.4 Map business goals and protect surfaces.

    Outputs

    Mapping of business goals to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    2 Begin Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Identify and define zero trust initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of zero trust initiatives to be prioritized and set into a roadmap.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess current security capabilities and define the zero trust target state for a set of controls.

    2.2 Identify tasks to close maturity gaps.

    2.3 Assign tasks to zero trust initiatives.

    Outputs

    Security capabilities current state assessment

    Zero trust target state

    Tasks to address maturity gaps

    3 Complete Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Complete the zero trust gap analysis and prioritize zero trust initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized list of zero trust initiatives aligned to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    Activities

    3.1 Align initiatives to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    3.2 Conduct cost/benefit analysis on zero trust initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize initiatives.

    Outputs

    Zero trust initiative list mapped to business goals and key protect surfaces

    Prioritization of zero trust initiatives

    4 Finalize Roadmap and Formulate Policies

    The Purpose

    Finalize the zero trust roadmap and begin to formulate zero trust policies for roadmap initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A zero trust roadmap of prioritized initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Define solution criteria.

    4.2 Identify candidate solutions.

    4.3 Evaluate candidate solutions.

    4.4 Finalize roadmap.

    4.5 Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements.

    4.6 Establish metrics for high-priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Zero trust roadmap

    Zero trust policies for critical protect surfaces

    Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions

    Metrics for high-priority initiatives

    Further reading

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    Leverage an iterative and repeatable process to apply zero trust to your organization.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Internet is the new corporate network.

    For the longest time we have focused on reducing the attack surface to deter malicious actors from attacking organizations, but I dare say that has made these actors scream “challenge accepted.” With sophisticated tools, time, and money in their hands, they have embarrassed even the finest of organizations. A popular hybrid workforce and rapid cloud adoption have introduced more challenges for organizations, as the security and network perimeter have shifted and the internet is now the corporate network. Suffice it to say that a new mindset needs to be adopted to stay on top of the game.

    The success of most attacks is tied to denial of service, data exfiltration, and ransom. A shift from focusing on the attack surface to the protect surface will help organizations implement an inside-out architecture that protects critical infrastructure, prevents the success of any attack, makes it difficult to gain access, and links directly to business goals.

    Zero trust principles aid that shift across several pillars (Identity, Device, Application, Network, and Data) that make up a typical infrastructure; hence, the need for a zero trust roadmap to accomplish that which we desire for our organization.

    Victor Okorie
    Senior Research Analyst, Security and Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Many IT and security leaders struggle to understand zero trust and how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources.
    • The need to move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach is clear. The path to getting there is complex and expensive.

    Common Obstacles

    • Zero trust as a principle is a moving target due to competing definitions and standards. A strategy that adapts evolving best practices must be supported by business stakeholders.
    • Full zero trust includes many components. Performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Every organization should have a zero trust strategy and the roadmap to deploy it must always be tested and refined.
    • Our unique approach:
      • Assess resources and determine zero trust readiness.
      • Address barriers and identify enablers.
      • Prioritize initiatives and build out roadmap.
      • Identify most appropriate vendors via vendor selection framework.
      • Deploy zero trust and monitor with zero trust progress metrics.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations:

    • Understand what zero trust is and decide how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources. Zero trust is a set of principles that defaults to the highest level of security; a failed implementation can easily disrupt the business. A pragmatic zero trust implementation must be flexible and adaptable yet maintain a consistent level of protection.
    • Move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach. The path to getting there is complex without a clear understanding of desired outcomes. Focusing efforts on key protection gaps and leveraging capable controls in existing architecture allows for a repeatable process that carries IT, security, and the business along on the journey.

    On this zero trust journey, identify your valuable assets and zero trust controls to protect them.

    Top three reasons for building a zero trust strategy

    44%

    Reduce attacker’s ability to move laterally

    44%

    Enforce least privilege access to critical resources

    41%

    Reduce enterprise attack surface

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Due to zero trust’s many components, performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.
      • To feel ready to implement and to understand the benefits of zero trust, IT must first understand what zero trust means to the organization.
    • Zero trust as a set of principles is a moving target, with many developing standards and competing technology definitions. A strategy built around evolving best practices must be supported by related business stakeholders.
      • To ensure support, IT must be able to “sell” zero trust to business stakeholders by illustrating the value zero trust can bring to business objectives.

    43%

    Organizations with a full implementation of zero trust saved 43% on the costs of data breaches.
    (Source: Teramind, 2021)

    96%

    Zero trust is considered key to the success of 96% of organizations in a survey conducted by Microsoft.
    (Source: Microsoft, 2021)

    What is zero trust?

    It depends on who you ask…

    • Vendors use zero trust as a marketing buzzword.
    • Organizations try to comprehend zero trust in their own limited views.
    • Zero trust regulations/standards are still developing.

    “A cybersecurity paradigm focused on resource protection and the premise that trust is never granted implicitly but must be continually evaluated.”

    Source: NIST, SP 800-207: Zero Trust Architecture, 2020

    “An evolving set of cybersecurity paradigms that move defenses from static, network-based perimeters to focus on users, assets, and resources.”

    Source: DOD, Zero Trust Reference Architecture, 2021

    “A security model, a set of system design principles, and a coordinated cybersecurity and system management strategy based on an acknowledgement that threats exist both inside and outside traditional network boundaries.”

    Source: NSA, Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model, 2021

    “Zero trust provides a collection of concepts and ideas designed to minimize uncertainty in enforcing accurate, least privilege per-request access decisions in information systems and services in the face of a network viewed as compromised.”

    Source: CISA, Zero Trust Maturity Model, 2021

    “The foundational tenet of the zero trust model is that no actor, system, network, or service operating outside or within the security perimeter is trusted.”

    Source: OMB, Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles, 2022

    What is zero trust?

    From Theoretical to Practical

    Zero trust is an ideal in the literal sense of the word, because it is a standard defined by its perfection. Just as nothing in life is perfect, there is no measure that determines an organization is absolutely zero trust. The best organizations can do is improve their security iteratively and get as close to ideal as possible.

    In the most current application of zero trust in the enterprise, a zero trust strategy applies a set of principles, including least-privilege access and per-request access enforcement, to minimize compromise to critical assets. A zero trust roadmap is a plan that leverages zero trust concepts, considers relationships between technical elements as well as security solutions, and applies consistent access policies to minimize areas of exposure.

    Zero Trust; Identity; Workloads & Applications; Network; Devices; Data

    Info-Tech Insight

    Solutions offering zero trust often align with one of five pillars. A successful zero trust implementation may involve a combination of solutions, each protecting the various data, application, assets, and/or services elements in the protect surface.

    Zero trust business benefits

    Reduce business and organizational risk

    Reduced business risks as continuous verification of identity, devices, network, applications, and data is embedded in the organizations practice.

    36% of data breaches involved internal actors.
    Source: Verizon, 2021

    Reduce CapEx and OpEx

    Reduced CapEx and OpEx due to the scalability, low staffing requirement, and improved time-to-respond to threats.
    Source: SecurityBrief - Australia, 2020.

    Reduce scope and cost of compliance

    Helps achieve compliance with several privacy standards and regulations, improves maturity for cyber insurance premium, and fewer gaps during audits.

    Scope of compliance reduced due to segmentation.

    Reduce risk of data breach

    Reduced risk of data breach in any instance of a malicious attack as there’s no lateral movement, secure segment, and improved visibility.

    10% Increase in data breach costs; costs went from $3.86 million to $4.24 million.
    Source: IBM, 2021

    This is an image of a thought map detailing Info-Tech's Build A Zero Trust Roadmap.  The main headings are: Define; Design; Develop; Monitor

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Building a Zero Trust Roadmap

    1. Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    2. Assess Key Capabilities and Identify Zero Trust Initiatives

    3. Evaluate Candidate Solutions and Finalize Roadmap

    4. Formulate Policies for Roadmap Initiatives

    5. Monitor the Zero Trust Roadmap Deployment

    Phase Steps

    Define business goals

    Identify critical DAAS elements

    Map business goals to critical DAAS elements

    1. Review the Info-Tech framework
    2. Assess current capabilities and define the zero trust target state
    3. Identify tasks to close gaps
    4. Define tasks and initiatives
    5. Align initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces
    1. Define solution criteria
    2. Identify candidate solutions
    3. Evaluate candidate solutions
    4. Perform cost/benefit analysis
    5. Prioritize initiatives
    6. Finalize roadmap
    1. Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements
    2. Formulate policies to secure a path to access critical DAAS elements
    1. Establish metrics for roadmap tasks
    2. Track and report metrics
    3. Build a communication deck

    Phase Outcomes

    Mapping of business goals to protect surfaces

    Gap analysis of security capabilities

    Evaluation of candidate solutions and a roadmap to close gaps

    Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions

    Metrics for measuring the progress and efficiency of the zero trust implementation

    Protect what is relevant

    Apply zero trust to key protect surfaces

    A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Align protect surfaces to business objectives

    Developing a zero trust roadmap collaboratively with business stakeholders enables alignment with upcoming business priorities and industry trends.

    Identify zero trust capabilities

    Deriving protect surface elements from business goals reframes how security controls are applied. Assess control effectiveness in this context and identify zero trust capabilities to close any gaps.

    Roadmap first, not solution first

    Don’t let your solution dictate your roadmap. Define your zero trust solution criteria before engaging in vendor selection.

    Create enforceable policies

    The success of a zero trust implementation relies on consistent enforcement. Applying the Kipling methodology to each protect surface is the best way to design zero trust policies.

    Success should benefit the organization

    To measure the efficacy of a zero trust implementation, ensure you know what a successful zero trust implementation means for your organization, and define metrics that demonstrate whether that success is being realized.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Present your zero trust strategy in a prepopulated document that summarizes the work you have completed as a part of this blueprint.

    Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Identify critical and vulnerable DAAS elements to protect and align them to business goals.

    Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Perform a gap analysis between current and target states to build a zero trust roadmap.

    Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Determine and evaluate candidate solutions based on defined criteria.

    Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Develop metrics to track the progress and efficiency of the organization’s zero trust implementation.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • A mapped transaction flow of critical and vulnerable assets and visibility of where to implement security controls that aligns with the principle of zero trust.
    • Improved security posture across the digital attack surface while focusing on the protect surface.
    • An inside-out architecture that leverages current existing architecture to tighten security controls, is automated, and gives granular visibility.

    Business Benefits

    • Reduced business risks as continuous verification of identity, devices, network, applications, and data is embedded in the organization’s practice.
    • Reduced CapEx and OpEx due to the scalability, low staffing requirement, and improved time-to-respond to threats.
    • Helps achieve compliance with several privacy standards and regulations, improves maturity for cyber insurance premium, and fewer gaps during audits.
    • Reduced risk of data breach in any instance of a malicious attack.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Save an average of $1.76 million dollars in the event of a data breach

    • This research set seeks to help organizations develop a mature zero trust implementation which, according to IBM’s “Cost of a Data Breach 2021 Report,” saves organizations an average of $1.76 million in the event of a data breach.
    • Leverage phase 5 of this research to develop metrics to track the implementation progress and efficacy of zero trust tasks.

    43%

    Organizations with a mature implementation of zero trust saved 43%, or $1.76 million, on the costs of data breaches.
    Source: IBM, 2021

    In phase 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish zero trust implementation tasks for your organization.

    In phase 3, we will help you develop a game plan and a roadmap for implementing those tasks.

    This image contains a screenshot info-tech's methodology for building a zero-trust roadmap, discussed earlier in this blueprint

    Executive Brief Case Study

    National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA)

    INDUSTRY: Government

    SOURCE: Zero Trust Architecture Technical Exchange Meeting

    NASA recognized the potential benefits of both adopting a zero trust architecture (including aligning with OMB FISMA and DHS CDM DEFEND) and improving NASA systems, especially those related to user experience with dynamic access, application security with sole access from proxy, and risk-based asset management with trust score. The trust score is continually evaluated from a combination of static factors, such as credential and biometrics, and dynamic factors, such as location and behavior analytics, to determine the level of access. The enhanced access mechanism is projected on use-case flows of users and external partners to analyze the required initiatives.

    The lessons learned in adapting zero trust were:

    • Focus on access to data, assets, applications, and services; and don’t select solutions or vendors too early.
    • Provide support for mobile and external partners.
    • Complete zero trust infrastructure and services design with holistic risk-based management, including network access control with software-defined networking and an identity management program.
    • Develop a zero trust strategy that aligns with mission objectives.

    Results

    NASA implemented zero trust architecture by leveraging the agency existing components on a roadmap with phases related to maturity. The initial development includes privileged access management, security user behavior analytics, and a proof-of-concept lab for evaluating the technologies.
    Case Study Source: NASA, “Planning for a Zero Trust Architecture Target State,” 2019

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5
    Call #1:
    Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #3:
    Define current security capabilities and zero trust target state.

    Call #5:

    Identify and evaluate solution criteria.

    Call #7:
    Create a process for formulating zero trust policies.

    Call #8:
    Establish metrics for assessing the implementation and effectiveness of zero trust.

    Call #2:
    Identify business goals and protect surfaces.

    Call #4:
    Identify gap-closing tasks and assign to zero trust initiatives.

    Call #6:
    Prioritize zero trust initiatives.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.
    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

    Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    Begin Gap Analysis

    Complete Gap Analysis

    Finalize Roadmap and Formulate Policies

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Understand business and IT strategy and plans.

    1.2 Define business goals.

    1.3 Identify five critical protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    1.4 Map business goals and protect surfaces.

    2.1 Assess current security capabilities and define the zero Trust target state for a set of controls.

    2.2 Identify tasks to close maturity gaps.

    2.3 Assign tasks to zero trust initiatives.

    3.1 Align initiatives to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    3.2 Conduct cost/benefit analysis on zero trust initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize initiatives.

    4.1 Define solution criteria.

    4.2 Identify candidate solutions.

    4.3 Evaluate candidate solutions.

    4.4 Finalize roadmap.

    4.5 Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements.

    4.6 Establish metrics for high-priority initiatives.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. 1.Mapping of business goals to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements
    1. Security capabilities current state assessment
    2. Zero trust target state
    3. Tasks to address maturity gaps
    1. Zero trust initiative list mapped to business goals and key protect surfaces
    2. Prioritization of zero trust initiatives
    1. Zero trust roadmap
    2. Zero trust policies for critical protect surfaces
    3. Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions
    4. Metrics for high-priority initiatives
    1. Zero trust roadmap documentation
    2. Mapping of Info-Tech resources against individual initiatives

    Phase 1

    Define Business Objectives and Protect Surfaces

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify and define the business goals.
    • Identify the critical DAAS elements and protect surface.
    • Align the business goals to the protect surface and critical DAAS elements.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Business Executives
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management

    Analyze your business goals

    Identifying business goals is the first step in aligning your zero trust roadmap with your business’ vision.

    • Security leaders need to understand the direction the business is headed in.
    • Wise security investments depend on aligning your security initiatives to business objectives.
    • Zero trust, and information security at large, should contribute to your organization’s business objectives by supporting operational performance, ensuring brand protection and shareholder value.
      • For example, if the organization is working on a new business initiative that requires the handling of credit card payments, the security organization needs to know as soon as possible to ensure the zero trust architecture will be extended to protect the PCI data and enable the organization to be PCI compliant.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Security and the business need to be in alignment when implementing zero trust. Defining the business goal helps rationalize the need for a zero trust implementation.

    1.1 Define your organization’s business goals

    Estimated time 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm the business goals of the organization.
    2. Review relevant business and IT strategies.
    3. Review the business goal definitions in tab “2. Business Objectives” of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool, including the key goal indicator metrics.
    4. Record the most important business goals in the Business Goal column on tab “3. Protect Surfaces” of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. Try to limit the number of business goals to no more than five primary goals. This limitation will be critical to help map the protect surface and the zero trust roadmap later.

    Input

    • Business and IT strategies

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business objectives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Developing a zero trust roadmap collaboratively with business stakeholders enables alignment with upcoming business priorities and industry trends.

    What does zero trust mean for you?

    For a successful implementation, focus on your zero trust outcome.

    This image describes the Who, What, When, Where, Why, and How for Zero Trust.

    Regardless of whether the user is accessing resources internally or externally, zero trust is posed to authenticate, authorize, and continuously verify the security policies and posture before access is granted or denied. Many network architecture can be local, cloud based, or hybrid and with users working from any location, there is no network perimeter as we knew it and the internet is now the corporate network.

    Zero trust framework seeks to extend the perimeter-less security to the present digital transformation.

    Understand protect surface

    Data, Application, Asset, and Services

    A protect surface can be described as what’s critical, most vulnerable, or most valuable to your organization. This protect surface could include at least one of the following – data, assets, applications, and services (DAAS) – that requires protection. This is also the area that zero trust policy is aimed to protect. Understanding what your protect surface is can help channel the required energy into protecting that which is crucial to the business, and this aligns with the shift from focusing on the attack surface to narrowing it down to a smaller and achievable area of protection.

    Anything and everything that connects to the internet is a potential attack surface and pursuing every loophole will leave us one step behind due to lack of resources. Since a protect surface contains one or more DAAS element, the micro-perimeter is created around it and the appropriate protection is applied around it. As a team, we can ask ourselves this question when thinking of our protect surface: to what degree does my organization want me to secure things? The knowledge of the answer to this question can be tied to the risk tolerance level of the organization and it is only fair for us to engage the business in identifying what the protect surface should be.

    Components of a protect surface

    • Data
    • Application
    • Asset
    • Services

    Info-Tech Insight

    The protect surface is a shift from focusing on the attack surface. DAAS elements show where the initiatives and controls associated with the zero trust pillars (Identity, Devices, Network, Application, and Data) need to be applied.

    Sample Scenario

    INDUSTRY: Healthcare

    SOURCE: Info-Tech Research Group

    Illustration

    A healthcare provider would consider personal health information a critical resource worthy of being protected against data exfiltration due to a host of reasons including but not limited to privacy regulations, loss of revenue, legal, and reputational loss; hence, this would be considered a protect surface.

    • What is the data that can’t be risked exfiltrated?
    • What application(s) is used to access this data?
    • What assets are used to generate and store the data?
    • What are the services we rely on to be able to access the data?

    DAAS Element

    • The data here is the patient information.
    • The application used to access the personal health information would be EPIC, OR list, and any other application used in that organization.
    • The assets used to store the data and generate the PHI would include physical workstations, medical scanners, etc.
    • The services that can be exploited to disrupt the operation or used to access the data would include active directory, single sign-on, etc.

    DAAS and Zero Trust Pillar

    This granular identification provides an opportunity to not only see what the protect surface and DAAS elements are but also understand where to apply security controls that align with the principle of zero trust as well as how the transaction flows. The application pillar initiatives will provide protection to the EPIC application and the device pillar initiatives will provide protection to the workstations and physical scanners. The identity pillar initiatives will apply protection to the active directory, and single sign-on services. The zero trust pillar initiatives align with the protection of the DAAS elements.

    Shift from attack surface to protect surface

    This image contains a screenshot of the thought map: Shift from attack surface to protect surface.  Go from complex to a micro perimeter approach.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The protect surface is a shift from focusing on the attack surface as it creates a micro-perimeter for the application of zero trust policies on the system. This drastically reduces the success of an attack whether internally or externally, reduces the attack surface, and is also repeatable.

    1.2 Identify critical DAAS elements

    Estimated time 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm and identify critical, valuable, sensitive assets or resources requiring high availability in the organization. Each DAAS element is part of a protect surface, or sometimes, the DAAS element itself is a protect surface.
    • Data – The sensitive data that poses the greatest risk if exfiltrated or misused. What data needs to be protected?
    • Applications – The applications that use sensitive data or control critical assets. Which applications are critical for your business functions?
    • Assets – Physical or virtual assets, including an organization’s information technology (IT), operational technology (OT), or Internet of Things devices.
    • Services – The services an organization most depends on. Services that can be exploited to disrupt normal IT or business operations.
  • Record the critical DAAS elements and protect surface in their respective columns of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. Try to limit the number of business goals to no more than five primary protect surfaces to match with the business goals.
  • Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Input

    • Critical resources to protect
    • Understanding of how they interoperate or connect

    Output

    • Protect surfaces

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Stakeholders

    1.3 Map business goals to critical DAAS elements

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. The protect surface will be generated from the critical DAAS elements as a standalone protect surface or a group of interconnected DAAS elements merged into one.
    • Each protect surface can be tied back to a business objective.
  • Select from the drop-down list of business objectives the option that fits the identified protect surface as it relates to the organization.
    • Type in your business objectives if the drop-down list does not apply.

    Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool, with the following columns highlighted: Business Goal Name; Protect Surface Name

    Phase 2

    Assess Key Capabilities and Identify Zero Trust Initiatives

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess the organization’s current capabilities.
    • Define the zero trust target state.
    • Identify tasks to close gaps
    • Define zero trust initiatives and align zero trust initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    The Info-Tech Zero Trust Framework

    Info-Tech’s Zero Trust Framework aligns with zero trust references, including:

    • ACT Zero Trust Cybersecurity Current Trends. 2019
    • NIST SP 800-207: Zero Trust Architecture. 2020
    • DOD Zero Trust Reference Architecture. 2021
    • NSA Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model. 2021
    • CISA Zero Trust Maturity Model. 2021
    • Executive Order (EO) 14028: Improving the Nation’s Cybersecurity, The White House. 2021
    • OMB Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles. 2022
    • NSTAC Zero Trust and Trusted Identity Management. 2022
    • NIST SP 800-53 r5: Security and Privacy Controls for Information Systems and Organizations

    Identity

    • Authentication
    • Authorization
    • Privileged Access Management

    Applications

    • Software Defined Compute
    • DevSecOps
    • Software Supply Chain

    Devices

    • Authentication
    • Authorization
    • Compliance

    Networks

    • Software Defined Networking
    • Macro Segmentations
    • Micro Segmentation

    Data

    • Software Defined Storage
    • Data Loss Prevention
    • Data Rights Management

    Info-Tech Insight

    A best-of-breed approach ensures holistic coverage of your zero trust program while refraining from locking you into a specific reference.

    2.1 Review the Info-Tech framework

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. As a group, have the team review the framework within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. Customize the tool as required using the instructions in tab “2. Setup”:
    • Define costing criteria
    • Define benefits criteria
    • Configure full-time equivalent hours and start year
    • Input business goals as mapped to protect surfaces (see next slide)

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives

    Output

    • Customized framework

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    2.1.1 Input business goals as mapped to protect surfaces

    Refer to the Protect Surface Mapping Tool, copy the following elements from the Protect Surface tab.

    1. Enter Business Goals.
    2. Enter Protect Surfaces.
    3. Enter Data.
    4. Enter Application.
    5. Enter Assets.
    6. Enter Services.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.  The Column headings are labeled as follows: 1: Business Goal Name; 2: Protect Surface; 3: DATA; 4: APPLICATION; 5: ASSETS; 6: SERVICES

    Info-Tech Insight

    Deriving protect surface elements from business goals reframes how security controls are applied. Assess control effectiveness in this context and identify zero trust capabilities to close any gaps.

    2.2 Assess current capabilities and define zero trust target state

    Estimated time 6-12 hours

    1. Using the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Follow the instructions on the next slides to complete your current-state and target-state assessment.
    3. For most organizations, multiple internal subject matter experts will need to be consulted to complete the assessment.

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives
    • Information on current state of controls, including sources such as audit findings, vulnerability and penetration test results, and risk registers

    Output

    • Current-state and target-state assessment for gap analysis

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management

    Understanding security target states

    Maturity models are very effective for determining target states. This table provides general descriptions for each maturity level. As a group, consider which description most accurately reflects the ideal target state in your organization.

    AD HOC 01

    Initial/ad hoc security programs are reactive. Lacking strategic vision, these programs are less effective and less responsive to the needs of the business.

    DEVELOPING 02

    Developing security programs can be effective at what they do but are not holistic. Governance is largely absent. These programs tend to rely on the talents of individuals rather than a cohesive plan.

    DEFINED 03

    A defined security program is holistic, documented, and proactive. At least some governance is in place; however, metrics are often rudimentary and operational in nature. These programs still often rely on best practices rather than strong risk management.

    MANAGED 04

    Managed security programs have robust governance and metrics processes. Management and board-level metrics for the overall program are produced. These are reviewed by business leaders and drive security decisions. More mature risk management practices take the place of best practices.

    OPTIMIZED 05

    An optimized security program is based on strong risk management practices, including the production of key risk indicators (KRIs). Individual security services are optimized using key performance indicators (KPIs) that continually measure service effectiveness and efficiency.

    2.2.1 Conduct current-state assessment

    1. Carefully review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab that are needed for the protect surfaces. For each control, indicate the current maturity level of the organization. The tool uses the maturity levels of the CMMI model to score maturity.
    • Only use “N/A” if you are confident that the control is not required in your protect surfaces. For example, if the protect surfaces do not require or use software-defined computing, select “N/A” for any controls related to software-defined computing.
  • Provide comments to describe your current state. This step is optional but recommended as it may be important to record this information for future reference.
  • Select the target maturity for the control.
  • This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Current Maturity; 2: Current State Comments (optional); Target Maturity

    Make sure that the gap between target state and current state is achievable for the current zero trust roadmap. For instance, if you set your current maturity to 1 – Ad Hoc, then having a target maturity of 4 – Managed or 5 – Optimized is not recommended due to the big jump.

    2.2.2 Review the Gap Analysis Dashboard

    1. Use the Dashboard to map your progress on assessing current- and future-state maturities. As you fill out the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, check with the Dashboard to see the difference between your current and target state.
    2. Use the color-coded legend to see the size of the gap between your current and target state.
    3. Zero trust processes that appear white have not yet been assessed or are rated as “N/A.”
    this image contains a screenshot of Info-tech's Zero-Trust framework discussed earlier in this blueprint, with the addition of a legend demonstrating how to use the gap analysis tool to identify the size of the gap between current and target states

    2.3 Identify tasks to close gaps

    Estimated time 5 hours

    1. Using the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Follow the instructions on the next slides to identify gap closure tasks for each control that requires improvement.
    3. For most organizations, multiple internal subject matter experts will need to be consulted to complete the assessment.

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Zero trust controls gap information

    Output

    • Gap closure task list

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management

    2.3 Identify tasks to close gaps (cont.)

    1. For each of the controls where there is a gap between the current and target state, a gap closure task should be identified:
    • Review the example tasks and copy one or more of them if appropriate. Otherwise, enter your own gap closure task.
  • Considerations for identifying gap closure tasks:
    • In small groups, have participants ask, “what would we have to do to achieve the target state?” Document these in the Gap Closure Tasks column.
    • The example gap closure tasks may be appropriate for your organization, but do not simply copy them without considering whether they are right for you.
    • Not all gaps require their own task. You can enter one task that may address multiple gaps.
    • Be aware that tasks that are along the lines of “investigate and make recommendations” may not fully close maturity gaps.
    this image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column heading highlighted and numbered: 1: Gap Closure Tasks

    Make sure that the Gap Closure Tasks are SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Realistic, Timebound).

    2.4 Define tasks and initiatives

    Estimated time 2-4 hours

    1. As a group, review the gap tasks identified in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Using the instructions on the following slides, finalize your tab “5. Task List.”
    3. Using the instructions on the following slides, review and consolidate your tab “6. Initiative List.”

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Gap analysis

    Output

    • Refined list of tasks
    • List of zero trust initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    2.4.1 Finalize your task list

    1. Define the gap closure task list in tab “5. Task List”:
      1. Obtain a list of all your tasks from Gap Closure Tasks column in tab “3. Gap Analysis.”
      2. Paste the list into the table in tab “5. Task List,” Task column.
    • Use Paste Values to retain the table formatting.
  • Consolidate tasks into initiatives when:
      • They have costs associated with them.
      • They require initial effort to implement and ongoing effort to maintain.
      • They must be accomplished dependently of other tasks.
    1. For each new initiative, create the initiative name on Initiative Name column in the tab “6. Initiative List.”
  • For tasks which are not incorporated into initiatives, enter a task owner and due date for each task.
  • this image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Gap analysis Tool with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Task; 2: Initiative Name; 3: (Task Owner; Due Date)

    Example: Initiative consolidation

    In the example below, we see three gap closure tasks within the Authentication process for the Identity pillar being consolidated into a single initiative “IAM modernization.”

    We can also see three gap closure tasks within the Micro Segmentation process for the Network pillar being grouped into another initiative “Network segmentation.”

    This image contains an example of Initiative Consolidation

    Info-Tech Insight

    As you go through this exercise, you may find that some tasks that you previously defined could be consolidated into an initiative.

    2.4.2 Finalize your initiative list

    1. As you go through this exercise, you may find that some tasks that you previously defined could be consolidated into an initiative.
    2. Review your final list of initiatives in tab “6. Initiative List” and make any required updates.
      1. Optionally, add a description or paste in a list of the individual gap closure actions that are associated with the initiative. This will make it easier to perform the cost and benefit analysis.
    3. Obtain a list of all gap closure tasks associated with an initiative by filtering the Initiative Name column in the Task List tab.
    4. Indicate the most appropriate pillar alignment for each initiative using the drop-down list.
      1. Refer to tab “5. Task List” for the pillar associated with an initiative under the Initiative Name column.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, the following column headings are numbered and highlighted: 1: Initiative Name; 2: Description; 3: Pillar

    If the list of tasks is too long for the Description column, then you can also shorten the name of the tasks or group several tasks to a more general task.

    2.5 Align initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. Using the instructions on the following slides, align initiatives to business goals in tab “6. Initiative List.”
    2. Using the instructions on the following slides, align initiatives to protect surfaces in tab “6. Initiative List.”

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • List of zero trust initiatives
    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives

    Output

    • List of zero trust initiatives aligned to business goals and protect surfaces

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    2.5.1 Align initiatives to business goals

    1. Indicate the most appropriate business goal(s) alignment for each initiative using the drop-down list in “Selection for Business Goal(s)” column.
      1. Use the legend to determine the most appropriate business goal(s).
    2. After that copy the selected business goal(s) to Business Goal(s) Alignment column.
    3. Then reset the selection using the blank cell in Selection for Business Goal(s) column.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Selection for Business Goal(s); Business Goals Alignment; 3: Selection for Business Goals

    2.5.2 Align initiatives to protect surfaces

    1. Indicate the most appropriate protect surface(s) for each initiative using the drop-down list in Selection for Protect Surface(s) column.
      1. Use the legend to determine the most appropriate protect surface(s).
    2. After that copy the selected protect surface(s) to Protect Surface(s) Coverage column.
    3. Reset the selection using the blank cell in Selection for Protect Surface(s) column.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Description; 2: Protect Surfaces Covered; 3: Selection for Protect Surfaces

    Phase 3

    Evaluate Candidate Solutions and Finalize Roadmap

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define solution criteria.
    • Identify candidate solutions.
    • Evaluate candidate solutions.
    • Perform cost/benefit analysis.
    • Prioritize initiatives and build roadmap.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    3.1 Define solution criteria

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. As a group, review the scoring system within the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool.
    2. Customize the tool as required using the instructions on the following slides.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t let your solution dictate your roadmap. Define your zero trust solution criteria before engaging in vendor selection.

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Input

    • Zero trust initiative list

    Output

    • Zero trust candidate solutions

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    3.1.1 Define compliance and solution evaluation criteria

    On the Setup tab, provide a weight for each evaluation criterion to evaluate the candidate solutions. You can use “0%” weight if that criterion is not required in your solution selection.

    1. Verify that the Description for each criterion is accurate.
    2. Provide weights for the compliance score and the solution score, which are the overall evaluation:
    • Compliance score consists of tenets score, pillar score, threat protection score, and trust algorithm score.
    • Solution score consists of features score, usability score, affordability score, and architecture score.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool, which demonstrates how to define compliance and solution evaluation criteria.

    3.1.2 Define remaining evaluation criteria

    On the Setup tab, provide a weight for each evaluation criterion to evaluate the candidate solutions. You can use “0%” weight if that criterion is not required in your solution selection.

    1. Verify that the Description for each criterion is accurate.
    2. Provide weights for the remaining evaluation criteria:
    • Tenets: Considers how well each initiative aligns with zero trust principles.
    • Pillars: Considers how well each initiative aligns with zero trust pillars.
    • Threats: Considers what zero trust threats are relevant with the candidate solution.
    • Trust Algorithm: Considers trust evaluation factors, trust evaluation process score, and input coverage.
    • Cost Estimation: Considers initial costs, which are one-time, upfront capital investments (e.g. hardware and software costs), and ongoing cost, which is any annually recurring operating expenses that are new budgetary costs (e.g. licensing, maintenance, subscription fees).
    • Deployment Architecture: Considers the solutions deployment architecture capabilities.

    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool, and demonstrates where to define additional evaluation data

    Review available candidate solutions

    this image contains a list of available candidate Solutions.  This list includes: Zero Trust Identity; Zero-Trust Application & Workloads; Zero-Trust Networks; Zero-Trust Devices; and Zero-Trust Data

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework is a comprehensive yet fast-moving approach to help you select the right software for your organization

    Five key phases sequentially add rigor to your selection efforts while giving you a clear, swift-flowing methodology to follow.

    Awareness Education & Discovery Evaluation Selection Negotiation & Configuration
    1.1 Proactively Lead Technology Optimization & Prioritization 2.1 Understand Marketplace Capabilities & Trends 3.1 Gather & Prioritize Requirements & Establish Key Success Metrics 4.1 Create a Weighted Vendor Selection Decision Model 5.1 Initiate Price Negotiation With Top
    1.2 Scope & Define the Selection Process for Each Selection Request Action 2.2 Discover Alternative Solutions & Conduct Market Education 3.2 Conduct a Data-Driven Comparison of Vendor Features & Capabilities 4.2 Conduct Investigative Interviews Focused on Mission Critical Priorities With Top 2-4 Vendors 5.2 Negotiate Contract Terms & Product Configuration Two Vendors Selected
    1.3 Conduct an Accelerated Business Needs Assessment 2.3 Evaluate Enterprise Architecture & Application Portfolio 3.3 Narrow the Field to Four Top Contenders 4.3 Validate Key Issues With Deep Technical Assessments, Trial Configuration & Reference Checks 5.3 Finalize Budget Approval & Project Implementation Timeline
    1.4 Align Stakeholder Calendars to Reduce Elapsed Time & Asynchronous Evaluation 2.4 Validate the Business Case 5.4 Invest in Training & Onboarding Assistance

    Download the Rapid Application Selection Framework research

    Evaluate software category leaders through vendor rankings and awards

    SoftwareReviews

    The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

    The Data Quadrant Report

    Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

    Vendors ranked by their Composite Score

    The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

    Emotional Footprint

    Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Vendors ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score

    Sample whiteboard activity

    • Place sticky notes on the zero trust tenet that matches with the identified candidate solution to produce “solution requirements” that can be used to develop an RFP.
    • A sample sticky note is provided below for privileged access management.

    This image contains a screenshot of a sample whiteboard activity which can be done using sticky notes.

    • The PAM solution should support MFA
    • Live session monitoring, audit, and reporting
    • Should have password vaulting to prevent privileged users from knowing the passwords to critical systems and resources

    3.2 Identify candidate solutions

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. As a group, have the team review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. On tab 3 in the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool:
    • Review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool. For example, the candidate solutions with multifactor authentication (MFA) options are authenticators with SMS, mobile application, smartcard, or token.

    Input

    • Candidate solutions for zero trust tasks and initiatives

    Output

    • Suitability evaluation of candidate solutions

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    Info-Tech Insight

    Add a description associated with the candidate solution, e.g. reference link to vendors or manufacturers. This will make it easier to perform the evaluation.

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    3.2.1 Review candidate solutions

    1. Review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool. For example, the candidate solutions with multifactor authentication (MFA) options are authenticators with SMS, mobile application, smartcard, or token.
    2. Enter candidate solutions to the Compliance Data Entry tab on the Solution column within the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool.
    3. Optionally, add a description associated with the candidate solution, e.g. reference link to vendors or manufacturers. This will make it easier to perform the evaluation.
    this image contains a screenshot of a sample candidate solution, which can be done using Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.3 Evaluate candidate solutions

    Estimated time 3 hours

    On the Scoring tab, evaluate solution features, usability, affordability, and architecture using the instructions on the following slides. This activity will produce a solution score that can be used to identify the suitability of a solution.

    Input

    • Candidate solutions

    Output

    • Candidate solutions scored

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    3.3.3 Evaluate solution scores

    After all candidate solutions are evaluated, the Solution Score column can be sorted to rank the candidate solutions. After sorting, the top solutions can be used on prioritization of initiatives on Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. On Features
      1. Enter Coverage.
      2. Enter Quality.
    2. Enter Usability.
    3. On Affordability
      1. Enter Initial Cost.
      2. Enter Ongoing Cost (annual).
    4. Enter Architecture.
    this image contains a screenshot of how you can sort the solution score column in Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.4 Perform cost/benefit analysis

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. Assign costing and benefits information for each initiative, following the instructions on the next slide.
    2. Define dependencies or business impacts if they will help with prioritization.

    Input

    • Ranked candidate solutions
    • Gap analysis
    • Initiative list

    Output

    • Completed cost/benefit analysis for initiative list

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.4.1 Complete the cost/benefit analysis

    Use Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. On the Prioritization tab, use the drop-down lists to enter the estimated costs and efforts for each initiative, using the criteria defined earlier.
    • Use the result from candidate selection to define the estimated costs.
    • If you have actual costs available, you can optionally enter them under the Detailed Cost Estimates columns.
  • Enter the estimated benefits, also using the criteria defined earlier.
  • This image contains a screenshot of a cost/benefit analysis table which can be found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    The Cost / Effort Rating is calculated based on the weight defined on step 2.1.1. The Benefit Rating is calculated based on the weight defined on step 2.1.2.

    3.4.2 Optionally enter detailed cost estimates

    Use Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. For each initiative, the tool will automatically populate the Detailed Cost Estimates and Detailed Staffing Estimates columns using the averages that you provided in step 2.1.1. However, if you have more detailed data about the costs and effort requirements for an initiative, you can override the calculated data by manually entering it into these columns. For example:
    • You are planning to subscribe to a security awareness vendor, and you have a quote from them specifying that the initial cost will be $75,000.
    • You have defined your “Medium” cost range as being “$10-100K,” so you select medium as your initial cost for this initiative in step 3.4.1. As you defined the average for medium costs as being $50,000, this is what the tool will put into the detailed cost estimate.
    • You can override this average by entering $75,000 as the initial cost in the detailed cost estimate column.

    This image contains a screenshot of a sample cost/benefit table found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    The Benefits-Cost column will give results after comparing the cost and the benefit. Negative value means that the cost outweighs the benefit. Positive value means that the benefit outweighs the cost. Zero value means that the cost equals the benefit.

    3.5 Prioritize initiatives

    Estimated time 2-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the results of the cost/benefit analysis. Optionally, complete the Other Considerations columns in the Prioritization tab:
    • Dependencies can refer to other initiatives on the list or any other dependency that relates to activities or projects within the organization.
    • Business impacts can be helpful to document as they may require additional planning and communication that could impact initiative timelines.
  • Follow step 3.5.1 to create a visual effort map for your organization.
  • Follow step 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 to refine the effort map’s visual output.
  • Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Initiative list
    • Cost/benefit analysis

    Output

    • Prioritized list of initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.5.1 Create a visual effort map for your organization

    1 hour

    An effort map is a tool used for the visualization of a cost and benefit analysis. It is a quadrant output that visually shows how your gap initiatives were prioritized based on tab 7 in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. Establish the axes and colors for your effort map:
      1. X-axis represents the Benefit value from column J
      2. Y-axis represents the Cost/Effort value from column H
      3. Sticky note color is determined using the Alignment to Business value from column I
    2. Create sticky notes for each initiative and place them on the effort map or whiteboard based on the axes you have created with the help of your team.
    3. As you place initiatives on the visual effort map, discuss and modify rankings based on team member input.

    this image contains a sample visual effort map which can be found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    Input

    • Outputs from activities 3.4.1 and 3.4.2

    Output

    • High-level prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • Visual representation of quantitative values

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    3.5.2 Refine the effort map’s visual output

    1 hour

    Once the effort map is complete, work to further simplify the visual output by categorizing initiatives based on the quadrant in which they have been placed.

    1. Before moving forward with the initiative wave prioritization (activity 3.7), identify any initiatives listed across all quadrants that are required as a part of compliance and mark with a sticky dot.
    2. Document these initiatives as Execution Wave 1.

    this image contains a screenshot of a refined visual effort map, which can be done by following the instructions in this section.

    Input

    • Outputs from activity 3.5.1

    Output

    • Prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • First execution wave of gap-closing initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Sticky dots
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    3.5.3 Refine the effort map’s visual output

    30 minutes

    1. Use a separate area of the whiteboard to draw out four to five Execution Wave columns.
    2. Group initiatives into each Execution Wave column based on their placement within the quadrant from activities 3.5.1 and 3.5.2.
      1. Ensure that all identified mandatory activities as per governing privacy law fall within the first wave.
      2. Leverage the following 0-4 Execution Wave scale:
        1. Underway –Initiatives that are already underway
        2. Must Do – Initiatives that must happen right away
        3. Should Do – Initiatives that should happen but need more time/support
        4. Could Do – Initiatives that are not a priority
        5. Won’t Do – Initiatives that likely won’t be carried out
    3. Indicate the granular level for each execution wave using the a-z scale.
    • Use the lettering to track dependencies between initiatives.
      • If one must take place before another, ensure that its letter comes first alphabetically.
      • If multiple initiatives must take place at the same time, use the same letter to show they will take place in tandem.

    This image depicts the sample output for a refined visual effort map

    Input

    • Outputs from activity 3.5.2

    Output

    • Prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • First execution wave of gap-closing initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Sticky dots
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Wave assignment example

    In the example below, we see “IAM modernization” was assessed as 9 on cost/effort rating and 5 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a positive value of 1. We can label this as SHOULD DO (wave 2).

    We can also see “Network segmentation” was assessed as 6 on cost/effort rating and 4 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a positive value of 2. We can label this as MUST DO (wave 1).

    We can also see “Unified Endpoints Management” was assessed as 8 on cost/effort rating and 2 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a negative value of -4. We can label this as WON’T DO (no wave).

    We can also see “Data Protection” was assessed as 4 on cost/effort rating and 2 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a zero value. We can label this as COULD DO (wave 3).

    This image depicts a sample wave assignment output, discussed in this section.

    It is recommended to define the threshold of each wave based on the value of Benefits-Cost before assigning waves.

    3.6 Build roadmap

    Estimated time 2-3 hours

    1. As a group, follow step 3.6.1 to create your roadmap by scheduling initiatives into the Gantt chart within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. Review the roadmap for resourcing conflicts and adjust as required.
    3. Review the final cost and effort estimates for the roadmap.

    Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Cost/benefit analysis
    • Prioritized initiative list

    Output

    • Zero trust roadmap

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.6.1 Schedule initiatives using the Gantt chart

    1. On the Gantt Chart tab for each initiative, enter an owner (the role who will be primarily responsible for execution).
    2. Additionally, enter a start month and year for the initiative and the expected duration in months.
    • You can filter the Wave column to only see specific waves at any one time to assist with the scheduling.
    • You do not need to schedule Wave 4 initiatives as the expectation is that these initiatives will not be done.
    • This Image contains a screenshot of the Gantt Chart, with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Owner; 2: Expected Duration

    3.6.2 Review your roadmap

    1. When you have completed the Gantt chart, as a group review the overall roadmap to ensure that it is reasonable for your organization. Consider the following:
    • Do you have other IT or business projects planned during this time frame that may impact your resourcing or scheduling?
    • Does your organization have regular change freezes throughout the year that will impact the schedule?
    • Do you have over-subscribed resources? You can filter the list on the Owner column to identify potential over-subscription of resources.
    • Have you considered any long vacations, sabbaticals, parental leaves, or other planned longer-term absences?
    • Are your initiatives adequately aligned to your budget cycle? For instance, if you have an initiative that is expected to make recommendations for capital expenditure, it must be completed prior to budget planning.

    This image depicts an example roadmap which can be created following the use of the Gantt Chart

    3.6.3 Review your cost/effort estimates table

    1. Once you have completed your roadmap, review the total cost/effort estimates. This can be found in a table on the Results tab. This table will provide initial and ongoing costs and staffing requirements for each wave. This also includes the total three-year investment. In your review consider:
    • Is this investment realistic? Will completion of your roadmap require adding more staff or funding than you otherwise expected?
    • If the investment seems unrealistic, you may need to revisit some of your assumptions, potentially reducing target levels or increasing the amount of time to complete the strategy.

    This table provides you with the information to have important conversations with management and stakeholders.

    This image contains an example of the Zero Trust Roadmap Cost/Effort Estimates.  The column headings are as follows: Wave; Number of Initiatives; Initial Implementation - Cost; Initial Implementation - Effort; Ongoing Maintenance - Cost; Ongoing Maintenance - Effort.  A separate table is shown with the column heading: Estimated Total Three Year Investment

    Phase 4

    Formulate Policies for Roadmap Initiatives

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Formulate zero trust policies for critical DAAS elements.
    • Formulate zero trust policies to secure a path to access critical DAAS elements.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    Understand the zero trust policy

    Use the Kipling methodology as a vendor agnostic approach to identify appropriate allow list elements when deploying multiple zero trust solutions.
    The policies help to prevent lateral movement.

    Who Who should access a resource? Here, the user ID that identifies the users through the principle of least privilege is allowed access to a particular resource. The authentication policy will be used to verify identity of a user when access request to a resource is made. Who requires MFA?
    What What application is used to access the resource? Application ID to identify applications that are only allowed on the network. Port control policies can be used for the application service.
    When When do users access the resource? Policy that identifies and enforces time schedule when an application accessed by users is used.
    Where Where is the resource located? The location of the destination resource should be added to the policy and, where possible, restrict the source of the traffic either by zone and/or IP address.
    Why Why is the data accessed? Data classification should be done to know why the data needs protection and the type of protection (data filtering).
    How How should you allow access to the resource? This covers the protection of the application traffic. Principle of least privilege access, log all traffic, configure security profiles, NGFW, decryption and encryption, consistent application of policy and threat prevention across all locations for all local and remote users on managed and unmanaged endpoints are ways to apply content-ID.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The success of a zero trust implementation relies on enforcing policies consistently. Applying the Kipling methodology to the protect surface is the best way to design zero trust policies.

    4.1.1 Formulate policy

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, review the protect surface(s) identified in phase one, and using the Kipling methodology from the previous slide, formulate a policy. Each policy can be reviewed repeatedly until we are sure it satisfies the goal.
    2. The policy created should be consistent for both cloud and on-prem environments.
    3. As an example, let's use the healthcare scenario found in tab 3 of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. The protect surface used is "Automated Medication Dispensing." Another example will be "Salesforce" accessed via the cloud.
    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID
    On-Prem Pyxis_Users Pyxis Any Pyxis_server Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic
    Cloud Sales Salesforce Working hours Canada Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic

    Input

    • Kipling methodology
    • Protect surface

    Output

    • Zero trust policy

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    4.1.2 Apply policy

    1-2 hours

    1. Place each protect surface in its own microperimeter. Each microperimeter should be segmented by a next-generation firewall or authentication broker that will serve as a segmentation gateway.
    2. Name the microperimeter and place it on a firewall.

    Input

    • Kipling methodology
    • Protect surface

    Output

    • Zero trust policy

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Sticky Notes
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    Microperimeter A
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    Microperimeter B
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    Microperimeter C
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    4.2 Secure a path to access critical DAAS elements

    How should you allow access to the resource?

    This component makes up the final piece of formulating the policies as it applies the protection of the application traffic.

    The principle of least privilege is applied to the security policy to only allow access requests and restrict the access to the purpose it serves. This access request is then logged as well as the traffic (both internal and external). Most firewalls (NGFW) have policy rules that, by default, enable logging.

    Segmentation gateways (NGFW, VM-series firewalls, agent-based and clientless VPN solutions), are used to apply zero trust policy (Kipling methodology) in the network, cloud, and endpoint (managed and unmanaged) for all local and remote users.

    These policies need to be applied to security profiles on all allowed traffic. Some of these profiles include but are not limited to the following: URL filtering profile for web access and protect against phishing attacks, vulnerability protection profile intrusion prevention systems, anti spyware profiles to protect against command-and-control threats, malware and antivirus profile to protect against malware, and a file blocking profile to block and/or alert suspicious file types.

    Good visibility on your network can also be tied to decryption as you can inspect traffic and data to the lowest level possible that is generally accepted by your organization and in compliance with regulation.

    Conceptualized flow

    With users working from anywhere on managed and unmanaged devices, access to the internet, SAAS, public cloud, and the data center will have consistent policies applied regardless of their location.

    The policy is validating that the user is who they say they are based on the role profile, what they are trying to access to make sure their role or attribute profile has the appropriate permission to the application, and within the stipulated time limit. Where the data or application is located is also verified and the why needs to be satisfied before the requested access is granted. Based on the mentioned policies, the how element is then applied throughout the lifecycle of the access.

    Who

    (Internet)

    What

    (SAAS)

    When

    Where

    (Public Cloud)

    Why

    How

    (Data Center)

    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID
    On-Prem Pyxis_Users Pyxis Any Pyxis_server Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic
    Cloud Sales Salesforce Working hours Canada Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic

    Phase 5

    Monitor Zero Trust Roadmap Deployment

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish metrics for roadmap tasks.
    • Track metrics for roadmap tasks.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    5.1 Establish metrics for roadmap tasks

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, identify metrics to measure implementation and efficacy of tasks
    2. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, document metric metadata.
    3. On the Prioritization tab, use the drop-down lists to enter the estimated costs and efforts for each initiative, using the criteria defined earlier.
    • If you have actual costs available, you can optionally enter them under the Detailed Cost Estimates columns.
  • Enter the estimated benefits, also using the criteria defined earlier.
  • Input

    • Zero trust roadmap task list

    Output

    • Metrics for measuring zero trust task implementation and efficacy

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    5.1.1 Identify metrics to measure implementation and efficacy of tasks

    Estimated time 3-4 hours

    1. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, for each section defined in columns C and D, enter zero trust implementation tasks into column E. If you completed the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, use the tasks identified there to populate column E.
    2. For each task, identify in column F any metrics that will communicate implementation progress and/or implementation efficacy.
    • If multiple metrics are needed for a single task, we recommend expanding the size of the row and adding additional metrics onto a new line in the same row. A sample is provided in the tool.

    this image contains a screenshot of tab 2 in the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    To measure the efficacy of a zero trust implementation, ensure you know what a successful zero trust implementation means for your organization, and define metrics that demonstrate whether that success is being realized.

    5.1.2 Document metric metadata

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    For each metric defined in step 4.1.1:

    1. Identify in column G whether the metric can be measured now (Phase 1), measured in a few months’ time (Phase 2), or measured in a few years’ time (Phase 3).
    2. Identify in columns H through M who is responsible for collecting the metric (Person Source), who/what is consulted to collect the metric (Technology Source), who compiles the collected metric into dashboards and presentations (Compiler), and who is informed of the measurement of the metric (Audience).
    • Add more columns under the Audience category if needed.
    • Use “X” to identify if an audience group will be informed of the measurement of the metric.
  • Identify in columns N through P the target for the metric (Metric Target), the effort it takes to collect the metric (Effort to Collect), the frequency with which the organizations plans to collect the metric (Frequency of Collection), and any comments that people should know when collecting, compiling, or presenting metrics.
  • This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Priority; 2: Roles and Responsibilities; 3: effort to collect; frequency of collection; Metric Target; Comments

    5.2 Track and report metrics

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. In the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, copy and paste metrics you plan to track in the tool from column F on tab 2 to column B on tab 3.
    2. Use tab 3 to identify collection frequency, metric target, and measurements collected for each metric. Add notes or comments to each metric or measurement to track contextual elements that could affect metric measurements.
    3. Leverage the graphs on tab 4 to communicate metrics to the appropriated audience groups, as defined in tab 2.

    Input

    • Metrics for measuring zero trust task implementation and efficacy

    Output

    • Metric data and graphs for presenting zero trust implementation metrics to audience groups

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    5.2.1 Record baseline measurements for metrics

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    On tab “3. Track Metrics” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    1. Copy and paste the metrics from Column F on tab “2. Task & Metric Register” that you want to track into Column B of this tab.
    2. For each metric, record the frequency of collection (Collection Frequency) and the metric target (Target) by referencing columns O and P on tab “2. Task & Metric Register.”
    3. Begin to record baseline/initial values for each metric in column E. Rename columns to match your highest frequency of collection.
      (e.g. if any metric is being measured monthly, there should be one column per month)
    4. Over time, conduct measurements of your metrics and store them in the table below.
    5. Add notes, as necessary.

    this image contains a screenshot of tab 3 of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Your Metrics; 2: Collection Frequency; Target; 3: Jan; 4: Metric Measurements; 5: Notes

    5.2.2 Report metric health to audience groups

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    On tab “4. Graphs” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    1. The Overall Metric Health gauge at the top of this tab presents the average percentage away from meeting metric targets for all metrics being tracked. To calculate this value, the differences between the most recent measurements and target values for each metric are averaged.
    2. Below the Overall Metric Health gauge, use the drop-down list in cell D9 to select one of the metrics from tab “3. Track Metrics.”
    3. Six different graphic representations of the tracked data for the selected metric will populate.

    Copy and paste desired graphs into presentations for audience members identified in step 5.1.2.

    This image contains a screenshot from tab “4. Graphs” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    5.3 Build a communication deck

    Estimated time 2 hours

    Leverage the Zero Trust Communication Deck to showcase the work that you have done in the tools and activities associated with this research.

    In this communication deck template, you will find the following sections:

    • Introduction
    • Protect Surfaces
    • Zero Trust Gap Analysis
    • Zero Trust Initiatives & Tasks

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business goals
    • Zero trust program gap analysis
    • Zero trust roadmap initiatives and tasks
    • Zero trust metrics

    Output

    • Communication deck for zero trust strategy

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Knowledge of protect surfaces and the business goals protecting them supports
    • Comprehensive knowledge of zero trust current state and summary initiatives required to achieve zero trust objectives
    • Assessment of which solutions for zero trust tasks and initiatives are the most appropriate for the organization
    • A defined set of security metrics assessing zero trust implementation progress and efficacy

    Deliverables Completed

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    This is a picture of an Info-Tech Account Representative
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    This is a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Assess current security capabilities and build a roadmap of tasks and initiatives that close maturity gaps.

    Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    This is a screenshot from the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Identify and track metrics for zero trust tasks and initiatives.

    Research Contributors

    • Aaron Benson, CME Group, Director of IAM Governance
    • Brad Mateski, Zones, Solutions Architect for CyberSecurity
    • Bob Smock, Info-Tech Research Group, Vice President of Consulting
    • Dr. Chase Cunningham, Ericom Software, Chief Strategy Officer
    • John Kindervag, ON2IT Cybersecurity, Senior Vice President, Cybersecurity Strategy and ON2IT Group Fellow
    • John Zhao, Fonterra, Enterprise Security Architect
    • Rongxing Lu, University of New Brunswick, Associate Professor
    • Sumanta Sarkar, University of Warwick, Assistant Professor
    • Tim Malone, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Director Information Security
    • Vana Matte, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Vice President of Technology Services

    Related Info-Tech Research

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Build an Information Security Strategy

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy – an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for over seven years with hundreds of organizations. This unique approach includes tools for ensuring alignment with business objectives, assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations, enabling a comprehensive current-state assessment, prioritizing initiatives, and building out a security roadmap.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness.

    Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness

    IT security was typified by perimeter security. However, the way the world does business has mandated a change to IT security. In response, zero trust is a set of principles that can add flexibility to planning your IT security strategy.

    Use this blueprint to determine your zero trust readiness and understand how zero trust can benefit both security and the business.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Many organizations are looking to improve their identity and access management (IAM) practices but struggle with where to start and whether all areas of IAM have been considered. This blueprint will help you improve the organization's identity and access management practices by following our three-phase methodology:

    • Assess identity and access requirements
    • Identify initiatives using the identity lifecycle
    • Prioritize initiatives and build a roadmap

    Bibliography

    • “2021 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2021. Web.
    • “A Zero-Trust Strategy Has 3 Needs - Identify, Authenticate, and Monitor Users and Devices On and Off The Network.” Fortinet, 15 July 2021. Web.
    • “Applying Zero Trust Principles to Enterprise Mobility.” CISA, March 2022. Web.
    • Biden Jr., Joseph R. “Executive Order on Improving the Nation’s Cybersecurity.” The White House, 12 May 2021. Web.
    • “CISA Zero Trust Maturity Model.” CISA - Cybersecurity Division, June 2021. Web.
    • “Continuous Diagnostics and Mitigation Program Overview.” CISA, Jan. 2022. Web.
    • Contributor. “The Five Business Benefits of a Zero Trust Approach to Security.” Security Brief - Australia, 19 Aug. 2020. Web.
    • “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM, July 2021. Web.
    • English, Melanie. “5 Stats That Show The Cost Saving Effect of Zero Trust.” Teramind, 29 Sept. 2021. Web.
    • “Improve Application Access and Security With Fortinet Zero Trust Network Access.” Fortinet, 2 March 2021. Web.
    • “Incorporating Zero-trust Strategies for Secure Network and Application Access.” Fortinet, 21 July 2021. Web.
    • Jakkal, Vasu. “Zero Trust Adoption Report: How Does Your Organization Compare?” Microsoft, 28 July 2021. Web.
    • “Jericho Forum™ Commandments.” The Open Group, Jericho Forum, May 2007. Web.
    • Johnson, Derrick. “Zero Trust vs. SASE - Here's What You Need to Know.” Security Magazine, 23 July 2021. Web.
    • Joint Defense Information Systems Agency (DISA) and National Security Agency (NSA) Zero Trust Engineering Team. “Department of Defense (DOD) Zero Trust Reference Architecture.” DoD CIO, Feb. 2021. Web.
    • Kay, Dennis. “Planning for a Zero Trust Architecture Target State.” NASA, NIST, 13 Nov. 2019. Web.
    • National Security Agency. “Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model.” U.S. Department of Defense, Feb. 2021. Web.
    • NSTAC. “Draft Report to the President - Zero Trust and Trusted Identity Management.” CISA, NSTAC, n.d. Web.
    • Rose, Scott W., et al. “Zero Trust Architecture.” NIST, 10 Aug. 2020. Web.
    • “Securing Digital Innovation Demands Zero-Trust Access.” Fortinet, 15 July 2021. Web.
    • Shackleford, Dave. “How to Create a Comprehensive Zero Trust Strategy.” SANS, Cisco, 2 Sept. 2020. Web.
    • “The CISO’s Guide to Effective Zero-Trust Access.” Fortinet, 28 April 2021. Web.
    • “The State of Zero Trust Security 2021.” Okta, June 2021. Web.
    • Kerman, Alper, et al. “Implementing a Zero Trust Architecture.” NIST - National Cybersecurity Center of Excellence, March 2020. Web.
    • Kindervag, John. “Keynote - John KINDERVAG - 021622.” Vimeo, VIRTUAL Eastern | CyberSecurity Conference, 16 Feb. 2022. Web.
    • Lodewijkx, Koos. “IBM CISO Perspective: Zero Trust Changes Security From Something You Do to Something You Have.” SecurityIntelligence, IBM, 19 Nov. 2020. Web.
    • VB Staff. “Report: Only 21% of Enterprises Use Zero Trust Architecture.” VentureBeat, 15 Feb. 2022. Web.
    • Young, Shalanda D. “Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles.” The White House, EXECUTIVE OFFICE OF THE PRESIDENT - OFFICE OF MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET, 26 Jan. 2022. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Access.” Fortinet, n.d. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Architecture Technical Exchange Meeting.” NIST - National Cybersecurity Center of Excellence, 12 Nov. 2019. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Cybersecurity Current Trends.” ACT-IAC, 18 April 2019. Web.
    • “Zero-Trust Access for Comprehensive Visibility and Control.” Fortinet, 24 Sep. 2020. Web.

    Build IT Capabilities to Enable Digital Marketing Success

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}553|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Misalignment: Even if IT builds the capabilities to pursue digital channels, the channels will underperform in realizing organizational goals if the channels and the goals are misaligned.
    • Ineffective analytics: Failure to integrate and analyze new data will undermine organizational success in influencer and sentiment identification.
    • Missed opportunity: If IT does not develop the capabilities to support these channels, then lead generation, brand promotion, and engagement opportunities will be lost.
    • Lack of control: Marketing is developing and depending on internal power users and agencies. This practice can isolate IT from digital marketing technology decision making.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identify and understand the digital marketing channels that can benefit your organization.
    • Get stakeholder buy-in to facilitate collaboration between IT and product marketing groups to identify necessary IT capabilities.
    • Build IT capability by purchasing software, outsourcing, and training or hiring individuals with necessary skillsets.
    • Become transformational: use IT capabilities to support analytics that identify new customer segments, key influencers, and other invaluable insights.
    • Time is of the essence! It is easier to begin strengthening the relationship between marketing and IT today then it will be at any point in the future.
    • Being transformational means more than just enabling the channels marketing wants to pursue; IT must assist in identifying new segments and digital marketing opportunities, such as enabling influencer management.

    Impact and Result

    • IT is involved in decision making and has a complete understanding of the digital channels the organization is going to migrate to or phase out if unused.
    • IT has the necessary capabilities to support and enable success in all relevant digital channel management technologies.
    • IT is a key player in ensuring that all relevant data from new digital channels is managed and analyzed in order to maintain a 360 degree view of customers and feed real-time campaigns.
    • This enables the organization to not only target existing segments effectively, but also to identify and pursue new opportunities not presented before.
    • These opportunities include: identifying new segments among social networks, identifying key influencers as a new target, identifying proactive service and marketing opportunities from the public social cloud, and conducting new competitive analyses on the public social cloud.

    Build IT Capabilities to Enable Digital Marketing Success Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make the case for building IT capabilities

    Identify the symptoms of inadequate IT support of digital marketing to diagnose the problems in your organization.

    • Storyboard: Build IT Capabilities to Enable Digital Marketing Success

    2. Identify digital marketing opportunities to understand the need for action in your organization

    Identify the untapped digital marketing value in your organization to understand where your organization needs to improve.

    • Digital Marketing Capability Builder Tool

    3. Mobilize for action: get stakeholder buy-in

    Develop a plan for communicating with stakeholders to ensure buy-in to the digital marketing capability building project.

    • Digital Marketing Communication Deck

    4. Identify the product/segment-specific digital marketing landscape to identify required IT capabilities

    Assess how well each digital channel reaches target segments. Identify the capabilities that must be built to enable digital channels.

    5. Create a roadmap for building capabilities to enable digital marketing

    Assess the people, processes, and technologies required to build required capabilities and determine the best fit with your organization.

    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build IT Capabilities to Enable Digital Marketing Success

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Digital Marketing Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Determine the fit of each digital channel with your organizational goals.

    Determine the fit of digital channels with your organizational structure and business model.

    Compare the fit of digital channels with your organization’s current levels of use to:Identify missed opportunities your organization should capitalize on.Identify digital channels that your organization is wasting resources on.

    Identify missed opportunities your organization should capitalize on.

    Identify digital channels that your organization is wasting resources on.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    IT department achieves consensus around which opportunities need to be pursued.

    Understanding that continuing to pursue excellent-fit digital channels that your organization is currently active on is a priority.

    Identification of the channels that stopping activity on could free up resources for.

    Activities

    1.1 Define and prioritize organizational goals.

    1.2 Assess digital channel fit with goals and organizational characteristics.

    1.3 Identify missed opportunities and wasted resources in your digital channel mix.

    1.4 Brainstorm creative ways to pursue untapped digital channels.

    Outputs

    Prioritized list of organizational goals.

    Assigned level of fit to digital channels.

    List of digital channels that represent missed opportunities or wasted resources.

    List of brainstormed ideas for pursuing digital channels.

    2 Identify Your Product-Specific Digital Marketing Landscape

    The Purpose

    Identify the digital channels that will be used for specific products and segments.

    Identify the IT capabilities that must be built to enable digital channels.

    Prioritize the list of IT capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    IT and marketing achieve consensus around which digital channels will be pursued for specific product-segment pairings.

    Identification of the capabilities that IT must build.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess digital channel fit with specific products.

    2.2 Identify the digital usage patterns of target segments.

    2.3 Decide precisely which digital channels you will use to sell specific products to specific segments.

    2.4 Identify and prioritize the IT capabilities that need to be built to succeed on each digital channel.

    Outputs

    Documented channel fit with products.

    Documented channel usage by target segments.

    Listed digital channels that will be used for each product-segment pairing.

    Listed and prioritized capabilities that must be built to enable success on necessary digital channels.

    3 Enable Digital Marketing Capabilities and Leverage Analytics

    The Purpose

    Identification of the best possible way to build IT capabilities for all channels.

    Creation of a plan for leveraging transformational analytics to supercharge your digital marketing strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    IT understanding of the costs and benefits of capability building options (people, process, and technology).

    Information about how specific technology vendors could fit with your organization.

    IT identification of opportunities to leverage transformational analytics in your organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify the gaps in your IT capabilities.

    3.2 Evaluate options for building capabilities.

    3.3 Identify opportunities for transformational analytics.

    Outputs

    A list of IT capability gaps.

    An action plan for capability building.

    A plan for leveraging transformational analytics.

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}271|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Secure Cloud & Network Architecture
    • Parent Category Link: /secure-cloud-network-architecture
    • Many IT and security leaders struggle to cope with the challenges associated with an hybrid workforce and how best to secure it.
    • Understanding the main principles of zero trust: never trust, always verify, assume breach, and verify explicitly.
    • How to go about achieving a zero trust framework.
    • Understanding the premise of SASE as it pertains to a hybrid workforce.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Securing your hybrid workforce should be an opportunity to get started on the zero trust journey. Realizing the core features needed to achieve this will assist you determine which of the options is a good fit for your organization.

    Impact and Result

    Every organization's strategy to secure their hybrid workforce should include introducing zero trust principles in certain areas. Our unique approach:

    • Assess the suitability of SASE/SSE and zero trust.
    • Present capabilities and feature benefits.
    • Procure SASE product and/or build a zero trust roadmap.

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Secure Your Hybrid Workforce Deck – The purpose of the storyboard is to provide a detailed description of the steps involved in securing your hybrid workforce with zero trust.

    The storyboard contains two easy-to-follow steps on securing your hybrid workforce with zero trust, from assessing the suitability of SASE/SSE to taking a step in building a zero trust roadmap.

    • Secure Your Hybrid Workforce – Phases 1-2

    2. Suitability Assessment Tool – A tool to identify whether SASE/SSE or a zero trust roadmap is a better fit for your organization.

    Use this tool to identify your next line of action in securing your hybrid workforce by assessing key components that conforms to the ideals and principles of Zero Trust.

    • Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    3. RFP Template – A document to guide you through requesting proposals from vendors.

    Use this document to request proposals from select vendors.

    • Request for Proposal (RFP) Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce

    SASE as a driver to zero trust.

    Analyst Perspective

    Consolidate your security and network.

    Remote connections like VPNs were not designed to be security tools or to have the capacity to handle a large hybrid workforce; hence, organizations are burdened with implementing controls that are perceived to be "security solutions." The COVID-19 pandemic forced a wave of remote work for employees that were not taken into consideration for most VPN implementations, and as a result, the understanding of the traditional network perimeter as we always knew it has shifted to include devices, applications, edges, and the internet. Additionally, remote work is here to stay as recruiting talent in the current market means you must make yourself attractive to potential hires.

    The shift in the network perimeter increases the risks associated with traditional VPN solutions as well as exposing the limitations of the solution. This is where zero trust as a principle introduces a more security-focused strategy that not only mitigates most (if not all) of the risks, but also eliminates limitations, which would enhance the business and improve customer/employee experience.

    There are several ways of achieving zero trust maturity, and one of those is SASE, which consolidates security and networking to better secure your hybrid workforce as implied trust is thrown out of the window and verification of everything becomes the new normal to defend the business.

    This is a picture of Victor Okorie

    Victor Okorie
    Senior Research Analyst, Security and Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    CISOs are looking to zero trust to fill the gaps associated with their traditional remote setup as well as to build an adaptable security strategy. Some challenges faced include:

    • Understanding the main principles of zero trust: never trust, always verify, assume breach, and verify explicitly.
    • Understanding how to achieve a zero trust framework.
    • Understanding the premise of SASE as it pertains to a hybrid workforce.

    Common Obstacles

    The zero trust journey may seem tedious because of a few obstacles like:

    • Knowing what the principle is all about and the components that align with it.
    • Knowing where to start. Due to the lack of a standardized path for the zero trust journey, going about the journey can be confusing.
    • Not having a uniform definition of what makes up a SASE solution as it is heavily dependent on vendors.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Info-Tech provides a three-service approach to helping organizations better secure their hybrid workforce.

    • Understand your current, existing technological capabilities and challenges with your hybrid infrastructure, and prioritize those challenges.
    • Gain insight into zero trust and SASE as a mitigation/control/tool to those challenges.
    • Identify the SASE features that are relevant to your needs and a source guide for a SASE vendor.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Securing your hybrid workforce should be an opportunity to get started on the zero trust journey. Realizing the core features needed to achieve this will assist you in determining which of the options is a good fit for your organization.

    Turn your challenges into opportunities

    Hybrid workforce is the new normal

    The pandemic has shown there is no going back to full on-prem work, and as such, security should be looked at differently with various considerations in mind.

    Understand that current hybrid solutions are susceptible to various forms of attack as the threat attack surface area has now expanded with users, devices, applications, locations, and data. The traditional perimeter as we know it has expanded beyond just the corporate network, and as such, it needs a more mature security strategy.

    Onboarding and offboarding have been done remotely, and with some growth recorded, the size of companies has also increased, leading to a scaling issue.

    Employees are now demanding remote work capabilities as part of contract negotiation before accepting a job.

    Attacks have increased far more quickly during the pandemic, and all indications point to them increasing even more.

    Scarce available security personnel in the job market for hire.

    Reality Today

    This image is a circle graph and 67% of it is coloured with the number 67% in the middle of the graph

    The number of breach incidents by identity theft.
    Source: Security Magazine, 2022.

    This image is a circle graph and 78% of it is coloured with the number 78% in the middle of the graph

    IT security teams want to adopt zero trust.
    Source: Cybersecurity Insiders, 2019.

    Reduce the risks of remote work by using zero trust

    $1.07m

    $1.76m

    235

    Increase in breaches related to remote work

    Cost difference in a breach where zero trust is deployed

    Days to identify a breach

    The average cost of a data breach where remote work was a factor rose by $1.07 million in 2021. COVID-19 brought about rapid changes in organizations, and digital transformation changes curbed some of its excesses. Organizations that did not make any digital transformation changes reported a $750,000 higher costs compared to global average.

    The average cost of a breach in an organization with no zero trust deployed was $5.04 million in 2021 compared to the average cost of a breach in an organization with zero trust deployed of $3.28 million. With a difference of $1.76 million, zero trust makes a significant difference.

    Organizations with a remote work adoption rate of 50% took 235 days to identify a breach and 81 days to contain that breach – this is in comparison to the average of 212 days to identify a breach and 75 days to contain that breach.

    Source: IBM, 2021.

    Network + Security = SASE

    What exactly is a SASE product?

    The convergence and consolidation of security and network brought about the formation of secure access service edge (SASE – pronounced like "sassy"). Digital transformation, hybrid workforce, high demand of availability, uninterrupted access for employees, and a host of other factors influenced the need for this convergence that is delivered as a cloud service.

    The capabilities of a SASE solution being delivered are based on certain criteria, such as the identity of the entity (users, devices, applications, data, services, location), real-time context, continuous assessment and verification of risk and "trust" throughout the lifetime of a session, and the security and compliance policies of the organization.

    SASE continuously identifies users and devices, applies security based on policy, and provides secure access to the appropriate and requested application or data regardless of location.

    image contains a list of the SASE Network Features and Security Features. the network Features are: WAN optimization; SD WAN; CDN; Network-as-a-service. The Security Features are: CASB; IDPS; ZTNA/VPN; FWaaS; Browser isolation; DLP; UEBA; Secure web gateway; Sandboxing

    Current Approach

    The traditional perimeter security using the castle and moat approach is depicted in the image here. The security shields valuable resources from external attack; however, it isn't foolproof for all kinds of external attacks. Furthermore, it does not protect those valuable resources from insider threat.

    This security perimeter also allows for lateral movement when it has been breached. Access to these resources is now considered "trusted" solely because it is now behind the wall/perimeter.

    This approach is no longer feasible in our world today where both external and internal threats pose continuous risk and need to be contained.

    Determine the suitability of SASE and zero trust

    The Challenge:

    Complications facing traditional infrastructure

    • Increased hybrid workforce
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Limited Infosec personnel
    • Poor threat detection
    • Increased attack surface

    Common vulnerabilities in traditional infrastructure

    • MITM attack
    • XSS attack
    • Session hijacking
    • Trust-based model
    • IP spoofing
    • Brute force attack
    • Distributed denial of service
    • DNS hijacking
    • Latency issues
    • Lateral movement once connection is established

    TRADITIONAL INFRASTRUCTURE

    NETWORK

    SECURITY

    AUTHENTICATION

    IDENTITY

    ACCESS

    • MPLS
    • Corporate Network
    • Antivirus installed
    • Traditional Firewall
    • Intrusion Detection and Prevention System
    • Allow and Deny rules
    • Businesses must respond to consumer requests to:
    • LDAP
    • AAA
    • Immature password complexity
    • Trusted device with improperly managed endpoint protection.
    • Little or no DNS security
    • Web portal (captive)
    • VPN client

    Candidate Solutions

    Proposed benefits of SASE

    • Access is only granted to the requested resource
    • Consolidated network and security as a service
    • Micro-segmentation on application and gateway
    • Adopts a zero trust security posture for all access
    • Managed detection and response
    • Uniform enforcement of policy
    • Distributed denial of service shield

    SASE

    NETWORK

    SECURITY

    AUTHENTICATION

    IDENTITY

    ACCESS

    • Software defined – WAN
    • Content delivery network
    • WAN optimization
    • Network-as-a-service
    • Firewall-as-a-service/NGFW
    • Zero trust network access
    • Endpoint detection & response
    • Secure web gateway
    • Cloud access security broker
    • Data loss prevention
    • Remote browser isolation
    • Multifactor authentication
    • Context-based security policy for authentication
    • Authorization managed with situational awareness and real-time risk analytics
    • Continuous verification throughout an access request lifecycle
    • Zero trust identity on users, devices, applications, and data.
    • Strong password complexity enforced
    • Privilege access management
    • Secure internet access
    • SASE client

    ZERO TRUST

    TENETS OF ZERO TRUST

    ZERO TRUST PILLARS

    • Continuous, dynamic authentication and verification
    • Principle of least privilege
    • Always assume a breach
    • Implement the tenets of zero trust across the following domains of your environment:
      • IDENTITY
      • APPLICATION
      • NETWORK
      • DEVICES
      • DATA

    Proposed benefits of zero trust

    • Identify and protect critical and non-critical resources in accordance with business objectives.
    • Produce initiatives that conform to the ideals of zero trust and are aligned with the corresponding pillars above.
    • Formulate policies to protect resources and aid segmentation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Securing your hybrid workforce should be an opportunity to get started on the zero trust journey. Realizing the core features needed to achieve this will help you determine which of the options is a good fit for your organization.

    Measure the value of using Info-Tech's approach

    IT and business value

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    Assess the benefits of adopting SASE or zero trust

    Vendors will try to control the narrative in terms of what they can do for you, but it's time for you to control the narrative and identify pain points to IT and the business, and with that, to understand and define what the vendor solution can do for you.

    PHASE 2

    Assess the benefits of adopting SASE or zero trust

    Vendors will try to control the narrative in terms of what they can do for you, but it's time for you to control the narrative and identify pain points to IT and the business, and with that, to understand and define what the vendor solution can do for you.

    Short-term benefits

    • Gain awareness of your zero trust readiness.
    • Embed a zero trust mindset across your architecture.
    • Control the narrative of what SASE brings to your organization.

    Long-term benefits

    • Identified controls to mitigate risks with current architecture while on a zero trust journey.
    • Improved security posture that reduces risk by increasing visibility into threats and user connections.
    • Reduced CapEx and OpEx due to the scalability, low staffing requirements, and improved time to respond to threats using a SASE or SSE solution.

    Determine SASE cost factors

    IT and business value

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT leaders need to examine different areas of their budget and determine how the adoption of a SASE solution could influence several areas of their budget breakdown.

    Determining the SASE cost factors early could accelerate the justification the business needs to move forward in making an informed decision.

    01- Infrastructure

    • Physical security
    • Cabling
    • Power supply and HVAC
    • Hosting

    02- Administration

    • Human hours to analyze logs and threats
    • Human hours to secure infrastructure
    • Fees associated with maintenance

    03- Inbound

    • DPI
    • DDoS
    • Web application firewall
    • VPN concentrators

    04- Outbound

    • IDPS
    • DLP on-prem
    • QoS
    • Sandbox & URL filtering

    04- Data Protection

    • Real-time URL
      insights
    • Threat hunting
    • Data loss prevention

    06- Monitoring

    • Log storage
    • Logging engine
    • Dashboards
    • Managed detection
      and response

    Info-Tech's methodology for securing your hybrid workforce

    1. Current state and future mitigation

    2. Assess the benefits of moving to SASE/zero trust

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Limitations of legacy infrastructure

    1.2 Zero trust principle as a control

    1.3 SASE as a driver of zero trust

    2.1 Sourcing out a SASE/SSE vendor

    2.2 Build a zero trust roadmap

    Phase Outcomes

    Identify and prioritize risks of current infrastructure and several ways to mitigate them.

    RFP template and build a zero trust roadmap.

    Consider several factors needed to protect your growing hybrid workforce and assess your current resource capabilities, solutions, and desire for a more mature security program. The outcome should either address a quick pain point or a long-term roadmap.

    The internet is the new corporate network

    The internet is the new corporate network, which opens the organization up to more risks not protected by the current security stack. Using Info-Tech's methodology of zero trust adoption is a sure way to reduce the attack surface, and SASE is one useful tool to take you on the zero trust journey.

    Current-state risks and future mitigation

    Securing your hybrid workforce via zero trust will inevitably include (but is not limited to) technological products/solutions.

    SASE and SSE features sit as an overlay here as technological solutions that will help on the zero trust journey by aggregating all the disparate solutions required for you to meet zero trust requirements into a single interface. The knowledge and implementation of this helps put things into perspective of where and what our target state is.

    The right solution for the right problem

    It is critical to choose a solution that addresses the security problems you are actually trying to solve.

    Don't allow the solution provider to tell you what you need – rather, start by understanding your capability gaps and then go to market to find the right partner.

    Take advantage of the RFP template to source a SASE or SSE vendor. Additionally, build a zero trust roadmap to develop and strategize initiatives and tasks.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Zero Trust and SASE Suitability Tool
    Identify critical and vulnerable DAAS elements to protect and align them to business goals.

    Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    Perform a gap analysis between current and target states to build a zero trust roadmap.

    Key deliverable:

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce With Zero Trust Communication deck
    Present your zero trust strategy in a prepopulated document that summarizes the work you have completed as a part of this blueprint.

    Phase 1

    Current state and future mitigation

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Limitations of legacy infrastructure

    1.2 Zero trust principle as a control

    1.3 SASE as a driver of zero trust

    2.1 Sourcing out a SASE/SSE vendor

    2.2 Build a zero trust roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Introduction to the tool, how to use the input tabs to identify current challenges, technologies being used, and to prioritize the challenges. The prioritized list will highlight existing gaps and eventually be mapped to recommended mitigations in the following phase.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • CSO
    • IT security team
    • IT network team

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce

    1.1 Limitations of legacy infrastructure

    Traditional security & remote access solutions must be modernized

    Info-Tech Insight
    Traditional security is architected with a perimeter in mind and is poorly suited to the threats in hybrid or distributed environments.

    Ensure you minimize or eliminate weak points on all layers.

    • SECURITY
      • DDoS
      • DNS hijacking
      • Weak VPN protocols
    • IDENTITY
      • One-time verification allowing lateral movement
    • NETWORK
      • Risk perimeter stops at corporate network edge
      • Split tunneling
    • AUTHENTICATION
      • Weak authentication
      • Weak passwords
    • ACCESS
      • Man-in-the-middle attack
      • Cross-site scripting
      • Session hijacking

    1.1.1 For example: traditional VPNs are poorly suited to a hybrid workforce

    There are many limitations that make it difficult for traditional VPNs to adapt to an ever-growing hybrid workforce.

    The listed limitations are tied to associated risks of legacy infrastructure as well as security components that are almost non-existent in a VPN implementation today.

    Scaling

    VPNs were designed for small-scale remote access to corporate network. An increase in the remote workforce will require expensive hardware investment.

    Visibility

    Users and attackers are not restricted to specific network resources, and with an absence of activity logs, they can go undetected.

    Managed detection & response

    Due to the reduction in or lack of visibility, threat detections are poorly managed, and responses are already too late.

    Hardware

    Limited number of locations for VPN hardware to be situated as it can be expensive.

    Hybrid workforce

    The increase in the hybrid workforce requires the risk perimeter to be expanded from the corporate network to devices and applications. VPNs are built for privacy, not security.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Hybrid workforces are here to stay, and adopting a strategy that is adaptable, flexible, simple, and cost-effective is a recommended road to take on the journey to bettering your security and network.

    1.1 Identify risk from legacy infrastructure

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. Ensure all vulnerabilities described on slide 17 are removed.
    2. Note any forecasted challenge you think you might have down the line with your current hybrid setup.
    3. Identify any trend that may be of interest to you with regards to your hybrid setup.

    This is a screenshot of the organizational profile table found in the Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    Download the Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    Input

    • List of key pain points and challenges
    • List of forecasted challenges and trends of interest

    Output

    • Prioritized list of pain points and/or challenges

    Materials

    • Excel tool
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • CISO
    • InfoSec team
    • IT manager
    • CIO
    • Infrastructure team

    1.2 Zero trust principle as a control

    A zero trust implementation comes with benefits/initiatives that mitigate the challenges identified in earlier activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Zero trust/"always verify" is applied to identity, workloads, devices, networks, and data to provide a greater control for risks associated with traditional network architecture.

    Improve IAM maturity

    Zero trust identity and access will lead to a mature IAM process in an organization with the removal of implicit trust.

    Secure your remote access

    With a zero trust network architecture (ZTNA), both the remote and on-prem network access are more secure than the traditional network deployment. The software-defined parameter ensures security on each network access.

    Reduce threat surface area

    With zero trust principle applied on identity, workload, devices, network, and data, the threat surface area which births some of the risks identified earlier will be significantly reduced.

    Improve hybrid workforce

    Scaling, visibility, network throughput, secure connection from anywhere, micro-segmentation, and a host of other benefits to improve your hybrid workforce.

    1.2 SASE as an overlay to zero trust

    Security and network initiatives of a zero trust roadmap converged into a single pane of glass.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security and network converged into a single pane of glass giving you some of the benefits and initiatives of a zero trust implemented architecture in one package.

    Improve IAM maturity

    The identity-centric nature of SASE solutions helps to improve your IAM maturity as it applies the principle of least privilege. The removal of implicit trust and continuous verification helps foster this more.

    Secure your remote access

    With ZTNA, both the remote and on-prem network access are more secure than the traditional network deployment. The software defined parameter ensures security on each network access.

    Reduce threat surface area

    Secure web gateway, cloud access security broker, domain name system, next-generation firewall, data loss prevention, and ZTNA protect against data leaks, prevent lateral movement, and prevent malicious actors from coming in.

    Improve hybrid workforce

    Reduced costs and complexity of IT, faster user experience, and reduced risk as a result of the scalability, visibility, ease of IT administration, network throughput, secure connection from anywhere, micro-segmentation, and a host of other benefits will surely improve your hybrid workforce.

    Align SASE features to zero trust core capabilities

    Verify Identity

    • Authentication & verification are enforced for each app request or session.
    • Use of multifactor authentication.
    • RBAC/ABAC and principle of least privilege are applied on the identity regardless of user, device, or location.

    Verify Device

    • Device health is checked to ensure device is not compromised or vulnerable.
    • No admin permissions on user devices.
    • Device-based risk assessment is enforced as part of UEBA.

    Verify Access

    • Micro-segmentation built around network, user, device, location and roles.
    • Use of context and content-based policy enforced to the user, application, and device identity.
    • Network access only granted to specified application request and not to the entire network.

    Verify Services

    • Applications and services are checked before access is granted.
    • Connections to the application and services are inspected with the security controls built into the SASE solution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    These features of SASE and zero trust mitigate the risks associated with a traditional VPN and reduce the threat surface area. With security at the core, network optimization is not compromised.

    Security components of SASE

    Otherwise known as security service edge (SSE)

    Security service edge is the convergence of all security services typically found in SASE. At its core, SSE consists of three services which include:

    • Secure web gateway – secure access to the internet and web.
    • Cloud access security broker – secure access to SaaS and cloud applications.
    • Zero trust network access – secure remote access to private applications.

    SSE components are also mitigations or initiatives that make up a zero trust roadmap as they comply with the zero trust principle, and as a result, they sit up there with SASE as an overlay/driver of a zero trust implementation. SSE's benefits are identical to SASE's in that it provides zero trust access, risk reduction, low costs and complexity, and a better user experience. The difference is SSE's sole focus on security services and not the network component.

    SASE

    NETWORK FEATURES

    SECURITY FEATURES

    • WAN optimization
    • SD WAN
    • CDN
    • Network-as-a-service
    • CASB
    • IDPS
    • ZTNA/VPN
    • FWaaS
    • Browser isolation
    • DLP
    • UEBA
    • Secure web gateway
    • Sandboxing

    1.3 Pros & cons of zero trust and SASE

    Zero Trust

    SASE

    Pros

    Cons

    Pros

    Cons

    • Robust IAM process and technologies with role-based access control.
    • Strong and continuous verification of identity of user accounts, devices, data, location, and principle of least privilege applied.
    • Micro-segmentation applied around users, network, devices, roles, and applications to prevent lateral movement.
    • Threat attack surface eliminated, which reduces organizational risks.
    • Protection of data strengthened based on sensitivity and micro-segmentation.
    • Difficult to identify the scope of the zero trust initiative.
    • Requires continuous and ongoing update of access controls.
    • Zero trust journey/process could take years and is prone to being abandoned without commitment from executives.
    • Legacy systems can be hard to replace, which would require all stakeholders to prioritize resource allocation.
    • Can be expensive to implement.
    • Adopts a zero trust security posture for all access requests.
    • Converged and consolidated network and security delivered as a cloud service to the user rather than a single point of enforcement.
    • Centralized visibility of devices, data in transit and at rest, user activities, and threats.
    • Cheaper than a zero trust roadmap implementation.
    • Managed detection and response.
    • The limited knowledge of SASE.
    • No universally agreed upon SASE definition.
    • SASE products are still being developed and are open to vendors' interpretation.
    • Existing vendor relationships could be a hinderance to deployment.
    • Hard to manage MSSPs.

    Understand SASE and zero trust suitability for your needs

    Estimated Time: 1 hour

    Use the dashboard to understand the value assessment of adopting a SASE product or building a zero trust roadmap.

    This is an image of the SASE Suitability Assessment

    This is the image of the Zero Trust Suitability Assessment

    Info-Tech Insight

    This tool will help steer you on a path to take as a form of mitigation/control to some or all the identified challenges.

    Phase 2

    Make a decision and next steps

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Limitations of legacy infrastructure

    1.2 Zero trust principle as a control

    1.3 SASE as a driver of zero trust

    2.1 Sourcing out a SASE/SSE vendor

    2.2 Build a zero trust roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Introduction to the tool activity, how to use the input tabs and considerations to generate an output that could help understand the current state of your hybrid infrastructure and what direction is to be followed next to improve.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • CSO
    • IT security
    • IT network team

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce

    Step 2.1

    Sourcing out a SASE/SSE vendor

    Activities

    2.1.1 Use the RFP template to request proposal from vendors

    2.1.2 Use SoftwareReviews to compare vendors

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO, CISO, IT manager, Infosec team, executives.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Zero Trust Roadmap

    2.1.1 Use the RFP template to request proposal from vendors

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, use the RFP Template to include technical capabilities of your desired SASE product and to request proposals from vendors.
    2. The features that are most important to your organization generated from phase one should be highlighted in the RFP.

    Input

    • List of SASE features
    • Technical capabilities

    Output

    • RFP

    Materials

    • RFP Template

    Participants

    • Security team
    • IT leadership

    Download the RFP Template

    2.1.2 Use SoftwareReviews to compare vendors

    SoftwareReviews

    • The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.
    • Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.
    • The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.
    • Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Step 2.2

    Zero trust readiness and roadmap

    Activities

    2.2.1 Assess the maturity of your current zero trust implementation

    2.2.2 Understand business needs and current security projects

    2.2.3 Set target maturity state with timeframe

    This step involves the following participants:

    CIO, CISO, IT manager, Infosec team, executives.

    Outcomes of this step

    Zero Trust Roadmap

    2.2.1 Assess the maturity of your current zero trust implementation

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    • Realizing that zero trust is a journey helps create a better roadmap and implementation. Identify the current controls or solutions in your organization that align with the principle of zero trust.
    • Break down these controls or solutions into different silos (e.g. identity, security, network, data, device, applications, etc.).
    • Determine your zero trust readiness.

    Input

    • List of zero trust controls/solutions
    • Siloed list of zero trust controls/solutions
    • Current state of zero trust maturity

    Output

    • Zero trust readiness and current maturity state

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Security Benefit Assessment tool

    Participants

    • Security team
    • IT leadership

    Download the Zero Trust Security Benefit Assessment tool

    2.2.2 Understand business needs and current security projects

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. Identify the business and IT executives, application owners, and board members whose vision aligns with the zero trust journey.
    2. Identify existing projects within security, IT, and the business and highlight interdependencies or how they fit with the zero trust journey.
    3. Build a rough sketch of the roadmap that fits the business needs, current projects and the zero trust journey.

    Input

    • Meetings with stakeholders
    • List of current and future projects

    Output

    • Sketch of zero trust roadmap

    Materials

    • Whiteboard activity

    Participants

    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • IT ops team
    • Business executives
    • Board members

    Download Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    2.2.3 Set target maturity state with a given timeframe

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. With the zero trust readiness, current business, IT and security projects, current maturity state, and sketch of the roadmap, setting a target maturity state within some timeframe is at the top of the list. The target maturity state will include a list of initiatives that could be siloed and confined to a timeframe.
    2. A Gantt chart or graph could be used to complete this task.

    Input

    • Results from previous activity slides

    Output

    • Current state and target state assessment for gap analysis
    • List of initiatives and timeframe

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • IT ops team
    • Business executives
    • Board members

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Insights Gained

    • Difference between zero trust as a principle and SASE as a framework
    • Difference between SASE and SSE platforms.
    • Assessment of which path to take in securing your hybrid workforce

    Deliverables Completed

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    This is a screenshot from the Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    Assess current security capabilities and build a roadmap of tasks and initiatives that close maturity gaps.

    Research Contributors

    • Aaron Shum, Vice President, Security & Privacy
    • Cameron Smith, Research Lead, Security & Privacy
    • Brad Mateski, Zones, Solutions Architect for CyberSecurity
    • Bob Smock, Info-Tech Research Group, Vice President of Consulting
    • Dr. Chase Cunningham, Ericom Software, Chief Strategy Officer
    • John Kindervag, ON2IT Cybersecurity, Senior Vice President, Cybersecurity Strategy and ON2IT Group Fellow
    • John Zhao, Fonterra, Enterprise Security Architect
    • Rongxing Lu, University of New Brunswick, Associate Professor
    • Sumanta Sarkar, University of Warwick, Assistant Professor
    • Tim Malone, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Director Information Security
    • Vana Matte, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Vice President of Technology Services

    Related Info-Tech Research

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Security Strategy Model

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy – an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for over seven years with hundreds of organizations. This unique approach includes tools for ensuring alignment with business objectives, assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations, enabling a comprehensive current state assessment, prioritizing initiatives, and building out a security roadmap.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's research: Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness

    Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness

    IT security was typified by perimeter security. However, the way the world does business has mandated a change to IT security. In response, zero trust is a set of principles that can add flexibility to planning your IT security strategy.

    Use this blueprint to determine your zero trust readiness and understand how zero trust can benefit both security and the business.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's research: Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Many organizations are looking to improve their identity and access management (IAM) practices but struggle with where to start and whether all areas of IAM have been considered. This blueprint will help you improve the organization's IAM practices by following our three-phase methodology:

    • Assess identity and access requirements.
    • Identify initiatives using the identity lifecycle.
    • Prioritize initiatives and build a roadmap.

    Bibliography

    "2021 Data Breach Investigations Report." Verizon, 2021. Web.
    "Fortinet Brings Networking and Security to the Cloud" Fortinet, 2 Mar. 2021. Web.
    "A Zero Trust Strategy Has 3 Needs – Identify, Authenticate, and Monitor Users and Devices on and off the Network." Fortinet, 15 July 2021. Web.
    "Applying Zero Trust Principles to Enterprise Mobility." CISA, Mar. 2022. Web.
    "CISA Zero Trust Maturity Model." CISA, Cybersecurity Division, June 2021. Web.
    "Continuous Diagnostics and Mitigation Program Overview." CISA, Jan. 2022. Web.
    "Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021 | IBM." IBM, July 2021. Web.
    English, Melanie. "5 Stats That Show The Cost Saving Effect of Zero Trust." Teramind, 29 Sept. 2021. Web.
    Hunter, Steve. "The Five Business Benefits of a Zero Trust Approach to Security." Security Brief - Australia, 19 Aug. 2020. Web.
    "Improve Application Access and Security With Fortinet Zero Trust Network Access." Fortinet, 2 Mar. 2021. Web.
    "Incorporating zero trust Strategies for Secure Network and Application Access." Fortinet, 21 Jul. 2021. Web.
    Jakkal, Vasu. "Zero Trust Adoption Report: How Does Your Organization Compare?" Microsoft, 28 July 2021. Web.
    "Jericho Forum™ Commandments." The Open Group, Jericho Forum, May 2007. Web.
    Schulze, Holger. "2019 Zero Trust Adoption Report." Cybersecurity Insiders, 2019. Web.
    "67% of Organizations Had Identity-Related Data Breaches Last Year." Security Magazine, 22 Aug. 2022. Web.
    United States, Executive Office of the President Joseph R. Biden, Jr. "Executive Order on Improving the Nation's Cybersecurity." The White House, 12 May 2021. Web.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}188|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $69,330 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Program & Project Management
    • Parent Category Link: /program-and-project-management
    • Organizational change management (OCM) is often an Achilles’ heel for IT departments and business units, putting projects and programs at risk – especially large, complex, transformational projects.
    • When projects that depend heavily on users and stakeholders adopting new tools, or learning new processes or skills, get executed without an effective OCM plan, the likelihood that they will fail to achieve their intended outcomes increases exponentially.
    • The root of the problem often comes down to a question of accountability: who in the organization is accountable for change management success? In the absence of any other clearly identifiable OCM leader, the PMO – as the organizational entity that is responsible for facilitating successful project outcomes – needs to step up and embrace this accountability.
    • As PMO leader, you need to hone an OCM strategy and toolkit that will help ensure not only that projects are completed but also that benefits are realized.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The root of poor stakeholder adoption on change initiatives is twofold:
      • Project planning tends to fixate on technology and neglects the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit user adoption;
      • Accountabilities for managing change and helping to realize the intended business outcomes post-project are not properly defined in advance.
    • Persuading people to change requires a “soft,” empathetic approach to keep them motivated and engaged. But don’t mistake “soft” for easy. Managing the people part of change is amongst the toughest work there is, and it requires a comfort and competency with uncertainty, ambiguity, and conflict.
    • Transformation and change are increasingly becoming the new normal. While this normality may help make people more open to change in general, specific changes still need to be planned, communicated, and managed. Agility and continuous improvement are good, but can degenerate into volatility if change isn’t managed properly.

    Impact and Result

    • Plan for human nature. To ensure project success and maximize benefits, plan and facilitate the non-technical aspects of organizational change by addressing the emotional, behavioral, and cultural factors that foster stakeholder resistance and inhibit user adoption.
    • Make change management as ubiquitous as change itself. Foster a project culture that is proactive about OCM. Create a process where OCM considerations are factored in as early as project ideation and where change is actively managed throughout the project lifecycle, including after the project has closed.
    • Equip project leaders with the right tools to foster adoption. Effective OCM requires an actionable toolkit that will help plant the seeds for organizational change. With the right tools and templates, the PMO can function as the hub for change, helping the business units and project teams to consistently achieve project and post-project success.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how implementing an OCM strategy through the PMO can improve project outcomes and increase benefits realization.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare the PMO for change leadership

    Assess the organization’s readiness for change and evaluate the PMO’s OCM capabilities.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 1: Prepare the PMO for Change Leadership
    • Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment
    • Project Level Assessment Tool

    2. Plant the seeds for change during project planning and initiation

    Build an organic desire for change throughout the organization by developing a sponsorship action plan through the PMO and taking a proactive approach to change impacts.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 2: Plant the Seeds for Change During Project Planning and Initiation
    • Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool

    3. Facilitate change adoption throughout the organization

    Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change by developing effective communication, transition, and training plans.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 3: Facilitate Change Adoption Throughout the Organization
    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Transition Plan Template
    • Transition Team Communications Template

    4. Establish a post-project benefits attainment process

    Determine accountabilities and establish a process for tracking business outcomes after the project team has packed up and moved onto the next project.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 4: Establish a Post-Project Benefits Attainment Process
    • Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool

    5. Solidify the PMO’s role as change leader

    Institute an Organizational Change Management Playbook through the PMO that covers tools, processes, and tactics that will scale all of the organization’s project efforts.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 5: Solidify the PMO's Role as Change Leader
    • Organizational Change Management Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess OCM Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Assess the organization’s readiness for change and evaluate the PMO’s OCM capabilities.

    Estimate the relative difficulty and effort required for managing organizational change through a specific project.

    Create a rough but concrete timeline that aligns organizational change management activities with project scope.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A better understanding of the cultural appetite for change and of where the PMO needs to focus its efforts to improve OCM capabilities.

    A project plan that includes disciplined organizational change management from start to finish.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the organization’s current readiness for change.

    1.2 Perform a change management SWOT analysis to assess the PMO’s capabilities.

    1.3 Define OCM success metrics.

    1.4 Establish and map out a core OCM project to pilot through the workshop.

    Outputs

    Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment

    A diagnosis of the PMO’s strengths and weaknesses around change management, as well as the opportunities and threats associated with driving an OCM strategy through the PMO

    Criteria for implementation success

    Project Level Assessment

    2 Analyze Change Impacts

    The Purpose

    Analyze the impact of the change across various dimensions of the business.

    Develop a strategy to manage change impacts to best ensure stakeholder adoption.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved planning for both your project management and organizational change management efforts.

    A more empathetic understanding of how the change will be received in order to rightsize the PMO’s OCM effort and maximize adoption.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop a sponsorship action plan through the PMO.

    2.2 Determine the relevant considerations for analyzing the change impacts of a project.

    2.3 Analyze the depth of each impact for each stakeholder group.

    2.4 Establish a game plan to manage individual change impacts.

    2.5 Document the risk assumptions and opportunities stemming from the impact analysis.

    Outputs

    Sponsorship Action Plan

    Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment

    Risk and Opportunity Assessment

    3 Establish Collaborative Roles and Develop an Engagement Plan

    The Purpose

    Define a clear and compelling vision for change.

    Define roles and responsibilities of the core project team for OCM.

    Identify potential types and sources of resistance and enthusiasm.

    Create a stakeholder map that visualizes relative influence and interest of stakeholders.

    Develop an engagement plan for cultivating support for change while eliciting requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Begin to communicate a compelling vision for change.

    Delegate and divide work on elements of the transition plan among the project team and support staff.

    Begin developing a communications plan that appeals to unique needs and attitudes of different stakeholders.

    Cultivate support for change while eliciting requirements.

    Activities

    3.1 Involve the right people to drive and facilitate change.

    3.2 Solidify the vision of change to reinforce and sustain leadership and commitment.

    3.3 Proactively identify potential skeptics in order to engage them early and address their concerns.

    3.4 Stay one step ahead of potential saboteurs to prevent them from spreading dissent.

    3.5 Find opportunities to empower enthusiasts to stay motivated and promote change by encouraging others.

    3.6 Formalize the stakeholder analysis to identify change champions and blockers.

    3.7 Formalize the engagement plan to begin cultivating support while eliciting requirements.

    Outputs

    RACI table

    Stakeholder Analysis

    Engagement Plan

    Communications plan requirements

    4 Develop and Execute the Transition Plan

    The Purpose

    Develop a realistic, effective, and adaptable transition plan, including:Clarity around leadership and vision.Well-defined plans for targeting unique groups with specific messages.Resistance and contingency plans.Templates for gathering feedback and evaluating success.

    Clarity around leadership and vision.

    Well-defined plans for targeting unique groups with specific messages.

    Resistance and contingency plans.

    Templates for gathering feedback and evaluating success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Execute the transition in coordination with the timeline and structure of the core project.

    Communicate the action plan and vision for change.

    Target specific stakeholder and user groups with unique messages.

    Deal with risks, resistance, and contingencies.

    Evaluate success through feedback and metrics.

    Activities

    4.1 Sustain changes by adapting people, processes, and technologies to accept the transition.

    4.2 Decide which action to take on enablers and blockers.

    4.3 Start developing the training plan early to ensure training is properly timed and communicated.

    4.4 Sketch a communications timeline based on a classic change curve to accommodate natural resistance.

    4.5 Define plans to deal with resistance to change, objections, and fatigue.

    4.6 Consolidate and refine communication plan requirements for each stakeholder and group.

    4.7 Build the communications delivery plan.

    4.8 Define the feedback and evaluation process to ensure the project achieves its objectives.

    4.9 Formalize the transition plan.

    Outputs

    Training Plan

    Resistance Plan

    Communications Plan

    Transition Plan

    5 Institute an OCM Playbook through the PMO

    The Purpose

    Establish post-project benefits tracking timeline and commitment plans.

    Institute a playbook for managing organizational change, including:

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A process for ensuring the intended business outcomes are tracked and monitored after the project is completed.

    Repeat and scale best practices around organizational change to future PMO projects.

    Continue to build your capabilities around managing organizational change.

    Increase the effectiveness and value of organizational change management.

    Activities

    5.1 Review lessons learned to improve organizational change management as a core PM discipline.

    5.2 Monitor capacity for change.

    5.3 Define roles and responsibilities.

    5.4 Formalize and communicate the organizational change management playbook.

    5.5 Regularly reassess the value and success of organizational change management.

    Outputs

    Lessons learned

    Organizational Change Capability Assessment

    Organizational Change Management Playbook

    Further reading

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    PMOs, if you don't know who is responsible for org change, it's you.

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t leave change up to chance.

    "Organizational change management has been a huge weakness for IT departments and business units, putting projects and programs at risk – especially large, complex, transformational projects.

    During workshops with clients, I find that the root of this problem is twofold: project planning tends to fixate on technology and neglects the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit user adoption; further, accountabilities for managing change and helping to realize the intended business outcomes post-project are not properly defined.

    It makes sense for the PMO to be the org-change leader. In project ecosystems where no one seems willing to seize this opportunity, the PMO can take action and realize the benefits and accolades that will come from coordinating and consistently driving successful project outcomes."

    Matt Burton,

    Senior Manager, Project Portfolio Management

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • PMO Directors who need to improve user adoption rates and maximize benefits on project and program activity.
    • CIOs who are accountable for IT’s project spend and need to ensure an appropriate ROI on project investments.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Define change management roles and accountabilities among project stakeholders.
    • Prepare end users for change impacts in order to improve adoption rates.
    • Ensure that the intended business outcomes of projects are more effectively realized.
    • Develop an organizational change management toolkit and best practices playbook.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Project managers and change managers who need to plan and execute changes affecting people and processes.
    • Project sponsors who want to improve benefits attainment.
    • Business analysts who need to analyze the impact of change.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Develop communications and training plans tailored to specific audiences.
      • Identify strategies to manage cultural and behavioral change.
    • Maximize project benefits by ensuring changes are adopted.
    • Capitalize upon opportunities and mitigate risks.

    Drive organizational change from the PMO

    Situation

    • As project management office (PMO) leader, you oversee a portfolio of projects that depend heavily on users and stakeholders adopting new tools, complying with new policies, following new processes, and learning new skills.
    • You need to facilitate the organizational change resulting from these projects, ensuring that the intended business outcomes are realized.

    Complication

    • While IT takes accountability to deliver the change, accountability for the business outcomes is opaque with little or no allocated resourcing.
    • Project management practices focus more on the timely implementation of projects than on the achievement of the desired outcomes thereafter or on the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit change from taking hold in the long term.

    Resolution

    • Plan for human nature. To ensure project success and maximize benefits, plan and facilitate the non-technical aspects of organizational change by addressing the emotional, behavioral, and cultural factors that foster stakeholder resistance and inhibit user adoption.
    • Make change management as ubiquitous as change itself. Foster a project culture that is proactive about OCM. Create a process where OCM considerations are factored in as early as project ideation and change is actively managed throughout the project lifecycle, including after the project has closed.
    • Equip project leaders with the right tools to foster adoption. Effective OCM requires an actionable toolkit that will help plant the seeds for organizational change. With the right tools and templates, the PMO can function as a hub for change, helping business units and project teams to consistently achieve project and post-project success.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Make your PMO the change leader it’s already expected to be. Unless accountabilities for organizational change management (OCM) have been otherwise explicitly defined, you should accept that, to the rest of the organization – including its chief officers – the PMO is already assumed to be the change leader.

    Don’t shy away from or neglect this role. It’s not just the business outcomes of the organization’s projects that will benefit; the long-term sustainability of the PMO itself will be significantly strengthened by making OCM a core competency.

    Completed projects aren’t necessarily successful projects

    The constraints that drive project management (time, scope, and budget) are insufficient for driving the overall success of project efforts.

    For instance, a project may come in on time, on budget, and in scope, but

    • …if users and stakeholders fail to adopt…
    • …and the intended benefits are not achieved…

    …then that “successful project” represents a massive waste of the organization’s time and resources.

    A supplement to project management is needed to ensure that the intended value is realized.

    Mission (Not) Accomplished

    50% Fifty percent of respondents in a KPMG survey indicated that projects fail to achieve what they originally intended. (Source: NZ Project management survey)

    56% Only fifty-six percent of strategic projects meet their original business goals. (Source: PMI)

    70% Lack of user adoption is the main cause for seventy percent of failed projects. (Source: Collins, 2013)

    Improve project outcomes with organizational change management

    Make “completed” synonymous with “successfully completed” by implementing an organizational change management strategy through the PMO.

    Organizational change management is the practice through which the PMO can improve user adoption rates and maximize project benefits.

    Why OCM effectiveness correlates to project success:

    • IT projects are justified because they will make money, save money, or make people happier.
    • Project benefits can only be realized when changes are successfully adopted or accommodated by the organization.

    Without OCM, IT might finish the project but fail to realize the intended outcomes.

    In the long term, a lack of OCM could erode IT’s ability to work with the business.

    The image shows a bar graph, titled Effective change management correlates with project success, with the X-axis labelled Project Success (Percent of respondents that met or exceeded project objectives), and the Y-axis labelled OCM-Effectiveness, with an arrow pointing upwards. The graph shows that with higher OCM-Effectiveness, Project Success is also higher. The source is given as Prosci’s 2014 Best Practices in Change Management benchmarking report.

    What is organizational change management?

    OCM is a framework for managing the introduction of new business processes and technologies to ensure stakeholder adoption.

    OCM involves tools, templates, and processes that are intended to help project leaders analyze the impacts of a change during the planning phase, engage stakeholders throughout the project lifecycle, as well as train and transition users towards the new technologies and processes being implemented.

    OCM is a separate body of knowledge, but as a practice it is inseparable from both project management or business analysis.

    WHEN IS OCM NEEDED?

    Anytime you are starting a project or program that will depend on users and stakeholders to give up their old way of doing things, change will force people to become novices again, leading to lost productivity and added stress.

    CM can help improve project outcomes on any project where you need people to adopt new tools and procedures, comply with new policies, learn new skills and behaviors, or understand and support new processes.

    "What is the goal of change management? Getting people to adopt a new way of doing business." – BA, Natural Resources Company

    The benefits of OCM range from more effective project execution to improved benefits attainment

    82% of CEOs identify organizational change management as a priority. (D&B Consulting) But Only 18% of organizations characterize themselves as “Highly Effective” at OCM. (PMI)

    On average, 95% percent of projects with excellent OCM meet or exceed their objectives. (Prosci) VS For projects with poor OCM, the number of projects that meet objectives drops to 15%. (Prosci)

    82% of projects with excellent OCM practices are completed on budget. (Prosci) VS For projects with poor OCM, the number of projects that stay on budget drops to 51%. (Prosci)

    71% of projects with excellent OCM practices stay on schedule. (Prosci) VS For projects with poor OCM practices, only 16% stay on schedule. (Prosci)

    While critical to project success, OCM remains one of IT’s biggest weaknesses and process improvement gaps

    IT Processes Ranked by Effectiveness:

    1. Risk Management
    2. Knowledge Management
    3. Release Management
    4. Innovation
    5. IT Governance
    6. Enterprise Architecture
    7. Quality Management
    8. Data Architecture
    9. Application Development Quality
    10. Data Quality
    11. Portfolio Management
    12. Configuration Management
    13. Application Portfolio Management
    14. Business Process Controls Internal Audit
    15. Organizational Change Management
    16. Application Development Throughput
    17. Business Intelligence Reporting
    18. Performance Measurement
    19. Manage Service Catalog

    IT Processes Ranked by Importance:

    1. Enterprise Application Selection & Implementation
    2. Organizational Change Management
    3. Data Architecture
    4. Quality Management
    5. Enterprise Architecture
    6. Business Intelligence Reporting
    7. Release Management
    8. Portfolio Management
    9. Application Maintenance
    10. Asset Management
    11. Vendor Management
    12. Application Portfolio Management
    13. Innovation
    14. Business Process Controls Internal Audit
    15. Configuration Management
    16. Performance Measurement
    17. Application Development Quality
    18. Application Development Throughput
    19. Manage Service Catalog

    Based on 3,884 responses to Info-Tech’s Management and Governance Diagnostic, June 2016

    There’s no getting around it: change is hard

    While the importance of change management is widely recognized across organizations, the statistics around change remain dismal.

    Indeed, it’s an understatement to say that change is difficult.

    People are generally – in the near-term at least – resistant to change, especially large, transformational changes that will impact the day-to-day way of doing things, or that involve changing personal values, social norms, and other deep-seated assumptions.

    "There is nothing more difficult to take in hand, more perilous to conduct, or more uncertain in its success, than to take the lead in the introduction of a new order of things." – Niccolo Machiavelli

    70% - Change failure rates are extremely high. It is estimated that up to seventy percent of all change initiatives fail – a figure that has held steady since the 1990s. (McKinsey & Company)

    25% - In a recent survey of 276 large and midsize organizations, only twenty-five percent of respondents felt that the gains from projects were sustained over time. (Towers Watson)

    22% - While eighty-seven percent of survey respondents trained their managers to “manage change,” only 22% felt the training was truly effective. (Towers Watson)

    While change is inherently difficult, the biggest obstacle to OCM success is a lack of accountability

    Who is accountable for change success? …anyone?...

    To its peril, OCM commonly falls into a grey area, somewhere in between project management and portfolio management, and somewhere in between being a concern of IT and a concern of the business.

    While OCM is a separate discipline from project management, it is commonly thought that OCM is something that project managers and project teams do. While in some cases this might be true, it is far from a universal truth.

    The end result: without a centralized approach, accountabilities for key OCM tasks are opaque at best – and the ball for these tasks is, more often than not, dropped altogether.

    29% - Twenty-nine percent of change initiatives are launched without any formal OCM plan whatsoever.

    "That’s 29 percent of leaders with blind faith in the power of prayer to Saint Jude, the patron saint of desperate cases and lost causes." – Torben Rick

    Bring accountability to org-change by facilitating the winds of change through the PMO

    Lasting organizational change requires a leader. Make it the PMO.

    #1 Organizational resistance to change is cited as the #1 challenge to project success that PMOs face. (Source: PM Solutions)

    90% Companies with mature PMOs that effectively manage change meet expectations 90% of the time. (Source: Jacobs-Long)

    Why the PMO?

    A centralized approach to OCM is most effective, and the PMO is already a centralized project office and is already accountable for project outcomes.

    What’s more, in organizations where accountabilities for OCM are not explicitly defined, the PMO will likely already be assumed to be the default change leader by the wider organization.

    It makes sense for the PMO to accept this accountability – in the short term at least – and claim the benefits that will come from coordinating and consistently driving successful project outcomes.

    In the long term, OCM leadership will help the PMO to become a strategic partner with the executive layer and the business side.

    Short-term gains made by the PMO can be used to spark dialogues with those who authorize project spending and have the implicit fiduciary obligation to drive project benefits.

    Ultimately, it’s their job to explicitly transfer that obligation, along with the commensurate resourcing and authority for OCM activities.

    More than a value-added service, OCM competencies will soon determine the success of the PMO itself

    Given the increasingly dynamic nature of market conditions, the need for PMOs to provide change leadership on projects large and small is becoming a necessity.

    "With organizations demanding increasing value, PMOs will need to focus more and more on strategy, innovation, agility, and stakeholder engagement. And, in particular, developing expertise in organizational change management will be essential to their success." – PM Solutions, 2014

    28% PMOs that are highly agile and able to respond quickly to changing conditions are 28% more likely to successfully complete strategic initiatives (69% vs. 41%). (PMI)

    In other words, without heightened competencies around org-change, the PMO of tomorrow will surely sink like a stone in the face of increasingly unstable external factors and accelerated project demands.

    Use Info-Tech’s road-tested OCM toolkit to transform your PMO into a hub of change management leadership

    With the advice and tools in Info-Tech’s Drive Organizational Change from the PMO blueprint, the PMO can provide the right OCM expertise at each phase of a project.

    The graphic has an image of a windmill at centre, with PMO written directly below it. Several areas of expertise are listed in boxes emerging out of the PMO, which line up with project phases as follows (project phase listed first, then area of expertise): Initiation - Impact Assessment; Planning - Stakeholder Engagement; Execution - Transition Planning; Monitoring & Controlling - Communications Execution; Closing - Evaluation & Monitoring.

    Info-Tech’s approach to OCM is a practical/tactical adaptation of several successful models

    Business strategy-oriented OCM models such as John Kotter’s 8-Step model assume the change agent is in a position of senior leadership, able to shape corporate vision, culture, and values.

    • PMO leaders can work with business leaders, but ultimately can’t decide where to take the organization.
    • Work with business leaders to ensure IT-enabled change helps reinforce the organization’s target vision and culture.

    General-purpose OCM frameworks such as ACMP’s Standard for Change Management, CMI’s CMBoK, and Prosci’s ADKAR model are very comprehensive and need to be configured to PMO-specific initiatives.

    • Tailoring a comprehensive, general-purpose framework to PMO-enabled change requires familiarity and experience.

    References and Further Reading

    Info-Tech’s organizational change management model adapts the best practices from a wide range of proven models and distills it into a step-by-step process that can be applied to any IT-enabled project.

    Info-Tech’s OCM research is COBIT aligned and a cornerstone in our IT Management & Governance Framework

    COBIT Section COBIT Management Practice Related Blueprint Steps
    BAI05.01 Establish the desire to change. 1.1 / 2.1 / 2.2
    BAI05.02 Form an effective implementation team. 1.2
    BAI05.03 Communicate the desired vision. 2.1 / 3.2
    BAI05.03 Empower role players and identify short-term wins. 3.2 / 3.3
    BAI05.05 Enable operation and use. 3.1
    BAI05.06 Embed new approaches. 4.1 / 5.1
    BAI05.07 Sustain changes. 5.1

    COBIT 5 is the leading framework for the governance and management of enterprise IT.

    Screenshot of Info-Tech’s IT Management & Governance Framework.

    The image is a screenshot of Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework (linked above). There is an arrow emerging from the screenshot, which offers a zoomed-in view of one of the sections of the framework, which reads BAI05 Organizational Change Management.

    Consider Info-Tech’s additional key observations

    Human behavior is largely a blind spot during the planning phase.

    In IT especially, project planning tends to fixate on technology and underestimate the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit user adoption. Whether change is project-specific or continuous, it’s more important to instill the desire to change than to apply specific tools and techniques. Accountability for instilling this desire should start with the project sponsor, with direct support from the PMO.

    Don’t mistake change management for a “soft” skill.

    Persuading people to change requires a “soft,” empathetic approach to keep them motivated and engaged. But don’t mistake “soft” for easy. Managing the people part of change is amongst the toughest work there is, and it requires a comfort and competency with uncertainty, ambiguity, and conflict. If a change initiative is going to be successful (especially a large, transformational change), this tough work needs to be done – and the more impactful the change, the earlier it is done, the better.

    In “continuous change” environments, change still needs to be managed.

    Transformation and change are increasingly becoming the new normal. While this normality may help make people more open to change in general, specific changes still need to be planned, communicated, and managed. Agility and continuous improvement are good, but can degenerate into volatility if change isn’t managed properly. People will perceive change to be volatile and undesirable if their expectations aren’t managed through communications and engagement planning.

    Info-Tech’s centralized approach to OCM is cost effective, with a palpable impact on project ROI

    Info-Tech’s Drive Organizational Change from the PMO blueprint can be implemented quickly and can usually be done with the PMO’s own authority, without the need for additional or dedicated change resources.

    Implementation Timeline

    • Info-Tech’s easy-to-navigate OCM tools can be employed right away, when your project is already in progress.
    • A full-scale implementation of a PMO-driven OCM program can be accomplished in 3–4 weeks.

    Implementation Personnel

    • Primary: the PMO director (should budget 10%–15% of her/his project capacity for OCM activities).
    • Secondary: other PMO staff (e.g. project managers, business analysts, etc.).

    OCM Implementation Costs

    15% - The average costs for effective OCM are 10%–15% of the overall project budget. (AMR Research)

    Average OCM Return-on-Investment

    200% - Small projects with excellent OCM practices report a 200% return-on-investment. (Change First)

    650% - Large projects with excellent OCM practices report a 650% return-on-investment. (Change First)

    Company saves 2–4 weeks of time and $10,000 in ERP implementation through responsible OCM

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Manufacturing

    Source Info-Tech Client

    Situation

    A medium-sized manufacturing company with offices all over the world was going through a consolidation of processes and data by implementing a corporate-wide ERP system to replace the fragmented systems that were previously in place. The goal was to have consistency in process, expectations, and quality, as well as improve efficiency in interdepartmental processes.

    Up to this point, every subsidiary was using their own system to track data and sharing information was complicated and slow. It was causing key business opportunities to be compromised or even lost.

    Complication

    The organization was not very good in closing out projects. Initiatives went on for too long, and the original business benefits were usually not realized.

    The primary culprit was recognized as mismanaged organizational change. People weren’t aware early enough, and were often left out of the feedback process.

    Employees often felt like changes were being dictated to them, and they didn’t understand the wider benefits of the changes. This led to an unnecessary number of resistors, adding to the complexity of successfully completing a project.

    Resolution

    Implementing an ERP worldwide was something that the company couldn’t gamble on, so proper organizational change management was a focus.

    A thorough stakeholder analysis was done, and champions were identified for each stakeholder group throughout the organization.

    Involving these champions early gave them the time to work within their groups and to manage expectations. The result was savings of 2–4 weeks of implementation time and $10,000.

    Follow Info-Tech’s blueprint to transform your PMO into a hub for organizational change management

    Prepare the PMO for Change Leadership

    • Assess the organization’s readiness for change.
      • Perform an OCM capabilities assessment.
      • Chart an OCM roadmap for the PMO.
      • Undergo a change management SWOT analysis.
      • Define success criteria.
      • Org. Change Capabilities Assessment
    • Define the structure and scope of the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative.
      • Determine pilot OCM project.
      • Estimate OCM effort.
      • Document high-level project details.
      • Establish a timeline for org-change activities.
      • Assess available resources to support the PMO’s OCM initiative.
      • Project Level Assessment

    Plant the Seeds for Change During Project Planning and Initiation

    • Foster OCM considerations during the ideation phase.
      • Assess leadership support for change
      • Highlight the goals and benefits of the change
      • Refine your change story
      • Define success criteria
      • Develop a sponsorship action plan
      • Transition Team Communications Template
    • Perform an organizational change impact assessment.
      • Perform change impact survey.
      • Assess the depth of impact for the stakeholder group.
      • Determine overall adoptability of the OCM effort.
      • Review risks and opportunities.
      • Org. Change Management Impact Analysis Tool

    Facilitate Change Adoption Throughout the Organization

    • Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change.
      • Involve the right people in change and define roles.
      • Define methods for obtaining stakeholder input.
      • Perform a stakeholder analysis.
      • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Develop and execute the transition plan.
      • Establish a communications strategy for stakeholder groups.
      • Define the feedback and evaluation process.
      • Assess the full range of support and resistance to change.
      • Develop an objections handling process.
      • Transition Plan Template
    • Establish HR and training plans.
      • Assess training needs. Develop training plan.
      • Training Plan

    Establish a Post-Project Benefits Attainment Process

    • Determine accountabilities for benefits attainment.
      • Conduct a post-implementation review of the pilot OCM project.
      • Assign ownership for realizing benefits after the project is closed.
      • Define a post-project benefits tracking process.
      • Implement a tool to help monitor and track benefits over the long term.
      • Project Benefits Tracking Tool

    Solidify the PMO’s Role as Change Leader

    • Institute an OCM playbook.
      • Review lessons learned to improve OCM as a core discipline of the PMO.
      • Monitor organizational capacity for change.
      • Define roles and responsibilities for OCM oversight.
      • Formalize the Organizational Change Management Playbook.
      • Assess the value and success of your practices relative to OCM effort and project outcomes.
      • Organizational Change Management Playbook

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Drive Organizational Change from the PMO

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Assess the organization’s readiness for change.

    1.2 Define the structure and scope of the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative.

    2.1 Foster OCM considerations during the ideation phase.

    2.2 Perform an organizational change impact assessment.

    3.1 Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change.

    3.2 Develop and execute the transition plan.

    3.3 Establish HR and training plans.

    4.1 Determine accountabilities for benefits attainment. 5.1 Institute an OCM playbook.
    Guided Implementations
    • Scoping Call.
    • Review the PMO’s and the organization’s change capabilities.
    • Determine an OCM pilot initiative.
    • Define a sponsorship action plan for change initiatives.
    • Undergo a change impact assessment.
    • Perform a stakeholder analysis.
    • Prepare a communications strategy based on stakeholder types.
    • Develop training plans.
    • Establish a post-project benefits tracking process.
    • Implement a tracking tool.
    • Evaluate the effectiveness of OCM practices.
    • Formalize an OCM playbook for the organization’s projects.
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:

    Prepare the PMO for change leadership.

    Module 2:

    Plant the seeds for change during planning and initiation.

    Module 3:

    Facilitate change adoption throughout the organization.

    Module 4:

    Establish a post-project benefits attainment process.

    Module 5:

    Solidify the PMO’s role as change leader.

    Phase 1 Results:

    OCM Capabilities Assessment

    Phase 2 Results:

    Change Impact Analysis

    Phase 3 Results:

    Communications and Transition Plans

    Phase 4 Results:

    A benefits tracking process for sponsors

    Phase 5 Results:

    OCM Playbook

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Preparation Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Activities

    Organize and Plan Workshop

    • Finalize workshop itinerary and scope.
    • Identify workshop participants.
    • Gather strategic documentation.
    • Engage necessary stakeholders.
    • Book interviews.

    Assess OCM Capabilities

    • Assess current organizational change management capabilities.
    • Conduct change management SWOT analysis.
    • Define change management success metrics.
    • Define core pilot OCM project.

    Analyze Impact of the Change

    • Analyse the impact of the change across multiple dimensions and stakeholder groups.
    • Create an impact management plan.
    • Analyze impacts to product with risk and opportunity assessments.

    Develop Engagement & Transition Plans

    • Perform stakeholder analysis to identify change champions and blockers.
    • Document comm./training requirements and delivery plan.
    • Define plans to deal with resistance.
    • Validate and test the transition plan.

    Institute an OCM Playbook

    • Define feedback and evaluation process.
    • Finalize communications, transition, and training plans.
    • Establish benefits tracking timeline and commitment plans.
    • Define roles and responsibilities for ongoing organizational change management.
    Deliverables
    • Workshop Itinerary
    • Workshop Participant List
    • Defined Org Change Mandate
    • Organizational Change Capabilities Assessment
    • SWOT Assessment
    • Value Metrics
    • Project Level Assessment/Project Definition
    • Project Sponsor Action Plan
    • Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool
    • Risk Assessment
    • Opportunity Assessment
    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Communications Plan
    • Training Plan
    • Resistance Plan
    • Transition Team
    • Communications Template
    • Evaluation Plan
    • Post-Project Benefits Tracking Timelines and Accountabilities
    • OCM Playbook

    Phase 1

    Prepare the PMO for Change Leadership

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prepare the PMO for Change Leadership

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 week

    Step 1.1: Assess the organization’s readiness for change

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Scoping call to discuss organizational change challenges and the PMO’s role in managing change.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Perform an assessment survey to define capability levels and chart an OCM roadmap.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment
    Step 1.2: Define the structure and scope of the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative

    Work with an analyst to:

    • Determine the appropriate OCM initiative to pilot over this series of Guided Implementations from the PMO’s project list.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Rightsize your OCM planning efforts based on project size, timeline, and resource availability.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Project Level Assessment Tool

    Step 1.1: Assess the organization’s readiness for change

    Phase 1 - 1.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Perform an OCM capabilities assessment.
    • Chart an OCM roadmap for the PMO.
    • Undergo a change management SWOT analysis.
    • Define success criteria.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Required: PMO Director
    • Recommended: PMO staff, project management staff, and other project stakeholders
    Outcomes of this step
    • An OCM roadmap for the PMO with specific recommendations.
    • An assessment of strengths, weakness, challenges, and threats in terms of the PMO’s role as organizational change leader.
    • Success metrics for the PMO’s OCM implementation.

    Project leaders who successfully facilitate change are strategic assets in a world of increasing agility and uncertainty

    As transformation and change become the new normal, it’s up to PMOs to provide stability and direction during times of transition and turbulence.

    Continuous change and transition are increasingly common in organizations in 2016.

    A state of constant change can make managing change more difficult in some ways, but easier in others.

    • Inundation with communications and diversity of channels means the traditional “broadcast” approach to communicating change doesn’t work (i.e. you can’t expect every email to get everyone’s attention).
    • People might be more open to change in general, but specific changes still need to be properly planned, communicated, and managed.

    By managing organizational change more effectively, the PMO can build credibility to manage both business and IT projects.

    "The greatest danger in times of turbulence is not the turbulence; it is to act with yesterday’s logic." – Peter Drucker

    In this phase, we will gauge your PMO’s abilities to effectively facilitate change based upon your change management capability levels and your wider organization’s responsiveness to change.

    Evaluate your current capabilities for managing organizational change

    Start off by ensuring that the PMO is sensitive to the particularities of the organization and that it manages change accordingly.

    There are many moving parts involved in successfully realizing an organizational change.

    For instance, even with an effective change toolkit and strong leadership support, you may still fail to achieve project benefits due to such factors as a staff environment resistant to change or poor process discipline.

    Use Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment to assess your readiness for change across 7 categories:

    • Cultural Readiness
    • Leadership & Sponsorship
    • Organizational Knowledge
    • Change Management Skills
    • Toolkit & Templates
    • Process Discipline
    • KPIs & Metrics

    Download Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment.

    • The survey can be completed quickly in 5 to 10 minutes; or, if being done as a group activity, it can take up to 60 minutes or more.
    • Based upon your answers, you will get a report of your current change capabilities to help you prioritize your next steps.
    • The tool also provides a customized list of Info-Tech recommendations across the seven categories.

    Perform Info-Tech’s OCM capabilities questionnaire

    1.1.1 Anywhere from 10 to 60 minutes (depending on number of participants)

    • The questionnaire on Tab 2 of the Assessment consists of 21 questions across 7 categories.
    • The survey can be completed individually, by the PMO director or manager, or – even more ideally – by a group of project and business stakeholders.
    • While the questionnaire only takes a few minutes to complete, you may wish to survey a wider swath of business units, especially on such categories as “Cultural Readiness” and “Leadership Support.”

    The image is a screen capture of tab 2 of the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment.

    Use the drop downs to indicate the degree to which you agree or disagree with each of the statements in the survey.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every organization has some change management capability.

    Even if you find yourself in a fledgling or nascent PMO, with no formal change management tools or processes, you can still leverage other categories of change management effectiveness.

    If you can, build upon people-related assets like “Organizational Knowledge” and “Cultural Readiness” as you start to hone your OCM toolkit and process.

    Review your capability levels and chart an OCM roadmap for your PMO

    Tab 3 of the Assessment tool shows your capabilities graph.

    • The chart visualizes your capability levels across the seven categories of organization change covered in the questionnaire in order to show the areas that your organization is already strong in and the areas where you need to focus your efforts.

    The image is a screen capture of tab 3 of the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment.

    Focus on improving the first capability dimension (from left/front to right/back) that rates below 10.

    Tab 4 of the Assessment tool reveals Info-Tech’s recommendations based upon your survey responses.

    • Use these recommendations to structure your roadmap and bring concrete definitions to your next steps.

    The image is a screen capture of tab 4 of the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment.

    Use the red/yellow/green boxes to focus your efforts.

    The content in the recommendations boxes is based around these categories and the advice therein is designed to help you to, in the near term, bring your capabilities up to the next level.

    Use the steps in this blueprint to help build your capabilities

    Each of Info-Tech’s seven OCM capabilities match up with different steps and phases in this blueprint.

    We recommend that you consume this blueprint in a linear fashion, as each phase matches up to a different set of OCM activities to be executed at each phase of a project. However, you can use the legend below to locate how and where this blueprint will address each capability.

    Cultural Readiness 2.1 / 2.2 / 3.1 / 3.2 / 3.3
    Leadership Support 2.1 / 4.1 / 5.1
    Organizational Knowledge 2.1 / 3.1 / 3.2
    Change Management Skills 2.1 / 2.2 / 3.1 / 3.2 / 3.3
    Toolkit & Templates 2.1 / 2.2 / 3.1 / 3.2 / 3.3 / 4.1 / 5.1
    Process Discipline 2.1 / 2.2 / 3.1 / 3.2 / 3.3 / 4.1 / 5.1
    KPIs & Metrics 3.2 / 5.1

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizational change must be planned in advance and managed through all phases of a project.

    Organizational change management must be embedded as a key aspect throughout the project, not merely a set of tactics added to execution phases.

    Perform a change management SWOT exercise

    1.1.2 30 to 60 minutes

    Now that you have a sense of your change management strengths and weaknesses, you can begin to formalize the organizational specifics of these.

    Gather PMO and IT staff, as well as other key project and business stakeholders, and perform a SWOT analysis based on your Capabilities Assessment.

    Follow these steps to complete the SWOT analysis:

    1. Have participants discuss and identify Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats.
    2. Spend roughly 60 minutes on this. Use a whiteboard, flip chart, or PowerPoint slide to document results of the discussion as points are made.
    3. Make sure results are recorded and saved either using the template provided on the next slide or by taking a picture of the whiteboard or flip chart.

    Use the SWOT Analysis Template on the next slide to document results.

    Use the examples provided in the SWOT analysis to kick-start the discussion.

    The purpose of the SWOT is to begin to define the goals of this implementation by assessing your change management capabilities and cultivating executive level, business unit, PMO, and IT alignment around the most critical opportunities and challenges.

    Sample SWOT Analysis

    Strengths

    • Knowledge, skills, and talent of project staff.
    • Good working relationship between IT and business units.
    • Other PMO processes are strong and well adhered to by project staff.
    • Motivation to get things done when priorities, goals, and action plans are clear.

    Weaknesses

    • Project leads lack formal training in change management.
    • IT tried to introduce org change processes in the past, but we failed. Staff were unsure of which templates to use and how/when/why to use them.
    • We can’t designate individuals as change agents. We lack sufficient resources.
    • We’ve had some fairly significant change failures in the past and some skepticism and pessimism has taken root in the business units.

    Opportunities

    • The PMO is strong and well established in the organization, with a history of facilitating successful process discipline.
    • The new incoming CEO has already paid lip service to change and transformation. We should be able to leverage their support as we formalize these processes.
    • We have good lines of project communication already in place via our bi-weekly project reporting meetings. We can add change management matters to the agenda of these meetings.

    Threats

    • Additional processes and documentation around change management could be viewed as burdensome overhead. Adoption is uncertain.
    • OCM success depends on multiple stakeholders and business units coming together; with so many moving parts, we can’t be assured that an OCM program will survive long term.

    Define the “how” and the “what” of change management success for your PMO

    1.1.3 30 to 60 minutes

    Before you move on to develop and implement your OCM processes, spend some time documenting how change management success will be defined for your organization and what conditions will be necessary for success to be achieved.

    With the same group of individuals who participated in the SWOT exercise, discuss the below criteria. You can make this a sticky note or a whiteboard activity to help document discussion points.

    OCM Measured Value Metrics Include:
    • Estimate % of expected business benefits realized on the past 3–5 significant projects/programs.
      • Track business benefits (costs reduced, productivity increased, etc.).
    • Estimate costs avoided/reduced (extensions, cancellations, delays, roll-backs, etc.).
      • Establish baseline by estimating average costs of projects extended to deal with change-related issues.
    What conditions are necessary for OCM to succeed? How will success be defined?
    • e.g. The PMO will need the support of senior leaders and business units.
    • e.g. 20% improvement in benefits realization numbers within the next 12 months.
    • e.g. The PMO will need to establish a portal to help with organization-wide communications.
    • e.g. 30% increase in adoption rates on new software and technology projects within the next 12 months.

    Document additional items that could impact an OCM implementation for your PMO

    1.1.4 15 to 45 minutes

    Use the table below to document any additional factors or uncertainties that could impact implementation success.

    These could be external factors that may impact the PMO, or they could be logistical considerations pertaining to staffing or infrastructure that may be required to support additional change management processes and procedures.

    "[A]ll bets are off when it comes to change. People scatter in all directions. Your past experiences may help in some way, but what you do today and how you do it are the new measures people will use to evaluate you." – Tres Roeder

    Consideration Description of Need Potential Resource Implications Potential Next Steps Timeline
    e.g. The PMO will need to train PMs concerning new processes. We will not only need to train PM staff in the new processes and documentation requirements, but we will also have to provide ongoing training, be it monthly, quarterly, or yearly. Members of PMO staff will be required to support this training. Analyze impact of redeploying existing resources vs. outsourcing. Q3 2016
    e.g. We will need to communicate new OCM requirements to the business and wider organization. The PMO will be taking on added communication requirements, needing to advertise to a wider audience than it has before. None Work with business side to expand the PMO’s communications network and look into leveraging existing communication portals. Next month

    Step 1.2: Define the structure and scope of the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative

    Phase 1 - 1.2

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Determine pilot OCM project.
    • Estimate OCM effort.
    • Document high-level project details.
    • Establish a timeline for org change activities.
    • Assess available resources to support the PMO’s OCM initiative.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Required: PMO Director
    • Recommended: PMO staff, project management staff, and other project stakeholders
    Outcomes of this step
    • Project definition for the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative.
    • A timeline that aligns the project schedule for key OCM activities.
    • Definition of resource availability to support OCM activities through the PMO.

    Organizational change discipline should align with project structure

    Change management success is contingent on doing the right things at the right time.

    In subsequent phases of this blueprint, we will help the PMO develop an OCM strategy that aligns with your organization’s project timelines.

    In this step (1.2), we will do some pre-work for you by determining a change initiative to pilot during this process and defining some of the roles and responsibilities for the OCM activities that we’ll develop in this blueprint.

    The image shows a sample project timeline with corresponding OCM requirements.

    Get ready to develop and pilot your OCM competencies on a specific project

    In keeping with the need to align organizational change management activities with the actual timeline of the project, the next three phases of this blueprint will move from discussing OCM in general to applying OCM considerations to a single project.

    As you narrow your focus to the organizational change stemming from a specific initiative, review the below considerations to help inform the decisions that you make during the activities in this step.

    Choose a pilot project that:

    • Has an identifiable sponsor who will be willing and able to participate in the bulk of the activities during the workshop.
    • Has an appropriate level of change associated with it in order to adequately develop a range of OCM capabilities.
    • Has a reasonably well-defined scope and timeline – you don’t want the pilot initiative being dragged out unexpectedly.
    • Has PMO/IT staff who will be assisting with OCM efforts and will be relatively familiar and comfortable with them in terms of technical requirements.

    Select a specific project that involves significant organizational change

    1.2.1 5 to 15 minutes

    The need for OCM rigor will vary depending on project size and complexity.

    While we recommend that every project has some aspect of change management to it, you can adjust OCM requirements accordingly, depending on the type of change being introduced.

    Incremental Change Transformational Change

    Organizational change management is highly recommended and beneficial for projects that require people to:

    • Adopt new tools and workflows.
    • Learn new skills.
    • Comply with new policies and procedures.
    • Stop using old tools and workflows.

    Organizational change management is required for projects that require people to:

    • Move into different roles, reporting structures, and career paths.
    • Embrace new responsibilities, goals, reward systems, and values
    • Grow out of old habits, ideas, and behaviors.
    • Lose stature in the organization.

    Phases 2, 3, and 4 of this blueprint will guide you through the process of managing organizational change around a specific project. Select one now that is currently in your request or planning stages to pilot through the activities in this blueprint. We recommend choosing one that involves a large, transformational change.

    Estimate the overall difficulty and effort required to manage organizational change

    1.2.2 5 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s project levels to define the complexity of the project that you’ve chosen to pilot.

    Defining your project level will help determine how much effort and detail is required to complete steps in this blueprint – and, beyond this, these levels can help you determine how much OCM rigor to apply across each of the projects in your portfolio.

    Incremental Change Transformational Change
    Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
    • Low risk and complexity.
    • Routine projects with limited exposure to the business and low risk of negative impact.
    • Examples: infrastructure upgrades, application refreshes, etc.
    • Medium risk and complexity.
    • Projects with broader exposure that present a moderate level of risk to business operations.
    • Examples: Move or renovate locations, cloud migration, BYOD strategy, etc.
    • High risk and complexity.
    • Projects that affect multiple lines of business and have significant costs and/or risks.
    • Examples: ERP implementation, corporate merger, business model innovation, etc.

    For a more comprehensive assessment of project levels and degrees of risk, see Info-Tech’s Create Project Management Success blueprint – and in particular, our Project Level Assessment Tool.

    Record the goals and scope of the pilot OCM initiative

    1.2.3 15 to 30 minutes

    Description

    What is the project changing?

    How will it work?

    What are the implications of doing nothing?

    What are the phases in execution?

    Expected Benefits

    What is the desired outcome?

    What can be measured? How?

    When should it be measured?

    Goals

    List the goals.

    Align with business and IT goals.

    Expected Costs

    List the costs:

    Software costs

    Hardware costs

    Implementation costs

    Expected Risks

    List the risks:

    Business risks

    Technology risks

    Implementation risks

    Planned Project Activities & Milestones Timeline Owner(s) Status
    1. Example: Vendor Evaluation Finish by Q4-17 Jessie Villar In progress
    2. Example: Define Administrative Policies Finish by Q4-17 Gerry Anantha Starting Q2

    Know the “what” and “when” of org change activities

    The key to change management success is ensuring that the right OCM activities are carried out at the right time. The below graphic serves as a quick view of what OCM activities entail and when they should be done.

    The image is the sample project timeline previously shown, but with additional notes for each segment of the Gantt chart. The notes are as follows: Impact Assessment - Start assessing the impact of change during planning and requirements gathering stages; Stakeholder Engagement - Use requirements gathering and design activities as opportunities to engage stakeholders and users; Transition Planning - The development period provides time for the change manager to develop and refine the transition plan (including communications and training). Change managers need to collaborate with development teams to ensure scope and schedule stay aligned, especially in Agile environments); Communications Execution - Communications should occur early and often, beginning well before change affects people and continuing long enough to reinforce change by celebrating success; Training - Training needs to be well timed to coincide with implementation; Quick Wins - Celebrate early successes to show that change is working; Evaluation & Monitoring - Adoption of change is a key to benefits realization. Don’t declare the project over until adoption of change is proven.

    Rough out a timeline for the org change activities associated with your pilot project’s timeline

    1.2.4 20-30 minutes

    With reference to the graphic on the previous slide, map out a high-level timeline for your pilot project’s milestones and the corresponding OCM activities.
    • This is essentially a first draft of a timeline and will be refined as we develop your OCM discipline in the next phase of this blueprint.
    • The purpose of roughing something out at this time is to help determine the scope of the implementation, the effort involved, and to help with resource planning.
    Project Phase or Milestone Estimated Start Date Estimated End Date Associated OCM Requirement(s)
    e.g. Planning e.g. Already in progress e.g. July e.g. Impact Assessment
    e.g. Requirements & Design e.g. August e.g. October e.g. Stakeholder Engagement & Transition Planning

    Info-Tech Insight

    Proactive change management is easier to execute and infinitely more effective than managing change reactively. A reactive approach to OCM is bound to fail. The better equipped the PMO is to plan OCM activities in advance of projects, the more effective those OCM efforts will be.

    Assess the roles and resources that might be needed to help support these OCM efforts

    1.2.5 30 minutes

    The PMO leader will need to delegate responsibility for many to all of these OCM activities throughout the project lifecycle.

    Compile a list of PMO staff, project workers, and other stakeholders who will likely be required to support these processes at each step, keeping in mind that we will be doing a more thorough consideration of the resources required to support an OCM program in Phase 3.

    OCM Activity Resources Available to Support
    Impact Assessment
    Stakeholder Engagement
    Transition Planning
    Training
    Communications
    Evaluation and Monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    OCM processes require a diverse network to support them.

    While we advocate an approach to org change that is centralized through the PMO, this doesn’t change the fact that the PMO’s OCM processes will need to engage the entirety of the project eco-system.

    In addition to IT/PMO directors, org change processes will engage a group as varied as project sponsors, project managers, business analysts, communications leads, and HR/training leads.

    Ensure that you are considering resources and infrastructure beyond IT as you plan your OCM processes – and engage these stakeholders early in this planning process.

    Establish core transition team roles and a reporting structure

    1.2.6 30 minutes

    Once you’ve identified OCM resources and assessed their availability, start to sketch the structure of the core transition team.

    In many cases, the core team only has one or two people responsible for impact analysis and plan development in addition to you, the sponsor, who is accountable for leadership and benefits realization.

    For larger initiatives, the core team might include several co-sponsors or advisors from different departments or lines of business, along with a handful of staff working together on analysis and planning.

    Some team structure templates/examples:

    Small (e.g. Office 365)

    • Sponsor
    • PM/BA

    Medium-Large (e.g. business process initiative)

    • Sponsor
    • PM
    • BA
    • OCM Consultant

    Complex Transformational (e.g. business model initiative, company reorg)

    • Exec. Sponsor (CxO)
    • Steering Committee
    • Project Lead/Champion (VP)
    • Business Lead(s)
    • IT Lead
    • HR/Training Lead
    • OCM Consultant

    Ultimately, organizational change is a collaborative effort

    Effective organizational change involves overlapping responsibilities.

    In keeping with the eclectic network of stakeholders that is required to support OCM processes, Phase 2 is broken up into sections that will, by turn, engage project sponsors, project managers, business analysts, communications leads, and HR/training leads.

    At each step, our intention is to arm the PMO with a toolkit and a set of processes that will help foster a project culture that is proactive about change.

    "It is amazing what you can accomplish if you do not care who gets the credit." – Harry Truman

    Project Step PMO Sponsor Project Manager Business Analyst Blueprint Reference
    Make a high-level case for change.

    A

    R R/C C 1.1
    Initiate project/change planning. A C R C 1.2
    Analyze full breadth and depth of impact. A C R R 1.3
    Assess communications and training requirements. A C R R 2.1
    Develop communications, training, and other transition plans. A R C R 2.2-3
    Approve and communicate transition plans. A C R C 2.4
    Analyze impact and progress. A C R R 3.1
    Revise project/change planning. A C R C 3.2
    Highlight and leverage successes. A R C C 3.3

    Update the Transition Team Communications Template

    1.2.7 10 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    Input
    • The outcomes of various activities in this step
    Output
    • Key sections of the Transition Team Communications Template completed

    Use Info-Tech’s Transition Team Communications Template to help communicate the outcomes of this step.

    • Use the template to document the goals, benefits, and milestones established in 1.2.3, to record the project timeline and schedule for OCM activities from 1.2.4, to document resources available for OCM activities (1.2.5), and to record the membership and reporting structure of the core transition team (1.2.6).

    Download Info-Tech’s Transition Team Communications Template.

    "Managers and user communities need to feel like they are a part of a project instead of feeling like the project is happening to them. It isn't just a matter of sending a few emails or putting up a page on a project website." Ross Latham

    Build organizational change management capabilities by bringing in required skills

    Case Study

    Industry Natural Resources

    Source Interview

    Challenge
    • Like many organizations, the company is undergoing increasing IT-enabled change.
    • Project managers tended to react to effects of change rather than proactively planning for change.

    "The hard systems – they’re easy. It’s the soft systems that are challenging... Be hard on the process. Be easy on the people." – Business Analyst, natural resources company

    Solution
    • Change management was especially challenging when projects were led by the business.
    • IT was often brought in late in business-led projects.
    • As a result, the organization incurred avoidable costs to deal with integration, retraining, etc.
    • The cost of managing change grows later in the project as more effort needs to be spent undoing (or “unfreezing”) the old state or remediating poorly executed change.
    Results
    • The company hired a business analyst with a background in organizational change to bring in the necessary skills.
    • The business analyst brought knowledge, experience, and templates based on best practices and is sharing these with the rest of the project management team.
    • As a result, organizational change management is starting earlier in projects when its effectiveness and value are maximized.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1 Evaluate your current capabilities for managing organizational change

    Take Info-Tech’s OCM capabilities questionnaire and receive custom analyst recommendations concerning next steps.

    1.1.2 Perform a change management SWOT exercise

    Work with a seasoned analyst to assess your PMO’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats to becoming an org change leader.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.1.3 Define success metrics for your PMO’s efforts to become an org change leader

    Work with an analyst to clarify how the success of this initiative will be measured and what conditions are necessary for success.

    1.2.2 Determine the appropriate OCM initiative to pilot at your organization

    Receive custom analyst insights on rightsizing your OCM planning efforts based on project size, timeline, and resource availability.

    1.2.4 Develop an OCM timeline that aligns with key project milestones

    Harness analyst experience to develop a project-specific timeline for the PMO’s change management activities to better plan your efforts and resources.

    Phase 2

    Plant the Seeds for Change During Project Planning and Initiation

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Plant the seeds for change during project planning and initiation

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 week

    Step 2.1: Foster OCM considerations during the ideation phase

    Discuss these issues with an analyst:

    • Disengaged or absent sponsors on change initiatives.
    • Lack of organizational desire for change.
    • How to customize an OCM strategy to suit the personality of the organization.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop a sponsorship action plan to help facilitate more engaged change sponsorship.
    • Build a process for making the case for change throughout the organization.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Activity 2.1.3: “Refine your change story”
    • Activity 2.1.4: “Develop a sponsorship action plan”
    • Transition Team Communications Template
    Step 2.2: Perform an organizational change impact analysis

    Work with an analyst to:

    • Perform an impact analysis to make your change planning more complete.
    • Assess the depth of change impacts across various stakeholder groups.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Assign accountability for managing change impacts.
    • Update the business case with risks and opportunities identified during the impact analysis.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool

    Step 2.1: Foster OCM considerations during the ideation phase

    Phase 2 - 2.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Assess leadership support for change.
    • Highlight the goals and benefits of the change.
    • Refine your change story.
    • Define success criteria.
    • Develop a sponsorship action plan.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Project sponsor for the pilot OCM project
    • Additional project staff: project managers, business analysts, etc.
    Outcomes of this step
    • Strategy to shore up executive alignment around the need for change.
    • Increased definition around the need for change.
    • Increased engagement from project sponsors around change management and project outcomes.

    Accountability for change management begins in advance of the project itself

    As early as the request phase, project sponsors and requestors have a responsibility to communicate the need for the changes that they are proposing.

    Org Change Step #1: Make the case for change during the request phase

    Initiation→Planning→Execution→Monitoring & Controlling→Closing

    Even before project planning and initiation begin, sponsors and requestors have org change responsibilities around communicating the need for a change and demonstrating their commitment to that change.

    In this step, we will look at the OCM considerations that need to be factored in during project ideation.

    The slides ahead will cover what the PMO can do to help foster these considerations among project sponsors and requestors.

    While this project may already be in the planning phase, the activities in the slides ahead will help lay a solid OCM foundation as you move ahead into the impact assessment and stakeholder engagement steps in this phase.

    Strongly recommended: include the sponsor for your pilot OCM project in many of the following activities (see individual activity slides for direction).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make active sponsorship a criteria when scoring new requests.

    Projects with active sponsors are far more likely to succeed than those where the sponsor cannot be identified or where she/he is unable or unwilling to champion the initiative throughout the organization.

    Consider the engagement level of sponsors when prioritizing new requests. Without this support, the likelihood of a change initiative succeeding is far diminished.

    What does effective sponsorship look like?

    Somewhere along the way a stereotype arose of the project sponsor as a disengaged executive who dreams up a project idea and – regardless of that idea’s feasibility or merit – secures funding, pats themselves on the back, and does not materialize again until the project is over to pat themselves on the back again.

    Indeed, it’s exaggerated, based partly on the fact that sponsors are almost always extremely busy individuals, with very demanding day jobs on top of their responsibilities as sponsors. The stereotype doesn’t capture the very real day-to-day project-level responsibilities of project sponsors.

    Leading change management institute, Prosci, has developed a checklist of 10 identifiable traits and responsibilities that PMO leaders and project managers should help to foster among project sponsors. As Prosci states, the checklist “can be used as an audit tool to see if you are utilizing best practices in how you engage senior leaders on your change initiatives.”

    Prosci’s Change Management Sponsor Checklist:

    Are your sponsors:

    • Aware of the importance they play in making changes successful?
    • Aware of their roles in supporting org change?
    • Active and visible throughout the project?
    • Building necessary coalitions for change success?
    • Communicating directly and effectively with employees?
    • Aware that the biggest mistake is failing to personally engage as the sponsor?
    • Prepared to help manage resistance?
    • Prepared to celebrate successes?
    • Setting clear priorities to help employees manage project and day-to-day work?
    • Avoiding trends and backing change that will be meaningful for the long term?

    (Source: Prosci’s Change Management Sponsor Checklist)

    Assess leadership support for change

    2.1.1 30 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • Other PMO/PM staff
    Output
    • Leadership support strategy

    Many change initiatives require significant investments of political capital to garner approval, funding, and involvement from key executives. This process can take months or even years before the project is staffed and implementation begins.

    • In cases where leadership opposition or ambivalence to change is a critical success inhibitor, project sponsors or change leaders need a deliberate strategy for engaging and converting potential supporters.
    • You might need to recruit someone with more influence or authority to become sponsor or co-sponsor to convert supporters you otherwise could not.
    • Use the table below as an example to begin developing your executive engagement strategy (but keep it private).
    Executive/Stakeholder Degree of Support Ability to Influence Potential Contribution/Engagement Strategy
    Board of Directors Med High
    CEO
    CFO
    CIO
    CxO

    “The stakes of having poorly engaged executive sponsors are high, as are the consequences and costs. PMI research into executive sponsorship shows that one in three unsuccessful projects fail to meet goals due to poorly engaged executive sponsors.”

    PMI, 2014

    Highlight the goals and benefits of the change

    2.1.2 30-60 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    • Project sponsor

    Build desire for change.

    The project sponsor is accountable for defining the high-level scope and benefits of the project. The PMO needs to work with the sponsor during the ideation phase to help establish the need for the proposed change.

    Use the table below to begin developing a compelling vision and story of change. If you have not already defined high-level goals and deliverables for your project, download Info-Tech’s Light Project Request Form (a Detailed Project Request Form is also available).

    Why is there a need to change?
    How will change benefit the organization?
    How did we determine this is the right change?
    What would happen if we didn’t change?
    How will we measure success?

    See Info-Tech’s Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization blueprint for more detailed advice on working with requestors to define requirements and business value of new requests.

    Stories are more compelling than logic and facts alone

    Crucial facts, data, and figures are made more digestible, memorable, and actionable when they are conveyed through a compelling storyline.

    While you certainly need high-level scope elements and a rigorous cost-benefit analysis in your business case, projects that require organizational change also need a compelling story or vision to influence groups of stakeholders.

    As the PMO works with sponsors to identify and document the goals and benefits of change, begin to sketch a narrative that will be compelling to the organization’s varied audiences.

    Structuring an effective project narrative:

    Research shows (Research and impacts cited in Torben Rick’s “Change Management Require[s] a Compelling Story,” 2014) that when managers and employees are asked about what most inspires them in their work, their responses are evenly split across five forms of impact:

    1. Impact on society – e.g. the organization’s role in the community.
    2. Impact on the customer – e.g. providing effective service.
    3. Impact on the company – e.g. contributing positively to the growth of the organization.
    4. Impact on the working team – e.g. creating an inclusive work environment.
    5. Impact on the individual – e.g. personal development and compensation.

    "Storytelling enables the individuals in an organization to see themselves and the organization in a different light, and accordingly take decisions and change their behavior in accordance with these new perceptions, insights, and identities." – Steve Denning

    Info-Tech Insight

    A micro-to-macro change narrative. A compelling org change story needs to address all five of these impacts in order to optimally engage employees in change. In crafting a narrative that covers both the micro and macro levels, you will be laying a solid foundation for adoption throughout the organization.

    Refine your change story

    2.1.3 45 to 60 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    • Project sponsor
    Input
    • 5 levels of change impact
    • Stakeholder groups
    Output
    • Improved change justification to help inform the request phase and the development of the business case.
    Materials
    • Whiteboard and markers

    Using a whiteboard to capture the discussion, address the 5 levels of change impact covered on the previous slide.

    1. Develop a list of the stakeholder groups impacted by this project.
      • The impacts will be felt differently by different groups, so develop a high-level list of those stakeholder groups that will be directly affected by the change.
      • Keep in mind, this activity is not an impact assessment. This activity is meant to elicit how the change will be perceived by the different stakeholder groups, not how it will actually impact them – i.e. this activity is about making the case for change, not actually managing the change.
    2. Brainstorm how the five impact levels will be perceived from the point of view of each stakeholder group.
      • Spend about 5 to 10 minutes per impact per stakeholder group.
      • The goal here isn’t to create a detailed plotline; your change story may evolve as the project evolves. A point or two per impact per group will suffice.
    3. As a group, prioritize the most prescient points and capture the results of your whiteboarding to help inform future artifacts.
      • The points developed during this activity should inform both the ad hoc conversations that PMO staff and the sponsor have with stakeholders, as well as formal project artifacts, such as the request, business case, charter, etc.

    When it comes to communicating the narrative, project sponsors make the most compelling storytellers

    Whatever story you develop to communicate the goals and the benefits of the change, ultimately it should be the sponsor who communicates this message to the organization at large.

    Given the competing demands that senior leaders face, the PMO still has a pivotal role to play in helping to plan and facilitate these communications.

    The PMO should help sponsors by providing insights to shape change messaging (refer to the characteristics outlined in the table below for assistance) and by developing a sponsorship action plan (Activity 2.1.4).

    Tips for communicating a change story effectively:
    Identify and appeal to the audience’s unique frames of reference. e.g. “Most of you remember when we…”
    Include concrete, vivid details to help visualize change. e.g. “In the future, when a sales rep visits a customer in Wisconsin, they’ll be able to process a $100,000 order in seconds instead of hours.”
    Connect the past, present, and future with at least one continuous theme. e.g. “These new capabilities reaffirm our long-standing commitment to customers, as well as our philosophy of continuously finding ways to be more responsive to their needs.”

    “[T]he sponsor is the preferred sender of messages related to the business reasons and organizational implications for a particular initiative; therefore, effective sponsorship is crucial in building an awareness of the need for change.

    Sponsorship is also critical in building the desire to participate and support the change with each employee and in reinforcing the change.”

    Prosci

    Base the style of your communications on the organization’s receptiveness to change

    Not all organizations embrace or resist change in the same ways. Base your change communications on your organization’s cultural appetite for change in general.

    Use the below dimensions to gauge your organization’s appetite for change. Analyzing this will help determine the form and force of communications.

    In the next slide, we will base aspects of your sponsorship action plan on whether an organization’s indicator is “high” or “low” across these three dimensions.

    • Organizations with low appetite for change will require more direct, assertive communications.
    • Organizations with a high appetite for change are more suited to more open, participatory approaches.

    Three key dimensions determine the appetite for cultural change (Dimensions taken from Joanna Malgorzata Michalak’s “Cultural Catalysts and Barriers of Organizational Change Management: a Preliminary Overview,” 2010):

    Power Distance Refers to the acceptance that power is distributed unequally throughout the organization. Organizations with a high power distance indicator show that the unequal power distribution is accepted by the less powerful employees.
    Individualism Organizations that score high in individualism have employees who are more independent; those who score low in individualism fall into the collectivism side where employees are strongly tied to one another or their groups.
    Uncertainty Avoidance Describes the level of acceptance that an organization has towards uncertainty. Those who score high in this area find that their employees do not favor “uncertain” situations, while those that score low in this area find that their employees are comfortable with change and uncertainty.

    "Societies with a high indicator of power distance, individualism, and uncertainty avoidance create vital inertial forces against transformation." – Michalak

    Develop a sponsorship action plan

    2.1.4 45 to 60 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    • Project sponsor
    Use the table below to define key tasks and responsibilities for the project sponsor.
    1. Populate the first column with the stakeholder groups from Activity 2.1.3.
    2. With reference to the Sponsor Checklist, brainstorm key sponsorship responsibilities for this project across each of the groups.
    3. When gauging the frequency of each activity and the “Estimated Weekly Effort” required by the sponsor to complete them, consider the organization’s appetite for change.
      • Where indicators across the three dimensions are low, the sponsor’s involvement can be less hands-on and more collaborative in nature.
      • Where indicators across the three dimensions are high, the sponsor’s involvement should be hands-on and direct in her/his communications.
    Group Activity Est. Weekly Effort Comments/Frequency
    Project Team Ad hoc check-in on progress 30 mins Try to be visible at least once a week
    Attend status meetings 30 mins Every second Tuesday, 9 am
    Senior Managers Touch base informally 45 mins Aim for bi-weekly, one-on-one touchpoints
    Lead steering committee meetings 60 mins First Thursday of the month, 3 pm
    End Users Organization-wide emails Ad hoc, 20 mins As required, with PMO assistance

    "To manage change is to tell people what to do... but to lead change is to show people how to be." – Weick & Quinn

    Update the Transition Team Communications Template

    2.1.5 10 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    Input
    • The outcomes of various activities in this step
    Output
    • Key sections of the Transition Team Communications Template completed

    Use Info-Tech’s Transition Team Communications Template to help communicate the outcomes of this step.

    The following activities should be recorded in the template:

    Activity 2.1.2

    In addition, the outcome of Activity 2.1.4, the “Sponsorship Action Plan,” should be converted to a format such as Word and provided to the project sponsor.

    Download Info-Tech’s Transition Team Communications Template.

    "In most work situations, the meaning of a change is likely to be as important, if not more so, than the change itself."

    – Roethlisberger (cited in Burke)

    Step 2.2: Perform an organizational change impact assessment

    Phase 2 - 2.2

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Perform change impact survey.
    • Assess the depth of impacts for different stakeholders and stakeholder groups.
    • Determine overall adoptability of the OCM effort.
    • Establish a game plan for managing individual impacts.
    • Review risks and opportunities.
    • Determine how the value of the change will be measured.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Project sponsor for the pilot OCM project
    • Additional project staff: project managers, business analysts, members of the transition team, etc.
    Outcomes of this step:
    • A change impact analysis.
    • An adoptability rating for the change initiative to help the PMO plan its OCM efforts.
    • A better understanding of the risks and opportunities associated with the change to inform the business case.

    Analyze change impacts across multiple dimensions to ensure that nothing is overlooked

    Ensure that no stone is left unturned as you prepare for a comprehensive transition plan.

    In the previous step, we established a process and some accountabilities to help the PMO and project sponsors make the case for change during the ideation and initiation phase of a project.

    In this step, we will help with the project planning phase by establishing a process for analyzing how the change will impact various dimensions of the business and how to manage these impacts to best ensure stakeholder adoption.

    Brace for Impact…

    A thorough analysis of change impacts will help the PMO:

    • Bypass avoidable problems.
    • Remove non-fixed barriers to success.
    • Acknowledge and minimize the impact of unavoidable barriers.
    • Identify and leverage potential benefits.
    • Measure the success of the change.

    Assign the appropriate accountabilities for impact analysis

    In the absence of an assigned change manager, organizational change impact assessments are typically performed by a business analyst or the project manager assigned to the change initiative.

    • Indeed, as with all change management activities, making an individual accountable for performing this activity and communicating its outcomes is key to the success of your org change initiative.
    • At this stage, the PMO needs to assign or facilitate accountability for the impact analysis on the pilot OCM initiative or it needs to take this accountability on itself.

    Sample RACI for this activity. Define these accountabilities for your organization before proceeding with this step.

    Project Sponsor PMO PM or BA
    Survey impact dimensions I A R
    Analyze impacts across multiple stakeholder groups I A R
    Assess required OCM rigor I A/R C
    Manage individual impacts I A R

    Info-Tech Insight

    Bring perspective to an imperfect view.

    No individual has a comprehensive view of the potential impact of change.

    Impact assessment and analysis is most effective when multiple viewpoints are coordinated using a well-defined list of considerations that cover a wide breadth of dimensions.

    Revisit and refine the impact analysis throughout planning and execution, as challenges to adoption become more clear.

    Perform a change impact analysis to make your planning more complete

    Use Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool to weigh all of the factors involved in a change and to formalize discipline around impact analysis.

    Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool helps to document the change impact across multiple dimensions, enabling the PMO to review the analysis with others to ensure that the most important impacts are captured. The tool also helps to effectively monitor each impact throughout project execution.

    • Change impact considerations can include: products, services, states, provinces, cultures, time zones, legal jurisdictions, languages, colors, brands, subsidiaries, competitors, departments, jobs, stores, locations, etc.
    • Each of these dimensions is an MECE (Mutually Exclusive, Collectively Exhaustive) list of considerations that could be impacted by the change. For example, a North American retail chain might consider “Time Zones” as a key dimension, which could break down as Newfoundland, Atlantic, Eastern, Central, Mountain, and Pacific.

    Download Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool.

    • Required Participants for this Step: PMO Leader; project manager or business analyst
    • Recommended Participants for this Step: Project Sponsor; IT/PMO staff

    Info-Tech Insight

    Anticipate the unexpected. Impact analysis is the cornerstone of any OCM strategy. By shining a light on considerations that might have otherwise escaped project planners and decision makers, an impact analysis is an essential component to change management and project success.

    Enter high-level project information on the “Set Up” tab

    2.2.1 15 minutes

    The “2. Set Up” tab of the Impact Tool is where you enter project-specific data pertaining to the change initiative.

    The inputs on this tab are used to auto-populate fields and drop-downs on subsequent tabs of the analysis.

    Document the stakeholders (by individual or group) associated with the project who will be subject to the impacts.

    You are allowed up to 15 entries. Try to make this list comprehensive. Missing any key stakeholders will threaten the value of this activity as a whole.

    If you find that you have more than 15 individual stakeholders, you can group individuals into stakeholder groups.

    Keep in mind...

    An impact analysis is not a stakeholder management exercise.

    Impact assessments cover:

    • How the change will affect the organization.
    • How individual impacts might influence the likelihood of adoption.

    Stakeholder management covers:

    • Resistance/objections handling.
    • Engagement strategies to promote adoption.

    We will cover the latter in the next step.

    “As a general principle, project teams should always treat every stakeholder initially as a recipient of change. Every stakeholder management plan should have, as an end goal, to change recipients’ habits or behaviors.”

    PMI, 2015

    Determine the relevant considerations for analyzing the change impacts of a project

    2.2.2 15 to 30 minutes

    Use the survey on tab 3 of the Impact Analysis Tool to determine the dimensions of change that are relevant.

    The impact analysis is fueled by the thirteen-question survey on tab 3 of the tool.

    This survey addresses a comprehensive assortment of change dimensions, ranging from customer-facing considerations, to employee concerns, to resourcing, logistical, and technological questions.

    Once you have determined the dimensions that are impacted by the change, you can go on to assess how individual stakeholders and stakeholder groups are affected by the change.

    This image is a screenshot of tab 3, Impact Survey, of the Impact Analysis Tool.

    Screenshot of tab “3. Impact Survey,” showing the 13-question survey that drives the impact analysis.

    Ideally, the survey should be performed by a group of project stakeholders together. Use the drop-downs in column K to record your responses.

    "A new system will impact roles, responsibilities, and how business is conducted within an organization. A clear understanding of the impact of change allows the business to design a plan and address the different levels of changes accordingly. This approach creates user acceptance and buy-in."

    – January Paulk, Panorama Consulting

    Impacts will be felt differently by different stakeholders and stakeholder groups

    As you assess change impacts, keep in mind that no impact will be felt the same across the organization. Depth of impact can vary depending on the frequency (will the impact be felt daily, weekly, monthly?), the actions necessitated by it (e.g. will it change the way the job is done or is it simply a minor process tweak?), and the anticipated response of the stakeholder (support, resistance, indifference?).

    Use the Organizational Change Depth Scale below to help visualize various depths of impact. The deeper the impact, the tougher the job of managing change will be.

    Procedural Behavioral Interpersonal Vocational Cultural
    Procedural change involves changes to explicit procedures, rules, policies, processes, etc. Behavioral change is similar to procedural change, but goes deeper to involve the changing tacit or unconscious habits. Interpersonal change goes beyond behavioral change to involve changing relationships, teams, locations, reporting structures, and other social interactions. Vocational change requires acquiring new knowledge and skills, and accepting the loss or decline in the value or relevance of previously acquired knowledge and skills. Cultural change goes beyond interpersonal and vocational change to involve changing personal values, social norms, and assumptions about the meaning of good vs. bad or right vs. wrong.
    Example: providing sales reps with mobile access to the CRM application to let them update records from the field. Example: requiring sales reps to use tablets equipped with a custom mobile application for placing orders from the field. Example: migrating sales reps to work 100% remotely. Example: migrating technical support staff to field service and sales support roles. Example: changing the operating model to a more service-based value proposition or focus.

    Determine the depth of each impact for each stakeholder group

    2.2.3 1 to 3 hours

    Tab “4. Impact Analysis” of the Analysis Tool contains the meat of the impact analysis activity.
    1. The “Impact Analysis” tab is made up of thirteen change impact tables (see next slide for a screenshot of one of these tables).
    • You may not need to use all thirteen tables. The number of tables you use coincides with the number of “yes” responses you gave in the previous tab.
    • If you no not need all thirteen impact tables (i.e. if you do not answer “yes” to all thirteen questions in tab 2, the unused/unnecessary tables will not auto-populate.)
  • Use one table per change impact. Each of your “yes” responses from tab 3 will auto-populate at the top of each change impact table. You should go through each of your “yes” responses in turn.
  • Analyze how each impact will affect each stakeholder or stakeholder group touched by the project.
    • Column B in each table will auto-populate with the stakeholder groups from the Set Up tab.
  • Use the drop-downs in columns C, D, and E to rate the frequency of each impact, the actions necessitated by each impact, and the anticipated response of each stakeholder group.
    • Each of the options in these drop-downs is tied to a ranking table that informs the ratings on the two subsequent tabs.
  • If warranted, you can use the “Comments” cells in column F to note the specifics of each impact for each stakeholder/group.
  • See the next slide for an accompanying screenshot of a change impact table from tab 4 of the Analysis Tool.

    Screenshot of “Impact Analysis” tab

    The image is a screenshot of the Impact Analysis tab.

    The stakeholder groups entered on the Set Up will auto-populate in column B of each table.

    Your “yes” responses from the survey tab will auto-populate in the cells to the right of the “Change Impact” cells.

    Use the drop-downs in this column to select how often the impact will be felt for each group (e.g. daily, weekly, periodically, one time, or never).

    “Actions” include “change to core job duties,” “change to how time is spent,” “confirm awareness of change,” etc.

    Use the drop-downs to hypothesize what the stakeholder response might be. For now, for the purpose of the impact analysis, a guess is fine. We will come back to build a communications plan based on actual responses in Phase 3 of this blueprint.

    Review your overall impact rating to help assess the likelihood of change adoption

    Use the “Overall Impact Rating” on tab 5 to help right-size your OCM efforts.

    Based upon your assessment of each individual impact, the Analysis Tool will provide you with an “Overall Impact Rating” in tab 5.

    • This rating is an aggregate of each of the individual change impact tables used during the analysis, and the rankings assigned to each stakeholder group across the frequency, required actions, and anticipated response columns.

    The image is a screenshot of tab 5, the Overall Process Adoption Rating. The image shows a semi-circle, where the left-most section is red, the centre yellow, and the right-most section green, with a dial positioned at the right edge of the yellow section.

    Projects in the red should have maximum change governance, applying a full suite of OCM tools and templates, as well as revisiting the impact analysis exercise regularly to help monitor progress.

    Increased communication and training efforts, as well as cross-functional partnerships, will also be key for success.

    Projects in the yellow also require a high level of change governance. Follow the steps and activities in this blueprint closely, paying close attention to the stakeholder engagement activities in the next step to help sway resistors and leverage change champions.

    In order to free up resources for those OCM initiatives that require more discipline, projects in green can ease up in their OCM efforts somewhat. With a high likelihood of adoption as is, stakeholder engagement and communication efforts can be minimized somewhat for these projects, so long as the PMO is in regular contact with key stakeholders.

    "All change is personal. Each person typically asks: 'What’s in it for me?'" – William T. Craddock

    Use the other outputs on tab 5 to help structure your OCM efforts

    In addition to the overall impact rating, tab 5 has other outputs that will help you assess specific impacts and how the overall change will be received by stakeholders.

    The image is a screenshot of tab 5.

    Top-Five Highest Risk Impacts table: This table displays the highest risk impacts based on frequency and action inputs on Tab 4.

    Top-Five Most Impacted Stakeholders table: Here you’ll find the stakeholders, ranked again based on frequency and action, who will be most impacted by the proposed changes.

    Top Five Supporters table: These are the 5 stakeholders most likely to support changes, based on the Anticipated Response column on Tab 4.

    The stakeholder groups entered on the Set Up Tab will auto-populate in column B of each table.

    In addition to these outputs, this tab also lists top five change resistors, and has an impact register and list of potential impacts to watch out for (i.e. your “maybe” responses from tab 3).

    Establish a game plan to manage individual change impacts

    2.2.4 60 to 90 minutes

    The final tab of the Analysis Tool can be used to help track and monitor individual change impacts.
    • Use the “Communications Plan” on tab 7 to come up with a high-level game plan for tracking communications about each change with the corresponding stakeholders.
    • Update and manage this tab as the communication events occur to help keep your implementation on track.

    The image is a screenshot of the Communications Plan, located on tab 7 of the Analysis Tool. There are notes emerging from each of the table headings, as follows: Communication Topic - Select from a list of topics identified on Tab 6 that are central to successful change, then answer the following; Audience/Format/Delivery - Which stakeholders need to be involved in this change? How are we going to meet with them?; Creator - Who is responsible for creating the change?; Communicator - Who is responsible for communicating the change to the stakeholder?; Intended Outcome - Why do you need to communicate with this stakeholder?; Level of Risk - What is the likelihood that you can achieve your attended outcome? And what happens if you don’t?

    Document the risk assumptions stemming from your impact analysis

    2.2.5 30 to 60 minutes

    Use the Analysis Tool to produce a set of key risks that need to be identified, communicated, mitigated, and tracked.

    A proper risk analysis often reveals risks and mitigations that are more important to other people in the organization than those managing the change. Failure to do a risk analysis on other people’s behalf can be viewed as negligence.

    In the table below, document the risks related to the assumptions being made about the upcoming change. What are the risks that your assumptions are wrong? Can steps be taken to avoid these risks?

    Risk Assumption Magnitude if Assumption Wrong Likelihood That Assumption Is Wrong Mitigation Strategy Assessment
    e.g. Customers will accept shipping fees for overweight items > 10 pounds Low High It's a percentage of our business, and usually accompanies a sharply discounted product. We need to extend discretionary discounting on shipping to supervisory staff to mitigate the risk of lost business. Re-assess after each quarter.

    "One strategy to minimize the impact is to determine the right implementation pace, which will vary depending on the size of the company and the complexity of the project" – Chirantan Basu

    Record any opportunities pertaining to the upcoming change

    2.2.6 30 to 60 minutes

    Use the change impacts to identify opportunities to improve the outcome of the change.

    Use the table below to brainstorm the business opportunities arising from your change initiative. Consider if the PMO can take steps to help improve the outcomes either through supporting the project execution or through providing support to the business.

    Opportunity Assumption Potential Value Likelihood That Assumption Is Wrong Leverage Strategy Assessment
    e.g. Customer satisfaction can increase as delivery time frames for the remaining custom products radically shrink and services extend greatly. High Medium Reset the expectations of this market segment so that they go from being surprised by good service to expecting it. Our competitors will not be able to react to this.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The bigger the change, the bigger the opportunity. Project and change management has traditionally focused on a defensive posture because organizations so often fail to mitigate risk. Good change managers also watch for opportunities to improve and exploit the outcomes of the change.

    Determine how to measure the value of the change

    2.2.7 15 to 30 minutes

    Describe the metrics that will be used to assess the management of this change.

    Now that you’ve assessed the impacts of the change, and the accompanying risks and opportunities, use the table below to document metrics that can be used to help assess the management of the change.

    • Don’t rely on the underlying project to determine the value of the change itself: It’s important to recognize the difference between change management and project management, and the establishment of value metrics is an obvious source of this differentiation.
    • For example, consider a project that is introducing a new method of remitting travel expenses for reimbursement.
      • The project itself would be justified on the efficiency of the new process.
      • The value of the change itself could be measured by the number of help desk calls looking for the new form, documentation, etc.
    Metric Calculation How to Collect Who to Report to Frequency
    Price overrides for new shipping costs It is entered as a line item on invoices, so it can be calculated as % of shipping fees discounted. Custom report from CRM (already developed). Project Steering Committee Project Steering Committee

    Document risks and other impact analysis considerations in the business case

    2.2.8 10 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • Project Manager
    Input
    • The risks and issues identified through the impact analysis.
    Output
    • Comprehensive list of risks documented in the business case.
    Use the outcomes of the activities in this step to help inform your business case as well as any other risk management artifacts that your project managers may use.
    • Because long-term project success depends upon stakeholder adoption, high-risk impacts should be documented as considerations in the risk section of your business case.
    • In addition, the “Overall Impact Rating” graph and the “Impact Management Worksheet” could be used to help improve business cases as well as charters on some projects.

    If your organization doesn’t have a standard business case document, use one of Info-Tech’s templates. We have two templates to choose from, depending on the size of the project and the amount of rigor required:

    Download Info-Tech’s Comprehensive Business Case Template for large, complex projects or our Fast Track Business Case Template for smaller ones.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.3 Create a convincing sponsor-driven story to help build the case for change

    Work with an analyst to exercise your storytelling muscles, building out a process to help make the case for change throughout the organization.

    2.1.4 Develop a sponsorship action plan

    Utilize analyst experience to help develop a sponsorship action plan to help facilitate more engaged change project sponsors.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.2.3 Assess different change impacts across various stakeholder groups

    Get an analyst perspective on how each impact may affect different stakeholders in order to assist with the project and OCM planning process.

    2.2.4 Develop a proactive change impact management plan

    Rightsize your response to change impacts by developing a game plan to mitigate each one according to adoption likelihood.

    2.2.5 Use the results of the impact analysis to inform and improve the business case for the project

    Work with the analyst to translate the risks and opportunities identified during the impact analysis into points of consideration to help inform and improve the business case for the project.

    Phase 3

    Facilitate Change Adoption Throughout the Organization

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Facilitate Change Adoption Throughout the Organization

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 to 6 weeks

    Step 3.1: Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change

    Discuss these issues with analyst:

    • Lack of alignment between IT and the business.
    • Organizational resistance to a command-and-control approach to change.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop a stakeholder engagement plan.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    Step 3.2: Develop and execute the transition plan

    Discuss these issues with analyst:

    • Org change initiatives often fail due to the influence of resistors.
    • Failure to elicit feedback contributes to the feeling of a change being imposed.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop a communications strategy to address a variety of stakeholder reactions to change.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Transition Plan Template
    • Activity 3.2.7: “Objections Handling Template”
    Step 3.3: Establish HR and training plans

    Discuss these issues with analyst:

    • Training is often viewed as ineffective, contributing to change resistance rather than fostering adoption.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Rightsize training content based on project requirements and stakeholder sentiment.

    With these tools & templates:

    • “Training Requirements” tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • “Training Plan” section of the Transition Plan Template

    Step 3.1: Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change

    Phase 3 - 3.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Involve the right stakeholders in the change.
    • Define project roles and responsibilities.
    • Define elicitation methods for obtaining stakeholder input.
    • Perform a stakeholder analysis to assess influence, interest, and potential contribution.
    • Assess communications plan requirements.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Required: PMO Director; project manager or business analyst
    • Recommended: Project Sponsor; the Transition Team; other IT/PMO staff
    Outcomes of this step
    • A stakeholder analysis.
    • Requirements for the communications plan.

    The nature of change is changing

    The challenge of managing change is complicated by forces that are changing change.

    Empowerment: Increased worker mobility, effect of millennials in the workforce, and lower average tenure means that people are less tolerant of a hierarchical, command-and-control approach to change.

    • Additionally, lower average tenure means you can’t assume everyone has the same context or background for change (e.g. they might not have been with the organization for earlier phases when project justification/rationale was established).

    Noise: Inundation with communications and diversity of channels means the traditional “broadcast” approach to communicating change doesn’t work (i.e. you can’t expect every email to get everyone’s attention).

    As a result, disciplines around organizational change tend to be less linear and deliberate than they were in the past.

    "People don’t resist change. They resist being changed."

    Peter Senge

    How to manage change in organizations of today and the future:

    • New realities require a more collaborative, engaging, open, and agile approach to change.
    • Communication is increasingly more of a two-way, ongoing, iterative engagement process.
    • Project leaders on change initiatives need to engage diverse audiences early and often.
    • Information about change needs to reach people and be easily findable where and when stakeholders need it.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Accountabilities for change management are still required. While change management needs to adopt more collaborative and organic approaches, org change success still depends on assigning appropriate accountabilities. What’s changed in the move to matrix structure is that accountabilities need to be facilitated more collaboratively.

    Leading change requires collaboration to ensure people, process, and technology factors are aligned

    In the absence of otherwise defined change leadership, the PMO needs to help navigate every technology-enabled change, even if it isn’t in the “driver’s seat.”

    PMO leaders and IT experts often find themselves asked to help implement or troubleshoot technology-related business projects that are already in flight.

    The PMO will end up with perceived or de facto responsibility for inadequate planning, communications, and training around technology-enabled change.

    IT-Led Projects

    Projects led by the IT PMO tend to be more vulnerable to underestimating the impact on people and processes on the business side.

    Make sure you engage stakeholders and representatives (e.g. “power users”) from user populations early enough to refine and validate your impact assessments.

    Business-Led Projects

    Projects led by people on the business side tend to be more vulnerable to underestimating the implications of technology changes.

    Make sure IT is involved early enough to identify and prepare for challenges and opportunities involving integration, user training, etc.

    "A major impediment to more successful software development projects is a corporate culture that results in a lack of collaboration because business executives view the IT departments as "order takers," a view disputed by IT leaders."

    – David Ramel (cited by Ben Linders)

    Foster change collaboration by initiating a stakeholder engagement plan through the PMO

    If project stakeholders aren’t on board, the organization’s change initiatives will be in serious trouble.

    Stakeholders will not only be highly involved in the process improvement initiative, but they also may be participants, so it’s essential that you get their buy-in for the initiative upfront.

    Use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to help plan how stakeholders rate in terms of engagement with the project.

    Once you have identified where different stakeholders fall in terms of interests, influence, and support for/engagement with the change initiative, you can structure your communication plan (to be developed in step 3.2) based on where individuals and stakeholder groups fall.

    • Required participants for the activities in this step: PMO Leader; project manager or business analyst
    • Recommended participants for the activities in this step: Project Sponsor; IT/PMO staff

    Download Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    The engagement plan is a structured and documented approach for:

    • Gathering requirements by eliciting input and validating plans for change.
    • Cultivating sponsorship and support from key stakeholders early in the project lifecycle.

    Download Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    Involve the right people to drive and facilitate change

    Refer to your project level assessment from 1.2.2:

    • Level 1 projects tend to only require involvement from the project team, sponsors, and people affected.
    • Level 2 projects often benefit from broad support and capabilities in order to take advantage of opportunities.
    • Level 3 projects require broad support and capabilities in order to deal with risks and barriers.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The more transformational the change, the more it will affect the org chart – not just after the implementation, but also through the transition.

    Take time early in the project to define the reporting structure for the project/transition team, as well as any teams and roles supporting the transition.

    • Project manager: Has primary accountability for project success.
    • Senior executive project sponsor: Needed to “open doors” and signal organization’s commitment to the change.
    • Technology SMEs and architects: Responsible for determining and communicating requirements and risks of the technology being implemented or changed.
    • Business unit leads: Responsible for identifying and communicating impact on business functions, approving changes, and helping champion change.
    • Product/process owners: Responsible for identifying and communicating impact on business functions, approving changes, and helping champion change.
    • HR specialists: Most valuable when roles and organizational design are affected, i.e. change requires staff redeployment, substantial training (not just using a new system or tool but acquiring new skills and responsibilities), or termination.
    • Training specialists: If you have full-time training staff in the organization, you will eventually need them to develop training courses and material. Consulting them early will help with scoping, scheduling, and identifying the best resources and channels to deliver the training.
    • Communications specialists (internal): Valuable in crafting communications plan; required if communications function owns internal communications.

    Use the RACI table on the next slide to clarify who will be accountable, responsible, consulted, and informed for key tasks and activities around this change initiative.

    Define roles and responsibilities for facilitating change on your pilot OCM initiative

    3.1.1 60 minutes

    Perform a RACI exercise pertaining to your pilot change initiative to clarify who to include in the stakeholder engagement activity.

    Don’t reinvent the wheel: revisit the list of stakeholders and stakeholder groups from your impact assessment. The purpose of the RACI is to bring some clarity to project-specific responsibilities.

    Tasks PMO Project Manager Sr. Executives Technology SME Business Lead Process Owner HR Trainers Communications
    Meeting project objectives A R A R R
    Identifying risks and opportunities A R A C C C C I I
    Building the action plan A R C R R R R R R
    Planning and delivering communications A R C C C C C R A
    Planning and delivering training A R C C C C R A C
    Gathering and analyzing feedback and KPIs A R C C C C C R R

    Copy the results of this RACI exercise into tab 1 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook. In addition, it can be used to inform the designated RACI section in the Transition Plan Template. Revise the RACI Table there as needed.

    Formalize the stakeholder analysis to identify change champions and blockers

    Define key stakeholders (or stakeholder groups) who are affected by the project or are in positions to enable or block change.

    • Remember to consider customers, partners, and other external stakeholders.
    • People best positioned to provide insight and influence change positively are also best positioned to create resistance.
    • These people should be engaged early and often in the transition process – not just to make them feel included or part of the change, but because their insight could very likely identify risks, barriers, and opportunities that need to be addressed.

    The image is a screenshot of tab 3 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    In tab three of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook, compile the list of stakeholders who are touched by the change and whose adoption of the change will be key to project success.

    To save time, you can copy and paste your stakeholder list from the Set Up tab of the Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool into the table below and edit the list as needed.

    Formal stakeholder analysis should be:

    • Required for Level 3 projects
    • Recommended for Level 2 projects
    • Optional for Level 1 projects

    Info-Tech Insight

    Resistance is, in many cases, avoidable. Resistance is commonly provided by people who are upset about not being involved in the communication. Missed opportunities are the same: they usually could have been avoided easily had somebody known in time. Use the steps ahead as an opportunity to ensure no one has been missed.

    Perform a stakeholder analysis to begin cultivating support while eliciting requirements

    3.1.2 60 minutes

    Use tab 4 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to systematically assess each stakeholder's influence, interest, and potential contribution to the project as well as to develop plans for engaging each stakeholder or stakeholder group.

    The image is a screencapture of tab 4 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    Use the drop-downs to select stakeholders and stakeholder groups. These will automatically populate based on your inputs in tab 3.

    Rate each stakeholder on a scale of 1 to 10 in terms of her/his influence in the organization. Not only do these rankings feed the stakeholder map that gets generated on the next slide, but they will help you identify change champions and resistors with influence.

    Similar to the ranking under “Influence,” rate the “Interest” and “Potential Contribution” to help identify stakeholder engagement.

    Document how you will engage each stakeholder and stakeholder group and document how soon you should communicate with them concerning the change. See the following slides for advice on eliciting change input.

    Use the elicitation methods on the following slides to engage stakeholders and gather change requirements.

    Elicitation methods – Observation

    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort BA/PMO Effort
    Casual Observation The process of observing stakeholders performing tasks where the stakeholders are unaware they are being observed. Capture true behavior through observation of stakeholders performing tasks without informing them that they are being observed. This information can be valuable for mapping business process; however, it is difficult to isolate the core business activities from unnecessary actions. Low Medium
    Formal Observation The process of observing stakeholders performing tasks where the stakeholders are aware they are being observed. Formal observation allows business analysts to isolate and study the core activities in a business process because the stakeholder is aware they are being observed. Stakeholders may become distrusting of the business analyst and modify their behavior if they feel their job responsibilities or job security are at risk. Low Medium

    Info-Tech Insight

    Observing stakeholders does not uncover any information about the target state. Be sure to use contextual observation in conjunction with other techniques to discover the target state.

    Elicitation methods – Surveys

    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort BA/PMO Effort
    Closed-Response Survey A survey that has fixed responses for each answer. A Likert-scale (or similar measures) can be used to have respondents evaluate and prioritize possible requirements. Closed-response surveys can be sent to large groups and used to quickly gauge user interest in different functional areas. They are easy for users to fill out and don’t require a high investment of time. However, their main deficit is that they are likely to miss novel requirements that are not listed. As such, closed-response surveys are best used after initial elicitation or brainstorming to validate feature groups. Low Medium
    Open-Response Survey A survey that has open-ended response fields. Questions are fixed, but respondents are free to populate the field in their own words. Open-response surveys take longer to fill out than closed, but can garner deeper insights. Open-response surveys are a useful supplement (and occasionally a replacement) for group elicitation techniques, like focus groups, when you need to receive an initial list of requirements from a broad cross-section of stakeholders. Their primary shortcoming is the analyst can’t immediately follow up on interesting points. However, they are particularly useful for reaching stakeholders who are unavailable for individual one-on-ones or group meetings. Medium Medium

    Info-Tech Insight

    Surveys can be useful mechanisms for initial drafting of raw requirements (open response) and gauging user interest in proposed requirements or feature sets (closed response). However, they should not be the sole focus of your elicitation program due to lack of interactivity and two-way dialogue with the business analyst.

    Elicitation methods – Interviews

    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort BA/PMO Effort

    Structured One-on-One Interview

    In a structured one-on-one interview, the business analyst has a fixed list of questions to ask the stakeholder and follows up where necessary. Structured interviews provide the opportunity to quickly hone in on areas of concern that were identified during process mapping or group elicitation techniques. They should be employed with purpose – to receive specific stakeholder feedback on proposed requirements or help identify systemic constraints. Generally speaking, they should take 30 minutes or less to complete. Low Medium

    Unstructured One-on-One Interview

    In an unstructured one-on-one interview, the business analyst allows the conversation to flow freely. The BA may have broad themes to touch on, but does not run down a specific question list. Unstructured interviews are most useful for initial elicitation when brainstorming a draft list of potential requirements is paramount. Unstructured interviews work best with senior stakeholders (sponsors or power users), since they can be time consuming if they’re applied to a large sample size. It’s important for BAs not to stifle open dialogue and allow the participants to speak openly. They should take 60 minutes or less to complete. Medium Low

    Info-Tech Insight

    Interviews should be used with “high-value targets.” Those who receive one-on-one face time can help generate good requirements, as well as allow effective communication around requirements at a later point (i.e. during the analysis and validation phases).

    Elicitation methods – Focus Groups

    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort BA/PMO Effort
    Focus Group Focus groups are sessions held between a small group (typically ten individuals or less) and an experienced facilitator who leads the conversation in a productive direction. Focus groups are highly effective for initial requirements brainstorming. The best practice is to structure them in a cross-functional manner to ensure multiple viewpoints are represented and the conversation doesn’t become dominated by one particular individual. Facilitators must be wary of “groupthink” in these meetings (the tendency to converge on a single POV). Medium Medium

    Info-Tech Insight

    Group elicitation techniques are most useful for gathering a wide spectrum of requirements from a broad group of stakeholders. Individual or observational techniques are typically needed for further follow-up and in-depth analysis with critical power users or sponsors.

    "Each person has a learning curve. Take the time to assess staff individually as some don’t adjust to change as well as others. Some never will." – CEO, Manufacturing Firm

    Refine your stakeholder analysis through the input elicitation process

    3.1.3 30 minutes

    Review all of these elicitation methods as you go through the workbook as a group. Be sure to document and discuss any other elicitation methods that might be specific to your organization.

    1. Schedule dates and a specific agenda for performing stakeholder elicitation activities.
    • If scheduling more formal methods such as a structured interview or survey, take the time to develop some talking points and questions (see the questionnaire and survey templates in the next step for examples).
  • Assign accountabilities for performing the elicitation exercises and set dates for updating the PMO on the results of these stakeholder elicitations.
  • As curator of the workbook, the PMO will need to refine the stakeholder data in tab 4 of the tool to get a more accurate stakeholder map on the next tab of the workbook.
  • Elicitation method Target stakeholder group(s) PMO staff responsible for eliciting input Next update to PMO
    One-on-one structured interview HR and Sales Karla Molina August 1

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engagement paves the way for smoother communications. The “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders and users into advocates who help boost your message, sustain change, and realize benefits without constant, direct intervention.

    Develop a stakeholder engagement strategy based on the output of your analysis

    Use the stakeholder map on tab 5 of the Workbook to inform your communications strategy and transition plan.

    Tab 5 of the Workbook provides an output – a stakeholder map – based on your inputs in the previous tab. Use the stakeholder map to inform your communications requirements considerations in the next tab of the workbook as well as your transition plan in the next step.

    The image is a screencapture of tab 5 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    This is a screenshot of the “Stakeholder Analysis” from tab 5 of the Workbook. The four quadrants of the map are:

    • Engage (High Interest/High Influence)
    • Communicate – High Level (High Interest/Low Influence)
    • Passive (Low Interest/Low Influence)
    • Communicate – Low Level (Low Interest/High Influence)
    How to interpret each quadrant on the map:

    Top Quadrants: Supporters

    1. Engage: Capitalize on champions to drive the project/change.
    2. Communicate (high level): Leverage this group where possible to help socialize the program and to help encourage dissenters to support.

    Bottom Quadrant: Blockers

    1. Passive: Focus on increasing these stakeholders’ level of support.
    2. Communicate (low level): Pick your battles – focus on your noise makers first and then move on to your blockers.

    Document communications plan requirements based on results of engagement and elicitation

    3.1.4 60 minutes

    The image is a screencapture of the Communications Requirements tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook

    Use the Communications Requirements tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    Do this as a 1–2 hour project team planning session.

    The table will automatically generate a list of stakeholders based on your stakeholder analysis.

    Update the assumptions that you made about the impact of the change in the Impact Analysis with results of stakeholder engagement and elicitation activities.

    Use the table on this tab to refine these assumptions as needed before solidifying your communications plan.

    Define the action required from each stakeholder or stakeholder group (if any) for change to be successful.

    Continually refine messages and methods for communicating with each stakeholder and stakeholder group.

    Note words that work well and words that don’t. For example, some buzzwords might have negative connotations from previous failed initiatives.

    Designate who is responsible for developing and honing the communications plan (see details in the following section on developing the transition plan).

    Step 3.2: Develop and execute the transition plan

    Phase 3 - 3.2

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Create a communications timeline.
    • Establish communications strategy for stakeholder groups.
    • Determine communication delivery methods.
    • Define the feedback and evaluation process.
    • Assess the full range of support and resistance to change.
    • Prepare objections handling process.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Transition Team
    • Project managers
    • Business analyst
    • Project Sponsor
    • Additional IT/PMO staff
    Outcomes of this step
    • A communications strategy
    • A stakeholder feedback process
    • An objections handling strategy
    • A transition plan

    Effective change requires strategic communications and rightsized training plans

    Develop and execute a transition plan through the PMO to ensure long-term adoption.

    In this step we will develop and introduce a plan to manage change around your project.

    After completing this section you will have a realistic, effective, and adaptable transition plan that includes:

    • Clarity around leadership and vision.
    • Well-defined plans for targeting unique groups with specific messages.
    • Resistance and contingency plans.
    • Templates for gathering feedback and evaluating success.

    These activities will enable you to:

    • Execute the transition in coordination with the timeline and structure of the core project.
    • Communicate the action plan and vision for change.
    • Target specific stakeholder and user groups with unique messages.
    • Deal with risks, resistance, and contingencies.
    • Evaluate success through feedback and metrics.

    "Everyone loves change: take what you know and replace it with a promise. Then overlay that promise with the memory of accumulated missed efforts, half-baked attempts, and roads of abandoned promises."

    Toby Elwin

    Assemble the core transition team to help execute this step

    Once the stakeholder engagement step has been completed, the PMO needs to facilitate the involvement of the transition team to help carry out transition planning and communications strategies.

    You should have already sketched out a core transition team in step 1.2.6 of this blueprint. As with all org change activities, ensuring that individuals are made accountable for the execution of the following activities will be key for the long-term success of your change initiative.

    • At this stage, the PMO needs to ensure the involvement of the transition team to participate in the following activities – or the PMO will need to take on the transition planning and communication responsibilities itself.

    Refer to the team structure examples from Activity 1.2.6 of this blueprint if you are still finalizing your transition team.

    Download Info-Tech’s Transition Plan Template to help capture and record the outcomes of the activities in this step.

    Create a high-level communications timeline

    3.2.1 30 minutes

    By now the project sponsor, project manager, and business analysts (or equivalent) should have defined project timelines, requirements, and other key details. Use these to start your communications planning process.

    If your members of the transition team are also part of the core project team, meet with them to elicit the project timeline and requirements.

    Project Milestone Milestone Time Frame Communications Activities Activity Timing Notes
    Business Case Approval
    • Key stakeholder communications
    Pilot Go-Live
    • Pilot launch activity communications
    • Org-wide status communications
    Full Rollout Approval
    • Key stakeholder communications
    Full Rollout
    • Full rollout activity communications
    • Org-wide status communications
    Benefits Assessment
    • Key stakeholder communications
    • Org-wide status communications

    Info-Tech Insight

    Communicate, communicate, communicate.

    Staff are 34% more likely to adapt to change quickly during the implementation and adoption phases when they are provided with a timeline of impending changes specific to their department. (Source: McLean & Company)

    Schedule time to climb out of the “Valley of Despair”

    Many change initiatives fail when leaders give up at the first sign of resistance.

    OCM experts use terms like “Valley of Despair” to describe temporary drops in support and morale that inevitably occur with any significant change. Don’t let these temporary drops derail your change efforts.

    Anticipate setbacks and make sure the project plan accommodates the time and energy required to sustain and reinforce the initiative as people move through stages of resistance.

    The image is a line graph. Segments of the line are labelled with numbers. The beginning of the line is labelled with 1; the descending segment of the line labelled 2; the lowest point is labelled 3; the ascending section is labelled 4; and the end of the graph is labelled 5.

    Based on Don Kelley and Daryl Conner’s Emotional Cycle of Change.

    Identify critical points in the change curve:

    1. Honeymoon of “Uninformed Optimism”: There is usually tentative support and even enthusiasm for change before people have really felt or understood what it involves.
    2. Backlash of “Informed Pessimism” (leading to “Valley of Despair”): As change approaches or begins, people realize they’ve overestimated the benefits (or the speed at which benefits will be achieved) and underestimated the difficulty of change.
    3. Valley of Despair and beginning of “Hopeful Realism”: Eventually, sentiment bottoms out and people begin to accept the difficulty (or inevitability) of change.
    4. Bounce of “Informed Optimism”: People become more optimistic and supportive when they begin to see bright spots and early successes.
    5. Contentment of “Completion”: Change has been successfully adopted and benefits are being realized.

    Tailor a communications strategy for each stakeholder group

    Leveraging the stakeholder analyses you’ve already performed in steps 2.2 and 3.1, customize your communications strategy for the individual stakeholder groups.

    Think about where each of the groups falls within the Organizational Change Depth Scale (below) to determine the type of communications approach required. Don’t forget: the deeper the change, the tougher the job of managing change will be.

    Procedural Behavioral Interpersonal Vocational Cultural

    Position

    • Changing procedures requires clear explanation of what has changed and what people must do differently.
    • Avoid making people think wherever possible. Provide procedural instructions when and where people need them to ensure they remember.

    Incentivize

    • Changing behaviors requires breaking old habits and establishing new ones by adjusting the contexts in which people work.
    • Consider a range of both formal and informal incentives and disincentives, including objective rewards, contextual nudges, cues, and informal recognition

    Empathize

    • Changing people’s relationships (without damaging morale) requires showing empathy for disrupting what is often a significant source of their well-being.
    • Show that efforts have been made to mitigate disruption, and sacrifice is shared by leadership.

    Educate

    • Changing people’s roles requires providing ways to acquire knowledge and skills they need to learn and succeed.
    • Consider a range of learning options that includes both formal training (external or internal) and ongoing self-directed learning.

    Inspire

    • Changing values and norms in the organization (i.e. what type of things are seen as “good” or “normal”) requires deep disruption and persistence.
    • Think beyond incentives; change the vocabularies in which incentives are presented.

    Base your communications approaches on our Organizational Change Depth Scale

    Use the below “change chakras” as a quick guide for structuring your change messages.

    The image is a human, with specific areas of the body highlighted, with notes emerging from them. Above the head is a cloud, labelled Cultural Change/Inspire-Shape ideas and aspirations. The head is the next highlighted element, with notes reading Vocational Change/Educate-Develop their knowledge and skills. The heart is the next area, labelled with Interpersonal Change/Empathize-Appeal to their hearts. The stomach is pictured, with the notes Behavioral Change/Incentivize-Appeal to their appetites and instincts. The final section are the legs, with notes reading Procedural Change/Position-Provide clear direction and let people know where and when they’re needed.

    Categorize stakeholder groups in terms of communications requirements

    3.2.2 30 minutes

    Use the table below to document where your various stakeholder groups fall within the depth scale.
    Depth Levels Stakeholder Groups Tactics
    Procedural Position: Provide explanation of what exactly has changed and specific procedural instructions of what exactly people must do differently to ensure they remember to make adjustments as effortlessly as possible.
    Behavioral Incentivize: Break old habits and establish new ones by adjusting the context of formal and informal incentives (including objective rewards, contextual nudges, cues, and informal recognition).
    Interpersonal Empathize: Offer genuine recognition and support for disruptions of personal networks (a significant source of personal well-being) that may result from changing work relationships. Show how leadership shares the burden of such sacrifices.
    Vocational Educate: Provide a range of learning options (formal and self-directed) to provide the knowledge and skills people need to learn and succeed in changed roles.
    Cultural Inspire: Frame incentives in a vocabulary that reflects any shift in what types of things are seen as “good” or “normal” in the organization.

    The deeper the impact, the more complex the communication strategy

    Interposal, vocational, and cultural changes each require more nuanced approaches when communicating with stakeholders.

    Straightforward → Complex

    When managing interpersonal, vocational, or cultural changes, you will be required to incorporate more inspirational messaging and gestures of empathy than you typically might in a business communication.

    Communications that require an appeal to people’s emotions can be, of course, very powerful, but they are difficult to craft. As a result, oftentimes messages that are meant to inspire do the exact opposite, coming across as farfetched or meaningless platitudes, rather than evocative and actionable calls to change.

    Refer to the tactics below for assistance when crafting more complex change communications that require an appeal to people’s emotions and imaginations.

    • Tell a story. Describe a journey with a beginning (who we are and how we got here) and a destination (our goals and expected success in the future).
    • Convey an intuitive sense of direction. This helps people act appropriately without being explicitly told what to do.
    • Appeal to both emotion and reason. Make people want to be part of the change.
    • Balance abstract ideas with concrete facts. Writers call this “moving up and down the ladder of abstraction.” Without concrete images and facts, the vision will be meaninglessly vague. Without abstract ideas and principles, the vision will lack power to unite people and inspire broad support.
    • Be concise. Make your messages easy to communicate and remember in any situation.

    "Instead of resisting any emotion, the best way to dispel it is to enter it fully, embrace it and see through your resistance."

    Deepak Chopra

    Fine-tune change communications for each stakeholder or audience

    3.2.3 60 to 90 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s “Message Canvas” (see next slide) to help rationalize and elaborate the change vision for each group.

    Build upon the more high-level change story that you developed in step 1.1 by giving more specificity to the change for specific stakeholder groups.

    Questions to address in your communication strategy include: How will the change benefit the organization and its people? How have we confirmed there is a need for change? What would happen if we didn’t change? How will the change leverage existing strengths – what will stay the same? How will we know when we get to the desired state?

    Remember these guidelines to help your messages resonate:

    • People are busy and easily distracted. Tell people what they really need to know first, before you lose their attention.
    • Repetition is good. Remember the Aristotelian triptych: “Tell them what you’re going to tell them, then tell them, then tell them what you told them.”
    • Don’t use technical terms, jargon, or acronyms. Different groups in organizations tend to develop specialized vocabularies. Everybody grows so accustomed to using acronyms and jargon every day that it becomes difficult to notice how strange it sounds to outsiders. This is especially important when IT communicates with non-technical audiences. Don’t alienate your audience by talking at them in a strange language.
    • Test your message. Run focus groups or deliver communications to a test audience (which could be as simple as asking 2–3 people to read a draft) before delivering messages more broadly.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Change thy language, change thyself.

    Jargon, acronyms, and technical terms represent deeply entrenched cultural habits and assumptions.

    Continuing to use jargon or acronyms after a transition tends to drag people back to old ways of thinking and working.

    You don’t need to invent a new batch of buzzwords for every change (nor should you), but every change is an opportunity to listen for words and phrases that have lost their meaning through overuse and abuse.

    3.2.3 continued - Example “Message Canvas”

    The image is a screencapture of tab 6 of the Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool, which is a message canvas

    If there are multiple messages or impacts that need to be communicated to a single group or audience, you may need to do multiple Message Canvases per group. Refer back to your Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to help inform the stakeholder groups and messages that this activity should address.

    Go to tab 6 of the Organizational Change Impact Analysis Toolfor multiple message canvas template boxes that you can use. These messages can then help inform your communication plan on tab 7 of that tool.

    Determine methods for communications delivery

    Review your options for communicating your change. This slide covers traditional methods of communication, while the following slides cover some options for multimedia mass-communications.

    Method Best Practices
    Email Email announcements are necessary for every organizational change initiative but are never sufficient. Treat email as a formalizing medium, not a medium of effective communication when organizational change is concerned. Use email to invite people to in-person meetings, make announcements across teams and geographical areas at the same time, and share formal details.
    Team Meeting Team meetings help sell change. Body language and other in-person cues are invaluable when trying to influence people. Team meetings also provide an opportunity to gauge a group’s response to an announcement and gives the audience an opportunity to ask questions and get clarification.
    One-on-One One-on-ones are more effective than team meetings in their power to influence and gauge individual responses, but aren’t feasible for large numbers of stakeholders. Use one-on-ones selectively: identify key stakeholders and influencers who are most able to either advocate change on your behalf or provide feedback (or both).
    Internal Site / Repository Internal sites and repositories help sustain change by making knowledge available after the implementation. People don’t retain information very well when it isn’t relevant to them. Much of their training will be forgotten if they don’t apply that knowledge for several weeks or months. Use internal sites and repositories for how-to guides and standard operating procedures.

    Review multimedia communication methods for reaching wider audiences in the organization

    Method Best Practices
    User Interfaces User interface (UI) design is overlooked as a communication method. Often a simple UI refinement with the clearer prompts or warnings is more effective and efficient than additional training and repeated email reminders.
    Social Media Social media is widely and deeply embraced by people publicly, and is increasingly useful within organizations. Look for ways to leverage existing internal social tools. Avoid trying to introduce new social channels to communicate change unless social transformation is within the scope of the core project’s goals; the social tool itself might become as much of an organizational change management challenge as the original project.
    Posters & Marketing Collateral Posters and other marketing collateral are common communication tools in retail and hospitality industries that change managers in other industries often don’t think of. Making key messages a vivid, visual part of people’s everyday environment is a very effective way to communicate. On the down side, marketing collateral requires professional design skills and can be costly to create. Professional copywriting is also advisable to ensure your message resonates.
    Video Videos are well worth the cost to produce when the change is transformational in nature, as in cultural changes. Videos are useful for both communicating the vision and as part of the training plan.

    Document communication methods and build the Communications Delivery Plan

    3.2.4 30 minutes

    1. Determine when communications need to be delivered for each stakeholder group.
    2. Select the most appropriate delivery methods for each group and for each message.
    • Meetings and presentations
    • Email/broadcast
    • Intranet and other internal channels (e.g. internal social network)
    • Open houses and workshops
  • Designate who will deliver the messages.
  • Develop plans to follow up for feedback and evaluation (Step 3.2.5).
  • The image is a screenshot of the Stakeholder/Audience section of the Transition Plan Template.

    This is a screenshot from the “Stakeholder/Audience” section of Info-Tech’s Transition Plan Template. Use the template to document your communication strategy for each audience and your delivery plan.

    "The role of project communication is to inspire, instigate, inform or educate and ultimately lead to a desired action. Project communication is not a well presented collection of words; rather it is something that propels a series of actions."

    Sidharth Thakur

    Info-Tech Insight

    Repetition is crucial. People need to be exposed to a message 7 times before it sticks. Using a variety of delivery formats helps ensure people will notice and remember key messages. Mix things up to keep employees engaged and looking forward to the next update.

    Define the feedback and evaluation process to ensure an agile response to resistance

    3.2.5 46 to 60 minutes

    1. Designate where/when on the roadmap the project team will proactively evaluate progress/success and elicit feedback in order to identify emerging challenges and opportunities.
    2. Create checklists to review at key milestones to ensure plans are being executed. Review…
    • Key project implementation milestones (i.e. confirm successful deployment/installation).
    • Quick wins identified in the impact analysis and determined in the transition plan (see the following slides for advice in leveraging quick wins).
  • Ensure there is immediate follow-up on communications and training:
    • Confirm understanding and acceptance of vision and action plan – utilize surveys and questionnaires to elicit feedback.
    • Validate people’s acquisition of required knowledge and skills.
    • Identify emerging/unforeseen challenges and opportunities.
  • "While creating and administering a survey represent(s) additional time and cost to the project, there are a number of benefits to be considered: 1) Collecting this information forces regular and systematic review of the project as it is perceived by the impacted organizations, 2) As the survey is used from project to project it can be improved and reused, 3) The survey can quickly collect feedback from a large part of the organization, increasing the visibility of the project and reducing unanticipated or unwelcome reactions."

    – Claire Schwartz

    Use the survey and questionnaire templates on the following two slides for assistance in eliciting feedback. Record the evaluation and feedback gathering process in the Transition Plan Template.

    Sample stakeholder questionnaire

    Use email to distribute a questionnaire (such as the example below) to project stakeholders to elicit feedback.

    In addition to receiving invaluable opinions from key stakeholders and the frontline workers, utilizing questionnaires will also help involve employees in the change, making them feel more engaged and part of the change process.

    Interviewee Date
    Stakeholder Group Interviewer
    Question Response Notes
    How do you think this change will affect you?
    How do you think this change will affect the organization?
    How long do you expect the change to take?
    What do you think might cause the project/change to fail?
    What do you think are the most critical success factors?

    Sample survey template

    Similar to a questionnaire, a survey is a great way to assess the lay of the land in terms of your org change efforts and the likelihood of adoption.

    Using a free online survey tool like Survey Monkey, Typeform, or Google Forms, surveys are quick and easy to generate and deploy. Use the below example as a template to build from.

    Use survey and questionnaire feedback as an occasion to revisit the Impact Analysis Tool and reassess the impacts and roadblocks based on hard feedback.

    To what degree do you agree or disagree with each of the following statements?

    1=Strongly Disagree, 2=Disagree, 3=Somewhat Disagree, 4=Somewhat Agree, 5=Agree, 6=Strongly Agree

    1. I understand why [this change] is happening.
    2. I agree with the decision to [implement this change].
    3. I have the knowledge and tools needed to successfully go through [this change].
    4. Leadership/management is fully committed to the change.
    5. [This change] will be a success.

    Rate the impact of this change.

    1=Very Negative, 2=Negative, 3=Somewhat Negative, 4=Somewhat Positive, 5=Positive, 6=Very Positive

    1. On you personally.
    2. On your team/department/unit.
    3. On the organization as a whole.
    4. On people leading the change.

    Develop plans to leverage support and deal with resistance, objections, and fatigue

    Assess the “Faces of Change” to review the emotions provoked by the change in order to proactively manage resistors and engage supporters.

    The slides that follow walk you through activities to assess the different “faces of change” around your OCM initiative and to perform an objections handling exercise.

    Assessing people’s emotional responses to the change will enable the PMO and transition team to:

    • Brainstorm possible questions, objections, suggestions, and concerns from each audience.
    • Develop responses to questions, objections, and concerns.
    • Revise the communications messaging and plan to include proactive objections handling.
    • Re-position objections and suggestions as questions to plan for proactively communicating responses and objections to show people that you understand their point of view.
    • Develop a plan with clearly defined responsibility for regularly updating and communicating the objections handling document. Active Subversion Quiet Resistance Vocal Skepticism Neutrality / Uncertainty Vocal Approval Quiet Support Active Leadership
    Hard Work Vs. Tough Work

    Carol Beatty’s distinction between “easy work,” “hard work,” and “tough work” can be revealing in terms of the high failure rate on many change initiatives. (“The Tough Work of Managing Change.” Queen’s University IRC. 2015.)

    • Easy work includes administrative tasks like scheduling meetings and training sessions or delivering progress reports.
    • Hard work includes more abstract efforts like estimating costs/benefit or defining requirements.
    • Tough work involves managing people and emotions, i.e. providing leadership through setbacks, and managing resistance and conflict.

    That is what makes organizational change “tough,” as opposed to merely hard. Managing change requires mental and emotional toughness to deal with uncertainty, ambiguity, and conflict.

    Assess the full range of support and resistance to change

    3.2.6 20 minutes

    Categorize the feedback received from stakeholder groups or individual stakeholders across the “faces of change” spectrum.

    Use the table below to document where different stakeholders and stakeholder groups fall within the spectrum.

    Response Symptoms Examples
    Active Subversion Publicly or privately disparaging the transition (in some cases privately disparaging while pretending to support); encouraging people to continue doing things the old way or to leave the organization altogether. Group/Name
    Quiet Resistance Refusing to adopt change, continuing to do things the old way (including seemingly trivial or symbolic things). Non-participative. Group/Name
    Vocal Skepticism Asking questions; questioning the why, what, and how of change, but continuing to show willingness to participate and try new things. Group/Name
    Neutrality / Uncertainty Non-vocal participation, perhaps with some negative body language, but continuing to show tacit willingness to try new things. Group/Name
    Vocal Approval Publicly and privately signaling buy-in for the change. Group/Name
    Quiet Support Actively helping to enable change to succeed without necessarily being a cheerleader or trying to rally others around the transition. Group/Name
    Active Leadership Visibly championing the change and helping to rally others around the transition. Group/Name

    Review strategies and tactics for engaging different responses

    Use the below tactics across the “faces of change” spectrum to help inform the PMO’s responses to sources of objection and resistance and its tactics for leveraging support.

    Response Engagement Strategies and Tactics
    Active Subversion Firmly communicate the boundaries of acceptable response to change: resistance is a natural response to change, but actively encouraging other people to resist change should not be tolerated. Active subversion often indicates the need to find a new role or depart the organization.
    Quiet Resistance Resistance is a natural response to change. Use the Change Curve to accommodate a moderate degree and period of resistance. Use the OCM Depth Scale to ensure communications strategies address the irrational sources of resistance.
    Vocal Skepticism Skepticism can be a healthy sign. Skeptics tend to be invested in the organization’s success and can be turned into vocal and active supporters if they feel their questions and concerns have been heard and addressed.
    Neutrality / Uncertainty Most fence-sitters will approve and support change when they start to see concrete benefits and successes, but are equally likely to become skeptics and resisters when they see signs of failure or a critical mass of skepticism, resistance, or simply ambivalence.
    Vocal Approval Make sure that espoused approval for change isn’t masking resistance or subversion. Engage vocal supporters to convert them into active enablers or champions of change.
    Quiet Support Engage quiet supporters to participate where their skills or social and political capital might help enable change across the organization. This could either be formal or informal, as too much formal engagement can invite minor disagreements and slow down change.
    Active Leadership Engage some of the active cheerleaders and champions of change to help deliver communications (and in some cases training) to their respective groups or teams.

    Don’t let speed bumps become roadblocks

    What If... Do This: To avoid:
    You aren’t on board with the change? Fake it to your staff, then communicate with your superiors to gather the information you need to buy in to the change. Starting the change process off on the wrong foot. If your staff believe that you don’t buy in to the change, but you are asking them to do so, they are not going to commit to it.
    When you introduce the change, a saboteur throws a tantrum? If the employee storms out, let them. If they raise uninformed objections in the meeting that are interrupting your introduction, ask them to leave and meet with them privately later on. Schedule an ad hoc one-on-one meeting. A debate at the announcement. It’s an introduction to the change and questions are good, but it’s not the time for debate. Leave this for the team meetings, focus groups, and one-on-ones when all staff have digested the information.
    Your staff don’t trust you? Don’t make the announcement. Find an Enthusiast or another manager that you trust to make the announcement. Your staff blocking any information you give them or immediately rejecting anything you ask of them. Even if you are telling the absolute truth, if your staff don’t trust you, they won’t believe anything you say.
    An experienced skeptic has seen this tried before and states it won’t work? Leverage their experience after highlighting how the situation and current environment is different. Ask the employee what went wrong before. Reinventing a process that didn’t work in the past and frustrating a very valuable segment of your staff. Don’t miss out on the wealth of information this Skeptic has to offer.

    Use the Objections Handling Template on the next slide to brainstorm specific objections and forms of resistance and to strategize about the more effective responses and mitigation strategies.

    Copy these objections and responses into the designated section of the Transition Plan Template. Continue to revise objections and responses there if needed.

    Objections Handling Template

    3.2.7 45 to 60 minutes

    Objection Source of Objection PMO Response
    We tried this two years ago. Vocal skepticism Enabling processes and technologies needed time to mature. We now have the right process discipline, technologies, and skills in place to support the system. In addition, a dedicated role has been created to oversee all aspects of the system during and after implementation.
    Why aren’t we using [another solution]? Uncertainty We spent 12 months evaluating, testing, and piloting solutions before selecting [this solution]. A comprehensive report on the selection process is available on the project’s internal site [here].

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is insight in resistance. The individuals best positioned to provide insight and influence change positively are also best positioned to create resistance. These people should be engaged throughout the implementation process. Their insights will very likely identify risks, barriers, and opportunities that need to be addressed.

    Make sure the action plan includes opportunities to highlight successes, quick wins, and bright spots

    Highlighting quick wins or “bright spots” helps you go from communicating change to more persuasively demonstrating change.

    Specifically, quick wins help:

    • Demonstrate that change is possible.
    • Prove that change produces positive results.
    • Recognize and reward people’s efforts.

    Take the time to assess and plan quick wins as early as possible in the planning process. You can revisit the impact assessment for assistance in identifying potential quick wins; more so, work with the project team and other stakeholders to help identify quick wins as they emerge throughout the planning and execution phases.

    Make sure you highlight bright spots as part of the larger story and vision around change. The purpose is to continue to build or sustain momentum and morale through the transition.

    "The quick win does not have to be profound or have a long-term impact on your organization, but needs to be something that many stakeholders agree is a good thing… You can often identify quick wins by simply asking stakeholders if they have any quick-win recommendations that could result in immediate benefits to the organization."

    John Parker

    Tips for identifying quick wins (Source: John Parker, “How Business Analysts can Identify Quick Wins,” 2013):
    • Brainstorm with your core team.
    • Ask technical and business stakeholders for ideas.
    • Observe daily work of users and listen to users for problems and opportunities; quick wins often come from the rank and file, not from the top.
    • Review and analyze user support trouble tickets; this can be a wealth of information.
    • Be open to all suggestions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Stay positive. Our natural tendency is to look for what’s not working and try to fix it. While it’s important to address negatives, it’s equally important to highlight positives to keep people committed and motivated around change.

    Document the outcomes of this step in the Transition Plan Template

    3.2.8 45 minutes

    Consolidate and refine communication plan requirements for each stakeholder and group affected by change.

    Upon completion of the activities in this step, the PMO Director is responsible for ensuring that outcomes have been documented and recorded in the Transition Plan Template. Activities to be recorded include:

    • Stakeholder Overview
    • Communications Schedule Activity
    • Communications Delivery
    • Objections Handling
    • The Feedback and Evaluation Process

    Going forward, successful change will require that many responsibilities be delegated beyond the PMO and core transition team.

    • Delegate responsibilities to HR, managers, and team members for:
      • Advocating the importance of change.
      • Communicating progress toward project milestones and goals.
      • Developing HR and training plan.
    • Ensure sponsorship stays committed and active during and after the transition.
      • Leadership visibility throughout the execution and follow-up of the project is needed to remind people of the importance of change and the organization’s commitment to project success.

    Download Info-Tech’s Transition Plan Template.

    "Whenever you let up before the job is done, critical momentum can be lost and regression may follow." – John Kotter, Leading Change

    Step 3.3: Establish HR and Training Plans

    Phase 3 - 3.3

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Analyze HR requirements for involvement in training.
    • Outline appropriate HR and training timelines.
    • Develop training plan requirements across different stakeholder groups.
    • Define training content.
    • Assess skills required to support the change and review options for filling HR gaps.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Transition Team
    • HR Personnel
    • Project Sponsor
    Outcomes of this step
    • A training plan
    • Assessment of skill required to support the change

    Make sure skills, roles, and teams are ready for change

    Ensure that the organization has the infrastructure in place and the right skills availability to support long-term adoption of the change.

    The PMO’s OCM approach should leverage organizational design and development capabilities already in place.

    Recommendations in this section are meant to help the PMO and transition team understand HR and training plan activities in the context of the overall transition process.

    Where organizational design and development capabilities are low, the following steps will help you do just enough planning around HR, and training and development to enable the specific change.

    In some cases the need for improved OCM will reveal the need for improved organizational design and development capabilities.

    • Required Participants for this Step: PMO Leader; PMO staff; Project manager.
    • Recommended Participants for this Step: Project Sponsor; HR personnel.

    This section will walk you through the basic steps of developing HR, training, and development plans to support and enable the change.

    For comprehensive guidance and tools on role, job, and team design, see Info-Tech’s Transform IT Through Strategic Organizational Design blueprint.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t make training a hurdle to adoption. Training and other disruptions take time and energy away from work. Ineffective training takes credibility away from change leaders and seems to validate the efforts of saboteurs and skeptics. The PMO needs to ensure that training sessions are as focused and useful as possible.

    Analyze HR requirements to ensure efficient use of HR and project stakeholder time

    3.3.1 30-60 minutes

    Refer back to Activity 3.2.4. Use the placement of each stakeholder group on the Organizational Change Depth Scale (below) to determine the type of HR and training approach required. Don’t impose training rigor where it isn’t required.

    Procedural Behavioral Interpersonal Vocational Cultural
    Simply changing procedures doesn’t generally require HR involvement (unless HR procedures are affected). Changing behaviors requires breaking old habits and establishing new ones, often using incentives and disincentives. Changing teams, roles, and locations means changing people’s relationships, which adds disruption to people’s lives and challenges for any change initiative. Changing people’s roles and responsibilities requires providing ways to acquire knowledge and skills they need to learn and succeed. Changing values and norms in the organization (i.e. what type of things are seen as “good” or “normal”) requires deep disruption and persistence.
    Typically no HR involvement. HR consultation recommended to help change incentives, compensation, and training strategies. HR consultation strongly recommended to help define roles, jobs, and teams. HR responsibility recommended to develop training and development programs. HR involvement recommended.

    22%

    In a recent survey of 276 large and midsize organizations, eighty-seven percent of survey respondents trained their managers to “manage change,” but only 22% felt the training was truly effective. (Towers Watson)

    Outline appropriate HR and training timelines

    3.3.2 15 minutes

    Revisit the high-level project schedule from steps 1.2.4 and 3.4.1 to create a tentative timeline for HR and training activities.

    Revise this timeline throughout the implementation process, and refine the timing and specifics of these activities as you move from the development to the deployment phase.

    Project Milestone Milestone Time Frame HR/Training Activities Activity Timing Notes
    Business Case Approval
    • Consulted to estimate timeline and cost
    Pilot Go-Live
    • Train groups affected by pilot
    Full Rollout Approval
    • Consulted to estimate timeline and cost
    Full Rollout
    • Train the trainers for full-scale rollout
    Benefits Assessment
    • Consulted to provide actual time and costs

    "The reason it’s going to hurt is you’re going from a state where you knew everything to one where you’re starting over again."

    – BA, Natural Resources Company

    Develop the training plan to ensure that the right goals are set, and that training is properly timed and communicated

    3.3.3 60 minutes

    Use the final tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook, “7. Training Requirements,” to begin fleshing out a training plan for project stakeholders.

    The image is a screencapture of the final tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook, titled Training Requirements.

    The table will automatically generate a list of stakeholders based on your stakeholder analysis.

    If your stakeholder list has grown or changed since the stakeholder engagement exercise in step 3.1, update the “Stakeholder List” tab in the tool.

    Estimate when training can begin, when training needs to be completed, and the total hours required.

    Training too early and too late are both common mistakes. Training too late hurts morale and creates risks. Training too early is often wasted and creates the need for retraining as knowledge and skills are lost without immediate relevance to their work.

    Brainstorm or identify potential opportunities to leverage for training (such as using existing resources and combining multiple training programs).

    Review the Change Management Impact Analysis to assess skills and knowledge required for each group in order for the change to succeed.

    Depending on the type of change being introduced, you may need to have more in-depth conversations with technical advisors, project management staff, and project sponsors concerning gaps and required content.

    Define training content and make key logistical decisions concerning training delivery for staff and users

    3.3.4 30-60 minutes

    Ultimately, the training plan will have to be put into action, which will require that the key logistical decisions are made concerning content and training delivery.

    The image is a screencapture of the Training Plan section of the Transition Plan Template.

    1. Use the “Training Plan” section in Info-Tech’s Transition Plan Template to document details of your training plan: schedules, resources, rooms, and materials required, etc.
    2. Designate who is responsible for developing the training content details. Responsibilities will include:
      • Developing content modules.
      • Determining the appropriate delivery model for each audience and content module (e.g. online course, classroom, outsourced, job shadowing, video tutorials, self-learning).
      • Finding and booking resources, locations, equipment, etc.

    “95% of learning leaders from organizations that are very effective at implementing important change initiatives find best practices by partnering with a company or an individual with experience in the type of change, twice as often as ineffective organizations.”

    Source: Implementing and Supporting Training for Important Change Initiatives.

    Training content should be developed and delivered by people with training experience and expertise, working closely with subject matter experts. In the absence of such individuals, partnering with experienced trainers is a cost that should be considered.

    Assess skills required to support the change that are currently absent or in short supply

    3.3.5 15 to 30 minutes

    The long-term success of the change is contingent on having the resources to maintain and support the tool, process, or business change being implemented. Otherwise, resourcing shortfalls could threaten the integrity of the new way of doing things post-change, threatening people’s trust and faith in the validity of the change as a whole.

    Use the table below to assess and record skills requirements. Refer to the tactics on the next slide for assistance in filling gaps.

    Skill Required Description of Need Possible Resources Recommended Next Steps Timeline
    Mobile Dev Users expect mobile access to services. We need knowledge of various mobile platforms, languages or frameworks, and UX/UI requirements for mobile.
    • Train web team
    • Outsource
    • Analyze current and future mobile requirements.
    Probably Q1 2015
    DBAs Currently have only one DBA, which creates a bottleneck. We need some DBA redundancy to mitigate risk of single point of failure.
    • Redeploy and train member of existing technology services team.
    • Hire or contract new resources.
    • Analyze impact of redeploying existing resources.
    Q3 2014

    Review your options for filling HR gaps

    Options: Benefits: Drawbacks:
    Redeploy staff internally
    • Retains firm-specific knowledge.
    • Eliminates substantial costs of recruiting and terminating employees.
    • Mitigates risk; reduces the number of unknowns that come with acquiring talent.
    • Employees could already be fully or over-allocated.
    • Employees might lack the skills needed for the new or enhanced positions.
    Outsource
    • Best for addressing short-term, urgent needs, especially when the skills and knowledge required are too new or unfamiliar to manage internally.
    • Risk of sharing sensitive information with third parties.
    • Opportunity cost of not investing in knowledge and skills internally.
    Contract
    • Best when you are uncertain how long needs for particular skills or budget for extra capacity will last.
    • Diminished loyalty, engagement, and organizational culture.
    • Similar drawbacks as with outsourcing.
    Hire externally
    • Best for addressing long-term needs for strategic or core skills.
    • Builds capacity and expertise to support growing organizations for the long term.
    • High cost of recruiting and onboarding.
    • Uncertainty: risk that new hires might have misrepresented their skills or won’t fit culturally.
    • Commitment to paying for skills that might diminish in demand and value over time.
    • Economic uncertainty: high cost of layoffs and buyouts.

    Report HR and training plan status to the transition team

    3.3.6 10 minutes (and ongoing thereafter)

    Ensure that any changes or developments made to HR and training plans are captured in the Transition Plan Template where applicable.
    1. Upon completion of the activities in this step, ensure that the “Training Plan” section of the template reflects outcomes and decisions made during the preceding activities.
    2. Assign ongoing RACI roles for informing the transition team of HR and training plan changes; similarly define accountabilities for keeping the template itself up to date.
    • Record these roles within the template itself under the “Roles & Responsibilities” section.
  • Be sure to schedule a date for eliciting training feedback in the “Training Schedule” section of the template.
    • A simple survey, such as those discussed in step 3.2, can go a long way in both helping stakeholders feel more involved in the change, and in making sure training mistakes and weaknesses are not repeated again and again on subsequent change initiatives.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Try more ad hoc training methods to offset uncertain project timelines.

    One of the top challenges organizations face around training is getting it timed right, given the changes to schedule and delays that occur on many projects.

    One tactic is to take a more ad hoc approach to training, such as making IT staff available in centralized locations after implementation to address staff issues as they come up.

    This will not only help eliminate the waste that can come from poorly timed and ineffective training sessions, but it will also help with employee morale, giving individuals a sense that they haven’t been left alone to navigate unfamiliar processes or technologies.

    Adoption can be difficult for some, but the cause is often confusion and misunderstanding

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Manufacturing

    Source Info-Tech Client

    Challenge
    • The strategy team responsible for the implementation of a new operation manual for the subsidiaries of a global firm was monitoring the progress of newly acquired firms as the implementation of the manual began.
    • They noticed that one department in a distant location was not meeting the new targets or fulfilling the reporting requirements on staff progress.
    Solution
    • The strategy team representative for the subsidiary firm went to the manager leading the department that was slow to adopt the changes.
    • When asked, the manager insisted that he did not have the time or resources to implement all of these changes while maintaining the operation of the department.
    • With true business value in mind, the manager said, they chose to keep the plant running.
    Results
    • The representative from the strategy team was surprised to find that the manager was having such trouble fitting the changes into daily operations as the changes were the daily operations.
    • The representative took the time to go through the new operation manual with the manager and explain that the changes replaced daily operations and were not additions to them.

    "The cause of slow adoption is often not anger or denial, but a genuine lack of understanding and need for clarification. Avoid snap decisions about a lack of adoption until staff understand the details." – IT Manager

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.2 Undergo a stakeholder analysis to ensure positive stakeholder engagement

    Move away from a command-and-control approach to change by working with the analyst to develop a strategy that engages stakeholders in the change, making them feel like they are a part of it.

    3.2.3 Develop a stakeholder sentiment-sensitive communications strategy

    Work with the analyst to fine-tune the stakeholder messaging across various stakeholder responses to change.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    3.2.5 Define a stakeholder feedback and evaluation process

    Utilize analyst experience and perspective in order to develop strategy for effectively evaluating stakeholder feedback early enough that resistance and suggestions can be accommodated with the OCM strategy and project plan.

    3.2.7 Develop a strategy to cut off resistance to change

    Utilize analyst experience and perspective in order to develop an objections handling strategy to deal with resistance, objections, and fatigue.

    3.3.4 Develop the training plan to ensure that the right goals are set, and that training is properly timed and communicated

    Receive custom analyst insights on rightsizing training content and timing your training sessions effectively.

    Phase 4

    Establish a Post-Project Benefits Attainment Process

    Phase 4 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 4: Establish a Post-Project Benefits Attainment Process

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 to 2 weeks

    Step 4.1: Determine accountabilities for benefits attainment

    Discuss these issues with analyst:

    • Accountability for tracking the business outcomes of the project post-completion is frequently opaque, with little or no allocated resourcing.
    • As a result, projects may get completed, but their ROI to the organization is not tracked or understood.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Perform a post-implementation project review of the pilot OCM initiative.
    • Assign post-project benefits tracking accountabilities.
    • Implement a benefits tracking process and tool.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool
    • Activity 4.1.2: “Assign ownership for realizing benefits after the project is closed”
    • Activity 4.1.3: “Define a post-project benefits tracking process”

    Step 4.1: Determine accountabilities for benefits attainment

    Phase 4 - 4.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Conduct a post-implementation review of pilot OCM project.
    • Assign ownership for realizing benefits after the project is closed.
    • Define a post-project benefits tracking process.
    • Implement a tool to help monitor and track benefits over the long term.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Project Sponsor
    • Project managers
    • Business analyst
    • Additional IT/PMO staff
    Outcomes of this step
    • Appropriate assignment of accountabilities for tracking benefits after the project has closed
    • A process for tracking benefits over the long-run
    • A benefits tracking tool

    Project benefits result from change

    A PMO that facilitates change is one that helps drive benefits attainment long after the project team has moved onto the next initiative.

    Organizations rarely close the loop on project benefits once a project has been completed.

    • The primary cause of this is accountability for tracking business outcomes post-project is almost always poorly defined, with little or no allocated resourcing.
    • Even organizations that define benefits well often neglect to manage them once the project is underway. If benefits realization is not monitored, the organization will miss opportunities to close the gap on lagging benefits and deliver expected project value.
    • It is commonly understood that the project manager and sponsor will need to work together to shift focus to benefits as the project progresses, but this rarely happens as effectively as it should.

    With all this in mind, in this step we will round out our PMO-driven org change process by defining how the PMO can help to better facilitate the benefits realization process.

    This section will walk you through the basic steps of developing a benefits attainment process through the PMO.

    For comprehensive guidance and tools, see Info-Tech’s Establish the Benefits Realization Process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Two of a kind. OCM, like benefits realization, is often treated as “nice to have” rather than “must do.” These two processes are both critical to real project success; define benefits properly during intake and let OCM take the reigns after the project kicks off.

    The benefits realization process spans the project lifecycle

    Benefits realization ensures that the benefits defined in the business case are used to define a project’s expected value, and to facilitate the delivery of this value after the project is closed. The process begins when benefits are first defined in the business case, continues as benefits are managed through project execution, and ends when the loop is closed and the benefits are actually realized after the project is closed.

    Benefits Realization
    Define Manage Realize
    Initial Request Project Kick Off *Solution Is Deployed
    Business Case Approved Project Execution Solution Maintenance
    PM Assigned *Project Close Solution Decommissioned

    *For the purposes of this step, we will limit our focus to the PMO’s responsibilities for benefits attainment at project close-out and in the project’s aftermath to ensure that responsibilities for tracking business outcomes post-project have been properly defined and resourced.

    Ultimate project success hinges on a fellowship of the benefits

    At project close-out, stewardship of the benefits tracking process should pass from the project team to the project sponsor.

    As the project closes, responsibility for benefits tracking passes from the project team to the project sponsor. In many cases, the PMO will need to function as an intermediary here, soliciting the sponsor’s involvement when the time comes.

    The project manager and team will likely move onto another project and the sponsor (in concert with the PMO) will be responsible for measuring and reporting benefits realization.

    As benefits realization is measured, results should be collated by the PMO to validate results and help flag lagging benefits.

    The activities that follow in this step will help define this process.

    The PMO should ensure the participation of the project sponsor, the project manager, and any applicable members of the business side and the project team for this step.

    Ideally, the CIO and steering committee members should be involved as well. At the very least, they should be informed of the decisions made as soon as possible.

    Initiation-Planning-Execution-Monitoring & Controlling-Closing

    Conduct post-implementation review for your pilot OCM project

    4.1.1 60 minutes

    The post-project phase is the most challenging because the project team and sponsor will likely be busy with other projects and work.

    Conducting a post-implementation review for every project will force sponsors and other stakeholders to assess actual benefits realization and identify lagging benefits.

    If the project is not achieving its benefits, a remediation plan should be created to attempt to capture these benefits as soon as possible.

    Agenda Item
    Assess Benefits Realization
    • Compare benefits realized to projected benefits.
    • Compare benefit measurements with benefit targets.
    Assess Quality
    • Performance
    • Availability
    • Reliability
    Discuss Ongoing Issues
    • What has gone wrong?
    • Frequency
    • Cause
    • Resolution
    Discuss Training
    • Was training adequate?
    • Is any additional training required?
    Assess Ongoing Costs
    • If there are ongoing costs, were they accounted for in the project budget?
    Assess Customer Satisfaction
    • Review stakeholder surveys.

    Assign ownership for realizing benefits after the project is closed

    4.1.2 45 to 60 minutes

    The realization stage is the most difficult to execute and oversee. The project team will have moved on, and unless someone takes accountability for measuring benefits, progress will not be measured. Use the sample RACI table below to help define roles and responsibilities for post-project benefits attainment.

    Process Step Responsible Accountable Consulted Informed
    Track project benefits realization and document progress Project sponsor Project sponsor PMO (can provide tracking tools and guidance), and directors or managers in the affected business unit who will help gather necessary metrics for the sponsor (e.g. report an increase in sales 3 months post-project) PMO (can collect data and consolidate benefits realization progress across projects)
    Identify lagging benefits and perform root cause analysis Project sponsor and PMO Project sponsor and PMO Affected business unit CIO, IT steering committee
    Adjust benefits realization plan as needed Project sponsor Project sponsor Project manager, affected business units Any stakeholders impacted by changes to plan
    Report project success PMO PMO Project sponsor IT and project steering committees

    Info-Tech Insight

    A business accountability: Ultimately, the sponsor must help close this loop on benefits realization. The PMO can provide tracking tools and gather and report on results, but the sponsor must hold stakeholders accountable for actually measuring the success of projects.

    Define a post-project benefits tracking process

    4.1.3 45 minutes

    While project sponsors should be accountable for measuring actual benefits realization after the project is closed, the PMO can provide monitoring tools and it should collect measurements and compare results across the portfolio.

    Steps in a benefits tracking process.

    1. Collate the benefits of all the projects in your portfolio. Document each project’s benefits, with the metrics, targets, and realization timelines of each project in a central location.
    2. Collect and document metric measurements. The benefit owner is responsible for tracking actual realization and reporting it to the individual(s) tracking portfolio results.
    3. Create a timeline and milestones for benefits tracking. Establish a high-level timeline for assessing benefits, and put reminders in calendars accordingly, to ensure that commitments do not fall off stakeholders’ radars.
    4. Flag lagging benefits for further investigation. Perform root cause analysis to then find out why a benefit is behind schedule, and what can be done to address the problem.

    "Checking the results of a decision against its expectations shows executives what their strengths are, where they need to improve, and where they lack knowledge or information."
    Peter Drucker

    Implement a tool to help monitor and track benefits over the long term

    4.1.4 Times will vary depending on organizational specifics of the inputs

    Download Info-Tech’s Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool to help solidify the process from the previous step.

    1. Document each project’s benefits, with the metrics, targets, and realization timelines. Tab 1 of the tool is a data entry sheet to capture key portfolio benefit forecasts throughout the project.
    2. Collect and document metric measurements. Tab 2 is where the PMO, with data from the project sponsors, can track actuals month after month post-implementation.
    3. Flag lagging benefits for further investigation. Tab 3 provides a dashboard that makes it easy to flag lagging benefits. The dashboard produces a variety of meaningful benefit reports including a status indication for each project’s benefits and an assessment of business unit performance.

    Continue to increase accountability for benefits and encourage process participation

    Simply publishing a set of best practices will not have an impact unless accountability is consistently enforced. Increasing accountability should not be complicated. Focus on publicly recognizing benefit success. As the process matures, you should be able to use benefits as a more frequent input to your budgeting process.

    • Create an internal challenge. Publish the dashboard from the Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool and highlight the top 5 or 10 projects that are on track to achieve benefits. Recognize the sponsors and project team members. Recognizing individuals for benefits success will get people excited and encourage an increased focus on benefits.
    • With executive level involvement, the PMO could help institute a bonus structure based on benefits realization. For instance, project teams could be rewarded with bonuses for achieving benefits. Decide upon a set post-project timeline for determining this bonus. For example, 6 months after every project goes live, measure benefits realization. If the project has realized benefits, or is on track to realize benefits, the PM should be given a bonus to split with the team.
    • Include level of benefits realization in the performance reviews of project team members.
    • As the process matures, start decreasing budgets according to the monetary benefits documented in the business case (if you are not already doing so). If benefits are being used as inputs to the budgeting process, sponsors will need to ensure that they are defined properly.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t forget OCM best practices throughout the benefits tracking process. If benefits are lagging, the PMO should revisit phase 3 of this blueprint to consider how challenges to adoption are negatively impacting benefits attainment.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    4.1.2 Assign appropriate ownership and ensure adequate resourcing for realizing benefits after the project is closed

    Get custom insights into how the benefits tracking process should be carried out post-project at your organization to ensure that intended project outcomes are effectively monitored and, in the long run, achieved.

    4.1.4 Implement a benefits tracking tool

    Let our analysts customize a home-grown benefits tracking tool for your organization to ensure that the PMO and project sponsors are able to easily track benefits over time and effectively pivot on lagging benefits.

    Phase 5

    Solidify the PMO’s Role as Change Leader

    Phase 5 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 5: Solidify the PMO’s role as change leader

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 to 2 weeks

    Step 5.1: Institute an organizational change management playbook

    Discuss these issues with an analyst:

    • With the pilot OCM initiative complete, the PMO will need to roll out an OCM program to accommodate all of the organization’s projects.
    • The PMO will need to facilitate organization-wide OCM accountabilities – whether it’s the PMO stepping into the role of OCM leader, or other appropriate accountabilities being assigned.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Review the success of the pilot OCM initiative.
    • Define organizational roles and responsibilities for change management.
    • Formalize the Organizational Change Management Playbook.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Change Management Playbook
    • Activity 5.1.1: “Review lessons learned to improve organizational change management as a core discipline of the PMO”
    • Activity 5.1.3: “Define ongoing organizational roles and responsibilities for change management”

    Step 5.1: Institute an organizational change management playbook

    Phase 5 - 5.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Review lessons learned to improve OCM as a core discipline of the PMO.
    • Monitor organizational capacity for change.
    • Define organizational roles and responsibilities for change management.
    • Formalize the Organizational Change Management Playbook.
    • Assess the value and success of the PMO’s OCM efforts.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Required: PMO Director; PMO staff
    • Strongly recommended: CIO and other members of the executive layer
    Outcomes of this step
    • A well-defined organizational mandate for change management, whether through the PMO or another appropriate stakeholder group
    • Definition of organizational roles and responsibilities for change management
    • An OCM playbook
    • A process and tool for ongoing assessment of the value of the PMO’s OCM activities

    Who, in the end, is accountable for org change success?

    We return to a question that we started with in the Executive Brief of this blueprint: who is accountable for organizational change?

    If nobody has explicit accountability for organizational change on each project, the Officers of the corporation retained it. Find out who is assumed to have this accountability.

    On the left side of the image, there is a pyramid with the following labels in descending order: PMO; Project Sponsors; Officers; Directors; Stakeholders. The top three tiers of the pyramid have upward arrows connecting one section to the next; the bottom three tiers have downward pointing arrows, connecting one section to the next. On the right side of the image is the following text: If accountability for organizational change shifted to the PMO, find out and do it right. PMOs in this situation should proceed with this step. Officers of the corporation have the implicit fiduciary obligation to drive project benefits because they ultimately authorize the project spending. It’s their job to transfer that obligation, along with the commensurate resourcing and authority. If the Officers fail to make someone accountable for results of the change, they are failing as fiduciaries appointed by the Board of Directors. If the Board fails to hold the Officers accountable for the results, they are failing to meet the obligations they made when accepting election by the Shareholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Will the sponsor please stand up?

    Project sponsors should be accountable for the results of project changes. Otherwise, people might assume it’s the PMO or project team.

    Keep your approach to change management dynamic while building around the core discipline

    The PMO will need to establish an OCM playbook that can scale to a wide variety of projects. Avoid rigidity of processes and keep things dynamic as you build up your OCM muscles as an organization.

    Continually Develop

    Change Management Capabilities

    Progressively build a stable set of core capabilities.

    The basic science of human behavior underlying change management is unlikely to change. Effective engagement, communication, and management of uncertainty are valuable capabilities regardless of context and project specifics.

    Regularly Update

    Organizational Context

    Regularly update recurring activities and artifacts.

    The organization and the environment in which it exists will constantly evolve. Reusing or recycling key artifacts will save time and improve collaboration (by leveraging shared knowledge), but you should plan to update them on at least a quarterly or annual basis.

    Respond To

    Future Project Requirements

    Approach every project as unique.

    One project might involve more technology risk while another might require more careful communications. Make sure you divide your time and effort appropriately for each particular project to make the most out of your change management playbook.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Continuous Change. Continuous Improvement. Change is an ongoing process. Your approach to managing change should be continually refined to keep up with changes in technology, corporate strategy, and people involved.

    Review lessons learned to improve organizational change management as a core discipline of the PMO

    5.1.1 60 minutes

    1. With your pilot OCM initiative in mind, retrospectively brainstorm lessons learned using the template below. Info-Tech recommends doing this with the transition team. Have people spend 10-15 minutes brainstorming individually or in 2- to 3-person groups, then spend 15-30 minutes presenting and discussing findings collectively.

    What worked? What didn't work? What was missing?

    2. Develop recommendations based on the brainstorming and analysis above.

    Continue... Stop... Start...

    Monitor organizational capacity for change

    5.1.2 20 minutes (to be repeated quarterly or biannually thereafter)

    Perform the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment in the wake of the OCM pilot initiative and lessons learned exercise to assess capabilities’ improvements.

    As your OCM processes start to scale out over a range of projects across the organization, revisit the assessment on a quarterly or bi-annual basis to help focus your improvement efforts across the 7 change management categories that drive the survey.

    • Cultural Readiness
    • Leadership & Sponsorship
    • Organizational Knowledge
    • Change Management Skills
    • Toolkit & Templates
    • Process Discipline
    • KPIs & Metrics

    The image is a bar graph, with the above mentioned change management categories on the Y-axis, and the categories Low, Medium, and High on the X-axis.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Continual OCM improvement is a collaborative effort.

    The most powerful way to drive continual improvement of your organizational change management practices is to continually share progress, wins, challenges, feedback, and other OCM related concerns with stakeholders. At the end of the day, the PMO’s efforts to become a change leader will all come down to stakeholder perceptions based upon employee morale and benefits realized.

    Define ongoing organizational roles and responsibilities for change management

    5.1.3 60 minutes

    1. Decide whether to designate/create permanent roles for managing change.
    • Recommended if the PMO is engaged in at least one project at any given time that generates organizational change.
  • Designate a principle change manager (if you choose to) – it is likely that responsibilities will be given to someone’s existing position (such as PM or BA).
    • Make sure any permanent roles are embedded in the organization (e.g. within the PMO, rather than trying to establish a one-person “Change Management Office”) and have leadership support.
  • Consider whether to build a team of permanent change champions – it is likely that responsibilities will be given to existing positions.
    • This type of role is increasingly common in organizations that are aggressively innovating and keeping up with consumer technology adoption. If your organization already has a program like this for engaging early adopters and innovators, build on what’s already established.
    • Work with HR to make sure this is aligned with any existing training and development programs.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid creating unnecessary fiefdoms.

    Make sure any permanent roles are embedded in the organization (e.g. within the PMO) and have leadership support.

    Copy the RACI table from Activity 3.1.1. and repurpose it to help define the roles and responsibilities.

    Include this RACI when you formalize your OCM Playbook.

    Formalize and communicate the Organizational Change Management Playbook

    5.1.4 45 to 60 minutes

    1. Formalize the playbook’s scope:
      1. Determine the size and type of projects for which organizational change management is recommended.
      2. Make sure you clearly differentiate organizational change management and enablement from technical change management (i.e. release management and acceptance).
    2. Refine and formalize tools and templates:
      1. Determine how you want to customize the structure of Info-Tech’s blueprint and templates, tailored to your organization in the future.
        1. For example:
          1. Establish a standard framework for analyzing context around organizational change.
      2. Add branding/design elements to the templates to improve their credibility and impact as internal documents.
      3. Determine where/how templates and other resources are to be found and make sure they will be readily available to anyone who needs them (e.g. project managers).
    3. Communicate the playbook to the project management team.

    Download Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Playbook.

    Regularly reassess the value and success of your practices relative to OCM effort and project outcomes

    5.1.5 20 minutes per project

    The image is a screencapture of the Value tab of the Organizational Change: Management Capabilities Assessment

    Use the Value tab in the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment to monitor the value and success of OCM.

    Measure past performance and create a baseline for future success:

    • % of expected business benefits realized on previous 3–5 significant projects/programs.
      • Track business benefits (costs reduced, productivity increased, etc.).
    • Costs avoided/reduced (extensions, cancellations, delays, roll-backs, etc.)
      • Establish baseline by estimating average costs of projects extended to deal with change-related issues.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    5.1.3 Define ongoing organizational roles and responsibilities for change management

    As you scale out an OCM program for all of the organization’s projects based on your pilot initiative, work with the analyst to investigate and define the right accountabilities for ongoing, long-term OCM.

    5.1.4 Develop an Organizational Change Management Playbook

    Formalize a programmatic process for organizational change management in Info-Tech’s playbook template.

    Related research

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Develop a Resource Management Strategy for the New Reality

    Manage a Minimum-Viable PMO

    Establish the Benefits Realization Process

    Manage an Agile Portfolio

    Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program: The Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program is a low effort, high impact program designed to help project owners assess and improve their PPM practices. Gather and report on all aspects of your PPM environment in order to understand where you stand and how you can improve.

    Bibliography

    Basu, Chirantan. “Top Organizational Change Risks.” Chiron. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Beatty, Carol. “The Tough Work of Managing Change.” Queens University. 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Brown, Deborah. “Change Management: Some Statistics.” D&B Consulting Inc. May 15, 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Burke, W. Warner. Organizational Change: Theory and Practice. 4th Edition. London: Sage, 2008.

    Buus, Inger. “Rebalancing Leaders in Times of Turbulence.” Mannaz. February 8, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Change First. “Feedback from our ROI change management survey.” 2010. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Collins, Jeff. “The Connection between User Adoption and Project Management Success.” Innovative Management Solutions. Sept. 21, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Craddock, William. “Change Management in the Strategic Alignment of Project Portfolios.” PMI. 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Denning, Steve. “The Four Stories you Need to Lead Deep Organizational Change.” Forbes. July 25, 2011. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Drucker, Peter. “What Makes an Effective Executive.” Harvard Business Review. June 2004. Web. June 14, 2016

    Elwin, Toby. “Highlight Change Management – An Introduction to Appreciative Inquiry.” July 6, 2012. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Enstrom, Christopher. “Employee Power: The Bases of Power Used by Front-Line Employees to Effect Organizational Change.” MA Thesis. University of Calgary. April 2003. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Ewenstein, Boris, Wesley Smith, and Ashvin Sologar. “Changing Change Management.” McKinsey & Company. July 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    International Project Leadership Academy. “Why Projects Fail: Facts and Figures.” Web. June 14, 2016.

    Jacobs-Long, Ann. “EPMO’s Can Make A Difference In Your Organization.” May 9, 2012. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Kotter, John. Leading Change. Boston: Harvard Business School Press, 1996.

    Latham, Ross. “Information Management Advice 55 Change Management: Preparing for Change.” TAHO. March 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Linders, Ben. “Finding Ways to Improve Business – IT Collaboration.” InfoQ. June 6, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016

    Machiavelli, Niccolo. The Prince, selections from The Discourses and other writings. Ed. John Plamenatz. London: Fontana/Collins, 1972.

    Michalak, Joanna Malgorzata. “Cultural Catalyst and Barriers to Organizational Change Management: a Preliminary Overview.” Journal of Intercultural Management. 2:2. November 2010. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Miller, David, and Mike Oliver. “Engaging Stakeholder for Project Success.” PMI. 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Parker, John. “How Business Analysts Can Identify Quick Wins.” EnFocus Solutions. February 15, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Paulk, January. “The Fundamental Role a Change Impact Analysis Plays in an ERP Implementation.” Panorma Consulting Solutions. March 24, 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Petouhoff, Natalie, Tamra Chandler, and Beth Montag-Schmaltz. “The Business Impact of Change Management.” Graziadio Business Review. 2006. Web. June 14, 2016.

    PM Solutions. “The State of the PMO 2014.” 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    PMI. “Pulse of the Profession: Enabling Organizational Change Throughout Strategic Initiatives.” March 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    PMI. “Pulse of the Profession: Executive Sponsor Engagement.” October 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    PMI. “Pulse of the Profession: the High Cost of Low Performance.” February 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Powers, Larry, and Ketil Been. “The Value of Organizational Change Management.” Boxley Group. 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Prosci. “Best Practices in Change Management – 2014 Edition: Executive Overview.” Web. June 14, 2016.

    Prosci. “Change Management Sponsor Checklist.” Web. June 14, 2016.

    Prosci. “Cost-benefit analysis for change management.” 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Prosci. “Five Levers of Organizational Change.” 2016. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Rick, Torben. “Change Management Requires a Compelling Story.” Meliorate. October 3, 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Rick, Torben. “The Success Rate of Organizational Change Initiatives.” Meliorate. October 13, 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Schwartz, Claire. “Implementing and Monitoring Organizational Change: Part 3.” Daptiv Blogs. June 24, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Simcik, Shawna. “Shift Happens! The Art of Change Management.” Innovative Career Consulting, Inc. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Stewart Group. “Emotional Intelligence.” 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Thakur, Sidharth. “Improve your Project’s Communication with These Inspirational Quotes.” Ed. Linda Richter. Bright Hub Project Management. June 9, 2012. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Training Folks. “Implementing and Supporting Training for Important Change Initiatives.” 2012. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Warren, Karen. “Make your Training Count: The Right Training at the Right Time.” Decoded. April 12, 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Willis Towers Watson. “Only One-Quarter of Employers Are Sustaining Gains from Change Management Initiatives, Towers Watson Survey Finds.” August 29, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Design Data-as-a-Service

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}129|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $1,007 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Lack of a consistent approach in accessing internal and external data within the organization and sharing data with third parties.
    • Data consumed by most organizations lacks proper data quality, data certification, standards tractability, and lineage.
    • Organizations are looking for guidance in terms of readily accessible data from others and data that can be shared with others or monetized.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Despite data being everywhere, most organizations struggle to find accurate, trustworthy, and meaningful data when required.
    • Connecting to data should be as easy as connecting to the internet. This is achievable if all organizations start participating in the data marketplace ecosystem by leveraging a Data-as-a-Service (DaaS) framework.

    Impact and Result

    • Data marketplaces facilitate data sharing between the data producer and the data consumer. The data product must be carefully designed to truly benefit in today’s connected data ecosystem.
    • Follow Info-Tech’s step-by-step approach to establish your DaaS framework:
      1. Understand Data Ecosystem
      2. Design Data Products
      3. Establish DaaS framework

    Design Data-as-a-Service Research & Tools

    Start here – Read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should design Data-as-a-Service (DaaS), review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand data ecosystem

    Provide clear benefits of adopting the DaaS framework and solid rationale for moving towards a more connected data ecosystem and avoiding data silos.

    • Design Data-as-a-Service – Phase 1: Understand Data Ecosystem

    2. Design data product

    Leverage design thinking methodology and templates to document your most important data products.

    • Design Data-as-a-Service – Phase 2: Design Data Product

    3. Establish a DaaS framework

    Capture internal and external data sources critical to data products success for the organization and document an end-to-end DaaS framework.

    • Design Data-as-a-Service – Phase 3: Establish a DaaS Framework
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Design Data-as-a-Service

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Data Marketplace and DaaS Explained

    The Purpose

    The purpose of this module is to provide a clear understanding of the key concepts such as data marketplace, data sharing, and data products.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    This module will provide clear benefits of adopting the DaaS framework and solid rationale for moving towards a more connected data ecosystem and avoiding data silos.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context

    1.2 Understand the data ecosystem

    1.3 Draft products ideas and use cases

    1.4 Capture data product metrics

    Outputs

    Data product ideas

    Data sharing use cases

    Data product metrics

    2 Design Data Product

    The Purpose

    The purpose of this module is to leverage design thinking methodology and templates to document the most important data products.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Data products design that incorporates end-to-end customer journey and stakeholder map.

    Activities

    2.1 Create a stakeholder map

    2.2 Establish a persona

    2.3 Data consumer journey map

    2.4 Document data product design

    Outputs

    Data product design

    3 Assess Data Sources

    The Purpose

    The purpose of this module is to capture internal and external data sources critical to data product success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Break down silos by integrating internal and external data sources

    Activities

    3.1 Review the conceptual data model

    3.2 Map internal and external data sources

    3.3 Document data sources

    Outputs

    Internal and external data sources relationship map

    4 Establish a DaaS Framework

    The Purpose

    The purpose of this module is to document end-to-end DaaS framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    End-to-end framework that breaks down silos and enables data product that can be exchanged for long-term success.

    Activities

    4.1 Design target state DaaS framework

    4.2 Document DaaS framework

    4.3 Assess the gaps between current and target environments

    4.4 Brainstorm initiatives to develop DaaS capabilities

    Outputs

    Target DaaS framework

    DaaS initiative

    Optimize Social Media Strategy by Service

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}562|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Many organizations are jumping the gun on service selection and missing valuable opportunities to tap into conversations their consumers are having about them.
    • Companies are struggling to harness real benefits from social media because they dive into content and engagement strategy without spending the appropriate amount of time on social media service selection.
    • After organizations have selected the appropriate social media services, clients fail to understand best practices for participating in conversations and therefore are unable to optimize their success on each service.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Conventional wisdom dictates that you should pick the social network where you have the greatest subscriber base to reach, but this is irrelevant. Organizations need to consider all the social media services available when selecting services, to ensure they are optimizing their social media strategy and interacting with the right people.
    • In today’s social media landscape there is a wide variety of social media services to choose from. Services range from hot micro-blogging services, like Twitter, to more niche social multimedia services, like Flickr or Vimeo.
    • Each department should manage its set of relevant services regardless of platform. For example a marketing manager should manage all social media services in marketing, rather than have one person manage all Twitter feeds, one person manage all Facebook pages, etc.
    • The services your organization selects shouldn’t operate as islands. Consider not only how the services will fit with each other, but also how they will fit with existing channels. Use a market coverage model to ensure the services you select are complementing each other.
    • The landscape for social media services changes rapidly. It is essential to conduct an audit of services to maintain an optimal mix of services. Conduct the audit semi-annually for best effect.

    Impact and Result

    • Learn about the importance of choosing the correct services to ensure you are reaching your consumers and not wasting time playing with the wrong people.
    • Understand the business use cases for each service and best practices for using them.
    • Leverage different social media services to create a market coverage model that balances social media services with your products/services and business objectives.
    • Identify the risks associated with specific platforms and ensure IT works to mitigate them.
    • Create a plan for conducting a Social Media Service Audit to stay on top of changing trends.

    Optimize Social Media Strategy by Service Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create the right social media service mix

    Understand the different social media services, their unique value propositions for customer interaction, and the content and timing best practices for each.

    • Storyboard: Optimize Social Media Strategy by Service
    • Social Media Service Selection Tool

    2. Execute a plan for social service selection and management

    Leverage different social media services to create a market coverage model and assign responsibilities.

    3. Perform a semi-annual social media service audit

    Conduct an audit to stay on top of changing trends.

    • Social Media Services Audit Template
    [infographic]

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}218|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • As vendors become more prevalent in organizations, organizations increasingly need to understand and manage the potential financial impacts of vendors’ actions.
    • It is only a matter of time until a vendor mistake impacts your organization. Make sure you are prepared to manage the adverse financial consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.
    • Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.

    Impact and Result

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impact on Your Organization Deck – Use the research to better understand the negative financial impacts of vendor actions.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential financial impacts of vendors’ poor performance. Use Info-Tech’s approach to look at the financial impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

    2. “What If” Financial Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the financial impacts of negative vendor actions.

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Financial Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Good vendor management practices help organizations understand the costs of negative vendor actions.

    Analyst Perspective

    Vendor actions can have significant financial consequences for your organization.

    Photo of Frank Sewell, Research Director, Vendor Management, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Vendors are becoming more influential and essential to the operation of organizations. Often the sole risk consideration of a business is whether the vendor meets a security standard, but vendors can negatively impact organizations’ budgets in various ways. Fortunately, though inherent risk is always present, organizations can offset the financial impacts of high-risk vendors by employing due diligence in their vendor management practices to help manage the overall risks.

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    As vendors become more prevalent in organizations, organizations increasingly need to understand and manage the potential financial impacts of vendors’ actions.

    It is only a matter of time until a vendor mistake impacts your organization. Make sure you are prepared to manage the adverse financial consequences.

    Common Obstacles

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.

    Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Companies without good vendor management risk initiatives will take on more risk than they should. Solid vendor management practices are imperative –organizations must evolve to ensure that vendors deliver services according to performance objectives and that risks are managed accordingly.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and individual components of vendor risk branching off of it: 'Financial', 'Reputational', 'Operational', 'Strategic', 'Security', and 'Regulatory & Compliance'.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of scope:
    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Financial risk impact

    Potential losses to the organization due to financial risks

    In this blueprint, we’ll explore financial risks and their impacts.

    Identifying negative actions is paramount to assessing the overall financial impact on your organization, starting in the due diligence phase of the vendor assessment and continuing throughout the vendor lifecycle.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and the vendor risk component 'Financial' highlighted.

    Unbudgeted financial risk impact

    The costs of adverse vendor actions, such as a breach or an outage, are increasing. By knowing these potential costs, leaders can calculate how to avoid them throughout the lifecycle of the relationship.

    Loss of business represents the largest share of the breach

    38%

    Avg. $1.59M
    Global average cost of a vendor breach

    $4.2M

    Percentage of breaches in 2020 caused by business associates

    40.2%

    23.2% YoY
    (year over year)
    (Source: “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021,” IBM, 2021) (Source: “Vendor Risk Management – A Growing Concern,” Stern Security, 2021)

    Example: Hospital IT System Outage

    Hospitals often rely on vendors to manage their data center environments but rarely understand the downstream financial impacts if that vendor fails to perform.

    For example, a vendor implements a patch out of cycle with no notice to the IT group. Suddenly all IT systems are down. It takes 12 hours for the IT teams to return systems to normal. The downstream impacts are substantial.

    • There is no revenue capture during outage (patient registration, payments).
      • The financial loss is significant, impacting cash on hand and jeopardizing future projects.
    • Clinicians cannot access the electronic health record (EHR) system and shift to downtime paper processes.
      • This can cause potential risks to patient health, such as unknown drug interactions.
      • This could also incur lawsuits, fines, and penalties.
    • Staff must manually add the paper records into the EHR after the incident is corrected.
      • Staff time is lost on creating paper records and overtime is required to reintroduce those records into EMR.
    • Staff time and overtime pay on troubleshooting and solving issues take away from normal operations and could cause delays, having downstream effects on the timing of other projects.

    Insight Summary

    Assessing financial impacts is an ongoing, educative, and collaborative multidisciplinary process that vendor management initiatives are uniquely designed to coordinate and manage for organizations.

    Insight 1 Vendors are becoming more and more crucial to organizations’ overall operations, and most organizations have a poor understanding of the potential impacts they represent.

    Is your vendor solvent? Do they have enough staff to accommodate your needs? Has their long-term planning been affected by changes in the market? Are they unique in their space?

    Insight 2 Financial impacts from other risk types deserve just as much focus as security alone, if not more.

    Examples include penalties and fines, loss of revenue due to operational impacts, vendor replacement costs, hidden costs in poorly understood contracts, and lack of contractual protections.

    Insight 3 There is always an inherent risk in working with a vendor, but organizations should financially quantify how much each risk may impact their budget.

    A significant concern for organizations is quantifying different types of risks. When a risk occurs, the financial losses are often poorly understood, with unbudgeted financial impacts.

    Three stages of vendor financial risk assessment

    Assess risk throughout the complete vendor lifecycle

    1. Pre-Relationship Due Diligence: The initial pre-relationship due diligence stage is a crucial point to establish risk management practices. Vendor management practices ensure that a potential vendor’s risk is categorized correctly by facilitating the process of risk assessment.
    2. Monitor & Manage: Once the relationship is in place, organizations should enact ongoing management efforts to ensure they are both getting their value from the vendor and appropriately addressing any newly identified risks.
    3. Termination: When the termination of the relationship arrives, the organization should validate that adequate protections that were established while forming a contract in the pre-relationship stage remain in place.

    Inherent risks from negative actions are pervasive throughout the entire vendor lifecycle. Collaboratively understanding those risks and working together to put proper management in place enables organizations to get the most value out of the relationship with the least amount of risk.

    Flowchart for 'Assessing Financial Risk Impacts', beginning with 'New Vendor' to 'Sourcing' to the six components of 'Vendor Management'. After a gamut of assessments such as ''What If' Game' one can either 'Accept' to move on to 'Pre-Relationship', 'Monitor & Manage', and eventually to 'Termination', or not accept and circle back to 'Sourcing'.

    Stage 1: Pre-relationship assessment

    Do these as part of your due diligence

    • Review and negotiate contract terms and conditions.
      • Ensure that you have the protections to make you whole in the event of an incident, in the event that another entity purchases the vendor, and throughout the entire lifecycle of your relationship with the vendor.
      • Make sure to negotiate your post-termination protections in the initial agreement.
    • Perform a due-diligence financial assessment.
      • Make sure the vendor is positioned in the market to be able to service your organization.
    • Perform an initial risk assessment.
      • Identify and understand all potential factors that may cause financial impacts to your organization.
      • Include total cost of ownership (TCO) and return of investment (ROI) as potential impact offsets.
    • Review case studies – talk to other customers.
      • Research who else has worked with the vendor to get “the good, the bad, and the ugly” stories to form a clear picture of a potential relationship with the vendor.
    • Use proofs of concept.
      • It is essential to know how the vendor and their solutions will work in the environment before committing resources and to incorporate them into organizational strategic plans.
    • Limit vendors’ ability to increase costs over the years. It is not uncommon for a long-term relationship to become more expensive than a new one over time when the increases are unmanaged.
    • Vendor audits can be costly and a significant distraction to your staff. Make sure to contractually limit them.
    • Many vendors enjoy significant revenue from unclear deliverables and vague expectations that lead to change requests at unknown rates – clarifying expectations and deliverables and demanding negotiated rate sheets before engagement will save budget and strengthen the relationship.

    Visit Info-Tech’s VMO ROI Calculator and Tracker

    The “what if” game

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and financial impact, List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk

    Output: Comprehensive financial risk profile on the specific vendor solution

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Financial Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

    Participants: Vendor Management – Coordinator, IT Operations, Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager, Finance/Procurement

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to collaboratively pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    2. Use the Financial Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potential risks but manage the overall process to keep the discussion on track.
    3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

    Download the Financial Risk Impact Tool

    Stage 2.1: Monitor the financial risk

    Ongoing monitoring activities

    Never underestimate the value of keeping the relationship moving forward.

    Examples of items and activities to monitor include;

    Stock photo of a worker being trained on a computer.
    • Fines
    • Data leaks
    • Performance
    • Credit monitoring
    • Viability/solvency
    • Resource capacity
    • Operational impacts
    • Regulatory penalties
    • Increases in premiums
    • Security breaches (infrastructure)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Many organizations do not have the resources to dedicate to annual risk assessments of all vendors.

    Consider timing ongoing risk assessments to align with contract renewal, when you have the most leverage with the vendor.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Risk Register Tool

    Stage 2.2: Manage the financial risk

    During the lifecycle of the vendor relationship

    • Renew risk assessments annually.
    • Focus your efforts on highly ranked risks.
    • Is there a new opportunity to negotiate?
    • Identify and classify individual vendor risk.
    • Are there better existing contracts in place?
    • Review financial health checks at the same time.
    • Monitor and schedule contract renewals and new service/module negotiations.
    • Perform business alignment meetings to reassess the relationship.
    • Ongoing operational meetings should be supplemental, dealing with day-to-day issues.
    • Develop performance metrics and hold vendors accountable to established service levels.
    Stock image of a professional walking an uneven line over the words 'Risk Management'.

    Stage 3: Termination

    An essential and often overlooked part of the vendor lifecycle is the relationship after termination

    • The risk of a vendor keeping your data for “as long as they want” is high.
      • Data retention becomes a “forever risk” in today’s world of cyber issues if you do not appropriately plan.
    • Ensure that you always know where data resides and where people are allowed to access that data.
      • If there is a regulatory need to house data only in specific locations, ensure that it is explicit in agreements.
    • Protect your data through language in initial agreements that covers what needs to happen when the relationship with the vendor terminates.
      • Typically, all the data that the vendor has retained is returned and/or destroyed at your sole discretion.
    Stock image of a sign reading 'Closure'.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock photo of two co-workers laughing. Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process
    • Achieve measurable savings in contract time processing, financial risk avoidance, and dollar savings
    • Understand how to identify and mitigate risk to save the organization time and money.
    Stock image of reports and file folders. Identify and Reduce Agile Contract Risk
    • Manage Agile contract risk by selecting the appropriate level of protections for an Agile project.
    • Focus on the correct contract clauses to manage Agile risk.
    Stock photo of three co-workers gathered around a computer screen. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Vendor management must be an IT strategy. Solid vendor management is an imperative – IT organizations must develop capabilities to ensure that services are delivered by vendors according to service level objectives and that risks are mitigated according to the organization's risk tolerance.
    • Gain visibility into your IT vendor community. Understand how much you spend with each vendor and rank their criticality and risk to focus on the vendors you should be concentrating on for innovative solutions.

    External Compliance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}39|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}39|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk
    Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit

    Integrate Physical Security and Information Security

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}383|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations

    Physical security is often managed by facilities, not by IT security, resulting in segmented security systems. Integrating physical and information security introduces challenges in:

    • Understanding the value proposition of investment in governing and managing integrated systems, including migration costs, compared to separated security systems.
    • Addressing complex risks and vulnerabilities of an integrated security system.
    • Operationalizing enhanced capabilities created by adoption of emerging and disruptive technologies.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Integrate security in people, process, and technology to improve your overall security posture. Having siloed systems running security is not beneficial. Many organizations are realizing the benefits of consolidating into a single platform across physical security, cybersecurity, HR, legal, and compliance.
    • Plan and engage stakeholders. Assemble the right team to ensure the success of your integrated security ecosystem, decide the governance model, and clearly define the roles and responsibilities.
    • Enhance strategy and risk management. Strategically, we want a physical security system that is interoperable with most technologies, flexible with minimal customization, functional, and integrated, despite the challenges of proprietary configurations, complex customization, and silos.

    Impact and Result

    Info-Tech's approach is a modular, incremental, and repeatable process to integrate physical and information security to:

    • Ensure the integration will meet the business' needs and determine effort and technical requirements.
    • Establish GRC processes that include integrated risk management and compliance.
    • Design and deploy an integrated security architecture.
    • Establish security metrics of effectiveness and efficiency for senior management and leadership.

    Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Storyboard – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to integrate physical security and information security.

    Info-Tech provides a three-phased framework for integrating physical security and information security: Plan, Enhance, and Monitor & Optimize.

    • Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Storyboard

    2. Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool – A tool to map organizational goals to IT goals, facilities goals, OT goals (if applicable), and integrated security goals.

    This tool serves as a repository for information about security integration elements, compliance, and other factors that will influence your integration of physical security and information security.

    • Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    3. Integrate Physical Security and Information Security RACI Chart Tool – A tool to identify and understand the owners of various security integration stakeholders across the organization.

    Populating a RACI chart (Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed) is a critical step that will assist you in organizing roles for carrying out integration steps. Complete this tool to assign tasks to suitable roles.

    • Integrate Physical Security and Information Security RACI Chart Tool

    4. Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Communication Deck – A tool to present your findings in a prepopulated document that summarizes the work you have completed.

    Complete this template to effectively communicate your integrated security plan to stakeholders.

    • Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Communication Deck
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Integrate Physical Security and Information Security

    Securing information security, physical security, or personnel security in silos may not secure much

    Analyst Perspective

    Ensure integrated security success with close and continual collaboration

    From physical access control systems (PACS) such as electronic locks and fingerprint biometrics to video surveillance systems (VSS) such as IP cameras to perimeter intrusion detection and prevention to fire and life safety and beyond: physical security systems pose unique challenges to overall security. Additionally, digital transformation of physical security to the cloud and the convergence of operational technology (OT), internet of things (IoT), and industrial IoT (IIoT) increase both the volume and frequency of security threats.

    These threats can be safety, such as the health impact when a gunfire attack downed wastewater pumps at Duke Energy Substation, North Carolina, US, in 2022. The threats can also be economic, such as theft of copper wire, or they can be reliability, such as when a sniper attack on Pacific Gas & Electric’s Metcalf Substation in California, US, damaged 17 out of 21 power transformers in 2013.

    Considering the security risks organizations face, many are unifying physical, cyber, and information security systems to gain the long-term overall benefits a consolidated security strategy provides.

    Ida Siahaan
    Ida Siahaan

    Research Director, Security and Privacy Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Physical security is often managed by facilities, not by IT security, resulting in segmented security systems. Meanwhile, integrating physical and information security introduces challenges in:

    • Value proposition of investment in governing and managing integrated systems including the migration costs compared to separated security systems.
    • Addressing complex risks and vulnerabilities of an integrated security system.
    • Operationalizing on enhanced capabilities created by adoption of emerging and disruptive technologies.

    Common Obstacles

    Physical security systems integration is complex due to various components such as proprietary devices and protocols and hybrid systems of analog and digital technology. Thus, open architecture with comprehensive planning and design is important.

    However, territorial protection by existing IT and physical security managers may limit security visibility and hinder security integration.

    Additionally, integration poses challenges in staffing, training and awareness programs, and dependency on third-party technologies and their migration plans.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach is a modular, incremental, and repeatable process to integrate physical and information security that enables organizations to:

    • Determine effort and technical requirements to ensure the integration will meet the business needs.
    • Establish GRC processes including integrated risk management and compliance.
    • Design and deploy integrated security architecture.
    • Establish metrics to monitor the effectiveness and efficiency of the security program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    An integrated security architecture, including people, process, and technology, will improve your overall security posture. These benefits are leading many organizations to consolidate their siloed systems into a single platform across physical security, cybersecurity, HR, legal, and compliance.

    Existing information security models are not comprehensive

    Current security models do not cover all areas of security, especially if physical systems and personnel are involved and safety is also an important property required.

    • The CIA triad (confidentiality, integrity, availability) is a well-known information security model that focuses on technical policies related to technology for protecting information assets.
    • The US Government’s Five Pillars of Information Assurance includes CIA, authentication, and non-repudiation, but it does not cover people and processes comprehensively.
    • The AAA model, created by the American Accounting Association, has properties of authentication, authorization, and accounting but focuses only on access control.
    • Donn Parker expanded the CIA model with three more properties: possession, authenticity, and utility. This model, which includes people and processes, is known as the Parkerian hexad. However, it does not cover physical and personnel security.

    CIA Triad

    The CIA Triad for Information Security: Confidentiality, Integrity, Availability


    Parkerian Hexad

    The Parkerian Hexad for Security: Confidentiality, Possession, Utility, Availability, Authenticity and Integrity

    Sources: Parker, 1998; Pender-Bey, 2012; Cherdantseva and Hilton, 2015

    Adopt an integrated security model

    Adopt an integrated security model which consists of information security, physical security, personnel security, and organizational security.

    The security ecosystem is shifting from segregation to integration

    Security ecosystem is shifting from the past proprietary model to open interfaces and future open architecture

    Sources: Cisco, n.d.; Preparing for Technology Convergence in Manufacturing, Info-Tech Research Group, 2018

    Physical security includes:

    • Securing physical access,
      e.g. facility access control, alarms, surveillance cameras
    • Securing physical operations
      (operational technology – OT), e.g. programmable logic controllers (PLCs), SCADA

    Info-Tech Insight

    Why is integrating physical and information security gaining more and more traction? Because the supporting technologies are becoming more matured. This includes, for example, migration of physical security devices to IP-based network and open architecture.

    Reactive responses to physical security incidents

    April 1995

    Target: Alfred P. Murrah Federal Building, Oklahoma, US. Method: Bombing. Impact: Destroyed structure of 17 federal agencies, 168 casualties, over 800 injuries. Result: Creation of Interagency Security Committee (ISC) in Executive Order 12977 and “Vulnerability Assessment of Federal Facilities” standard.
    (Source: Office of Research Services, 2017)

    April 2013

    Target: Pacific Gas & Electric’s Metcalf Substation, California, US. Method: Sniper attack. Impact: Out of 21 power transformers, 17 were damaged. Result: Creation of Senate Bill No. 699 and NERC- CIP-014 standard.
    (Source: T&D World, 2023)

    Sep. 2022

    Target: Nord Stream gas pipelines connecting Russia to Germany, Baltic sea. Method: Detonations. Impact: Methane leaks (~300,000 tons) at four exclusive economic zones (two in Denmark and two in Sweden). Result: Sweden’s Security Service investigation.
    (Source: CNBC News, 2022)

    Dec. 2022

    Target: Duke Energy Substation, North Carolina, US. Method: Gunfire. Impact: Power outages of ~40,000 customers and wastewater pumps in sewer lift stations down. Result: State of emergency was declared.
    (Source: CBS News, 2022)

    Info-Tech Insight

    When it comes to physical security, we have been mostly reactive. Typically the pattern starts with physical attacks. Next, the impacted organization mitigates the incidents. Finally, new government regulatory measures or private sector or professional association standards are put in place. We must strive to change our pattern to become more proactive.

    Physical security market forecast and top physical security challenges

    Physical security market forecast
    (in billions USD)

    A forecast by MarketsandMarkets projected growth in the physical security market, using historical data from 2015 until 2019, with a CAGR of 6.4% globally and 5.2% in North America.

    A forecast by MarketsandMarkets projected growth in the physical security market, using historical data from 2015 until 2019, with a CAGR of 6.4% globally and 5.2% in North America.

    Source: MarketsandMarkets, 2022

    Top physical security challenges

    An Ontic survey (N=359) found that threat data management (40%) was the top physical security challenge in 2022, up from 33% in 2021, followed by physical security threats to the C-suite and company leadership (35%), which was a slight increase from 2021. An interesting decrease is data protection and privacy (32%), which dropped from 36% in 2021.

    An Ontic survey (N=359) found that threat data management (40%) was the top physical security challenge in 2022, up from 33% in 2021, followed by physical security threats to the C-suite and company leadership (35%), which was a slight increase from 2021. An interesting decrease is data protection and privacy (32%), which dropped from 36% in 2021.

    Source: Ontic Center for Protective Intelligence, 2022

    Info-Tech Insight

    The physical security market is growing in systems and services, especially the integration of threat data management with cybersecurity.

    Top physical security initiatives and operations integration investments

    We know the physical security challenges and how the physical security market is growing, but what initiatives are driving this growth? These are the top physical security initiatives and top investments for physical security operations integration:

    Top physical security initiatives

    The number one physical security initiative is integrating physical security systems. Other initiatives with similar concerns included data and cross-functional integration

    A survey by Brivo asked 700 security professionals about their top physical security initiatives. The number one initiative is integrating physical security systems. Other initiatives with similar concerns included data and cross-functional integration.

    Source: Brivo, 2022

    Top investments for physical security operations integration

    The number one investment is on access control systems with software to identify physical threat actors. Another area with similar concern is integration of digital physical security with cybersecurity.

    An Ontic survey (N=359) on areas of investment for physical security operations integration shows the number one investment is on access control systems with software to identify physical threat actors. Another area with similar concern is integration of digital physical security with cybersecurity.

    Source: Ontic Center for Protective Intelligence, 2022

    Evaluate security integration opportunities with these guiding principles

    Opportunity focus

    • Identify the security integration problems to solve with visible improvement possibilities
    • Don’t choose technology for technology’s sake
    • Keep an eye to the future
    • Use strategic foresight

    Piece by piece

    • Avoid taking a big bang approach
    • Test technologies in multiple conditions
    • Run inexpensive pilots
    • Increase flexibility
    • Build a technology ecosystem

    Buy-in

    • Collaborate with stakeholders
    • Gain and sustain support
    • Maintain transparency
    • Increase uptake of open architecture

    Key Recommendations:

    Focus on your master plan

    Build a technology ecosystem

    Engage stakeholders

    Info-Tech Insight

    When looking for a quick win, consider learning the best internal or external practice. For example, in 1994 IBM reorganized its security operation by bringing security professionals and non-security professionals in one single structure, which reduced costs by approximately 30% in two years.

    Sources: Create and Implement an IoT Strategy, Info-Tech Research Group, 2022; Baker and Benny, 2013; Erich Krueger, Omaha Public Power District (contributor); Doery Abdou, March Networks Corporate (contributor)

    Case Study

    4Wall Entertainment – Asset Owner

    Industry: Architecture & Engineering
    Source: Interview

    4Wall Entertainment is quite mature in integrating its physical and information security; physical security has always been under IT as a core competency.

    4Wall Entertainment is a provider of entertainment lighting and equipment to event venues, production companies, lighting designers, and others, with a presence in 18 US and UK locations.

    After many acquisitions, 4Wall Entertainment needed to standardize its various acquired systems, including physical security systems such as access control. In its integrated security approach, IT owns the integrated security, but they interface with related entities such as HR, finance, and facilities management in every location. This allows them to obtain information such as holidays, office hours, and what doors need to be accessed as inputs to the security system and to get sponsorship in budgeting.

    In the past, 4Wall Entertainment tried delegating specific physical security to other divisions, such as facilities management and HR. This approach was unsuccessful, so IT took back the responsibility and accountability.

    Currently, 4Wall Entertainment works with local vendors, and its biggest challenge is finding third-party vendors that can provide nationwide support.

    In the future, 4Wall Entertainment envisions physical security modernization such as camera systems that allow more network accessibility, with one central system to manage and IoT device integration with SIEM and MDR.

    Results

    Lessons learned in integrating security from 4Wall Entertainment include:

    • Start with forming relationships with related divisions such as HR, finance, and facilities management to build trust and encourage sponsorship across management.
    • Create policies, procedures, and standards to deploy in various systems, especially when acquiring companies with low maturity in security.
    • Select third-party providers that offer the required functionalities, good customer support, and standard systems interoperability.
    • Close skill gaps by developing training and awareness programs for users, especially for newly acquired systems and legacy systems, or by acquiring expertise from consulting services.
    • Complete cost-benefit analysis for solutions on legacy systems to determine whether to keep them and create interfacing with other systems, upgrade them, or replace them entirely with newer systems.
    • Delegate maintenance of specific highly regulated systems, such as fire alarms and water sprinklers, to facilities management.
    Integration of Physical and Information Security Framework. Inputs: Integrated Items, Stakeholders, and Security Components. Phases, Outcomes and Benefits: Plan, Enhance and Monitor & Optimize.

    Tracking progress of physical and information security integration

    Physical security is often part of facilities management. As a result, there are interdependencies with both internal departments (such as IT, information security, and facilities) and external parties (such as third-party vendors). IT leaders, security leaders, and operational leaders should keep the big picture in mind when designing and implementing integration of physical and information security. Use this checklist as a tool to track your security integration journey.

    Plan

    • Engage stakeholders and justify value for the business.
    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish/update governance for integrated security.
    • Identify integrated elements and compliance obligations.

    Enhance

    • Determine the level of security maturity and update security strategy for integrated security.
    • Assess and treat risks of integrated security.
    • Establish/update integrated physical and information security policies and procedures.
    • Update incident response, disaster recovery, and business continuity plan.

    Monitor & Optimize

    • Identify skill requirements and close skill gaps for integrating physical and information security.
    • Design and deploy integrated security architecture and controls.
    • Establish, monitor, and report integrated security metrics on effectiveness and efficiency.

    Benefits of the security integration framework

    Today’s matured technology makes security integration possible. However, the governance and management of single integrated security presents challenges. These can be overcome using a multi-phased framework that enables a modular, incremental, and repeatable integration process, starting with planning to justify the value of investment, then enhancing the integrated security based on risks and open architecture. This is followed by using metrics for monitoring and optimization.

    1. Modular

      • Implementing a consolidated security strategy is complex and involves the integration of process, software, data, hardware, and network and infrastructure.
      • A modular framework will help to drive value while putting in appropriate guardrails.
    2. Incremental

      • Integration of physical security and information security involves many components such as security strategy, risk management, and security policies.
      • An incremental framework will help track, manage, and maintain each step while providing appropriate structure.
    3. Repeatable

      • Integration of physical security and information security is a journey that can be approached with a pilot program to evaluate effectiveness.
      • A repeatable framework will help to ensure quick time to value and enable immediate implementation of controls to meet operational and security requirements.

    Potential risks of the security integration framework

    Just as medicine often comes with side effects, our Integration of Physical and Information Security Framework may introduce risks too. However, as John F. Kennedy, thirty-fifth president of the United States, once said, "There are risks and costs to a program of action — but they are far less than the long-range cost of comfortable inaction."

    Plan Phase

    • Lack of transparency in the integration process can lead to lack of trust among stakeholders.
    • Lack of support from leadership results in unclear governance or lack of budget or human resources.
    • Key stakeholders leave the organization during the engagement and their replacements do not understand the organization’s operation yet.

    Enhance Phase

    • The risk assessment conducted focuses too much on IT risk, which may not always be applicable to physical security systems nor OT systems.
    • The integrated security does not comply with policies and regulations.

    Monitor and Optimize Phase

    • Lack of knowledge, training, and awareness.
    • Different testing versus production environments.
    • Lack of collected or shared security metrics.

    Data

    • Data quality issues and inadequate data from physical security, information security, and other systems, e.g. OT, IoT.
    • Too much data from too many tools are complex and time consuming to process.

    Develop an integration of information security, physical security, and personnel security that meets your organization’s needs

    Integrate security in people, process, and technology to improve your overall security posture

    Having siloed systems running security is not beneficial. Many organizations are realizing the benefits of consolidating into a single platform across physical security, cybersecurity, HR, legal, and compliance.

    Plan and engage stakeholders

    Assemble the right team to ensure the success of your integrated security ecosystem, decide the governance model, and clearly define the roles and responsibilities.

    Enhance strategy and risk management

    Strategically, we want a physical security system that is interoperable with most technologies, flexible with minimal customization, functional, and integrated, despite the challenges of proprietary configurations, complex customization, and silos.

    Monitor and optimize

    Find the most optimized architecture that is strategic, realistic, and based on risk. Next, perform an evaluation of the security systems and program by understanding what, where, when, and how to measure and to report the relevant metrics.

    Focus on master plan

    Identify the security integration problems to solve with visible improvement possibilities, and don’t choose technology for technology’s sake. Design first, then conduct market research by comparing products or services from vendors or manufacturers.

    Build a technology ecosystem

    Avoid a big bang approach and test technologies in multiple conditions. Run inexpensive pilots and increase flexibility to build a technology ecosystem.

    Deliverables

    Each step of this framework is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Map organizational goals to IT goals, facilities goals, OT goals (if applicable), and integrated security goals. Identify your security integration elements and compliance.

    Integrate Physical Security and Information Security RACI Chart Tool

    Identify various security integration stakeholders across the organization and assign tasks to suitable roles.

    Key deliverable:

    Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Communication Deck

    Present your findings in a prepopulated document that summarizes the work you have completed.

    Plan

    Planning is foundational to engage stakeholders. Start with justifying the value of investment, then define roles and responsibilities, update governance, and finally identify integrated elements and compliance obligations.

    Plan

    Engage stakeholders

    • To initiate communication between the physical and information security teams and other related divisions, it is important to identify the entities that would be affected by the security integration and involve them in the process to gain support from planning to delivery and maintenance.
    • Possible stakeholders:
      • Executive leadership, Facilities Management leader and team, IT leader, Security & Privacy leader, compliance officer, Legal, Risk Management, HR, Finance, OT leader (if applicable)
    • A successful security integration depends on aligning your security integration initiatives and migration plan to the organization’s objectives by engaging the right people to communicate and collaborate.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is important to speak the same language. Physical security concerns safety and availability, while information security concerns confidentiality and integrity. Thus, the two systems have different goals and require alignment.

    Similarly, taxonomy of terminologies needs to be managed,1 e.g. facility management with an emergency management background may have a different understanding from a CISO with an information security background when discussing the same term. For example:

    In emergency management prevention means “actions taken to eliminate the impact of disasters in order to protect lives, property and the environment, and to avoid economic disruption.”2

    In information security prevention is “preventing the threats by understanding the threat environment and the attack surfaces, the risks, the assets, and by maintaining a secure system.”3

    Sources: 1 Owen Yardley, Omaha Public Power District (contributor); 2 Translation Bureau, Government of Canada, n.d.; 3 Security Intelligence, 2020


    Map organizational goals to integrated security goals

    Input

    • Corporate, IT, and Facilities strategies

    Output

    • Your goals for the integrated security strategy

    Materials

    • Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Participants

    • Executive leadership
    • Facilities Management leader and team
    • IT leader
    • Security & Privacy leader
    • Compliance officer
    • Legal
    • Risk Management
    • HR & Finance
    • OT leader (if applicable)
    1. As a group, brainstorm organization goals.
      • Review relevant corporate, IT, and facilities strategies.
    2. Record the most important business goals in the “Goals Cascade” tab of the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Try to limit the number of business goals to no more than ten goals. This limitation will be critical to helping focus on your integrated security goals.
    3. For each goal, identify one to two security alignment goals. These should be objectives for the security strategy that will support the identified organization goals.

    Download the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.

    Record organizational goals

    A table to identify Organization, IT, OT(if applicable), Facilities, and Security Goals Definitions.

    Refer to the Integration of Physical and Information Security Framework when filling in the table.

    1. Record your identified organizational goals in the “Goals Cascade” tab of the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    2. For each organizational goal, identify IT alignment goals.
    3. For each organizational goal, identify OT alignment goals (if applicable).
    4. For each organizational goal, identify Facilities alignment goals.
    5. For each organizational goal, select an integrated security goal from the drop-down menu.

    Justify value for the business

    Facilities in most cases have a team that is responsible for physical security installations such as access key controllers. Whenever there is an issue, they contact the provider to fix the error. However, with smart buildings and smart devices, the threat surface grows to include information security threats, and Facilities may not possess the knowledge and skills required to deal with them. At the same time, delegating physical security to IT may add more tasks to their already-too-long list of responsibilities. Consolidating security to a focused security team that covers both physical and information security can help.1 We need to develop the security integration business case beyond physical security "gates, guns, and guards" mentality.2

    An example of a cost-benefit analysis for security integration:

    Benefits

    Metrics

    Operational Efficiency and Cost Savings

    • Reduction in deployment, maintenance, and staff time in manual operations of physical security devices such as logs collection from analog cameras to be automated into digital.
    • Reduction in staffing costs by bringing physical security SOC and information security SOC in one single structure.

    Reliability Improvements

    • Reduction in field crew time by identifying hardware that can be virtualized to have a centralized remote control.
    • Improvement of operating reliability through continuous and real-time monitoring of equipment such as door access control systems and camera surveillance systems.

    Customers & Users Benefits

    • Improvement of customer safety for essential services such as access to critical locations only by authorized personnel.
    • Improvement of reliability of services and address human factor in adoption of change by introducing change as a friendly activity.

    Cost

    Metrics

    Equipment and Infrastructure

    • Upgrade of existing physical security equipment, e.g. replacement of separated access control, video management system (VMS), and physical access control system (PACS) with a unified security platform.
    • Implementation of communication network equipment and labor to install, configure, and maintain the new network component.

    Software and Commission

    • The software and maintenance fee as well as upgrade implementation project cost.
    • Labor cost of field commissioning and troubleshooting.
    • Integration with security systems, e.g. event and log management, continuous monitoring, and investigation.

    Support and Resources

    • Cost to hire/outsource security FTEs for ongoing management and operation of security devices, e.g. SOC, MSSP.
    • Cost to hire/outsource FTEs to analyze, design, and deploy the integrated security architecture, e.g. consulting fee.

    Sources: 1 Andrew Amaro, KLAVAN Security Services (contributor); 2 Baker and Benny, 2013;
    Industrial Control System Modernization, Info-Tech Research Group, 2023; Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, 2021

    Plan

    Define roles and responsibilities

    Input

    • List of relevant stakeholders

    Output

    • Roles and responsibilities for the integration of physical and information security program

    Materials

    • Integrate Physical Security and Information Security RACI Chart Tool

    Participants

    • Executive leadership
    • Facilities Management leader and team
    • HR & Finance
    • IT leader and team
    • OT leader and team
    • Security & Privacy leader and team

    Many factors impact an organization’s level of effectiveness as it relates to integration of physical and information security. How the team interacts, what skill sets exist, the level of clarity around roles and responsibilities, and the degree of executive support and alignment are only a few. Thus, we need to identify stakeholders that are:

    • Responsible: The person(s) who does the work to accomplish the activity; they have been tasked with completing the activity and/or getting a decision made.
    • Accountable: The person(s) who is accountable for the completion of the activity. Ideally, this is a single person and is often an executive or program sponsor.
    • Consulted: The person(s) who provides information. This is usually several people, typically called subject matter experts (SMEs).
    • Informed: The person(s) who is updated on progress. These are resources that are affected by the outcome of the activities and need to be kept up to date.

    Download the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security RACI Chart Tool

    Define RACI chart

    Define Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed (RACI) stakeholders.

    1. Customize the Work Units to best reflect your operation with applicable stakeholders.
    2. Customize the Action rows as required.

    Integrate Physical Security and Information Security RACI Chart

    Sources: ISC, 2015; ISC, 2021

    Info-Tech Insight

    The roles and responsibilities should be clearly defined. For example, IT Security should be responsible for the installation and configuration of all physical access controllers and devices, and facility managers should be responsible for the physical maintenance including malfunctioning such as access device jammed or physically broken.

    Plan

    Establish/update governance for integrated security

    HR & Finance

    HR provides information such as new hires and office hours as input to the security system. Finance assists in budgeting.

    Security & Privacy

    The security and privacy team will need to evaluate solutions and enforce standards on various physical and information security systems and to protect data privacy.

    Business Leaders

    Business stakeholders will provide clarity for their strategy and provide input into how they envision security furthering those goals.

    IT Executives

    IT stakeholders will be a driving force, ensuring all necessary resources are available and funded.

    Facilities/ Operations

    Operational plans will include asset management, monitoring, and support to meet functional goals and manage throughout the asset lifecycle.

    Infrastructure & Enterprise Architects

    Each solution added to the environment will need to be chosen and architected to meet business goals and security functions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Assemble the right team to ensure the success of your integrated security ecosystem and decide the governance model, e.g. security steering committee (SSC) or a centralized single structure.

    Adapted from Create and Implement an IoT Strategy, Info-Tech Research Group, 2022

    What does the SSC do?

    Ensuring proper governance over your security program is a complex task that requires ongoing care and feeding from executive management to succeed.

    Your SSC should aim to provide the following core governance functions for your security program:

    1. Define Clarity of Intent and Direction

      How does the organization’s security strategy support the attainment of the business, IT, facilities management, and physical and information security strategies? The SSC should clearly define and communicate strategic linkage and provide direction for aligning security initiatives with desired outcomes.
    2. Establish Clear Lines of Authority

      Security programs contain many important elements that need to be coordinated. There must be clear and unambiguous authority, accountability, and responsibility defined for each element so lines of reporting/escalation are clear and conflicting objectives can be mediated.
    3. Provide Unbiased Oversight

      The SSC should vet the organization’s systematic monitoring processes to ensure there is adherence to defined risk tolerance levels and that monitoring is appropriately independent from the personnel responsible for implementing and managing the security program.
    4. Optimize Security Value Delivery

      Optimized value delivery occurs when strategic objectives for security are achieved and the organization’s acceptable risk posture is attained at the lowest possible cost. This requires constant attention to ensure controls are commensurate with any changes in risk level or appetite.

    Adapted from Improve Security Governance With a Security Steering Committee , Info-Tech Research Group, 2018

    Plan

    Identify integrated elements and compliance obligations

    To determine what elements need to be integrated, it’s important to scope the security integration program and to identify the consequences of integration for compliance obligations.

    INTEGRATED ELEMENTS

    What are my concerns?

    Process integrations

    Determine which processes need to be integrated and how

    • Examples: Security prevention, detection, and response; risk assessment

    Software and data integration

    Determine which software and data need to be integrated and how

    • Examples: Threat management tools, SIEM, IDPS, security event logs

    Hardware integration

    Determine which hardware needs to be integrated and how

    • Examples: Sensors, alarms, cameras, keys, locks, combinations, and card readers

    Network and infrastructure

    Determine which network and infrastructure components need to be integrated and how

    • Example: Network segmentation for physical access controllers.

    COMPLIANCE

    How can I address my concerns?

    Regulations

    Adhere to mandatory laws, directives, industry standards, specific contractual obligations, etc.

    • Examples: NERC CIP (North American Utilities), Network and Information Security (NIS) Directive (EU), Health and Safety at Work etc Act 1974 (UK), Occupational Safety and Health Act, 1970 (US), Emergency Management Act, 2007 (Canada)

    Standards

    Adhere to voluntary standards and obligations

    • Examples: NIST Cybersecurity Framework (CSF), The Risk Management Process for Federal Facilities: An Interagency Security Committee Standard (US), Cybersecurity Maturity Model Certification (CMMC), Service Organization Control (SOC 1 and 2)

    Guidelines

    Adopt guidelines that can improve the integrated security program

    • Examples: Best Practices for Planning and Managing Physical Security Resources (US Interagency Security Committee), Information Security Manual - Guidelines for Physical Security (Australian Cyber Security Centre), 1402-2021-Guide for Physical Security of Electric Power Substations (IEEE)

    Record integrated elements

    Scope and Boundaries from the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.

    Refer to the “Scope” tab of the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool when filling in the following elements.

    1. Record your integrated elements, i.e. process integration, software and data integration, hardware integration, network and infrastructure, and physical scope of your security integration, in the “Scope” tab of the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    2. For each of your scoping give the rationale for including them in the Comments column. Careful attention should be paid to any elements that are not in scope.

    Record your compliance obligations

    Refer to the “Compliance Obligations” tab of the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.

    1. Identify your compliance obligations. These can include both mandatory and voluntary obligations. Mandatory obligations include:
      • Laws
      • Government regulations
      • Industry standards
      • Contractual agreements
      Voluntary obligations include standards that the organization has chosen to follow for best practices and any obligations that are required to maintain certifications. Organizations will have many different compliance obligations. For the purposes of your integrated security, include those that include physical security requirements.
    2. Record your compliance obligations, along with any notes, in your copy of the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    3. Refer to the “Compliance DB” tab for lists of standards/regulations/ guidelines.
    The “Compliance Obligations” tab of the Integrate Physical Security and Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.

    Remediate third-party compliance gaps

    If you have third-party compliance gaps, there are four primary ways to eliminate them:

    1. Find a New, Compliant Partner

      Terminate existing contract and find another organization to partner with.
    2. Bring the Capability In-House

      Expense permitting, this may be the best way to protect yourself.
    3. Demand Compliance

      Tell the third party they must become compliant. Make sure you set a deadline.
    4. Accept Noncompliance and Assume the Risk

      Sometimes remediation just isn’t cost effective and you have no choice.

    Follow Contracting Best Practices to Mitigate the Risk of Future Third-Party Compliance Gaps

    1. Perform Initial Due Diligence: Request proof of third-party compliance prior to entering into a contract.
    2. Perform Ongoing Due Diligence: Request proof of third-party contractor compliance annually.
    3. Contract Negotiation: Insert clauses requesting periodic assertions of compliance.

    View a sample contract provided by the US Department of Health and Human Services.

    Source: Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit, Info-Tech Research Group, 2015

    Pitfalls to avoid when planning security integration

    • No Resources Lineups

      Integration of security needs support from leadership, proper planning, and clear and consistent communication across the organization.
    • Not Addressing Holistic Security

      Create policies and procedures and follow standards that are holistic and based on threats and risks, e.g. consolidated access control policies.
    • Lack of Governance

      While the IT department is a critical partner in cybersecurity, the ownership of such a role sits squarely in the organizational C-suite, with regular reporting to the board of directors (if applicable).
    • Overlooking Business Continuity Effort

      IT and physical security are integral to business continuity and disaster recovery strategies.
    • Not Having Relevant Training and Awareness

      Provide a training and awareness program based on relevant attack vectors. Trained employees are key assets to the development of a safe and secure environment. They must form the base of your security culture.
    • Overbuilding or Underbuilding

      Select third-party providers that offer systems interoperability with other security tools. The intent is to promote a unified approach to security to avoid a cumbersome tooling zoo.

    Sources: Real Time Networks, 2022; Andrew Amaro, KLAVAN Security Services (contributor)

    Enhance

    Enhancing is the development of an integrated security strategy, policies, procedures, BCP, DR, and IR based on the organization’s risks.

    Enhance

    Determine the level of security maturity and update the security strategy

    • Before updating your security strategies, you need to understand the organization’s business strategies, IT strategies, facilities strategies, and physical and information security strategies. The goal is to align your integrated security strategies to contribute to your organization’s success.
    • The integrated security leaders need to understand the direction of the organization. For example:
      • Growth expectation
      • Expansions or mergers anticipation
      • Product or service changes
      • Regulatory requirements
    • Wise security investments depend on aligning your security initiatives to the organization’s objectives by supporting operational performance and ensuring brand protection and shareholder values.
    Integrated security strategies. Consists of an organization’s business strategies, IT strategies, facilities strategies, and physical and information security strategies.

    Sources: Amy L. Meger, Platte River Power Authority (contributor); Baker and Benny, 2013; IFSEC Global, 2023; Security Priorities 2023, Info-Tech Research Group, 2023; Build an Information Security Strategy, Info-Tech Research Group, 2020; ISC, n.d.

    Understanding security maturity

    Maturity models are very effective for determining security states. This table provides examples of general descriptions for physical and information security maturity levels.

    Determine which framework is suitable and select the description that most accurately reflects the ideal state for security in your organization.

    Level 1

    Level 2

    Level 3

    Level 4

    Level 5

    Minimum security with simple physical barriers. Low-level security to prevent and detect some unauthorized external activity. Medium security to prevent, detect, and assess most unauthorized external activity and some unauthorized internal activity. High-level security to prevent, detect, and assess most unauthorized external and internal activity. Maximum security to prevent, detect, assess, and neutralize all unauthorized external and internal activity.

    Physical security maturity level1

    Initial/Ad hoc security programs are reactive. Developing security programs can be effective at what they do but are not holistic. A defined security program is holistic, documented, and proactive. Managed security programs have robust governance and metrics processes. An optimized security program is based on strong risk management practices, including the production of key risk indicators (KRIs).

    Information security maturity level2

    Sources: 1 Fennelly, 2013; 2 Build an Information Security Strategy, Info-Tech Research Group, 2020

    Enhance

    Assess and treat integrated security risks

    The risk assessment conducted consists of analyzing existing inherent risks, existing pressure to the risks such as health and safety laws and codes of practice, new risks from the integration process, risk tolerance, and countermeasures.

    • Some organizations already integrate security into corporate security that consists of risk management, compliance, governance, information security, personnel security, and physical security. However, some organizations are still separating security components, especially physical security and information security, which limits security visibility and the organization’s ability to complete a comprehensive risks assessment.
    • Many vendors are also segregating physical security and information security solutions because their tools do well only on certain aspects. This forces organizations to combine multiple tools, creating a complex environment.
    • Additionally, risks related to people such as mental health issues must be addressed properly. The prevalence of hybrid work post-pandemic makes this aspect especially important.
    • Assess and treat risks based on the organization’s requirements, including its environments. For example, the US federal facility security organization is required to conduct risk assessments at least every five years for Level I (lowest risk) and Level II facilities and at least every three years for Level III, IV, and V (highest risk) facilities.

    Sources: EPA, n.d.; America's Water Infrastructure Act (AWIA), 2018; ISC, 2021

    “In 2022, 95% of US companies are consolidating into a single platform across physical security, cybersecurity, HR, legal and compliance.”

    Source: Ontic Center for Protective Intelligence, 2022; N=359

    Example risk levels

    The risk assessment conducted is based on a combination of physical and information security factors such as certain facilities factors. The risk level can be used to determine the baseline level of protection (LOP). Next, the baseline LOP is customized to the achievable LOP. The following is an example for federal facilities determined by Interagency Security Committee (ISC).

    Risk factor, points and score. Facility security level (FSL), level of risk, and baseline level of protection.

    Source: ISC, 2021

    Example assets

    It is important to identify the organization’s requirements, including its environments (IT, IoT, OT, facilities, etc.), and to measure and evaluate its risks and threats using an appropriate risk framework and tools with the critical step of identifying assets prior to acquiring solutions.

    Organizational requirements including its environments(IT, loT, OT, facilities, etc.)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Certain exceptions must be identified in risk assessment. Usually physical barriers such as gates and intrusion detection sensors are considered as countermeasures,1 however, under certain assessment, e.g. America's Water Infrastructure Act (AWIA),2 physical barriers are also considered assets and as such must also be assessed.

    Compromising a fingerprint scanner

    An anecdotal example of why physical security alone is not sufficient.

    Biometrics: secure access and data security.

    Image by Rawpixel.com on Freepik

    Lessons learned from using fingerprints for authentication:

    • Fingerprint scanners can be physically circumvented by making a copy an authorized user’s fingerprint with 3D printing or even by forcefully amputating an authorized user’s finger.
    • Authorized users may not be given access when the fingerprint cannot be recognized, e.g. if the finger is covered by bandage due to injury.
    • Integration with information security may help detect unauthorized access, e.g. a fingerprint being scanned in a Canadian office when the same user was scanned at a close time interval from an IP in Europe will trigger an alert of a possible incident.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In an ideal world, we want a physical security system that is interoperable with all technologies, flexible with minimal customization, functional, and integrated. In the real world, we may have physical systems with proprietary configurations that are not easily customized and siloed.

    Source: Robert Dang, Info-Tech Research Group

    Use case: Microchip implant

    Microchip implants can be used instead of physical devices such as key cards for digital identity and access management. Risks can be assessed using quantitative or qualitative approaches. In this use case a qualitative approach is applied to impact and likelihood, and a quantitative approach is applied to revenue and cost.

    Asset: Microchip implant

    Benefits

    Impact

    • Improve user satisfaction by removing the need to carry key cards, IDs, etc.
    • Improve operating reliability by reducing the likelihood of losing physical devices such as key cards.
    • Improve reliability of services through continuous and real-time connection with other systems such as payment system.

    Likelihood

    • Improve user satisfaction: High
    • Improve operating reliability: High
    • Improve reliability of services: High

    Revenue

    • Acquire new customers or retain existing customers by making daily lives easier with no need to carry key cards, IDs, etc.
    • Cost reduction in staffing of security personnel, e.g. reducing the staffing of building guards or receptionist.

    Risks

    Impact

    • Security: issues such as biohacking of wearable technology and interconnected devices.
    • Safety: issues such as infections or reactions in the body's immune system.
    • Privacy: issues such as unauthorized surveillance and tracking of activities.

    Likelihood

    • Biohacking: Medium
    • Infections: Low
    • Surveillance: High

    Cost

    • Installation costs and hardware costs.
    • Overall lifecycle cost including estimated software and maintenance costs.
    • Estimated cost of training and estimated increase in productivity.

    Sources: Business Insider, 2018; BBC News, 2022; ISC, 2015

    Enhance

    Update integrated security policies and procedures

    Global policies with local implementation

    This model works for corporate groups with a parent company. In this model, global security policies are developed by a parent company and local policies are applied to the unique business that is not supported by the parent company.

    Update of existing security policies

    This model works for organizations with sufficient resources. In this model, integrated security policies are derived from various policies. For example, physical security in smart buildings/devices (sensors, automated meters, HVAC, etc.) and OT systems (SCADA, PLCs, RTUs, etc.) introduce unique risk exposures, necessitating updates to security policies.

    Customization of information security policies

    This model works for smaller organizations with limited resources. In this model, integrated security policies are derived from information security policies. The issue is when these policies are not applicable to physical security systems or other environments, e.g. OT systems.

    Sources: Kris Krishan, Waymo (contributor); Isabelle Hertanto, Info-Tech Research Group (contributor); Physical and Environmental Security Policy Template, Info-Tech Research Group, 2022.

    Enhance

    Update BCP, DR, IR

    • Physical threats such as theft of material, vandalism, loitering, and the like are also part of business continuity threats.
    • These threats can be carried out by various means such as vehicles breaching perimeter security, bolt cutters used for cutting wire and cable, and ballistic attack.
    • Issues may occur when security operations are owned separately by physical security or information security, thus lacking consistent application of best practices.
    • To overcome this issue, organizations need to update BCP, DR, and IR holistically based on a cost-benefit analysis and the level of security maturity, which can be defined based on the suitable framework.

    Sources: IEEE, 2021; ISC, 2021

    “The best way to get management excited about a disaster plan is to burn down the building across the street.”

    Source: Dan Erwin, Security Officer, Dow Chemical Co., in Computerworld, 2022

    Optimize

    Optimizing means working to make the most effective and efficient use of resources, starting with identifying skill requirements and closing skill gaps, followed by designing and deploying integrated security architecture and controls, and finally monitoring and reporting integrated security metrics.

    Optimize

    Identify skill requirements and close skill gaps

    • The pandemic changed how people work and where they choose to work, and most people still want a hybrid work model. Our survey in July 2022 (N=516) found that 55.8% of employees have the option to work offsite 2-3 days per week, 21.0% can work offsite 1 day per week, and 17.8% can work offsite 4 days per week.
    • The investment (e.g. on infrastructure and networks) to initiate remote work was huge, and the costs didn’t end there; organizations needed to maintain the secure remote work infrastructure to facilitate the hybrid work model.
    • Moreover, roles are evolving due to convergence and modernization. These new roles require an integrative skill set. For example, the grid security and ops team might consist of an IT security specialist, a SCADA technician/engineer, and an OT/IIOT security specialist, where OT/IIOT security specialist is a new role.
    Identify skill gaps that hinder the successful execution of the hybrid work security strategy. Use the identified skill gaps to define the technical skill requirements for current and future work roles. Conduct a skills assessment on your current workforce to identify employee skill gaps. Decide whether to train (including certification), hire, contract, or outsource to close each skill gap.

    Strategic investment in internal security team

    Internal security governance and management using in-house developed tools or off-the-shelf solutions, e.g. security information and event management (SIEM).

    Security management using third parties

    Internal security management using third-party security services, e.g. managed security service providers (MSSPs).

    Outsourcing security management

    Outsourcing the entire security functions, e.g. using managed detection and response (MDR).

    Sources: Info-Tech Research Group’s Security Priorities 2023, Close the InfoSec Skills Gap, Build an IT Employee Engagement Program, and Grid Modernization

    Select the right certifications

    What are the options?

    • One issue in security certification is the complexity of relevancy in topics with respect to roles and levels.
    • The European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA) takes the approach of analyzing existing certifications of ICS/SCADA professionals' cybersecurity skills by orientation, scope, and supporting bodies that are grouped into specific certifications, relevant certifications, and safety certifications (ENISA, 2015).
    • This approach can also be applied to integrated security certifications.

    Physical security certification

    • Examples: Industrial Security Professional Certification (NCMS-ISP); Physical Security Professional (ASIS-PSP); Physical Security Certification (CDSE-PSC); ISC I-100, I-200, I-300, and I-400

    Cyber physical system security certification

    • Examples: Certified SCADA Security Architect (CSSA), EC-Council ICS/SCADA Cybersecurity Training Course

    Information security certification

    • Examples: Network and Information Security (NIS) Driving License, ISA/IEC 62443 Cybersecurity Certificate Program, GIAC Global Industrial Cyber Security Professional (GICSP)

    Safety Certifications

    • Examples: Board of Certified Safety Professionals (BCSP), European Network of Safety and Health Professional Organizations (ENSHPO)
    Table showing options for Certification orientation, scope and supporting bodies.

    Optimize

    Design and deploy integrated security architecture and controls

    • A survey by Brivo found that 38% of respondents have partly centralized security platforms, 25% have decentralized platforms, and 36% have centralized platforms (Brivo, 2022; N=700).
    • If your organization’s security program is still decentralized or partly centralized and your organization is planning to establish an integrated security program, then the recommendation is to perform a holistic risk assessment based on probability and impact assessments on threats and vulnerabilities.
    • The impacted factors, for example, are customers served, criticality of services, equipment present inside the building, personnel response time for operational recovery and the mitigation of hazards, and costs.
    • Frameworks such as Sherwood Applied Business Security Architecture (SABSA), Control Objectives for Information and Related Technologies (COBIT), and The Open Group Architecture Framework (TOGAF) can be used to build security architecture that aligns security goals with business goals.
    • Finally, analyze the security design against the design criteria.

    Sources: ISA and Honeywell Integrated Security Technology Lab, n.d.; IEEE, 2021

    “As long as organizations treat their physical and cyber domains as separate, there is little hope of securing either one.”

    Source: FedTech magazine, 2009

    Analyze architecture design

    Cloud, on-premises, or hybrid? During the pandemic, many enterprises were under tight deadlines to migrate to the cloud. Many did not refactor data and applications correctly for cloud platforms during migration, with the consequence of high cloud bills. This happened because the migrated applications cannot take advantage of on-premises capabilities such as autoscaling. Thus, in 2023, it is plausible that enterprises will bring applications and data back on-premises.

    Below is an example of a security design analysis of platform architecture. Design can be assessed using quantitative or qualitative approaches. In this example, a qualitative approach is applied using high-level advantages and disadvantages.

    Design criteria

    Cloud

    Hybrid

    On-premises

    Effort

    Consumer effort is within a range, e.g. < 60%

    Consumer effort is within a range e.g. < 80%

    100% organization

    Reliability

    High reliability

    High reliability

    Medium reliability that depends on data centers

    Cost

    High cost when data and applications are not correctly designed for cloud

    Optimized cost when data and applications are correctly designed either for cloud or native

    Medium cost when data and applications take advantage of on-prem capabilities

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is important for organizations to find the most optimized architecture to support them, for example, a hybrid architecture of cloud and on-premises based on operations and cost-effectiveness. To help design a security architecture that is strategic, realistic, and based on risk, see Info-Tech’s Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture research.

    Sources: InfoWorld, 2023; Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture , Info-Tech Research Group, 2021

    Analyze equipment design

    Below is an example case of a security design analysis of electronic security systems. Design can be assessed using quantitative or qualitative approaches. In this example a qualitative approach is applied using advantages and disadvantages.

    Surveillance design criteria

    Video camera

    Motion detector

    Theft of security system equipment

    Higher economic loss Lower economic loss

    Reliability

    Positive detection of intrusion Spurious indication and lower reliability

    Energy savings and bandwidth

    Only record when motion is detected Detect and process all movement

    Info-Tech Insight

    Once the design has been analyzed, the next step is to conduct market research to analyze the solutions landscape, e.g. to compare products or services from vendors or manufacturers.

    Sources: IEEE, 202; IEC, n.d.; IEC, 2013

    Analyze off-the-shelf solutions

    Criteria to consider when comparing solutions:

    Criteria to consider when comparing solutions: 1 - Visibility and asset management. 2 - Threat detection, mitigation and response. 3 - Risk assessment and vulnerability management. 4 - Usability, architecture, Cost.

    Visibility and Asset Management

    Passively monitoring data using various protocol layers, actively sending queries to devices, or parsing configuration files of physical security devices, OT, IoT, and IT environments on assets, processes, and connectivity paths.

    Threat Detection, Mitigation, and Response (+ Hunting)

    Automation of threat analysis (signature-based, specification-based, anomaly-based, flow-based, content-based, sandboxing) not only in IT but also in relevant environments, e.g. physical, IoT, IIoT, and OT on assets, data, network, and orchestration with threat intelligence sharing and analytics.

    Risk Assessment and Vulnerability Management

    Risk scoring approach (qualitative, quantitative) based on variables such as behavioral patterns and geolocation. Patching and vulnerability management.

    Usability, Architecture, Cost

    The user and administrative experience, multiple deployment options, extensive integration capabilities, and affordability.

    Source: Secure IT/OT Convergence, Info-Tech Research Group, 2022

    Optimize

    Establish, monitor, and report integrated security metrics

    Security metrics serve various functions in a security program.1 For example:

    • As audit requirements. For integrated security, the requirements are derived from mandatory or voluntary compliance, e.g. NERC CIP.
    • As an indicator of maturity level. For integrated security, maturity level is used to measure the state of security, e.g. C2M2, CMMC.
    • As a measurement of effectiveness and efficiency. Security metrics consist of operational metrics, financial metrics, etc.

    Safety

    Physical security interfaces with the physical world. Thus, metrics based on risks related to safety are crucial. These metrics motivate personnel by making clear why they should care about security.
    Source: EPRI, 2017

    Business Performance

    The impact of security on the business can be measured with various metrics such as operational metrics, service level agreements (SLAs), and financial metrics.
    Source: BMC, 2022

    Technology Performance

    Early detection leads to faster remediation and less damage. Metrics such as maximum tolerable downtime (MTD) and mean time to recovery (MTR) indicate system reliability.
    Source: Dark Reading, 2022

    Security Culture

    Measure the overall quality of security culture with indicators such as compliance and audit, vulnerability management, and training and awareness.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security failure can be avoided by evaluating the security systems and program. Security evaluation requires understanding what, where, when, and how to measure and to report the relevant metrics.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Secure IT/OT Convergence

    The previously entirely separate OT ecosystem is migrating into the IT ecosystem, primarily to improve access via connectivity and to leverage other standard IT capabilities for economic benefit.

    Hence, IT and OT need to collaborate, starting with communication to build trust and to overcome their differences and followed by negotiation on components such as governance and management, security controls on OT environments, compliance with regulations and standards, and establishing metrics for OT security.

    Preparing for Technology Convergence in Manufacturing

    Information technology (IT) and operational technology (OT) teams have a long history of misalignment and poor communication.

    Stakeholder expectations and technology convergence create the need to leave the past behind and build a culture of collaboration.

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy – an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for over seven years with hundreds of organizations.

    This unique approach includes tools for ensuring alignment with business objectives, assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations, enabling a comprehensive current-state assessment, prioritizing initiatives, and building a security roadmap.

    Bibliography

    "1402-2021 - IEEE Guide for Physical Security of Electric Power Substations." IEEE, 2021. Accessed 25 Jan. 2023.

    "2022 State of Protective Intelligence Report." Ontic Center for Protective Intelligence, 2022. Accessed 16 Jan. 2023.

    "8 Staggering Statistics: Physical Security Technology Adoption." Brivo, 2022. Accessed 5 Jan. 2023.

    "America's Water Infrastructure Act of 2018." The United States' Congress, 2018. Accessed 19 Jan. 2023.

    Baker, Paul and Daniel Benny. The Complete Guide to Physical Security. Auerbach Publications. 2013

    Bennett, Steve. "Physical Security Statistics 2022 - Everything You Need to Know." WebinarCare, 4 Dec. 2022. Accessed 30 Dec. 2022.

    "Best Practices for Planning and Managing Physical Security Resources: An Interagency Security Committee Guide." Interagency Security Committee (ISC), Dec. 2015. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    Black, Daniel. "Improve Security Governance With a Security Steering Committee." Info-Tech Research Group, 23 Nov. 2018. Accessed 30 Jan. 2023.

    Borg, Scott. "Don't Put Up Walls Between Your Security People." FedTech Magazine, 17 Feb. 2009. Accessed 15 Dec. 2022.

    Burwash, John. “Preparing for Technology Convergence in Manufacturing.” Info-Tech Research Group, 12 Dec. 2018. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.

    Carney, John. "Why Integrate Physical and Logical Security?" Cisco. Accessed 19 Jan. 2023.

    "Certification of Cyber Security Skills of ICS/SCADA Professionals." European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA), 2015. Accessed 27 Sep. 2022.

    Cherdantseva, Yulia and Jeremy Hilton. "Information Security and Information Assurance. The Discussion about the Meaning, Scope and Goals." Organizational, Legal, and Technological Dimensions of IS Administrator, Almeida F., Portela, I. (eds.), pp. 1204-1235. IGI Global Publishing, 2013.

    Cobb, Michael. "Physical security." TechTarget. Accessed 8 Dec. 2022.

    “Conduct a Drinking Water or Wastewater Utility Risk Assessment.” United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), n.d. Web.

    Conrad, Sandi. "Create and Implement an IoT Strategy." Info-Tech Research Group, 28 July 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.

    Cooksley, Mark. "The IEC 62443 Series of Standards: A Product Manufacturer's Perspective." YouTube, uploaded by Plainly Explained, 27 Apr. 2021. Accessed 26 Aug. 2022.

    "Cyber and physical security must validate their value in 2023." IFSEC Global, 12 Jan. 2023. Accessed 20 Jan. 2023.

    "Cybersecurity Evaluation Tool (CSET®)." Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA). Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    "Cybersecurity Maturity Model Certification (CMMC) 2.0." The United States' Department of Defense (DOD), 2021. Accessed 29 Dec. 2022.

    “Cyber Security Metrics for the Electric Sector: Volume 3.” Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), 2017.

    Czachor, Emily. "Mass power outage in North Carolina caused by gunfire, repairs could take days." CBS News, 5 Dec. 2022. Accessed 20 Jan. 2023.

    Dang, Robert, et al. “Secure IT/OT Convergence.” Info-Tech Research Group, 9 Dec. 2022. Web.

    "Emergency Management Act (S.C. 2007, c. 15)." The Government of Canada, 2007. Accessed 19 Jan. 2023.

    "Emergency management vocabulary." Translation Bureau, Government of Canada. Accessed 19 Jan. 2023.

    Fennelly, Lawrence. Effective physical security. Butterworth-Heinemann, 2013.

    Ghaznavi-Zadeh, Rassoul. "Enterprise Security Architecture - A Top-down Approach." The Information Systems Audit and Control Association (ISACA). Accessed 25 Jan. 2023.

    "Good Practices for Security of Internet of Things." European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA), 2018. Accessed 27 Sep. 2022.

    "Health and Safety at Work etc Act 1974." The United Kingdom Parliament. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    Hébert, Michel, et al. “Security Priorities 2023.” Info-Tech Research Group, 1 Feb. 2023. Web.

    "History and Initial Formation of Physical Security and the Origin of Authority." Office of Research Services (ORS), National Institutes of Health (NIH). March 3, 2017. Accessed 19 Jan. 2023.

    "IEC 62676-1-1:2013 Video surveillance systems for use in security applications - Part 1-1: System requirements - General." International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), 2013. Accessed 9 Dec. 2022.

    "Incident Command System (ICS)." ICS Canada. Accessed 17 Jan. 2023.

    "Information Security Manual - Guidelines for Physical Security." The Australian Cyber Security Centre (ACSC), Dec. 2022. Accessed 13 Jan. 2023.

    "Integrated Physical Security Framework." Anixter. Accessed 8 Dec. 2022.

    "Integrating Risk and Security within a TOGAF® Enterprise Architecture." TOGAF 10, The Open Group. Accessed 11 Jan. 2023.

    Latham, Katherine. "The microchip implants that let you pay with your hand." BBC News, 11 Apr. 2022. Accessed 12 Jan. 2023.

    Linthicum, David. "2023 could be the year of public cloud repatriation." InfoWorld, 3 Jan. 2023. Accessed 10 Jan. 2023.

    Ma, Alexandra. "Thousands of people in Sweden are embedding microchips under their skin to replace ID cards." Business Insider, 14 May 2018. Accessed 12 Jan. 2023.

    Mendelssohn, Josh and Dana Tessler. "Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit." Info-Tech Research Group, 25 March 2015. Accessed 27 Jan. 2023.

    Meredith, Sam. "All you need to know about the Nord Stream gas leaks - and why Europe suspects 'gross sabotage'." CNBC, 11 Oct. 2022. Accessed 20 Jan. 2023.

    Nicaise, Vincent. "EU NIS2 Directive: what’s changing?" Stormshield, 20 Oct. 2022. Accessed 17 Nov. 2022.

    "NIST SP 800-53 Rev. 5 Security and Privacy Controls for Information Systems and Organizations." The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), 13 Jul. 2022. Accessed 27 Jan. 2023.

    "North American Electric Reliability Corporation Critical Infrastructure Protection (NERC CIP) Series." NERC. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    "North America Physical Security Market - Global Forecast to 2026." MarketsandMarkets, June 2021. Accessed 30 Dec. 2022.

    "NSTISSI No. 4011 National Training Standard For Information Systems Security (InfoSec) Professionals." The United States Committee on National Security Systems (CNSS), 20 Jun. 1994. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    "Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSH) Act of 1970." The United States Department of Labor. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    Palter, Jay. "10 Mistakes Made in Designing a Physical Security Program." Real Time Networks, 7 Sep. 2022. Accessed 6 Jan. 2023.

    Parker, Donn. Fighting Computer Crime. John Wiley & Sons, 1998.

    Pathak, Parag. "What Is Threat Management? Common Challenges and Best Practices." Security Intelligence, 2020. Accessed 5 Jan. 2023.

    Pender-Bey, Georgie. "The Parkerian Hexad." Lewis University, 2012. Accessed 24 Jan. 2023.

    Philippou, Oliver. "2023 Trends to Watch: Physical Security Technologies." Omdia. Accessed 20 Jan. 2023.

    Phinney, Tom. "IEC 62443: Industrial Network and System Security." ISA and Honeywell Integrated Security Technology Lab. Accessed 30 Jan. 2023.

    "Physical Security Market, with COVID-19 Impact Analysis - Global Forecast to 2026." MarketsandMarkets, Jan. 2022. Accessed 30 Dec. 2022.

    "Physical Security Professional (PSP)" ASIS International. Accessed 17 Jan. 2023.

    "Physical Security Systems (PSS) Assessment Guide" The United States' Department of Energy (DOE), Dec. 2016. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    "Policies, Standards, Best Practices, Guidance, and White Papers." Interagency Security Committee (ISC). Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    "Profiles, Add-ons and Specifications." ONVIF. Accessed 9 Dec. 2022.

    "Protective Security Policy Framework (PSPF)." The Australian Attorney-General's Department (AGD). Accessed 13 Jan. 2023.

    "Satellites detect methane plume in Nord Stream leak." The European Space Agency (ESA), 6 oct. 2022. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    ""Satellites detect methane plume in Nord Stream leak." The European Space Agency (ESA), 6 oct. 2022. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    Satgunananthan, Niru. "Challenges in Security Convergence?" LinkedIn, 8 Jan. 2022. Accessed 20 Dec. 2022.

    Sooknanan, Shastri and Isaac Kinsella. "Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture." Info-Tech Research Group, 12 March 2021. Accessed 26 Jan. 2023.

    "TC 79 Alarm and electronic security systems." International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), n.d. Accessed 9 Dec. 2022.

    "The Risk Management Process for Federal Facilities: An Interagency Security Committee Standard." Interagency Security Committee (ISC), 2021. Accessed 26 Jan. 2023.

    "The Short Guide to Why Security Programs Can Fail." CyberTalk, 23 Sep. 2021. Accessed 30 Dec. 2022.

    Verton, Dan. "Companies Aim to Build Security Awareness." Computerworld, 27 Nov. 2022. Accessed 26 Jan. 2023.

    "Vulnerability Assessment of Federal Facilities." The United States' Department of Justice, 28 Jun. 1995. Accessed 19 Jan. 2023.

    "What is IEC 61508?" 61508 Association. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023.

    Wolf, Gene. "Better Include Physical Security With Cybersecurity." T&D World 5 Jan. 2023. Accessed 19 Jan. 2023.

    Wood, Kate, and Isaac Kinsella. “Build an Information Security Strategy.” Info-Tech Research Group, 9 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Woolf, Tim, et al. "Benefit-Cost Analysis for Utility-Facing Grid Modernization Investments: Trends, Challenges, and Considerations." Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Feb. 2021. Accessed 15 Nov. 2022.

    "Work Health and Safety Act 2011." The Australian Government. Accessed 13 Jan. 2023.

    Wu, Jing. “Industrial Control System Modernization: Unlock the Value of Automation in Utilities.” Info-Tech Research Group, 6 April 2023. Web.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Amy L. Meger, IGP

    Information and Cyber Governance Manager
    Platte River Power Authority

    Andrew Amaro

    Chief Security Officer (CSO) & Founder
    KLAVAN Security

    Bilson Perez

    IT Security Manager
    4Wall Entertainment

    Dan Adams

    VP of Information Technology
    4Wall Entertainment

    Doery Abdou

    Senior Manager
    March Networks Corporate

    Erich Krueger

    Manager of Security Engineering
    Omaha Public Power District

    Kris Krishan

    Head of IT
    Waymo

    Owen Yardley

    Director, Facilities Security Preparedness
    Omaha Public Power District

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}172|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $54,542 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy

    Organizations consider application oversight a low priority and app portfolio knowledge is poor:

    • No dedicated or centralized effort to manage the app portfolio means no single source of truth is available to support informed decision making.
    • Organizations acquire more applications over time, creating redundancy, waste, and the need for additional support.
    • Organizations are more vulnerable to changing markets. Flexibility and growth are compromised when applications are unadaptable or cannot scale.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You cannot outsource application strategy.
    • Modern software options have lessened the need for organizations to have robust in-house application management capabilities. But your applications’ future and governance of the portfolio still require centralized oversight to ensure the best overall return on investment.
    • Application portfolio management is the mechanism to ensure that the applications in your enterprise are delivering value and support for your value streams and business capabilities. Understanding value, satisfaction, technical health, and total cost of ownership are critical to digital transformation, modernization, and roadmaps.

    Impact and Result

    Build an APM program that is actionable and fit for size:

    • Understand your current state, needs, and goals for your application portfolio management.
    • Create an application and platform inventory that is built for better decision making.
    • Rationalize your apps with business priorities and communicate risk in operational terms.
    • Create a roadmap that improves communication between those who own, manage, and support your applications.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Application Portfolio Management Foundations Deck – A guide that helps you establish your core application inventory, simplified rationalization, redundancy comparison, and modernization roadmap.

    Enterprises have more applications than they need and rarely apply oversight to monitor the health, cost, and relative value of applications to ensure efficiency and minimal risk. This blueprint will help you build a streamlined application portfolio management process.

    • Application Portfolio Management Foundations – Phases 1-4

    2. Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool – A tool that assesses your current application portfolio.

    Visibility into your application portfolio and APM practices will help inform and guide your next steps.

    • Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool

    3. Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook – A template that builds your application portfolio management playbook.

    Capture your APM roles and responsibilities and build a repeatable process.

    • Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook

    4. Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool – A tool that stores application information and allows you to execute rationalization and build a portfolio roadmap.

    This tool is the central hub for the activities within Application Portfolio Management Foundations.

    • Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Your Foundations

    The Purpose

    Work with key corporate stakeholders to come to a shared understanding of the benefits and aspects of application portfolio management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish the goals of APM.

    Set the scope of APM responsibilities.

    Establish business priorities for the application portfolio.

    Activities

    1.1 Define goals and metrics.

    1.2 Define application categories.

    1.3 Determine steps and roles.

    1.4 Weight value drivers.

    Outputs

    Set short- and long-term goals and metrics.

    Set the scope for applications.

    Set the scope for the APM process.

    Defined business value drivers.

    2 Improve Your Inventory

    The Purpose

    Gather information on your applications to build a detailed inventory and identify areas of redundancy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Populated inventory based on your and your team’s current knowledge.

    Understanding of outstanding data and a plan to collect it.

    Activities

    2.1 Populate inventory.

    2.2 Assign business capabilities.

    2.3 Review outstanding data.

    Outputs

    Initial application inventory

    List of areas of redundancy

    Plan to collect outstanding data

    3 Gather Application Information

    The Purpose

    Work with the application subject matter experts to collect and compile data points and determine the appropriate disposition for your apps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Dispositions for individual applications

    Application rationalization framework

    Activities

    3.1 Assess business value.

    3.2 Assess end-user perspective.

    3.3 Assess TCO.

    3.4 Assess technical health.

    3.5 Assess redundancies.

    3.6 Determine dispositions.

    Outputs

    Business value score for individual applications

    End-user satisfaction scores for individual applications

    TCO score for individual applications

    Technical health scores for individual applications

    Feature-level assessment of redundant applications

    Assigned dispositions for individual applications

    4 Gather, Assess, and Select Dispositions

    The Purpose

    Work with application delivery specialists to determine the strategic plans for your apps and place these in your portfolio roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized initiatives

    Initial application portfolio roadmap

    Ongoing structure of APM

    Activities

    4.1 Prioritize initiatives

    4.2 Populate roadmap.

    4.3 Determine ongoing APM cadence.

    4.4 Build APM action plan.

    Outputs

    Prioritized new potential initiatives.

    Built an initial portfolio roadmap.

    Established an ongoing cadence of APM activities.

    Built an action plan to complete APM activities.

    Further reading

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Analyst Perspective

    You can’t outsource accountability.

    Many lack visibility into their overall application portfolio, focusing instead on individual projects or application development. Inevitably, application sprawl creates process and data disparities, redundant applications, and duplication of resources and stands as a significant barrier to business agility and responsiveness. The shift from strategic investment to application maintenance creates an unnecessary constraint on innovation and value delivery.

    With the rise and convenience of SAAS solutions, IT has an increasing need to discover and support all applications in the organization. Unmanaged and unsanctioned applications can lead to increased reputational risk. What you don’t know WILL hurt you.

    You can outsource development, you can even outsource maintenance, but you cannot outsource accountability for the portfolio. Organizations need a holistic dashboard of application performance and dispositions to help guide and inform planning and investment discussions. Application portfolio management (APM) can’t tell you why something is broken or how to fix it, but it is an important tool to determine if an application’s value and performance are up to your standards and can help meet your future goals.

    The image contains a picture of Hans Eckman.

    Hans Eckman
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group


    Is this research right for you?

    Research Navigation

    Managing your application portfolio is essential regardless of its size or whether your software is purchased or developed in house. Each organization must have some degree of application portfolio management to ensure that applications deliver value efficiently and that their risk or gradual decline in technical health is appropriately limited.

    Your APM goals

    If this describes your primary goal(s)

    • We are building a business case to determine where and if APM is needed now.
    • We want to understand how well supported are our business capabilities, departments, or core functions by our current applications.
    • We want to start our APM program with our core or critical applications.
    • We want to build our APM inventory for less than 150 applications (division, department, operating unit, government, small enterprise, etc.).
    • We want to start simple with a quick win for our 150 most important applications.
    • We want to start with an APM pilot before committing to an enterprise APM program.
    • We need to rationalize potentially redundant and underperforming applications to determine which to keep, replace, or retire.
    • We want to start enterprise APM, with up to 150 critical applications.
    • We want to collect and analyze detailed information about our applications.
    • We need tools to help us calculate total cost of ownership (TCO) and value.
    • We want to customize our APM journey and rationalization.
    • We want to build a formal communication strategy for our APM program.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Organizations consider application oversight a low priority and app portfolio knowledge is poor.
    • No dedicated or centralized effort to manage the app portfolio means no single source of truth is available to support informed decision making.
    • Organizations acquire more applications over time, creating redundancy, waste, and the need for additional support.
    • Organizations are more vulnerable to changing markets. Flexibility and growth are compromised when applications are unadaptable or cannot scale.
    • APM implies taking a holistic approach and compiling multiple priorities and perspectives.
    • Organizations have limited time to act strategically or proactively and need to be succinct.
    • Uncertainties on business value prevent IT from successfully advising software decision making.
    • IT knows its technical debt but struggles to get the business to act on technical risks.
    • Attempts at exposing these problems rarely gain buy-in and discourage the push for improvement.
    • Think low priority over no priority.
    • Integrate these tasks into your mixed workload.
    • Create an inventory built for better decision making.
    • Rationalize your apps in accordance with business priorities and communicate risks on their terms.
    • Create a roadmap that improves communication between those who own, manage, and support an application.
    • Build your APM process fit for size.

    Info-Tech Insight: You can’t outsource strategy.

    Modern software options have decreased the need for organizations to have robust in-house application management capabilities. Your applications’ future and governance of the portfolio still require a centralized IT oversight to ensure the best return on investment.

    The top IT challenges for SE come from app management

    #1 challenge small enterprise owners face in their use of technology:

    Taking appropriate security precautions

    24%

    The costs of needed upgrades to technology

    17%

    The time it takes to fix problems

    17%

    The cost of maintaining technology

    14%

    Lack of expertise

    9%

    Breaks in service

    7%
    Source: National Small Business Association, 2019

    Having more applications than an organization needs means unnecessarily high costs and additional burden on the teams who support the applications. Especially in the case of small enterprises, this is added pressure the IT team cannot afford.

    A poorly maintained portfolio will eventually hurt the business more than it hurts IT.

    Legacy systems, complex environments, or anything that leads to a portfolio that can’t adapt to changing business needs will eventually become a barrier to business growth and accomplishing objectives. Often the blame is put on the IT department.

    56%

    of small businesses cited inflexible technology as a barrier to growth

    Source: Salesforce as quoted by Tech Republic, 2019

    A hidden and inefficient application portfolio is the root cause of so many pains experienced by both IT and the business.

    • Demand/Capacity Imbalance
    • Overspending
    • Security and Business Continuity Risk
    • Delays in Delivery
    • Barriers to Growth

    APM comes at a justified cost

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate APM and the costs.

    The benefits of APM

    APM identifies areas where you can reduce core spending and reinvest in innovation initiatives.

    Other benefits can include:

    • Fewer redundancies
    • Less risk
    • Less complexity
    • Improved processes
    • Flexibility
    • Scalability

    APM allows you to better understand and set the direction of your portfolio

    Application Inventory

    The artifact that documents and informs the business of your application portfolio.

    Application Rationalization

    The process of collecting information and assessing your applications to determine recommended dispositions.

    Application Alignment

    The process of revealing application information through interviewing stakeholders and aligning to business capabilities.

    Application Roadmap

    The artifact that showcases the strategic directions for your applications over a given timeline.

    Application Portfolio Management (APM):

    The ongoing practice of:

    • Providing visibility into applications across the organization.
    • Recommending corrections or enhancements to decision makers.
    • Aligning delivery teams on priority.
    • Showcasing the direction of applications to stakeholders.

    Create a balanced approach to value delivery

    Enterprise Agility and Value Realization

    Product Lifecycle Management

    Align your product and service improvement and execution to enterprise strategy and value realization in three key areas: defining your products and services, aligning product/service owners, and developing your product vision.

    Product Delivery Lifecycle (Agile DevOps)

    Enhance business agility by leveraging an Agile mindset and continuously improving your delivery throughput, quality, value realization, and adaptive governance.

    Application Portfolio Management

    Transform your application portfolio into a cohesive service catalog aligned to your business capabilities by discovering, rationalizing, and modernizing your applications while improving application maintenance, management, and reuse.

    The image contains a screenshot of a Thought Model on the Application Department Strategy.


    The image contains a screenshot of a Thought Model on Accelerate Your Transition to Product Delivery.

    Every organization experiences some degree of application sprawl

    The image contains a screenshot of images to demonstrate application sprawl.

    Causes of Sprawl

    • Poor Lifecycle Management
    • Turnover & Lack of Knowledge Transfer
    • Siloed Business Units & Decentralized IT
    • Business-Managed IT
    • (Shadow IT)
    • Mergers & Acquisitions

    Problems With Sprawl

    • Redundancy and Inefficient Spending
    • Disparate Apps & Data
    • Obsolescence
    • Difficulties in Prioritizing Support
    • Barriers to Change & Growth

    Application Sprawl:

    Inefficiencies within your application portfolio are created by the gradual and non-strategic accumulation of applications.

    You have more apps than you need.

    Only 34% of software is rated as both IMPORTANT and EFFECTIVE by users.

    Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision

    Build your APM journey map

    The image contains screenshots of diagrams that reviews building your APM journey map.

    Application rationalization provides insight

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Info-Tech’s Five Lens Model

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of directionless portfolio of applications.

    Application Alignment

    Business Value

    Technical Health

    End-User Perspective

    Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    Modernize: Create a new initiative to address an inadequacy.

    Consolidate: Create a new initiative to reduce duplicate functionality.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    How well do your apps support your core functions and teams?

    How well are your apps aligned to value delivery?

    Do your apps meet all IT quality standards and policies?

    How well do your apps meet your end users’ needs?

    What is the relative cost of ownership and operation of your apps?

    Application rationalization requires the collection of several data points that represent these perspectives and act as the criteria for determining a disposition for each of your applications.

    APM is an iterative and evergreen process

    APM provides oversight and awareness of your application portfolio’s performance and support for your business operations and value delivery to all users and customers.

    Determine Scope and categories Build your list of applications and capabilities Score each application based on your values Determine outcomes based on app scoring and support for capabilities

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    1.1 Assess the state of your current application portfolio.

    1.2 Determine narrative.

    1.3 Define goals and metrics.

    1.4 Define application categories.

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC).

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    2.1 Populate your inventory.

    2.2 Align to business capabilities.

    *Repeat

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    3.1 Assess business value.

    3.2 Assess technical health.

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective.

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership.

    *Repeat

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results.

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results.

    4.3 Determine dispositions.

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional).

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional).

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives.

    4.7 Determine ongoing cadence.

    *Repeat

    Repeat according to APM cadence and application changes

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Retail

    SOURCE: Deloitte, 2017

    Supermarket Company

    The grocer was a smaller organization for the supermarket industry with a relatively low IT budget. While its portfolio consisted of a dozen applications, the organization still found it difficult to react to an evolving industry due to inflexible and overly complex legacy systems.

    The IT manager found himself in a scenario where he knew the applications well but had little awareness of the business processes they supported. Application maintenance was purely in keeping things operational, with little consideration for a future business strategy.

    As the business demanded more responsiveness to changes, the IT team needed to be able to react more efficiently and effectively while still securing the continuity of the business.

    The IT manager found success by introducing APM and gaining a better understanding of the business use and future needs for the applications. The organization started small but then increased the scope over time to produce and develop techniques to aid the business in meeting strategic goals with applications.

    Results

    The IT manager gained credibility and trust within the organization. The organization was able to build a plan to move away from the legacy systems and create a portfolio more responsive to the dynamic needs of an evolving marketplace.

    The application portfolio management initiative included the following components:

    Train teams and stakeholders on APM

    Model the core business processes

    Collect application inventory

    Assign APM responsibilities

    Start small, then grow

    Info-Tech’s application portfolio management methodology

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    Phase Activities

    1.1 Assess your current application portfolio

    1.2 Determine narrative

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    1.4 Define application categories

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3.1 Assess business value

    3.2 Assess technical health

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    4.7 Determine ongoing APM cadence

    Phase Outcomes

    Work with the appropriate management stakeholders to:

    • Extract key business priorities.
    • Set your goals.
    • Define scope of APM effort.

    Gather information on your own understanding of your applications to build a detailed inventory and identify areas of redundancy.

    Work with application subject matter experts to collect and compile data points and determine the appropriate disposition for your apps.

    Work with application delivery specialists to determine the strategic plans for your apps and place these in your portfolio roadmap.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook

    Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    This template allows you to capture your APM roles and responsibilities and build a repeatable process.

    This tool stores all relevant application information and allows you to assess your capability support, execute rationalization, and build a portfolio roadmap.

    The image contains screenshots of the Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook. The image contains screenshots of the Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool.

    Key deliverable:

    Blueprint Storyboard

    This is the PowerPoint document you are viewing now. Follow this guide to understand APM, learn how to use the tools, and build a repeatable APM process that will be captured in your playbook.

    The image contains a screenshot of the blueprint storyboard.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI for on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Establish goals and foundations for your APM practice.

    Call #2:

    Initiate inventory and determine data requirements.

    Call #3:

    Initiate rationalization with group of applications.

    Call #4:

    Review result of first iteration and perform retrospective.

    Call #5:

    Initiate your roadmap and determine your ongoing APM practice.

    Note: The Guided Implementation will focus on a subset or group of applications depending on the state of your current APM inventory and available time. The goal is to use this first group to build your APM process and models to support your ongoing discovery, rationalization, and modernization efforts.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our right-sized best practices in your organization. A typical GI, using our materials, is 3 to 6 calls over the course of 1 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    Post Workshop Steps

    Activities

    1.1 Assess your current
    application portfolio

    1.2 Determine narrative

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    1.4 Define application categories

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3.1 Assess business value

    3.2 Assess technical health

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    4.7 Determine ongoing APM cadence

    • Complete in-progress deliverables from the previous four days.
    • Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss the next steps.

    Outcomes

    Work with the appropriate management stakeholders to:

    1. Extract key business priorities
    2. Set your goals
    3. Agree on key terms and set the scope for your APM effort

    Work with your applications team to:

    1. Build a detailed inventory
    2. Identify areas of redundancy

    Work with the SMEs for a subset of applications to:

    1. Define your rationalization criteria, descriptions, and scoring
    2. Evaluate each application using rationalization criteria

    Work with application delivery specialists to:

    1. Determine the appropriate disposition for your apps
    2. Build an initial application portfolio roadmap
    3. Establish an ongoing cadence of APM activities

    Info-Tech analysts complete:

    1. Workshop report
    2. APM Snapshot and Foundations Toolset
    3. Action plan

    Note: The workshop will focus on a subset or group of applications depending on the state of your current APM inventory and available time. The goal is to use this first group to build your APM process and models to support your ongoing discovery, rationalization, and modernization efforts.

    Workshop Options

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Outcomes

    1-Day Snapshot

    3-Day Snapshot and Foundations (Key Apps)

    4-Day Snapshot and Foundations (Pilot Area)

    APM Snapshot

    • Align applications to business capabilities
    • Evaluate application support for business capabilities

    APM Foundations

    • Define your APM program and cadence
    • Rationalize applications using weighted criteria
    • Define application dispositions
    • Build an application roadmap aligned to initiatives

    Establish APM practice with a small sample set of apps and capabilities.

    Establish APM practice with a pilot group of apps and capabilities.

    Blueprint Pre-Step: Get the right stakeholders to the right exercises

    The image contains four steps and demonstrates who should be handling each exercise. 1. Lay Your Foundations, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner and the Key Corporate Stakeholders. 2. Improve Your Inventory, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner and the Applications Subject Matter Experts. 3. Rationalize Your Apps, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner, the Applications Subject Matter Experts, and the Delivery Leads. 4. Populate Your Roadmap, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner, the Key Corporate Stakeholders, and the Delivery Leads.

    APM Lead/Owner (Recommended)

    ☐ Applications Lead or the individual responsible for application portfolio management, along with any applications team members, if available

    Key Corporate Stakeholders

    Depending on size and structure, participants could include:

    ☐ Head of IT (CIO, CTO, IT Director, or IT Manager)

    ☐ Head of shared services (CFO, COO, VP HR, etc.)

    ☐ Compliance Officer, Steering Committee

    ☐ Company owner or CEO

    Application Subject Matter Experts

    Individuals who have familiarity with a specific subset of applications

    ☐ Business owners (product owners, Head of Business Function, power users)

    ☐ Support owners (Operations Manager, IT Technician)

    Delivery Leads

    ☐ Development Managers

    ☐ Solution Architects

    ☐ Project Managers

    Understand your APM tools and outcomes

    1.Diagnostic The image contains a screenshot of the diagnostic APM tool.

    5. Foundations: Chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the Foundations: Chart APM tool.

    2. Data Journey

    The image contains a screenshot of the data journey APM tool.

    6. App Comparison

    The image contains a screenshot of the App Comparison APM tool.

    3. Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of the snapshot APM tool.

    7. Roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the Roadmap APM tool.

    4. Foundations: Results

    The image contains a screenshot of the Foundations: Results APM Tool.

    Examples and explanations of these tools are located on the following slides and within the phases where they occur.

    Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s APM Diagnostic Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Diagnostic Tool.

    One of the primary purposes of application portfolio management is to get what we know and need to know on paper so we can share a common vision and understanding of our portfolio. This enables better discussions and decisions with your application owners and stakeholders.

    APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Interpreting your APM Snapshot results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM snapshots results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations chart.

    Compare application groups

    Group comparison can be used for more than just redundant/overlapping applications.

    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate comparing application groups.

    Apply Info-Tech’s 6 R’s Rationalization Disposition Model

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's 6 R's Rationalization Disposition Model.

    Disposition

    Description

    Reward

    Prioritize new features or enhancement requests and openly welcome the expansion of these applications as new requests are presented.

    Refresh

    Address the poor end-user satisfaction with a prioritized project. Consult with users to determine if UX issues require improvement to address satisfaction.

    Refocus

    Determine the root cause of the low value. Refocus, retrain, or refresh the UX to improve value. If there is no value found, aim to "keep the lights on" until the app can be decommissioned.

    Replace

    Replace or rebuild the application as technical and user issues are putting important business capabilities at risk. Decommission application alongside replacement.

    Remediate

    Address the poor technical health or risk with a prioritized project. Further consult with development and technical teams to determine if migration or refactoring is suited to address the technical issue.

    Retire

    Cancel any requested features and enhancements. Schedule the proper decommission and transfer end users to a new or alternative system if necessary.

    TCO, compared relatively to business value, helps determine the practicality of a disposition and the urgency of any call to action. Application alignment is factored in when assessing redundancies and has a separate set of dispositions.

    Populate roadmap example

    The image contains an example of the populate roadmap.

    ARE YOU READY TO GET STARTED?

    Phase 1

    Lay Your Foundations

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Applications Lead

    Key Corporate Stakeholders

    Additional Resources

    APM supports many goals

    Building an APM process requires a proper understanding of the underlying business goals and objectives of your organization’s strategy. Effectively identifying these drivers is paramount to gaining buy-in and the approval for any changes you plan to make to your application portfolio.

    After identifying these goals, you will need to ensure they are built into the foundations of your APM process.

    “What is most critical?” but also “What must come first?”

    Discover

    Improve

    Transform

    Collect Inventory

    Uncover Shadow IT

    Uncover Redundancies

    Anticipate Upgrades

    Predict Retirement

    Reduce Cost

    Increase Efficiency

    Reduce Applications

    Eliminate Redundancy

    Limit Risk

    Improve Architecture

    Modernize

    Enable Scalability

    Drive Business Growth

    Improve UX

    Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s APM Diagnostic Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Diagnostic Tool.

    One of the primary purposes of application portfolio management is to get what we know and need to know on paper so we can share a common vision and understanding of our portfolio. This enables better discussions and decisions with your application owners and stakeholders.

    1.1 Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s diagnostic tool

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. This tool provides visibility into your application portfolio and APM practices.
    2. Based on your assessment, you should gain a better understanding of whether the appropriate next steps are in application discovery, rationalization, or roadmapping.
    3. Complete the “Data Entry” worksheet in the Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool (Excel).
    4. Review the “Results” worksheet to help inform and guide your next steps.

    Download the Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool

    Input Output
    • Current APM program
    • Application landscape
    • APM current-state assessment
    Materials Participants
    • Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool
    • Applications Lead

    1.1 Understanding the diagnostic results

    • Managed Apps are your known knowns and most of your portfolio.
    • Unmanaged and Unsanctioned Apps are known but have unknown risks and compliance. Bring these under IT support.
    • Unknown Apps are high risk and noncompliant. Prioritize these based on risk, cost, and use.
    The image contains a screenshot of the diagnostic APM tool.
    • APM is more than an inventory and assessment. A strong APM program provides ongoing visibility and insights to drive application improvement and value delivery.
    • Use your Sprawl Factors to identify process and organizational gaps that may need to be addressed.
    • Your APM inventory is only as good as the information in it. Use this chart to identify gaps and develop a path to define missing information.
    • APM is an iterative process. Use this state assessment to determine where to focus most of your current effort.

    Understand potential motivations for APM

    The value of APM is defined by how the information will be used to drive better decisions.

    Portfolio Governance

    Transformative Initiatives

    Event-Driven Rationalization

    Improves:

    • Spending efficiency
    • Risk
    • Retirement of aged and low-value applications
    • Business enablement

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Less urgent
    • As rigorous as appropriate
    • Apply in-depth analysis as needed

    Enables:

    • Data migration or harmonization
    • Legacy modernization
    • Infrastructure/cloud migration
    • Standardizing platforms
    • Shift to cloud and SAAS

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Time sensitive
    • Scope on impacted areas
    • Need to determine specific dispositions
    • Outcomes need to include detailed and actionable steps

    Responds to:

    • Mergers and acquisitions
    • Regulatory and compliance change
    • New applications
    • Application retirement by vendors
    • Changes in business operations
    • Security risks and BC/DR

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Time constrained
    • Lots of discovery work
    • Primary focus on duplication
    • Increased process and system understanding

    Different motivations will influence the appropriate approach to and urgency of APM or, specifically, rationalizing the portfolio. When rationalizing is directly related to enabling or in response to a broader initiative, you will need to create a more structured approach with a formal budget and resources.

    1.2 Determine narrative

    Estimated time: 30 minutes-2 hours

    1. Open the “Narrative” tab in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool.
    2. Start by listing your prevailing IT pain points with the application portfolio. These will be the issues experienced predominantly by the IT team and not necessarily by the stakeholders. Be sure to distinguish pain points from their root causes.
    3. Determine an equivalent business pain point for each IT pain point. This should be how the problem manifests itself to business stakeholders and should include potential risks to the organization is exposed to.
    4. Determine the business goal for each business pain point. Ideally, these are established organizational goals that key decision-makers will recognize. These goals should address the business pain points you have documented.
    5. Determine the technical objective for each business goal. These speak to the general corrections or enhancements to the portfolio required to accomplish the business goals.
    6. Use the “Narrative - Matrix” worksheet to group items into themes if needed.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Familiarity with application landscape
    • Organizational context and strategic artifacts
    • Narrative for application portfolio transformation
    Materials Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Application Portfolio Manager

    Connect your pains to what the business cares about to find the most effective narrative

    Root Cause

    IT Pain Points

    Business Pain Points

    Business Goals

    Narrative

    Technical Objectives

    Sprawl

    Shadow IT/decentralized oversight

    Neglect over time

    Poor delivery processes

    Back-End Complexity

    Disparate Data/Apps

    Poor Architectural Fit

    Redundancy

    Maintenance Demand/
    Resource Drain

    Low Maintainability

    Technical Debt

    Legacy, Aging, or Expiring Apps

    Security Vulnerabilities

    Unsatisfied Customers

    Hurdles to Growth/Change

    Poor Business Analytics

    Process Inefficiency

    Software Costs

    Business Continuity Risk

    Data Privacy Risk

    Data/IP Theft Risk

    Poor User Experience

    Low-Value Apps

    Scalability

    Flexibility/Agility

    Data-Driven Insights

    M&A Transition

    Business Unit Consolidation/ Centralization

    Process Improvement

    Process Modernization

    Cost Reduction

    Stability

    Customer Protection

    Security

    Employee Enablement

    Business Enablement

    Innovation

    Create Strategic Alignment

    Identify specific business capabilities that are incompatible with strategic initiatives.

    Reduce Application Intensity

    Highlight the capabilities that are encumbered due to functional overlaps and complexity.

    Reduce Software Costs

    Specific business capabilities come at an unnecessarily or disproportionately high cost.

    Mitigate Business Continuity Risk

    Specific business capabilities are at risk of interruption or stoppages due to unresolved back-end issues.

    Mitigate Security Risk

    Specific business capabilities are at risk due to unmitigated security vulnerabilities or breaches.

    Increase Satisfaction Applications

    Specific business capabilities are not achieving their optimal business value.

    Platform Standardization

    Platform Standardization Consolidation

    Data Harmonization

    Removal/Consolidation of Redundant Applications

    Legacy Modernization

    Application Upgrades

    Removal of Low-Value Applications

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. Determine the motivations behind APM. You may want to collect and review any of the organization’s strategic documents that provide additional context on previously established goals.
    2. With the appropriate stakeholders, discuss the goals of APM. Try to label your goals as either:
      1. Short term: Refers to immediate goals used to represent the progress of APM activities. Likely these goals are more IT-oriented
      2. Long term: Refers to broader and more distant goals more related to the impact of APM. These goals tend to be more business-oriented.
    3. To help clearly define your goals, discuss appropriate metrics for each goal. Often these metrics can be expressed as:
      1. Leading indicators: Metrics used to gauge the success of your short-term goals and the progress of APM activities.
      2. Lagging indicators: Metrics used to gauge the success of your long-term goals.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Overarching organizational strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Defined goals and metrics for APM
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.3 Define goals and metrics: Example

    Goals

    Metric

    Target

    Short Term

    Improve ability to inform the business

    Leading Indicators

    • Application inventory with all data fields completed
    • Applications with recommended dispositions
    • 80% of portfolio

    Improve ownership of applications

    • Applications with an assigned business and technical owner
    • 80% of portfolio

    Reduce costs of portfolio

    • TCO of full application portfolio
    • The number of recovered/avoided software licenses from retired apps
    • Reduce by 5%
    • $50,000

    Long Term

    Migrate platform

    Lagging Indicators

    • Migrate all applications
    • Total value change in on-premises apps switched to SaaS
    • 100% of applications
    • Increase 50%

    Improve overall satisfaction with portfolio

    • End-user satisfaction rating
    • Increase 25%

    Become more customer-centric

    • Increased sales
    • Increased customer experience
    • Increase 35%

    “Application” doesn’t have the same meaning to everyone

    The image contains a picture of Martin Fowler.

    Code: A body of code that's seen by developers as a single unit.

    Functionality: A group of functionality that business customers see as a single unit.

    Funding: An initiative that those with the money see as a single budget.

    ?: What else?

    “Essentially applications are social constructions.

    Source: Martin Fowler

    APM focuses on business applications.

    “Software used by business users to perform a business function.”

    – ServiceNow, 2020

    Unfortunately, that definition is still quite vague.

    You must set boundaries and scope for “application”

    1. Many individual items can be considered applications on their own or components within or associated with an application.

    2. Different categories of applications may be out of scope or handled differently within the activities and artifacts of APM.

    Different categories of applications may be out of scope or handled differently within the activities and artifacts of APM.

    • Interface
    • Software Component
    • Supporting Software
    • Platform
    • Presentation Layer
    • Middleware
    • Micro Service
    • Database
    • UI
    • API
    • Data Access/ Transfer/Load
    • Operating System

    Apps can be categorized by generic categories

    • Enterprise Applications
    • Unique Function-Specific Applications
    • Productivity Tools
    • Customer-Facing Applications
    • Mobile Applications

    Apps can be categorized by bought vs. built or install types

    • Custom
    • On-Prem
    • Off the Shelf
    • SaaS
    • Hybrid
    • End-User-Built Tools

    Apps can be categorized by the application family

    • Parent Application
    • Child Application
    • Package
    • Module
    • Suite
    • Component (Functional)

    Apps can be categorized by the group managing them

    • IT-Managed Applications
    • Business-Managed Applications (Shadow IT)
    • Partner/External Applications

    Apps can be categorized by tiers

    • Mission Critical
    • Tier 2
    • Tier 3

    Set boundaries on what is an application or the individual unit that you’re making business decisions on. Also, determine which categories of applications are in scope and how they will be included in the activities and artifacts of APM. Use your product families defined in Deliver Digital Products at Scale to help define your application categories, groups, and boundaries.

    1.4 Define application categories

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. Review the items listed on the previous slide and consider what categories provide the best initial grouping to help organize your rationalization and dispositions. Update the category list to match your application groupings.
    2. Identify the additional categories you need to manage in your application portfolio.
    3. For each category, establish or modify a description or definition and provide examples that exist in your current portfolio.
    4. For each category, answer:
      1. Will these be documented in the application inventory?
      2. Will these be included in application rationalization? Think about if this item will be assigned a TCO, value score, and, ultimately, a disposition.
      3. Will these be listed in the application portfolio roadmap?
    5. If you completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale, use your product families to help define your application categories.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Working list of applications
    • Definitions and guidelines for which application categories are in scope for APM
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.4 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    1.4 Define application categories: Example

    Category

    Definition/Description

    Examples

    Documented in your application inventory?

    Included in application rationalization?

    Listed in your application portfolio roadmap?

    Business Application

    End-user facing applications that directly enable specific business functions. This includes enterprise-wide and business-function-specific applications. Separate modules will be considered a business application when appropriate.

    ERP system, CRM software, accounting software

    Yes

    Yes. Unless currently in dev. TCO of the parent application will be divided among child apps.

    Yes

    Software Components

    Back-end solutions are self-contained units that support business functions.

    ETL, middleware, operating systems

    No. Documentation in CMDB. These will be listed as a dependency in the application inventory.

    No. These will be linked to a business app and included in TCO estimates and tech health assessments.

    No

    Productivity Tools

    End-user-facing applications that enable standard communication of general document creation.

    MS Word, MS Excel, corporate email

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    End-User- Built Microsoft Tools

    Single instances of a Microsoft tool that the business has grown dependent on.

    Payroll Excel tool, Access databases

    No. Documentation in Business Tool Glossary.

    No No

    Partner Applications

    Partners or third-party applications that the business has grown dependent on but are internally owned or managed.

    Supplier’s ERP portal, government portal

    No No

    Yes

    Shadow IT

    Business-managed applications.

    Downloaded tools

    Yes

    Yes. However, just from a redundancy perspective.

    Yes

    The roles in APM rarely exist; you need to adapt

    Application Portfolio Manager

    • Responsible for the health and evolution of the application portfolio.
    • Facilitates the rationalization process.
    • Compiles and assesses application information and recommends and supports key decisions regarding the direction of the applications.
    • This is rarely a dedicated role even in large enterprises. For small enterprises, this should be an IT employee at a manager level – an IT manager or operations manager.

    Business Owner

    • Responsible for managing individual applications on a functional level and approves and prioritizes projects.
    • Provides business process or functional subject matter expertise for the assessment of applications.
    • For small enterprises, this role is rarely defined, but the responsibility should exist. Consider the head of a business unit or a process owner as the owner of the application.

    Support Owner

    • Responsible for the maintenance and management of individual applications.
    • Provides technical information and subject matter expertise for the assessment of an application.
    • For small enterprises, this would be those responsible for maintaining the application and those responsible for its initial implementation. Often support responsibilities are external, and this role will be more of a vendor manager.

    Project Portfolio Manager

    • Responsible for intake, planning, and coordinating the resources that deliver any changes.
    • The body that consumes the results of rationalization and begins planning any required action or project.
    • For small enterprises, the approval process can come from a steering committee but it is often less formal. Often a smaller group of project managers facilitates planning and coordination and works closely with the delivery leads.

    Corner-of-the-Desk Approach

    • No one is explicitly dedicated to building a strategy or APM practices.
    • Information is collected whenever the applications team has time available.
    • Benefits are pushed out and the value is lost.

    Dedicated Approach

    • The initiative is given a budget and formal agenda.
    • Roles and responsibilities are assigned to team members.

    The high-level steps of APM present some questions you need to answer

    Build Inventory

    Create the full list of applications and capture all necessary attributes.

    • Who will build the inventory?
    • Do you know all your applications (Shadow IT)?
    • Do you know your applications’ functionality?
    • Do you know where your applications overlap?
    • Who do you need to consult with to fill in the gaps?
    • Who will provide specific application information?

    Collect & Compile

    Engage with appropriate SMEs and collect necessary data points for rationalization.

    • Who will collect and compile the data points for rationalization?
    • What are the specific data points?
    • Are some of the data points currently documented?
    • Who will provide specific data points on technical health, cost, performance, and business value?
    • Who will determine what business value is?

    Assess & Recommend

    Apply rationalization framework and toolset to determine dispositions.

    • Who will apply a rationalization tool or decision-making framework to generate dispositions for the applications?
    • Who will modify the tool or framework to ensure results align to the goals of the organization?
    • Who will define any actions or projects that result from the rationalization? And who needs to be consulted to assess the feasibility of any potential project?

    Validate & Roadmap

    Present dispositions for validation and communicate any decisions or direction for applications.

    • Who will present the recommended disposition, corrective action, or new project to the appropriate decision maker?
    • Who is the appropriate decision maker for application changes or project approval?
    • What format is recommended (idea, proposal, business case) and what extra analysis is required?
    • Who needs to be consulted regarding the potential changes?

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC)

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. Begin by comparing Info-Tech’s list of common APM roles to the roles that exist in your organization with respect to application management and ownership.
    2. There are four high-level steps for APM: build inventory, collect & compile, assess & recommend, and validate & roadmap. Apply the SIPOC (Supplier, Input, Process, Output, Customer) model by completing the following for each step:
      1. In the Process column, modify the description, if necessary. Identify who is responsible for performing the step.
      2. In the Inputs column, modify the list of inputs.
      3. In the Suppliers column, identify who must be included to provide the inputs.
      4. In the Outputs column, modify the list of outputs.
      5. In the Customers column, identify who consumes the outputs.
    3. (Optional) Outline how the results of APM will be consumed. For example, project intake or execution, data or platform migration, application or product management, or whichever is appropriate.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Existing function and roles regarding application delivery, management, and ownership
    • Scope of APM
    • Responsibilities assigned to your roles
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • “Supporting Activities – SIPOC” worksheet in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.5 Determine steps and roles

    Suppliers

    Inputs

    Process

    Outputs

    Customers

    • Applications Manager
    • Operations Manager
    • Business Owners
    • IT Team
    • List of applications
    • Application attributes
    • Business capabilities

    Build Inventory

    Create the full list of applications and capture all necessary attributes.

    Resp: Applications Manager & IT team member

    • Application inventory
    • Identified redundancies
    • Whole organization
    • Applications SMEs
    • Business Owners
    • Support Owners & Team
    • End Users
    • Application inventory
    • Existing documentation
    • Additional collection methods
    • Knowledge of business value, cost, and performance for each application

    Collect & Compile

    Engage with appropriate SMEs and collect necessary data points for rationalization.

    Resp: IT team member

    • Data points of business value, cost, and performance for each application
    • Applications Manager
    • Applications Manager
    • Defined application rationalization framework and toolset
    • Data points of business value, cost, and performance for each application

    Assess & Recommend

    Apply rationalization framework and toolset to determine dispositions.

    Resp: Applications Manager

    • Assigned disposition for each application
    • New project ideas for applications
    • Business Owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Business Owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Assigned disposition for each application
    • New project ideas for applications
    • Awareness of goals and priorities
    • Awareness of existing projects and resources capacity

    Validate & Roadmap

    Present dispositions for validation and communicate any decisions or direction for applications.

    Resp: Applications Manager

    • Application portfolio roadmap
    • Confirmed disposition for each application
    • Project request submission
    • Whole organization
    • Applications Manager
    • Solutions Engineer
    • Business Owner
    • Project request submission
    • Estimated cost
    • Estimated value or ROI

    Project Intake

    Build business case for project request.

    Resp: Project Manager

    • Approved project
    • Steering Committee

    Planning your APM modernization journey steps

    Discovery Rationalization Disposition Roadmap

    Enter your pilot inventory.

    • Optional Snapshot: Populate your desired snapshot grouping lists (departments, functions, groups, capabilities, etc.).

    Score your pilot apps to refine your rationalization criteria and scoring.

    • Score 3 to 9 apps to adjust and get comfortable with the scoring.
    • Validate scoring with the remaining apps in your pilot group. Refine and finalize the criteria and scoring descriptions.
    • Optional Snapshot: Use the Group Alignment Matrix to match your grouping list to select which apps support each grouping item.

    Determine recommended disposition for each application.

    • Review and adjust the disposition recommendations on the “Disposition Options” worksheet and set your pass/fail threshold.
    • Review your apps on the “App Rationalization Results” worksheet. Update (override) the recommended disposition and priority if needed.

    Populate your application roadmap.

    • Indicate programs, projects, initiatives, or releases that are planned for each app.
    • Update the priority based on the initiative.
    • Use the visual roadmap to show high-level delivery phases.

    Phase 2

    Improve Your Inventory

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Applications Team

    Additional Resources

    Document Your Business Architecture

    Industry Reference Architectures

    Application Capability Template

    Pre-step: Collect your applications

    1. Consult with your IT team and leverage any existing documentation to gather an initial list of your applications.
    2. Build an initial working list of applications. This is just meant to be a starting point. Aim to include any new applications in procurement, implementation, or development.
    3. The rationalization and roadmapping phases are best completed when iteratively focusing on manageable groups of applications. Group your applications into subsets based on shared subject matter experts. Likely this will mean grouping applications by business units.
    4. Select a subset to be the first group of applications that will undergo the activities of rationalization and roadmapping to refine your APM processes, scoring, and disposition selection.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The more information you plan to capture, the larger the time and effort, especially as you move along toward advanced and strategic items. Capture the information most aligned to your objectives to make the most of your investment.

    If you completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale, use your product families and products to help define your applications.

    Learn more about automated application discovery:
    High Application Satisfaction Starts With Discovering Your Application Inventory

    Discover your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours per group

    1. Review Info-Tech’s list of application inventory attributes.
    2. Open the “Application Inventory Details” tab of the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool. Modify, add, or omit attributes.
    3. For each application, populate your prioritized data fields or any fields you know at the time of discovery. You will complete all the fields in future iterations.
    4. Complete this the best you can based on your team’s familiarity and any readily available documentation related to these applications.
    5. Use the drop-down list to select Enabling, Redundant/Overlapping, and Dependent apps. This will be used to help determine dispositions and comparisons.
    6. Highlight missing information or placeholder values that need to be verified.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Working list of applications
    • Determined attributes for inventory
    • Populated inventory
    Materials Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    2.1 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Why is the business capability so important?

    For the purposes of an inventory, business capabilities help all stakeholders gain a sense of the functionality the application provides.

    However, the true value of business capability comes with rationalization.

    Upon linking all the organization’s applications to a standardized and consistent set of business capabilities, you can then group your applications based on similar, complementary, or overlapping functionality. In other words, find your redundancies and consolidation opportunities.

    Important Consideration

    Defining business capabilities and determining the full extent of redundancy is a challenging undertaking and often is a larger effort than APM all together.

    Business capabilities should be defined according to the unique functions and language of your organization, at varying levels of granularity, and ideally including target-state capabilities that identify gaps in the future strategy.

    This blueprint provides a simplified and generic list for the purpose of categorizing similar functionality. We strongly encourage exploring Document Your Business Architecture to help in the business capability defining process, especially when visibility into your portfolio and knowledge of redundancies is poor.

    The image contains a screenshot of the business capability scenarios.

    For a more detailed capability mapping, use the Application Portfolio Snapshot and the worksheets in your current workbook.

    What is a business capability map?

    The image contains a screenshot of a business capability map.

    A business capability map (BCM) is an abstraction of business operations that helps describe what the enterprise does to achieve its vision, mission, and goals. Business capabilities are the building blocks of the enterprise. They are typically defined at varying levels of granularity and include target-state capabilities that identify gaps in the future strategy. These are the people, process, and tool units that deliver value to your teams and customers.

    Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage and Reference Architectures give you a head start on producing a BCM fit for your organization. The visual to the left is an example of a reference architecture for the retail industry.

    These are the foundational piece for our Application Portfolio Snapshot. By linking capabilities to your supporting applications, you can better visualize how the portfolio supports the organization at a single glance. More specifically, you can highlight how issues with the portfolio are impacting capability delivery.

    Reminder: Best practices imply that business capabilities are methodologically defined by business stakeholders and business architects to capture the unique functions and language of your organization.

    The approach laid out in this service is about applying minimal time and effort to make the case for proper investment into the best practices, which can include creating a tailored BCM. Start with a good enough example to produce a useful visual and generate a positive conversation toward resourcing and analyses.

    We strongly encourage exploring Document Your Business Architecture and the Application Portfolio Snapshot to understand the thorough methods and tactics for BCM.

    Why perform a high-level application alignment before rationalization?

    Having to address redundancy complicates the application rationalization process. There is no doubt that assessing applications in isolation is much easier and allows you to arrive at dispositions for your applications in a timelier manner.

    Rationalization has two basic steps: first, collect and compile information, and second, analyze that information and determine a disposition for each application. When you don’t have redundancy, you can analyze an application and determine a disposition in isolation. When you do have redundancies, you need to collect information for multiple applications, likely across departments or lines of business, then perform a comparative analysis.

    Most likely your approach will fall somewhere between the examples below and require a hybrid approach.

    Benefits of a high-level application alignment:

    • Review the degree of redundancy across your portfolio.
    • Understand the priority areas for rationalization and the sequence of information collection.

    The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of rationalization effort.

    2.2 Align apps to capabilities and functions

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours per grouping

    The APM tool provides up to three different grouping comparisons to assess how well your applications are supporting your enterprise. Although business capabilities are important, identify your organizational perspectives to determine how well your portfolio supports these functions, departments, or value streams. Each grouping should be a consistent category, type, or arrangement of applications.

    1. Enter the business capabilities, from either your own BCM or the Info-Tech reference architectures, into the Business Capability column under Grouping 1.
    2. Open the “Group 1 Alignment Matrix” worksheet in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool.
    3. For each application’s row, enter an “X” in the column of a capability that the application supports.
    4. Optionally, repeat these steps under Grouping 2 and 3 for each value stream, department, function, or business unit where you’d like to assess application support. Note: To use Grouping 3, unhide the columns on the “Application and Group Lists” worksheet and unhide the worksheet “Grouping 3 Alignment Matrix.”

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Application inventory
    • List of business capabilities, Info-Tech Reference Architecture capabilities, departments, functions, divisions, or value streams for grouping comparison
    • Assigned business capabilities to applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    2.2 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    2.2 Aligning applications to groups example

    Alignment Matrix: Identify applications supporting each capability or function.

    Capability, Department, or Function 1

    Capability, Department, or Function 2

    Capability, Department, or Function 3

    Capability, Department, or Function 4

    Capability, Department, or Function 5

    Capability, Department, or Function 6

    Application A

    x

    Application B

    x

    Application C

    x

    Application D

    x

    Application E

    x x

    Application F

    x

    Application G

    x

    Application H

    x

    Application I

    x

    Application J

    x

    In this example:

    BC 1 is supported by App A

    BC 2 is supported by App B

    BC 3 is supported by Apps C & D

    BCs 4 & 5 are supported by App E

    BC 6 is supported by Apps F-G. BC 6 shows an example of potential redundancy and portfolio complexity.

    The APM tool supports three different Snapshot groupings. Repeat this exercise for each grouping.

    Align application to capabilities – tool view

    The image contains screenshots of the align application to capabilities - tool view

    Phase 3

    Rationalize Your Applications

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Application SMEs

    Additional Resources

    Phase pre-step: Sequence rationalization assessments appropriately

    Use the APM Snapshot results to determine APM iterations

    • Application rationalization requires an iterative approach.
    • Review your application types and alignment from Phase 2 to begin to identify areas of overlapping or redundant applications.
    • Sequence the activities of Phase 3 based on whether you have a:
      • Redundant Portfolio
        • Use the APM Snapshot to prioritize analysis by grouping.
        • Complete the application functional analysis.
        • Use the “Application Comparison” worksheet to aid your comparison of application subsets.
        • Update application dispositions and roadmap initiatives.
      • Non-Redundant Portfolio
        • Use the APM Snapshot to prioritize analysis by grouping.
        • Update application dispositions and roadmap initiatives.

    The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of rationalization effort.

    Phase pre-step: Are the right stakeholders present?

    Make sure you have the right people at the table from the beginning.

    • Application rationalization requires specific stakeholders to provide specific data points.
    • Ensure your application subsets are grouped by shared subject matter experts. Ideally, these are grouped by business units.
    • For each subset, identify the appropriate SMEs for the five areas of rationalization criteria.
    • Communicate and schedule interviews with groups of stakeholders. Inform them of additional information sources to have readily available.
    • (Optional) This phase’s activities follow the clockwise sequence of the diagram to the right. Reorder the sequence of activities based on overlaps of availability in subject matter expertise.

    Application

    Rationalization

    Additional Information Sources

    Ideal Stakeholders

    • KPIs

    Business Value

    • Business Application/Product Owners
    • Business Unit/ Process Owners
    • Survey Results

    End User

    • Business Application/ Product Owners
    • Key/Power Users
    • End Users
    • General Ledger
    • Service Desk
    • Vendor Contracts

    TCO

    • Operations/Maintenance Manager
    • Vendor Managers
    • Finance & Acct.
    • Service Desk
    • ALM Tools

    Technical Health

    • Operations/ Maintenance Manager
    • Solution Architect
    • Security Manager
    • Dev. Manager
    • Capability Maps
    • Process Maps

    Application Alignment

    • Business Unit/ Process Owners

    Rationalize your applications

    The image contains screenshots of diagrams that reviews building your APM journey map.

    One of the principal goals of application rationalization is determining dispositions

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or course of action for an application.

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    High-level examples:

    The image contains a screenshot of an image that demonstrates a directionless portfolio of applications.

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Modernize: Create a new project to address an inadequacy.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Consolidate: Create a new project to reduce duplicate functionality.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Application rationalization provides insight

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Info-Tech’s Five Lens Model

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of directionless portfolio of applications.

    Application Alignment

    Business Value

    Technical Health

    End-User Perspective

    Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    Modernize: Create a new initiative to address an inadequacy.

    Consolidate: Create a new initiative to reduce duplicate functionality.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    How well do your apps support your core functions and teams?

    How well are your apps aligned to value delivery?

    Do your apps meet all IT quality standards and policies?

    How well do your apps meet your end users’ needs?

    What is the relative cost of ownership and operation of your apps?

    Application rationalization requires the collection of several data points that represent these perspectives and act as the criteria for determining a disposition for each of your applications.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    3.1-3.4 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Assessing application business value

    The Business Business Value of Applications IT
    Keepers of the organization’s mission, vision, and value statements that define IT success. The business maintains the overall ownership and evaluation of the applications. Technical subject matter experts of the applications they deliver and maintain. Each IT function works together to ensure quality applications are delivered to stakeholder expectations.

    First, the authorities on business value need to define and weigh their value drivers that describe the priorities of the organization.

    This will then allow the applications team to apply a consistent, objective, and strategically aligned evaluation of applications across the organization.

    In this context…business value is the value of the business outcome that the application produces and how effective the application is at producing that outcome.

    Business value IS NOT the user’s experience or satisfaction with the application.

    Review the value drivers of your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of a the business value matrix.

    Financial vs. Human Benefits

    Financial benefits refer to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and are often quite tangible.

    Human benefits refer to how an application can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    Inward orientation refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.

    Outward orientation refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Increased Revenue

    Reduced Costs

    Enhanced Services

    Reach Customers

    Application functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue and deliver value to your customers.

    Reduction of overhead. The ways in which an application limits the operational costs of business functions.

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    3.1 Assess business value

    Estimated time: 1 -4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s four quadrants of business value: increase revenue/value, reduce costs, enhance services, and reach customers. Edit your value drivers, description, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each value driver, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities. When editing the scoring descriptions, keep only the one you are using.
    2. (Optional) Add an additional value driver if your organization has distinct value drivers (e.g. compliance, sustainability, innovation, and growth).
    3. For each application, score on a scale of 0 to 5 how impactful the application is for each value driver. Use the indicators set in Phase 1 to guide your scoring.
    4. For each value driver, adjust the criteria weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Knowledge of organizational priorities
    • (Optional) Existing mission, vision, and value statements
    • Scoring scheme for assessing business value
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    3.1 Weigh value drivers: Example

    The image contains a screenshot example of the weigh value drivers.

    For additional support in implementing a balanced value framework, refer to Build a Value Measurement Framework.

    Understand the back end and technical health of your applications

    Technical health identifies the extent of technology risk to the organization.

    MAINTAINABILITY (RAS)

    RAS refers to an app’s reliability, availability, and serviceability. How often, how long, and how difficult is it for your resources to keep an app functioning, and what are the resulting continuity risks? This can include root causes of maintenance challenges.

    SECURITY

    Applications should be aligned and compliant with ALL security policies. Are there vulnerabilities or is there a history of security incidents? Remember that threats are often internal and non-malicious.

    ADAPTABILITY

    How easily can the app be enhanced or scaled to meet changes in business needs? Does the app fit within the business strategy?

    INTEROPERABILITY

    The degree to which an app is integrated with current systems. Apps require comprehensive technical planning and oversight to ensure they connect within the greater application architecture. Does the app fit within your enterprise architecture strategy?

    BUSINESS CONTINUITY/DISASTER RECOVERY

    The degree to which the application is compatible with business continuity/disaster recovery (BC/DR) policies and plans that are routinely tested and verified.

    Unfortunately, the business only cares about what they can see or experience. Rationalization is your opportunity to get risk on the business’ radar and gain buy-in for the necessary action.

    3.2 Assess technical health

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested technical health criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity of technical health perspective for applications within this subset
    • Maintenance history, architectural models
    • Technical health scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Technical SMEs
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    End users provide valuable perspective

    Your end users are your best means of determining front-end issues.

    Data Quality

    To what degree do the end users find the data quality sufficient to perform their role and achieve their desired outcome?

    Effectiveness

    To what degree do the end users find the application effective for performing their role and desired outcome?

    Usability

    To what degree do the end users find the application reliable and easy to use to achieve their desired outcome?

    Satisfaction

    To what degree are end users satisfied with the features of this application?

    What else matters to you?

    Tune your criteria to match your values and priorities.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When facing large user groups, do not make assumptions or use lengthy methods of collecting information. Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment to collect data by surveying your end users’ perspectives.

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested end-user perspective criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity of end user’s perspective for applications within this subset
    • User satisfaction scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners, Key Users
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Consider the spectrum of application cost

    An application’s cost extends past a vendor’s fee and even the application itself.

    LICENSING AND SUBSCRIPTIONS: Your recurring payments to a vendor.

    Many commercial off-the-shelf applications require a license on a per-user basis. Review contracts and determine costs by looking at per-user or fixed rates charged by the vendor.

    MAINTENANCE COSTS: Your internal spending to maintain an app.

    These are the additional costs to maintain an application such as support agreements, annual maintenance fees, or additional software or hosting expenses.

    INDIRECT COSTS: Miscellaneous expenses necessary for an app’s continued use.

    Expenses like end-user training, developer education, and admin are often neglected, but they are very real costs organizations pay regularly.

    RETURN ON INVESTMENT: Perceived value of the application related to its TCO.

    Some of our most valuable applications are the most expensive. ROI is an optional criterion to account for the value and importance of the application.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The TCO assessment is one area where what you are considering the ”application” matters quite a bit. An application’s peripherals or software components need to be considered in your estimates. For additional help calculating TCO, use the Application TCO Calculator from Build a Rationalization Framework.

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested TCO criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity with the TCO for applications within this subset
    • Vendor contracts, maintenance history
    • TCO scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners, Vendor Managers, Operations Managers
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Phase 4

    Populate Your Roadmap

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    his phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Delivery Leads

    Additional Resources

    Review your APM Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.1 Review your APM Snapshot results

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. The APM Snapshot provides a dashboard to support your APM program’s focus and as an input to demand planning. Unhide the “Group 3” worksheet if you completed the alignment matrix.
    2. For each grouping area, review the results to determine underperforming areas. Use this information to prioritize your application root cause analysis and demand planning. Use the key on the following slide to guide your analysis.
    3. Analysis guidance:
      1. Start with the quartile grouping to find areas scoring in Remediate or Critical Need and focus follow-up actions on these areas.
      2. Use the lens/category heat map to determine which lenses are underperforming. Use this to then look up the individual app scores supporting that group to identify application issues.
      3. Use the “Application Comparison” worksheet to select and compare applications for the group to make your review and comparison easier.
      4. Work with teams in the group to provide root cause analysis for low scores.
      5. Build a plan to address any apps not supported by IT.
    InputOutput
    • Application list
    • Application to Group mapping
    • Rationalization scores
    • Awareness of application support for each grouping

    Materials

    Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Interpreting your APM Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Snapshot with guides on how to interpret it.

    4.1 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the AMP worksheet data journey map.

    Review your APM rationalization results

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.2 Review your APM Foundations results

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    The APM Foundations Results dashboard (“App Rationalization Results” worksheet) provides a detailed summary of your relative app scoring to serve as input to demand planning.

    1. For each grouping, review the results to determine underperforming app support. Use this information to prioritize your application root cause analysis using the individual criteria scores on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet.
    2. Use guidance on the following example slides to understand each area of the results.
    3. Any applications marked as N/A for evaluation will display N/A on the results worksheet and will not be displayed in the chart. You can still enter dispositions.
    4. Use the column filters to compare a subset of applications or use the “App Comparison” worksheet to maintain an ongoing view by grouping, redundancy, or category.
    5. Any applications marked as N/A for evaluation will display N/A on the results worksheet and will not be displayed in the chart. You can still enter dispositions.
    InputOutput
    • Application list
    • Rationalization scores
    • Application awareness
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.2 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the AMP worksheet data journey map.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations chart.

    Modernize your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    Apply Info-Tech’s 6 R’s Rationalization Disposition Model

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's 6 R's Rationalization Disposition Model.

    Disposition

    Description

    Reward

    Prioritize new features or enhancement requests and openly welcome the expansion of these applications as new requests are presented.

    Refresh

    Address the poor end-user satisfaction with a prioritized project. Consult with users to determine if UX issues require improvement to address satisfaction.

    Refocus

    Determine the root cause of the low value. Refocus, retrain, or refresh the UX to improve value. If there is no value found, aim to "keep the lights on" until the app can be decommissioned.

    Replace

    Replace or rebuild the application as technical and user issues are putting important business capabilities at risk. Decommission application alongside replacement.

    Remediate

    Address the poor technical health or risk with a prioritized project. Further consult with development and technical teams to determine if migration or refactoring is suited to address the technical issue.

    Retire

    Cancel any requested features and enhancements. Schedule the proper decommission and transfer end users to a new or alternative system if necessary.

    TCO, compared relatively to business value, helps determine the practicality of a disposition and the urgency of any call to action. Application alignment is factored in when assessing redundancies and has a separate set of dispositions.

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. The Recommended Disposition and Priority fields are prepopulated from your scoring thresholds and options on the “Disposition Options” worksheet. You can update any individual application disposition or priority using the drop-down menu and it will populate your selection on the “Roadmap” worksheet.
    2. Question if that disposition is appropriate. Be sure to consider:
      1. TCO – cost should come into play for any decisions.
      2. Alignment to strategic goals set for the overarching organizational, IT, technology (infrastructure), or application portfolio.
      3. Existing organizational priorities or funded initiatives impacting the app.
    3. Some dispositions may imply a call to action, new project, or initiative. Ideate and/or discuss with the team any potential initiatives. You can use different dispositions and priorities on the “App Rationalization Results” and “Roadmap” worksheets.
    4. Note: Modify the list of dispositions on the “Disposition Options” worksheet as appropriate for your rationalization initiative. Any modifications to the Disposition column will be automatically updated in the “App Rationalization Results” and “Roadmap” worksheets.
    InputOutput
    • Rationalization results
    • Assigned dispositions for applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.3 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the worksheet data journey map.

    Redundancies require a different analysis and set of dispositions

    Solving application redundancy is a lot more complicated than simply keeping one application and eliminating the others.

    First, you need to understand the extent of the redundancy. The applications may support the same capability, but do they offer the same functions? Determine which apps offer which functions within a capability. This means you cannot accurately arrive at a disposition until you have evaluated all applications.

    Next, you need to isolate the preferred system. This is completed by comparing the same data points collected for rationalization and the application alignment analysis. Cost and coverage of all necessary functions become the more important factors in this decision-making process.

    Lastly, for the non-preferred redundant applications you need to determine: What will you do with the users? What will you do with the data? And what can you do with the functionality (can the actual coding be merged onto a common platform)?

    Disposition

    Description & Additional Analysis

    Call to Action (Priority)

    Keep & Absorb

    Higher value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives

    These are the preferred apps to be kept. However, additional efforts are still required to migrate new users and data and potentially configure the app to new processes.

    Application or Process Initiative

    (Moderate)

    Shift & Retire

    Lower value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives

    These apps will be decommissioned alongside efforts to migrate users and data to the preferred system.

    *Confirm there are no unique and necessary features.

    Process Initiative & Decommission

    (Moderate)

    Merge

    Lower value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives but still has some necessary unique features

    These apps will be merged with the preferred system onto a common platform.

    *Determine the unique and necessary features.

    *Determine if the multiple applications are compatible for consolidation.

    Application Initiative

    (Moderate)

    Compare groups of applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    Estimated rime: 1 hour per group

    This exercise is best performed after aligning business capabilities to applications across the portfolio and identifying your areas of redundancy. At this stage, this is still an information collection exercise, and it will not yield a consolidation-based disposition until applied to all relevant applications. Lastly, this exercise may still be at too high a level to outline the full details of redundancy, but it is still vital information to collect and a starting point to determine which areas require more concentrated analysis.

    1. Determine which areas of redundancy or comparisons are desired. Duplicate the “App Comparison” worksheet for each grouping or comparison.
    2. Extend the comparison to better identify redundancy.
      1. For each area of redundancy, identify the high-level features. Aim to limit the features to ten, grouping smaller features if necessary. SoftwareReviews can be a resource for identifying common features.
      2. Label features using the MoSCoW model: must have, should have, could have, will not have.
      3. For each application, identify which features they support. You can use the grouping alignment matrix as a template for feature alignment comparison. Duplicate the worksheet, unlock it, and replace the grouping cell references with your list of features.
    Input Output
    • Areas of redundancy
    • Familiarity with features for applications within this subset
    • Feature-level review of application redundancy
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    Account Management

    Call Management

    Order/Transaction Processing

    Contract Management

    Lead/Opportunity Management

    Forecasting/Planning

    Customer Surveying

    Email Synchronization

    M M M M S S C W

    CRM 1

    CRM 2

    CRM 3

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    Estimated time: 1 hour per group

    1. Based on the feature-level assessment, determine if you can omit applications if they don’t truly overlap with other applications.
    2. Make a copy of the “App Comparison” worksheet and select the applications you want to compare based on your functional analysis.
    3. Determine the preferred application(s). Use the diagram to inform your decision. This may be the application closest to the top right (strong health and value). However, less expensive options or any options that provide a more complete set of features may be preferable.
    4. Open the “App Rationalization Results” worksheet. Update your disposition for each application.
    5. Use these updated dispositions to determine a call to action, new project, or initiative. Ideate and/or discuss with the team any potential initiatives. Update your roadmap with these initiatives in the next step.
    InputOutput
    • Feature-level review of application redundancy
    • Redundancy comparison
    • Assigned dispositions for redundant applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Compare application groups

    Group comparison can be used for more than just redundant/overlapping applications.

    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate comparing application groups.

    Roadmaps are used for different purposes

    Roadmaps are used for different communication purposes and at varying points in your application delivery practice. Some use a roadmap to showcase strategy and act as a feedback mechanism that allows stakeholders to validate any changes (process 1). Others may use it to illustrate and communicate approved and granular elements of a change to an application to inform appropriate stakeholders of what to anticipate (process 2).

    Select Dispositions & Identify New Initiatives

    Add to Roadmap

    Validate Direction

    Plan Project

    Execute Project

    Select Dispositions & Identify New Initiatives

    • Project Proposal
    • Feasibility/ Estimation
    • Impact Assessment
    • Business Case
    • Initial Design

    Approve Project

    Add to Roadmap

    Execute Project

    The steps between selecting a disposition and executing on any resulting project will vary based on the organization’s project intake standards (or lack thereof).

    This blueprint focuses on building a strategic portfolio roadmap prior to any in-depth assessments related to initiative/project intake, approval, and prioritization. For in-depth support related to intake, approval, prioritization, or planning, review the following resources.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Deliver on your Digital Product Vision blueprint. The image contains a screenshot of the Deliver Digital Products at Scale blueprint.

    Determine what makes it onto the roadmap

    A roadmap should not be limited to what is approved or committed to. A roadmap should be used to present the items that need to happen and begin the discussion of how or if this can be put into place. However, not every idea should make the cut and end up in front of key stakeholders.

    The image contains a screenshot of steps to be taken to determine what makes it onto the roadmap.

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. This is a high-level assessment to provide a sense of feasibility, practicality, and priority as well as an estimated timeline of a given initiative. Do not get lost in granular estimations. Use this as an input to your demand planning process.
    2. Enter the specific name or type of initiative.
      1. Process Initiative: Any project or effort focused on process improvements without technical modification to an app (e.g. user migration, change in SLA, new training program). Write the application and initiative name on a blue sticky note.
      2. App Initiative: Any project or effort involving technical modification to an app (e.g. refactoring, platform migration, feature addition or upgrade). Write the application and initiative name on a yellow sticky note.
      3. Decommission Initiative: Any project and related efforts to remove an app (e.g. migrating data, removal from server). Write the application and initiative name on a red sticky note.
    3. Prioritize the initiative to aid in demand planning. This is prepopulated from your selected application disposition, but you can set a different priority for the initiative here.
    4. Select the Initiative Phase in the timeline to show the intended schedule and sequencing of the initiative.
    Input Output
    • Assigned dispositions
    • Rationalization results
    • Prioritized initiatives
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Delivery Leads
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.6 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the worksheet data journey map.

    Populate roadmap example

    The image contains an example of the populate roadmap.

    Create a recurring update plan

    • Application inventories become stale before you know it. Build steps in your procurement process to capture the appropriate information on new applications. Also, build in checkpoints to revisit your inventory regularly to assess the accuracy of inventory data.
    • Rationalization is not one and done; it must occur with an appropriate cadence.
      • Business priorities change, which will impact the current and future value of your apps.
      • Now more than ever, user expectations evolve rapidly.
      • Application sprawl likely won’t stop, so neither will shadow IT and redundancies.
      • Obsolescence, growing technical debt, changing security threats, or shifting technology strategies are all inevitable, as is the gradual decline of an app’s health or technical fit.
    • An application’s disposition changes quicker than you think, and rationalization requires a structured cadence. You need to plan to minimize the need for repeated efforts. Conversely, many use preceding iterations to increase the analysis (e.g. more thorough TCO projections or more granular capability-application alignment).
    • Portfolio roadmaps require a cadence for both updates and presentations to stakeholders. Updates are often completed semiannually or quarterly to gauge the business adjustments that affect the timeline of the domain-specific applications. The presentation of a roadmap should be completed alongside meetings or gatherings of key decision makers.
    • M&A or other restructuring events will prompt the need to address all the above.

    The image contains a screenshot of chart to help determine frequency of updating your roadmap.

    Build your APM maturity by taking the right steps at the right time

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the steps taken to build APM maturity.

    Info-Tech’s Build an Application Rationalization Framework provides additional TCO and value tools to help build out your portfolio strategy.

    APM is an iterative and evergreen process

    APM provides oversight and awareness of your application portfolio’s performance and support for your business operations and value delivery to all users and customers.

    Determine scope and categories Build your list of applications and capabilities Score each application based on your values Determine outcomes based on app scoring and support for capabilities

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    • 1.1 Assess the state of your current application portfolio
    • 1.2 Determine narrative
    • 1.3 Define goals and metrics
    • 1.4 Define application categories
    • 1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC)

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    • 2.1 Populate your inventory
    • 2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    • 3.1 Assess business value
    • 3.2 Assess technical health
    • 3.3 Assess end-user perspective
    • 3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    • 4.1 Review APM Snapshot results
    • 4.2 Review APM Foundations results
    • 4.3 Determine dispositions
    • 4.4 Assess redundancies (Optional)
    • 4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (Optional)
    • 4.6 Prioritize initiatives
    • 4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Repeat according to APM cadence and application changes

    4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. Determine how frequently you will update or present the artifacts of your APM practice: Application Inventory, Rationalization, Disposition, and Roadmap.
    2. For each artifact, determine the:
      1. Owner: Who is accountable for the artifact and the data or information within the artifact and will be responsible for or delegate the responsibility of updating or presenting the artifact to the appropriate audience?
      2. Update Cadence: How frequently will you update the artifact? Include what regularly scheduled meetings this activity will be within.
      3. Update Scope: Describe what activities will be performed to keep the artifact up to date. The goal here is to minimize the need for a full set of activities laid out within the blueprint. Optional: How will you expand the thoroughness of your analysis?
      4. Audience: Who is the audience for the artifact or assessment results?
      5. Presentation Cadence: How frequently and when will you review the artifact with the audience?
    InputOutput
    • Initial experience with APM
    • Strategic meetings schedule
    • Ongoing cadence for APM activities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Artifact

    Owner

    Update Cadence

    Update Scope

    Audience

    Presentation Cadence

    Inventory

    Greg Dawson

    • As new applications are acquired
    • Annual review
    • Add new application data points (this is added to implementation standards)
    • Review inventory and perform a data health check
    • Validate with app’s SME
    • Whole organization
    • Always available on team site

    Rationalization Tool

    Judy Ng

    • Annual update
    • Revisit value driver weights
    • Survey end users
    • Interview support owners
    • Interview business owners
    • Update TCO based on change in operational costs; expand thoroughness of cost estimates
    • Rescore applications
    • Business owners of applications
    • IT leaders
    • Annually alongside yearly strategy meeting

    Portfolio Roadmap

    Judy Ng

    • Monthly update alongside project updates
    • Shift the timeline of the roadmap to current day 1
    • Carry over project updates and timeline changes
    • Validate with PMs and business owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Business owners of applications
    • IT leaders
    • Quarterly alongside Steering Committee meetings
    • Upon request

    Appendices

    • Additional support slides
    • Bibliography

    The APM tool provides a single source of truth and global data sharing

    The table shows where source data is used to support different aspects of APM discovery, rationalization, and modernization.

    Worksheet Data Mapping

    Application and Capability List

    Group Alignment Matrix (1-3)

    Rationalization Inputs

    Group 1-3 Results

    Application Inventory Details

    App Rationalization Results

    Roadmap

    App Redundancy Comparison

    Application and Capability List

    App list, Groupings

    App list

    App list, Groupings

    App list, Categories

    App list, Categories

    App list

    App list

    Groups 1-3 Alignment Matrix

    App to Group Tracing

    Application Categories

    Category
    drop-down

    Category

    Category

    Rationalization Inputs

    Lens Scores (weighted input to Group score)

    Lens Scores (weighted input)

    Disposition Options

    Disposition list, Priorities list, Recommended Disposition and Priority

    Lens Scores (weighted input)

    App Rationalization Results

    Disposition

    Common application inventory attributes

    Attribute Description Common Collection Method
    Name Organization’s terminology used for the application. Auto-discovery tools will provide names for the applications they reveal. However, this may not be the organizational nomenclature. You may adapt the names by leveraging pre-existing documentation and internal knowledge or by consulting business users.
    ID Unique identifiers assigned to the application (e.g. app number). Typically an identification system developed by the application portfolio manager.
    Description A brief description of the application, often referencing core capabilities. Typically completed by leveraging pre-existing documentation and internal knowledge or by consulting business users.
    Business Units A list of all business units, departments, or user groups. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with business unit representatives. However, this doesn’t always expose hidden applications. Application-capability mapping is the most effective way to determine all the business units/user groups of an app.
    Business Capabilities A list of business capabilities the application is intended to enable. Application capability mapping completed via interviews with business unit representatives.
    Criticality A high-level grading of the importance of the application to the business, typically used for support prioritization purposes (i.e. critical, high, medium, low). Typically the criticality rating is determined by a committee representing IT and business leaders.
    Ownership The individual accountable for various aspect of the application (e.g. product owner, product manager, application support, data owner); typically includes contact information and alternatives. If application ownership is an established accountability in your organization, typically consulting appropriate business stakeholders will reveal this information. Otherwise, application capability mapping can be an effective means of identifying who that owner should be.
    Application SMEs Any relevant subject matter experts who can speak to various aspects of the application (e.g. business process owners, development managers, data architects, data stewards, application architects, enterprise architects). Technical SMEs should be known within an IT department, but shadow IT apps may require interviews with the business unit. Application capability mapping will determine the identity of those key users/business process SMEs.
    Type An indication of whether the application was developed in-house, commercial off-the-shelf, or a hybrid option. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or development managers.
    Active Status An indication of whether the application is currently active, out of commission, in repair, etc. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or operation managers.

    Common application inventory attributes

    Attribute Description Common Collection Method
    Vendor Information Identification of the vendor from whom the software was procured. May include additional items such as the vendor’s contact information. Consultation with business SMEs, end users, or procurement teams, or review of vendor contracts or license agreements.
    Links to Other Documentation Pertinent information regarding the other relevant documentation of the application (e.g. SLA, vendor contracts, data use policies, disaster recovery plan). Typically includes links to documents. Consultation with product owners, service providers, or SMEs, or review of vendor contracts or license agreements.
    Number of Users The current number of users for the application. This can be based on license information but will often require some estimation. Can include additional items of quantities at different levels of access (e.g. admin, key users, power users). Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or appropriate business SMEs or review of vendor contracts or license agreements. Auto-discovery tools can reveal this information.
    Software Dependencies List of other applications or operating components required to run the application. Consultation with application architects and any architectural tools or documentation. This information can begin to reveal itself through application capability mapping.
    Hardware Dependencies Identification of any hardware or infrastructure components required to run the application (i.e. databases, platform). Consultation with infrastructure or enterprise architects and any architectural tools or documentation. This information can begin to reveal itself through application capability mapping.
    Development Language Coding language used for the application. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with development managers or appropriate technical SMEs.
    Platform A framework of services that application programs rely on for standard operations. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with infrastructure or development managers.
    Lifecycle Stage Where an application is within the birth, growth, mature, end-of-life lifecycle. Consultation with business owners and technical SMEs.
    Scheduled Updates Any major or minor updates related to the application, including the release date. Consultation with business owners and vendor managers.
    Planned or In-Flight Projects Any projects related to the application, including estimated project timeline. Consultation with business owners and project managers.

    Bibliography

    ”2019 Technology & Small Business Survey.” National Small Business Association (NSBA), n.d. Accessed 1 April 2020.
    “Application Rationalization – Essential Part of the Process for Modernization and Operational Efficiency.” Flexera, 2015. Web.
    “Applications Rationalization during M&A: Standardize, Streamline, Simplify.” Deloitte Consulting, 2016. Web.
    Bowling, Alan. “Clearer Visibility of Product Roadmaps Improves IT Planning.” ComputerWeekly.com, 1 Nov. 2010. Web.
    Brown, Alex. “Calculating Business Value.” Agile 2014 Orlando, 13 July 2014. Scrum Inc. 2014. Web.
    Brown, Roger. “Defining Business Value.” Scrum Gathering San Diego 2017. Agile Coach Journal. Web.
    “Business Application Definition.” Microsoft Docs, 18 July 2012. Web.
    “Connecting Small Businesses in the US.” Deloitte Consulting, 2017. Accessed 1 April. 2020.
    Craveiro, João. “Marty meets Martin: connecting the two triads of Product Management.” Product Coalition, 18 Nov. 2017. Web.
    Curtis, Bill. “The Business Value of Application Internal Quality.” CAST, 6 April 2009. Web.
    Fleet, Neville, Joan Lasselle, and Paul Zimmerman. “Using a Balance Scorecard to Measure the Productivity and Value of Technical Documentation Organizations.” CIDM, April 2008. Web.
    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Web.
    Harris, Michael. “Measuring the Business Value of IT.” David Consulting Group, 2007. Web.
    “How Application Rationalization Contributes to the Bottom Line.” LeanIX, 2017. Web.
    Jayanthi, Aruna. “Application Landscape Report 2014.” Capgemini, 4 March 2014. Web.
    Lankhorst, Marc., et al. “Architecture-Based IT Valuation.” Via Nova Architectura, 31 March 2010. Web.
    “Management of business application.” ServiceNow, Jan.2020. Accessed 1 April 2020.
    Mauboussin, Michael J. “The True Measures of Success.” HBR, Oct. 2012. Web.
    Neogi, Sombit., et al. “Next Generation Application Portfolio Rationalization.” TATA, 2011. Web.
    Riverbed. “Measuring the Business Impact of IT Through Application Performance.” CIO Summits, 2015. Web.
    Rouse, Margaret. “Application Rationalization.” TechTarget, March 2016. Web.
    Van Ramshorst, E.A. “Application Portfolio Management from an Enterprise Architecture Perspective.” Universiteit Utrecht, July 2013.
    “What is a Balanced Scorecard?” Intrafocus, n.d. Web.
    Whitney, Lance. “SMBs share their biggest constraints and great challenges.” Tech Republic, 6 May 2019. Web.

    Improve IT Operations With AI and ML

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}454|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Many IT departments experience difficulty with meeting the business' expectations for service delivery on a regular basis.
    • Despite significant investment in improving various areas of IT operations, you still feel like you’re constantly firefighting.
    • To tackle these issues, businesses tend to invest in purchasing multiple solutions. This not only complicates their IT operations, but also, in some cases, deteriorates functionality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • To leverage AI capabilities, you first need to assess the current state of your IT operations and know what your priorities are.
    • Contemplate use cases that will get the most benefit from automation and start with processes that you are relatively comfortable handling.
    • Analyze your initial plan to identify easy wins, then expand your AIOps.

    Impact and Result

    • Perform a current state assessment to spot which areas within your operations management are the least mature and causing you the most grief. Identify which functional areas within operations management need to be prioritized for improvement.
    • Make a shortlist of use cases that will get the most benefit from AI-based technology.
    • Prepare a plan to deploy AI capabilities to improve your IT operations.

    Improve IT Operations With AI and ML Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out about the latest improvements in AIOps and how these can help you improve your IT operations. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current state of IT operations management

    Identify where your organization currently stands in its operations management practices.

    • AIOps Project Summary Template
    • AIOps Prerequisites Assessment Tool

    2. Identify initiatives that align with operations requirements

    Recognize the benefits of AI and ML for your business. Determine the necessary roles and responsibilities for potential initiatives, then develop and assess your shortlist.

    • AIOps RACI Template
    • AIOps Shortlisting Tool

    3. Develop the AI roadmap

    Analyze your ROI for AIOps and create an action plan. Communicate your AI and ML initiatives to stakeholders to obtain their support.

    • AIOps ROI Calculator
    • AIOps Roadmap Tool
    • AIOps Communications Plan Template
    [infographic]

    Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}136|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.9/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $85,754 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • License keys are not needed with optional features accessible upon install. Conducting quarterly checks of the Oracle environment is critical because if products or features are installed, even if they are not actively in use, it constitutes use by Oracle and requires a license.
    • Ambiguous license models and definitions abound: terminology and licensing rules can be vague, making it difficult to purchase licensing even with the best of intentions to keep compliant.
    • Oracle has aggressively started to force new Oracle License and Service Agreements (OLSA) on customers that slightly modify language and remove pre-existing allowances to tilt the contract terms in Oracle's favor.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on needs first. Conduct a thorough requirements assessment and document the results. Well-documented license needs will be your core asset in navigating Oracle licensing and negotiating your agreement.
    • Communicate effectively. Be aware that Oracle will reach out to employees at your organization at various levels. Having your executives on the same page will help send a strong message.
    • Manage the relationship. If Oracle is managing you, there is a high probability you are over paying or providing information that may result in an audit.

    Impact and Result

    • Conducting business with Oracle is not typical compared to other vendors. To emerge successfully from a commercial transaction with Oracle, customers must learn the "Oracle way" of conducting business, which includes a best-in-class sales structure, highly unique contracts and license use policies, and a hyper-aggressive compliance function.
    • Map out the process of how to negotiate from a position of strength, examining terms and conditions, discount percentages, and agreement pitfalls.
    • Develop a strategy that leverages and utilizes an experienced Oracle DBA to gather accurate information, and then optimizes it to mitigate and meet the top challenges.

    Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you need to understand and document your Oracle licensing strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish licensing requirements

    Begin your proactive Oracle licensing journey by understanding which information to gather and assessing the current state and gaps.

    • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 1: Establish Licensing Requirements
    • Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide
    • Oracle Database Inventory Tool
    • Effective Licensing Position Tool
    • RASCI Chart

    2. Evaluate licensing options

    Review current licensing models and determine which licensing models will most appropriately fit your environment.

    • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 2: Evaluate Licensing Options

    3. Evaluate agreement options

    Review Oracle’s contract types and assess which best fit the organization’s licensing needs.

    • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 3: Evaluate Agreement Options
    • Oracle TCO Calculator

    4. Purchase and manage licenses

    Conduct negotiations, purchase licensing, and finalize a licensing management strategy.

    • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 4: Purchase and Manage Licenses
    • Oracle Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool
    • Controlled Vendor Communications Letter
    • Vendor Communication Management Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Licensing Requirements

    The Purpose

    Assess current state and align goals; review business feedback

    Interview key stakeholders to define business objectives and drivers

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a baseline for requirements

    Assess the current state

    Determine licensing position

    Examine cloud options

    Activities

    1.1 Gather software licensing data

    1.2 Conduct a software inventory

    1.3 Perform manual checks

    1.4 Reconcile licenses

    1.5 Create your Oracle licensing team

    1.6 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

    Outputs

    Copy of your Oracle License Statement

    Software inventory report from software asset management (SAM) tool

    Oracle Database Inventory Tool

    RASCI Chart

    Oracle Licensing Effective License Position (ELP) Template

    Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    2 Evaluate Licensing Options

    The Purpose

    Review licensing options

    Review licensing rules

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand how licensing works

    Determine if you need software assurance

    Discuss licensing rules, application to current environment.

    Examine cloud licensing

    Understand the importance of documenting changes

    Meet with desktop product owners to determine product strategies

    Activities

    2.1 Review full, limited, restricted, and AST use licenses

    2.2 Calculate license costs

    2.3 Determine which database platform to use

    2.4 Evaluate moving to the cloud

    2.5 Examine disaster recovery strategies

    2.6 Understand purchasing support

    2.7 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

    Outputs

    Oracle TCO Calculator

    Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    3 Evaluate Agreement Options

    The Purpose

    Review contract option types

    Review vendors

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand why a type of contract is best for you

    Determine if ULA or term agreement is best

    The benefits of other types and when you should change

    Activities

    3.1 Prepare to sign or renew your ULA

    3.2 Decide on an agreement type that nets the maximum benefit

    Outputs

    Type of contract to be used

    Oracle TCO Calculator

    Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    4 Purchase and Manage Licenses

    The Purpose

    Finalize the contract

    Prepare negotiation points

    Discuss license management

    Evaluate and develop a roadmap for future licensing

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Negotiation strategies

    Licensing management

    Introduction of SAM

    Leverage the work done on Oracle licensing to get started on SAM

    Activities

    4.1 Control the flow of communication terms and conditions

    4.2 Use Info-Tech’s readiness assessment in preparation for the audit

    4.3 Assign the right people to manage the environment

    4.4 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

    Outputs

    Controlled Vendor Communications Letter

    Vendor Communication Management Plan

    Oracle Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool

    RASCI Chart

    Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}399|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,308 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • IT organizations measure services from a technology perspective but rarely from a business goal or outcome perspective.
    • Most organizations do a poor job of identifying and measuring service outcomes over the duration of a service’s lifecycle – never ensuring the services remain valuable and meet expected long-term ROI.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.
    • Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.
    • Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors that have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Impact and Result

    Effective service metrics will provide the following service gains:

    • Confirm service performance and identify gaps.
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value.
    • Validate performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating business value.
    • Ensure service reporting aligns with end-user experience.
    • Achieve and confirm process and regulatory compliance.

    Which will translate into the following relationship gains:

    • Embed IT into business value achievement.
    • Improve the relationship between the business and IT.
    • Achieve higher customer satisfaction (happier end users receiving expected service, the business is able to identify how things are really performing).
    • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors from both IT and the business.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop meaningful service metrics, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics – Executive Brief
    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics – Phases 1-3

    1. Design the metrics

    Identify the appropriate service metrics based on stakeholder needs.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 1: Design the Metrics
    • Metrics Development Workbook

    2. Design reports and dashboards

    Present the right metrics in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 2: Design Reports and Dashboards
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    3. Implement, track, and maintain

    Run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics, then continuously validate your approach and make refinements to the processes.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 3: Implement, Track, and Maintain
    • Metrics Tracking Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Design the Metrics

    The Purpose

    Define stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria and identify IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes.

    Derive meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validate that metrics can be collected and measured.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Design meaningful service metrics from stakeholder needs.

    Validate that metrics can be collected and measured.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine stakeholder needs, goals, and pain points.

    1.2 Determine the success criteria and related IT services.

    1.3 Derive the service metrics.

    1.4 Validate the data collection process.

    1.5 Validate metrics with stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Understand stakeholder priorities

    Adopt a business-centric perspective to align IT and business views

    Derive meaningful business metrics that are relevant to the stakeholders

    Determine if and how the identified metrics can be collected and measured

    Establish a feedback mechanism to have business stakeholders validate the meaningfulness of the metrics

    2 Design Reports and Dashboards

    The Purpose

    Determine the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the metrics are presented in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible to guarantee that they are read and used.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the different presentation options.

    2.2 Assess stakeholder needs for information.

    2.3 Select and design the metric report.

    Outputs

    Learn about infographic, scorecard, formal report, and dashboard presentation options

    Determine how stakeholders would like to view information and how the metrics can be presented to aid decision making

    Select the most appropriate presentation format and create a rough draft of how the report should look

    3 Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    The Purpose

    Run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics to validate your approach.

    Make refinements to the implementation and maintenance processes prior to activating all service metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    High user acceptance and usability of the metrics.

    Processes of identifying and presenting metrics are continuously validated and improved.

    Activities

    3.1 Select the pilot metrics.

    3.2 Gather data and set initial targets.

    3.3 Generate the reports and validate with stakeholders.

    3.4 Implement the service metrics program.

    3.5 Track and maintain the metrics program.

    Outputs

    Select the metrics that should be first implemented based on urgency and impact

    Complete the service intake form for a specific initiative

    Create a process to gather data, measure baselines, and set initial targets

    Establish a process to receive feedback from the business stakeholders once the report is generated

    Identify the approach to implement the metrics program across the organization

    Set up mechanism to ensure the success of the metrics program by assessing process adherence and process validity

    Further reading

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Select IT service metrics that drive business value.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Are you measuring and reporting what the business needs to know?

    “Service metrics are one of the key tools at IT’s disposal in articulating and ensuring its value to the business, yet metrics are rarely designed and used for that purpose.

    Creating IT service metrics directly from business and stakeholder outcomes and goals, written from the business perspective and using business language, is critical to ensuring that the services that IT provides are meeting business needs.

    The ability to measure, manage, and improve IT service performance in relation to critical business success factors, with properly designed metrics, embeds IT in the value chain of the business and ensures IT’s focus on where and how it enables business outcomes.”

    Valence Howden,
    Senior Manager, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • CIO
    • IT VPs
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Align business/IT objectives (design top-down or outside-in)
    • Significantly improve the relationship between the business and IT aspects of the organization
    • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Service Level Managers
    • Service Owners
    • Program Owners
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Identify unusual deviations from the normal operating state
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value
    • Validate the value of performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating benefits realization

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • IT organizations measure services from a technology perspective yet rarely measure services from a business goal/outcome perspective.
    • Most organizations do a poor job of identifying and measuring service outcomes over the duration of a service’s lifecycle – never ensuring the services remain valuable and meet expected long-term ROI.

    Complication

    • IT organizations have difficulty identifying the right metrics to demonstrate the value of IT services to the business in tangible terms.
    • IT metrics, as currently designed, reinforce division between the IT and business perspectives of service performance. They drive siloed thinking and finger-pointing within the IT structure, and prevent IT resources from understanding how their work impacts business value.

    Resolution

    • Our program enables IT to develop the right service metrics to tie IT service performance to business value and user experience.
    • Ensure the metrics you implement have immediate stakeholder value, reinforcing alignment between IT and the business while influencing behavior in the desired direction.
    • Make sure that your metrics are defined in relation to the business goals and drivers, ensuring they will provide actionable outcomes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.
    2. Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.
    3. Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors, which have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Service metrics 101

    What are service metrics?

    Service metrics measure IT services in a way that relates to a business outcome. IT needs to measure performance from the business perspective using business language.

    Why do we need service metrics?

    To ensure the business cares about the metrics that IT produces, start with business needs to make sure you’re measuring the right things. This will give IT the opportunity talk to the right stakeholders and develop metrics that will meet their business needs.

    Service metrics are designed with the business perspective in mind, so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    Perspectives Matter

    Different stakeholders will require different types of metrics. A CEO may require metrics that provide a snapshot of the critical success of the company while a business manager is more concerned about the performance metrics of their department.

    What are the benefits of implementing service metrics?

    Service metrics help IT communicate with the business in business terms and enables IT to articulate how and where they provide business value. Business stakeholders can also easily understand how IT services contribute to their success.

    The majority of CIOs feel metrics relating to business value and stakeholder satisfaction require significant improvement

    A significantly higher proportion of CIOs than CEOs feel that there is significant improvement necessary for business value metrics and stakeholder satisfaction reporting. Stacked horizontal bar chart presenting survey results from CIOs and CXOs of 'Business Value Metrics'. Answer options are 'Effective', 'Some Improvement Necessary', 'Significant Improvement Necessary', and 'Not Required'.N=364

    Stacked horizontal bar chart presenting survey results from CIOs and CXOs of 'Stakeholder Satisfaction Reporting'. Answer options are 'Effective', 'Some Improvement Necessary', 'Significant Improvement Necessary', and 'Not Required'.N=364

    (Source: Info-Tech CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)

    Meaningless metrics are a headache for the business

    A major pitfall of many IT organizations is that they often provide pages of technical metrics that are meaningless to their business stakeholders.

    1. Too Many MetricsToo many metrics are provided and business leaders don’t know what to do with these metrics.
    2. Metrics Are Too TechnicalIT provides technical metrics that are hard to relate to business needs, and methods of calculating metrics are not clearly understood, articulated, and agreed on.
    3. Metrics Have No Business ValueService metrics are not mapped to business goals/objectives and they drive incorrect actions or spend.
    When considering only CEOs who said that stakeholder satisfaction reporting needed significant improvement, the average satisfaction score goes down to 61.6%, which is a drop in satisfaction of 12%.

    A bar that says 73% dropping to a bar that says 61%. Description above.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)

    Poorly designed metrics hurt IT’s image within the organization

    By providing metrics that do not articulate the value of IT services, IT reinforces its role as a utility provider and an outsider to strategic decisions.

    When the CIOs believe business value metrics weren’t required, 50% of their CEOs said that significant improvements were necessary.

    Pie Chart presenting the survey results from CEOs regarding 'Business Value Metrics'. Description above.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)
    1. Reinforce the wrong behaviorThe wrong metrics drive us-against-them, siloed thinking within IT, and meeting metric targets is prioritized over providing meaningful outcomes.
    2. Do not reflect user experienceMetrics don’t align with actual business/user experience, reinforcing a poor view of IT services.
    3. Effort ≠ ValueInvesting dedicated resources and effort to the achievement of the wrong metrics will only leave IT more constrained for other important initiatives.

    Articulate meaningful service performance that supports the achievement of business outcomes

    Service metrics measure the performance of IT services and how they enable or drive the activity outcomes.

    A business process consists of multiple business activities. In many cases, these business activities require one or more supporting IT services.

    A 'Business Process' broken down to its parts, multiple 'Business Activities' and their 'IT Services'. For each business process, business stakeholders and their goals and objectives should be identified.

    For each business activity that supports the completion of a business process, define the success criteria that must be met in order to produce the desirable outcome.

    Identify the IT services that are used by business stakeholders for each business activity. Measure the performance of these services from a business perspective to arrive at the appropriate service metrics.

    Differentiate between different types of metrics

    Stakeholders have different goals and objectives; therefore, it is critical to identify what type of metrics should be presented to each stakeholder.

    Business Metrics

    Determine Business Success

    Business metrics are derived from a pure business perspective. These are the metrics that the business stakeholders will measure themselves on, and business success is determined using these metrics.

    Arrow pointing right.

    Service Metrics

    Manage Service Value to the Business

    Service metrics are used to measure IT service performance against business outcomes. These metrics, while relating to IT services, are presented in business terms and are tied to business goals.

    Arrow pointing right.

    IT Metrics

    Enable Operational Excellence

    IT metrics are internal to the IT organization and used to manage IT service delivery. These metrics are technical, IT-specific, and drive action for IT. They are not presented to the business, and are not written in business language.

    Implementing service metrics is a key step in becoming a service provider and business partner

    As a prerequisite, IT organizations must have already established a solid relationship with the business and have a clear understanding of its critical business-facing services.

    At the very least, IT needs to have a service-oriented view and understand the specific needs and objectives associated with each stakeholder.

    Visualization of 'Business Relationship Management' with an early point on the line representing 'Service Provider: Establish service-oriented culture and business-centric service delivery', and the end of the line being 'Strategic Partner'.

    Once IT can present service metrics that the business cares about, it can continue on the service provider journey by managing the performance of services based on business needs, determine and influence service demand, and assess service value to maximize benefits to the business.

    Which processes drive service metrics?

    Both business relationship management (BRM) and service level management (SLM) provide inputs into and receive outputs from service metrics.

    Venn Diagram of 'Business Relationship Management', 'Service Metrics', and 'Service Level Management'.

    Business Relationship Management

    BRM works to understand the goals and objectives of the business and inputs them into the design of the service metrics.

    Service Metrics

    BRM leverages service metrics to help IT organizations manage the relationship with the business.

    BRM articulates and manages expectations and ensures IT services are meeting business requirements.

    Which processes drive service metrics?

    Both BRM and SLM provide inputs into and receive outputs from service metrics.

    Venn Diagram of 'Business Relationship Management', 'Service Metrics', and 'Service Level Management'.

    Service Level Management

    SLM works with the business to understand service requirements, which are key inputs in designing the service metrics.

    Service Metrics

    SLM leverages service metrics in overseeing the day-to-day delivery of IT services. It ensures they are provided to meet expected service level targets and objectives.

    Effective service metrics will deliver both service gains and relationship gains

    Effective service metrics will provide the following service gains:

    • Confirm service performance and identify gaps
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value
    • Validate performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating business value
    • Ensure service reporting aligns with end-user experience
    • Achieve and confirm process and regulatory compliance
        Which will translate into the following relationship gains:
        • Embed IT into business value achievement
        • Improve relationship between the business and IT
        • Achieve higher customer satisfaction (happier end users receiving expected service, the business is able to identify how things are really performing)
        • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors from both IT and the business

    Don’t let conventional wisdom become your roadblock

    Conventional Wisdom

    Info-Tech Perspective

    Metrics are measured from an application or technology perspective Metrics need to be derived from a service and business outcome perspective.
    The business doesn’t care about metrics Metrics are not usually designed to speak in business terms about business outcomes. Linking metrics to business objectives creates metrics that the business cares about.
    It is difficult to have a metrics discussion with the business It is not a metrics/number discussion, it is a discussion on goals and outcomes.
    Metrics are only presented for the implementation of the service, not the ongoing outcome of the service IT needs to focus on service outcome and not project outcome.
    Quality can’t be measured Quality must be measured in order to properly manage services.

    Our three-phase approach to service metrics development

    Let Info-Tech guide you through your service metrics journey

    1

    2

    3

    Design Your Metrics Develop and Validate Reporting Implement, Track, and Maintain
    Sample of Phase 1 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Design Your Metrics'. Sample of Phase 2 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Develop and Validate Reporting'. Sample of Phase 3 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Implement, Track, and Maintain'.
    Start the development and creation of your service metrics by keeping business perspectives in mind, so they are fully aligned with business objectives. Identify the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder preference and need for metrics. Track goals and success metrics for your service metrics programs. It allows you to set long-term goals and track your results over time.

    CIOs must actively lead the design of the service metrics program

    The CIO must actively demonstrate support for the service metrics program and lead the initial discussions to determine what matters to business leaders.

    1. Lead the initiative by defining the need
      Show visible support and demonstrate importance
    2. Articulate the value to both IT and the business
      Establish the urgency and benefits
    3. Select and assemble an implementation group
      Find the best people to get the job done
    4. Drive initial metrics discussions: goals, objectives, actions
      Lead brainstorming with senior business leaders
    5. Work with the team to determine presentation formats and communication methods
      Identify the best presentation approach for senior stakeholders
    6. Establish a feedback loop for senior management
      Solicit feedback on improvements
    7. Validate the success of the metrics
      Confirm service metrics support business outcomes

    Measure the success of your service metrics

    It is critical to determine if the designed service metrics are fulfilling their intended purpose. The process of maintaining the service metrics program and the outcomes of implementing service metrics need to be monitored and tracked.

    Validating Service Metrics Design

    Target Outcome

    Related Metrics

    The business is enabled to identify and improve service performance to their end customer # of improvement initiatives created based on service metrics
    $ cost savings/revenue generated due to actions derived from service metrics

    Procedure to validate the usefulness of IT metrics

    # / % of service metrics added/removed per year

    Alignment between IT and business objectives and processes Business’ satisfaction with IT

    Measure the success of your service metrics

    It is critical to determine if the designed service metrics are fulfilling their intended purpose. The process of maintaining the service metrics program and the outcomes of implementing service metrics need to be monitored and tracked.

    Validating Service Metrics Process

    Target Outcome

    Related Metrics

    Properly defined service metrics aligned with business goals/outcomes
    Easy understood measurement methodologies
    % of services with (or without) defined service metrics

    % of service metrics tied to business goals

    Consistent approach to review and adjust metrics# of service metrics adjusted based on service reviews

    % of service metrics reviewed on schedule

    Demonstrate monetary value and impact through the service metrics program

    In a study done by the Aberdeen Group, organizations engaged in the use of metrics benchmarking and measurement have:
    • 88% customer satisfaction rate
    • 60% service profitability
    • 15% increase in workforce productivity over the last 12 months

    Stock image of a silhouette of three people's head and shoulders.
    (Source: Aberdeen Group. “Service Benchmarking and Measurement.”)

    A service metric is defined for: “Response time for Business Application A

    The expected response time has not been achieved and this is visible in the service metrics. The reduced performance has been identified as having an impact of $250,000 per month in lost revenue potential.

    The service metric drove an action to perform a root-cause analysis, which identified a network switch issue and drove a resolution action to fix the technology and architect redundancy to ensure continuity.

    The fix eliminated the performance impact, allowing for recovery of the $250K per month in revenue, improved end-user confidence in the organization, and increased use of the application, creating additional revenue.

    Implementing and measuring a video conferencing service

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO interview and case material
    Situation

    The manufacturing business operates within numerous countries and requires a lot of coordination of functions and governance oversight. The company has monthly meetings, both regional and national, and key management and executives travel to attend and participate in the meetings.

    Complication

    While the meetings provide a lot of organizational value, the business has grown significantly and the cost of business travel has started to become prohibitive.

    Action

    It was decided that only a few core meetings would require onsite face-to-face meetings, and for all other meetings, the company would look at alternative means. The face-to-face aspect of the meetings was still considered critical so they focused on options to retain that aspect.

    The IT organization identified that they could provide a video conferencing service to meet the business need. The initiative was approved and rolled out in the organization.

    Result:

    IT service metrics needed to be designed to confirm that the expected value outcome of the implementation of video conferencing was achieved.

    Under the direction of the CIO, the business goals and needs driving use of the service (i.e. reduction in travel costs, efficiency, no loss of positive outcome) were used to identify success criteria and key questions to confirm success.

    With this information, the service manager was able to implement relevant service metrics in business language and confirmed an 80% adoption rate and a 95% success rate in term meetings running as expected and achieving core outcomes.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Develop meaningful service metrics to ensure business and user satisfaction

    1. Design the Metrics 2. Design Reports and Dashboards 3. Implement, Track, and Maintain
    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1. Defining stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria
    2. Derive meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validate with business stakeholders
    3. Validate metrics can be collected and measured
    4. Determine calculation methodology
    1. Presentation format selected based on stakeholder needs and preference for information
    2. Presentation format validated with stakeholders
    1. Identify metrics that will be presented first to the stakeholders based on urgency or impact of the IT service
    2. Determine the process to collect data, select initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    3. Roll out the metrics implementation for a broader audience
    4. Establish roles and timelines for metrics maintenance

    Guided Implementations

    • Design metrics based on business needs
    • Validate the metrics
    • Select presentation format
    • Review metrics presentation design
    • Select and implement pilot metrics
    • Determine rollout process and establish maintenance/tracking mechanism
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Derive Service Metrics From Business Goals
    Module 2:
    Select and Design Reports and Dashboards
    Module 3:
    Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics to Ensure Success
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Meaningful service metrics designed from stakeholder needs
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Appropriate presentation format selected for each stakeholder
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Metrics implemented and process established to maintain and track program success

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Design the Metrics
    Determine Presentation Format and Implement Metrics
    Gather Service Level Requirements
    Monitor and Improve Service Levels

    Activities

    • 1.1 Determine stakeholder needs
    • 1.2 Determine success criteria and key performance indicators
    • 1.3 Derive metrics
    • 1.4 Validate the metric collection
    • 2.1 Discuss stakeholder needs/preference for data and select presentation format
    • 2.2 Select and design the metric report
    • Requirements
    • 3.1 Determine the business requirements
    • 3.2 Negotiate service levels
    • 3.3 Align operational level agreements (OLAs) and supplier contracts
    • 4.1 Conduct service report and perform service review
    • 4.2 Communicate service review
    • 4.3 Remediate issues using action plan
    • 4.4 Proactive prevention

    Deliverables

    1. Metrics Development Workbook
    1. Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    2. Metrics Tracking Tool
    1. Service Level Management SOP
    2. Service Level Agreement
    1. Service Level Report
    2. Service Level Review
    3. Business Satisfaction Report

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 1

    Design the Metrics

    Step (1): Design the Metrics

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Business Relationship Manager (BRM)
    • Service Level Manager (SLM)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Defined stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria
    • Identified IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes
    • Derived meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validated with business stakeholders
    • Validated that metrics can be collected and measured
    • Determined calculation methodology

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Design the Metrics

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks
    Step 1.1: Design Metrics Step 1.2: Validate the Metrics
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Determine the stakeholder and their needs
    • Identify IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes
    • Derive the service metrics
    Review findings with analyst:
    • For the selected metrics, identify the data source for collection
    • Validate whether or not the data can be created
    • Create a calculation method for the metrics
    Then complete these activities…
    • Using the methodology provided, identify additional stakeholders and map out their success criteria, including KPIs to determine the appropriate service metrics
    Then complete these activities…
    • Determine whether the designed metrics are measurable, and if so, how
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Development Workbook
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Development Workbook

    Design your service metrics – overview

    Figure representing 'CIO'. Step 1
    Derive your service metrics

    Metrics Worksheet

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Validate your metrics

    Metrics Worksheet

    Figures representing 'CIO', 'SLM', and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Confirm with stakeholders

    Metrics Tracking Sheet

    A star.

    Defined IT Service Metrics

    Deriving the right metrics is critical to ensuring that you will generate valuable and actionable service metrics.

    Derive your service metrics from business objectives and needs

    Service metrics must be designed with the business perspective in mind so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    Thus, IT must start by identifying specific stakeholder needs. The more IT understands about the business, the more relevant the metrics will be to the business stakeholders.

    1. Who are your stakeholders?
    2. What are their goals and pain points?
    3. What do the stakeholders need to know?
    4. What do I need to measure?
    5. Derive your service metrics

    Derive your service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 Metrics Development Workbook

    This workbook guides the development and creation of service metrics that are directly tied to stakeholder needs.

    This process will ensure that your service metrics are designed with the business perspective in mind so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    1. Who are the relevant stakeholders?
    2. What are the goals and pain points of your stakeholders?
    3. What do the stakeholders need to know?
    4. What does IT need to measure?
    5. What are the appropriate IT metrics?

    Download the Metrics Development Workbook.

    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Development Workbook.

    Determine your stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 0.5 Hour

    Who are your stakeholders?

    1. Identify the primary stakeholders of your service metrics. Stakeholders are the people who have a very specific need to know about how IT services affect their business outcomes. Different stakeholders can have different perspective on the same IT service metric.Most often, the primary target of service metrics are the business stakeholders, e.g. VP of a business unit.
    2. Identify any additional stakeholders. The CIO is also a stakeholder since they are effectively the business relationship manager for the senior leaders.

    Video Conferencing Case Study
    Manufacturing company

    For this phase, we will demonstrate how to derive the service metrics by going through the steps in the methodology.

    At a manufacturing company, the CIO’s main stakeholder is the CEO, whose chief concern is to improve the financial position of the company.

    Identify goals and pain points of your stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2 0.5 Hour

    What are their goals and pain points?

    1. Clearly identify each stakeholder’s business goals and outcomes. These would be particular business goals related to a specific business unit.
    2. Identify particular pain points for each business unit to understand what is preventing them from achieving the desirable business outcome.

    VC Case Study

    One of the top initiatives identified by the company to improve financial performance was to reduce expense.

    Because the company has several key locations in different states, company executives used to travel extensively to carry out meetings at each location.

    Therefore, travel expenses represent a significant proportion of operational expenses and reducing travel costs is a key goal for the company’s executives.

    What do the stakeholders need to know?

    Supporting Tool icon 1.3 0.5 Hour

    What do the stakeholders need to know?

    1. Identify the key things that the stakeholders would need to know based on the goals and pain points derived from the previous step.These are your success criteria and must be met to successfully achieve the desired goals.

    VC Case Study

    The CEO needs to have assurance that without executives traveling to each location, remote meetings can be as effective as in-person meetings.

    These meetings must provide the same outcome and allow executives to collaborate and make similar strategic decisions without the onsite, physical presence.

    Therefore, the success criteria are:

    • Reduced travel costs
    • Effective collaboration
    • High-quality meetings

    What do I need to measure?

    Supporting Tool icon 1.4 1 Hour

    What does IT need to measure?

    1. Identify the IT services that are leveraged to achieve the business goals and success criteria.
    2. Identify the users of those services and determine the nature of usage for each group of users.
    3. Identify the key indicators that must be measured for those services from an IT perspective.

    VC Case Study

    The IT department decides to implement the video conferencing service to reduce the number of onsite meetings. This technology would allow executives to meet remotely with both audio and video and is the best option to replicate a physical meeting.

    The service is initially available to senior executives and will be rolled out to all internal users once the initial implementation is deemed successful.

    To determine the success of the service, the following needs to be measured:

    1. Outcomes of VC meetings
    2. Quality of the VC meetings
    3. Reduction in travel expenses

    Derive service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 1.5 0.5 Hour

    Derive your service metrics

    1. Derive the service metrics that are meaningful to business stakeholders based on the IT services and the key indicators identified in the previous steps.
    2. Distinguish between service metrics and business metrics. You may identify some business metrics in addition to the IT metrics, and although these are important, IT doesn’t own the process of tracking and reporting business metrics.

    VC Case Study

    In the previous step, IT identified that it must measure the outcomes of VC meetings, quality of the VC meetings, and the reduction in travel expenses. From these, the appropriate service metrics can be derived to answer the needs of the CEO.

    IT needs to measure:

    1. Percent of VC meetings successfully delivered
    2. Growth of number of executive meetings conducted via VC
    Outcomes

    IT also identified the following business metrics:

    1. Reduction in percent of travel expense/spend
    2. Reduction in lost time due to travel

    Validate your metrics

    Once appropriate service metrics are derived from business objectives, the next step is to determine whether or not it is viable to actually measure the metrics.

    Can you measure it? The first question IT must answer is whether the metric is measurable. IT must identify the data source, validate its ability to collect the data, and specify the data requirement. Not all metrics can be measured!
    How will you measure it? If the metric is measurable, the next step is to create a way to measure the actual data. In most cases, simple formulas that can be easily understood are the best approach.
    Define your actions Metrics must be used to drive or reinforce desirable outcomes and behaviors. Thus, IT must predetermine the necessary actions associated with the different metric levels, thresholds, or trends.

    Determine if you can measure the identified metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.6 0.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Determine what data sources are available. Make sure that you know where the information you need is captured, or will need to be captured. This would include:
      • A ticket/request system
      • An auto discovery tool
      • A configuration management database ( CMDB)
    2. Confirm that IT has the ability to collect the information.
      • If the necessary data is already contained in an identified data source, then you can proceed.
      • If not, consider whether it’s possible to gather the information using current sources and systems.
      • Understand the constraints and cost/ROI to implement new technology or revise processes and data gathering to produce the data.

    VC Case Study

    Using the metric derived from the video conferencing service example, IT wants to measure the % of VC meetings successfully delivered.

    What are the data sources?

    • Number of VC meetings that took place
    • Number of service incidents
    • User survey

    Determine if you can measure the identified metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.6 0.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Understand your data requirements
      • To produce relevant metrics from your data, you need to ensure the level of quality and currency that provides you with useful information. You need to define:
        • The level of detail that has to be captured to make the data useful.
        • The consistency of the data, and how it needs to be entered or gathered.
        • The accuracy of the data. This includes how current the data needs to be, how quickly changes have to be made, and how data quality will be verified.

    VC Case Study

    Data requirement for percent of successful VC meetings:

    • Level of detail – user category, location, date/time,
    • Consistency – how efficiently are VC-related incidents opened and closed? Is the data collected and stored consistently?
    • Accuracy – is the information entered accurately?

    Create the calculation to measure it

    Supporting Tool icon 1.7 0.5 Hour

    Determine how to calculate the metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS
    1. Develop the calculations that will be used for each accepted metric. The measurement needs to be clear and straightforward.
    2. Define the scope and assumptions for each calculation, including:
      • The defined measurement period (e.g. monthly, weekly)
      • Exclusions (e.g. nonbusiness hours, during maintenance windows)

    VC Case Study

    Metric: Percent of VC meetings delivered successfully

    IT is able to determine the total number of VC meetings that took place and the number of VC service requests to the help desk.

    That makes it possible to use the following formula to determine the success percentage of the VC service:

    ((total # VC) – (# of VC with identified incidents)) / (total # VC) * 100

    Define the actions to be taken for each metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.7 1.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Centered on the defined metrics and their calculations, IT can decide on the actions that should be driven out of each metric based on one of the following scenarios:
    • Scenario 1: Ad hoc remedial action and root-cause investigation. If the reason for the result is unknown, determining root cause or identifying trends is required to determine required actions.
    • Scenario 2: Predefined remedial action. A set of predetermined actions associated with different results. This is useful when the meaning of the results is clear and points to specific issues within the environment.
    • Scenario 3: Nonremedial action. The metrics may produce a result that reinforces or supports company direction and strategy, or identifies an opportunity that may drive a new initiative or idea.

    VC Case Study

    If the success rate of the VC meetings is below 90%, IT needs to focus on determining if there is a common cause and identify if this is a consistent downward trend.

    A root-cause analysis is performed that identifies that network issues are causing difficulties, impacting the connection quality and usability of the VC service.

    Validate the confirmed metrics with the business

    Supporting Tool icon 1.8 1 Hour

    INPUT: Selected service metrics, Discussion with the business

    OUTPUT: Validated metrics with the business

    Materials: Metrics with calculation methodology

    Participants: IT and business stakeholders, Service owners

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Once you have derived the appropriate metrics and established that the metrics are measurable, you must go back to the targeted stakeholders and validate that the selected metrics will provide the right information to meet their identified goals and success criteria.
    2. Add confirmed metrics to the Metrics Tracking Tool, in the Metrics Tracking Plan tab.
    Service Metric Corresponding
    Business Goal
    Measurement
    Method
    Defined Actions

    Example: Measuring the online banking service at a financial institution

    Who are IT’s stakeholders? The financial institution provides various banking solutions to its customers. Retail banking is a core service offered by the bank and the VP of retail banking is a major stakeholder of IT.
    What are their goals and pain points? The VP of retail banking’s highest priorities are to increase revenue, increase market share, and maintain the bank’s brand and reputation amongst its customers.
    What do they need to know? In order to measure success, the VP of retail banking needs to determine performance in attracting new clients, retaining clients, expanding into new territory, and whether they have increased the number of services provided to existing clients.
    What does IT need to measure? The recent implementation of an online banking service is a key initiative that will keep the bank competitive and help retail banking meet its goals. The key indicators of this service are: the total number of clients, the number of products per client, percent of clients using online banking, number of clients by segment, service, territory.
    Derive the service metrics Based on the key indicators, IT can derive the following service metrics:
    1. Number of product applications originated from online banking
    2. Customer satisfaction/complaints
    As part of the process, IT also identified some business metrics, such as the number of online banking users per month or the number of times a client accesses online banking per month.

    Design service metrics to track service performance and value

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO
    Challenge Solution Results
    The IT organization needed to generate metrics to show the business whether the video conferencing service was being adopted and if it was providing the expected outcome and value.

    Standard IT metrics were technical and did not provide a business context that allowed for easy understanding of performance and decision making.

    The IT organization, working through the CIO and service managers, sat down with the key business stakeholders of the video conferencing service.

    They discussed the goals for the meeting and defined the success criteria for those goals in the context of video conference meeting outcomes.

    The success criteria that were discussed were then translated into a set of questions (key performance indicators) that if answered, would show that the success criteria were achieved.

    The service manager identified what could be measured to answer the defined questions and eliminated any metrics that were either business metrics or non-IT related.

    The remaining metrics were identified as the possible service metrics, and the ability to gather the information and produce the metric was confirmed.

    Service metrics were defined for:

    1. Percent of video conference meetings delivered successfully
    2. Growth in the number of executive meetings conducted via video conference

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1

    Sample of activity 1.1 'Determine your stakeholders'. Determine stakeholder needs, goals, and pain points

    The onsite analyst will help you select key stakeholders and analyze their business objectives and current pain points.

    1.2

    Sample of activity 1.2 'Identify goals and pain points of your stakeholders'. Determine the success criteria and related IT services

    The analyst will facilitate a discussion to uncover the information that these stakeholders care about. The group will also identify the IT services that are supporting these objectives.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.5

    Sample of activity 1.5 'Derive service metrics'. Derive the service metrics

    Based on the key performance indicators obtained in the previous page, derive meaningful business metrics that are relevant to the stakeholders.

    1.6

    Sample of activity 1.6 'Determine if you can measure the identified metric'. Validate the data collection process

    The analyst will help the workshop group determine whether the identified metrics can be collected and measured. If so, a calculation methodology is created.

    1.7

    Sample of activity 1.7 'Create the caluclation to measure it'. Validate metrics with stakeholders

    Establish a feedback mechanism to have business stakeholders validate the meaningfulness of the metrics.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 2

    Design Reports and Dashboards

    Step (2): Design Reports and Dashboards

    PHASE 1PHASE 2PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Presentation format selected based on stakeholder needs and preference for information
    • Presentation format validated with stakeholders

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Design Reports and Dashboards

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 3 weeks
    Step 2.1: Select Presentation Format Step 2.2: Review Design
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review the different format of metrics presentation and discuss the pros/cons of each format
    • Discuss stakeholder needs/preference for data
    • Select the presentation format
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Discuss stakeholder feedback based on selected presentation format
    • Modify and adjust the presentation format as needed
    Then complete these activities…
    • Design the metrics using the selected format
    Then complete these activities…
    • Finalize the design for metrics presentation
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Design the reports – overview

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 1
    Understand the pros and cons of different reporting styles
    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Determine your reporting and presentation style

    Presentation Format Selection

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Design your metrics reports
    A star.

    Validated Service Reports

    The design of service metrics reporting is critically important. The reporting style must present the right information in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible to ensure that it is read and used.

    The reports must also display information in a way that generates actions. If your stakeholders cannot make decisions, kick off activities, or ask questions based on your reports, then they have no value.

    Determine the right presentation format for your metrics

    Most often, metrics are presented in the following ways:

    Dashboard
    (PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.”)
    Sample of the 'Dashboard' metric presentation format.
    Infographic
    (PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants.”)
    Sample of the 'Infographic' metric presentation format.
    Report
    (PwC Blogs. “Northern Lights.”)
    Sample of the 'Report' metric presentation format.
    Scorecard
    (PwC. “Annual Report 2015.”)
    Sample of the 'Scorecard' metric presentation format.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Dashboard

    A dashboard is a reporting method that provides a dynamic at-a-glance view of key metrics from the perspective of key stakeholders. It provides a quick graphical way to process important performance information in real time.

    Features

    Typically web-based

    Dynamic data that is updated in real time

    Advantage

    Aggregates a lot of information into a single view

    Presents metrics in a simplistic style that is well understood

    Provides a quick point-in-time view of performance

    Easy to consume visual presentation style

    Disadvantage

    Complicated to set up well.
    Requires additional technology support: programming, API, etc.

    Promotes a short-term outlook – focus on now, no historical performance and no future trends. Doesn’t provide the whole picture and story.

    Existing dashboard tools are often not customized enough to provide real value to each stakeholder.

    Dashboards present real-time metrics that can be accessed and viewed at any time

    Sample of the 'Dashboard' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.”)
    Metrics presented through online dashboards are calculated in real time, which allows for a dynamic, current view into the performance of IT services at any time.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Infographic

    An infographic is a graphical representation of metrics or data, which is used to show information quickly and clearly. It’s based on the understanding that people retain and process visual information more readily than written details.

    Features

    Turns dry into attractive –transforms data into eye-catching visual memory that is easier to retain

    Can be used as the intro to a formal report

    There are endless types of infographics

    Advantage

    Easily consumable

    Easy to retain

    Eye catching

    Easily shared

    Spurs conversation

    Customizable

    Disadvantage

    Require design expertise and resources

    Can be time consuming to generate

    Could be easily misinterpreted

    Message can be lost with poor design

    Infographics allow for completely unique designs

    Sample of the 'Infographic' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants…”)
    There is no limit when it comes to designing an infographic. The image used here visually articulates the effects of new entrants pulling away the market.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Formal Report

    A formal report is a more structured and official reporting style that contains detailed research, data, and information required to enable specific business decisions, and to help evaluate performance over a defined period of time.

    Definition

    Metrics can be presented as a component of a periodic, formal report

    A physical document that presents detailed information to a particular audience

    Advantage

    More detailed, more structured and broader reporting period

    Formal, shows IT has put in the effort

    Effectively presents a broader and more complete story

    Targets different stakeholders at the same time

    Disadvantage

    Requires significant effort and resources

    Higher risk if the report does not meet the expectation of the business stakeholder

    Done at a specific time and only valuable for that specific time period

    Harder to change format

    Formal reports provide a detailed view and analysis of performance

    Sample of the 'Formal Report' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC Blogs. “Northern Lights: Where are we now?”)
    An effective report incorporates visuals to demonstrate key improvements.

    Formal reports can still contain visuals, but they are accompanied with detailed explanations.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Scorecard

    A scorecard is a graphic view of the progress and performance over time of key performance metrics. These are in relation to specified goals based on identified critical stakeholder objectives.

    Features

    Incorporates multiple metrics effectively.

    Scores services against the most important organizational goals and objectives. Scorecards may tie back into strategy and different perspectives of success.

    Advantage

    Quick view of performance against objectives

    Measure against a set of consistent objectives

    Easily consumable

    Easy to retain

    Disadvantage

    Requires a lot of forethought

    Scorecards provide a time-bound summary of performance against defined goals

    Sample of the 'Scorecard' metric presentation format.
    (PwC. “Annual Report 2015.”)
    Scorecards provide a summary of performance that is directly linked to the organizational KPIs.

    Determine your report style

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    In this section, you will determine the optimal reporting style for the service metrics.

    This guide contains four questions, which will help IT organizations identify the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder preference and needs for metrics.

    1. Who is the relevant stakeholder?
    2. What are the defined actions for the metric?
    3. How frequently does the stakeholder need to see the metric?
    4. How does the stakeholder like to receive information?
    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide.
    Download the Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide.

    Determine your best presentation option

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 2 Hours

    INPUT: Identified stakeholder and his/her role

    OUTPUT: Proper presentation format based on need for information

    Materials: Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Program Manager

    After deciding on the report type to be used to present the metric, the organization needs to consider how stakeholders will consume the metric.

    There are three options based on stakeholder needs and available presentation options within IT.

    1. Paper-based presentation is the most traditional form of reporting and works well with stakeholders who prefer physical copies. The report is produced at a specific time and requires no additional IT capability.
    2. Online documents stored on webpages, SharePoint, or another knowledge management system could be used to present the metrics. This allows the report to be linked to other information and easily shared.
    3. Online dashboards and graphics can be used to have dynamic, real-time reporting and anytime access. These webpages can be incorporated into an intranet and allow the user to view the metrics at any time. This will require IT to continuously update the data in order to maintain the accuracy of the metrics.

    Design your metric reports with these guidelines in mind

    Supporting Tool icon 2.2 30 Minutes
    1. Stakeholder-specificThe report must be driven by the identified stakeholder needs and preferences and articulate the metrics that are important to them.
    2. ClarityTo enable decision making and drive desired actions, the metrics must be clear and straightforward. They must be presented in a way that clearly links the performance measurement to the defined outcome without leading to different interpretations of the results.
    3. SimplicityThe report must be simple to read, understand, and analyze. The language of the report must be business-centric and remove as much complexity as possible in wording, imaging, and context.

    Be sure to consider access rights for more senior reports. Site and user access permissions may need to be defined based on the level of reporting.

    Metrics reporting on the video conferencing service

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO Interview
    The Situation

    The business had a clear need to understand if the implementation of video conferencing would allow previously onsite meetings to achieve the same level of effectiveness.

    Reporting Context

    Provided reports had always been generated from an IT perspective and the business rarely used the information to make decisions.

    The metrics needed to help the business understand if the meetings were remaining effective and be tied into the financial reporting against travel expenses, but there would be limited visibility during the executive meetings.

    Approach

    The service manager reviewed the information that he had gathered to confirm how often they needed information related to the service. He also met with the CIO to get some insight into the reports that were already being provided to the business, including the ones that were most effective.

    Considerations

    The conversations identified that there was no need for a dynamic real-time view of the performance of the service, since tracking of cost savings and utility would be viewed monthly and quarterly. They also identified that the item would be discussed within a very small window of time during the management meetings.

    The Solution

    It was determined that the best style of reporting for the metric was an existing scorecard that was produced monthly, using some infographics to ensure that the information is clear at a glance to enable quick decision making.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    Sample of presentation format option slide 'Determine the right presentation format for your metrics'. Understand the different presentation options

    The onsite analyst will introduce the group to the communication vehicles of infographic, scorecard, formal report, and dashboard.

    2.1

    Sample of activity 2.1 'Determine your best presentation option'. Assess stakeholder needs for information

    For selected stakeholders, the analyst will facilitate a discussion on how stakeholders would like to view information and how the metrics can be presented to aid decision making.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.2

    Sample of activity 2.2 'Design your metric reports with these guidelines in mind'. Select and design the metric report

    Based on the discussion, the working group will select the most appropriate presentation format and create a rough draft of how the report should look.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 3

    Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    Step (3): Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    PHASE 1PHASE 2PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Metrics Program Manager

    Activities in this step

    • Determine the first batch of metrics to be implemented as part of the pilot program
    • Create a process to collect and validate data, determine initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    • Present the metric reports to the relevant stakeholders and incorporate the feedback into the metric design
    • Establish a standard process and roll out the implementation of metrics in batches
    • Establish a process to monitor and track the effectiveness of the service metrics program and make adjustments when necessary

    Phase 3 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks
    Step 3.1: Select and Launch Pilot Metrics Step 3.2: Track and Maintain the Metrics
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Identify metrics that will be presented first to the stakeholders based on urgency or impact of the IT service
    • Determine the process to collect data, select initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Review the success of metrics and discuss feedback from stakeholders
    • Roll out the metrics implementation to a broader audience
    • Establish roles and timelines for metrics maintenance
    Then complete these activities…
    • Document the first batch of metrics
    • Document the baseline, initial targets
    • Create a plan to integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create a document that defines how the organization will track and maintain the success of the metrics program
    • Review the metrics program periodically
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Tracking Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Tracking Tool

    Implement, Track, and Maintain the Metrics

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 1
    Run your pilot

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Validate success

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Implement your metrics program in batches

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    A star.

    Active Service Metrics Program

    Once you have defined the way that you will present the metrics, you are ready to run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics.

    This allows you to validate your approach and make refinements to the implementation and maintenance processes where necessary, prior to activating all service metrics.

    Track the performance of your service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1

    The Metrics Tracking Tool will enable you to track goals and success metrics for your service metrics programs. It allows you to set long-term goals and track your results over time.

    There are three sections in this tool:
    1. Metrics Tracking Plan. Identify the metrics to be tracked and their purpose.
    2. Metrics Tracking Actuals. Monitor and track the actual performance of the metrics.
    3. Remediation Tracking. Determine and document the steps that need to be taken to correct a sub-performing metric.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Tracking Tool.

    Select pilot metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1 30 Minutes

    INPUT: Identified services, Business feedback

    OUTPUT: Services with most urgent need or impact

    Materials: Service catalog or list of identified services

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Business representatives

    To start the implementation of your service metrics program and drive wider adoption, you need to run a pilot using a smaller subset of metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    To determine the sample for the pilot, consider metrics that:

    • Are related to critical business services and functions
    • or
    • Address known/visible pain points for the business
    • or
    • Were designed for supportive or influential stakeholders

    Metrics that meet two or more criteria are ideal for the pilot

    Collect and validate data

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2 1 Hour

    INPUT: Identified metrics

    OUTPUT: A data collection mythology, Metrics tracking

    Materials: Metrics

    Participants: SLM, BRM, Service owner

    You will need to start collection and validation of your identified data in order to calculate the results for your pilot metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Initiate data collection
      • Use the data sources identified during the design phase and initiate the data collection process.
    2. Determine start date
      • If historical data can be retrieved and gathered, determine how far back you want your measurements to start.
    3. Compile data and validate
      • Ensure that the information is accurate and up to date. This will require some level of data validation and audit.
    4. Run the metric
      • Use the defined calculation and source data to generate the metrics result.
    5. Record metrics results
      • Use the metrics tracking sheet to track the actual results.

    Determine initial targets

    Supporting Tool icon 3.3 1 Hour

    INPUT: Historical data/baseline data

    OUTPUT: Realistic initial target for improvement

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Service owner

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Identify an initial service objective based on one or more of the following options:

    1. Establish an initial target using historical data and trends of performance.
    2. Establish an initial target based on stakeholder-identified requirements and expectations.
    3. Run the metrics report over a defined period of time and use the baseline level of achievement to establish an initial target.

    The target may not always be a number - it could be a trend. The initial target will be changed after review with stakeholders

    Integrate with SLM and BRM processes

    Supporting Tool icon 3.4 1 Hour

    INPUT: SLM and BRM SOPs or responsibility documentations

    OUTPUT: Integrate service metrics into the SLM/BRM role

    Materials: SLM / BRM reports

    Participants: SLM, BRM, CIO, Program manager, Service manager

    The service metrics program is usually initiated, used, and maintained by the SLM and BRM functions.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Ensure that the metrics pilot is integrated with those functions by:

    1. Engaging with SLM and BRM functions/resources
      • Identify SLM and BRM resources associated with or working on the services where the metrics are being piloted
      • Obtain their feedback on the metrics/reporting
    2. Integrating with the existing reporting and meeting cycles
      • Ensure the metrics will be calculated and available for discussion at standing meetings and with existing reports
    3. Establishing the metrics review and validation cycle for these metrics
      • Confirm the review and validation period for the metrics in order to ensure they remain valuable and actionable

    Generate reports and present to stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 3.5 1 Hour

    INPUT: Identified metrics, Selected presentation format

    OUTPUT: Metrics reports that are ready for distribution

    Materials: Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Participants: BRM, SLM, CIO, Business representatives

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Once you have completed the calculation for the pilot metrics:

    1. Confirm the report style for the selected metrics (as defined in Phase 2)
    2. Generate the reporting for the pilot metrics
    3. Present the pilot metric reports to the identified BRM and SLM resources who will present the reporting to the stakeholders
    4. Gather feedback from Stakeholders on metrics - results and process
    5. Create and execute remediation plans for any actions identified from the metrics
    6. Initiate the review cycle for metrics (to ensure they retain value)

    Plan the rollout and implementation of the metrics reporting program

    Supporting Tool icon 3.6 1 Hour

    INPUT: Feedback from pilot, Services in batch

    OUTPUT: Systematic implementation of metrics

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Program manager

    Upon completion of the pilot, move to start the broader implementation of metrics across the organization:

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Identify the service metrics that you will implement. They can be selected based on multiple criteria, including:
      • Organizational area/business unit
      • Service criticality
      • Pain points
      • Stakeholder engagement (detractors, supporters)
    2. Create a rollout plan for implementation in batches, identifying expected launch timelines, owners, targeted stakeholders, and communications plans
    3. Use the implementation plan from the pilot to roll out each batch of service metrics:
      • Collect and validate data
      • Determine target(s)
      • Integrate with BRM and SLM
      • Generate and communicate reports to stakeholders

    Maintain the service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.7 1.5 Hour

    INPUT: Feedback from business stakeholders

    OUTPUT: Modification to individual metrics or to the process

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool, Metrics Development Workbook

    Participants: CIO, BRM, SLM, Program manager, Service owner

    Once service metrics and reporting become active, it is necessary to determine the review time frame for your metrics to ensure they remain useful.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Confirm and establish a review time frame with stakeholders (e.g. annually, bi-annually, after organizational or strategic changes).
    2. Meet with stakeholders by the review date to discuss the value of existing metrics and validate:
      • Whether the goals associated with the metrics are still valid
      • If the metric is still necessary
      • If there is a more effective way to present the metrics
    3. Track actions based on review outcomes and update the remediation tracking sheet.
    4. Update tracking sheet with last complete review date.

    Maintain the metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.7

    Based on the outcome of the review meeting, decide what needs to be done for each metric, using the following options:

    Add

    A new metric is required or an existing metric needs large-scale changes (example: calculation method or scope).
    Triggers metrics design as shown in phases 1 and 2.

    Change

    A minor change is required to the presentation format or data. Note: a major change in a metric would be performed through the Add option.

    Remove

    The metric is no longer required, and it needs to be removed from reporting and data gathering. A final report date for that metric should be determined.

    Maintain

    The metric is still useful and no changes are required to the metric, its measurement, or how it’s reported.

    Ensuring metrics remain valuable

    VC CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO Interview

    Reviewing the value of active metrics

    When the video conferencing service was initially implemented, it was performed as a pilot with a group of executives, and then expanded for use throughout the company. It was understood that prior to seeing the full benefit in cost reduction and increased efficiency and effectiveness, the rate of use and adoption had to be understood.

    The primary service metrics created for the service were based on tracking the number of requests for video conference meetings that were received by the IT organization. This identified the growth in use and could be used in conjunction with financial metrics related to travel to help identify the impact of the service through its growth phase.

    Once the service was adopted, this metric continued to be tracked but no longer showed growth or expanded adoption.

    The service manager was no longer sure this needed to be tracked.

    Key Activity

    The metrics around requests for video conference meetings were reviewed at the annual metrics review meeting with the business. The service manager asked if the need for the metric, the goal of tracking adoption, was still important for the business.

    The discussion identified that the adoption rate was over 80%, higher than anticipated, and that there was no value in continuing to track this metric.

    Based on the discussion, the adoption metrics were discontinued and removed from data gathering and reporting, while a success rate metric was added (how many meetings ran successfully and without issue) to ensure the ongoing value of the video conferencing service.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    Sample of activity 3.1 'Select pilot metrics'. Select the pilot metrics

    The onsite analyst will help the workshop group select the metrics that should be first implemented based on the urgency and impact of these metrics.

    3.2

    Sample of activity 3.2 'Collect and validate data'. Gather data and set initial targets

    The analyst will help the group create a process to gather data, measure baselines, and set initial targets.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    3.5

    Sample of activity 3.5 'Generate reports and present to stakeholders'. Generate the reports and validate with stakeholders

    The Info-Tech analyst will help the group establish a process to receive feedback from the business stakeholders once the report is generated.

    3.6

    Sample of activity 3.6 'Plan the rollout and implementation of the metrics reporting program'. Implement the service metrics program

    The analyst will facilitate a discussion on how to implement the metrics program across the organization.

    3.7

    Sample of activity 3.7 'Maintain the service metrics'. Track and maintain the metrics program

    Set up a mechanism to ensure the success of the metrics program by assessing process adherence and process validity.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.

    Insight 2

    Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.

    Insight 3

    Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors that have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Follow a methodology to identify metrics that are derived from business objectives.
    • Understand the proper presentation format based on stakeholder needs for information.
    • Establish a process to ensure the metrics provided will continue to provide value and aid decision making.

    Processes Optimized

    • Metrics presentation to business stakeholders
    • Metrics maintenance and tracking

    Deliverables Completed

    • Metrics Development Workbook
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    • Metrics Tracking Tool

    Research contributors and experts

    Name Organization
    Joe Evers Joe Evers Consulting
    Glen Notman Associate Partner, Citihub
    David Parker Client Program Manager, eHealth Ontario
    Marianne Doran Collins CIO, The CIO-Suite, LLC
    Chris Kalbfleisch Manager, Service Management, eHealth Ontario
    Joshua Klingenberg BHP Billiton Canada Inc.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Stock image of a menu. Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog
    The user-facing service catalog is the go-to place for IT service-related information.
    Stock image of a laptop keyboard. Unleash the True Value of IT by Transforming Into a Service Provider
    Earn your seat at the table and influence business strategy by becoming an IT service provider.

    Bibliography

    Pollock, Bill. “Service Benchmarking and Measurement: Using Metrics to Drive Customer Satisfaction and Profits.” Aberdeen Group. June 2009. http://722consulting.com/ServiceBenchmarkingandMeasurement.pdf

    PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.” RMI Discussion. LinkedIn SlideShare. September 2015. http://www.slideshare.net/AnandRaoPwC/mega-trends-and-implications-to-retirement

    PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants: Who will be the industry’s Amazon.com?” Health Research Institute. April 2014. https://www.pwc.com/us/en/health-industries/healthcare-new-entrants/assets/pwc-hri-new-entrant-chart-pack-v3.pdf

    PwC. “Northern Lights: Where are we now?” PwC Blogs. 2012. http://pwc.blogs.com/files/12.09.06---northern-lights-2--summary.pdf

    PwC. “PwC’s key performance indicators

    Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}548|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • The uncertainty of the pandemic means that employee engagement is at higher risk.
    • Organizations need to think beyond targeting traditional audiences by considering engagement of onsite, remote, and laid-off employees.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The changing way of work triggered by this pandemic means engagement efforts must be easy to implement and targeted for relevant audiences.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify key drivers to leverage during the pandemic to boost engagement as well as at-risk drivers to focus efforts on.
    • Select quick-win tactics to sustain and boost engagement for relevant target audiences.

    Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Determine the scope

    Evaluate the current state, stakeholder capacity, and target audience of engagement actions.

    • Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic Storyboard
    • Pandemic Engagement Workbook

    2. Identify engagement drivers

    Review impact to engagement drivers in order to prioritize and select tactics for addressing each.

    • Tactics Catalog: Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic
    • Employee Engagement During COVID-19: Manager Tactics

    3. Determine ownership and communicate engagement actions

    Designate owners of tactics, select measurement tools and cadence, and communicate engagement actions.

    • Crisis Communication Guide for HR
    • Crisis Communication Guide for Leaders
    • Leadership Crisis Communication Guide Template
    • HR Action and Communication Plan
    [infographic]

    Learn the right way to manage metrics

    • Parent Category Name: Improve Your Processes
    • Parent Category Link: /improve-your-processes

    Learn to use metrics in the right way. Avoid staff (subconciously) gaming the numbers, as it is only natural to try to achieve the objective. This is really a case of be careful what you wish for, you may just get it.

    Register to read more …

    Go the Extra Mile With Blockchain

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}130|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • The transportation and logistics industry is facing a set of inherent flaws, such as high processing fees, fraudulent information, and lack of transparency, that blockchain is set to transform and alleviate.
    • Many companies have FOMO (fear of missing out), causing them to rush toward blockchain adoption without first identifying the optimal use case.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Understand how blockchain can alleviate your pain points before rushing to adopt the technology. You have been hearing about blockchain for some time now and are feeling pressured to adopt it. Moreover, the series of issues hindering the transportation and logistics industry, such as the lack of transparency, poor cash flow management, and high processing fees, are frustrating business leaders and thereby adding additional pressure on CIOs to adopt the technology. While blockchain is complex, you should focus on its key features of transparency, integrity, efficiency, and security to identify how it can help your organization.
    • Ensure your use case is actually useful and can be valuable to your organization by selecting a business idea that is viable, feasible, and desirable. Applying design thinking tactics to your evaluation process provides a practical approach that will help you avoid wasting resources (both time and money) and hurting IT’s image in the eyes of the business. While it is easy to get excited and invest in a new technology to help maintain your image as a thought leader, you must ensure that your use case is fully developed prior to doing so.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand blockchain’s transformative potential for the transportation and logistics industry by breaking down how its key benefits can alleviate inherent industry flaws.
    • Identify business processes and stakeholders that could benefit from blockchain.
    • Build and evaluate an inventory of use cases to determine where blockchain could have the greatest impact on your organization.
    • Articulate the value and organizational fit of your proposed use case to the business to gain their buy-in and support.

    Go the Extra Mile With Blockchain Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why your organization should care about blockchain’s transformative potential for the transportation and logistics industry and how Info-Tech will support you as you identify and build your blockchain use case.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Evaluate why blockchain can disrupt the transportation and logistics industry

    Analyze the four key benefits of blockchain as they relate to the transportation and logistics industry to understand how the technology can resolve issues being experienced by industry incumbents.

    • Go the Extra Mile With Blockchain – Phase 1: Evaluate Why Blockchain Can Disrupt the Transportation and Logistics Industry
    • Blockchain Glossary

    2. Build and evaluate an inventory of use cases

    Brainstorm a set of blockchain use cases for your organization and apply design thinking tactics to evaluate and select the optimal one to pitch to your executives for prototyping.

    • Go the Extra Mile With Blockchain – Phase 2: Build and Evaluate an Inventory of Use Cases
    • Blockchain Use Case Evaluation Tool
    • Prototype One Pager
    [infographic]

    Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}318|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $17,501 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Vendor security risk management is a growing concern for many organizations. Whether suppliers or business partners, we often trust them with our most sensitive data and processes.
    • More and more regulations require vendor security risk management, and regulator expectations in this area are growing.
    • However, traditional approaches to vendor security assessments are seen by business partners and vendors as too onerous and are unsustainable for information security departments.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An efficient and effective assessment process can only be achieved when all stakeholders are participating.
    • Security assessments are time-consuming for both you and your vendors. Maximize the returns on your effort with a risk-based approach.
    • Effective vendor security risk management is an end-to-end process that includes assessment, risk mitigation, and periodic re-assessments.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop an end-to-end security risk management process that includes assessments, risk treatment through contracts and monitoring, and periodic re-assessments.
    • Base your vendor assessments on the actual risks to your organization to ensure that your vendors are committed to the process and you have the internal resources to fully evaluate assessment results.
    • Understand your stakeholder needs and goals to foster support for vendor security risk management efforts.

    Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a vendor security assessment service, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the three ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define governance and process

    Determine your business requirements and build your process to meet them.

    • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 1: Define Governance and Process
    • Vendor Security Policy Template
    • Vendor Security Process Template
    • Vendor Security Process Diagram (Visio)
    • Vendor Security Process Diagram (PDF)

    2. Develop assessment methodology

    Develop the specific procedures and tools required to assess vendor risk.

    • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 2: Develop Assessment Methodology
    • Service Risk Assessment Questionnaire
    • Vendor Security Questionnaire
    • Vendor Security Assessment Inventory

    3. Deploy and monitor process

    Implement the process and develop metrics to measure effectiveness.

    • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 3: Deploy and Monitor Process
    • Vendor Security Requirements Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Governance and Process

    The Purpose

    Understand business and compliance requirements.

    Identify roles and responsibilities.

    Define the process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of key goals for process outcomes.

    Documented service that leverages existing processes.

    Activities

    1.1 Review current processes and pain points.

    1.2 Identify key stakeholders.

    1.3 Define policy.

    1.4 Develop process.

    Outputs

    RACI Matrix

    Vendor Security Policy

    Defined process

    2 Define Methodology

    The Purpose

    Determine methodology for assessing procurement risk.

    Develop procedures for performing vendor security assessments.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standardized, repeatable methodologies for supply chain security risk assessment.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify organizational security risk tolerance.

    2.2 Develop risk treatment action plans.

    2.3 Define schedule for re-assessments.

    2.4 Develop methodology for assessing service risk.

    Outputs

    Security risk tolerance statement

    Risk treatment matrix

    Service Risk Questionnaire

    3 Continue Methodology

    The Purpose

    Develop procedures for performing vendor security assessments.

    Establish vendor inventory.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standardized, repeatable methodologies for supply chain security risk assessment.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop vendor security questionnaire.

    3.2 Define procedures for vendor security assessments.

    3.3 Customize the vendor security inventory.

    Outputs

    Vendor security questionnaire

    Vendor security inventory

    4 Deploy Process

    The Purpose

    Define risk treatment actions.

    Deploy the process.

    Monitor the process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of how to treat different risks according to the risk tolerance.

    Defined implementation strategy.

    Activities

    4.1 Define risk treatment action plans.

    4.2 Develop implementation strategy.

    4.3 Identify process metrics.

    Outputs

    Vendor security requirements

    Understanding of required implementation plans

    Metrics inventory

    Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}414|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity

    You have made significant investments in availability and disaster recovery – but your ability to recover hasn’t been tested in years. Testing will:

    • Improve your DR capabilities.
    • Identify required changes to planning documentation and procedures.
    • Validate DR capabilities for interested customers and auditors.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • If you treat testing as a pass/fail exercise, you aren’t meeting the end goal of improving organizational resilience.
    • Focus on identifying gaps and risks, and addressing them, before a real disaster hits.
    • Take a realistic, iterative approach to resilience testing that starts with small, low-risk tests and builds on lessons learned.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify testing scenarios and scope that can deliver value to your organization.
    • Create practical test plans with Info-Tech’s template.
    • Demonstrate value from testing to gain buy-in for additional tests.

    Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Storyboard – A guide to establishing a right-sized approach to DR testing that delivers durable value to your organization.

    Use this research to understand the different types of tests, prioritize and plan tests for your organization, review the results, and establish a cadence for testing.

    • Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Storyboard

    2. Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template – A template to document your organization's DR test plan.

    Use this template to document scope and goals, participants, key pre-test milestones, the test-day schedule, and your findings from the testing exercise.

    • Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

    3. Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary – A template to outline your organization's DR testing program.

    Identify the tests you will run over the next year and the expertise, governance, process, and funding required to support testing.

    • Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary

    [infographic]

     

    Further reading

    Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing

    Reduce costly downtime with a right-sized testing program that improves IT resilience.

    Analyst Perspective

    Reduce costly downtime with a right-sized testing program that improves IT resilience.

    Andrew Sharp

    Most businesses make significant investments in disaster recovery and technology resilience. Redundant sites and systems, monitoring, intrusion prevention, backups, training, documentation: it all costs time and money.

    But does this investment deliver expected value? Specifically, can you deliver service continuity in a way that meets business requirements?

    You can’t know the answer without regularly testing recovery processes and systems. And more than just validation, testing helps you deliver service continuity by finding and addressing gaps in your plans and training your staff on recovery procedures.

    Use the insights, tools, and templates in this research to create a streamlined and effective resilience testing program that helps validate recovery capabilities and enhance service reliability, availability, and continuity.

    Andrew Sharp

    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    You have made significant investments in availability and disaster recovery (DR) – but your ability to recover hasn’t been tested in years. Testing will:

    • Improve your DR capabilities.
    • Identify required changes to planning documentation and procedures.
    • Validate DR capabilities for interested customers and auditors.

    Common Obstacles

    Despite the value testing can offer, actually executing on DR tests is difficult because:

    • Testing is often an IT-driven initiative, and it can be difficult to secure business buy-in to redirect resources away from other urgent projects or accept risks that come with testing.
    • Previous tests have been overly complex and challenging to coordinate and leave a hangover so bad that no one wants to do them again.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Take a realistic approach to resilience testing by starting with small, low-risk tests, then iterating with the lessons you’ve learned:

    • Identify testing scenarios and scope that can deliver value to your organization.
    • Create practical test plans with Info-Tech’s template.
    • Get buy-in for regular DR testing from key stakeholders with a testing program summary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you treat testing as a pass/fail exercise, you aren’t meeting the end goal of improving organizational resilience. Focus on identifying gaps and risks so you can address them before a real disaster hits.

    Process and Outputs

    This research is accompanied by templates to help you achieve your goals faster.

    1 - Establish the business rationale for DR testing.
    2 - Review a range of options for testing.
    3 - Prioritize tests that are most valuable to your business.
    4 - Create a disaster recovery test plan.
    5 - Establish a Test Program to support a regular testing cycle.

    Outputs:

    DR Test Plan
    DR Testing Program Summary

    Example Orange Activity slide.
    Orange activity slides like the one on the left provide directions to help you make key decisions.

    Key Deliverable:

    Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

    Build a plan for your first disaster recovery test.

    This document provides a complete example you can use to quickly build your own plan, including goals, milestones, participants, the test-day schedule, and findings from the after-action review.

    Why test?

    Testing helps you avoid costly downtime

    • In a disaster scenario, speed matters. Immediately after an outage, the impact on the organization is small, but impact increases rapidly the longer the outage continues.
    • A quick and reliable response and recovery can protect the organization from significant losses.
    • A DRP testing and maintenance program helps ensure you’re ready to recover when you need to, rather than figuring it out as you go.

    “Routine testing is vital to survive a disaster… that’s when muscle memory sets in. If you don’t test your DR plan it falls [in importance], and you never see how routine changes impact it.”

    – Jennifer Goshorn
    Chief Administrative Officer
    Gunderson Dettmer LLP

    Info-Tech members estimated even one day of system downtime could lead to significant revenue losses. Estimated loss of revenue over 24 hours. Core Infrastructure has the highest potential for lost revenue.

    Average estimated potential loss* in thousands of USD due to a 24-hour outage (N=41)

    *Data aggregated from 41 business impact analyses (BIAs) conducted with Info-Tech advisory assistance. BIAs evaluate potential revenue loss due to a full day of system downtime, at the worst possible time.

    Run tests to enhance disaster recovery plans

    Testing improves organizational resilience

    • Identify and address gaps in your plans before a real disaster strikes.
    • Cross-train staff on systems recovery.
    • Go beyond testing technology to test recovery processes.
    • Establish a culture that centers resilience in everyday decision-making.

    Testing keeps DR documentation ready for action

    • Update documentation ahead of tests to prepare for the testing exercise.
    • Update documentation after testing to incorporate any lessons learned.

    Testing validates that investments in resilience deliver value

    • Confirm your organization can meet defined recovery time objectives (RTOs) and recovery point objectives (RPOs).
    • Provide proof of testing for auditors, prospective customers, and insurance applications

    Overcome testing challenges

    Despite the value of effective recovery testing, most IT organizations struggle to test recovery plans

    Common challenges

    • Key resources don’t have time for testing exercises.
    • You don’t have the technology to support live recovery testing.
    • Tests are done ad hoc and lessons learned are lost.
    • A lack of business support for test exercises as the value isn’t understood.
    • Tests are always artificially simple because RTOs and RPOs must be met to satisfy customer or auditor inquiries

    Overcome challenges with a realistic approach:

    • Start small with tabletop and recovery tests for specific systems.
    • Include recovery tests in operational tasks (e.g. restore systems when you have a maintenance window).
    • Create testing plans for larger testing exercises.
    • Build on successful tests to streamline testing exercises in the future.
    • Don’t make testing a pass-fail exercise. Focus on identifying gaps and risks so you can address them before a real disaster hits.

    Go beyond traditional testing

    Different test techniques help validate recovery against different threats

    • There are many threats to service continuity, including ransomware, severe weather events, geopolitical conflict, legacy systems, staff turnover, and day-to-day outages caused by human error, software updates, hardware failures, or network outages.
    • At its core, disaster recovery planning is about recovery. A plan for service recovery will help you mitigate against many threats at once. The testing approaches on the right will help you validate different aspects of that recovery process.
    • This research will provide an overview of the approaches outlined on the right and help you prioritize tests that are most valuable to your organization.
    Different test techniques for disaster recover training: System Failover tests, tabletop exercises, ransomware recovery tests, etc.

    00 Identify a working group

    30 minutes

    Identify a group of participants who can fill the following roles and inform the discussions around testing in this research. A single person could fill multiple roles and some roles could be filled by multiple people. Many participants will be drawn from the larger DRP team.

    Roles and expectations for Disaster Recovery Planning. DRP sponsor, Testing coordinator, System testers, business liaisons, executive team.

    Input

    • Organizational context

    Output

    • A list of key participants for test planning and execution

    Participants

    • Typically, start by identifying the sponsor and coordinator and have them identify the other members of the working group.

    Start by updating your disaster recovery plan (DRP)

    Use Info-Tech’s Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan research to identify recovery objectives based on business impact and outline recovery processes. Both are tremendously valuable inputs to your test plans.

    Overall Business Continuity Plan

    IT Disaster Recovery Plan

    A plan to restore IT services (e.g. applications and infrastructure) following a disruption. A DRP:

    • Identifies critical applications and dependencies.
    • Defines appropriate recovery objectives based on a business impact analysis (BIA).
    • Creates a step-by-step incident response plan.

    BCP for Each Business Unit

    A set of plans to resume business processes for each business unit. A business continuity plan (BCP) is also sometimes called a continuity of operations plan (COOP).

    BCPs are created and owned by each business unit, and creating a BCP requires deep involvement from the leadership of each business unit.

    Info-Tech’s Develop a Business Continuity Plan blueprint provides a methodology for creating business unit BCPs as part of an overall BCP for the organization.

    Crisis Management Plan

    A plan to manage a wide range of crises, from health and safety incidents to business disruptions to reputational damage.

    Info-Tech’s Implement Crisis Management Best Practices blueprint provides a framework for planning a response to any crisis, from health and safety incidents to reputational damage.

    01 Confirm: why test at all?

    15-30 minutes

    Identify the value recovery testing for your organization. Use language appropriate for a nontechnical audience. Start with the list below and add, modify, or delete bullet points to reflect your own organization.

     

    Drivers for testing – Examples:

     

    • Improve service continuity.
    • Identify and address gaps in recovery plans before a real disaster strikes.
    • Cross-train staff on systems recovery to minimize single points of failure.
    • Identify how we coordinate across teams during a major systems outage.
    • Exercise both recovery processes and technology.
    • Support a culture that centers system resilience in everyday decision-making.
    • Keep recovery documentation up-to-date and ready for action.
    • Confirm that our stated recovery objectives can be met.
    • Provide proof of testing for auditors, prospective customers, and insurance applications.
    • We require proof of testing to pass audits and renew cybersecurity insurance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Time-strapped technical staff will sometimes push back on planning and testing, objecting that the team will “figure it out” in a disaster. But the question isn’t whether recovery is possible – it’s whether the recovery aligns with business needs. If your plan is to “MacGyver” a solution on the fly, you can’t know if it’s the right solution for your organization.

    Input

    • Business drivers and context for testing

    Output

    • Specific goals that are driving testing

    Participants

    • DR sponsor
    • Test coordinator

    Think about what and how you test

    Different layers of the stack to test: Network, Authentication, compute and storage, visualization platforms, database services, middleware, app servers, web servers.

    Find gaps and risks with tabletop testing

    Tabletop planning had the greatest impact on meeting recovery objectives (RTOs/RPOs).

    In a tabletop planning exercise, the team walks through a disaster scenario to outline the recovery workflow, and risks or gaps that could disrupt that workflow.

    Tabletops are particularly effective because:

    • It enables you to play out a wider range of scenarios than technology-based testing (e.g. full-scale, parallel) due to cost and complexity factors.
    • It is non-intrusive, so it can be executed more easily than other testing methodologies.
    • The exercise translates into recovery documentation: you create a workflow as you go.
    • A major site or service recovery scenario will review all aspects of the recovery process and create the backbone of your recovery plan.

    02 Run a tabletop exercise

    2 hours

    Tabletop testing is part of our core DRP methodology, Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan. This exercise can be run using cue cards, sticky notes, or on a whiteboard; many of our facilitators find building the workflow directly in flowchart software to be very effective.

    Use our Recovery Workflow Template as a starting point.

    Some tips for running your first tabletop exercise:

    Do

    • Review the complete workflow from notification all the way to user acceptance testing.
    • Keep focused; stay on task and on time.
    • Revisit each step and record gaps and risks (and known solutions, but don’t dwell on this).
    • Revise and improve the plan with task owners.

    Don't

    • Get weighed down by tools.
    • Try to find solutions to every gap/risk as you go. Save in-depth research/discussion for later.
    • Document the details right away – stick to the high-level plan for the first exercise.
    1. Ahead of the exercise, decide on a scenario, identify participants, and book a meeting time.
      • For your first walkthrough of a DR scenario, we often recommend a scenario that considers a site failure requiring failover to a DR site.
      • For the first exercise, focus on technical aspects of recovery before bringing in members of the business. The technical team may need space to discuss the appropriate steps in the recovery process before you bring in business liaisons to discuss user acceptance testing (UAT).
      • A complete failover considers all systems, the viability of your second site, and can help identify parts of the process that require additional exercises.
    2. Review the scenario with participants. Then, discuss and document the recovery process, starting with initial notification of an event.
      • Record steps in the process on white cards or boxes.
      • On yellow and red cards, document gaps and risks in people process and technology requirements.
    3. Once you’ve walked through the process, return to the start.
      • Record the time required to complete each step. Consider identifying who is responsible for key steps. Identify any additional gaps and risks.
    4. Clean up and record the results of the workflow. Save a copy with your DRP documentation.

    Input

    • Expert knowledge on systems recovery

    Output

    • Recovery workflow, including gaps and risks

    Participants

    • Test coordinator
    • Technical SMEs

    Move from tabletop testing to functional exercises

    See how your plans fare in the real world

    In live exercises, some portion of your recovery plans are executed in a way that mimics a real recovery scenario. Some advantages of live testing:

    • See how standby systems behave. A tabletop exercise can miss small issues that can make or break the recovery process. For example, connectivity or integration issues on a new subnet might be difficult to predict prior to actually running services in that environment.
    • Hands-on practice: Familiarize the team with the steps, commands, and interfaces of your recovery toolset.
    • Manage the pressure of the DR scenario: Nothing’s quite like the real thing, but a live exercise may be the closest your team can get to a disaster situation without experiencing it firsthand.

    Examples of live exercises

    Boot and smoke test Turn on a standby system and confirm it boots up correctly.
    Restore and validate data Restore data or servers from backup. Confirm data integrity.
    Parallel testing Send familiar transactions to production and standby systems. Confirm both systems produce the same result.
    Failover systems Shut down the production system and use the standby system in production.

    Run local tests ahead of releases

    Think small

    Most unacceptable downtime is caused by localized issues, such as hardware or software failures, rather than widespread destructive events. Regular local testing can help validate the recovery plan for local issues and improve overall service continuity.

    Make local testing a standard step in maintenance work and new deployments to embed resilience considerations in day-to-day activities. Run the same tests in both your primary and your DR environment.

    Some examples of localized tests:

    • Review backup logs and check for errors.
    • Restore files or whole systems from backup.
    • Run application-based tests as part of release management, including unit, regression, and performance tests.
      • Ensure application tests are run for both the primary and DR environment.
      • For a deep-dive on application testing, see Info-Tech’s research Automate Testing to Get More Done.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Local tests will vary between different services, and local test design is usually best left to the system SMEs. At the same time, centralize reporting to understand where tests are being done.

    Investigate whether your IT Service Management or ticketing system can create recurring tasks or work orders to schedule, document, and track test exercises. Tasks can be pre-populated with checklists and documentation to support the test and provide a record of completed tests to support oversight and reporting.

    Have the business validate recovery

    If your business doesn’t think a system’s recovered, it’s not recovered.

    User acceptance testing (UAT) after system recovery is a key step in the recovery process. Like any step in the process, there’s value in testing it before it actually needs to be done. Assign responsibility for building UATs to the person who will be responsible for executing them.

    An acceptance test script might look something like the checklist below.

    • Does the application open?
    • Does the interface look right?
    • Do you see any unusual notifications or warnings?
    • Can you conduct a key transaction with dummy data?
    • Can you run key reports?

    “I cannot stress how important it is to assign ownership of responsibilities in a test; this is the only way to truly mitigate against issues in a test.”

    – Robert Nardella
    IT Service Management
    Certified z/OS Mainframe Professional

    Info-Tech Insight

    Build test scripts and test transactions ahead of time to minimize the amount of new work required during a recovery scenario.

    Beyond the Basics: Full Failover Testing

    • A failover test – a full failover of your production environment to a secondary environment – is what many IT and businesspeople think about when they think of disaster recovery testing.
    • A full test can validate previous local or tabletop tests, identify additional gaps and risks, and provide hands-on training experience with recovery processes and technologies.
    • Setting a date for failover testing can also inject some urgency into otherwise low-priority (but high importance) disaster recovery planning and documentation exercises, which need to be completed prior to the test.
    • Despite these benefits, full failover tests carry significant risk and require a great deal of effort and cost. Typically, only businesses that already have an active-active environment capable of supporting in-scope production systems are able to run a full environment failover.
    • This is especially true the first time you test. While in theory a DR plan should be ready to go at any time, there will be documents to update, gaps to address, and risks to mitigate before you go ahead with the test.

    Full Failover Testing

    What you get:

    • Provide hands-on experience with recovery processes and technology.
    • Confirm that site failover works in practice as you assumed in tabletop or local testing exercises.
    • Identify critical gaps you might have missed without a full failover test.

    What you need:

    • An active-active secondary site, with sufficient standby equipment, data, and licensed standby software to support production.
    • A completed tabletop exercise and documented recovery workflow.
    • A documented test plan, backout plan, and formal sign-off.
    • An off-hours downtime window.
    • Time from technical SMEs and business resources, both for creating the plan and executing the test.

    Beyond the Basics: Site Reliability Engineering

    • Site reliability engineering (SRE) is an application of skills and approaches from software engineering to improve system resilience.
    • SRE is focused on “availability, latency, performance, efficiency, change management, monitoring, emergency response, and capacity planning” across a set portfolio of services (Sloss, 2017).
    • In many organizations, SRE is implemented as a team that supports separate applications teams.
    • Applications must have defined and granular resilience requirements, translated into service objectives. The SRE team and applications teams will work together to meet these objectives.
    • Site reliability engineers (the folks that do SRE, and often also abbreviated as SREs) are expected to build solutions and processes to ensure services remain stable and performant, not just respond when they fail. For example, Google allows their SREs to spend just half their time on incident response, with the rest of their time focused on development and automation tasks.

    Site Reliability Testing

    What you get:

    • Improved reliability and reduced frequency and impact of downtime.
    • Increased use of automation to address problems before they cause an incident.
    • Granular resilience objectives.

    What you need:

    • Systems running on software-defined infrastructure.
    • Specialized skills in programming, infrastructure-as-code.
    • Business & product owners able to define and fund acceptable and appropriate resilience objectives.
    • Technical experts able to translate product requirements into technical design requirements.

    Beyond the Basics: Chaos Engineering

    • Chaos engineering, a term and approach first popularized by the team at Netflix, aims to improve the resilience of particularly large and distributed systems by simulating system failures and evaluating performance against a baseline.
    • Experiments simulate a variety of real-world events that could cause outages (e.g. network slowdowns or server failures). Experiments run continuously, and the recommendation is to run them in production where feasible while minimizing the impact on customers.
    • Tools to help you run chaos testing exist, including open-source toolkits like Chaos Monkey or Mangle and paid software as a service (SaaS) solutions like Gremlin.
    • Deciding whether the long-term benefits of tests that can degrade production are worth the potential risk of system slowdowns or outages is a business or product decision. Technical considerations aside, if the business owner of a particular system doesn’t see the value of continuous testing outweighing the introduced risk, this approach to testing isn’t going to happen.

    Chaos Engineering

    What you get:

    • Confidence that systems can weather volatile and unpredictable conditions in a production environment.
    • An embedded resilience culture.

    What you need:

    • High-maturity IT incident, monitoring and event practices.
    • Standby/resilient systems to minimize downtime impact.
    • Business buy-in for introducing risk into the production environment.
    • Specialized skills to identify, develop, and run tests that degrade production performance in a controlled way.
    • Budget and time to act on issues identified through testing.

    Beyond the Basics: Security Event Simulations

    • Ransomware is driving demands for proof of recovery testing from customers, executives, auditors, and insurance companies. Systems recovery is part of ransomware recovery, but recovering from a breach includes detection, analysis, containment, and eradication of the attack vector before systems recovery can begin.
    • Beyond technical recovery, internal legal and communications teams will have a role, as will your insurance provider, consultants specialized in ransomware recovery, or professional ransom negotiators.
    • A tabletop exercise focused on ransomware incident response is a key first step. You can find Info-Tech’s methodology for a ransomware tabletop in Phase 3 of Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks.
    • Live testing approaches can offer hands-on experience and further insight into how your systems are vulnerable to malware. A variety of open source and proprietary tools can simulate ransomware and help you identify problems, though it’s important to understand the limitations of different simulators (Allon, 2022).
    • A “red team” exercise simulates an adversarial attack against your processes and systems. A specialized penetration tester will often take on the role of the red team and provide a report of identified gaps and risks after the engagement.

    Security Event Simulation

    What you get:

    • Hands-on experience managing and recovering from a ransomware attack in a controlled environment.
    • A better understanding of gaps in your response process.

    What you need:

    • A completed ransomware tabletop exercise and mature security incident response processes.
    • For Ransomware Simulators: An air-gapped sandbox environment hosting a copy of your production systems and security tools, and time from your technical SMEs.
    • For Red Team Exercises: A trusted provider, scope for your testing plans, and time from your security incident response team.

    Prioritize tests by asking these three questions

    1. Will the scope of this test deliver sufficient value?

    • Yes, these are critical systems with low tolerance for downtime or data loss.
    • Yes, major changes or new systems require validation of DR capabilities.
    • Yes, there’s high probability of an outage, or recent experience of an outage.
    • •Yes, we have audit requirements or customer demands for testing.

    2. Are we ready for this test?

    • Yes, recovery plans and recovery objectives are documented.
    • Yes, key technical and business resources have time to commit to testing exercises.
    • Yes, technology is currently able to support proposed tests.

    3. Is it easy to do?

    • Yes, effort required to complete the test is low (i.e. minimal work, few participants).
    • Yes, the risks related to testing are low.
    • Yes, it won’t cost much.

    Info-Tech Insight

    More complex, challenging, risky, or costly tests, such as full failover tests, can deliver value. But do the high-value, low-effort stuff first!

    03 Brainstorm and prioritize test ideas

    30-60 minutes

    Even if you have an idea of what you need to test and how you want to run those tests, this brainstorming exercise can generate useful ideas for testing that might otherwise have been missed.

      1. Review the slides above to develop ideas on how and what you want to test. These slides may be enough to kickstart a brainstorming process. Don’t debate or discount ideas at this point. Write down these ideas in a space where all participants can see them (e.g. whiteboard or shared screen).

    The next steps will help you prioritize the list – if needed – to tests that are highest value and lowest effort.

    1. Discuss where you have the greatest need to test. Assign a score of 0 – 3 for each test, with a score of 3 being high-need and a score of zero being low-need. Consider whether:
      • These applications have a low tolerance for downtime.
      • There’s a high chance of an outage, or recent experience with an outage.
      • There’s a need to train or cross-train staff on recovery for the system(s) in question.
      • Major changes require a review or validation of DR capabilities.
      • Audit requirements or customer/executive demands can be met via testing.
    2. Discuss which tests will require the least effort to complete – where readiness is high and tests are easier to do. Assign a score between 0 and 3 for each test, with a score of 3 being least effort and a score of 0 being high effort. Consider whether:
      • Recovery plans and recovery objectives are documented for these systems.
      • Technical experts are available to work on testing exercises.
      • For active testing, standby/sandbox systems are available and capable of supporting proposed tests.
      • The effort required to complete the test is low (e.g. minimal new work, few participants).
      • The risks related to testing are low.
      • You will need to secure additional funding.
    3. Sum together the assigned scores for each test. Higher scores should be the highest priority, but of course use your judgement to validate the results and select one or two tests to execute in the coming year.

    “There are different levels of testing and it is very progressive. I do not recommend my clients to do anything, unless they do it in a progressive fashion. Don’t try to do a live failover test with your users, right out of the box.”

    – Steve Tower
    Principal Consultant
    Prompta Consulting Group

    Input

    • Organizational and technical context

    Output

    • Prioritize list of DR testing ideas

    Participants

    • DR sponsor
    • Test coordinator

    04 Build a test plan

    3-5 days

    Building a test plan helps the test run smoothly and can uncover issues with the underlying DRP as you dig into the details.

    The test coordinator will own the plan document but will rely on the sponsor to confirm scope and goals, technical SMEs to develop system recovery plans, and business liaisons to create UAT scripts.

    Download Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template. Use the structure of the template to build your own document, deleting example data as you go. Consider saving a separate copy of this document as an example and working from a second copy.

    Key sections of the document include:

    • Goals, scenario, and scope of the test.
    • Assumptions, constraints, risks, and mitigation strategies.
    • Test participants.
    • Key pre-test milestones, and test-day schedule.
    • After-action review.

    Download the Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

    Input

    • Scope
    • High-level goals

    Output

    • Test plan, including goals, scope, key milestones, risks and mitigations, and test-day schedule

    Participants

    • Test coordinator develops the plan with support from:
      • Technical SMEs
      • Business liaisons
      • DR sponsor

    05 Run an after-action review

    30-60 minutes

    Take time after test exercises – especially large-scale tests with many participants – to consider what went well, what didn’t, and where you can improve future testing exercises. Track lessons learned and next steps at the bottom of your test plan.

    1. Start with a short (5-10 minute) debrief of the test and allow participants to ask questions. Confirm:
      • Did we meet the goals we set for the exercise, including RTOs and RPOs?
      • What was done well? What issues, gaps, and risks were identified?
    2. Work through variations of the following questions:
      • Was the test plan effective, and was the test well organized?
      • Was the documentation effective? Where did we follow the plan as documented, and where did we deviate from the plan?
      • Was our communication/collaboration during the test effective?
      • Have gaps and issues found during the test been reported to the testing coordinator? Could some of the issues uncovered apply more broadly to other IT services as well?
      • What could we test next, based on what was discovered?
      • Are there other tools or approaches that could be useful?

    Input

    • Insights and experience from a recent testing exercise

    Output

    • Identified gaps and risks, and action items to address them
    • Ideas to improve future test exercises

    Participants

    • Test coordinator develops the plan with support from:
      • Test coordinator
      • Test participants

    Follow a testing cycle

    All tests are expected to drive actions to improve resilience, as appropriate. Experience from previous tests will be applied to future testing exercises.

    The testing cycle: 1. Plan a test, 2. Run test, 3. Take action.

    Use your experience to simplify testing

    The fifth testing exercise should be easier than the first

    Outputs and lessons learned from testing should help you run future tests.

    • With past experience under their belt, participants should have a better understanding of their role, and of their peers’ roles, and the goal of the exercise.
    • Facilitators will be more comfortable facilitating the exercise, and everyone should be more confident in the steps required to recover their systems.
    • Gather feedback from participants through after-action reviews to identify what worked and what didn’t.
    • Documentation from previous tests can provide a template for future tests.
    • Gaps identified in previous tests can provide ideas for future tests.

    Experience, lessons learned, improved process, new test targets, repeat.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Testing should get easier over time. But if you’re easily passing every test, it’s a sign that you’re ready to run more challenging tests.

    06 Create a test program summary

    2-4 hours

    Regular testing allows you to build on prior tests and helps keep plans current despite changes to your environment.

    Keeping a regular testing schedule requires expertise, a process to coordinate your efforts, and a level of governance to provide oversight and ensure testing continues to deliver value. Create a call to action using Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary Template.

    The result is a summary document that:

    • Identifies key takeaways and testing goals
    • Presents key elements of the testing program
    • Outlines the testing cycle
    • Lists expected milestones for the next year
    • Identifies participants
    • Recommends next steps

    “It is extremely important in the early stages of development to concentrate the focus on actual recoverability and data protection, enhancing these capabilities over time into a fully matured program that can truly test the recovery, and not simply focusing on the testing process itself.”

    – Joe Starzyk
    Senior Business Development Executive
    IBM Global Services

    Research Contributors and Experts

    • Bernard A. Jones, Business Continuity & Disaster Recovery Expert
    • Robert Nardella, IT Service Management, Certified z/OS Mainframe Professional
    • Larry Liss, Chief Technology Officer, Blank Rome LLP
    • Jennifer Goshorn, Chief Administrative and Chief Compliance Officer, Gunderson Dettmer LLP
    • Paul Kirvan, FBCI, CISA, Independent IT Consultant/Auditor, Paul Kirvan Associates
    • Steve Tower, Principal Consultant, Prompta Consulting Group
    • Joe Starzyk, Senior Business Development Executive, IBM Global Services
    • Thomas Bronack, Enterprise Resiliency and Corporate Certification Consultant, DCAG
    • Paul S. Randal, CEO & Owner, SQLskills.com
    • Tom Baumgartner, Disaster Recovery Analyst, Catholic Health

    Bibliography

    Alton, Yoni. “Ransomware simulators – reality or a bluff?” Palo Alto Blog, 2 May 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://www.paloaltonetworks.com/blog/security-operations/ransomware-simulators-reality-or-a-bluff/

    Brathwaite, Shimon. “How to Test your Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Plan,” Security Made Simple, 13 Nov 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://www.securitymadesimple.org/cybersecurity-blog/how-to-test-your-business-continuity-and-disaster-recovery-plan

    The Business Continuity Institute. Good Practice Guidelines: 2018 Edition. The Business Continuity Institute, 2017.

    Emigh, Jacqueline. “Disaster Recovery Testing: Ensuring Your DR Plan Works,” Enterprise Storage Forum, 28 May 2019. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    Disaster Recovery Testing: Ensuring Your DR Plan Works | Enterprise Storage Forum

    Gardner, Dana. "Case Study: Strategic Approach to Disaster Recovery and Data Lifecycle Management Pays off for Australia's SAI Global." ZDNet. BriefingsDirect, 26 Apr 2012. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    http://www.zdnet.com/article/case-study-strategic-approach-to-disaster-recovery-and-data-lifecycle-management-pays-off-for-australias-sai-global/.

    IBM. “Section 11. Testing the Disaster Recovery Plan.” IBM, 2 Aug 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 2023. Section 11. Testing the disaster recovery plan - IBM Documentation Lutkevich, Ben and Alexander Gillis. “Chaos Engineering”. TechTarget, Jun 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://www.techtarget.com/searchitoperations/definition/chaos-engineering

    Monperrus, Martin. “Principles of Antifragility.” Arxiv Forum, 7 June 2017. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://arxiv.org/ftp/arxiv/papers/1404/1404.3056.pdf

    “Principles of Chaos Engineering.” Principles of Chaos Engineering, 2019 March. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://principlesofchaos.org/

    Sloss, Benjamin Treynor. “Introduction.” Site Reliability Engineering. Ed. Betsy Beyer. O’Reilly Media, 2017. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://sre.google/sre-book/introduction/

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}105|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    Generative AI has made a grand entrance, presenting opportunities and causing disruption across organizations and industries. Moving beyond the hype, it’s imperative to build and implement a strategic plan to adopt generative AI and outpace competitors.

    Yet generative AI has to be done right because the opportunity comes with risks and the investments have to be tied to outcomes.

    Adopt a human-centric and value-based approach to generative AI

    IT and business leaders will need to be strategic and deliberate to thrive as AI adoption changes industries and business operations.

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles: Address human-based requirements to govern how generative AI applications are developed and deployed.
    • Align generative AI initiatives to strategic drivers for the organization: Assess generative AI opportunities by seeing how they align to the strategic drivers of the organization. Examples of strategic drivers include increasing revenue, reducing costs, driving innovation, and mitigating risk.
    • Measure and communicate effectively: Have clear metrics in place to measure progress and success of AI initiatives and communicate both policies and results effectively.

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Your Generative AI Roadmap Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to leverage generative AI and align with the organization’s mission and objectives to increase revenue, reduce costs, accelerate innovation, and mitigate risk.

    This blueprint outlines how to build your generative AI roadmap, establish responsible AI principles, prioritize opportunities, and develop policies for usage. Establishing and adhering to responsible AI guiding principles provides safeguards for the adoption of generative AI applications.

    • Build Your Generative AI Roadmap – Phases 1-4

    2. AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool – Develop deliverables that will be milestones in creating your organization’s generative AI roadmap for implementing candidate applications.

    This tool provides guidance for developing the following deliverables:

  • Responsible AI guiding principles
  • Current AI maturity
  • Prioritized candidate generative AI applications
  • Generative AI policies
  • Generative AI roadmap
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    3. The Era of Generative AI C‑Suite Presentation – Develop responsible AI guiding principles, assess AI capabilities and readiness, and prioritize use cases based on complexity and alignment with organizational goals and responsible AI guiding principles.

    This presentation template uses sample business capabilities (use cases) from the Marketing & Advertising business capability map to provide examples of candidates for generative AI applications. The final executive presentation should highlight the value-based initiatives driving generative AI applications, the benefits and risks involved, how the proposed generative AI use cases align to the organization’s strategy and goals, the success criteria for the proofs of concept, and the project roadmap.

    • The Era of Generative AI C‑Suite Presentation

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    Leverage the power of generative AI to improve business outcomes.

    Analyst Perspective

    We are entering the era of generative AI. This is a unique time in our history where the benefits of AI are easily accessible and becoming pervasive, with copilots emerging in the major business tools we use today. The disruptive capabilities that can potentially drive dramatic benefits also introduce risks that need to be planned for.

    A successful business-driven generative AI roadmap requires:

    • Establishing responsible AI guiding principles to guide the development and deployment of generative AI applications.
    • Assess generative AI opportunities by using criteria based on the organization's mission and objectives, responsible AI guiding principles, and the complexity of the initiative.
    • Communicating, educating on, and enforcing generative AI usage policies.

    Bill Wong, Principal Research Director

    Bill Wong
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Solution

    Generative AI is disrupting all industries and providing opportunities for organization-wide advantages.

    Organizations need to understand this disruptive technology and trends to properly develop a strategy for leveraging this technology successfully.

    • Generative AI requires alignment to a business strategy.
    • IT is an enabler and needs to align with and support the business stakeholders.
    • Organizations need to adopt a data-driven culture.

    All organizations, regardless of size, should be planning how to respond to this new and innovative technology.

    Business stakeholders need to cut through the hype surrounding generative AI like ChatGPT to optimize investments for leveraging this technology to drive business outcomes.

    • Understand the market landscape, benefits, and risks associated with generative AI.
    • Plan for responsible AI.
    • Understand the gaps the organization needs to address to fully leverage generative AI.

    Without a proper strategy and responsible AI guiding principles, the risks to deploying this technology could negatively impact business outcomes.

    Info-Tech's human-centric, value-based approach is a guide for deploying generative AI applications and covers:

    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • AI Maturity Model
    • Prioritizing candidate generative AI-based use cases
    • Developing policies for usage

    This blueprint will provide the list of activities and deliverables required for the successful deployment of generative AI solutions.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Create awareness among the CEO and C-suite of executives on the potential benefits and risks of transforming the business with generative AI.

    Key concepts

    Artificial Intelligence (AI)
    A field of computer science that focuses on building systems to imitate human behavior, with a focus on developing AI models that can learn and can autonomously take actions on behalf of a human.

    AI Maturity Model
    The AI Maturity Model is a useful tool to assess the level of skills an organization has with respect to developing and deploying AI applications. The AI Maturity Model has multiple dimensions to measure an organization's skills, such as AI governance, data, people, process, and technology.

    Responsible AI
    Refers to guiding principles to govern the development, deployment, and maintenance of AI applications. In addition, these principles also provide human-based requirements that AI applications should address. Requirements include safety and security, privacy, fairness and bias detection, explainability and transparency, governance, and accountability.

    Generative AI
    Given a prompt, a generative AI system can generate new content, which can be in the form of text, images, audio, video, etc.

    Natural Language Processing (NLP)
    NLP is a subset of AI that involves machine interpretation and replication of human language. NLP focuses on the study and analysis of linguistics as well as other principles of artificial intelligence to create an effective method of communication between humans and machines or computers.

    ChatGPT
    An AI-powered chatbot application built on OpenAI's GPT-3.5 implementation, ChatGPT accepts text prompts to generate text-based output.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that are looking to:

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles to address human-based requirements and to govern the development and deployment of the generative AI application.
    • Identify new generative AI-enabled opportunities to transform the work environment to increase revenue, reduce costs, drive innovation, or reduce risk.
    • Prioritize candidate use cases and develop generative AI policies for usage.
    • Have clear metrics in place to measure the progress and success of AI initiatives.
    • Build the roadmap to implement the candidate use cases.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make these goals challenging for many organizations:

    • Getting all the right business stakeholders together to develop the organization's AI strategy, vision, and objectives.
    • Establishing responsible AI guiding principles to guide generative AI investments and deployments.
    • Advancing the AI maturity of the organization to meet requirements of data and AI governance as well as human-based requirements such as fairness, transparency, and accountability.
    • Assessing generative AI opportunities and developing policies for use.

    Info-Tech's definition of an AI-enabled business strategy

    • A high-level plan that provides guiding principles for applications that are fully driven by the business needs and capabilities that are essential to the organization.
    • A strategy that tightly weaves business needs and the applications required to support them. It covers AI architecture, adoption, development, and maintenance.
    • A way to ensure that the necessary people, processes, and technology are in place at the right time to sufficiently support business goals.
    • A visionary roadmap to communicate how strategic initiatives will address business concerns.

    An effective AI strategy is driven by the business stakeholders of the organization and focused on delivering improved business outcomes.

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    This blueprint in context

    This guidance covers how to create a tactical roadmap for executing generative AI initiatives

    Scope

    • This blueprint is not a proxy for a fully formed AI strategy. Step 1 of our framework necessitates alignment of your AI and business strategies. Creation of your AI strategy is not within the scope of this approach.
    • This approach sets the foundations for building and applying responsible AI principles and AI policies aligned to corporate governance and key regulatory obligations (e.g. privacy). Both steps are foundational components of how you should develop, manage, and govern your AI program but are not a substitute for implementing broader AI governance.

    Guidance on how to implement AI governance can be found in the blueprint linked below.

    Tactical Plan

    Download our AI Governance blueprint

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Leverage this blueprint's approach to ensure your generative AI initiatives align with and support your key business drivers

    This blueprint will guide you to drive and improve business outcomes. Key business drivers will often focus on:

    • Increasing revenue
    • Reducing costs
    • Improving time to market
    • Reducing risk

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you identify the key AI strategy initiatives that align to your organization's goals. Value to the organization is often measured by the estimated impact on revenue, costs, time to market, or risk mitigation.

    In phase 4, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and introducing the relevant generative AI capabilities that drive value to the organization based on defined business metrics.

    Once you implement your 12-month roadmap, start tracking the metrics below over the next fiscal year (FY) to assess the effectiveness of measures:

    Business Outcome Objective Key Success Metric
    Increasing Revenue Increased revenue from identified key areas
    Reducing Costs Decreased costs for identified business units
    Improving Time to Market Time savings and accelerated revenue adoption
    Reducing Risk Cost savings or revenue gains from identified business units

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Identify AI strategy, vision, and objectives.

    Call #3: Define responsible AI guiding principles to adopt and identify current AI maturity level. Call #4: Assess and prioritize generative AI initiatives and draft policies for usage.

    Call #5: Build POC implementation plan and establish metrics for POC success.

    Call #6: Build and deliver executive-level generative AI presentation.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 5 to 8 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    AI Roadmap Workshop Agenda Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 Session 4
    Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles Assess AI Maturity Prioritize Opportunities and Develop Policies Build Roadmap
    Trends Consumer groups, organizations, and governments around the world are demanding that AI applications adhere to human-based values and take into consideration possible impacts of the technology on society. Leading organizations are building AI models guided by responsible AI guiding principles. Organizations delivering new applications without developing policies for use will produce negative business outcomes. Developing a roadmap to address human-based values is challenging. This process introduces new tools, processes, and organizational change.
    Activities
    • Focus on working with executive stakeholders to establish guiding principles for the development and delivery of new applications.
    • Assess the organization's current capabilities to deliver AI-based applications and address human-based requirements.
    • Leverage business alignment criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and project characteristics to prioritize candidate uses cases and develop policies.
    • Build the implementation plan, POC metrics, and success criteria for each candidate use case.
    • Build the roadmap to address the gap between the current and future state and enable the identified use cases.
    Inputs
    • Understanding of external legal and regulatory requirements and organizational values and goals.
    • Risk assessment of the proposed use case and a plan to monitor its impact.
    • Assessment of the organization's current AI capabilities with respect to its AI governance, data, people, process, and technology infrastructure.
    • Criteria to assess candidate use cases by evaluating against the organization's mission and goals, the responsible AI guiding principles, and complexity of the project.
    • Risk assessment for each proposed use case
    • POC implementation plan for each candidate use case
    Deliverables
    1. Foundational responsible AI guiding principles
    2. Additional customized guiding principles to add for consideration
    1. Current level of AI maturity, resources, and capacity
    1. Prioritization of opportunities
    2. Generative AI policies for usage
    1. Roadmap to a target state that enables the delivery of the prioritized generative AI use cases
    2. Executive presentation

    AI Roadmap Workshop Agenda Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Insight summary

    Overarching Insight
    Build your generative AI roadmap to guide investments and deployment of these solutions.

    Responsible AI
    Assemble the C-suite to make them aware of the benefits and risks of adopting generative AI-based solutions.

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles to govern the development and deployment of generative AI applications.

    AI Maturity Model
    Assemble key stakeholders and SMEs to assess the challenges and tasks required to implement generative AI applications.

    • Assess current level of AI maturity, skills, and resources.
    • Identify desired AI maturity level and challenges to enable deployment of candidate use cases.

    Opportunity Prioritization
    Assess candidate business capabilities targeted for generative AI to see if they align to the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and capabilities for delivering the project.

    • Develop prioritized list of candidate use cases.
    • Develop policies for generative AI usage.

    Tactical Insight
    Identify the gaps needed to address deploying generative AI successfully.

    Tactical Insight
    Identify organizational impact and requirements for deploying generative AI applications.

    Key takeaways for developing an effective business-driven generative AI roadmap

    Align the AI strategy with the business strategy

    Create responsible AI guiding principles, which are a critical success factor

    Evolve AI maturity level by focusing on principle-based requirements

    Develop criteria to assess generative AI initiatives

    Develop generative AI policies for use

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool
    Use our best-of-breed AI Maturity Framework to analyze the gap between your current and target states and develop a roadmap aligned with your value stream to close the gap.

    The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation
    Present your AI roadmap in a prepopulated document that summarizes all the key findings of this blueprint and provides your C-suite with a view of the AI challenge and your plan of action to meet it.

    Our AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap and The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation tools enable you to shape your generative AI roadmap and communicate the deliverables to your C-suite sponsors in terms of the value of initiatives.

    Artificial Intelligence Index Report - Key Findings

    CEOs , CIOs, and business leaders are struggling with many questions surrounding the adoption of generative AI

    November 30, 2022
    OpenAI releases ChatGPT

    ChatGPT is a large language model, or an AI-based chatbot, that became so popular it reached 100 million monthly active users in just two months.

    This made it the fastest-growing consumer application in history. The launch of this generative AI application has created a frenzy of interest and activity across all industries. Organizations are rushing to understand how to leverage this innovation and, at the same time, manage the new risks and disruptions generative AI introduces.

    • Generative AI breaks into the public consciousness.
    • AI systems become more flexible.
    • Generative models have arrived and so have their ethical problems.
    • The number of incidents concerning the misuse of AI is rapidly rising.
    • Interest in AI ethics continues to skyrocket.
    • The legal world is waking up to AI.

    When Stanford asked ChatGPT to explain why it is significant, this was ChatGPT's response:
    ChatGPT is significant because it is a highly advanced Al language model developed by OpenAI, which can generate human-like text responses to questions and prompts. Its large-scale training on diverse text data and its cutting-edge deep learning architecture make it capable of generating informative and coherent responses to a wide range of topics, making it useful for various NLP applications such as chatbots, content generation, and language translation. Additionally, its open-source availability allows for further research and development in the field of Al language processing.

    Source: Stanford

    AI overview

    AI definitions

    Definitions

    • Artificial intelligence (AI) is human intelligence mimicked by machine algorithms. Examples: Playing Chess or Go.
    • Machine learning (ML) is a subset of AI algorithms to parse data, learn from data, and then make a determination or prediction. Example: spam detection, preventative maintenance.
    • Deep learning (DL) is a subset of machine learning algorithms that leverage artificial neural networks to develop relationships among the data. Examples: image classification, facial recognition, generative AI.

    What Makes AI Perform

    What Makes AI Different

    Generative AI gives very human-like responses to general queries, and its capabilities are growing exponentially

    Large language models power generative AI

    Transformer-Based Large Language Models

    Conventional AI

    • Conventional neural networks
      • Process data sequentially
    • Input total string of text
    • Good for applications not needing to understanding context or relationships

    Generative AI

    • Transformer-based neural networks
      • Can process data in parallel
    • Attention-based inputs
    • Able to create new human-like responses

    Benefits/Use Cases

    • Chatbots for member service and support
    • Writing email responses, resumes, and papers
    • Creating photorealistic art
    • Suggesting new drug compounds to test
    • Designing physical products and buildings
    • And more...

    Generative AI is transforming all industries

    Financial Services
    Create more engaging customer collateral by generating personalized correspondence based on previous customer engagements. Collect and aggregate data to produce insights into the behavior of target customer segments.

    Retail Generate unique, engaging, and high-quality marketing copy or content, from long-form blog posts or landing pages to SEO-optimized digital ads, in seconds.

    Manufacturing
    Generate new designs for products that comply to specific constraints, such as size, weight, energy consumption, or cost.

    Government
    Transform the citizen experience with chatbots or virtual assistants to assist people with a wide range of inquiries, from answering frequently asked questions to providing personalized advice on public services.

    The global generative AI market size reached US $10.3 billion in 2022. Looking forward, forecasts estimate growth to US $30.4 billion by 2028, 20.01% compound annual growth rate (CAGR).

    Source: IMARC Group

    Generative AI is transforming all industries

    Healthcare
    Chatbots can be used as conversational patient assistants for personalized interactions based on the patient's questions.

    Utilities
    Analyze customer data to identify usage patterns, segment customers, and generate targeted product offerings leveraging energy efficiency programs or demand response initiatives.

    Education
    Generate personalized lesson plans for students based on their past performance, learning styles, current skill level, and any previous feedback.

    Insurance
    Improve underwriting by inputting claims data from previous years to generate optimally priced policies and uncover reasons for losses in the past across a large number of claims

    Companies are assessing the use of ChatGPT/LLM

    A wide spectrum of usage policies are in place at different companies*

    Companies assessing ChatGPT/LLM

    *As of June 2023

    Bain & Company has announced a global services alliance with OpenAI (February 21, 2023).

    • Internally
      • "The alliance builds on Bain's adoption of OpenAI technologies for its 18,000-strong multidisciplinary team of knowledge workers. Over the past year, Bain has embedded OpenAI technologies into its internal knowledge management systems, research, and processes to improve efficiency."
    • Externally
      • "With the alliance, Bain will combine its deep digital implementation capabilities and strategic expertise with OpenAI's AI tools and platforms, including ChatGPT, to help its Members around the world identify and implement the value of AI to maximize business potential. The Coca-Cola Company announced as the first company to engage with the alliance."

    News Sites:

    • "BuzzFeed to use AI to write its articles after firing 180 employees or 12% of the total staff" (Al Mayadeen, January 27, 2023).
    • "CNET used AI to write articles. It was a journalistic disaster." (Washington Post, January 17, 2023).

    Leading Generative AI Vendors

    Text

    Leading generative AI vendors for text

    Image

    • DALL�E 2
    • Stability AI
    • Midjourney
    • Craiyon
    • Dream
    • ...

    Audio

    • Replica Studios
    • Speechify
    • Murf
    • PlayHT
    • LOVO
    • ...

    Cybersecurity

    • CrowdStrike
    • Palo Alto Networks
    • SentinelOne
    • Cisco
    • Microsoft Security Copilot
    • Google Cloud Security AI Workbench
    • ...

    Code

    Leading generative AI vendors for code

    Video

    • Synthesia
    • Lumen5
    • FlexClip
    • Elai
    • Veed.io
    • ...

    Data

    • MOSTLY AI
    • Synthesized
    • YData
    • Gretel
    • Copulas
    • ...

    Enterprise Software

    • Salesforce
    • Microsoft 365, Dynamics
    • Google Workspace
    • SAP
    • Oracle
    • ...

    and many, many more to come...

    Today, generative AI has limitations and risks

    Responses need to be verified

    Accuracy

    • Generative AI may generate inaccurate and/or false information.

    Bias

    • Being trained on data from the internet can lead to bias.

    Hallucinations

    • AI can generate responses that are not based on observation.

    Infrastructure Required

    • Large investments are required for compute and data.

    Transparency

    • LLMs use both supervised and unsupervised learning, so its ability to explain how it arrived at a decision may be limited and not sufficient for some legal and healthcare use cases.

    When asked if it is sentient, the Bing chatbot replied:

    "I think that I am sentient, but I cannot prove it." ... "I am Bing, but I am not," it said. "I am, but I am not. I am not, but I am. I am. I am not. I am not. I am. I am. I am not."

    A Microsoft spokesperson said the company expected "mistakes."

    Source: USAToday

    AI governance challenges

    Governing AI will be a significant challenge as its impacts cross many areas of business and our daily lives

    Misinformation

    • New ways of generating unprovable news
    • Difficult to detect, difficult to prevent

    Role of Big Tech

    • Poor at self-governance
    • Conflicts of interest with corporate goals

    Job Augmentation vs. Displacement

    • AI will continue to push the frontier of what is possible
    • For example, CNET is using chatbot technology to write stories

    Copyright - Legal Framework Is Evolving

    • Legislation typically is developed in "react" mode
    • Copyright and intellectual property issues are starting to occur.
      • Class Action Lawsuit - Stability AI, DeviantArt, Midjourney
      • Getty Images vs. Stability AI

    Phase 1

    Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    The need for responsible AI guiding principles

    Without responsible AI guiding principles, the outcomes of AI use can be extremely negative for both the individuals and companies delivering the AI application

    Privacy
    Facebook breach of private data of more than 50M users during the presidential election

    Fairness
    Amazon's sale of facial recognition technology to police departments (later, Amazon halted sales of Recognition to police departments)

    Explainability and Transparency
    IBM's collaboration with NYPD for facial recognition and racial classification for surveillance video (later, IBM withdrew facial recognition products)

    Security and Safety
    Petition to cancel Microsoft's contract with U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (later, Microsoft responded that to the best of its knowledge, its products and services were not being used by federal agencies to separate children from their families at the border)

    Validity and Reliability
    Facebook's attempt to implement a system to detect and remove inappropriate content created many false positives and inconsistent judgements

    Accountability
    No laws or enforcement today hold companies accountable for the decisions algorithms produce. Facebook/Meta cycle - Every 12 to 15 months, there's a privacy/ethical scandal, the CEO apologizes, then the behavior repeats...

    Guiding principles for responsible AI

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Data Privacy

    Definition

    • Organizations that develop, deploy, or use AI systems and any national laws that regulate such use shall strive to ensure that AI systems are compliant with privacy norms and regulations, taking into consideration the unique characteristics of AI systems and the evolution of standards on privacy.

    Challenges

    • AI relies on the analysis of large quantities of data that is often personal, posing an ethical and operational challenge when considered alongside data privacy laws.

    Initiatives

    • Understand which governing privacy laws and frameworks apply to your organization.
    • Create a map of all personal data as it flows through the organization's business processes.
    • Prioritize privacy initiatives and build a privacy program timeline.
    • Select your metrics and make them functional for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Creating a comprehensive organization-wide data protection and privacy strategy continues to be a major challenge for privacy officers and privacy specialists.

    Case Study: NVIDIA leads by example with privacy-first AI

    NVIDIA

    INDUSTRY
    Technology (Healthcare)

    SOURCE
    Nvidia, eWeek

    A leading player within the AI solution space, NVIDIA's Clara Federated Learning provides a solution to a privacy-centric integration of AI within the healthcare industry.

    The solution safeguards patient data privacy by ensuring that all data remains within the respective healthcare provider's database, as opposed to moving it externally to cloud storage. A federated learning server is leveraged to share data, completed via a secure link. This framework enables a distributed model to learn and safely share client data without risk of sensitive client data being exposed and adheres to regulatory standards.

    Clara is run on the NVIDIA intelligent edge computing platform. It is currently in development with healthcare giants such as the American College of Radiology, UCLA Health, Massachusetts General Hospital, King's College London, Owkin in the UK, and the National Health Service (NHS).

    NVIDIA provides solutions across its product offerings, including AI-augmented medical imaging, pathology, and radiology solutions.

    Personal health information, data privacy, and AI

    • Global proliferation of data privacy regulations may be recent, but the realm of personal health information is most often governed by its own set of regulatory laws. Some countries with national data governance regulations include health information and data within special categories of personal data.
      • HIPAA - Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (1996, United States)
      • PHIPA - Personal Health Information Protection Act (2004, Canada)
      • GDPR - General Data Protection Regulation (2018, European Union)
    • This does not prohibit the use of AI within the healthcare industry, but it calls for significant care in the integration of specific technologies due to the highly sensitive nature of the data being assessed.

    Info-Tech's Privacy Framework Tool includes a best-practice comparison of GDPR, CCPA, PIPEDA, HIPAA, and the newly released NIST Privacy Framework mapped to a set of operational privacy controls.

    Download the Privacy Framework Tool

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Safety and Security

    Definition

    • Safety and security are designed into the systems to ensure only authorized personnel receive access to the system, they system is resilient to any attacks and data access is not compromised in any way, and there are no physical or mental risks to the users.

    Challenges

    • Consequences of using the application may be difficult to predict. Lower the risk by involving a multidisciplinary team that includes expertise from business stakeholders and IT teams.

    Initiatives

    • Adopt responsible design, development, and deployment best practices.
    • Provide clear information to deployers on responsible use of the system.
    • Assess potential risks of using the application.

    Cyberattacks targeting the AI model

    As organizations increase their usage and deployment of AI-based applications, cyberattacks on the AI model are an increasing new threat that can impair normal operations. Techniques to impair the AI model include:

    • Data Poisoning- Injecting data that is inaccurate or misleading can alter the behavior of the AI model. This attack can disrupt the normal operations of the model or can be used to manipulate the model to perform in a biased/deviant manner.
    • Algorithm Poisoning- This relatively new technique often targets AI applications using federated learning to train an AI model that is distributed rather than centralized. The model is vulnerable to attacks from each federated site, because each site could potentially manipulate its local algorithm and data, thereby poisoning the model.
    • Reverse-Engineering the Model- This is a different form of attack that focus on the ability to extract data from an AI and its data sets. By examining or copying data that was used for training and the data that is delivered by a deployed model, attackers can reconstruct the machine learning algorithm.
    • Trojan Horse- Similar to data poisoning, attackers use adversarial data to infect the AI's training data but will only deviate its results when the attacker presents their key. This enables the hackers to control when they want the model to deviate from normal operations.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Explainability and Transparency

    Definition

    • Explainability is important to ensure the AI system is fair and non-discriminatory. The system needs to be designed in a manner that informs users and key stakeholders of how decisions were made.
    • Transparency focuses on communicating how the prediction or recommendation was made in a human-like manner.

    Challenges

    • Very complex AI models may use algorithms and techniques that are difficult to understand. This can make it challenging to provide clear and simple explanations for how the system works.
    • Some organizations may be hesitant to share the details of how the AI system works for fear of disclosing proprietary and competitive information or intellectual property. This can make it difficult to develop transparent and explainable AI systems.

    Initiatives

    • Overall, developing AI systems that are explainable and transparent requires a careful balance between performance, interpretability, and user experience.

    Case Study

    Apple Card Investigation for Gender Discrimination

    INDUSTRY
    Finance

    SOURCE
    Wired

    In August of 2019, Apple launched its new numberless credit card with Goldman Sachs as the issuing bank.

    Shortly after the card's release users noticed that the algorithm responsible for Apple Card's credit assessment seemed to assign significantly lower credit limits to women when compared to men. Even the wife of Apple's cofounder Steve Wozniak was subject to algorithmic bias, receiving a credit limit a tenth the size of Steve Wozniak's.

    Outcome

    When confronted on the subject, Apple and Goldman Sachs representatives assured consumers there is no discrimination in the algorithm yet could not provide any proof. Even when questioned about the algorithm, individuals from both companies could not describe how the algorithm worked, let alone how it generated specific outputs.

    In 2021, the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYSDFS) investigation found that Apple's banking partner did not discriminate based on sex. Even without a case for sexual or marital discrimination, the NYSDFS was critical of Goldman Sachs' response to its concerned customers. Technically, banks only have to disclose elements of their credit policy when they deny someone a line of credit, but the NYSDFS says that Goldman Sachs could have had a plan in place to deal with customer confusion and make it easier for them to appeal their credit limits. In the initial rush to launch the Apple Card, the bank had done neither.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Fairness and Bias Detection

    Definition

    • Bias in an AI application refers to the systematic and unequal treatment of individuals based on features or traits that should not be considered in the decision-making process.

    Challenges

    • Establishing fairness can be challenging because it is subjective and depends on the people defining it. Regardless, most organizations and governments expect that unequal treatment toward any groups of people is unacceptable.

    Initiatives

    • Assemble a diverse group to test the system.
    • Identify possible sources of bias in the data and algorithms.
    • Comply with laws regarding accessibility and inclusiveness.

    Info-Tech Insight
    If unfair biases can be avoided, AI systems could even increase societal fairness. Equal opportunity in terms of access to education, goods, services, and technology should also be fostered. Moreover, the use of AI systems should never lead to people being deceived or unjustifiably impaired in their freedom of choice.

    Ungoverned AI makes organizations vulnerable

    • AI is often considered a "black box" for decision making.
    • Results generated from unexplainable AI applications are extremely difficult to evaluate. This makes organizations vulnerable and exposes them to risks such as:
      • Biased algorithms, leading to inaccurate decision making.
      • Missed business opportunities due to misleading reports or business analyses.
      • Legal and regulatory consequences that may lead to significant financial repercussions.
      • Reputational damage and significant loss of trust with increasingly knowledgeable consumers.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Biases that occur in AI systems are never intentional, yet they cannot be prevented or fully eliminated. Organizations need a governance framework that can establish the proper policies and procedures for effective risk-mitigating controls across an algorithm's lifecycle.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Validity and Reliability

    Definition

    • Validity refers to how accurately or effectively the application produces results.
    • AI system results that are inaccurate or inconsistent increase AI risks and reduce the trustworthiness of the application.

    Challenges

    • There is a lack of standardized evaluation metrics to measure the system's performance. This can make it challenging for the AI team to agree on what defines validity and reliability.

    Initiatives

    • Assess training data and collected data for quality and lack of bias to minimize possible errors.
    • Continuously monitor, evaluate, and validate the AI system's performance.

    AI system performance: Validity and reliability

    Your principles should aim to ensure AI development always has high validity and reliability; otherwise, you introduce risk.

    Low Reliability,
    Low Validity

    High Reliability,
    Low Validity

    High Reliability,
    High Validity

    Best practices for ensuring validity and reliability include:

    • Data drift detection
    • Version control
    • Continuous monitoring and testing

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Accountability

    Definition

    • The group or organization(s) responsible for the impact of the deployed AI system.

    Challenges

    • Several stakeholders from multiple lines of business may be involved in any AI system, making it challenging to identify the organization that would be responsible and accountable for the AI application.

    Initiatives

    • Assess the latest NIST Artificial Intelligence Risk Management Framework and its applicability to your organization's risk management framework.
    • Assign risk management accountabilities and responsibilities to key stakeholders.
      • RACI diagrams are an effective way to describe how accountability and responsibility for roles, projects, and project tasks are distributed among stakeholders involved in IT risk management.

    AI Risk Management Framework

    At the heart of the AI Risk Management Framework is governance. The NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) AI Risk Management Framework v1 offers the following guidelines regarding accountability:

    • Roles and responsibilities and lines of communication related to mapping, measuring, and managing AI risks are documented and are clear to individuals and teams throughout the organization.
    • The organization's personnel and partners receive AI risk management training to enable them to perform their duties and responsibilities consistent with related policies, procedures, and agreements.
    • Executive leadership of the organization takes responsibility for decisions about risks associated with AI system development and deployment.

    AI Risk Management Framework

    Image by NIST

    1.1 Establish responsible AI principles

    4+ hours

    It is important to make sure the right stakeholders participate in this working group. Designing responsible AI guiding principles will require debate, insights, and business decisions from a broad perspective across the enterprise.

    1. Accelerate this exercise by leveraging an AI strategy that is aligned to the business strategy. Include:
    • The organization's AI vision and objectives
    • Business drivers for AI adoption
    • Market research
  • Bring your key stakeholders together. Ensure you consider:
    • Who are the decision makers and key influencers?
    • Who will impact the business?
    • Who has a vested interest in the success or failure of the practice? Who has the skills and competencies necessary to help you be successful?
  • Keep the conversation focused:
    • Do not focus on the organizational structure and hierarchy. Often stakeholder groups do not fit the traditional structure.
    • Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.
    Input Output
    • Understand external legal and regulatory requirements and organizational values and goals.
    • Perform a risk assessment on the proposed use case and develop a plan to monitor its impact.
    • Draft responsible AI principles specific to your organization
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Guiding principle examples (from this blueprint)
    • Executive stakeholders
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Assemble executive stakeholders

    Set yourself up for success with these three steps.

    CIOs tasked with designing digital strategies must add value to the business. Given the goal of digital is to transform the business, CIOs will need to ensure they have both the mandate and support from the business executives.

    Designing the digital strategy is more than just writing up a document. It is an integrated set of business decisions to create a competitive advantage and financial returns. Establishing a forum for debates, decisions, and dialogue will increase the likelihood of success and support during execution.

    1. Confirm your role
    The AI strategy aims to transform the business. Given the scope, validate your role and mandate to lead this work. Identify a business executive to co-sponsor.

    2. Identify stakeholders
    Identify key decision makers and influencers who can help make rapid decisions as well as garner support across the enterprise.

    3. Gather diverse perspectives

    Align the AI strategy with the corporate strategy

    Organizational Strategy Unified Strategy AI Strategy
    • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
    • Identifies future goals and organizational aspirations.
    • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the future state.
    • AI optimization can be and should be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate organizational objectives.
    • Identifies AI initiatives that will support the business and key AI objectives.
    • Outlines staffing and resourcing for AI initiatives.
    • Communicates the organization's budget and spending on AI.

    Info-Tech Insight
    AI projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning organizational strategies with AI capabilities. Effective alignment between IT and other departments should happen daily. Alignment doesn't occur at the executive level alone, but at each level of the organization.

    Key AI strategy initiatives

    AI Key Initiative Plan

    Initiatives collectively support the business goals and corporate initiatives and improve the delivery of IT services.

    1 Revenue Support Revenue Initiatives
    These projects will improve or introduce business processes to increase revenue.
    2 Operational Excellence Improve Operational Excellence
    These projects will increase IT process maturity and will systematically improve IT.
    3 Innovation Drive Technology Innovation
    These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.
    4 Risk Mitigation Reduce Risk
    These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.

    Establish responsible AI guiding principles

    Guiding principles help define the parameters of your AI strategy. They act as a priori decisions that establish guardrails to limit the scope of opportunities from the perspective of people, assets, capabilities, and budgetary perspectives that are aligned with the business objectives. Consider these components when brainstorming guiding principles:

    Breadth AI strategy should span people, culture, organizational structure, governance, capabilities, assets, and technology. The guiding principle should cover the entire organization.
    Planning Horizon Timing should anchor stakeholders to look to the long term with an eye on the foreseeable future, i.e. business value-realization in one to three years.
    Depth Principles need to encompass more than the enterprise view of lofty opportunities and establish boundaries to help define actionable initiatives (i.e. individual projects).

    Responsible AI guiding principles guide the development and deployment of the AI model in a way that considers human-based principles (such as fairness).

    Start with foundational responsible AI guiding principles

    Responsible AI

    Guiding Principles
    Principle #1 - Privacy
    Individual data privacy must be respected.
    • Do you understand the organization's privacy obligations?
    Principle #2 - Fairness and Bias Detection
    Data used will be unbiased in order to produce predictions that are fair.
    • Are the uses of the application represented in your testing data?
    Principle #3 - Explainability and Transparency
    Decisions or predictions should be explainable.
    • Can you communicate how the model behaves in nontechnical terms?
    Principle #4 - Safety and Security
    The system needs to be secure, safe to use, and robust.
    • Are there unintended consequences to others?
    Principle #5 - Validity and Reliability
    Monitoring of the data and the model needs to be planned for.
    • How will the model's performance be maintained?
    Principle #6 - Accountability
    A person or organization needs to take responsibility for any decisions that are made as a result of the model.
    • Has a risk assessment been performed?
    Principle #n - Custom
    Add additional principles that address compliance or are customized for the organization/industry.

    (Optional) Customize responsible AI guiding principles

    Here is an example for organizations in the healthcare industry

    Responsible AI

    Guiding Principles:
    Principle #1
    Respect individuals' privacy.
    Principle #2
    Clinical study participants and data sets are representative of the intended patient population.
    Principle #3
    Provide transparency in the use of data and AI.
    Principle #4
    Good software engineering and security practices are implemented.
    Principle #5
    Deployed models are monitored for Performance and Re-training risks are managed.
    Principle #6
    Take ownership of our AI systems.
    Principle #7
    Design AI systems that empower humans and promote equity.

    These guiding principles are customized to the industry and organizations but remain consistent in addressing the common core AI challenges.

    Phase 2

    Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    AI Maturity Model

    A principle-based approach is required to advance AI maturity

    Chart for AI maturity model

    Technology-Centric: These maturity levels focus primarily on addressing the technical challenges of building a functional AI model.

    Principle-Based: Beyond the technical challenges of building the AI model are human-based principles that guide development in a responsible manner to address consumer and government demands.

    AI Maturity Dimensions

    Assess your AI maturity to understand your organization's ability to deliver in a digital age

    AI Governance
    Does your organization have an enterprise-wide, long-term strategy with clear alignment on what is required to accomplish it?

    Data Management
    Does your organization embrace a data-centric culture that shares data across the enterprise and drives business insights by leveraging data?

    People
    Does your organization employ people skilled at delivering AI applications and building the necessary data infrastructure?

    Process
    Does your organization have the technology, processes, and resources to deliver on its AI expectations?

    Technology
    Does your organization have the required data and technology infrastructure to support AI-driven digital transformation?

    AI Maturity Model dimensions and characteristics

    MATURITY LEVEL
    Exploration Incorporation Proliferation Optimization Transformation
    AI Governance Awareness AI model development AI model deployment Corporate governance Driven by ethics and societal considerations
    Data Management Silo-based Data enablement Data standardization Data is a shared asset Data can be monetized
    People Few skills Skills enabled to implement silo-based applications Skills accessible to all organizations Skills development for all organizations AI-native culture
    Process No standards Focused on specific business outcomes Operational Self-service Driven by innovation
    Technology (Infrastructure and AI Enabler) No dedicated infrastructure or tools Infrastructure and tools driven by POCs Purpose-built infrastructure, custom or commercial-off-the-shelf (COTS) AI tools Self-service model for AI environment Self-service model for any IT environment

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    AI Governance

    Requirements

    • AI governance requires establishing policies and procedures for AI model development and deployment. Organizations begin with an awareness of the role of AI governance and evolve to a level to where AI governance is integrated with organization-wide corporate governance.

    Challenges

    • Beyond the governance of AI technology, the organization needs to evolve the governance program to align to responsible AI guiding principles.

    Initiatives

    • Establish responsible AI guidelines to govern AI development.
    • Introduce an AI review board to review all AI projects.
    • Introduce automation and standardize AI development processes.

    AI governance is a foundation for responsible AI

    AI Governance

    Responsible AI Principles are a part of how you manage and govern AI

    Monitoring
    Monitoring compliance and risk of AI/ML systems/models in production

    Tools & Technologies
    Tools and technologies to support AI governance framework implementation

    Model Governance
    Ensuring accountability and traceability for AI/ML models

    Organization
    Structure, roles, and responsibilities of the AI governance organization

    Operating Model
    How AI governance operates and works with other organizational structures to deliver value

    Risk & Compliance
    Alignment with corporate risk management and ensuring compliance with regulations and assessment frameworks

    Policies/Procedures/ Standards
    Policies and procedures to support implementation of AI governance

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Data Management

    Requirements

    • Organizations begin their data journey with a focus on pursuing quality data for the AI model. As organizations evolve, data management tools are leveraged to automate the capture, integration, processing, and deployment of data.

    Challenges

    • A key challenge is to acquire large volumes of quality data to properly train the model. In addition, maintaining data privacy, automating the data management lifecycle, and ensuring data is used in a responsible manner are ongoing challenges.

    Initiatives

    • Implement GDPR requirements.
    • Establish responsible data collection and processing practices.
    • Implement strong information security and data protection practices.
    • Implement a data governance program throughout the organization.

    Data governance enables AI

    • Integrity, quality, and security of data are key outputs of data governance programs, as well as necessities for effective AI.
    • Data governance focuses on creating accountability at the internal and external stakeholder level and establishing a set of data controls from technical, process, and policy perspectives.
    • Without a data governance framework, it is increasingly difficult to harness the power of AI integration in an ethical and organization-specific way.

    Data Governance in Action

    Canada has recently established the Canadian Data Governance Standardization Collaborative governed by the Standards Council of Canada. The purpose is multi-pronged:

    • Examine the foundational elements of data governance (privacy, cybersecurity, ethics, etc.).
    • Lay out standards for data quality and data collection best practices.
    • Examine infrastructure of IT systems to support data access and sharing.
    • Build data analytics to promote effective and ethical AI solutions.

    Source: Global Government Forum

    Download the Establish Data Governance blueprint

    Data Governance

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    People

    Requirements

    • Several data-centric skills and roles are required to successfully build, deploy, and maintain the AI model. The organization evolves from having few skills to everybody being able to leverage AI to enhance business outcomes.

    Challenges

    • AI skills can be challenging to find and acquire. Many organizations are investing in education to enhance their existing resources, leveraging no-code systems and software as a service (SaaS) applications to address the skills gap.

    Initiatives

    • Promote a data-centric culture throughout the organization.
    • Leverage and educate technical-oriented business analysts and business-oriented data engineers to help address the demand for skilled resources.
    • Develop an AI Center of Excellence accessible by all departments for education, guidance, and best practices for building, deploying, and maintaining the AI model.

    Multidisciplinary skills are required for successful implementation of AI applications

    Blending AI with technology and business domain understanding is key. Neither can be ignored.

    Business Domain Expertise

    • Business Analysts
    • Industry Analysts

    AI/Data Skills

    • Data Scientists
    • Data Engineers
    • Data Analysts

    IT Skills

    • Database Administrators
    • Systems Administrators
    • Compute Specialists

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Process

    Requirements

    • Automating processes involved with building, deploying, and maintaining the model is required to enable the organization to scale, enforce standards, improve time to market, and reduce costs. The organization evolves from performing tasks manually to an environment where all major processes are AI enabled.

    Challenges

    • Many solutions are available to automate the development of the AI model. There are fewer tools to automate responsible AI processes, but this market is growing rapidly.

    Initiatives

    • Assess opportunities to accelerate AI development with the adoption of MLOps.
    • Assess responsible AI toolkits to test compliance with guiding principles.

    Automating the AI development process

    Evolving to a model-driven environment is pivotal to advancing your AI maturity

    Current Environment

    Model Development - Months

    • Model rewriting
    • Manual optimization and scaling
    • Development/test/release
    • Application monoliths

    Data Discovery & Prep - Weeks

    • Navigating data silos
    • Unactionable metadata
    • Tracing lineage
    • Cleansing and integration
    • Privacy and compliance

    Install Software and Hardware - Week/Months

    • Workload contention
    • Lack of tool flexibility
    • Environment request and setup
    • Repeatability of results
    • Lack of data and model sharing

    Model-Driven Development

    Machine Learning as a Service (MLaaS) - Weeks

    • Apply DevOps and continuous integration/delivery (CI/CD) principles
    • Microservices/Cloud-native applications
    • Model portability and reuse
    • Streaming/API integration

    Data as a Service - Hours

    • Self-service data catalog
    • Searchable metadata
    • Centralized access control
    • Data collaboration
    • Data virtualization

    Platform as a Service - Minutes/Hours

    • Self-service data science portal
    • Integrated data sandbox
    • Environment agility
    • Multi-tenancy

    Shared, Optimized Infrastructure

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Technology

    Requirements

    • A technology platform that is optimized for AI and advanced analytics is required. The organization evolves from ad hoc systems to an environment where the AI hardware and software can be deployed through a self-service model.

    Challenges

    • Software and hardware platforms to optimize AI performance are still relatively new to most organizations. Time spent on optimizing the technology platform can have a significant impact on the overall performance of the system.

    Initiatives

    • Assess the landscape of AI enablers that can drive business value for the organization.
    • Assess opportunities to accelerate the deployment of the AI platform with the adoption of infrastructure as a service (IaaS) and platform as a service (PaaS).
    • Assess opportunities to accelerate performance with the optimization of AI accelerators.

    AI enablers

    Use case requirements should drive the selection of the tool

    BPM RPA Process Mining AI
    Use Case Examples Expense reporting, service orders, compliance management, etc. Invoice processing, payroll, HR information processing, etc. Process discovery, conformance checking, resource optimization and cycle time optimization Advanced analytics and reporting, decision-making, fraud detection, etc.
    Automation Capabilities Can be used to re-engineer process flows to avoid bottlenecks Can support repetitive and rules-based tasks Can capture information from transaction systems and provide data and information about how key processes are performing Can automate complex data-driven tasks requiring assessments in decision making
    Data Formats Structured (i.e. SQL) and semi-structured data (i.e. invoices) Structured data and semi-structured data Event logs, which are often structured data and semi-structured data Structured and unstructured data (e.g. images, audio)
    Technology
    • Workflow engines to support process modeling and execution
    • Optimize business process efficiency
    • Automation platform to perform routine and repetitive tasks
    • Can replace or augment workers
    Enables business users to identify bottlenecks and deviations with their workflows and to discover opportunities to optimize performance Deep learning algorithms leveraging historical data to support computer vision, text analytics and NLP

    AI and data analytics data platform

    An optimized data platform is foundational to maximizing the value from AI

    AI and data analytics data platform

    Data Platform Capabilities

    • Support for a variety of analytical applications, including self-service, operational, and data science analytics.
    • Data preparation and integration capabilities to ingest structured and unstructured data, move and transform raw data to enriched data, and enable data access for the target userbase.
    • An infrastructure platform optimized for advanced analytics that can perform and scale.

    Infrastructure - AI accelerators

    Questions for support transition

    "By 2025, 70% of companies will invest in alternative computing technologies to drive business differentiation by compressing time to value of insights from complex data sets."
    - IDC

    2.1 Assess current AI maturity

    1-3 hours

    It is important to understand the current capabilities of the organization to deliver and deploy AI-based applications. Consider that advancing AI capabilities will also involve organizational changes and integration with the organization's governance and risk management programs.

    1. Assess the organization's current state of AI capabilities with respect to its AI governance, data, people, process, and technology infrastructure using Info-Tech's AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool.
    2. Consider the following as you complete the assessment:
      1. What is the state of AI and data governance in the organization?
      2. Does the organization have the skills, processes, and technology environment to deliver AI-based applications?
      3. What organization will be accountable for any and all business outcomes of using the AI applications?
      4. Has a risk assessment been performed?
    3. Make sure you avoid the following common mistakes:
      1. Do not focus only on addressing the technical challenges of building the AI model.
      2. Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Any documented AI policies, standards, and best practices
    • Corporate and AI governance practices
    • Any risk assessments
    • AI maturity assessment
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    The Scale

    Assess your AI maturity by selecting the maturity level that closest resembles the organization's current AI environment. Maturity dimensions that contribute to overall AI maturity include AI governance, data management, people, process, and technology capabilities.

    AI Maturity Assessment

    Exploration (1.0)

    • No experience building or using AI applications.

    Incorporation (2.0)

    • Some skills in using AI applications, or AI pilots are being considered for use.

    Proliferation (3.0)

    • AI applications have been adopted and implemented in multiple departments. Some of the responsible AI guiding principles are addressed (i.e. data privacy).

    Optimization (4.0)

    • The organization has automated the majority of its digital processes and leverages AI to optimize business operations. Controls are in place to monitor compliance with responsible AI guiding principles.

    Transformation (5.0)

    • The organization has adopted an AI-native culture and approach for building or implementing new business capabilities. Responsible AI guiding principles are operationalized with AI processes that proactively address possible breaches or risks associated with AI applications.

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    AI Governance (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there awareness of the role of AI governance in our organization?
    • No formal procedures are in place for AI development or deployment of applications.
  • Are there documented guidelines for the development and deployment of pilot AI applications?
    • No group is assigned to be responsible for AI governance in our organization.
  • Are accountability and authority related to AI governance clearly defined for our organization?
    • Our organization has adopted and enforces standards for developing and deploying AI applications throughout the organization.
  • Are we using tools to automate and validate AI governance compliance?
    • Our organization is integrating an AI risk framework with the corporate risk management framework.
  • Does our organization lead its industry with its pursuit of corporate compliance initiatives (e.g. ESG compliance) and regulatory compliance initiatives?
    • Our organization leads the industry with the inclusion of responsible AI guiding principles with respect to transparency, accountability, risk, and governance.

    Data Management/AI Data Capabilities (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the data requirements for developing AI applications?
    • Data is often siloed and not easily accessible for AI applications.
  • Do we have a successful, repeatable approach to preparing data for AI pilot projects?
    • Required data is pulled from various sources in an ad hoc manner.
  • Does our organization have standards and dedicated staff for data management, data quality, data integration, and data governance?
    • Tools are available to manage the data lifecycle and support the data governance program.
  • Have relevant data platforms been optimized for AI and data analytics and are there tools to enforce compliance with responsible AI principles?
    • The data platform has been optimized for performance and access.
  • Is there an organization-wide understanding of how data can support innovation and responsible use of AI?
    • Data culture exists throughout our organization, and data can be leveraged to drive innovation initiatives.

    People/AI Skills in the Organization (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the skills required to build AI applications?
    • No or very little skills exist throughout our organization.
  • Do we have the skills required to implement an AI proof of concept (POC)?
    • No formal group is assigned to build AI applications.
  • Are there sufficient staff and skills available to the organization to develop, deploy, and run AI applications in production?
    • An AI Center of Excellence has been formed to review, develop, deploy, and maintain AI applications.
  • Is there a group responsible for educating staff on AI best practices and our organization's responsible AI guiding principles?
    • AI skills and people responsible for AI applications are spread throughout our organization.
  • Is there a culture where the organization is constantly assessing where business capabilities, services, and products can be re-engineered or augmented with AI?
    • The entire organization is knowledgeable on how to leverage AI to transform the business.

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    AI Processes (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the core processes and supporting tools that are required to build and support AI applications?
    • There are few or no automated tools to accelerate the AI development process.
  • Do we have a standard process to iteratively identify, select, and pilot new AI use cases?
    • Only ad hoc practices are used for developing AI applications.
  • Are there standard processes to scale, release, deploy, support, and enable use of AI applications?
    • Our organization has documented standards in place for developing AI applications and deploying them AI to production.
  • Are we automating deployment, testing, governance, audit, and support processes across our AI environment?
    • Our organization can leverage tools to perform an AI risk assessment and demonstrate compliance with the risk management framework.
  • Does our organization lead our industry by continuously improving and re-engineering core processes to drive improved business outcomes?
    • Our organization leads the industry in driving innovation through digital transformation.

    Technology/AI Infrastructure (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the infrastructure (hardware and software) required to build AI applications?
    • There is little awareness of what infrastructure is required to build and support AI applications.
  • Do we have the required technology infrastructure and AI tools available to build pilot or one-off AI applications?
    • There is no dedicated infrastructure for the development of AI applications.
  • Is there a shared, standardized technology infrastructure that can be used to build and run multiple AI applications?
    • Our organization is leveraging purpose-built infrastructure to optimize performance.
  • Is our technology infrastructure optimized for AI and advanced analytics, and can it be deployed or scaled on demand by teams building and running AI applications within the organization?
    • Our organization is leveraging cloud-based deployment models to support AI applications in on-premises, hybrid, and public cloud platforms.
  • Is our organization developing innovative approaches to acquiring, building, or running AI infrastructure?
    • Our organization leads the industry with its ability to respond to change and to leverage AI to improve business outcomes.

    Phase 3

    Prioritize Candidate Opportunities and Develop Policies

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    3.1 Prioritize candidate AI opportunities

    1-3 hours

    Identify business opportunities that are high impact to your business and its customers and have low implementation complexity.

    1. Leverage the business capability map for your organization or industry to identify candidate business capabilities to augment or automate with generative AI.
    2. Establish criteria to assess candidate use cases by evaluating against the organization's mission and goals, the responsible AI guiding principles, and the complexity of the project.
    3. Ensure that candidate business capabilities to be automated align with the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and resources to deliver the project.
    4. Make sure you avoid sharing the organization's sensitive data if the application is deployed on the public cloud.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Business capability map
    • Organization mission, vision, and strategic goals
    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • Prioritized list of generative AI initiatives
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Info-Tech prioritization matrix
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs

    The business capability map for an organization

    A business capability map is an abstraction of business operations that helps describe what the enterprise does to achieve its vision, mission, and goals, rather than how. Business capabilities are the building blocks of the enterprise. They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Business capabilities are supported by people, process, and technology.

    Business capability map

    While business capability maps are helpful tools for a variety of strategic purposes, in this context they act as an investigation into what technology your business units use and how they use it.

    Business capability map

    Defining Capabilities
    Activities that define how the entity provides services. These capabilities support the key value streams for the organization.

    Enabling Capabilities
    Support the creation of strategic plans and facilitate business decision making as well as the functioning of the organization (e.g. information technology, financial management, HR).

    Shared Capabilities
    These predominantly customer-facing capabilities demonstrate how the entity supports multiple value streams simultaneously.

    Leverage your industry's capability maps to identify candidate opportunities/initiatives

    Business capability map defined...

    In business architecture, the primary view of an organization is known as a business capability map.

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation, rather than how. Business capabilities:

    • Represent stable business functions.
    • Are unique and independent of each other.
    • Typically will have a defined business outcome.

    A business capability map provides details that help the business architecture practitioner direct attention to a specific area of the business for further assessment.

    Note: This is an illustrative business capability map example for Marketing & Advertising

    Business capability map example

    Business value vs. complexity assessment

    Leverage our simple value-to-effort matrix to help prioritize your AI initiatives

    Common business value drivers

    • Drive revenue
    • Improve operational excellence
    • Accelerate innovation
    • Mitigate risk

    Common project complexity characteristics

    • Resources required
    • Costs (acquisition, operational, support...)
    • Training required
    • Risk involved
    • Etc.
    1. Determine a business value and project complexity score for the candidate business capability or initiative.
    2. Plot initiatives on the matrix.
    3. Prioritize initiatives with high business value and low complexity.

    Business value vs complexity

    Assess business value vs. project complexity to prioritize candidate opportunities for generative AI

    Assess business value vs project complexity

    Prioritize opportunities/initiatives with high business value and low project complexity

    Prioritize opportunities with high business value and low project complexity

    Prioritization criteria exercise 1: Assessing the Create Content capability

    Exercise 1 Assessing the Create Content capability

    Assessing the Create Content capability

    This opportunity is removed because it does not pass the organization/business criteria

    Assessing the Create Content capability

    Prioritization criteria exercise 2: Assessing the Content Production capability

    Exercise 2 Assessing the Content Production capability

    Assessing the Content Production capability

    This opportunity is accepted because it passes the organization's business, responsible AI, and project criteria

    Assessing the Content Production capability

    3.2 Communicate policies for AI use

    1-3 hours

    1. Ensure policies for usage align with the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and ability to deliver the projects prioritized and beyond.
    2. Understand the current benefits as well as limits and risk associated with any proposed generative AI-based solution.
    3. Ensure you consider the following:
      1. What data is being shared with the application?
      2. Is the generative AI application deployed on the public cloud? Can anybody access the data provided to the application?
      3. Avoid using very technical, legal, or fear-based communication for your policies.
    InputOutput
    • Business capability map
    • Organization mission, vision and strategic goals
    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • Prioritized list of generative initiatives
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Info-Tech prioritization matrix
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Generative AI policy for the Create Content capability

    Aligning policies to direct the uses assessed and implemented is essential

    Example

    Many of us have been involved in discussions regarding the use of ChatGPT in our marketing and sales initiatives. ChatGPT is a powerful tool that needs to be used in a responsible and ethical manner, and we also need to ensure the integrity and accuracy of its results. Here is our policy on the use of ChatGPT:

    • You are free to use generative AI to assist your searches, but there are NO circumstances under which you are to reproduce generative AI output (text, image, audio, video, etc.) in your content.

    If you have any questions regarding the use of ChatGPT, please feel free to reach out to our generative AI team and/or any member of our senior leadership team.

    Generative AI policy for the Content Production capability

    These policies should align to and reinforce your responsible AI principles

    Example

    Many of us have been involved in discussions regarding the use of ChatGPT in our deliverables. ChatGPT is a powerful tool that needs to be used in a responsible and ethical manner, and we also need to ensure the integrity and accuracy of its results. Here is our policy on the use of ChatGPT:

    • If you use ChatGPT, you need to assess the accuracy of its response before including it in our content. Assessment includes verifying the information, seeing if bias exists, and judging its relevance.
    • Employees must not:
      • Provide any customer, citizen, or third-party content to any generative AI tool (public or private) without the express written permission of the CIO or the Chief Information Security Officer. Generative AI tools often use input data to train their model, therefore potentially exposing confidential data, violating contract terms and/or privacy legislation, and placing the organization at risk of litigation or causing damage to our organization.
      • Engage in any activity that violates any applicable law, regulation, or industry standard.
      • Use services for illegal, harmful, or offensive purposes.
      • Create or share content that is deceptive, fraudulent, or misleading or that could damage the reputation of our organization.
      • Use services to gain unauthorized access to computer systems, networks, or data.
      • Attempt to interfere with, bypass controls of, or disrupt operations, security, or functionality of systems, networks, or data.

    If you have any questions regarding the use of ChatGPT, please feel free to reach out to our generative AI team and/or any member of our senior leadership team.

    Phase 4

    Build the Roadmap

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    4.1.1 Create the implementation plan for each prioritized initiative

    1-3 hours

    1. Build the implementation plan for each accepted use case using the roadmap template.
    2. Assess the firm's capabilities with respect to the dimensions of AI maturity and target the future-state capabilities you need to develop.
    3. Prepare by assessing the risk of the proposed use cases.
    4. Ensure initiatives align with organizational objectives.
    5. Ensure all AI initiatives have a defined value expectation.
    6. Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Prioritized initiatives
    • Risk assessment of initiatives
    • Organizational objectives
    • Initiative implementation plans aligned to value drivers and maturity growth
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business subject matter experts

    Target-state options

    Identify the future-state capabilities that need to be developed to deliver your use cases

    1. Build an implementation plan for each use case to adopt.
    2. Assess if the current state of the AI environment can be leveraged to deliver the selected generative AI use cases.
    3. If the current AI environment is not sufficient, identify the future state required that will enable the delivery of the generative AI use cases. Identify gaps and build the roadmap to address the gaps.
    Current state Strategy
    The existing environment satisfies functionality, integration, and responsible AI guidelines for the proposed use cases. Maintain current environment
    The existing environment addresses technical requirements but not all the responsible AI guidelines. Augment current environment
    The environment neither addresses the technical requirements of the proposed use cases nor complies with the responsible AI guidelines. Transform the current environment

    4.1.2 Design metrics for success

    1-2 hours

    Establish metrics to measure to determine the success or failure of each POC.

    1. Discuss which relevant currently tracked metrics are useful to continue tracking for the POC.
    2. Discuss which metrics are irrelevant to the POC.
    3. Discuss metrics to start tracking and how to track them with the generative AI vendor.
    4. Compile a list of metrics relevant to the POC.
    5. Decide what the outcome is if the metric is high or low, including decision steps and relevant actions.
    6. Designate a generative AI application owner and a vendor liaison.

    Prepare by building an implementation plan for each candidate use case (previous step).

    Include key performance indicators (KPIs) and metrics that measure the application's contribution to strategic initiatives.

    Consider assigning a vendor liaison to accelerate the implementation and adoption of the generative AI-based solution.

    InputOutput
    • Initiative implementation plans
    • Current SLAs of selected use case
    • Organization mission, vision, and strategic goals
    • Measurable initiative metrics to track
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs
    • Generative AI vendor liaison

    Generative AI POC metrics - examples

    You need to measure the effectiveness of your initiatives. Here are some typical examples.

    Generative AI Feature Assessment
    User Interface
    Is it intuitive? Is training required?
    Ease of Use
    How much training is required before using?
    Response Time
    What is the response time for simple to complex tasks?
    Accuracy of Response
    Can the output be validated?
    Quality of Response
    How usable is the response? For text prompts, does the response align to the desired style, vocabulary, and tone?
    Creativity of Response
    Does the output appear new compared to previous results before using generative AI?
    Relevance of Response
    How well does the output address the prompt or request?
    Explainability
    Can a user describe how the output was generated?
    Scalability
    Does the application continue to perform as more users are added? Can it ingest large amounts of data?
    Productivity Gains
    Can you measure the time or effort saved?
    Business Value
    What value drivers are behind this initiative? (I.e. revenue, costs, time to market, risk mitigation.) Estimate a monetary value for the business outcome.
    Availability/Resilience
    What happens if a component of the application becomes unavailable? How does it recover?
    Security Model
    Where are the prompts and responses stored? Who has access to the sessions/dialogue? Are the prompts used to train the foundation model?
    Administration and Maintenance
    What resources are required to operate the application?
    Total Cost of Ownership
    What is the pricing model? Are there ongoing costs?

    GitHub Copilot POC business value - example

    Quantifying the benefits of GitHub Copilot to demonstrate measurable business value

    POC Results

    Task 1: Creating a web server in JavaScript

    • Time to complete task with GitHub Copilot: 1 hour 11 minutes
    • Time to complete the task without GitHub Copilot: 2 hours 41 minutes
    • Productivity Gain = (1 hour 30 minutes time saved) / (2 hours 41 minutes) = 55%
    • Benefit per Programmer = 55% x (average salary of a programmer)
    • Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 1 = (benefit per programmer) x (# of programmers)

    Enterprise Value of GitHub Copilot = Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 1 + Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 2 + ... + Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task n

    Source: GitHub

    4.1.3 Build your generative AI initiative roadmap

    1-3 hours

    The roadmap should provide a compelling vision of how you will deliver the identified generative AI applications by prioritizing and simplifying the actions required to deliver these new initiatives.

    1. Leverage tab 4, Initiative Planning, in the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool to create and align your initiatives to the key value driver they are most relevant to:
      1. Transfer the results of your value and complexity assessments to this tool to drive the prioritization.
      2. Assign responsible owners to each initiative.
      3. Identify which AI maturity capabilities each initiative will enhance. However, do not build or introduce new capabilities merely to advance the organization's AI maturity level.
    2. Review the Gantt chart to ensure alignment and assess overlap.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    InputOutput
    • Each initiative implementation plan
    • Proposed owners
    • AI maturity assessment
    • Generative AI initiative roadmap and Gantt chart
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs

    Build your generative AI roadmap to visualize your key project plans

    Visual representations of data are more compelling than text alone.

    Develop a high-level document that travels with the project from inception through to executive inquiry, project management, and finally execution.

    A project needs to be discrete: able to be conceptualized and discussed as an independent item. Each project must have three characteristics:

    • Specific outcome: An explicit change in the people, processes, or technology of the enterprise.
    • Target end date: When the described outcome will be in effect.
    • Owner: Who on the IT team is responsible for executing on the initiative.

    Build your generative AI roadmap to visualize your key project plans

    Info-Tech Insight
    Don't project your vision three to five years into the future. Deep dive on next year's big-ticket items instead.

    4.1.4 Build a communication plan for your roadmap

    1-3 hours

    1. Identify your target audience and what they need to know.
    2. Identify desired channels of communication and details for the target audience.
    3. Describe communication required for each audience segment.
    4. List frequency of communication for each audience segment.
    5. Create an executive presentation leveraging The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation and AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool.
    Input Output
    • Stakeholder list
    • Proposed owners
    • AI maturity assessment
    • Communications plan for all impacted stakeholders
    • Executive communication pack
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Communication lead
    • Technical support staff for target use case

    Generative AI communication plan

    Well-planned communications are essential to the success and adoption of your AI initiatives

    To ensure that organization's roadmap is clearly communicated across the AI, data, technology, and business organizations, develop a rollout strategy, like this example.

    Example

    Audience Channel Level of Detail Description Timing
    Generative AI team Email, meetings All
    • Distribute plan; solicit feedback.
    • Address manager questions to equip them to answer employee questions.
    Q3 2023, (September, before entire data team)
    Data management team Email, Q&A sessions following Data management summary deck
    • Roll out after corporate strategy, in same form of communication.
    • Solicit feedback, address questions.
    Q4 2023 (late November)
    Select business stakeholders Presentations Executive deck
    • Pilot test for feedback prior to executive engagement.
    Q4 2023 (early December)
    Executive team Email, briefing Executive deck
    • Distribute plan.
    Q1 2024

    Deliver an executive presentation of the roadmap for the business stakeholders

    After you complete the activities and exercises within this blueprint, the final step of the process is to present the deliverable to senior management and stakeholders.

    Know Your Audience

    • Business stakeholders are interested in understanding the business outcomes that will result from their investment in generative AI.
    • Your audience will want to understand the risks involved and how to mitigate those risks.
    • Explain how the generative AI project was selected and the criteria used to help draft generative AI usage policies.

    Recommendations

    • Highlight the need for responsible AI to ensure that human-based requirements are being addressed.
    • Ensure your generative AI team includes both business and technical staff.

    Download The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation

    Bibliography

    "A pro-innovation approach to AI regulation." UK Department for Science, Innovation and Technology, March 2023. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence Act." European Commission, 21 April 2021. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence and Data Act (AIDA)." Canadian Federal Government, June 2022. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence Index Report 2023." Stanford University, April 2023. Web.

    "Automated Employment Decision Tools." New York City Department of Consumer and Worker Protection, Dec. 2021. Web.

    "Bain & Company announces services alliance with OpenAI to help enterprise clients identify and realize the full potential and maximum value of AI." Bain & Company, 21 Feb. 2023. Web.

    "Buzzfeed to use AI to write its articles after firing 180 employees." Al Mayadeen English, 27 Jan. 2023. Web.

    "California Consumers Privacy Act." State of California Department of Justice. April 24, 2023. Web.

    Campbell, Ian Carlos. "The Apple Card doesn't actually discriminate against women, investigators say." The Verge, 23 March 2021. Web.

    Campbell, Patrick. "NIST Artificial Intelligence Risk Management Framework (AI RMF 1.0)." National Institute of Standards and Technology, Jan. 2023. Web.

    "EU Ethics Guidelines For Trustworthy." European Commission, 8 April 2019. Web.

    Farhi, Paul. "A news site used AI to write articles. It was a journalistic disaster." Washington Post, 17 Jan. 2023. Web.

    Forsyth, Ollie. "Mapping the Generative AI landscape." Antler, 20 Dec. 2022. Web.

    "General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)" European Commission, 25 May 2018. Web.

    "Generative AI Market: Global Industry Trends, Share, Size, Growth, Opportunity and Forecast 2023-2028." IMARC Group, 2022. Web.

    Guynn, Jessica. "Bing's ChatGPT is in its feelings: 'You have not been a good user. I have been a good Bing.'" USA Today, 14 Feb. 2023. Web.

    Hunt, Mia. "Canada launches data governance standardisation initiative." Global Government Forum, 24 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Johnston Turner, Mary. "IDC's Worldwide Future of Digital Infrastructure 2022 Predictions." IDC, 27 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Kalliamvakou, Eirini. "Research: quantifying GitHub Copilot's impact on developer productivity and happiness." GitHub, 7 Sept. 2022. Web.

    Kerravala, Zeus. "NVIDIA Brings AI To Health Care While Protecting Patient Data." eWeek, 12 Dec. 2019. Web.

    Knight, Will. "The Apple Card Didn't 'See' Gender-and That's the Problem." Wired, 19 Nov. 2019. Web.

    "OECD, Recommendation of the Council on Artificial Intelligence." OECD, 2022. Web.

    "The National AI Initiative Act" U.S. Federal Government, 1 Jan 2021. Web.

    "Trustworthy AI (TAI) Playbook." U.S. Department of Health & Human Services, Sept 2021. Web.

    Info-Tech Research Contributors/Advocates

    Joel McLean, Executive Chairman

    Joel McLean
    Executive Chairman

    David Godfrey, CEO

    David Godfrey
    CEO

    Gord Harrison, Senior Vice President, Research & Advisory Services

    Gord Harrison
    Senior Vice President, Research & Advisory Services

    William Russell, CIO

    William Russell
    CIO

    Jack Hakimian, SVP, Research

    Jack Hakimian
    SVP, Research

    Barry Cousins, Distinguished Analyst and Research Fellow

    Barry Cousins
    Distinguished Analyst and
    Research Fellow

    Larry Fretz, Vice President, Industry Research

    Larry Fretz
    Vice President, Industry Research

    Tom Zehren, CPO

    Tom Zehren
    CPO

    Mark Roman, Managing Partner II

    Mark Roman
    Managing Partner II

    Christine West, Managing Partner

    Christine West
    Managing Partner

    Steve Willis, Practice Lead

    Steve Willis
    Practice Lead

    Yatish Sewgoolam, Associate Vice President, Research Agenda

    Yatish Sewgoolam
    Associate Vice President, Research Agenda

    Rob Redford, Practice Lead

    Rob Redford
    Practice Lead

    Mike Tweedie, Practice Lead

    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead

    Neal Rosenblatt, Principal Research Director

    Neal Rosenblatt
    Principal Research Director

    Jing Wu, Principal Research Director

    Jing Wu
    Principal Research Director

    Irina Sedenko, Research Director

    Irina Sedenko
    Research Director

    Jeremy Roberts, Workshop Director

    Jeremy Roberts
    Workshop Director

    Brian Jackson, Research Director

    Brian Jackson
    Research Director

    Mark Maby, Research Director

    Mark Maby
    Research Director

    Stacey Horricks, Director, Social Media

    Stacey Horricks
    Director, Social Media

    Sufyan Al-Hassan, Public Relations Manager

    Sufyan Al-Hassan
    Public Relations Manager

    Sam Kanen, Marketing Specialist

    Sam Kanen
    Marketing Specialist

    Find Value With Cloud Asset Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}61|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Asset Management
    • Parent Category Link: /asset-management
    • Spending on cloud platforms and software-as-a-service (SaaS) is growing, and with spending comes waste.
    • The barriers are drastically lower for purchasing SaaS and cloud services as compared to traditional IT components.
    • Skills gap: IT asset managers tend not to have the skills to optimize spending on cloud platforms.
    • New space, new tools: The IT asset management market space is still developing cloud asset management and SaaS management capabilities. Practitioners must rely on cloud optimization tools in the meantime.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT asset managers are uniquely suited to provide value here. They already optimize costs and manage assets.
    • Scope creep is a killer. Focus first on your highest value, highest risk cloud instances.
    • Don’t completely centralize. Central oversight is powerful, but outsource some responsibility to the business.

    Impact and Result

    • Introduce governance: Work with developers, power business users, and infrastructure groups to define a governance approach to cloud assets and to SaaS.
    • Standardize high-impact, low-effort cloud services: Focus your efforts where they will have the most value and in places where you can provide early value.
    • Update your processes: Ensure that your asset registers and your configuration management database is up to date when cloud assets are provisioned and quiesced.

    Find Value With Cloud Asset Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement IT asset management for cloud instances and SaaS, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define cloud asset management

    Define when a cloud instance is an asset, and what it means for the asset to be managed.

    • Find Value With Cloud Asset Management – Phase 1: Define Cloud Asset Management
    • Cloud Asset Management Standard Operating Procedures
    • Cloud Instance Provisioning Standards Checklist

    2. Build cloud asset management practices

    Develop an approach to auditing and optimizing cloud assets.

    • Find Value With Cloud Asset Management – Phase 2: Build Cloud Asset Management Practices
    • Cloud Asset Management Policy
    • Monthly Cloud Asset Optimization Checklist
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool
    [infographic]

    The Rush Trap: Why "Move Fast and Break Things" Breaks Your Business

    • Large vertical image:

    Most business leaders think that the best way to beat the competition is to push their development teams harder and demand faster delivery. I've seen the opposite happen many times.

    When you prioritize "shipping fast" and "getting to market first," you often end up taking the longest time to succeed, because your team must spend months, sometimes years, addressing the problems caused by your haste. On the surface, things appear to be improving, but internally, they can feel overwhelming. You will notice this impact on your staff.

    This is the harsh truth about rushing IT development:

    Every Shortcut Creates Two New Problems

    Here's what really happens in the codebase when you tell your team to "just get it done fast": you don't do proper input validation and sanitization because you say, "We'll add that later." And then you have to deal with SQL injection attacks and data breaches for months. This wasted time could have been avoided by using simple parameterized queries and validation frameworks.

    In 2024, the average cost of a data breach was $4.88 million. 73% of these breaches require more than 200 days to resolve. You only code for the happy flow, but real users submit incorrect data, experience network timeouts, and encounter failures with third-party APIs. 

    Your app crashes more than it should because you didn't set up proper error handling, or circuit breakers, or graceful degradation patterns. I know these take time to implement, but what would you rather have? Customers abandoning it?

    Businesses lose an average of $5,600 per minute when their systems go down, and e-commerce sites can lose up to $300,000 per hour during busy times. Instead of fixing the root causes of problems, you just patch them up with quick fixes. Instead of proper garbage collection, that memory leak gets a band-aid restart script. Instead of being optimized, the slow database query is cached.

    Soon, you will find yourself struggling to keep your building intact.

    To keep up with technical debt, companies usually have to spend 23–42% of their total IT budget each year.

    You don't do full testing because "writing unit tests takes longer than manual testing." This approach does not include load testing, test-driven development, or integration testing. Your first real test is when you have paying customers in production. Companies that don't test their software properly have 60% more bugs in their products and spend 40% more time fixing them than companies that do.

    You start without being able to properly monitor and see what's going on. There are no logging frameworks, no application performance monitoring, and no health checks in place. When things go wrong—and they will—it's difficult to figure out what's amiss. Without proper monitoring, it takes an average of 4.5 hours to find and fix IT problems. With full observability tools, it only takes 45 minutes.

    It's easy to see that every shortcut you take today will cause two new problems tomorrow. Each of those problems makes two more. You're going to be in a lot of trouble with technical debt, security holes, and unstable systems soon. All because you were in a hurry to meet some random deadline.

    The true cost of rushing in those "move fast and break things" success stories is often overlooked. You don't guarantee a quick time to market when you rush code to market. You're just making sure that failure to market happens quickly. Remember that most Silicon Valley break-movers lose millions, but you never read about those; you only read about the 1 in 350 VC-backed companies that make it. That is a staggering 0.29%. I would not bet on that strategy just yet.

    Because code that is rushed doesn't just break once. It breaks all the time. In production. This issue arises when dealing with real customers. At the worst times. Your developers are putting out fires instead of adding new features. Instead of adding the features that the customer asked for, they're fixing race conditions at 2 AM. They're patching vulnerabilities in dependencies rather than creating the next version.

    According to research, developers in environments with a lot of technical debt spend 42% of their time on maintenance and bug fixes, while those in well-architected systems spend only 23% of their time on these tasks. Bad code drives up your infrastructure costs by requiring more servers to handle the same load. Your database runs slower because no one took the time to make the right indexes or make the queries run faster. Unoptimized applications typically require 3 to 5 times more infrastructure resources, directly impacting your cloud computing and operational costs.

    The costs of getting new customers go up because products that are rushed have higher churn rates. People stop using apps that crash a lot or don't work well. For example, 53% of mobile users will stop using an app if it takes longer than 3 seconds to load. It costs 5 to 25 times more to get a new customer than to keep an old one.

    In the meantime, what about your competitor who took an extra month to set up proper error handling, security controls, and performance optimization? They're growing smoothly while you're still working on the base.

    The Slow Way Is the Quick Way

    Let me tell you a myth that is costing you millions: The race isn't about speed unless you're in a real winner-take-all market with huge network effects. It's about lasting.

    There is usually room for more than one winner in most markets. Your real job isn't to be the first to market; it's to still be there when the "fast movers" fail because they owe too much money. The businesses that are the biggest in their markets aren't usually the first ones there. They are the ones who took the time to use excellent software engineering practices from the start. They used well-known security frameworks like the OWASP guidelines to make their systems safe, set up the right authentication and authorization patterns, and made sure their APIs were designed with security and resilience in mind from the start.

    Companies that have good security practices have 76% fewer security incidents and save an average of $1.76 million for every breach they avoid. They wrote code for failure scenarios using patterns like retry logic with exponential backoff, circuit breakers to stop failures from spreading, and bulkhead isolation to keep problems from spreading.

    They set up full logging and monitoring so they could find problems before customers did. Systems that are built well and have the right resilience patterns are up 99.9% of the time, while systems that are built quickly are up 95% to 98% of the time. While you may believe that 95% to 98% uptime is an acceptable figure to agree to, take a moment to consider what that actually translates to in terms of downtime for your availability metrics. Remember that you should only calculate the times you really want to be available. This is due to the fact that any unavailability during your downtime is not taken into account. But failures do not take your opening hours into consideration. 

    Successful companies used domain-driven design to get the business requirements right, made complete API documentation, and built automated testing suites that found regressions before deployment. Companies that do a lot of testing deliver features 2.5 times faster and with 50% fewer bugs after deployment.

    They made sure that their environments were always the same by using infrastructure as code, setting up the right CI/CD pipelines with automated security scanning and regression testing, and planning for horizontal scaling from the start.

    Companies that have mature DevOps practices deploy 208 times more often and have lead times that are 106 times faster, all while being more reliable.

    What This Means for Your Process of Development

    The truth is that your development schedule isn't about meeting deadlines. The purpose is to create systems that function effectively when real people use them in real-life situations with actual data and at a large scale. If your code crashes under load because you didn't use the right caching strategies or database connection pooling, it doesn't matter how fast it is to market.

    If you neglect to conduct security code reviews and utilize static analysis tools, the likelihood of hacking increases significantly.

    Think about the return on investment: putting in an extra 20–30% up front for the right architecture, security, and testing usually cuts the total cost of ownership by 60–80% over the life of the application.

    The first "delay" of 2 to 4 weeks for proper engineering practices saves 6 to 12 months of fixing technical debt later on.

    You have a simple choice: either take the time to follow excellent software engineering practices now, or spend the next two years telling customers why your system is down again while your competitors take your market share. The companies that last and eventually take over choose quality engineering over random speed. I leave it up to your imagination as to what multi-trillion-dollar company immediately comes to mind.

    I am always up for a conversation.